JP6678875B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, a game table provided with a display means has been proposed (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in the display means .

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a display means .

A gaming table according to the present invention is a gaming table provided with a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a holding icon, and the plurality of types One type of icon is a notice icon, the hold icon is an icon that displays a number of displays according to the number of holds, the notice icon, depending on the number displayed An icon that does not display the number of holdings, the holding icon is an icon displayed in the holding icon display area of the display unit, and the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area of the display unit. The hold icon display area and the notice icon display area are different display areas, and the hold icon and the notice icon are Is configured symbol variation display the notice icon is digested by being displayed in the display area of the people do not know, in a single period of symbol variable display is performed in the warning icon is first number of When the second number, which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than when the first number is extinguished, a plurality of the notice icons are displayed in a certain symbol variation display. There is a case where at least one of the notice icons has been digested, and the notice icon that has not been digested (hereinafter referred to as "not noticed notice icon") is displayed at the time when the certain symbol variable display ends. If the hold icon and the warning icon power interruption during the execution of the symbol variation display in a state that is displayed has Fukuden occurred (hereinafter, "first case" hereinafter.) the hold icon Is displayed by default aspect, the first is the announcement icon in the case of not displayed, the decorative design to the first of the display unit symbol variation display is completed when the display stops, characterized in that It is a game table.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a display means .

3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is the outline front view which looked at game board 200 in the state where a back cover was attached from the back (back). It is the abbreviated front view which looked at game board 200 in the state where the back cover was removed from the back (back). (A) It is the schematic front view which extracted and showed the sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246. (B) It is a side sectional view which follows the AA line in (a). 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) shows an example of a decorative design. (C) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 7C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (D) is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. It is the elements on larger scale which expands and shows the vicinity of the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 in the game board 200. FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed, viewed from the rear side. It is the perspective view which looked at back unit 200a from the back side in the state where accessory unit 950 was removed. It is the elements on larger scale which expands and shows the game ball storage part circumference. It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is a schematic front view which showed the light emitting substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. It is an exploded perspective view of a rising accessory unit 750. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a launch accessory unit 800. 11 is an enlarged perspective view of a relay board 806 included in the launch accessory unit 800. FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a V forming accessory unit 850. It is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V-forming accessory right unit 854 as seen from the back side. It is a front view of a center accessory unit 900. It is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900. It is the figure which pulled out only the drop deployment accessory unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation of the drop deployment accessory 712. It is a figure showing the up-and-down operation of the drop deployment accessory 712 in the drop deployment accessory unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which extracted only the drop deployment accessory unit 700, and showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment accessory 712. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rotation operation of a drop deploying accessory 712 in the drop deploying accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rotation operation of a drop deploying accessory 712 in the drop deploying accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascent accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing operations of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800 installed on the game board 200. (A) It is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the lifting accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the lifting accessory unit 750 is operating. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the operation of the V-forming accessory product unit 850 by extracting only the V-forming accessory product unit 850. It is a diagram showing the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 installed in the game board 200. (A) A circuit block diagram showing a main control circuit around a first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is the block diagram which showed typically the connection relation of various boards with which the pachinko machine 100 is provided. (A) It is the figure which looked at game board 200 from the back, and is a figure for explaining the arrangement place of sub-control board 245a and motor drive board 245b. (B) It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 200, and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of board | substrate peripheral board 672. (A) It is the figure which saw a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement place of the accessory peripheral board 674. (B) It is the front view which extracted and showed a part of drop development accessory board unit 700, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of the accessory top illumination board 676. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a connection relationship between a motor drive board 245b and another board and electric components mounted on the motor drive board 245b. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board and an example of electric components mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672. (A) It is the figure which showed the connection relation of the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory illumination board 676, and another board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical components mounted in the accessory illumination board 676. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the electric component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the electric component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 3 of the electric component mounted in various board | substrates. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 4 of the electric component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 5 of the electric component mounted in various board | substrates. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 6 of the electric component mounted in various boards. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 7 of the electric component mounted in various boards. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 8 of the electric component mounted in various boards. It is the figure which showed the modification of the connection relation of various boards. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 seen from the front side (player side). (A) It is an external perspective view of an information display button 2046. FIG. 52 (b) is a top view of the information display button 2046. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display pattern of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It illustrates an example of a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special drawing 1 related lottery processing. (A) is an example of a table used for determining whether or not the special figure probability is in the low probability state of special figure in the special figure 1. (B) is an example of a table used for determining whether or not the special figure probability is in the high special figure probability state. (C) An example of a table used for determining whether or not the special figure probability is in the low probability state of special figure in the special figure 2. (D) It is an example of a table used for determining whether or not the special figure probability is in the low probability state of special figure. (A) Special figure 1 This is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. (B) Special figure 2 is an example of a special figure determination table in the variation game. It is an example of the Toku-zu 1 variable display time determination table used to decide the Toku-zu 1 variable time. It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of special figure 2. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub-control part performs. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit. (D) is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd subcontrol part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub-control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub-control part. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of operation means image display processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of notice lottery processing. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the first embodiment in time series. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example 5 in time series. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in the time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of a modified example of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in the time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in the time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of a modified example of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. It is a figure showing the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the front. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol, (c) Shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a normal symbol. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process of a main control unit according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a main control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 4A and 4B are flowcharts showing the processing of the first sub-control unit according to the embodiment of the present invention, wherein FIG. 7A is a flowchart of main processing, FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. A flowchart of processing, (d) is a flowchart of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub-control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interruption processing, (c) is a timer interruption. It is a flowchart of a process. It is a fluctuation time determination table used in the special figure related lottery process of the main control unit according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the notice lottery processing of the 1st sub control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a notification mode determination table used in the advance notice lottery process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a time chart showing a button reception period of Example 1 of a remaining time notification mode of the present invention, a notification mode of a remaining time of the button reception period, and a time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production | presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. 9 is a time chart showing a button reception period of Example 2 of a remaining time notification mode of the present invention, a notification mode of a remaining time of the button reception period, and a time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 3 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the time change of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 4 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the time change of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 5 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the time change of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time variation of the button reception period of Example 6 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production | presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. 119. It is a time chart which shows the time variation of the button reception period of Example 7 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time of FIG. It is a table used in Example 7 of the remaining time notification mode of the present invention to determine the content of the effect related to the remaining time notification mode of the button reception period and the advance notice before and after the button reception period. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 8 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, and the time change of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display device, when a chance button is not operated in each time of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production | presentation image after the time of (j) of FIG. 124 displayed on a decorative design display device, when a chance button is operated at the time of (j) and (k) of FIG. 13 is a table used to determine the remaining time notification mode of each button reception period, which is used in Example 8 of the remaining time notification mode of the present invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decorative symbol display device at each time. It is a schematic front view showing an example in which the gaming table of the present invention is a slot machine. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. FIG. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front side (player side). 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in the same (a). (A) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of a universal figure, and (b) shows an example of a universal figure decorative symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a figure which shows the table which put together the operation aspect of the universal figure electric auditors's figure 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for universal figure validity determination, (c) is for the universal figure validity determination It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per table for general figure fluctuation period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability loss table for general figure fluctuation period determination, (c) is for general figure fluctuation period determination It is a figure which shows a high probability loss table, and (d) is a figure which shows a high probability loss table for general figure fluctuation period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special-drawing success / failure judgment, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special-drawing success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table for big hits. Is. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for special figure fluctuation period determination at the time of high probability of a figure, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for special figure fluctuation period at the time of low probability of a figure, and (c). It is a figure which shows the losing table for special figure fluctuation periods at the time of high probability of a figure, and (d) is a figure which shows the losing table for special figure fluctuation periods at the time of low probability of a figure. (A) is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of the effect control process shown in (a) of the same drawing, and (c) is a flowchart. , (D) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. 9 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow of the game on the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decorative symbol display device in steps in the flow of the game shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of a decorative pattern display device in a stepwise manner when the first hit is a big hit without certainty change. It is a figure which shows the modification of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 146 (c). It is a time chart of the appearance change of ordinary symbols and the appearance of prize balls. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of general design fluctuation production and prize ball paying appearance appearance. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the general design reservation increase production and the prize ball paying appearance appearance in the state where the general design fluctuation production is done. It is a time chart that the general symbol variation production changes to the prize ball paying appearance. It is the figure which shows the concrete example which changes from general design fluctuation production to prize ball paying appearance appearance. It is the figure which shows the concrete example where the general design reservation increase production changes in the state where the general design fluctuation production is done. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to the universal figure pending | holding increase production, after the production changes from the general figure pending | holding increase production to prize ball paying appearance appearance. It is a figure showing an example in which a prize ball payout appearance starts with a slight delay from the timing at which a game ball passes through a central general winning opening 226. It is the outline front view which looked at game board 200 of a 2nd embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol of a special figure, (c) is a general figure It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect), and (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of special figure pre-reading processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a figure showing a special figure propriety judgment table, and (c) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table for a figure prior determination. (A) is a diagram showing a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. And (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the general figure validity determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the general figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. Is. It is the figure which shows the specific example of the general design fluctuation production, the special design fluctuation production and the pre-reading announcement production. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of general design fluctuation production and pre-reading announcement production. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of general design fluctuation production and special figure reservation increase production. It is the figure which shows the concrete example where the general design fluctuation production itself changes. It is the outline front view which looked at game board 200 of a 3rd embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. It is the figure which was shown, (b) is the figure which shows one example of the decoration design of the special figure, (c), after the variable display of the design, in the universal design indicator 210, of the universal design which is stopped and displayed It is a figure showing an example of a stop design mode (the 1st design mode), and (d) is a figure showing a stop design mode of a decorative design of a general design. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for general-purpose figure validity determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for general-purpose figure validity determination, (c) shows the low probability table for general figure determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability table for general figure determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of the electric chu in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a general figure production in the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for explaining several examples. It is the flowchart which shows the flow of general figure production decision processing. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (c) is in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. It is a figure which shows the table for small hit determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. It is a figure showing 1/5 part of the example of the production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the example of the production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 3/5 part of the concrete example of the production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 4/5 part of the example of the production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the specific example of the production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production which mixed the lookahead production in this embodiment step by step. It is the figure which shows one example of the production where the big hit announcement is mixed in the universal figure production in this execution form step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the example in which the universal presentation of the variable display pattern shown to (F) of FIG. 169 (b) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of other productions. (A) is a figure which shows the win / loss determination table of special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment, and the same figure (b) is a figure which shows the win / loss determination table of special figure 2. (A) is a figure which shows the starting information of the special figure 1 which is used when pre-determining by starting the starting information of the special figure 1 beforehand, and (b) shows the starting information of the special figure 2. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 success / failure predetermination table used when pre-reading and performing a predetermination, (c) is a figure which shows a special figure predetermination table. (A) is a figure which shows the general figure validity determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the general figure determination table, (c) is a general figure. It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the universal figure propriety pre-determination table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of universal figure, (b) is a figure which shows a universal figure pre-determination table. Is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the general figure production determination processing in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice production determination processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device or the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 186. It is a time chart showing the continuation flow of the example shown in FIG. 186. It is a figure which shows a mode such as a decorative pattern display device for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 188. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a 2nd universal figure production. 8 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a predetermined condition is changed from a satisfied state to a not satisfied state. It is a figure which shows an example of a general picture pre-reading notice. It is the figure which shows the example which does the big hit announcement production of the special figure in the general design production territory 283 of decorative design display 208. It is the figure which shows the example which does the development advance notice production to the special production of the special figure in the general design production territory 283 of decoration design display 208. It is a figure which shows the example which the general figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area of hold digestion production. It is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, ( c) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol, (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a normal symbol. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example 20 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 21 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 22 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 23 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 in time series. It is a figure showing operation means image display of Example 25 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 26 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 27 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 28 in the time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 29 in the time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 30 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 in time series. It is a figure showing the operation means image display of Example 32 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 33 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 34 in time series. It is a figure showing the operation means image display of Example 35 in time series. It is a figure showing the operation means image display of Example 36 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 38 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 39 in the time series. It is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 40 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 41 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a 2nd display of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a 2nd display of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the 1st state of a 5th embodiment and the 2nd state. It is a figure which shows the modification of the meter display of 5th Embodiment. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. It is an external view of the same pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) shows an example of a decorative design. (C) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 7C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (D) is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a movable body interruption process. (A) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the operation completion position. (C) It is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. It is the figure which extracted and showed only lower case 704b and rotating member 708b in each state of (d)-(f) (a)-(c). (A) It is an external perspective view of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position. (B) An external perspective view of the vicinity of the door with a ball storage tray 108 in a state (during operation) in which the chance button 700 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between an operating state of a chance button 700, acceptance / non-acceptance of a detection result of a depression operation of the chance button 700, and execution / non-execution of an operation acceptance effect. (A) It is an external perspective view of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the initial position. (B) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. (C) An external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when a failure occurs). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production | presentation performed when the chance button 700 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production performed when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (A) An external perspective view showing the vicinity of the chance button 750 before operation. (B) It is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 11 is a front view of the chance button 750 seen from the direction of the second operation unit 758. (A) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. (C) It is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production performed when the chance button 750 is in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production performed when the chance button 750 is in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production performed when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 8 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with a front door 102 opened. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 7C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (D) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 periphery when the bet button 132 is in an initial position. (B) is an external perspective view of the area around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (C) An external perspective view of the area around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. (B) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. (C) An external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the initial position. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in an initial position. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (B) An external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position. (C) An external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when the bet button 132 fails). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the normal production. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (G) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception production performed when the bet button 132 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is a figure showing an example of various effects. (A) An example of a high probability table for winning / discarding determination used for winning / shutting determination of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) when the toku-zu probability is in the Toku-zu high probability state. (B) is an example of a low probability table for win / fail determination used for win / fail determination of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) when the special figure probability is in a low special figure probability state. (C) It is an example of a special figure determination table for determining a stop symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2). (A) It is an example of the special figure 1 variation display time determination table used for determining the variation time of the special figure 1. (B) It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of special figure 2. (A) An example of a pending change notice lottery table used to determine a pending change mode. (B) It is a figure showing an example of the mode of change of reservation. (A) It is an example of a reach A-time effect character lottery table used for determining a character image used for effect. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the character image. (C) An example of a state lottery table used to determine a state. (A) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. (B) An example of a decorative design for a normal design is shown. (C) It is the figure which showed the relationship of the kind of figure, the kind of figure decoration pattern, and the electric opening pattern. (D) It is the figure which showed the pattern of the variable display of the decorative design for normal designs. (A) It is an example of a general / university production system 1 executability lottery table used for determining whether or not to give a notice of the general / university production system 1. (B) is an example of the general-purpose production system 1 lottery table used for determining the general-purpose production system 1 production pattern. (C) An example of a general / pictorial effect system 2 executability lottery table used for determining whether or not to give a notice of the general / pictorial effect system 2. (D) An example of a general-purpose production system 2 lottery table used for determining the general-purpose production system 2 production pattern. It is the flowchart which showed one example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing. It is the flowchart which showed one example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the flow of sub side pre-reading announcement execution processing at the time of starting winning a prize. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of execution processing of a sub-side notice at the start of fluctuation. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the flow of production lottery processing 1 in the execution processing of the sub notice and the like at the time of fluctuation start. (A) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the production lottery process 2 in a sub-side notice etc. execution process at the time of a change start. (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the sub-side notice execution process at the time of a universal figure fluctuation start. It is the figure which showed one example of the production when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed one example of the production when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed one example of the production when reach A hit is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which showed one example of the production when reach A hit is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the press operation of chance button 700. It is the figure which shows one example of the production when reach B hit is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production when reach B hit is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the press operation of chance button 700. It is the figure which showed the modification of operation acceptance production (per reach B) in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of operation acceptance production (per reach B) in time series. (A) An example of a step-up notice lottery table used for determining a notice production mode. (B) An example of a state lottery table used to determine a state. (C) An example of a reach B jackpot state lottery table used to determine a reach B jackpot state. (D) An example of an effect lottery table used for determining an effect mode. (A) It is an exploded perspective view of a chance button unit 750. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st-3rd state. (B) It is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of advance notice lottery processing (reach B sub). (A) It is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of notice lottery processing (step-up). (B) It is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of advance notice lottery processing (reach B sub). It is the figure which showed an example of the production when normal reach loss is selected as a change pattern of special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when reach B hit is selected as a change pattern of special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when reach B hit is selected as a change pattern of special figure 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed one example of the production in the case of the after-loss rejuvenation hit (second production) by production lottery in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of operation reception production and step-up notice production. It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of operation acceptance production and step-up notice production. 8 is an example of a lottery table for determining the state of the chance button 700 and the number of repeated hits, such as the number of repeated hits. It is the figure which showed an example of the production when Reach C loss is selected as a change pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in the case where the reach C hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in the case where the reach C hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure in time series. It is a figure showing the modification 1 of operation reception production (per reach C). It is a figure showing the modification 2 of operation acceptance production (per reach C). It is a figure showing the modification 3 of operation acceptance production (per reach C). It is the figure which showed the modification 4 of operation acceptance production (per reach C). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (pause of effective time). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (pause of effective time). (A) An example of a button effect when there is no operation of the chance button 136 during the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) An example of button effects on the game console that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 only once during the valid time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) The button effect example 1 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 2 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) The button effect example 3 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) The button effect example 4 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 5 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) The button effect example 6 when the sub-control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 7 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 1 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 2 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button effect example 3 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 4 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 5 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) is a time-series representation of Button Effect Example 6 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. (A) A button effect example 7 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. It is the figure which showed the example 1 of the (a-1)-(a-6) button production in time series. It is the figure which showed concrete example 2 of (b-1)-(b-6) button production in time series. It is the figure which showed concrete example 3 of the (c-1)-(c-6) button production in time series. It is the figure which showed concrete example 4 of (a-1)-(a-6) button production in time series. It is a figure for explaining other examples of (b)-(e) button production. It is the figure which showed concrete example 5 of (a-1)-(a-6) button production in time series. It is the figure which showed the other specific example of button production. It is the figure which showed the example 6 of button production in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the basic concept of the game table which concerns on other embodiment (normal button and deca button). It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is the figure which showed the example 1 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the example 2 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the example 3 of the button production which hides various displays in time series. (A-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated in a state where the auto button function is not operated (disabled). (A-2) It is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the auto button function is operating (when it is valid). (B-1) In the example shown in (a-1), it is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the effect when the operation means is operated during the animation. (B-2) In the example shown in (a-2), it is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied during the animation. It is the figure which showed an example of the button production in the state where the (a-1)-(a-6) automatic button function was inoperative in a time series. It is the figure which showed concrete example 1 of the button production in the state where the (b-1)-(b-6) automatic button function was operating in time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed concrete example 2 of the button production in the state where the automatic button function is operating in time series. (B-1)-(ab6) It is the figure which showed concrete example 3 of button production in the state where the automatic button function is operating in a time series. (A-1)-(a-7) It is the figure which showed concrete example 4 of the button production in the state where the automatic button function is operating in a time series. (B-1)-(b-7) It is the figure which showed concrete example 5 of the button production in the state where the automatic button function is operating in a time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of an auto button function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) is an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 And (c) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display design of a general design. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main controller of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of main controller timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention was provided. It is a figure which shows the winning / discarding judgment table for general drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, and an example of symbol allocation and hitting operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the success / failure determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 and the big hit time in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figures 2 in a pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit operation. 3 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention, (a) showing a flow of first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) showing The flow of 1st sub-control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub-control part timer interruption processing, (d) has shown the flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric chulong opening production performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main processing, and (b) shows the. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the button production control process performed by the production control process of the main process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. 4 illustrates various settings of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 4 illustrates a method of setting mode 1 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 6 shows a method of setting mode 4 in the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 1 of an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 2 of an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 3 of an embodiment of the invention. The opportunity button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of one embodiment of this invention is equipped is shown. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 5 of an embodiment of the invention. The timing button sensor 426 in Example 5 of one embodiment of this invention, the automatic button process determination result, and the timing chart which shows the state of a button reception flag are shown. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 6 of an embodiment of the invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 7 of an embodiment of the invention. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is equipped with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. 1 shows a telephone 3000, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-2 in time series. It is a figure explaining the game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the animation example at the time of the appearance of a button image among the button images used by the special figure fluctuation game in the Pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the animation example of the button image used by the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of the button operation animation which is the game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the timing chart about the opportunity button operation reception, the opportunity button sensor detection, and the display regarding the operation reception period in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the sixth exemplary embodiment of the present invention. It is an external appearance perspective view in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a touch operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the chance button 136 in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which compares the rotation speed of the operation means and the rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which compares the rotation speed of the operation means and the rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which compares the rotation speed of the operation means and the rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition diagram of the original mode and the user mode in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the sixth exemplary embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the demonstration production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the user menu in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the actual machine customization in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the effect of a button image and the sound effect which are the game effects in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the effect of a button image and the sound effect which are the game effects in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the effect of a button image and the sound effect which are the game effects in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the opportunity button operation reception and button operation sound output in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is a game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation which is game production in Pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention from the front side (the player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, ( c) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption processing of the pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows. The flow of the 1st sub control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part image processing. . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is. The flow of the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption processing is shown, and (c) has shown the flow of the 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the win / loss determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of the win / loss determination table used at the time of high probability. 9B shows an example of a win / loss determination table used when the probability is low. It is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the special figure 1 determination table, (B) has shown an example of the special figure 2 determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold display of the special figure fluctuation game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the hold display mode without a change, (b) of hold A The hold display mode is shown, and (c) shows the hold B display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the board surface lamp pre-reading lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 1 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 2 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 3 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the advance notice of the winning / losing determination result before the reach of the special figure fluctuation game being performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is "character A". Shows a character image of "Panda" as "," (b) shows a character image of "Sabohani" as "character B", and (c) shows a character image of "princess" as "character C". Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 4 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the chance button of the alerting notification displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure variation game being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the button mode of the chance button 136 in the special figure fluctuation game being performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice lottery table 5 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the notice information of the notice determination result of the success / failure determination after the reach of the special figure fluctuation game currently being performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is "character D". Shows a character image of "grandpa" as "", (b) shows a character image of "boxer" as "character E", and (c) shows a character image of "bancho" as "character F". Is shown. It is an example of a flowchart (No. 1) showing a flow of special figure prefetching processing in the main control unit main processing of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a flowchart (part 2) showing the flow of special figure prefetching processing in the main control unit main processing of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of a first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquiring start information in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of a first sub-control unit prefetching notice execution process at the time of starting the special figure variation game in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of a normal notice lottery process in the first sub-control unit at the time of special figure variation game in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 5) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure (the 6) explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the seventh embodiment of the present invention seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is equipped with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. Shows a portable telephone 3000, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 provided with the above is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the button image by Example 14 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the gauge image (effective period image) by Example 15 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by a 9th embodiment of the present invention from the front side (the player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by a 9th embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative design, (d) is a figure showing an example of a stop display design of a general figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result memory part for special figures 1 and special figures 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table for general drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit time operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the hit / miss determination table for special drawings in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figures 1 and the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figures 2 and the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric chu long opening production performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by a 9th embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the button production control process performed by the production control process of the main process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The various settings of the automatic button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention are shown. The setting method of the mode 1 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention is shown. The setting method of the mode 4 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention is shown. It is a figure showing an example of the production in Example 1 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 2 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 3 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. The opportunity button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention is equipped is shown. It is a figure showing an example of the production in Example 5 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. The timing button sensor 426 in Example 5 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention, the automatic button process determination result, and the timing chart which shows the state of a button reception flag are shown. It is a figure showing an example of the production in Example 6 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in Example 7 of a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the ninth embodiment of the present invention seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of the 9th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is equipped with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. 1 shows a portable telephone 3000, a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) a storage unit that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 provided with the above is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative part 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative part 814 with which the pachinko machine 100 according to the example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative part 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative part 814 with which the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention was seen from the player side. It is a figure which shows the concrete production in the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete production in the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example which the visibility of the display in the decorative pattern display device 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example which the visibility of the display in the decorative pattern display device 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for read / write of success / failure. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure propriety pre-reading result table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a win / fail judgment. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special figure determination. (C) It is a figure showing an example of a table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub-control part performs. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub-control part. It is the figure which shows one example of the character selective production. It is a time chart of character select production. It is the figure which showed in detail an example of the temporary selection moving image (character moving display) of the 2nd character (grandpa). It is a figure showing an example which interrupts character movement display, when a chance button is pushed during character movement display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. It is the figure which showed the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect. It is the figure which showed the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character select production. It is the figure which showed the modification of the production period of character select production. It is a figure showing other examples of (a)-(d) character select production. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for read / write of success / failure. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure propriety pre-reading result table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for a win / fail judgment. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special figure determination. (C) It is a figure showing an example of a table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub-control part performs. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub-control part. It is the figure which shows one example of the character selective production. It is a time chart of character select production. It is the figure which showed in detail an example of the temporary selection moving image (character moving display) of the 2nd character (grandpa). It is a figure showing an example which interrupts character movement display, when a chance button is pushed during character movement display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. It is the figure which showed the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect. It is the figure which showed the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character select production. It is the figure which showed the modification of the production period of character select production. It is a figure showing other examples of (a)-(d) character select production. It is a figure for explaining the outline of other embodiments. It is a circuit block diagram of other embodiment. (A) It is the schematic which shows the structure of the data of other embodiment. (B) It is a schematic diagram of the command of other embodiment. (C) A timing chart for explaining how commands are transmitted and received according to another embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission / reception of other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is a figure for explaining the outline of other embodiments. It is an example of a timing chart of a button effect of another embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart of a button effect of another embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart of a button effect of another embodiment. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and production display of other embodiments in time series. It is a figure for explaining the outline of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining the outline of other embodiments. It is an example of a timing chart of a character change effect of another embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart of a character change effect of another embodiment. It is an example of a timing chart of a character change effect of another embodiment. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is an example of a setting screen of another embodiment. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. FIG. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front side (player side). 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (c) shows an example of a stop symbol of a general symbol. Is. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process of the first sub control unit 400, and (c) is a first sub control unit. 9 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. (A) is a figure which shows a high probability table for win / loss determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for win / loss determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for determining special figure 1. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 determination. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. The figure which shows the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 stepwise when the first special figure starting opening 230 and the special figure 2 special drawing fixed starting opening 233 are alternately won by left-handing in the non-electric support state (normal state). Is. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 606 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 615. (A) and (b) are vertical sectional views of the passage structure 1, (c) is a sectional view taken along the line I-I of FIG. 617 (a), and (d) is a sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. 617 (a). (E) is a III-III sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 617 (a). It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. It is a figure which shows the example which made the attacker approach the passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of arrangement of passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. It is a figure showing other examples of passage structure 1. (A) is a perspective view of the passage structure 1, and (b) is a front view of the mounting plate 14. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of the passage part and the passage mode of a game ball. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing of the example of arrangement | positioning of a sphere detection sensor. (A) is a front view of the modification of a passage part, (b) is the perspective view. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. (A)-(d) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. It is the front view, left and right side view, top view, and bottom view showing other examples of passage structure 1. (A) is a rear view showing another example of the passage structure 1, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear side. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view of the component parts of passage structure 1. (A)-(d) is the VV sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 633, the VI-VI sectional view, the VII-VII sectional view, and the VIII-VIII sectional view in order. (A) And (b) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of a passage part. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line IX-IX of FIG. 635 (b), and (b) is an explanatory view of a manner in which a game ball enters the opening OP2. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 635 (b). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine of the embodiment seen from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 641 from the back side. It is the front view which saw the game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) is a figure showing an example of a stop design mode of a special drawing, (b) is a figure showing an example of a decorative design, (c) is a figure showing an example of a stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of strobe interrupt process of the first sub-control unit, and (c) is a timer variable update interrupt of the first sub-control unit. A flowchart of processing, (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub-control unit. (A) is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit, and (c) is a timer interrupt of the second sub control unit. It is a flowchart of a process. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a partially exploded rear view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a rear unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a moving mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a moving mechanism. It is a partial detailed view of a moving mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body and a moving mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the example of the operation timing of a movable part. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). 1 is an external view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern, (c) Is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a universal figure, (d) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol of a universal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic front view showing a state (part 1) in which the effect movable body 224 is moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic front view showing a state (part 2) in which the effect movable body 224 has moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 is an external perspective view of a movable object unit of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the back side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the back side. It is a front view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable object of Pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is a rear view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the production movable object of Pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the rear view and the partial cross section diagram of the production movable body of pachinko machine 100 with the form of one execution of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the effect | action movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the effect | action movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the effect | action movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the effect | action movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (the 1) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (the 2) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 3) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (the 4) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 5) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action (the 6) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a gaming table according to a modified example of the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front. It is the outline front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning Embodiment D of the present invention from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a drop deployable accessory unit 700. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is a schematic front view which showed the light emitting substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. It is the figure which pulled out only the drop deployment accessory unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation of the drop deployment accessory 712. It is a figure showing the up-and-down operation of the drop deployment accessory 712 in the drop deployment accessory unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which extracted only the drop deployment accessory unit 700, and showed the rotation operation of the drop deployment accessory 712. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rotation operation of a drop deploying accessory 712 in the drop deploying accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rotation operation of a drop deploying accessory 712 in the drop deploying accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. (A) A circuit block diagram showing a main control circuit around a first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is the block diagram which showed typically the connection relation of various boards with which the pachinko machine 100 is provided. (A) It is the figure which looked at game board 200 from the back, and is a figure for explaining the arrangement place of sub-control board 245a and motor drive board 245b. (B) It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 200, and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of board | substrate peripheral board 672. (A) It is the figure which saw a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement place of the accessory peripheral board 674. (B) It is the front view which extracted and showed a part of drop development accessory board unit 700, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of the accessory top illumination board 676. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a connection relationship between a motor drive board 245b and another board and electric components mounted on the motor drive board 245b. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board and an example of electric components mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672. (A) It is the figure which showed the connection relation of the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory illumination board 676, and another board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical components mounted in the accessory illumination board 676. It is a circuit block diagram which showed an example of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on a character product. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the modification 1 of the circuit structure of the illumination board 676 on a character object. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the modification 2 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on a character object. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the modification 3 of the circuit structure of the lighting board 676 on a character object. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the modification 4 of the circuit structure of the accessory illumination board 676. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the other modified example of the circuit structure of the illumination board 676 on a character object. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of arrangement | positioning of LED in the accessory lighting board 676. It is a circuit block diagram which showed an example of the circuit structure of the board | substrate surface peripheral substrate 872 which concerns on a modification. It is a circuit block diagram which showed the modification of the resistance for electric current setting. It is a schematic exploded perspective view which extracted and showed some members which comprise the movable body 1. (A) It is the front view which showed the surface of the 1st board | substrate 14e. (B) It is a rear view showing the back surface of the first substrate 14e. It is a circuit block diagram which showed an example of the circuit structure of the 1st board | substrate 14e. 6 is a rear view of the movement of the movable parts 11 and 12 as viewed from the rear of the movable body 11. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the modification 1 of a non-mounting field. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 2 of a non-mounting area. FIG. 4 is a circuit configuration diagram of a substrate of the display device 34 that constitutes the movable body 3. (A) It is a front view of the board | substrate of the display apparatus 34 which comprises the movable body 3. FIG. (B) It is a rear view of the substrate of the display device 34 that constitutes the movable body 3. It is the figure which extracted and showed a part of a certain board | substrate. It is the figure which showed a part of board | substrate in which the via of the modification was formed. It is the figure which showed the movement of a certain role in time series. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display pattern of a universal figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure explaining processing of the 1st sub control part, (a) It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main processing, and (b) The flow chart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control command reception interruption processing. FIG. 6C is a flowchart showing a flow of (c) first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing of the first sub-control unit. It is a figure explaining the process of a 2nd sub control part, (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) The flowchart which shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption process. FIG. 7C is a flowchart showing a flow of (c) second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. (A) An example of a box data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit, and (b) An example of a part data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. It is the outline figure which shows one example of the timing of command transmission in production control of this execution form. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display device corresponding to each timing of FIG. 760 in time series. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display device corresponding to each timing of FIG. 760 in time series. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display device corresponding to each timing of FIG. 760 in time series. It is a figure which shows another example of the production of this embodiment in a time series. 6 is a block diagram showing peripheral circuits of a sound control circuit 431 and a lamp control circuit 420 of the first sub control unit 400 in the present embodiment. FIG. (A) It is the block diagram which extracted and showed various circuits (sound control related circuit) used for sound control among the circuits which comprise the 1st sub-control part 400 mentioned above. (B) It is a block diagram showing an example of connection of a reset signal line of a sound control related circuit. 8 is a block diagram showing a modification of the connection of the reset signal line. (A) A block diagram schematically showing a sound control circuit 431. (B) A block diagram schematically showing various processes in the reproduction sound output setting of the sound control circuit 431. (A) An example of a memory map of a control RAM included in the sound control circuit 431 is shown. (B) It is the figure which showed the correspondence of channel 1 and control RAM-channel 32 and control RAM, and a channel. (C) It is a figure showing the correspondence of the channel and the usage of sound. (D) It is an example of a sound list. (A) An example of a box data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit in the present embodiment, and (b) A table of part data provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit in the present embodiment. This is an example. It is an example of the sound device data included in the sound layer in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a sound list stored in advance in a ROM of the first sub control unit 400 in the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a channel control RAM with which a sound control circuit in this embodiment is provided, (a) Channel 1 control RAM-channel 32 control RAM in a 1st system of this embodiment, and a channel It is a figure showing a correspondence, (b) It is a figure showing a correspondence of a layer in the second method of this embodiment, and the use of sound, and (c) A layer in the second method of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the use of sound. 7 is a flowchart showing a flow of a sound update process executed in a sound control process in a main process of the first sub control unit 400 in the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of sound data update processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of channel acquisition processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of in-use channel acquisition processing in this embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of unused channel acquisition processing in the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of channel release processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of sound setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of layer number acquisition processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of data setting processing in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of data setting processing in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an available free layer acquisition process in this embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an identification information existing layer number acquisition process in this embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of an unused free layer search process in this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of sound data coincidence judging processing in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a sound control process in this embodiment, (a) is a timing chart of the sound data reproduced with progress of a game, (b) display in a decorative pattern display device, and sound data FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a sound control process in this embodiment, (a) is a timing chart of the sound data reproduced with progress of a game, (b) display in a decorative pattern display device, and sound data FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a sound control process in this embodiment, (a) is a timing chart of the sound data reproduced with progress of a game, (b) display in a decorative pattern display device, and sound data FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a sound control process in this embodiment, (a) is a timing chart of the sound data reproduced with progress of a game, (b) display in a decorative pattern display device, and sound data FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the setting of in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a sound control process in this embodiment, and is a figure which showed in the decorative symbol display device and an example of setting of sound data in time series. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of output of sound device data in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is a figure which shows in time series an example of the production | generation by the display of a decorative pattern display apparatus and the sound data output from a speaker in a bound embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is an example of the timing chart of the special symbol display device, the variable display of decorative symbols, the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM when the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM are output while the symbol is stopped in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is an example of the timing chart of the special symbol display device, the variable display of decorative symbols, the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM when the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM are output while the symbol is stopped in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, in the symbol variation game in which the hit determination result is a big hit, the special figure display device, the accessory continuous operation device, the condition device, the special electric accessory when the BGM is output between the SP reach effect and the promotion effect. 3 is an example of a timing chart of a variable display of a decorative pattern and a swing fluctuation BGM. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action by the display of a decorative symbol display device and the sound data output from a speaker in this embodiment in a time series. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display pattern of a universal figure. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the display in the decorative symbol display device during one game in time series. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It is an example of a stop display pattern of a universal figure. (E) It shows an example of a display mode of the fourth symbol. It is a figure showing an example of production display in a time series in a Pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of subcommand transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of (a) subcommand transmission processing. (B) is a timing chart of subcommand transmission. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which illustrates the state where the pre-reading result was memorize | stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates the state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit, and (b) illustrates the state in which the preread result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a figure which illustrates the state in which the pre-reading result was memorize | stored in the pre-reading result storage part of the pachinko machine concerning other embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates the state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit, and (b) illustrates the state in which the preread result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. And (c) illustrates the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the power support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability variation area | region related setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability variation area | region related setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure state update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a probability variation area | region control process. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special drawing relation lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit / miss determination table for special figures. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table of a special figure. (A) illustrates a special figure 1 symbol determination table, (b) illustrates a special figure 2 symbol determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the flow of processing during the design fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure display fixed weight processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of hit start display weight processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electric power combination opening processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electric power combination operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electric power combination control processing. It is an example of (a-1) to (a-3) special electricity combination operation pattern data. It is an example of (b-1)-(b-3) special electricity combination operation data. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special electric power remaining ball detection process. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special electricity combination operation end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an external output signal management process. It is a figure showing the signal number of an external terminal board signal, a signal name, and output conditions. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is a figure showing an example of a notice mode of an error notice by Pachinko machine 100. 6 is a timing chart related to a first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like. It is the figure which shows one example of the production display which notifies the magnetic field detection error in decorative design display 208 in time series. FIG. 8A is an example of a timing chart when the error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 846B shows that a magnetic detection error and an error relating to the other main control unit 300 and the like are duplicated. It is an example of a timing chart in the case of. It is an example of a timing chart in the case where a magnetic detection error and an error relating to other payouts occur in duplicate. It is the figure which showed an example of the effect display which notifies a magnetic field detection error and a door opening error in decorative design display device 208 in a time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the second error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display corresponding to (a) in the same time series. . (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error regarding the main control unit 300, etc., (b) is an example of the effect display corresponding to the same figure (a). It is a figure shown in a time series. (A) is an example of a timing chart related to the first error and the second error regarding the main control unit 300, etc., (b) is an example of the effect display corresponding to the same figure (a). It is a figure shown in a time series. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game. It is the figure which shows one example of the production display which notifies the special winning opening winning excess error in decorative design display device 208 in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display in the notification period of the special winning opening winning excess error shown in FIGS. 853 and 854. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error corresponding to FIG. 853 (10) -FIG. 853 (14). It is the figure which shows the other production example during the information period of the special winning a prize excess error. It is the figure which shows the other production example during the information period of the special winning a prize excess error. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a time series, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning error occurs. It is an example of a timing chart when a special winning opening winning error occurs. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of a display design of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display design of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display design of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative design An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | production in another case following FIG. 878 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 882 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 883 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 885 step by step. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 894 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 895 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 896 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is the figure which shows the production example where the notice icon changes in stages. It is a figure which shows in sequence the display example at the time of a power failure / power recovery, while displaying a notice icon. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 904 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 909 step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect | action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about the example of an effect using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing another example of production of notice icon increase production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be performed in decorative pattern display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 925 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of a display design of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display design of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display design of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative design An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of special figure pre-reading processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. (A) An example of a box data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit, and (b) An example of a part data table provided in the RAM of the first sub-control unit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. (A) is a flow chart of production system operation processing, and (b) is a flow chart of chance button operation state judging processing. It is a flow chart of various button operation related processing. It is a flow chart of various button operation related processing. It is a flow chart of processing when a button is pressed. It is a flow chart of one-time operation processing. It is a flow chart of one-time operation processing. It is a flowchart of a continuous hit operation process. It is a flow chart of long press operation processing. It is a flowchart of other button operation processing. It is a flow chart of setting display processing at the time of a decision button operation. It is a flow chart of setting display processing at the time of right button operation. (A) is a flowchart of a brightness setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user brightness setting operation process. (A) is a flowchart of a volume setting display update process, (b) is a flowchart of a user volume setting operation process. It is a flow chart of setting display processing at the time of operating the upper button. (A) is a flowchart of a button long press process, and (b) is a flowchart of a chance button long press operation state determination process. It is a flow chart of various button long press operation related processing. It is a figure which shows the operation key unit shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 970 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect | action in another case following FIG. 971 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the waiting state (customer waiting state) which is not performing symbol variation display, and (b) is the operation result of each button during symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example, and (c) is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in a big hit game. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating another example of effects in the effect shown in FIG. 974. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating another example of effects in the effect shown in FIG. 974. It is a figure explaining another example of the effect shown by FIG. 974. It is the figure which explains one example of the setting operation which uses the production button and the operation key unit. It is the figure which explains the production example which uses the production button and the operation key unit. (A) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the continuous hit operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for continuous hits, and (B) is the effect button during the execution of the effect for continuous hits. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the long press operation and the effect display, and (C) is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the long press operation by the effect button and the effect display during execution of the effect for the long press. is there. (A) is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed during execution of the continuous hit effect, and (B) is execution of the long press effect. It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button is intermittently performed. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of the effect for continuous hits centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production for consecutive hits which centers on the decorative design display of the pachinko machine of this execution form in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of the effect for long press centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a step-up production step by step centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 985 step by step. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing another example of effects performed in the effect shown in FIG. 985. It is a figure explaining the relation between the effect display and the operation of the effect button in the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the relation between the effect display and the operation of the effect button in the decorative symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 993. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of the effect for continuous hits centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on a decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining the other example of the effect shown by FIG. 1004. It is a figure explaining the modification of the example of an effect shown by FIG. 1005. It is an external perspective view of a slot machine (spindle gaming machine) as a gaming table to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). (A) is an external appearance perspective view of the information display button 1046, (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the first embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit, and a cross key 146 capable of accepting various operations relating to customization, volume / light amount setting, music selection, and the like. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 17) are arranged around it. The details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, but it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Further, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage 244 is arranged in a region where the game balls can roll. On the stage 244, a game ball or the like that is out of the game area 124 can be temporarily rolled. Further, behind the stage 244, a wall portion 200a3 described later is erected, and a game ball rolling on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall portion 200a3 and the front side. It is guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 has a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The public figure display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in the present embodiment, they are constituted by 7-segment LEDs.

  The public figure holding lamp 216 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variable games (details described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of general figure variable games (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to two). The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, It is possible to hold a figure fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is a low probability that a big jackpot is unlikely to occur. Lights when changing from the high probability state to the high probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the front surface of the game board 200. One is arranged on the right side of the view. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the lower center part of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, they are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 when viewed from the front. The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed. When the display device stops and displays the jackpot pattern, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are picked up as prize balls. Discharge to plate 126. The balls that enter the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, a game nail, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning hole 226, first variable winning hole 234, second). The variable winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or the universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach the outlet 240 only by passing through.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 with the back cover attached, viewed from the back surface (back surface), and FIG. 4 is a view of the game board 200 with the back cover removed from the back surface (back surface). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the game board 200, a back cover 241 made of a transparent plate-shaped member is provided. The back cover 241 is rotatably attached to the game board 200 via hinges 242 arranged at two places on the left side as viewed from the rear. Further, lock portions 243 for fixing the back cover 241 to the back surface of the game board 200 are provided at two upper and lower positions at an end portion of the back cover 241 opposite to the hinge portion 242.

  A main control board case 244 that can accommodate a control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a main control board or a main control board) that configures a main control unit 300 described later is disposed below the back cover 241. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, above the main control board case 244 and at a position covered by the back cover 241, a control board (hereinafter referred to as a sub-control board or a sub-control board) that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 described later is formed. A sub-control board case 245 that can house a control board) and a liquid crystal control board case 246 that can house a control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a liquid crystal control board) that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 described later. It is arranged.

  The sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered by the back cover 241. However, since the back cover 241 of this example is a transparent plate-shaped member, the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are included. The states of various electronic components housed in the board cases 245 and 246 are visible from the back surface (back surface) side through the back cover 241.

  FIG. 5A is a schematic front view showing the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 extracted, and FIG. 5B is a side along the line AA in FIG. 5A. FIG.

  The liquid crystal control board case 246 accommodates the above-mentioned liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a and another control board. Further, the sub control board case 245 accommodates the sub control board 245a.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when the side surface on the right side in side view of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as a reference plane, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board are arranged in order from the reference plane. 245a and relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference plane than the liquid crystal control board 246a and closer to the reference plane than the relay board 246b. It is located between 246a and the relay board 246b.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the present specification, the main controller 300 may be referred to as “main controller”, and the first sub controller 400 and the second sub controller 500 may be collectively referred to as “sub controller”.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time and the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing, and a crystal oscillator 316a. And a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a random number value based on the clock signal output by the sensor circuit 322 and the signal output by the sensor circuit 322. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It stores in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 outputs signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a game ball that passes through each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening, and a lower plate full tank sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special character display device. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the diagram display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, universal figure (Holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and a predetermined movable member, eg It connects the drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a such places blade members 232a and the variable winning hole 234 of the second JP view start hole 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various performance data, and the like. Is connected to the ROM 406 in which is stored.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a volume of the speaker 120. Volume switch 417 for adjusting the position, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 146. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the key sensor 427, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136 to the basic circuit 402, and a game board lamp drive circuit that controls the game board lamp 532. 530 and game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542 It is connected to the road 540, a. In addition, in the present example, the example in which the accessory unit 950 is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 is shown, but it is configured to be drive-controlled by another control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500). Good.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 reads out image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. VDP434 (Video Display Processor) is connected.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether the payout of is completed. The payout control unit 600 receives signals output from various sensors 601 including a front frame door opening sensor and an inner frame opening sensor, and is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. It communicates with the card unit 608.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 7A to 7C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. FIG. 7 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do.

  These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display.

  As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), 10 kinds of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In (a) of the same figure, the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments where the light is turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments where the light is turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "Special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special figure B" is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  "Special map C" is a 2R jackpot design called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shortened working hours, which is a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

  “Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, and both are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG.7 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical ornamental symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, "special drawing E" 2R big hit called hidden probability change, "special drawing F" suddenly called 2R big hit, or "special drawing G" first small hit, "special drawing H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R jackpot which is called a sudden change of "Special drawing C" or a 2R jackpot which is called a sudden shortening of "Special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. (B) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  The same figure (c) shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 8. Note that FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined.

  When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203, the WDT is periodically set (to prevent the processing abnormality from being detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (Information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232. It is determined that the player has entered the ball or passed through the universal figure starting port 228.

  That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random number value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Value is obtained from the special register, the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  If there is a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number counter of the random number generating circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is obtained from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 2 winning random number value and the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 7C) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 7C). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off.

  Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the general figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 7A are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special map B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special map probability fluctuation flag is on, the special map C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure Stochastic fluctuation flag is off, Special rate F when the rate variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first deviation flag is on In the case of special map I, when the second deviation flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the respective modes of special map I, A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is made in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first off pattern (special map) I), and the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) A solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 ( In 332), a signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number 100 times is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning port 234 during the jackpot game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting port 232 until the game ball enters There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a jackpot increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special character The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, or , And whether or not there is a winning in the second variable winning port 235.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related that are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, or the second variable winning port 235, and via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing is resumed. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main controller.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, if it has been detected that the chance button has been pressed, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed. In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the accessory unit 950, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

<Direction device>
Next, the effect device included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 of this example has a rear unit 200a in which a rendering device is arranged, a front unit 200c that forms the above-mentioned game area 124, and a game of a plate-shaped member that separates the rear unit 200a and the front unit 200c. It is composed of three units of the plate 200b. Then, the game board 200b is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 200a, and the front unit 200c is further attached to the front surface of this game board 200b, so that the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c. Are integrated into a game board 200. The material of the game board 200b is not particularly limited, and may be transparent resin or wood.

  On the right side in the front view of the game board 200b, a through hole 200b1 for a gate, which is an elongated hole through which a part of a universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 arranged in the front unit 200c can penetrate, and this through hole 200b1 for a gate. And a notch portion 200b2 serving as a mark for specifying the position of. In addition, a notch portion 200a1 for a gate is formed on the right side of the rear unit 200a when viewed from the front so that a part of the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c can be touched (accessed). Has been done.

  13A and 13B are partially enlarged views showing the vicinity of the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. In the state where the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are integrated, the rear end portion of the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 arranged in the front unit 200c is the game board 200b. It is configured to penetrate the gate through hole 200b1 and reach the inside of the gate cutout 200a1 of the rear unit 200a.

  The clerk of the game shop can easily and quickly identify the location of the universal figure starting port (gate) 228 by using the notch 200b2 of the game board 200b as a mark, and configure the game board 200. Without disassembling the unit, it is possible to replace the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 or visually confirm the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 through the gate notch portion 200a1 of the rear unit 200a. it can. For this reason, maintenance work such as replacement and repair of the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 is easier than before, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any misconduct with respect to the universal figure starting opening (gate) 228 and In some cases it can be prevented.

<Game ball storage section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the game ball storage portion provided in the rear unit 200a will be described. 14 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed, as viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 15 shows the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed. It is the perspective view seen from FIG. 16, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged view showing the periphery of the game ball storage portion in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a rear unit opening 200a2 is formed in the center of the rear unit 200a so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit 200a can be visually recognized. . A center accessory 900 is arranged above the rear unit opening 200a2 in the horizontal direction of the rear unit 200a, and a center accessory opening 900a having a contour of the character's face is formed in the center thereof. ing. As will be described later in detail, the face of the character applied to the cover means 718 of the drop deploying accessory 712 arranged behind the center accessory 900 can be visually recognized from the center accessory opening 900a.

  Below the rear unit opening portion 200a2, a wall portion 200a3 made of a transparent plate-like member and a decorative portion 200a4 formed in an uneven shape are arranged. Further, below the decorative portion 200a4, a horizontally long dish-shaped game ball storage portion 200a5 is arranged from the vicinity of the left end of the rear unit opening portion 200a2 in rear view to the vicinity of the right end thereof. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball storage section 200a5 is a part capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB1.

  As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 16, the game ball storage section 200a5 of this example has a second storage section 200a8 having a width capable of storing a maximum of two game balls in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. And a first storage portion 200a7 which is in communication with the second storage portion 200a8 and has a width capable of storing a maximum of one game ball in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a, and the second storage portion And a guide portion 200a6 having an inclined surface inclined downward toward 200a8. The guide portion 200a6 has an inclined surface, so that it is possible to guide the game ball that has passed over the wall portion 200a3 and dropped to the rear of the rear unit 200a to the second storage portion 200a8.

  As shown in FIG. 14, a plurality of connectors 200a9 to which a harness for electrically connecting the accessory unit 950 and the rear unit 200a can be attached below the game ball storage section 200a5, and a game. A plurality of game ball passages 200a11 for guiding the game balls out of the area 124 to the lower plate or the like are provided. The game ball storage section 200a5 of this example also functions as a portion for preventing the game ball that has passed over the wall section 200a3 and dropped to the rear of the rear unit 200a from coming into contact with the connector 200a9.

  By providing such a game ball storage section 200a5, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball comes into contact with the connector 200a9 and the electrical system is short-circuited or the connector 200a9 is damaged, and stable game control is achieved. You may be able to do it.

  Further, in this example, a gap having a width equal to or larger than one game ball is formed between the wall portion 200a3 and the decoration portion 200a4, and this gap is, for example, the wall portion 200a3 as shown in FIG. It functions as a second game ball storage section 200a10 capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB2 that has passed over and dropped to the rear of the rear unit 200a.

<Accessory unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

  The accessory unit 950 is a unit attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 200a, and in this example, the drop deployment accessory unit 700, the ascent accessory unit 750, the launch accessory unit 800, and the V forming accessory unit 850. Composed by. In this example, the climbing accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Accessory unit / Drop deployment accessory unit>
18 to 20 are exploded perspective views of the drop-deployment accessory unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the drop deploying accessory unit 700 is mainly composed of a base 702 having a U-shape in a front view, and a pair of lower left lower drive parts arranged on the left side in the front view and the right side in the front view of the base 702. 704 and a right / bottom drive unit 706, a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, a relay board 710 for electrically connecting the drop deployable accessory unit 700 and another board, and a pair. The lower left upper drive unit 704 and the right upper vertical drive unit 706 are configured to be slidable in the up-down direction, and a falling deploying accessory 712 (see FIG. 20).

<Accessory unit / Drop deploying accessory unit / Left (right) vertical drive unit>
As shown in FIG. 18, the left up-and-down drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to an upper portion of the drive base 704a, and a drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the lower left upper drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702, and a slider 704e fixed to the slider 704e and a drop deploying accessory 712. And a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is disposed so as to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d. And is configured to slide vertically. The right up / down drive unit 706 has the same structure as the upper left down drive unit 704, and is as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19.

  A drop deploying accessory 712, which will be described later, is supported at both ends by an accessory supporting portion 704f of an upper left lower drive portion 704 and an accessory supporting portion 706f of a right up and down driving portion 706. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the drop deploying accessory 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as “up and down operation of the drop deploying accessory 712”.

<Accessory unit / Drop expansion accessory unit / Unlock unit>
As shown in FIG. 18, the unlocking portion 708 is a solenoid 708a driven by the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 6, a shaft portion 708b slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 708a, and the shaft portion 708b. The movable portion 708c that is slid up and down together with the shaft portion 708b, the rotating portion 708d that is rotated in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and the rotating portion 708d in the direction indicated by the symbol A. And a slidable claw portion 708e.

  The claw portion 708e of the lock release portion 708 is slidably arranged inside and outside the through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is operated to move the claw portion 708e into the through hole 702a, the base 702 is blocked (locked) from sliding downward, and the drop deploying component 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is actuated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the downward sliding of the base 702 is allowed (unlocked), and the drop deploying component 712 slides downward by its own weight. To do. In addition, in the above-mentioned "vertical movement of the drop deploying accessory 712", in addition to the downward sliding due to the operation of the left drive motor 704b and the right drive motor 706b, the downward expanding slide 712 due to its own weight is also slid down. included.

<Accessory unit / fall expansion accessory unit / fall expansion accessory>
As shown in FIG. 20, the drop deploying accessory 712 has a long plate-shaped fourth structure 712a whose both ends are supported by the accessory supporting portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 19, and the fourth structure 712a. A long plate-shaped first structure 712b rotatably attached to the front side of the vehicle, a pair of left and right third structures 712c rotatably disposed on the fourth structure 712a, and A pair of left and right second structures 712d that are rotatably disposed in the structure 712b, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotationally driving the left side of the first structure 712b in a front view, and the first structure 712d. It has a right rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b in front view, and a plate-shaped cover means 718 (see FIG. 21) arranged on the front side of the first structure 712b. Consists of

  The left rotation drive unit 712e decorates the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. The left rotation motor base ornament 712e3, the gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b when viewed from the front. And a rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has almost the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, and as shown in FIG. 20, the rotation arm 712f5 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51 and the position of this detection piece 712f51 is set. The left rotation drive unit 712e differs from the left rotation drive unit 712e in that it includes a detectable sensor 712f6. The right rotation drive unit 712f can detect whether the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 30A) by including the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6. It is possible.

  In the drop deployment component 712, the left rotation motor 712e2 is actuated to rotate the rotation arm 712e5 via the gear 712e4, and the left side in front view of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is the front surface. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 rotates via the gear 712f4, and the right side in front view of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed rotates to the front side (tilt). ) Is configured to.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, it is possible to rotate (tilt) the first structure body 712b toward the front side (the direction away from the fourth structure body 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (tilting) the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 to the front side may be referred to as “rotating operation of the drop deploying accessory 712”.

  A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base portion 712g. To be done. On the other hand, an engaging portion 712m that can engage with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structure 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 30 (a), the arm 712k on the side of the first structure 712b and the engaging part 712m on the side of the fourth structure 712a are connected to each other. The engagement holds the first structure 712b in the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure body 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement of the arm portion 712k on the first structure body 712b side with the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure body 712a side. It will be canceled.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that is vertically slidable with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure body 712b side and is urged downward by the spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 is released, the slider 722 is urged by the slider. 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. Although the face of the character is applied to the cover means 718 in this example, other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the base portion 712g is provided with a magnet 712n for attracting the iron metal piece 712c7 arranged in the pair of third structure bodies 712c by magnetic force. When the 712b is inclined to the front by about 180 °, the pair of third structures 712c is held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  Further, a pair of magnets 712b1 are respectively arranged at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are arranged at the respective positions. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and is held in the initial position.

  Further, the third structure 712c on the left side in the front view is rotatably supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the left side in the front view and a support shaft 712c2 on the support portion 712c1. The arm portion 712c3 is provided, the upper left half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper left half body portion 712c4.

  The third structure 712c on the right side in front view is supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the right side in front view of the fourth structure 712a, and rotatable on the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 is provided, the upper right half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper right half body portion 712c4.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side in the front view is rotatably supported by a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the left side in the front view of the first structure 712b and a support shaft 712d2 on the support portion 712d1. It is configured to have an arm portion 712d3 to be arranged, a left lower body 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It

  As shown in FIG. 21, the second structure 712d on the right side in front view includes a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in front view of the first structure 712b, and a support shaft 712d2 on the support portion 712d1. An arm portion 712d3 that is rotatably disposed, a lower right half body portion 712b4 that is fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 that connects the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. Configured to have.

  In the drop deploying accessory 712, the left upper body 712c4, the hat 712c5, and the school emblem 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side in front view, and the upper right body 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side in front view. , A hat portion 712c5, and a school emblem portion 712c6, a left lower body 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the left side in front view, and a lower right body 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the right side in front view. The character is configured to be formed.

<Electrical object unit / falling expansion accessory unit / light emitting means of falling expansion accessory>
FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the first structure 712b extracted, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a extracted. It is a figure. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure body 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure body 712a.

  On the front side of the first structure 712b, a light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting means 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached, and by the plurality of second light emitting means 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through the cover means 718 arranged in the front. Further, a light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the back surface side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a are attached. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a arranged in front.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the light emitting board 716 of the fourth structure 712a is provided with a first harness to which the fourth structure 712a and the first sub-control unit 400 can be electrically connected. The connector CN1, a second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left side. A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotary motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotary motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Accessory Unit / Ascending Accessory Unit>
FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting accessory unit 750. As shown in FIG. 23, the lifting accessory unit 750 mainly includes a base 752, a drive unit 754 disposed on the left side of the base 752 when viewed from the front, a first lifting accessory 756, and a second lifting accessory 756. And an accessory 758.

  The drive unit 754 includes a drive base 754a fixed to the base 752 with screws, a drive motor 754b attached to the drive base 754a, a drive gear 754c fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 754b, and the drive gear 754c. A plurality of gears 754d for transmitting motive power, a sensor 754e capable of detecting the position of a detection piece 754d1 provided on one gear of the plurality of gears 754d, and one gear of the plurality of gears 754d And a cam 754f that meshes with.

  The first lifting accessory base 756 includes a first lifting accessory base 756a and an arm portion 756b which is rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise with the left side of the first lifting accessory base 756a in front view as a fulcrum. , A first rising accessory slider 756c that is vertically slidable in conjunction with the rotation of the arm portion 756b, and a first rising that is attached to the first lifting accessory slider 756c and that shows the appearance of rocks. The accessory decoration portion 756d.

  The arm portion 756b is engaged with the front side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754d of the drive portion 754, and is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by rotating the cam 754d. The first lifting accessory slider 756c and the first lifting accessory decoration 756d move up when the arm 756b rotates counterclockwise, and move down when the arm 756b rotates clockwise.

  The second lifting accessory 758 includes a second lifting accessory base 758a, a second lifting accessory slider 758b slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the second lifting accessory base 758a, and the second lifting accessory slider 758b. Second climbing accessory slider 758b, which is attached to the climbing accessory slider 758b, and which shows the appearance of rock, and a lock releasing portion 758d which can prevent the second climbing accessory slider 758b from falling. And a part 758e.

  The second lifting accessory slider 758b is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the first lifting accessory slider 756c, and the first lifting accessory slider 756c is lifted by a predetermined amount to cause the first lifting accessory slider 756c to move up. The accessory slider 756c is configured so as to move upward (details will be described later).

  The lock releasing portion 758d has a solenoid 758d1, a shaft portion 758d2 that is slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 758d1, and a claw portion 758d3 that is engaged with the shaft portion 758d2 and is slidable in the direction indicated by reference numeral B. Configured.

  Although the details will be described later, when the solenoid 758d1 is actuated to extend the claw portion 758d3, the second descending accessory slider 758b is prevented from being lowered (locked), and is fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The removed second ascending accessory decoration 758c is held at the ascending position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 758d1 is actuated to retract the claw portion 758d3, the second descending accessory slider 758b is allowed to descend (unlocked) and is fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c slides downward due to its own weight.

<Accessory unit / Launch accessory unit>
FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the launch accessory unit 800, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged perspective view of the relay board 806 included in the launch accessory unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the launching accessory unit 800 is mainly provided in a plate-shaped rear unit 802, a launching mechanism 804 disposed below the rear unit 802, and on the right side in front view of the rear unit 802. Relay board 806 disposed in the vicinity of the game ball passage 802a formed, a protective film 808 attached to the surface of the relay board 806, and a spacer for forming a movable space of a small piece accessory 804d composed of a plurality of small pieces. 810 and a plate-shaped front unit 812 that covers the front surface of the spacer 810.

  The launching mechanism 804 is provided with a slider 804a provided at a position where it can be engaged with the back side convex portion of the cam 754f of the lifting accessory unit 750, a spring 804b for biasing the slider 804a upward, and a slider 804a for moving up and down. A guide portion 804c for guiding in the direction, a small piece accessory 804d arranged in a free state above the slider 804a, and a pair of guide rails 804e for guiding the small piece accessory 804d in the direction of the slider 804a. Configured.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 25, a protective film 808 is attached to the front surface of the relay board 806 except for the connector and the like. The relay board 806 is arranged in the game ball passage 802a of the rear unit 802, but in this example, by attaching the protective film 808 to the front surface of the relay board 806, the game passing through the game ball passage 802a. It is configured such that the ball does not contact the relay board 806 (so that the game ball passing through the game ball passage 802a and the relay board 806 are insulated). Therefore, in the relay board 806, it is possible to prevent the electric system from being short-circuited or the relay board 806 to be damaged, and stable game control may be performed in some cases.

<Feature unit / V forming feature unit>
FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the V-forming accessory unit 850. As shown in FIG. 26, the V forming accessory unit 850 includes a V forming accessory left unit 852 arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 100 when viewed from the front and a V forming accessory unit 850 arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 when viewed from the front. And an accessory right unit 854. Since the V-forming accessory left unit 852 and the V-forming accessory right unit 854 have a bilaterally symmetrical structure, a detailed description of the V-forming accessory right unit 854 will be omitted below.

  The V-forming accessory left unit 852 includes a V-forming accessory left base 852a, a driving portion 852b arranged at a lower end of the V-forming accessory left base 852a, and a left link portion rotatable by the driving portion 852b. 852c, a decorative portion 852d fixed to the V forming accessory left base 852a, a left light emitting substrate 852e disposed on the upper portion of the V forming accessory left base 852a, and a V forming left movable attached to the left link portion 852c. It is configured to have a portion 852f, a V-formed left decorative portion 852g attached to the V-formed left movable portion 852f, and a left light guide slope 852h attached to the left light emitting substrate 852e.

  The drive unit 852b includes a drive motor 852b1 attached to the V forming accessory left base 852a, a drive gear 852b2 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 852b1, and a cam 852b3 rotated by the drive gear 852b2. Configured to have.

  The V formation left movable part 852f of the V formation accessory left unit 852 can be rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end as a fulcrum by driving the drive portion 852b, and the V formation accessory right unit 854 can be rotated. The V-forming right movable portion 854f can be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end portion as a fulcrum by driving the driving portion 854b. Therefore, by driving the drive unit 852b and the drive 854d at the same time, the V-shaped left movable portion 852f and the V-formed right movable portion 854f form a V-shape in a front view.

  FIG. 27 is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V-forming accessory right unit 854 as seen from the back side. Ejector pin marks 854h1 formed at the time of molding remain at two places above the right light guide plate 854h. The ejector pin mark 854h1 is a recess that is unavoidably formed when the right light guide plate 854h is molded, and the thickness of the portion including the ejector pin mark 854h1 is smaller than the thickness of the portion without the ejector pin mark 854h1. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the right light emitting substrate 854e of the V forming accessory right unit 854 is arranged so as to face the ejector pin mark 854h1. With such a structure, it may be possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) and enhance the effect.

<Accessory unit / Center accessory unit>
28 is a front view of the center accessory unit 900, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900.

  The center accessory 900 includes a decorative portion 902 arranged on the upper part of the game board 200, and a light emitting substrate 904 arranged on the back side of the decorative portion 902. The decorative portion 902 of this example includes a plurality of first portions 902a (see FIG. 29) radially arranged around the center accessory opening 900a at predetermined intervals, and the inside of the first portion 902a. And a second portion 902b (see FIG. 28) that is disposed at the outer edge of the center accessory opening 900a.

  The first portion 902a is a portion formed of a transparent or semi-transparent member capable of transmitting light. In this example, a part of the plurality of first portions 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center accessory 900. Of the light emitted from the light emitting means (in this example, LED) mounted on the light emitting means and the light emitted from the light emitting means (in this example, LED) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b. Both can be transmitted. On the other hand, the second part 902b is a part made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.

<Operation of fall deploying accessory>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the drop deploying accessory 712 can be vertically moved to slide in the vertical direction and can be rotated to rotate the first structure 712b forward.

<Movement of fall / deployment / up / down movement>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the vertical movement of the drop deploying accessory product 712 by extracting only the drop deploying accessory product unit 700, and FIG. 31 is the drop in the drop deploying accessory product unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is a figure showing the up-and-down operation of development part 712.

  FIG. 30A and FIG. 31A show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement. The initial position in the vertical movement is the position where the entire fall deploying accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center accessory 900 above the game board 200.

  At this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the face of the character) provided on the front surface of the cover means 718 of the fall deploying accessory 712 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. It becomes possible, and the central effect 900 and the drop development effect 712 provide an integrated effect. In addition, the initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. The entire display area 208 is visible.

  30 (b) and 31 (b) show a front view and a sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the intermediate position in the vertical movement. When the drop-deployment accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement, the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 18) is actuated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, and the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the drop deploying accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches an intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the vertical movement is a position where the drop deploying accessory 712 at the initial position is lowered and a part of the drop deploying accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) with the center accessory 900. At this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop deploying accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decorative symbol is displayed from the front. The top of the display area of device 208 is invisible, but most of the display area is visible.

  30 (c) and 31 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the vertical movement. The maximum movement position in the vertical movement is a position where the fall deploying accessory 712 at the intermediate position is further lowered and a part of the drop deploying accessory 712 does not overlap with the center accessory 900 (does not overlap). The maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening portion 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decoration is seen from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Motion / rotation motion of fall deploying accessory>
32 is a diagram showing the rotation operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 by extracting only the drop deploying accessory unit 700, and FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are the drop deploying accessory units in the state of being installed on the game board 200. It is a figure showing rotation operation of drop deployment accessory 712 in 700.

  32 (a) and 33 (a) are front views when the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d that are interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b move the first structure 712b. The three left and right third structure bodies 712c, which rotate in the direction of coming closer to each other as a fulcrum and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d, come close to each other with the fourth structure body 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 21) is released, the slider 721 pushes down on the cover means 718. Therefore, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined toward the front by about 45 °, but the decoration provided on the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  32B and FIG. 33B show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process of the first structure 712b rotating from the front side to 45 ° to 90 °, the two left and right second structure 712d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The two left and right third structure bodies 712c that rotate in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated by 45 ° toward the front side and that are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to that in the state in which the structure 712b has rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is tilted toward the front by about 90 °, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a (disposed on the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) becomes visible from the front.

  Note that the cover means 718 has a structure that slides downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, so that when the cover means 718 is inclined to the front by about 90 °. Even if there is, the amount of protrusion of the cover means 718 to the front side can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thickness of the game board 200 from becoming unnecessarily large, and it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the cover means 718 comes into contact with another member.

  32 (c) and 34 (a) show front views when the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The two left and right third structure bodies 712c that rotate in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated 90 ° toward the front side and that are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to that in the state in which the structure 712b has rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is tilted toward the front by about 135 °, and the decoration provided on the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a (disposed on the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  32D and 34B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the drop deploying component 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The third left and right third structure 712d interlocked with the left and right second structure 712d while being brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structure bodies 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to each other than the state in which the first structure body 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the two left and right second structures 712d and the left and right two third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and a character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c. To be done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined to the front by about 180 °, the decoration provided on the bar means 718 is invisible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (main body) provided on the fourth structure 712a is not visible. In the example, a part of the LED) is also covered with the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus is not visible from the front.

<Operation of the ascending accessory unit and launch accessory unit>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the operation of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the lifting accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 36 is installed on the game board 200. It is a figure showing the operation of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800 in the state.

  35 (a) and 36 (a) are front views showing a state in which the lifting accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are located at the initial positions, and FIGS. b) is a front view of a process in which the lifting accessory unit 750 is activated and the first lifting accessory decoration 756d and the second lifting accessory decoration 758c are lifted.

  When the cam 754f is rotated clockwise by the operation of the drive motor 754b, it is pushed up by the front convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f, and the arm portion 756b is rotated counterclockwise. When the arm portion 756b rotates counterclockwise, the first lifting accessory slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides upward, and the first lifting accessory slider 756c fixed to the first lifting accessory slider 756c. The ascending accessory decoration portion 756d rises.

  Further, when the first lifting accessory slider 756c slides upward by a predetermined amount, the engaging portion 756c1 of the first lifting accessory slider 756c becomes the engaging portion 758b1 of the second lifting accessory slider 758b. Engage. As a result, the second lifting accessory slider 758b slides upward together with the first lifting accessory slider 756c, and the second lifting accessory decoration 758c fixed to the second lifting accessory slider 758b is removed. To rise.

  FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (c) are front views showing a state in which the first climbing accessory decoration 756d and the second climbing accessory decoration 758c are raised to the maximum height. When the sensor 754e (see FIG. 23) detects that the cam 754f has further rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35 (b) to the position shown in FIG. 35 (c), the solenoid 758d1 is activated. The claw portion 758d3 extends in the direction of the second lifting accessory slider 758b. When the claw portion 758d3 extends, the downward movement of the second lifting accessory slider 758b becomes impossible, and the second lifting accessory slider 758b is prevented from falling (locked). The second rising accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the object slider 758b is held at the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c).

  35 (d) and 36 (d) are front views showing a state in which the launch accessory unit 800 is in operation. The cam 754f further rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35 (c), and the engagement between the front convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f and the arm portion 756b is released. As a result, the first lifting accessory slider 756c that engages with the arm portion 756b slides downward, and the first lifting accessory decoration 756d fixed to the first lifting accessory slider 756c moves downward. The effect of sliding to (the effect of expressing that a part of the climbing accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of a rock has been destroyed and sunk below) is executed.

  On the other hand, since the second descending accessory slider 758b is kept in a state of being blocked (locked) by the extended claw portion 758d3, the second ascending object slider 758b fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The object decoration portion 758c remains held in the raised position.

  When the cam 754f is rotated to release the engagement between the rear projection of the cam 754f and the slider 804a (see FIG. 24) of the launching accessory unit 800, the slider 804a urged by the spring 804b is moved upward. By sliding in the direction, the small piece accessory 804d is vigorously launched upward (an effect representing that a part of the ascending accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of a rock is scattered).

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d), in addition to the effect produced by the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800, the fall deploying accessory 712 is provided as shown in FIG. After the effect of sliding downward from the initial position shown in (a) to the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 30 (c) or FIG. 31 (c) is executed, the rotation operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 (shown in FIG. 32). The effect by the rotation operation) is executed.

<Game ball passage>
In the present example, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the rising accessory unit 750 is provided with a first game ball passage 750a and a second game ball passage 750b through which game balls can pass, and Below the one game ball passage 750a, an inclined surface 750c that is inclined downward in the front direction is formed. The inclined surface 750c plays a role of guiding the game ball that has passed through the first game ball passage 750a to the lower side of the game board 200. In the case of an enclosed game machine, the game balls that have passed through the first game ball passage 750a and the second game ball passage 750b may be guided to the circulation path.

<Game ball storage unit and ascending accessory unit>
FIG. 37 (a) is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the lifting accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 37 (b) is a state in which the lifting accessory unit 750 is operating. It is a side sectional view of the game board 200.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example includes two game ball storage units, that is, the game ball storage unit 200a5 and the second game ball storage unit 200a10. However, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), a game ball that has passed over the wall portion 200a3 of the game board 200 and dropped to the rear of the pachinko machine 100 is stored in any of the game ball storage portions 200a5, 200a10. Instead, it may reach above the lifting accessory unit 750 located at the initial position and come into contact with the second lifting accessory decoration 758c.

  In such a case, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example moves the game ball that is in contact with the second ascent accessory unit 758c with the operation of the ascent accessory unit 750. From the area, it can be guided to the front game ball storage section 200a5. Therefore, the operation of the rising accessory unit 750 is not hindered by the game ball, and it may be possible to prevent the failure of the rising accessory unit 750 in advance.

<Operation of V-forming accessory unit>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the operation of the V-forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V-forming accessory unit 850, and FIG. 39 is the operation of the V-forming accessory unit 850 installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed.

  38 (a) and 39 (a) show front views when the V-forming accessory unit 850 is located at the initial position, and FIGS. 38 (b) and 39 (b) show V. The front view is shown when the forming accessory unit 850 is activated and is located at the intermediate position.

  When the drive motor 852b1 of the V-forming accessory left unit 852 is driven, the V-forming left movable portion 852f rotates counterclockwise via the left link portion 852c and drives the drive motor 854b1 of the V-forming accessory right unit 854. Then, the V-forming right movable portion 854f rotates clockwise through the right link portion 854c. As a result, the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f are closer to each other than the initial position.

  FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (c) show front views when the V-forming accessory unit 850 is activated and is located at the maximum movement position. When the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f are rotated to the maximum movement position, they are closer to each other than the intermediate position, and the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f are viewed from the front. Forms a V-shape.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is confirmed), the V formation accessory unit 850 is operated, and the V formation left movable portion 852f and the V formation right movable portion 854f operate. By forming a V shape in a front view, it is configured to indicate to the player that a predetermined condition has been established.

  As described above, the game table according to the present example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine not shown) is provided with the production means (for example, the drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20). The production means is a means having a first structure (for example, a first structure 712b shown in FIG. 20), and the production means is a second structure (for example, FIG. 20). And a second structure 712d) shown in FIG. 7, wherein the first structure is a structure capable of a deployment effect operation, and the second structure moves according to the expansion effect operation. The first structure is a structure to be moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to the fourth position (for example, FIG. 32D) by the expansion effect operation. Moved from the initial position to the position rotated 180 ° to the front side) The second structure is a possible structure, and the second structure is changed from the second position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to the fifth position (for example, FIG. ), The first structure (eg, the first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure at the second position. (For example, the first structure 712b) is a structure located in front of, and as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the first structure (for example, the first structure) at the fourth position. The body 712b) is a structure located behind the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) in the fifth position, and the first structure is the fourth position. The foremost part of the effecting means located at is the effecting means in which the first structure is located at the first position. Is located in front of the foremost part of the game table.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, it is possible to provide a variety of effects with a simple structure and improve the interest of the player in some cases. In addition, there is a case where the production means can perform a novel production in which the production means approaches the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure (for example, the second structure 712b) at the second position. The structure 712d) may cover at least a part of the structure 712d) from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 32D, the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position is the first structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fourth position. , The first structure 712b) may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first structure 712b) from the front.

  Further, the rendering means is a means having a first light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 21B), and as shown in FIG. The first structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first light emitting means from the front. Further, as shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) is the first structure (for example, the first structure). 712b) from the first position (eg, position shown in FIG. 32 (a)) to the fourth position (eg, position shown in FIG. 32 (d)) being visible to the player. It may be a means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32D, the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the fourth position is the first light emitting unit (for example, the first light emitting unit). 716a) may not be covered from the front. Further, the rendering means is means having a third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 20), and the third structure is the first structure (for example, the third structure 712c). It may be a structure that moves according to the movement of one structure 712b). Further, the third structure is a structure that is movable from a third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a sixth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32D). May be

  Further, at least a part of the second end (for example, the upper end) of the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 32D) at the fifth position is the At least a part of a third end (for example, a lower end) of the third structure (for example, a third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position, Good.

  Further, the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position corresponds to the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a). It may be a structure that covers at least a part from the front. Further, the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) at the sixth position corresponds to the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a). The structure may cover a part from the front.

  In addition, the production means is a means having a second light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means is the first structure body. It may be a means capable of emitting light when it is located at the first position. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is a means provided in the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b). May be.

  Further, the rendering means is means having a cover means (for example, the cover means 718 shown in FIG. 21A), and for example, as shown in FIG. 21, the cover means is the second light emitting means ( For example, it is a means for covering the second light emitting means 714a), and for example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the cover means is the first structure of the first structure. It may be a means capable of changing the relative position with respect to the second light emitting means during the movement from the position to the fourth position.

  Further, the production means is means having a third light emitting means (for example, a light emitting means (LED) provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the third light emitting means. May be a means capable of emitting light when the first structure is located at the fourth position. Further, the third light emitting means may be means provided in the first structure. Further, the rendering means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is the light emitting substrate. May be provided on the first surface of the light emitting substrate, and the third light emitting means may be provided on the second surface of the light emitting substrate.

  Further, the foremost portion (the portion that protrudes most forward) of the rendering means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 32D) in which the first structure is located at the fourth position is The first structure may be located in front of the foremost part of the rendering means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 30) located in the first position.

  The first structure may be a rotatable structure. Further, the display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 2) may be provided, and the rendering means may be a means that is movable in front of the display means. Further, the first structure may be a structure rotatable about an axis parallel to the display means (for example, an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 2). .

  Further, the rendering unit may be a unit having a second light emitting substrate, and the first light emitting unit may be a unit provided on the second light emitting substrate. Further, the second light-emitting substrate may be a substrate that includes an effect control unit and relays the effect control unit and the light-emitting substrate. Further, the rendering means may be a means having a driving means, and the driving means may be a means for moving the first structure.

  Further, the second light emitting board may be a board that relays the effect control means and the drive means. Further, the rendering means may be a means having a detecting means, and the detecting means may be a means for detecting the first structure located at the first position. Further, the second light emitting board may be a board that relays the effect control means and the detection means.

  The second light emitting board is a board having a first connector, the first connector is connected to a first harness, and the first harness is the driving means and the detection means. The first harness, which is connected to the means, may be a bifurcated harness.

  Further, the rendering means may be a means having a fourth structure, and the fourth structure may be a structure having the second light emitting substrate. Further, one of the first structure and the fourth structure is a structure having a first magnet, the other of the first structure and the fourth structure is , A structure having a first magnetic body or a second magnet, the first magnetic body or the second magnet is attracted to the first magnet, the first structure is The first position may be maintained.

  Further, the first magnetic body or the second magnet may be attracted to the first magnet via non-magnetism. Further, one of the first structure and the third structure is a structure having a third magnet, and the other of the first structure and the third structure is , A structure having a second magnetic body or a fourth magnet, the third magnetic body or the fourth magnet is attracted to the third magnet, the third structure The sixth position may be maintained.

  Further, the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet may be attracted to the third magnet via a non-magnetic body. Further, the rendering means may be means having two or three or more driving means. Further, the effect producing means may be a means having two or three or more detecting means. Moreover, the said production | generation means may be a means which has the said 2nd structure 2 or 3 or more. Moreover, the said production | generation means may be a means which has the said 3rd structure 2 or 3 or more. Further, the first structure may include a first image display unit capable of displaying an image at the first position. Further, the first structure may include a second image display unit capable of displaying an image at the fourth position.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine not shown) has a first driving unit (for example, the driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, 23 is a gaming table provided with the first rising accessory decoration portion 756d) of the lifting accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first effect means is driven by the first driving means to make the first effect. (For example, the operation of raising the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c)) can be performed, and the second rendering means is Second movement by driving the first driving means For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), it is a means capable of executing the operation of raising the first rising accessory decoration portion 756d, and the second operation by the second effecting means. The first operation by the first effecting means is executed during the period, and the first effecting means operates the third operation (for example, by operating the solenoid 758d1 by driving the second driving means). It is a means capable of executing the operation of lowering the second lifting accessory decoration 758c).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, it is possible to provide a variety of effects with a simple structure and improve the interest of the player in some cases.

  Further, the first operation may be an operation different from the third operation. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), in the first operation, the first effect means is in a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)). ) To a second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)). Further, in the third operation, the first effect means (for example, the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c) moves to the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)). It may be an action.

  In addition, in the second operation, the second effect means operates from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). It may be an operation of moving to a position (Sano). Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) contacts (engages) with the second effect means (for example, the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d). It may be a means capable of executing the first operation.

  Further, the first effect means (for example, the second rising accessory decoration portion 758c) is prevented from being lowered (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 35D). Existing position), the fifth position is the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) and the second position (for example, FIG. 35). (Position of maximum height shown in (c)).

  Further, the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is a position higher than the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)), The first effect means, by its own weight, from the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C) to the fifth position (for example, the nail shown in FIG. 35D). It may be a means capable of moving to a position where the lowering is blocked (locked) by the portion 758d3. In addition, the first effect means is driven by the second drive means, and is positioned at the fifth position (for example, a position where the lowering is blocked (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35D). ) To a first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)).

  The first drive means may be a motor or a solenoid. Further, the second drive means may be a motor or a solenoid. Further, a third rendering means may be provided, and the third rendering means may be a means capable of executing the fourth operation by driving the first driving means. Further, it may include a fourth effect means, and the fourth effect means may be a means capable of executing the fifth operation by driving the first drive means. Further, the first rendering means may include at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means. Further, the second rendering means may include at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine (not shown)) according to this example discharges the game balls that have entered the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2) to the outside of the gaming table. Sphere passage portion (for example, arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 35 (b), first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c), second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35 (c)) Is provided with a production movable body (for example, a rising accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 35) provided with.

  According to the game table according to the present example, there is a case where unnecessary game balls can be discharged to the outside of the game table at the same time as providing the effect.

  Further, the effecting movable body may be a movable body positioned behind the stage. Further, the effecting movable body is a movable body having an arm portion (for example, arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 37). For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the arm portion is provided. May be an arm portion whose angle can be changed by the operation of the effecting movable body, and the arm portion may be an arm portion which can eject a game ball by changing the angle. Further, it may be provided with a first ball passage means (for example, a first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C) through which the game balls discharged by the operation of the effecting movable body can pass.

  Further, the first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is one side in the left-right direction of the effecting movable body (for example, the front of the lifting accessory unit 750). It may be a means provided on the left side in the view. In addition, it is provided with a second ball passage means (for example, a second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35C) through which the game balls discharged by the operation of the effecting movable body can pass. Good. Further, the second ball passage means may be provided on the other side of the movable body in the left-right direction (for example, the right side of the lifting accessory unit 750 in front view). Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided with a substrate (for example, the relay substrate 806 shown in FIGS. 24 and 25), and the substrate is an insulating means (for example, FIG. Means provided with the protective film 808 shown in FIG. 25 may be used.

  In addition, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine not shown) can receive a game ball that has entered behind a stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2). It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising a receiving portion (for example, the game ball storing portion 200a5 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16).

  According to the game table according to the present example, a clerk of a game store or the like can easily remove an unnecessary game ball, which may improve maintainability.

  Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of storing game balls. Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of discharging a game ball. Further, the receiving portion is a receiving portion capable of storing a game ball in the first state, and the receiving portion discharges the game ball in the second state. It is a receiving part capable of, the first state is a state in which the game ball that has entered the rear of the stage can be stored, and the second state has entered the rear of the stage It may be a state in which the game balls cannot be stored.

  Further, the receiving portion has a storage portion capable of storing the game ball, the receiving portion, a guide portion for guiding the game ball to the storage portion (for example, the guide portion 200a6 shown in FIG. 16). It may have one. Moreover, the guide part may be inclined toward the storage part. Further, a wall portion (for example, the wall portion 200a3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16) is provided between the stage and the receiving portion. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the stage has the wall portion. May be provided at a position lower than the upper end of the wall portion, and the receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end of the wall portion.

  In addition, a movable body (for example, the second rising accessory decorative portion 758d of the lifting accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 37) may be provided, and the receiving portion may be a receiving portion provided in front of the movable body. . Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball that is in contact with the movable body by the operation of the movable body. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving portion may be provided in an area different from the operation area of the movable body. Further, a ball passage (for example, a game ball passage 200a11 shown in FIG. 14) may be provided below the receiving portion.

  Further, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine not shown) according to this example has a structure (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) having a window (for example, 28 is a game console including a center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28) and a movable body (for example, a drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28). Is a game table characterized by being visible.

  According to the game table according to the present example, the movable body can be displayed in various ways, and the staging effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Further, when the movable body (for example, the drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is located at the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 31A), the movable body is moved from the window portion. A part of the player can be visually recognized, and when the movable body is located at the second position (for example, the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 31C), the player can move the movable body through the window. It may not be visible.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31A, the movable body located at the first position may be a movable body that overlaps with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, the movable body located at the second position may be a movable body that is not overlapped with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the movable body located at the second position may be visible to the player.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B) is provided, and the movable body located at the second position is a movable body overlapping the display means. It may be. Further, the movable body may be a movable body having a light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A).

  Further, at least a part of the structure (for example, the first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) may be transparent or translucent. Further, the portion of the movable body located at the first position and overlapping the structure may be a portion having a first display (for example, a character). Further, the first display may be a character or a character. Further, a part of the movable body that can be visually recognized by the player through the window section may have a second display (for example, the face of the character shown in FIG. 28). Further, the second display may be a display having a contour corresponding to the contour of the window. Further, the window portion may have a transmissive portion having transparency, and the window portion may be an opening portion.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or a slot machine not shown) has a decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28) and light emission capable of emitting light. A game table provided with means (for example, a drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28), and a transparent portion of the decorative cover (for example, a first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 29). ) Is visible to the player through the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is a movable means.

  According to the game table according to the present example, there are cases in which the effect produced by the light emitting means can be diversified and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the decorative cover may be a non-movable decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 28). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (eg, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) without passing through the decorative cover (eg, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 331). The light from may be visible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the light emitting means (eg, the drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the first position is the decoration cover (eg, the center accessory shown in FIG. 331). 900 decorative cover). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (eg, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the second position is the decoration cover (eg, the center accessory shown in FIG. 331). 900 decorative cover).

  The light emitting means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 28) is a means having a second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop deploying accessory 712), and the second decorative cover. May be transparent or translucent, and the second decorative cover may be a decorative cover that is movable according to the movement of the light emitting means.

  Further, the light of the light emitting means is light that can be visually recognized by the player through the second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop deploying accessory 712) and the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory 900). It may be. Further, a second light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a light emitting substrate 904 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29) is provided, and the player can visually recognize the light from the second light emitting means through the decorative cover. The second light emitting means may be an immovable means.

  Further, the first portion of the decorative cover (for example, the first portion 902a shown in FIG. 29) is a portion through which the light of the light emitting means can pass, and the first portion of the decorative cover (for example, the first portion 902a). The first portion 902a) shown in FIG. 29 may be a portion through which the light of the second light emitting means can pass. Further, the first portion may be colorless or colored.

  Further, the second portion of the decorative cover (for example, the second portion 902b shown in FIG. 28) is a portion that does not transmit the light of the light emitting means, and the second portion of the decorative cover (for example, FIG. 28). The second portion 902b) may be a portion that does not transmit the light of the second light emitting means. Further, the decorative cover may be movable. Further, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the first mode at the first position, and the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the second mode at the second position, The first aspect and the second aspect may be different or the same.

<Various substrates>
Next, various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Various boards / control boards, drive boards>
FIG. 40A is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 of this example is electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a described with reference to FIG. 5, and a board-to-board (hereinafter, referred to as “BtoB”) connector to the sub-control board 245a. And a motor drive board 245b that has been formed. The connection between the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b is not limited to the connection by the BtoB connector, and may be the connection by a harness or the like.

  The sub-control board 245a is mounted with the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 described with reference to FIG. 6, and in this example, the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 are each configured by a one-chip microcomputer. , Can communicate with each other.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, the motor drive board 245b is mounted with electrical parts for electrically connecting the sub control board 245a to another board, and the motor drive board 245b is mounted on the sub control board 245a. Input of effect control data from the circuit 516 and output of a drive signal (for example, a board surface LED PWM signal described later) for operating a motor or the like that is a drive source of the game board side movable body 444 (for example, the accessory unit 950 or the like). It is possible to

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of two types of substrates, that is, a sub-control substrate 245a on which at least one microcomputer is mounted and a motor drive substrate 245b on which no microcomputer is mounted. When there is a change in the specifications of the game board side movable body (for example, the accessory unit 950), it may be possible to deal with the change of the specifications by replacing only one motor drive board 245b, and the other sub control board 245a. By providing versatility, it may be possible to shorten the development period and reduce the cost.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the sub-control board 245a, a game frame lamp 542, a game board lamp 532, a speaker 120, and a game frame side movable body 442 (for example, glass using a front frame door (glass frame)). Buttons, shield devices (shutters, etc.), second sub-control unit 500, motor drive board 245b, etc. are connected. Further, the motor drive board 245b is connected with a sub-control board 246a, a harness for electrically connecting the motor drive board 245b to another board, and the like.

<Various boards / connections and location>
Next, the connection relationship and arrangement location of various boards provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 40B is a block diagram schematically showing the connection relationship of various boards provided in the pachinko machine 100. In this example, the board peripheral board 672 on which electric components including a switching circuit are mounted is electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub control board 245a (FIG. 43 (a), FIG. (See (a)), and electrically connect the accessory peripheral board 674 on which no electric component is mounted to the board peripheral board 672 (see FIGS. 44 (a) and 45 (a)), and the peripheral area of the accessory. The board 674 is electrically connected to the accessory lighting board 676 on which electric components including power LEDs are mounted (see FIG. 45A).

  FIG. 41 (a) is a view of the game board 200 as seen from the back side, and is a view for explaining the arrangement positions of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 4, a sub-control board case 245 is provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and a sub-control board 245a and a motor drive are provided inside the sub-control board case 245. The substrate 245b is housed. The board indicated by reference numeral 246a in FIG. 41A is a liquid crystal control board constituting the second sub-control unit 500, and the board indicated by reference numeral 678 in FIG. 41A is supplied from the power supply control section 660. It is a sub power supply board that can supply the power to the sub control units such as the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 41B is a diagram showing a part of the game board 200 taken out and viewed from the front side, and is a view for explaining the arrangement location of the board peripheral board 672. In this example, the board surface peripheral board 672 is arranged in the vicinity of the stage 244 of the game board 200, and is electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 41 (a) via a board surface peripheral board connection harness 678 described later. Has been done.

  FIG. 42A is a view seen from the front through a part of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining the arrangement location of the accessory peripheral board 674. In this example, the accessory peripheral board 674 is arranged at the upper left of the game board 200 when viewed from the front, and is electrically connected to the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 41B via a harness (not shown).

  FIG. 42B is a front view showing a part of the drop deploying accessory unit 700, which is a diagram for explaining the location of the accessory lighting board 676. The accessory lighting board 676 of this example is a board that constitutes a part of the drop deploying accessory unit 700, and is a board corresponding to the light emitting board 716 described with reference to FIG. The accessory lighting board 676 (light emitting board 716) is electrically connected to the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 42 (a) via a harness (not shown), and also has a first light emission including a power LED. Means 676a (716a).

<Motor control board>
Next, the motor control board 245b will be described. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a connection relationship between the motor drive board 245b and another board and electric components mounted on the motor drive board 245b.

  The motor drive board 245b includes a BtoB connector 245b1 connectable to the BtoB connector 245a1 of the sub control board 245b, and a connector 245b2 connectable to the connector 678a of the board surface peripheral board connection harness 678 connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. .

  The BtoB connector 245b1 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 80 pins of 80, of which No. The 31st pin is connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal output from the drive circuit 516 mounted on the sub control board 245a. The connector 245b2 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal lines of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 43B, the B.B connector 245b1 No. No. 31 of the connector 245b2. A first resistor 245b3, an IC 245b4, and a second resistor 245b5 are arranged in series as electrical components between the pins of 26.

<Board surface peripheral board>
Next, the board peripheral board 672 will be described. 44A to 44C are diagrams showing an example of the connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board and electrical components mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672.

  The board peripheral board 672 includes a motor drive board side connector 672a connectable to the connector 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 and a accessory peripheral board side connectable to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674. And a connector 672b.

  The motor drive board side connector 672a is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal lines of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678. Moreover, the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal of the harness (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 44 (b), the motor drive board side connector 672a of No. No. 26 of the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b. A first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e formed of an N-channel MOS FET, and a third resistor 672f are provided as electrical components between the 26 pins.

  The first resistor 672c is a resistor for stabilizing the operation of the switching circuit 672e. The second resistor 672d is a ground resistor for setting the gate-source voltage of the switching circuit 672e to 0v when the input signal of the switching circuit 672e is opened. The third resistor 672f is a current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676.

  No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a. A board LED PWM signal having a predetermined drive voltage (5 v in this example) is input to the 26 pins, and a voltage that is higher than the predetermined voltage (the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 872c and that allows a sufficient drain current to flow). , 1.2 v) is applied, the switching circuit 672e is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) is configured to light up.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed for turning on / off the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is higher than that in the case where other switching elements are applied. In addition to being able to speed up, there are cases where heat dissipation can be improved.

  Although the N-channel MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit 672e in this example, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used.

  Further, the third resistor 672f is applied as the current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676, as shown in FIG. In addition, two third resistors 672f and 672g connected in series may be applied as the current setting resistors.

<Accessory peripheral board>
Next, the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. 45A is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 and another board, and FIG. 45B is mounted on the accessory lighting board 676. It is the figure which showed an example of the electric component.

  The accessory peripheral board 674 is connectable to a board peripheral board side connector 674a connectable to a connector of a harness (not shown) connected to the board peripheral board 672 and a connector of a harness 680 connected to the accessory lighting board 676. And a connector board 674b on the accessory board.

  The board side peripheral board side connector 674a is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. Further, the accessory-side illumination board side connector 674b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 22 pins of No. 22, of which No. The pins of No. 17 are No. 17 of the illumination board 676 on the accessory. It is connected to the electrical components mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 through the 17 pins.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 45B, the connector No. 674b of the accessory illumination board side 674b. A first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) are provided as electrical components between the 17 pin and the power source (7v power source in this example). There is.

  In this example, a plurality of resistors (first resistor 245b3 and second resistor 245b3 in this example) arranged in series between the sub-control board 245a and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example). 245b5, the first resistance 676b) total resistance value of 15 ohms, the current passing through the first resistance 676b is set to about 270 milliamperes, the brightness of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, power LED). (Light intensity) is increased.

<Variations of electrical components mounted on various boards>
Next, modified examples of electric components mounted on various substrates will be described.

<Modification / Modification 1 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of electric components mounted on various substrates. In the accessory lighting board 676 shown in Fig. 45 (b), the accessory lighting board side connector 674b to which the board LED PWM signal is input. Although the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are provided as electrical parts between the 17 pin and the 7v power source, as shown in FIG. A second resistor 676c is further arranged in series between the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED), and this accessory lighting substrate 676 and the board surface peripheral substrate shown in FIG. 44 (b). 672 may be combined.

  According to this example, three resistors (the third resistor 672f of the board peripheral board 672, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676, and the drain of the switching circuit 672e of the board peripheral board 672 and the 7v power supply are provided. The second resistor 676c) is arranged in series.

<Modification / Modification 2 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of electric components mounted on various substrates. In the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 44C, the No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a to which the board LED PWM signal is input. No. 26 of the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b from which the board surface LED PWM signal is output. A first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e, a third resistor 672f, and a fourth resistor 672g are arranged as electrical parts between the pins of 26 and the board peripheral substrate. 672 and the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 46A may be combined.

  According to this example, four resistors (the third resistor 672f and the fourth resistor 672g of the board peripheral board 672, and the accessory lighting board 676) are provided between the drain of the switching circuit 672e of the board peripheral board 672 and the 7v power supply. The first resistor 676b and the second resistor 676c) are arranged in series.

<Modification / Modification 3 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 47A is a diagram showing Modification Example 3 of the electric components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory-side illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 47A, the connector-side illumination board side connector 674b to which the board surface LED PWM signal is input is No. Two sets of a first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in parallel as electrical parts between the 17 pin and the 7v power source. The board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 44 (b) may be combined.

  According to this example, a plurality of (two in this example) light emitting means are arranged on the accessory lighting board 676, and the brightness (light amount) of each light emitting means can be set to be substantially the same. . In this example, two sets of the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in parallel, but two or more sets may be arranged in parallel. A plurality of combinations of the resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) may be arranged in series.

<Modification / Modification 4 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 47B is a diagram showing Modification Example 4 of the electric components mounted on various boards. As in the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 47 (b), the accessory lighting board No. 674 b of the accessory lighting board side connector 674 b to which the board LED PWM signal is input. A combination of a first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED) as electric parts between the 17 pin and the 7v power source, a first resistor 676b, a second resistor 676c and a first light emitting means. A combination with 676a (power LED) may be arranged in parallel, and the accessory lighting board 676 and the board surface peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 44B may be combined.

  According to this example, a plurality of (two in this example) light emitting means are arranged on the accessory lighting board 676, and the brightness (light amount) of each light emitting means can be made different.

<Modification / Modification 5 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a modified example 5 of electric components mounted on various substrates. Like the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 48 (a), the accessory lighting board connector 674b to which the board LED PWM signal is input is No. Between the 17 pin and the 7v power source, only the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is provided as an electric component, and the first resistor 674a is provided on the signal line of the board LED PWM signal on the accessory peripheral board 674. It is also possible to dispose them and combine the above-described accessory lighting board 676 and accessory peripheral board 674 with the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG.

  According to this example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) and the first resistor 674a which is one of the current setting resistors of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged on different substrates. In some cases, the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Further, by disposing the electric components on a plurality of substrates in a distributed manner, it may be possible to avoid a situation where heat is concentrated on a specific substrate.

<Modification / Modification 6 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a modified example 6 of the electric components mounted on various boards. Like the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 48 (b), the third resistor 672f is eliminated from the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 44 (b), and the board LED PWM signal on the signal board peripheral board 674 is provided on the signal line. The first resistor 674a may be provided, and the board peripheral board 672 and accessory peripheral board 674 may be combined with the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 45B.

  According to this example, the first resistor 674a, which is one of the current setting resistors of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED), and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are switched on / off. In some cases, the switching circuit 672e and the switching circuit 672e can be provided on different substrates, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Further, by disposing the electric components on a plurality of substrates in a distributed manner, it may be possible to avoid a situation where heat is concentrated on a specific substrate.

<Modification / Modification 7 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 49 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example 7 of electric components mounted on various substrates. Like the accessory-side illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 49A, the connector-side illumination board-side connector 674b to which the board LED PWM signal is input is No. A first resistor 676b having a resistance value A, a second resistor 676c having a resistance value A, and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged in series as electrical components between the pin 17 and the 7v power source. Alternatively, instead of the first resistor 676b having the resistance value A and the second resistor 676c having the resistance value A, a third resistor 676d having a resistance value B different from the resistance value A may be provided. In this case, if the resistance value B is twice the resistance value A, the brightness (light amount) of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) can be made the same, but the resistance value B is It may be a value other than.

  According to this example, the number of electric components can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced in some cases. In addition, by making the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 different from the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the board peripheral board 672, the current value flowing to the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is flexible. In some cases, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, such as changing to.

<Modification / Modification 8 of electrical components mounted on various substrates>
FIG. 49 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example 8 of electric components mounted on various substrates. As in the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 49 (b), the accessory lighting board No. 674b of the accessory lighting board connector 674b to which the board surface LED PWM signal is input. Between the 17th pin and the 7v power source, there are provided as electrical parts a third resistor 676d having a resistance value C, a fourth resistor 676e having a resistance value C different from the resistance value B, and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED). ) May be arranged in series.

  According to this example, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design by making the resistance values of the plurality of resistors mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 different. In addition, by making the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 different from the resistance value of the resistor mounted on the board peripheral board 672, the current value flowing to the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is flexible. In some cases, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, such as changing to.

<Variation of connection relation of various boards>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection relationship of various boards. As shown in FIG. 50, the first board (for example, the board peripheral board 672) and the second board (for example, the accessory lighting board 676) may be electrically connected by a BtoB connector.

  In addition, when the surface area of the first substrate is larger than the surface area of the second substrate, the number of electrical components (for example, resistors) mounted on the first substrate is set to the electrical components mounted on the second substrate ( For example, it may be larger than the number of resistors, or conversely, may be smaller. Further, when the surface area of the first substrate is larger than the surface area of the second substrate, a plurality of electrical components mounted on the first substrate are arranged in parallel and a plurality of electrical components mounted on the second substrate. May be arranged in series, or the number of electric components arranged in parallel on the first substrate may be larger than the number of electric components arranged in parallel on the second substrate.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to the slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 2000 as seen from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51 includes a main body 2001 and a front door 2002 attached to the front of the main body 2001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 2001. Inside the center of the main body 2001, three reels (left reel 2010, middle reel 2011, right reel 2012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and are configured to be rotatable inside the slot machine 2000. Has been done. These reels 2010 to 2012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 2000, each pattern is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are formed by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame member. The symbols on the reels 2010 to 2012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 2013 by the player, and three symbols are displayed in total, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 2010 to 2012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 2010 to 2012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, the slot machine 2000 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 2000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 2013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 2010 to 2012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting section and a light receiving section is provided near each of the reels 2010 to 2012 inside the slot machine 2000. The light projecting section and the light receiving section of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 2010 to 2012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 2020 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 2014 that becomes valid. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 2014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three bets are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. Note that the number of pay lines 2014 is not limited to five lines, and, for example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

  The notification lamp 2023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 2024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 2022 informs the player that the current game is re-playable (no need to insert medals) when the player has won a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 2028 is a production lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 2000. In the slot machine 2000, each time the medal insertion button 2030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins. When the medal insertion button 2031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 2032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 2032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 2029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start is notified that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 2021 is turned on.

  The medal insertion slot 2041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 2041. Is. The stored number display 2025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000. The game information display device 2026 is a display device for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display device 2027 is a display device for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, the stored number display 2025, the game information display 2026, and the payout number display 2027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 2035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 2010 to 2012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 2041 or the medal insertion buttons 2030 to 2032 are operated and the start lever 2035 is operated, the reels 2010 to 2012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 2035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 2036 is provided with stop buttons 2037 to 2039. The stop buttons 2037 to 2039 are button switches for individually stopping the reels 2010 to 2012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 2035, and are associated with the reels 2010 to 2012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 2037 to 2039, and when the stop buttons 2037 to 2039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 2033 is a button for pressing and removing the inserted medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The settlement button 2034 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 2000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 2055. The door key hole 2040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 2002 of the slot machine 2000 is inserted. The medal payout port 2055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  A chance button 2100 is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 2032. The chance button 2100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 2010 to 2012, or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 2057. The chance button 2100 can take a plurality of states (for example, a light emitting state, a rotating state, a vibrating state, or a combination thereof) as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the operation of the chance button 2100 is effective. The state may be changeable during the period.

  The information display button unit 2050 is provided with an information display button 2046. The information display button 2046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting the game history information of the individual player), and includes a plurality of buttons. The configuration and operation of the information display button 2046 will be described later.

  Below the stop button unit 2036, a title panel 2062 for displaying a model name and pasting various certificate sheets is provided, and a title panel lamp 2064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 2062. A medal payout port 2055 and a medal tray 2061 are provided below the title panel 2062.

  The sound hole 2081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 2000 to the outside. The side lamps 2044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 2002 are decorative lamps for raising the game. A rendering device 2060 is provided above the front door 2002, and a sound hole 2043 is provided above the rendering device 2060. The rendering device 2060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 2063 composed of two right shutters 2063a and a left shutter 2063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 2063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 2063a and the left shutter 2063b open horizontally outside in front of the liquid crystal display device 2057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 2057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 2000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

  It should be noted that it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may look odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.

  52A is an external perspective view of the information display button 2046, and FIG. 52B is a top view of the information display button 2046. As shown in FIG. 52, the information display button 2046 includes a plurality of buttons on the substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 2050. That is, the information display button 2046 is a general term for a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 2050, and more specifically, a determination (call) button 2046O provided in substantially the center of the information display button unit 2050 and a determination ( An upper selection button 2046U, a lower selection button 2046D, a left selection button 2046L and a right selection button 2046R which are provided separately on the left side of the call button 2046O and a cancel provided on the right side of the decision (call) button 2046O. And a button 2046C.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51) according to this example has a plurality of substrates (for example, sub-control shown in FIG. 40B). The board 245a, the motor drive board 245b, the board surface peripheral board 672, the accessory peripheral board 674, the accessory illumination board 676), and the effect movable body (for example, the drop development accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20). In the gaming table, one of the plurality of boards is a first board (for example, a board surface peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 46A), and one of the plurality of boards is It is a second substrate (for example, the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A), the second substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the first substrate, and The substrate is a first resistor (for example, the board shown in FIG. 46 (a)). The third resistor 672f of the peripheral substrate 672 is provided, and the second substrate is the second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A). 46 is a substrate provided with, the movable movable body is provided with an electric component (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A). A body, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the electrical component, the second The resistor is a game machine characterized by being a resistor connected in series with the electric component.

  According to the game table according to the present example, by distributing the heat generated by the resistance to the plurality of substrates, it may be possible to prevent problems caused by heat and to perform stable game control. In addition, it may be possible to reduce the size of each resistance component and increase the degree of freedom in designing the layout of each board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand having a characteristic of the movable body for performance.

  In addition, the first substrate is a substrate provided at a position different from the performance movable body, the second substrate is a substrate provided on the performance movable body, the electrical component Is provided on the second board, and the second board is formed by connecting the first board and the connector (for example, the connectors 678a and 678b of the board peripheral board connecting harness 678 shown in FIG. 43A). It may be a connected board.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the side of the production movable body. In addition, it may be possible to reduce the weight of the board on the movable body side for performance. In addition, the influence of static electricity generated at the time of connector connection may be mitigated by the resistance provided on each board.

  Further, the first substrate is a substrate provided with a third resistor (for example, the first resistor 672c of the board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 46A), and the third resistor is the third resistor. A resistor connected in series with one resistor, the third resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, and the third resistor is connected in series with the electrical component. May be a resistance.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the effecting movable body side by providing a plurality of resistors on the first substrate side.

  Further, the first substrate may be a substrate provided with a switching circuit (for example, the switching circuit 672e (MOS FET) of the board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 46A).

With such a configuration, the first resistor (including the third resistor) may be able to alleviate the influence on the switching circuit portion when static electricity is generated.

  Further, a relay board (for example, a accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 45A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board via the relay board. The relay board may be a board not provided with a resistor.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first substrate and the second substrate by interposing the relay substrate. In addition, it may be possible to prevent static electricity from occurring on the first board side or the second board side by finally connecting the connector on the relay board side.

  The first board and / or the second board may be a board connected to the relay board by a connector. Further, the relay board may be a board provided with an electric component other than a resistor, or a board provided only with a connector for electrically connecting to the first board and the second board. May be

  The resistance value of the second resistor may be the same as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  With such a configuration, when the first substrate and the second substrate have the same number of resistors, the heat generation amount may be dispersed evenly in some cases. Further, it may be possible to prevent the resistance component mounted on one of the first substrate and the second substrate from becoming large.

  Further, the electric component may be a power LED. With such a configuration, heat is generated by the power LED on the side of the production movable body, but it may be possible to effectively reduce heat generation by providing some resistance on the first substrate.

  The electric component is a power LED, and the power LED is invisible to the player in the state before the performance movable body is moved. When the performance movable body is moved, the power LED is not visible. The power LED may be visible to the player. With such a configuration, it may be possible to perform heat dissipation in association with the operation of the movable body.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51) according to this example has a plurality of substrates (for example, a sub control substrate 245a and a motor shown in FIG. 40B). The drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, the accessory peripheral board 674, and the accessory illumination board 676, and the first electric component (for example, the switching circuit 672e (MOS FET shown in FIG. 46A) of the board peripheral board 672 (MOS FET). )), A second electric component (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A), and the second electric component for driving. A game table provided with a drive circuit (for example, the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 40A, the resistor and the switching circuit shown in FIG. 46A), which is one of the plurality of substrates. One is a first substrate (for example, a board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 46A), and one of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, FIG. 46A). Illustrated on the accessory lighting board 676), the second board is connected to the first board by a connector (for example, connectors 678a and 678b of a board surface peripheral board connection harness 678 shown in FIG. 43A). The drive circuit is a circuit provided with a plurality of resistors, and one of the plurality of resistors is a first resistor (for example, a board surface peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 46A). Third resistor 672f), and one of the plurality of resistors is a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A), The first substrate is a substrate provided with the first resistor, The second substrate is a substrate provided with the second resistor, the first substrate is a substrate provided with the first electrical component, the second substrate is the second A game table characterized in that it is a board provided with the second electric component.

  According to the game table according to the present example, the effect of static electricity generated when the connector is connected may be mitigated by the resistance provided on each board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand having a characteristic in the drive circuit of the movable body for performance.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51) according to this example has a plurality of substrates (for example, a sub control substrate 245a and a motor shown in FIG. 40B). Drive board 245b, board peripheral board 672, accessory peripheral board 674, accessory lighting board 676), first electric component (for example, IC 245b4 of motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 43A), second Electric components (for example, the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A) and a drive circuit for driving the second electric component (for example, FIG. A basic circuit 402 and a drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 40 (a), a resistor, an IC, and a switching circuit shown in FIG. 43 (b) and FIG. 46 (a), and a gaming table of the plurality of boards. One of them Is a first substrate (for example, the motor drive substrate 245b shown in FIG. 43A), and one of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, the substrate shown in FIG. 46A). A lighting substrate 676), one of the plurality of substrates is a third substrate (for example, the sub-control substrate 245a shown in FIG. 43A), and the second substrate is the above-mentioned substrate. A substrate connected to the first substrate by a connector, the third substrate is a substrate connected to the first substrate by a BtoB connector, and the first substrate and the third substrate are The drive circuit is housed in one board case (for example, the sub-control board case 245 shown in FIG. 5), and the drive circuit is a circuit provided with a plurality of resistors. Resistance (for example, motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 43 (b)) A first resistor 245b3), and one of the plurality of resistors is a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A). One substrate of the one substrate and the third substrate is a substrate provided with the first resistor, the other substrate of the first substrate and the third substrate is the A substrate provided with a first electrical component, the second substrate is a substrate provided with the second resistor, the second substrate is provided with the second electrical component It is a game board characterized by being a substrate.

  According to the game table according to the present example, the effect of static electricity generated when the connector is connected may be mitigated by the resistance provided on each board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand having a characteristic in the drive circuit of the movable body for performance.

  It should be noted that a production movable body (for example, a drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20) is provided, and the first substrate is a substrate provided at a position different from that of the production movable body. The substrate may be a substrate provided on the effecting movable body, and the second electric component may be provided on the second substrate.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the side of the production movable body. In addition, it may be possible to reduce the weight of the board on the movable body side for performance.

  The first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the second resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the electrical component, the second resistor is It may be a resistor connected in series with the electric component.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce heat generation on the effecting movable body side by providing a plurality of resistors on the first substrate side.

  Further, a relay board (for example, a accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 45A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board via the relay board. The relay board may be a board on which a resistor related to the drive circuit is not provided.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first substrate and the second substrate by interposing the relay substrate. In addition, it may be possible to prevent static electricity from occurring on the first board side or the second board side by finally connecting the connector on the relay board side.

  The resistance value of the second resistor may be the same as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  With such a configuration, when the first substrate and the second substrate have the same number of resistors, the heat generation amount may be dispersed evenly in some cases. Further, it may be possible to prevent the resistance component mounted on one of the first substrate and the second substrate from becoming large.

  Further, the number of resistors may be singular or plural for each of the first substrate and the second substrate. Further, the number of resistors may be large on one substrate or may be different. In addition, factors other than heat generation may be taken into consideration as factors that cause the number of resistors to differ, for example, the number may be changed depending on the surface area of the first substrate and the second substrate and the size of the vertical and horizontal dimensions. , And may be determined by the amount of electric components related to other circuits. The first electric component may be an electric component related to a switching circuit, and the second electric component may be a power LED.

  Further, the plurality of resistors may employ the same component, different components, or different resistance values. Generally, the resistance value tends to increase as the resistance value increases, and the resistance component can be appropriately determined depending on the number of resistors and the area of the substrate.

  Further, the electric component according to the present invention can be applied to electric components other than LEDs. Further, the second substrate may be applied not only to the movable body on the game board side but also to the movable body on the game frame side or the illumination board, or one of the first substrate and the second substrate. May be provided on the game board side, and the other substrate may be provided on the frame side.

  Further, the relay board according to the present invention may be provided with a resistor. Further, the switching circuit and the resistor may be provided on another substrate, or the LED (electrical component) and the resistor may be provided on another substrate. In addition, a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs and resistors are provided in parallel may be used, or electric components and resistors may be connected in parallel.

  In addition, the first substrate and the second substrate may be connected by a BtoB connector, or the second substrate may have a plurality of resistors. Further, at least one substrate may be housed in the substrate case. Moreover, the number of electric components may be plural, and for example, a configuration may be such that plural LEDs are connected in parallel.

  Further, the electric component according to the present invention may be a drive source of a performance movable body such as a solenoid or a motor. Further, the electrical connection between the boards may be a floating connector, for example, a relay board that relays the first board on the game board side and the second board on the frame side (front frame or game board ) And the connector connection portion provided on the relay substrate and the other floating connector. In addition, the boards may be electrically connected to each other with a flexible harness.

  Further, the electric component may be mounted on only one side of the board, or may be mounted on both sides of the board. Further, only the power LED in the embodiment may be mounted on the surface on the player side, and the resistor and the like may be mounted on the surface on the opposite side. Further, in the present embodiment, the power LED of the production movable body is visible during operation, but the power LED itself may not be visible due to a lens or the like. Further, the configuration may be such that it can be visually recognized by the player even when the operation of the production movable body is not performed.

  Further, the second substrate does not have to be configured to move in relation to the operation of the production movable body. For example, only the production movable body (not including the second substrate) operates and is related to the operation. The power LED on the second substrate may emit light in this state. According to this configuration, the weight of the production movable body may be reduced in some cases.

  If the first substrate and the second substrate are not housed in the substrate case, it may be possible to efficiently radiate heat from the substrate and the electric components.

<Other Embodiments>
Next, a game table according to another embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 53 to 95 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are not used in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 53 to 95 are given priority. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 53. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is provided for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”), and is provided with a door side ball passage unit for guiding the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball firing handle 134 that shoots the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the presentation mode of the various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setter (for example, a player), and has a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, and a lower position below the confirm button. A down button located at, a right button located to the right of the enter button, a left button located to the left of the enter button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. There is. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 56) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. Note that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may be configured to have the same function as the chance button 136 described above.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Back of Pachinko machine>
FIG. 54 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 53 as viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

<Front of game board>
FIG. 55 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. The special symbol display device wins the special symbol variation game and the special symbol display device stops the big hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It has a built-in counter) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. , A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high accuracy medium). A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamps 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. Is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling the.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137. An operation unit sensor 427 that detects an operation, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426, and the operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Workout of VRAM 436 by reading stored image data etc. It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a gaming circuit lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming frame lamp driving for controlling the gaming frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 57 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), 10 kinds of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing F" and "special drawing a" to "special drawing d" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. The white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R big jack symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  “Special drawing a” is a 16R special jackpot design and “Special drawing b” is an 8R special jackpot design, both of which are in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. Also, "special map c" is a 8R big hit symbol, which is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, "special map C" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, which is a special map high probability general figure high probability state. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R. "Special map E" is a small hit symbol, and is a special map low probability general pattern low probability state. In addition, "special drawing F" and "special drawing d" are outlying symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched.

  For example, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R big hit are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative symbols are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is displayed. On the other hand, when notifying that the "special drawing F" and the "special drawing d" are out of alignment, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 7B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 57 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically set (to prevent the processing abnormality from being detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 56 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage.

  That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning openings 226, 234 or the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value is obtained as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 2 random number value. And the value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value is acquired as the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON / OFF driving control of the 7-segment LED is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 57 (c)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 57 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, special figure prefetching processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (details will be described later). Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 performs lighting / lighting-off drive control of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special symbol display device 214, and then determines the special symbol 2 using the second special symbol display device 214. Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 hours are set in the hour saving frequency storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the hour saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data, the value of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special figure related lottery process, the timer number Including the information indicating (special figure change time), in the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., the winning effect command and the end effect start In the case of a command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure probability related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. The information indicating the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, and the like is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main controller.

<Special map prefetching process>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit determination process, and the pre-determination result (special The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section (see FIGS. 61A to 61C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are special figures. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are shown. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S251). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S252, and if it is determined that the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the win / fail judgment processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S253 subsequent to step S252, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. When it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and when it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. When it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S256, and when it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S258. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S256, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S257 following step S256, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S258, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric power support. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the start information of the special figure 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-reading result. Further, even if the area for storing the starting information and the pre-reading result is not provided for each special figure, the starting information and the pre-reading result of each special figure may be stored in one starting information and pre-reading result storage section. good.

<Prefetch result information>
FIG. 61 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 11A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 4A, the prefetching result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 4A, "special figure E" (out of order) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 1", and "special figure E" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 2". "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing D" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 2B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 7B, the special-reading 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in the figure (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing d" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in the same figure (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 7C shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 3C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>
Next, the special figure 1 related lottery process in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In addition, this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process.

  In step S281, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game or the big hit game is in progress, and if the result is satisfied, the process is ended. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension of the special figure 1 variation game. If there is no suspension of the special figure 1 variation game, the process ends. If there is a suspension, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag is ON or OFF. If the special figure probability variation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for win / fail judgment [Special figure 1 ] Lottery data is used to make a jackpot judgment (judgment of a big hit) and a small hit (judgment of a small hit). The big hit judgment (judgment judgment of big hit) and the small hit judgment (judgment judgment of small hit) are performed using the lottery data of the judgment low probability table [Tokuzu 1].

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. If yes, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, a symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot win / fail judgment result and the symbol random value, and a jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, in the case of Toku-zu 1, one of Toku-zu A to Toku-zu D, Toku-zu 2 In the case of, the special figure a to special figure c) is determined, and then the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination is a small hit. If yes, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S289, a symbol lottery is performed based on the above-described winning / disapproving result of the small hit and the random number of the symbol, and the small hit symbol (in the present embodiment, the special symbol E in the case of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is the small hit symbol). After determining “none”, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, after the symbol lottery is performed based on the symbol random number value and the outlying symbols (in the present embodiment, the special figure F in the case of special figure 1 and the special figure d in the case of special figure 2) are determined, It proceeds to step S291. In step S291, the variation type lottery is performed based on the type of special figure stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the current (when variation starts in special figure 2) pending storage number, and the variation pattern and special figure variation time are determined. To do.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related lottery processing, the lottery processing regarding special figure 2 is performed, but in the special figure 1 related lottery processing shown in FIG. The table [* 1] is replaced with a high probability table [* 2] for judgment of success / failure, and the low probability table [* 1] for judgment of success / failure is changed to a low probability table [* 2] for judgment of success / failure. Since the process is the same as the process without determination, the description thereof is omitted.

<Data table of main controller>
Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Validity judgment table>
The probability determination low probability table [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 63 (a) is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the low special figure probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of numerical value and the success / failure result of special figure 1. Further, the high probability table for winning / disapproval determination [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 7B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the high probability state of special figure. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a random number of winning, and the winning / failing result of Toku-zu 1.

  When the special-drawing probability is in the special-drawing low-probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for winning / losing judgment [Special-drawing 1], and based on the obtained special-drawing random number value, Judgment as to whether the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), or the non-winning (off) is decided (big hit judgment or small hit judgment of special figure 1) ) Is performed, and when the special map 1 is in the high probability state of special map, the high probability table for win / fail judgment [Special figure 1] is referred to, and the special random number value (details described later) is used to determine the special value. The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value obtained is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variation game is won (big hit) and the big hit provided in the RAM 308. Information that indicates a big hit is set in the flag storage area (hereinafter, setting big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as "turning the big hit flag on").

  Further, in the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value obtained is 10220 to 10383, it is determined to be the winning (small hit) of the special figure 1 variation game and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that a small hit will be set in the small hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "turning the small hit flag on").

  In addition, in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or 10384 to 65535, it is determined to be out of the special figure 1 variation game, and Set information indicating that there is a deviation in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag (hereinafter, setting deviation information in the storage area for the big hit flag is referred to as "setting the big hit flag off", Setting deviation information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as "setting the small hit flag off".

  The probability determination low probability table [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 6C is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the low special figure probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of numerical value, and the success / failure result of Toku-zu 2. Further, the high probability table for winning / discarding judgment [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 6D is an example of a table used for the right / wrong decision of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the high probability state of special figure. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a winning random value, and the winning-and-winning result of special figure 2.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for winning / losing judgment [Special figure 2] when the special figure probability is in the low special figure probability state, and acquires the special figure winning random value (details will be described later). Based on), it is determined whether the special game 2 variation game is won (big hit) or unwinned (missed) (large hit judgment of special map 2). In this case, the jackpot determination of special figure 2 is performed on the basis of the obtained special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) by referring to the high probability table for special decision [special figure 2]. In addition, in the special figure 2 variation game, it is configured so that the small hit is not won.

<Table for determining special maps>
64 (a) and 64 (b), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] and the special figure determination table [special figure 2] are the above-mentioned big hit flag and small hit flag (result determination result), and a symbol. It is the data table which memorize | stored the random number value and the kind of special figure stop symbols by the 1st, 2nd special figure display devices 212 and 214 in association.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses this special figure determination table, the above-described big hit determination result (big hit flag value), small hit determination result (small hit flag value), and the obtained symbol random value. Based on this, special symbol drawing lottery for determining the type of special symbol stop symbol is performed. If the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random value, and if the small hit flag is on, the small hit symbol generated from the above special symbol winning random number value Use the random number value as the pattern random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are out), use the obtained out-of-use symbol random value as the pattern random value. To do.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variation game, refer to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] of the same figure (a), when the big hit flag is on (when the hit determination result is a big hit), When the acquired symbol random number value is 0 to 24, the special symbol A has a probability of 25/100, and when the acquired symbol random number value is 25 to 49, the special symbol B has a probability of 25 / Is 50 to 54, the special figure C is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 55 to 99, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 45/100. In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the result of the hit determination is small hit), the special figure E (small hit) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol random value, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are selected. In the case of OFF (when the hit determination result is off), the special figure F (off) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the symbol random value.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 variation game, when the big hit flag is on (when the hit / miss judgment result is a big hit), the special figure a has a probability of 70/100 when the obtained random number of symbols is 0-69. When the acquired symbol random value is 70 to 74, the special symbol b is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 75 to 99, the special symbol c is selected with a probability of 25/100. Also, in the special figure 2 variation game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the hit / miss judgment result is off), the special figure d (off) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the symbol random number value. To do. In the special figure 2 variation game, unlike the special figure 1 variation game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.

<Variable display time determination table>
FIG. 65 is an example of a special figure 1 variation display time determination table used to determine the variation time of special figure 1, and FIG. 66 is a special figure 2 variation used to determine the variation time of special figure 2. It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the types of the special figure stop symbols described above, the change time of the special figure, the effect performed by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure change, and the random number values are stored in association with each other. Is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a variation pattern lottery that determines the variation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the variation display time determination table and the acquired random number value.

  For example, when determining the variation time of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 65 is referred to, and the type of the special figure stop symbol is the special figure A or the special figure B, and the acquired disorder is acquired. When the range of numerical values is 1001 to 20000, 45,000 ms is selected as the variable time, and the super reach A hit is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the case of determining the variation time of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. When the range of numerical values is 20001 to 65535, 65,000 ms is selected as the variation time, and the super reach B hit is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 67. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S311, if it is detected that the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation part 137 is pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the operation means being pressed. In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 68. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

<Operation means image display processing>
Next, the operation means image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub-control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation means image display processing.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137) has come. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the step It proceeds to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 and the setting operation section 137, and may be, for example, a ball firing handle 134 or the like as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the “acceptance period of the operation means” is a period in which when the operation of the operation means is detected, the operation is determined to be valid and the process corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  In addition, the condition for determining that "the start timing of the acceptance period of the operating means has arrived" is not particularly limited, but for example, in the case of winning the big hit or the small hit of the special figure variation game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When the payout of the ball is made, the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state advantageous to the player (or the third game state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game. When the special figure variation game is played a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined lottery is won, and the like.

  In step S1002, effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406 in order to display the operation means image (details will be described later, for example, an image simulating the chance button 136) on the decorative pattern display device 208. Etc., and the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image which also serves as an operation means image described later and an elapsed time notification image accompanied by the display of the operation means image. In order to display the same) on the decorative pattern display device 208, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. To end the processing.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image (an operation means image that allows the operator to know that some operation is required for the operation means. For example, a progress information notification image simulating the operation means) is displayed, Then, the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. Further, an elapsed time notification image that does not include information related to the operation means (an elapsed time notification image that does not indicate that the operation means needs to be operated, for example, an elapsed time notification image that includes only a number indicating the elapsed time) is displayed. If so, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406 or the like, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Note that, in the present embodiment, an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a scale on a meter) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in each of the examples described later, but the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be. If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the operation means image is being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. If it is not being displayed, the process is ended, and if it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 when the operation means image is an image imitating the chance button 136) has been accepted, and the operation has been accepted. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1007, and when the operation is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the display end timing of the operation means image has come, and if it is, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if it is not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that “the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived” is not particularly limited, but for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means in step S1002, the game state is different. The case where it shifts to a game state etc. is mentioned.

  In step S1007, the operation means image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including the operation means image also serving as the elapsed time notification image and the operation means image accompanied by the display of the elapsed time notification image. The same applies hereinafter) is deleted. The display of the operation means image ends. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operating means matches a predetermined time (T seconds), and if so, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1010. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image when the elapsed time of the operation means reception period coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the effect data corresponding to the specific image is changed. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue displaying the operation means image, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the image data update processing is performed. I do.

  For example, an operation device image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image (an operation device image that allows the user to grasp the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operating device. For example, a display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) according to the elapsed time. If the operation means image) in which the operation means image is changed is displayed, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed, When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation means image that does not include information about the elapsed time (an operation means image in which the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation means cannot be grasped. When the operation means image including only the character information representing the name (for example, chance button) is displayed, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406. Is performed and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated.

<Preliminary lottery processing>
Next, the advance notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub-control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the advance notice lottery process.

  In step S1101, the value of the big hit flag included in the command (for example, a pattern variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and if the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won and step S1102. When the value of the big hit flag is off, it is determined that the big hit is not won, and the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1102, after advance notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to "big hit (15R system)", "big hit (sudden change in probability)", or "big hit (probability change in latency)" in the advance notice lottery table described later, step S1106. Proceed to.

  In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command (for example, the pattern variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and when the value of the small hit flag is ON, it is determined that the small hit is won. Then, the process advances to step S1104, and if the value of the small hit flag is off, it is determined that the small hit is not won and the process advances to step S1105. In step S1104, the advance notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the “small hit” in the advance notice lottery table described later, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. Further, in step S1105, the advance notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to “out” of the advance notice lottery table, which will be described later, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 including the information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery, and then the process ends.

<Data table of first sub-control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73.

<Preliminary lottery table>
The advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 71 is an example of a table used for advance notice lottery performed in the advance notice lottery process, and includes the symbol type of the special map (result of success or failure), the variation time of the special map, the notice table number, and the lottery value. It is the table which linked | related and memorized the numerical range.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the jackpot flag is on, the item of “symbol type” in the advance notice lottery table is “big hit (15R system)”, “big hit (sudden change)”, or “big hit ( Based on the obtained random number for advance notice lottery, a lottery (preliminary lottery) is performed based on the obtained random number for advance notice lottery.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on, the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, and the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 15000 ms, the item of "symbol type" in the notice lottery table is "big hit (15R System) ”and“ variable time ”items refer to the lottery value corresponding to“ 15000 ms ”. When the obtained random number for advance notice lottery is 0 to 9, the advance notice table 2 is selected, and the obtained advance notice lottery random number is selected. When the numerical value is 10 to 29, the advance notice table 3 is selected, when the obtained random number for advance notice lottery is 30 to 94, the advance notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained random number for advance notice lottery is 95 to 99. Select the notice table 5.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (disappeared) and the variation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is set regardless of the notice lottery random number value. select. Further, the notice table 5 is selected because the jackpot flag is on, and the symbol type of the special diagram 1 is the special symbol A or the special symbol B (or the symbol type of the special symbol 2 is the special symbol a to the special symbol c). Only in case. In addition, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of special map 1 is special drawing D (probability of latent change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set to be the same. In this embodiment, the small lottery table is used for the preliminary lottery, but the small lottery table may be used for the preliminary lottery.

<Notice table>
The notice table shown in FIG. 72A is an example of the notice table 4 of the notice tables described above, and is a table in which the notice mode and the numerical range of the lottery value are stored in association with each other.

  When the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. Advance notice lottery will be held. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, "button press (once) advance notice" is selected to determine the acquired mode, and when the acquired random value is 10 to 24, "button press (twice) ) "Advance notice" is selected, "Conversation notice" is selected when the acquired random number value is 25 to 39, "Open door notice" is selected when the acquired random number value is 40 to 59, and the acquired random number is selected. When the numerical value is 60-74, select "Treasure box selection notice", when the obtained random number is 75-89, select "Step-up notice", when the obtained random value is 90-99, select "Title" Select "Notice".

  72 (b) to 72 (d) and FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (b) are subdivisions of the content of "Open the door notice", for example, the first notice. When “Notice to open door” is selected in the mode lottery, the table corresponding to “Notice to open door” shown in FIG. A second preliminary announcement lottery will be made. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, the table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 72C is referred to. Based on the acquired random number value, the third advance notice mode lottery for determining the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

  Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess“ Chance! ”” Is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess“ Chance! ”Shown in FIG. 72D is referred to and acquired. The fourth advance notice mode lottery for determining the next advance notice mode is performed based on the random number. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach may ”” is selected, the table corresponding to “signboard“ reach may ”” shown in FIG. 73A is referred to and acquired. The fifth advance notice mode lottery for determining the next advance notice mode is performed based on the random number value. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess's fan (Hanamaru)” is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess's fan (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. 73B is displayed. With reference to the acquired random number value, the sixth advance notice mode lottery for determining the next advance notice mode is performed.

<Example 1 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a first embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the first embodiment in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is a decorative design. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7A, the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the operation of the chance button 136 is performed twice. In order to urge the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the character information "Press chance button!" Is displayed in the lower center part. are doing.

  A first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7A, the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. , Is displayed below the second operation means image BG2.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7B, a predetermined time (two seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 4A, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The timing is shown. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 2 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 4 seconds).

  Further, at this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, it is adjusted to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. The scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually decreasing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds). . Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. From this, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 2 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 4 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9D shows the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 5 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 1 second). Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. From this, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 3 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 3 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 continues to be displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Have been erased. Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). There is. In addition, in this example, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing of (f) in the figure, but the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 7A is set as the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136, and 2 seconds after that, the timing shown in FIG. The timing shown in () is the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the second operation of the chance button 136, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, FIG. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (for example, 6 seconds) and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (for example, 8 seconds). May be That is, the start timings of the acceptance periods for the N-th (N is a positive integer) operation of the operating means may be set to the same timing (the same applies to other embodiments).

  In addition, when the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (for example, 6 seconds) and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (for example, 8 seconds) are the same timing. However, when the reception times are different, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be different. In this example, after 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation reception, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed. The elapsed time may be notified.

<Example 2 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the second embodiment in time series. Since the displays shown in FIGS. 74A to 74F are the same as the display examples shown in FIGS. 74A to 74F, the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 75 (g) is in the state shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. , The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the decorative symbol display device is replaced with the image display. A character image (lord) is displayed in the left display area of 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Since the time has elapsed, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). The image to be displayed is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed. Have been erased. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 7 (j), the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed. A character image (grandpa) may be displayed instead of the elapsed time notification image TG2. When the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, (g) in the same figure) while the chance button 136 is operated for the first time. Further, as shown in (j) of the figure, a character image (grandpa) may be displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the timing at which the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. There is. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Since the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed, the character image (grandpa) is displayed because the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed while the deletion is performed. are doing. When the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, FIG. 9G) in a state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. In addition, as shown in (j) of the same figure, instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2, a character image (lord and grandfather) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the timing immediately after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 have not been performed, The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

  According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Example 3 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a third embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the third embodiment in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied instead of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and is also an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. . With such a configuration, the player's attention can be gathered in the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  It should be noted that in this example, the result of the judgment of success is suggested using the elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this, Alternatively, an elapsed time notification image may be used to indicate the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the result of the success / failure determination may be suggested, or the number of progress information notification images may be three or more. Of course, in this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the hit determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the hit determination by using the progress information notification image, the result of the hit determination may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but it is displayed at another timing. May be started, for example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated (for example, at the timing at which the first or second operation is performed).

  According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Example 4 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a fourth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fourth embodiment in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 10A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. The means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are at the same timing. It is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the acceptance period for the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed below.

  A second elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2. An image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136) is displayed in the second operation means image BG2. It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9B shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds).

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 continues, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds).

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Immediately after (6 seconds) has elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased and the state is continued.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased and the state is continued.

  The figure (e) shows the state shown in the figure (b), that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the display is changed to that image display and the decorative pattern display is performed. A character image (lord) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  16F shows the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. 16E, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. The timing at which the second operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, the display is changed to that image display and the decorative pattern display is performed. In the right display area of the device 208, a character image (grandpa) different from the character image (lord) is displayed. Even when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without performing the second operation of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 9G shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without performing the second operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed. The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

  According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Example 5 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a fifth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fifth embodiment in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied instead of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and is also an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. . With such a configuration, the player's attention can be gathered in the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  It should be noted that in this example, the result of the judgment of success is suggested using the elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this, Alternatively, an elapsed time notification image may be used to indicate the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the result of the success / failure determination may be suggested, or the number of progress information notification images may be three or more. Of course, in this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the hit determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the hit determination by using the progress information notification image, the result of the hit determination may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but it is displayed at another timing. May be started, for example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

  According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Operation means image display embodiment 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a sixth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-mentioned operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that the figure shows the operation means image display of the sixth embodiment in time series.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the notice production by the notice lottery process described above is performed. For example, when the special jackpot is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination, the special symbol stop symbol of the special symbol 1 is determined to be the special symbol A in the special symbol lottery, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 ms in the variation pattern lottery, 1 sub-control unit 400, based on the fact that the value of the big hit flag is ON, the special figure stop symbol is the special figure A, the command including the information that the variation time of the special figure is 45000 ms is received from the main control section 300, The advance notice lottery is performed by using the lottery value corresponding to the variation time of 45000 ms for the "big hit (15R system)" in the advance notice lottery table 71. In this preliminary announcement lottery, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94, the preliminary announcement table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice table 4 shown in FIG. 72 (a), and determines the advance notice mode of the advance notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value in the first advance notice mode lottery. However, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 59, the “advance door open notice” is selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the “door open notice” shown in FIG. 72B, and determines the color of the meter for the second time based on the acquired random number value. For example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50 to 64, “meter color blue → red” will be selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 72 (c), and based on the acquired random value, the character (princess) mode The third advance notice mode lottery for determining is performed, but assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess "chance!" Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed in accordance with the notice effect mode determined by such notice lottery or notice mode lottery.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (a), the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the opportunity button 136. The image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, in order to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136, the character information "Open the door !!" is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, an opportunity in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period of the button 136) is displayed in the first color (blue in this example) as the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed below.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "Open the door notice" (in this example, the characters "Open the door !!"). A display and an image simulating a door are displayed in the right display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the present embodiment, a part of the image of this notice effect (in this example, an image simulating a door) is the first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. It also serves as the image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Indicates that 1 second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 that also serves as the notice effect is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image notifying that 1 second has elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed to the first color (blue in this example) as the image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned “meter color (blue → red)”. ) To a second color (red in this example).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the first color. The color is changed to 4 (red in this example). With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to perform an operation.

  Note that, here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. Although it has been notified that (4 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to suggest the result of winning or losing the special figure variation game by changing the color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Indicates that 6 seconds have elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 that also serves as the notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 8E shows the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated in a state before the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the princess “Chance!” The image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display “chance!” And the character image (princess)) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136.

  The figure (f) shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation without operating the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification After the images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 6G is a diagram showing an example of reach display in the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the reach display is after the state of any one of FIG. 3D, FIG. Is displayed.

  According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed on the display (meter color) of the elapsed time notification image in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed on the notice table for the elapsed time notification image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image indicates only the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operating means, and changes the display mode after the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, the color of the meter changes after T seconds have elapsed). It may be. Further, the elapsed time notification image may notify only the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation means, and the display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) may not be changed due to the passage of time. .

<Operational means image display embodiment 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the seventh embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the notice production by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the opportunity button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, an opportunity in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period of the button 136) is displayed in the first color (blue in this example) as the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Indicates that 1 second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. The image notifying that the acceptance period of 3 seconds has elapsed is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (for this, 3 seconds in this example) of the remaining time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed above the first operation means image BG1. In the example, an image of numerical information) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9D shows the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image notifying that 5 seconds have passed. Further, at this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, an image for notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 second is displayed.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image notifying that 6 seconds have passed. At this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the opportunity button 136). ) Has elapsed) is displayed.

  It should be noted that the figure (f) is a diagram showing an example of an out-of-match display in the case where the win / fail result of the special figure variation game is out, and the figure (g) is a big hit display when the win / fail result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these off-range display or big hit display, the chance button 136 is operated in a state before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (during the operation acceptance period). Or when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has passed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136.

  According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Operation means image display embodiment 8>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, an eighth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the eighth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the notice production by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7A, the right timing of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a treasure box; white) corresponding to the button operation is displayed on the right side display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a treasure box; white) is displayed in each of the left display areas. At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, in order to urge the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the display of the character information "Select a treasure box to open with the direction keys!" It is displayed above the area.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2, the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation part 137 is notified. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Is displayed in the central display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in the first color (blue in this example).

  The timing shown in FIG. 9B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to inform that the acceptance period for the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 5 seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (blue in this example) to the second color as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “color of the treasure box (blue → red)”. Is changed to red (in this example, red).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is changed to red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. Although it is notified that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to indicate the result of winning or losing the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 that also serves as the notice effect is not changed.

  In the figure (e), the operation of the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is performed before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how the book pops out of the treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6F shows the left button of the setting operation unit 137 in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing when the operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how the book pops out of the treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. Further, when the determination result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, as shown in (g) of the same figure, the notice effect having higher reliability and expectation than the notice effect of the figure (f) is performed. You may comprise.

  FIG. 11H shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is deleted because the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. ing. Note that the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in time with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

<Example 9 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a ninth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-mentioned operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure shows the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment in chronological order. In this embodiment, the hold icon and the variable icon are displayed in addition to the operation means image display.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of special figure variation games on hold, and as the animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as "increase animation of the hold icon"), the order of the hold changes due to the completion of the previous hold, and the hold icon has a different display position (for example, the position on the left side). ) Animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "holding icon movement animation"), an animation executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the prefetch result (hereinafter, " Sometimes it is called "change animation of the hold icon"), the hold is exhausted and the hold icon becomes An animation that is executed when it is deleted (hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "holding icon deletion animation"), and when the number of pending special side special maps is increased, the pending icon for the non-priority special map is increased. There is an animation (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "holding icon save animation") executed when the save is saved. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the above animation (for example, a period during which there is no increase or decrease of the hold or the change of the hold icon) and that can be executed overlapping with the above animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "standby icon standby animation"). A plurality of animations of increase, move, change, delete, save, and wait of the hold icon may be duplicated and executed.

  In addition, after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started, one variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game may be displayed. The variable icon has, for example, a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, and is displayed as an animation of the texture image similarly to the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the winning / failing result of the special figure changing game is held.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the display area of the hold icon is displayed in a different area from the display area of the hold icon when the hold is exhausted. An animation that moves as a floating icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "moving animation between hold / fluctuating icons") and an animation that changes from the hold icon display mode to the floating icon display mode (hereinafter "between hold / fluctuating icon Change animation "may be called)". These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, execution of the change animation between the hold and variable icons can be omitted.

  The animation related to the variable icon is an animation that is executed during the execution of the special map variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "floating icon standby animation"), or a variable icon when the special map variable game ends. Animation that is executed when is deleted (hereinafter, may be referred to as "variable icon deletion animation"), animation that is executed when the display state of the variable icon is changed (hereinafter, "variable icon change animation"). Sometimes called "animation"). These animations may be combined with each other and run at the same time. Also, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation or the change animation between the hold / variable icons.

  The same figure (a) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game ends, the stop display of the decorative design is done. At this timing, four holding icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby indicating that there are four holdings of the special figure variation game.

  The same figure (b) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which is suspended is started, and the suspension of special figure fluctuation game is decreased from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the earliest (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the display area of the hold icon to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The CI is stopped and displayed. The variable icon CI is a variable icon for suggesting the result of the special figure variable display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variable icon CI is represented by the character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. I am configuring.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. The image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to view. .

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image (the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). , And is displayed behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to inform that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image for notifying that the second has elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed.

  16F shows that the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 6C, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 have been erased, information indicating the result of the change in the special figure (this In the example, the character information "Reach!" Is displayed behind the variable icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information indicating the result of the change in the special figure is covered with the change icon CI, so that a part of the information is invisible or difficult to view.

  When the chance button 136 is operated before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. After the BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, information suggesting the result of the special figure change may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not shown in the figure, even after displaying the variation icon CI in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the variation of the special map is displayed. Good.

  Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) in the figure may be performed. Further, (h) of the figure is a diagram showing an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the variable display is displayed after any of the states of (e), (f) and (g) of the same figure. Good.

  According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

<Example 10 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a tenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment in chronological order. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  The same figure (a) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game ends, the stop display of the decorative design is done. At this timing, four holding icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby indicating that there are four holdings of the special figure variation game.

  The same figure (b) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which is suspended is started, and the suspension of special figure fluctuation game is decreased from 4 to 3. At this timing, a deletion animation for deleting the earliest hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and a first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the chance An image simulating a button) is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image (the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, an advance notice effect (in this example, an image having an upside down character image (lord) with a sign saying "Reach") is performed based on the result of winning or losing the special figure variation game. There is.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Indicates that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image. All of TG1 are invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to inform that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are invisible.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image for notifying that the second has elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are invisible.

  The figure (f) has shown the timing when the chance button 136 was operated in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has passed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 have been erased, information indicating the result of the change in the special figure (this In the example, the character information "Gekiatsu !!!!" is displayed behind the variable icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information indicating the result of the change in the special map is covered with the image of the notice effect, so that a part of the information is invisible.

  When the chance button 136 is operated before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. After deleting the BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the notice effect, information indicating the result of success or failure of the special figure change may be displayed.

  Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) in the figure may be performed. Further, (h) of the figure is a diagram showing an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the variable display is displayed after any of the states of (e), (f) and (g) of the same figure. Good.

  According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

<Embodiment 11 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, an eleventh embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the general figure fluctuation display and the notice effect based on the judgment of whether the general figure fluctuation display is valid or not are displayed.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing when the general figure fluctuation display was started during the special figure fluctuation display, and the effect accompanying the general figure fluctuation display was started. At this timing, the general figure variation display area 208s starts the general figure variation display, performs the notice effect based on the general figure variation display success / failure determination, and also operates the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, whether or not the universal figure fluctuation game is hit is determined by using the universal figure determination table of FIG. 161 described later, the universal figure control state has a low probability, and the acquired random value is 90 to 99. Since it is within the numerical value range, the figure 2 shows an example in the case where the design 2 per figure (the figure decoration 2 shown in FIG. 157 (d) described later) is selected. The details of whether or not the universal figure variation game using the universal figure determination table of FIG. 161 is determined will be described in the third embodiment.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image (the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (display of a character image (princess) appears from below in this example) is performed based on the figure change display and whether or not the figure change game is hit.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is set as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Indicates that 1 second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the notice effect character image (princess), a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible. In addition to (or in place of), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to be visually recognized (the same applies to the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the notice production is continued based on the result of winning or losing of the universal figure variation game, and as the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the rest of the acceptance period. An image for notifying that the time is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the notice effect character image (princess), a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image for notifying that the second has elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The same figure (e) has shown the timing which performed the stop display of a normal figure. At this timing, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the result of the change in the general figure (in this example, the character image (princess) has a fan). Image) is displayed. Further, as described above, since the universal figure per symbol 2 is selected in the universal figure variation game, the universal figure decorative pattern corresponding to the “universal figure decoration 2” is displayed in the universal figure variation display area 208s.

  The figure (f) has shown the timing when the chance button 136 was operated in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has passed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 have been erased, information indicating the result of the change in the special figure (this In the example, the text information "Is this a chance?" Is displayed. Note that when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136, the display of (e) or (f) in the same figure may be performed.

  According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

<Example 12 of displaying operation means image>
Next, a twelfth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment in chronological order. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  The same figure (a) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game ends, the stop display of the decorative design is done. At this timing, by displaying the three hold icons PI1 to PI3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are three hold of the special figure variation game. In this example, by displaying the character image (Sabohani) as the third hold icon PI3, the result of the prefetching of the third special figure variation game is suggested.

  The same figure (b) has started the special figure fluctuation game which is suspended, has shown the timing when the suspension of special figure fluctuation game is decreased from 3 to 2. At this timing, a deletion animation for deleting the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the display area of the hold icon is performed, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are moved to the positions of the adjacent hold icons. You are doing a moving animation to move to.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows the timing at which the movement animation of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 ends. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating the chance button) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image (the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). Is displayed. However, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed behind the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3 and is invisible. In addition to (or in place of) the hold icon PI3, at least part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to be visible (the same applies to the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to inform that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image for notifying that the second has elapsed (remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  16F shows that the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 16B, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the special map change after the special map change (in this example, A notice (in this example, character information "It's hot after 2 rotations!") Indicating the result of success or failure of the special figure after 2 rotations is displayed. Note that the notice is an example of a “pre-reading notice” that indicates a result of success or failure of the special map change after the special map change.

  In this example, the display of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is not erased, but it may be erased at the same time as the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136, the display of FIG. Further, (g) of the figure is a diagram showing an example of variable display of a decorative pattern, and the variable display may be displayed after any of the states of (e) and (f) of the same figure.

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

  86: is a figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 12 in time series. In this example, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3 as shown in (c) to (e) of the figure, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is held icon PI3. It is in a visible state without being covered by.

  According to the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

<Example 13 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 88, a thirteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. 87 to 88 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is covered with the variable icon.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows the timing at which the special figure variation game ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this timing, four holding icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby indicating that there are four holdings of the special figure variation game.

  The same figure (b) has shown the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which is suspended is started, and the suspension of special figure fluctuation game is decreased from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the earliest (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the display area of the hold icon to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the left side display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The CI is stopped and displayed. The variable icon CI is a variable icon for suggesting the result of the special figure variable display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variable icon CI is represented by the character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. I am configuring.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the first timing corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed behind the variable icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to view. .

  In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is a decorative design. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered with the change icon CI, and all of the second operation means image BG2 is visible.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image (the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). , And is displayed behind (on the back of) the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as the second operation means. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7D, a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. 7C, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The timing is shown. At this timing, since the predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the chance button 136 operation, the acceptance period of the chance button 136 operation is 2 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to inform that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed.

  Further, at this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has come, the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. 'Is the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 indicates the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136). In addition, the scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually reduced).

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. From this, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 2 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 4 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same figure. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be viewed.

  At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 continues to be displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed that notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining acceptance period is 2 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Have been erased. Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image is displayed which notifies that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). There is.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Have been erased.

  FIG. 88 (i) shows the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period for the first operation of the chance button 136. Shows. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the display is changed to that image display and the decorative pattern display is performed. A character image (lord) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (lord) is covered with the change icon CI, a part of the character image (lord) is invisible or difficult to see. It is to be noted that FIGS. 11 (j) to 11 (k) show the chance button before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display of FIG. The example of a display when the second operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  FIG. 1L shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Shows. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, the display is changed to that image display and the decorative pattern display is performed. A character image (grandpa) is displayed in the right display area of the device 208. Even when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG. Good. It should be noted that FIG. 11M shows a display example after the character image (custom character) is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of FIG.

  89: is a figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 13 in a time series. In this example, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the start timing of the acceptance period for the first and second operations of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing.

  Further, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. Then, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is configured to be covered with the variation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) for notifying the same elapsed time is changed by the change icon CI. Since it is covered, part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

  The position at which the variation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and at least one image of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon, and only one image of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image and the second progress notification image may be displayed. May be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image of may be displayed at a position covered by the variable icon.

  Further, even if only two images of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the position covered by the variable icon. Of course, at least one image of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the change icon. Of course, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the change icon. Alternatively, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at the position covered by the change icon.

  Further, the image displayed at the position covered by the variable icon may be at least partially covered, only partially covered, or all covered. .

<Example 14 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a fourteenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fourteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the present embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 79) (first image in this example, By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with the image of the notice effect shown in (b) to (d) of the same figure, a part of the one image (the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is removed. It is configured to be invisible or difficult to see. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered by the character image (lord) at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, and the character image (princess) is made at the timing shown in FIG. It covers a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Further, in this embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 79), the advance notice lottery processing using FIGS. 71 to 21 is performed. The other display is the same as that of the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 79), and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 15 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a fifteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fifteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 80) are all shown in FIG. By covering with the image of the notice effect shown in (d), a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 are all invisible or visible. It is configured to be in a difficult state. The other display is the same as that of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 80), and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 16 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a sixteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the sixteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the above-mentioned Embodiment 8 (see FIG. 81) is shown in FIGS. By covering with the image of the notice effect that suggests, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. The other display is the same as that of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 81), and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Example 17 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a seventeenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the seventeenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, a part of the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is first. It is displayed so as to overlap the operation means image BG1. That is, in the present embodiment, by covering a part of the first operation means image BG1 with the second operation means image BG2, a part of the first operation means image BG1 becomes invisible or difficult to see. It is configured in.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 7B, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the first and second operations of the chance button 136 being performed, When the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 is replaced as shown in (d) of the same figure. When the character image (lord) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (grandpa) is replaced with the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the operation is urged twice, an example in which two operation means images having the same number of times as the number of times of the operation are displayed is shown. The same number of operation means images as the number of times may be displayed. Further, in the case of prompting one operation, a number of operation means images larger than the number of times of operation may be displayed. In this case, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform one operation.

<Example 18 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, an eighteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the eighteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, an animation of increasing the hold icon is performed when a new hold of the special figure variation game occurs, and the second hold icon PI2 after the increase (in this example, a chance) It is configured to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first holding icon PI1 by an icon that is an image simulating the button 136 and a star-shaped figure. . That is, in the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the hold icon PI1 are covered with the hold icon PI2, so that the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the hold icon PI1 are invisible or It is configured so that it is difficult to see.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon which is invisible or difficult to see, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means and Since the game is more concentrated than in the past, the operating rate of the game table can be increased in some cases.

  Further, the hold icon PI2 also serves as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon PI2 suggests the result of winning or losing the special figure variation game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 from the operation means image (the icon that combines the image simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped figure) ( In this example, the result of the pre-reading of the special figure variation game is changed to a character image (sabohani) indicating that it is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, the game information can be obtained by the hold icon that is changed by the operation of the operation device, so that the operation of the operation device can be further promoted and the interest of the game can be enhanced. is there.

  In this example, both the image before the change of the hold icon PI2 (the icon simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped graphic) and the image after the change (the character image (sabohani)) are the first images. Although it is configured to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the changed image may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, the second operation of the operating means can be surely performed after prompting the first operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated for the first time, as shown in (f) of the same figure, the notice effect regarding the change is started, and when the chance button 136 is operated for the second time, it is shown as (g) of the same figure. The display regarding the hold icon may be changed so that the display regarding the fluctuation may be displayed with priority over the display regarding the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. Further, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation means (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Further, it may be configured such that by operating the chance button 136 once, both the notice effect regarding the change and the display mode of the hold icon are changed.

<Example 19 of displaying operation means image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a nineteenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the nineteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in (a), (b), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f. It is provided. This special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 variation game, and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f is an area which displays the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 variable game, For example, during a special figure variation game (during a special figure variation), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed blinking.

  The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 shown in (b) of the same figure. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the right door 246b causes the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a part of the hold icon, and a variable display. By covering all the decorative patterns inside, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon, and all of the changing decorative patterns are invisible or difficult to see. It is configured to be in a state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the operation means image that has become invisible or difficult to be visible, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decorative pattern, and therefore to prompt the operation of the operation means. In addition to that, since the player concentrates on the game more than ever before, it may be possible to increase the operating rate of the game table. It should be noted that the shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the changing decorative design. Good.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device. A cutout portion may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f may be configured to be visible through the cutout portion. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to surely grasp the game information that is important to the player such as the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and thus it may be possible to prevent the motivation of the game from decreasing.

<Modifications of Operation Means Image, Elapsed Time Notification Image, and Remaining Time Notification Image>
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing modified examples of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, a reception start image displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means arrives, and the reception time of the operation means is half. An image for the half of the acceptance period that is displayed when the time has elapsed and an image for the acceptance end that is displayed when the acceptance end timing of the operating means arrives are shown.

  In the same figure (a), an image simulating the design of the operating means is adopted as the operating means image, and as the elapsed time notification image (or the remaining time notification image), the meter is displayed according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period. The image has gradually reduced the scale (filled part). Further, in FIG. 7B, an image in which the operation means is simplified is adopted as the operation means image, and the elapsed time notification image (or the remaining time notification image) is used in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period. An image is used in which the scale of the meter divided into multiple parts (filled part) gradually decreases. Further, in FIG. 7C, an image obtained by simplifying the operating means is adopted as the operating means image, and the elapsed time notification image (or the remaining time notification image) is used in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period. An image is used in which a lamp (including a light emitting means such as an LED and a display means such as an LCD) is gradually turned off.

  The figure (d) is configured to count down the remaining time of the operation acceptance period as the remaining time notification image, and the figure (e) is configured as the elapsed time notification image (or the remaining time notification image). The image is gradually lightened according to the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the operation acceptance period, and the image is erased immediately before the acceptance period. As the notification image (or the remaining time notification image), the color of the image is gradually darkened according to the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the operation acceptance period. These operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the game table according to the first embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has at least operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. ), And a display means capable of executing at least a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), at least one of the plurality of displays. Is a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to (e)), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display. (For example, it is a remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 80C to 80E), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). When the The second display is a display relating to the operation of the operation means (for example, a remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136). ), The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display during the display of the first display, and the display means displays at least one of the plurality of displays. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, to display an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is gradually reduced in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display related to the operating means by displaying the countdown of the remaining time (display related to the operating means, notice effect, variable display of general figures, hold icon, etc.) At least partially hide) ones, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the game table according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the acceptance period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter (in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 ( The second display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the operation of the chance button 136). The countdown may be performed at least for the remaining time of the reception period.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

  Further, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means was started (for example, FIG. 79). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various displays and prevent the player from getting tired. Also, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, it may be possible for the player to easily participate in the game.

  The first display (for example, meter) may have a display mode different from that of the second display (for example, number).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be more strongly urged to operate the operation means by the notification by the various displays. In addition, there are cases in which the player can be entertained by the notification by various displays.

  Further, the first and second displays may be ended (for example, the elapsed time notification image or the remaining time notification image may be deleted) at least when the reception period ends.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choices of the player.

  In addition, a win / loss determination means (for example, special figure-related lottery processing, ordinary figure-related lottery processing) capable of executing a win / loss determination when the win / loss determination condition is satisfied is provided, and at least one of the first and second displays is provided. One may be one that suggests the result of the hit / miss judgment (for example, the third elapsed time notification image TG3 shown in FIG. 76).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to perform various displays. In addition, there are cases in which the player has more choices in how to play, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, a third display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to (e) (chance button Including the simulated image)), the third display does not notify the elapsed time from the start timing of the acceptance period for accepting the operation of the operation means, and the third display is during the acceptance period, It may be at least executable during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game caused by urging the player to perform an operation more than necessary. In addition, the display may be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  It should be noted that a third display may be displayed that only informs that it is the operation acceptance period of the operation means, or that a third display that at least informs that it is the operation acceptance period of the operation means is displayed. Good.

  Further, the third display may not display only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. It may not be notified, or at least the elapsed time from a specific time after the start of the reception period may be notified, and only the elapsed time from a specific time after the start of the reception period is notified. It may be one.

  Further, the third display may be at least executable during execution of the first display, may be at least executable only during execution of the first display, or It may be at least executable during execution of the second display, or may be at least executable only during execution of the second display. Further, the third display may be at least executable during execution of both the first and second displays, or only during execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display is displayed on at least one of the first and second displays when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation acceptance period overlaps with at least one display ( Alternatively, the operation acceptance result may be reflected in only one display or both displays).

  Further, the third display is at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation reception period overlaps with at least one of the first and second displays. The acceptance result of the operation may be reflected in (or only the third display, or all the first to third displays).

  Further, the plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 79C) displayed when a specific time has passed, and the fourth display. Is displayed according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the acceptance period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red)). ) May be performed at least. With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to perform an operation.

  In addition, the fourth display may be a notification only according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the acceptance period, or at least a notice (or only a notice) indicating the result of the acceptance judgment. Alternatively, at least (or only the notice) indicating the result of the judgment result may not be given.

  In addition, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment has a plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. Is a display means capable of performing at least the display of (eg, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a first And at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display relating to the operating means (first operating means image BG1, second operating means). Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means displays a third display (for example, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 82). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the time) can be displayed, and the display means displays at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 82). If the display position of the third display and the display position of the fourth display match, the display means gives priority to the fourth display over the third display. The third display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display. Is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display, and is a gaming table.

  According to the game table according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation unit. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the acceptance period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter (in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 ( It is also possible to at least display an image in which the filled portion) gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode.

  Further, the third display (for example, part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 82, the first operation shown in FIG. 93). The means image BG1 (a part or all of the image representing the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the variable icon CI shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 93). The second operation means image BG2 (a part or all of the image simulating the chance button) shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player's operation may be more prompted.

  Further, the display means displays a fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 shown in FIG. 82 (a chance button is displayed when a specific time has elapsed after the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is started). The display means is capable of displaying at least a simulated image)), and the display means displays the fifth display when the display position of the fourth display matches the display position of the fifth display. Also the fourth display is preferentially displayed (for example, displayed in front), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. May be

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to focus more attention on the game by paying more attention to the display mode hidden by the player.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 82) may have a display mode different from that of the fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 82). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, different transmittances, different colors, or different sizes. In addition, at least part of the third display (shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) may be used so that different display modes may be used as long as they have the same shape but different colors. Different display modes may be used as long as one) and a part of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) are different.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  A part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) so that the colors may be different or the shape may be the same and the same display mode may be used. And a part of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc., which matches a part of the third display) is matched, The same display mode may be used.

  The third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 82 for notifying the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 82) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the notification of the reception period easy to see and to allow the player to surely perform the operation. In addition, it may be possible to urge the player to press and push the button. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from getting tired by focusing on the game.

  (A) Further, a win / loss determination means (for example, special figure-related lottery processing or general figure-related lottery processing) capable of executing a win / loss determination when the win / loss determination condition is satisfied is provided, and a second display (for example, notice) The display of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the win / fail judgment.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to perform various displays. In addition, it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the acceptance period of the operation means.

  (B) In addition, a win / loss determination means (for example, special figure-related lottery processing, general figure-related lottery processing) capable of executing a win / loss determination when the win / loss determination condition is satisfied is provided, and a first display (related to operation means) The display) may be a notice that suggests the result of the judgment.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to perform various displays. In addition, it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the notice.

  In the above cases (A) and (B), at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display, or both displays) suggests the result of the judgment. The notice may include a notice, or the first display and the second display may be the same (or different) notice indicating the result of the judgment. For example, both of them may be the result of judgment on whether or not the special figure is valid, and both of them may be results of judgment on the validity of a general figure. In addition, one may be the judgment result of the special drawing and the other may be the judgment result of the general drawing, or one may be the judgment result of the fluctuation and the other may be the judgment result of the next time or later ( (Pre-reading) or both may be different judgment results (pre-reading of special map / general drawing) of variations.

  (C) In addition, if at least a part of at least one of the first, second, and third displays is hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display can be made more noticeable. May be possible. Note that only a part (or all) of at least one of the first, second, and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) If at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, it may be possible to make the hidden display more noticeable. In addition, the hidden display may be able to attract more attention. Note that at least a part (or only a part or all) of one of the plurality of other displays is hidden by the one display, and the other display is at least a part (or only) of the other display by the one display. Alternatively, only some or all of them may be hidden.

  In the cases of (C) and (D) above, the third display may give at least a notice indicating the result of the acceptance / rejection determination (or only a notice indicating the result of the acceptance / rejection determination). The third display may give at least a notification of the acceptance period of the operating means (or only a notification of the acceptance period of the operating means), or may give a notice indicating the result of the acceptance / rejection decision and the acceptance period of the operating means. At least one of the notifications (or only one of both, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the second embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game table such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 96 to 129 are used only for the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the present embodiment. The symbols shown in FIGS. 96 to 129 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 96 to 129, the same reference numerals are used as the same components as in the above-described embodiment. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game stand installation business store.

  The main body 104, which is called an inner frame, is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game stand base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 98 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 53 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 99 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. The special symbol display device wins the special symbol variation game and the special symbol display device stops the big hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It has a built-in counter) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. , A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high accuracy medium). A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamps 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. Is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling the.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<First sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the reference circuit 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 is read and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate. VDP434 (Bi-Phy) which displays an image on the symbol display device 208 Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

<Second sub control unit>
Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a gaming circuit lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming frame lamp driving for controlling the gaming frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 101 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the figure (a), 10 types of special symbols from "Special symbol A" to "Special symbol J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white parts in the figure are turned off. The position of the segment to be turned on is shown, and the black part shows the position of the segment to be lit.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R big jack symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  “Special map C” is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

  “Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same big hit without 2R time saving. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") corresponding to the 15R big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, in which three identical decorative patterns are arranged. 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative symbols are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" suddenly changed or a sudden 2R big hit called "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. (B) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 101 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 102 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically set (to prevent the processing abnormality from being detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 100 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning openings 226, 234 or the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value is obtained as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 2 random number value. And the value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value is acquired as the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure variation time has passed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display mode of the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the off symbol. Lighting and extinction drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 101 (c)) and the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 101 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is out of alignment, the out of universal map flag is turned on as described later. In the case of this universal figure flag being turned on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change and display the general figure on the general figure display device 210, and this variation time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in steps S225 and S227, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed. Perform (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag When the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 101A are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is on. Special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is also on, special figure probability variation flag is also on, special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is off, public figure probability When the variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off, Special rate F when the rate variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first deviation flag is on In the case of special figure I, when the second deviation flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED configuring the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so as to be in each aspect of special figure I, A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first outlier pattern (special map) I), and the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 hours are set in the hour saving frequency storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the hour saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230. The special figure related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special effect The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related that are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer variable interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

<First sub-control unit main processing>
First, in step S301 of the main process of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the press of the chance button 136 is monitored, and when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is converted into effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136. Perform the process of changing. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, a button reception period that allows reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is provided during the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols. In this button reception period, time counting is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation (for example, when t ₀ seconds in FIG. 109B have elapsed).

  Further, at the start of the button reception period, effect data for informing the player that the operation of pressing the chance button 136 can be accepted is prepared, and in the image control processing described later, for example, in FIG. ) (In this example, an image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed). Further, when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, effect data for giving a notice is prepared, and in the image control processing described later, for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 110 (d). A notice is given (in this example, the characters "Geki Atsu!") Are displayed. Then, after the lapse of the button reception period (for example, 6 seconds), the time measurement is ended, and the processing for deleting the notification of the button reception period and the advance notice is performed.

  In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416.

  In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

<First sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>
Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

<First sub-control unit timer interrupt process>
Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In a succeeding step S503, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

<First sub-control unit image control process>
Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you.

  In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
The process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 105. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

<Second sub-control unit main processing>
First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

<Second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>
Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

<Second sub-control unit timer interrupt process>
Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

<Data table of main controller 300>
Next, the data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and the special figure related lottery process will be described.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 variation time determination table for determining the variation time of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 variation time determination table for determining the variation time of the special figure 2. . These special figure 1 variation time determination table and special figure 2 variation time determination table are the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol, the random number selection range, and the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table. 6 is a data table in which numbers are associated and stored.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 variation time determination table in the above-mentioned special figure 1 related lottery process, and selects the table number based on the result of the judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game. For example, when the special game 1 variation game hit determination result is a big hit, and special map A or special map B is selected as the stop symbol of special map 1, table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from one or a plurality of fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random value. For example, when the table number is the table 1 and the acquired random number value is 500, the variation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

  Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 variation time determination table in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related lottery processing, and selects a table number based on the result of winning / decision determination of the special figure 2 variation game. For example, in the case where the hit determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is out of order and the special figure I or the special figure J is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 2, for example, the table 9 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from one or a plurality of fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random value. For example, when the table number is the table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, the variation time 10000 ms (out of the normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.

<Preliminary performance>
Next, the details of the effect (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the winning / deciding determination result of the above-described special drawing related lottery processing (steps S229 and S231) will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a “preliminary notice”) that suggests the win / fail judgment result to the player during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, this effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “notification”) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 in order to give the advance notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect (notification) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is first performed, and when the player operates the chance button 136, the decorative symbol is displayed. While the variable is displayed, the result of the win / no decision is changed to an effect (notice) that suggests to the player. At this time, the effect (notification) for urging the operation of the chance button 136 may also perform a function (preliminary function) of suggesting the win / fail judgment result to the player by being set according to the win / no judgment result. The chance button 136 is set so that the operation becomes effective when it is operated within a predetermined reception period, and the button reception period is notified to the player in various notification modes.

  More specifically, in the special figure-related lottery process (steps S229 and S231), the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on. When the big hit flag is turned on, one of the plurality of big hit symbols (special figure A to special figure F in this embodiment) is determined. If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from a plurality of small hit symbols (special figure G to special figure F in this embodiment). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is turned on, one symbol is determined from a plurality of deviating symbols (special symbols I to J in this embodiment). When the stop symbol of the special figure is determined, the variation time is determined by the above-mentioned special figure variation time determination table (see FIG. 106) according to the stop symbol. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, a symbol change start command including at least the result of the hit / miss judgment (stop symbol of special figure) and the information of the variation time is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the above-mentioned effect control process (step S309), the win / fail judgment result (stop symbol of special figure) and the variation time included in the symbol variation start command received from the main control unit 300, and The advance notice lottery process is executed based on the notification mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 406 for each stop symbol and variation time of the special figure and the random number value obtained from the predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the 15R big hit symbol (special figure B) and the variable time for super reach A (45000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, the table number 2 of the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. 108 is selected. The notification mode determination table for the super reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect will be performed in the random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for super reach A, the notification mode in which the mode changes from notification B to D is selected. In addition, for example, when the first deviation symbol (special figure I) and the variable time for super-reach A deviation (40000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, the table is selected from among a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. 108. The notification mode determination table for misalignment of the super reach A of number 12 is selected, and the advance notice lottery process is executed. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect will be performed in the random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for super-reach A deviation, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change midway is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery process as shown in, for example, FIG. 107 at the start of the fluctuation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the win / no win determination result acquired from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether or not the stop symbol is the special symbols A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, the notification mode is selected based on the big hit table in the notification mode determination table. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol and the variation time received from the main control unit 300. For example, the jackpot table of table number 2 in the notification manner determination table shown in FIG. 108 is a notification manner determination table for the super reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table of FIG. 106, and other Although not shown in detail in the case of reach, a notification mode determination table is also prepared. Further, in step S1003, the notification mode lottery for the remaining time of the notification button reception period is performed based on the notification mode determination table for per-reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit via the super reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 4, the "mode of continuing the notification F (a mode in which the notification does not change)" is selected as the notification mode, and the random value of 5 to 19 is selected. In this case, select the "mode of switching from the notification A to the notification E", select the "mode of switching from the notification B to the notification D" when the random number value is 20 to 49, and select the "mode of switching from the notification B to the notification D". "Mode in which C ₁ switches to notification C ₂ " is selected. Since the numerical value range of the random number value is set to 0 to 99 in the present embodiment, for example, the probability of selecting the “mode of continuing the notification F” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). If the hit / no hit determination result of the special figure is a big hit, the probability that the “mode of continuing the notification F” is most selected among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If it is the predetermined fluctuation time, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1009. The predetermined variation time here is based on the table shown in FIG. 106 in the special figure-related lottery process, and the lottery using the result of judgment (stop symbol) of the special figure and the random number value in the numerical range of 0 to 65535. It refers to the fluctuation time of the special map determined by. In the present embodiment, the case where the notification mode is selected in the next step S1007 is limited to the case of performing the effects related to the out, the normal reach, the super reach A off, or the super reach B off, and the shortening and the super shortening are excluded. It is supposed to be done. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special figure is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the outlier table.

In step S1007, the notification mode is selected based on the out-of-report table among the notification mode determination tables. For example, the out-of-range table of table number 12 in the notification manner determination table shown in FIG. 108 is the notification manner determination table for the super-reach A out-of-range selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table of FIG. Similar to the case, in the case of other reach or out of reach, the notice mode determination table for advance notice is similarly prepared. Further, in step S1007, the notification mode lottery for the remaining time of the button reception period for advance notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for out-of-range reach of FIG. That is, when the random number value is 0 to 49, the "mode of continuing the notification F" is selected as the notification mode when the random number value is 0 to 49, and the "notification from notification A is notified" when the random number value is 50 to 79. When the random number value is 80 to 94, the "mode of switching from the notification B to the notification D" is selected, and when the random number value is 95 to 99, the "mode of switching from the notification C ₁ to the notification C ₂ " is selected. "Mode of switching". Note that the probability of selecting "a mode in which the notification C ₁ is switched to the notification C ₂ " as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and when the hit determination result of the special figure is not a big hit, "the notification C ₁ From the notification C ₂ ”has the lowest probability of being selected most in all the notification modes. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices that execute the advance notice (for example, VDP434 that controls the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208), and this control flow ends.

Of the above notification modes, in the notification mode in which the notification X is switched to the notification Y, the first notification mode is called the first notification mode, and the notification mode switched after that is called the second notification mode. Moreover, at least the notification period is set in each of the above-described notifications A to F. For example, the notification A has a notification period of 1 second, the notification B has a notification period of 2 seconds, the notifications C ₁ and C ₂ have a notification period of 3 seconds, the notification D has a notification period of 4 seconds, and the notification E has a notification period of 5 seconds. The notification period of the notification F is 6 seconds. Then, in the case where the mode in which the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode is won, the notification period in the first notification mode (hereinafter, also referred to as the first notification period) and the notification period in the second notification mode (hereinafter, , And the second notification period) are set to match the button reception period.

  Further, although not particularly shown, in the advance notice lottery process, details of the advance notice are based on the winning / failing determination result received from the main control unit 300, a predetermined advance notice lottery table stored in the ROM 406 in advance, and the random number value described above. The contents (for example, whether the character display such as "Geki Atsu !!" or the character display such as "..." when the button is pressed) is determined.

<Example 1 of notification mode of remaining time>
As a result of the above-mentioned notice lottery process, Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the acceptance period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110. Here, in the case where the win / fail judgment result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification mode determination table for super reach A of table number 2 shown in FIG. An example will be described in which a case where the notification mode in which the notification B (first notification mode) is switched to the "report D (second notification mode)" is selected is won.

  As described above, the chance button 136 is valid for accepting operations only during a preset period (button acceptance period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in a format that shows the remaining time (here, in the form of a rectangular meter), and the remaining time of the button reception period is notified by the remaining amount of the meter. It The notification mode can be set in various modes with parameters such as the notification period, the color of the meter, the initial amount of the meter at the start of the notification, and the amount of decrease (decrease speed) of the meter per unit time.

In the notification B mode in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 110 (b) to 110 (d), the meter is displayed in a state of being partially overlapped with the front surface of the changing decorative design. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the meter is displayed as full when the notification starts in the notification B mode, and gradually decreases as time elapses. The decrease rate of the meter is set to match the actual decrease rate of the button reception period (actual decrease rate of the remaining time).

In the notification D mode, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front surface of the changing decorative pattern. At the time of starting the notification in the mode of the notification D, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (at the time of ending the notification in the mode of the notification B) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button reception period.

  Note that in FIGS. 109 and 110, (a) is the start time of variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols, (b) is the start time of acceptance of the button acceptance period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is the time when the notification mode is changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

In this example, first, as the first notification mode, the meter is displayed in the reference color during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front surface of the changing decorative pattern. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter corresponds to the actual rate of decrease during the button reception period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is reduced to the remaining 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of reception.

When the notification period according to the first notification mode ends, the second notification mode is switched to, and the meter is displayed in a special color during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decreasing speed is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the notification D mode, since the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching is continued, the notification of the remaining time is started from the state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button reception period ends, the display of the meter disappears, and the display returns to the state where the changing decorative design is displayed on all the screens of the decorative design display device 208.

  If the player operates the chance button 136 while the button reception period is being informed by the meter, the meter disappears and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 110 is displayed. In this case, the character "Gekiatsutsutsu !!" is displayed, which indicates that the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big hit by giving a notice saying "It's hot!"

  Explaining in detail the notice, in the first embodiment, when the player operates the chance button 136, any one of "...", "super hot?", And "super hot !!" is displayed. It is set to be done. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification by the random number value is further subdivided, and for example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “...” is displayed and the random number value is 25 to In the case of 34, "Geki Atsu ??" is displayed, and in the case of a random number value of 35 to 49, "Geki Atsu !!" is displayed. The same setting is made when a notification mode other than the notifications B → D is selected.

  According to the notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the length of the remaining time of the button reception period, so that the chance button 136 may or may not be pressed at a desired timing. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode is switched in the middle with the passage of time (for example, in the case of the notification mode where the random number value is 5 to 99 when the 15R big hit is hit, when the random number value is 50 to 99 when it is out of the notification mode) Mode), the timing for pressing the chance button 136 is "press immediately after reception is valid", "press when notification mode changes", "press at any timing of player", "press" There is an advantage that the range of choices such as "no" is widened and the variety of games is increased. In other words, the execution of the advance notice is in response to the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, so that the range of the game can be particularly widened in this respect, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced in some cases.

  Further, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by amplifying the expectation of the player for the big hit by switching the notification mode. In addition, it is possible to reduce unnecessary operation of the chance button 136 by the player and improve the durability of the chance button 136. Further, if the color of the meter is changed before and after the switching of the notification mode, the effect range may be expanded and the player may be expected to operate the chance button 136.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 108, the probability of winning each of the notification modes is set to be different depending on whether or not the result of winning / judging is a big hit. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is expected to be given to the player. It is possible to increase the probability that the feeling becomes high, and increase the probability that the expectation given to the player is lowered in the case of the deviation, thereby making a difference between the two, and in this respect also, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Example 2 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. Similar to the first embodiment, also in the second embodiment, in the advance notification table shown in FIG. 108, the result of the judgment is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45,000 ms (per super reach A) The case of winning the notification mode in which the notification mode is switched from "1 notification mode" to "report D (second notification mode)" will be described as an example. However, in the second embodiment, the notice when the button is pressed displayed in the notification period according to the first notification mode (first notification period) and the notification period according to the second notification mode (second notification period) are different. Is different from that of the first embodiment.

  In addition, in FIGS. 111 and 112, (a) is a change start time of the decorative symbol, (b) is a start time of acceptance of the button acceptance period, and (c) is a notification mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is the time when the button is changed, and (d) is the time when the button reception period ends.

In this example, first, as the first notification mode, the meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front surface of the changing decorative pattern. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button reception period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is reduced to the remaining 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of reception. When the chance button 136 is operated during this first notification period, a notice (first notice) of "..." is displayed. After that, the notice continues until the button reception period ends, and the notice disappears when the reception ends.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode at the end of the first notification period, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The speed at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. If the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period, a notice (second notice) that "it's hot!" Is displayed. After that, the notice continues until the end of the button acceptance period, and the notice disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even in the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It returns to the state in which all the decorative patterns that are changing are displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the first and second notification periods, no advance notice is given.

  The first notice with "..." and the second notice with "Super hot !!" are based on the winning / decision result and the variation time acquired from the main control unit 300. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player a low expectation, while the second notice gives the player a high expectation.

  Explaining the details of the notice, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the player accepts the operation of the chance button 136, "...", "Geki Atsu ??", "Geki Atsu!" Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification by the random number values 20 to 49 is further divided. For example, when the random number is 20 to 24, "..." is displayed when the operation is received at the notification B, while "Gekiatsutsu !!" is displayed when the operation is received at the notification D. Is set to. When the random number value is 25 to 34, it is set such that “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed when the operation is received at the notification B, and “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed when the operation is received at the notification D. Has been done. When the random number value is 35 to 49, both the notification B and the notification D are set to display "Gekiatsu !!" when the operation is accepted. The same setting is made when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color in the first notification period, and the set notice is lower or equivalent to the notice in the second notice period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color and the set notice has a higher or equivalent expectation as compared with the notice in the first notice period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a larger impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the expectation suggested by the notice mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the expectation suggested by the advance notice are associated with each other. As a result, the sense of expectation given to the player can be adjusted by a combination of the notification mode and the advance notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, the player may be able to understand the content of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the notification mode of the remaining time and the content of the notice correspond. That is, the player who is hitting the jackpot may not be able to press the chance button 136 because he or she may be aware of paying out the game ball (moving the game ball to the box). In addition, there is a case in which a disadvantage such as spilling a ball paid out when the chance button 136 is operated may be incurred. However, the notification mode of the remaining time also functions as a notice indicating the result of the judgment, and if it is possible to infer the contents of the notice without pressing the chance button 136, the player pays out the game balls. You may be able to concentrate and increase your expectations for the next game.

<Example 3 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. The third embodiment is an example of a notification mode in which the meter temporarily stops, and in the table shown in FIG. 108, the win / fail judgment result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An example will be described in which the case where the notification mode in which the notification A (first notification mode) is switched to the “report E (second notification mode)” is selected is won. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds in this case). In FIGS. 113 and 114, (a) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is started, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. Is the end of acceptance.

  In the mode of the notification A, the notification period is one second, the full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the button reception period (apparent reception period) for informing the player is actually the button reception period. Half (3 seconds here). Here, by making the speed of decrease of the meter double the speed of decrease of the actual button reception period, it is possible to give the player the illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period. As a premise for this, in normal times, repeat the game by setting the amount of decrease per unit time (reduction speed) of the meter that is initially full to match the actual reduction speed of the button reception period. It is preferable that the player can recognize that the button reception period is usually set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). The BGM may allow the player to intuitively recognize that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. When there is such a precondition, even if the actual button reception period is set to 6 seconds, it is normal to reduce the full tank meter by 1/6 in 1 second. If it is decreased by 1/3, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the current button acceptance period is 3 seconds. Further, if it is decreased by ⅕ per second, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the current button acceptance period is 5 seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, an arbitrary remaining amount of the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) immediately after the notification is started. After that, in order to adjust the book edge, the meter decreasing speed is faster than the normal button receiving period decreasing speed (speed decreasing by 1/6 in 1 second) (here, decreasing speed by 1/3 in 1 second). Decrease and inform the remaining time.

  That is, first, at the time of starting the notification in the first notification mode, the full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the first notification period, the meter is reduced by 1/3 in 1 second.

  When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. In the second notification mode, the meter reduction is stopped for the first 3 seconds. Therefore, the meter keeps the remaining amount of 2/3 until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of reception of the button reception period. Next, when 4 seconds have elapsed, the meter starts to decrease again, and decreases by 1/3 in 1 second. Therefore, the remaining amount of the meter is reduced to 1/3 when 5 seconds have passed, and the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 when 6 seconds have passed, that is, at the end of the button reception period. In the third embodiment, in order to compensate for the temporary stoppage of the meter, the rate of decrease of the meter is made faster than the rate of decrease of the normal button reception period, especially in the second notification period.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the actual remaining time of the button reception period and the remaining time suggested by the meter are set differently. Therefore, by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the decrease of the meter is temporarily stopped to give the player the illusion that the remaining time has increased, and it is possible to amplify the expectation and to be surprised. In some cases, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving it.

  Further, even if the remaining time of the button reception period that is different from the actual one is notified in either one of the first and second notification modes, it is possible to adjust the book edge in the other notification mode, so that various notifications can be performed. It is possible to In the third embodiment, if the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, it is preferable that the same notice as in the first embodiment is given.

<Example 4 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. Similar to the first and second embodiments, also in the fourth embodiment, in the notification mode determination table for advance notice shown in FIG. 108, the success / failure determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45,000 ms (per super reach A). An example will be described in which the case where the notification mode in which the notification is switched from the “report B (first notification mode)” to the “report D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the respective notifications A to F are different from those of the first and second embodiments, and the fourth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched. Further, the button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 115 and 116, (a) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is started, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. Is the end of acceptance.

  In the mode of the notification B of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, the full meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and the button reception period (apparent reception) for notifying the player The period) is set to half of the actual button reception period (here, 3 seconds). Here, as in the case of the third embodiment, the decrease speed of the meter is set to be double the decrease speed of the actual button reception period, so that the player has the illusion that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is like this.

  In the mode of the notification D, the notification period is 4 seconds, a meter with a full tank is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and the player has the illusion that the button reception period has returned to the original state and the meter has recovered. Let After that, the decrease speed of the meter is set to be slower than the decrease speed in the mode of notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, at the time of starting the notification in the first notification mode, the full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in 1 second. This causes the player to recognize that the current button acceptance period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. After that, the meter of full tank is decreased by 1/4 per second. As a result, the player is made to recognize that the remaining time of the button reception period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. At the end of reception of the button reception period, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the meter decrease rate in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the rate of decrease in the first notification mode, the player can be illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, the expectation can be amplified, and amusement of the game can be enhanced by giving surprise. There is an effect that can be.

  Further, since the reduction rate of the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the button reception period is notified differently from the actual one in either the first or second notification mode. In addition, it is possible to adjust the book ends in the other notification mode, and it is possible to give various notices.

  In the above example, the display of the meter is returned to full when switching the notification mode, but if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after the switching is larger than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching, the display immediately after the switching is performed. The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to full. Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable to give the same notice as in the first embodiment.

<Example 5 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. In the fifth embodiment, as in the first, second and fourth embodiments, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 108, the success / failure determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An example will be described in which the case where the notification mode in which the notification is switched from the “report B (first notification mode)” to the “report D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the respective notifications A to F are different from the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when the notification mode is switched and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds in this case).

  117 and 118, (a) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is started, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. Is the end of acceptance.

  Further, the color of the meter is associated with the expectation for the big hit, and the expectation is low for the reference color (for example, blue) and high for the special color (for example, red). This point is the same as in the second embodiment.

  The mode of the notification B of the fifth embodiment is such that the notification period is set to 2 seconds and the meter with a full tank is displayed in the reference color at the start of the notification, and then the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced while playing the game. It is set to correctly inform the person of the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, by setting the decreasing speed of the meter to be the same as the decreasing speed of the actual button reception period (that is, the speed at which the meter is decreased by ⅙ per second), the actual button reception period is correctly set for the player. It is designed to be recognized.

  The mode of the notification D is that the notification period is set to 4 seconds, the meter with a full tank is displayed in a special color at the time of notification start, and then the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced, and the actual button is displayed to the player. It is set to correctly inform the remaining time of the reception period. In this case as well, the remaining time is informed at the same speed as the decrease speed of the actual button reception period (that is, the speed at which the meter decreases 1/4 in 1 second).

  That is, first, at the time of starting the notification in the first notification mode, the full-meter meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is reduced by 1/6 in 1 second. At the time when the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, the meter is returned to full and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. After that, the meter of full tank is decreased by 1/4 per second. Therefore, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of reception of the button reception period.

  Even with the notification as in the fifth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, so the player feels a momentary illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased. Therefore, the expectation can be amplified, and at the same time, it is possible to surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, since the reduction rate of the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the button reception period is notified differently from the actual one in either the first or second notification mode. Since the book ends can be adjusted in the other notification mode, it is possible to give various notices.

  Further, the color of the meter changes from the reference color to the special color, which has the effect of increasing the expectation for a big hit.

  In the above example, the display of the meter is returned to full when switching the notification mode. However, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after the switching increases more than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching. If so, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to full. Further, in the fifth embodiment, if the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, it is preferable that the same notice as in the second embodiment is given.

<Example 6 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. Also in the sixth embodiment, in the notification manner determination table shown in FIG. 108, the result of judgment is 15R big hit (special view B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), “notification B (first notification manner)”. An example will be described in which the case where the notification mode in which the notification mode is switched to "Notification D (second notification mode)" is won. Example 6 is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching the notification mode, and further, in the first notification period and the second notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying the notice is It is set to be different. It is preferable that the contents of each of the notifications A to F be set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment, but not limited to this.

  Further, in FIGS. 119 and 120, (a) is the start time of variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols, (b) is the start time of acceptance of the button acceptance period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is the time when the notification mode is changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so that the player is properly notified of the remaining amount of the actual button reception period while gradually reducing the remaining amount of. Here, the player is made to correctly recognize the actual button reception period by making the decreasing speed of the meter equal to the decreasing speed of the actual button reception period.

In the mode of the notification D, the notification period is set to T _D seconds (for example, 4 seconds), the meter with full tank is displayed with the reference color at the start of the notification, and then the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced. , Is set so that the player is properly informed of the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, the remaining time is notified at the same speed as the actual remaining time decreasing speed of the meter.

First, at the time of starting the notification of the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount [1 / (T _B + T _D )] per second. At the time when the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, full tan meters per second predetermined amount by (1 / T _D by) decreases, the remaining amount of the meter to 0 at the reception end of the button acceptance period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a one-time operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode at the time when the first notification period ends, and the meter is changed to the reference color during the subsequent second notification period. While displaying, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hit (continuous multiple operations). The rate of decrease of the meter is faster than in the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the content of the effect screen is selected according to the number of times the chance button 136 is operated and the random number value. When the operation screen of the chance button 136 is received and the effect screen is displayed, thereafter, the effect screen is continuously displayed until the button reception period ends. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the display returns to the state in which the changing decorative design is displayed on all the screens of the decorative design display device 208.

  The selection of the effect screen during the second notification period will be described in detail. For example, if the random number value is 20 to 49 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a preset number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), the effect screen "Success!" Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is activated once or more. Moreover, when the operation is performed less than the predetermined number of times, the effect screen of "sorry ..." is displayed. Further, when the random number value is 40 to 49, when the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen of "sorry ..." is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and when the button reception period ends, the meter display disappears and the decorative symbol display device is displayed. The display returns to the state in which the changing decorative pattern is displayed on all the screens of 208.

  The notification as in Example 6 also has the effect of giving the player the illusion that the button acceptance period has increased. In addition, since the operating condition of the chance button 136 changes with the passage of time, there is an advantage that the range of games can be expanded.

  In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 varies depending on the passage of time, the range of games can be expanded and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Example 7 of remaining time notification mode>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and the random number value obtained by the predetermined random number lottery. It is decided based on.

  For example, when the hit / miss determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is the fluctuation time for the super reach A, the decorative pattern is used by using the table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 123 (a). The outline (basic items) of the contents of the effect concerning the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the notices given before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the mode of notification B as the first notification mode to the mode of notification D as the second notification mode. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. The same applies to the other tables.

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 123 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the notice (hereinafter, also referred to as “advance notice”) given before the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” is acquired in the table, the effect screen in which the balloon of “?” Is attached to the princess character image is selected. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range.

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 123 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the first notification mode is determined. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 123 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the second notification mode is determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification D. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 123 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the notice (hereinafter, also referred to as “subsequent notice”) given after the button acceptance period is determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” is acquired in the table, the effect screen displayed as “really hot !!” is selected as the reach time character display notice after the button reception period. To be done. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set such that the effect screen displayed as “Geki Atsu !!” is easier to select than the effect screen displayed as “Reach”.

  More specifically, for example, when the win / no judgment result is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is the fluctuation time for the super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. 123 (a), 121 and a series of effects as shown in FIG. 122 are performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 121 and FIG _122, the period of t 2 ~t ₄ is configured as a button acceptance period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified as in the first embodiment.

First, during the period from t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period, the advance notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The content of this advance notice is such that, as a notice that the expectation for a big hit is low, an effect screen with a balloon of "?" Is displayed on the character image of the princess. Then, the button reception period starts. Here, as the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, the notification mode in which the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at t ₃ is won. Then, in the first notification mode, the meter with a full tank is displayed in blue (reference color) with a low expectation for a big hit at the start of notification, and the meter is gradually reduced as time elapses. In the subsequent second notification mode, the meter is changed to red (special color), which has a high expectation for a big hit, and displayed, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button reception period ends, the display of the meter disappears and the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, at which time the subsequent notice is displayed. The content of the subsequent notice is displayed here as "Gekiatsu!" As a notice with high expectation for a big hit.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in the standard color of blue, the expectation of a big hit is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a special color of red, the expectation of a big hit is high. In other words, in this example, in association with the expectation of a big hit by a notice before and after the button reception period, the first notification mode is likely to be set to a notification mode with low expectation, and the second notification mode is expected. It is easy to set a high notification mode.

  When associating the notification mode during the button reception period with the notices before and after the button reception period in this way, at least the following five patterns are conceivable.

  In the first pattern, it is set to give a notice before the button acceptance period (expectation; low) → during the button acceptance period (expectation; low → low) → notice after the button acceptance period (expectation; low) . In the second pattern, it is set to give advance notice (expectation; low) before the button reception period → during button reception period (expectation; low → low) → advance notice after button reception period (expectation; high) . In the third pattern, it is set to give a notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → high) → a notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, the notification is set before the button reception period (expectation; high) → during the button reception period (expectation: high → high) → notification after the button reception period (expectation: low) . In the fifth pattern, the notification is set before the button reception period (expectation; high) → during the button reception period (expectation: low → low) → notification after the button reception period (expectation: high) .

  According to the first pattern, it may be possible to lower the player's expectation for a big hit and to make the difference more clear when the expectation for a big hit is high. In addition, in the case where the expectation is low and a big hit occurs, it may be possible to increase the joy of the player. According to the second and third patterns, the player's expectation for a big hit may be gradually increased. According to the fourth pattern, the player's expectation for a big hit may not be increased too much, and the disappointment in the case of no big hit may be reduced in some cases. According to the fifth pattern, the player's expectation for a big hit is once lowered and then raised, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be raised or lowered, and finally the expectation can be further increased. is there.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 of the seventh embodiment, the announcement before and after the button reception period is made using the decorative pattern display device 208. However, for example, the effect movable body 224 or any lamp is used. Etc. may be performed by another rendering device. However, also in this case, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the expectation suggested by the advance notice are set in association with each other.

<Example 8 of the remaining time notification mode>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. First, the premise situation of the eighth embodiment will be described. When the hit / no hit determination result is a 15R special big hit (probability variation big hit), the decorative design display device 208 displays the stop of the decorative design with a design combination showing the 15R big hit (normal big hit). After making it, there is a case of performing a re-lottery that changes to a design combination of decorative symbols showing the 15R special jackpot (However, since it is internally determined whether it is a probable change or an uncertain change, the re-lottery is actually performed. It's not done). At this time, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops is divided into three periods, for example, (1) before the start of change and reach, (2) during reach, (3) during re-lottery. It is possible to set, and it is possible to set to give different notices in each of these three periods. Further, in the re-lottery, as shown in FIG. 106, the variation time is set to be longer for each hit of 5000 ms than the hit of each reach. This is because the variation time of winning includes the time for performing the re-lottery regardless of whether the variation is probable or not.

  In Example 8, when notifying the remaining time of the button reception period in any two or more of each of the above periods (1) to (3), the notification mode in each period (1) to (3) or At least two feelings of expectation given to the player are associated with the notice. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are the random number values obtained by the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and the predetermined random number lottery. It is decided based on and.

  For example, if the result of the determination is a big hit and the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is variation time for super reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 127 (a) is used. Then, the outline (basic items) of the content of the effect concerning the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notices given before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the mode of the notification a as the first notification mode to the mode of the notification b as the second notification mode before the reach of the period (1). Information for changing from the mode of the notification c as the first notification mode to the mode of the notification d as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as the first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information for changing from the mode of the notification e to the mode of the notification f as the second notification mode is included. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Although not particularly shown, a table corresponding to each case, such as a table in the case where the result of the hit determination is a big hit and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is a fluctuation time for super reach B, is separately prepared in advance from the ROM 406. Remembered in.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 127 (b) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the first notification mode before the reach of the period (1) is determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification a. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 127 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the second notification mode before the reach of the period (1) is determined. For example, when the random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” is acquired in the table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount as a mode of the notification b To be selected. As the mode of the notification b, the mode in which the meter increases by a predetermined amount is set to have a slightly higher expectation given to the player than the mode in which the meter does not increase. In this table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 127 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the first notification mode during the reach of the period (2) is determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification c. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 127 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the second notification mode during the reach of the period (2) is determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification d. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 127 (f) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. The detailed content of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) is determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification e. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, and based on, for example, a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 127 (g) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) is determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random number value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” is acquired in the table, the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. Different information is set in the table for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  More specifically, for example, in the case where the win / no judgment result is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is the fluctuation time for the super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. 127 (a), A series of effects as shown in 124 and FIG. 125 are performed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, 0 to t ₃ seconds is a period before reaching (1), t _{3 to} t ₇ seconds is a period during reaching (2), and t _{7 to} t ₁₁ seconds is re-lottery. The medium period (3), t ₁₁ seconds and thereafter, is set as the period during the big hit round. Then, the button acceptance period is notified in all the periods, and the suggested feelings are set in association with each other. It should be noted that, basically, one game is from the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation is stopped and the symbol is fixed, but in the case of a big hit symbol, one game is completed until the big hit round is over.

  First, in the first button reception period before the decorative design is stopped, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the meter color continues to be blue (reference color) in the second notification mode. ) Is displayed, and the remaining amount of the meter is increasing. In other words, the expectation for the big hit given to the player is still low although the expectation has been raised to a little low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, a notice such as "..." shown in FIG. 112 is displayed.

It should be noted that there are a case where the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds and a case where the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. The contents of the notice may be different as described in the second embodiment. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds, “...” is displayed, and the chance is displayed during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, "Gekiatsu!" May be displayed.

In the second button acceptance period during reach, at the time when t ₅ seconds elapse, the first notification mode changes to the second notification mode, and the color of the meter changes from blue to red (special color). Then, the expectation for a big hit changes from a little low to a high. Then, spruce determination when the result is 15R special jackpot (probability variation big hit) or 15R big hit (usually big hit), the combination of decorative symbols for jackpot predetermined at time t ₇ seconds (e.g., "decoration 2- decoration (2-decoration 2 "combination), and in other cases, it stops with a predetermined combination of decorative patterns for exfoliation (for example," decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2 "combination). If the result of the winning / judgment is the 15R special jackpot or the 15R jackpot, the re-lottery is performed and the third button acceptance period starts.

  Note that, during the second button reception period, as in the first embodiment, for example, the content of the notice given when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period. The content of the notice given when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, different contents may be set as in the second embodiment. In addition, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the result of judgment whether or not the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

In the third button reception period, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode when t ₉ seconds elapse. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 127 (g), the display shown on the right side in FIG. 125 (k) is performed, while the meter is displayed. When the mode in which is displayed in red is selected, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 125 (k) is performed.

  After that, whichever mode is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in (l) of FIG. 124 is displayed, and thereafter, the 15R special jackpot is won. If it is, the decorative pattern is a combination of predetermined patterns showing the 15R special jackpot (for example, a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), or a combination of predetermined patterns showing the 15R jackpot (for example, "decoration 2 -Decoration 2-decoration 2 "combination). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot is won, the decoration pattern stops at a predetermined combination of symbols indicating the 15R jackpot (for example, a combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2"). Even when the 15R special jackpot is won, the decorative design may not stop at the symbol combination showing the 15R special jackpot at this point, but may stop at the symbol combination showing the 15R jackpot. In that case, the probability variation promotion effect is performed during or after the jackpot round, or without the probability variation promotion effect, after the jackpot round, the special map variation game enters the probability change state of the special figure high accuracy normal figure high accuracy. It is set to

In the period (3) during re-lottery, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{8 to} t ₉ seconds, re-lottery is being performed from the time when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Until the period (3) of (3) ends, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, if you have won the 15R special jackpot, a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" or the like that indicates the 15R special jackpot, or , 15R jackpot is won, a combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" indicating the 15R jackpot is displayed (see the left side of FIG. 126 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, the button reception period is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode when t ₉ seconds elapse (FIG. 126 (FIG. 126 ( k) See center or right side).

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period and the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{9 to} t ₁₀ seconds, from the time when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Until the period (3) during the re-lottery ends, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" indicating the 15R special jackpot when the 15R special jackpot is won) A combination display, or a combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" indicating the 15R jackpot) when the player has won the 15R jackpot is produced.

  Since the time for performing the re-lottery is fixed to 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an arbitrary combination is properly adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this way, when notifying the remaining time of a plurality of times in one game, the player's expectation for a big hit can be variously changed. In particular, the expectations given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the expectations given by the notification mode or advance notice of each period in association with each other.

  That is, for example, in the case where all the announcements have low expectations for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) is lowered, and the distinction from the case where the expectation is high is clarified. You may be able to. In addition, when a big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) occurs when the expectation is low, it may be possible to further enhance the joy of the player.

  Also, when the player changes from a low notice to a high expectation, it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation of a big hit (especially the 15R special big hit). In addition, when the player's expectation for a big hit changes from a high expectation to a low one, the player's expectation for a big hit may not be raised too much, and the disappointment in the case of no big hit may be reduced. . In addition, if all the announcements have high expectations for the player, it may be possible to further increase the player's expectation for the big hit (in particular, the 15R special big hit).

<Other>
It should be noted that the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Embodiment 9), the full meter is first displayed only with the reference color (for example, blue). For example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is reduced by ⅙ per second. Go.

  When one second has passed from the start of the notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The position of the special area changed to the special color is also moved as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing [the timing of (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. 128] when the base end (here, the left end) of the meter is the reference color. In such a case, a notice with low expectation (for example, a notice of “...” shown in FIG. 110) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end portion of the meter is in the special color [timing (e) in FIG. 128], there is a high expectation (for example, in FIG. 110). The notice "That's super hot !!" is displayed. In this way, the range of games can be expanded in some cases by setting the notification mode so that a highly anticipated announcement cannot be seen unless the chance button 136 is pressed in a timely manner.

  The first mode in which the meter is displayed only with the reference color is called the first notification mode, and the mode in which the meter having the special area of the special color is displayed is called the second notification mode.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) of FIG. 128, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 128, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. As a result, the timing at which the player presses the Chan button 136 can be changed.

  Further, the above-described first to ninth embodiments of the remaining time notification mode can be appropriately combined and configured. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the above-described remaining time notification mode, the color of the meter is changed to change the level of expectation for the jackpot given to the player, but the meter blinks or does not blink. By changing and displaying the blinking mode, the level of expectation for a big hit may be changed. Further, for example, in Examples 1 to 9 of the remaining time notification mode described above, the advance notice is given by accepting the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operation means other than the chance button 136 is accepted. The notice may be given. Further, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, there may be provided a mode of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode and further to the third notification mode. That is, as the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change with the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two stages from the first to the second notification mode are provided. It suffices not to exclude a configuration further including a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in three or more steps.

  In addition, in Examples 1 to 9 of the remaining time notification mode described above, it is described that the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per second, but the meter may be decreased by a predetermined amount per unit time. It is not limited to 1 second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the above-described remaining time notification mode, the remaining time of the button reception period is represented in the form of a rectangular meter, but, for example, the form in which the hands of a clock advance or the form in which the sand of an hourglass falls Of course, it may be expressed in other formats such as.

  In addition, the gaming table according to the present invention is, as shown in FIG. 129, "a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, respectively. Stop button 1006 provided corresponding to each reel for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is achieved by a lottery (winning combination internal lottery), and a lottery means. The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control related to the reel rotation stop based on the lottery result, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means the internal winning. The determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination; In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the game medium payout processing for paying out the game medium corresponding to the winning mode, in addition to the effect means 1010 for executing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, this effect A means detects a launching device 1014 that launches a ball into a predetermined game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to enter a ball launched from the launching device, and a ball entering the winning opening 1016. A means 1018, a payout means 1020 for paying out the sphere when the detecting means 1018 detects the sphere, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a position for shielding the variable display device 1022. The variable display device is provided with a possible shutter 1024 and a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and when a game ball enters a winning opening and wins a prize. 022 is is stopped and displayed after varying the design, it is also suitable in which the slot machine 1000 "a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

That is, at least the gaming machine of the present invention is configured to determine whether or not the winning / losing determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) determines whether or not a certain winning / winning determination condition is satisfied, and the result of the winning / non-winning determination by the winning / missing determination means. In the case of a winning / judgment determination result (for example, a big hit), the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage. Regarding the control state shifting means (for example, the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state to the second control state, the operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the chance button 136), and the result of the hit / miss judgment. A notice means for producing an effect including a notice (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative pattern display device 208) is provided, and the notice means becomes effective when a player accepts an operation of the operation means. Regarding the attached period, a remaining time notification means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode, and the operation by the player during the reception period. When the operation of the means is accepted, a specific advance notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative pattern display device 208) that gives a predetermined advance notice suggesting the result of the success / failure determination, The notification mode of 1 has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means sets the remaining time to a predetermined time after a predetermined time has elapsed. The remaining time is notified by the first notification mode until the length of the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the predetermined time elapses (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 108). Mode determination table If "notification F" is won), the first notification mode is continued to notify the remaining time, while if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 108). (Notification A → E ”or“ Notification B → D ”or“ Notification C ₁ → C ₂ ”) is to switch from the first notification mode to the second notification mode to notify the remaining time. If

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the win / fail judgment, and function as a notification similar to the notification given by the specific notification means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the remaining time informing means gives the remaining time to be informed in each of the first informing mode and the second informing mode by a predetermined table (in accordance with a result of the win / fail judgment). For example, when the determination result is based on the notification mode determination table) and the result of the hit determination is the specific hit determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is determined. It is preferable to make the determination based on a specific table of the predetermined tables (for example, a big hit table of the notification mode determination table).

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming table, the operation means can accept at least one of a single operation by the player and a plurality of consecutive operations, and the specific advance notification means is the predetermined advance means. Until a certain period of time elapses, a notice is given on the condition that the one-time operation is accepted, and after the predetermined period of time, a notice is given on the condition that a plurality of consecutive operations are accepted. It is preferable to carry out.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual length of the remaining time. It is preferable.

  At this time, the remaining time notification means sets the predetermined length as a first length, and when the remaining time to be notified in the first notification mode is reduced to the first length, the predetermined time is determined. When the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the remaining time to be notified by the second notification mode is set to a second length longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase it.

  Further, the remaining time notifying unit notifies the remaining time by indicating the remaining time of the meter by the remaining amount of the meter, and notifies the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode in the first notification mode. It is preferable that the rate of decrease is faster than.

  The big hit in the present invention means that the next special figure fluctuation game is a special figure high accuracy general figure high accuracy [for example, 15R special big hit (see special drawing A of FIG. 101 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden positive change; FIG. 101). (See (a) Special map C)], Special map high-accuracy general map low probability [eg 2R big hit (hidden probability variation; see special map E of FIG. 101 (a))], special map low-accuracy general map high accuracy 15R big hit (see special drawing B in FIG. 101 (a)), 2R big hit (suddenly shortened time; see special drawing D in FIG. 101 (a)), and special figure low accuracy general figure low accuracy [eg 2R big hit (sudden normal) 101 (a), refer to the special drawing F)]].

  Further, the deviation referred to in the present invention is that the next special figure variation game is a special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy and does not apply to the above [for example, a small hit (see the special figures G and H of FIG. 101 (a)) and Out (see special drawings I and J in FIG. 101 (a))].

<Third Embodiment>
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the third embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. Note that, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 130 to 180 are used only in the description of the third embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the present embodiment. The symbols shown in FIGS. 130 to 180 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 130 to 180, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the description here, a light source using an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage tray for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 132) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 are built-in. A production button lamp 138 for causing the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player's balance return to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball. Further, a cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 130, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 132.

  131 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 130 as viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed this payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 133) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 133) that performs control processing relating to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 133) that performs control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (Refer to FIG. 133) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop clerk, A launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 133) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power management section 660 (see FIG. 133) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines. And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power supply is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 132 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. On the game board 200 shown in FIG. 132, the outer rails 202 and the inner rails 204 are arranged to partition and form a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, and a high-precision middle lamp 222. Are installed. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the pachinko machine 100. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the fourth symbol of the universal symbol and the fourth symbol of the special symbol are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a public figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100. The special figure display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100. The public figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 correspond to an example of notification means.

  It should be noted that the display areas of the public figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 (informing means) (here, the size of 7 segments corresponds) and the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 (design display means) (display here) The size of the screen is equivalent), the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is larger. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the public figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative pattern display device 208 can display a moving image.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 performs notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, is configured not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, two universal figure starting gates 251, 253, a universal figure electric accessory 252, a special figure starting aperture 230, and a variable winning port 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. are doing.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 130, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning hole 226 (general). When the winning hole 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 131 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the pachinko machine 100, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a “loan ball”. And call it "ball (gaming ball)". Of the plurality of general winning openings 226, only one general winning opening 226 is provided below the universal figure starting gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is arranged between the universal figure starting gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, when distinguishing this general winning opening 226 from other general winning openings 226, it is referred to as a central general winning opening 226. Moreover, when distinguishing the universal figure starting gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board from the other universal figure starting gate 253, it is referred to as the central universal figure starting gate 251. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the central general map starting gate 251 is not discharged to the game island side, and the ball can enter the central general winning opening 226. Is. However, even if the game ball passes through the central universal figure starting gate 251, the prize ball is not paid out. The central universal figure starting gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below it corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game nature of the pachinko machine 100 including the game board 200 shown in FIG. 132 will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not enter a game ball into the variable winning a prize port 234 to earn a ball, but instead enters a game ball into the universal electric accessory 252 to earn a ball. In a normal state (a special probability low probability general figure low probability state which will be described later), first, when the game ball enters the center general figure starting gate 251, which is provided at the lower center of the game board, Then, the general / universal figure hit determination (first hit / miss determination) is performed, and the universal figure display device 210 starts variable display. In addition to the variable display of the public figure display device 210, the decorative pattern display device 208 also performs the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure. That is, the decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the general design display device 210 in a form that enhances the effect.

  In the case of winning the hit in the hit / no hit judgment of the drawing, the drawing display device 210 displays a stop design (see FIG. 134 (c)) of a predetermined design mode corresponding to the hit, and the decorative design display device 208. Also, the combination of the decorative patterns corresponding to the hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to hit the right side, and the universal figure electric accessory 252 arranged in the right area of the game area 124 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). To do. That is, the universal figure electric accessory 252 includes a movable member (here, the door member 2521) that can be opened and closed, and when the door member 2521 is opened, the special figure starting port 230 can win. The door member 2521 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize at the special figure starting port 230. It is impossible to enter the special figure starting port 230 with the door member 2521 kept closed, and the closed state where the door member 2521 is closed is an open / closed state where winning is difficult. On the other hand, the open state of the door member 2521 is an open / close state in which winning is easy. Therefore, the special figure starting port 230, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size) Is a variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the universal figure starting gates 251, 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrances of the universal figure starting gates 251, 253 or less than the size of the entrances of those (251, 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and may be a little open as long as it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 7) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The universal figure electric accessory 252 shown in FIG. 132 is a variable starting means, and can be said to be an attacker-type electric tulip (electric chu).

  When the game ball enters the universal figure electric accessory 252 with the door member 2521 opened, it always enters the special figure starting port 230. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 230 with one opening of the door member 2521, the special figure win / fail judgment (lottery) is performed only for the first ball entered. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no special figure pending storage. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with a special figure holding lamp. In addition, a prize lamp 254 is provided near the universal figure electric accessory 252 (on the right side in this example). The winning lamp 254 emits light (blinks) when the special figure starting port 230 receives a prize. Further, it also emits light (blinks) when the door member 2521 is closed. The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  The door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), and a predetermined number of balls (here, 10 balls) enter the universal figure electric accessory 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for a predetermined time when the predetermined number of balls have entered. When the game ball enters the universal figure electric accessory 252, the special figure win / fail judgment (lottery) is performed, and the special figure display device 212 starts variable display. Further, along with the variable display of the special figure display device 212, the effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the single opening of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is aimed at obtaining the right to judge whether or not the special figure is valid once and increasing the number of prize balls by winning one or more balls. It is a thing.

  When a big hit is won in the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the special drawing display device 212 displays a stop design in a predetermined design mode corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative design display device 208 also produces an effect corresponding to the big hit. The variable start port 234 is opened for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or 2 times). Only one variable winning port 234 is provided below the central portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning port 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning port 234 is in a predetermined first open / closed state (closed state here) and in a second open / closed state (open state here) in which it is easier to win a game ball than in the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means capable of changing the open / closed state from one side to the other side. It should be noted that the closed state of the variable winning port 234 does not necessarily have to be completely closed, and may be a little open as long as it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. However, in the above-described Pachinko machine 100, since the open state of the variable winning port 234 is for an extremely short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), it is almost impossible to expect the payout due to the ball entering the variable winning port 234. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Also, in the normal state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state), when a big hit is won by the special figure win / fail judgment, the state always shifts to a power support state (also called a time saving state, high probability probability state of general figure). In the electric support state, first, aim at the universal figure starting gate 253 arranged in the right side area of the game area 124. The universal figure electric accessory 252 is provided directly below the universal figure starting gate 253. The universal figure starting gate 253 on the right side also corresponds to an example of the first approach area, and the special figure starting port 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 directly below is opened. 2 corresponds to an example of the entry area.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting gate 253 is not discharged to the game island side and the prize ball is not paid out. When a predetermined sphere detection sensor detects that the sphere has passed the right figure starting gate 253, it is judged whether or not the figure is normal, and the figure changing device starts the figure changing game.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in a power-supported state, it is easy to hit it by the judgment of hit / absence of a general figure. When the hit / non-judgment of the universal figure is successful, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened again, and when the game ball enters the universal figure electric accessory 252, the special figure is determined. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (high probability state of special map) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state of special map), the probability of winning the big hit by the success / failure determination of the special map changes, but the big hit with high probability in any state. Is configured to win. The variable winning a prize port 234 is not opened unless the jackpot is won by the special drawing determination (if it is lost). However, since it is in the electric support state, if the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 253 on the right side, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 opens with a high probability. In this way, it is easy to win the big hit of the special figure several times during the electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100, the state of this electric power support state corresponds to the special game state, and the effect of the bonus game is performed.

  In general, it is called Renso to repeatedly win the big hit of the special figure while the number of balls is not reduced. Therefore, even if it is in the non-electric power support state, it is sometimes referred to as a condominium to repeatedly win the big hit of the special figure while in the state of the probability change. However, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 132, there is only one special figure starting port, and the special figure starting port 230 does not win unless the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened. Therefore, herein, a state in which the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is repeatedly opened by repeatedly winning the jackpot with the electric support during the electric support state is referred to as a condominium. For example, even if the special figure loses one or more times during the electric support state, and the big hit with the electric support of the special figure is won, the condominium is established. There are two types of big hits, one with a certain variation and the other with a non-certain variation. It is easy to win the big jackpot with probability variation between the big jackpot with probability variation and the non-probability jackpot, but the number of times you can get the big jackpot with probability variation between the transition to the electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state. There are restrictions. Hereinafter, the limit of the probability variation is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a specified number. Here, the prescribed number of times is 11. When the specified number of times is reached, the electric support state shifts to the non-electric support state and the non-probability variation state. In other words, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, which is a normal state, is set. On the other hand, if the special figure wins the non-probability variation jackpot before reaching the specified number of times, the limiter is reset, and the number of winning the probability variation jackpot becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration described above, a plurality of types of time are prepared as the time until deriving the hit / no hit determination result of the universal figure, that is, the fluctuation time of the universal figure display device 210. A plurality of types of time are prepared for the time until the derivation, that is, the fluctuation time of the special figure display device 212. In the electric support state, the variation time of the universal figure is short, and when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 253 on the right side, the result of the hit determination is immediately notified. When the special map is a big hit, the variation time of the special map is less than or equal to one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the universal figure electric accessory 252, but one opening period. May become longer with a predetermined probability.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and the inner rail 204 of the inner rail 204 is provided. At the bottom, there is provided an outlet 240 for guiding balls that have not won any winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 to reach the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Either the (universal figure starting gate 251, 253, the special figure starting port 230) is won, or the out port 240 is reached without winning any winning port or starting port.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. A warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged on the front side of the effect device 206 in a region where the game balls can roll. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the central universal figure starting gate 251 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the operation.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means. .

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 133. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are It may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One may be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined first sub-control section 400 and second sub-control section 500 may be regarded as a predetermined control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two random number generation circuits are built in this circuit. And a main body opening sensor 1041, a front frame door sensor 1061, a ball storage tray door sensor 1082, and a lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 131 for detecting that the lower tray 128 is filled with a game ball. Signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor and a ball detection sensor provided inside each of the starting opening, the winning opening and the variable winning opening are received, and the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage are disturbed. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 212, and a general figure display device 2 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 0, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display parts 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a universal figure electric role A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of the object 252, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234, etc., and a drive circuit 335 for controlling light emission of the winning lamp 254 are connected. ing. The emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed by the first sub-control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs to the random number generation circuit 318 a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the special figure starting port 230 at that timing and stores the latched value in the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number is stored in the register for storing the random value corresponding to the starting port 230. Similarly, the random number generation circuit 318 receives the signal indicating that the ball has won the universal figure starting gates 251, 253 (these two universal figure starting gates are collectively referred to as the universal figure starting area). , Latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the universal figure starting region, and stores the latched value in the random number value storage register corresponding to the universal figure starting region, which is built in the random number value generating circuit 318. To do.

  Further, as the sphere detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a sphere that has won a predetermined winning opening or a starting opening such as a general winning opening 226, a special figure starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234. A sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253 can be given.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (here, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electrical system abnormality signal indicating that the electrical system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is abnormal, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electrical system abnormality signal output means.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 detects the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 131. The effect button detection sensor 426 is connected to a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 is connected to a second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500 with the predetermined voltage. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the pachinko machine 100, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the types of special drawings that the special drawing display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 134 (a) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect). The special figure variation game is started on condition that the ball detecting sensor detects that the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened and the ball enters the special figure starting port 230. When the special figure variation game is started, the special figure display device 212 repeats "lightening of special segment" (special figure variation game) in which all the seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. To do. When the variation time (first variation time) determined before the variation of the special figure starts, the special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of special figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure may be referred to as a variable stop display of the special figure. The fluctuation stop display of this special figure may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 134 (a), 22 types of special maps from “special map A” to “special map W” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 134 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol T”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. Any jackpot design is a jackpot design of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds).

  The term "round" here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 100, the number of operations of the variable winning a prize port 234 shown in FIG. 132 is represented, and 15 rounds means that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning a prize port 234 is performed once (or once). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / closed state changes from the first open / closed state (here, closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, open state), and the variable winning port 234 is During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is one of a predetermined round end condition (for example, entry of a predetermined number of game balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc.) 1 or a plurality of) is established, the process ends. During the predetermined round, the big hit game is going on.

  FIG. 134B is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG. When the special figure is a big hit in the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability), that is, in the state where the special figure is a big hit in the non-electric power support state, the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability that it is performed is extremely low, and it is indicated in FIG. 134 (b) that the universal electric accessory is released (initial). This means that the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is to be opened once for determining whether the special figure is true or false. When the universal figure electric accessory is released (initial stage), special figures A to P become big hits with certainty changes. If it is with a certainty change, in the next special figure variation game, it shifts to a state in which there is a high probability of winning the big hit. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure low probability state shifts during the big hit game, and if the big hit with probability variation is won, the special figure high probability state shifts after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, special figure Q to special figure T are big hits without any change.

  Further, at the time of releasing the universal figure electric accessory (initial stage), if the special figure is a big hit, time saving is given. That is, special figure A to special figure P become a big hit with a time reduction until the next big hit, and special figure Q to special figure T are given special time while the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. After any of the big hit games from special figure A to special figure T, the state shifts to the state with the electric choo support (electric sapo) (hereinafter referred to as the electric sapo state). The power support state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time saving state. The electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the probability of winning the universal figure variation game is 1/60 in the low probability state of the universal figure (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 1 / 1.0003 in the high probability state of the universal graphic (electric power support state). To do. Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds in the non-electric support state is shortened to 1.5 seconds in the electric support state. The probability of entering the special map starting port 230 increases due to the probability change or shortness of the figure. Note that, in the pachinko machine 100, the universal figure confirmation variation and the universal figure variation are performed in the power support state (time saving state), but the power channel opening period may be extended or the power channel opening frequency may be increased. From the above, in the non-electrically supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure starting port 230 than in the electrically supported state. That is, in the non-electric power support state, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is likely to be in a closed state, and the entry rate of the game ball into the special figure starting port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is easily opened, and the rate of entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 230 is increased. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of a non-specific state (corresponding to a normal game state), and the electric support state corresponds to an example of a specific state (also corresponds to a special game state). Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game state transition means for transitioning the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, the Kupachinko machine 100 is provided with a limiter (limiter) on the number of times that the jackpot with a definite change can be obtained from the time of shifting to the electric power support state to the time of shifting to the non-electric power support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric power support state is switched to the power support state, the probability variation counter is set to a specified number of times. The probability variation counter is decremented by 1 each time a big hit with probability variation is obtained. The probability variation counter corresponds to an example of the specified number of times counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with a probable variation after the transition to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times, it is in a condominium Then, the special drawings A to P become a big hit with a definite change and a time saving until the next big hit. Further, in the special maps A to P, the probability variation counter is not reset. On the other hand, when the limiter has not arrived, the special symbols Q to T are big hits without probability variation, and the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, and the time saving is 100 times the symbol variation stop display of the special symbol. Granted during the performance.

  Furthermore, when the probability variation counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter arrives, the special figures A to H and the special figures Q and R are big hits without a positive variation, and the time saving is shortened. The symbol variation stop display of the special figure is given during 100 times, and the probability variation counter is reset. On the other hand, when the limiter arrives, the special figures I to P and the special figures S and T are big hits without any definite change and no time saving, and the limiter setting is completed and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  Summarizing the above, from the first hit (when the electric figure electric accessory is released (initial)) to when the limiter is not reached (during the continuous vacation), special maps A to P are in the special map high probability general figure high probability state. Yes, the special maps Q to S are the special map low probability general map high probability states. Then, when the limiter is reached, the special maps A to H and the special maps Q and R are in the special low probability general figure high probability state, and the special maps I to P and the special maps S and T are the low special maps. Stochastic figure is a low probability state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 100, the profit given to the player based on the stop symbol aspect of the special figure is in the gaming state (when the universal figure electric auditors are released (initial), when the limiter is not reached (during the condominium). , Different when reaching the limiter), but has a common stop symbol mode of special figures in different game states.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, two types of lost symbols are prepared. In FIG. 134 (a), the special figure V is the first missing symbol and the special figure W is the second missing symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning a prize port 234 does not open and close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol whose control state (game state) does not change before and after the small hit game may be prepared. The special figure display device 212 is equivalent to an example of a first symbol display means for notifying the result of the decision of the special figure (second decision result).

  FIG. 135 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the general picture of the pachinko machine 100, that is, "general picture A" which is a winning symbol and "general picture B" which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the sphere has entered the universal figure starting area (the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253), the universal figure display device 210 indicates that all seven segments are lit. , The "universal figure fluctuation display" (universal figure fluctuation game) that repeats the lighting of one segment in the center is performed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the lost symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 135 (a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions are the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable stop display of the universal figure. The public figure display device 210 corresponds to an example of a second symbol display means for notifying the hit / no hit determination result (first hit / miss judgment result) of the common figure.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows an example of a universal figure decoration pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the pachinko machine 100, which are "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". On the condition that the ball has entered the universal figure starting area (universal figure starting gates 251 and 253), each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → ... "Variable display". That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit of a general figure, a combination of decorative patterns in which three identical decorative patterns are lined up in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2"). -Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a combination of three decorative symbols arranged in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the loss of a general figure, the combination of decorative symbols (for example, a gap) other than the combination of decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are lined up is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this "variable display of decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a variable symbol stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode of the general symbol (see FIG. 135 (a)) and the stop symbol mode of one decorative symbol displayed in each symbol display area 208a-c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure) The decorative pattern (see (b)) is larger than the decorative pattern (see (b) in the figure).

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 is provided with a special figure determination random number counter, a special figure variation time determination random number counter, and a general figure variation period determination random number counter. Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure right / wrong judgment result, a special figure determination result, a special figure fluctuation time determination result, a general figure appropriateness judgment result, a general figure fluctuation period determination result, and a general figure reservation number are stored. . Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a general figure reservation storage section divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the general figure validity determination (lottery) can be suspended.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 136 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In the pachinko machine 100, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (here, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 54 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update processing, a random number counter for initial value generation for generating the initial value of the random number counter for special figure determination, a random value for special figure fluctuation time determination, and a random value for general figure fluctuation period determination Update the two random number counters to generate For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (here, here) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (here, 32.8 ms) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). Restart once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 133 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 133 stores winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), it is determined that the general winning opening 226, the universal figure starting gates 251, 253, the special figure starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 have been entered or passed. That is, it is determined that the winning holes 226 and 234, the starting opening 230, and the gates 251 and 253 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the random number counter for determining a special figure used in the main control unit 300 is used. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the general figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original It is stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, in order to measure the time to change / stop display the symbol on the universal figure display device 210, the time to display / change the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 for measuring the time to display the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 is measured. Various timers including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning holes 226, 234 and the starting opening 230, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning hole in the RAM 308 is read and 1 is added. , The original prize ball number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize receiving process, if there is a prize in the universal figure starting area (general figure starting gates 251 and 253) and the number of pending universal figure variation games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4), , Get predetermined start information. That is, if the number of reserved universal figures is less than a predetermined number, the universal figure winning random number value and the random number value for determining the universal figure variation period are acquired. The universal figure winning random number and the universal figure variation period determining random number correspond to an example of the starting information according to the present invention. The universal figure winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (the value of the hardware random number + the value of the R register + 1), and the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation period is the value obtained by processing the software random number ( The value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). A random number value storage register corresponding to the universal figure starting region of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 133, a random number counter for determining a universal figure variation period provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 that performs random number processing are combined. The one corresponds to an example of the starting information generating means (first starting information generating means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the universal figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This public figure reservation storage unit can store up to a predetermined upper limit number (here, four) of the starting information acquired when the game ball enters the universal figure starting area (universal figure starting gates 251 and 253). It corresponds to a storage means. At this time, the starting information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the hold storage unit of the universal map. In this case, the temporary area may be used as the starting information storage means. Alternatively, the ordinary storage unit and the temporary area may be used as the starting information storage unit. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations for public figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations for general figures is incremented by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 does not have a special figure pending storage. The special control winning flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened, the special figure prize flag is in the off state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains predetermined start information when the special figure starting port 230 has a prize and the special figure winning flag is in the off state. That is, the special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure changing time determining random number value are acquired as the predetermined start information. The special figure winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (the value of the hardware random number + the value of the R register + 1). It is a value obtained by processing a software random number (value of software random number + value of R register + 1). A random number value storage register corresponding to the special figure starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. This corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means (second starting information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure variation time determining random number value acquired here are stored in the special figure starting information storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a set of starting information. It

  Further, in the prize receiving process, when the predetermined ball detection sensor detects a prize (ball) to the universal figure starting gates 251, 253, the special figure starting port 230, or the variable winning port 234, the first sub In the transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning acceptance information indicating presence / absence of winning (ball entry) at the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253, the special figure starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234 is set.

  In addition, when there is a prize in the special figure starting port 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the prize lamp 254 shown in FIG. 132 to emit light.

  It should be noted that the start information of the universal figure is not acquired if the number of pending figures of the universal figure is a predetermined number or more, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the special figure starting information is not acquired if the special figure winning flag is in the ON state, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 133 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED configuring the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to display the lost design. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 135 (a)) and the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 135 (b)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player. If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later.

  FIG. 138 (a) is a diagram showing a table in which operation modes of the universal figure electric accessory 252 are summarized. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage region of the door member opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308, while the normal operation is set in the region. In the pachinko machine 100, regardless of whether it is in the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) or in the non-electric power support state (universal figure low probability state), the storage area of the door member opening period management timer is 5.8. Set the information indicating the open period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the universal figure electric accessory 252 in the electric support state is the same as the operation of the universal figure electric accessory 252 in the non-electric support state, and the player sees the operation mode of the universal electric piece 252. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is in the electric support state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is for opening / closing the door member 2521 for 5.8 seconds set here or until the special figure starting port 230 detects winning of a predetermined number of game balls (here 10 balls). A signal for holding the door member 2521 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) of. In the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (universal figure electric accessory 252) can be in the open state (second state) only once during one operation period, so this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period. Equivalent to. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command / universal figure electric auditors release setting processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal figure operation processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door member opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the normal figure operation set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained. At the same time, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, information indicating a closing period of 0.5 seconds in the electric support state (probability figure high probability state) is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, and the non-electric support state (normal figure low) is set. In the stochastic state, information indicating the closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric power support state (universal figure low probability state). Corresponds to an example. Therefore, the first period is longer in the non-electrically supported state than in the electrically supported state. Note that, as described above, the electric support state here is an example of the specific state, and the non-electric support state is an example of the non-specific state. Compared to the non-specific state (non-electric power support state), the specific state (electric power support state) is more likely to cause the variable starting means (universal electric member 252) to be in the second state (open state), and the variable start means (special power state). The entry rate of the game ball into the starting port 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 2521 until the closing period set here elapses. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command / universal figure electric auditors article closing setting processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Then, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the door member closing period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general area inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command universal figure non-operating process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the Pachinko machine 100, the normal operation period is the first operation time (here, 6.3 seconds) in the electric support state (the high probability state of the figure) and the non-electric support state (low probability state of the general state). Then, the second operation period (here, 65.8 seconds) is longer than the first operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer that measures the elapse of these operation periods (period during normal operation), and the state of general operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 and the storage area of the operation period timer is set. You may make it set the information which shows a predetermined period. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the fact that the condition of being won at the hit of the universal figure corresponding to an example of the first predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (universal figure electric accessory 252) can be in the second state (open state) only once during one operation period, but there is a plurality of states in the second state (open state). It may be a mode that turns. For example, simultaneously with the start of the operation period, the open state is maintained for 1 second, the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, For example, 0.5 seconds), and finally, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the electric support state and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In this case, 2 seconds for maintaining the last second state (open state) corresponds to an example of the second period. Further, in the non-electric power support state, the last closed state of one operation period is 60 seconds, which is the longest period longer than the closed state (0.5 seconds in this example). Is.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that controls the opening and closing of the door member 2521 in this manner corresponds to an example of a variable start control unit that controls the universal figure electric accessory 252 that is the variable start unit.

  Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure lost flag is turned on. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Succeedingly, in a step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is executed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first determines whether the universal figure variation game is being performed or whether the universal figure electric accessory 252 is being opened / closed (the state of the universal figure is operating), and either of them is determined. If it has been performed on the other hand, the universal figure-related lottery process ends. On the contrary, if neither is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is 1 or more, and if 0, the universal figure related lottery process ends, and 1 If it is more than the above, one set of random number values (general figure winning random number value and random number value for general figure fluctuation period determination), which is the start information stored in the earliest, is retrieved from the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM 308. , The starting information (set of random number values) still stored in the reserved storage section is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, the starting information stored in the earliest time is taken out from the universal figure holding storage section, and if the starting information is stored in the universal figure holding storage section, the Nth oldest starting information is N-1 in the universal figure holding storage section. It is set as the second oldest startup information. In addition, 1 is subtracted from the number of reservations of the universal figure stored in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300, which performs a process of extracting one set of random number values (a general figure winning random number value and a random number value for determining a universal figure fluctuation period) from the universal figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 308, is a start information acquisition unit (first start). Information acquisition means). Next, the universal figure validity determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a universal figure validity determination table.

  FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for general / universal pattern judgment, and FIG. 138 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability table for general / universal pattern judgment.

  In the universal figure hit / miss determination process, the hit / fail determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. If the time saving flag is turned off (in the non-electric power saving state), it is determined whether or not the general figure is valid by using the low probability table shown in FIG. 138 (b), and if the time saving flag is turned on (the power saving support). (If it is in a state), it is determined whether or not the general figure is valid by using the high probability table shown in FIG. 138 (c). The universal figure winning / judgment determination is performed based on the universal figure winning random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information extracted from the universal figure pending storage unit of the RAM 308. The Atari probability of the ordinary figure is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 138 (b), and is 1 / 1.0003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 138 (c), which is a considerably high probability. In the universal figure winning a prize, the central universal figure start gate 251 becomes the main in the non-electric support state, and in the electrical support state, it is urged to hit the right side, and the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is easily opened. The general map starting gate 253 will be the main one. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 138 (b) is a table used when the central universal figure starting gate 251 is won, and the high probability table shown in FIG. 138 (c) is a table used when the general figure starting gate 253 is winning on the right side. You can say that. Here, deriving the “hit” or “miss” corresponds to the universal figure hit / miss determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the universal figure hit / miss determination process is the first hit / damage determination means. This corresponds to an example. Further, the hit or hit determination result of “hit” corresponds to an example of a specific first hit or hit determination result.

  When the execution / non-execution determination process of the general figure is completed, the general figure fluctuation period in the fluctuation stop display of the general figure is determined. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a general-use figure variation period determination table is also stored.

  FIG. 139 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability probability table for determining a universal figure fluctuation period, and FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability per table for determining a universal figure variation period. Further, FIG. 139 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for general figure fluctuation period determination, and FIG. 139 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability per table for general figure fluctuation period determination.

  Also in the determination of the universal figure fluctuation period, the winning / shortening determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state by referring to the time saving flag. If the time saving flag is turned off (in the non-electric power support state), the universal figure fluctuation period is determined using the low probability table shown in FIGS. 139 (a) and 139 (b), and the time saving flag is set. If is turned on (in the power support state), the universal figure fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIGS. 139 (c) and (d). In addition, based on the result of judgment on whether or not the universal figure is valid, if it is a loss, the table for varying the universal figure is determined using the table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 139 (b) and FIG. The universal figure fluctuation period is determined using the hit table shown in FIGS. 139 (a) and 139 (c). Further, the universal figure changing period is determined based on the random number value for determining the universal figure changing period (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the starting information extracted from the universal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. Note that the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the universal figure fluctuation. In addition, in the case where the general / universal figure validity determination result is a loss in the non-electricity support state, the general figure fluctuation period is determined also based on the number of holdings at that time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a set of random number values (a general figure winning random number value and a random number value for determining a general figure fluctuation period) is reserved from the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Since the number is subtracted by one, the minimum value of the number of reserved balls in the general map here is 0 and the maximum value thereof is 3. As shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation period belongs to the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of reserved universal figure is three, the universal figure fluctuation period of 3 seconds becomes 0, When it is ˜2, the fluctuation period is 10 seconds. When the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation period is 59001 or more, it is a common universal figure fluctuation period regardless of the number of reserved universal figures. Further, in the electric support state, even if the result of judgment on whether or not the universal figure is lost is a common universal figure variation period regardless of the number of retained universal figures.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (c) and FIG. 139 (d), in the electric power support state, the universal figure fluctuation period is 1.5 even if the universal figure valid / invalid determination result is a hit or a loss. It will be an extremely shortened fluctuation period of seconds. The universal figure fluctuation period in the electric support state is shorter than the open period of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 described later. Further, the universal figure fluctuation period in the electrical support state is shorter than the universal figure fluctuation period in the non-electric support state.

  Further, in each of the tables in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (d), the representation mode of the universal figure decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is determined according to the length of the universal symbol variable period, is shown. The information indicating the universal figure fluctuation time determined here is included in the universal figure fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as will be described later, and the first command that received the command. The sub-control unit 400 specifically determines an effect mode of the universal figure decoration symbol shown here based on the information indicating the universal figure variation time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the production mode of the universal figure decoration pattern. With normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 132) stop and display the same decorative symbol, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. The state of variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the same symbol as the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed) is stopped and displayed, a predetermined combination of big hit symbols (FIG. 135) This is a state in which the combination of decorative symbols shown in (b) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a version of normal reach that has special effects such as variable display added to improve the effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also a mode called special variation in the presentation mode of the decorative pattern. Special variations include special multi-line reach, full-reach reach, special full-reach reach, etc. When simply called reach, it means normal reach, super-reach, and a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including special variations. This reach means that the result of the general / universal figure acceptance / rejection determination in the universal figure related processing becomes a specific first impact / invalidity determination result (a predetermined result in which the player's advantage is high) after the determination of the appropriateness / invalidity. It is a notice effect that is notified to the player in advance before notifying the result of the hit determination, and whether or not to reach is determined after the hit determination.

  When the general figure fluctuation period is determined, the general figure related lottery process (step S223) ends, and then the special figure state update process is executed (step S225). The special figure state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure. For example, in the special figure state update processing in the middle of the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), turning on and off the 7-segment LED configuring the special figure display device 212 Repeated lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 performs a variable display of the special figure (special figure variation game).

  In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the general command rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  The RAM 308 of the main controller 300 is provided with a big hit flag and a loss flag. In the special figure state update processing started at the timing when the special figure fluctuation display period has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in the special figure-related lottery process described later ( Based on the stop pattern mode of the special drawing), the 7 segment LED constituting the special drawing display device 212 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special drawing is being stopped is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 is one of the big hit symbols (special figure A to special figure T), the first lost symbol (special symbol V), and the second lost symbol (special symbol W). Confirm display of one symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the confirmed special display is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special map variation game.

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described later, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When this big hit flag is on, in the special figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. In addition to setting the special figure in operation, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the RAM 308 to stand by while displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure waiting time management timer provided in. Also, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 0.1 seconds) Or, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the variable winning a prize opening for the predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) A signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the H.234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing which repeats this opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and starts at the timing when it is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display. Information indicating the production standby period is stored in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the standby state for the period in which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the device 208 is finished is displayed. Set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means that controls the change of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 during the big hit game state. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable winning a prize port 234 is stored, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds from the ROM 306 to determine whether or not the special figure variation game is hit. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation flag in addition to the time saving flag, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result and the special figure determination result. At the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the game state when the start information used for (when the general electric motor accessory is released (initial stage) , The probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are set to ON.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area is inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set the special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update processing in the case where the special figure is not operating, the next process is executed without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing (step S229) is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a second winning / judging determination unit. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), the lottery (first win / fail judgment) is executed, the special figure to be stopped and displayed, and the variation period (first variation period) in the symbol variation stop display of the special figure are determined. . First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit / miss determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device 212 is performing the special figure change display or the stop display, and if any of them is being displayed, the special figure related lottery process ends. . On the other hand, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or during non-special figure operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, special figure related lottery processing If it is set to the end and the special figure is not in operation, it means that the hit / absence determination prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit / miss determination condition is satisfied. The determination here is whether or not the start information is stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the starting information is not stored, the special figure-related lottery process ends, and if the starting information is stored, the predetermined win / loss determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined win / fail judgment condition is satisfied, the start information stored in the special figure starting information storage area (special figure winning random number value, special figure deciding random number value, and special figure variation time deciding random number value) Is acquired, and the special drawing validity determination (first validity determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a hit / miss determination table for a special drawing.

  FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining the special drawing validity, and FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining the special drawing validity.

  In this special figure hit determination processing, the hit determination is performed based on whether the current control state is the special figure probability change state by referring to the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308. If the probability variation flag is off (in the special probability low probability state), the special probability determination is made using the low probability table shown in FIG. 140 (a), and the probability variation flag is in the on state (special probability high probability). (State), the high probability table shown in FIG. 140 (b) is used to determine whether or not the special figure is valid. The special figure win / no judgment is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information acquired from the special figure starting information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, when the specified number of times is reached (during limiter), the pachinko machine 100 shifts to an indeterminate change state (special probability low probability state). In this case, in the special symbol win / fail judgment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), there is a 12.5% chance of winning the jackpot without time saving, and with a 12.5% chance of the symbol fluctuation stop display of the next special symbol. To win the big hit with a time saving until the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is displayed 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, in the non-probability variation state, the special figure win / loss determination result is a big hit result with 25% establishment as shown in the special figure win / loss determination table of FIG. 140 (a). As shown in the special figure valid / invalid judgment table 140 (b), the result is almost a big hit. The special jackpot judgment result of this "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific second hit judgment result.

  When the execution of the special figure appropriateness determination processing is completed, special figure determination processing for determining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 140 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit special figure determination table. In the big hit special figure determination table shown in FIG. 140 (c), the number of times until the limiter is reached is also shown.

  This special figure determination processing is performed based on the random number for special figure determination (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information acquired from the special figure starting information storage area of the RAM 308. Further, the special figure stop symbol mode is determined based on the game state when the starting information used when obtaining the special figure hit determination result is obtained. In other words, if the special map hit / non-judgment result is a big hit at the time of releasing the general map electric auditors (at the time of initial general map hit), there is a 96% probability that the special map A to special map is based on the random number value for determining special map P (decisive change and big hit pattern with time reduction until the next big hit) decided to one of the special drawings, with a probability of 4% special drawing Q ~ special drawing T (no big change and 100 times big hit with big time pattern) ) Of any of the above. In addition, the number of times to reach the limiter, if one of the special maps A to P is decided, it means that the jackpot with probability variation has been won once, and the maximum number of wins with the jackpot with probability variation. (11 times) -1 time = 10 times. On the other hand, when any one of the special maps Q to T is determined, the maximum number of times of the jackpot with probability variation is 11 times. Even if the result of the special map judgment is a big hit when the limiter has not arrived (during the continuous vacation), there is a 96% probability that the special map A to the special map P (with a probability change) based on the random number value for determining the special map. Until the next big hit, it is decided to be one of the special drawings among the big hit symbols with time reduction, and with a probability of 4% any of the special figure Q to special figure T (the big hit pattern with no probability change and 100 times reduction) It decides on the special map. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be one of the special maps A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation has been won once, and the subtraction is one. When any one of FIGS. Q to T is determined, the reset is performed and the specified number of times 11 is set again. In the case where the special figure hit judgment result is a big hit when the limiter arrives, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for determining the special figure. (Sudden change and 100 big hits with time reduction) It is decided to be one of the special drawings, and there is a 4% probability of special drawing I to special drawing P, special drawing S, special drawing T (without certain change and short time). Big hit pattern without)) to be decided. In this case, the number of times until reaching the limiter is reset when any special drawing of special drawing A to special drawing H, special drawing Q and special drawing R is determined, and the specified number of times is set to 11 times again. To be done. If any one of the special drawings I to P, the special drawing S, and the special drawing T is determined, the number is 0 times.

  That is, the number of times that the jackpot with a definite change can be obtained is 11 times between the transition to the electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state, and the non-probability change state (special probability low probability state) is not confirmed. When the big hit is drawn, the limiter number of 11 times is set, and when the probability variation big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. When a non-probable variation big hit is drawn during the continuous vacation, the limiter number is reset, the prescribed number of 11 times is set again, and a time saving of 100 times is given. In other words, the fluctuation of the special figure is allowed once in a short time after the non-probability variation big hit, and therefore, the collision is added to the reset of the limiter number by hitting at this time. Further, when the limiter arrives, even if the probability variation pattern is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit. However, if a time saving is given at this time, the real condominium will be added as will be described later in detail.

  When the execution of the special figure determination process is completed, the special figure fluctuation period in the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is determined. The special control fluctuation period determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing a big hit table for determining a special figure fluctuation period at the time of high probability of a general figure, and FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing a big hit table for determining a special figure fluctuation period at a low probability of a general figure. FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a special table variation period determination loss table for high probability of universal figure, and FIG. 7D is a diagram showing a special table variation period loss table for general diagram low probability.

  In determining the special map fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 141 is used based on the previous special map validity determination result and the electric support state (universal figure high probability state) or non-electricity support state (universal figure low probability state). To determine the special map fluctuation period. Further, the special figure variation period is determined based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation period (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information acquired from the special figure starting information storage area of the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation. As shown in the table of FIG. 141 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special drawing valid / invalid determination result is a big hit in the electric power support state, the special drawing variation period has a considerably high probability of being a predetermined short period (here: Then, it will be a fluctuation period of 1 second). This predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252, and while the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened once, During the meantime, the result of the special figure validity determination based on winning the special figure starting port 230 is often notified in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are prepared. The probability of being a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of being a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 141 (b), when the special figure valid / invalid judgment result is a big hit in the non-electric power support state, the special figure change period is uniformly a predetermined period (here, 60 seconds) change period. become.

  Further, as shown in the table of FIG. 141 (c), when the special figure valid / invalid determination result is lost in the electric power support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 10 seconds, which is shown in FIG. As shown in the table, when the special figure valid / invalid determination result is lost in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the variation time of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds in the non-electric power support state. Also, only when the special figure win / loss judgment result is a big hit in the electric support state, the period of the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure that notifies the special figure win / fail judgment result is made different, and the bonus game effect is performed. During the special game state, the special figure determination is made at different intervals.

  The information indicating the variation period of the special figure is included in the symbol variation start command of the special figure transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the command is a decoration On the symbol display device 208, if it is a fluctuation period of 120 seconds, a big hit performance of Premier A is displayed during the fluctuation period, and if it is a fluctuation period of 360 seconds, a big hit performance of Premier B during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the special figure fluctuation period is determined, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) is ended, and then the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 137 is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit. Sent to 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (here, basic command, special symbol variation start command, special symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general figure hold increase Information such as a command that can specify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. In the case of the special symbol variation start command, the command data, the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, the information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), the special symbol variation time Including the information, in the case of the special symbol variation stop command, the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, the information indicating the control state, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of winning at the special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  In the general command winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the control state. Set the information that represents. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission processing, the command data represents effect control information and control states stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Set the information. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the commands related to these effects transmits control commands related to the effects to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the received commands.

  Further, in the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, and the like is set. In the general command special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, information indicating the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the like is set in the command data.

  Further, in this step S233, general command universal figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, the command data of the hold increase command is set with information indicating the control state.

  Further, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as a command related to the universal figure, a universal symbol variation start command indicating that the variation display of the universal figure has started (does) is also transmitted. The command data of this general pattern variation start command includes information indicating the result of judgment on whether or not the universal pattern is valid, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), information indicating the variation time of the universal pattern, and the probability variation. Information and the like indicating the value of the counter are included. Further, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the universal figure variation stop command indicating that the variation display of the universal figure is stopped (executed) and the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 are opened. A universal figure electric accessory opening start command indicating that it has started (execution), a universal figure electric accessory closing command that indicates that its door member 2521 has closed (execution), etc. are transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 133. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and power-on information is set in bit 6. (When it is turned on, it indicates that the command has been transmitted for the first time after the power is turned on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the data after encryption processing. The number of payout requests is shown.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error, and the glass frame opening error or the lower plate is detected. When a full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is set with device information indicating the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence of a lower tray full tank error. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 133 are driven to control the opening / closing of the universal figure electric accessory 252 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the universal figure display device 210 and the special figure are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the display device 212, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Further, when the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 132 to emit light. By the emission of the winning lamp 254 when the door member 2521 is closed, it may be possible to make the player think of a predetermined special effect, which will be described later, as an effect based on the Den Chu prize.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on, in order to determine whether or not the cutoff (power cutoff) of the power supply has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241, and when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt enable is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 136 is executed. Return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power restoration is saved as restoration data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. And then returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 136.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting of step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, the initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 133 and the initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408 are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the depression of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 131 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416.

  In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting control commands to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. When the control command is set in this transmission area, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  142 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process shown in FIG. 142 (a).

  In the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 137, the first sub-control unit 400 receives from the main control unit 300 the universal figure operation start command indicating the start of the universal figure operation period and the universal figure electric accessory 252. A universal figure electric accessory closing command indicating the closing of the door member 2521 in, a symbol variation start command indicating the variation start of the special figure, etc. are transmitted. The universal figure operation start command includes information indicating the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), here, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern of opening once and closing once, but the first sub-control unit 400 uses one of the patterns based on this information. It is possible to recognize the last closing of the door member 2521 during the normal operation period of one time. That is, it is possible to recognize the closing just before the electric Chu opening end waiting time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether or not the special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). That is, if the symbol variation start command has not been received during the period from the reception of the universal figure operation start command to the reception of the universal figure electric accessory closing command indicating the last closure, the special effect When the start condition is satisfied, the special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process of step S3092 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S3093. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. 142 (a). Upon receiving the special effect command, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 142 (c). FIG. 142 (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 142 (d). FIG. 142 (d) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered at a predetermined cycle by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
The second sub-control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. An image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is connected to the second sub control unit 500. The image controller has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 and displays the display image using the display area (work area) of the VRAM. The generated image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM) and the like in the attribute register of the GPU based on the table of position information etc., and then the image from ROM to VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU, and when the transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU has information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, if the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  Then, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is given, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When the generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts the number of scene images generated is incremented (+1) and the processing ends. To do.

  As described above, the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the image display means. Moreover, what combined the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 is equivalent to an example of an effect control means.

  In addition, the second sub control unit 500 also controls the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, the flow of the game on the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the screens of the decorative symbol display device in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 143 in stages. In FIG. 144, time elapses in the alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to subsequent figures. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144, the fourth symbol 217 of the universal symbol and the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, the white circles represent the changing display, the black circles represent the stopped display, and the same applies to the subsequent figures.

  When the game is started, it is in the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). The player aims at the central universal figure starting gate 251, and hits left. Eventually, the central universal figure starting gate 251 is won (step S501), and the universal figure display device 210 starts the symbol variation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display panel, the symbol variation of the decorative symbol of the general figure is started (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being stopped and displayed, but the fourth symbol 217 of the ordinary symbol is being variably displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach effect using the decorative pattern of the universal pattern may be performed (step S503), but the reach effect is not performed, and the universal pattern display device 210 has the lost pattern (see FIG. 135 (a)). ) Is stopped and displayed, and on the decorative design display device 208, combinations of decorative designs other than combinations of decorative designs in which the same three decorative designs are lined up (for example, eyelashes) are stopped and displayed, and the process returns to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even if the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIGS. 144 (b) and (d) is performed, the hit symbol (see FIG. 135 (a)) is always stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210. The combination of decorative patterns in which the same three decorative patterns are lined up is not always stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of judgment on whether or not the universal figure is hit is a hit, the hit symbol (see FIG. 135 (a)) is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, and as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the decorative symbol display device. The combination of three decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are lined up in 208 is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the universal figure variation game is notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), at the same time that the universal figure display device 210 is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol 217 of the universal figure of the decorative pattern display device 208 is also displayed as stopped. Along with the winning of the universal figure variation game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to hit the right side (step S506), and the universal figure electric accessory 252 arranged in the right side area of the game area 124. The door member 2521 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  By opening the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252, it is possible to win the special figure starting port 230. However, if there is no prize, the process returns to step S501 (step S508), and if there is a prize, first. It is determined whether or not a special figure has won the special figure (special figure lottery) (step S509). When the special drawing hit determination is made, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and (f), a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 217 of the universal symbol is being stopped and displayed, but the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the special figure hit determination result is lost, the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the lost symbol (see FIG. 134 (a)), and as shown in FIG. 144 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208. Displays an image of a scene in which the strike cannot be taken (step S511). The probability that the special figure hit / miss judgment here is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 140 (a)). On the other hand, if the special figure hit determination result is a big hit, a stop symbol (see FIG. 134 (a)) of one of the special figures A to P which is a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212. As shown in FIG. 144 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the strike is taken and the bonus game is started (step S512). The probability that the special drawing hit determination here is a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a considerably high probability (see FIG. 140 (a)). If you win the jackpot of the special map, it will definitely shift from the non-electric power support state (universal figure low probability state) to the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state). Note that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (g) and (h), at the same time that the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed during stop.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. 143, and FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the screens of the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variation game here, the probability of winning the big hit with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning the big hit without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 140 (c)). When the big hit without probability change is won, a value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 146 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game is displayed. , "11 times remaining" is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability variation can be obtained before the shift to the non-electric power support state (step S513). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “in one condominium” because the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 143). It On the other hand, when the big hit with probability variation is won, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the winning / failing judgment of the universal figure and the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is easily opened. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not the special figure is hit, and in the pachinko machine 100, the odds or hits of the special figure are won with a 25% probability of being a jackpot if the state is a non-probability variation state, and if the probability variation state is a very high probability. And win the big hit. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability variation before the transition to the non-electric support state is 2 or more, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability variation and time saving until the next jackpot is 96%, There is a 4% probability of winning the big hit with no probability change and 100 time reductions (see FIG. 140 (c)). For example, when the number of remaining times is 11 and the big hit with the probability change and the time reduction until the next big hit is won, the probability change counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set up to then. As shown in 146 (b), "the remaining 10 times" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “2 consecutive holidays”.

  On the other hand, if the big hit with no probability change and 100 times shortening is won, the probability variation counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and the big hit with probability variation is obtained before the transition to the non-electric power support state. The number of remaining times that can be done increases. Although this reset of the probability variation counter is advantageous for the player, it is only performed with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 146 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game when the remaining number of times becomes two. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (c), “2 times remaining” and “10 consecutive holidays” are displayed, and “Add bonus if extra chance strike is taken” is also displayed. . Then, when the remaining number of times becomes one, the bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variation game that is supposed to be the big hit game here is a big hit without a certainty change, but it is a big hit with 100 times shortened with a probability of 53.3%, and a probability of 46.7%. It is a big hit without time saving. If the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit without time saving, the bonus ends (step S519), and the state shifts to the non-electrical support state as well as to the non-probability variation state and the normal game state. . On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (g), an image of a scene in which a strike cannot be taken is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit with 100 times reduction, it shifts to an indeterminate change state, but the electric support state is extended until the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure hit determination result is a big hit in the electric power support state, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation period of is often a short period of 1 second. However, there is a 500/65536 probability of 120 seconds and a 35/65536 probability of 360 seconds. Therefore, even when the big hit without any probability change is won during the bonus, the variation period of the special figure may be 120 seconds or 360 seconds, which is long. Note that the variation period of the special figure may be long in some cases only when the big hit without any probability change is won during the bonus. Since the time member is attached even in the non-probable change state, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is easily opened, and it is easy to determine whether or not the special figure is right or wrong. If the fluctuation period of the special figure is a short period (here, 1 second), the result of the judgment of the special figure is immediately notified, and the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened once. The special figure variation game is often played only once. That is, the number of times the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened is synchronized with the number of probability limiters. However, if the variation period of the special map is a long period (120 seconds or 360 seconds here), the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened a plurality of times while one special game variation game is played. The payout based on the winning of the special figure starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning) can earn the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 145, when the variation period of the special figure is a short period of time, the process returns to step S513, and as shown in FIG. 146 (f), “remaining 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It On the other hand, if the variation period of the special figure is a long period, information indicating the variation period of the special figure included in the special figure symbol variation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, long-term information ), The first sub-control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 any number of times between the transition to the electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state. Prediction calculation is performed. The prediction calculation here is performed based on the fact that one opening period of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is 5.8 seconds, which is uniform. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the number of times is uniformly set to a predetermined number of times larger than the specified number. For example, the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 predicts that the door member 2521 will be opened five times within 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times is 16 times, which is 11 times, which is the prescribed number, and 5 times, which is the estimated number. (Corresponding to an example of information). Further, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (360 seconds in this case) longer than the first long period, it is uniformly displayed by a predetermined symbol or the like (eg, ??????). You may do it.

  The number of times predicted and calculated here is the number of times that the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 can be opened before shifting to the non-electric power support state. In many cases, the variation period of the figure is a short period, and since the special figure variation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252, The predicted number of times is regarded as the number of times that a big hit with a certainty change can be obtained before shifting to the non-electric power support state, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the remaining number on the decorative pattern display device 208. (Step S520). As can be seen from this, in the pachinko machine 100, one special figure variation game and one opening of the universal figure electric auditors product 252 are linked unless the additional opportunity is considered.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a modification of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 146 (c).

  FIG. 147 (a) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game in a state where the number of remaining jackpots with which the probability variation can be obtained is 5 before the transition to the non-electric power support state. . On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (a), a display such as "Large bonus chance, big bonus added when cup-in" is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (c) is a screen displayed when the “large bonus chance” is a false display, and the display is “sorry”. That is, the “large bonus chance” shown in FIG. 11A is originally a screen displayed when the big hit without any probability change is won during the bonus, and the remaining number of times is reset. However, in the same figure (c), there is no change in the number of remaining times, and “5 times remaining” is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 147 (b) is a screen displayed when the "large bonus chance" is a true display, and the display is "Congratulations".

  FIG. 147 (d) is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds). How many times is left? ? ? It has been turned.

  FIG. 147 (e) is a screen displayed when the variation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds), and the remaining number of times is 120 seconds in addition to 11 times which is the prescribed number of times. It is 16 times, which is 5 times the number of predictions.

  As described above, during the bonus during the special game state, if a long production period (variation period of special figure) is reached, an production different from the normal production is performed. In addition, when the special hit big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the electric power support state, the opening of the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is often once for each special figure variation game. 141 (a), the premiere A production is 12 times, and the premiere B production is 36 times. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the variable winning a prize port 234 (attacker) is opened, but the number of game balls is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252. It should be noted that the number of prize balls is 0 when winning in the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253, 4 balls when winning in the variable winning port 234 (attacker), and 7 when winning in the universal figure electric accessory 252 (special figure starting port). A ball may be set to 10 balls at the time of winning in the general winning opening 226. The establishment of the predetermined condition referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entry of the game ball into the winning opening or the starting opening, and in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a predetermined game value is given based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is provided with a game value giving means (game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media) to be given to a person. Further, a variable winning port 234 (attacker) having a small number of prize balls is arranged downstream of the universal figure electric accessory 252 (special figure starting port) having a large number of prize balls. It is possible to reverse the positional relationship between the universal figure electric accessory 252 and the variable winning port 234, but if this happens, the variable winning port 234 with few prize balls will win first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus during the special game state, the game balls that have leaked to the ball for the universal figure electric accessory 252 can be won at the variable winning port 234 (attacker), which contributes to the increase of prize balls. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in the electric power support state, the intervals (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds, respectively) for deriving the big hit with special figure probability variation (specific first hit / miss determination result) are different. As a result, the interest of the game is improved. Further, the game characteristic of the present embodiment is that the game machine is a so-called limiter machine (the number of the probability variation continuous holidays has an upper limit), and that the game balls are increased by the universal figure electric accessory 252 (Den Chu). In other words, because the time between the big hits in the special figure is different, the number of times the electric Chu is opened during that time is different, so that it is possible to cause a change in the amount of game balls to be increased. This game property is advantageous as the player fits in. Also, by deriving the winning of the normal symbol with a high probability in a short time, the electric chu can be frequently opened, and the electric chu contributes to the game property of increasing the number of game balls. In addition, in the electric support state, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening frequency of the electric tube by changing the change time of the special figure (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds). Furthermore, by increasing the probability of deriving the special map big hit until reaching the limiter, it is possible to change the open frequency of the electric chew and the game balls that can be acquired based on the open frequency by almost the fluctuation time of the special map. it can. In addition, by resetting the limiter, it is possible to make the result of the special figure interested in the game property in which the number of game balls is increased by the universal figure electric accessory 252 (electricity chew). In addition, the long variation time of the special figure itself is advantageous for the player in the special game state, but by making it possible to determine the long variation time at the time of resetting the limiter, the special figure can be changed even after the variation ends. It is possible to continue the special game state until the specified number of hits is derived. That is, it is possible to simultaneously provide two advantageous states for the player, that is, limiter reset and long-term fluctuation. Further, by notifying the current number of consecutive holidays and the remaining number of times until the limiter, the interest in the game in the special game state may be improved. In addition, if notification is made based on the number of times the electric chu is released, it may be linked to a payout and the interest may be further improved. Furthermore, the long-time fluctuation of the special map is equivalent to one short-time fluctuation of the special map to the limiter and is equivalent to the short-time fluctuation. May increase. Since the game property in this embodiment is a limiter machine, it is not guaranteed to give a special game state more than the number of limiters at any timing, but a game ball obtained by long-term fluctuation is a normal special figure digestion 1 By utilizing the fact that the number of times is larger than the number of times (subtraction of the limiter), it is possible to notify the player as if the special game state of the number of times of the limiter or more is given. That is, the payout and the notification can be linked. Further, by setting the content of the notification to the number of times remaining until the limiter, the payout can be linked even if the number of notifications exceeds the specified number, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

  Note that the variation period of the special figure may be long only when the big hit without any probability change is won during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of a loss, a long-term variable period of a special map may be used, and in this case, a large number of game balls can be acquired without the prescribed number of times being exhausted (without subtraction of a limiter). It is possible.

  Further, in the embodiment, the game board 200 board structure is configured such that the game ball is guided to both the universal figure electric accessory 252 and the variable winning port 234 when the player hits the ball right (during the special game state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning port 234 (attacker) may be arranged at a place where it is difficult to win a prize with the launch strength during the special game state. In this case, it is possible to make the point where the attacker does not open stand out during the long fluctuation period (large bonus) of the special map.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability at the time of low probability of special figure is ¼, and the number of shortening times given after the addition (after the uncertain variation big hit) is 100 times, so that the next big hit can be realized. At the same time, it is possible to increase the game balls by opening the universal figure electric accessory 252 during this period due to the loss of the special figure of 3/4.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be made to correspond to the stop symbol of the special figure completely 1: 1.

  Furthermore, the interval for deriving a big hit with a special figure probability variation (specific first hit determination result) can be made different depending on the period during the big hit game in addition to the variation time (production time) of the special figure. For example, the above intervals can be made different by changing the time of the start effect, the end effect of the big hit game, and the effect of the interval between rounds. Further, the interval can be made different by changing the stop display period of the special figure.

  Subsequently, characteristic points of the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the prize balls are not paid out even when the game balls pass (win) the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253, the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253 have the advantage of paying out the prize balls. Corresponds to the profit non-grant entry area that is not granted to the player. In addition, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253 (wins), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive the lottery for the universal figure variation game. On the other hand, when the game balls enter (win), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of prize balls are paid out to the central general winning opening 226 arranged below the central universal map starting gate 251, and the right winning When the game ball enters (wins), the special number starting port 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 arranged below the diagram starting gate 251 opens is also a predetermined number. Prize balls (for example, 7 balls) are paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit-giving entry area for giving a player a profit of paying out a prize ball when the game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 sends a universal symbol variation start command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400, which has received the symbol variation start command for the universal symbol, outputs a control command for instructing the second symbol sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the universal symbol variation effect, The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a universal symbol variation effect. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal symbol change start command instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 133 to output a predetermined sound as a universal symbol change effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound. Done. Here, the display of a predetermined effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention.

  Further, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 or the special figure starting opening 230, the main control unit 300 sets the winning acceptance information in the winning acceptance processing as described above, and the winning acceptance information is the first sub-control. It is transmitted to the section 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information outputs a control command to the second sub-control unit 400 to instruct the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform the prize-ball payout appearance, and the second sub-control unit. 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a specific effect image as a prize ball paying appearance. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 133 to output a specific sound as the appearance of paying a prize ball, and the speaker 120 outputs the specific sound. Here, the display of the specific effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect referred to in the present invention.

  FIG. 148 is a time chart of a general symbol variation effect and a prize ball paying appearance. In FIG. 148, time elapses from left to right in the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the profit non-grant entry area, which is the universal start gate 251, 253, detects the entry of the game ball into the universal start gate 251, 253, the detection signal is from non-detection. Change to detection, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start the universal symbol variation effect (profit non-grant entry area entry effect) at the timing (A) shown in the figure.

  Moreover, when the game ball that has passed through the central universal figure starting gate 251 enters the central general winning port 226, the ball detection sensor provided in the central general winning port 226 detects the entry of the gaming ball and the detection signal is not detected. Change from detection to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the prize symbol paying appearance (profit-giving entry area entry effect) is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and the (c) shown in the figure. The prize payout appearance will end at the timing. On the other hand, the universal symbol variation effect started at the timing of (A) shown in the figure continues even after the prize ball paying appearance has ended. That is, the execution period of the universal symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball paying appearance, and the execution period of the prize symbol paying appearance is included in the execution period of the universal symbol fluctuation effect.

  In addition, if the number of holdings of the universal figure when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gates 251 and 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the main control unit 300 causes the first sub control unit 400 to display the universal symbol. Send the hold increase command. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the general-drawing hold increase command outputs a control command to the second sub-control unit 400 to instruct the decorative pattern display device 208 to execute the general-drawing hold increase effect. Good. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal figure hold increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 133 to output a predetermined sound as the universal figure hold increase effect. By doing so, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as a general figure holding increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed by the speaker 120, and display of these predetermined effect images is performed. Alternatively, the predetermined sound output may be the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a specific example of the universal symbol variation effect and the prize ball paying appearance.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols of a general figure is displayed. That is, it is a state in which the universal figure variation game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central universal figure starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 148), symbol variation display is started on the universal figure display device 210, and at the same time (b). ), The decorative pattern display device 208 starts the variable display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image) of the decorative pattern of the universal figure. Further, here, the speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a general figure fluctuation sound indicating that the variable figure display is being performed on the general figure display device 210. The variable display of the decorative symbol and the output of the universal symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the universal symbol variation effect. Further, the central universal map starting gate 251 corresponds to an example of the first approach area.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing (a) shown in FIG. 148), as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the decorative display is displayed in a variable manner. In the center of the display screen of the pattern display device 208, a large panda character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) of a panda with a scary face who utters "Jara Jara" is displayed large. That is, a character image 2081 of a panda with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 outputs a prize ball payout sound "Jarajara" imitating the payout sound. To be done. The display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the prize ball payout sound “Jarajara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a part of the image of the variable display of the decorative pattern is covered with the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face, and a part of the image of the variable display of the decorative pattern (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) becomes invisible. ing. Also, the prize-ball payout sound starts to sound in the middle of the general-purpose fluctuation sound, and the general-purpose fluctuation sound is overlaid with the prize-ball payout sound. In this way, the general pattern variation effect changes depending on the appearance of the prize ball paying appearance. As a result, the player is more likely to notice that the prize ball payout appearance is prioritized and the prize ball is paid out, the ball is considered to be good, and the impression of the gaming table may be improved. That is, since the player does not notice the occurrence of the prize ball, it may be possible to make the player think that the player has a better ball than the player who does not notice it. Further, since the effect in which the player concentrates is changed, it becomes easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the prize ball. Furthermore, since the game ball that has passed through the central universal figure starting gate 251 wins the central general winning opening 226, it is possible to enjoy the general symbol variation effect and the effect in which the universal symbol variation effect has changed with the same game ball. In some cases, the player can enjoy many performances with a small investment, and can improve the impression of the game table.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a specific example of the universal figure pending increase effect and the prize ball paying appearance in the state where the universal symbol variation effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variable display) is performed on the universal symbol display device 210, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbol of the regular symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a figure variation sound indicating that the figure variation display is being performed on the figure display device 210 is output. That is, the general symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed.

  Further, in this example, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, the general figure hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the general figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 is displayed as the general figure hold storage unit. The starting information is displayed in the order stored from the left (in order of winning), from oldest to newest. The universal figure holding display is a display indicating that the starting information is stored in the first starting information storage unit (the universal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308) or has been stored. That is, the universal figure hold display is performed for each of the universal figure start information stored in the first startup information storage means, and the number of the universal figure hold display corresponds to the number of the retained universal figure. The decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of a first start hold display means. Each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives the universal figure hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold increase instruction for the universal figure to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 based on the instruction. , The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of the universal symbol reservation display by one. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a general-use figure hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500 each time it receives a general-use symbol variation start command, which is a signal for the end-of-use of the general-use figure, and a second sub-control. The unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the general-drawing reservation decrease signal to decrease the number of general-drawing reservation display by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (a), two universal figure hold displays are displayed. In the following, the universal figure hold display indicating the older universal figure hold (hereinafter referred to as universal figure hold 1) is referred to as the first universal figure hold display 291 and the newer universal figure hold (hereinafter referred to as the universal figure hold 2). ), Which is designated as (2), is referred to as a second universal figure pending display 292. In this case, the number of reservations on the universal map is two.

  When the game ball passes through the central universal figure starting gate 251, while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is being performed here, and the number of reserved universal symbols is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, starting information based on the passage of the central universal figure starting gate 251 of the game ball this time is stored in the universal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of holding of the universal figure increases. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (b), a third universal figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed. The third universal figure pending display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the universal figure pending 3 represented by the third universal figure pending display 293 is exhausted. Further, at the same time that the third public figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a general figure hold increase sound for notifying that the number of hold of the common figure has increased for a predetermined period. This ordinary figure hold increase sound stops before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third public figure hold display 293 and the output of the public figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general figure hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, similar to FIG. 149 (c), in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, a voice “Jarajara” is displayed. The panda character image 2081 with a scary face is displayed in a large size, and the speaker 120 outputs the prize ball payout sound “Jarajara” imitating the payout sound (see FIG. 150 (c)). The scary face part 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Also in the example shown in FIG. 150, the display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a part of the image of the variable display of the decorative pattern is covered with the scary face part 2081a of the panda, and a part of the image of the variable display of the decorative pattern (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) is invisible. . Also, a balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" is overlaid on most of each of the first universal figure pending display to the third universal figure pending display 291-293 displayed in the effect display area 208d. 293 is no longer visible. Also, from the middle of the universal figure fluctuation sound indicating that the variable display is being displayed, first, the universal figure hold increase sound that notifies that the number of universal figure reservations has increased starts to sound, and the universal figure fluctuation sound is displayed. The hold increase sound is heard. Next, the award ball payout sound also starts to sound, and the aural ball fluctuation sound and the universal figure hold increase sound are overlaid with the award ball payout sound. In this way, the general pattern variation effect changes depending on the prize ball paying appearance, and the general figure holding increase effect also changes depending on the prize ball paying appearance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player who concentrates on the production that a prize ball is generated due to the influence of the change of the production, that is, the appearance of the prize ball paying appearance, and the impression of the gaming table is improved. You may be able to. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image by the appearance of paying a prize ball, it is possible to visually inform that the prize ball has occurred, and improve the impression of the gaming table. You may be able to. In addition, it is possible to audibly inform that the prize ball has been generated by covering the effect sound from the speaker 120.

  In the above description, the prize symbol payout appearance and / or the payout payout increase production are overwhelmed by the prize ball paying appearance, but the payout payout appearance production and / or the payout payout increase production are in the prize paying payout appearance. It may be changed.

  FIG. 151 is a time chart in which the universal symbol variation effect changes to the appearance of paying a prize ball.

  Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 151, when the ball detection sensor provided in the profit non-grant entry area which is the universal figure starting gates 251, 253 detects the entry of the game ball into the universal figure starting gates 251, 253. The detection signal is changed from non-detection to detection, and at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start the universal symbol variation effect (profit non-grant entry area entry effect). It

  Moreover, when the game ball that has passed through the central universal figure starting gate 251 enters the central general winning port 226, the ball detection sensor provided in the central general winning port 226 detects the entry of the gaming ball and the detection signal is not detected. It changes from detection to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, which have been performing the ordinary symbol variation effect, end the ordinary symbol variation effect and instead award. Start paying a ball (appearing in a profit-giving approach area). Eventually, the prize payout appearance will end at the timing of (c) shown in the figure.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a specific example of changing from the universal symbol variation effect to the prize ball paying appearance.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (a), a combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols of the general figure is displayed. That is, it is a state in which the universal figure variation game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central universal figure starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 151), as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the variable display of symbols on the universal figure display device 210. With the start of, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 208, the background screen is blank. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a first general-purpose fluctuation sound indicating that the variable display is being displayed on the general-purpose display device 210 is output. The variable display of the decorative symbol and the output of the first universal symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the universal symbol variation effect.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), the symbol "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display mode of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. 135 (b). On the other hand, in each of the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. Note that the speaker 120 continues to output the first universal figure fluctuation sound.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 151), as shown in FIG. 152 (d), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The background screen of the pattern display device 208 changes from a non-patterned background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a background screen with a cross-hatching pattern), and the decorative pattern (“decoration 6 The display mode of ")" is also changed from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a display mode of solid black). Further, the display mode of the images respectively displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, which indicates that the decorative symbols are being variably displayed, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal stripe pattern display mode). ). Further, the general-purpose fluctuation sound output from the speaker 120 is also switched from the first general-purpose fluctuation sound that has been output so far to the second general-purpose fluctuation sound. The display of the predetermined display mode of the predetermined background screen and the decorative pattern, and the output of the second public figure fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the prize ball paying appearance, and the production is changed from the public figure changing effect to the prize ball paying appearance. Is changing. It should be noted that this effect change can also be considered as a change in the universal figure variation effect itself. In any case, based on the game ball entering the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the universal symbol variation effect is performed. The decorative pattern changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the pattern variation display on the universal figure display device 210 ends, and the timing at which the pattern variation display ends, that is, the stop symbol is At the timing of display, the display mode returns to the default display mode or changes to another display mode. Also, the public figure fluctuation sound changed to the second general figure fluctuation sound also remains changed to the second general figure fluctuation sound until the pattern fluctuation display on the public figure display device 210 ends, and the pattern fluctuation display is When it ends, the fluctuation sound itself stops.

  As described above, due to the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning at the central general winning opening 226, the universal symbol variation effect itself changes, and the prize balls are paid out. It may be easier for the player to notice, and it seems that the player can hold the ball better, which may improve the impression of the game table.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the universal figure hold increase effect changes in the state where the universal figure change effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (a), the symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variable display) is performed on the universal symbol display device 210, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the regular symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a figure variation sound indicating that the figure variation display is being performed on the figure display device 210 is output. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 153, the universal symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (a), the first universal figure hold display 291 representing the universal figure hold 1 and the second universal figure hold display 292 representing the universal figure hold 2 are displayed. Is displayed.

  When the game ball passes through the central universal figure starting gate 251, while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of retained regular symbols also increases, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (b) is displayed. A third universal figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 153 (b), three public figure hold displays, that is, the first public figure hold display 291 to the third general figure hold display 293 are displayed, but any of the hold displays is the default display mode, that is, there is no pattern. In addition, it is displayed in a display mode of all black. At the same time that the third public figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first general figure hold increase sound for a predetermined period of time, which notifies that the hold of the general figure has increased. The additional display of the third public figure hold display 293 and the output of the first public figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general figure hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, the display mode of the third universal figure hold display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode, as shown in FIG. . That is, out of the three general-purpose figure holding displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display mode, the display mode of only the third general-purpose figure holding display 293 increased this time becomes a predetermined display mode (horizontal stripe pattern here). Change. Further, the general-purpose-hold increasing sound output from the speaker 120 is also switched from the first general-purpose holding increasing sound that has been output so far to the second general-purpose holding increasing sound. The display in the predetermined display mode in the third public figure hold display 293 and the output of the second public figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball paying appearance, and the public figure hold increasing effect is changed to the prize ball paying appearance. The production is changing. It should be noted that this effect change can also be regarded as a change in the general figure hold increase effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the ordinary figure holding increase effect is performed. In addition, the 3rd universal figure hold display 293 that has changed to a predetermined display mode is retained 3 and the 3rd universal figure hold is retained even if the 3rd universal figure hold display 293 has changed to a predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display ends. The display may be changed to a predetermined display mode until the display 293 itself disappears. Further, the public figure hold increase sound that has changed to the second public figure hold increase sound continues to ring while changing to the second public figure hold increase sound, and stops before the symbol variable display ends.

  As described above, due to the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning at the central general winning opening 226, here, the universal figure hold increase effect itself changes, and the prize balls are paid out. In particular, it becomes easier for the player to notice, and it seems that the player can hold the ball better, which may improve the impression of the game table.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 153, the third universal figure holding display 293 that has changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variable display ends, An example of returning to the default display mode before the symbol variable display is finished will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of returning to the general figure hold increase effect after the effect changes from the general figure hold increase effect to the prize ball paying appearance.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 154 (a), the universal figure holding increase effect (profit non-grant entry area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a), and at the timing shown in FIG. Figure hold increase effect temporarily changes to prize ball paying appearance (profit giving entry area entry effect). Then, after the prize-ball paying appearance has been performed for a predetermined period, at the timing shown in (c) in the figure, the routine returns to the general figure hold increase effect (profit non-approach entry area entrance effect).

  The drawing of (a) in FIG. 154 (b) is a view showing, for each layer, an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 154 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 154 (a) includes a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three pending display images. Become. Of these three images displayed on hold, the images of the first universal map pending display 291 and the images of the second universal drawing pending display 292 are all images in the default display mode, that is, images with no pattern and a single black color. . On the other hand, the image of the third public figure reservation display 293 has changed to an image with a black horizontal stripe on a white background due to the appearance of the prize ball paying appearance.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 displayed on the farthest side from the player's side, and the image showing that the decorative pattern is being variably displayed is the second layer, which is one layer before the first layer L1. It is drawn in L2.

  The three images 291 to 293 in the universal figure reservation display are drawn on the third layer L3, which is immediately before the second layer L2. All of the three general-drawing-pending display images drawn on the third layer L3 are images without a pattern and having a single black color (black circle images) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, which is one layer before the third layer L3, a black horizontal stripe is attached to a white background at a position overlapping the image of the black circle of the third universal figure reservation display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. The image 290w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is the layer displayed closest to the player as viewed from the player. In the image of the third public image reservation display 293, an image 290b of a black circle drawn on the third layer L3 is overlapped with an image 290w of black horizontal stripes drawn on a white background drawn on the fourth layer L4. Disappears, and an image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background drawn on the fourth layer L4 is visible.

  The drawing of (b) in FIG. 154 (b) is a view showing, for each layer, an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 154 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 154 (b) is also a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three pending display images. Become. All of the three pending display images here are images in the default display mode (black circle images). In other words, the image of the third public figure hold display 293 that has changed due to the appearance of paying a prize ball returns to the normal figure hold increase effect and becomes an image in the default display mode (black circle image). In the drawing process of the decorative pattern display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 154 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative pattern display device 208 at the timing of (a) are used as they are. , It is not necessary to draw only the fourth layer L4. By doing this, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on the white background is hidden, and the image of the third universal figure hold display 293 also returns to the image of a black circle, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, it is possible to reduce the addition of drawing processing.

  Subsequently, in the specific examples so far, the prize ball paying appearance starts at the timing when the game ball passes through the central general winning opening 226, but an example in which the prize ball paying appearance starts after a little delay will be described. .

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example in which the prize-ball paying appearance starts with a slight delay from the timing when the game ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 155 (a), the universal figure holding increase effect (profit non-profit entry area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in (a) in the figure, and the game is played at the timing shown in (a) in the figure. Although it is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, at this timing, the ordinary figure hold increase effect does not change to the prize ball paying appearance (profit giving entry area entry effect), and a predetermined period elapses, or On the basis of a predetermined trigger that occurs thereafter, at the timing shown in (c) in the figure, the ordinary figure hold increase effect temporarily changes to prize ball paying appearance. The predetermined trigger here may be, specifically, that a predetermined effect (for example, super reach) is executed in the universal symbol variation effect. Then, after the prize-ball paying appearance has been performed for a certain period of time, the process returns to the general figure holding increase effect (profit non-profit entry area entry effect) at the timing shown in FIG.

  The drawing of (c) in FIG. 155 (b) is a diagram showing, for each layer, an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. The images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 155 (a) are a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three pending display images. Become. Of these three hold display images, the image of the first universal figure hold display 291 and the image of the second universal figure hold display 292 are both images in the default display mode, that is, an image with no pattern and a solid black color (black circle). Image). On the other hand, in the image of the third public figure reservation display 293, the black circle image is changed to an image in which white horizontal stripes are added to the black circle due to the appearance of the prize ball payout.

  In this example as well, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image indicating that the decorative pattern is being variably displayed is drawn on the second layer L2.

  Further, the three images 291 to 293 in the universal figure reservation display are drawn on the third layer L3. Also in this case, all of the three normal-picture-holding images drawn on the third layer L3 are images without a pattern and having a single black color (black circle images) 290b. On the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the image of the black circle of the third universal figure reservation display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. In the image of the third public image reservation display 293, the image 290b of white circles drawn on the fourth layer L4 overlaps the image 290b of black circles drawn on the third layer L3, and white horizontal stripes are added to the black circles. It looks like the image. That is, although a part of the black circle image 290b is covered with the image 290s having only white horizontal stripes, the remaining portion of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 is , The image 290s having only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is a single image.

  The drawing (d) in FIG. 155 (b) is a view showing the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 for each layer at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 155 (a). The three pending display images here are also images in the default display mode (black circle images). In other words, the image of the third public figure hold display 293 that has changed due to the appearance of paying a prize ball returns to the normal figure hold increase effect and becomes an image in the default display mode (black circle image). Also in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 155 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) are used as they are. , It is not necessary to draw only the fourth layer L4. By rubbing, the image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is hidden, and the image of the third universal figure hold display 293 also returns to the image 290b with a black circle, that is, the default display mode. Also in this mode, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  In addition, in the state where the prize ball paying appearance is performed, for example, in the state where the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face that utters “Jarajara” is displayed as shown in FIG. 149 (c), When a game ball enters (wins) the central universal figure starting gate 251, and the winning / non-winning decision of the universal figure based on the winning is successful, a predetermined effect (for example, an instruction to instruct to perform a right hit) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is cast on the balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" which is a part of the prize ball paying appearance, and the prize ball paying appearance changes.

  Further, even when the production for instructing right-handedness is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the universal symbol variation effect, and the decorative symbol representing the result of the determination of the universal symbol is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize that the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is open.

  Further, in the above description, the game ball is entered into the central universal figure starting gate 251 and the central general winning opening 226 below the central universal figure starting gate 251. The same applies to the special figure starting port 230 where the game ball can enter when the door member 2521 of the universal figure electric accessory 252 is opened. The same applies not only to the central general winning opening 226 below the central universal figure starting gate 251, but also to other general winning openings 226 and an entry area where prize balls are paid out.

  Further, in the above description, the production sound (for example, the prize ball payout sound) is output using the speaker 120, but the game ball paid out from the payout device 152 is displayed on the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. The collision sound generated by the collision with the stored game balls may be used as the effect sound (for example, prize ball payout sound). By doing so, the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120, so that the player may be able to more recognize the occurrence of profit.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following explanation, the matters which overlap with those explained so far will be explained again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described with the same symbols as those used so far.

  FIG. 156 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminS3ence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game to be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 performs notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, is configured not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called game state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 131 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 53 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 131 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate is used. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided near the second special figure starting port 232, and a pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 are combined. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning a prize port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game is started, and when the big hit game of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The variable winning port 234 corresponds to an example of the winning device according to the present invention, and winning the big hit of the special figure corresponds to an example of satisfying the second condition according to the present invention. The closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 156 as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 to reach the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball caught by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 156 correspond to the effect means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 among them is the image display means. Corresponds to an example.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is basically the same as the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 157 (a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 and is detected by the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor, and the ball is in the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has entered. When the special game 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats all the lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of the special diagram 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a variable stop display of special figure. The fluctuation stop display of this special figure may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 157 (a), six types of special drawings, "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing F", are shown as stop symbol modes in the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 157 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments where the light is turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments where the light is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (“Special symbol A” to “Special symbol D”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. “Special map A” is a 15-round (R) special jackpot pattern, and after the special map A is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state. "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern with electric support, and when special map B is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special map low probability general figure high probability state. “Special map C” is a 4R big hit symbol with probability variation, and when this special map C is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map D” is a 4R big hit symbol, and when this special map D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general pattern low probability state.

  The term "round" here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable winning port 234 shown in FIG. 156 is represented, and 15 rounds means that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning port 234 is performed once (or once). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / closed state changes from the first open / closed state (here, closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, open state), and the variable winning port 234 is During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is one of a predetermined round end condition (for example, entry of a predetermined number of game balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc.) 1 or a plurality of) is established, the process ends. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The big hit by special drawing A and the special big hit by special drawing C have a high probability of winning the big hit in the next special drawing variation game (special big hit or time-saving big hit). Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state shifts, and when the special figure A or the special figure C is won, the special figure high probability state is maintained after the big hit game and until the next big hit. To be done. On the other hand, when the special map B or the special map D is won, the special map low probability state remains after the jackpot game is over. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of the first probability control state. In addition, the special figure high probability state after the big hit game is sometimes called special figure probability change, and the state where the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game is high (special figure high probability state) is the player. Is a control state in which the advantage of is high and corresponds to an example of the second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called game state. The main control unit 300 performs the transition of the probability control state, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the probability control state transition unit.

  If the special map A or the special map B is won, the game shifts to a state (hereinafter, referred to as a power support state) with the electric power support (electric power support) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This electric power support state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes called a time saving state. That is, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/101 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/101 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extending the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-powered support state, the power-chew open period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the power-supported state. Furthermore, in the electrically supported state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to be opened than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electric tube is increased). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically-supported state per winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens three times in the electrically-supported state (for example, opening 1.7 seconds is 3 Repeated times, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is, when the jackpot game is in the electric power support state, a large number of game balls in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of variable prize holes 234 and game balls enter during the jackpot game. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be entered and hit during a big hit increases, which increases gambling. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. . In the non-electric power support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric power support state. As described above, the second special figure starting port 232 is such that the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large in the electric support state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the special map A is stopped and displayed, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the end of the big hit game performed, and the special map B is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 100 times, and the non-electric support state (universal figure low probability state) is the 101st time. Transition. On the other hand, when the big hit without special electric support (special figure C, special figure D) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric power support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is maintained in a small size. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric power support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 has a large size, and the entry rate of the game ball is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, which is the variable starting area, at the first entry rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure. The mouth 232 enters at a second approach rate which is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric power support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the power support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, a special symbol E stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this happens, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state before the small hit game starts is restored. In addition, you may prepare the small hitting pattern other than "special EI" (for example, the second small hitting pattern etc.).

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 performs one or more opening / closing operations, and the player's advantage becomes relatively high.

  Further, the special drawing F shown in FIG. 157 (a) is a lost design. When this lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 does not open and close, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It should be noted that a lost symbol other than the “special symbol F” (for example, a second lost symbol or the like) may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) having the second advantage, which is highly advantageous to the player, is lower than the second advantage. A loss control state of the first advantage with a low degree of advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 has one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of special game state giving means. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 opens and closes, almost no ball can be expected to enter the variable winning port 234. It can be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In addition, the big hits include big hits that are relatively advantageous to the player and big hits that are relatively unfavorable. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R big hit (special figure A, special figure B) corresponds to an advantageous big hit, and the 4R big hit (special figure C, special figure D) corresponds to a disadvantageous big hit. Also, in terms of whether or not there is a probability variation, the big hits according to special figure A and the big hits according to special figure C correspond to the advantageous big hits, and the big hits according to special figure B and the big hits according to special figure D correspond to the disadvantageous big hits. The jackpot determination result relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a specific hit determination result, and the jackpot control state relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a special game state.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the big hit symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the big hit symbol 2.

  The first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 are informing means for informing the win / loss determination result (lottery result), and the symbol mode corresponding to the win / loss determination result after starting the symbol variation ( It corresponds to an example of a symbol display means for performing symbol variable display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern of a special figure. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the special drawing of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Change display of decorative pattern of special drawing" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol of the special symbol in a variably manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) that is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special figure is stopped and displayed. When notifying a big hit (special drawing A to special drawing D), "the combination of decorative patterns 1" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three identical decorative patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying a probability big jackpot (special map A or special map C) in the normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability) or a big hit other than the normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability) , "The combination of decorative patterns 2" in which the same odd-numbered decorative patterns are arranged in three in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" etc. ) Is displayed. When notifying a small hit (special figure E), "combination of decorative symbols 3" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying "special drawing F" which is a loss, in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, other than "combination of decorative pattern 1", "combination of decorative pattern 2" and "combination of decorative pattern 3" A combination of decorative patterns (for example, a streak) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol" until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol of the special symbol (for example, "combination of decorative symbols 2") is stopped and displayed. The series of display may be referred to as a variation stop display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode of the special symbols 1 and 2 (see FIG. 157 (a)), and the decoration of one special symbol displayed in each of the left, right, and middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop symbol aspect of the symbol (see FIG. 2B) is larger than the decorative symbol of the special symbol (see FIG. 1B).

  FIG. 157 (c) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of a universal figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment: "Public symbol A" which is a winning symbol 1, "Public symbol B" which is a winning symbol 2, and "Public symbol C" which is a lost symbol. . The hit symbol 1 "Public symbol A" is a normal symbol hit in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special symbol starting port 232 is relatively short, and the hit symbol 2 is "Public symbol". “B” is a universal figure in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively long. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 indicates that all seven segments are lit and one segment in the center is lit. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 157 (c), the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions are the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable stop display of the universal figure. The public figure display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 157 (d) shows an example of a decorative pattern of a general figure. There are three types of decorative patterns of the universal figure of the present embodiment, which are the universal figure decorations 1 to 3. On the condition that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, that is, the universal figure starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the universal figure starting port 228, the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 In a predetermined area, which is the central portion of the, the display is changed in the order of "decoration ○" → "decoration ◎" → ... That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern of the general figure in a variable manner, separately from the general pattern display device 210. Then, the stop design mode (effect design mode) of the decorative design of the universal design is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit symbol 1 (general symbol A) of the universal symbol, "decorative ○" which is the universal symbol ornament 1 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit pattern 2 (general drawing B) of the universal figure, "decorative ◎" which is the universal figure decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying a lost design (general drawing C) of the universal graphic, "Decorative x" which is the universal graphic decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern of the universal figure (for example, universal figure decoration 2) The display may be referred to as a fluctuation stop display of a decorative pattern of a general figure.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode of the universal symbol A and the universal symbol B (see FIG. 157 (c)), and the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol of one universal symbol displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure). As for (d) reference, the decorative pattern of a general drawing (see (d) of the same figure) is larger.

<Main control unit control processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is basically the same as the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 137 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the description is omitted.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment has two types of special drawings, such as special drawing 1 and special drawing 2, and a lottery based on winning in the second special drawing starting port 232 (judgment of success / failure of special drawing 2) is performed. Priority is given to the lottery based on the winning of the first special map starting port 230 (whether or not the special figure 1 is determined). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special starting area, the random number value is stored in the first random value storage area up to the maximum reserved number, and the second special start is performed. Both the first random number storage area and the second random value storage area, and a winning storage section that stores a maximum random number in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area Irrespective of the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random number value is stored in the area, the second The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the numerical value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random value storage area, and the random value is stored in the first random value storage area. If the answer is yes, it is provided with a win / fail judgment means for making a win / no judgment based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and the prize is given to the second special figure starting port 232. The notification of the result of the win / fail judgment based on the priority information is given as priority over the notification of the result of the win / no win determination based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the start information of the special figure 1 is used as the start information not having the win / no win determination. When only the starting information of the special figure 1 among the starting information of the special figure 2 and the starting information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly started starting of the special figure 2 is stored. The notification of the result of the hit determination based on the information is performed before the notification of the result of the hit determination based on the starting information of the special figure 1 that has been already stored. Further, the starting information acquisition means for acquiring the starting information, if the starting information is stored in both the first starting information storage means and the second starting information storage means, the second starting information. When the starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storage means and the second starting information storage means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is acquired from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 State update processing) is performed (step S1225), and then special figure state update processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S1227). When the special figure state update processing in step S1225 and step S1227 ends, this time, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the winning / disapproving means. The main control unit 300 first performs a process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 (step S1229), and then performs a process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for special figure 1 (step S1231). ). In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the same timing. When the start information is acquired, and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start of the special figure 1 variable game Even if the conditions are met at the same time, or both the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation game start condition are established, the special figure 2 variation game is changing first, so special Figure 1 The fluctuation game does not start fluctuation.

  Further, after performing the prize winning acceptance processing S1217 and before performing the special figure state updating processing, special figure prefetching processing is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 159 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, it is determined whether or not the start information of special figure 2 has increased, that is, the start information (special figure 2 winning random number value, big hit for special figure 2) is stored in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 random number value and the special figure 2 random time determination random number value) are added, and if the number is increased (if added), the increased start information of the special figure 2 is prefetched. Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In this step S1224b, first, the starting information of special figure 2 is preread from the reserved storage section of special figure 2. That is, upon the winning of the winning in the second special figure starting port 232, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the start information is pre-read before the start information is acquired in the winning / disapproval determination (special figure 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 158). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetch corresponds to an example of the start information prefetch unit. The pre-reading here pre-reads only the winning amount (the increased amount of the hold), but all the pre-reading may be performed. It should be noted that the pre-reading here means that the starting information is read before the success / failure determination (main lottery), but in the following description, the word “pre-reading” will be referred to as the “result of the success / failure determination (main lottery), etc.” ) May be used in the sense of reading.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure validity pre-determination table shown in FIG. 159 (b) and a special figure pre-determination table shown in FIG. 159 (c).

  When the start information is prefetched, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 preliminarily determines the win / fail judgment result and the symbol to be stopped in the future special figure 2 related lottery process based on the prefetched start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability variation flag, and uses the special figure propriety pre-determination table shown in FIG. 159 (b), and uses the special figure 2 winning random value ( The range of possible values is 0-65535), and it is pre-determined whether the result of the hit determination is the hit determination result of the big hit, the hit determination result of the small hit, or the hit determination result of the loss. . That is, whether or not the winning / winning determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning when the winning is given to the second special figure starting port 232 becomes the jackpot winning / winning determination result (specific winning / unwinning determination result). To determine in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination corresponds to an example of the preliminary determination means, and the result of the preliminary determination here is treated as the special figure 2 validity / invalidity preliminary determination result.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure validity determination table having the same contents as the contents of the special figure validity determination table shown in FIG. 159 (b). In both the special figure right / wrong determination table and the special figure right / wrong pre-determination table shown in FIG. 159 (b), the jackpot probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric power support state). On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (electric support state), it rises to 1/32. On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 in both the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (electric support state).

  Next, in the case where the special figure 2 hit / non-judgment prior determination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure preliminary judgment table shown in FIG. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (the possible numerical value range is 0 to 99), the jackpot symbol which is the stopped symbol is preliminarily determined. The pre-determination of the special map here is also executed before the hit determination (special figure 2 related lottery processing) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as the special figure 2 pre-determination result. . The pre-determination of the big hit symbol here corresponds to pre-determining which kind of big hit among the kinds of big hits prepared in plural kinds. In addition, in the second embodiment, since only one kind of small hit symbol and one loss symbol are prepared, if the special figure 2 winning / failing determination result is a small hit or is a loss, it is unique. The special figure 2 preliminary judgment result is obtained.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table having the same contents as the special figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 159 (c). When the jackpot type of the special drawing of the second embodiment is described in detail with reference to the special figure advance determination table shown in FIG. 159 (c), the big hit symbol 1 (special symbol A) or the big hit symbol 2 (special symbol B) is obtained. In the big hit game which is stopped and displayed, one round of opening the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 for 30 seconds (however, closing when 10 balls are won in the variable winning port 234) is performed 15 times. In the big hit game which is started after the big hit symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the big hit symbol 4 (special symbol D) is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, in the variable winning port 234). It will be closed 4 times when 10 balls are won. In addition, the winning probability of the jackpot pattern 1 (special figure A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 preliminary determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special figure 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308, and in step S1224d. move on.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1224a that the startup information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and pre-reading or pre-determination of the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is not performed.

  In step S1224d, whether or not there is an increase in the start information (special figure 1 random number value, special figure 1 random number value for big hit, and special figure 1 variation time random number value) of special figure 1, that is, in RAM 308. It is determined whether or not one set of random number values has been added to the reserved storage unit of the special diagram 1 provided, and if it has increased (if added), then the current control state is the power support state. It is determined by referring to the time saving flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e), and if the current control state is the non-electric power support state (when the time saving flag is off), step S1224f. Proceed to.

  In step S1224f, like the above-described step S1224b, first, the starting information of special figure 1 is preread from the reserved storage unit of special figure 1. Next, similarly to step S1224b, the special figure 1 pre-determination result is obtained based on the pre-read start information (special figure 1 random number selection value) using the special figure propriety pre-determination table shown in FIG. 159 (b). Next, if the special figure 1 hit / non-judgment pre-determination result is a big hit, similar to step S1224b, using the special figure pre-determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value in FIG. 1, the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is acquired.

  In step S1224g following step S1224f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 pre-determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S1224f is stored in the special figure 1 pre-determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308, and shown in FIG. 158. The process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process shown.

  In addition, in this special figure pre-reading process, it was performed only up to the pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special figure, but based on the random number value for determining the special figure change time in the pre-read start information, the change time of the special figure is pre-determined. The determination may be performed and the preliminary determination result of the variation time (special figure variation time preliminary determination result) may be stored in the preliminary determination result storage area. Further, instead of the change time, the effect mode (change pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 are associated with each other one-to-one, and selecting the variation time means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also Further, the effect modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only the group of “outside / normal reach loss” or the group of “reach A out / reach B loss” may be selected by lottery. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of "per normal reach, per normal reach loss, per reach A per reach, per reach B per reach A, per reach B". It may be limited to pre-determining whether it belongs to a group without reach.

  The pre-determination information (information indicating the special figure prior determination result) newly stored in the pre-determination result storage area of the RAM 308 is used as command information of the special figure pending increase command as information of the pre-determined special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is included and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1224d shown in FIG. 159 (a) that the startup information of Toku-zu 1 has not increased, the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 158 to pre-read the startup information of Toku-zu 1 of FIG. Or pre-judgment is not performed.

  In addition, even when the current control state is the power support state (the time saving flag is in the on state) in step S1224e, pre-reading or pre-determination of the start information of Toku-zu 1 is not performed, and in these cases, it is increased this time. "Undetermined" information indicating that the determination of win or failure based on the start information of the special figure 1 and the prior determination of the stop symbol are not performed is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area (step S1224h), and FIG. The process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process shown in. It should be noted that, based on the fact that the big hit game is started, the area in which the special figure 1 pre-determined result is stored in the special figure 1 pre-determined result storage area is rewritten to "undetermined" information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (here, in the electric power support state) is satisfied, the pre-reading of the starting information itself is not performed, but the pre-reading is performed and the pre-determination is not performed. Alternatively, pre-reading and pre-determination may be performed, but the result may not be sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special figure preliminary determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain the special figure preliminary determination result, and the prefetched start information is used as the special figure hold increase command command. The data may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may obtain the special figure prior determination result as necessary. However, since the state update of the universal figure is performed by the main control unit 300, if the first sub-control unit 400 tries to determine whether or not the power supply is being supported, the state of the universal figure also changes to the first sub-control unit 400. Need to send, not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to perform the preliminary determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special map prefetch process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special diagram related lottery process (steps S1229, S1231), and the same start information as the preread start information targeted by the special map prefetch process. Based on the above, the special figure validity determination result using the special figure validity determination table, the special figure determination result using the special figure determination table, and the variation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  Here, a method of determining the variation time of the special figure in the special figure-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, the variation time of Toku-zu 1 and the variation time of Toku-zu 2 are the same, and therefore the description will be made without distinguishing between the two.

  In the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 158, when the special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the special figure determination result. , Decide the timer number that represents the fluctuation time of the special figure.

  FIG. 160 (a) is a diagram showing a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between the special figure determination result (special figure stop symbol), the number of special figure changes, and the timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used to determine the variation time of the special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information indicating the timer selection table. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variation game execution number counter that counts the number of executions of the special figure variation game. If the value of this special figure variation game execution number counter is greater than 0, the variation display by the special figure display device 212 is finished, and after the confirmed special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, the special figure variation game is executed by the CPU 304. The value of the execution counter is decremented by 1.

  For example, in the special figure state update processing (steps S1227, S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop symbol is the 15R big hit which is the big hit symbol 2 and the finish production period of the 15R big hit game is finished, the special figure variation game execution number counter Is set to a value of 100 and information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. In addition, in the special figure state update processing (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure is finished, if the value of the special figure variation game execution number counter is larger than 0, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1, The information representing the table 2 is continuously stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the value of the counter becomes 0. When the value of the special figure variation game execution number counter becomes 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced to set the value of 0 to the special figure variation game execution number counter, and in the timer selection table information storage area. Stores information representing Table 1. Then, in the special figure state update processing (steps S1227, S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure is finished, the value of the special figure variation game execution frequency counter is continuously set to 0 until the special figure determination result is switched, and the timer is set. The information representing the table 1 is continuously stored in the selection table information storage area. As a result, when the 15R big hit game ends, unless the big hit or the small hit is won, the fluctuation time of the special drawing is decided using the timer selection table 2 in the first 100 times of the special figure fluctuation game, and the timer after 101 times. The variation time of the special figure is determined using the selection table 1.

  FIG. 160 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 160 (b) based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time (the possible range is 0 to 99) in the start information. Determine the timer number that is present. That is, the determination of the timer number is made by determining the special figure, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), the number of holdings obtained by adding the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2, and predetermined period information. It is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table) and not based on the pre-reading result of the pre-reading process or the result of pre-determination.

  The timer number is the time from when the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the variation of the symbol to the display of the stop symbol indicating the result of the winning / disapproval determination, that is, the variation display time of the special symbol. It shows (symbol fluctuation display time). The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variation time determining unit that determines the variation time of the symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208, the time from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol of the special symbol to the display of the stop symbol representing the result of the hit / absence determination (the time of the decorative symbol variation stop display) is also this symbol variable display. It is adjusted to the time.

  FIG. 160 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set in accordance with the symbol variable display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special figure based on the timer number (symbol variation display time). For reference, FIG. 160 (c) also shows the relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special figure.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes an ultra-shortened fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 5 seconds. Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time of 10 seconds (standard fluctuation time). Further, in timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 is no reach. The timer 4 represents that the special figure variation time becomes a variation time of 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The timer 5 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the timer 6 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this reach, it is determined that the result of the win / no judgment (main lottery) of the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) becomes a specific win / loss determination result (a predetermined result in which the player has a high advantage). This is a notice effect that is given to the player in advance after notifying the result of the win / fail judgment, and whether or not to reach is determined after the win / fail judgment. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a notice control means.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from when the special drawing is determined to be valid to when the notification of the special determination is performed is notified more than when the notice of reach production is not given (special figure variation time). ) Is long.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), when the special figure determination result is the outlier symbol (“special figure F”), if the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the timer 3 without reach has a 90% probability. If it is determined and the number of holding is 3 to 7, the timer 2 without reach is also determined with a probability of 98%. In addition, when the table 1 is selected with the outlier pattern, the timer 5 or the timer 6 of the super reach is determined with a probability of 1% each, regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, when the result of the winning or hitting is a big hit, regardless of the type of special drawing (big hit symbols 1 to 4), regardless of the timer selection table, and regardless of the number of holdings, the normal reach The timer 4 has a probability of 2%, the timer 5 of the super reach 1 has a probability of 32%, and the timer 6 of the super reach 2 has a probability of 66%. The same applies when the special figure determination result is a small hit symbol.

  Next, the universal figure-related lottery process (step S1223) shown in FIG. 158 will be described. The starting information of the universal figure in the second embodiment is a universal figure winning random number value and a winning universal figure random number value. In the universal figure-related lottery process (step S1223), a universal pattern appropriateness determination process is performed.

  FIG. 161 (a) is a diagram showing a universal figure valid / invalid judgment table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the universal figure hit / miss determination process, the hit / fail determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. This general / universal figure winning / judging determination is performed based on the random number for general / universal figure winning (a possible range is 0 to 65535) in the starting information extracted from the general / universal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the Atari probability of the universal figure is about 10% in the low probability state of the universal figure (non-electric power support state), but is 100% in the high probability state of the universal figure (electric power support state).

  When the execution of the universal figure appropriateness determination process is completed, and the result of the universal figure appropriateness determination is a hit, the universal figure stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one type of out-of-drawing pattern in the universal figure, if the result of the determination on whether or not the universal figure is lost is, the stop pattern of the universal figure is uniquely determined.

  FIG. 161 (b) is a diagram showing a general-drawing determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here again, the time saving flag is referred to and whether or not the current control state is the electric power support state is used to determine whether or not the winning or hitting is successful. This universal figure stop symbol determination process is performed based on the hit universal figure random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the starting information extracted from the universal figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state of the figure (non-electric power support state), there is a 90% chance of winning the symbol 1 (general chart A) per figure, and a probability of 10% of winning the symbol 2 figure per figure (general diagram B). . On the other hand, in the high probability state of the universal figure (electric support state), there is a 100% probability of winning the symbol 2 per universal figure (general symbol B).

  Here, referring to the universal figure determination table shown in FIG. 161 (b), the hit type of the universal figure of the second embodiment will be described in detail. When is stopped and displayed, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 are opened for 1.8 seconds (however, the second special figure starting port 232 is closed when 10 balls are won). On the other hand, when the universal figure display device 210 stops displaying the universal symbol pattern 2 (general symbol B), the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special symbol starting port 232 opens for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special symbol). It will be closed when 10 balls are won in the starting opening 232.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the universal figure changing time is uniquely determined to be a predetermined time according to the control state of the universal figure. For example, the universal figure low probability state (non-electric support state) is 10 seconds, and the universal figure high probability state (electric support state) is 5 seconds.

<Sub-control side control processing>
Next, the first sub-control unit main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the second embodiment is shown in FIG. 142 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the first embodiment. Since each process of the first sub-control unit is basically the same, description thereof will be omitted. Further, the processing in the second sub control unit 500 is also basically the same as that in the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the pre-reading notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the decorative symbol of the general figure is displayed. A special display 2 reserved display area is prepared on the right side of the display area. In the special figure 1 pending display area, the pending display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the pending storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is displayed in the pending storage section of the special figure 1. The starting information is displayed in the order stored from the left (in order of winning), from oldest to newest. The hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored in or stored in the start information storage unit (a special storage unit of the RAM 308). In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage section of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is displayed in the hold storage section of the special figure 2. The starting information is displayed in the order stored from the left (in order of winning), from oldest to newest. That is, the hold display is performed for each start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the hold number. The decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start pending display means. In the present embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round figure is displayed in a non-pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 decorates based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending displays by one. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500 every time it receives a symbol variation start command that is a signal of the hold exhaustion, and the second sub-control unit 500 causes the hold decrease. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to decrease the number of pending displays by one.

  The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is an effect for giving a notice that the result of the hit / miss determination performed in the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 158 may be a big hit. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is also a jackpot relatively advantageous to the player (for example, 15R system jackpot: special figure A, special figure B) and relatively disadvantageous big hit ( For example, 4R system big hits: special figure C, special figure D) are prepared, and the look-ahead notice is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit. Even in the case of the 4R system big hit, the big hit with a certain variation (special figure C) may be an advantageous big hit. The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is a notice given based on the start-up information (pre-reading start-up information) acquired before the start-up information is acquired in the special map-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading notice is given based on the pre-determined result based on the pre-reading start information.

  Further, the pre-reading notice here includes a false pre-reading notice that falsely gives a warning as if the pre-judgment result is an advantageous big hit. That is, the pre-reading notice indicates that there is a possibility that the result of the success / failure judgment will be an advantageous jackpot, or is a notice that suggests to the player, or that the result of the success / failure determination is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that this is a notice to expect.

  In the second embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to perform the pre-reading notice effect using the hold display. In the look-ahead preview effect using this hold display, the execution start timing is at the time of winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208d in the decorative symbol display device 208. If there is a prize in the special map starting ports 230, 232 when the special map is not held, the determination of whether or not the special figure is based on the winning is immediately made and the symbol variation display of the special map is also made immediately. Since it is started, the suspension display of the special figure based on the winning is considered not to be performed, but it may be intentionally performed for a few seconds immediately after the symbol variable display of the special figure based on the winning is started. In this case, the pre-reading notice effect is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-reading start information) that notifies the result of the judgment based on the pre-reading start information. The pre-reading notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice mode of the pre-reading notice, and the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponds to an example of the pre-reading notice means.

  In addition, by driving the production movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is possible to perform the pre-reading announcement production by operating the accessory. The look-ahead notice effect by the action of the accessory may be executed at the time of winning or at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation stop in the prefetching notice means that at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the prefetched start information and the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display is stopped. More specifically, if there is a winning with the hold being 0, the winning / decreasing determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the variable display of the special symbols is also immediately started. When the symbol variable display corresponding to the information is stopped, the execution of the pre-reading notice is started.

  It is also possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by making a symbol such as a specific character or symbol appear on the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the look-ahead notice production using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first symbol variation start command after winning. It may be displayed during the variation display of the symbols. Here, if there is a winning in the state that the hold is 0, the winning / winning determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is also immediately started. Therefore, the winning / winning based on the pre-read start information. The symbol variation display for notifying the determination result (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) is started during the symbol variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed. When there is a winning in the state where the hold is 1 or more, the symbol variation display is performed before the symbol variation display. The execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or a predetermined area related to the effect display area 208d. Good.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to give a pre-reading notice effect by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the look-ahead notice effect using this background image is at the time of winning, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the notice using the image or the accessory, and may be the notice using the sound or the light.

  Upon receiving the special figure suspension increase command, the first sub control unit 400 performs the prefetching notice execution process in the effect control process in the first sub control unit main process. In the pre-reading notice execution process, a pre-reading notice using a hold display, a pre-reading notice by operating a character, a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, and a pre-reading notice using a background image are executed. Further, in the case of a pre-reading notice using the hold display, the display form after the change due to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from among the display forms of the plurality of types of the hold display prepared in advance. If it is a look-ahead notice due to operation of a bonus product, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from the drive patterns of a plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224 and the shielding device 246 prepared in advance. If it is a look-ahead notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to appear in the look-ahead notice is selected by lottery from the symbols such as a plurality of types of characters and symbols prepared in advance. In the case of a pre-reading notice using a background image, a background image used for the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the universal symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the universal symbol variation effect. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 also executes the special symbol variation effect.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a specific example of the universal symbol variation effect, the special symbol variation effect, and the prefetching notice effect.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols of special figures is displayed, and in a predetermined area 208x where decorative symbols of general figures are displayed in the effect display area 208d. , The stop design of the universal design decoration design is displayed. That is, it is a state where the special figure variation game and the general figure variation game are stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the symbol variable display is started on the universal figure display device 210, and the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed. Then, the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern is started. Further, here, the speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a general figure fluctuation sound indicating that the variable figure display is being performed on the general figure display device 210. The variation display of the universal figure decoration symbol and the output of the universal figure variation sound correspond to an example of the universal symbol variation effect, and the universal symbol variation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention.

  Subsequently, when the game balls enter the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are paid out as prize balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. In the area 208c, the variable display of the special figure decoration symbol is started. Further, from the speaker 120, a special figure variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed on the special figure 1 display device 212 is output. The variation display of the special figure decoration symbol and the output of the special figure variation sound correspond to an example of the special symbol variation effect. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by the winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is also executed. Here, a pre-reading notice effect using a specific symbol is executed at the time of winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol 2082 of the princess character as the specific symbol is displayed in the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. The pre-reading notice effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the pattern 2082 of the princess character is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special figure fluctuation sound also starts to sound in the middle of the general figure fluctuation sound, and the special figure fluctuation sound is overlaid with the special figure fluctuation sound. Further, the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern is displayed is covered for a moment by the pattern 2082 of the princess character passing by the look-ahead notice effect, and the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern disappears for a moment. In other words, the pattern 2082 of the princess character enters the predetermined area 208x, so that the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller. Therefore, the universal symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention is changed by the special symbol variation effect or the prefetching notice effect.

  In addition, here, the movement of the pattern 2082 of the princess character is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but may be executed as the special symbol variation effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 162 (c '), when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the middle symbol of the special figure decorative pattern is a predetermined area in which the variable display of the general figure decorative pattern is displayed. It may be a special symbol variation effect that is displayed in a variable manner over 208x. By doing so, the general symbol variation effect is changed by the special symbol variation effect. In addition, in order to pre-read the start information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230, the effect that the middle pattern of the special figure decoration pattern is variably displayed over the predetermined area 208x. It may be performed as a presentation of a pre-reading notice based on this.

  Further, in FIG. 162 (c), the look-ahead notice effect based on the look-ahead of the starting information stored in the special-figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 due to winning in the first special-figure starting port 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is executed in the form, it may be executed in a notice form in which the production movable body 224 is driven as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the rotating forearm 224b covers the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the universal figure decoration symbol is displayed, and the universal symbol variable effect is changed by the look-ahead notice effect.

  Also in the specific example of the second embodiment described above, due to the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning in the first special figure starting port 230, here, a change occurs in the general symbol variation effect, and the prize ball. The player is more likely to notice that the payout has been made, and it seems that the player can hold the ball better, which may improve the impression of the gaming table. This also applies to the specific examples described below. Moreover, since the general pattern variation effect is changed by the look-ahead notice effect, the player may have a predetermined profit (here, the prize ball is paid out) and the variable winning port 234 may be in an advantageous state. It can be recognized at once by the pre-reading notice effect (specific effect), which can enhance the interest of the player's game and improve the impression of the game table, compared with the case of individually recognizing each of them. It may be possible to

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a specific example of the universal symbol variation effect and the look-ahead notice effect. The differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 162 will be mainly described below.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal symbol variation effect is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the universal symbol decorative symbol is started, and the universal symbol fluctuation sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when the game balls enter the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are paid out as prize balls. Also, the special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 162 is started, but the start information stored in the special diagram 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 is prefetched by winning the first special symbol starting port 230. A pre-reading notice production based on this is also executed. The notice mode of the look-ahead notice effect based on the look-ahead here is a mode using a background image, and at the same time when the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, as shown in FIG. 163 (c), The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes black for a moment, and neither the ordinary symbol variation effect executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 nor the special symbol variation effect started by the decorative symbol display device 208 is seen for a moment. . That is, the general pattern variation effect is changed by the look-ahead notice effect.

  It should be noted that here, the switching of the background image is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as the special symbol variation effect. That is, the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is momentarily switched to a black background image (blackout image) before the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special image is started, and then the normal background image is restored to the decoration of the special image. A variable display of symbols may be performed. Even by rubbing, the special symbol variation effect changes due to the special symbol variation effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such a background image switching can be regarded as a special symbol variation effect that also serves as a scene switching effect.

  Further, in FIG. 163 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image), but as shown in FIG. 163 (c ′), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, whiteout image). Good.

  Further, in FIG. 163 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage section of the RAM 308 due to the winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is a notice mode using the background image. However, as shown in (c ″) of the same figure, it may be executed in a notice mode of closing the shield device 246 that has been opened. In this case as well, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the universal figure decoration symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the universal symbol variation effect is changed by the look-ahead notice effect. It should be noted that switching to a whiteout image and the effect production in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed can also be regarded as a scene switching effect.

  The background image may be a semitransparent image. Since it is semi-transparent, it is possible to visually confirm the special symbol variation effect and the special symbol variation effect, and thus it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the special symbol hold increase effect is executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a specific example of the universal symbol variation effect and the special symbol pending increase effect.

  In FIG. 164 (a), a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and a variation display of the special symbol decoration symbol is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, three special symbol reservation displays are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (a). Hereinafter, the special figure reservation display that represents the oldest special figure reservation (hereinafter referred to as special figure reservation 1) is referred to as a first special figure reservation display 296, and the second oldest special figure reservation (hereinafter referred to as special figure reservation 2). ) Is referred to as a second special figure reservation display 297, and the special figure reservation display indicating the latest special figure reservation (hereinafter referred to as special figure reservation 3) is referred to as a third special figure reservation display 298. Here, the number of reserved special maps is three. On the other hand, the public figure display device 210 is stopped and displayed, and in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop symbol of the universal figure decorative symbol is displayed.

  When the game sphere passes through the universal figure starting port 228 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the universal symbol variation effect is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the universal symbol decorative symbol is started, and the universal symbol fluctuation sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when the game balls enter the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the suspension of special maps will increase. Hereinafter, the increase of the special figure reservation will be referred to as a special figure reservation 4, and the special figure reservation display representing the special figure reservation 4 will be referred to as a fourth special figure reservation display 299. When the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the special figure holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown), and from the right end of the decorative pattern display device 208, the fourth black circle, which is the default display mode. The design 2991 of the truck on which the design of the special figure reservation display 299 is placed appears, and the design 2991 of this truck moves to the left in the effect display area 208d. As a result, as shown in FIG. 164 (c), the pattern 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern is performed, and the universal figure decoration pattern performed in the predetermined area 208x. The fluctuation display of disappears for a moment. In other words, the track pattern 2991 is inserted into the predetermined area 208x, so that the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller. In this specific example as well, the universal symbol variation effect is changed by the special symbol pending increase effect.

  The design of the fourth special figure reservation display 299 of the black circle which is the default display mode placed on the truck is carried to the right side of the third special figure reservation display 298, and then it is unloaded from the truck and the fourth special figure is displayed. The figure reservation display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure reservation display 298. When the fourth special drawing reservation display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special drawing reservation display 298, a pre-reading notice effect using the reservation display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 164 (d), an effect image 2992 of an aura of light indicating that light is radially radiating from the image of the black circle is added to the image of the black circle which is the default display mode. The display mode has changed. The effect image 2992 of the aura of light enters the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern is performed, and the predetermined area 208x becomes small here as well. Therefore, the general pattern variation effect is also changed by the look-ahead notice effect. The effect image 2992 of the aura of light may be a semitransparent image. Since it is semi-transparent, the general pattern variation effect can be visually recognized, and thus it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the general symbol variation effect.

  The display form of the fourth special figure reservation display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure reservation display 298 may be changed to another display mode. In FIG. 164 (d '), the display form of the fourth special figure reservation display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure reservation display 298 is changed to a character image of a panda with a scary face. Moreover, this character image is larger than the black circle image in the default display mode, and a part thereof enters the predetermined area 208x, and the general symbol variation effect is also changed by the look-ahead notice effect. The hold display, which also serves as a look-ahead notice effect, represents a hold that the player can expect for a big hit, and by making the display larger than the size of the default display mode, it becomes easier for the player to understand. In this way, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the expectation (reliability) of the prefetching notice. It should be noted that the hold display may be displayed in a large size only in the first predetermined period and thereafter may be displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the universal symbol variation effect itself changes. The differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 162 will be mainly described below.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal symbol variation effect is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the universal symbol decorative symbol is started, and the universal symbol fluctuation sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Then, when the game balls enter the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are paid out as prize balls also here. Further, as shown in FIG. 165 (c), the special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 162 is started. Further, based on the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the universal figure decoration symbol is performed changes, and the universal symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the unpatterned background image is changed to a diagonal striped background image.

  In addition, as a change in the universal symbol variation effect itself based on the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), instead of the variable display of the universal symbol decoration symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x. The countdown display may be performed, and the display may be changed to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → ○.

  When the number of special symbols is increased, a look-ahead notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special diagram reservation storage unit of the RAM 308 due to the winning of the special figure starting opening is displayed as a variable display of the universal symbol decoration symbol. May be executed in the predetermined area 208x where In this case, as shown in FIG. 165 (e), instead of the variable display of the universal figure decoration symbol, a symbol such as a specific character or symbol (here, a panda character character with a scary face) is displayed in the predetermined area 208x. Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern (general symbol variation effect) on the decorative pattern display device 208 is always performed every time. However, in the case of the misjudgment of the regular figure, it is predetermined. It may be performed with a probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing so, it may be possible to increase the player's expectation for the universal figure variation effect.

  Further, the sound effect based on each effect may include a silent effect. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to notice that a profit (for example, payout of a prize ball) has occurred. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it has hit or not the special figure, without disturbing the production of the special figure.

  It should be noted that the universal symbol variation effect may not be performed during electric power support. During electric power support, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 are easily opened, and a prize ball is easily generated. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the effect based on the prize ball generation. There are cases.

  Further, here, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, “the game ball can enter the game table that gives the player a predetermined game value based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball enters the winning opening or the starting opening). Starting information based on a first approach area (for example, a central universal figure starting gate 251) and a game ball entering the first approach area (for example, a universal figure winning random number and a random number for determining a universal figure variation period) ) Generating start information generating means (for example, a random number value storage register of the random number generating circuit 318 shown in FIG. 133 corresponding to the universal figure starting area, a random number counter for determining a universal figure variation period provided in the RAM 308, and A combination of a main control unit 300 that performs random number processing and a win / loss determination means that performs a win / fail determination based on the start information generated by the start information generation means (for example, a master control that executes a universal figure validity determination process). The CPU 304 of the unit 300), an effect producing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that produces an effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a universal symbol variation effect) on the effect producing means based on the result of the hit determination of the hit determining means. ) Is carried out (for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500), and a second entry area where the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball (for example, , Central general winning opening 226), and the effect control means, based on the game ball has entered the second entry area during the predetermined effect, the effect means to the predetermined effect. A game table characterized in that a changed effect (for example, a change in the universal symbol pattern changing effect due to the appearance of a prize ball paying appearance) is performed. ] Is made.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (for example, a gate) through which the game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where a game ball rolls, and the game ball may further roll in the game area even when entering. Further, the predetermined condition may not be established even if the game ball enters the first entry area.

  Further, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and when entering, the game ball may be guided to the back side of the game area.

  Further, in the second entry area, it is easy to enter the game ball from the first state where it is difficult to enter the game ball, based on the result of the hit determination of the hit determination means being a specific hit determination result. It may include a variable starting port that changes its state to the second state.

  Further, the predetermined effect may be an image display effect, a sound effect, or a light effect.

  In addition, the effect that changes the predetermined effect here may be an effect in which the predetermined effect itself is switched to another effect, or an effect in which a part of the predetermined effect is changed. Alternatively, a part or all of the predetermined effect may be covered with another effect.

  In addition, giving a predetermined game value to a player is, for example, paying out a game medium.

  Further, in the description so far, "The effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, a prize ball paying appearance) that affects the predetermined effect because the effect is changed. A game table characterized by the fact that there is. ] Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, "the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) that displays an effect image, and the effect control means controls the predetermined effect image (for example, a decoration of a general figure). (Variable display of symbols) is displayed on the image display means to cause the image display means to perform the predetermined effect, and a part or all of the predetermined effect image is changed as the effect. An image (for example, see FIG. 149 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 with a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Game table. ] Is also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may display an effect image, which is wholly or partially translucent, on the image display means as the specific effect.

  Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The effect control means causes the sound output means to perform the predetermined effect by causing the sound output means to output the predetermined sound, and a specific output that is output in parallel with the predetermined sound as the specific effect. A sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing so, the player may be able to recognize the generation of profit by the sound based on the specific effect.

  Further, the sound output means includes a ball dish capable of storing a game ball, and the game ball paid out from the game ball payout means collides with the ball plate or the game ball stored in the ball plate. A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing so, the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker, so that the player may be able to more recognize the occurrence of profit.

  Further, in the above description, “the first entry area (for example, the central universal figure starting gate 251) is provided in the game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game ball rolls, and the entered game ball is The game ball further rolls in the game area, and the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226) is entered by the game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area. A game table, which is provided at a position where it can be played. ] Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, "a winning device (for example, a variable winning port 234, which becomes advantageous to a player based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning of a special jackpot)). ), The effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect that suggests that the predetermined second condition is likely to be established (for example, an effect of prefetching notice) as the specific effect. A gaming table characterized by being. ] Is also explained.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the win / fail judgment based on the first start information is used as the first win / fail judgment. The hit / damage determination means for performing the first hit / damage determination is the first hit / miss determination means.

  In addition, the second starting information (for example, special figure) which is formed on the basis of the fact that the game sphere enters into the aforementioned 2nd entry territory (for example, 1st special figure starting mouth 230, 2nd special figure starting mouth 232) Second start information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores a winning random number value, a big hit special figure random value, a small hit special figure random value, a lost special figure random number value, and a special figure fluctuation time determination random value. And the second starting information stored in the second starting information storage means, and whether or not the second starting information is obtained based on the acquired second starting information. A second winning / judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for making a judgment and deriving a second winning / damage judgment result, and a variable display of symbols and ending the variable display of the symbols, the second winning / prohibition Performs a pattern variation display that stops and displays the symbol aspect indicating the determination result The second symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214), and the second symbol display device stop and display the symbol aspect showing the specific second winning / deciding determination result. After that, the control state transition unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that transitions the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state, and the win / fail judgment based on the predetermined second start information by the second win / no judgment unit. The pre-reading notice effect that gives a notice that there is a possibility that the result of the above may become the specific second hit determination result (for example, the jackpot hit determination result), the second hit determination means sets the predetermined second hit determination result. A game stand provided with a pre-reading notice production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that is executed with a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second start information acquired before the start information is acquired. There The production means includes the pre-reading notice production means, and the production control means causes the pre-reading notice production means to perform the pre-reading notice production as the specific production. Good.

  Also, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning opening 234) which is opened after the second symbol display means stops and displays the symbol aspect showing the specific second winning / absence determination result (for example, the special symbol jackpot determination result). May be provided.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice production means executes a pre-reading notice production that gives a notice that the result of the hit determination based on the predetermined start information by the hit determination means may be the specific hit determination result. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed, in which the hit / fail judgment unit notifies the information based on the predetermined start information acquired before the predetermined start information is acquired.

  Further, the pre-reading notice production means may start the pre-reading notice production before the hit / disapproval determination means makes a hit / no decision based on the predetermined start information.

  Further, a pattern display means is provided for performing symbol fluctuation display for each starting information stored in the starting information storage means, from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the stop display of the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the hit / miss judgment. If it is a mode, the pre-reading notice effect control means, in at least one of the predetermined start information during the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol variation display executed prior to the symbol variation display. It is also possible to execute a pre-reading announcement effect for notifying that the result of the hit determination based on the result will be the specific hit determination result.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice production means, whether or not execution of the notice that the result of the success / failure determination based on the predetermined start information by the success / failure determination means may be the specific success / failure determination result is appropriateness determination means is It is also possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that is determined before performing the hit determination based on the predetermined start information.

  Further, the pre-reading notice effect means may execute the pre-reading notice effect on the basis of the predetermined starting information being stored in the start-up information storing means, or the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. Alternatively, it may be executed based on receiving a command indicating that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means.

  In addition, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming machine in which the enclosed ball which is given a prize and is won in the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball which is not won is fired again in the game area and can be circulated. Further, the game value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data that can be fired to the game area, the effect control means, based on the game ball number data is given to the player, You may make the said production | generation means perform the production | generation which changed the said predetermined production | generation (for example, the production | generation design variation production | production changed by the prize ball paying appearance). Further, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an image showing the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game balls as the specific effect.

  Subsequently, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, items that are the same as those described above may be omitted or may be repeated, but the same name as the name of the component described above is used for the component. Will be described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 166 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 166 is a game board that makes a right-hand hit during the electric support and the big hit game. In this game board 200, a universal figure starting port (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left area and the right area. The universal figure starting port 228 corresponds to an example of an entry area, and the ball passing through the universal figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side but rolls in the game area 124. The universal figure starting port 228 provided in the left area can aim to open the electric turong (details will be described later) in the non-electric power support state, and the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the right area is It is possible to aim to open the power cable while the power is being supported.

  Further, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are starting areas into which game balls can enter, but by arranging the game nails 238 and the like, rolling in the second area (right side in the game area) The game ball to be played is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 232. On the other hand, the second special figure starting port (electric Chu) 232 rolls in the second area (right side in the game area) even if the game ball rolls in the first area (left side in the game area). Even a game ball can be entered. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230, and in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid are provided. It is provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 corresponds to the variable starting means (variable starting area), and is hereinafter referred to as electric Chu (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 is opened. Is called Den Chu open. When the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (first state), it is difficult to enter the game ball, and when the pair of blade members 2321 is open (second state), it is easy to enter the game ball. . The electric chu is a starting region in which at least the state can be changed between the difficult entry state and the easy entry state. It should be noted that the size of the receiving opening for the game balls of the electric chu in the state where the pair of blade members 2321 is open is less than five game balls.

  Further, the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the movable state of the door member 2341 enables the winning state. That is, the variable winning port 234 is a winning area (winning means) in which at least the state can be changed between the non-winable state and the possible winning state. It should be noted that the size of the game ball receiving port of the attacker with the door member 2341 open is equal to or larger than five game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 166, due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 and the like, it is difficult for the game ball rolling in the first area (left side in the game area) to enter the variable winning port (attacker) 234 or Since it is impossible, the player has to make a right hit during the big hit game.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIG. 167 (a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings, general drawings, and decorative patterns to be used will be described.

  FIG. 167 (a) is an example of a stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. It is the figure which showed. In FIG. 167 (a), ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown. In FIG. 167 (a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols (“Special symbol A” to “Special symbol F”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special drawing A" and "Special drawing B" are 15 round (R) special jackpot designs, and "Special drawing E" is a 2R jackpot design (sudden change). When these symbols (special maps A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state. “Special drawing C” and “Special drawing D” are 15R jackpot designs (15R normal jackpot). After the special map C or the special map D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot pattern (hidden probability variation). When the special map F is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability state, and when special figure A, special figure B, special figure E, and special figure F are won, after the big hit game ends, next big hit The special figure high probability state is maintained until you do. On the other hand, when the special map C and the special map D are won, the special map low probability state remains after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, after the 15R big hit game and after the big hit game due to a sudden change, the state shifts to a state with electric choo support (electric sapo) (hereinafter referred to as electric sapo state). In the present embodiment as well, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short change, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. . In the non-electric power support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric power support state. In the present embodiment, when the special map A, the special map B, or the special map E is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability State) is maintained, and the special map C or special map D is stopped and displayed, and after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, the special support variable game is maintained 100 times while the electric support state is maintained and the 101st time. Will shift to the non-electric power support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. As will be described later, the special figure F is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two kinds of stop symbols are prepared as the small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. In FIG. 167 (a), the special symbol G is the small hit symbol 1 and the special symbol H is the small hit symbol 2. Any of the small hit symbols is a stop symbol mode in which the profit amount to be given to the player becomes a relatively small profit amount. As will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol selected in the special map 1 but not selected in the special map 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as the lost symbols. The special symbol I is the lost symbol 1 and the special symbol J is the lost symbol 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the big hit control state of the second advantage, which is highly advantageous to the player, and the first advantage, which is less advantageous than the second advantage. A non-big hit control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of a big hit control state (second control state) and a non-big hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of the control state transition unit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the 15R special jackpot pattern, symbols other than the two types of symbols, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B", are also prepared, and the 15R normal jackpot symbol is "special symbol". Symbols other than the two types of symbols "Fig. C" and "special diagram D" are also prepared, and a plurality of types of symbols are also prepared for sudden sudden change big hit symbols and hidden certain change big hit symbols.

  FIG. 167 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern of a special drawing. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the special drawing in this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." When the hold digestion condition is satisfied, in each of the symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → " "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols of the special symbols in a variable manner in addition to the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) which is a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. The variable display and stop display of the decorative symbols of the special figure are synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214.

  When notifying the 15R special big hit (“special drawing A” “special drawing B”) or the 15R special big hit (“special drawing C” “special drawing D”), the same decorative pattern is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three arranged decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative designs is a combination of decorative designs that are confirmed as a big hit. In addition, among these combinations of decorative patterns, combinations of decorative patterns in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") Is a combination of 15R special jackpot-decorated decorative symbols which is stopped and displayed only in the case of the 15R special jackpot which is “special map A” or “special map B”. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map F”) or a small hit (“special map G”, “special map H”) of the 2R big hit, “” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying a sudden change (“special figure E”) of the 2R jackpot, a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" and a combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" may be referred to as a chance opportunity. Further, when notifying a lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol J", in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols other than the combinations of the decorative symbols described above (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative design display device 208, the special display from the start of this “variable display of the decorative design of the special design” to the stop display of the stop design mode (combination of the decorative designs) of the special design It may be referred to as a variable display of decorative patterns for use. The variable display of the special design decorative pattern is performed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  As described above, the stop symbol aspect of the special symbols 1 and 2 (see FIG. 134 (a)), and one special symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop symbol mode of the decorative pattern (see FIG. 7 (c)) is larger than the decorative pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 3 (c)).

  FIG. 167 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a stopped symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the universal figure that is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the symbols on the universal figure display device 210. In the present embodiment, two types of hit symbols (“Public symbol A” and “Public symbol B”) and one type of deviating symbol (“Public symbol C”) are prepared as stop symbol patterns of the universal symbol. . "Universal figure A" is a winning symbol 1, and "Public symbol B" is a winning symbol 2. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 indicates that all seven segments are lit and one segment in the center is lit. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, the stop symbol mode of the universal figure shown in FIG. 167 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 167 (c), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable display of the universal figure. The public figure display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification means, a first symbol display means, or a simple symbol display means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the variable display of the decorative symbol of the general figure. FIG. 167 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol of a general figure. The variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure will be described later in detail, but after the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 7D is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, when the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol 1 (“universal figure A”) shown in FIG. 7C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the “universal symbol” shown in FIG. When the decoration 1 "is stopped and displayed, and the universal figure display device 210 also stops and displays the hit symbol 2 (" general symbol B ") shown in FIG. 7C, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the same figure (d). “Public decoration 2” shown in () is stopped and displayed, and in each case, the hit of the universal figure is notified. Further, when the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the outlier symbol (“general symbol C”) shown in FIG. 7C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the “general symbol ornament” shown in FIG. "3" is stopped and displayed, and the deviation from the normal figure is notified. It should be noted that the variable display of the regular symbols on the universal symbol display device 210 and the variable display of the decorative symbols of the regular symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized.

  Subsequently, the hit / no-go decision of the universal figure in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, left-handing is performed in the non-electrically-supported state, and right-handing is performed in the electrically-supported state. When left-handed hitting is performed in the non-electric power support state, whether or not the general figure is valid is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting port (gate) 228 provided in the left area. When the player hits the ball right in the power-supported state, the hit / non-defective judgment is made on the basis of the game ball passing through the universal figure starting port (gate) 228 provided in the right area. In addition, even if the player hits the right side in the non-electrically-supported state and the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the right area, the left side is in the electrically-supported state even if the game ball is in the electrically supported state. Even if the game ball hits and the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the left area, the determination as to whether or not the universal figure is correct is made. However, if the universal figure hold digestion condition is not satisfied, the universal figure will not be judged. The condition to fulfill the hold digestion condition of the universal figure here is when the universal figure is on hold, when the electric chute is inactive, the universal figure variation game is not being played, and the universal figure confirmation display is also not in progress. Is a requirement that holds. In addition, in the state where there is no holding of the general figure, when the electric Chu is not in operation, the general figure variation game is not being performed, and the general figure confirmation display is not being displayed, the general figure starting opening (gate) 228 is played. It is a requirement that holds even if the ball passes.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 according to the present embodiment, a universal figure validity determination table is also stored.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for general / universal pattern judgment, and FIG. 168 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for general / universal pattern judgment.

  In the present embodiment, when the universal figure random number acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random number values (starting information) is stored in the universal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement to satisfy the universal figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement to be established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting port (gate) 228. That is, in the state where the number of reserved universal figures is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reserved universal figures is the predetermined upper limit number, It is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228. In the present embodiment, the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure determination random number value are stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit as one set of random number values (starting information).

  In the universal figure hit / miss determination process, the hit / fail determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. If the time saving flag is turned off (in the non-electric power saving state), it is determined whether or not the general figure is correct by using the low probability table shown in FIG. 168 (a), and if the time saving flag is turned on (the power saving support). (If it is in a state), it is determined whether or not the general figure is valid by using the high probability table shown in FIG. 168 (b). The universal figure winning / judgment determination is performed based on the universal figure winning random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information extracted from the universal figure pending storage unit of the RAM 308. The hit probability of the universal figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 168 (a), and is 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 168 (b). Although it is almost true that the winning / decreasing judgment is successful, the probability of winning in the electric support state is higher than that in the non-electricity support state in probabilistic terms. Here, deriving the “hit” or “miss” corresponds to the universal figure hit / miss determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the universal figure hit / miss determination process here uses the first hit / miss determination means. This corresponds to an example of (assistance propriety determination means). In addition, the hit / no hit determination result of the hit is equivalent to an example of a specific hit / no hit determination result.

  Upon completion of the determination on whether or not the universal figure is valid, the stop symbol mode of the universal figure is determined. In addition, it may be possible to determine whether or not the universal figure is valid (first determination) by combining the determination of whether or not the universal figure is valid and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the universal figure.

  FIG. 168 (c) is a diagram showing a low probability table for general figure determination, and FIG. 168 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability table for general figure determination.

  Also in the universal figure determination process, the universal figure determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. If the time saving flag is turned off (in the non-electric power support state), the universal figure determination is performed using the low probability table shown in FIG. 168 (c), and if the time saving flag is turned on (in the power support state). If so, the general figure determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. 168 (d). This general figure determination processing is performed based on the general figure determination random value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the starting information extracted from the general figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state of the figure (non-electric power support state), there is a 99% chance of winning the pattern 1 per figure (Public A), and a probability of 1% to win the pattern 2 per figure (PB) . On the other hand, in the high probability state of the universal figure (electric support state), there is a 100% probability of winning the symbol 2 per universal figure (general symbol B). Since there is only one type of lost symbol, the universal figure determination process based on the universal figure determination random number value may be omitted.

  The hit / no hit judgment of the general map may be to derive “hit” or “miss”. Alternatively, the determination as to whether or not the universal figure is valid may be to derive even the universal symbol.

  The variable time is described for reference in both the general figure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (c) and the general figure determination table shown in FIG. 168 (d). In the present embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure in the universal figure display device 210 is uniformly 1 second in the electric support state and 20 seconds in the non-electric support state. Therefore, the variation time of the normal figure is a relatively short first variation time in the electrical support state, and is a relatively long second variation time in the electrical support state. If the universal figure random number acquisition condition is met, the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation period is acquired together with the random number value for universal figure winning and the random number for universal figure determination, and the variation time of the universal figure is determined by lottery. Good.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, the opening / closing pattern of the electric tube will be described.

  FIG. 169 (a) is a diagram for explaining an opening / closing pattern of the electric chew in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  When the universal figure determination result is the universal figure A, after the universal figure decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the electric Chu performs opening for 0.3 seconds once. Even in the pachinko machine in the second embodiment, the interval at which the game balls are fired by the launching device 110 is 0.6 seconds, and in the case of the hit symbol of the general figure A, the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 is one time. It is shorter than the firing interval of the balls, and even if the player wins the per-universal map of the general-universal map A, it is virtually impossible to expect to enter the electric-chu and it is almost impossible to obtain the exit ball. Hereinafter, the opening of the pair of blade members 232a upon winning the general drawing A may be referred to as electric Chu short opening. This electric choo short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes an electric chew open pattern in the non-electric support state.

  When the universal figure determination result is the universal figure B, after the universal figure decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, Den Chu first opens for 0.3 seconds, and then, After a closing time of 0.5 seconds, a 5 second opening is performed. That is, the electric Chu performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the opening of the pair of blade members 232a upon winning the general drawing B may be referred to as electric turong opening. With this Den Chu Long Open (corresponding to the second opening pattern), you can expect to enter the Den Chu and expect to get an exit. In the electric turong opening, the blade member 2321 may be opened at least longer than the firing interval or longer than the normal figure fluctuation time in the electric support state, and the first opening for 0.3 seconds is omitted. Alternatively, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric chu long opening stochastically becomes an electric chu opening opening pattern in the electric power support state.

  If a predetermined number of balls enter before the predetermined opening time elapses, Den Chu is closed at that time.

  When the universal figure determination result is the universal figure C, after the universal figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the electric chow does not perform the opening operation and maintains the closed state.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter, referred to as a universal figure effect) performed on the sub control unit side (second sub control unit 500) will be described. In the general pattern production in the present embodiment, at least one of production during change, production during determination, and production during operation is included, or a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 is included. Any effect can be used as long as it is an effect executed in the area. Fluctuating effect is an effect that is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the symbol variation display of the universal figure by the universal figure display device 210, and the confirming effect is that the stop symbol aspect of the universal symbol on the universal figure display device 210 is confirmed. It is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and the in-motion effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during operation of the electric chu. In addition, these effects are effects that are related to the result of the hit / non-judgment of the special drawing (for example, notice of hitting the general drawing), and effects that are related to the result of judgment of the special drawing (for example, notice of big hit of the special drawing) are added. Alternatively, instead of the effect regarding the result of the hit / miss determination of the universal figure, the effect regarding the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure may be performed. As will be described in more detail later, the universal figure production is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area displaying the hold icon of special map 1 and the area displaying the hold icon of special map 2. .

  FIG. 169 (b) is a diagram for explaining several examples of the general figure production in the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  (A) to (F) are variable display patterns during the non-electric power support state.

  (A) is a variable display pattern of the decorative pattern of the general figure (the above-mentioned effect during fluctuation). In the effect shown in (A), the high-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of the universal figure decoration 1, the universal figure decoration 2, and the universal figure decoration 3, and after 3 seconds, the decorative pattern of the universal figure showing the result of the universal figure determination is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also the variable display pattern of the decorative pattern of the general figure (the above-mentioned effect during the fluctuation). In the effect shown in (A), high-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of figure decoration 2, figure decoration 2, and figure decoration 3, and after 15 seconds, the decoration pattern of the figure representing the figure decision result is stopped and displayed. In this effect, many ordinary figure decorations 2 are displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so the degree of expectation of opening the electric turong improves.

  (C) is also a variable display pattern of the decorative pattern of the general figure (the above-mentioned effect during the fluctuation). In the effect shown in (C), the high-speed fluctuation in which the universal figure decoration 2 is continuously displayed is repeated and stopped and displayed after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the universal figure decoration 2 is continuously displayed, the stop display is also the universal figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this effect is started, the electric Chulong opening is confirmed.

  (D) is also a variable display pattern (decorative effect during the variation) of a decorative pattern of a general figure. In the production shown in (D), the high-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of the universal design 1, the universal design 2, the universal design 3, and the decorative pattern of "Gekiatsu", which indicates the big hit notice of the special design. After 10 seconds, One of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the decoration pattern of "Gekiatsu" may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the expectation of opening the electric turong does not increase, but the expectation of the big hit of the special figure increases and the interest of the game improves. . In other words, it may be possible to expect a big hit as well as an electric chu open.

  (E) is also a variable display pattern (decorative effect during the variation) of a decorative pattern of a general figure. In the production shown in this (e), the high-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of the decoration pattern of "Public decoration 2" and "Gekiatsu" which shows a big hit notice of special drawing. One of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In this effect, half of the special jackpot notice is displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so it may be possible to expect not only the opening of the electric tube but also the special jackpot during high-speed fluctuations.

  In the variable display pattern shown in (F), the decorative pattern of "latent" which shows the notice of 2R big hit which is the latent probability change of special figure, the decorative pattern of "Attack" which shows the notice of 2R big hit which is sudden change of special figure, High-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of the "big hit" decorative pattern representing the 15R big hit notice of the special figure, and after 5 seconds, one of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable winning port 234 is confirmed.

  The variable display pattern described above may be one in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the timing of ending the symbol variable display of the universal figure by the universal figure display device 210. In particular, in the case of hitting a universal figure, after this, the electric chute is released, so that the timing of ending the pattern variation display by the universal figure display device 210 and the production ending timing of (a) to (e) are matched. It is preferable to notify the player of the opening of Den Chu. On the other hand, particularly in the case of a non-genuine figure, it is not always necessary to match the timings of the two, and it may be performed at any timing during the symbol fluctuation display of 20 seconds by the figure display device 210. For example, the public figure production may be started before the symbol variation display by the public figure display device 210 is started, or the public figure production may be continued until after the pattern variation display by the public figure display device 210 is finished. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect relating to the result of the hit determination of the special figure, not the ordinary figure, it may be performed during the period in which the symbol variation display by the universal figure display device 210 is not performed. Further, the decorative design that is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative design may be a decorative design that represents a false general pattern determination result, or may be a false big hit announcement.

  (G) is an example of the above-mentioned effect during operation. In the production during operation shown in (K), after the symbol variation display by the universal figure display device 210 in the non-electric power support state, the decorative pattern on which the character of the samurai is giving the peace sign is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. It In the non-electric power support state, in many cases, the electric choo short opening is won, but during the electric choo short opening, the in-motion effect shown in (ki) is suddenly executed for a moment. In addition, in the case of winning the Den Chu long opening, the in-motion effect shown in (G) is executed for 5.8 seconds during which the Den Chu opens and closes. It should be noted that the action effect shown in (K) may be executed only while Den Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only when Den Chu first opens for 0.3 seconds ( The in-motion effect shown in (g) may be executed. Hereinafter, the effect in which the decorative design in which the lord's character is making a peace sign is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 may be referred to as the electric-chu open notification performance.

  In addition, you may make it perform the action production shown in (ki) immediately after the fixed display of the universal figure B by the universal figure display device 210 is complete | finished (immediately before the operation of the electric chu).

  Further, not only the non-electric power support state, but also in the electric power support state, when the electric tulong opening is won, the in-motion effect shown in (K) may be executed. In this case, after the variable display for 1 second is displayed, in most cases, the electric chu long is won, and during the 5.8 seconds during which the electric chu opens and closes, the performance during operation shown in (ki) is executed. do it. In addition, when the electrifying short circuit opening is won, it may be executed for a moment during the electrifying short circuit opening for 0.3 seconds.

  In addition, the effect time (first time) of the variable display patterns shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 169 (b) is the effect of the electric-chu open notification effect effect pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 169 (b). Since it is a time longer than the time (second time), and the variable display effect of the decorative pattern of the general figure is performed in a relatively long effect time, it may be possible to improve the expectation for opening the electric chu.

  (H) is an example of an effect of giving a big hit notice of the change in the special map. The effect shown in (H) is executed in a region including a predetermined region in the decorative symbol display device 208 irrespective of the symbol variation display by the universal figure display device 210 and the operation of the electric chew. That is, it is executed during the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, even if the symbol variable display by the universal symbol display device 210 is not being performed or the power switch is not operating. It is an effect that is an effect to give a notice that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, and an effect that gives an advance notice as if the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed in the variable display ( So-called false notice production) is also included. Here, the "latency" decorative pattern that shows the notice of the 2R jackpot which is the latent change of the special figure, the decorative pattern of "Attack" that shows the notice of the 2R jackpot that is the sudden change of the special figure, and the 15R jackpot notice of the special figure High-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative pattern that is represented and the “gekiatsu” decorative pattern that represents the special jackpot notice, and after 8 seconds, one of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that a decorative pattern of a picture may be used instead of the decorative pattern of a character.

  Also, the electric-chu release notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 169 (b) may be executed after the effects of (a) to (f) and (h) shown in FIG. 169 (b). That is, the electric-chu open notification effect may be combined with the variable display pattern. Further, the electric-chu open notification effect may not be executed when the electric-chu short is opened, but may be executed when the electric-chu long is opened. By doing so, the electric-chu open notification production is performed only when the electric-chu is opened advantageously for the player, and it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player. In addition, when the normal figure A is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variable display effect) of (A) to (F) and (H) shown in FIG. 169 (b) are not executed, and the electric power is released. The notification effect is also not executed, and when the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative pattern variable display effect) of (A) to (F) and (H) shown in FIG. 169 (b) are executed. After that, the electric-chu open notification effect may be executed. By doing so, the decorative symbol variable display effect is performed only when the electric Chu is advantageously opened, and it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player.

  In addition, the general drawing effect may be an effect that does not perform the variable display (the above-mentioned changing effect) of the decorative pattern of the general figure, and displays the general pattern decorative pattern shown in FIG. 167 (d) as the finalizing effect. However, the effect during the confirmation may be performed, and in the case of a normal figure, the electric chew opening notification effect may be performed. It should be noted that, even in the case of a general figure, it may be an effect in which the electric Chu opening notification effect is performed only in the case of a general figure B in which the electric Chu long opening is performed, or in the sense that the rare display is performed in an extremely short time, It may be an effect in which the electric-chu open notification effect is performed only in the case of the general drawing A in which the electric-chu short opening is performed.

  Subsequently, the universal figure effect determination process executed by the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 170.

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the flow of the universal figure production determination process.

  A universal figure variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. The universal figure effect determination process shown in FIG. 170 is started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this universal figure variation start command. The universal figure fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is in the power support state) and the universal figure determination result. Note that the main control unit 300 also transmits a general-drawing-holding increase command to the first sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the general-drawing holding increase command, the general-drawing effect determination process is started. You may

  First, based on the information indicating the current control state included in the universal figure fluctuation start command, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is being performed (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-electric power support state, it is determined whether or not the universal figure effect is executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the figure determination result included in the figure variation start command is figure B, the figure effect is executed. Further, even if the figure determination result is the figure C, it may be executed as a false figure effect. Furthermore, a dedicated random number may be acquired, a drawing effect execution availability lottery may be performed, and the random number may be executed when the lottery is won. In particular, when the result of the universal figure determination is the universal figure C, the execution of the false general figure effect may be determined by the lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol variation start command is received and the symbol variation of the special symbol is being executed, the general figure effect may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the universal figure effect including the big hit advance notice effect of the special figure. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is being executed, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the special jackpot notice effect of the special symbol may be executed, Even if the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed, the big hit announcement effect of a false special figure may be executed. The special jackpot jackpot notice effect may also be executed when an effective / non-effective lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the figure effect is not executed, the figure effect determination process ends, and if the figure effect is to be executed, it is then determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the big hit game of the special drawing (attacker opening and closing operation) and during the production with high expectation of the big hit of the special drawing (for example, during super reach in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing), The execution of each of (a) to (e) and (h) shown in 169 (b) is refrained from. The predetermined period referred to here is during the big hit game of the special figure, and during the production with high expectation of the big hit of the special figure. If it is not within the predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((A) to (K)) shown in FIG. 169 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. Note that the electric-chu-opening notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 169 (b) may be executed after each of the effects of (a) to (e) shown in FIG. 169 (b), or FIG. 169 (b). It is also possible to execute only the electric-chu open notification effect without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. In addition, if it is not during the predetermined period, an effect pattern may be selected from effects ((A) to (E) and (K) shown in FIG. 169 (b)) other than the electric-chu open notification effect.

  On the contrary, if it is within the predetermined period, the effect pattern of only the electric-chu open notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 169 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. By doing so, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variable display effect of (A) to (E) and (H) shown in FIG. 169 (b) is not executed, and the time of the general figure effect is opened to the electric power tube. Only the presentation time of the notification production may be provided, and the player may be able to concentrate on the big hit game.

  In step S606, the information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the universal figure effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the ordinary figure effect determination processing is ended. The second sub-control unit 500, which has received the universal figure effect command, controls the decorative pattern display device 208 based on the information indicating the effect pattern included in the universal figure effect command to set a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. The general drawing effect is executed in the area including the area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the current control state is the electric power support state, the general figure effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. In addition, when the current control state is the electric support state, instead of not uniformly executing the universal figure effect, the execution possibility lottery is performed, and the universal figure effect is executed with a predetermined probability. Good. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general-drawing effect is an effect that is more likely to be executed in the non-electrically supported state than in the electrically supported state. The non-electric power support state is a state in which the game ball is hard to win in the Den Chu, so that it may be possible to expect the winning of the game ball in the Den Chu. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the player's expectation level may not be improved so much even if the general production is performed because the game balls are easy to win in the electric Chu.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the predetermined period such as during the big hit game, the changing effect and the finalizing effect are not uniformly performed by the determination of step S603, but only the electric-chu open notification effect is performed. In addition, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, instead of not uniformly executing the production during change and the effect during determination, the execution possibility lottery is performed, and the effect during change and the effect during determination are executed with a predetermined probability. Good. Further, during the above-described predetermined period, the changing effect and the finalizing effect may not be performed, and the universal figure effect may not be uniformly performed. Alternatively, even if it is performed, it is also possible to perform the executability lottery and execute only the electric-chu open notification effect with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect that is more likely to be executed in the non-big hit control state than in the big hit control state. In the case where the player can expect the player by performing the general drawing production during the non-big hit game, the winning of the winning / discarding judgment of the universal figure is also a factor that improves the chance of the determination of the winning / disapproval of the special drawing (lottery for the big hit). There is. Also, in general, there are more attacker prize balls than Den Chu, and in the board layout where Den Chu is located on the upper side or upstream side of the attack, opening Den Chu during the big hit game wins the attack May interfere with. Therefore, it may be possible to alleviate the dissatisfaction of the player by making it difficult for the universal figure production to be performed during the big hit game.

  Here, the determination of success / failure of the special figure will also be described.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure starting information acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random number values (starting information) is stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit or the special figure 2 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for satisfying the special figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement that is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 for the special figure 1. That is, in the state where the number of holdings of special figure 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230. In addition, the special figure 2 is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu). That is, in the state where the number of holdings of special figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232. In the present embodiment, as a set of random number values (starting information), a special figure 1 winning random number value, a special figure 1 determined random number value, and a special figure 1 variable time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 1 reserved storage unit. To do. Further, as a set of random number values (starting information), a special figure 2 winning random number value, a special figure 2 determined random number value, and a special figure 2 variable time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 2 reserved storage unit.

  FIG. 171 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, and FIG. 171 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the probability variation flag when the start information is extracted from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. FIG. 1 is based on which random number range in the winning probability high probability table shown in FIG. 171 (a) the winning random number value (both possible numerical values range from 0 to 65535) belongs to as the special figure winning judgment result. "Big hit" or "miss" is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is OFF, it means that the special figure low probability state, so that the special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random number value is any random number in the winning probability high probability table shown in FIG. 171 (b). Based on whether or not it belongs to the range, "big hit" or "miss" is derived as the special figure 2 hit / miss determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, while it is about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In this embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2, but only in the special figure 1. Therefore, as a result of the winning / judging determination using the random number value of the special figure 1 winning, if there is a loss, the small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 171 (c) is a diagram showing a small hit determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the small hit determination limited to the special figure 1, the small hit determination is performed by using the random number value of the special figure 1 winning again.

  Note that, as in the case of the special view 1, the special view 2 may be provided with a small hit.

  In this way, “big hit”, “small hit” or “miss” is derived as the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment result. In addition, “big hit” or “miss” is derived as the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 is valid.

  Then, the symbol of the special drawing is determined based on the result of the special drawing judgment.

  FIG. 171 (d) is a diagram showing a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure determination table, the big hit (special figure A ~ special figure F), small hit (special figure G, H), out (special figure I, J) stop symbol mode of the special figure (Fig. 167 (a ) Reference) is defined for the random number range. Note that the special figure 2 is not provided with a random number range corresponding to each of the special figures F to H, and in the special figure 2, the big hits are 15R special big hits (special figures A and B) and 15R normal big hits. (Special drawing C, D), suddenly changed 2R big hit design (Special drawing E), there is no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 random number value or the special figure 2 random value out of one set of random number values previously acquired from the special figure 1 pending storage section or the special figure 2 pending storage section of the RAM 308. The special figure is determined using a numerical value (the possible numerical value range is 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special jackpot (special maps A and B), which is the most advantageous for the game, is 70% in the case of the special map 2, while it is 30% in the case of the special map 1. 2 is a big hit that is more advantageous than Toku-zu 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit, which is advantageous for the player, than the special figure 1.

  Whether or not the special figure is hit may be determined by deriving “big hit”, “small hit” or “miss”, or by deriving “big hit” or “miss”. Alternatively, whether or not the special figure is valid may be derived to the special figure design.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in this embodiment will be described. First, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 172 is a figure showing 1/5 part of the concrete example of the production in this embodiment, FIG. 173 is a figure showing 2/5 part of the concrete example of the production in this embodiment, and FIG. 174 is this embodiment. 175 is a diagram showing a 3/5 part of a specific example of the effect in FIG. 175, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a 4/5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 176 is a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a 5/5 portion, and FIGS. 172 to 176 are examples in which they are connected together.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in the drawings showing the respective stages of FIGS. 172 to 176. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general image display device 210, a first special image display device 212, and a second special image display device 214 are shown. The public figure display device 210 is the 7-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special figure display device 214 is the 7-segment display device shown on the leftmost side, and the first special figure display device 212 is , A 7-segment display device shown in the center. In these 7-segment display devices, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the up-down direction is lit while the symbol is changing. Note that the black-painted portions indicate the locations of the illuminated segments.

  In addition, between FIG. 172 (A) and (A), a state in which the game ball B is about to pass through the universal figure starting port 228 is shown. Further, in FIG. 172 (ki) and (ku), FIG. 173 (ke) and (ko), FIG. 174 (su) and (ta), FIG. 175 (d), and FIG. 176 (no) and (e), An electric chu (the second special figure starting port 232 and a pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special figure 1 reserved display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 reserved display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, between the special figure 1 reserved display area 281 and the special figure 2 reserved display area 282, a general figure effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-described predetermined area is provided. That is, the universal figure production area 283 is provided in the central portion of the production display area 208d.

  In both the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icons are displayed closer to the general figure effect area 283 (center side) as the older hold icon. That is, in the hold of the special figure 1, the first hold icon representing the first hold having the oldest winning timing is displayed on the left side of the universal figure production area 283, and in the hold of the special figure 2, the first hold icon having the oldest winning timing. The second hold icon indicating 2 hold is displayed on the right side of the universal figure production area 283. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 shown in FIG. 172 (a), one special figure 1 hold icon (first special figure 1 hold icon) 2811 indicating that there is one hold of the special figure 1 is shown. Has been done. The default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed on the left side of the universal figure production area 283. In addition, one special figure 2 hold icon (first special figure 2 hold icon) 2821 indicating that there is one hold of special figure 2 in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 shown in FIG. 172 (K). It is shown. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 1 hold icon. The first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 is displayed to the right of the universal figure production area 283.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority variation machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 172 (a) is a non-electric power support state, there is no holding of special figure 2 and one holding of special figure 1 is left, and the variable display of symbols is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 in a variable manner. On the other hand, the public figure display device 210 does not perform the variable display, and the design of the decorative figure display device 208, which is the result of the last time, is still displayed in the public figure effect area 283. . In addition, when the universal figure display device 210 does not perform the variable display of symbols, there is a case where no symbol is displayed in the universal figure effect area 283.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric power support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, one game ball B passes through the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the left area, and the universal figure display device 210. Then, the variable display of symbols is started.

  In the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the regular symbol is started. The variable display pattern of the decorative pattern here is the variable display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. 169 (b). In addition, in this decorative pattern display device 208, a haniwa character C1 simulating a cactus appears as an effect of the big hit notice of special figure 1. This character C1 is displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the general figure effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the universal figure display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that the character C1 may hide the entire general-purpose drawing production area 283.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the reach effect is developed by the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1. Since the character C1 disappears, the symbol variation display in the universal figure production area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (d), the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special diagram 1 is developed into super reach, and the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special diagram 1 is small in the left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. The maiden character C2 appears as a display of the super reach. Super reach itself is a type of big hit announcement, and the production of that super reach is also equivalent to the big hit announcement production. The character C2 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the general figure effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure becomes difficult to be seen again, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the universal figure display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that the character C2 may hide the whole of the general-drawing production area 283. Also, when the super reach is developed, the hold icon that has been displayed so far (here, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) disappears. In addition, here, although a part of the general effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general effect area 283 is displayed. You may hide a part by the variable display of the decorative design of special figure 1. The mode of hiding a part or the whole of the ordinary figure production area 283 by the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure is not limited to during the super reach, and may be any timing as long as the variable display of the special figure is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (e), in the state where the maiden character C2 has appeared, the disappointing effect of telling that the decorative pattern stopped in the middle pattern display area 208b is decoration 7 is performed, In 172 (F), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order "decoration 6-decoration 7". -Decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the pattern variation display on the public figure display device 210 is also terminated, and although it is in the non-electric power support state, the public figure B is stopped and displayed, and in the public figure effect area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern of the public figure The variable display ends, and the universal figure decoration 2 corresponding to the universal figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric turong is opened.

  In FIG. 172 (Ki), the electric chulong opening is started, and in the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the electric chuo open notification effect (the lord's character is a piece is shown as (ki) in FIG. 169 (b)). The effect of displaying a decorative pattern that is a signature is being executed. In addition, the remaining one special figure 1 is reserved, the first special figure display device 212 has started the variable display of symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable display of the special symbols of the special figure 1.

  In FIG. 172 (K), the game ball enters the electric Chu which is in the open state for 5 seconds, and the holding of the special figure 2 is increased by one. Display of one special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (first special figure 2 hold icon 2821) indicating that there is one hold of special figure 2 in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of decorative symbols that are out of order, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4". It is displayed as a stop.

  Next, the first reservation of the special figure 2 represented by the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 shown in FIG. 172 (K) is exhausted, the variable display of the symbols is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern of special figure 2 is started. In addition, in Den Chu, opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter Den Chu, and the holding of special figure 2 is increased by two. In the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (X), the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 that indicate that there are two holds of the special figure 2 are held. A hold icon 2822 is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special drawing 2. This character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the general figure effect area 283 in which the electric-chu open notification effect is being performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu opening notification effect in the decorative pattern of the general figure, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. That is, due to the predetermined effect (big hit advance notice effect) of the special drawing 2 based on the entrance of the electric chew opening, the ordinary figure effect (here, the electric chew opening notification effect) becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The player (here, the jackpot notice effect) that is performed during the special symbol pattern change (during the special symbol decoration pattern) that occurs when you win the prize while the electric chew is open, is better than the Den Chu open notification. There is a case that the interest of the game is improved by giving priority to the effect that the player is interested in and making it difficult to visually recognize the other (here, the electric Chu open notification effect). Further, as described with reference to FIG. 171 (d), in the symbol variation of the special figure 2 performed here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to occur than the symbol variation of the special figure 1. In some cases, it may be possible to make the character C3 that notices the advantageous big hit occurrence noticeable. Note that the character C3 may hide the whole of the general-drawing production area 283. On the other hand, in the figure display device 210, the figure display B is still stopped and displayed, but the figure display device 210 can be visually recognized well.

  In FIG. 173 (C), the opening of the electric Chu for 5 seconds is completed, and the electric Chu returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric-chu release notification production in the public figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (C) is also finished, and no symbol is displayed in the public figure production area 283 here. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the reach effect is developed by the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2. Since the character C3 disappears, although no symbol is displayed, the normal figure production area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In addition, between FIG. 172 (a) -FIG. 173 (co), the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, and the suspension of universal figure is accumulated.

  Although the variable display of symbols is started on the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 173 (SA), no symbol is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (SA). No, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is not executed. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 170, since the figure determination result included in the figure variation start command is the figure A, it is determined that the figure production is not performed. . In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and the maiden character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the part of the foot hides a part of the general figure effect area 283, and the general figure effect area 283 becomes difficult to see. The interest of the game is improved. No symbols are displayed in the universal figure production area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols of the regular figure is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (shi), with the character C2 of the maiden appearing, a jackpot notification effect is made to tell that the decorative pattern to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7. In FIG. 174 (s), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 ends, the special symbol A that is the 15R special jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 special symbol A. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to, is stopped and displayed. Further, the pattern variation display on the public figure display device 210 is also terminated, and the general figure A is stopped and displayed, but in the general figure production area 283, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure is not performed, and the general figure display is displayed. Even if the symbol variation display on the device 210 is completed, no symbol is displayed. As a result of the universal figure A being stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric Chu short opening is performed, but there is no one ball in the opening period of 0.3 seconds, and the special figure 2 There is no change in the number held.

  Eventually, the 15R jackpot game is started, and the player switches from left hitting to right hitting. FIG. 174 (s) shows the state of the 1R decorative pattern display device 208. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit mid-game effect in which a panda character appears is performed. Further, during the big hit game, the hold icons (here, the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822) that have been displayed until then disappear, and a predetermined area including the general figure effect area 283 (here Then, in the general figure effect area 283 and the special area 1 reserved display area 281), an effect different from the general figure effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character "1 consecutive holiday" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area 281, and the face of the character in the 1 consecutive holiday is displayed in the general effect production area 283. Has been done. By doing so, the universal figure production area 283 can be effectively used. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as the universal figure is held (as long as it enters the universal figure starting port 228), the symbol variation display on the universal figure display device 210 is performed. However, in the universal figure production area 283, the number of consecutive holidays notice production is performed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is not performed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 170). On the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 174 (S), the variable display of symbols is started. It should be noted that the effects different from the general drawing effect performed in the lower area are the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacker winning ball number notification effect, the attacker open remaining time notification effect, and the attacker open elapsed time. It may be a notification effect, an effect for incentivizing the winning of the attacker, or the like. Further, even during the big hit game, the hold icon may be displayed without being erased, and an effect different from the ordinary figure effect (for example, the number of consecutive holidays notice effect) may be performed only in the ordinary figure effect area 283. However, it may be performed only in the area (for example, the hold display area) adjacent to the general-purpose production area 283. Furthermore, even during the big hit game, when the drawing effect execution availability lottery is won, the drawing effect may be performed in the drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 174 (SO) shows a state of the decorative pattern display device 208 of the 8th R. In the decorative symbol display device 208 as well, the effect during the big hit is continued and the number-of-games notification effect is also continued. Further, in the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 174 (SO), the symbol variation display that has been performed so far is finished, and the universal figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric turong is opened.

  In FIG. 174 (T), the electric Chu-long opening is started, and in the general-drawing production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, instead of the number of consecutive holidays notifications that have been performed so far, the electric-chu opening notification production (Denshi). The effect in which the decorative pattern in which the character is the peace sign is displayed) is being executed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 170). That is, in the universal figure production area 283, since the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is not displayed, the electric-chu release notification production is suddenly started. During the opening of Den-Chu Long, four game balls enter Den-Chu, and the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 increases by 4. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  FIG. 174 (Ta ') is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 174 (Ta), and in FIG. 174 (Ta'), the sound from the speaker 120 is not performed without the electric-chu open notification effect in the general figure effect area 283. Is performing an electric notification opening notification that tells that Den Chu is open. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 174 (T ') where the electric-chu open notification production has not been performed, the number of consecutive holidays production production continues. Since the attacker has more prize balls than Den Chu, it may not be necessary to perform any active Den Chu opening notification effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (H), the end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is informed that the jackpot game will be promoted to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. Also in the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 175 (H), the variable display of symbols is started.

  FIG. 175 (tsu) shows the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the number of special figure 2 holds increased by entering the electric chu at the timing of FIG. 174 (T) due to the end of the big hit game. 1st-4th special figure 2 reservation icons 2821-2824 are displayed.

  In the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (te), the character display of "probably changing" indicating that it is in the probable state is displayed. That is, an effect for informing the game information is performed. Also, the power support state continues until the next big hit. Further, in FIG. 175 (te), the variable display of the symbols by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol 2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the universal figure display device 210, which has been performing the variable display of symbols until now, performs a stop display, and the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol variation display of the public figure stopped and displayed here is the symbol variation display that was performed across the big hit game, and is the symbol variation display that notifies the result of the hit / no decision of the general figure in the non-electric power support state during the big hit game. is there.

  Further, in the general figure effect area 283, the general figure effect is not performed because it is in the electric power support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 170), and the general figure effect area 283 functions as a display area for the digestion hold icon. There is. That is, the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 representing the first hold of the special figure 2 started here, from the special figure 2 hold display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special figure, is a different area of the general figure production area. After moving to 283, it disappears in the universal figure production area 283 before the symbol variation ends. Further, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon, which has been the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 until now, is shifted to the first special figure 2 hold icon display position which is on the right side of the general figure production area 283. The second special figure 80 hold icon 2823 and the subsequent hold icons are similarly shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time to move the digestion hold icon, which was the first special map 2 hold icon 2821 until now, to the universal figure production area 283 (second area) in which the display area of the digestion hold icon (second movement completion time). ) Indicates that the undigested hold icon (the hold icon that has been the second to fourth special map 2 hold icons 2822 to 2824 until now) remaining in the special map 2 hold display area 282 (first area) is the special figure 2 It is different from the time to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time). In addition, in order to make the player show the hold icon (digestion hold icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and strongly impress that one hold has been consumed, the second movement completion time is the above It is preferable that it is longer than one movement completion time. Further, the drawing effect area 283 is a common destination for the digestion hold icon of the special figure 1 and the digestion hold icon of the special figure 2, but the figure effect area 283 is divided into two and the digest hold of the special figure 1 is held. The moving destination of the icon and the moving destination of the digestion hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 175 (g), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 ends, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order "decoration 4-decoration 5". -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the universal figure display device 210, the variable display of the regular figure is started. It should be noted that the first special map 2 hold icon 2821 (digestion hold icon) that has moved to the public figure production area 283 has disappeared, and in the electric power support state, since it is stochastically almost elected to open the electric turong, the general figure display device. Even if the variable display of symbols is started in 210, the universal figure effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 170).

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started again, and the variable symbol display of the special symbol 2 is restarted on the decorative symbol display device 208 again, and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. On the display device 208, the princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. This character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the ordinary figure effect area 283, and the head portion is called "probably changing". Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. In the general-purpose production area 283 shown in FIG. 175 (na), the digestion hold icon 2820 is different from the default display mode, and is a display mode of a big jackpot notice (including a fake jackpot notice) in the variation (here, the face of the panda). However, it is difficult for the character C3 to visually recognize the character C3, and the interest in the game is improved. The digest hold icon 2820 changes the display mode during or after the movement to the universal figure production area 283. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to be visually recognized by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the public figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 175 (a) shows the general figure B with the electric turong open.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (d), the character C3 disappears, and the reach effect is developed by the variable display of the decorative symbol of special figure 2. Since the character C3 disappears, the big hit announcement by the digestion hold icon 2820 in the general-purpose production area 283 can be visually recognized well. Note that, in FIG. 175 (d), the electric chu long opening is started, but in the electric power support state, the electric chu long opening is stochastically almost elected, so the electric chu open notification effect is also not performed (FIG. See step S601 shown in 170). During the opening of the electric chu long, the game ball enters the electric chu and the special map 2 is fully reserved (four).

  In the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 175 (nu), the symbol variable display is started, but no symbol is displayed in the universal figure effect area 283, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the universal figure is not executed. is there. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and the maiden character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the part of the foot hides a part of the general figure effect area 283, and the general figure effect area 283 becomes difficult to see. There is. No symbols are displayed in the universal figure production area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols of the regular figure is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (ne), with the character C2 of the maiden appearing, a jackpot notification effect is made to announce that the decorative pattern stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 6, In FIG. 176 (No), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, and the special symbol D, which is the 15R normal big hit symbol, is displayed as a stop symbol, and the special symbol D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “Ornament 6-Ornament 6-Ornament 6”, which is a combination of the decorative patterns corresponding to, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 175 (n), the pattern variation display is ended and the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, but in the universal figure effect area 283, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the universal figure is performed. No, no symbol is displayed even if the symbol variation display on the universal symbol display device 210 is completed. As a result of the universal figure B being stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric turong is opened in FIG. 176 (No).

  Eventually, the 15R big hit game is started, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c), the end effect of the big hit game is performed, it is notified that after the big hit game is promoted to the power support state (time saving state) ing. In the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 176 (c), the symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 176 (H) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. Further, the public figure display device 210, which has been performing the variable display of symbols, displays a stop display, and the public figure display device 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol variation display of the public figure stopped here is also the symbol variation display that was made across the big hit game, and it is the symbol variation display that notifies the result of the hit / miss judgment of the general figure in the non-electric power support state during the big hit game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 176 (H) is an electric power support state, and even if the notification of the result of the determination as to whether or not the general figure is valid in the non-electric power support state is issued, the general figure production is not performed. However, a general drawing effect may be performed here.

  Above the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (F), the character display "time saving" is displayed to indicate that it is in the electric power support state. That is, an effect for informing the game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 176 (F), the variable display of the symbols by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol 2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 176 (F), the variable display of symbols is also started. Furthermore, if you win the 15R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 100 times, and in the state shown in FIG. 176 (F), the symbol of the first special figure. Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times that the electric power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (f), since it is in the electric support state, even if the variation display of the general figure by the general figure display device 210 is started, the general figure production is not performed, and instead, the electric figure support is performed. The number of remaining states is displayed. That is, in the general-purpose production area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (F), the production for notifying the game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chu can occur normally during the electric support state, it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by displaying the remaining number of times of the electric support state instead of the general drawing effect.

  In FIG. 176 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 ends, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order, "decoration 4-decoration 5". -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, even on the figure display device 210, the figure variation display of the figure is completed, and the figure B of the electric chulong is stopped and displayed, but in the figure production area 283, the figure variation display on the figure display device 210 is displayed. Even if is finished, no design is displayed. As a result of the universal figure B being stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, in FIG. 176 (e), the electric turong is opened and the suspension of the special figure 2 becomes full. Further, in FIG. 176 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special figure display device 214 is restarted, and the remaining number of times that the electric power support state is maintained is 98 times. The numeral 98 is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (e).

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (Ma), a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of special figure 2. This character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the part of the foot hides a part of the general figure production area 283, and the part of the head is called "time saving". Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. The game information notification effect (the numeral 98) displayed in the universal figure effect area 283 shown in FIG. 176 (Ma) is also the game information notification effect (the character display "time saving") displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Is also difficult to see due to the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Next, an example of an effect with the look-ahead effect according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect with the look-ahead effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 177 (a) is a non-electric power support state, there is no suspension of special figure 2 and one reservation of special figure 1 is left, and the variable display of symbols is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. The special symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1, and the special figure 1 hold display area 281 shows the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the default display mode. Has been done. Further, the variable display of the general pattern is displayed on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general pattern is started in the general figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 177 (a) shows that the game ball B has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 reserved display area 281 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (a). , A second special figure 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode different from the default display mode. That is, the hold icon representing the second hold of the special figure 1 is started to be displayed in the display mode of the aged character. The pre-reading notice referred to here is a notice about the result of the hit determination of the special drawing, which is started before the start of the symbol variation for notifying the result of the hit determination. More specifically, the start information is prefetched before the symbol fluctuation of the special figure is started, the result of the judgment of the special figure is judged based on the starting information in advance, and the result of the judgment based on the start information is notified. Before the start of the symbol variation, based on the preliminary determination result, it is a warning that the result of the determination based on the starting information will be a big hit, or will be Special Drawing A or Special Drawing B, based on the starting information. Even if the hit / miss determination result is out of place or the special drawing I or the special drawing J is obtained, a notice that the result of the win / no judgment based on the start information is a big hit, or the special drawing A or the special drawing B (a so-called false Notice) is also included. Note that here, the prefetch notice is started from the display start of the hold icon (starting entrance ball timing), but the display is temporarily started in the default display mode and then changed to the prefetch notice display mode. Alternatively, the display may be temporarily started in a display mode different from the default display mode and the read-ahead notice display mode, and then the display mode may be changed to the read-ahead notice display mode. For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the pre-reading notice at the timing at which the hold icon shifts (the timing of the start of symbol variation of the special figure), or to change the display form of the pre-reading notice by pressing the chance button 136. May be.

  Further, in FIG. 177 (a), the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order "decoration 5-". Decorative 3 “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 177 (c), the variable display of the symbols is started by the first special symbol display device 212 that consumes the first hold, and the decoration symbol display device 208 decorates the special symbol 1. The variable display of symbols has started. On the other hand, in the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 177 (c), the pattern variation display that has been performed up to now is terminated, the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, and even in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, The variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure has ended, and the universal figure decoration 2 corresponding to the universal figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric turong is opened.

  In FIG. 177 (D), the electric chu long opening is started, and in the public figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the electric chu open notification production (the decorative design in which the lord's character is making a peace sign is displayed. Production) is being executed. In this electric Chu opening notification production, the lord's character is displayed in a large size beyond the ordinary figure production area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, a pre-reading notice is displayed). A part of the (hold icon of the mode) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, by intentionally hiding the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 whose display mode has changed to the look-ahead notice mode by the figure effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the trend of the figure effect. There is. In addition, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a big hit in the future, and it may be possible to give the player the expectation of opening the electric choo by highlighting the present-day progressive drawing effect. It should be noted that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric Chu open notification effect. Further, the lord's character also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure which is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 177 (a ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the prefetching notice. In FIG. 177 (a), the pre-reading notice effect is performed using the display mode of the hold icon, but in FIG. 177 (a '), the effect image in which grandfather characters are arranged in a large V shape is displayed. The look-ahead notice effect is performed by the character display of "look-ahead notice". This look-ahead notice production also enters the general-purpose production area 283, but is partially hidden by the variable display of the decorative design of the general-purpose illustration. On the contrary, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure may be hidden by the look-ahead notice effect.

  FIG. 177 (c ') is a diagram showing a modified example of the aspect of the universal figure decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 177 (c '), the symbol of the universal figure decoration 2 that is stopped and displayed is enlarged beyond the universal figure effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 ( Here, a part of the pre-reading notice display hold icon) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to see, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. It should be noted that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the variable display of the decorative pattern of the public figure, or the stopped public display of the decorative pattern. In addition, the stationary figure decoration 2 that is stopped and displayed also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 177 (d ') is a diagram showing a modification of the electric-chu open notification effect. In the electric-chu open notification production in FIG. 177 (d '), the lord's character is displayed in a large size beyond the general-purpose production area 283 and enters the special figure 1 reserved display area 281, but a part of this lord's character is displayed. However, it is hidden by the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetching notice). Further, the lord's character has entered the middle symbol display area 208b, but a part of this lord's character is hidden by the decorative symbol of the special figure which is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result of these, it is difficult to visually confirm the electric Chu open notification effect.

  The pre-reading notice with the hold icon is a type of continuous notice that is continuously given over a plurality of symbol variable displays. In the special figure 2 priority variator, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 may interrupt while the continuous notice of special figure 1 is being executed, but the continuous notice is continued even when the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is interrupted. . That is, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted before the reservation of the special figure 1 hold icon is interrupted, the symbol variation display of the interrupted special figure 2 is being displayed. Also, the special figure 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (d '), the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric-chu open notification effect, and the player is notified by the electric-chu open notification. It may be possible to make the look-ahead notice stand out while maintaining the expectation, and to maintain the expectation for the big hit.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect in which the jackpot notice is mixed with the universal figure effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 178 (a) is a non-electric power support state, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shows the combination of the decoration symbols that are out of order, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", in a stopped state. On the other hand, the universal figure display device 210 is performing variable display, but in the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the symbol of the ordinary figure decoration 3 which is the last result and is not displayed is still displayed. , The variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal map is not displayed.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 178 (a), the variable display of symbols is started, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbols of special figure 1 is started. When the symbol variable display of this special figure is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the general figure is also started in the general figure production area 283. That is, the general figure effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure) is started in accordance with the variation of the special figure (variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure).

  In FIG. 178 (c), the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure in the universal figure production area 283 is hidden by the character display production of "gekiatsu" which is a kind of special jackpot notice production. That is, the special jackpot notice effect here is displayed over the lower area including the figure effect area 283, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the figure effect. The character display effect "Geki Atsu" here is a notice before the reach, and may be an effect that gives a notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure develops into the reach. It should be noted that the pattern of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure here is, for example, a high speed display of the character "Gekiatsu", which is one of the special jackpot notice effects shown in (e) of FIG. 169 (b). It is a fluctuation display pattern included in fluctuations. In the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure, the character display of “super hot” is displayed in the universal figure production area 283.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the universal display effect of the variable display pattern shown in FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 179 (a) is a non-electric power support state, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is displaying the decoration "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of the decorative patterns. Further, the pattern variation display is not performed even on the public figure display device 210, and in the public figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the pattern of the general figure decoration 3 which is the last result and is not displayed is still displayed. is there.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 179 (a), the variable display of symbols is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbols of special figure 1 is started. Also, the variable display of symbols is started on the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 179 (a), and the variable display of decorative symbols of regular symbols is started in the universal symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the general effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 169 (b) is performed.

  In the general-purpose production area 283 shown in FIG. 179 (c), the character display of “incubation”, which indicates a notice of the 2R big hit, which is a latent variation of the special figure, is displayed beyond the general-purpose production area 283.

  In the general-purpose production area 283 shown in FIG. 179 (d), the character display of "Attack", which indicates a notice of a 2R big hit, which is a sudden change in the special figure, is displayed beyond the general-purpose production area 283.

  179 (e), the character display of "major hit" representing the 15R big hit notice of the special figure is displayed beyond the figure effect area 283 in the figure effect area 283.

  In FIG. 179 (F), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the second small hit symbol (special symbol H) is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special symbol. “Decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 3” corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. In the universal figure display device 210, the variable display of symbols continues, but in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of decorative symbols of the universal symbol is displayed before the end of the variable display of special symbols. The character "Hidden" is stopped and displayed in the general-purpose production area 283.

  In this example, the drawing effect is functioning as a big hit notice for the special figure, but the drawing effect in this example is also an effect executed in the drawing effect area 283.

  It should be noted that the general-purpose drawing effect that functions as a big hit notice for the special figure here has entered the special figure 1 reserved display area 281 and the special figure 2 reserved display area 282. Therefore, if the first special figure hold icon whose display mode has been changed to the look-ahead notice mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the first special figure hold icon is , A part or the whole is hidden by the drawing effect. The big hit notice (especially the big hit notice of the special figure variation game currently being executed) is a notice that can be expected to the big hit before the prefetch notice (the big hit notice of the future special figure variation game). It is possible to improve the interest of the player because the general drawing effect including it can be performed more conspicuously than the pre-reading notice.

  It should be noted that the character display displayed in the general figure effect area 283 may be a mode that can be accommodated in the general figure effect area 283. Also, the end timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure is the same as the end timing of the variable display of the special figure, or slightly before, the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure is It may be delayed from the symbol variation display start timing of the display device 210.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of another effect.

  FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (A) show an example in which a big hit announcement effect is performed by an effect using an effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having the effecting movable body 224 shown in FIG. 156. In the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (a), the ordinary figure effect is performed. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure. Then, after the ordinary figure effect is started, a big hit announcement effect that gives an advance notice of a big hit in the variable display is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. A production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 180 (a) is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b which imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position of the elbow. The production movable body 224 is an accessory that is movable at least on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 180 (a), the forearm part 224b that has turned upward covers the general figure effect area 283 in which the general figure effect is performed, and the general effect area 283 is hidden by the forearm portion 224b. Visual effects are difficult to see. In addition, there are cases where the operation of the effect movable body 224 can be emphasized, which improves the enjoyment of the game. Further, although three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180A, these special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are displayed. Part or all of each of the to 2823 are hidden by the forearm portion 224b, and the special figure 2 holding icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to visually recognize. Further, the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 can be largely used to perform a big hit advance notice effect by the effect movable body 224 and the effect image, and the entertainment of the game is improved by the effect of a large scale.

  FIG. 180 (a) is a diagram showing a state of continuation from FIG. 180 (a), in which the forearm portion 224b rotates further upward, and from the front of the general-purpose production area 283 in which the general-use production is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, three shooting star images) related to the operation of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general effect area 283 is hidden by the effect image. Is difficult to see. Further, although three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are also displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (a), these special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are shown. Part or all of each of the to 2823 are hidden by the forearm portion 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to visually recognize. Note that the effect image may be an image displayed before, during, or after the production movable body 224 is operated. Moreover, the effect movable body 224 does not necessarily have to be exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, after the big hit announcement is started by the production movable body 224, the universal figure production is not executed until the big hit announcement ends. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to during execution of the big hit announcement by the production movable body 224. By doing so, it may be possible to draw attention to the big hit announcement by the production movable body 224.

  Further, the effect movable body 224 may not perform the operation to the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and may make the visual effect difficult to visually recognize only with the effect image.

  51 (a) is an example in which a big hit announcement effect is performed by an effect using a tutorial.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (a), the tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the general figure effect area 283 in which the general figure effect is performed. In this tutorial display, a description is given of a predetermined display (here, the jackpot preliminary announcement character C1 of Toku-zu 1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) etc.). The general-purpose production area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, making it difficult to visually recognize the general-purpose production.

  FIG. 180 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hide the general-purpose effect and the hold icon. In addition, in this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but may be three or more effects.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (I), the variable symbol decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the general symbol effect is performed in the general symbol effect area 283, and the first special symbol 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the big hit announcement character C1 (first special effect) of the special drawing 1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) and the like and another new character C4 (second special effect). Has been done. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display that the reach will be developed, a notification that one 15R special jackpot is won, a display that urges the chance button 136 to be pressed, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 180 (I), the characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the general-purpose drawing production area 283, the hold icon, and the variable display of the decorative design of the special drawing, and It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing.

  Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be supplemented.

  An example in which it is difficult to visually recognize a variable display (second variable display), that is, a variable display of a decorative symbol (for example, a general drawing effect) on a display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub-control unit. About not only hiding by other effect display (for example, big hit notice display, game information display, etc.), but also other methods are included. For example, it may be relatively difficult to visually recognize by violently emitting light around the variable display of the decorative pattern (more prominent if it is a similar color), or the variable display of the decorative pattern and another effect display are similar colors. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize even when there is no overlap. Further, the device for performing variable display of decorative symbols and other effects may be a separate body. For example, the main liquid crystal and the auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is difficult to see due to another effect display, on the contrary, another effect display may be difficult to see due to the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, a part of the look-ahead notice may be hidden by the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern, and other effects with low reliability may be made difficult to visually recognize by the variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern. When the expectation of a big hit is low, there is a case where the play of opening the electric chu is more interesting for the player.

  Further, it may be configured such that it is made different depending on the situation whether it is difficult to visually recognize another effect or the variable display of the decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize. It may be configured to give priority to the effect that the player can expect and make the other difficult to see, or may be configured to give priority to the effect from which the result is derived first and make the other difficult to see. .

  Other effects include big hit announcement, pre-reading announcement, reach effect (reach fluctuation), suggestion of gaming state such as incubation, etc., but at least a part may be a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern. . For example, the action itself of the accessory does not make the variable display of the decorative pattern difficult to visually recognize by a big hit announcement by the action of the accessory, but makes the variable display of the decorative pattern difficult to visually recognize by the effect image generated at the same time. Good.

  Further, at least a part of the electric-chu-opening notification effect after the variable display of the decorative pattern may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be always performed when the electric chu is long opened in the non-electric power support state, but may or may not be performed by the item availability lottery.

  Further, another effect may be a configuration in which it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold display (hold icon) at the same time.

  Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed when the electric choo short is opened.

  Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol may not be performed during the electric power support state, or the variable display of the decorative symbol may be performed during the electric power support state.

  Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not only related to the result of the auxiliary hit / miss judgment (judgment judgment of the universal figure), but in addition to the result of the auxiliary hit / fail judgment, the result of the hit / miss judgment (judgment judgment of the special drawing) and other It may be a variable display in which notices are mixed.

  In addition, the execution frequency of the variable display of the decorative pattern is compared between the electric power support state and the non-electric power support state, and is also influenced by the emission intensity (for example, right-handed or left-handed) in terms of the game. You may.

  During the big hit game, the display device controlled by the main control means (for example, the universal display device 210) may be configured to perform only the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display), or in addition, the decorative symbol. The variable display may also be performed. Further, during the big hit game, the variable display of the decorative symbol may not be displayed, and only the electric-chu open notification effect may be performed.

  Further, during the big hit game which is an advantageous state and during the electric power support state, it is a right-handed configuration, but it may be left-handed during the big hit game, and the combination is arbitrary.

  In addition, although it has been described with the special figure 2 priority variation machine, the special order 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won during the winning order variation machine or the non-electric support state, and the electric Chu is displayed during the electric support state. It may be a gaming machine that is open and allows only the special figure 2 to win. In particular, when the power is being supported, it has the same effect as that of the priority variator. Further, it may be a simultaneous variable machine.

  The so-called tutorial notice, in which the big hit announcement effect is performed by using the tutorial, makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern, or vice versa. For example, highlight the tutorial notice explaining the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern (at this time the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see), and then stop the decorative pattern related to the description, It is also possible to explain.

  Further, the look-ahead notice may make it difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Further, among the other effects described with reference to FIG. 180 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be hidden so that the player cannot see the variable display of the decorative symbol at all. Further, the first other effect may hide the first area of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the second other effect may hide the second area. The variable display of the decorative pattern may display a plurality of characters, characters, etc. at the same time, and at least one of them may be hidden by another effect. Further, it may be configured to hide other effects.

  Further, it may be configured such that a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed.

  As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect hides the other effect, the other effect may hide one effect even if not otherwise specified. . In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, one effect may hide all of the other effect even if not otherwise specified.

  Further, "difficult to see" includes invisible.

  Further, the other effects such as the general drawing effect and the big hit effect may be an effect by sound or an effect by light, and an effect as shown in FIGS. 180 (a) and (a). It may be a production by a movable body. In the case of effect by sound, sounds overlap each other, and one effect hides the other effect depending on the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, “a starting region (for example, electric chu) at least capable of changing the state between the easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) and the difficult-for-entry state (for example, closed state) and the first hit / miss determination ( For example, it is possible to execute at least a first hit / miss determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the hit / miss determination of the general figure and a second hit / fail determination (eg, hit / fail determination of the special drawing). When the result of the second hit / damage determination is a jackpot judgment result, the control state is changed from the non-jackpot control state to the jackpot control state. At least game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to, and effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can perform effect display at least are provided. It is a technique stand, and the starting area is at least in a state where the difficult entry state is the easy entry state when the result of the first hit determination is a specific hit determination result (for example, a universal figure). It is changeable, the first hit determination means, the power support state is easier to derive the specific hit determination result than non-power support state, the effect display means, the first Is at least displayable, the first effect is an effect including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first hit determination (for example, a general effect), the effect display means, It is possible to display at least a second effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect) relating to the result of the second hit determination, and the second effect is a part or the whole period during the execution of the first effect. , A little of the first production Both of them are effects that can make it difficult to visually recognize a part (for example, FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 173 (ke)), and the first effect is in a non-electrically-supported state rather than an electrically-supported state. Is an effect that is easily executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 170), a gaming table. ] Was explained.

  It should be noted that at least the state changeable between the easy winning state and the difficult winning state is provided with a winning means (or a winning area) (for example, an attacker), and the winning means (or the winning area) is used for the second winning / absence determination. If the result is a jackpot determination result, at least the state may be changed from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state.

  Further, the jackpot control state may be a state in which at least the state of the winning area can be changed from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state.

  Further, it may be a mode including an approach area whose state cannot be changed (for example, a first approach area, in other words, a fixed approach area such as a universal gate).

  Further, it may be an aspect including a first symbol display means (for example, the universal symbol display device 210) capable of at least executing the first symbol variable display. The first symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first winning / improper determination after performing the first symbol variation display. In addition, the first symbol display means, when the first hold condition is satisfied, the operation may be held, the satisfaction requirement of the first hold condition, the game ball in the entry area May be a requirement including that the vehicle has entered. More carefully, the requirement for the first holding condition to be satisfied may be a requirement that includes at least that the game ball has entered the entry area.

  Further, it may be a mode including a second symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of at least executing the second symbol variable display. The second symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning / improper determination after performing the second symbol variable display. Further, the second symbol display means, when the second holding condition is satisfied, the operation may be held, the satisfaction condition of the second holding condition, the starting region (for example, The requirement may include that the game ball has entered the second entry area, in other words, a variable entry area such as an electric tulip. More specifically, the requirement for the second holding condition to be satisfied may be a requirement that includes at least that the game ball has entered the starting area.

  The aspect may be provided with an effect display means capable of controlling at least the effect display means (for example, sub-control means 400, 500).

  The first effect may be a change effect and an effect including at least an opening effect,

  The variation effect is an effect executed during a period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed,

  The opening effect is an effect executed after a stop symbol corresponding to a specific (for example, hit) result of the first hit determination is displayed, for example, a period in which the starting area is in the easy entry state. It may be an effect that is executed during the period that includes it.

  Further, the first effect may include a stop display effect that is executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first hit determination is displayed.

  The second effect may be a big hit announcement effect or a prefetching announcement effect.

  In addition, "the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a general figure effect area 283). The image display means is capable of displaying at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect is also the first effect. It is an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect that displays the remaining number of electric support states), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during execution of the third effect. , A game table characterized in that at least a part of the third effect can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIG. 176 (Ma)). ] Was also explained.

  The third effect may be a hold icon, or a display of the number of times saved and the number of consecutive holidays.

  In addition, "the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notification display (for example, appearance effect of characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, character display of" probably changing "), A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  The jackpot notification display herein may be a display for notifying that the winning area is changed to the easy winning state, and includes a false display. Further, the jackpot preview display may be a jackpot preview display that is started after the second hit determination is made, that is, after the second symbol variation display is started, It may be a pre-reading advance notice display that is started before the hit determination is made, that is, before the second symbol variable display is started.

  Further, the game information display referred to here is a display showing the number of time saved (the remaining number of times of the second symbol variation display or the number of times the digest has been completed in the electric power support state) or the number of consecutive games (the number of executions of the big hit game). May be

  Further, “the image display means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric power support state (for example, FIG. Etc.), the image display means can execute at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the electric power support state (for example, FIG. 175 (TE) and the like). ), A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one kind of effect pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 169 (b)). One type of effect pattern among the patterns is at least an image related to the result of the first hit / absence determination (for example, a universal figure decoration pattern) and an image of the jackpot notice display (for example, a decoration image called “super hot”). A gaming table, which is an effect pattern of variable display for sequentially displaying a plurality of images including the variable display pattern (for example, the variable display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 169 (b)). ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “at least the starting region (for example, power tube) that can change the state between the easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) and the difficult-for-entry state (for example, closed state), At least a first hit determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a second hit determination (for example, hit determination of a special map) capable of performing at least a determination (for example, hit determination of a general drawing). When possible second win / loss determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second win / loss determination is a big hit win / loss judgment result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit. Game control means (for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transitioning to the control state, and effect display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing effect display at least. In the gaming table provided, the starting area is changed from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first hit determination result is a specific hit determination result (for example, per universal figure). At least the state is changeable, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect, the first effect is an effect including at least an effect display regarding the result of the first hit determination. (For example, a general effect), the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a second effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect) related to the result of the second hit determination, and the second effect. Is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or the whole period during the execution of the first effect (for example, FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 173). (K) etc.), the above Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 170), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one kind of effect pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 169 (b)). Of these, the first effect pattern is an effect pattern that is more likely to be executed in the non-big hit control state than in the big hit control state (for example, effect pattern other than the electric-chu open notification effect: variable display effect). A gaming machine characterized by showing steps S604 and S605). ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern that is performed over a first time period (for example, a variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 169 (b)), and among the effect patterns of the plurality of types. Second production pattern (for example, the electric-chu-opening notification production pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 169 (b)) is a production pattern performed over a second time period, and the first time period (for example, 15 seconds). Seconds) is a time longer than the second time (for example, 5.8 seconds), the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, electric Chu short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, electric Chu long opening pattern). One of a plurality of opening patterns is used for opening, and the second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. The gaming table, wherein at least the first effect can be displayed when the electric tulip opens in the second opening pattern. ] Was also explained.

  The opening pattern advantageous to the player here is an opening pattern in which a game ball easily enters the electric tulip, in other words, an opening pattern in which a large number of exit balls can be obtained, and for example, the opening time is long. When the number of times of opening is large, the number of times of opening is large, or the number of times of opening is plural, the total opening time is long, or the opening time is long once.

  Further, "the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the big hit control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 170). Game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “at least the starting region (for example, power tube) that can change the state between the easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) and the difficult-for-entry state (for example, closed state), At least a first hit determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a second hit determination (for example, hit determination of a special map) capable of performing at least a determination (for example, hit determination of a general drawing). When possible second win / loss determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second win / loss determination is a big hit win / loss judgment result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit. Game control means (for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transitioning to the control state, and effect display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing effect display at least. In the gaming table provided, the starting area is changed from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first hit determination result is a specific hit determination result (for example, per universal figure). At least the state is changeable, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect, the first effect is an effect including at least an effect display regarding the result of the first hit determination. (For example, a general drawing effect), the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a look-ahead notice effect related to the result of the second hit determination, and the first effect is executing the look-ahead notice effect. Is a production in which at least a part of the prefetching notice production can be made difficult to be visually recognized in a part or all of the period (for example, FIG. 177 (D)), and the game machine. ] Was explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one kind of effect pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 169 (b)). One type of the effect pattern includes a plurality of images including at least an image related to the result of the first hit / absence determination (for example, a universal figure decoration pattern) and an image of a big hit notice display (for example, a decoration image called “super hot”). A gaming machine, which is an effect pattern of variable display for sequentially displaying images (for example, a variable display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 169 (b)). ] Was also explained.

  The one type of effect pattern here may be the first effect pattern.

  In addition, “after performing the symbol variation display, a symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning / disagreement determination, and the symbol display means. At least a controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is provided, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the symbol display means when a suspension condition is satisfied. Control can be performed at least, the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means displays the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a general effect area 283). At least display is possible, and the image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means is capable of displaying at least the hold icon in the hold display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold display area 281), and the prefetching notice effect is the display of the hold icon. It is an effect of changing the mode to display the hold icon (for example, an example shown in FIG. 177), and the first effect is an effect of one kind of effect pattern selected from a plurality of kinds of effect patterns. One of the plurality of types of effect patterns has an effect image (for example, an effect image in which a lord's character has a peace sign) exceeding the predetermined display area and the reserved display area. It is possible to make part or all of the hold icon displayed in the hold display area difficult to visually recognize by part or all of the effect image. Pattern (e.g., FIG. 177 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The one type of effect pattern here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, here, although limited to the hold icon, the prefetching notice effect may be an effect without using the hold icon, and in this case, the image display unit displays the second predetermined display area in the second predetermined display area. At least the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed.

  In addition, "after starting the other starting area different from the starting area (for example, the first special figure starting opening 230) and the symbol variation display, at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning / disabling determination is displayed. A possible symbol display means is provided, and as one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 212) and one of the symbol display means. As one symbol display unit, a second symbol display unit (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and a symbol display control unit capable of at least controlling the first symbol display unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). ), And the another starting area, the ease of entry of the game ball does not change, the symbol display control means is capable of at least controlling the second symbol display means, The symbol display The control means can execute at least the control of the first hold (for example, the hold of the special figure 1) that holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is satisfied. The symbol display control means controls the second hold (for example, hold of special figure 2) that holds the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. At least is feasible, the requirement to meet the first holding condition is a requirement that at least includes that the game ball has entered the different starting area, and the requirement to meet the second holding condition is a game. It is a requirement including at least that the sphere has entered the starting region, and the symbol display control means controls the operation of the first symbol display means when the first reserved digestion condition is satisfied. Is at least viable and before The symbol display control means is capable of at least executing control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold digestion condition is satisfied, and the second hold digestion condition Satisfaction requirement is a requirement including at least that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, the satisfaction requirement of the first hold digestion condition, the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. It is a requirement that includes at least that not, the satisfaction requirement of the first holding digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, the effect display means, The image display means is a means for displaying one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for one first hold for the first hold display area (for example, Figure 1 Hold At least it can be displayed in the display area 281), and the image display means displays one second hold icon (for example, special figure 2 hold icon 2821) for one second hold. Can be displayed at least in a reserved display area (for example, special figure 2 reserved display area 282), and the image display means displays the first image in a predetermined display area (for example, general figure effect area 283). At least an effect can be displayed, the predetermined display area is an area located between the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, and the first effect has a plurality of types. Is one of the effect patterns selected from among the effect patterns, and one of the effect patterns of the plurality of effect patterns is an effect image (for example, the character of the lord is a peace sign). Effect image), which exceeds the predetermined display area, enters the reserved display area of at least one of the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, and holds the reserved area. It is an effect pattern (for example, a pattern of the electric-chu open notification effect shown in FIG. 177 (D)) that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the prefetching notice effect is the first hold. It is an effect of changing the display mode of the icon to display the first hold icon (for example, an example shown in FIG. 177), and the pre-reading notice effect changes the display mode of the second hold icon to change the display mode of the second hold icon. It is an effect that displays a second hold icon, and one of the first hold icon and the second hold icon is difficult to see due to the effect image (for example, , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 177 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The game table here is a game table of a so-called special figure 2 priority variation machine.

  Further, the one type of effect pattern referred to herein may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold display areas as viewed from the predetermined display area. The areas may be areas provided at positions displaced from each other. Further, the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area may be provided with an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided with the interval.

  In addition, "the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a third effect, and the third effect is different from the first effect and the pre-reading notice effect (for example, for the variation. The third effect is an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to be visually recognized during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. There is (for example, FIG. 172 (a), FIG. 173 (ke), etc.), a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  The third effect referred to here may be an effect related to the result of the second hit determination (for example, a big hit announcement effect), or an effect indicating game information (for example, the number of hours saved or the number of consecutive holidays). It may be.

  Further, in the above description, “at least the starting region (for example, power tube) that can change the state between the easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) and the difficult-for-entry state (for example, closed state), At least a first hit determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a second hit determination (for example, hit determination of a special map) capable of performing at least a determination (for example, hit determination of a general drawing). When possible second win / loss determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second win / loss determination is a big hit win / loss judgment result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, and effect means capable of executing at least effects (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 2) 4), and the starting area is at least a state from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state when the result of the first hit-or-miss determination is a specific hit-or-miss determination result. It is changeable, and the effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means is capable of performing effect display at least, and the effect movable means of the effect means (for example, The production movable body 224) is capable of performing at least a production operation, the production display means is capable of displaying at least a first production, and the first production is the first hit determination. Is a production including at least a production display related to the result of (2), and the production movable means is a production operation of the second production related to the result of the second hit determination (for example, FIG. And (a)) can be executed at least, and the effect display means displays a related effect related to the effect operation of the second effect in the effect moving means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 180 (a)). Image display) can be executed at least, and at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is performed during a part or all of the period during execution of the first effect. A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first effect can be made difficult to be visually recognized (for example, FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (A)). ] Was explained.

  That is, the effect means is configured to perform a part or all of the first effect execution by at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving means and the related effect display by the effect display means. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during the period.

  Further, the related effect display may be an effect image display.

  In addition, "the effect means starts the first effect by the effect display means first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving means and the effect. At least one of the related effect displays by the effect display means makes it possible to make at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize, and the effect means sets the second effect first. While the second effect is being started, the first effect by the effect display means is not performed (for example, FIG. 180 (A) and (A)), which is a game characterized by the above-mentioned. Stand. ] Was also explained.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is the first effect. It is possible to make at least a part difficult to see,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during execution of the second effect.

  In addition, “after performing the symbol variation display, a symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning / disagreement determination, and the symbol display means. At least a controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is provided, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the symbol display means when a suspension condition is satisfied. At least control of (for example, hold of special figure 2) can be executed, the effect display means is image display means, and the image display means has one hold icon for one hold ( For example, at least the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) can be displayed, and the image display means displays the hold icon in the hold display area (for example, the special figure 2 hold display area 282). In at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display, it is possible to make at least a part of the hold display area difficult to see. For example, FIG. 180 (A) and (A)), a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "when the result of the second hit determination is a specific second hit determination result, the control state, at least control state transition means capable of transition from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state (for example, CPU304) of the main control unit 300, the jackpot control state is a state in which the winning area is at least changeable from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, the first effect is the big hit control A game table characterized in that the non-big hit control state is an effect that is easier to be executed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 170). ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first hit / miss determination means is one in which an electric power support state is easier to derive the specific hit / miss determination result than a non-electric power support state, and the first effect is more than the electric power support state. Also, the game console characterized in that the non-electric power support state is an effect that is more likely to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 170). ] Was also explained.

  That is, the electric support state may be a state in which the game ball easily enters the starting area, and the non-electric support state may be a state in which the game ball is hard to enter the starting area.

  Further, in the above description, “at least the starting region (for example, power tube) that can change the state between the easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) and the difficult-for-entry state (for example, closed state), At least a first hit determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a second hit determination (for example, hit determination of a special map) capable of performing at least a determination (for example, hit determination of a general drawing). When possible second win / loss determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second win / loss determination is a big hit win / loss judgment result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit. After performing a variation display with the game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can shift at least to the control state, at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning / absence determination is displayed. A game stand provided with a possible symbol display means (for example, a second special figure display device 214) and an effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing an effect display, which is the start. The area is capable of performing at least a specific action when the result of the first hit determination is a certain hit determination result, and the particular action is the entry from the difficult-to-enter state. An operation including an operation for changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening / closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric Chu short opening operation or an electric Chu long opening operation), and the effect display means, At least a first effect can be displayed, and the first effect includes at least an effect performed while the start region is executing the specific operation (for example, ((b) in FIG. 169 (b)). ) Shown in ()), the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display. (For example, the display of the characters C1 to C3) is at least an effect, and the second effect is at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during execution of the first effect. A game table characterized by an effect that can be made difficult to see (for example, FIG. 173 (K)). ] Was explained.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation in which the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize when the starting area is in the easy entry state. May be an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize before changing the state from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is the easily-accessible state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing a first symbol variation display (for example, a universal symbol variation display), a first symbol display means (for example, a universal symbol) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first hit determination. A display device 210) is provided, and the effect display means is, as a first effect, an effect executed during the first symbol variation display (for example, shown in (A) to (F) in FIG. 169 (b)). (During change effect) can be displayed at least, the effect display means, as the first effect, an effect executed while the stop symbol is being displayed by the first symbol display means (for example, confirmation At least an intermediate effect) can be displayed, and the effect display means displays, as the first effect, at least an effect (for example, an in-motion effect) performed while the start region is executing the specific operation. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one of the changing effect, the finalizing effect, and the action effect.

  In addition, “another starting area different from the starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230) and one of the symbol displaying means as a symbol displaying means, a first symbol displaying means (for example, a first symbol displaying means). 1 special symbol display device 212), as one symbol display means of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214), and the first symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is provided, and the another starting area does not change the easiness of entering the game ball, and the symbol display control means is The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first suspension condition is satisfied. One hold control less It is executable, and the symbol display control means can execute at least a second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The first holding condition is a requirement that at least includes that the game ball has entered the different starting area, and the second holding condition is a requirement that the game ball is the starting area. Is a requirement that includes at least entering the, the second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot advance notice effect against the variation) A gaming table characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The second effect referred to here may be an effect of variable display of decorative symbols, which is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the variable symbol display.

  Further, "the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment after performing the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the hit determination of the big hit after performing the symbol variation display, The case where the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol is more advantageous to the player as the jackpot control state than the case where the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A gaming table having a configuration (for example, FIG. 171 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State) is at least transferable, the game control means, when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, a 15R special jackpot game state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state changing operation (for example, opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation in which the number of releases is large or an operation in which the opening time is long may be easily performed.

  In addition, "the symbol display control means is capable of at least executing control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digestion condition is satisfied, and the symbol display control The means is capable of at least executing a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold extinguishing condition is satisfied, and the condition for satisfying the second hold extinguishing condition is , Is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, the requirements for the satisfaction of the first holding digestion condition, that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended Is a requirement that includes at least, the requirement to satisfy the first holding digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, the effect display means, the second Judgment of At least a pre-reading notice effect related to the result of (1) (for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. , The effect display means, at least during the interrupt symbol variation display, it is possible to continue the continuous notice effect, the interrupt symbol variation display, the second holding digestion condition during the continuous notice effect It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is during the first effect execution. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect (for example, electric-chu-opening notification effect) in part or all of the period. FIG 177 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The game table here is a game table of a so-called special figure 2 priority variation machine.

  Further, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetching notice effect.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Then, the pachinko machine of a 4th embodiment of the present invention is explained. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has many points in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, constituent elements having the same names as the constituent elements described so far are designated by the same reference numerals as those used so far. 181 to 196 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. 181 to 196 are given priority. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a diagram showing a win / loss determination table of the special figure 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 181 (b) is a diagram showing a win / loss determination table of the special figure 2. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the fourth embodiment, in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine with specifications that make it easier to win a big hit compared to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1.

  The special figure determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 171 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 160. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in this fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit, which is advantageous to the player, than the special figure 1.

  In addition, the hit / no-judgment of the special figure may be to derive a “big hit”, a “small hit”, or a “miss”, or to derive a “big hit” or a “miss”. Alternatively, whether or not the special figure is valid may be derived to the special figure design.

  The prefetching notice is also executed in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. Pre-reading advance notice reads the start information before the start of the symbol change of the special figure, pre-determines the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure based on the start information, and notifies the result of the determination based on the start information Before the start, based on the preliminary determination result, it is a warning that the result of the determination of success based on the starting information will be a big hit, or will be special map A or special map B. The result of the determination of judgment based on the starting information. Even if the result is out of place or the special map I or the special map J is displayed, a notice that the judgment result based on the start information is a big hit, or a special map A or a special map B is given (a so-called false notice). ) Is also included.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 acceptance / rejection pre-determination table used when performing pre-determination by pre-reading the start information of special figure 1, and FIG. 182 (b) is a special figure 2 FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 validity / invalidity pre-determination table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of FIG.

  The special figure 1 win / fail pre-determination table shown in FIG. 182 (a) is the same as the win / loss judgment table of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 181 (a), and the special figure 2 win / fail pre-determination shown in FIG. 182 (b). The use table is the same as the win / loss determination table of FIG. 181 (b) of FIG. Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the table for preliminary determination shown in FIG. 182, in the special figure-related lottery process, the determination of success or failure is again made using the table for determination of success or failure shown in FIG. 181.

  Further, in the preliminary determination, the preliminary determination of the special figure is performed.

  FIG. 182 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure preliminary determination table.

  The special figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 182 (c) is the same as the special figure determination table used in the special figure related lottery processing (see FIG. 171 (d)), but in the special figure related lottery processing, A special figure determination process using the special figure determination table is performed.

  In the pre-determination, the special figure may not be pre-determined, the variable time of the special figure may be pre-determined, and the prefetching notice may be given based on the result of the pre-determination of the variable time. Alternatively, instead of specifically pre-determining the fluctuation time of the special figure, the tendency of the fluctuation time and the group of fluctuation time are pre-judged, and the pre-reading notice is given based on the pre-judgment result. May be.

  The sub-control unit side (400, 500) determines, for example, by random number lottery, whether or not to give a pre-reading notice, or in what manner the pre-reading notice is given.

  Next, the hit / no hit judgment of the universal figure in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram showing a universal figure validity determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Also in the universal figure hit / miss judgment processing in this embodiment, the hit / miss judgment is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. The universal figure control state is a low-probability state if the time saving flag is turned off (if it is a non-electric support state), and a high probability state if the time saving flag is turned on (if it is a power support state). . The universal figure winning / judgment determination is performed based on the universal figure winning random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the starting information extracted from the universal figure pending storage unit of the RAM 308. The common probability of Atari in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electrically supported state (low probability state), and 100% in the electrically supported state (high probability state). It should be noted that in the electric power support state, only the winning may be won.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram showing a universal figure determination table.

  Also in determining the universal figure, the general-purpose determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state by referring to the time saving flag. In the non-electric power support state, the universal figure determination is performed based on the universal figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the starting information extracted from the universal figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the fourth embodiment, in the non-electric power support state, the universal figure A is determined with a 90% probability and the universal figure B is determined with a 10% probability. The public figure determination table shown in FIG. 183 (b) shows the opening mode of the electronic Chu corresponding to the result of the general figure decision. When the universal figure A is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric channel is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric channel short open). On the other hand, when the universal figure B is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric channel is opened for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric channel long opening). If a predetermined number of balls (here, 10 balls) are entered before the predetermined opening time elapses, the electric Chu is closed at that time.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, if it is in the electric power support state, it is always determined to be the universal map B. Therefore, the lottery based on the universal figure determination random value is not performed. Even when the universal figure B is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210 in the electric power support state, the electric channel is opened for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric channel long open). Here, when the universal figure B is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210 in the non-electrically supported state, the electronic chart is opened for the first time at maximum (for example, 4 seconds), and the ordinary figure is displayed in the electrically supported state. When the universal figure A is stopped and displayed on the device 210, the power cable may be opened for a maximum of the second time (for example, 6 seconds).

  Further, if the result of the determination on whether or not the general figure is wrong is the general figure C, the lottery based on the general figure determination random number value is not performed.

  In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the general / universal winning / non-defective judgment is won almost every time, only in the electric support state, but it may be won almost (or without fail) even in the non-electric power support state. In this case, when the universal figure A is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210 in the non-electric power support state, the electric channel is opened for 0.1 seconds at the maximum.

  FIG. 183 (c) is a diagram showing a universal figure timer table.

  As shown in the universal figure timer table of FIG. 183 (c), in the fourth embodiment also, regardless of the symbol of the universal figure, the symbol variation time of the universal figure is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric power support state (typically Figure timer 1), which is 1 second (universal figure timer 2) uniformly in the power support state. In this way, the symbol variation time of the general figure is longer in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state, so it is possible to perform a long production during the symbol variation display of the general figure in the non-electric support state, and enhance the production effect. You may be able to.

  It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of symbol variation time for a universal figure in the non-electrically-supported state, and to determine the symbol variation time for the universal figure in the non-electrically-supported state by random number lottery. In addition, a plurality of types (may be two types or three types or more) of symbol fluctuation times of the universal figure in the electric support state are prepared, and a random number lottery from among them is used in the electric support state. You may make it determine the symbol variation time of a figure. Alternatively, a symbol variation time may be prepared for each regular figure, and further, the symbol variation time of the universal symbol B may be longer than that of the regular symbol A so that it can be easily selected. By doing so, it becomes easier to perform a stirrup effect before the normal figure B is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to select the symbol variation time shorter than that in the universal figure A in the universal figure B. By doing so, the player can be made more advantageous.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, pre-determination of a universal figure is also executed based on the fact that the starting information acquisition condition of the universal figure is satisfied. The requirement for satisfying the starting information acquisition condition of the universal figure mentioned here is a requirement that is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228. That is, in the state where the number of reserved universal figures is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reserved universal figures is the predetermined upper limit number, It is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228. The prior determination of the general map is the same processing as the prior determination of the special map.

  FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram showing a universal figure validity pre-determination table used when pre-determining by pre-reading start information of the universal figure.

  The table for universal figure validity determination shown in FIG. 184 (a) is the same as the table for universal figure validity determination shown in FIG. 183 (a). Even if pre-determination is performed using the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 184 (a), in the universal figure-related lottery process, it is again necessary to perform the success / failure determination using the universal figure validity determination table shown in FIG. 183 (a). Be seen.

  In addition, in the pre-determination, general pre-determination is performed.

  FIG. 184 (b) is a diagram showing a universal figure advance determination table.

  The general figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 184 (b) is also the same as the general figure determination table shown in FIG. 183 (b), but in the general figure related lottery process, the general figure determination table is used again. The normal map determination process is performed.

  Subsequently, the universal figure production determination process executed by the first sub control unit 400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185 (a).

  FIG. 185 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the universal figure effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The universal figure effect determination process shown in FIG. 185 (a) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the universal figure variation start command from the main control unit 300. The universal figure fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is in the power support state) and the universal figure determination result.

  First, it is determined whether it is during the prohibition period of the universal figure production (step S611). The prohibited period referred to here is a period during power support. In addition, you may include the execution period of at least any one of the specific effects mentioned later in this prohibition period. If it is during the prohibition period (during electric power support), the general-purpose drawing effect determination process is ended, and the general-purpose effect (first effect) is not performed. In the electric support state, since the game balls are easy to win in the electric chew, there is a possibility that the expectation of the player may not be improved so much even if the general production is performed. However, if the electric power support is in progress, it is not decided not to uniformly perform the general effect, but even if the electric power support is in effect, the general effect is executed when the lottery with a predetermined probability is won. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the prohibition period (if non-electric power support is being performed), it is determined whether or not the universal figure effect execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The requirement for establishing the universal figure production execution condition is a requirement that is established by winning the universal figure B shown in FIG. 167 (c). It should be noted that when the universal figure B is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric tulong opening is executed, and the universal figure effect execution condition corresponds to the true universal figure effect execution condition. In addition, it is also a requirement that is satisfied by winning the universal figure A shown in FIG. 167 (c) and winning the effect execution availability lottery with the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the universal figure A is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric chu short opening is executed, and this universal figure effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of the false universal figure effect for the electric chu long opening. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of the true general-purpose drawing production for the opening of the electric chu. Furthermore, it is also a requirement to be satisfied by winning the general figure C shown in FIG. 167 (c) and winning the production execution availability lottery with the second probability (for example, 1/100). It should be noted that the first probability may be equal to or higher than the second probability, or may be higher than the second probability. When the universal figure C is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, the electric chu does not open but remains closed, and the universal figure effect execution condition corresponds to a false universal figure effect execution condition. It should be noted that, here, if the universal figure B is won, the universal figure effect execution condition is always satisfied, but it may be established by winning the effect execution availability lottery with the third probability (for example, 1/2). Good. The third probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the first probability, or a probability higher than the first probability. If the above-mentioned general-diagram production execution condition is not satisfied, this general-diagram production determination process ends.

  On the contrary, if the universal figure performance execution condition is satisfied, then it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The requirement for satisfying the predetermined condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when the specific effect is executed. As specific effects, effects during a big hit game, effects with a high expectation of a big hit during symbol changes in special symbols (for example, super reach, notice effects), forced effects that occur at predetermined time intervals, right hitting and button pressing Examples include an effect that prompts the player to operate, and an effect that prompts the user to press a button for each of the plurality of buttons. The forced effect is an effect that is performed by moving the decorative symbol to a corner if the symbol of the special figure is changing, and is an effect that is performed in the middle of the demonstration effect if the symbol is being demoed. Further, the effect of urging the button press may be, for example, an effect of notifying the button press timing for each button, an effect of notifying the button press acceptance period, or a button press acceptance remaining time. It may be an effect for notifying the period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first general-purpose production effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S614), the general-purpose production effect determination process ends, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the second universal figure effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S615), and the ordinary figure effect determination processing ends. The universal figure effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 142 (a), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the universal figure command. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled based on the effect command, and the ordinary symbol effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The general drawing production based on the first general drawing production command is a production executed for a relatively long production time, and the general drawing production based on the second general production production command is executed for a relatively short production time. It is a production. For example, the start time of the general figure production based on the second general figure production command is later than the start time of the general figure production based on the first general figure production command, and the production time becomes shorter. That is, when the general effect is started during execution of the specific effect, the effect time is shorter than when the general effect is started during non-execution of the specific effect. By doing so, it may be possible to diversify the effect and enhance the interest of the game. Also, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit notice) is being executed, by shortening the effect time of the general effect, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the specific effect, and the general effect including the result display. By carrying out, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the stop display of the universal symbol, and it may be possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the short effect time mentioned here includes 0 seconds, and in the case of 0 second, the general-purpose effect is not executed. In the case of 0 second, the second general-purpose drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second general-purpose effect effect command may be used as the cancel command. Further, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, instead of uniformly setting the first general-purpose drawing production command, a lottery is performed in step S614, and a second probability is set with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). You may make it set a figure production command.

  As described above, also in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the general figure effect is more likely to be performed in the non-electrically supported state than in the electrically supported state. In the non-electric power support state, it is difficult for the game balls to win the electric chu. Therefore, it may be possible to expect the winning of the game balls to the electric chu by executing the general drawing effect.

  FIG. 185 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the predetermined area advance notice effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area referred to here is a predetermined area in the decorative pattern display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special figure reservation display area. In the fourth embodiment as well, the special figure reservation display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the same as in the third embodiment described above. However, in the third embodiment, the general figure effect area provided between the special figure 1 reserved display area and the special figure 2 reserved display area, in which the general figure effect is performed, is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved display area or the special figure 2 reserved display area is referred to as a predetermined area. The predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special figure reservation display area, and may be an area that includes an area that is close to or adjacent to the area where the general figure effect is performed.

  The predetermined area advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 185 (b) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure suspension increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect mentioned here corresponds to a special jackpot notice effect. The special jackpot preview effect here is a look-ahead preview effect based on the preliminary determination result described using FIG. 182. It should be noted that the first sub-control unit 400 starts even when it receives any of the commands described above, such as the special symbol variation start command, the universal figure hold increase command, the universal figure variation start command, and the big hit production start command. You may do it. In these cases, the notice production is not limited to the look-ahead notice production, and may be a notice production for the stop symbol of the symbol variation, or may be a notice production for giving a notice that the reach will be developed. Alternatively, it may be a notice effect or the like for giving a notice that the state will change to the probability change state or the electric power support state after the big hit ends.

  In step S621, it is determined whether the prohibition period is in progress. The prohibition period in this step S621 is a period during the drawing effect. If it is during the prohibition period (during the drawing production), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibited period, it is determined whether or not the notice effect execution condition is satisfied (step S622). The condition for satisfying the notice production execution condition is a condition satisfied by winning the notice execution possibility lottery. If the preliminary notice effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the contrary, if the notice effect execution condition is satisfied, the predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area advance notice effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 142 (a), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the predetermined predetermined information. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled based on the region notice effect command, and the notice effect is displayed in a predetermined region of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, other notice effect lottery processing is executed, and the predetermined area notice effect determination processing ends. The other notice productions correspond to notice productions (including pre-read notices) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187.

  186 is a time chart showing the flow of an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device or the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 186. That is, the decorative symbol display devices and the like shown in (A) to (H) of FIG. 187 correspond to the periods of (A) to (H) shown in FIG. 186. In the time chart shown in FIG. 186, time (t) elapses from left to right in the figure.

  Below the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187, a universal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device 214, which are all driven and controlled by the main control unit 300, are shown. Has been done. In the drawings used for the description of the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special drawing display device 212 and the second special drawing display device 214 are opposite to those of the drawings used for the description of the third embodiment. The display device 212 is shown on the leftmost side, and the second special figure display device 214 is shown on the right side. Further, the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the far right side. Further, in the drawings used for the description of the fourth embodiment, a holding lamp that lights up by the number of holdings is shown on each display device. That is, four first special figure reservation lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device 214 on the right (middle) thereof is the second special figure display lamp 218. Four figure holding lamps 220 are shown, and four figure holding lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost figure display device 210. Lighting of all of these holding lamps is controlled by the main control unit 300. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of reservations of the general map is four, which is the same as the maximum number of reservations of the special diagram 1 and the maximum number of reservations of the special diagram 2. It should be noted that the maximum number of reservations may not be provided or may not be provided for both the general drawing and the special drawing. Also in the figure used for the description in the fourth embodiment, like the figure used in the description in the third embodiment, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the up-down direction is lit and the black-painted portion is lit during the pattern change. Shows the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by the sub control unit (here, the second sub control unit 500). A special figure 1 reserved display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 reserved display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, between the special figure 1 reserved display area 281 and the special figure 2 reserved display area 282, a general figure effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-described predetermined area is provided. In each hold display area, the older hold icons are displayed on the side of the universal figure effect area 283 (center side), and this point is the same as the decorative pattern display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 172 and the like. Further, the default display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle, and when performing the prefetching notice effect, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the look-ahead notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the old character. Note that a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from the old age) may be prepared and used properly according to the reliability of the prefetching notice. For example, the pre-reading notice effect may be performed by displaying the hold icon in a predetermined display mode when the reliability of winning the jackpot is really low and in a second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187, the numbers of the respective numbers of holdings and the fourth symbols are displayed in a vertical column on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a. That is, the numeral display 284 showing the number of reservations of special figure 1 is provided at the top, and the fourth symbol 285 of special figure 1 is displayed below it. Below that, a numerical display 286 showing the number of holdings of special figure 2 is provided, and the fourth symbol 287 of special figure 2 is displayed below it. Further below that, there is provided a numeral display 288 indicating the number of holdings of the universal figure, and a fourth symbol 289 of the universal figure is displayed below it. The fourth symbol is for displaying that the symbol is changing, and the first special symbol display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 187 (a) is performing the symbol variable display of the special symbol, and the other display devices 214, 210 is stopped. The fourth symbol 285 of special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other fourth symbols 287, 289 are turned off. Each of the fourth symbols 285, 287.289 lights up in a predetermined color when the display devices 212, 214, 210 stop and display the big hit symbols and the hit symbols, and during the big hit game and the electric chew opening / closing operation. May continue to light in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIGS. 187 and 186 (a) is a non-electric power support state, and the number of holdings in special figure 1 is three, and the number of holdings in special figure 2 and general figure is 0. Two special hold icons are displayed in the special drawing 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (A), and the first special drawing 1 hold icon 2811 representing the first hold of the oldest winning prize. Is displayed in the display mode of an old character, and the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed on the left side of the normal figure effect area 283. In addition, the default image 283a is displayed in the ordinary figure production area 283. This default image 283a is an image displayed in the general figure effect area 283 when the general figure effect is not performed. Further, as shown in (a) of FIG. 186, the electric Chu is not operating, and the electric Chu (the pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. As described above, the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 187 (a) displays a special figure symbol variation display, and this symbol variation display continues beyond the timing of FIG. 187 (h). To do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric power support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually three game balls B pass through the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the left area, and Will be increased to three. As shown in (A) of FIG. 186, the general figure display device 210 starts the symbol variable display of the general figure and also the general figure effect. The general figure effect here is a general figure effect based on the first general figure effect command set in step S614 of FIG. 185 (a) (hereinafter, referred to as first general figure effect). The variable display of ordinary figures is displayed for 20 seconds. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (a), the variable display (high-speed variation) of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is started. In the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure here, the variable display pattern (repetition of general figure decoration 1 → general figure decoration 2 → general figure decoration 3) shown in (A) of FIG. 169 (b) is performed for 20 seconds. . In addition, the number display 288 of the number of holdings of the general figure shown in FIG. 187 (a) becomes 3, and the fourth symbol 289 of the general figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 186, the universal figure display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the universal figure, and the confirmation display is performed. That is, the public figure display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the general figure C (see FIG. 167 (c)) for 0.6 seconds. The term "symbol variable display period" may refer to a period from the start of variable display of symbols to the end of fixed display. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (c), following the variable display of the decorative symbol of the universal symbol, the universal symbol decoration 3 which is the stopped symbol aspect of the universal symbol decorative symbol (see FIG. 167 (d)) is 0. Displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the result display effect of the universal figure is performed. It should be noted that the first general drawing effect here refers to the general drawing determination result in step S612 in FIG. 185, displays the decorative pattern of the general drawing in a variable display, and then performs the general display result display effect. It will be a production over a very long first time (20.6 seconds). Further, the fourth symbol 289 of the universal figure shown in FIG. 187 (c) is turned off when the universal figure display device 210 is in the finalizing display.

  When the fixed display on the public figure display device 210 ends, as shown in (D) of FIG. 186, the public figure display device 210 restarts the symbol variable display of the general figure, but here, the general figure effect is not executed. . That is, in the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 185, it is determined that the universal figure effect execution condition is not satisfied, so that the general figure effect is not executed and the false general figure effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (D). In addition, the number display 288 of the number of holdings of the universal figure shown in FIG. 187 (d) becomes 2, and the fourth symbol 289 of the universal figure also lights in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (e) of FIG. 186, the universal figure display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the universal figure, and the fixed display for 0.6 seconds is performed. The default image 283a is still displayed in the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (c). That is, the result display effect of the universal figure is not performed. Note that the fourth symbol 289 of the universal figure shown in FIG. 187 (e) is turned off.

  When the confirmation display on the public figure display device 210 ends, as shown in (F) in FIG. 186, the general figure display device 210 starts the symbol variable display of the general figure again, and this time, the general figure production is also started. . The symbol variation display of the general figure here is also performed for 20 seconds. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (F), the variable display (high-speed variation) of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is started. The general picture production here is also the first general picture production. Further, the numeral display 288 of the number of holdings of the universal figure shown in FIG. 187 (a) becomes 1, and the fourth symbol 289 of the universal figure also lights in gray.

  When 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation display of the universal figure was started, as shown in (G) of FIG. 186, the universal figure display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the universal figure and is confirmed for 0.6 seconds. The display is done. In the universal figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 187 (K), the stationary symbol of the universal symbol B (see FIG. 167 (c)) is displayed, and in the universal symbol effect area 283, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the universal symbol is displayed. After that, the universal figure decoration 2 (see FIG. 167 (d)) corresponding to the universal figure B is displayed, and the result display effect of the universal figure is performed. Further, as a figure effect, an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) is displayed so as to surround the figure effect area 283. The effect image 283b enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 of the look-ahead notice display mode that is the display mode of the old character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the effect image 283b may hide the entire first special figure 1 hold icon 2811.

  Subsequently, as shown in (H) of FIG. 186, the electric Chu long opening is performed, and the electric Chu is opened for 5 seconds. In the universal figure effect area 283 shown in FIG. 187 (h), the electric-chu open notification effect is executed subsequent to the result display effect of the general figure accompanied by the effect image 283b. In the electric-chu-opening notification production here, a decorative design in which the character of the lord who has a balloon saying "Den-chu open" is a peace sign is displayed. By the balloon "Den Chu open", the player can know that the game ball can enter the Den Chu and can know the launch timing of the game ball. Further, the character's hand extends beyond the universal figure production area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the prefetch advance notice is made) at the portion where the peace sign is applied. A part of the hold icon (display mode) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. This electric-chu open notification production can also be seen as one of the result display productions of the universal figure. It should be noted that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric Chu open notification effect. In addition, a balloon "Den Chu open" also extends beyond the normal figure production area 283, and this balloon has entered the special figure 2 hold display area 282.

  In this way, by intentionally hiding the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 whose display mode is changed to the prefetching notice mode, and hiding it in the effect image 283b or the electric figure opening notification effect, the figure effect is given to the player. Sometimes you can be interested in trends. In addition, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a big hit in the future, and it may be possible to give the player the expectation of opening the electric choo by highlighting the present-day progressive drawing effect.

  It should be noted that the first general drawing effect here refers to the general drawing decision result in step S612 in FIG. 185 to perform variable display of the decorative pattern of the general drawing, and then displays the result of the general drawing with the effect image 283b. Is performed, and then the electric-chu-opening notification effect is performed, which is an effect over a relatively long second time (25.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 187, as shown in (vi) of FIG. 186, when the electric chu long opening is completed, the electric chu opening notification effect is also completed, and the symbol variation display of the general figure is started. However, the general drawing production is not executed.

  FIG. 188 is a time chart showing the continuation flow of the example shown in FIG. 186, and FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a state of a decorative symbol display device or the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. 188. That is, the decorative symbol display device and the like shown in (S) to (S) of FIG. 188 correspond to the periods of (S) to (S) shown in FIG. 189. Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 188, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  After the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 performed in FIG. 187 ends and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the first feature of the look-ahead notice display mode that is the display mode of the old character shown in FIG. 187. The suspension of the special figure 1 represented by the FIG. 1 suspension icon 2811 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1, the decorative pattern display device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 and develops into a super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 188 is the predetermined condition in step S613 of FIG. 185, and the predetermined condition is established during the production of super reach with a high expectation of a big hit. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (SA), the state of development into super reach is shown. Super reach itself is a type of big hit announcement, and the production of that super reach is also equivalent to the big hit announcement production. In the production of the super reach here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the maiden character C2. Appears. When you reach Super Reach, the hold icon disappears. It should be noted that the display control of the hold icon is performed, and even when it is only invisible to the player, it is referred to as "disappear" or "disappear" in this specification. This also applies to "hidden" and "hidden". However, the respective numerical displays 284, 286, 286 on the left end have not disappeared (visible). Further, each fourth symbol 285, 287, 289 is also displayed.

  Again, since the player is in the non-electric power support state, the player is left-handed, and three game balls B successively pass through the universal figure starting port 228 provided in the left region, and the game ball B in FIG. As shown in (a), the public figure display device 210 starts the symbol variable display of the universal figure, and the symbol variable display of this general figure is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, since the predetermined condition is satisfied (during super-reach) in the general drawing effect, the effect based on the second general drawing effect command set in step S615 of FIG. 185 (a) (hereinafter referred to as the second Although it will be executed), the second general drawing effect is not yet started at the time of starting the variation display of the general figure on the general figure display device 210, and the general figure shown in FIG. A default image 283a is displayed in the graphic effect area 283. It should be noted that the background image, which is one of the effects of super reach, may be used to erase the general-purpose production area 283, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the general-use production is started. Good.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 189 (Sa), in the super reach character C2, the foot portion hides a part of the general figure effect area 283 in which the general figure effect is not performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the general figure production area 283.

  As shown in (SI) of FIG. 188, when the end of the pattern variation display of the universal figure on the universal figure display device 210 is approaching (from 1 second before here), the second universal figure production area 283 displays the second universal figure production. Is started. In the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 189 (shi), the variable display (high-speed variation) of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is started. The variation display of the decorative pattern of the general figure here is also the variation display pattern (repeating the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3) shown in (A) of FIG. 169 (b), Since the time is short, the number of repetitions is small.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (Shi), when the general-purpose production effect is started in the general-purpose production area 283, this time, the general-purpose production area 283 hides the foot portion of the super reach character C2. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the character C2. It should be noted that the foot portion of the super reach character C2 may still hide a part of the general figure effect area 283, or the general effect area 283 may indicate the foot portion of the super reach character C2. You may not hide it.

  Eventually, as shown in (S) of FIG. 188, the universal figure display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the universal figure, and the fixed display for 0.6 seconds is performed. In the universal figure effect area 283 shown in FIG. 189 (s), following the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure, the universal figure decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds, and the result display effect of the universal figure is performed. . Further, as a figure effect, here also, an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) is displayed so as to surround the figure effect area 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the band portion. As a result, the super reach character C2 becomes more difficult to visually recognize. The effect image 283b may hide the entire super-reach character C2.

  The variable display time of the decorative pattern of the universal figure in the second universal figure production (the period length of (si) in FIG. 188) is the fixed display time (the result display production time of the universal figure: the period of (s) in FIG. 188). Long), and may be shorter or longer than the fixed display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 188, the electric Chu long opening is performed, and the electric Chu is opened for 5 seconds. In the universal figure effect area 283 shown in FIG. 189 (e), following the effect display effect of the universal figure accompanied by the effect image 283b, the same effect as the electric-chu open notification effect shown in FIG. 187 is executed. The right reach part of the character C2 of the super reach is hidden by the balloon "Opening the electric chew" in the electric chew opening notification effect. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the super reach character C2. The electric-chu-opening notification effect here can also be seen as one of the result display effects of the universal figure. Note that the super-reach character C2 may be entirely hidden by the electric-chu open notification effect.

  Note that, in the second figure rendering here, referring to the figure determination result in step S612 in FIG. 185, a short variation display of the decorative pattern of the figure is performed, and then the result display of the figure accompanied by the effect image 283b is displayed. A relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) in which an effect is performed and then an electric-chu open notification effect is performed is achieved.

  Next, although not shown in FIG. 189, as shown in (SO) of FIG. 188, when the electric Chu long opening is finished, the electric Chu opening notification effect is also finished, and the symbol variation display of the general figure is started. However, the general drawing production is not executed.

  The start time of the second drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the variable display of the special figure, and for example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second drawing effect (for example, 5 seconds before and after). If there is a start of the symbol variation display of the special figure between the), it is possible to control the start time of the second general figure production to coincide with the start time of the symbol variation display of the special figure (at the same time). The control may be delayed from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special figure, or may be controlled to be advanced. In addition, in the period (c) of FIG. 188, an example in which the electric chew continues to be opened is shown. However, during the period (c), the electric chew (a pair of blade members 232a) is opened and closed one or more times, respectively. At least a part of the effect display may be common or may be different between the time of opening or during opening and the time of closing or during closing. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo sign during closing or closing, or a blue kimono during opening or opening, even if you continue to sign. Yes, a red kimono may be used during or during closing.

  FIG. 190 is a time chart showing a modified example of the second general-purpose drawing effect, in which time (t) elapses from left to right in the figure.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 190 (a), the second general drawing production is not performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general drawing (the period of (h)), and the fixed display starts (the beginning of the period of (tsu)). ) Is performed, the second general drawing effect is started, and even during the opening of the electric chu long ((te) period), the electric chu open notification effect (this is also the result display of the general figure is displayed as part of the second general drawing effect. Perform a kind of production). In other words, the second general-purpose drawing effect in this modified example has only the result display effect of the general-purpose drawing, and the effect time is the relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). In addition, in the case of a general figure being out of place (General figure C), only the result display effect of the final figure being confirmed and displayed is displayed, but since it is a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the general figure is out of order (normal figure). In the case of FIG. C), the second universal figure effect may not be executed.

  In the second general-purpose drawing production in the modified example shown in FIG. 190 (b), the decorative pattern of the general-purpose drawing is displayed both during the variable display (period (d)) and during the fixed display (period (nu)). When the electric figure chulong opening is started (the beginning of the period (n)) without the general figure effect, the second general figure effect is started. The effect time of the second general-purpose drawing effect in this modified example is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). It should be noted that if the public drawing is out of place (general drawing C), the second general drawing effect is not executed.

  185, in step S615 in FIG. 185, any one of the second general drawing effect of the third time period, the second general drawing effect of the fourth time period, and the second general drawing effect of the fifth time period. It may be possible to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the second general-purpose figure production for time. In addition, as the second general-purpose production, production times other than the third time to the fifth time may be prepared.

  In addition, all of the third time to the fifth time are shorter than the symbol variation time (here, 20 seconds) of the normal figure in the non-electric power support state. By doing so, it may be possible to diversify the effect and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, while the symbol variation display that is not performing the universal figure production can be made to attract the player's attention to other productions, by performing the universal production including the result display, the stop display of the universal symbol can be displayed by the player. May be easier to recognize, which may enhance the interest of the game.

  FIG. 191 is a time chart showing an example when the predetermined condition is changed from the satisfied state to the unsatisfied state, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right of the figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 191 (a), even if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, super-reach is being executed), the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, super-reach is completed), the symbol variable display start of the general figure is started. It is an example of executing the second general-purpose drawing effect determined at the time. That is, the same second general-purpose drawing effect as the second general-purpose effect shown in FIG. 188 is executed ((F) to (E) period).

  The example shown in FIG. 191 (b) is an example in which the universal figure effect is started when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, since the predetermined condition was satisfied at the time of starting the pattern variation display of the universal figure, the second universal figure production (the second universal figure production shown in FIG. 188) in which the production is started from the beginning of the period (re). Same as). However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure, and the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is started from the middle of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure (the start of the period of (L)). ), The variable display of the decorative pattern of the universal figure is continued even in the period of (re), after that, the result display effect of the universal figure accompanied by the effect image 283b is performed (period of (b)), and then the electric-chu open notification effect is produced. Do (period (wa)).

  In addition, you may add the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure for the period of (ru), or start the display control of the variable display of the decorative pattern of the general figure from the beginning of the period of (ri), It may be hidden while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and may be displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-reading prefetching notice. This general picture pre-reading notice production may be executed when there is a general picture hit in the hold of the common picture, or a hit pattern of a specific symbol may be held in the hold of the common figure (for example, public figure B of Den Chulon opening). ) May be performed, or may be executed when there is a delay in holding the universal figure and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (fake universal figure prefetch notice presentation effect). In addition, even if there is a winning hit in the holding of the drawing or there is a winning design of the specific symbol in the holding of the drawing, it may not be executed unless a lottery of a predetermined probability is won.

  In the universal figure pre-reading notice production shown in FIG. 192, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) so as to surround the universal figure production area 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 192 has also entered the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. Further, a part of the decorative pattern of the special figure which is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this general picture pre-reading notice production, when the last general picture is held with multiple public figures being held, the notice display is displayed over the multiple symbol variation display of the general figure, and it is continuous. It will be a notice.

  Note that the general picture pre-reading notice effect may be started after receiving the general figure hold increase command (immediately after the general figure hold increase command), but the specific effect (for example, special jackpot notification or special figure super reach) Etc.) has been executed, it may be started from the time when the specific effect is finished, or when the specific effect is started halfway, the general picture prefetch notice effect is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of performing special jackpot advance notice effect in the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 193 (a), the symbol variation is stopped in the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the general figure. Further, a default image 283a is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of reservations of special figure 1 is 3, but the number of reservations of special figure 2 and general figure is 0. The state shown in FIG. 193 is a non-electric power support state.

  In FIG. 193 (b), the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The universal figure display device 210 remains stopped. In addition, in this example, when the first universal figure production is executed in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed inside.

  If the number of holdings of the special figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the big hit advance notice effect of the special figure may be started in the general figure effect area 283. The special jackpot jackpot production in the special symbol production area 283 is a case where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and a lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, or a loss occurs. Even when the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (false big hit announcement effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice production of a special figure. When the special jackpot notice production is started in the universal figure production area 283, first, high speed fluctuation is started in the universal figure production area 283, and as shown in FIG. 193 (c), the universal figure production area 283 before the reach is developed. The decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" is stopped and displayed. The decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" shown in FIG. 193 (c) is displayed beyond the universal figure production area 283, overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon. 2811 is difficult to see. In addition, the decorative character pattern of "Gekiatsu" may be displayed in the general-purpose production area 283. Further, in the case of a fake big hit announcement effect, the decoration character design of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decoration character design of "super hot".

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol is developed into the reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" is still displayed in the general drawing production area 283, but after the development of the reach production, the decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" may be erased. Of course, the default image 283a may be displayed in the universal figure production area 283.

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of performing a development notice effect to a special effect of a special figure in the general effect effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The description will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 193, and the matters that are not particularly mentioned are the same as the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure. In addition, the advance notice production of the special figure to the specific production can be regarded as a big hit notice of the special production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 as well, similar to the example shown in FIG. 193, if the number of holdings of the universal figure is 0 when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Then, the high speed fluctuation is started in the general figure production area 283 (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (c), after the normal reach is generated and before the super reach effect is developed, the decorative character pattern of "super hot" is stopped and displayed in the general effect effect area 283. The decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" shown in FIG. 194 (c) is also displayed beyond the general-purpose production area 283 and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon. 2811 is difficult to see.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol develops into the super reach effect. After the development of the super reach effect, the decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the general effect effect area 283. Further, the foot portion of the super reach character C2 overlaps a part of the universal figure effect area 283, making it difficult to visually recognize the universal figure effect area 283.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of performing special jackpot advance notice effect in the universal figure effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 193 (a), the symbol variation is stopped in the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the general figure. Further, a default image 283a is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of reservations of special figure 1 is 3, but the number of reservations of special figure 2 and general figure is 0. The state shown in FIG. 193 is a non-electric power support state.

  In FIG. 193 (b), the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The universal figure display device 210 remains stopped. In addition, in this example, when the first universal figure production is executed in the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed inside.

  If the number of holdings of the special figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the big hit advance notice effect of the special figure may be started in the general figure effect area 283. The special jackpot jackpot production in the special symbol production area 283 is a case where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and a lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, or a loss occurs. Even when the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (false big hit announcement effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice production of a special figure. When the special jackpot notice production is started in the universal figure production area 283, first, high speed fluctuation is started in the universal figure production area 283, and as shown in FIG. 193 (c), the universal figure production area 283 before the reach is developed. The decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" is stopped and displayed. The decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" shown in FIG. 193 (c) is displayed beyond the universal figure production area 283, overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon. 2811 is difficult to see. In addition, the decorative character pattern of "Gekiatsu" may be displayed in the general-purpose production area 283. Further, in the case of a fake big hit announcement effect, the decoration character design of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decoration character design of "super hot".

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 193 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol is developed into the reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" is still displayed in the general drawing production area 283, but after the development of the reach production, the decoration character pattern of "Gekiatsu" may be erased. Of course, the default image 283a may be displayed in the universal figure production area 283.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example in which the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area for the pending digest production.

  In the universal figure production area 283 of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), the electric Chu opening notification production is performed, and the electric Chu long opening is performed. As a result, Den Chu has 4 balls.

  In FIG. 195 (b), four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282. A part of each of these four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric-chu open notification effect, which makes it difficult to see.

  In FIG. 195 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been performed so far ends. In addition, Den Chu long opening is also completed, Den Chu is closed, and the universal figure production is completed. However, the lord's character is displayed in the universal figure production area 283 shown in FIG. 195 (c). The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and in this example, when the special figure 2 is held, the lord's character continues to be displayed in the general figure production area 283. That is, in the universal figure production area 283, when all of the special maps 2 have been reserved, the lord's character disappears and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 194 (a) is displayed. If the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228 before the special figure 2 is reserved, the lord's character disappears in the universal figure effect area 283, and the ordinary figure effect is preferentially executed. You may do it.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 195 (d), the second special figure display device 214 starts the variable display of the special figure. The display mode of the lord's character displayed in the universal figure production area 283 may be changed when the symbol variable display of the special map 2 is started. For example, the default lord's character is a display mode in which both hands are holding bales, but in the case of announcing that the jackpot design will be stopped and displayed in the digested pending symbol variation display, the symbol variation display When it starts, the display mode changes to a display in which the bales held in both hands are lifted. In addition, you may change from a lord to another character. Further, the display in the universal figure production area 283 may be changed each time the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is started.

  It should be noted that in the above description, when one effect hides the other effect, the other effect may hide one effect even if not otherwise specified. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 189 (c), the electric-chu-opening notification effect hides a part of the super-reach character C2, but conversely, the super-reach character C2 shows one of the electric-chu opening notification effects. The part may be hidden so that it is difficult to visually recognize the electric-chu open notification effect. Furthermore, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be hidden for the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be hidden for only a part of the entire effect period. In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, one effect may hide all of the other effect even if not otherwise specified. Further, "difficult to see" includes invisible.

  Further, the other effects such as the general-purpose effect and the big hit effect described above may be effect by sound or effect by light, and are shown in FIGS. 180 (a) and (a). It may be an effect by such an effect movable body. In the case of effect by sound, sounds overlap each other, and one effect hides the other effect depending on the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, “a starting region (for example, a power tube) in which at least the state can be changed between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-for-entry state (for example, a closed state) and whether or not it is true or false (for example, general After determining whether or not the winning / improperness determination is possible (at least the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and a variation display of the symbol, at least a symbol that can display a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning / deficit determination A gaming machine provided with a display means (for example, a public figure display device 210) and a production means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of at least producing an effect, wherein the starting area is for the hit / no hit judgment. It is possible to perform at least a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) when the result is a specific hit / no hit determination result (for example, per figure), and the specific operation is It is an operation including an operation of changing the state from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, the production means is capable of at least executing a first production (for example, a general production), and the first production is , The starting area is an effect that includes at least an effect (for example, electric-chu-opening notification effect) performed while the specific operation is being executed, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect). Time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds) is the effect that is performed, the first effect time of the symbol A game table characterized in that the time may be shorter than the variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). ] Was explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect producing means may be, for example, effect producing means.

  Further, the specific operation may be an operation in which the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize when the starting area is in the easy entry state. May be an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize before changing the state from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is the easily-accessible state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, "the hit determination means is one that is easier to derive the specific hit determination result in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state, and the first effect is A game console characterized in that the electric power support state is an effect that is more likely to be executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 185). ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the symbol display means often performs variable display of the symbol for a long time in the electric power support state than in the non-electric power support state (Fig. 183 (c)). Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the first effect is an enterable notification effect that notifies that the game ball can enter the starting area when the result of the hit determination is a specific hit determination result (for example, FIG. A gaming machine characterized by being at least an effect including at least "a balloon that is open for electric power" shown in 187 (K). ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a second hit / miss judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second hit / miss judgment (for example, hit / miss judgment of a special figure) and the result of the second hit / miss judgment are a big hit. In the case of the hit determination result of, the control state, at least game control means capable of transition from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state (for example, CPU304 of the main control unit 300), and the effect means, It is possible to execute at least a second effect related to the result of the second hit determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice) of a special figure), and the second effect is the first effect. A gaming machine, which is an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to be visually recognized during a part or all of the period during execution. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, at least the start region (for example, electric power tube) in which the state can be changed between the easy entry state (for example, the open state) and the difficult entry state (for example, the closed state), and the determination of whether or not the entry is successful (for example, , Winning / non-judgment of general figure) can be executed at least, and at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned winning / judgment determination can be displayed after performing variable display of the symbols with the winning / non-judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main controller 300) A game table provided with a symbol display means (for example, a public figure display device 210) and a production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of performing at least an effect, and the starting area is the hit or hit. It is possible to perform at least a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) when the result of the determination is a specific hit-or-miss determination result (for example, per figure). , An operation including an operation of changing the state from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, wherein the rendering means is capable of at least executing a first rendering (for example, a universal rendering), The effect is an effect that includes at least one effect of an effect during change, an effect during determination, and an effect during operation, and the effect during change is an effect executed during the symbol change display (for example, in FIG. 186). (D) during the period), and the confirmed effect is an effect that is executed during the display of the stop symbol by the symbol display means (for example, during the period (G) shown in FIG. 186). Yes, the in-motion effect is an effect (for example, an effect in the period (h) shown in FIG. 186) shown in FIG. 186 while the starting area is executing the specific operation, and the effect means is the first effector. Different from directing At least a second big effect (for example, special jackpot jackpot notice effect (including pre-reading notice)) can be executed, and the effect means can perform at least the first effect during the execution of the second effect. It can be started (for example, FIGS. 189 (SI) to (SE)), and the production means can start at least the first production even when the second production is not being executed. (For example, FIGS. 187 (a) to (c)), than the effect time of the first effect (for example, the first time (20.6 seconds)) started during the second effect non-execution. A gaming machine characterized in that the production time of the first production (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds)) started during execution of the second production is likely to be shorter. ] Was explained.

  Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. May be Further, the effect producing means may be, for example, effect producing means.

  The second effect may be an effect that is started every predetermined time, or may be an effect that is started during the full game state. Further, it may be an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation such as a right-hand hit or a button press. Further, it may be an effect that prompts the user to press each of the plurality of buttons. For example, it may be an effect of notifying the timing of button press for each button, an effect of notifying a button press acceptance period, or an effect of notifying a button press acceptance remaining period. Good.

  In addition, “a second hit / miss judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second hit / miss judgment (for example, hit / miss judgment of a special figure) and the result of the second hit / miss judgment are a big hit. In the case of the hit determination result, the control state is provided with at least game control means capable of shifting from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the second effect. Is a production (for example, a super reach production shown in FIG. 189) including at least a production related to the result of the second hit determination, the gaming table. In addition, "If the result of the second hit determination is a jackpot judgment result of the second, the result of the second hit determination is a jackpot judgment result of It is an effect including an effect to be announced in advance (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 189), and the second effect is the second effect even if the result of the second hit determination is not a jackpot hit determination result. (2) A gaming machine characterized in that it is also an effect including an effect of giving a notice as if the result of the hit determination is a hit determination result of a big hit (so-called false big hit announcement effect). ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “another starting area different from the starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230) and one of the symbol displaying means as a symbol displaying means, a first symbol displaying means (for example, a first symbol displaying means). 1 special symbol display device 212), as one symbol display means of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214), and the first symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is provided, and the another starting area does not change the easiness of entering the game ball, and the symbol display control means is The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first suspension condition is satisfied. One hold control less It is executable, and the symbol display control means can execute at least a second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The first holding condition is a requirement that at least includes that the game ball has entered the different starting area, and the second holding condition is a requirement that the game ball is the starting area. Is a requirement that includes at least entering the, the second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot advance notice effect against the variation) A gaming table characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The second effect referred to here may be an effect of variable display of a decorative symbol (for example, super reach effect) that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variable display.

  Further, "the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment after performing the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the hit determination of the big hit after performing the symbol variation display, The case where the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol is more advantageous to the player as the jackpot control state than the case where the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A gaming table having a configuration (for example, FIG. 171 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State) is at least transferable, the game control means, when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, a 15R special jackpot game state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state changing operation (for example, opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation in which the number of releases is large or an operation in which the opening time is long may be easily performed.

  In addition, "the symbol display control means is capable of at least executing control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digestion condition is satisfied, and the symbol display control The means is capable of at least executing a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold extinguishing condition is satisfied, and the condition for satisfying the second hold extinguishing condition is , Is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, the requirements for the satisfaction of the first holding digestion condition, that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended Is a requirement that includes at least, the requirement to satisfy the first holding digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, the effect display means, the second Judgment of At least a pre-reading notice effect related to the result of (1) (for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. , The effect display means, at least during the interrupt symbol variation display, it is possible to continue the continuous notice effect, the interrupt symbol variation display, the second holding digestion condition during the continuous notice effect It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is during the first effect execution. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect (for example, electric-chu-opening notification effect) in part or all of the period. FIG 177 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  The game table here is a game table of a so-called special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetching notice effect.

  In addition, "the second effect is an effect capable of making at least a part of the first effect difficult to visually recognize in a part or the whole period during the execution of the first effect. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type pachinko machine. FIG. 196 is a front view of an enclosed-type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 196, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launch means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launch means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown at 53 are not provided.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game table such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 197 to 233 are used only for the description of the fifth embodiment in principle, and the description of the present embodiment will be given even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 197 to 233 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 197 to 233, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as in the first to fourth embodiments. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

<Type of design>
First, with reference to FIG. 197, the special display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment are stopped and displayed. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described.

  The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, the figure (b) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), five kinds of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing E" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 1, and the white outline in the figure is shown. The black circles show the locations of the turned off segments, and the black areas show the places of the illuminated segments. Further, FIG. (B) shows four types of special symbols from “special symbol a” to “special symbol d” as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display of special symbol 2, and white in the diagram. The open portions indicate the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  As shown in (a) of the same figure, "special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state. The state of shifting to the time saving state is referred to as the high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as the low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R big jack symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  “Special map C” is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. "Special drawing D" is a small hit pattern, if the gaming state before winning the small hit is the special drawing high-accuracy normal drawing high-accuracy state (after winning the small win) If it is a certain state and the gaming state before winning the small hit is the special figure low certainty general figure high certainty state (after winning the small hit), it is the special figure low certainty general figure high certainty state. In addition, “special figure E” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the amount of profit to be given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B, the "special map a" is a 16R special jackpot pattern and the "special map b" is an 8R special jackpot pattern, both of which are in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. Also, "special map c" is a 8R big hit symbol, which is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. Further, the "special figure d" is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the amount of profit to be given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched.

  For example, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", the 15R big jackpot of "Special drawing B", the 8R special jackpot of "Special drawing b", or the 8R big jackpot of "Special drawing c", the symbol display area Stop the pattern combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", etc.) in which three identical decorative patterns corresponding to the 15R jackpot or the 8R jackpot are arranged in 208a to 208c. indicate. In the case of notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" or the 16R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns is lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") Or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a small hit of "special drawing D" or a sudden probability change of "special drawing C" is notified, a symbol combination other than the above symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 1-decoration") is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "2-decoration 3" and "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the deviation between the "special drawing E" and the "special drawing d", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 7B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 197 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black-painted part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Another Example of Display Related to Operation of Operation Means by Display Means>
Next, another example will be described in which the display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) performs a display related to the operation of the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as another example, another example of the operation means image display for performing display related to the operation of the operation means by the same processing as the operation means image display processing described in the first embodiment will be described.

<Example 20 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twentieth embodiment in chronological order. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f are provided, for example, above the right end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is provided. This special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e displays the result of winning or losing the special figure 1 variation game, and during the special figure 1 variation game (during variation of special figure 1), it is circular as the fourth symbol 217 of special figure 1. Blinks the figure. Special figure 2 4th symbol display territory 208f is the territory which displays the hit result of special figure 2 fluctuation game, during special figure 2 fluctuation game (during fluctuation of special figure 2) as the 4th symbol 218 of special figure 2 Blinks the triangular figure. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as an example of the variation game, a case of performing the special figure 1 variation game will be described as an example, but the same can be performed with the special figure 2 variation game.

  For example, a reserved display area 700 is provided below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the reserved display area 700 is secured as a variable icon display area 702. Here, hold icons PI1 and PI2 indicating that there are two hold of Toku-zu 1 are displayed. In the following description, the case where one reserved display area 700 is provided is shown as an example. However, as shown in FIG. 172, the special figure 1 reserved display area 281 and the special figure 2 reserved display area 282 may be provided separately. Good.

  At the timing shown in the same figure (b), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted, the hold of special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and symbol variation display is started on the first special figure display device 212. Then, the decorative pattern display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1. In the variable icon display area 702, the consumed hold is displayed as a change icon CI, and in the hold display area 700, a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, after the variation display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 (or the second special symbol display device 214) is started, the blinking display of the fourth symbol 217 and the reduction of the hold icons PI1 and PI2 are performed. It is started in the order of animation and variable display of decorative patterns. The order of the start timing of the blinking display of the fourth symbol, the decrease animation (display) of the hold icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the above, and the display may be started in any order. The display may be started, and the order of these display start timings is the same in the following embodiments.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7C, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the effect display 704 (for example, the character display of the balloon "Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun") is displayed in the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. And an image corresponding to the notice effect for displaying the character image (princess)) are displayed. Here, the effect display 704 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the variable display of the decorative symbols, but a part of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be visually recognized by the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (this operation image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136) In the example, an image simulating the chance button is displayed on the front surface of the decorative pattern (the front surface of the layer (player side)) and the rear surface of the effect display 704.

  In addition, at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first time for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1. The elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Further, the character image (lord) is displayed on the front surface of the decorative pattern at substantially the same timing as these displays.

  This timing is at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end portion to the right end portion) is filled with the first color. However, a part of the effect display 704 (here, the character display of the balloon "Yoshimune is Yatsushiro Shogun.") Is displayed at the timing of FIG. 7C and a part of the first operation means image BG1 and the first operation means image BG1. A part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the part including the right end portion) is hidden, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (invisible).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is preferentially overlapped (that is, earlier in time and The first display is hidden by the second display (displayed as a layer on the front) (a part of the effect display 704), and is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). ), The visibility of the first display is lower. Here, the first display in the present embodiment means a display in which the display mode of the first display can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. Further, the establishment of the change condition may be, for example, when the time from the start of the display of the first display has elapsed, or the operation of a predetermined operation means (one or more operations or long press). When you say something. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once or plural times during the display period of the first display. For example, if the change condition is that a time elapses, for example, every one second from the start of the display of the first display, and this is satisfied multiple times, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed every one second. Aspect changes. Specifically, as described later, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image in which the filled portion of the first color decreases (or increases, for example, every 1 second) over time (for example, every 1 second). Is displayed. The second display may not be displayed with priority over the first display in terms of time.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. 16 indicate a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ((d) of the same figure). ing. As described above, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a meter display, and the scale (filled portion) of the meter (also referred to as a gauge. The same applies hereinafter) corresponds to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display images that are gradually decreasing. Then, even during the period in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases, the effect display 704 continues to be displayed, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the first display (the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is hidden by the second display (a part of the effect display 704), so that it is not hidden by the second display ((j) in the figure). Even if the visibility is lower than that in the above, the display mode of the first display (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is continuously changed (display in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases). ing. In this example, the display mode and display position of the effect display 704 do not change with the passage of time.

  The timings shown in (g) to (i) of the same figure show a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the time shown in (f) of the figure. At these timings, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases is displayed (decreased display), but the scale of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704 and the scale of the meter decreases. The display mode of the display is made difficult (invisible) by the player. In other words, the reduced display of the scale is continued even during the period when the scale of the meter is hidden by the effect display 704.

  It should be noted that the second display (the effect display 704, which is a notice here) overlaps (is hidden by the effect display 704) and thus becomes non-display, and the first display becomes invisible to the player (here Then, if there is an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases), do not actually draw the first display (that is, the image that is not displayed) of the invisible part. You may control. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load of the drawing process. This is the same in all the examples of the present specification. It should be noted that the first display of the portion that is invisible (hidden) to the player may be drawn.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is hidden before (just before) the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends. As a result, before the end of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the entire portion including the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 becomes visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the second display (the effect display 704 in this case) is superimposed on the area including the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 to display the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter). The start position of the reduced display of the scale) and the display mode of the reduced display may be made difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  As described above, in FIGS. 8D to 8J, an example of the case where the button operation is not performed during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is shown, but the button operation is performed during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. A display example in this case is shown below.

  (G-1) of the same figure is a display example when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in (g) of the same figure. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the previously displayed effect display (first An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, in this example, the character display of "Chance!"), Which is different from the image corresponding to the notice effect) 704, is a decorative pattern. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is reduced in visibility for the player due to the overlap of the effect display 704 (the image corresponding to the first notice effect). (It is difficult for the player to see).

  It should be noted that, in this example, the case where it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the effect display 704 which is an image corresponding to the notice effect is explained, but another effect image or another image Therefore, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be difficult to be visually recognized, and this is the same in the following examples.

<Example 21 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-first embodiment in time series.

  Although the timings shown in FIGS. 198 (b) to 198 (e) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 198 (b) to 198 (e), in the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is the chance button. The image corresponding to the first operation of 136 is set, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image displaying the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed compared to the timing of FIG. 199 (e). At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and the downward arrow are displayed in a part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). On the other hand, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that displays the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In this example, while the visibility of the image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is gradually reduced is reduced (while making it difficult for the player to see), part of the effect display 704 (second operation) With the means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow), an effect of promoting the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  The second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (inside the balloon here). Further, the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow are hidden when the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ends, and the timing thereof is the first time of the chance button 136. It may be set to the same timing as the timing of ending the operation acceptance period (the timing of non-display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1), or may be set to a timing earlier than that. It may be later timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is shorter than the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, but the times may be the same period. May be for a long period.

  The timings shown in (g) to (j) of the same figure are the same as those of the timings shown in (g) to (j) of FIG.

  199 (b) to (j) show an example where the button operation is not performed during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, but the button operation is performed during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. A display example is shown below.

  (G-1) of the same figure is a display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (g) of the same figure. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the previously displayed effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect other than the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect 704 (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, which is the character display of "Chance!" In this example) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (the image corresponding to the first notice effect). Moreover, a part of the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and a kind of special jackpot advance notice effect "Gekiatsu! Is displayed.

  (G-2) of the figure is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (g) of the figure. At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the previously displayed effect display ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect other than the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect 704 (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, which is the character display of "Chance!" In this example) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect is difficult to be visually recognized by the player due to the effect display (image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704. In this example, the display mode of the effect display 704 is not changed, and the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow is continued. In this case, the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow may prompt the third operation of the chance button 136, and accordingly, the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In this case, the effect display 704 shown in FIG. Further, in practice, the third operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted (regulated).

  (G-3) of the figure is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (g) of the figure. At this timing, a part of the effect display 704 is changed based on the second operation of the chance button 136. Specifically, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and the character "Gekiatsu!" Is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues, and a part of the effect display 704 allows the player to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. It's difficult. In this case, an image in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases is actually displayed.

  The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is another display example when the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in (e) of the figure. At this timing, based on the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display previously displayed ( An image 730 corresponding to the notice effect other than the image 704 corresponding to the first notice effect 704 (an image corresponding to the second notice effect, which is the character display of "Chance!" In this example) Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in (f-1), a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed in a part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). There is.

  In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, the effect display (the image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect respectively correspond to the chance button 136. An image corresponding to the operation may be displayed, or either one of the images may be displayed. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation mode is not accepted, and both the effect display (the image corresponding to the first notice effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second notice effect are displayed. It may not be changed.

<Example 22 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-second embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is an image corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Is displayed, and the second operation means image BG2 is an image corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 198 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 198 (b).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , Effect display 704 (for example, a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, an image of the character "long press!", And a character image (princess) are displayed in the balloon. The image corresponding to the notice effect) is being displayed. In this example, as the second operation of the chance button 136, a display prompting that the chance button 136 is pressed and held is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (this operation image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136) In the example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed on the front surface of the decorative pattern and the rear surface of the effect display 704.

  A first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 is displayed in the first color (blue in this example). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Further, the character image (lord) is displayed on the front surface of the decorative pattern at substantially the same timing as these displays.

  At this timing, at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, in reality, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end portion to the right end portion) is painted in the first color. , A part of the effect display 704 (here, an image of a balloon displaying the second operation means image BG2), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 ( Here, the portion including the right end portion) is hidden, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (invisible)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7E is the second operation (long operation) of the chance button 136 when a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the acceptance period) has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. It shows the state in which the push operation) has started. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) is gradually reduced is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during that period. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the notification image TG1. Further, in this example, the effect display 704 is changed with the start of the second operation (long-press operation) of the chance button 136. Specifically, the display position of the effect display 704 does not change, but the display mode of the effect display 704 (here, the fill color of the second operation means image BG2) is changed from the first color (for example, white) to the second color. The color (for example, red) is changed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the second operation (long-pressing operation) is continuing. Is shown. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) is gradually reduced is displayed, and the effect display 704 continues to be displayed during that period. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the notification image TG1. In addition, the effect display 704 keeps the state (filling with the second color) after the display mode is changed, and notifies that the second operation (long-press operation) is continuing. In this way, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained while the second operation (long-press operation) continues, but the second operation (long-press operation) continues. The color may be returned to the original first color even during the period of time. Further, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is the same as the display mode before (or immediately before) being interrupted even when the player interrupts the second operation (long-press operation). Alternatively, when the player interrupts the second operation (long-press operation), the original color may be restored.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the (f) of the figure. At these timings, an image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases is displayed, but the scale (filled portion) of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704. , It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the reduced display of the meter. In this case, control may be performed so that an image whose scale is gradually reduced is not actually drawn. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load of the drawing process. In addition, the effect display 704 keeps the state (filling with the second color) after the display mode is changed, and notifies that the second operation (long-press operation) is continuing. Further, in the above case, control may be performed so as to draw an image in which the scale is gradually reduced.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from the (f) of the figure. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 is erased based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, that the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds) has elapsed). The character "Gekiatsu!" Is displayed.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In the present embodiment, the display of the effect display 704 continues even at the end of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (after the end), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) is set. Is difficult for the player to see.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (k), the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the character image (donor) are hidden (erased), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed to the player. It is visible. However, even in this case, the display of the effect display 704 is continued, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  FIG. 7E-1 is another display example at the timing of FIG. At this timing, as the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136 is started, the display mode (here, the fill color) of the effect display 704 is changed from the first color (for example, white). Although the color is changed to the second color (for example, red), the second operation of the chance button 136 is determined to be the first operation of the chance button 136 for control, and corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136. It shows a state in which the notice production has started. That is, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the notice effect image 730 (here, the character “chance”) corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. . Even in this case, part of the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704.

  (H-1) of the figure is another display example at the timing of (h) of the figure. At this timing, the character “Gekiatsutsuyo!” Displayed based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, that the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds) has elapsed). At approximately the same timing as the display, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (here, the character “chance” is displayed). ) Is displayed.

  At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, when the chance button 136 is further operated (third operation (long press, press for a period shorter than long press, etc.)), the same figure (e-1). Alternatively, the display shown in (h-1) of the figure may be performed, or if the chance button 136 is further operated (third operation) at the timing shown in (j) of the figure. The display shown in Fig. (E-1) or (h-1) may be performed.

<Example 23 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-third embodiment in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 198 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 198 (b).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image that imitates a chance button), a first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a character image (donor) are displayed in front of the decorative design. At this timing, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end portion to the right end portion) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the state in which the prefetching notice effect for changing the hold icon PI1 has started during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. As an example, the look-ahead notice effect of the present embodiment is to perform effect display (animation display) 704 by animation. The animation display 704, for example, executes a display start animation in which a star connected to a balloon starts to be displayed from above the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, descends toward the hold display area 700, and displays a star near the hold icon PI1. Is moved away from the balloon and the hold icon PI1 is changed or not changed, and the moving animation is executed in which only the balloon rises again and the deletion animation is deleted.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than the reception period of 6 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter that is TG1 is gradually decreasing. Further, the animation display 704 continues, and an image in which balloons and stars are descending is displayed.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the state of (e) of the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. It shows an image in which the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing. Further, the animation display 704 continues, and while the balloon and the star are descending, they overlap the front surfaces of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (to the player. It is difficult to see). Further, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than the reception period of 6 seconds) has elapsed from the state of (f) of the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. It shows an image in which the scale (filled part) of the meter is gradually decreasing. Further, the animation display 704 continues, and the stars and balloons move from right to left along with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, while the first operation means image BG1 and the front of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Overlap. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Further, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving second display (here, the animation display 704) makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1). ing. In addition, the position where the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered (the position where it is difficult for the player to see) due to the moving second display (here, animation display 704) has elapsed. Change with. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image that gradually decreases even during a period in which a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the animation display 704 and is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timings (i) to (l) in the figure show the state where the change display of the hold icon PI1 has succeeded by the animation display 704. That is, when the change display of the hold icon is successful, the balloon and the star approach the hold display area 700 ((i) in the same figure), the star leaves the balloon ((j) in the same figure), and the hold icon PI1 indicated by a white circle. And a star are combined to display a hold icon PI1 ′ in which the display mode is changed (change display is successful) and the balloon is raised ((k) in the figure), and the balloon is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display area 208. Is deleted ((l) in the figure), the animation display 704 is executed.

  (I-1) to (j-1) of the figure are states after the timing shown in (g) of the figure, and show a state in which the change display of the hold icon has failed. That is, when the display of the change of the hold icon fails, even if the star and the balloon come close to the hold display area 700, the star does not leave the balloon ((i-1) in the figure) and moves to the left as it is, for example. Then, the animation display 704 that moves away from the hold icon PI is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon fails are described as different animation displays. However, the same animation display is executed, and as a result, the hold display is performed. The change display may be successful when only the display mode of the icon is changed, or the change display may be failed when only the display mode of the hold icon is not changed. Also, the execution time of the animation display executed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the execution time of the animation display executed when it fails may be the same period (length). May be different, such as a longer period.

  The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is a state after the timing shown in (e) of the figure, and shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the chance button 136. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, The character display “Chance!” Is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Also in this case, the animation display 704 (second display) covers a part of the image 730 (first display) corresponding to the notice effect, which makes it difficult for the player to view.

<Example 24 of displaying operation means image>
202 to 154 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the twenty-fourth embodiment in time series. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments, an example of the operation means image display in the case of performing the normal operation means image display will be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 202 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 ends, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. "Decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", which is a combination of symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of the special figure 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 2B, one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the hold of the special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Is started, and the variable display of the decorative design of special figure 1 is started on the decorative design display device 208. In the hold display area 700, the consumed hold is displayed as a change icon CI in the change icon display area 702, and a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  Further, at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the first color (this In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and all (from the left end portion to the right end portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds, which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is before the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the acceptance period of 6 seconds) has elapsed (for example, the acceptance period of 6 seconds has elapsed). In the state of (before) (after the timing of (d) in the same figure), the state where the chance button 136 is operated is shown. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, The character display "Chance!" And the character image (customer) are displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the notice effect is displayed will be described as an example, but another effect display may be used.

  The timings shown in (f) and (g) of FIG. 16 are states in which, when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the production according to the result of winning / disapproval determination, the change time, and the notice production which has been won is started. , (F) and (g) show an example of reach display in variable display of decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in the figure (h) is the effect start state of the super reach, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is changed to the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display is made in the upper right part of the display area (display of the decorative pattern is reduced). Further, the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). It should be noted that the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, the erasing timing of the variable icon CI, the white background timing, and the reduced display timing of the decorative pattern may be any one when they are sequentially executed. They may be executed in order. Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously.

  At the timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure, for example, a swordsman reach production in which a swordsman character is confronted with a sword is started to be executed as a super reach production. Here, as an example, after a swordsman character and the characters “VS swordsman” are displayed ((i) in the figure), a confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed ((j) in the figure).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9 (k), the confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is once deleted, and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the chance button). Is displayed). In addition, at a substantially same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2, a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the first color (this In the example, it is displayed in blue below the second operation means image BG2. This timing is immediately before the start of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136, and all of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. There is. The fill color of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be a second color (for example, white) different from the first color. Furthermore, at this timing, for example, an image prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2 (for example, the character "Press the button to stop the spirit meter!"). Further, the first state notification image SG1 is displayed, for example, at the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first state notification image SG1 is a meter display, and is a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The change condition is satisfied, for example, when a time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, or when a predetermined operation means has been operated (one or more operations or long press). Etc. Further, the change condition may be satisfied once or plural times during the display period of the first display. For example, if the changing condition is, for example, a time period of 1 second elapses from the start of displaying the first state notification image SG1 and this is satisfied a plurality of times, the first state notification image SG1 is displayed every 1 second. The display mode changes to. Specifically, as described later, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases (or decreases) with the lapse of time (eg, every 1 second). Further, when the first state notification image SG1 changes the display mode with the passage of time, the change of the display mode is stopped in response to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during the change period of the display mode. It may be (or ended). For example, in the first state notification image SG1 of the present embodiment, the scales (filled portions) of a plurality of stages (for example, 10 stages) gradually increase from the bottom (the scale is displayed to increase) in the first state notification image SG1. This is a meter that reaches the upper stage, and is an image for ending (or stopping) the increase display of the scale when the chance button 136 is operated during the increase display of the scale. Here, with the lapse of time, the first state notification image SG1 is not filled with any of the stages or has the first color (white or the like) as the initial state at the timing shown in FIG. The whole is displayed in a filled state.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the same display as in the (k) of the figure, but the time has elapsed from the timing shown in the (k) of the figure and the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has started. Shows.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure shows a state in which time has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is gradually filled with the second color different from the first color gradually from the bottom, and the filled portion gradually increases. Display the image to go. At this time, the fill color (second color) of the first state notification image SG1 changes stepwise, but may be the same color.

  The timing shown in (n) of the figure shows a state in which more time has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image to go. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timing shown in (o) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 138 is operated after a lapse of time from the state of (n) in the figure. At this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 has reached the uppermost stage is displayed, and the characters "Mix MAX" are displayed above the first state notification image SG1. Also, based on the operation of the chance button 136, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the characters "Press the button, stop the spirit meter!" Alternatively, in front of these images), an image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the characters “Death Killing!” And the character image (lord)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) gradually decreases after reaching the uppermost stage with the lapse of time, and the scale increases during the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Display and decrease display are repeated. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated, the change (increase / decrease) in the display mode of the scale is stopped, and a different effect is executed depending on the position of the scale.

  That is, the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is the timing when the player reaches the uppermost stage in anticipation of the increase in the scale of the first state notification image SG1 in which the display mode changes (the scale increases) over time. By operating the chance button 136, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is stopped at the uppermost stage, and a notice effect (“hot” effect) advantageous to the player is being executed. .

  In addition, the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be previously determined by the effect lottery, regardless of the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In this case, the scale stops at a predetermined position, triggered by the player operating the chance button 136.

  Further, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be previously determined by the effect lottery. That is, the scale increases or decreases with the lapse of time, but during the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the upper limit is the position (e.g., 8th row) that is predetermined by the effect lottery, and the uppermost row may not be reached. Good. Further, in this case, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale may be determined at the timing when the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the operation unit image display after FIG. 202 (o) in time series. At the timing shown in FIG. 203 (p), the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, the first state display image SG1, and the notice effect image are erased, and the timing shown in FIG. 202 (j) is shown. The confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character after the timing is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIGS. 203 (q) (r) displays a scene in which the character (donor) has won the swordsman character, and in FIG. 203 (r), a big hit (probable variation big hit) symbol is displayed as a reduced display of the decorative symbol. The shake variation display of the combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 3 (t) is a big hit to the design display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative design display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7") of the probability variation big hit) is shaken and changed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (w), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the character of "probably strange jackpot" for notifying the start of the jackpot is displayed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 202 to 203, the display example when the chance button 136 is operated in the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. 202 (k) and thereafter) has been described.

  FIG. 204 shows a display example when the chance button 136 is not operated in the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. 202 (k) and thereafter).

  The timing shown in FIG. 204 (k) shows the same state as the timing in FIG. 202 (k).

  The timing shown in FIG. 204 (l) shows a state in which time has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases from the bottom is displayed.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure shows a state in which more time has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display the image to go. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the uppermost stage is displayed.

  The timings shown in (n) and (o) of the figure are images in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases when time has elapsed from the state of (m) of the figure. Is displayed. Further, after the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) reaches the uppermost stage, an image that gradually decreases is displayed.

  Further, at the timing shown in (p) of the figure, when the time has elapsed from the state of (o) in the figure, the scale (painted portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 disappears, and the acceptance period of the chance button 136 becomes longer. It shows the state that has passed. At this timing, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) again increases is displayed.

  At the timing shown in (q) of the figure, since the operation was not performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white and the second operation means is used. The image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are deleted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 203 (r), as in the case of FIG. 203 (p), the confrontation scene between the player and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 202 (j) is displayed.

  As described above, during the period from the start to the end of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 ((k) to (p) in the same figure), when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the first state notification is issued. The scale of the image SG1 (meter) is repeatedly increased and decreased.

  FIG. 205 shows another example of the notice effect displayed at the timing of FIG. 202 (o).

  FIG. 205 (o-1) shows that while the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 is on the way to rising before reaching the uppermost stage (for example, on the 10th stage), or on the way to descending after reaching the uppermost stage. This is an example of the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at a timing when the upper stage (for example, the eighth stage) is reached. In this case, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display “strong slashing!” And the character image (lord)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 205 (o-2) shows the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the middle stage (for example, the fourth stage) is reached while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is rising or falling. This is an example. In this case, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display “slash!” And the character image (lord)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 205 (o-3) shows a notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at a timing when the lower stage (for example, the first stage) is reached while the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is rising or falling. This is an example. In this case, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display “weak slashing!” And the character image (lord)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this way, the notice effect may be changed according to the size of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated. In this example, when the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is large, a notice effect having a high degree of advantage for the player is displayed, and when the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is small, the player is notified of it. The notice production with low advantage is displayed. However, not limited to this, the same effect may be performed regardless of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  FIG. 206 is an example of displaying a deviation in the super reach effect, and is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 202 (o) in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 206 (p) and (q) display a scene where the character (lord) lost to the swordsman character as a confrontation scene between the lord and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 202 (j). In FIG. 206 (q), a fluctuation variation display of a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) that is out of alignment with the reduced display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (r) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 9 (s) is shifted to the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which the symbol combination ((for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7") is displayed in a swinging manner. Note that in the figure (s), since it is out of alignment, the reserved display area 700 is re-displayed. , The hold icon PI1 indicating the remaining number of holds and the change icon CI of the change game are displayed again.

  At the timing shown in (t) of the figure, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. As a result, since the variation game ends, a round figure is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e in preparation for the next start of the special figure 1 variation game.

  The period shown in the same figure (u) to the same figure (w) has shown the state after the same figure (t) until the next special figure 1 fluctuation game starts. During this period, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon CI indicating the hold that has been consumed by the special figure 1 variable game up to the same figure (t) is executed. That is, in this example, after the decorative symbol shown in (t) of FIG. 16 is stopped and displayed, the animation of erasing the variable icon CI indicating the digested hold is executed.

<Example 25 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 207 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-fifth embodiment in time series. The timing shown in (A) of the figure is a timing corresponding to FIG. 202 (k), and the timing shown in (D) of the figure is a timing corresponding to FIG. 202 (l). That is, in this embodiment, before the start of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (between FIG. 202 (k) and FIG. 202 (l)). It is a display example in the case of performing the effect display 704 during a period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows a state in which the effect display 704 is being performed before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. This effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and a band-shaped image of the character (lord) is displayed (cut in) in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, by the second display (effect display 704), at least a part of the first display (a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and the “button” are displayed. The part of the character "Press to stop the spirit meter!" Is less visible than before the effect display 704 is displayed ((A) in the figure). As described above, according to the present embodiment, by being covered by the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and “Please push the button to stop the spirit meter. A part of the character "!" Is difficult for the player to see.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C) of the figure, the effect display 704 displayed in (B) of the figure is hidden (erased), and as shown in (D) of the figure, the operation of the chance button 136 is changed. The display indicating the start of the reception period continues.

  The display position of the effect display 704 in the present embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 7B, but is a position where at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult to view (cover). If so, it may cover the vicinity of the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1, or may cover the vicinity of the lowermost stage. Further, it may cover the entire first state notification image SG1.

  The figure (B-1) to the figure (B-4) are other display examples of the effect display 704 shown in the figure (B).

  As shown in (B-1) of the same figure, the effect display 704 allows the player to visually recognize the first state notification image SG1 (meter) and part of the characters "Press the button to stop the spirit meter!" Although it is difficult, the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f may not be visually difficult. That is, the effect display 704 is in front of the first state notification image SG1 and the characters "Press the button to stop the psyche meter!", And is a reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e and the special symbol. It is displayed on the rear surface side of FIG. 2 fourth symbol display area 208f.

  Further, as shown in (B-2) of the figure, the effect display 704 makes it difficult to visually recognize the first state notification image SG1, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. May be.

  Further, as shown in (B-3) of the figure, the effect display 704 is an image in which only a part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to be visually recognized (here, a character having a placard called “Gekiatsu”). (Image of (lord)) may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in (B-4) of the same figure, the effect display 704 moves so as to make the entire (or substantially the entire) first state notification image SG1 difficult to be visible or visible with the passage of time. In this example, in the effect display 704, an image in which the character “Gekiatsu” is displayed on the background image having substantially the same area as the entire first state notification image SG1 is displayed. An animation of entering (cut-in) from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 and sliding left and right.

<Example 26 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-sixth embodiment in chronological order. In the present embodiment, a display example in which the effect display 704 is performed during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (the period after FIG. 202 (l)) in the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment. is there.

  The timing shown in FIG. 20A is the timing corresponding to FIG. 202I, and the timing shown in FIG. 20B is the timing corresponding to FIG.

  The timing shown in (C) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is being performed at the timing corresponding to (n) of FIG. This effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and an image of the character (lord) is displayed in a strip shape (cut-in) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the spirit meter!" The visibility is lower than that before the display 704 is displayed ((A) and (B) in the same figure). On the other hand, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has not deteriorated in visibility (is visible to the player), and the chance An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the button 136.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which a further time has elapsed (the acceptance period has advanced) from the timing shown in (C) of the figure, and the effect display 704 is continued. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) becomes smaller than in the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1, a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the spirit meter!" The change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled-in portion gradually decreases) continues to be visually recognized by the player while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  After that, as shown in (E) of the figure, the effect display 704 displayed in (C) and (D) of the figure is hidden (erased). FIGS. 4F and 4G are the same as the states shown in FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, since the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect display 704 during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the player operates the chance button 136 depending on the display position of the effect display 704. It becomes difficult to understand when to do it. Since the player may refrain from the operation when the operation timing is difficult to understand, the player may be able to guide the operation timing of the chance button 136 by the effect display 704. For example, in the case where the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is at the lower level, operating the chance button 136 is unlikely to give an advantageous result to the player (the spirit meter does not sufficiently accumulate), By hiding the lower part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) in the effect display 704, it may be difficult for the player to operate the chance button 136. By doing so, it may be possible to guide the operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is in the upper stage, it is difficult for the player to understand the optimal timing while trying to operate the chance button 136, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

  Note that the display examples of the effect display 704 shown in FIGS. 207 (B-1) to (B-4) can also be applied to the same drawings (C) and (D) of this embodiment.

<Example 27 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the twenty-seventh embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, during the super reach of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (during the period after (j) of FIG. 202), as the effect display 704, the general / universal figure fluctuation display and the general / universal figure fluctuation display are accepted or rejected. The notice effect is displayed based on the determination.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) are timings corresponding to FIG. 202 (j), and the general figure fluctuation display is performed during the super reach production (while the confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed). Has been started, and the effect accompanying the general-purpose variation display has been started. Specifically, the effect display 704 at this timing is, for example, a display start animation of a character (Chibihime) and Chibihime roulette (display of a character (Chibihime), Chibihime roulette, and “◎. This is an effect in which the animation of displaying a balloon of "Den Chu open when stopped at" is executed (FIGS. (A) and (B)), and the decorative pattern variable display of the general figure is started (FIG. (C)).

  (D) to (G) of the figure show the same timing as that of (k) to (m) of FIG. 202, and although the explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, it is displayed after (D) of the same figure. In the front of the first state notification image SG1, the effect display 704 (decorative variable display of the general figure) continues, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is the effect display. 704 makes it difficult for the player to see.

  202 (n) shows the same timing as FIG. 202 (n), and although the explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, the effect display 704 (of the normal figure) is displayed in front of the first state notification image SG1. The decoration pattern ◎ (stop display of the ordinary figure) is continued), and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704. .

  FIGS. (I) and (J) show the same timings as in FIGS. 202 (o) and (p), and the explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1. The display 704 (the display of the decoration pattern ◎ of the general map and the display of the balloon indicating that “Den Chu is open”) continues. Particularly, in FIG. 1I, at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIGS. (K) and (L) show the same timing as in FIGS. 202 (p) and (q), and the explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (decorative design ◎ (The stop display of (C)) continues (K in the same figure), and when the effect display 704 ends, the deletion animation of Chibihime roulette and the character (Chibihime) is executed ((L) in the same figure).

  (M) of the figure shows the same timing as that of (q) of FIG. 202 in a state where the effect display 704 is finished.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at least during the period in which the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed (from the start of the display of the first state notification image SG1 shown in FIGS. Until the display ends), at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the effect display 704 (it is difficult for the player to visually recognize). On the other hand, even during the period in which the effect display 704 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continuously visible to the player ((D) in the figure). ~ (H)).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any game character (such as during variable display of decorative symbols (before reach effect) or during big hit) ( For example, the second display (effect display 704) that reduces the visibility of the first display can be executed at the timing shown in FIG. 202 (c) or 202 (d).

  The timing shown in (H-1) of the figure is a state in which the effect display 704 (decorative display of a general figure x (stop display of a general figure) stop display) is continued. Further, the timing shown in (I-1) in the figure is the state after (H-1) in the figure, and when the effect display 704 is finished, the deletion animation of the Chibihime roulette wheel and the character (Chibihime) is executed. It In this way, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be different depending on whether or not the general / universal figure variation display is determined to be valid or incorrect. In addition, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be the same in the case of hitting the hit determination of the figure change display and in the case of not hitting the hit determination of the figure change display.

  The execution (including the execution time) of the effect display 704 based on the determination as to whether or not the universal figure variation display is possible is also applicable to the following embodiments.

<Example 28 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-eighth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, two kinds of effect display 704 (first effect display 7041 and second effect display 7041 and second operation) are displayed during the super reach (the period after FIG. 202 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment. The effect display 7042) is displayed. The first effect display 7041 is, for example, a general figure fluctuation display in Example 27 and a notice effect display based on the judgment on whether or not the general figure fluctuation display is valid. The second effect display 7042 is, for example, the fluctuation in Example 25. It is a display of a notice production regarding.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 20A to 20D are the same as those shown in FIGS. 209A to 209K, but in the present embodiment, the advance notice based on the general / universal figure variation display and the general / universal figure variation display is determined. The effect display (first effect display 7041) is executed, and at the timing of (D) in the figure, the first effect display 7041 (second display) is changed to the first state notification image SG1 (first display). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows the state after the timing shown in (D) of the figure. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues, and in addition to this, the display of the notice effect related to the change (second effect display 7042) has started. Then, the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter). Furthermore, at least a part of the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 are overlapped (superposed) and displayed. On the other hand, even in this state, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player. In addition, for the area that is displayed in duplicate, control may be performed such that only the meter is not drawn, only the second effect display 7092 is not drawn, or both are not drawn. In addition, control to draw all may be performed.

  In addition, in this example, the first effect display 7041 is displayed prior to the second effect display 7042 (on the front side), but the second effect display 7042 is prioritized over the first effect display 7041. It may be displayed (on the front). Also, the first effect display 7041 may be displayed with priority over the second effect display 7042 in time, or the second effect display 7042 may be displayed with priority over time in the first effect display 7041. May be displayed, or these may be displayed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7F shows the state after the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues to reduce the visibility of part of the first state notification image SG1, but the second effect display 7042 has ended.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (E) of FIG. 202, and shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started.

  The timings shown in (H) to (O) in the same figure are the same as the timings shown in (G) to (M) in FIG. 202, but at least during the period when the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed. ((H) to (K) in the figure), at least part of the first state notification image SG1 has low visibility due to the continuously displayed first effect display 7041 ( It is difficult for the player to see). On the other hand, even during the period in which the first effect display 7041 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player (the same figure). (H)-(J)).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any game character (such as during variable display of decorative symbols (before reach effect) or during big hit) ( For example, the second display (effect display 704) that reduces the visibility of the first display can be executed at the timing shown in FIG. 202 (c) or 202 (d).

<Example 29 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the twenty-ninth example in time series. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the thirtieth embodiment, an example of the operation means image display when the normal operation means image display is performed will be described. The present embodiment has a configuration in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated in response to repeated hits of the chance button 136.

  Similar to the timing shown in FIG. 202 (k), the timing shown in FIG. (A) shows, for example, the state before the start of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed, and above the second operation means image BG2. An image (for example, the characters “collect the spirit meter by hitting the button repeatedly!”) That prompts the user to operate (successively hit) the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (B) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first operation time image TG2. The state notification image SG1 is displayed, and an image (for example, the character “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C indicates a state in which a time has elapsed (for example, a time shorter than the reception period of 6 seconds) from the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (the reception period has advanced). Therefore, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases is displayed. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is increased (the spirit meter is accumulated) according to the number of times of successive hits. . In other words, in this case, the change condition is one or more operations of the chance button 136, which is satisfied a plurality of times. Specifically, as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases, the first state notification image SG1 displays an image in which the number of filled parts increases.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which a further time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the timing of (C) in the figure, and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is shown. An image is displayed in which the scales (filled parts) of are gradually decreasing. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is increased from the timing of FIG. 7C in accordance with the number of times of repeated hits. (Accumulated).

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state where the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated to the maximum (uppermost stage) within the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. . That is, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first state notification image SG1 has reached the uppermost stage is displayed, and the characters "Kai MAX" are displayed above the first state notification image SG1. The state notification image SG1 (meter) indicates that the scale (maximum) has been accumulated. Further, based on the fact that the first state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the characters of “continuous hit” are erased (or these On the front of the image), an image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the characters “Death Killing!” And the character image (lord)) is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 203F is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Note that, after (F) in the same figure, the operation means image display of "big hit" similar to that after (r) in Fig. 203 is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum position where the meters are accumulated may be determined in advance by lottery. That is, even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, it may not increase beyond the maximum value (for example, the eighth row) determined by the lottery. Even when the result of the hit / miss judgment is “out”, the effect may be increased to the maximum value (for example, the 10th row). Further, even when the result of the hit determination is “big hit”, an effect that does not increase to the maximum value (for example, 10th stage) (for example, increases only to 8th stage) may be performed.

  (D ') to (G') of the same figure are display examples in which the operation device image display of "off" is executed in the present embodiment.

  When the result of the win / fail judgment is “out”, and the effect “out” is selected in the effect lottery, as shown in (D ′) and (E ′) of the same figure, the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly struck within the period (until the end of the acceptance period), the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is not accumulated to the maximum (the scale does not change after it is accumulated halfway). indicate.

  At the timing shown in (F '), the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and at the timing shown in (G'), a scene of the confrontation between the lord and the swordsman character, Is showing the scene where he lost to the swordsman character.

  After this, the operation means image display of "off" is executed as in FIG. 206 (q) and thereafter.

<Example 30 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 212 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the thirtieth embodiment in chronological order. This figure shows a state corresponding to the timings shown in FIGS. 211 (A) to (C). That is, the present embodiment is a display example in which the effect display 704 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C are similar to the timings shown in FIGS. 211A to 211C. (D) of the figure shows a state in which a further time has elapsed from the (C) of the figure, in which the first state notification image SG1 further increases as the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136 increases. Shows. Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is gradually decreasing.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is being performed during the acceptance period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. This effect display 704 is, for example, a display of a notice effect related to the change, and a band-shaped image of the character (lord) is displayed (cut in) in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. By the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the spirit meter!" The visibility is lower than that before the display 704 is displayed ((A) in the figure). As described above, in the present embodiment, by being covered with the effect display 704, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and the character “continuous hit!” Some of them are difficult for the player to see. On the other hand, a change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (a change in which the filled portion is gradually reduced) continues to be displayed so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is continued during the acceptance period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit even during execution of the effect display 704 (even during a period when a part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to be visually recognized due to the effect display 704). Then, an image in which the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases (the meter accumulates) is displayed, and the change of the display mode of the meter (change of increase display) is continued.

  In addition, the effect display 704 that makes it difficult to visually recognize (hide) the first state notification image SG1 may be one that determines the display position based on the result of judgment or the like, or the operation of the chance button 136 ( It may be determined by the number of consecutive hits) or the like, or may be displayed when the scale reaches the uppermost stage of the first state notification image SG1. This also applies to the following examples.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is completed during the acceptance period of the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is hidden (erased), and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first state notification image SG1 are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, the image (for example, the character “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is continued to be displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  Also in the present embodiment, each effect display 704 of FIGS. 207 (Example 25) to 210 (Example 26) can be applied.

<Example 31 of displaying operation means image>
213 to 214 are time-series views of the operation means image display of the thirty-first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is made to be difficult for the player to visually recognize at least one of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 213 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are out of decoration. "Decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", which is a combination of symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold display area 700, two hold icons PI1 and PI2 of the special figure 1 are shown here.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 2B, one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the hold of the special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Is started, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e blinks and displays a round figure.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, a movement animation in which the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the held hold is moved to the variable icon display area 702 in the hold display area 700 has started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 3D, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the moving animation is completed in the hold display area 700, and the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed, and the change icon CI corresponding to the change game is displayed in the change icon display area 702.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state before the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced to the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, 708. The state notification image SG (first state notification image SG1, second state notification image SG2, third state) is formed by vertically dividing the substantially entire surface of the display area into a plurality (here, three). The notification image SG3) is displayed. The state notification image SG in this example is also a meter whose scale increases from the lower stage to the upper stage with the passage of time (or the operation state of the chance button 136) and the like, and here, the whole is painted in the same color (for example, white). Has been. Characters such as "Press and hold the button to decide the character!" Are displayed in the upper end portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, for example. At this timing, for example, the third state notification image SG3 on the right side is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol. , 4th design 217,218 (round figure (flashing), triangular figure) and the reduction display 708 of the decorative design (all are the 2nd display), 3rd state information picture SG3 (the 1st display) The visibility of at least a part of) is reduced (it is difficult for the player to see).

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, long-pressing operation) has started. For example, on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 at the center, A notification display 706 prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is displayed. The notification display 706 that prompts the operator to operate the chance button 136 in this embodiment is, for example, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters "long press!" Further, since it is the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a completely filled state.

  That is, at this timing, in the second state notification image SG2 (first display), the visibility of the second state notification image SG2 is reduced due to the notification display 706 (second display). (It is difficult for the player to see). Further, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) also continues, and at least a part of the third state notification image SG3 is displayed by the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbols 217 and 218 and the decorative pattern. The visibility is low (it is difficult for the player to see).

  The timings shown in (g) and (h) of FIG. 11 indicate a state in which time (reception period) has progressed from the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification are displayed. In each of the image SG2 and the third state notification image SG3, for example, images in which the scale is sequentially increased from the lower stage to the upper stage are displayed. In this example, the scale is a divided image of the character (grandpa), the character (princess), and the character (lord), that is, the character (grandpa) and the second state notification image SG2 in the first state notification image SG1. In, the character (princess) and the scale (divided image) of the character (donor) in the third state notification image SG3 are sequentially increased, and an image that approaches the completed image is displayed. Further, in the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3, the scale increasing speeds are different from each other, and the scale increasing speeds are switched in the middle (for example, the same. In the figure (g), the scale of the third state notification image SG3 increases rapidly, but in the figure (h), the scale of the first state notification image SG1 increases rapidly). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the status notification images SG may have the scale increasing at the same speed, or the speed may not be changed in the middle. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as an image in which the filled portion is gradually reduced.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has further progressed, and the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3 are displayed. In each of them, an image in which the scale is gradually increased is displayed. Here, the scale of the second state notification image SG2 (character (princess)) is set before the first state notification image SG1 (character (old)) and the third state notification image SG3 (character (lord)). At the top, the character (princess) is approaching the completed image. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as an image in which the filled portion is gradually reduced.

  The timing shown in (j) of the same figure shows the state at the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Here, the scales of the first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3 have not reached the uppermost end, and the completed images of the character (grandpa) and the character (lord) are not displayed, but the second state is displayed. In the notification image SG2, the scale reaches the top level, and the completed image of the character (princess) is displayed. In addition, with the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 does not include the portion painted in the first color, and the entire image displayed in the second color (for example, white) is displayed. Has been done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 (second display), while the first state is displayed. The change in the display mode of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion decreases) is visible to the player. Further, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol. In addition, in this example, the first state notification image SG1 (a part of the first display) does not overlap the second display at any timing, and is visible to the player. .

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the state after the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the notification display 706 (first operation means) displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2. The image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the characters “Long press!” Are erased, and the selection of the character (princess) is decided.

  The timings shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure are the states in which the effect indicating that the selection of the character (princess) is decided is being executed, and are shown in (n) to (o) of the same figure. The timing is a state in which a super reach effect is being executed by the determined character (princess).

  FIGS. 214 (p) (q) show a state in which the result of the hit / miss determination is out of alignment at the timing after FIG. 213 (o), and the symbols are out of alignment in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display region 208. The combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6") is displayed in a swinging manner (Fig. (P)), and the decorative pattern is stopped (Fig. (Q)).

  On the other hand, FIGS. 214 (p ′) and (q ′) show a state in which the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit at the timing after FIG. 213 (o), and the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are The jackpot pattern combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in a swinging manner (Fig. (P ')), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (Fig. (Q')).

<Example 32 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 215 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the working example 32 in time series. Similar to the thirty-second embodiment, the present embodiment has a configuration in which the scales of the meters of the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3 increase respectively. There is.

  The timing shown in (A) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (e) of FIG. 213, and shows the state before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (B) of the figure is a timing after (A) of the figure, and shows a state in which the effect display 704 is started before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136. The effect display 704 is displayed preferentially (on the front side) over the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3. In this example, the effect display 704 displays a group announcement effect (animation display), which is a type of big hit announcement effect of the special figure in the variation game, and at the timing shown in FIG. (Hani) appears, and a moving animation of moving from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. A part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the reduced display 708 of the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2C is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 213F, and shows the state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, long-pressing operation) has started. That is, on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 in the center, a notification display 706 (first operation means image BG1, first elapsed time notification image TG1 and “long press!”) Prompting the user to operate the chance button 136. Is displayed). Further, the effect display 704 (animation display of group notice) is also continued, and a moving animation in which a plurality of characters (Hani) appear after the leading character (Hani) is executed. Further, since it is the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a completely filled state. A part of the second state notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 and the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is displayed on the effect display 704. The reduced display 708 of the (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the decorative symbol makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2D is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 213G, and the notification display 706 continues on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2. Further, the effect display 704 is also continued, and after the leading character (Hani), a large number of characters (Hani) appear one after another, and a moving animation from the right side to the left side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is executed. To do. The effect display 704 is executed (on the front side) prior to the notification display 706. That is, a part of the second state notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to view by the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface thereof, and the notification display 706 is further displayed to the player by the effect display 704 displayed on the front surface. It is considered difficult to see. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third state notification image SG3 is effected by the effect display 704 (character (character (Hani)). (Hani)), the fourth design, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative design make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (h) of FIG. 213, and the notification display 706 continues on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2. Although the effect display 704 is also continued, the effect display 704 is ended in front of the third state notification image SG3 and the second state notification image SG2 because of the moving animation display. That is, a part of the third state notification image SG3 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol, and a part of the second state notification image SG2 is displayed by the notification display 706. Although it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the notification display 706 is visible to the player because the animation of moving the front surface of the notification display 706 is completed. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the effect display 704 (character (Hani)).

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (i) of FIG. 213, and shows the state in which the effect display 704 is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the notification display 706 that reduces the visibility of the second state notification image SG2 (first display) is made difficult for the player to view due to the effect display 704 displayed on the front surface thereof. Further, due to the effect display 704 (animation display), the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (change in which the filled portion decreases) may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same figure (D)). ), There is also a period during which it is visible ((C), (E), (F) in the same figure). In this case, the effect display 704 may also be an animation (image) that allows the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 over the entire period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Good.

<Example 33 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 33 in time series. In this example, a tutorial display (tutorial notice) 710 is performed instead of the effect display 704 (group notice display) of the example 32 (FIG. 215).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 213A and 213B are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 213E, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. At a later time and before the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 (here, long-pressing operation), the tutorial display 710 (here, a balloon image and "There is also a pattern in which the meter suddenly accumulates. The display of the character "." The tutorial display 710 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2 to reduce the visibility of these.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13C is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 213F, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize due to the tutorial display 710. It is said that.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (g) of FIG. 213, and shows that the tutorial display 710 is erased. It should be noted that the tutorial display 710 of this embodiment can be said to be the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. Here, the tutorial display may be a display for explaining effects (notice, characters, etc.) performed on the gaming machine.

<Example 34 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 217 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the thirty-fourth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the read-ahead hold icon 712 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 213A and 213B are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 213E, but as an example, the animation for moving the prefetch hold icon 712 has started at the timing shown in FIG. 213B. It shows the state.

  The timings shown in (C) and (D) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (f) and (g) of FIG. 213, but the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon 712 continues, and the timing shown in (D) of FIG. At the timing, the prefetching hold icon 712 is displayed on the front surface of a part of the first state notification image SG1, and a part of the first state notification image SG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (h) of FIG. 213, but the standby animation of the look-ahead hold icon 712 continues, and the read-ahead hold icon 712 causes the first state notification image to be displayed. A part of SG1 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, in (D) and (E) of the figure, the read-ahead hold icon 712 moves to the standby state, and thus the visibility is reduced (hidden) by the read-ahead hold icon 712, the region of the first state notification image SG1. Is changing. The look-ahead hold icon 712 in this embodiment can also be said to be the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.

<Example 35 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the thirty-fifth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the error display 714 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timings shown in (A) to (D) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (e) to (g) and (m) of FIG. 213, respectively. Here, as an example, a state is shown in which a door opening error is detected and an error display 714 (for example, a character display “Error: Door is open!”) Is performed at the timing shown in FIG. . The error display 714 is displayed over, for example, the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, and the third state notification image SG3.

  The error display 714 is continuously displayed during a period in which the state of the door opening error is not released, as shown in FIG. The error display 714 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.

<Example 36 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the thirty-sixth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the alerting notification display 718 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timing shown in the same figure (a) is a state in which the big hit end screen is displayed, and the timing shown in (b) is the decoration symbol is stopped before the first variation game is started after the end of the probability variation big hit. It shows the state of being performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the reminder display 718 is displayed on the front surface of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed (here, the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"). Shows. The alert notification display 718 is, for example, configured to move and display the alert character string on a band-shaped background image.

  The timing shown in (d) and (e) of the same figure shows a state in which one hold is exhausted (the number of holdings is reduced from 4 to 3) and the variable game of special figure 1 is started. Further, the alert display 718 continues. At these timings, the letters "Please be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card" are moved and displayed as the alerting notification display 718 over the belt-shaped background image.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2F shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. An alerting notification display 718 is displayed in front of the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3, and the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 are displayed. And a part of the third state notification image SG3 is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, the reduced display of the fourth design and the decorative design makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the third state notification image SG3.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (f) of FIG. 213 for the operation means image display, although the number of holdings is different. The notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and the attention notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, the character “long press!”) Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the attention notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first status notification image SG1 and the third status notification image SG3 are difficult to visually recognize due to the alert notification display 718 and the like, as in FIG.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) in the same figure show the same states as the timings shown in (i) and (j) in FIG. The notification display 706 is displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2, and the attention notification display 718 is further displayed on the front surface thereof. A part of the second state notification image SG2 (for example, the character “long press!”) Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is displayed by the attention notification display 718. It is difficult to see. The first status notification image SG1 and the third status notification image SG3 are difficult to visually recognize due to the alert notification display 718 and the like, as in FIG.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows a state in which the alerting notification display 718 is deleted, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front surface of the second state notification image SG2 becomes visible to the player. There is.

  The alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment can be said to be the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. In addition, the alert display 718 of the present embodiment repeatedly displays the moving display "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card" a predetermined number of times (for example, the moving display is displayed until it makes two laps). However, it may be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In addition, although the alerting notification display 718 of the present embodiment is performed before the change of the special map starts, it may be performed after the change of the special map starts. It should be noted that the alerting notification display 718 is displayed when the gaming state before the big hit starts is the special figure low probability state, and the game state after the big hit ends shifts to the special figure high accuracy general figure high accuracy state (probability change state). It may be performed only when the special map high-accuracy general map low-probability state (time saving state) shifts to the special map low-probability general map low accuracy state (normal state) (that is, the first fluctuation after the time-saving end) It may be configured to be performed only. In addition, regardless of the game state, it may be always performed after the jackpot.

<Example 37 of displaying operation means image>
220 to 221 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirty-seventh embodiment in time series. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as an assumption of the explanation of the thirty-eighth to thirty-first embodiments, an example of the operation means image display in the case of performing the normal operation means image display will be described. In the present embodiment, a reach effect that causes the player to operate the chance button 136 once to a plurality of times is executed. For example, by operating the chance button 136 a plurality of times, a status notification image (here, the first status notification) is displayed. The scale of the meter of the image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2) is changed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) and (B) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 202 (h) and (i), although the reduced display position of the decorative pattern is different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, a first state notification image SG1 is displayed in which the confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed and the degree of damage to each of the character (lord) and the swordsman character is indicated by a meter. And the state which is displaying the 2nd state notification image SG2 is shown. Further, the characters "YOSHIMUNE" and "KENGOU" are displayed above the first state notification image SG1 and above the second state notification image SG2, respectively.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which the operation notification display 720 for notifying the operation timing of the chance button 136 and the like is displayed. In the operation notification display 720, in order to notify the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated, the character string “Chance is three times !!” is displayed on the belt-shaped background image.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which the operation notification display 720 is displayed to notify that the first operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to the attack of the character (lord).

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure shows the state before the start of the acceptance period for the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the front surface of the operation notification display 720. The operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure shows the state after the start of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (during the acceptance period), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. The image is going to be displayed.

  The timing shown in (H) of the figure shows the state in which the first operation of the chance button 136 (attack of the character (lord)) is performed. The operation notification display 720, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are temporarily erased, and the second state notification image SG2 displays an image with reduced scale (filled portion) to display a swordsman. It informs the decrease of the character's damage.

  Each timing shown in (I) to (L) of the same figure is an operation means image display corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. The second operation of the chance button 136, except that the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed and an operation corresponding to the counterattack of the swordsman character, is performed (E) to FIG. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  At the respective timings shown in (M) to (O) of the figure, the operation means image display corresponding to the third operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. In the third operation of the chance button 136, the third operation means image BG3 and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are displayed ((O) in the figure).

  Each timing shown in FIGS. 221 (P) to 221 (R) shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. 220 (O). There is a third operation during the acceptance period of the third operation of the chance button 136 ((P) in the same figure), which causes the character (Don) to win ((Q) (R) in the same figure), and the reduced display As for the decoration pattern, the combination of symbols (for example, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7") that is a big hit is stopped and displayed ((R) in the figure). It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the operation notification display 720 can be said to be the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.

<Example 38 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 38 in time series. In this embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment is made difficult for the player to visually confirm by the effect display 704. It is a display example.

  The timing shown in FIG. 220C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 of (C) of the figure. The effect display 704 in this example is a mission achievement display, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter that indicates the damage to the character (lord)).

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (D) of FIG. 220, and the timing shown in (F) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is erased.

<Example 39 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 39 in time series. In this embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment is made difficult for the player to visually confirm by the effect display 704. This is a display example, and the effect display 704 here is a hitting method notification display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 220C is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in (D) of the same figure shows the state in which the effect display (how to hit display) 704 is displayed on the front surface of the first state notification image SG1 of the same figure (C). As a result, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter displaying the damage of the character (lord)) and a part of the second state notification image SG2 (a meter displaying the damage of the character (lord)) are played. It is considered difficult for people to see.

  The timing shown in FIG. 220E shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 220D, and the timing shown in FIG. 220R shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 221R. It is a thing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect display (how to hit notification display) 704 is continued even when the reach effect is finished. The effect display (how to hit display) 704 is a predetermined time from the last sensor detection by the game ball hit in the area on the right side of the board (for example, detection of passage of the game ball by the sensor of the universal figure starting port 228). The display ends (display disappears) when, for example, elapses.

  The hitting notification display may be displayed when the player operates (turns) the steering wheel to a certain position (the position where the game ball is launched into the right area), In that case, the display may be terminated when the player operates the handle to a certain position (the position where the game ball is launched into the left area). Note that the hitting notification may be performed not only by the effect display but also by sound notification at the same time as the effect display.

<Example 40 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 224 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the operation means image display according to the fortieth embodiment. In this embodiment, at least a part of the first state notification image SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment is reduced in visibility by the effect display 704 (game). This is a display example that makes it difficult for a person to see). Although the example 37 describes the display example when the chance button 136 is operated three times, the example is a display example when the chance button 136 is operated twice.

  The timing shown in FIG. 220 (G) shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG. 220 (G).

  The timing shown in (H) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and thereby the effect display 704 is displayed. The effect display 704 is, for example, a notice effect, and is displayed (cut in) so that the image of the panda is inserted into the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 here. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least part of the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 3I shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the entire surface of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 is displayed on the rear surface of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, whereby the first state notification image SG1 and the second symbol are displayed. All of the state notification image SG2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (J) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is erased (finished). In this state, the character (panda) is added next to the character (lord), and the display (effect display) above the first state notification image SG1 is changed from "YOSHIMUNE & PANDA" to "YOSHIMUNE & PANDA". Has changed to.

  The timing shown in (K) of the figure shows the state before (directly) the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is started, and corresponds to the second operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The second operation means image BG2 to be operated and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in (L) of the figure shows the state after the start of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 (during the acceptance period), and the scale of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. The image is going to be displayed.

  The respective timings shown in (M) to (O) of the figure show the state in which the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, and the operation means image display is shown in FIGS. 221 (Q) to (R). Since it is similar to the state of each timing, the explanation is omitted.

<Example 41 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the forty-first embodiment in time series. The present embodiment has a configuration for executing a rewind effect in addition to the normal operation means image display described in the 37th embodiment, and a part of the rewind effect display causes the first state notification image to be displayed. It is a display example in which the visibility of at least a part of the SG1 or the second state notification image SG2 is reduced (makes it difficult for the player to see).

  Each timing shown in (L) to (P) of the same figure is the same state as each timing shown to (L) to 220 (P) of FIG. 220.

  The timing shown in (P) of the figure shows a state in which execution of the rewind effect is started (state at the time of execution start) based on, for example, the third operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, a temporary stop mark and the characters "temporary stop" are displayed as an effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the same image is displayed for a predetermined time to stop the image. It looks like they are. Even in this case, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the blinking of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e continue.

  The timing shown in (Q) of the same figure shows the state where the rewind effect is being executed. At this timing, the rewind mark and the characters "rewind" are displayed as the effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image displayed at the previous timing (the image several frames before). Is displayed to make it look like the rewind display is being performed. Here, the image displayed at the timing shown in (O) of the same figure is displayed again, and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 also displays an image that is entirely painted.

  The timing shown in (R) of the figure shows a state in which the rewind effect is being executed, and the image displayed at the timing shown in (L) of the figure is displayed again. At the timing of (L) in the figure, the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification image SG2 are displayed, and the entire first state notification image SG1 is displayed by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect. A part of the second state notification image SG2 is hidden, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  At the respective timings shown in (S) to (V) of the figure, the rewind effect is continuously executed, and as shown in (S) and (T) of the figure, the second operation means image BG2 and the second progress are shown. The state where the time notification image TG2 is displayed is shown. It is to be noted that although the meters (scales) of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are also displayed as being rewound in (S) and (T) of the same figure, it is actually outside the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Also in the period of (S) to (V) in the same figure, the entire first state notification image SG1 and a part of the second state notification image SG2 are hidden by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect, and the game is played. It is considered difficult for people to see.

  The timing shown in (W) of the figure shows the state at the end of the rewind effect, and the image displayed at the timing of FIG. 220 (B) is re-displayed and the effect display 704 of the rewind display is displayed. It is displayed. The timing shown in (X) of the figure shows the state after the end of the rewinding effect. After this, the operation means image display after FIG. 220 (B) is executed again.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which an image of a few frames before is displayed again as a rewinding effect has been described, but the invention is not limited to this, and a rewinding movie (reverse playback movie) may be prepared and played back. The rewinding effect may be performed using a control movie that actually rewinds and plays back the movie used for displaying the operation means image. During the rewind effect, the operation means image and / or the elapsed time notification image may be hidden.

  In the above embodiment, the effect display 704 may be changed to the notification display 706, or the notification display 706 may be changed to the effect display 704.

<Example 42 of displaying operation means image>
As Example 42, an outline of the fifth embodiment and other modifications will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 233.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating the outline of the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the gaming table of the fifth embodiment (for example, Pachinko machine 100) includes a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display unit has a first display (for example, a first display). The state notification image SG1) of FIG. The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a display according to the operation timing or a display according to the number of repeated hits), and the first display is related to the operation of the operation means. Accordingly, the display mode of the first display is a display that can be changed at least (for example, an increase display or a decrease display that increases the scale of the meter is possible), and the first display is the second state (for example, a player). In the case where the noticeable presentation display 704 that is advantageous to (the state in which the noticeable presentation display 704 is executed) is being executed, the visibility is at least higher than that in the first state (for example, the state in which the noticeable presentation display 704 is not executed). This is a low display.

  FIG. 227 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. 226. (A) to (h) of the same figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is, as shown in display A-0 ′ of FIG. 11C to display AN of FIG. 7F, by operating the operation means during the operation acceptance period or the like. It is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes. The display A-0 in FIG. 9B shows a state in which the image or the like to be the first display is displayed, but the operation acceptance period has not started, and the display A-0 in FIG. -N 'indicates the state after the operation acceptance period has ended although the image or the like that was the first display is displayed. That is, the time here means, for example, from after the start of the acceptance period of the operation means (chance button 136) ((c) in the figure) to the end of the acceptance period (excluding the end) ((f) in the figure). A display which is a period and whose display mode is changed by operating the operation means during this period is referred to as a first display.

  Further, the operation of the operation means is one operation, multiple operations, continuous hits, long presses, non-contact operation of detecting a holding hand with a proximity sensor or the like, flick operation of detecting with a touch sensor, or the like. . Further, the period during which the operating means is operated means the time from the display A is displayed until the display A is erased (from the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 9B to the reception period shown in FIG. (Time until after the end), that is, as the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 7B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG. Good.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating the outline of the fifth embodiment from another viewpoint. As shown in the figure, the gaming table of the fifth embodiment (for example, Pachinko machine 100) includes a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the display unit has a first display (for example, a first display). Is a means capable of displaying at least the elapsed time notification image TG1 and the first state notification image SG1). The first display is a display relating to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the progress of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136). Or, if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, the display mode of the first display is at least changeable (for example, a reduced display that reduces the scale of the meter is possible), and the first display is In the case of the second state (for example, the state in which the notice effect that is advantageous to the player (hot) is being executed), the first state (for example, the state in which the hot notice effect is not being executed) Is a display in which the visibility is at least low, and the first display is a display for at least continuing the change of the display mode of the first display in the second state.

  FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram illustrating the first display in FIG. 228. (A) to (h) of the same figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes with the passage of time, as shown from display B-0 ′ in FIG. 7C to display BN in FIG. is there. Display b-0 in FIG. 7B shows a state in which the image or the like to be the first display is displayed, but the operation acceptance period has not started, and display B-0 in FIG. -N 'indicates the state after the operation acceptance period has ended although the image or the like that was the first display is displayed. That is, the time here means, for example, from after the start of the acceptance period of the operation means (chance button 136) ((c) in the figure) to the end of the acceptance period (excluding the end) ((f) in the figure). A display that is a period and in which the display mode changes with the passage of time during this period is referred to as a first display.

  Further, the time is not limited to the period during which the operation means can be accepted, but is the total time during which the operation means is actually operated (for example, the operation time when the chance button 136 is operated a plurality of times (including consecutive hits)). Or the time during which the operation means is continuously operated (for example, long press). Further, it may be the time from the display of the display B until it is erased (the time from the start of the reception period shown in (b) of the figure to the end of the reception period shown in (g) of the figure), That is, the first display may include the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 11B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating the second display. (A) to (h) of FIG. 7A are display examples of the operation means image display at a plurality of timings of the pachinko machine 100. In the figure, the second display is represented by display C, and the first display is represented by display A (see FIG. 227) or display B (see FIG. 228). Further, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the display start timing of the second display (display C) over time.

  Further, the second display (display C) is, for example, effect display 704 (animation display, hitting effect display, rewind effect display, tutorial display, prefetch hold icon, error display, big hit confirmation display, probability variation state or time saving state. (Remaining number of times), a notification display 706, a fourth design, a reduced display 708 of a decorative design, and the like.

  The display timing of the second display (display C) may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B), as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, it may be at the same time as the display start of the first display or after the display start of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started, or after the display of the first display is started, the period is up to, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 7C, it may be before the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 227 (b), FIG. 229 (b)). Further, as shown in (d) to (f) of the same drawing, it may be during the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 9G, it may be after the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 227 (g) and FIG. 229 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after (or immediately after) deleting the first display as shown in FIG. Further, the start timing of the second display is not limited to the same timing at all times, and may be a configuration in which one or more timings of (a) to (h) in FIG.

  On the other hand, the erasing timing of the second display may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B), as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, it may be at the same time as the display start of the first display or after the display start of the first display. After the display of the first display is started, immediately after the display of the first display is started, or after the display of the first display is started, the period is up to, for example, about 10 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 7C, it may be before the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 227 (b), FIG. 229 (b)). Further, as shown in (d) to (f) of the same drawing, it may be during the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of the first display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 9G, it may be after the acceptance period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 227 (g) and FIG. 229 (g)). Alternatively, it may be after (or immediately after) deleting the first display as shown in FIG. Further, the erasing timing of the second display is not always the same timing, but may be a configuration in which one or more timings of (a) to (h) in the same figure are combined.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the second display. The second display may be one in which the display mode and display position do not change during the display period, or may be one in which at least one of the display mode and display position changes.

  As shown in (a) of the same figure, the second display (display C) hides the entire first display (display A or display B) (makes the first display difficult for the player to see). May be

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the region that hides the first display may change (reduce) by changing (reducing).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7C, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the size (area) of the second display. The area of the area for hiding the first display may be changed (enlarged) by changing (enlargement).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6D, the second display (display C) moves the display position of the second display while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B). As a result, the position of the area for hiding the first display may be changed (moved).

  Further, as shown in (e) of the figure, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), and the display position (or display) of the second display. By moving the (direction), the area of the area where the first display is hidden, the area where the first display is hidden, or the position where the first display is hidden may be changed (moved) depending on the shape of the second display.

  Further, as shown in (f) of the figure, the second display (display C) changes its shape, and at least a part of the first display (display A or display B) is hidden while the second display (display C) is displayed. By changing the shape of the second display, the area of the area for hiding the first display, the area for hiding, or the position for hiding may be changed (moved).

  The second display may be composed of any one combination of (a) to (f) in the figure, and may be composed of one or more or all combinations of (a) to (f) in the figure. It may be configured. Further, for combinations of two or more or all of (a) to (f) of FIG. Is included, and a configuration that changes from the left figure of FIG. 7B to the middle figure of FIG. 7B is also included (the same figure (a)). (The same applies to FIG. 6F).

  FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating the first state and the second state of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, in the second state, the second display (display C) overlaps with the first display (display A or display B) (is displayed by being superimposed on the front surface). The visibility of the first display is lower in the second state than in the state.

  That is, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 9A, in the first state, only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second display (display C) is not displayed. In the second state, the second display (display C) is transparent by being overlapped (on the front surface) with the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the figure in FIG. It is in a state of being displayed at a rate of 0%. Alternatively, in the second state, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 10A, the first display (display A or display B) is overlaid (on the front thereof), and the second display (display C) is set to the transmittance. It is in a state of being displayed at less than 100% (for example, transmittance of 50%).

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 3B, the first state is such that only the first display (display A or display B) is overlaid (on the front side) and the second display (display C) is displayed. It is a state where it is displayed small (for example, smaller than the first display), and the second state overlaps the first display as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. The display is larger than the left view of FIG.

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 3C, the first state is superimposed on (in front of) the first display (display A or display B), and the second display (display C) is The second state is a state where it is displayed with a large transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 80%), and the second state is the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. ) Is superimposed (on the front surface thereof) and the second display (display C) is displayed with a small transmittance (for example, transmittance 30% or 50%).

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 3D, the first state is a state in which the first display (display A or display B) and the second display (display C) do not overlap. In the second state, the second display (display C) is displayed by overlaying (on the front of) the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure of FIG. It is in a state of being. In this case, the transmittance of the second display in the second state is 0% or more (including the case where only the frame line is not filled) and less than 100%.

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 6E, the first state is a state in which only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second state is e) As shown in the right figure, the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B), and the second display is the first display. This is the case of similar colors. Even when the second display is displayed on the rear surface of the first display, the visibility of the first display is low when these are similar colors.

  Further, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 7F, the first state is a state in which the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B). When the second display is not the same color as the first display, the second state is the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure of FIG. The second display (display C) is displayed on the display, and the second display has the same color as the first display.

  Note that only one of the display modes (changes) of the second display shown in FIGS. 231 (a) to 231 (f) or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 231 (a) to 231 (f) may be added to FIG. ) To (f), only one of the first state and the second state, or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 232 (a) to (f) may be applied to each other.

  FIG. 233 illustrates the first state notification image SG1, the second state notification image SG2, the third state notification image SG3, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, which are described as meters (gauges) in the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows other forms, such as the 2nd elapsed time notification image TG2 and the 3rd elapsed time notification image TG3.

  As shown in (a) to (a ″) of the same figure, the meter is not limited to an image composed of one continuous region, but is composed of a plurality of images (graduations M) separated from each other, and a meter group MG is 1 It may constitute one meter. In that case, all the scales M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. 11A, or only some of the scales M may have the same shape as shown in FIG. All the scales M may have different shapes as shown in FIG. In addition, the maximum number of scales is simultaneously displayed as the scale group MG on the meter, and the display mode of each scale M (for example, the fill color) is sequentially changed (filled) with the passage of time. The scale M may be provided or the scales M may be sequentially displayed (the number of the scales M increases) as time passes.

  FIG. 2B is an example of a meter in which the number of scales M increases. In this example, the scale M drops from above and accumulates in the meter with the passage of time. However, as shown in FIG. 232, due to the change in the transmittance of each scale, the inside of the meter is changed. It may be configured to fill up.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, the meter is not limited to the structure in which the length and area increase by stacking (having a shape as a so-called meter or gauge), and the meter may increase from the inside to the outside or the color and the transmittance may increase. Any configuration may be used as long as the shape of the entire meter can be visually expanded or contracted by the change.

  Further, although the case where the number of meters is increased has been described here as an example, a configuration in which the number of meters is decreased can be similarly applied.

  In the conventional gaming machine, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table capable of improving the interest of the player, and a gaming table according to the present invention. According to this, the interest of the player can be improved.

  That is, as described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment includes the display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136). In the gaming table, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first state notification image SG1), and the first display relates to the operation of the operation means. It is a display (for example, a display according to an operation timing, a display according to the number of repeated hits, etc.), and the first display has at least a display mode of the first display according to an operation of the operation means. It is a changeable display (for example, a decrease display or an increase display on the scale of the meter), and the first display is in a second state (for example, a "hot" performance execution state). ,first State (e.g., "HOT" non-execution state of the effect) visibility than is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. Further, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means (chance button 136) (operation at a timing advantageous to the player, continuous hitting, etc.). In addition, since the visibility of the first display may be low, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. In some cases, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation means.

  The "display related to the operation of the operating means" means the following display.

It may be (a) "display including display for prompting operation of operating means".

(B) “Display including a display indicating that the operation of the operation unit is accepted” may be used.

It may be (c) "a display including a display indicating that an effect of operating the operation means is (or is being) performed."

(D) Only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be displayed.

(E) It may be a display that does not include the display of one of the above ((a) to (c)) or a combination of two or more (two or all).

  Further, "at least the visibility is low" may indicate that "when in the second state, at least a part or all of the first display becomes at least difficult to see". . Alternatively, it may indicate that "in the second state, at least part or all of the first display becomes at least invisible".

  Further, "the first display is a display in which visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state" means "only at least a part or all of the first display". Visibility is at least low ”. Alternatively, it may indicate that “the visibility of at least a part or all of the two or more displays among the plurality of displays is low”. The “two or more displays” may mean “two or more displays including the first display”.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, a presentation display 704), and the second state means that at least a part of the second display is the first display. May be a state of overlapping at least a part of the above.

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be noticeable in some cases.

  The "state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps with at least a part of the first display" refers to the following state.

(A) It may indicate that the state is such that "at least a part of the second display is displayed preferentially to at least a part of the first display".

(B) "At least a part of the second display is displayed on the front side (front side) of at least a part of the first display" (for example, "the front side of the layer on which the first display is displayed" "Displayed in a layer" and "displayed in the same layer before the first display"). Here, the “front side” may mean the “player side (close to)”.

(C) The state may be that "at least a part of the second display is displayed overlapping (overlapped) with at least a part of the first display".

(D) Only one of (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be shown.

(E) One of the above (a) to (c) or a combination (two or all) of two or more may not be included.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and concentrate more on the game. is there.

  The state in which at least part of the second display does not overlap at least part of the first display means that the second display is not displayed and the second display is displayed. However, it includes any state in which the first display is not hidden. That is, "a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display" means the following state.

(A) It may indicate "a state in which the second display is not displayed on the display means".

(B) The "part of the second display may be displayed in a position where it does not overlap part or all of the first display".

(C) The “second display may be displayed in a position where it does not overlap a part or all of the first display”.

(D) One or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may not be shown.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a meter display (for example, the first state notification image SG1), and the meter display has at least a display mode of the meter display according to an operation of the operation unit. The display may be changeable.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the meter display may be lowered to make it difficult for the player to understand the operation status of the operating means and prompt the player to operate the operating means.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the second display may be a performance display (for example, a performance display 704).

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display stand out.

  Further, at least a part of the first display that overlaps with the second display may be a non-display image, and the display means may not draw the non-display image.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce the drawing processing load.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment is a game table including display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, chance button 136). The display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a first state notification image SG1), and the first display means the operation means. Of the operation (for example, an operation acceptance period, an operation status display), and the first display indicates that a change condition is satisfied (for example, an operation acceptance period starts, an operation acceptance period When the operation means is operated, the operation means is repeatedly hit or long-pressed, etc.), the display mode of the first display is at least changeable display (for example, decrease display or increase display of the scale of the meter), Before The first display is more visible than the first state (for example, the non-execution state of the "hot" effect) when the second state (for example, the execution state of the "hot" effect) Is a display whose sex is at least low, and the first display is a display for at least continuing the change of the display mode of the first display when in the second state, It is a stand.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. In addition, it may be possible to guide the eyes to a hot notice so that the player does not overlook that the reception time of the operation of the operation means is running short. In addition, since the visibility of the first display may be low, it may be possible to concentrate the player's line of sight on the display means. In some cases, the player's line of sight can be directed around the first display, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation means.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.), and the second state means at least a part of the second display. May overlap with at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be noticeable in some cases.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, the second display may not overlap, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness and allow the player to concentrate more on the game.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a first state notification image SG1).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the meter display may be lowered to make it difficult for the player to understand the change status of the meter display and prompt the player to operate the operation means.

  Further, the second display may be effect display (eg, effect display 704, notification display 706, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display stand out.

  Further, the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, the display mode of the first display is a display mode that can be changed at least from the first mode to the second mode, and the condition that the change condition is satisfied The term may be a requirement including at least a lapse of a first time from the display in the first aspect.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the operation reception time and further prompt the operation of the operation means by reducing the visibility of the change in the change mode with the passage of time.

  Further, at least a part of the first display that overlaps with the second display may be a non-display image, and the display means may not draw the non-display image.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce the drawing processing load.

  Further, the first region in the first display may be a region having lower visibility than the first state in the second state.

  Further, the second region in the first display may be a region having higher visibility than the first region in the second state.

  The above-mentioned first area and second area may be the following areas.

(A) The first area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of the meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the meter (display) is a display in which the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time or a change in state (for example, the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

(B) The first area may be an area that does not include a part or all of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(C) The first area may be an area that includes a part (for example, a part of the button image) or the whole of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit. Here, the button image means an operation means (an image simulating the chance button 136 (for example, the first operation means image BG1)).

(D) The first area may be an area that does not include a part or all of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means.

(E) The first area may have a combination of two or more of the above (a) to (d). For example, (a) and (c), (a) and (d), (b) and (c) can be combined.

(A ′) The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of the meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation unit.

(B ′) The second area may be an area that does not include a part or all of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means.

(C ′) The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of the button image) or the entire area of which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(D ′) The second region may be a region that does not include a part or all of the region in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation unit.

(E ′) The second region may have a configuration in which two or more (or all) of the above (a ′) to (d ′) are combined. For example, (a ') and (c'), (a ') and (d'), (b ') and (c') can be combined.

  Further, the second display may be a display related to the game. In addition, as an example of "display related to game", error display, operation request notification, attention display, effect display, notice display, original mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power-on Display (during power-on, power-on, etc.), etc.

  Further, the display means may not display at least a part of the first display (for example, button image) at least when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.

  The display unit may be a unit that does not display a part of the first display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation unit is finished. Here, the "part of the first display" may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display showing all or part of the button image (first operation means image BG1 and the like).

(B) It may be a display showing all or a part of the meter display (the first state notification image SG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, etc.).

(C) It may be a display showing all or part of a display (for example, character display) prompting an operation.

(D) It may be a combination of two or more or all of the above (a) to (c).

(E) Only one of the displays (a) to (c) may be displayed.

  Further, the display unit may be a unit that does not display the entire first display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation unit is completed. Here, “all of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display indicating a meter display (such as the first state notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

(B) It may indicate a plurality of displays including a meter display (for example, a button image or a display prompting an operation (for example, a character display)).

  The display unit is a unit that does not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) when the second time has elapsed after the acceptance of the operation of the operation unit is started. May be.

  Further, the display means may continuously display a part or all of the first display when the acceptance of the operation means is completed.

  Further, the display means may be means for continuously displaying the meter display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed. It should be noted that the display means continuously displays the meter display when the acceptance of the operation means is completed, and the meter display is displayed when the condition for deleting the meter display is satisfied (for example, the end of the effect display). The display of may be terminated.

  The display mode of the first display may be changeable from the first mode to the second mode. The first display mode can be changed from the first mode to the third mode, and may be changed from the third mode to the second mode. That is, it is not limited to the one that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and may change from the first aspect to the second aspect through another plurality of aspects (third aspect). .

  Moreover, the following are examples of the "effect display" in the above-described embodiment. For example, notice display system (prefetch (hold icon, notice effect, decorative pattern, etc.) effect display, variation (hold icon, notice effect, decorative pattern, etc.) effect display, non-notice system (tutorial, demo, user mode, Hold display, 4th design, big hit display, decorative design, etc.), and other notice production display, big hit production display, user mode display, demo display, tutorial display, decoration design It may be a display or an effect display using a hold icon.

  Further, regarding the transmittance of the second display described with reference to FIG. 232, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be 0% (it may not be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the second display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value of more than 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be changed stepwise, and the "stepwise change" means that the transmittance is the first value, the second value, the third value. , And the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may be continuously changed, and the "continuous change" means that the transmittance is from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the second display may change from only one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the first display described with reference to FIG. 232, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be 0% (it may not be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the first display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be a value of more than 0% and less than 100%.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be changed stepwise, and the "stepwise change" means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, a third value, or a third value. , And the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may be continuously changed, and the "continuous change" means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part or all of the first display may change from only one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first display (or the second display) may include at least a display imitating the operation means. Here, “the display including at least a display simulating the operating means” may indicate only the display simulating the operating means (for example, the first operating means image BG1). In addition, "including at least a display simulating the operating means" means that the display simulating the operating means and the display displayed in a period overlapping the period in which the display simulating the operating means are displayed (for example, the first display). It may be both a meter (or gauge) indicating a period for accepting an operation such as the elapsed time notification image TG1 and a character display such as “press the button!” And an effect).

  Further, the first display (or the second display) may include at least a notification for prompting the operation of the operation means. Here, "including at least a notification prompting the user to operate the operating means" means only a notification prompting the operation of the operating means (for example, a character such as "press the button!" Or an image / animation display for operating the button). May be shown. In addition, a period that overlaps with a period in which a notification prompting the user to operate the operating means (for example, characters such as “press the button!” Or an image / animation display that operates the button) and a notification prompting the user to operate the operating means are displayed. It may be one that indicates both the display (background image, effect, meter (gauge), etc.) displayed in.

  The first display (or the second display) may be displayable when at least display control is executed. Here, the "display control" may be executed at least when a condition including the operation of the operation unit is satisfied. Further, the "display control" may be displayed by a command transmitted from the second control means (first sub control unit or second sub control unit).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the example described as “display with high visibility” may be applied to “display with low visibility”, and the example described as “display with low visibility” may be “display with low visibility”. It may be applied to “display with high visibility”.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, “at least a part” means that only a part or all (whole) may be used.

  Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be combined with other embodiments with respect to each configuration in each embodiment.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation unit. Here, the "operation of the operating means" may have the following configuration.

(A) may indicate that "the operation means has been operated by the detection means (sensor of the operation means)".

(B) It may indicate that "the command has been transmitted to the first (second) sub-control unit by the detection means".

(C) It may indicate that "the command transmitted by the detection means is received by the first (second) sub-control unit."

(D) Any one or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may be shown.

  Further, the change of the first display mode may be the following configuration. That is, the first mode may be changed to the second mode by operating the operating means once. Further, the first mode may be changed to the second mode by operating the operation means a plurality of times. Further, the first mode may be changed to the second mode by a cumulative total of the time during which the operating means is continuously operated (the hand may be released once from the operating means). Further, it may change from the first mode to the second mode depending on the time during which the operating means is continuously operated (the operation ends when the hand is once released from the operating means).

  Further, the first display may be configured such that the display mode of the first display can be changed at least in accordance with the operation of the operation means, and the first mode can be displayed only when the condition for changing the display mode is satisfied. The display mode of the first display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may not be changed when the condition for changing the display mode is not satisfied.

  Further, the first display may include a portion that does not change the display mode of the first display according to the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, the first display and the second display are, respectively, a start display and an end display of a privilege game (for example, AT), a remaining number display of the privilege game (for example, a remaining number display which is always displayed, a privilege game display). A game in which the privilege game is played by displaying the remaining number of times that is emphasized when the number of remaining games becomes small) and an additional effect of the number of privilege games (for example, one or more character displays such as 20G are displayed. (For example, an effect indicating that the number has increased) or a push order notification for notifying the order of pressing the stop buttons. Here, the AT indicates an AT (assist time) game state, and may be a period during which a notification for assisting the operation of the player (for example, a pressing order notification) is executed.

  Further, the display means may be constituted by the decorative pattern display device 208. The display means may execute the first display only when the first display condition is satisfied, and the second display is displayed only when the second display condition is satisfied. It may be executed, the first display may be displayed, the second display may be displayed, or the first display and the second display may be displayed. . Further, the operation means may be configured by the chance button 136.

  A plurality of display means may be provided. In that case, the first display means of the plurality of display means may be a special symbol display device, and the second display means may be a decorative symbol display device.

  Further, the first display means may be the first decorative symbol display device, and the second display means may be the second decorative symbol display device. In that case, the first decorative symbol display device or the second decorative symbol display device may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208.

At least one or both of the first display means and the second display means may be provided on the movable means, or only one of them may be provided on the movable means.

The first display means may be provided on the front side of the second display means.

  Further, the first display means displays the first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display means displays the second display (for example, the effect display 704). In the present embodiment, the first display displayed on the first display means is overlapped by the second display displayed on the second display means and the visibility is lowered. Is applicable.

  Moreover, the third display (for example, the background image or the effect display (including the second display)) is overlapped (on the front thereof), and the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and / or the first display) is displayed. When the third display is difficult for the player to view by displaying the elapsed time notification image TG1 of 1), the first display is erased (non-displayed) in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Display), and the third display may be visible to the player.

  When the operating means is operated by the player while the operation means image and the elapsed time notification image are being displayed (during the acceptance period of the operation means), the elapsed time notification image is the same image as the end of the acceptance period (remaining time). It may be deleted after displaying 0 seconds). Further, the operation notification image may be deleted after the progress notification image is deleted first.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a game table including operation means (for example, chance button 136) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208). The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in FIGS. 84 and 85, the elapsed time notification image in FIG. 96, or the remaining time notification image). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect accompanying the general figure variation display in FIG. 84, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 85, etc.), and is the same as the first display. Is a display relating to the operating means, the first display is a display capable of changing at least the display mode according to the passage of time, the change of the display mode in the first display, In the case of the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that of the first state, and the second state is that at least a part of the second display is at least one of the first display. It is characterized in that it is a state in which it overlaps the part.

  The first state may be a state in which at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible for the player to focus on the first display and the second display, which are overlapping with each other, and concentrate on the game. Further, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to further encourage the player to operate the game means. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means so that the player can concentrate on the game and to determine whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 85), and the first display is a third image (for example, the image shown in FIG. 85 is a display including at least a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 85). The third image is a display in which the display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time, and the second state means a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus the game on the game by allowing the player to pay attention to the overlapping second image and third image. Further, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the lapse of time, and to further encourage the player to operate the game means. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means so that the player can concentrate on the game and to determine whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image in the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes in accordance with the passage of time, compared with the first image, and the player is allowed to play the game. In some cases, the operation of the means can be prompted more. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means and concentrate on the game because of the difference in the visual recognition mode between the first image and the third image, and it is possible to fuel the decision as to whether or not the operation is necessary. It may be possible to improve the interest.

  Further, the second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display in the second state.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be a display that is at least difficult to see when in the second state.

  With such a configuration, the player is allowed to have a different visual recognition mode between a part (overlapping region) of the first display and another region (non-overlapping region), and the player is provided with the game means. In some cases, the operation can be prompted more. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to watch the display means carefully from the difference in the visual recognition mode of the first display and concentrate on the game, and to determine whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game. May be possible.

  Further, the display unit may be a unit that does not display at least the first display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is capable of performing at least a plurality of types of display, and at least operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate. And a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (for example, the first of FIG. 82). Operation means image BG1, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type (for example, the variation icon CI of FIG. 82) display, The display of the first type is a display relating to the operating means, and the display of the first type is configured to be at least displayable when an operation of the operating means is accepted. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 82), and the first type of display is a second display (for example, 82 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1) of FIG. 82, and the second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time. The second type of display is a display including at least a third display (for example, the variation icon CI of FIG. 82), and the second type of display is a performance display, and the third display Is displayed with priority over the first display, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, the second display The start position of the third display is more than the second display. By being preferentially displayed, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display than when the third display is not displayed. The change in the display mode of the second display is more than that of the second display. Also, since the third display is preferentially displayed, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize it than the third display. The first type of display is the second type of display. The display of the second type may be at least displayed on the display unit before the display of the first type.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  Further, the first display may include a display imitating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation unit. Further, in the case where the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the acceptance period of the operating means by a decrease display from the start position, the start position of the second display is changed to the second position. Since the third display (effect display) is preferentially displayed over the display of, it becomes more difficult for the player to visually recognize it than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display. The change of the display mode toward the end position is made easier for the player to visually recognize than the third display by preferentially displaying the third display over the second display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be more prompted to operate the game means. In addition, it may be possible to focus more attention on the game by paying more attention to the display mode hidden by the player. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display form of the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change of the display form from the start position of the second display to the end position on the third display. In some cases, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means and concentrate on the game, and to determine the necessity of the operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a big hit notice.

  With such a configuration, in the case of a big hit announcement, the player can carefully watch the display means and concentrate on the game, and at the same time, determine whether or not the operation is necessary and improve the interest of the game. May be possible.

  Further, the display means may not display at least the first type of display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix 1)
A first entrance into which the game ball can enter, a start information deriving unit that derives start information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquisition unit. A win / loss determination means for making a win / fail decision on the basis of a win, a production means for giving a predetermined effect in accordance with a win / no decision result of the win / fail determination means, and a second entrance for producing a predetermined profit based on the entry of a game ball. And a game machine characterized in that the effect means changes the predetermined effect on the basis of a game ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined effect.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note 1, further comprising: a profit giving unit that gives a predetermined profit to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, and the production unit is the predetermined unit. A game stand that performs a specific effect that influences the predetermined effect, based on the game ball entering the second entrance during the effect.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note 1 or 2, wherein the rendering means includes a display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means has a game ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined rendering. Based on this, a part of the display effect based on the predetermined effect is covered with a part of the display effect based on the specific effect.

(Appendix 4)
4. The game table according to any one of appendices 1 to 3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are the game balls that have entered the first entrance and the second entrance. A game table, which is arranged at a position where it can enter the mouth.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to appendix 2, comprising a winning device that is in an advantageous state for a player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is highly likely to meet the predetermined condition. A game table characterized by a production that suggests that.

(Appendix 6)
A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when the game value giving condition is satisfied, a first entry area in which the game value giving condition is not met even if the game ball passes, and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value granting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball, and a win / loss determination means capable of executing a win / loss determination when the win / loss determination condition is satisfied; The symbol aspect corresponding to the result includes at least an informing means capable of stop display after the variable display of the symbol and an image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is configured separately from the informing means. In a gaming machine provided with a rendering means and a rendering control means capable of controlling the rendering means, the hit / miss determination condition includes at least that a game ball has passed through the first entry area. Yes, the production The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol variable display for performing a stop display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means after starting the variable display of the symbol. The second entry area is where the game ball can enter at least when the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a specific hit determination result, and the effect control means causes a big hit. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute at least a big hit announcement that gives an advance notice, and the big hit is generated under at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect control means is such that at least a part of the symbol variable display is difficult for the player to visually recognize while the symbol variable display is being displayed by the image display means. At least part of the symbol variation display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize, because the big hit notice can be at least caused by the effecting means, and the variation display of the symbol by the notifying means is at least part of the symbol variation display by the image display means. A game table characterized by being easily visible to the player even during the period.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to appendix 6, wherein the effect control means, during the stop display of the symbol by the image display means, the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the symbol becomes difficult for the player to see. At least a part of the symbol stop display by the image display unit is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, and the player can perform at least the effect production unit. A game table characterized by being easily visible.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note 6 or 7, wherein the effect control means, when the game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the variable display, the symbol It is possible to cause the effecting means to perform at least an effect that does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display, and the big hit notice does not cause the player to visually recognize the effect. Stand.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8, wherein the hit / damage determination result includes a first hit / miss judgment result and a second hit / miss judgment result, and the notification unit is the hit / miss judgment result. Is the first winning / losing determination result, it is possible to stop and display the first symbol aspect, and if the winning / loss determination result is the second winning / loss determination result, the first symbol aspect is A gaming table characterized by being able to stop and display a different second symbol aspect.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 6 to 9, wherein the rendering means is at least one of a first position where the symbol variation display by the image display means is not covered from the front and the symbol variation display. A movable body that is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position that covers the portion from the front, and the effect control unit is configured to move the movable body from the first position to the second position. A game table characterized in that it is possible to give a notice of a big hit to the movable body.

  Note that the above description can be applied to the gaming table described in other appendices and the gaming table described in this specification as appropriate.

(Appendix 11)
A plurality of entry areas into which the game ball can enter, and at least when the game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least the first entry area among the plurality of entry areas, at least a hit determination can be performed Means and auxiliary fluctuation determination means capable of executing at least auxiliary collision judgment when the game ball enters a second entrance area different from the predetermined entrance area among the plurality of entrance areas, and fluctuation of symbols After performing the display, first informing means capable of at least executing the first symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary winning / disabling determination, and after performing the variable display of the symbol, A second notifying means capable of at least executing a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary winning / disapproval determination, and a rendering means including at least the second notifying means, and at least the above A gaming machine provided with a production control means capable of controlling the output means, at least a time saving state in which a game ball easily enters the first entry area, and a time saving control means capable of controlling a non-time saving state. , The first entry area, after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the specific auxiliary win / loss determination of the results of the win / fail determination is stopped and displayed, the game ball Is capable of entering, the effect control means is capable of causing the effecting means to execute at least the predetermined effect and the second symbol variation display related to the result of the hit determination. The effect control means performs at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol variable display becomes difficult to visually recognize during a predetermined period during execution of the second symbol variable display. Letting It is possible that the first symbol variation display is easy to visually recognize even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-time saving state rather than in the time saving state. A game table characterized by being easy to be played.

  The first approach area referred to here is, for example, electric Chu, and the predetermined approach areas are, for example, the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu) and the first special figure starting port 230, and the second approach. The area is, for example, the universal figure starting port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, the symbol variation display of the universal symbol performed by the universal symbol display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, and the second symbol variation. The display is, for example, a decorative pattern variable display of a general figure performed by the decorative pattern display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming machine according to appendix 11, wherein the second notification means is an image display means, and the predetermined effect can be executed by at least the image display means. Is at least a predetermined display area capable of executing the second symbol variable display, the effect control means, in the predetermined display area, at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variable display A game table characterized in that a display effect different from the second symbol variable display can be executed in a period including a part.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of causing the effect means to execute at least the predetermined effect such that at least a part of the different display effects becomes difficult to visually recognize.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 12, wherein the different display effects that can be executed in the predetermined display area include at least one of a big hit announcement display and a game information display.

  The big hit notice display here includes a so-called look-ahead notice. Further, the game information display includes, for example, the number of times saved, the number of consecutive games, the number of acquired game balls, the number of pseudo games, and the like.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 13, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice during a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time saving state, The non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time-saving state is such that at least the game information display can be executed.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 14, wherein the specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary winning / disabling judgment and a symbol relating to the jackpot announcement. A game table characterized by being capable of executing the second symbol variable display.

  The above-mentioned predetermined period in the gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 11 to Supplementary Note 15 may be a period including at least part of the execution of the second symbol variable display. Further, the predetermined effect may include at least a big hit announcement capable of giving an announcement as to whether or not a big hit will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variable display in the non-time saving state. Further, in the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variable display of special figure 2 among the displays different from the second symbol variable display may be executable. While the special symbol 2 is interrupted during execution of the second symbol variation display, even if the different display is possible, even if the second symbol variation display can be preferentially executed. Good. It is possible to execute the notification during operation of the power-chu, and the notification mode of the notification during operation of the power-chu may differ depending on whether or not the second symbol variable display is executed. For example, the lamp control in the vicinity of the power switch may be different with or without the second symbol variable display. Specifically, the notification may be more flashy with the second symbol variable display. The fact that the notification is flashy here includes that the presentation period is long. Further, the second symbol variable display may be capable of varying only the symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary win / fail judgment. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed play, and it is easier to execute the second symbol variation display when left-handed. Further, it may be a gaming machine that left-hands in the non-electrically-supported state and right-hands in the electrically-supported state. Further, the opening pattern of the electric Chu includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, the second opening pattern is more advantageous than the first opening pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be executable at least when the second opening pattern is obtained.

  Note that the above description can be applied to the gaming table described in other appendices and the gaming table described in this specification as appropriate.

(Appendix 16)
It is equipped with an electric chu, a hit determination means (special figure), an auxiliary hit determination means (general figure), and a jackpot game control means, and a main figure variation display (first symbol variation display) and a sub-general figure variation display. It is a game table capable of performing (second symbol variation display), the sub-general figure variation is difficult to visually recognize due to the second effect, and the main general figure variation is the sub-general figure variation. A game table characterized in that it is easy to see even if it is difficult to see by the second effect, and the sub-universal figure fluctuation is more likely to be performed during a big hit game than during a big hit game.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming machine according to appendix 16, wherein a specific sub-universal figure variation of the sub-universal figure variation is more likely to be performed during a big-hit game than during a big-hit game. Game table.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to appendix 17, wherein the sub-universal figure variation can be executed at least in a first variation time and a second variation time, and the second variation is more than the first variation time. Is longer, and the specific sub-universal figure fluctuation can be executed in a fluctuation time including at least the second fluctuation time.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 16 to 18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, and The second opening pattern is more advantageous to the player than the opening pattern (for example, the game ball is easy to enter), and the sub-universal figure fluctuation is at least the electric Chu opens in the second opening pattern. A gaming table, which is capable of being executed in some cases.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note 18 or 19, wherein the sub-universal figure variation can be executed during a variation time including at least the first variation time during the big hit game. Stand.

  The specific sub-universal figure variation in the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 16 to Supplementary Note 20 may not be performed in the first variation time. Further, the sub-general figure fluctuations other than the specific sub-general figure fluctuations may not be performed in the second fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-universal figure fluctuation performed in the first fluctuation time may be capable of performing an effect that only notifies the result of the auxiliary hit determination. Further, the sub-universal figure change may not be performed during the big hit game. Further, at least a part of the sub-universal figure variation may be capable of executing the symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the big hit game, only the opening notification effect of the electric Chu may be executable. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handedness and left-handedness, and a predetermined firing strength (for example, right-handedness) may be easier to execute the sub-universal figure variation. Further, at least during a big hit game, the game table may be played with the predetermined launch strength (right hit).

  Note that the above description can be applied to the gaming table described in other appendices and the gaming table described in this specification as appropriate.

(Appendix 21)
The main universal figure is provided with a win / loss determination means (special figure), an auxiliary win / loss determination means (general drawing), a production means capable of at least giving a pre-reading notice, and a production control means capable of at least controlling the production means. A gaming table capable of performing variable display (first symbol variable display) and sub-universal symbol variable display (second symbol variable display), wherein the effect control means includes the prefetching notice and the sub-general diagram. It is possible to cause the effecting means to perform at least the variable display, and when the sub-universal figure variation is executed during execution of the prefetching notice, the subgeneral figure variation is at least one of the prefetching notices. A game table characterized by making it difficult to see the part.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming machine according to appendix 21, wherein at least a part of the sub-universal figure variation is capable of executing a symbol variation display including a jackpot notice.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming machine according to appendix 21 or 22, wherein the rendering means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means can execute the sub-universal figure variation and the prefetching notice. The display means has a predetermined display area in which the sub-universal figure variation can be executed, and the image display means has a look-ahead notice display area. When a figure change is made, the sub-universal figure change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the pre-reading notice display area, and make at least a part of the pre-reading notice difficult to view. Characteristic game table.

  It should be noted that the pre-reading notice is a notice of a pending change, the image display means has a pending display area, and when a predetermined sub-universal figure variation of the sub-universal figure variation is performed, the sub-universal figure variation is performed. The figure variation may be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make at least a part of the hold prefetching notice difficult to be visually recognized.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 21 to 23, wherein the gaming machine is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and has a reserved display area of special figure 1 and a reserved display area of special figure 2. Both of the reserved display areas are provided so as to sandwich a predetermined display area, and the sub-universal figure variation can make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the both reserved display areas. A gaming table characterized in that only one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the special-reading notice of special figure 2 is made difficult to visually recognize.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 24, characterized in that it is possible to perform an effect such that at least a part of the variation of the sub-universal figure is difficult to see. And a gaming table.

  The sub-universal figure variation in the game table described in Supplementary Note 21 to Supplementary Note 25 is at least a part of the suspension display areas (for example, the first suspension display area having the oldest winning timing) among the plurality of suspension display areas. It may be one that makes it difficult to see. Further, the first hold of the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 hold display areas may be made difficult to visually recognize. Further, it may be one that makes it difficult to visually recognize another hold such as the second hold. In addition, when the electric chu is opened and the special map 2 is interrupted during the non-electric power support state, at least a part of the holding of the special drawing 2 may be made difficult to be visually recognized by the electric chu open notification effect. Further, it is possible to make (at least) the notice of holding prefetch of special figure 1 in the non-electric power support state, and (at least) make it difficult to see the notice of holding prefetch of special figure 2 in the electric support state. It may be possible to do. Further, in a game table with a change in winning order, the specific hold display area that is difficult to see due to the change in the sub-universal figure can perform the hold display of special map 1 and the special display of special map 2. The function may be able to be switched for each special map fluctuation (in the non-electric power support state). In addition, when the presentation (for example, super reach etc.) is started during the look-ahead display and the above-mentioned sub-general-drawing variation is being performed at the same time as the decorative symbol variation display of the special figure, the sub-general figure variation The pre-reading pending display may be hidden, the sub-universal figure variation and the pre-reading pending display may be hidden, the pre-reading pending display may be left, and the sub-universal figure may be displayed. The fluctuation may be hidden.

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in each of the embodiments and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments and the supplementary notes.

(Appendix 26)
The winning / non-judgment determining means (special drawing), the auxiliary winning / unjudging determining means (general drawing), the rendering means, and the rendering control means capable of controlling at least the rendering means, and the main universal pattern variation display (first symbol variation display) ) And a sub-universal figure variation display (second symbol variation display), it is possible to perform an effect such that at least a part of the sub-general figure variation is difficult to see. It is provided with an image display means and a production movable means, the production movable means is at least operable as the production, and the sub-general figure change is at least performed by the image display means. In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect movable means, and at least one of the effect movable means and the image operated as the effect. Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.

(Appendix 27)
In the gaming machine according to appendix 26, when the sub-general-drawing variation is performed first, it is difficult to visually recognize the sub-general-drawing variation in the production, and the production is performed first. In the gaming table, the sub-universal figure variation using the image display means is not executed.

(Appendix 28)
The game table according to appendix 26 or 27, wherein the image display means has a hold display area, and the effect makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display area. Characteristic game table.

(Appendix 29)
The game table according to any one of appendices 26 to 28, wherein the sub-universal figure variation is more likely to be performed during a non-big hit game than during a big hit game. Stand.

(Appendix 30)
30. The game table according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein the sub-universal figure fluctuation is more likely to be performed in the non-electric power support state than in the electric power support state.

  The effects on the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 21 to Supplementary Note 25 may include at least a big hit announcement. Further, the effect movable means may be operable at least as a big hit announcement. Further, the effect movable means may be capable of at least moving to the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in each of the embodiments and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments and the supplementary notes.

(Appendix 31)
A main general-purpose figure variation display (first display) is provided, which includes a power controller, a win / loss determination means (special figure), an auxiliary win / loss determination means (general figure), a production means, and a production control means capable of controlling at least the production means. Is a game table capable of performing a display variation display) and a sub-universal figure variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the production control means at least produces the production means and the sub-public figure variation. It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute the effect so that at least a part of the electric Chu opening notification effect after the sub-universal figure change becomes difficult to see. While executing, it is in a state in which entry into the electric Chu is allowed, and while making it difficult to visually confirm the electric Chu opening notification effect being executed by the effect in the special figure variation display based on entering the Den Chu , Said Mei Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming machine described in appendix 31, the special symbol 1 symbol variation display means capable of performing at least the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1, and the special symbol 2 symbol variable display capable of performing at least the symbol variable display of the special symbol 2. Means, and makes it difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect that is being executed by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 described above.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 31 or 32, wherein the special FIG. 2 is more likely to be provided with an advantageous jackpot.

(Appendix 34)
This gaming table is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and is provided with at least a pre-reading notice means capable of executing the pre-reading notice of special figure 1, and at least the sub-general figure variation display is executed during the pre-reading notice execution of said special figure 1. Yes, it is possible that the universal figure variation is won and Den Chu opens, and even if the pattern variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the pre-reading notice is given, and the pre-reading notice effect display visually confirms the electric Chu opening notification production. A game table characterized by making it difficult.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric chew opening notification effect being executed by the effect in the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 according to the entry into the electric chute. In addition, in the winning order variation machine, when the special figure is held for a predetermined number or less (small or 0) and the symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped, the electric power release notification effect being executed is switched on. It may be difficult to visually recognize in the effect in the symbol variable display of the special figure corresponding to the ball entering the chew. In addition, during the non-electric power support, the special map 89 can be won almost alternately, and during the electric power support state, the game table that can continuously win the special map 2 by opening the electric chew through the fluctuation of the general map is being executed. The electric-chu open notification effect may be made difficult to visually recognize in the effect in the symbol variable display of the special drawing 2 according to the winning. By doing so, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the advantageous symbol variation display of special FIG. Further, the attacker has a first big hit (a disadvantageous big hit) and a relatively long second big hit (an advantageous big hit), each of which has a relatively short opening time. The second big hit may appear more easily than the second big hit, or the first big hit may not appear.

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in each of the embodiments and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments and the supplementary notes.

(Appendix 35)
A first entry area in which a game ball can enter, a second entry area in which a game ball can enter, and a first entry / exit determination that can be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The winning / unlocking determination means, the second winning / unlocking determination means capable of executing the second winning / unlocking determination when the second condition is satisfied, and the first winning / unlocking determination means after the variable display of the symbols is started. A gaming machine provided with an informing means capable of executing a symbol variable display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first hit / miss determination result, and a production means including at least a display means capable of executing the display, At least one of the requirements for the establishment of the first condition is at least that the game ball enters the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first hit determination result. If the result is a specific acceptance / rejection result, the available time is limited The game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for satisfying the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area. The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least a result display relating to the result of the first hit determination, and The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variable display is being executed, and the display means can display the result display while the stop display of the symbol is being executed. That is, the effect display is displayed over an effect time that is equal to or longer than a first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display. Features Gaming table.

  The first entry area is, for example, the universal figure starting opening 228, the second entry area is, for example, Den Chu, and the first winning / disabling determination is, for example, the universal determination (general drawing lottery), The second winning / unwinning determination is, for example, winning / unwinning determination of a special drawing (special drawing lottery).

(Appendix 36)
The gaming machine according to appendix 35, wherein the gaming state is configured to be transferable to any one of a plurality of states, the plurality of states include at least a first state, and the plurality of states include It includes at least a second state, the second state has a higher probability that the first hit determination result is the specific hit determination result is higher than the first state, the display The means is more likely to display the effect display during the period in the first state than in the period in the second state.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming machine according to appendix 36, wherein the variable display of symbols is performed over a display time of any of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times is at least a first display time. It includes, the plurality of display time is one that includes at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, the first state is The gaming table, wherein the display time is more likely to be the second display time than the second state.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein the result display is the second entry area when the first hit determination result is a specific hit determination result. A game table characterized in that it includes at least an enterable display indicating that a game ball can enter.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 38, wherein the effect means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur. At least a part of the effect display is generated while at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area is being displayed, and the effect display is displayed by the display means. Is at least capable of executing the jackpot notice so that it is difficult for the player to see, and the variation display of the symbol by the notifying means is such that at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult for the player to see. A game table characterized by being easily visible to the player even during the period.

(Appendix 40)
A first entry area in which a game ball can enter, a second entry area in which a game ball can enter, and a first entry / exit determination that can be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The winning / unlocking determination means, the second winning / unlocking determination means capable of executing the second winning / unlocking determination when the second condition is satisfied, and the first winning / unlocking determination means after the variable display of the symbols is started. A gaming machine provided with an informing means capable of executing a symbol variable display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first hit / miss determination result, and a production means including at least a display means capable of executing the display, At least one of the requirements for the establishment of the first condition is at least that the game ball enters the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first hit determination result. If the result is a specific acceptance / rejection result, the available time is limited The game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for satisfying the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area. The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least a result display relating to the result of the first hit determination, and The production means is at least capable of executing a big hit announcement to give an advance notice of whether or not a big hit will occur, and the big hit is generated on the condition that at least one game ball has entered the second approach area. The effect display started to be displayed when the jackpot notification is being executed is more than the effect display that is being displayed when the jackpot notification is not being executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

  Also here, the first entry area is, for example, the universal figure starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, Den Chu, and the first winning / disallowing determination is, for example, the universal figure winning / disallowing determination (general drawing lottery). ), The second winning / unwinning determination is, for example, winning / unwinning determination of a special drawing (special drawing lottery).

(Appendix 41)
The gaming machine according to appendix 40, wherein the rendering means at least issues the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the rendering display is difficult for the player to visually recognize while the rendering display is being performed by the display means. It is executable, and the variable display of the symbols by the notification means is easy for the player to visually recognize even during a period in which at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A gaming table characterized by.

  Note that the gaming table described in appendices 35 to 41 may be a gaming table in which the opening time of the electric chew during the non-electric support is shorter than that during the electric support. That is, the accessible time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, and the first time The state may be such that the approachable time is more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing so, it may be possible to expect the time in the first state to be a time other than the first time.

  In addition, the public figure production may be easier to perform in the electric chu long opening than in the electric chu short opening. That is, the display means is more likely to execute the effect display when the approachable time is the second time than when it is the first time. In this case, it may be possible to have an expectation that it will be the second time.

  Further, the time for the short public figure production may be longer than the time for the short general figure variation display. That is, in the second state, the display time is more likely to be the first display time than in the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. It may be. Further, the approachable display may be displayed during the approachable time.

  Further, the display means has a display area capable of performing at least display, the display area includes at least a first display area, the display means, the first effect display the first effect display. May be displayable in at least a part of the display area.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing a notice display regarding the result of the second hit determination in at least a part of the first display area (example shown in FIG. 193). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the notice display may be common. For example, the relationship between the variable display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. 169 (b) and the variable display pattern shown in (D) can be cited.

  Further, when performing the special figure effect when the special figure has not changed, the big hit notice (for example, "super hot") may not be stopped and displayed, or even when the special figure effect is performed when the special figure has not changed, It may be one that displays a variable display including a big hit notice (for example, "super hot").

  Furthermore, the general-drawing effect may be performed only during the non-electric power support, or may be performed only during the non-big hit state.

  The effect display includes at least a first display (for example, a variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, a result display or an effect image display may be included). The effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an enterable display). Here, the third display may have a larger display area than the first display, may have a larger display area than the second display, or The display area may be larger than the display.

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in each of the embodiments and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments and the supplementary notes.

(Appendix 42)
A symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variable display, a hold display means capable of displaying a hold icon, and a first control means capable of performing at least display control of the symbol display means. , A second control means capable of at least performing display control of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variable display is performed after variable display of symbols The symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the hit determination is stopped and displayed, and the first symbol display means of the symbol display means is the symbol variation when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform at least display, and the second symbol display means of the symbol display means performs at least the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. It is possible that, the first symbol variation conditions include at least that there was a ball in the first starting region of the starting region, the second symbol variation conditions, start It includes at least that there is a ball in the second starting area of the area, the hold display means, in connection with the start of the symbol variable display, a hold icon corresponding to the symbol variable display It is possible to perform at least a first display relating to a certain digestion hold icon, and the hold display means is a hold icon that is a hold icon that does not correspond to the design change display in association with the start of the design change display. It is possible to perform at least a second display regarding the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least the undigested hold icon of a predetermined upper limit number or less. The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of undigested hold icons, the first control means, in association with the start of the symbol variable display, a command signal to the second control means. At least it can be transmitted, the second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal, the second control The control means can start at least the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means has at least a first display area. Yes, the hold display means has at least a second display area, the first display, the digestion hold icon from the first display area to the second display area is small. At least move (hereinafter referred to as the first move. ), The digestion pending icon is erased in the second display area, and the second display is such that the display position of the undigested pending icon is different from that in the first display area. Is moved to at least the position (hereinafter, referred to as a second movement), and the hold display means displays the first hold icon as the hold icon when the first hold increasing condition is satisfied. It is possible to display at least an increase, and the hold display means can display at least a second hold icon as the hold icon at least when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first hold increasing condition includes at least that there is a ball in the first starting area, and the second hold increasing condition is an entry in the second starting area. There is a sphere If at least the first hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display area of the first display area. In the case where the second hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the second hold icon is displayed in the second symbol display means display area of the first display area. The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area in which the deletion is performed for the first hold icon is the second hold icon. Is the same as the display area in which the deletion is performed, the first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, the hold display means, the effect display by the undigested hold icon It is possible to perform, the hold display means is also capable of performing effect display by the digestion hold icon, at least all of the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon is for completing the second movement in a second time, and at least the digestion hold icon in the display area for the second symbol display means is the first movement in the first time. Is completed, and the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in each of the embodiments and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments and the supplementary notes.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fifth embodiments. For example, the gaming table according to the present invention is limited to the pachinko machine. However, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and a reel provided corresponding to each reel are provided, and the rotation of the reels is individually stopped. A stop button for making the winning combination, a lottery means for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning are won by a lottery, a reel stop control means for carrying out a stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and a lottery The symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the means, the determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination, and the symbol If stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

<Other Embodiments>
Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 234 to 261. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments other than the present embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 234 to 261 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 234. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage dish, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 236) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 (see FIG. 236) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 236) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 700. Provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. Since the chance button 700 is one of the characteristic parts of the present invention, it will be described in detail in <Chance button> below.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching device (not shown) that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod. And a launch mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 235 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 234 as viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play the game. The ball to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 236 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. The special symbol display device wins the special symbol variation game and the special symbol display device stops the big hit symbol. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap.

  In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 237. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two random number generation circuits are built in this circuit. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, bottom plate full A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a ton sensor and outputting an amplification result or a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210. In order to control the display of the drive circuit 326 and the various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Drive circuit 330 and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. are doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It stores in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various performance data, and the like. Is connected to the ROM 406 in which is stored.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, a detector 710 for detecting the detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and image data or the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 is read to use the work area of the VRAM 436. VDP 43 for generating a display image and displaying the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the production movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, and the current position of the production movable body 224. Effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp driving circuit for controlling the game board lamp 532. 530, a gaming underframe lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the gaming underframe lamp 542, and lighting control by serial communication between the gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and the gaming underframe lamp driving circuit 540. Is connected to the serial communication control circuit 520 for performing.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIG. 238 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. FIG. 238 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2.

  Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 238 (a), ten types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 238 (a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R big jack symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  “Special map C” is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

  “Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same big hit without 2R time saving. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 238 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") corresponding to the 15R big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, in which three identical decorative patterns are arranged. 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative symbols are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" suddenly changed or a sudden 2R big hit called "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “special drawing I” and the second deviation of “special drawing J”, stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 236 (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 238 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 238 (c), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments that are turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 239. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 239 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 237. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically set (to prevent the processing abnormality from being detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 237 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning openings 226, 234 or the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage circuit 318 stores the random number value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Value is obtained from the special register, the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number counter of the random number generating circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is obtained from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 2 winning random number value and the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON / OFF driving control of the 7-segment LED is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 238 (c)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 238 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 238 (a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special map B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special map probability fluctuation flag is on, the special map C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure Stochastic flag is off, Special figure F when the figure probability variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first deviation flag is on In the case of, the special figure I, when the second deviation flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so as to have the respective aspects of the special figure I. , The setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special figure E), suddenly normal pattern (special figure F), first small hitting pattern (special figure G), second small hitting pattern (special figure H), first out of pattern (special figure) I), and the fixed display of any one of the first outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 hours are set in the hour saving frequency storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the hour saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special effect The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related that are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 239 is executed. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 239.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether or not the chance button 700 has been pressed. As will be described later in detail, when the result of the determination is that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into the effect data corresponding to the operation of pressing the chance button 700, or the chance. When the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, a process of preparing effect data corresponding to an operation acceptance effect described later is performed. In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700, while the second sub-control unit 500 controls the drive of the movable unit 704 of the chance button 700. The detection process and the drive control regarding the chance button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700). Is set to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 242. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, the movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. Although details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command regarding the effect movable body 224 or a control command regarding the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub-control unit 400, the control command is changed to the control command. Performs various corresponding processes.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

<Movable body control processing>
FIG. 243 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub-control unit main process, and FIG. 243 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of the movable body interrupt process. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in FIG. 9A, various received command processes are performed based on the command received from the first sub control unit 400. The received command various processes include, for example, a production movable body process performed when a command regarding the production movable body 224 is received, and a chance button movable body process performed when a command regarding the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received. Can be mentioned.

  More specifically, in the chance button movable body process, the control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button drive storage area provided in the RAM 508, or the control stored in the chance button drive storage area is performed. Performs processing such as updating information to new information and discarding old information.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 7B at a predetermined cycle, triggered by the timer interrupt described above. In step S1101 of this movable body interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-mentioned chance button drive storage area, When the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. As a result, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not the control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the production movable body 224 is stored, and if the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is driven. Output to the circuit 516. As a result, the production movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, the detection signal from the production movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, and the position information of the production movable body 224 is detected based on the detection signal. In the present embodiment, the detection process of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but it may be performed in step S1102.

  In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In this output information update process, a process of updating the control information of the effect movable body 224, the control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, and the like are performed.

<Chance button>
Next, the structure of the above-described chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 244 and 245. Note that FIG. 244 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700. FIG. 244A is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. A side sectional view of the entire chance button 700, and FIG. 7C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. Further, FIGS. 7D to 7F are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b in the respective states of FIGS.

  Also, FIG. 245 (a) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 245 (b) shows that the chance button 700 moves from the initial position to the operation completion position. FIG. 3C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door with a ball storage tray 108 in the state (in operation), and FIG. 7C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door with a ball storage tray 108 when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the chance button 700 includes a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and a movable portion 704 (movable up and down with respect to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage tray to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive that enables the movable portion 704 to move up and down. The unit 708 (708a, 708b) and the detection unit 710 capable of detecting the position of the movable unit 704 are configured. Although not shown, the chance button lamp 138 described above is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

  The fixed portion 702 is configured by two rod-shaped fixed shafts 702a provided upright on the ball storage tray door 108, and a disc-shaped fixed plate 702b fixed to the tips of these two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 244 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later and serve to guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has a cylindrical upper case 704a that has an opening on one side and the other side is an operation surface 704a1 with which a player's finger or hand comes into contact, and an upper portion so as to close the opening of this upper case 704a. The disk-shaped lower case 704b is fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 244 (d) to (f), two insertion holes 704b1 inserted into each of the fixed shafts 702a and a central portion into which a rotary member 708b of a drive unit 708 described later is inserted into the lower case 704b. An insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as a base end, and a detection protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as a base end. The pieces 704b4 are formed.

  The drive unit 708 includes a drive source 708a including a motor and a solenoid, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove portion 708b1 is linearly formed on a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b from one side to the other side in the longitudinal direction, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end side of the concave groove portion 708b1. An engagement recess 708b2 is formed that can engage with the piece 704b3.

  In the rotating member 708b, as shown in FIG. 244 (d), the engaging recess 708b2 engages with the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b, so that the movable portion 704 moves upward by the urging force of the spring 706. As shown in FIG. 244 (e), the movable recess 708b2 is disengaged from the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b, so that the movable portion 704 is attached to the spring 706. It is rotatable between a permission position that allows upward movement by power and a permission position.

  The detection unit 710 is composed of an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is configured to be movable back and forth between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 244 (b), is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed). When it is not operated and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b does not enter between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the detecting unit 710), the movable unit 704 moves downward as shown in FIG. 244 (c). It is possible to discriminate the state in which the detection button 704b4 of the lower case 704b is pushed between the light projecting section and the light receiving section of the lower case 704b.

  At the initial position shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permission position to the restricting position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708 and is moved downward. It is a state that can only be moved to. In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  At the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 244 (b) and 245 (c), the rotation member 708b is rotated from the regulation position to the permission position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the regulation of the upward movement so that the spring 706 moves. The urging force moves upward, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, and the upward movement is restricted again, and only the downward direction is possible. Also in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 244 (c), when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The operation of pressing the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 244 (c) is the state when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 244 (b) and 245 (c) when the button is pressed. In the present embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed close to the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the driving portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permission position to the regulation position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 245 (b), that is, the chance button 700 moves from the initial position shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a) to FIGS. 244 (b) and 245. In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 is detected. Is ignored (the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is not judged to be valid).

  With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing not intended by the player. In some cases, such a situation can be prevented. In the present embodiment, the operation of pressing the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of pressing the chance button 700 is enabled. May be.

  Further, when the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when it is pressed before the detection is accepted), the operation of pressing the chance button may be ignored. The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, the chance button may be operated or the chance button may not be operated. In these cases, the chance button acceptance effect may be provided, or the chance button acceptance effect may not be performed.

<Operation reception production>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the operating state of the chance button 700, the acceptance / non-acceptance of the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700, and the executability of the operation acceptance effect.

  Also, FIG. 247 (a) is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the ball storage tray door 108 when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 247 (b) is a ball when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 7C is an external perspective view of the vicinity of the door 108 with a storage tray, showing the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when a failure occurs). FIG. Further, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 7E is when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. It is the figure which shows one example of the operation acceptance production which it does, the figure (f), one example of the operation acceptance production which is done when chance button 700 stops between initial position and operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is the figure which showed.

<Operation reception performance / initial position>
When the chance button 700 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 247 (a) (before the operation shown in FIG. 246), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the detection unit 710 to move the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b. It becomes a detectable state (a state in which the detection result can be accepted). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at the initial position, the chance button effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect of changing an image or a character displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 according to the number of times and the speed of pressing the chance button 700, or the timing of pressing the chance button 700. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. In other words, at least some aspects (display (for example, animation, image, character, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) may be changed according to the operation of pressing the chance button 7000.

  Further, this partial aspect may be one or plural, and for example, in the case of plural, a combination with the same category (display, sound, motion, color, etc.) (for example, LED 1 The color may change from red to blue, the LED 2 may change from white to blue, etc., and combination with different categories (for example, display on liquid crystal (change from display A to display B) and chance button). It may be a motion of itself (change from no motion to a rotating motion).

  Further, when the chance button 700 is stopped at the initial position (before the operation), the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 247 (a). In addition, by suggesting to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed by causing the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), as shown in FIG. Using the pattern display device 208, an operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed (in this example, the character display "Press the chance button!" And the blue color at the initial position) The image display imitating the chance button 700 that has emitted the light and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

  In this way, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light or executing the operation acceptance effect, the player can easily recognize that the chance button pressing operation is effective, and the player can be sure at the initial position. The pressing operation can be performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative pattern display device 208, and for example, the effect using the various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, or the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be any effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed.

<Operation acceptance production / during operation>
When the first sub-control unit 400 is moving the chance button 700 from the initial position shown in FIG. 247 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 247 (d) (during the operation shown in FIG. 246), the detection is performed. Even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the unit 710, the detection result is ignored (the detection result cannot be accepted). Therefore, the first sub control unit 400 does not execute the chance button effect described above. Note that after the detection result of the chance button 700 is received (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once valid), it is determined whether the chance button 700 is in operation, and In this case, the chance button effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 does not turn on the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). Is configured as follows. In this way, if the chance button 700 is not made to emit light and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily recognize that the chance button pressing operation is invalid, and it is disadvantageous due to an erroneous operation. It does not suffer.

<Operation reception performance / motion completion position>
When the chance button 700 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 247 (b) (after the operation shown in FIG. 246), the first sub control unit 400 causes the detection unit 710 to detect the detection piece of the lower case 704b. 704b4 can be detected (the detection result can be accepted). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this operation completion position, the above-described chance button effect is performed.

  Further, when the chance button 700 is stopped at the operation completion position (after the operation is completed), the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the opportunity button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. As shown, by making the chance button 700 emit light of a predetermined color (for example, red), it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed, and as shown in FIG. 247 (e). , An operation acceptance effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed using the decorative pattern display device 208 (in this example, the character display “press chance button!” And operation completion) The image display imitating the chance button 700 emitting red light at the position and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

  As described above, by causing the chance button 700 to emit light or performing the operation acceptance effect, the player can easily recognize that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the operation completion position. Can be pressed.

<Operation acceptance production / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
As shown in FIG. 247 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. It will be in a different state (a state in which the detection result can be accepted). Here, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position. An example is a case where the urging force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable portion 704 cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position.

  Further, even if the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 does not press the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 247 (f). An operation acceptance effect that suggests to the player that it is possible (in this example, the same effect as the operation acceptance effect performed after the operation is completed (effect shown in FIG. 247 (e))) is performed.

  In this way, even if the chance button 700 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the chance button 700 can be operated, even if the chance button 700 is broken, the chance button 700 is operated. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly inform that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and encourage the player's operation. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 is not made to emit a predetermined color, but for example, a color different from the initial position and the operation completion position is used. The light may be emitted (for example, green) or the same color (for example, blue or red) as before or after the operation is completed.

  Further, in this example, an example in which the chance button 700 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color is shown, but for example, it may be blinked in a predetermined color. In this case, the initial position, the operation completion position, the initial position and the operation completion The blinking pattern may be changed at each stop between positions. For example, in the initial position, blinking is repeated in the first cycle (for example, 1 second), and in the operation completion position, blinking is repeated in the second cycle (for example, 0.5 second) shorter than the first cycle. And the operation completion position, the blinking is repeated in a third cycle (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first cycle.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the pressing operation can be performed in each state, and also that each state is different. It may be possible to perform a pressing operation suitable for the state.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, the first operation unit 756, and the second operation) that can be operated by the player. The part 758, the bet button 132, and the pressing surfaces of these buttons and the operation unit, the rendering means that can execute at least the rendering (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a). , A base 754) and a movement control means capable of at least executing movement control (for example, a second sub-control unit 500), wherein the operating means is the movement control means. When the control is performed, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a), FIG. 247 (a), FIG. 248 (a), and FIG. 258 (a)) to the second position (for example, , 245 (c), FIG. 247 (c), FIG. 248 (b), and FIG. 258 (c) (movement completion position), and the production means is operated by the movement control. When the operation means moved to the second position is operated, at least a special effect can be executed, and the effect means is the operation means despite the movement control being performed. Even when the button does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, an effect when the button shown in FIG. 261 (c) is pressed) is generated in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game machine characterized by being executable.

  In addition, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is operable by a player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet). The buttons 132, and the pressing surfaces of these buttons and the operating unit, the rendering means that can execute at least the rendering (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). And a movement control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing movement control for moving the game machine, wherein the operation means performs the movement control by the movement control means. In this case, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a), FIG. 247 (a), FIG. 248 (a), and FIG. 258 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 245 ( c) 247 (c), 248 (b), 258 (c) (movement completion position), and the effect means is when a special effect execution condition is satisfied (for example, bet). When the button 132 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position, a special effect (for example, an effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 261 (c)) ) Is at least executable, and the special effect execution condition is satisfied when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition of the plurality of conditions is satisfied. The above is true when the operation means moved to the second position by the movement control is operated, and the second condition of the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is Done Nevertheless, even if the operating means does not move to the second position, it is established according to the operation of the operating means, the gaming table. .

  According to the game table of the present embodiment, even if the operating means cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operating means, the operating means is operated by the player. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, operation accepting means capable of accepting at least the operation by the player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations). The operation means may be provided in the operation accepting means, including a surface of a part (including a surface that is not a button).

  Further, the special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of acceptance of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the rendering means may be capable of performing at least rendering in response to the player operating the operating means even when the moved means is located at the first position. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, it may be possible to increase the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, it is provided with an informing means capable of at least informing the operation of the operating means, wherein the informing means moves the operating means to the second position in spite of the movement control. Even if there is no such notification, the notification may be given.

  In addition, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game table provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 700) that can be operated by the player, and the operation means includes a player. A contactable operation part (for example, upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation part is moved from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a)) to a second position (for example, FIG. 245 ( drive means (for example, drive section 708) movable to at least the operation completion position (c), drive control means (for example, second sub-control section 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive means, and the drive When the operation unit is operated by the player after the operation unit has been moved to the second position by the means, at least an effect unit capable of executing an effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), With the performance The means has not been moved to the second position after the drive means controls the operation part to move the operation part from the first position to the second position. Even in the case (for example, when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 247 (c)), at least the effect can be executed in response to the player operating the operation means. (For example, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the chance button 700 is pressed at the timing of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button corresponding to the press operation of the chance button 700 is performed. It is possible to produce), which is a game table.

  According to the gaming table of the present embodiment, even if the operating unit cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operating unit, the operating unit is operated by the player. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by suggesting to the player that the operation has been accepted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where the drive means is in the middle of control for moving the operation portion from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 245 (b)). In addition, it may be configured such that the effect is not executed even when the operating means is operated by the player.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of acceptance of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least the effect may be executed in response to the operation of the operation unit by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period during which the operation can be detected, it may be possible to increase the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, it is provided with an informing means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of at least informing the operation of the operating means, wherein the informing means has the operation portion in the second position. The notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 247 (f)) may be performed even when the notification has not been moved to.

  With such a configuration, by notifying that the operation unit can be operated even if the operation unit does not move to the position where it originally moves, it is possible for the player to miss the opportunity to operate the operation unit. Sometimes it can be prevented. In addition, by giving the same notification as when moving to the second position, it may be possible for the player to operate with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player can feel a sense of discomfort, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. In some cases, it can be treated. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is operable by a player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet). The button 132, and the pressing surface of these buttons and the operating unit, the rendering unit that can execute at least the rendering (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the notification unit that can perform the reporting at least (for example, the chance button). The lamp 138, the decorative pattern display device 208) and the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). In a gaming table provided, the operation means is in a first position (for example, FIG. 245 (a), when the movement control is performed by the movement control means). 247 (a), FIG. 248 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 258 (a) to a second position (for example, FIG. 245 (c), FIG. 247 (c), FIG. 248 (b), FIG. 258 ( The operation means is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and when the operation means that has moved to the second position by the movement control is operated, At least an effect (effect when the button shown in FIG. 261 (c) is pressed) can be executed, and the notification unit is configured such that the operation unit sets the second position in spite of the movement control being performed. The player can operate the operating means even when the player does not move to the position (for example, when the player stops between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 247 (c)). Can be reported at least (for example, FIG. 247 (f)). It is possible to perform operation acceptance effect as shown), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is operable by a player (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet). The button 132, and the pressing surface of these buttons and the operating unit, the rendering unit that can execute at least the rendering (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the notification unit that can perform the reporting at least (for example, the chance button). The lamp 138, the decorative pattern display device 208) and the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). In a gaming table provided, the operation means is in a first position (for example, FIG. 245 (a), when the movement control is performed by the movement control means). 247 (a), FIG. 248 (a), and the initial position shown in FIG. 258 (a) to a second position (for example, FIG. 245 (c), FIG. 247 (c), FIG. 248 (b), FIG. 258 ( c), the effect means is a special effect (effect when the button shown in FIG. 261 (c) is pressed) when the special effect execution condition is satisfied. Is at least executable, the special effect execution condition is satisfied when any of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, one of the plurality of conditions, The movement control is performed when the operation means moved to the second position by the movement control is operated, and the notification means performs the operation despite the movement control being performed. If the means did not move to the second position Even in the case (for example, in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 247 (c)), it can be at least informed that the player can operate the operation means. (For example, it is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 247 (f)), which is a gaming table.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even if the operating means cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operating means or the like, by informing the operation, the game is played. In some cases, the player can operate the operation unit without anxiety, and in addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of acceptance of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

  In addition, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means has been moved to the second position due to the movement control being performed. (For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 247 (e)) is executed at least, and the notification unit does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed. Even in such a case, it is configured to execute at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 247 (f)) as the notification that suggests that the operating means has moved to the second position. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the player originally should have moved, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the originally moved position. There are cases. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the operation means does not move to the position where it originally moves, and the player is informed that "this variation can be expected". In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, by giving the same notification as when moving to the second position, it may be possible for the player to operate with peace of mind.

  Further, the notifying means is a plurality of notifying means (for example, two chance button lamps 138 and a decorative symbol display device 208), and that the player can operate the operating means. The notification may be possible by at least one of the notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation by issuing a plurality of notifications that prompt operation.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can inform that the player can operate the operating means (for example, the chance button 700) that the player can operate and the operating means. A notification table (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative pattern display device 208), and the operation unit is provided with an operation unit (for example, an upper case 704a) with which the player can contact. A drive capable of at least moving the operation unit from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a)) to a second position (for example, an operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c)). Means (for example, drive section 708), drive control means (for example, second sub control section 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive means, and the drive section for moving the operation section to the second position. After that, when the player operates the operation means, at least an effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the informing means, the drive means operates the operation. When the operation section is not moved to the second position after performing control to move the section from the first position to the second position (for example, in FIG. 247 (c)). Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (f)). It is possible to perform an operation reception effect), which is a gaming table.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, even if the operation unit cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is notified by prompting the operation. In some cases, the player can operate the operation unit without anxiety, and in addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where the driving means is in the middle of control for moving the operating portion from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 245 (b)). In addition, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of acceptance of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notifying means is a plurality of notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138 and two decorative symbol display devices 208), and among the plurality of notifying means, the player can operate the operating means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation by issuing a plurality of notifications that prompt operation.

  In addition, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to an operation of the operation unit when the operation unit is not moved to the second position. May be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable by not performing the effect obtained as a result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There are cases. Further, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and to easily notice the malfunction of the operating means.

  Further, when the operation section has not been moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation means may not be accepted (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from the operation of the operation means or to carefully handle the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and to easily notice the malfunction of the operating means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (e)). (Operation reception effect shown) is performed at least, and even when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the same suggestion as the notification indicating that the operation unit has moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 247 (f) may be configured to be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the player originally should have moved, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the originally moved position. There are cases. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the operation means does not move to the position where it originally moves, and the player is informed that "this variation can be expected". In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, by giving the same notification as when moving to the second position, it may be possible for the player to operate with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player can feel a sense of discomfort, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. In some cases, it can be treated. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

<Modification of chance button>
Next, a modified example of the chance button will be described. FIG. 248 (a) is an external perspective view showing the vicinity of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 248 (b) is an external perspective view showing the vicinity of the chance button 750 after the completion of the operation. Further, FIG. 249 is a front view of the chance button 750 seen from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

  The chance button 750 has a substantially triangular prism-shaped base 754 whose side view is an isosceles triangle shape, a first operation portion 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. The second operation portion 758 provided on the second surface orthogonal to each other, the first gear 754b fixed to the rotating shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and the second gear 754b meshed with the first gear 754b. A gear 754c and a drive source 754d including a motor for rotationally driving the second gear 754c are included. By activating the drive source 754d, the base 754 of the chance button 750 uses the rotating shaft 754a as an axis center between the initial position shown in FIG. 248 (a) and the operation completion position shown in FIG. 248 (b). It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor and a sensor circuit that can detect the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 248 (a), this detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 is shown in FIG. 248 (b). When it is at the operation completion position shown in, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. That is, the player can operate the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 248 (a). Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  In addition, the second operation unit 758 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor and a sensor circuit that can detect the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. When the base 754 is located at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 248 (b), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while the base 754 displays the detection result. ), The detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can operate the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 248 (b). Even when the base 754 is at the initial position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can inform that the player can operate the operating means (for example, the chance button 700) that the player can operate and the operating means. A notification table (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative pattern display device 208), and the operation unit is provided with an operation unit (for example, an upper case 704a) with which the player can contact. A drive capable of at least moving the operation unit from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 245 (a)) to a second position (for example, an operation completion position shown in FIG. 245 (c)). Means (for example, drive section 708), drive control means (for example, second sub control section 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive means, and the drive section for moving the operation section to the second position. After that, when the player operates the operation means, at least an effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the informing means, the drive means operates the operation. When the operation section is not moved to the second position after performing control to move the section from the first position to the second position (for example, in FIG. 247 (c)). Even when it is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (f)). It is possible to perform an operation reception effect), which is a gaming table.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, even if the operation unit cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means, the game is notified by prompting the operation. In some cases, the player can operate the operation unit without anxiety, and in addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case where the driving means is in the middle of control for moving the operating portion from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 245 (b)). In addition, the operation means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of acceptance of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notifying means is a plurality of notifying means (for example, a chance button lamp 138 and two decorative symbol display devices 208), and among the plurality of notifying means, the player can operate the operating means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation by issuing a notification prompting the operation. It should be noted that the plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means of the plurality of notification means play the operation means. You may notify at least that a person can operate.

  In addition, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to an operation of the operation unit when the operation unit is not moved to the second position. May be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable by not performing the effect obtained as a result of accepting the operation, and to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. There are cases. Further, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and to easily notice the malfunction of the operating means.

  Further, when the operation section has not been moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation means may not be accepted (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable by not accepting the detection of the operation, and to refrain from the operation of the operation means or to carefully handle the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make the player feel uncomfortable and to easily notice the malfunction of the operating means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification unit indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (e)). (Operation reception effect shown) is performed at least, and even when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the same suggestion as the notification indicating that the operation unit has moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 247 (f) may be configured to be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the player originally should have moved, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the originally moved position. There are cases. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the operation means does not move to the position where it originally moves, and the player is informed that "this variation can be expected". In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, by giving the same notification as when moving to the second position, it may be possible for the player to operate with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player can feel a sense of discomfort, refrain from operating the operation means, or carefully operate the operation means. In some cases, it can be treated. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

<Chance button 750 operation reception effect>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described with reference to FIG. 250. It should be noted that FIG. 10A is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 9B is a side view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. The cross-sectional view, FIG. 6C, is a side cross-sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure).

  Further, (d) of the figure is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and (e) of the figure is when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. It is the figure which shows one example of the operation acceptance production which it does, the figure (f), one example of the operation acceptance production which is done when chance button 750 stops between initial position and operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is the figure which showed.

<Operation reception performance / initial position>
As described above, the pachinko machine according to the modification validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 250 (a). On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated.

  Further, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation unit of the chance button 750 is used at a predetermined timing by using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 250 (d). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the pressing operation of 756 is possible (in this example, the character display "Press the chance button!", The image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and the downward direction) Image display of the arrow).

  Thus, if the operation reception effect is executed at a timing when the first operation unit 756 can be operated, the player can easily recognize that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can surely perform the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

  Note that, instead of (or in addition to) such an operation acceptance effect, the first operation unit 756 is made to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue) so that the first operation unit 756 can be pressed. It may be suggested to the player that there is. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative pattern display device 208, and for example, the effect using the various lamps 418, the effect using the speaker 120, the movable body (for example, the shielding device 246, the effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.

<Operation acceptance production / during operation>
In the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 250 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 250 (b) (during operation), the first operation unit is operated. Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are made invalid. Further, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.

<Operation reception performance / motion completion position>
When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 250 (b), the pachinko machine according to the modified example validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is made invalid. As described above, by depressing the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completion position, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completion position to the initial position, an object is provided between the chance button 750 and the main body. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's hand is caught and to improve safety.

  When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed at a predetermined timing using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 250 (e). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the operation of pressing the part 758 is possible (in this example, a character display different from the case of the first operation part 756, "Press the super chance button!", The image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed. In this way, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the mode of the operation reception effect corresponding to each operation unit is made different, it is possible to avoid pressing mistakes of the operation units, etc. In some cases, decline can be prevented. It should be noted that, instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the second operation unit 758 can be made to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, red) so that the second operation unit 758 can be pressed. It may be suggested to the player that there is.

  Note that the content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 250 (e), and for example, an image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be performed, and a downward arrow mark may be displayed. The image may not be displayed. Further, when the operation unit is caused to emit light, the brightness of the operation unit may be lower than the brightness of other parts (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200) or higher than the brightness of other parts. You may. With such a configuration, since the operation unit can be made more conspicuous than other parts, it may be easier for the player to recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player may be improved. is there.

  Further, as the operation reception effect, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) showing a period during which the operation can be received may be performed. In this case, the remaining time during which the operation means can receive the operation may be displayed. Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be detected at the same time. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 are detected. Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that both of the pressing operations are possible (for example, the character display "Press the chance button or the super chance button!", The first operation unit 756, and the second operation It is preferable to perform image display imitating the portion 758 and image display of a downward arrow). With such a configuration, it is possible that the variation of the operation by the player can be widened and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In addition, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that either one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “press chance button!”). Character notation). Further, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation acceptance notifications may be performed.

<Operation acceptance production / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
The pachinko machine according to the modification is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is caught on the main body or the like, and from the initial position to the operation completion position (or from the operation completion position). An example is the case where the rotation cannot be completed (to the initial position).

  Also, even if the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, it is possible for the player to press the chance button 750 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 250 (f). The suggested operation acceptance effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation acceptance effect (the effect shown in FIG. 250 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) is performed.

  In this way, even if the chance button 750 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if it is possible to accept the operation of the chance button 750, even if the chance button 750 is broken, the chance button 750 is operated. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Further, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and encourage the player's operation. it can.

  Note that the mode of the operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 250 (e)) performed when the player is at the operation completion position, and the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, , The operation reception effect shown in FIG. 250 (f) may be different. For example, in the operation reception effect performed when the player is at the operation completion position, the first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp) is used, while between the initial position and the operation completion position. A second type of notification means different from the first type (for example, three types of a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and a speaker) may be used for the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the same kind of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, an operation reception effect performed when the operation reception position is performed between the initial position and the operation completion position) And a speaker), some of the notification means may have different modes. For example, in the operation acceptance performance performed when the player is at the operation completion position, the first display (for example, character display and image display) is performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the operation performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. In the reception performance, a second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same manner.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to clearly inform whether the chance button 750 is at a predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and it may be possible to prompt an operation according to the state of the chance button 750.

<Example of slot machine>
Next, an example of the slot machine will be described. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 251 includes a main body 101, and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on a strip-shaped member at an appropriate number of intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 110 to 112. The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 as viewed by the player, so that a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Incidentally, as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each design so that the individual designs can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are 5 pay lines 114. For example, when one bet is placed on the medal, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on the medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three bets are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right horizontal line. Five of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a production lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, one when the bet button 131 is pressed, two are inserted, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three are inserted. It has become so. In addition, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button that changes the mode of effect by the player's operation. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button 132. It should be noted that the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called a stop operation, the first stop operation is a first stop operation, the next stop operation is a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is a third stop operation. It should be noted that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button for pressing when the inserted medals are jammed to remove the medals. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals, and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and affixing various certificate stamps is provided. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A rendering device 160 is arranged above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the rendering device 160. The rendering device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (produced image) disposed behind the shutter 163. A display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened to the outside in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front surface (player side) of the slot machine 100. Has become.

  FIG. 252 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 261, a left side surface plate 260, a right side surface plate 260, a lower surface plate 264, and a rear surface plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 having a main control board stored therein is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a ventilation port 249 provided on an upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. A sub-control board storage case 220, in which a sub-control board is housed, is provided inside a side plate 260 on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side. Further, an external centralized terminal board 248 which is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply externally supplied to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as a main control unit 300 and sub control units 400 and 500, which will be described later, and each device. To do. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. There is.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power supply cord connecting portion for connecting the power supply cord 264, and the power supply cord 264 connected to the power supply device 252 is extended to the outside through a power supply cord hole 262 formed in the rear plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the upper part of the symbol display window 113, the effect device 160, and an effect control board for controlling the effect device 160 ( (Not shown), an upper speaker 272 is provided. Provided below the symbol display window 113 are a medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like into the medal tray 161. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

  The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop. A ROM 306 for storing a position and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times. , WDT (Watchdog Timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of drive pulses in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 uses a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 is provided with 338, and when the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control unit main processing described later).

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 inserts various sensors 318 (the bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, the bet button 132 sensor, and the medal insertion slot 141 at each interrupt time. Medal acceptance sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) are monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in the register that stores the random number value used in the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are installed in the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, respectively, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as the inserted medals for the game. Detect the operation. Further, the bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132, and when the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. When the bet button 132 is functioning as a chance button, the throwing operation is detected.

  The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes. It becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one revolution, and resets the reel rotation position information to zero.

  The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A driving circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insert lamp 129, game startable lamp 121, stored number of sheets A drive circuit 328 for driving the display device 125, the game information display device 126, and the payout amount display device 127) is provided.

  Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various display devices, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

  A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided in the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing voice data is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the voice data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  A drive circuit 422 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 through an input / output interface. (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) or the like) is connected.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404. Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

  A drive circuit 425 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a drive unit 427 that drives the bet button 132 up and down is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in <Bet button 132> below.

  The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 performs various controls of the rendering device 160 including display control of the rendering image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured with a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls the various drive devices. Good.

  The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. And 512 are mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the VDP 516 is connected to the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 254. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the setting of interrupt prohibition, the initial setting of the I / O 310, the initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, the operation permission and the initial setting of the WDT 314. Set values etc. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the pay line display lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of the medal. When a player wins a replay game in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 is operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined and an effective pay line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value obtained in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which one of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111. Stop based on the data. When all reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, winning determination is performed. Here, it is determined that the winning combination has been won when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that Bell is winning. In step S119, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S121, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, a process relating to the transition of each game state of the normal game, the BB game, the RB game, and the internal winning game is performed, and the game state is shifted by the establishment of the start condition and the end condition thereof. With the above, one game is completed. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-mentioned processing.

<Main controller 300 timer interrupt process>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 255. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. The data is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when information indicating that a detection signal is present is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparation for transmitting a bet button acceptance command to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (the various interrupt statuses are acquired based on the signals from the various sensors 318), and the processing according to this status is performed (for example, the acquired interrupt status of the stop buttons 137 to 139). Based on, perform stop button acceptance processing). In step S209, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. It should be noted that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), bit 11 -14 are command types (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a start lever reception command, a bet button reception command, a production command associated with the production lottery process, a rotation start command associated with starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and a stop button 137 to. Stop button acceptance command associated with acceptance of operation 139, stop position information command associated with reel 110 to 112 stop processing, payout number command and payout completion command associated with medal payout processing, command indicating game state, etc.), bit 0 to 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In step S213, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of errors relating to a medal insertion abnormality, a medal ejection abnormality, etc., and when an error is detected, (Omitted) Error processing is executed. Furthermore, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current game state.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register. After that, the processing returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 238. On the other hand, in step S221, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 238.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 256. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, processing such as reading effect data from the ROM 406, and performing effect data update processing when effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 420, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the drive circuit 424 of the shutter 163, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, movable object control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, information output processing is performed to set the transmission of the control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 256 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 256 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 256 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S315, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 257. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S601 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S601. In this initialization processing, the input / output port initialization and the storage area initialization processing in the RAM 508 are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S609, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S607, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, processing such as reading effect data from the ROM 506, and performing effect data update processing when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, when the effect data read in step S609 includes an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 257 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 257 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 257 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 257 (d). This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S905, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is given. In response to this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S909, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S911, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S911, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Bet button 132>
258 (a) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 and its surroundings when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 258 (b) shows a state in which the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). FIG. 13C is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 and its surroundings when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position.

  The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 included in the pachinko machine 100, and by controlling the drive unit 427 by the first sub-control unit 400, the initial position shown in FIG. 258 (a). And an operation completion position shown in FIG. 258 (c).

<Bet button 132 / initial position>
At the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the movement in the upward direction is restricted by the rotating member (not shown), and the movement is only in the downward direction. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, so that the bet button 132 is pressed. Can be detected.

<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>
At the operation completion position shown in FIG. 258 (c), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction of the upward movement and is moved upward by the urging force of the spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown). ), The movement in the upward direction is restricted again, and only the downward movement is possible. Even at this operation completion position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, so that the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation can be detected.

<Bet button 132 / in operation>
In the state shown in FIG. 258 (b), that is, the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 258 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 258 (c), the bet button 132 is a game. Even if the detection piece of the bet button 132 is pressed downward by a person and the detection piece of the bet button 132 is detected by the person, the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor is ignored (do not judge that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid). I am configuring.

  With such a configuration, if the player mistakenly presses the bet button 132 while the bet button 132 is operating, the bet button 132 can be pressed at a timing unintended by the player. In some cases, such a situation can be prevented. Note that, in the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation of the bet button 132 during operation is enabled. May be.

<When the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button>
FIG. 259 (a) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the above-mentioned notification lamp 123, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, game startable lamp 121, and game medal insertion lamp 129, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned on, and the number of the game medal insertion lamps 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals required for one game (3 in this example). The state is a state in which the player can start the game by inserting a specified number of medals, and the medals can be electronically inserted by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on a bet button lamp (not shown), and causes the bet button 132 to have a predetermined color (for example, yellow). ), The player is informed that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective. When the player inserts the specified number of medals, the game start possible lamp 121 is turned on as shown in FIG. 7B, and it is notified that the game start operation is possible. It

  Further, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be electronically stored in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum storage number (for example, 50), and it is notified that the medals cannot be inserted. . If a medal is inserted while the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is off (when trying to insert a medal exceeding the maximum number of stored coins), the medal is forcibly ejected from the medal ejection port 155. I am configuring.

<When the bet button 132 cannot be used>
FIG. 259 (b) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 7B, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 and the game startable lamp 121 are turned on, and the number of the game medal insertion lamps 129 is equal to the specified number (3 in this example). The state in which the game is started is a state in which the player can start the game, and the reels 110 to 112 can be started to rotate (the game can be started) by pressing the start lever 135.

  Further, when the game startable lamp 121 is lit, since a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, no medals are inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed (the detection result of pressing the medal insertion button is not accepted. , The bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

  The bet button 132 can be used as a chance button even when the game startable lamp is lit. For example, while the replay lamp 122 is on, it is not possible to insert a medal even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, as a performance between the game in which the re-playing combination is won and the start of the next game (until the start lever 135 is pressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating), the production of urging the bet button 132 to be pressed May be performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid by turning on the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the bet button 132 to be pressed may be performed during a period other than the exemplified period.

<When using the bet button 132 as a chance button>
FIG. 259 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 260 (a) is a case where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). FIG. 260 (b) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 260 (c) is an initial position of the bet button 132 in FIG. 260 (c). FIG. 13 is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when stopped between the operation completion position and (for example, a failure).

  Further, FIG. 259 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 260 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the normal effect, FIG. 260 (e) is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG. 260 (g) shows that the bet button 132 is between the initial position and the operation completion position. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation acceptance production | presentation performed when it stops at (for example, when it breaks down).

<Operation reception performance / initial position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 259 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 has a predetermined timing (for example, a timing to start receiving the detection result of the bet button depression). By illuminating the bet button lamp and causing the bet button 132 to emit a predetermined color (for example, blue), the player is informed that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective, and the second sub-control unit As shown in (d) of FIG. 5, the reference numeral 500 denotes an operation reception effect (in this example, the character of the lord, which indicates to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157. Displays an image showing a signboard with a bet button 132 emitting blue light).

  In this example, in order to allow the player to easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button or a chance button, the bet button 132 is caused to emit different colors. You may make it light-emit with a color. Further, in this example, the example in which the bet button 132 is made to emit light in a predetermined color is shown, but for example, it may be blinked in a predetermined color. In this case, the case where the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button The blinking pattern may be changed depending on whether the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, blinking is repeated at a first cycle (for example, 1 second), and when used as a chance button, a second cycle shorter than the first cycle (for example, 0. It is configured to repeat blinking every 5 seconds.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and it may be possible to prevent the situation in which the player is disadvantaged due to an operation mistake of the button. is there. If the detection result of the bet button press can be accepted, the bet button lamp may not be turned on, the operation acceptance effect may not be performed, and the operation means (or the operation unit) is operated. You don't have to perform the performance.

<Operation acceptance production / during operation>
The first sub control unit 400 operates the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 260 (a), that is, moves the bet button 132 from the initial position shown in FIG. 259 (c) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 260 (b). When it is moved to, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, in the effect image display device 157, a normal effect as shown in FIGS. 260 (d) and 261 (a) is executed. Here, as the normal effects, in the case of a pachinko machine, there are a changing effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, and the like, and in the case of a slot machine, a BB effect, a reel rotating effect, and a freeze effect. Directing is included.

  The bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit in the first color (for example, red), and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is in the second color (for example, white). It may be turned on. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, the bet button lamp is lit at the first brightness, and when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid, the bet button lamp is lit at the second brightness lower than the first brightness. May be.

<Operation reception performance / motion completion position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 260 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 260 (b). The player is informed that the player can press the bet button 132 by illuminating it and causing the bet button 132 to emit a predetermined color (for example, red), and as shown in FIG. 260 (e). Using the effect image display device 157, an operation acceptance effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position). And display the image of the downward arrow).

<Operation acceptance production / Stop between initial position and operation completion position>
Even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 260 (c) is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the detecting unit can detect the pressing operation of the bet button 132. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable part of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed part and the movable part cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position, An example is a case where the urging force of the spring of 132 weakens and the movable part cannot rise to the operation completion position.

  Further, even when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button, as shown in FIG. 260 (f). Can be used, and at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 260 (g) and FIG. 261 (b), an operation acceptance effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed (this example). Then, the operation reception effect (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 260E) performed after the operation is completed is performed.

  Thus, even if the bet button 132 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the bet button 132 can be accepted, the operation of the bet button 132 can be performed even if the bet button 132 fails. Therefore, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the bet button 132 can be operated even when the bet button 132 is located at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and prompt the player's operation. it can.

  261 (c) is an example of a special effect displayed when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted. This effect is applicable not only when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is displayed even when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position. Note that the button may be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, after the end of the period in which the button can be accepted) without pressing the button. Is activated (the operation pattern may be changed), the light emitting means such as the LED is turned on (the light emitting pattern may be changed), and the sound output means such as the speaker can hear the sounds such as BGM and sound effects. Good.

  In addition, the game table according to the first embodiment has operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, a bet button 132) provided at a position where the player can operate. , And the pressing surface of these buttons and the operation unit), a display means capable of performing at least display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208), and a state capable of performing at least state control for changing the state of the operation means. A game table including a control unit (for example, a second sub-control unit 500), wherein the state of the operation unit is a first protruding state when the state control is performed by the state control unit. (For example, initial positions shown in FIGS. 245 (a), 247 (a), 248 (a), and 258 (a)) to a second protruding state (for example, FIGS. 245 (c), 247 (c)). ), FIG. 248 ( ), The operation completion position shown in FIG. 258 (c)), wherein the operation means in the second protruding state is more protruded than the operation means in the first protruding state. Yes, the display means is capable of executing a first display prompting the player to operate the operation means in the first protruding state, and the display means is in the second protruding state. A second display that prompts the player to operate the operation means can be executed, and the first display can at least indicate that the operation means is in the first protruding state. The second display is capable of at least indicating that the operation means is in the second protruding state, and the display means is the operation in the second protruding state. If the means is operated, the third display is reduced. It is also possible to start, regardless of whether or not the operation means is changed to the second protruding state by the execution of the state control, in relation to the execution of the state control, not the first display. The second display is configured to be displayed on the display means, and the display means changes the operation means to the second protruding state in spite of the state control being executed. Even if it does not exist, at least the third display (for example, the effect when the button is pressed as shown in FIG. 261 (c)) can be started in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game table characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even if the operating means does not change to the second protruding state, which should originally change due to a failure of the operating means, the player is informed by urging the operation to In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity for operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play the game is deteriorated due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when urging the operation of the operating means in the normal state due to the fact that the first protruding state has not changed to the second protruding state due to a failure of the operating means, etc., the first protruding state to the second protruding state In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that there is a possibility of machine failure by informing the operation of the operating means in a special state that the state control has been performed to , It may be possible to give suggestions that do not place excessive expectations on the player.

  It should be noted that, in the display means, the operating means changes to the first projecting state (not projecting more than the operating means in the second projecting state) despite the state control being executed. Even if it does not exist, at least the third display may be started in response to the operation of the operation means.

<Other Embodiments>
Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 262 to 283. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments other than the present embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 262 to 283 are given priority.

<High probability table for judgment of success / failure>
FIG. 262 (a) is an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, which is used for win / fail determination of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) when the special figure probability is in the high special figure probability state.

  The high probability table for determining whether or not the win / fail is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The numerical range of the random number values of 0 to 65535 and the hit / damage result of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) are associated with this hit / non-judgment high probability table.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the high probability table for winning / losing judgment when the special figure probability is in the high special figure probability state, and based on the special figure winning random number value acquired at a predetermined timing, Figure Floating game win (big hit), special figure fluctuating game win (small hit), or un-win (miss) Judgment) ”is performed.

  For example, in the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 10001 to 11638, it is determined to be the special figure variation game winning (big hit) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating a big hit is set in the big hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as "turning the big hit flag on"). In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 11639 to 11940, it is determined to be the winning (small hit) of the special figure variation game and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that a small hit will be set in the small hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "turning the small hit flag on").

  On the other hand, in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure high probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random value is 0 to 10000, or in the numerical range of 11941 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variation game is lost, The information indicating that there will be a loss will be set in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag (hereinafter, setting the information for the loss in the storage area for the big hit flag is referred to as "setting the big hit flag to OFF"). Setting the loss information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as "turning the small hit flag off". Needless to say, the numerical range of the random number value is not limited to the numerical range shown in this example (the same applies to other tables described below).

<Low probability table for judgment of success / failure>
FIG. 262 (b) is an example of the win / loss determination low probability table used for the win / fail determination of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) when the special figure probability is in the low special figure probability state.

  The hit probability low probability table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. The numerical range of the random number values of 0 to 65535 is associated with the win / loss result of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) in the hit probability determination low probability table.

  When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the winning probability determination low probability table, and based on the special figure winning random number value acquired at a predetermined timing, Figure Floating game win (big hit), special figure fluctuating game win (small hit), or un-win (miss) Judgment) ”is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value obtained is in the numerical range of 10001 to 10162, it is determined that the special figure variation game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is turned on. Set to. In addition, when the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value which is acquired is in the numerical value range of 10163 to 10464, it is determined as the special figure variation game winning (small hit) and the small hit flag. Set to on. On the other hand, in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or in the numerical range of 10465 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variation game is lost, The big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to off.

<Table for determining special maps>
262 (c) is an example of a special figure determination table for determining the stop symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2).

  The special figure determination table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure determination table, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination of the above-mentioned special figure (the success / failure determination result of the special figure), the numerical value range of the random number value of 0 to 99, and the above-mentioned FIG. 238 (a). The type of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) described using the above is associated with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses this special figure determination table, the above-described big hit determination result (big hit flag value), small hit determination result (small hit flag value), and the obtained symbol random value. Based on this, "special symbol drawing lottery" for determining the type of special symbol stop symbol is performed. If the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as a symbol random value, and if the small hit flag is on, the small hit symbol generated from the above special symbol winning random number value Use the random number value as the symbol random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are lost), use the obtained random symbol value for symbols as the symbol random value. To do.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on (when the hit / miss judgment result is a big hit), when the acquired symbol random value is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100), the special map A is selected and acquired. When the random number value of the symbol is 50 to 69 (that is, with a probability of 20/100), the special symbol B is selected, and when the random number value of the acquired symbol is 70 to 77 (that is, with a probability of 8/100). When the special symbol C is selected and the acquired symbol random value is 78 to 83 (that is, with a probability of 6/100), the special symbol D is selected and when the acquired symbol random value is 84 to 91 (that is, , With a probability of 8/100), and when the obtained random number of symbols is 92 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 8/100), the special figure F is selected.

  In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the result of the hit determination is small hit), the special symbol G is selected when the acquired symbol random value is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100). When the acquired random number of symbols is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100), the special symbol H is selected. In addition, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the hit / miss judgment result is lost), the special symbol I is obtained when the acquired symbol random value is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100). When the random number value of the selected and acquired symbols is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100), the special symbol J is selected.

<Special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table>
FIG. 263 (a) is an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table used to determine the variable time of the special figure 1 in the variable time lottery of the special figure prefetching process described later.

  The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 1 variation display time determination table, together with the type of stop symbol of the above-mentioned special figure 1, the variation time of special figure 1, the numerical range of the random number value of 0-65535, and the variation display of special figure 1 A mode of effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a “variation pattern”) performed using the decorative pattern display device 208 and a table number are associated with each other. In this example, since the variation time and the variation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence, another data table in which the variation time and the variation pattern are associated with each other is provided, and the special figure 1 variation display time determination table is Alternatively, only one of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 1 variable display time determination table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing, the variable time of the special figure 1 and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208. (Fluctuation pattern) and "Special map 1 variation time lottery" for determining the table number are performed.

  For example, in the case where the type of the stop symbol of the special drawing 1 is the special drawing A or the special drawing B, the variation time is 15000 ms when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000 regardless of the presence or absence of the electric support. , Normal reach as the presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, table 1 is selected as the table number, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decorative pattern display device 208 For each reach A as the presentation mode, each table 1 is selected as the table number, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the reach pattern B on the decorative pattern display device 208 is reach B. Then, table 1 is selected as the table number. In addition, when the types of the stop symbols of the special drawing 1 are special drawings C to H, the variation mode is 12000 ms, regardless of whether or not there is an electric support and the acquired random value, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 As a result, all the opportunities are turned off, and table 2 is selected as the table number.

  If the type of the stop symbol of special figure 1 is special figure I or special figure J, and there is no electric support, and the number of pending special figure 1 variable games is 3, the acquired random number value is 0 to 65,000. When in the numerical range, 3000 ms as the variation time, shortened loss as the effect mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, and table 3 is selected as the table number, respectively, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 65001 to 65400, the variation occurs. When the time is 10,000 ms, the normal reach lost as the presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the table 3 is selected as the table number, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 65401 to 65500, the variable time is 40000 ms, the decorative pattern display. Select Reach A Loss as the presentation mode on the device 208 and Table 3 as the table number. When the obtained random number is a number range of 65,501 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 3 as the table number.

  In addition, the type of the stop symbol of special figure 1 is special figure I or special figure J, there is no electric support, and the number of pending special game 1 variable games is 0 to 2, or the stop symbol of special figure 1 If the type is Toku-zu I or Toku-J, and there is electric power support, and the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 0 to 3, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 50000, it fluctuates. Time is 8000 ms, as a presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, the loss is selected, and table 4 is selected as the table number. When the acquired random number value is in the range of 50001 to 60,000, the variation time is 10000 ms, the decorative symbol display device. When the normal reach loss is selected as the presentation mode in 208 and the table 4 is selected as the table number, and the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 60001 to 65000, the variation time is 4000. ms, reach A loss as a presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, and select table 4 as the table number, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 65001 to 65536, the variable time is 60000 ms, the decorative pattern display device Reach B loss is selected as the presentation mode in 208, and table 4 is selected as the table number.

<Special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table>
FIG. 263 (b) is an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table used to determine the variable time of the special figure 2 in the variable time lottery of the special figure prefetching process described later.

  The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 2 variable display time determination table, together with the type of stop symbol of the above-mentioned special figure 2, the variable time of special figure 2, the numerical range of the random number value of 0-65535, and the variable display of special figure 2. The mode of the effect (variation pattern) performed using the decorative pattern display device 208 and the table number are associated with each other. In this example, since the variation time and the variation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence, another data table in which the variation time and the variation pattern are associated with each other is provided, and the special figure 1 variation display time determination table is Alternatively, only one of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 variable display time determination table and the random number value obtained at a predetermined timing, the variable time of the special figure 2 and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208. (Fluctuation pattern) and "Special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery" for determining the table number are performed.

  For example, in the case where the type of the stop symbol of the special drawing 2 is the special drawing A or the special drawing B, the variation time is 15000 ms when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000 regardless of the presence or absence of the electric support. When normal reach is selected as the presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208 and table 5 is selected as the table number, and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decorative pattern display device 208 Reach A is selected as the production mode of Table 5, and each of the table numbers is selected as the table number. When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the reach mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 is Reach B. Then, the table 5 is selected as the table number. In addition, when the types of the stop symbols of the special drawing 2 are special drawings C to H, the variation mode is 12000 ms, regardless of whether or not there is a power support and the acquired random number value, and the effect mode on the decorative pattern display device 208 As a result, all the opportunities are turned off, and table 6 is selected as the table number.

  In addition, if the type of the stop symbol of special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, there is electric power support, and the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is 1 to 3, regardless of the acquired random number value. , 1500 ms as the variation time, super-shortening loss as the presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, and table 7 as the table number. In addition, if the type of stop symbol of special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, there is electric power support, and the number of pending special game 2 variation games is 0, it changes regardless of the acquired random number value. The time is 8000 ms, the effect is lost on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the table 8 is selected as the table number.

  Further, if the type of the stop symbol of special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, and there is no electric support, and the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 0 to 3, the acquired random value is 0. When the numerical value range is 50,000, the variation time is 8000 ms, the decorative pattern display device 208 loses the effect, and the table number is table 9 respectively. When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50001 to 60,000, When the variation time is 10000 ms, the normal reach loss as the presentation mode on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the table 9 is selected as the table number, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60001 to 65000, the variation time is 40000 ms, the decorative pattern. Reach A lost as the presentation mode on the display device 208, and table 9 is selected as the table number. When the obtained random number is a number range of 65001 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 9 as the table number.

<Pending change notice lottery table>
FIG. 264 (a) is an example of the hold change notice lottery table used to determine the mode of the hold change in the “holding change lottery process” of the starting prize winning sub-side prereading notice execution process described later. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of the mode of the pending change.

  The pending change notice lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the pending change notice lottery table, the variation time of the special map 1 (or the special map 2) determined by the special map 1 variable time lottery (or the special map 2 variable time lottery) and the special map 1 (or the special map 1) The manner of variation (variation pattern) performed by using the decorative pattern display device 208 together with the variation display of FIG. 2), the numerical range of the random number values of 0 to 99, and the aspect of the pending change are associated.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the pending change notice lottery table and a predetermined timing (for example, in the case of Toku-zu 1, the timing when the ball wins the first Toku-zu start port 230, the Toku-zu). In the case of 2, the "holding change lottery process" for determining the mode of the holding change is performed based on the random number value acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second special figure starting port 232.

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is 10,000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach. In the case of a loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, select "No change", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, select "Hold A (grandfather)". select. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is 40,000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of A loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, "No change" is selected, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 79, "Hold A (grandpa)" Is selected, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 99, “Hold B (D)” is selected.

  Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is 60000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of B loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, select "no change", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 30 to 79, select "Hold A". When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 95, "Hold B" is selected, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 96 to 99, "Movable body" is selected. In addition, when the other variation time (15000 ms, 45000 ms, 65000 ms in the present embodiment) is selected in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery), the same result is obtained according to the table. A lottery is conducted to determine the mode of pending change.

  In the pending change notice lottery table of this example, the "movable body" is selected in the pending change lottery process by changing time of 60000 ms (change pattern is reach B loss) or changing time of 65000 ms (change pattern is reach. Since it is only in the case of B hit), it is determined that the variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B hit when the production movable body 224 operates during the hold change. In addition, “holding B” is selected in the lottery process for holding change because the variation time is 40000 ms (variation pattern is reach A loss), the variation time is 60000 ms (variation pattern is reach B loss), and the variation time is 45000 ms (variation Since the pattern is only for reach A) or the variation time is 65000 ms (variation pattern is for reach B), when the hold B hold icon is displayed during the hold change, the change pattern It is confirmed that it is per Reach A loss, Reach B loss, Reach A, or Reach B.

  When "no change" is selected by the lottery process for the hold change, control is performed so that the hold mode is not changed when the hold icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when the hold icon of the normal hold is moved, the move is performed in the normal hold mode, and when the hold icon of the hold A is moved, the move is performed in the hold A mode.

  When either "Hold A" or "Hold B" is selected, the holding mode is changed when the holding icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when "Hold A" is selected when moving the hold icon of the normal hold, the control for moving while changing the mode of the normal hold to the mode of the hold A or the movement of the mode of the normal hold is completed. Immediately after that, control such as changing the normal hold to the hold A mode is performed, and when "hold B" is selected when moving the hold icon of the normal hold, the normal hold mode is changed to the hold B mode. While moving, the normal hold mode is changed to the hold B mode immediately after the normal hold mode is completed.

  When “movable body” is selected, control is performed to activate the effect movable body 224 when the holding icon is moved, increased, or changed. For example, when “movable body” is selected when increasing the hold icons of hold A, control for rotating the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 244 upward in accordance with the increase of the hold icons of hold A, or When “movable body” is selected when moving the hold icon of hold B, control such as rotating the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 244 downward is performed in accordance with the movement of the hold icon of hold B.

<Reach A-time production character lottery table>
FIG. 265 (a) is an example of a reach A-time production character lottery table used for determining a character image to be used for production in the production character lottery of production lottery processing 1 described later, and FIG. 265 (b) is It is a figure showing an example of a character image.

  The reach A time effect character lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this reach A time production character lottery table, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) and the decorative symbol display device The mode of the effect (variation pattern) performed using 208, the numerical range of the random number values of 0 to 99, and the type of the character image are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “effect character lottery” that determines a character image based on this reach-A-time effect character lottery table and a random number value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is 40,000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of A loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, select "Character A", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 80 to 96, select "Character B". , When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 97 to 99, "character C" is selected. In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) decided by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is 45000 ms, and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach. In the case of per A, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, select "character A", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 30 to 59, select "character B". , When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99, “character C” is selected.

  In this reach A-time production character lottery table, the probability of winning the character A in the case of reach A lost (in this example, the probability of winning the character A in the case of reach A (30/100 in this example)) Since 80/100) is set higher, the possibility that the character A appears in the performance is higher in the reach A loss than in the reach A. In other words, when the character A appears in the performance, there is a higher possibility that the reach A will be lost than when the reach A is hit. Also, the probability of winning the character C per reach A (40/100 in this example) is set higher than the probability of winning the character C per reach A (3/100 in this example). Therefore, it is more likely that the character C will appear in the performance when the reach A hits than the reach A loss. In other words, when the character C appears in the performance, the possibility of hitting the reach A is higher than that of the reach A loss. Therefore, when the character C appears in the effect, the player's expectation can be increased.

  When "character A" is selected in this effect character lottery, an effect using character A (in this example, a grandpa character image) is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and when "character B" is selected. Performs an effect using the character B (a character image of Sabohani in this example) on the decorative pattern display device 208, and when "character C" is selected, the character C (in this example, the character C on the decorative pattern display device 208 is selected. , Panda character image). When the character A or the character B is selected in the effect character lottery, the state lottery described below is performed.

<Status lottery table>
FIG. 265 (c) is an example of a state lottery table used for determining the state in the state lottery of the effect lottery process 1 described later.

  The state lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the type of character (selected character) selected in the above-mentioned effect character lottery, the numerical range of the random value of 0 to 99, and the type of state of the chance button 700 are associated. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “state lottery” to determine the state of the chance button 700 based on this state lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is the reach A loss, and the character image determined by the subsequent effect character lottery is. In the case of character A, referring to the line “character A (miss)”, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 2, the second state is selected as the state, and the obtained random number value is When the numerical value range is 3 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. In addition, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is the reach A loss, and the character image determined by the subsequent effect character lottery is displayed. In the case of character B, referring to the “character B (miss)” line, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random number value is When the numerical range is 2 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

  In addition, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach A, and the character image determined by the subsequent effect character lottery is displayed. In the case of character A, referring to the line “character A (win)”, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, the second state is selected as the state and the acquired random number value is When the numerical range is 20 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. In addition, the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach B, and the character image determined by the subsequent effect character lottery is displayed. In the case of character B, referring to the line of “character B (win)”, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random number value is When the numerical value range is 50 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

  In the state lottery table of this example, the probability of selecting the first state when the selected character is character A (hit) or character B (hit) (in this example, character A (hit) is 80/100, character B (Loss) is 50/100) and the probability that the first state is selected when the selected character is Character A (Loss) or Character B (Loss) (in this example, Character A (Loss) is 97/100, Character B (miss) is set higher than 98/100). That is, the chance button 700 is more likely to be in the first state when the reach A is lost than when the reach A is hit.

<Normal pattern>
FIG. 266 (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. In the stop display mode of the universal figure of the second embodiment, there are three types of "general figure A" which is a winning symbol 1, "general symbol B" which is a winning symbol 2 and "general symbol C" which is a lost symbol. There is.

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, using the normal symbol display device 210, all of the seven segments are lit up and one in the center. The "variable display of the general map" that repeats the lighting of the segment is displayed. In this example, the fluctuation display time of the universal figure is 20000 ms at the low probability of the universal figure and 1000 ms at the high probability of the universal figure.

  And when notifying the winning of the universal figure variation game after the variation display time of the universal figure, "Public symbol A (winning symbol 1)" and "Public symbol B (winning symbol 2)" are stopped and displayed. When notifying the loss of the figure variation game, the "universal figure C (missing symbol)" is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 266 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

<Ornamental design for ordinary design>
FIG. 266 (b) shows an example of a decorative design for a normal design. In the present embodiment, there are three types of decorative patterns for ordinary patterns, "ordinary ornament 1" to "ordinary ornament 3", and these ordinary symbol ornamental symbols are "variable display of ordinary symbol ornamental pattern" described later. Used in.

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the seven types of effect patterns P1 shown in FIG. One performance pattern is selected from P7 to P7, and "variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern" is performed to switch the display according to the selected performance pattern.

  Here, the effect pattern P1 is, as a variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern, "General figure decoration 1 → General figure decoration 3 → General figure decoration 1 → General figure decoration 1 → General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 3 → ... ( Hereafter, the effect pattern is displayed in the order of “repeat”). The production pattern P2 is, as a variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern, "General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 2 → General figure decoration 3 → ... ) ”Are displayed in the order of, and the number of times the universal figure decoration 2 is displayed per unit time is larger than that of the effect pattern P1, and the expectation of the long opening of the electric chu which will be described later is increased. . The effect pattern P3 is an effect pattern that is displayed in the order of "Public decoration 2 → Public decoration 2 → Public decoration 2 → ... By continuing to display the decoration 2, it is an effect pattern for notifying that the long opening of the electric chu has been confirmed.

  The production pattern P4 is a variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern, which is a character display of "universal figure decoration 1 → general figure decoration 2 → general figure decoration 3 →" heat "(hereinafter sometimes referred to as P4 (heat)) → general It is a production pattern that is displayed in the order of "drawing decoration 1-> ordinary decoration 2-> ordinary decoration 3-> character display of" heat "→ ... (hereinafter, repeated), and character display of" heat "is displayed in the production pattern P1. This is a production pattern in which the degree of expectation of a long opening of the electric chu is increased compared to the production pattern P1. The effect pattern P5 is, as variable display of the universal figure decoration pattern, “character display of universal figure decoration 2 →“ A ”(hereinafter, may be referred to as P5 (A)) → character display of general figure decoration 2 →“ B ” (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as P5 (B)) → ... (Hereinafter, the character display portions are displayed in alphabetical order (C → D → ...)) ”.

  The effect pattern P6 is an effect pattern for suddenly performing the electric type chew opening notification effect that suggests that the long opening of the electric chew has been confirmed without displaying the ordinary decorative pattern. The effect pattern P7 is "character display of chance" (hereinafter, may be referred to as P7 (chance)) → image display imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 (hereinafter, may be referred to as P7 (button)) → ordinary This is an effect pattern in which display is performed in the order of "drawing decoration 2".

  The variable display of the decorative pattern for these ordinary symbols is performed simultaneously with the universal figure variation display by the universal figure display device 210, but in the present embodiment, at the time of low probability of the universal figure, before the stop display of the universal figure by the universal figure display device 210. It is configured to be performed only for 5 seconds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7C, when the winning of "Public symbol A (winning symbol 1)" is notified after the variable display of the ordinary symbol decorative symbol, the universal symbol decoration shown in FIG. When 1 is stopped and displayed, and when the winning of "general drawing B (winning pattern 2)" is notified after the variable display of the ordinary design decorative pattern, the general design decoration 2 shown in FIG. When notifying the winning of the "universal figure C (missing symbol)" after the variable display of the ordinary symbol decoration pattern is displayed, the ordinary figure decoration 3 shown in FIG. Then, when the "general drawing A (winning pattern 1)" is won, the electric Chu (second special drawing starting port 232) is controlled to be opened once for a period of 300 ms, and "general drawing B (winning pattern)" In the case of winning the "Pattern 2)", after opening the electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232) once for the period of 300 ms, it is closed for the period of 500 ms and once for the period of 5000 ms. Control (long opening of the electric chu).

<Public drawing production system 1 executability lottery table>
FIG. 267 (a) is a drawing effect system 1 executability lottery table used for deciding whether or not to give a notice of the drawing effect system 1 in the notice operation execution on the sub side at the time of starting to change the drawing effect, which will be described later. This is an example.

  The universal figure production system 1 executability lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. The universal figure production system 1 executability lottery table is associated with the type of universal figure determined by the universal decision of the universal figure, the numerical value range of the random number of 0 to 99, and the winning or non-winning. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the drawing effect system 1 executability lottery table, the type of drawing, and at a predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, the drawing fluctuation starts when the drawing ratio is low). At the time), based on the obtained random number value, the "universal figure production system 1 executability lottery" for deciding whether or not to give a notice of the general figure production system 1 is performed.

  For example, when the result of the hit / no hit determination of the universal figure is the universal figure B (winning pattern 2), it is determined to be a winning regardless of the acquired random number value. Further, when the result of the hit / no hit judgment of the universal figure is the universal figure C (missing pattern), when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, it is determined to be winning, and the obtained random number value is 10 to 99. If it is within the numerical range of, it is judged as non-win.

<Purpose drawing system 1 lottery table>
FIG. 267 (b) is an example of the general figure production system 1 lottery table used for determining the production pattern of the general figure production system 1 in the later-described general figure variation start sub-side notice execution process.

  The universal figure production system 1 lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. The general drawing production system 1 lottery table is associated with the types of general drawings decided by the hit / non-execution of general drawings, the numerical value range of the random number of 0 to 99, and the general production drawing system 1 production patterns. ing. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the above-mentioned general figure production system 1 executability lottery is won, this general figure production system 1 lottery table, the type of general figure, and at a predetermined timing (this In the embodiment, the "universal figure production system 1 lottery" for determining the production pattern of the universal figure production system 1 is performed on the basis of the random number value acquired (at the time of starting the universal figure fluctuation at the low probability of general figure).

  For example, in the case where the result of the hit / no hit judgment of the universal figure is the universal figure B (winning pattern 2), when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, P1 is selected as the effect pattern and the obtained random number value. Is selected in the numerical range of 20 to 39, P2 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 85, P3 is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is 86 to 90. When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 91 to 94, P5 is selected as the production pattern when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 91 to 94, and the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 95 to 98. At this time, P6 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random number value is within the numerical range of 99, P7 is selected as the effect pattern.

  In addition, when the result of the hit / no hit judgment of the universal figure is the universal figure C (missing pattern), when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 94, P1 is selected as the effect pattern and the obtained random number value is When the numerical value range of 95 to 98 is selected, P2 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random value is 99, P4 is selected as the effect pattern, while P3, P5, P6, and P7 are selected as the effect patterns. There is nothing to do. Therefore, when any one of P3, P5, P6, and P7 is selected as the effect pattern, the result of the hit / no hit judgment of the general drawing is not the general drawing C (missing design) but the general drawing B (winning design 2). It is confirmed that there is. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be increased by performing the effect according to one of the effect patterns P3, P5, P6, and P7.

<Public drawing production system 2 execution possibility lottery table>
FIG. 267 (c) is an example of a universal figure effect system 2 executability lottery table used for determining whether or not to give a notice of the general figure effect system 2 in the effect lottery process 2 described later. In the present embodiment, the general-drawing production system 2 is a production that can be changed in the same manner as the production including the contents related to the opening of the electric Chu, and as a result, a notice regarding the special figure variation game can be executed.

  The universal figure production system 2 executability lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this universal figure production system 2 executability lottery table, the production mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) described above. , 0 to 99, a numerical value range of random numbers, and winning or non-winning are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the fluctuation of the special figure production system 2 executability lottery table, the fluctuation pattern, and the predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 (or special figure 2)). At the time), based on the acquired random number value, the "universal figure production system 2 executability lottery" for deciding whether or not to give a notice of the general figure production system 2 is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach A loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, It is determined that the player has won, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won. In addition, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach B loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, It is determined that the player has won, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 10 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won.

  In addition, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach A, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, It is determined that the player has won, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won. Further, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach B, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, It is determined that the player has won, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won.

  In the universal figure production system 2 executability lottery table of this example, the winning probability when the variation pattern is per reach A or per reach B (in this example, 40 per 100 per reach A, 50/100 per reach B) Is set higher than the winning probability when the variation pattern is reach A loss or reach B loss (in this example, reach A loss is 20/100, reach B loss is 10/100). That is, the universal figure production system 2 is more likely to be executed for the reach A hit or the reach B hit than for the reach A hit or the reach B hit. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be increased by performing the effect of the general-purpose production system 2.

<Public drawing production system 2 lottery table>
FIG. 267 (d) is an example of a general figure production system 2 lottery table used to determine an effect pattern of the general figure production system 2 in the production lottery process 2 described later.

  The universal figure production system 2 lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this general drawing production system 2 lottery table, "the production mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208" determined in the special map 1 variable time lottery (or the special map 2 variable time lottery) described above, The numerical value range of the random number values of 0 to 99 and the effect pattern of the universal figure effect system 2 are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the above-mentioned general figure production system 2 execution feasibility lottery is won, this general figure production system 2 lottery table, a variation pattern, and at a predetermined timing (this embodiment. Then, the "universal figure production system 2 lottery" for deciding the production pattern of the general figure production system 2 is performed based on the random number value obtained at the time of start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2).

  For example, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach A loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 20 to 89, when P5 (A) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical value range of 90 to 99 Then, P7 (chance) is selected as the effect pattern. In addition, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is reach B loss, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 10 to 59, when P5 (B) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern.

  Further, when the variation pattern determined in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach A, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50 to 89, when P5 (A) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical value range of 90 to 99 Then, P7 (chance) is selected as the effect pattern. Further, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable time lottery (or special figure 2 variable time lottery) is per reach B, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 50 to 69, when P5 (B) is selected as the effect pattern and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 70 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern.

  In the universal drawing production system 2 lottery table of this example, the probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the variation pattern is per reach A or per reach B (in this example, 50/100 per reach A, per reach B) 50/100) than the probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the variation pattern is reach A loss or reach B loss (in this example, reach A loss is 20/100, reach B loss is 10/100) It is set high. That is, P4 (heat) of the universal figure production system 2 is more likely to be performed for each reach A or reach B than for reach A loss or reach B loss. Further, P5 (B) and P7 (button) are not selected per reach A loss or reach A, and P5 (A) and P7 (chance) are selected per reach B loss or reach B. Never.

<Special map prefetching process>
FIG. 268 and FIG. 269 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetch processing. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured to execute the special map prefetch process immediately before the special map 2 state update process (step S225) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 240. ing.

  In step S2001 of the special figure prefetching process, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the electric support (universal figure high probability state) is being performed, and if it is determined that the electric support is being performed, step S2002. If it is determined that the power supply is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 by referring to the value in the prize ball number storage area in the RAM 308. If there is a prize, the process proceeds to step S2003, and there is no prize. In the case of, the processing ends.

  In step S2003, when the number of reserved special game 2 variable games is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 4), the increased special map 2 start information (a set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) Prior to the winning / judgment processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), prefetching is performed from the special figure 2 random value storage area.

  In step S2003, the pre-reading special figure 2 starting information, the high probability table for win / loss determination (or the low probability table for win / loss determination) used for the big hit determination (or the small hit determination), and the special symbol used for the special symbol lottery Using the figure determination table, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variation game related to the start information is pre-determined before the winning / disabling decision process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229).

  As a result of the pre-determination, if the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2004 to determine the big hit symbol (saves the pre-determined result of the big hit symbol), and then proceeds to step S2008, if not a big hit. Advances to step S2005. As a result of the preliminary determination in step S2005, if the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variation game is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2006 to determine the small hit symbol (save the preliminary determination result of the small hit symbol), and then to step S2008. If it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the lost symbol is determined (the preliminary determination result of the lost symbol is saved), and then the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, the special symbol 2 variable time lottery is performed by using the previously determined special symbol 2 stop symbol and the above-mentioned special symbol 2 variable display time determination table, and after the variable time of the special symbol 2 is determined, the processing is performed. finish. Further, in step S2008, preparation is made to transmit the pre-reading notice execution command including the variable time information of FIG. 2 to the first sub control unit 400. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above.

  In step S2009, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 by referring to the value in the prize ball number storage area in the RAM 308. If there is a prize, the process proceeds to step S2010, and there is no prize. In the case of, the processing ends. In step S2010, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the hit determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area.

  Further, in step S2010, when the pending number of the special figure 1 variation game is a predetermined number (for example, 4) or less, the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the hit determination used for the big hit determination (or the small hit determination) High probability table (or low probability table for determination of success or failure), and using the special figure determination table used in the special figure lottery, stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information, special figure 1 related lottery Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231).

  As a result of pre-determination, if the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2011 to determine the big hit symbol (saves the pre-determined result of the big hit symbol), and then proceeds to step S2015, if it is not a big hit. Advances to step S2012. As a result of the preliminary determination in step S2012, if the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variation game is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2013 to determine the small hit symbol (save the preliminary determination result of the small hit symbol), and then to step S2015. If it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, the lost symbol is determined (the preliminary determination result of the lost symbol is saved), and then the process proceeds to step S2015.

  In step S2015, the stop time of special figure 1 determined in advance and the variation time lottery of special figure 1 are performed using the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation display time determination table, and after the variation time of special figure 1 is determined, the processing is performed. To finish. Further, in step S2015, preparation is made to transmit the prefetching advance notice execution command including the variable time information of special figure 1 to the first sub-control unit 400. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above.

<Pre-reading notice execution process on the sub side at the time of starting winnings>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the sub prefetching notice execution process at the time of starting winning. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether or not the prefetching advance notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 241 and receives the command. In this case, this sub-prefetching advance notice execution processing at the time of starting winning is executed.

  In step S2101 of the sub-side prefetching notice execution process at the time of winning a prize, it is determined whether the prefetching executing flag stored in the RAM 408 is on or off, and if it is off (when the prefetching notice is not executed), step S2102. If it is ON (when pre-reading notice is being executed), the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2102, the variable time information of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) included in the prefetch advance notice execution command is referred to, and the variable time is a predetermined variable time (in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 264 (a) above). It is determined whether or not the variable time included in the pending change notice lottery table is any of 10000 ms, 40000 ms, 60000 ms, 15000 ms, 45000 ms, and 65000 ms. If so, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2103, a lottery process for holding change using the above-mentioned holding change notice lottery table is performed, and in step S2104, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2105. If the lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2105, a predetermined number is set as the number of times of pre-reading notice execution stored in the RAM 408, and in the next step S2106, the pre-reading execution flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, the second sub-control unit 500 is prepared to transmit a hold command, and then the process ends. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above information transmission process (step S321).

<Execution processing of sub-side notice at the start of fluctuation>
FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of execution processing of the sub-side notice at the start of fluctuation. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether or not the special figure variation start command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 241 and receives the command. In such a case, the sub-side notice execution processing at the start of fluctuation is executed.

  Here, the special figure variation start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 when the variation of the special figure is started, and the command includes a big hit flag value and a small hit flag. Value, special figure stop design, fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern information and the like are included. In the variation start sub-side notice execution process, the RAM 408 stores such information included in the received special figure variation start command. The information included in the special figure fluctuation start command is not limited to this example, and for example, the fluctuation pattern is configured not to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the fluctuation is performed in the first sub-control unit 400. The later-described determination performed using the pattern may be performed using the variation time.

  In step S2201 of the variation start sub-side notice execution process, it is determined whether the prefetch execution flag is on or off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2205, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, the prefetch advance notice execution count is decremented by 1, and in the next step S2203, it is determined whether or not the prefetch advance notice execution count after subtraction is zero. As a result of the determination, if the prefetching notice execution count is 0, the process proceeds to step S2204, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2205.

  In step S2204, the prefetching in-execution flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, after performing the effect lottery process 1 (details will be described later), the flow proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, after performing effect lottery process 2 (details will be described), the process ends.

<Production lottery processing 1>
FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 1 (step S2205) in the above-described change start sub-side notice execution process.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern stored in the RAM 408 is reach B (reach B loss or per reach B), and if so, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, otherwise. The process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2302, the second sub-control unit 500 is prepared to transmit the button effect command in the second state, and then the process ends. In this way, when the reach B loss or the reach B hit is selected as the variation pattern, the second state notice is always executed (details will be described later). Therefore, the notice of the second state functions as a notice indicating that the reach B (reach B loss or per reach B) is confirmed.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is reach A (reach A loss or per reach A). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2304, and if not, the process ends. In step S2304, an effect character lottery using the above-mentioned reach A time effect character lottery table is performed, and in the next step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the effect character lottery is character C (panda).

  As a result of the determination, if the character C (panda) is selected, the process proceeds to step S2306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2306, the process is ended after preparing to transmit the button effect command in the second state to the second sub control unit 500. In this manner, when the character C (panda) is selected in the effect character lottery, the first stop mode notice is always executed (details will be described later).

  In step S2307, the state lottery is performed using the above-mentioned state lottery table, and in the next step S2308, it is determined whether or not the state lottery has not been won. As a result of the determination, in the case of winning, the process proceeds to the above-described step S2306, and after the preparation for transmitting the button effect command in the second state to the second sub control unit 500, the process ends. On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the process proceeds to step S2309, and the process is terminated after preparing to transmit the button effect command in the first state to the second sub control unit 500.

<Production lottery process 2>
FIG. 273 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 2 (step S2206) in the above-mentioned change start sub-side notice execution process.

  In step S2401, the universal figure production system 2 executability lottery is performed using the above-mentioned universal figure effect system 2 executability lottery table, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won. If the result of the determination is that the lottery has been won, the operation proceeds to step S2402, and if the lottery has not been won, the processing ends. In step S2402, after performing the general figure production system 2 lottery using the above-mentioned general figure production system 2 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, the process is ended after preparation for transmitting the lottery result (production pattern of general figure production system 2) of the general figure production system 2 lottery in step S2402 to second sub control unit 500.

<Sub-side notice execution processing at the start of universal map change>
FIG. 273 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the sub-side notice execution process at the start of universal figure fluctuation. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether or not the universal figure variation start command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 241 and receives the command. In this case, it is configured to execute the sub-side notice execution process at the start of universal figure fluctuation.

  Here, the universal figure fluctuation start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of fluctuation of the universal figure, and the command includes information on the universal figure stop symbol and the like. Be done. The general-diagram fluctuation start sub-side notice execution process is configured to store these pieces of information contained in the received general-university fluctuation start command in the RAM 408.

  In step S2501 of the sub-side notice execution process at the time of starting the universal figure fluctuation, the universal figure production system 1 executability lottery using the above-mentioned universal figure production system 1 executability lottery table is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won. To do. If the result of the determination is that the lottery has been won, the operation proceeds to step S2502, and if the lottery has not been won, the processing ends. In step S2502, after performing the universal figure production system 1 lottery using the above-mentioned universal figure production system 1 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the second sub-control unit 500 is prepared to transmit the lottery result of the universal figure effect system 1 lottery in step S2502 (effect pattern of the ordinary figure effect system 1), and then the process ends. In addition, since the public figure production system 1 is mainly for producing an announcement that the electric Chu is to be opened for a long time, it is executed in the "subject notice execution process at the time of starting the general figure variation start". On the other hand, since the general figure production system 2 is a notice regarding the special figure variation game, it is performed in "variation start sub side notice execution processing". It should be noted that the gazed effect (as a result, a pattern that does not open the power tube or a pattern that does not accompany the result expected as a notice) may be executable in any process.

<Operation reception production (reach A loss)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 274 and 275, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach A loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach A loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure.

  In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 variation game of the special figure variation game will be described, but the special figure 2 variation game may be applied instead of the special figure 1 variation game. Further, the special figure 1 variation game and the special figure 2 variation game may be able to be executed at the same time, and in this case, the special figure 2 variation game may be given priority over the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 274 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed and one special figure 1 variation game is held. In this state, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) to perform variable display of the special figure, and at the same time, turns on one first special figure holding lamp 218 (not shown). 1 Notify that the number of held variable games is 1.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol to display the variable variation of the decorative symbol. While performing, by displaying one circular image (normal hold icon) indicating a normal hold in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, the number of special game 1 variable games held is increased. Notify that it is 1. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and accepts the operation of pressing the chance button 700 until the acceptance of the operation of pressing the chance button 700 in FIG. 274 (h) described later is permitted. Prohibit

  FIG. 274 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. In this state, the main control unit 300 continues the variable display of the special figure by using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown), and lights the two first special figure holding lamps 218 (not shown), Figure 1 Notify that the number of pending variable games has increased from 1 to 2.

  Further, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning (ball entry) of the first special figure starting port 230, the prize corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above winning hole counter updating process (step S215). 1 is added to the sphere number storage area, and the prefetch process of special diagram 1 is executed in steps S2010 to S2015 of the special diagram prefetch process executed thereafter. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading advance notice execution command including the information on the variable time shown in FIG. 1 to the first sub control unit 400. In this example, as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is “special figure I”, the variation time is “40000 ms”, and the variation pattern is “reach A loss”.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start side winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process triggered by the reception of the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control unit 300, and at the step 2102, the variation time of special figure 1 Is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is 40,000 ms, the lottery process of the pending change of the subsequent step S2103 is performed. Here, as a result of the lottery process of the pending change, "no change" is selected as the holding mode. Suppose

  The 1st sub-control part 400 continues the variable display of a decorative design, and the hold icon of the normal hold displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative design display device 208 (hold corresponding to the first hold). By displaying one new hold icon for normal hold (hold icon corresponding to the second hold) to the right of (icon), it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is two.

  FIG. 274 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game which was being displayed in variation at the timing of FIG. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol, but in the present example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7−” corresponding to the special symbol I (missing symbol). "Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a → the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c → the middle symbol display In the area 208b, the stop display is performed in the order of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed. Therefore, when the decoration pattern combination “decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, the stop display is performed in the order of decoration 7 → decoration 3 → decoration 2.

  FIG. 274 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) to start the variable display of the special figure 1 and then turns off one of the first special figure holding lamps 218 (not shown). Special figure 1 One of the holdings of the variable game is exhausted, and it is notified that the number of holdings has decreased from 2 to 1. It should be noted that the variable display of the special figure 1 may be started after the first special figure holding lamp 218 is turned off (after the display of the hold reduction is performed) (the same applies to the following examples).

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special figure, by deleting one of the hold icon of the normal hold, to hold the special figure 1 variable game 1 is digested to notify that the number of reservations has decreased from 2 to 1. It should be noted that the variable display of the decorative pattern may be started after the hold icon of the normal hold is erased (the same applies to the following examples).

  FIG. 274 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game based on the first hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 uses the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) to stop the variable display of the special figure 1. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 4” corresponding to the special symbol I (missing symbol). -Decoration 5-decoration 0 "is stopped and displayed. When the decoration pattern combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed, the stop display is performed in the order of decoration 4 → decoration 0 → decoration 5.

  FIG. 274 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the second hold. In this state, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 by using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) and turns off one first special figure holding lamp 218 (not shown), Special figure 1 One of the suspension of variable games is consumed, and the number of suspensions is notified from 1 to 0. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special figure 1, and also erases one of the hold icons of the normal hold, thereby changing the special figure 1 game. One reservation is exhausted and the fact that the number of reservations has decreased from 1 to 0 is notified.

  FIG. 274 (g) shows a state where the reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” corresponding to the special symbol I (missing symbol), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 274 (h) shows a state in which the operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the "decoration 7" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. By displaying them side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously informed that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 urges the player to press the chance button 700 by performing a character display such as "Select with button" in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  274 (i) and 274 (j) show a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the chance button 700 is pressed. In addition to urging the player, images of all characters (in this example, character A (grandpa), character B (sabohani), character C (panda)) that may be selected in the production character lottery described later are displayed. . In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. Further, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. Note that the chance button 700 does not have to be illuminated.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect character lottery using the reach-A-time effect character lottery table in step S2304 of the effect lottery process 1 described above upon reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. However, in this example, it is assumed that the character A (grandpa) is selected. In the production character lottery of this embodiment, as shown in the reach A-time production character lottery table of FIG. 265 (a), when the variation pattern is reach A loss, there is a probability of 80/100. If the variation pattern is per reach A, the character A (grandpa) is selected with a probability of 30/100. It is easy for character A (grandpa) to be selected.

  FIG. 275 (k) shows a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is highlighted. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 produces an effect (in this example, character A (grandpa)) for notifying the type of the character selected in the above-described character effect (character A (grandpa) in this example). Perform a lighting effect to illuminate the surroundings.

  FIG. 275 (l) shows a state in which the operation acceptance production after the production character lottery is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 urges the player to press the chance button 700 by performing a character display such as "press with spirit!" In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The character A (grandpa) selected in the production character lottery is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table and selects the state, but in the present example, the first state (the chance button 700 at the initial position) is selected. To do. In the state lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in the state lottery table of FIG. 265 (c), when the selected character is character A (miss), the second state is selected with a probability of 3/100. However, the first state is selected with a probability of 97/100, and the first state is easier to select than the second state.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the button effect command in the first state to the second sub-control unit 500, as the first state is selected by the state lottery. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position in a light-emitting state because the chance button 700 is already in a position (initial position) where it can be operated in the first state.

  FIGS. 275 (m) and 275 (n) show a state where the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits the operation of pressing the chance button 700 to be accepted. Further, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. In addition to urging the user to press the button, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the button operation of the chance button 700 is performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to this example, and, for example, an effect of gradually reducing the remaining meter amount may not be performed (the same applies to the following examples).

  FIG. 275 (o) is an effect performed when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) Is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the stop display of the decorative symbol that was being variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol I (missing symbol). According to "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 275 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game based on the second hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbols in accordance with the stop display of the special symbols, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-” corresponding to the special symbols I (missing symbols). Decoration 6-decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

<Operation reception performance (per reach A)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach A hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach A hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure. Note that, hereinafter, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A loss) will be described.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. When the main controller 300 detects a winning (ball) of the first special figure starting port 230, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning hole counter updating process (step S215). 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetch process of special diagram 1 is executed in steps S2010 to S2015 of the special diagram prefetch process executed thereafter. In the present example, it is assumed that, as a result of the prefetching process of special figure 1, the stop symbol of special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "45000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach A".

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start side winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process triggered by the reception of the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control unit 300, and at the step 2102, the variation time of special figure 1 Is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is 45000 ms, the lottery process for the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed. Here, as a result of the lottery process for the pending change, "Hold B (D)" is selected. Suppose

  The 1st sub-control part 400 continues the variable display of a decorative design, and the hold icon of the normal hold displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative design display device 208 (hold corresponding to the first hold). By displaying a new hold icon (hold character image) of hold B on the right next to (icon), the special game 1 variation game has a hold count of 2 and corresponds to the second hold. Notify that the variation pattern of the special figure variation game is "per reach A". The subsequent FIGS. 276 (c) to 276 (f) are the same as those in FIGS. 274 (c) to 274 (f).

  FIG. 276 (g) shows a state in which reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit pattern), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The next FIG. 276 (h) is the same as FIG. 274 (h) above.

  276 (i) and (j) show a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700, and in step S2304 of the above-described effect lottery process 1, the effect character lottery using the reach A-time effect character lottery table described above. However, in this example, it is assumed that the character C (panda) is selected. In the effect character lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in the reach A-time effect character lottery table of FIG. 265 (a), when the variation pattern is reach A, the character C (has a probability of 40/100. While Panda) is selected, when the variation pattern is reach A loss, it is configured to select character C (panda) with a probability of 3/100. It is easy to select character C (panda).

  FIG. 277 (k) shows a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is highlighted. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 produces an effect (character C (panda) in this example) for notifying the type of the character selected in the character effect (character C (panda) in this example). Perform a lighting effect to illuminate the surroundings.

  FIG. 277 (l) shows a state in which the operation acceptance production after the production character lottery is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as "Hot!" In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby increasing the player's expectation and performing a lottery character lottery. The selected character C (panda) is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table and selects a state. However, in this example, when the character C is selected in the effect character lottery, it is always the second. The state (the chance button 700 at the operation completion position) is selected.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a button effect command in the second state to the second sub-control unit 500, as the second state is selected by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is at the initial position, the second sub control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position (operation completion position) where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state.

  277 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position, and permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. Further, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. In addition to urging the user to press the button, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the button operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 277 (o) is an effect performed when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) Is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a stop display of the decorative symbol that was being variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, a decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol). According to "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area of the ornamental pattern display device 208, and a display suggesting whether or not the special figure 1 variation game is successful (in this example, , "Congratulations" are displayed).

  FIG. 277 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game based on the second hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol). Decoration 7-decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

<Operation acceptance performance (per reach A, chance button failure)>
FIG. 278 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 278 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state), as in FIG. 277 (l). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 278 (m) to 278 (n), the second sub control unit 500 permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that acceptance of the pressing operation has been permitted. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, whereby the chance button 700 is displayed. In addition to urging the user to press the button, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the button operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 has been pressed for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). As shown in FIG. 278 (o), in accordance with the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol), in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, " The decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed, and a display (in this example, a character display such as" Congratulations ") indicating the result of winning or losing the special figure 1 variation game is displayed.

<Operation reception performance (per reach B)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 279 and 280, an example of the operation acceptance effect when the reach B hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. In addition, this figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach B hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure. Note that, hereinafter, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A loss) will be described.

  FIG. 279 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. When the main controller 300 detects a winning (ball) of the first special figure starting port 230, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning hole counter updating process (step S215). 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetch process of special diagram 1 is executed in steps S2010 to S2015 of the special diagram prefetch process executed thereafter. In this example, as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "65000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach B".

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start side winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process triggered by the reception of the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control unit 300, and at the step 2102, the variation time of special figure 1 Is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is 65000 ms, the lottery process for the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but here, it is assumed that “movable body” is selected as a result of the lottery process for the pending change. . In this case, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a movable body operation command for operating the effect movable body 224 to the second sub control unit 500.

  In the hold change advance notice lottery table shown in FIG. 264 (a), “movable body” is selected in the hold change lottery process by changing time of 60000 ms (change pattern is reach B loss) or by changing time. Is 65000 ms (variation pattern per reach B), the variation pattern may be reach B loss or per reach B when the production movable body 224 operates during the hold change. Determine.

  The 1st sub-control part 400 continues the variable display of a decorative design, and the hold icon of the normal hold displayed in a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative design display device 208 (hold corresponding to the first hold). By displaying one new hold icon for normal hold (hold icon corresponding to the second hold) to the right of (icon), it is notified that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game is two.

  FIG. 279 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 rotates the forearm 224b of the production movable body 224 up and down based on the movable body operation command received from the first sub-control unit 400, thereby reaching the reach B (reach). (B loss or per reach B) is announced. After that, the forearm 224b of the production movable body 224 is rotated up and down even during the variable display of the decorative symbols and the execution of the production.

  FIG. 279 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols for normal symbols are displayed variably. In this state, the main control unit 300 uses the normal symbol display device 210 (not shown) to perform the variable display of the universal figure, and also transmits the universal figure variation start command to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, when the general figure fluctuation start command is received from the main control section 300, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the general figure effect system 1 executability lottery table in the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation start sub-side notice execution process. If the general figure production system 1 execution possibility lottery is performed, and if the lottery is won, the general figure production system 1 lottery using the above-mentioned general figure production system 1 lottery table is further performed.

  In this example, the stop pattern of the universal figure is the universal figure B (winning symbol 2), and the general figure production system 1 execution possibility lottery is won, and P7 ("P7 (chance)" is produced as the production pattern by the general figure production system 1 lottery. → P7 (button) → presentation pattern 2), which is an effect pattern to be displayed in this order) is selected. According to the selected effect pattern 7, the first sub-control unit 400 displays in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the order of P7 (chance) → P7 (button) → general drawing decoration 2. In the universal figure production system 1 lottery table shown in FIG. 267 (b), P7 is selected as the production pattern only when the result determination result of the universal figure is the universal figure B (winning symbol 2). From the result, by executing the effect pattern P7, it is determined that the hit / no hit determination result of the general drawing is the general drawing B (winning pattern 2).

  Moreover, the 1st sub-control part 400 performs the universal figure production system 2 executability lottery using the universal figure production system 2 executability lottery table in the above-mentioned production lottery process 2, and when winning the said lottery, , The general figure production system 2 lottery using the above-mentioned general figure production system 2 lottery table is performed. In the present example, it is assumed that the variation pattern is per reach B, the regular figure production system 2 execution possibility lottery is won, and P7 (button) is selected as the production pattern by the general figure production system 2 lottery.

  The first sub control unit 400 displays P7 (button) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the selected P7 (button). After that, the display of P7 (button) is continued in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 even during the variable display of decorative symbols and the execution of effects. In the universal figure production system 2 lottery table shown in FIG. 267 (d), P7 (button) is selected as the production pattern only when the special figure variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B hit. From execution of the effect pattern P7 (button), it is determined that the special figure variation pattern is reach B loss or reach B hit.

  FIG. 279 (j) is a state in which reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit pattern), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  280 (k) and (l) show a state in which the operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the "decoration 7" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. By displaying them side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously informed that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as “One shot chance!” And “Push button to break clothes!” In the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, thereby pressing the chance button 700. Prompt the player for operation.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table to select a state. In this example, reach B (reach B loss, per reach B) is selected as the variation pattern. In such a case, the second state (the operation of pressing the chance button 700 at the operation completion position) is always selected. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a button effect command in the second state to the second sub-control unit 500, as the second state is selected by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is at the initial position, the second sub control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position (operation completion position) where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state.

  FIGS. 280 (m) and 280 (n) show a state where the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position, and permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. Further, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and visually confirms the button image. In order not to interfere with (in a mode in which at least a part of the button image is visible), the character image is superimposed on the button image, and a character display such as "press!" Is displayed above the character image. A pressing operation of the chance button 700 is urged.

  FIG. 280 (o) is an effect performed when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 has been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is an example. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a stop display of the decorative symbol that was being variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, a decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol). According to "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 280 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game based on the second hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit symbol). Decoration 7-decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  According to this example, even when the operating means does not enter the second state due to a failure or the like, the first notice (FIGS. 279 (h) to (j) and FIGS. 280 (k) to 280 (m) is displayed. Since it is possible to notify the player in advance of the actual state by the button image shown in ()), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged due to a failure or the like. Further, the conventional operation means is configured to have the expectation to the player according to the type of the state only during the effective period of the operation, but according to the present invention, the first advance notice indicates that before the effective period of the operation. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the player's motivation for playing the game can be increased more than before.

<Operation reception performance (per reach B, chance button failure)>
FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the valid period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 281 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state) as in FIG. 280 (l). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 281 (m) to 281 (n), the second sub control unit 500 permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that acceptance of the pressing operation has been permitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and hinders the visual recognition of the button image. The chance button is displayed by superimposing the character image on the button image and displaying "press!" Above the character image so that it does not exist (at least a part of the button image is visible). Prompt operation of pressing 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 has been pressed for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). As shown in FIG. 281 (o), in accordance with the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the special figure A (big hit symbol), “” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

<Modification of operation reception performance (per reach B)>
Next, a modified example of the above-described operation reception effect (per reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283. 282 and 283 are diagrams showing a modified example of the operation reception effect (per reach B) in time series.

  In this example, a rectangular variable icon display area 208e is provided in a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable icon display area 208e is a display area for displaying the hold icon corresponding to the special figure change game during change display (during digestion) for a predetermined period, and is held after moving to the change icon display area 208e. The icon may be called a variable icon.

  FIG. 282 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed and one special figure 1 variation game is held. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the variation icon CI corresponding to the special figure variation game being executed (being digested) in the variation icon display area 208e, and the hold icon corresponding to the first hold. (Normal hold) PI1 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 282 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. When the main controller 300 detects a winning (ball) of the first special figure starting port 230, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 in the above-described winning hole counter updating process (step S215). 1 is added to the storage area, and the prefetch process of special diagram 1 is executed in steps S2010 to S2015 of the special diagram prefetch process executed thereafter. In this example, as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "65000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach B".

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start side winning time sub-side pre-reading notice execution process triggered by the reception of the pre-reading notice execution command from the main control unit 300, and at the step 2102, the variation time of special figure 1 Is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is 65000 ms, the lottery process for the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but here, the pending icon indicating the confirmation of reach B as a result of the lottery process for the pending change. It is assumed that PI2 (the image with the character "B" added) is selected.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol, and newly displays one hold icon PI2 to the right of the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the first hold, It is informed that the number of holdings of the variation game of FIG. 1 is 2, and that the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the second holding is “per reach B”.

  FIG. 282 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special figure, and then moves the hold icon PI1 to the variable icon display area 208e to change it to the variable icon CI. In addition to moving the hold icon PI2 to the left, one hold of the special figure 1 variable game is consumed, and the fact that the number of hold has decreased from 2 to 1 is notified.

  FIG. 282 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started based on the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special figure, and then moves the hold icon PI2 to the variable icon display area 208e to change it to the variable icon CI. By doing so, one of the special game 1 variation game is digested, and it is notified that the number of reservations has decreased from 1 to 0.

  28 (g) and 28 (h) show a state where the first operation reception effect is being performed. In this state, the first sub control unit 400 urges the player to press the chance button 700 by displaying a character such as "PUSH" in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and permits reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  FIG. 282 (i) shows a state where the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 is triggered by the reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700, and in step S2304 of the above-described effect lottery process 1, the effect character lottery using the reach A-time effect character lottery table described above. However, in this example, it is assumed that the character A (grandpa) is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect using the character A (grandpa) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 282 (j) is a state where the reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the special symbol A (big hit pattern), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol is displayed. The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the area 208c. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub-control unit 400 also erases the variable icon CI displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

  283 (k) to (p) are diagrams showing an example of effects when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 283 (m), similarly to FIG. 280 (m), let's move the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completion position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). However, here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like, and the chance button 700 remains at the initial position.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 283 (m) to 283 (n), the second sub control unit 500 permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700 to cause the chance button 700 to emit light of a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is indicated that acceptance of the pressing operation has been permitted. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and visually confirms the button image. In order not to interfere with (in a mode in which at least a part of the button image is visible), the character image is superimposed on the button image, and a character display such as "press!" Is displayed above the character image. A pressing operation of the chance button 700 is urged.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 has been pressed for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). As shown in FIG. 283 (o), in accordance with the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the special figure A (big hit symbol), "" in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, The decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the game table according to the second embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the effect means that can execute at least the first effect. (For example, the effect control and the decorative pattern display device 208 performed by the first sub-control unit 400) and the first notice (for example, the effect in which the character C is selected in FIG. 277 (l), or the effect movable body in FIG. 279. A game table provided with a notice means (for example, a notice control or a decorative symbol display device 208 performed by the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least an effect that 224 operates), and the operation means includes a plurality of operation means. At least one of the plurality of types of states can be a state of at least one type, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, the chance button 700 in the initial position). Yes, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, the chance button 700 at the operation completion position that is a state in which it is projected from the initial position), and the first state is It is a state at least different from the second state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the effect means has the first effect (for example, FIG. 280 (o in FIG. 280 (o ), At least the effect of notifying the result of the special figure variation game notification) can be executed, and the first condition is satisfied by the player for the second period (for example, FIG. 280 (m)). (N) is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the operation means during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 700), the operation means being in the second state during the second period. At least The notice means is capable of performing the first notice (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 279 (h) to (j) and 280 (k) to 280 (m)) in the first period (for example, (Displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700) can be performed at least, and the first period is a period including at least a period prior to the second period, and the first period. The advance notice is at least a notice that the operation means can be in the second state.

  According to the game table according to the second embodiment, it may be possible to provide a game table having a feature in the advance notice means. Even if the operating means does not go into the second state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to notify the player of the actual state in advance by the first notice. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the person is disadvantaged. Further, the conventional operation means is configured to have the expectation to the player according to the type of the state only during the effective period of the operation, but according to the present invention, the first advance notice indicates that before the effective period of the operation. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the player's motivation for playing the game can be increased more than before.

  The first notice may be at least a notification that the operating means can be in the second state, and the state of the operating means actually becomes the second state (change). In addition to the above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery is won), the state of the operation means becomes the second state, or the state of the operation means is the second state. It also includes the case where the above second state cannot be achieved due to a failure or the like. Further, even when the first notice is not executed, the state of the operation means may be the second state.

  Further, the notice means is capable of executing at least a second notice during the second period, and the second notice at least indicates that the state of the operation means can be the second state. It may be a notice that can be grasped (for example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 280 (m) to (n)).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the second state will be provided as the second notice even during the second period, which is the operation valid period, so that the operation of the operation means can be easily transmitted to the player. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play.

  The second notice may be a series of notices as an extension of the first notice. For example, the first notice and the second notice may be included in a series of presentations composed of a plurality of presentations. May be included.

  Further, the first symbol variation display is capable of performing at least a symbol display means (for example, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208), the first The notice (for example, the display of an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 279 (h) to 280 (j) and 280 (k) to 280 (m)) is described above. Image that is at least executable during the execution of the symbol variable display and imitates the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in the second notice (for example, FIGS. 280 (m) to (n)). Display) is at least executable during execution of the first symbol variation display, and the notice means can at least continue the first notice until the second notice is executed. And It may be.

  With such a configuration, since the first notice is continued until the second notice is executed, it may be easy to understand the relationship between the first notice and the second state by the notice means.

  The first notice may be stopped immediately after the second notice is executed, or may be continued after the second notice is executed. Further, the timing of stopping the first notice includes after the lapse of the first period, after the end of the first effect, after stopping the display of the first symbol variation, after the end of the big hit game, and the like. .

  Further, when the operating means is operated during the third period (for example, the operation receiving period shown in FIGS. 282 (g) to (h)), the effect means produces a third effect (for example, FIG. 282 ( i), which is capable of performing at least the effect using the character A (grandpa), the third period is executing the first symbol variation display, and the third period is , The period before the first period (for example, the operation reception period shown in FIGS. 283 (m) to (n)), and the notice means is the third period (third effect). And another production that requires the operation of the operation means in the "hereinafter referred to as a fourth period" between the first period and the first period (the first stage) is not executed. At least the first notice can be continued until a period including at least a part of the period It may be.

  With such a configuration, the first notice can be continued until another effect is not performed, so that it may be possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner as to which effect will bring the second state.

  After continuing the first notice until a period including at least a part of the fourth period, another notice that can at least notify that the state of the operation means can be the second state is given. May be.

  Further, at least a symbol display means (for example, a left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing the first symbol variable display (for example, variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 279 (f) to (p)). , A middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c), and the symbol display means at least a second symbol variable display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 279 (d) to (e)). It is executable, and the second symbol variation display is at least a symbol variation display that can be executed before the first symbol variation display, and the first notice (for example, the effect movable body 224). The effect of rotating the forearm portion 224b up and down can be started at least during the execution of the second symbol variable display, and the second notice (for example, FIGS. 280 (m) to 280 (n)) is displayed. Show, complete The display of an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the position) is at least executable during the execution of the first symbol variation display, and the advance notice means executes the second symbol variation display. The first notice started during may be at least continuous over the first symbol variation display.

  With such a configuration, the first notice can be used as a pre-read notice (preliminary notice that suggests or clearly indicates the judgment result of the special figure variation game or the general figure variation game before the variation of the game starts). In some cases, the second notice can be announced in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The pre-reading notice may be continuously given over the plurality of symbol variable displays, or may be given intermittently during the multiple symbol variable displays. Further, it may be temporarily displayed during the one-time symbol variable display.

  Further, the production means is capable of performing at least the first production in accordance with one production pattern of a plurality of types of production patterns, and at least one of the plurality of types of production patterns, It is a first effect pattern, at least one of the plurality of kinds of effect patterns is a second effect pattern, the effect according to the first effect pattern, the operation means, the second It includes at least the second state in the period, the notice means performs at least the first notice suggesting that the first effect pattern, the operation means It may be possible to at least give advance notice that the state of 1 may become the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the second state by the first effect, and therefore, it may be easy to understand the relation with the second state by the advance notice means.

  In addition, the effect pattern includes a variation pattern determined by the main control unit 300 (for example, the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 263 (a) and 263 (b)), the first sub-control unit 400, or the first sub-control unit 400 based on the variation pattern. The effect patterns (for example, the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 267 (b) and (d) of FIG. 267) determined by the second sub control unit 500 are included.

  Further, a control means (for example, a second multiple control section 500) capable of controlling at least the state of the operation means is provided, and the control means is capable of performing at least the first control. Includes at least control for bringing the operating means into the second state, and the producing means is configured such that, even though the control means performs the first control, the operating means is in the second state. Even in the case of a state other than the state, at least the first effect may be executable.

  With such a configuration, even if the operating means does not change to the second state, which should be changed due to a failure of the operating means, the first effect can be executed. As a result, a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished can be prevented, and the interest in the game can be improved in some cases.

<Other Embodiments>
Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 284 to 300. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments other than the present embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 284 to 300 are given priority.

<Step-up notice lottery table>
FIG. 284 (a) is an example of a step-up notice lottery table used to determine a notice production mode in a step-up notice lottery of a notice lottery process (step-up) described later.

  The step-up advance notice lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this step-up notice lottery table, the effect mode (variation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) and the randomness of 0 to 99 The numerical range of numerical values and the notice production mode are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the notice effect mode based on the step-up notice lottery table and the random value obtained at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing the step-up notice lottery). "Step-up notice lottery".

  For example, when the variation pattern is the normal reach loss, the normal reach loss line is referred to and “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode regardless of the acquired random number value. When the variation pattern is reach A loss, refer to the reach A loss line, and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 59, select "1-2" as the notice effect mode, When the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 60 to 79, "1-2-3" is selected as the notice effect mode, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 89, the notice effect mode is " 1-2-3-4 "is selected, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99," 4 "is selected as the notice effect mode. Other variation patterns (reach B loss, per normal reach, per reach A, per reach B) are as shown in the figure.

  Here, the notice production mode “1-2” has two stages (2 steps) in the order of the notice production of step 1 → the notice production of step 2 before giving a predetermined notice (for example, notice of reach state). It is to give a notice production. In addition, the notice production mode “1-2-3” is in the order of notice production of step 1 → notice production of step 2 → notice production of step 3 before giving a predetermined notice (for example, reach notice). A three-stage (three-step) notice production is performed.

  In addition, the notice production mode “1-2-3-4” has the notice production of step 1 → the notice production of step 2 → the notice production of step 3 → before giving a predetermined notice (e.g., notice of reach state). The notice production of four stages (4 steps) is performed in the order of the notice production of step 4. On the other hand, the advance notice effect mode “4” is to perform the advance notice effect of step 4 without performing the advance notice effects of steps 1 to 3 before giving a predetermined advance notice (for example, advance notice of reach state).

<Status lottery table>
FIG. 284 (b) is an example of a state lottery table used to determine the state in the state lottery of the advance notice lottery process (step-up) described later.

  The state lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the notice effect mode selected in the step-up notice lottery, the numerical value range of the random number values of 0 to 99, and the type of state are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs "state lottery" for determining the state based on this state lottery table and the random number value obtained at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing the state lottery).

  For example, if the advance notice production mode selected in the step-up advance notice lottery is “4” (hereinafter, the advance production mode of “4” may be referred to as “first production”), 4 ( When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random number value is 90 to 99. When the value is in the numerical range of, the normal mode "(first state) is selected as the state. That is, when the notice production mode is “4 (first production)”, the vibration + rotation (second state) is easier to select than the normal mode (first state).

  In addition, the notice effect mode selected in the above step-up notice lottery is other than "4", that is, any of "1-2", "1-2-3", and "1-2-3-4". (Hereinafter, the aspect of any one of "1-2", "1-2-3", and "1-2-3-4" for the notice effect may be referred to as "second effect") Is referred to a row other than 4 (second effect), and when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, vibration + rotation (second state) is selected and acquired. When the random number value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, when the notice production mode is "other than 4 (second production)", the normal mode (first state) is easier to select than the vibration + rotation (second state).

  Here, the state selected in the state lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 285. Note that FIG. 11A is an exploded perspective view of the chance button unit 750, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of first to third states.

  The chance button unit 750 can vibrate the button case 750a made of a transparent member that can be pressed by the player, the rotary decoration member 750b rotatably arranged inside the button case 750a, and the button case 750a. Opportunity oscillator 750c, and a chance button 760 having the same.

  The second sub control unit 500 refers to the advance notice command received from the first sub control unit 400, and controls the chance button 760 according to the state information included in the advance notice command. In the present embodiment, when the state information is “vibration + rotation (second state)”, the rotation decoration member 750b of the chance button 760, as schematically shown in the upper part of FIG. While rotating, the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 is operated to vibrate the button case 750a. On the other hand, when the state information is “normal mode (first state)”, the rotating decoration member 750b and the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 are schematically shown in the middle part of FIG. Stop both

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal mode (first state)" is changed to "vibration + rotation (second state)", the rotation decoration member 750b of the chance button 760 cannot rotate due to a failure or the like. Therefore, as schematically shown in the lower part of FIG. 9B, a state in which only the vibration of the chance button 760 by the vibrator 750c is possible is called a state different from the first state and the second state. In some sense, it may be referred to as the “third state”. The state in which the vibration of the chance button 760 due to the vibrator 750c is disabled and only the rotation decoration member 750b of the chance button 760 can be rotated is different from the first state and the second state. You may call it a "3rd state" in the meaning of a state.

<Reach B jackpot state lottery table>
FIG. 284 (c) is an example of the reach B jackpot state lottery table used for determining the state in the state lottery of the notice lottery process (reach B sub) described later.

  The reach B big hit state lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this reach B big hit state lottery table, the numerical range of the random number values of 0 to 99 and the type of state are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, based on the state lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing the state lottery) when the above-described variation pattern is the reach B big hit. , "Reach B jackpot state lottery" to determine the state.

  For example, when the variation pattern is the reach B big hit, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random number value is selected. When is within the numerical range of 90 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, in this example, when the variation pattern is the reach B big hit, the vibration + rotation (second state) is more easily selected than the normal mode (first state).

<Production lottery table>
FIG. 284 (d) is an example of an effect lottery table used to determine an effect mode in the effect lottery of the notice lottery process (reach B sub) described later.

  The effect lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the effect lottery table, the state selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, the numerical value range of the random value of 0 to 99, and the type of effect are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs "effect lottery" for determining the effect mode based on this effect lottery table and a random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing effect lottery). .

  For example, when the second state is selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, direct hit (first effect) is selected as the effect mode. Then, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, the post-missing revival hit (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in this example, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), the direct hit (first effect) is easier to be selected than the revival after loss (second effect).

  Further, when the first state is selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, the direct hit (first effect) is selected as the effect mode. Then, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50 to 99, the post-missing revival hit (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in the present example, when the state is the normal mode (first state), the direct hit (first effect) and the post-lost revival hit (second effect) are selected with substantially the same probability.

<Preliminary lottery process (step up)>
FIG. 286 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the advance notice lottery process (step-up). The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment monitors whether or not the prefetching advance notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 241 and receives the command. In this case, the notice lottery process (step-up) is executed.

  In step S3001, the variation pattern information of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) included in the prefetch advance notice execution command is referred to, and the variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern (in the present embodiment, the step of FIG. 286 (a)). It is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern included in the up notice lottery table, that is, normal reach loss, reach A loss, reach B loss, per normal reach, per reach A, or per reach B). If so, the process proceeds to step S3002. If not, the process ends.

  In step S3002, step-up dry run lottery using the above-mentioned step-up preliminary announcement lottery table is performed, and in next step S3003, state lottery is performed using the above-mentioned state lottery table. In step S3004, preparation is made for transmitting the advance notice command including the information on the state selected in step S3003 to the second sub control unit 500. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above information transmission process (step S321).

<Preliminary lottery processing (reach B sub)>
FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the notice lottery process (reach B sub). The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment monitors whether or not the prefetching advance notice execution command is received from the main control unit 300 in the first sub-control unit main interrupt process shown in FIG. 241 and receives the command. In this case, the notice lottery process (reach B sub) is executed.

  In step S3101, by referring to the variation pattern information of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) and the value of the big hit flag included in the prefetching advance notice execution command, the variation pattern is for reach B and the big hit flag is on. Or not. If so, the process proceeds to step S3102. If not, the process ends.

  In step S3102, state lottery is performed using the above-mentioned reach B big hit state lottery table, and in the next step S3103, effect lottery is performed using the above-mentioned effect lottery table. In step S3104, preparation is made to transmit the advance notice command including the information on the state selected in step S3102 to the second sub control unit 500. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above information transmission process (step S321).

<Operation acceptance production and step-up notice production (normal reach loss)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, an example of the operation acceptance effect and the step-up notice effect when the normal reach loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing, in a time series, an example of an effect when normal reach loss is selected as the variation pattern of special figure 1.

  287 (c) and (d) show a state in which the operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of special figure 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating a button with the character "press" in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the player is urged to press the chance button 760. In this example, as the button image, an image different from the appearance of the actual chance button 760 is displayed, but an image simulating the appearance of the actual chance button 760 may be displayed. Good.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up notice lottery (step S3002) using the step-up notice lottery table in the notice lottery process (step-up) described above, and selects the notice effect mode. Then, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation game during variation display is the normal reach loss, and "1-2" is selected as the notice effect mode. In the step-up notice lottery table shown in FIG. 284 (a), when the variation pattern is normal reach loss, "1-2" is selected as the notice effect mode with a probability of 100%.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table (step S3003) and selects the state of the chance button 760. In this example, the notice production mode is the second production. “1-2”, and the “normal mode (first state)” is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 284 (b), when the notice production mode is other than 4 (second production), the normal mode (first mode) rather than vibration + rotation (second state) is used. (State of) is easier to select.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a notice command in the normal mode (first state) to the second sub-control unit 500, in association with the selection of the normal mode (first state) by the state lottery. To do. Since the chance button 760 is already in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 760 state and permits reception of the operation of pressing the chance button 760.

  FIGS. 287 (e) and (f) show a state in which the step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of special figure 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 operates the chance button 700 for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 760 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed. In case of, the step-up notice production is started. In this example, since "1-2" is selected as the notice effect mode, the notice effect of step 1 shown in FIG. 287 (e) (in this example, before the reach effect shown in FIG. 287 (g)). By displaying the image including the number 1) and then displaying the notice effect of step 2 shown in FIG. 287 (f) (in this example, the image including the number 2), two stages (two steps) are displayed. The notice production of.

  FIG. 287 (g) shows a state in which reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative pattern combination "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" corresponding to the loss, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, and then "decoration 7" is indicated in the right symbol display region 208c. Is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 287 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the second hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops and displays the decorative pattern combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” corresponding to the loss.

<Operation reception production and step-up notice production (per reach B)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289, an example of the operation acceptance effect and the step-up notice effect when the reach B hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 will be described. In addition, this figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach B hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1.

  288 (j) to (l) are states in which the operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby allowing the chance button 760 to be pressed. Encourage others.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up notice lottery (step S3002) using the step-up notice lottery table in the notice lottery process (step-up) described above, and selects the notice effect mode. Then, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation game in the variation display is reach B, the big hit flag is on (reach B big hit), and "4" is selected as the notice effect mode.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table (step S3003) and selects the state of the chance button 760. In this example, the notice production mode is the first production. “4”, and “vibration + rotation (second state)” is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 284 (b), when the notice effect mode is “4 (first effect)”, vibration + rotation (second mode) is more than in the normal mode (first state). State) is easier to select.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub-control unit 500 as the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected by the state lottery. Send the advance notice command. Since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration + rotation (second state), and at the same time, performs the operation of pressing the chance button 760. Allow reception.

  288 (m) and (n) are states in which the step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of special figure 1 corresponding to the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 operates the chance button 700 for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 760 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed. In case of, the step-up notice production is started. In this example, since "4" is selected as the notice effect mode, the notice effect of step 4 shown in FIGS. 288 (m) and (n) is performed before the reach effect shown in FIG. 288 (o). Then, by displaying an image including the numeral 4, the notice effect of step 4 is suddenly performed without performing the notice effect of steps 1 to 3.

  In this example, even after the chance button 760 is pressed at the timing of FIG. 288 (l), the chance button 760 is kept in vibration + rotation (second state) until the step-up notice ends. There is. Further, in this example, since the number of steps is smaller than that of the two-step notice effect mode “1-2”, the one-step notice effect mode “4” is selected, the steps in FIGS. 288 (m) and (n) are performed. By performing the notice effect of 4 twice, the time until the reach effect of FIG. 288 (o) is made the same as in the case of the step-up notice of "1-2".

  FIG. 288 (o) shows a state in which reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative pattern combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit, after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, “decoration 7” is displayed in the right symbol display region 208c. Is displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second sub control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to the normal mode (first state).

  288 (p) to FIG. 289 (s) are states in which the second operation reception effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 289 (r), the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 and “press!”. By displaying the characters, the player is urged to press the chance button 760.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B big hit state lottery table in the advance notice lottery process (reach B sub), and selects the state. , "Vibration + rotation (second state)" is selected as the state. In the reach B big hit state table shown in FIG. 284 (c), when the variation pattern is reach B big hit, the vibration + rotation (second state) is higher than in the normal mode (first state). Easy to select.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery using the above-described effect lottery table (step S3103) and selects an effect mode. In this example, the state selected in the state lottery is “vibration + It is assumed that the direct hit (first effect), which has a higher winning probability than the rehabilitation after loss (second effect), is selected because it is a rotation (second state). In the effect lottery table shown in FIG. 284, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), direct hit (first effect) is better than recovery after loss (second effect). Is easy to select.

  In this example, the winning probability of direct hit (first effect) in the effect lottery is set higher than the winning probability of after resurrection (second effect). The winning probability of the second effect) is set higher than the winning probability of the direct hit (the first effect), and the winning revival hit (the second effect) is performed rather than the direct hit (the first effect). You may comprise so that it may become easy.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub-control unit 500 as the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected by the state lottery. Send the advance notice command. Since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration + rotation (second state), and at the same time, performs the operation of pressing the chance button 760. Allow reception.

  Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (r), when the chance button 760 is changed from the normal mode (first state) to the vibration + rotation (second state), the rotation decoration member of the chance button 760 is rotated. Even when 750b becomes unrotatable due to a failure or the like and the chance button 760 can be vibrated only by the vibrator 750c (the third state), in the present embodiment, the chance button 760 is vibrated + rotated. The operation reception effect similar to the case of changing to the (second state) is performed, and the reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted line frame in FIG. 289).

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 289 (r), when the chance button 760 is to be changed from the normal mode (first state) to the vibration + rotation (second state), the rotation decoration member of the chance button 760. Even when both the 750b and the vibrator 750c become unrotatable due to a failure or the like and remain in the normal state (first state), in the present embodiment, the chance button 760 is vibrated + rotated (second state). The operation reception effect similar to the case of changing to the state) is performed, and the reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted line frame in FIG. 289).

  289 (t) and (u) are states in which a direct hit (first effect) is being performed before the confirmation display of special figure 1. The first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 760 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, or when the chance button 700 has been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), The production is started before the confirmation display of special figure 1.

  In this example, since "direct hit (first effect)" is selected as the effect mode, the first effect shown in FIGS. 289 (t) and (u) is displayed before the confirmation display shown in FIG. 289 (v). Production (in this example, a production that suggests that the winning / discarding determination of the special figure 1 variation game is a success (in this example, a character display such as "win" or "Congratulations" or an image display of the decoration 7) is performed. Note that, in this example, since the direct hit (first effect) effect, which has less effect time than the effect (second effect) after revival after loss, is selected, the results are shown in FIGS. 289 (t) and (u). In FIG. 289 (v), the time until the confirmation display is performed is performed by performing the direct hit effect twice.

  FIG. 289 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the first hold is completed. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variable display of the special figure using the first special figure display device 212 (not shown). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variable display of the decorative symbols in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” corresponding to the big hit. Is being stopped.

  FIG. 290 is a diagram corresponding to FIGS. 289 (s) to (v) above, and is a diagram showing an example of the effects in a time series when the post-missing revival hit (second effect) is selected by the effect lottery. Is.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B big hit state lottery table in the advance notice lottery process (reach B sub) to select the state, but in this example, It is assumed that the "normal mode (first state)" is selected as the state. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect lottery using the effect lottery table described above (step S3103) and selects an effect mode, but in the present example, after a loss after revival (second effect), Suppose it is selected.

  290 (t) and (u) show a state in which the second effect is being performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1. In the present example, the first sub-control unit 400 selects "per revival after loss (second effect)" as the effect mode, so that before the confirmation display shown in FIG. t), the second effect shown in (u) (in this example, a false effect that falsely suggests that the winning / failing judgment of the special figure 1 variation game is a loss (in this example, characters such as "about that") After the display and the image display of the decoration 6), a true presentation (in this example, a character display such as "Nanchatte") or a decoration 7 that suggests that the winning / disapproving judgment of the special game 1 variation game is really a hit Image display).

  According to this example, it is possible to expect that the first effect (effect that suggests the result of winning or losing judgment of special figure 1 variation game) is performed by the second state (vibration + rotation), and the player's game In some cases, it can motivate you.

<Modification 1 of operation acceptance production and step-up notice production>
FIG. 291 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIGS. 287 to 289, and FIGS. 291 (a) to (h) are shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to (h). It corresponds to.

  291 (c) and (d) are states in which the operation reception effect is being performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the second hold. In the present modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image simulating a button with the character “press” in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby giving a chance. The player is urged to press the button 760, and the operation to press the chance button 760 is performed by gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the valid period of the operation to press the chance button 760. The effective time of.

  In addition, FIGS. 291 (e) and (f) show a state in which the step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the second hold. In the present modification, even if the chance button 760 has not been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the first sub control unit 400 sets the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. When it has passed, the step-up notice production is started. Further, in the present modification, since "1-2" is selected as the advance notice effect mode, the advance notice effect of step 1 shown in FIG. 291 (e) (before this reach effect shown in FIG. 291 (g). In the example, the image including the number 1 is displayed, and then the notice effect of the step 2 shown in FIG. 291 (f) (in this example, the image including the number 2) is displayed, whereby two steps ( (2 steps).

  As shown in FIG. 291 (e ′), instead of displaying the notice effect in step 1, variable display of decorative symbols may be performed. Further, the contents of this modified example may be applied to the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect (per reach B) shown in FIG. 288.

<Modification 2 of operation acceptance production and step-up notice production>
FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a modification example 2 of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIGS. 287 to 289, and FIGS. 292 (o) to (v) show FIGS. 288 (o) to 289 (). It corresponds to v).

  292 (p) to (s) are states in which the operation reception effect is being performed. In this modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. , "Press!" Is urged to the player to press the chance button 760, and the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced according to the remaining time of the effective period of the press operation of the chance button 760. The effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 is informed by performing the effect of moving forward.

  In addition, FIGS. 292 (t) and (u) show a state in which the post-missing revival hit (second effect) is performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1. In the present modification, even if the chance button 760 has not been pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the first sub control unit 400 sets the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. When it has passed, the second effect (in this example, a false effect that falsely suggests that the winning / disapproval determination of the special figure 1 variation game is a failure (in this example, a character display such as “that extent”, After the decoration 6 image is displayed), the true representation suggesting that the winning / discarding judgment of the special figure 1 variation game is really a hit (in this example, a character display such as "Nanchatte" and an image display of the decoration 7) )I do.

  In addition, in the present modification, an example is shown in which after the loss of the chance button 760, the effective period of the depression operation of the chance button 760 is forcibly performed (second effect). It may be configured to forcibly perform a direct hit (first effect) when the period has elapsed.

  As described above, in the game table according to the third embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 760) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the effect means (at least the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects) ( For example, a game console provided with the effect control and the decorative symbol display device 208) performed by the first sub-control unit 400, wherein the operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states, At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, the chance button 760 in the normal mode), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, Vibration + rotation chance button 760), the first state is at least different from the second state, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first state. It is an output (for example, a first effect shown in FIG. 289 (t) (a true effect that suggests whether or not the special figure variation game is true or false), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is , A second effect (for example, a second effect shown in FIG. 290 (t) (a fake effect that falsely suggests that the winning / failing judgment of the special figure variation game is a failure)), and the first effect is , At least an effect different from the second effect, the effect means is capable of performing at least the first effect when the first condition is satisfied, the effect means, When the first condition is satisfied, at least the second effect can be executed, and the first condition is that the player operates the operation means during the first period. It is a condition that may be satisfied, and the first effect is the first Wherein said operating means in a period when the a second state, said a second at least performed easily effect than demonstration, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  The game table according to the third embodiment may be able to provide a game table having a characteristic in the relationship between the rendering means and the operating means. In addition, it may be possible to expect the first effect to be performed in the second state, which may increase the player's motivation for playing.

  In addition, the operation means (for example, the chance button 760) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means that can execute at least the first effect (for example, effect control and decoration performed by the first sub-control unit 400). A pattern display device 208), and the operating means is capable of performing at least a plurality of types of states, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first A state (for example, a chance button 760 in the normal mode), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, a vibration + rotation chance button 760), and the first state. Is a state at least different from the second state, and the first effect is at least an executable effect when the operation means is operated in the first period (for example, in FIG. 289 (t)). It is a first effect (true effect that suggests whether or not the special figure variation game is a hit), and the first effect is that the state of the operation means in the first period is the second value. In the case of the state, it may be an effect that is more easily executed than at least other effects.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic relationship between the effect means and the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to expect the first effect to be performed in the second state, which may increase the player's motivation for playing.

  Further, the first effect is an effect that may be executed even when the operating means is not operated in the first period, and the second effect is the first period. The effect may be executed even when the operation means is not operated.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic relationship between the effect means and the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to expect the first effect to be performed in the second state, which may increase the player's motivation for playing.

  In addition, the operation means is at least capable of taking at least the second state in association with the first effect, and the operation means is associated with at least the second effect in association with the second effect. It may be at least capable of taking the two states.

  Further, the first effect includes at least an effect for deriving a first result (e.g., hit / miss determination result of special figure variation game), and the second effect is the first result. At least recognizing that the first effect is derived in the second period, and the second effect is the third effect. It is at least recognizable to derive the first result in the period of, and the second period may start at least earlier than the third period.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to derive the first result earlier in relation to the player's operation in the second state, and to allow the player to positively operate the operation means. May be possible.

  The aspect of the first result by the first effect (for example, display, sound, light, movement) and the aspect of the second result by the second effect may be different or the same. It may be one. Further, the first effect and the second effect may be configured such that the player can recognize the first result at the same timing even if the effects are different. For example, if the second effect (second state) is given more added value than the first effect (first state), for example, the first effect is a rare effect, In some cases, the operation means can be operated positively.

  Further, the second effect is at least recognizable as deriving (or possibly deriving) the second result (for example, the loss of the judgment result of the special figure variation game) in the fourth period. The fourth period is a period at least partially overlapping with the second period, the third period is a period started at least after the fourth period, The second effect is at least recognizable to be changed from the second result to the first result in the third period, and the second result is the first result. The result may be at least different from the result.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible for the player to recognize the final result, the first result, in the first state, so that a sense of security and expectation can be given to the player. There is.

  The first result and the second result are not limited to those notified by the combination display of the decorative symbols, and may be notified by the presence or absence of the movement of the movable body, or by the outcome of the battle effect. You may notify. In this case, even if the symbol combination is not derived, the player may be able to easily recognize that the first result or the second result may be obtained due to the game nature, the effect, or the like. In addition, the first result and the second result are not only related to the success or failure of the special map variation game, but also the notice for going to the intense heat reach, the result of the prefetch notice, the result of the general figure production, the mission achievement and setting. The present invention can be applied to various effects such as registration (changing the effect according to the level and giving a sense of superiority).

  Further, a decorative pattern display means capable of at least performing variable display of decorative symbols is provided, and the first result is a stop mode in which the stop mode of the decorative patterns allows a big hit to be recognized, and the second result is The stop mode of the decorative pattern may be a stop mode in which a loss can be recognized.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to quickly recognize that a big hit has occurred in accordance with the operation of the operation means, and in some cases, the relationship between the operation of the operation means and the big hit may be close. Further, it may be possible to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

  Further, the effect means, even if the operation means is operated to enable execution of the first effect, if the operation means is not operated, to the first effect Instead, at least the second effect may be executable.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to quickly recognize the big hit by operating the operation means by the first effect, and thus the operation means may be actively operated. The effect production unit may continuously execute the first effect when the operation unit is not operated.

  Further, a control means (for example, a second multiple control section 500) capable of controlling at least the state of the operation means is provided, and the control means is capable of performing at least the first control. Includes at least control for changing the state to the second state, and the production means is the second state even if the operation means performs the first control. Even in a case other than the above, at least the first effect may be executed.

  With such a configuration, even if the operating means does not change to the second state, which should be changed due to a failure of the operating means, the first effect can be executed. As a result, a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished can be prevented, and the interest in the game can be improved in some cases.

  In addition to the first state (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 285 (b)), states other than the second state include the first state and the second state (for example, FIG. 285). A third state different from the vibration + rotation shown in (b) (for example, only the vibration shown in FIG. 285 (b), only rotation not shown, the first state and the second state) There are multiple differences, one of which is inoperable due to a failure).

  Further, the operation means is at least capable of being in the first state during the second period, and the effect means is the second state when the operation means is operated during the second period. At least an effect (for example, an effect that suggests a loss) can be performed, and the second effect may be at least a different effect from the first effect (for example, an effect that suggests a hit).

  With such a configuration, since the relationship between the second notice and the first effect is maintained, the player will not be mistaken for the effect or the like.

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the first effect and the second effect when the operation means in the first state is operated, and is in the second state. When the operation means is operated, at least the first effect and the second effect may be executed.

  In addition, the first state may be a normal state (for example, the operation means in the initial position). The second state may be a mode in which at least the first mode (for example, height, vibration, curing, rotation, wind, etc.) is added to the first mode.

  Further, the operating means may be easier to take in the first state than in the second state in the first effect, and the operating means may be in the first effect. The second state may be easier to take than the first state.

<Embodiment 4>
Next, a pachinko machine according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described in detail. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, only the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described.

<Lottery table for continuous rotation>
FIG. 293 is an example of a lottery table for determining the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits, which is used for determining the number of consecutive hits.

  The continuous hit count lottery table is one of the data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this lottery table such as the number of continuous hits, the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 variable time lottery (or the special figure 2 variable time lottery) and the randomness of 0 to 99. The numerical range of numerical values, the state of the chance button 700, and the number of consecutive hits are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits based on the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits and the random value obtained at a predetermined timing (for example, when executing the state lottery). Perform "state lottery" to decide.

  For example, when the variation pattern is the reach C loss, the line of the reach C loss is referenced, and when the acquired random number value is 0, the “second state (single operation)” is selected as the state and the number of continuous hits. Then, when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 1 to 5, when the second state (3 times operation) is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 6 to 19 When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, "second operation (5 times or more 1/10 lottery)" is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits. Operation (5 times and later 1/10 lottery) "is selected.

  When the variation pattern is per reach C, the row per reach C is referred to, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, the state and the number of repeated hits are “second state (one time). Operation) ”, and when the obtained random number value is in the numerical range of 80 to 89, select“ second state (3 times operation) ”as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the obtained random number value is 90 to 93. In the numerical range of, the second operation (5 times or later 1/10 lottery) is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and when the acquired random number value is 94, the state and the number of repeated hits are set as the "first operation". When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 95 to 96, "First state (3 times operation)" is selected as the state and the number of repeated hits, and the acquired random number value is selected. When is in the numerical range of 97 to 99, " Selecting one of the operation (5 times since 1/10 lottery) ".

  In the lottery table for continuous hits and the like according to the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is reach C loss, the winning probability in the second state is 20/100, and the winning probability in the first state is 80/100. When the variation pattern is per reach C, the winning probability in the second state is 94/100, and the winning probability in the first state is 6/100. In other words, if the special figure variation game wins or loses, the second state is easier to win than the first state, while if the special figure variation game wins or loses the second state, The first state is easier to win than the state.

  In addition, when the special figure fluctuation game winning or losing judgment is a win, the second state is easier to win than the first state, but it is particularly easy to win the "single operation" in the second state (winning). Probability is 80%). Also, if the winning / disapproving judgment of the special figure variation game is lost, the first state is easier to win than the second state, but the first state (one-time operation) or the first state (three-time operation) ) Is not won, and only “5/10 or later 1/10 lottery” is won. That is, in the case where the hit determination of the special figure variation game is a hit, the number of continuous hits is smaller than when the hit determination of the special figure variation game is lost.

<Operation acceptance production (reach C loss)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach C loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach C loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure.

  FIG. 294 (c) shows a state where the reach design is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" corresponding to the lost symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, and then "decoration" in the right symbol display region 208c. "7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  294 (d) to (h) show a state in which an operation reception effect is suggested, which suggests that it is a reception period for the operation of pressing the chance button 700. The first sub-control unit 400 performs a character display such as “Tear off your clothes by repeated hits!” At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, and then at the timing shown in FIGS. By displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display of "continuous hitting !!" in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the display device 208, the first The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in the state (initial position) (continuously hitting the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the lottery table, such as the number of consecutive hits described above, at the start of the operation reception effect, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is assumed that the “first state (5 times or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of continuous hits. In the lottery table for the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 293, when the variation pattern is reach C loss, the first state (5 times or more and 1/10 lottery) is the easiest to win.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 informs the second sub-control unit 500 of the first state by selecting the first state (1st lottery after 5 times) by the state lottery. Send the advance notice command including. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

  FIG. 294 (i) shows a state in which the effect is being performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state If it is pressed only for 5 times selected in the lottery, and if you do not win the lottery with a winning probability of 1/10, the production (in this example, the special game 1 variable game win / loss judgment is missed) After performing the suggested effect (in this example, the character display such as "that extent" or the image display of the decoration 6), the stop display of the decorative pattern combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the loss To do.

<Operation reception performance (per reach C)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 296, an example of the operation reception effect when the reach C hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure will be described. It should be noted that this figure is a diagram showing in time series an example of the effect when the reach C hit is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure.

  FIG. 295 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the ordinary design decorative pattern similar to that of FIG. 279 (g) is performed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 follows P7 (chance) → P7 according to the effect pattern 7 selected in the ordinary figure effect system 1 lottery using the ordinary effect effect system 1 lottery table. (Button) → Display in the order of universal decoration 2. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, according to P7 (button) selected in the ordinary figure effect system 2 lottery using the ordinary figure effect system 2 lottery table, P7 (button). ) Is displayed. After that, the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 7E and the display of P7 (button) are continued in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 while the effect shown in FIG. However, in this example, the display of P7 (button) is temporarily erased during the reach effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 295 (f) shows a state where a reach effect is being performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable symbol that is being variably displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the book In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the jackpot pattern, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, and then "decoration" in the right symbol display region 208c. "7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 informs that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state by displaying the letters "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIGS. 295 (g) to (i) show a state in which an operation reception effect is suggested, which suggests that it is a reception period for the operation of pressing the chance button 700. The first sub-control unit 400 displays a character such as "Tear off clothes with repeated hits!" At the timing shown in (g), and then at the timing shown in (h) to (i), the decorative pattern. By displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position), the character “repeatedly stroked” is provided in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the display device 208, The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) (continuously hitting the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the lottery table, such as the number of consecutive hits described above, at the start of the operation reception effect, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is assumed that the “second state (single operation)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of repeated hits. In the lottery table for the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 293, when the variation pattern is per reach C, the second state (single operation) is the easiest to win.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 selects the second state (one-time operation) by the state lottery, and accordingly notifies the second sub-control unit 500 of the advance notice command including the information of the second state. To send. Since the second sub-control unit 500 has the chance button 700 in the initial position (first state), as shown in FIG. 295 (h), the operation of the chance button 700 from the initial position (first state) is completed. Move to position (second state).

  296 (j) to (l) show a state in which an effect is being performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state When the push operation is performed only once in the lottery, the effect (in this example, the effect indicating that the judgment of the variation of the special figure 1 variable game is a win (in this example, the character display such as "win") is displayed. Or, after displaying the image of the decoration 7), the decoration pattern combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, and the second sub-control unit 500 is the first sub-control unit. In accordance with the effect produced by 400, as shown in (j) and (k) of the same figure, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is rotated up and down.

<Modification 1 of operation reception performance (per reach C)>
297 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 295 to 296, and FIGS. 297 (f) to 297 (m) are shown in FIGS. 295 (f) to 296 (). It corresponds to m).

  297 (h) and (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state), as in FIG. 295 (h). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub control unit 400 sets the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIGS. 297 (h) to (i). By performing an image display imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the center of which the characters “repeated strokes” are applied and which is in the second state (operation completion position), the second state (operation completion position) is displayed. The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 (continuously pressing the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

<Modification 2 of operation acceptance performance (per reach C)>
298 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 295 to 296, and FIGS. 298 (f) to 298 (m) are shown in FIGS. 295 (f) to 296 (). It corresponds to m).

  298 (g) to (i ') show a state in which an operation reception effect is suggested, which suggests that it is a reception period for the operation of pressing the chance button 700. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as "Tear off clothes with repeated hits!" At the timing shown in (g) of the same figure, and then decorates at the timings shown in (h) to (i ') of the figure. By displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display of "repeated hits!" In the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208, The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (continuously pressing the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the lottery table, such as the number of consecutive hits described above, at the start of the operation reception effect, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is assumed that the “first state (5 times or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of continuous hits. The first sub-control unit 400 informs the second sub-control unit 500 that the first state (5 times and subsequent 1/10 lottery) has been selected by the state lottery, which includes the information of the first state. Send a command. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

  298 (j) to (l) show a state in which an effect is performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or the chance button 700 is a predetermined number of times (in this example, the state If it is pressed only for 5 times selected in the lottery, and if you do not win the lottery with a winning probability of 1/10, the effect (in this example, the special game 1 variable game win / fail judgment is a win) After performing the suggested effect (in this example, character display such as "winning" and image display of decoration 7), stop display of decorative pattern combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the winning pattern To do.

<Modification 3 of operation acceptance performance (per reach C)>
FIG. 299 is a diagram showing a modified example 3 of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 295 to 296, and FIGS. 299 (f) to (m) are shown in FIGS. 295 (f) to 296 ( It corresponds to m).

  298 (g) to (j ′) are states in which an operation reception effect is suggested, which suggests that it is a reception period for the operation of pressing the chance button 700. The first sub-control unit 400 displays characters such as "Tear off clothes with repeated hits!" At the timing shown in (g) in the figure, and then decorates at the timing shown in (h) to (j ') in the figure. By displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character display of "repeated hits!" In the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208, The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (continuously pressing the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position)). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a state lottery using the lottery table, such as the number of consecutive hits described above, at the start of the operation reception effect, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is assumed that the “first state (5 times or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of continuous hits. The first sub-control unit 400 informs the second sub-control unit 500 that the first state (5 times and subsequent 1/10 lottery) has been selected by the state lottery, which includes the information of the first state. Send a command. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

  298 (j) to (l) show a state in which an effect is performed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. In the present modified example, the first sub-control unit 400, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the period of the operation acceptance effect, or when the chance button 700 has the predetermined number of times ( In this example, when the press operation is performed only 5 times selected in the state lottery, and if the lottery with the winning probability of 1/10 is not won, the effect (in this example, the special game 1 variable game win / fail judgment is determined). After performing a fake effect that falsely suggests that it is a loss (in this example, a character display such as “that extent” or an image display of the decoration 6), the winning / judgment of the special figure 1 variation game is really a hit. After performing a true production (in this example, a character display such as "Nanchatte" or an image display of the decoration 7), a decorative pattern combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the winning pattern is performed. Is displayed.

  According to this example, the second state (one-time operation at the operation completion position) is easier than the first state (five-time operation at the initial position) to perform the first effect (special operation 1). In some cases, it may be possible to facilitate the production of suggesting the result of the determination of the variation game). In addition, there is a case where the function of serving as a notice by the second state (for example, an increase in the degree of expectation) is fulfilled, but the derivation of the result does not bother the user.

<Modification 4 of operation reception performance (per reach C)>
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing a modified example 4 of the operation acceptance effect (per reach C) shown in FIGS. 295 to 296, and FIGS. 300 (f) to 300 (m) are shown in FIGS. 295 (f) to 296 (). It corresponds to m).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 300 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the operation completion position to the initial position, but here, an example in which the chance button 700 cannot be raised to the initial position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like. Shows.

  In the present modification, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub-control unit 400 has the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timings shown in (h) to (j ') of FIG. By displaying an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) and the character string "repeatedly hit !!" in the center of the, the chance button in the first state (initial position) is displayed. The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on 700 (continuously hitting the first state (initial position) chance button 700). At the same time, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified by performing an effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the fourth embodiment has an operating means (for example, a chance button 700) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and an effecting means capable of executing at least the first effect ( For example, a game console provided with the effect control and the decorative symbol display device 208) performed by the first sub-control unit 400, wherein the operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states, At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, the chance button 700 in the initial position), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, , The chance button 700) at the operation completion position in which it is in a state of protruding from the initial position, the first state is at least different from the second state, and the first performance is (For example, as shown in FIGS. 295 (j) to (l), which suggests that the special figure variation game win / loss determination is a hit), if the first condition is satisfied (for example, chance button 700 is 1 It is an effect that can be executed at least when the button is pressed down twice, and suggests that the determination as to whether or not the special figure variation game shown in the first effect (for example, FIGS. 298 (j) to (l)) is a hit. Is a production that can be executed at least when the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 700 is pressed five times and the lottery with a winning probability of 1/10 is not won). Yes, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied by the player operating the operating means in the second state, and the second condition is that the player uses the first condition. By operating the operating means in the state A condition that may be, the first condition, the a met is likely to occur than the second condition, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to provide a game table having a feature in the operation means. In addition, in the second state, it may be possible to easily perform the first effect with an easier operation than in the first state. In addition, there is a case where the function of serving as a notice by the second state (for example, an increase in the degree of expectation) is fulfilled, but the derivation of the result does not bother the user.

  In addition, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the operating device a first number of times (for example, once), and the second condition is a condition that the operating device is set to the second operating condition. This is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the number of times (for example, 5 times), and the first number may be less than the second number.

  With such a configuration, the second state can give the player a sense of expectation, but may not be suitable for operations that require a large number of times. Therefore, by changing the number of times from the first state, the game can be played. There is a case where the operator does not feel the trouble of operation.

  The first number may be 0 and the second number may be 1. For example, in the second state, the first effect is performed at a certain timing even if the player does not perform a button operation. On the other hand, in the case of the first state, it may be possible to add value to the second state if the first effect is not performed unless the button is operated.

  Further, the operation means is at least capable of being in one of the first state and the second state in one effect pattern capable of executing the first effect. It may be.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the first effect can be expected depending on the state of the operating means.

  Further, the first effect is an effect capable of at least suggesting the result of the hit determination, and the first condition is at least satisfied by operating the operation means for the first number of times in a first period. In some cases, the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the second number of times in the first period, and the first effect is Even when the first condition is not satisfied (for example, when the acceptance period of pressing operation of the chance button 700 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed without pressing the chance button 700 the first number of times). The effect can be executed at least after the first period ends, and the first effect is when the second condition is not satisfied (for example, the chance button 700 is pressed a second number of times). Acceptance period of depressed chance buttons 700 without (e.g., 5 seconds) is the presentation of the may be capable of at least performed after the first period ends even if) past.

  With such a configuration, the result of the hit determination is the effect that the player pays most attention to, and the player can be surely shown to the player regardless of the operation of the operation means (whether or not the condition is satisfied). it can.

  The first effect is an effect capable of at least suggesting a first result as the result of the hit determination, and the first result is a result in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit. One production can suggest the first result by a plurality of types of patterns, at least one of the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern, and at least one of the plurality of types of patterns. One is a second pattern, and the first pattern is capable of executing only an effect capable of suggesting the first result when the first condition is satisfied. One pattern can execute only an effect that can suggest the first result when the second condition is satisfied, and the second pattern is that the first condition is satisfied. If possible, suggest a second result Is capable of suggesting the first result after executing, and the second pattern is a presentation capable of suggesting the second result when the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the effect that can suggest the first result after executing, the second result is a result that the result of the hit determination is lost, the effect means, If the one condition is not satisfied, the second pattern may be easily selected as the execution of the first effect.

  Further, when the first effect is executed in the first pattern, the operation means is easy to take the first state, and the operation means uses the first effect as the first effect. When the second pattern is executed, the second state may be easily obtained.

  Further, the first effect is at least a notice, and the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the first number of times in a second period. The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the second number of times in the second period, and the first effect is that the first condition is satisfied. If not, it is at least not executed, and if the second condition is not satisfied, the first effect may be at least not executed.

  The notice is not necessarily directed to the player, unlike the effect that suggests the result of the judgment. Therefore, it may be possible to effectively prompt the operation of the operation means by giving the advance notice only when the condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the effect means is capable of at least executing the second effect, the second effect is an effect at least executable when a third condition is satisfied, and the second effect is , At least an effect that can be executed when the fourth condition is satisfied, and the third condition may be satisfied at least when the player operates the operation means in the first state. The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by the player operating the operation means in the second state, and the third condition is (the first condition). (The state) is a condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing the operation of the operating means for a third period, and the fourth condition is the operating means (which is the second state). Continue operation for a fourth period A condition that when at least satisfied by the third period may be the same as the fourth period.

  With such a configuration, since another production is provided in which the operation period of the operation means is the same and the difficulty of establishing the condition is substantially the same regardless of the state, in the second production, the difference in state is announced. In some cases, it may be possible to provide only as a function (only a difference in the degree of expectation), and it may be possible to make a variation in the function due to a difference in the state.

  Further, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing the operation of the operation means (which is in the first state) for a first period, and the second condition Is a condition that may be satisfied at least by continuing the operation of the operation means (which is in the second state) for a second period, and the first period is the second period. May be shorter than.

  Further, the state may be determined after selecting either the first effect or the second effect at the same timing. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give variations to the effect using the operating means at the same timing.

  The configuration of the game table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the production means and the notification means according to the present invention include a speaker, in addition to the liquid crystal display device and the lamp, A movable body, operating means itself, etc. can be applied. Therefore, the presentation by the presentation unit and the notification by the notification unit are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device, the light emission by the lamp, and the like. For example, the sound by the speaker, the movement or vibration by the movable body, the light emission or blinking of the operation unit itself, etc. But it's okay. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and may be any operation means that can be operated by the player.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the operation means is in an error state. Further, the number of the notification means is one, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means is not operating up to the position where it should be originally moved. Further, the number of the notification means is one, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating up to the position where the operating means originally moves. Here, the “different notification mode” may be either no notification, only notification, or no notification.

  Further, there may be a plurality of notifying means, and at least one or all of the plurality of notifying means may notify the operation. Further, there may be a plurality of informing means, and different informing modes may be performed when the operating means is not operating up to the originally moved position. Here, the "different notification mode" may include a case where a predetermined notification means of the plurality of notification means does not perform the notification, or a case where all of the plurality of notification means do not perform the notification. Further, the operating means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever or the like.

  Further, in the case where there are a plurality of effects resulting from the operation being received by one informing means, at least one of the plurality of effects may not be performed when the operating means is not operating up to the second position where the notification originally moves. Good. Further, the effect obtained by accepting the operation by each of the plurality of notification means may be performed, and at least one of the plurality of notification means when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where the original movement is made. The effect may not be performed. In addition, one effect may be one effect resulting from the operation being accepted. Further, the plurality of notification means may include one that does not produce the effect as a result of accepting the operation.

  Further, although an example has been shown in which the detection of the operation means and the effect based on the detection result are performed by different control units, the detection of the operation means and the effect based on the detection result may be performed by the same control unit. Further, even when the detection of the operation unit and the effect based on the detection result are performed by different control units, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, , The operation detection result is transmitted to another control unit, and the other control unit is configured to accept the detection result, while the operation detection is performed when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result.

  Further, when the operation means is operated when the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit, While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is set to the first control unit. Alternatively, it may be transmitted to the second control unit, but the first control unit or the second control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result. Further, when the operation means is operated while the operation unit is located at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is located at the second position. The detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit when the operation unit is operated during operation or during operation.

  Further, the destination of the operation detection result before, during, and after the operation of the operation means may be the first control unit. Further, even when the operation means is operated during operation, the operation detection result may be accepted by another control unit. When the operating means before the operation is operated, the detection result of the operation is transmitted from the first control section to the second control section, and when the operating means is operated during or after the operation, the second control section is operated. You may make it transmit the detection result of operation to a 1st control part. Further, before the operation and during the operation may be transmitted to the second control unit, and after the operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  Also, if the operating means is not operating to the second position that originally moves, if the notifying means gives a notification suggesting the second position that originally moves, the second position that was originally supposed to move is played. In some cases, the player can be informed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the second position where the player originally moves. Further, when the operating means does not operate to the second position where the player originally moves, if the notifying means gives a notification that does not suggest the second position where the player originally moves, confusion of the player due to a mismatch between the operating state and the notification mode. May be prevented. Further, in this case, the notification that does not suggest the second position that originally moves may notify the position of the operating means before the operation, or the notification that does not suggest the second position that originally moves is the same as before the operation. The position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, the first operation unit and the second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the detection result of the operation of the first operation unit is displayed. The operation result of the operation of the second operation unit is not received before the operation of the operation unit is possible, and at least when the operation unit operates to the second position where the operation unit originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation unit The detection result may be accepted.

  In addition, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation unit does not operate to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If not accepted, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, since the originally operable second operation unit can be operated, it is possible to perform the same operation as when the operation unit moves to the second position where the operation unit originally moves, and thus the player It may be possible to prevent it from being disadvantaged. In this case, the notification means does not have to notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation unit does not operate to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated. In this case, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit is operable and not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, since it is sufficient to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit is operable by the notification unit, or the notification unit may notify that the first operation unit is operable, The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  In addition, when the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted when the operation unit is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is accepted even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the operation unit from being broken by refraining from operating the operation unit when the operation unit is not operating to the second position where the operation unit originally moves. In this case, the notification means does not have to notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  In the case where the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated when the detection result of the second operation unit is not received when the operation unit does not operate to the second position where it originally moves. In addition, while notifying that the second operating unit is operable by the notifying unit, it is not necessary to notify that the first operating unit is operable by the notifying unit. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness by changing the operable operation unit when the operation means is not operating to the position where it is originally moved. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit is operable by the notification unit, or the notification unit may notify that the first operation unit is operable, The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  Further, the operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. In addition, the effect means, in the case where the operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, in accordance with the operation of the operation means, the special means. At least the effect may not be executed.

  Further, when the operation means moved to the second position by the movement control is operated, (1) the detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance) provided in the operation means. It may be that the pressing operation of the operating means is detected by the detecting portion of the button 750 and the detecting portion of the bet button 132, and (2) the operation means is provided after the time required for the movement control has elapsed. The pressing operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detected detection unit (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the detection unit of the chance button 750, the detection unit of the bet button 132).

  Further, the time required for the movement control may be the time required to move from the first position to the second position, and the driving means provided in the operating means (for example, the driving unit 708 (708a, 708b) may be used. ), The driving source 754d and the driving unit 427) may be operated until the rotating member rotates from the restricting position to the permitting position. When the moving unit is driven up and down, the moving unit is moved. May be the time until it moves to the movement completion position.

  In addition, if the operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, (1) the operation is performed due to a physical factor such as a failure of the drive means or a press by the player. The means may be immovable, or (2) the driving means may not be able to perform a constant drive even after the time required for movement control has elapsed. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operation means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  Alternatively, the movement control may detect that the operation means has completed moving to the second position. In this case, it can be seen that the operating means could not be moved to the second position because it was not detected, so that it is possible to perform an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, the movement control may detect that the operating means cannot move to the second position. In this case, it can be known that the operation means has completed the movement to the second position because it has not been detected, and thus it may be possible to perform an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation unit is operated even while the movement control is being executed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, the first movement period is a period including a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement. Even when the control is being executed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. Further, the special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being executed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when the movement control is started and ended in 1 second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed even if the operation means is operated for 0.5 seconds (an example of the second period) after the start, A special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated for 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from the start of 0.5 seconds to the end. Of course, when the movement control is started and ended within 1 second (an example of the movement control period), a special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated during the 1 second.

  Further, regarding the operating means moved to the second position, when the operation receiving period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed, the operating means may be moved to the first position by movement control. Further, the operation means moved to the second position may not be returned from the second position to the first position when the operation reception period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed.

  Further, for the operation means moved to the second position, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation acceptance period. Regarding the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation acceptance period. Further, the operation means moved to the second position may be moved from the second position to the first position by a physical factor during the operation reception period.

  Further, when a plurality of operating means are provided (for example, the first operating means of the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operating means of the plurality of operating means). The means does not move, and the notification means notifies the user to press the first operation means) (hereinafter (A)). When the operating means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (A) above, if the first operating means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operating means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (A) above, if the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (A) above, if the first operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected.

  Further, when a plurality of operating means is provided (for example, the third operating means and the fourth operating means of the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and , When the notification for prompting the operation of the third operating means is made) (hereinafter, in the case of (B)), the third operating means is set to the second position in spite of the movement control. When it has not moved, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of the above (B), if the third operating means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means is detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B), if the third operating means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means should not be detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (B), if the third operating means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means should not be detected. May be. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B), when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Further, in the case of (B), when the third operating means is moved to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected.

  When a plurality of operating means is provided (for example, the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means of the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by movement control, , The notification for prompting the operation of the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means is given) (hereinafter, in the case of (C)), the pressing operation of the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means is detected. If the detection of the fifth operation means is faster than that of the sixth operation means (the same applies in the case of sixth detection> fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operation means is not accepted. Alternatively, the detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection process of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  Further, in the case of the above (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are substantially simultaneous, the detection may be accepted at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, the detection of the sixth (fifth) operation means may be performed after the detection of the fifth (sixth) operation means is received. When the detection is accepted, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. In addition, when they are almost simultaneous, one of them may be preferentially accepted. For example, of the pressed operating means, the operating means that produces an effect advantageous to the player may be prioritized, or the predetermined operating means may be prioritized.

  Further, in the above case (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, or the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected. Further, in the case of (C), the sixth operating means may be left at the second position when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, or the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected.

  In the cases (B) and (C) above, when the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period ends, movement control is performed. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timings of movement may be substantially the same for the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means, and one of them may move first and the operation is in progress or the operation has ended. The other may be moved later.

  In addition, when the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position after the acceptance of the operation, the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means. It is also possible to stop the operation means of) as it is at the second position. Further, when the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period ends, the movement control controls the third (fifth) operation means and the third (fifth) operation means. Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  If the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position during the operation acceptance period, the movement control controls the third (fifth) operation means and the third (fifth) operation means. The fourth (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timings of movement may be substantially the same for the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means, and one of them may move first and the operation is in progress or the operation has ended. The other may be moved later.

  If the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position during the operation acceptance period, the movement control controls the third (fifth) operation means and the third (fifth) operation means. Only one of the four (sixth) operation means may be moved to the first position.

  Further, the operation acceptance period refers to a period in which the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means is accepted. For example, when the operation acceptance period is 6 seconds, the inspection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is accepted for 6 seconds after starting the operation acceptance, but the inspection result of the operation means is not accepted after 6 seconds have elapsed.

  Also, a special effect can be executed when the operating means in the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by the movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by the movement control is pressed. There may be. The third position may be different from the first position and the second position.

  Further, the first notice and the second notice (including the pre-reading notice) are not limited to the display of an image simulating the operation means, and include, for example, a voice from a speaker, light from a lamp, movement by a movable body, and hold. Includes icons, variable icons, text display, etc. The second period is not limited to the period after the reach, and may be the period before the reach. For example, the reach advance notice may be executed in the second period.

  Further, when the operation means is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, the first state is a state in which the light emitting means is not operating and does not emit light, and the second state is: The light emitting means may be activated to emit light.

  Further, the first effect and the second effect are not limited to effects by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable member 224, and may be effect sounds by a speaker or effects by a lamp. One, a plurality, or all of the above may be used.

  Further, the operating means is not limited to the chance buttons 700 and 760, and includes, for example, the bet buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 of the slot machine 100 described above.

<Other embodiments (suspend effective time)>
Hereinafter, a game table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 301 to 314. In addition, in order to avoid duplicated description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 301 to 314 are given priority.

  Although the details will be described later, the game table according to the present embodiment is a game table including an operating unit and a display unit, and is a unit capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of them is a first display, the first display is a display relating to the operation means, and the display means is capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second period when the display condition is satisfied, and the second period is the first period. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is a longer period and the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated.

<Basic concept>
First, the basic concept of the gaming table according to this embodiment will be described. The gaming table according to the present embodiment is configured to have an operating unit and a displaying unit. The operation unit is a unit that can be operated by at least the player, and examples thereof include the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, and the ball firing handle 134 described above. Further, the display means is a means capable of performing at least display, and examples thereof include the above-mentioned decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps, various LEDs, and the like.

<Basic concept / display>
Next, the display by the display means according to the present embodiment will be described. The display according to the present embodiment includes a display of an operation means image representing the operation means, a display of an elapsed time notification image for notifying (clear or suggesting) the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation means, and the operation means Display of an effective time notification image for notifying (expressing or suggesting) the effective time in which the operation can be accepted, display of a display mode change image in which the display mode can be changed according to the operation of the operating means, and At least a display of an operation prompting image for prompting an operation, an animation display according to the operation by the operation means, and an animation display related to the operation means and unrelated to the operation by the operation means are included. Then, the display according to the present embodiment is configured by one, a plurality, or all of these plurality of displays, for example, the display of the operation means image and the display of the operation promotion image of the plurality of displays, It also includes a display represented by a single figure.

  Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, in the first effect of a plurality of types of effects, one of the displays according to the present embodiment is displayed, and among a plurality of types of effects, The second effect may be configured to display a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment. Further, in a gaming table capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, a first effect of a plurality of types of effects displays a plurality of displays according to the present embodiment, and a first of the effects of a plurality of types. Even in the second effect, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment may be displayed.

  Here, the operation means image is a character, a number, a figure or the like representing the operation means, and for example, the character “chance button” indicating the name of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) or the operation means image. An example is a figure that imitates the appearance. The elapsed time notification image is a character, number, figure, or the like for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operating means, and is, for example, a character representing the elapsed time (for example, the character “3 seconds have elapsed”). As an example, a meter display that shows the elapsed time on a scale is given. Further, the effective time notification image is a character, a number, a figure, or the like for notifying the effective time that the operation means can accept the operation, and for example, a character indicating the effective time (for example, "3 seconds remaining"). Character), and a meter display that shows the effective time on a scale is an example.

<Basic concept / display mode of display>
Next, the display mode of the display according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 and 302. 301 and 302 are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the display according to another embodiment (temporarily suspending the valid time). In the figure, the image indicated by reference numeral BG is an operation means image, the image indicated by reference numeral TG is an effective time notification image, the image indicated by reference numeral CG is a display mode change image, and the reference numeral PG is indicated. , An operation promotion image.

  FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b) show in time series an example in which the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment overlaps with the second display due to a change in the display mode. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (a), the operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG are arranged in this order from the upper side to the lower side at predetermined intervals. By displaying the operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG, the display is controlled so that they are not overlapped with each other. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (b) after the lapse of the predetermined time, by moving the display of the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG upward, a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG becomes The display control is performed so that the display mode change image CG overlaps a part of the display.

  The operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG may each be composed of different image data (still image data or moving image data), or one moving image. It may be configured by a part of a plurality of image data included in the image data.

  According to such display control, in this example, at least a part of the first display (display of the display mode change image CG in this example) of the displays according to the present embodiment causes the second display (this example). Then, since at least a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG) is overlapped (covered), a part of the second display (in the present example, the display of the effective time notification image TG) is part of the first display ( In this example, the display mode change image CG is displayed to make it invisible from the front (or more difficult to view than when there is no first display). In this example, a part of the display of the display mode change image CG overlaps a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG (a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG is covered). The display of the image other than the display mode change image CG may be partially overlapped with the display of the image other than the effective time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (b), the operation means image BG and the display mode change image CG, and the operation means image BG and the operation promotion image PG are controlled so as not to overlap each other. By such display control, at least a part of the first display (display of the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG in this example) of the displays according to the present embodiment is the second display (book. In the example, since at least part of the display of the operation means image BG does not overlap, all of the second display (display of the operation means image BG in this example) is visible from the front. In this example, the operation means image BG is not overlapped with the display of other images, but the image other than the operation means BG is not overlapped with the display of the other one (or a plurality of) images. You may comprise.

  In addition, in FIGS. 301 (c) to (e), at least a part of the first display among the displays according to the present embodiment overlaps with at least a part of the second display due to the change of the display mode. Examples are shown in chronological order with or without overlapping. In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (c), the same display as that shown in FIG. 301 (b) is displayed, but at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (d) after the elapse of a predetermined time, the display mode is changed. By deleting the display of the change image CG, all of the effective time notification image TG can be visually recognized from the front. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (e) after the lapse of a predetermined time, the same display as that shown in FIG. 301 (c) is displayed again, and thereafter, the display shown in FIG. 301 (d) and FIG. The display shown in) is repeated.

  As described above, at least a part of the first display (display of the display mode change image CG in this example) of the displays according to the present embodiment is the second display (effective time notification image TG in this example). If the display is controlled so that it overlaps or does not overlap with at least a part of the display (for example, displaying or deleting the second display), the first display and the second display At the timing when they do not overlap with each other, the second display may be visually recognized from the front, and the effect may be enhanced.

  Further, in FIGS. 301F to 301H, the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment is started at the first timing, and then the second display is started at the second timing. , An example of erasing only the second display at the third timing is shown in time series. Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (f), the first display (in this example, the display of the operation means image BG) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (g) after the elapse of a predetermined time. , The second display (in this example, the display of the effective time notification image TG) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (h) after the elapse of a predetermined time, the second display (in this example, the effective Only the display of the time notification image TG) is deleted. If such display control is performed, the display time of the first display and the second display can be appropriately adjusted depending on the display content, and it may be possible to perform a display that is easier to understand than in the past.

  In addition, FIGS. 301 (i) to 301 (m) are diagrams showing a specific example of the display according to the present embodiment in time series. A figure simulating the appearance of the button in the figure shows an example of the operation means image BG, and the characters "* (the number is entered in the part *) destroy the body" show an example of the display mode change image CG, The characters "PUSH !!" and "Repeat !!" and the downward arrow graphic indicate an example of the operation promotion image PG, and the meter graphic and "remaining * seconds (* indicates a number)" The letters indicate an example of the effective time notification image TG.

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 301 (i), the figure of the meter of the effective time notification image TG is displayed immediately below the operation means image BG (substantially the center of the display area), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, After the timing indicated by 301 (j), the characters "remaining * seconds (a number is entered in the * part)" of the effective time notification image TG are displayed in the upper right of the operation means image BG (the upper right corner of the display area). By doing so, the display mode of the effective time notification image TG is changed and the display position of the effective time notification image TG is also changed. As described above, if the display mode and the display position of the display according to the present embodiment are changed, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the display in which the display mode and the display position are changed, and the player's interest is increased. May be able to increase.

  Further, FIGS. 302 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 302 (d) to (f) respectively perform the first display and the second display of the displays according to the present embodiment. In addition, it is a diagram showing in time series an example of deleting the first display and the second display after controlling the display so that the third display overlaps the second display.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 302 (a) to 302 (c), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (a). After the notification image TG is displayed) and the display is controlled so that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps with the second display, FIG. At the timing shown in (b), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased. Therefore, in this example, at the timings shown in FIGS. 302 (b) and 302 (c), the first display (display of the operation means image BG), the third display (display of the display mode change image CG), The visibility of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) is not hindered.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 302 (d) to (f), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time notification image TG) at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (d). Is displayed), and the display is controlled so that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps the second display, and then the second time longer than the first time elapses. The first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (f) later. Therefore, in this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (e), part of the second display (effective time notification image TG) is visually recognized from the front by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). Impossible (or difficult to see compared to when there is no third indication).

  In addition, FIGS. 302 (g) and (h) and FIGS. 302 (i) and (j) respectively show the first display and the second display among the displays according to the present embodiment, and then, An example of performing the third display is shown in time series. Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 302 (g) and 302 (h), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time notification image) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (g). After the display of the TG), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (h) after the elapse of the third time. (Display) is erased. Therefore, at the same timing, the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) visually confirms the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG). Sex is not hindered.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 302 (i) and 302 (j), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (i). ), The first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time) at the timing shown in FIG. 302 (j) after the lapse of the fourth time longer than the third time. The display of the notification image TG) is continued. Therefore, at the same timing, due to the third display (display of the display mode change image CG), a part of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) is invisible from the front (or the third display). It is difficult to see compared to the case without).

<Display control in button production>
Next, display control in the button effect according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, the "button effect" according to the present embodiment is, for example, as shown in FIG. 303 (b), as a display of the above-mentioned operation means image BG, a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed. As the display of the above-mentioned effective time notification image TG, a graphic of a meter showing the remaining time of the effective time at which the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted is displayed as a scale, and as the above-mentioned operation promotion image PG display. This is an effect of displaying the character "PUSH" and performing the first display as the above-mentioned display mode change image CG. The button effect is not limited to this example, and may be configured by one or a plurality of these multiple displays.

  Further, the game table according to the present embodiment is configured by the control unit shown in FIG. 187, and specifically, the main control unit 300 that performs the control process of the whole game and the process generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing related to performance based on information, and a second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. There is. In the following description, the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as a “sub control unit”, and the control by the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as a “sub control”. The second sub-control unit 500 may be referred to as a “liquid crystal control unit”, and the control performed by the second sub-control unit 500 may be referred to as a “liquid crystal control”.

  Further, “operation” shown in the following drawings indicates whether or not the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is operated, and the vertical thick line indicates that there is an operation. Further, the “effective time” shown in the drawing indicates the remaining time (second) of the effective time of the chance button 136 by a numeral. The “valid state” shown in the drawing indicates whether the operation of the chance button 136 is valid (a state in which the operation can be accepted) or invalid (in a state in which the operation cannot be accepted), and the underline is invalid. In this state, the upper line shows the valid state. The “liquid crystal control” and “sub-control” shown in the drawings are as described above, and the arrows shown in the drawings indicate transmission or reception of various commands.

<Display control / no operation in button production>
FIG. 303A shows, in time series, an example of button effects when the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid time of the chance button 136.

  At the timing indicated by T1 in FIG. 303 (a), the sub-control unit switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state, and the valid time of the chance button 136 (5 seconds in this example, and so on). Has started counting down. Further, the sub control unit transmits a button effect start command for instructing the start of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit which has received the button effect start command has started the button effect. In the button effect start command, time information indicating the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 at the time of command transmission, and image data of an image displayed in the button effect (in this example, operation means image BG). , Effective time notification image TG, and operation promotion image PG).

  Upon receiving this button effect start command, the liquid crystal control unit displays the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) and the effective time notification image TG (the remaining effective time of the chance button 136 as the button effect. The display of a meter figure showing time on a scale) and the operation prompting image PG (display of characters "PUSH") are displayed. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit increments the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) every time the effective time is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second in this example) after starting the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. The display is reduced by one.

  Further, the sub-control unit continues counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, and the effective time becomes 0. At the timing shown in T2 of FIG. 303 (a), the sub-control unit finishes the button effect. A button effect end command for instructing is transmitted. Upon receiving this button effect end command, the liquid crystal control unit first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG. , Button production has ended.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the valid time of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit transmits a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit to inform that the operation of the chance button 136 has been received. However, in this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid time of the chance button 136, the sub control unit does not transmit the button reception command.

<Display control in button effect / button effect example of single operation>
FIG. 303B shows, in time series, an example of button effects on the gaming machine that can accept the operation of the chance button 136 only once during the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the valid time of the chance button 136, and when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, the display mode change image CG is displayed. ing.

  The sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown by T3 in FIG. 303B, and the number of operations of the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number (one time in this example). The effective time of the button 136 is initialized to 0, and a button reception command including time information of 0 second is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that receives the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 0 seconds erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG, and displays the display mode change image CG. As the display, the first display is displayed, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the first display is erased to end the effect.

  Although the sub-control unit is configured to send a button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit when the chance button 136 is operated during the valid time of the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. When the chance button 136 is valid, the liquid crystal control unit is configured to send the button reception command unconditionally (regardless of whether the chance button 136 is valid or not). It may be configured to determine whether or not there is and display the corresponding display only during the valid period.

  In the following, with regard to the gaming machine, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted a plurality of times during the valid time of the opportunity button 136, and the display mode change image CG can be displayed each time the operation of the opportunity button 136 is accepted. explain. In the button effect, the case where the sub control unit mainly manages the valid time of the chance button 136 and the case where the liquid crystal control unit mainly manages the valid time of the chance button 136 will be described separately.

<When the display control / sub-control unit in button production manages the effective time>
When the sub-control unit manages the effective time, in the first sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms cycle), counting of the effective time counter used for managing the effective time (subtraction, addition, etc.) I do. The valid time counter may be counted each time the first sub-control unit main process is executed, or may be performed each time the first sub-control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. The process of temporarily suspending the valid time of the operating means may be realized by not counting the valid time counter (skipping the counting process), or the counting of the valid time counter is continued and the valid time counter is It may be realized by not performing the determination process of whether or not the predetermined number is reached.

  In addition, when the effective time of the operating means is temporarily stopped, in the first sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms period), the effective time cancel counter used to cancel the temporary stop of the effective time ( Subtraction, addition, etc.) may be performed.

<Button effect example 1 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 303C shows a button effect example 1 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T3, but since the operation of the chance button 136 can be received multiple times during the valid time of the opportunity button 136, While continuing the countdown of the effective time of 136, the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds continues without erasing the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG. The display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the liquid crystal control unit continues to count down the effective time of the chance button 136 even while the first display is displayed or erased, and the effective time is reduced each time the effective time is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second). The display of decreasing the scale of the notification image TG (meter figure) by one is continued.

  Further, the sub-control unit transmits a button effect end command to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control unit that receives this button effect end command , The display of the operation promotion image PG is first erased, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG are erased, thereby ending the button effect.

<Button effect example 2 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 304 (a) shows a button effect example 2 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, each time the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to hold the current valid time, and the liquid crystal control unit displays the chance button. A button reception command including the time information of the valid time of 136 and the information of the pause for temporarily stopping the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is transmitted, and the button including the time information of the valid time and the information of the pause. Upon receiving the acceptance command, the liquid crystal control unit temporarily suspends the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136.

  The sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to countdown the valid time when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and also informs the liquid crystal control unit of the valid time after the countdown. And the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the information about the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time and the button reception command including the information about the release of the pause. Restart the countdown.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (a), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T2, pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and stops the current effective time (3 seconds). ) Is held, and a button reception command including time information of an effective time of 3 seconds and suspension information for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. .

  Upon receiving the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds and the information of the pause, the liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing. , The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Due to the interruption, the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is not reduced by one. As a result, the period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) indicates 3 seconds is longer than that in the example shown in FIG. 303 (c).

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 to perform the countdown of the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds), and also notifies the liquid crystal control unit of the countdown after the countdown. The button reception command including the information of the effective time (2 seconds) and the information of the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the effective time notification image is displayed. Continue to reduce the TG (figure on the meter) scale by one. Further, the sub-control unit transmits a command for instructing the end of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing indicated by T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control which receives this command The section first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

<Button effect example 3 when the display control / sub-control unit in the button effect manages the effective time>
FIG. 304 (b) shows a button effect example 3 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 304 (a) to countdown the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). At the same time, the button reception command including the information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the effective time notification image TG ( The display of reducing the scale of (meter figure) by one is continued. Further, the sub-control unit transmits a command instructing the liquid crystal control unit to end the button effect at the timing indicated by T6 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control which receives this command The section first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

  In this example, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is restarted at the timing T5, which is later than T3 shown in FIG. 304 (a), the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) has a scale of 3 The period indicating seconds is longer than that in the example shown in FIG. 304 (a).

<Button effect example 4 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 304C shows a button effect example 4 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, each time the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 and then temporarily stops the countdown, and the liquid crystal control unit notifies the effective time after the countdown. Of the chance button 136 and the information of the suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 are configured to be transmitted.

  For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 304 (c), the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T2, counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 (3 seconds → 2 seconds), and then counts down. Button reception command including the time information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the suspension for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 as well as the liquid crystal control unit. To send.

  Upon receiving the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds and the information of the pause, the liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing. , The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds is received. , The effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing T7 to perform the countdown of the effective time, and the liquid crystal control unit displays the effective time (1 second) after the countdown. The button reception command including the information and the information about the suspension release for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted.

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit suspends the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 until it receives the button reception command from the sub control unit, and executes the countdown of the valid time before the suspension. The period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) indicates 2 seconds is longer than that in the example shown in FIG. 303 (c).

<Example 5 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 305 (a) shows a button effect example 5 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. 304 (b) to countdown the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). At the same time, the button reception command including the information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  Since the liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 3 seconds, the execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 3 seconds is completed. continuing. Then, after the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 3 seconds is completed to the end, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is restarted, and every time the effective time is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second), the effective time notification image TG (meter) is displayed. The figure) is continuously reduced by one.

  In this example, since the timing for counting down the effective time in the sub control unit and the timing for counting down the effective time in the liquid crystal control unit are different, the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second. Even if there is, the valid time in the sub control unit becomes 0 second, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be invalid. Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated during execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display corresponding to the operation may not be performed.

<Example 6 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 305 (b) shows a button effect example 6 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, when the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T2, the sub-control unit does not temporarily stop the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and notifies the liquid crystal control unit of the valid time ( In this example, the button reception command including the information of 3 seconds) is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds and the information of the pause, the liquid crystal control unit continues without erasing the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG. Then, the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Due to the temporary interruption, the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is not reduced by one.

  Further, the sub-control unit transmits a button reception command including information of the effective time after the countdown (1 second in this example) to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing T4, and the liquid crystal control which has received the command. The section adjusts the effective time of the chance button 136 based on the effective time information included in the command, and performs the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second. It should be noted that the sub-control unit does not transmit the button reception command including the valid time information to the liquid crystal control unit at the same timing, and the liquid crystal control unit manages the valid time of the chance button 136 by itself. You may comprise.

<Button effect example 7 when the display control / sub-control unit in the button effect manages the effective time>
FIG. 306 (a) shows a button effect example 7 in a time series when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, every time the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit temporarily stops the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to hold the current valid time, and the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled. At the same time, a button reception command including time information of the valid time of the chance button 136 and suspension information for temporarily stopping the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the effective time and the information of the suspension temporarily suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  In addition, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 to countdown the valid time when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and sets the acceptance of the chance button 136 to the valid state, and the liquid crystal display. A button reception command including information on the effective time after the countdown and information on the pause release for restarting the countdown on the effective time is transmitted to the control unit, and the button reception command including the information on the pause release is transmitted. The received liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 306 (a), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T2, pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and stops the current effective time (3 seconds). ) Is held, the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled, and the liquid crystal control unit is caused to temporarily stop the countdown of the valid time of the valid time of 3 seconds and the valid time of the chance button 136. A button reception command including information and is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds and the information of the pause, the liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing. , The first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily performed. Due to the interruption, the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is not reduced by one.

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled, the detection of the chance button 136 may be ignored, or the chance button 136 is detected. The button reception command may not be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. Further, although the sub-control unit detects the chance button 136 and transmits the button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit, the liquid crystal control unit may be configured not to execute the process corresponding to the button reception command. Good.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the chance button 136). Counts down the effective time, sets the acceptance of the chance button 136 to the effective state, and informs the liquid crystal control unit of the information of the effective time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and the effective time. The button reception command including the information about the suspension release to be resumed is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second), the effective time notification image TG ( Decrease the graduation of (meter figure) by one and continue the display.

  Note that in this example, the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled during the period of T2 to T3, but the chance button lamp 138 may continue to be lit during that period, or throughout the period. The chance button lamp 138 may be turned off. When the chance button 136 is turned off at the timing T2, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG in the button effect may be erased, or these displays may be continued. Good.

<Button effect example 8 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 306 (b) shows a button effect example 8 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, even when the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136, the sub-control unit does not temporarily stop the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and informs the liquid crystal control unit of the time of the effective time of the chance button 136. Send a button acceptance command containing information.

  The sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T2, but continues the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 without pausing and notifies the liquid crystal control unit of the effective time (3 seconds). ) Send the button reception command including the time information.

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the second display. (Display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one. It is displaying.

<When the display control / liquid crystal control unit in the button performance manages the effective time>
Next, a case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time will be described. When the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time, in the second sub-control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms cycle), the effective time counter used for managing the effective time is counted (subtraction, addition, etc.). I do. The effective time counter may be counted each time the second sub-control unit main process is executed, or may be performed each time the second sub-control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. The process of temporarily suspending the valid time of the operating means may be realized by not counting the valid time counter (skipping the counting process), or the counting of the valid time counter is continued and the valid time counter is It may be realized by not performing the determination process of whether or not the predetermined number is reached.

  Further, when the effective time of the operating means is temporarily stopped, in the second sub-control unit main processing (timer interrupt processing of about 33 ms cycle), the effective time cancel counter used for canceling the effective time pause ( Subtraction, addition, etc.) may be performed.

<Example 1 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 307 (a) shows a button effect example 1 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. At the timing indicated by T1 in FIG. 307 (a), the liquid crystal control unit starts the button effect and starts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136. Further, the liquid crystal control unit transmits to the sub control unit a button valid command instructing to switch the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state. Upon receiving the button enable command, the sub control unit switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the effective state, and starts the process of lighting the chance button lamp 138. The button valid command includes at least time information indicating the valid time of the chance button 136 (in this example, information indicating 5 seconds).

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit displays the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the chance button 136) and the effective time notification image TG (the remaining time of the effective time of the chance button 136 on a scale as a button effect. (Fig.) And an operation promotion image PG (display of characters "PUSH") are displayed. Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit starts counting down the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136, and thereafter, every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the effective time notification image TG ( Display the number of graduations on the meter figure).

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit causes the sub-control unit to operate the chance button 136 from the valid state to the invalid state at the timing T2 in FIG. 307 (a) when the valid time of the chance button 136 becomes 0. A button disable command for instructing to switch to the state is transmitted, the display of the operation prompting image PG is first erased, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG are erased. That is the end of the button production. Further, the sub control unit that has received the button invalidation command switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the valid state to the invalid state.

  If the effective time of the operating means is managed by the liquid crystal controller as in this example, the control load on the sub controller can be reduced, and stable game control may be realized.

<Example 2 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal controller in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 307 (b) shows a button effect example 2 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the valid time of the chance button 136, and when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, the display according to the operation (display of the display mode change image CG) ) Is configured to do.

  The sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown by T3 in FIG. 307 (b), and also transmits the button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit. Upon receiving this button acceptance command, the liquid crystal control unit initializes the valid time of the chance button 136 to 0 since the number of times of operating the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number (one time in this example), and A command is transmitted to the sub-control unit informing that the button reception command has been received. Further, the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG, and displays the first display as the display mode change image CG. The effect is ended by displaying and deleting the first display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

<Example 3 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 307 (c) shows a button effect example 3 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 in FIG. 307 (c) and also transmits the button reception command to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received this button acceptance command can accept the operation of the chance button 136 a plurality of times during the valid time of the chance button 136, so that it continues the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and performs the sub-control. It sends a response command to the department informing that the button reception command has been received.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has received the button reception command continues the display of the operation prompting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the first display (display mode change image CG). (Display) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the liquid crystal control unit continues to count down the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 even while the first display is being displayed or erased, and the effective time is a predetermined time (this example). Every 1 second), the display of decreasing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) by 1 is continued.

<Example 4 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 308 (a) shows a button effect example 4 in time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In the gaming table according to the present example, the liquid crystal control unit temporarily stops the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time each time the button control command is received from the sub control unit. To the department, a pause command including time information of the valid time of the chance button 136 and information of a pause for temporarily stopping the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is transmitted, and the time information of the valid time is transmitted. Upon receiving the temporary stop command including the temporary stop information, the sub control unit temporarily interrupts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136. The sub-control unit may turn off the chance button lamp 138 on the condition that the temporary stop command is received.

  In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to countdown the effective time, and informs the sub-control unit of the information of the effective time after the countdown. And a pause release command including the information of the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time, and the sub control unit receiving the pause release command including the information of the pause release, the sub-control unit of the chance button 136. Resume valid time countdown. The sub-control unit may turn on the chance button lamp 138 if the chance button lamp 138 is turned off on the condition that the temporary stop cancel command is received.

  For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 308 (a), the liquid crystal control unit temporarily stops the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 on the condition that the button reception command is received from the sub control unit at the timing T2. The current valid time (3 seconds) is held, and the sub-control unit is temporarily provided with time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and temporary stop information for temporarily stopping the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136. Send a stop command.

  The sub-control unit, which has received the pause command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds and the information of the pause, temporarily stops the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time (3 seconds). The chance button lamp 138 is turned off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). Although it is displayed so as to overlap a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, since the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted, the scale of the valid time notification image TG (meter figure) is displayed. Is not reduced by one.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 to perform the countdown of the effective time, and the sub-control unit performs the effective time after the countdown (2 in this example). Second) information and the information about the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time, and the pause release command is transmitted. The sub-control unit that has received the temporary stop release command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and lights the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), one scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is set. Continue to reduce display. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit first erases the display of the operation prompting image PG at the timing T4 in FIG. 308 (a) when the effective time of the chance button 136 has become 0, and the operation is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

<Example 5 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 308 (b) shows a button effect example 5 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a temporary stop cancellation command including information on the effective time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and information on the temporary stop cancellation for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted. The sub-control unit that has received the temporary stop release command including the time information of the valid time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and lights the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and every time the effective time is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), one scale of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is set. Continue to reduce display. Further, the liquid crystal control unit first erases the display of the operation prompting image PG at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 308 (b) when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation is performed. The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

<Example 6 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 308 (c) shows a button effect example 6 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In the gaming table according to the present example, the liquid crystal control unit performs a countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 after each time the button reception command is received from the sub control unit, and then temporarily stops the countdown. Then, the temporary stop command including the time information of the effective time after the countdown and the information of the temporary stop for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is configured to be transmitted.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 308 (c), the liquid crystal control unit receives a button reception command from the sub control unit at the timing T2, and counts down the effective time (3 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136. After the countdown, the countdown is temporarily stopped, and the sub-control unit also includes the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds after the countdown and the information of the pause for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. Send a command.

  The sub-control unit, which has received the pause command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds and the information of the temporary stop, temporarily stops the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 and holds the current effective time (3 seconds). The chance button lamp 138 is turned off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). The display is made so as to overlap a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds has been received, so that the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) is reduced by one scale. It is carried out.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing T7 to count down the valid time, and also instructs the sub-control unit to count the valid time after the countdown (in this example, 1). Second) information and the information about the pause release for restarting the countdown of the effective time, and the pause release command is transmitted. The liquid crystal control unit temporarily stops the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 until it receives this button reception command, and since it executes the countdown of the effective time before the suspension, the effective time notification image is displayed. The period in which the scale of the TG (figure of the meter) represents 2 seconds is longer than in the example shown in FIGS. 308 (a) and 308 (b). The subsequent display control is the same as the example shown in FIG.

<Example 7 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit manages effective time in button effect>
FIG. 309 (a) shows a button effect example 7 in a time series when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the temporary stop command including the information of the effective time after the countdown (2 seconds in this example) and the information of the temporary stop release for restarting the countdown of the effective time is transmitted.

  However, in this example, since the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 3 seconds, after the button effect is finished, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to obtain the effective time. Every time a predetermined time (1 second in this example) is decreased, the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) is continuously reduced by one.

  In this example, since the timing for counting down the effective time in the sub control unit and the timing for counting down the effective time in the liquid crystal control unit are different, the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second. Even if there is, the valid time in the sub control unit becomes 0 second, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be invalid. Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated during execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display corresponding to the operation may not be performed.

<Example 8 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>
FIG. 309 (b) shows a button effect example 8 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In the gaming machine according to the present example, the sub control unit is configured not to temporarily stop the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 when the temporary stop command is received from the liquid crystal control unit. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has transmitted the pause command continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing, and displays the first display (display mode change image CG). (Display) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted, the effective time notification image TG ( There is no display that reduces the scale of the meter figure) by one.

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit transmits the button reception command including the information of the effective time (1 second in this example) to the sub control unit at the timing indicated by T4 in FIG. 309 (b), and receives the command. The sub-control unit adjusts the valid time of the chance button 136 based on the valid time information included in the command.

<Specific example 1 of button effect>
Next, a specific example of the button effect will be described. FIGS. 310 (a-1) to 310 (a-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the button effect in time series. It should be noted that each display in the drawings shows a part of the display of the button effect composed of a moving image, and the time intervals of each display do not necessarily match (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In Specific Example 1, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (a-1), a graphic simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the operation means image BG, and the chance button 136 is displayed as the effective time notification image TG. The button effect is started by displaying the figure of a meter that represents the remaining time of the effective time that can accept the operation on a scale and displaying the character "PUSH !!" as the operation promotion image PG. ing.

  Further, in the period shown in FIGS. 310 (a-1) to (a-5), the effective time of the chance button 136 is counted down, and the effective time of the chance button 136 is reduced by a predetermined time (1 second in this example). Each time, the button effect is continued by displaying the effective time notification image TG (meter figure) with one scale reduced.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (a-6), since the effective time of the chance button 136 has become 0, the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the opportunity button 136) and the effective time notification image are displayed. The display of the TG (figure of the meter) and the display of the operation promotion image PG (characters of "PUSH !!") are all erased, and the button effect is finished.

<Specific examples 2 to 4 of button production>
310 (b-1) to (b-6) are diagrams showing a concrete example 2 of the button effect in time series, and FIGS. 310 (c-1) to (c-6) are concrete examples of the button effect. It is the figure which showed example 3 in time series, and Drawings 311 (a-1)-(a-6) are the figures showing example 4 of button production in time series. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicated description, the description of the same contents as those of the specific example 1 will be omitted (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In Concrete Example 2 shown in FIGS. 310 (b-1) to 310 (b-6), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (b-1). -3) to (b-4) are displayed in the cut-in display. In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed, the effective time notification image TG (a meter figure) is displayed, and the operation promotion image PG (“PUSH! ) Since the moving image is displayed so as to cover all of the display, the player cannot visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (during the button effect in this example). When the cut-in display is composed of a semi-transparent image or the like, the display of the operation means image BG, the display of the effective time notification image TG, and the display of the operation promotion image PG can be visually recognized by the player. , It becomes more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not covered by the cut-in display.

  In addition, in the specific example 3 shown in FIGS. 310 (c-1) to (c-3), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (c-1). The cut-in display is performed in the periods shown in FIGS. (C-1) to (c-2). In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed, the effective time notification image TG (a meter figure) is displayed, and the operation promotion image PG (“PUSH! ) Since the moving image is displayed so as to cover all of the display, the player cannot visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (in this example, the beginning of the button effect).

  Further, in the specific example 4 shown in FIGS. 311 (a-1) to (a-5), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 3 (a-1). The cut-in display is performed in the period shown in a-3) to (a-4) (the period longer than the period shown in FIGS. 310 (b-3) to 310 (b-4) of the specific example 2). In this cut-in display, the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed, the effective time notification image TG (a meter figure) is displayed, and the operation promotion image PG (“PUSH! ) Is displayed so as to cover the entire display, the player is in the cut-in display period (in this example, in the middle of the button effect, which is longer than the specific example 2). Cannot see the button effect.

  Note that the cut-in display is not limited to the examples shown in the concrete examples 2 to 4, and for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (b), the display of the operation means image BG (a figure simulating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed. , And the display of the operation promotion image PG (characters of “PUSH !!”) are all covered, but a moving image may be displayed that does not cover the display of the effective time notification image TG (meter figure). With such a configuration, the player can confirm the effective time of the operating means while enjoying the cut-in display.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 311 (c-1) to 3 (c-2), the operation means image BG (a figure simulating the appearance of the chance button 136) is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the cut-in display moving image. , The effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter), and the operation promotion image PG (characters “PUSH !!”) may all be moved. With such a configuration, the player can grasp the information about the operating means by the button effect while enjoying the cut-in display.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (d), cut-in display may be performed using the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and as shown in FIG. As the notification image TG, a display mode in which the effective time is displayed in characters may be applied instead of the figure of the meter. Further, the effective time may be displayed in characters in a display area that is not covered by the cut-in display (visible to the player).

<Specific example 5 of button effect>
FIGS. 312 (a-1) to 312 (a-6) are views showing a specific example 5 of the button effect in time series. In the specific example 5, a plurality of button effects are performed corresponding to a plurality of operating means, and the effective time is counted down in the button effect corresponding to a specific operating means to display an effective time notification image TG (meter figure). During button display corresponding to other operating means, during the period of displaying the reduced scale, the effective time countdown is temporarily stopped and displayed so as not to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter). Control.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (a), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first button effect corresponding to the first operation means is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the central display area, the second button effect corresponding to the second operation means is started, and in the display area on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the third button effect corresponding to the third operation means is started. are doing.

  In each of the first to third button effects, a graphic representation of the appearance of each operating means is displayed as the display of the operating means images BG1 to 3 and each of the effective time notification images TG1 to TG3 is displayed. The figure of the meter showing the remaining time of the effective time for accepting the operation of the operation means is displayed on a scale, and the character "PUSH !!" is displayed as the display of the operation promotion images PG1 to PG3.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 312 (b), the effective time countdown (8 seconds → 6 seconds) is performed in the first to third button effects, and the effective time notification images TG1 to TG3 (meter figure) are graduated. In the first button effect, the effective time countdown (6 seconds → 0 seconds) is continued and the effective time notification image TG1 ( While continuing the display of reducing the scale of the meter) every one second, in the second and third button effects, the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped and the effective time notification images TG2, TG3 (the figure of the meter) are displayed. ) Control the display so that the scale is not reduced.

  Further, during the period of FIGS. 312 (d) to 312 (f), at the timing shown in FIG. 3 (d), the state in which the countdown of the effective time in the second and third button effects is temporarily stopped is maintained. , The first button effect is finished, and at the timing shown in FIG. 8E, the cut-in display is performed in a state where the scales of the effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (figure of the meter) are visible, and At the timing shown in (), the cut-in display is ended and the countdown of the effective time of each operation means is restarted in the second and third button effects.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 312 (g), the effective time countdown (6 seconds → 4 seconds) is performed in the second and third button effects, and the effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (meter figure) are graduated. In the second button effect, the effective time countdown (4 seconds → 0 seconds) is continued, and the effective time notification image TG1 ( While continuing the display to reduce the scale of (meter figure) every 1 second, in the third button effect, the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped and the scale of the effective time notification image TG3 (meter figure) is reduced. The display is controlled so that it does not exist.

  Further, during the period shown in FIGS. 312 (i) to 312 (m), while the state in which the countdown of the effective time in the third button effect is temporarily stopped is maintained, at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in (j) of the figure, the cut-in display is performed in a state in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG3 (figure of the meter) is visible, and at the timing shown in (k) of the same figure. , The cut-in display is ended, the countdown of the effective time of the operating means is restarted in the third button effect, and the third button effect is ended at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (n).

  The display of the period in which the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped is not limited to the example shown in the specific example 5, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 313 (a-1) to (a-2), the operation is performed. Display mode of display of means image BG (figure imitating appearance of chance button 136), display of effective time notification image TG (figure of meter), and display of operation promotion image PG (characters of "PUSH !!") ( (Color, brightness, color tone, etc.) may be changed. Further, even when the display mode is changed, the chance button 136 may be kept lit, or the chance button 136 may be turned off in accordance with the change in the display mode. Further, the lighting color of the chance button 136 may be changed according to the change of the display mode, or the lighting mode of the chance button 136 may be changed by blinking by repeating lighting and extinguishing.

  Further, according to the change of the display mode, the acceptance of the operation means may be changed from the valid state to the invalid state, or the valid state may be maintained. Further, as shown in FIGS. 313 (b-1) to 313 (b-5), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) remains while the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped in the button effect. The button effect may be ended.

<Specific example 6 of button effect>
FIG. 314 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 6 of the button effect. In this specific example 6, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is won), a specific character (for example, a character appearing in an effect executed during a big hit game) is selected from a plurality of characters. In a possible game console, while the animation for selecting the character is being executed, the countdown of the effective time of the operating means is temporarily stopped so that the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) is not reduced. Control the display.

  It should be noted that during the period when the animation for selecting the character is being executed, the countdown of the effective time of the operation means is not paused but is configured to be paused during the period when the animation is not being executed. Good. Further, the countdown of the effective time of the operating means may be temporarily stopped during at least a part of the period during which the animation for selecting the character is being executed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), the character select effect for allowing the player to select a character is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (c), the button effect is started during the character select effect. are doing. In the button effect of this example, a figure simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the display of the operation means image BG, and the remaining time of the valid time for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as the display of the valid time notification image TG. Is displayed on the scale, and the characters "PUSH !!" and "Press the button to select a character!" Are displayed as the operation promotion image PG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (d), in the button effect, the effective time is counted down (8 seconds → 6 seconds), and the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) is reduced by two. During the period of executing the animation, the player switches the character that can be selected from the character C1 of the lord to the character C2 of the grandpa based on the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. ((F) to (i) in the figure), in the button effect, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled, the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped, and the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) is displayed. ) Control the display so that the scale is not reduced.

  Further, during the period of (i) to (j) of the same figure, the animation for switching the character that the player can select from the character C1 of the lord to the character C2 of the grandpa is finished, and the chance button is used in the button effect. The operation of 136 is enabled and the effective time is counted down (6 seconds → 4 seconds), and the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) is reduced by two. In this example, the effect of selecting a character has been described, but for example, in the effect of selecting a song or a sound effect to be output during a big hit game, the effective time may be temporarily stopped. The effect may be configured such that the effective time is temporarily stopped only in the effect for selecting a character without temporarily suspending the effective time.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137, ball firing handle 134, etc.) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). , A variety of LEDs, etc.), and a plurality of types of displays (for example, an operation means image display, an elapsed time notification image display, an effective time notification image display display mode change image display, operation At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a display of a promotion image, an animation display according to an operation by the operation unit, an animation display related to the operation unit, etc.). , A meter display which is one of the displays of the effective time notification image), and the first display is a display relating to the operation means, Is a unit capable of displaying at least the first display during a first period (for example, a period for displaying a meter indicating that the effective time is 4 seconds in FIG. 304 (a)). When the display condition is satisfied, at least the first display is displayed in the second period (for example, a period in which a meter indicating that the effective time is 3 seconds in FIG. 304 (a) is displayed). It is a displayable unit, the second period is a period longer than the first period, and the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is operated. It is a gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide variations in the display period of the first display, and it may be possible to provide a game table having a characteristic display unit.

  Note that the “display means” according to the present embodiment may be “means for always displaying the first display in the first period (or the second period) when the display condition is satisfied”. Alternatively, it may be “means for displaying at least the first display in the first period (or the second period) unconditionally”. Further, the “display condition” according to the present embodiment is a condition that may be satisfied when the second condition other than the case where the operation means is operated (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed). May be. In addition, the “first period” and the “second period” according to the present embodiment include all of the predetermined period, a part of the predetermined period, and a plurality of periods included in the predetermined period. The period may be a combination of the periods.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display. Further, the first display may be a meter display. Further, the meter display may be a display in which the display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be a performance display. Further, the display means may be a means capable of at least displaying the second display when the display condition is satisfied. Note that the “display means” according to the present embodiment may be “means for always displaying the second display when the display condition is satisfied”, or “unconditionally displaying the second display”. At least a means for displaying ”.

<Other Embodiments (Normal Button and Deca Button)>
Hereinafter, a gaming table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 315 to 319. In addition, in order to avoid duplicated description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 315 to 319 are given priority.

  Although details will be described later, the game table according to the present embodiment is a game table including an operating unit and a display unit, and the display unit displays at least a first display in a first display area. The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, and the display means is capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area. Means, the first display is a display regarding the operating means, the second display is a display regarding the operating means, at least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter, The “fourth display area”) is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area of the third display area, and is a display area of at least a part of the second display area (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display area”). "Display area") is the third display Is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area, the second display area is a display area larger than the first display area, the fifth display area, the fourth display It is a game table characterized by being a display area larger than the area.

<Basic Concept / Normal Button and Deca Button>
First, the basic concept of the game table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 315. Note that FIG. 315 is a diagram for explaining the basic concept of the gaming table according to another embodiment (normal button and deca button).

  The game table according to the present embodiment has an operation unit and a display unit, like the game table described with reference to FIGS. 301 to 314, and can perform the same display as that of the game table. Is. Further, the gaming table according to the present embodiment displays the operation means image BG described above as a display of the operation means image BGs of the first size as shown in FIG. 315 (a) and FIG. 315 (b). As shown in FIG. 315 (a), it is possible to display the operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the first size as shown in FIG. The display of the effective time notification image TGs of the third size and the display of the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size larger than the third size as shown in FIG. 315 (b) are possible. .

  In the present embodiment, a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGs of the first size and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the third size shown in FIG. 315 (a). It may be referred to as a "normal button", and includes at least one of the display of the operation means image BGb of the second size and the display of the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size shown in FIG. 315 (b). The display may be referred to as a “deca button”.

  Further, the normal button may be a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGs of the first size and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the third size, and FIG. As shown, it may include another display OG (for example, a decorative pattern or an image of another effect). Similarly, the Deca button may be a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGb of the second size and the display of the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size, and FIG. ), Other display OG (for example, a decorative pattern, an image of another effect, etc.) may be included.

  Also, the shortest distance L1 between the first size operation means image BGs and the second size effective time notification image TGs, the third size operation means image BGb and the fourth size of the deca button. The shortest distance L2 to the effective time notification image TGb of the size is not particularly limited, but by making the shortest distance L2 longer than the shortest distance L1, the display of the deca button is different from that of the normal button on the back side. There is an effect that the display OG of is easy to see and an effect that the difference from the normal button can be made clear.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 315 (a) and 315 (b), the size of the first area Es of the other display OG which is covered by the operation means image BGs of the normal button and the effective time notification image TGs is the same as that of the large button. The size of the second area Eb covered by the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGb is different, and in this example, the first area Es is larger than the second area Eb.

  Further, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 315 (c), the shortest distance between the operation means image BGb of the third size and the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size in the deca button is shown in FIG. 315 (b). The shortest distance L3 may be shorter than the shortest distance L2 shown, or as shown in the lower part of FIG. 315 (c), at least a part of the operation means image BGb of the third size and the fourth size of the deca button are displayed. You may superimpose at least one part of the effective time notification image TGb. The same thing can be said for the normal button as for the big button.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 315 (c), the size of the first area Es of the other display OG which is covered by the normal button operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs is the same as the size of the deca button operation means image BGb. Is different from the size of the second region Eb covered by the effective time notification image TGb, and in this example, the second region Eb is larger than the first region Es.

<Basic concept / display mode of display>
Next, a display mode of the display according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 315 (d) and 315 (e). Note that in FIGS. 315 (d) and 315 (e), the movable body indicated by reference numeral AG is included in the gaming table according to the present embodiment, and, for example, the effect movable body 224 described above with reference to FIG. In addition to the shutter 1024, the movable body 1026, and the like described with reference to FIG. 183, one including an image, one including a panel, and the like are applicable.

  This movable body AG does not cover all the normal buttons and the decabuttons, so that all the normal buttons and the decabuttons can be visually recognized and the first position (the position shown in FIG. 315 (d)) and the normal buttons and the decabuttons. A second position (shown in FIG. 315 (e)) is shown in which at least a part of the normal button or the decabutton is invisible (or is more difficult to see than when not covered with a movable body) by covering at least a part. Position), and between.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 315 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the operation means image BGs of the first size and the second size of the normal button are displayed. Since at least a part of the effective time notification image TGs of the size is covered with the movable body AG, some regions of the operation means image BGs of the first size and the effective time notification image TGs of the second size are invisible. (Or, it is more difficult to see compared to the case where the movable body is not covered). As shown in the figure, the operation means image BGs may be made visible by making the portion of the movable body AG covering the operation means image BGs semitransparent.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 315 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the operation means image BGb of the third size and the fourth position on the deca button are displayed. Since at least a part of the effective time notification image TGb of the size is covered by the movable body AG, a part of the area of the operation means image BGb of the third size and the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size is visually recognized. Impossible (or harder to see than when not covered by a movable body). As shown in the figure, the operation means image BGsb may be made visible by making the portion of the movable body AG covering the operation means image BGb semitransparent.

  As described above, the operation button image BGs of the first size and the effective time notification image TGs of the second size, and the operation button image BGb of the third size and the fourth size of the deca button are used as described above. The size of the effective time notification image TGb is different from each other, and the shortest distance L1 between the operation means image BGs of the first size and the effective time notification image TGs of the second size of the normal button and the big button. The shortest distance L2 between the third size operation means image BGb and the fourth size effective time notification image TGb is different from each other. Therefore, even when the normal button and the deca button are covered with the same movable body AG, the size and shape of the region which cannot be visually recognized by the movable body AG (or which is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the movable body AG is not covered) are provided. , The normal button and the big button are different.

<Specific examples of normal button and big button>
Next, specific examples of the normal button and the big button will be described. FIG. 316 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal button, and FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example of a large button.

  The normal button shown in FIG. 316 (a) is the operation means image BGs of the first size (in this example, an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136, the letters "PUSH !!", and a downward arrow. (Combination of figures) and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the third size (in this example, the figure of the meter).

  On the other hand, the deca button shown in FIG. 316 (b) is an operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button (in this example, an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and “PUSH”). !! "and a combination of downward arrow graphics) and a fourth effective time notification image TGb (meter figure in this example) larger than the normal button effective time notification image TGs. It is composed of a combination of displays. Further, the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGb is longer than the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs shown in FIG. Big).

  As is clear from FIGS. 11A and 11B, the size of the display area covered by the deca button is larger than the size of the display area covered by the normal button, so that the display of the normal button is larger than that of the deca button. By changing to the display, the display that is not normally covered by the button can be covered by the big button.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the deca button is not limited to the example shown in (b) of the same figure. For example, as shown in (c) of the figure, the deca button is larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button. The display of the operation means image BGb of the second size and the display of the valid time notification image TGs of the normal button may be combined. Further, as shown in FIG. 3D, the display is configured by a combination of displaying an operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button and displaying an effective time notification image TGs of the normal button. At the same time, at least a part of the displays of both may overlap.

  Further, as shown in (e) of the figure, the deca button is configured only by displaying the operation means image BGb having a second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button (without displaying the effective time notification image TGb). You may. Further, as shown in (f) of the same figure, the big button is larger than the display of the operation means image BGb of the second size which is larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button and the effective time notification image TGs of the normal button. You may comprise by the display combination of the effective time alerting | reporting image TGb 'of the 4th magnitude | size, and a display mode different from the valid time alerting | reporting image TGs of a normal button.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 317 (a-1), the normal button is displayed such that at least a part of the display of the operation means image BGs and at least a part of the display of the effective time notification image TGs overlap each other, and FIG. As shown in a-2), the deca button may display the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGs so as not to overlap each other. With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the big button to the other, it may be possible to easily distinguish the normal button and the big button.

  When the maximum width of the chance button 136 is L3, as shown in FIG. 317 (b-1), the maximum width of the operation button image BGs of the normal button is L1 shorter than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136. (L1 <L3), and as shown in FIG. 317 (b-2), the maximum width of the operation means image BGb of the big button may be L4 (L4> L3) longer than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136. With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the big button to the other, it may be possible to easily distinguish the normal button and the big button. Further, as shown in FIG. 317 (c), when a plurality of normal buttons are displayed in the button effect, the maximum width of each normal button is represented by the normal button operation means image shown in FIG. 317 (b-1). A maximum width L5 (L5 <L1) shorter than the maximum width L1 of BGs may be used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 318 (a), in addition to the deca button constituted by the display of the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGs, the maximum width substantially the same as the hold icon PI indicating the hold of the special figure variation game. You may display the normal button comprised only with the operation means image BGs' which has L6. Further, the entire size of the deca button or the normal button is not particularly limited, and for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (b), the deca button may be displayed using the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device. As shown in FIG. 318 (c), a mini button smaller than the normal button shown in FIG. 318 (a) may be displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device.

  Further, another image may be added to the normal button or the deca button, and for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the button is repeatedly hit), the effect image EG is displayed as shown in FIG. 318 (d). The added normal button may be displayed, or, as shown in FIG. 318 (e), a deca button added with the effect image EG may be displayed.

  When the normal button is covered by the movable body AG described above, as shown in FIG. 319 (a-1), the entire normal button is covered, and when the same movable body AG covers the decabutton, FIG. As shown in (a-2), a part of the big button may be covered. Further, the display positions of the normal button and the deca button are not particularly limited, and for example, as shown in FIG. 319 (b), the display area of the entire deca button and the display area of the entire normal button may be overlapped. The display area of the entire big button may be configured to include the entire display area of the entire normal button. Further, although not shown, the display area of the entire large button and the display area of the entire normal button may be configured not to overlap with each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319 (c-1) to (c-3), after displaying the normal button, a cut-in display for covering the entire normal button is performed, and when the cut-in display is finished, A big button may be displayed instead of the button. If such display control is performed, it is possible to perform a display with a surprising effect, and it may be possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

  Further, although not shown, a plurality of normal buttons can be displayed at a time, but it is also possible to configure so that only one deca button can be displayed at a time. Display control may be performed so that there are many types and the Deca button has few animation types. In addition, the display control of the deca button may be performed so that the ratio (or the ratio of not being hidden) by another image is higher than that of the normal button.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137, ball firing handle 134, etc.) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). , Various LEDs, etc.), and the display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a normal button) in the first display area, and the display means is , A means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, a large button) in the second display area, wherein the display means has a third display (for example, background display, effect display, decoration) in the third display area. It is a means that can display at least a design (in particular, a decorative design in the center), the first display is a display relating to the operating means, and the second display is a display relating to the operating means. The display area of at least a part of the first display area (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display area”) is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area of the third display area, At least a part of the display area of the second display area (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display area”) is a display area that overlaps with at least a part of the display area of the third display area. The display area is a display area larger than the first display area, and the fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the display area on the display unit can be made different by the first display, the second display, and the third display, and the display unit has a characteristic display unit. May be available.

  Note that the “display means” according to the present embodiment “displays the first display (or the second display area, the third display area) when the display condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the "second display, the third display) may be always displayed" or "unconditionally displayed in the first display area (or second display area, third display area)". It may be a means for always displaying the first display (or the second display, the third display).

  In addition, a plurality of types of display (for example, display of operation means image, display of elapsed time notification image, display of effective time notification image, display of change in display mode, display of operation promotion image, animation display according to operation by operation means) , At least an animation display, a background display, an effect display, a decorative pattern (in particular, a central decorative pattern) regarding the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first And at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the first display during the display of the third display, or the first display during the display of the third display. It may be a unit that can always start displaying, or a unit that can unconditionally start at least the first display. Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the third display during the display of the first display, and the third display during the display of the first display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the display of the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the second display during the display of the third display, or the second display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the second display. Further, the display means may be a means capable of at least displaying the third display during the display of the second display, or the third display during the display of the second display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the display of the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display in which visibility is at least lower than in the first state in the second state. Further, the second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display in which visibility in the fourth state is at least lower than that in the third state. The fourth state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the third state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the second state in the fourth state. Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.

<Other embodiment (effect of hiding various displays)>
Hereinafter, a gaming table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 320 to 322. In addition, in order to avoid duplicated description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the codes used in FIGS. 320 to 322 are given priority.

  Although details will be described later, the game table according to the present embodiment is a game table including an operating unit and a display unit, and the display unit displays at least a first display in a first display area. The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, and the display means is capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area. Means, the first display is a display relating to the operating means, the second display is a performance display, the third display is a symbol display, of the second display area At least a part of the display area is a display area that overlaps with at least a part of the display area of the first display area, and at least a part of the display area of the third display area is a display area of the first display area. A display area that overlaps at least part of the display area It is the amusement machine according to claim.

<Various Concepts / Various Displays Performed on Decorative Symbol Display Device 208>
First, the basic concept of the gaming table according to this embodiment will be described. The game table according to the present embodiment has an operation unit and a display unit, like the game table described with reference to FIGS. 301 to 314, and can perform the same display as that of the game table. Is.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present embodiment hides (covers) at least a part of various displays performed by the decorative pattern display device 208 with button effects, thereby making at least a part of the various displays invisible (or button effects). Display control to make it more difficult to see than when not covered with. Here, the various displays performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 include, for example, the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, the display of the hold icon, the display of the variable icon, the display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

<Specific example 1 of button production for hiding various displays>
Next, a specific example of a button effect for hiding various displays will be described. FIG. 320 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 1 of a button effect for hiding various displays.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (a), three decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in the next FIG. 320 (b), in the left symbol display area 208a, a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the left decorative symbol is performed, and at the timing shown in the subsequent FIG. 320 (c), the right symbol In the display area 208b, a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the right decorative pattern is performed to display a combination of decorative patterns (decoration 3- (changing) -decoration 3) corresponding to the reach. In the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern of this example, the decorative pattern is slightly moved up and down. Therefore, when the decorative pattern is moved upward, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the decorative pattern. When the fourth display area of the area becomes invisible and the decorative pattern moves downward, the decorative pattern causes the fifth display area (fourth display area) of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 to be displayed. A display area different from the display area) becomes invisible.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (d), after displaying the effect image on which the characters of “continuation” are given in the middle symbol display area 208b, at the timings shown in FIGS. 320 (e) to (f), By hiding (covering) at least a part of the display of the effect image (first display area) with at least a part of the display of the button effect (second display area), at least a part of the display of the effect image ( The display control is performed so that the first display area) is invisible (or more difficult to view than when not covered by the button effect). In addition, you may perform the moving animation which moves the production | generation effect image in which the character of "continuation" was given from the upper part (or lower part) of the middle symbol display area 208b to a stop display position.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (g), the button effect is ended, and the variable “X2” is displayed in the upper right display area of the middle symbol display area 208b, so that the variable display of the decorative symbols is continued. At the timing shown in the next FIG. 320 (h), three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, you may perform the movement animation which moves the character display of "x2" from the upper part (or lower part) of the middle symbol display area 208b to a stop display position.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (i), after the effect image on which the characters “continuation” are applied is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (j), this effect image is displayed. By hiding (covering) at least a part of the display (first display area) with at least a part of the button effect display (second display area), at least a part of the display of the effect image (first display) The display control is performed to make the area) invisible (or difficult to see compared to the case where the area is not covered by the button effect).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (k), after performing a temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation display) of the central decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIGS. 320 (l) to (m). Then, by hiding (covering) at least a part (third display area) of the display of the decorative pattern with at least a part (second display area) of the display of the button effect, at least one of the display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Display control is performed to make the portion (third display area) invisible (or more difficult to see than when not covered by the button effect).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (n), the button effect is ended, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the effect image on which the character "CONTINUE" is given is displayed, and "x" is displayed in the upper right display area. By displaying the character "2", it is suggested that the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

<Specific example 2 of button production for hiding various displays>
FIG. 321 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 2 of the button effect for hiding various displays. Note that the display in FIGS. 321 (a) to 321 (h) is the same as the display in FIGS. 320 (a) to 320 (h), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (i), an effect of super reach (SP reach) is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (j), a temporary stop display (shaking) of the central decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. After performing (variable display), at a timing shown in FIGS. 321 (k) to (l), at least a part of the display of the decorative pattern is hidden (covered) by the button effect, thereby displaying the decorative pattern. Display control is performed to make at least a part invisible (or more difficult to view than when not covered with a button effect).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (m), the button effect is terminated, and a temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation display) of a combination of decorative patterns (decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3) corresponding to the big hit is performed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (n), the fixed display of the combination of the decorative patterns (decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3) corresponding to the big hit is performed.

  Note that, at the timings shown in FIGS. 321 (k) to (l), an example in which a graphic of a meter is displayed as a button effect has been shown. However, as shown in FIG. The display may be controlled so as not to display the figure. Further, at the timings shown in FIGS. 321 (k) to 321 (l), the button effect constituted by the above-described big button may be executed.

<Specific example 3 of button production for hiding various displays>
FIG. 322 is a diagram showing, in a time series, a specific example 3 of the button effect for hiding various displays. This example shows an example of a button effect in the case of performing an effect of displaying a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a big hit after performing a fake effect corresponding to normal reach loss.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (a), as a fake effect corresponding to the normal reach loss, the decorative symbol (decoration A) with the letter A is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, and the middle symbol display region 208b. The decorative design with the letter B (decoration B) is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design with the letter C (decoration C) is stopped and displayed in the right design display area 208c.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (b), at least a part of the display of the decorative patterns A, B, C is hidden (covered) by the button effect, so that the display of the decorative patterns A, B, C is performed. Display control is started to make at least a part invisible (or more difficult to view than when not covered with a button effect).

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (d), the decoration pattern A hidden by the button effect is changed to the character of the lord when the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decoration pattern A is accepted. After changing to an image, at the next timing shown in FIG. 322 (e), by ending the button effect in the left symbol display area 208a, the character image of the hall hidden by the button effect is changed to the left symbol display area. The state is visible at 208a.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (f), the decoration pattern B hidden by the button effect is changed to the character of the lord when the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decorative pattern B is accepted. After changing to an image, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 322 (g), by ending the button effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, the character image of the hall hidden by the button effect is changed to the middle symbol display area. The state is visible at 208b.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (h), the decoration pattern C hidden by the button effect is changed to the character of the lord when the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect for hiding the decorative pattern C is accepted. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 322 (i), by ending the button effect in the right symbol display area 208c, the character image of the hall hidden by the button effect is changed to the right symbol display area. The state is visible at 208c.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the upper half of the decorative patterns A, B, and C are hidden by the button effect, or the face of the lord is displayed as the character image of the lord, and most of the face is hidden by the button effect. However, as shown in FIGS. 322 (k) and (l), the entire body of the hall may be displayed as the character image of the hall, and the part excluding the face may be hidden by the button effect. With such a configuration, even when a part of the character image is hidden by the button effect, it is possible to recognize whether or not the character image is the character image of the lord, so that a special benefit is obtained. It may be possible to give the player the expectation that it may be. Further, a part of the character image of the hall and a part of the numbers (for example, the number of holdings and the number of rounds) indicating the information about the game may be hidden by the button effect.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation section 137, ball firing handle 134, etc.) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). , Various LEDs, etc.), and the display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in the first display area, and the display means is the second display area. Is a means capable of displaying at least a second display, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area, and the first display is a display relating to the operating means. (For example, the display of the operation means image, the display of the elapsed time notification image, the display of the effective time notification image, the display mode change image, the operation promotion image, the animation display according to the operation by the operation means. The second display is an effect display, the third display is a symbol display (for example, a decorative symbol, etc.), and at least one of the second display areas is The display area of the part is a display area that overlaps with at least a part of the display area of the first display area, and at least a part of the display area of the third display area is at least one of the first display areas. It is a game table characterized in that it is a display area that overlaps a display area of a part.

  According to the game table according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the display area on the display device can be made different depending on the display related to the operation device, the effect display, and the symbol display, and the game device having the characteristic display device is provided. May be possible.

  In addition, a plurality of types of display (for example, display of operation means image, display of elapsed time notification image, display of effective time notification image, display of change in display mode, display of operation promotion image, animation display according to operation by operation means) , At least an animation display, a background display, an effect display, a decorative pattern (in particular, a central decorative pattern) regarding the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first And at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the first display during the display of the third display, or the first display during the display of the third display. It may be a unit that can always start displaying, or a unit that can unconditionally start at least the first display. Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the third display during the display of the first display, and the third display during the display of the first display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the display of the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least displaying the second display during the display of the third display, or the second display during the display of the third display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the second display. Further, the display means may be a means capable of at least displaying the third display during the display of the second display, or the third display during the display of the second display. It may be a means capable of starting the display without fail, or a means capable of unconditionally starting at least the display of the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display in which visibility is at least lower than in the first state in the second state. Further, the second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display.

  Further, the third display may be a display in which visibility in the fourth state is at least lower than that in the third state. The fourth state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the third state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the second state in the fourth state. Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.

<Other embodiment (button effect during auto button function setting)>
Hereinafter, a gaming table according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 323 to 329. In addition, in order to avoid duplicated description, the same contents as those of the other embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment shall be used only for the description of the present embodiment in principle, and even when the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in other embodiments, In the description of this embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 323 to 329 are given priority.

  Although details will be described later, the game table according to the present embodiment is a game table including an operating unit and a display unit, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, the first display is a display related to the operation unit, and the display unit is the first display in a first mode. Is a means capable of displaying at least, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second mode, and the first mode is that the operating means is automatically operated. It is a mode that does not become, and the second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.

<Basic concept / Auto button function>
First, the basic concept of the gaming table according to this embodiment will be described. The game table according to the present embodiment has an operation unit and a display unit, like the game table described with reference to FIGS. 301 to 314, and can perform the same display as that of the game table. Is. The gaming table according to the present embodiment has an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operating means is accepted triggered by a predetermined condition even when the player does not operate the operating means.

  FIG. 323 (a-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated in a state where the auto button function is not operated (disabled). In this example, each time the operation by the operation means is accepted, the effect display is switched in the order of display A → display B → display C → display A → ... It is configured to switch in the order of voice C → voice A → ... Here, AB1 to AB3 indicate animations executed when switching the display from the display A to the display B, BC1 to BC3 indicate animations executed when switching the display from the display B to the display C, and CA1 to CA3. Shows an animation executed when switching the display from the display C to the display A. In this example, the switching timing of the effect sound is delayed from the switching timing of the effect display so that the player does not feel uncomfortable when switching the effect.

  In this example, when the first operation by the operating means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2 → animation AB3 → display B, and then the voice of the effect is changed to voice A. To voice B. In addition, when the second operation by the operating means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched from the display B to the animation BC1 to the animation BC2 to the animation BC3 to the display C in that order, and then the voice of the effect is changed from the voice B to the voice. Switching to C. Further, when the third operation by the operating means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display C → animation CA1 → animation CA2 → animation CA3 → display A, and then the effect sound is changed from voice C to voice. Switching to A.

  Also, FIG. 323 (a-2) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the effect when the auto button function is operating (when it is valid). In this example, even when the player does not operate the operation means, the display of the effect is changed to display A → display B → display C → display A → ... every time a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied. In addition to switching in order, the effect voice is configured to be switched in the order of voice A → voice B → voice C → voice A → ... In this example, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable at the time of switching the effect, even when the auto button function is activated (when enabled), the auto button function is not activated (disabled). Similarly, the timing of switching the effect sound is intentionally delayed from the timing of switching the effect display.

  In this example, the display is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the effect (when the effect time reaches a predetermined time), and the effect A (display A, voice A) is changed. When the effect time reaches a predetermined time, after changing the effect display in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2 → animation AB3 → display B, the effect sound is changed from voice A to voice B. Are switching. In addition, when the effect time of effect B (display B, voice B) reaches a predetermined time, after changing the effect display in the order of display B → animation BC1 → anime BC2 → animation BC3 → display C , The voice of the effect is switched from the voice B to the voice C. Further, when the effect time of the effect C (display C, voice C) reaches a predetermined time, after changing the effect display in the order of display C → animation CA1 → animation CA2 → animation CAC3 → display A. , The voice of the effect is switched from the voice C to the voice A.

  In the example shown in FIG. 323 (a-1), the effect switching timing is determined by the operation timing of the operating means by the player. Therefore, for example, when the effect A is an effect capable of selecting the character A and the effect C is an effect capable of selecting the character C, when the player wants to select the character C, the player operates the operation means. Need to be performed twice to switch the effect from the effect A to the effect C, and it may take time to switch the effect A to the effect C.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 323 (b-1), the switching timing of the effect is determined by the control of the game table. Therefore, when the player wants to select the character C in the previous example, the player operates it. In some cases, the effect can be switched from the effect A to the effect C without operating the means, and the effect A can be smoothly switched to the effect C as compared with a state in which the auto button function is not operated.

  Also, FIG. 323 (b-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated in the middle of the animation in the example shown in FIG. 323 (a-1). In this example, when the first operation by the operation means is accepted, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2, and then the second operation is accepted immediately after the execution of animation AB2. Therefore, after the animation AB2 is executed, the display of the effect is switched in the order of animation BC1 → animation BC2 → animation BC → display C without executing the animation AB3 and the display B (skipping the animation AB3 and the display B). ing.

  Also, FIG. 323 (b-2) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the effect when a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied during the animation in the example shown in FIG. 323 (a-2). Is. In this example, when the effect time of the effect A (display A, voice A) reaches a predetermined time, after changing the effect display in the order of display A → animation AB1 → animation AB2, Immediately after the execution, the predetermined condition in the auto button function was satisfied, so after the animation AB2 is executed, the display of the effect is changed from animation BC1 to animation without executing animation AB3 and display B (skipping animation AB3 and display B). Switching is performed in the order of BC2 → Anime BC → Display C.

<Specific example 1 of button effect when auto button function is activated>
Next, a specific example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 324 (a-1) to FIG. 324 (a-6) are diagrams showing in time series an example of the button effect in the state where the automatic button function is not operated. During the period shown in FIG. 324 (a-1) to FIG. 324 (a-2), the button effect is not yet started, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138 thereof) is turned off.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 324 (a-3), the button effect is started in response to the start of the special figure variation game in FIG. 324 (a-2), and at the same time, the opportunity button 136 (the opportunity button lamp 138) ) Is lit in the first color (red in this example). In the button effect executed in FIGS. 324 (a-3) to (a-4), the color of the operation means image BG is set to the same color as the first color (red) which is the lighting color of the chance button 136. are doing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 324 (a-5), the opportunity button 136 is extinguished and the button effect is displayed when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the immediately preceding timing shown in FIG. 324 (a-4). Has finished. It should be noted that at this timing, the chance button 136 is extinguished while the effect suggesting that the operation by the chance button 136 has been performed. Instead of turning off the chance button 136, the chance button 136 may be turned on in a color (for example, orange) different from the above-mentioned first color (red). Further, at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 324 (a-6), the special effect is executed when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (a-4).

  In addition, FIGS. 324 (b-1) to 324 (b-6) are diagrams showing, in a time series, a specific example 1 of the button effect in a state where the automatic button function is activated. During the period shown in FIG. 324 (b-1) to FIG. 324 (a-6), the auto button function is in operation, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138 thereof) is different from the first color. It is lit in the second color (blue in this example).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 324 (b-3), the button effect is started in response to the start of the special figure variation game in FIG. 324 (b-2). Note that in the button effect executed in FIGS. 324 (b-3) to (b-4), the color of the operation means image BG is different from the second color (blue) which is the lighting color of the chance button 136. It is set to one color (red).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 324 (b-5), the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied at the timing shown in FIG. The button effect has been ended by the special thing). Further, at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 324 (b-6), the special effect is executed when the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (b-4).

<Specific example 2 of button effect when auto button function is activated>
325 (a-1) to FIG. 325 (a-6) are diagrams showing, in a time series, a specific example 2 of the button effect in the state where the auto button function is activated. Note that the display shown in FIGS. 325 (a-1) to (a-3) is the same as the display shown in FIG. 324 (b-1) to (b-3), and therefore the description thereof is omitted. .

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (a-4) when the auto button function is activated and the button effect is being executed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (a-5), the button effect is produced when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted during the operation of the automatic button function at the immediately previous timing shown in FIG. 325 (a-4). Upon completion, the automatic button function is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the chance button 136 is turned off.

<Specific example 3 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>
FIG. 325 (b-1) to FIG. 325 (b-6) are diagrams showing, in a time series, a specific example 3 of the button effect in a state where the automatic button function is activated. Note that the displays shown in FIGS. 325 (b-1) to (b-3) are the same as the displays shown in FIGS. 324 (a-1) to 324 (a-3), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. .

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (b-5), the button effect is ended and the chance button is ended when the operation by the chance button 136 is detected at the immediately previous timing shown in FIG. 325 (a-4). When the operation by 136 is continued for a predetermined time (when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time), the automatic button function is switched from the non-actuated state to the actuated state, and the chance button 136 is set to the second color. It is lit in (blue).

<Specific example 4 of button effect when auto button function is activated>
FIG. 326 (a-1) to FIG. 326 (a-7) are diagrams showing, in a time series, a specific example 4 of the button effect in the state where the auto button function is activated. At the timing shown in FIG. 326 (a-1) of this example, when a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, the number of pending special game variation games is increased from 3 to 4) Button production has started. In this button effect, after the operation means image BG is displayed above the increased hold icon PI4, the display mode of the hold icon PI4 is changed from a normal hold icon (in this example, a white circle image) to the hold. Is changed to the notice holding icon (in this example, the character image of the lord) indicating the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game corresponds to.

  In this example, as long as the player operates the auto button function, the display mode of the hold icon can be changed without operating the operating means. In some cases, it is possible to know in advance whether or not the special figure variation game is judged to be right or wrong, which may increase the player's willingness to play the game.

<Specific example 5 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>
FIG. 326 (b-1) to FIG. 326 (b-7) are diagrams showing, in a time series, a specific example 5 of the button effect in the state where the automatic button function is activated. At the timing shown in FIG. 326 (b-1) of this example, the button effect is triggered by the fact that a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, the fact that a predetermined time in the button effect has been reached has been reached). Although it has started, it is configured to not change the display mode of the hold icon PI4 because it is just before the stop of the variation of the special figure variation game.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (b-3), the holding is triggered by the fact that the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, the number of holding the special figure variation game is reduced from 4 to 3). The display mode of the icon PI4 is changed from the normal hold icon (white circle image in this example) to the notice hold icon (lord's character image in this example).

<Other examples of auto button function>
Next, another example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 327 is a diagram for explaining another example of the auto button function.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 327 (a-1), in a gaming table in which a left button 136a and a right button 136b are provided on both sides of a chance button 136 corresponding to the auto button function, the chance button 136 and the left button are provided. When three of 136a and the right button 136b are pressed simultaneously (when they are pressed simultaneously), as shown in FIG. 327 (a-2), the auto button function is set to ON (operated), and as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-3), when the left button 136a (or right button 136b) other than the chance button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 327 (a-4), the auto button function is turned off (not It may be configured to be set to (operation).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), while the auto button function is operating, a display indicating that the auto button function is operating in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, "auto The character display of "setting button" may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 327 (c), a display for prompting an operation by the operating means or a display for prompting an operation by the operating means (in the present example, "Now, "!" Is displayed).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 327 (d-1) to (d-3), when the auto button function is set to ON (operation), the button corresponding to the operating means is activated during the operation of the auto button function. As shown in FIG. 327 (d-3), the effect to be executed may be displayed when the operation of the operation means is accepted without executing the effect at all. The start timing of the effect is not particularly limited, and for example, the effect may be started when the effective time of the operating means is halved, or when the effective time of the operating means is 0 seconds. You may start.

  Further, since the auto button function of this example is different from the above-mentioned auto button function in that no button performance is performed, the auto button function of this example is called a second auto button function, and the second auto button function is called. It is also possible that the chance button 136 is lit in a third color (for example, yellow) different from that in the operation of the above-described auto button function.

<Character select function>
Next, the character select function will be described. 328 and 329 are diagrams for explaining the character select function.

  The game stand according to this example can select a character to appear in the predetermined effect from a plurality of characters when starting a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit game effect, a bonus game effect). It has a character select function. However, in the character select function, the character can be selected only when the operation by the operation means is accepted, and therefore the character selection is automatically performed (the operation means It is configured so that it will not be performed (without operation by).

  The state shown in FIG. 328 (a) is a state in which the character select effect is started while the auto button function is on (activated). In this state, by starting the character selection effect, a display for prompting the operation by the operation means (in this example, a character display "Press button to select character!") Is displayed. Normally, while the auto button function is operating, the character is automatically selected without any operation by the operating means, but in this example, the character is automatically selected even while the auto button function is operating. It is configured not to be performed (without operation by the operation means). Therefore, the first displayed character (in this example, the character of the lord) is not automatically selected (without operation by the operation means) by the auto button function.

  FIG. 328 (b) shows a state in which the operation by the left button 136a is accepted. In this example, when the operation by the operation means is received during the character select effect, the automatic button function is changed to the non-activated state. Therefore, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (c), the automatic button function is set. And the chance button 136 is turned off.

  Note that in the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 328 (c) to 328 (f), the characters selectable in the character select effect are selected based on the operation by the left button 136a being accepted at the timing shown in FIG. , An animation that changes the character of the lord to the character of the old man is running.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 329, the character select function is selected in the period shown in FIGS. 329 (b) to (c) based on the operation by the left button 136a being accepted at the timing shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the animation for changing the possible character from the character of the lord to the character of the old man is executed, and the operation by the left button 136a is accepted again at the timing shown in FIG. In the period shown in FIGS. 329 (d) to (g), an animation in which the character selectable by the character select function is changed from the old character to the princess character is executed.

  That is, in this example, after the animation for changing the selectable character in the character select function from the first character to the second character is started after the character selection operation is accepted, before the animation is completed. When the character selection operation is accepted again, the animation for changing the selectable character from the first character to the second character is canceled (cancel), and the selectable character is changed to the third character. Is configured.

  Further, in a game console that performs a vibration effect for vibrating the operation means when an operation by the operation means is accepted, the vibration effect may not be executed when the auto button function is activated. With such a configuration, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the player is uncomfortable by performing the vibration effect in a situation where the operation means does not require an operation.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137, ball firing handle 134, etc.) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps). , Various LEDs, etc.), and the display means has a plurality of types of display (for example, operation means image display, elapsed time notification image display, effective time notification image display change mode). A means capable of displaying at least an image display, an operation promotion image display, an animation display according to an operation by the operating means, an animation display regarding the operating means, a background display, a performance display, a decorative pattern (particularly, a decorative pattern in the center), etc. And at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means. In the first mode, the display means displays at least the first display (for example, all or part of the display of the operation means image, the display of the effective time notification image, the display mode change image, and the operation promotion image). Display means, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second mode, and the first mode does not mean that the operation means is automatically operated. A mode (for example, a state in which the auto button function is off), and the second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated (for example, a state in which the auto button function is on). It is a game table characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first display can be displayed even in the mode in which the operating means is automatically operated, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the displaying means. There are cases.

  The first display may be a display including at least a display prompting the player to operate the operating means, and the first display is a display prompting the player to operate the operating means. It may be. At least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be a performance display.

  Further, the display means may be means for starting at least the display of the second display when the display condition is satisfied, and the display means is when the display condition is satisfied, It may be a means capable of at least displaying the second display.

  In addition, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is operated in the first mode. In addition, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is not operated in the second mode. Further, the display condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is operated in the second mode. Further, the operation means may be means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.

  Hereinafter, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 330. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened / closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. A ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and to the launcher 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for launching the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a cha that gives a change to the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 330) by the operation of the player. Button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like to be performed by the operation of a setter (for example, a player, a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) Ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit ( (Not shown). Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push-button switch that can be pressed by a setting person, and includes a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, a lower button located below the confirm button, and a confirm button. A right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button are provided. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 332) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 331 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 330 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, having an opening opening upward at the upper rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 333). The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing of the whole game, and an effect based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub that accommodates a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs a control process and that includes a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game shop clerk. A board case 162, a second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400, An error release switch that configures a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and that cancels an error by the operation of a game store clerk A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 68, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power supply for various electric gaming devices. And a RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, etc. are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. It is provided on the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 332 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at substantially the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and a left path on the left side of the rendering device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), a variable winning a prize port 234, 235 (open state), etc. The easiness of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235, these ordinary symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball that drops on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, etc., the game is dropped on the left side path. It is relatively easy to enter the ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handing machine is used as an example, but a machine other than a right-handing machine may be used.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the respective display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 332, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 332, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (two in total) is provided, but the first special symbol and the second symbol. Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  At the bottom of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The toku-zu 1 display device 212 and the toku-zu 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the toku-zu, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The general-figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-figure fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in this embodiment, the special figure variation games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, 229, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, a variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize ball”) and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). May be included) and.

  The universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 are constituted by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the form, one universal figure starting port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one universal figure starting port 229 is arranged on the right side path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 or the universal figure starting port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 1 variation game") is started. Note that the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 2 variation game") is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one of them is installed. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member is closed. When the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol and wins the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls that enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches the launch rod. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed through by the 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, variable winning holes 234, 235) and Out by simply winning at the starting opening (Special Drawing 1 starting opening 230, Special Drawing 2 starting opening 232), without winning at any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through Universal Drawing starting openings 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in the rolling area of the game ball, and the rendering movable body 224 is placed in the rolling area of the gaming ball. It is arranged. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passing ball is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball is provided.

  The production movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The production movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, A counter timer 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high level). The driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the confirmation lamp 222, etc., and various kinds of opening / closing driving of a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 or a door member of the variable winning ports 234, 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 333) for adjusting the volume, the operation sensor (not shown) that detects the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and the detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 which outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the ROM 406 which is stored based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a gaming circuit lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming underframe lamp driving for controlling the gaming underframe lamp 542. The circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIGS. 334 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed in a stopped state. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 334 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, FIG. 334 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started under the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are all lit and one central segment is repeatedly lit. . These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". A series of displays until the above is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 334 (a), seven types of special symbols “Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special symbol 1. In FIG. 334 (a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special drawing A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, “Special drawing B” is a 7R special jackpot design, and “Special drawing C” is a 7R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot and the number of rounds is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the special figure change game after the end of the jackpot game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game is over, after the 7R special jackpot game is over, and after the 7R jackpot game is over, both shift to a time saving state (electric power support state). Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special drawing A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "special drawing B" are the symbols that become the special symbol high probability general symbol high probability state after the jackpot game, and are the 7R jackpot symbols. “Special map C” is a symbol that becomes a special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B" and "special drawing C" are symbols in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  “Special drawing D” is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R, as compared with “Special drawing A” which is 15R and “Special drawing B” which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot pattern called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "Special map E" is stopped and displayed in the special map low probability general figure low probability state, the special map high probability general figure low probability state (so-called after the jackpot game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. When the special figure low probability probability state is displayed and "Special figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability normal state is reached after the jackpot game (opening time 29000 ms x 2R) ends. The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 340 (a) and 340 (b)). That is, "special map E" is a game state when the game is stopped and displayed (in this example, whether or not it is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) It is a different design.

  "Special map F" is a small hit symbol, and is in a special map low probability general pattern low probability state. In addition, "special figure G" is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 334 (b), four types of special drawings, “special drawing a” to “special drawing d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. The "special drawing a" is a 15R special jackpot design, the "special drawing b" is a 7R special jackpot design, the "special drawing c" is a 7R jackpot design, and the "special drawing d" is a falling design. In the present embodiment, 7 types of special drawings (5 types of which are big hits) are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 while special figure 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four kinds of special drawings “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” (of which three kinds are big hits) are used. With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in advantage between the special figures 1 and 2 without changing the probability of a big hit and the probability of a probability change of the big hit. In this example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that rarely yield balls, whereas the big hit in Toku-zu 2 does not include sudden probability changes or latent probability changes. The advantage of Toku-zu 2 is higher than that of Toku-zu 1.

  FIG. 334 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The "decoration 1" to "decoration 9" and "decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... → "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  And 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing B", 7R jackpot of "Special drawing C", 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing b" , In the case of notifying the 7R big hit of "special drawing c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-" Decoration 2-decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. In order to explicitly notify the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns is lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3- "Decorative 3" and "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7") are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called “special figure E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special figure F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a sudden 2R big hit of "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing d", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 334 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 334 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" and "Public figure B" which are hit symbols, and "Public figure C" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments turned on and one in the center. Repeatedly illuminate the segment of "Public variable display". And, in case of notifying the winning of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure A" or "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of notifying the failure of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 334 (d), the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 335. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Operation permission, initial value setting, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1 to the sub control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is all added to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result has a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ( In step S233), the information is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value updating process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the universal figure winning random number value, the universal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are generated. The four initial value generating random number counters, the two random number counters for generating the normal figure fluctuation time determining random number value, and the special figure changing time determining random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and is acquired. The value is added to 1 and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 336. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in this example, about every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 after step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). Specifically (in this example, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous-previous-time detection signal, there is a previous-time detection signal, and there is a present-time detection signal). (The information indicating that), it is a general winning a prize port 226, a variable winning a prize port 234, 235, a special figure 1 starting port 230, and a special figure 2 starting port 232, or a universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there is a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no detection signal for the previous time, and no detection signal for the present time). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing is performed, and in subsequent step S209, basic random number update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the general control unit 300 then uses the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to.

  For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, a random number counter for generating the universal figure random number value, special figure 1 random number value generating The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for generating a random number and the random number counter for generating a special figure 2 random number has completed one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for obtaining the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying / stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the number storage area is read, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls storage area.

  In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a prize winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting openings 228, 229, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special value 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special value 1 special value random number counter for random number generation is provided in the RAM 308. One random number value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased every time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. At the same time, the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 1 reserved increases by one, a new special map 1 is added to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. The data of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value are written.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by subjecting the value stored in the value storage register to predetermined processing is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of special figure 2 winning random number values and special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the special figure 2 reservation number is reduced by one, the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number having the highest reservation order is deleted, and the remaining data is deleted. The processing is performed so that the pending order of the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value moves up by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 2 held increases by one, a new special map 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest holding order. And the data of the special figure 2 random number set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 starting information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 or universal figure starting port 229, and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the universal figure winning random number generation random number counter It is acquired as a winning random number value, and the universal figure random number value is acquired from the universal figure random number generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the universal figure random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The same number of sets of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value in the universal figure random number storage area are stored as the same as the number of reserved universal figure numbers stored in the universal figure hold number storage area. In the universal figure random number storage area, each time the number of pending figure numbers decreases by one, the data of the universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased and the remaining The data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value are processed so that the holding order of the data is incremented by one. In addition, as the number of reserved universal figures increases by one, a new universal figure winning random number value and a new universal figure winning random number value are added to the next pending order of the data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value with the lowest (last) pending order. The data of a set of random numbers for general use is written. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. When there is a winning in the variable winning port 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED configuring the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  In addition, in the ordinary figure state update processing at the timing when the ordinary figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the winning symbol The seven-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the general-purpose display device 210 has a display mode. Lighting / light-out driving control of the seven-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By carrying out this control, the universal figure display device 210 is either a winning symbol (the universal symbol A or the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 334 (d)) or a deviating symbol (the universal symbol C shown in FIG. 334 (d)). The symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member of the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of order, the universal figure per-match flag is turned off. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the general figure variation game and special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of public figure variation games that are held. Is set to 1 or more as the start condition, the first universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number set in the universal figure random value storage area are used for execution.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the universal figure starting information (a pair of universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the universal figure random number storage area, Based on the universal figure winning random number value in the acquired universal figure start information, the value of the universal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like, a win / fail judgment table (FIGS. 338 (a) and (b) described later) stored in the ROM 306. Refer to) to determine whether to hit or not (judgment). Next, the main control unit 300, on the basis of the universal figure random number value in the acquired universal figure start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result, etc., the universal figure determination table (shown in FIG. 338 (c)) stored in the ROM 306. (See the time operation table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the universal figure. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and the like, various tables stored in the ROM 306 (for example, timer number selection (not shown)). The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the general figure is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, deletes the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, and stores the number of retained universal figure numbers. Subtract the number of reserved universal maps in the area by 1. At this time, the universal figure starting information extracted from the universal figure random number storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the universal figure starting information stored in this temporary area. Good.

  The main control unit 300 turns on the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 when the win / no determination result is a win (win), and sets the universal figure hit flag off when the win is not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinction drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on In FIG. 334 (b), the special figure a, 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off The special figure c and the special flag d are turned on when the off flag is turned on so that the 7 segment LED configuring the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the special area is set in the RAM 308. FIG. 2 A setting indicating that the stop display is being performed is made. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability changes stored in the probability change storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability changes, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 is detected) Solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 (a part of various solenoids 332) And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the open state, and sets information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Toku-zu, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Toku-zu 1), and ended. In the special figure 2 state update process started at a timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is to be ended is waited for. In order to set the setting, information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric Chu extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start opening 232 until the game ball enters There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number storage unit (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of this big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. However, in this example, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, so the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update processing started at different timings is different from the special figure 2 state update processing. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure E, and the small hit flag is on In the special area F, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the special area G is in the respective modes when the off flag is on, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 2 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, when the number of special game 2 variable game holding is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game holding are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is played prior to the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 A big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in Toku-zu 1) is made by using the hit / miss determination table (see FIGS. 339 (a) to (d) described later) stored in. It is determined whether or not it is determined (whether it is true or false). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the determined hit / miss judgment result, etc., the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 340 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 341 (a), the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the start opening is started. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update The special process and the special figure-related lottery process may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or may be configured to display a plurality of special lottery results in one area. In addition, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a prefetch result information command , Etc.), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as the command type, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command relating to a universal figure are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a special figure design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability change flags, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the value of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability change flags, etc. In the case of the start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. is included. I try to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning ports 234, 235. It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, the command data is information indicating the type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Included in.

  If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the ordinary figure, the command data includes values such as the ordinary figure hit flag, the ordinary figure out-of-position flag, the ordinary figure probability variation flag, and the general figure related lottery process. Including the information on the determined stop symbol and the fluctuation time, and in the case of the design fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the general figure, information indicating the value of the general figure hit flag, the general figure deviation flag, the general figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stores values of various types of big hit flag, small hit flag, out-of-match flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc., special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figure The information showing the timer number selected in FIG. 2 related lottery processing, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize ports 234, 235, and the general figure display device 210, special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 335. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 335.

  FIG. 337 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning / disabling determination process. The pre-determined result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 337 (b) to 337 (d)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are special figures. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored area. The comparison is performed with the number of prefetches in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of special figure 2 has increased when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is equal to the number of special figure 2 prefetches. It is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. It is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit timer allocation is ended. The process returns to the prize receiving process (step S217) of the included process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the power support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetching notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (group of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning / judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIGS. 337 (b) to 337 (d) exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 337 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 337 (b), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 337 (b), "special figure G" (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure G" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing F" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 337 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 337 (c), the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 337 (c), "special drawing d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. Note that, in FIG. 337 (c), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 337 (d) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 337 (d), in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the judgment result and the variation timer number (variation time) are pre-determined and those The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 338 to 341 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 338 (a) and 338 (b) show an example of a win / loss determination table used when a win / loss determination is made in the universal figure related lottery process (step S223). The win / loss determination tables shown in FIGS. 338 (a) and 338 (b) are configured with respective items of “universal figure probability”, “random number range”, and “win / fail result”. The item of “universal figure probability” indicates a general figure probability (low probability of general figure or high probability of general figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired universal figure winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the universal figure winning random number value of this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 338 (a) is a win / loss determination table for a universal figure used when the universal figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 338 (a), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of failure is 99/100.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 338 (b) is a win / loss determination table for a universal figure used when the universal figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 338 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of failure is 0%. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 338 (a), the probability of winning is 100 times. In this way, in the universal figure high probability state (during time saving operation), only the hit may be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be set to be higher than 0% at the time saving operation, but the probability that the hit is selected is made higher at the time saving operation than at the time saving non-operation (normal probability low state).

  FIG. 338 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hitting operation for a general figure. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the universal figure random number value when determining the stop symbol in the universal symbol related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, for each symbol) (Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 338 (c), the distribution ratio of each winning symbol in the case where the hit / miss determination result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit is 50% for the universal figure A and 50% for the universal figure B. Universal drawings A and B are symbols in which the electric Chu opening operation is executed after the universal character variation game. In addition, since there is only one disengagement pattern in the general drawing C when the hit determination result is out, the general drawing C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of disagreement. When the universal figure C is selected, the electric charge opening operation is not executed after the universal figure variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 338 (c), after the universal figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electric tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is not in time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000-10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and again opened for 1800 ms, then, It is closed only for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 338 (c), after the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electricity chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is not in the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the power tube 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is the time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for 1450 ms, and again. It is closed for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 339 (a) to 339 (d) show an example of a win / loss determination table used when the win / loss determination is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The win / loss determination table shown in FIGS. 339 (a) to 339 (d) is composed of respective items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “win / fall determination result”. The item of “special map probability” indicates a special map probability (low probability of special map or high probability of special map) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are both 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (a) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 339 (a), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (b) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 339 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (a), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (c) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 339 (c), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (d) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 339 (d), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 339 (c), the jackpot probability is about 10 times.

  FIG. 340 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the random number value of Special Figure 1 when determining the stopped symbol in the Special Figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 340 (a), the distribution ratio of each jackpot symbol when the hit determination result of the Toku-zu 1 variable game is a jackpot, the Toku-zu A (15R special jackpot) is 30%, and the Toku-zu B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, and special figure E (latent probability change big hit) is 10%. is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E except for special drawing C are symbols in which the positive change operates after the jackpot game is over. The ratio of the probability variation big hit (special features A, B, D, E) in the big hit in the special game 1 variation game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special figures A, B, D are game states (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, general figure high probability (time saving operation), general figure low probability (time saving non-operation) at the time of judgment of judgment (when symbol stop is displayed) Regardless of the time)), it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special drawing C, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving frequency 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time saving works after the big hit game ends only when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state or the general figure high probability state. That is, when the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the time saving does not operate after the jackpot game ends. For example, if special map E is displayed as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability general figure low probability state in succession multiple times, the time saving does not work after the first stop display (special figure high probability general figure (It becomes a low probability state), but after the second stop display or later, the time saving works (it becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Special figure 1 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 90% in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one small hit symbol and one missing symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, if the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is a small hit, the special map F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special diagram 1 random number value, and the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and out-of-match symbols may be provided like the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using the random number value of Toku-zu.

  FIG. 340 (b) shows an example of a big-hit operation in each symbol of Toku-zu 1. As shown in FIG. 340 (b), in the big hit game after the special map A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special map B or the special map C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special map D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened. Is performed for 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this jackpot game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the jackpot game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special map F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 341 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is a distribution rate of random number ranges for each symbol (that is, each distribution ratio) which is compared with the random number of Special Figure 2 when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 341 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the hit determination result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability variation operates after the jackpot game is over. Proportion of probability variation big hit (special figure a and b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation game big hit, namely, probability variation probability is 75% which is the same as the probability variation probability of special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  Special figures a and b are game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of ordinary figure (at time shortening operation), low probability of ordinary figure (at time of non-operation of special figure) at the time of judgment of judgment (at the time of symbol stop display) ) Regardless of, it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special figure c, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving number 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. Special figure 2 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variation game. Therefore, in the case where the winning / deciding result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, like the big hit symbols, a plurality of outlier symbols may be provided, and may be determined by a lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 341 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being provided with a shorter working time than the special figure 1, and has a long attacker opening time (or a large number of Rs). Therefore, it can be considered that Toku-zu 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Toku-zu 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 342 and 343. FIG. 342 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 342 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 343.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 342 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 342 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 342 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. Therefore, the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the processing ends.

  FIG. 343 (a) shows a flow of the electric tulong opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 343 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chu long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the universal figure changing game, and the special figure 2 starting opening (electrical chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or a plurality of times when the regular figure changing game is won (hereinafter , Sometimes referred to as a long opening) is a production that fuels whether or not to do. It should be noted that, even after the universal figure fluctuation stop, the electric chu long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during electric chu opening!") May be continued based on the general figure stop symbol.

  The electric tulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 343 (a) is the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 of FIG. It is executed when the (start rotation) command is received.

  First, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag that restricts the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether or not the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is restricted. For example, in the display darkness when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game during display darkness. Further, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not in the dark display, and the variation time of the universal figure variation game is long enough to execute the electric tulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to execute an electric chulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game or the demonstration effect.

  When the electric chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  In step S801, if the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric turong opening effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step S803, and symbol variation start (rotation start) of the universal figure is started. By referring to the information about the universal figure hit flag and the ordinary figure out of sync flag from the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the hit / no hit determination result of the ordinary figure fluctuation game is hit.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit / miss determination result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the universal symbol is changed from the command data of the symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the regular figure. By referring to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the public figure variation game is the general symbol A.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S807, and the production of the production type “success pattern” is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for electric tulong opening effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of main processing. It returns to a process (step S409).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure fluctuation game is not the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S811, and the production of the production type "failure pattern A" is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on "failure pattern A", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit / non-win determination result of the universal figure variation game is not a hit, the process proceeds to step S815, and executes the electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric chulong opening false effect execution lottery process, a random number value is taken out from the random counter for the electric chulong opening pseudo effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 and stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect, based on the result of the hit determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect, the process proceeds to step S817, and selects the effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B" and sets it as the electric tulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern B", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric tulong opening fake effect is not to be executed, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric tulong opening effect, ends this processing, and ends the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric chu long opening effect shown in FIG. 343, if the electric chu long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, it is assumed that the electric chu long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. It is also possible to perform an execution lottery in the same manner as in the case of failure and execute the effect only when the lottery is won. In addition, in this example, the effect of "Failure pattern A" is set when the electric Chu is opened for a short time (short opening B), and the failure pattern is set when the electric Chu does not open (General drawing C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general drawing B) and a hit (general drawing C).

  FIG. 343 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 343 (b) shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and a background effect named "land stage" is being executed. On the front of the background effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern in which "decoration 0" to "decoration 9" sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, the electric tulong opening effect area d is arranged. The public figure variation game is started on the public figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chu long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric chu long opening effect is executed in the electric chu long opening effect area d. As a Den Churon opening production, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with the display of "helping chance lottery", and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is selected to win the universal figure variation game. A stirrup production is performed that makes the player expect to open long. As shown in FIG. 343 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. A part of the right side area of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. As described above, the opening of the electric tulong may make it difficult to confirm at least a part of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or the case where the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the fluctuating display of the electric tulong. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 344. FIG. 344 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 344 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 subsequent to step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S903.

  FIG. 344 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 344 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an update process of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, the effect of the special figure variation game on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 to 357. FIG. 345 (a) shows the flow of the button effect control process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. In the button effect control processing, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether or not the button effect flag in-execution flag is in the on state (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (within the valid operation period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button effect flag has a value of "0", the button effect flag is determined to be in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button reception flag is in the on state. The button reception flag is turned on when the chance button 136 or each button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button reception flag is “1”, the button reception flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button acceptance flag has a value of "0", the process proceeds to step S1207 and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 executes a button reception control process. In the button reception execution process, control for executing the effect executed based on the operation of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is performed.

  In step S1207, which follows step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the valid operation period, when the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are operated in a predetermined order, or when the valid operation period ends, the button effect end condition is To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if it is determined that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the button effect executing flag. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the operation valid period has ended in step S1207, the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 is overwritten with “0” to set the button effect flag in-execution flag. Turn off.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect executing flag is in the off state, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the button effect executing condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is satisfied when the execution of the effect that is the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is won in the predetermined lottery process. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213, and if it is determined that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to the process of step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect executing flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied by winning the execution of the effect that is the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, and thus the button effect is being executed. The button effect executing flag indicating that is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 345 (b).

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like for deciding whether or not to execute the effect with the operation valid period is performed. After finishing the other button effect control processing, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control processing and returns to the effect control processing of the main processing (step S409).

  FIG. 345 (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the automatic button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is “0”, the automatic button mode is set. When it is determined that the setting flag is in the off state, the process proceeds to step S1303. When the value of the auto button mode setting flag is "1", it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is in the on state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The automatic button mode setting condition is satisfied when the automatic button mode setting is called in the user mode (menu) that can be called by the player during non-execution of the special figure variation game. Further, the automatic button mode setting condition may be established when a predetermined lottery is won or when the number of jackpots after the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number. Further, the automatic button mode setting condition may be forcibly satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the automatic button mode itself to satisfy the automatic button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305, which follows step S1303, the automatic button mode is set. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of modes 1 to 4 can be set by the player's operation. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the automatic button mode has been set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the automatic button mode setting flag indicating that the automatic button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect executing flag is in the off state, in next step S1309, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the automatic button mode setting release condition is satisfied. The automatic button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied when the player cancels the automatic button mode. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the automatic button mode setting release condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if it is determined that the automatic button mode setting release condition is not satisfied, the automatic button mode setting process ends. Then, the process moves to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311, which follows step S1309, the automatic button mode setting flag is turned off. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the automatic button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, it turns off the automatic button mode setting flag indicating that the automatic button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “0” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns off the automatic button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the automatic button mode setting process and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 346 shows a processing flow of the chance button control processing (S411) of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. In the chance button control process, the first sub control unit 400 first turns off the button reception flag (step S1401). In this way, the button reception flag is once turned off each time the chance button control processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” to turn off the button reception flag, and proceeds to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect flag in-execution flag is in the on state. The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (within the valid operation period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button effect flag is “0”, the button effect flag is determined to be off, and the chance button control process is ended.

  In step S1405, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is on. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the automatic button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is "1", the automatic button mode is set. It is determined that the setting flag is in the ON state, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is "0", it is determined that the automatic button mode setting flag is the OFF state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first sub control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated.

  In step S1409, which follows step S1407, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not to accept a button operation. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button operation has been accepted, the process moves to step S1413, and if it determines that the button operation has not been accepted, the chance button control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that the automatic button mode setting flag is in the off state, in step S1411, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. When the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is ON, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 has been operated, and when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is ON, the setting operation unit 137 is operated. to decide. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, it proceeds to the process of step S1413, and if it determines that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated, it executes the chance button control process. finish.

  In step S1413, the button reception flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated automatically or manually, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the button reception flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the button reception flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  FIG. 347 shows various settings in the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners and no settable conditions are provided. Therefore, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for intermediate players, and can be set by a player who has reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 3 is for advanced players, and can be set by a player who has reached level 100 by Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is intended for all players, but cannot be set unless a predetermined ban date arrives.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation valid period, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of "sexuality" in the figure, "carefree" is set in the mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the effective operation period. Further, in Mode 2, “Immediate” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the beginning of the effective operation period. In Mode 3, “Mood shop” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation valid period. Further, in the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to “relax”, “impressed” or “mood shop”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of operations of the chance button 136 per unit time is set to “low speed” in mode 1, “medium speed” in mode 2, and “high speed” in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player repeatedly hits without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player only continuously hits the chance button 136. Has become. Further, in mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to "low speed", "medium speed" or "high speed".

  Also, in the effect of matching the operation timing of the chance button 136 (for example, Hime Dance SP reach described later), the operation timing is set to “GOOD” in the allowable range in Mode 1, and the operation timing is slightly shifted in Mode 2 “GREAT”. , And the mode 3 is set to “PERFECT” in which the operation timing is perfectly matched. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to "GOOD", "GREAT" or "PERFECT".

  In addition, the setting of the "back button" in which the operation promotion leaving to encourage the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period is not performed is that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in the mode 1 during the operation valid period, In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed.

  In addition, when a hold icon indicating the number of holdings of the special figure variation game is displayed with a pattern simulating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, during the operation valid period. The chance button 136 is automatically operated in mode 1, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 2, and the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 3. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed. If the chance button 136 is operated during the display of "button hold", the display mode of the hold icon of "button hold" is changed.

  Further, the cross key (command input of the cross key) for operating each button of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be automatically operated in mode 1 and set to be automatically operated in mode 2. , Mode 3 is set so as not to be automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed.

  In addition, in the selection effect in which the player draws a lottery or the like, the mode 1 is set to "indecisiveness" in which the options are not determined immediately, the mode 2 is set to "quick decision in which the options are determined immediately", and the mode 3 Is set to "default" where the choices are determined by initial selection. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set "indecision", "quick decision", or "default".

  In addition, the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player who is setting each mode is effectively accepted in the mode 1, accepted effectively in the mode 2, and not accepted effectively in the mode 3. Has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the player's button operations of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are effectively accepted.

  Further, as described in the "Remarks" column in the figure, mode 1 is an automatic button setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the non-execution of the special figure variation game (during non-play), or a special figure. On / off can be set by inputting a cross key command during a variable game (during a game). Further, in mode 2, when the player actually operates the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 in the automatic button mode on state, the automatic button mode is switched to the off state. Further, in the mode 3, the continuous hitting speed is set so that it cannot be achieved when the chance button 136 is physically (directly operated by the player) operated. Also, an effect that appears only when the operation timing is "PERFECT" is provided.

  FIG. 348 shows a method of setting the mode 1 of the auto button mode in time series. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 348 (a) shows the display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect that is performed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" which is the latest stop symbol is displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d, “Call a menu with a chance button” is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is called (displayed) by operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 348 (b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect and the menu screen is displayed when Daitomo has not logged in (password has not been input). The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operate the chance button 136 to set the selection item. Further, this is informed by a tutorial display including a grandpa character displayed in the effect display area 208d and a balloon message "Select item to decide". The menu of this example includes “member registration”, “password input”, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance”, “data clear”, “volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment”, and “auto button mode”. “Issuing QR code (registered trademark)” and “data clear” are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 348, since the login to Daitomo is not made, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by hatching to the right in the figure), and menus that cannot be selected are displayed. Is shown.

  FIG. 348 (c) shows a state in which the "auto button mode" is selected on the menu screen. At the time point shown in 19 (c), the cursor e1 is located at “mode 1” and “mode 1” is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message “Mode 1 is recommended for beginners”. In addition, Modes 2 and 3 are modes that can be selected only while logged in to Daitomo, and the ban date of "Mode 4" has not arrived. Therefore, “mode 2”, “mode 3”, and “mode 4” cannot be selected. When "Return" is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 348 (b) is returned.

  FIG. 348 (d) shows a state in which the mode 1 is determined. The item "mode 1" is displayed so as to light up (indicated by a dotted frame in the figure), and a princess balloon message "decided on mode 1!" Is displayed. Further, "mode 1" is displayed at the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode being set is displayed.

  FIG. 348 (e) shows a state where the mode 1 is determined and the screen returns to the menu screen. When the menu item "end" is selected, the grandfather character and the balloon message "I'll do my best!" Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is resumed, as shown in FIG. 348 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may be hidden by a display different from the display regarding the auto button mode (for example, "end" of the menu item), As shown in FIG. 348 (f), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may be different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of "call menu with chance button").

  FIG. 349 shows a method of setting the mode 4 of the auto button mode in time series. FIG. 349 (a) shows a state in which "password input" is selected and determined on the menu screen shown in FIG. 348 (b). The player can operate the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password to log in to Daitomo.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows a state in which the password has been successfully input. After "Password input has been accepted" is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, the menu screen shown in FIG. 349 (c) is displayed. Since the login to Daitomo is completed, the menu items “Issue QR code (registered trademark)” and “Data clear” can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display including a grandfather character and a balloon message "Select item to decide" is displayed. Further, "level: 250" is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the logged-in player is shown. A title corresponding to each level is provided, and since the title of level 250 is a general, "title: shogun" is displayed below "level: 250".

  In this state, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the “auto button” of the menu items and operates the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 349 (d), the auto button mode setting is performed. The screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is located at "mode 4" and "mode 4" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message "Mode 4 can customize all functions." Also, since the login to Daitomo is in progress and the Daitomo level is 250, "mode 2" and "mode 3" can be selected. Further, since the ban date of "mode 4" has arrived, "mode 4" can also be selected.

  FIG. 349 (e) shows a state after the mode 4 is selected and determined. The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select a function to be set and operate the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set each function. The selection items of each function selected by the player are displayed brighter than the non-selected items (indicated by dot hatching in the figure). When "decision" shown below the effect display area 208d is selected and decided, the setting (customization) of mode 4 ends, and when "cancel" is selected and decided, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 349 (d). To return to.

  FIG. 349 (f) shows a state in which “decision” is selected and decided, and the setting of the auto button mode 4 is completed. "Mode 4" is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the mode being set is displayed. Further, instead of the “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be individually notified.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 1)
FIG. 350 shows an example of the effect display in Example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 350 and each drawing described later, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In FIG. 350 and the respective drawings described later, the relative layout relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 1 displaying device 212, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the special figure 2 displaying device 214 is shown. Are shown differently from the illustration in FIG. In FIG. 350 and each drawing described later, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218 and the special symbol 1 display device 212 are shown in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 and the special symbol 2 display are shown on the right side thereof. Device 214 is shown. Further, the light-off parts of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit parts are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being performed. The illustration of the fourth symbol is omitted. Further, on the left side of FIG. 350, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown, and on the left side, the chance button 136 seen from the player is shown.

  FIG. 350 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 350 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  FIG. 350 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. Therefore, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 350 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 350 (d), the face of the hall f1 is displayed in a cut-in effect. Is executed. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 350 (c) and 350 (d).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 2)
FIG. 351 shows an example of the effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 351 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 351 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 351 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image simulating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation prompt notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 351 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 347, the “sexuality” of mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period, like “carefree”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 351 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 351 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period (see FIG. 350 (d)). Further, different cut-in effects may be executed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting status of the auto button mode. In particular, the mode may not be displayed unless the automatic button mode is set, or vice versa.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not depending on the player) in the automatic button mode within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In this embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the chance button 136 is lit and the meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed during the operation valid period. Without being limited thereto, when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 is lit and a meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or You don't have to do both.

(Example 3)
FIG. 352 shows an example of the effect display in the third example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 352 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 352 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 352 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image simulating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation prompt notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 352 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 347, the “sexuality” of mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the beginning of the operation valid period as in the case of “improvement”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 352 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 352 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period (see FIG. 350 (d)). If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not depending on the player) in the automatic button mode within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 4)
FIG. 353 shows a chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate it, and is configured to be able to be pressed. The chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the revolving light. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is arranged.

  353 (a) to 353 (d) show an example in which the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 353 (a) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 353 (b) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 353 (c) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 700. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 353 (c) and 353 (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. In this way, when the chance button 700 is operated, the effect of lighting the lamp 700a while rotating is started. However, if the player holds his / her hand on the chance button 700 after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by the hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 353 (e) to 353 (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 353 (e) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 353 (f) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has started (the operation valid period has started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. Thus, when the auto button mode is set, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating based on the automatic operation. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lamp 700a from being lowered by the player's hand.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the auto button mode can be set, visibility is sacrificed, and the accessory (for example, the lamp 700a) is moved by operating the chance button 700, and the chance button. The player can select whether to secure the visibility of the accessory while sacrificing the operation of 700.

(Example 5)
FIG. 354 shows an example of the effect according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 354 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, a shooting reach in which the hall f1 defeats the Echigoya f3 with a beam is executed.

  In the shooting reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is emitted from the sword of the f1 as many times as the operation of the chance button 136. In order to inform this, at the start of shooting reach, a character string "shooting reach-defeat Echigoya with continuous button hits-" is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 1" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 354 (b) shows a state in which shooting reach is started. When the shooting reach is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and "PUSH!" A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the image, and the operation promotion notification is executed.

  The continuous hit speed in the mode 1 of the auto button mode is "low speed" as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 354 (b) and 354 (c), since the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, the number of beams emitted from the sword of the buttocks f1 is small.

  FIG. 354 (d) shows a state in which the player himself has started consecutively hitting the chance button 136. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the player's operation of the chance button 136 is also valid. For this reason, more beams are emitted from the sword of the hall f1 than when the chance button 136 was automatically operated.

  FIG. 355 is a timing chart showing the states of the chance button sensor 426, the automatic button processing determination result (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button reception flag when the effect shown in FIG. 354 is executed. FIG. 355 shows the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the result of the auto button determination process (determined in steps S1407 to S1409), and the on / off state of the button reception flag in order from the top. The horizontal axis of FIG. 355 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The auto button determination processing result is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button reception flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the automatic button mode.

  Time t1 in FIG. 355 is the time shown in FIG. 354 (b). When the automatic button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes determination in step S1407 to step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the opportunity button sensor 426 remains off at time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 355 is the time shown in FIG. 354 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes determination in step S1407 to step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t2 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the opportunity button sensor 426 remains off at time t2. Further, the operation of the chance button 136 from time t3 to t4 is also an automatic operation in the auto button mode. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is executed at equal intervals. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be performed randomly or in a pattern with a different cycle.

  At time t5, the player has started operating the chance button 136. Therefore, at the times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on and the button reception flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only either the operation of the chance button 136 by the player or the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, both may be determined to be valid. Further, for example, even when the chance button 136 pushed down at time t6 is maintained as it is, the auto button processing determination result at time t7 and time t10 may be ON, or conversely, the chance button 136 may be changed. When it is maintained in the ON state, the button reception flag may be turned OFF without being turned ON even at the timing when the automatic button processing determination result is turned ON.

  At time t8, the player operates the chance button 136. At time t9, the player operates the chance button 136. Further, time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 354 (d).

  Although the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, the button acceptance flag is not turned on at time t10. Therefore, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalid. In this way, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be disabled for a predetermined period after the player operates the chance button 136. After that, at time t11, the player operates the chance button 136.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player's operation of the chance button 136 is valid even when the automatic button mode is set. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the automatic button mode is set, by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to deal with the player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136. . Further, in addition to the operation performed automatically, the chance button 136 may be manually operated to easily capture continuous hitting effects (for example, shooting reach).

  Here, the configuration may be such that the result of the auto button process determination process turns on when the acceptance period of the chance button 136 starts. When the player pushes the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 at the same time as the start of the period, even if the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is awaited. It takes time from the start of the acceptance period of 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In that respect, when the automatic button mode is set, since the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost at the same time as the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the effect may be seen earlier. is there.

(Example 6)
FIG. 356 shows an example of the effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. 356 (a)-(d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 356 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 356 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white.

  FIG. 356 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 347, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 356 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 356 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period (see FIG. 350 (d)).

  356 (e) to (h) show an example in which the auto button mode does not operate. FIG. 356 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is executed. Further, since the auto button mode mode 3 is set, "mode 3" is displayed in the upper left part of the effect display area 208d. When the super reach effect is executed, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set is on the lower left side, and when the super reach effect is not being executed, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set is on the upper left side. It has become. In this way, the position of the display indicating that the automatic button mode is being set may change depending on the state.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area a. In the variable icon display area a, one variable icon can be displayed, and it is possible to give advance notice (preliminary notice of the change) of the validity of the change with a predetermined reliability depending on the display mode of the change icon. In the variable icon display area a, the variable icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  In addition, a horizontally long area that is adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area a below the effect display area 208d is a special figure hold display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special figure hold display area c, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure change game depending on the number of hold icons, and also to notify the success or failure of the hold with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon (prefetching). Notice) is possible. Further, in the special figure hold display area c of this example, hold icons indicating hold of the hold orders 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of current special figure 1 variable games is two, as shown in FIG. 356 (e), two special hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed as white circles (default) in the special figure hold display area c. It is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 356 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is increased by one. . In the special figure reservation display area c, a reservation icon b3 is newly displayed.

  The hold icon b3 is a button hold that is displayed in a display mode of a pattern simulating the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a look-ahead notice. While the button holding is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is entered. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. Further, when a plurality of button holdings are displayed while the automatic button mode (excluding mode 3) is set, and the automatic button mode is activated, only the display mode of the previously displayed button holding is displayed. May be changed, or conversely, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. Further, in that case, the display mode of both button suspensions may not be changed, or the display mode of both button suspensions may be simultaneously changed. Further, these controls may be different or the same during the setting of the auto button mode and other states. Further, the display mode after the change may be different between the change of the display mode due to the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the fact that the chance button 136 is actually pressed, or the same. Good. In addition, there may be a mode in which it is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, although the mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, as shown in FIG. 347, the mode 3 does not perform the automatic operation when the button is held and the operation by the player is not valid. Therefore, when mode 3 is set, the display mode of button holding does not change.

  FIG. 356 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game, which had been held by the hold icon b3, has been started. The hold icon b3 of button hold becomes the variable icon a2 while keeping the display mode. The variable icon a2 gradually moves toward the variable icon display area a.

  FIG. 356 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon a2 has moved to the variable icon display area a. The display mode of the variable icon a2 changes after the movement to the variable icon display area a is completed. The variation icon a2 is changed to a display mode of a picture drawn as "heat" in a red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) circle, and a notice display of the special figure 1 variation game being executed ( Notice display of the fluctuation).

  As shown in FIGS. 356 (a) to 356 (d) of the present embodiment, the automatic button mode may be activated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the chance button 136 may be automatically operated. However, as shown in FIGS. 356 (e) to 356 (h), the auto button mode may not operate during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may not be automatically operated. The auto button mode may be activated when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, or when the button hold is changed when the chance button 136 is operated. May operate. In addition, when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode does not have to be activated, and when the button hold is changed when the chance button 136 is operated, The auto button mode does not have to operate.

(Example 7)
FIG. 357 shows an example of effect display in time series in Example 7 of the present embodiment. On the left side of FIG. 357, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown, and on the right side, the chance button 136 seen from the player is shown.

  FIG. 357 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of this embodiment, a princess dance super reach in which a princess dances is executed.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the effect of operating the chance button 136 with good timing is executed. In order to notify this, at the start of the princess dance super reach, the character string "Princess dance SP reach-press the flowing button with good timing!" Is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 3" is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 357 (b) shows a state in which the princess dance super reach has started. When the princess dance super reach is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 lights up.

  Further, an image of a princess, a chance button image g, and an aiming frame h are displayed in the effect display area 208d. In this embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from above toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated at the timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, the evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 357 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be moved by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. The opportunity button 136 is retracted as if the opportunity button 136 was pressed at the timing when the opportunity button 136 is automatically operated. Note that, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may perform an operation of protruding upward. When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Further, when the chance button 136 is provided with a driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed down by operating the driving means according to the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the driving means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the automatic button mode being set to ON. For example, a force can be applied from the inside to the outside of the chance button 136 to fix the chance button 136 so that it does not move, or the chance button 136 may be retracted, and the chance button 136 may be fixed in the retracted state to be pressed. You can lose it.

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 operates as if it were actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the player operates the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is automatically activated by the operation in the auto button mode. By turning off the chance button lamp 138 based on the operation, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  Further, in order to give the player the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated, there are a case where the chance button 136 is actually operated and a case where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. It suffices that the chance buttons 136 have the same appearance. In this case, the lighting status of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, the presence or absence of issuance, emission color, and brightness) depending on whether the chance button 136 is actually operated or when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. At least one element among a plurality of elements such as a posture, a posture, and a movement condition may be made common.

  FIG. 357 (d) shows a state after the chance button 136 is automatically operated. As shown in FIG. 347, in mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing of all “PERFECT”. Therefore, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the effect image including the character string “PERFECT” is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a player who feels annoyed to operate the chance button 136 does not operate the chance button 136, and the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played. May be visible to others.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 357 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effect, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP). At least one of the reach effect), at least one effect means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is executable, at least one of the plurality of effects, One effect (for example, cut-in effect, change of button hold), at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold), and the effect The means is capable of at least executing the first effect (for example, the cut-in effect (see FIG. 350)) when the first condition is satisfied. The production means is capable of at least executing the second production (for example, a change of button holding in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied, and the first production is The second effect is at least a different effect, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player, and the second condition is the It is characterized in that it is a condition that may be established when the operating means is not operated by the player.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various effects.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to show the same effect as when the operating means is operated, without causing the player to operate the operating means even to the player who feels the operation of the operating means is troublesome. There are cases. In addition, by providing an effect that can be visually recognized by not operating the operation means, there is a case where a new way of enjoying the game in which the operation means is not intentionally operated can be performed.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, the gaming machine is provided with a performance mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of performance modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of performance modes is a One effect mode (for example, non-setting of the automatic button button mode), at least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, the automatic button button mode), and Production is not performed when the production mode is the first production mode, and the second production is not executed when the production mode is the first production mode The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated, and the second effect mode is the operation hand. There amusement machine which automatically, is that the effect mode in which it has been operated, characterized in that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, by providing an effect that is executed only in the effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated, a player who does not want to operate the operation means does not operate the operation means. May not be lost in On the contrary, a player who does not want to operate the operating means may gain the advantage by not operating the operating means.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means can execute at least an operation promotion notification (for example, an image simulating the chance button 136, a meter image), and the rendering means is the rendering mode. Is the first effect mode, at least the operation promotion notification can be executed, the effect means, when the effect mode is the second effect mode, the operation promotion notification It is at least executable, and the operation promotion notification is a notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the operation is automated by executing the operation prompting notification that prompts the operation of the operation means even in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. In some cases, a player who feels humble can be rescued. Further, it may be difficult to understand that the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode) is set by another player. Moreover, since control can be made common in a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to reduce the control load and the number of design work steps.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect), and the effect means satisfies the third condition. If there is, it is possible to at least execute the third effect, the third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, the third condition is that the operating means is It is characterized in that it is a condition that may be established when operated by a player.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the third effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode. Is a performance to be executed when is the second performance mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-mentioned configuration, even when the operation mode is automatically operated, the operation of the operation means by the player is accepted, so that the player suddenly wants to operate the operation means. Can also be used by people. Further, in addition to the automatic operation, manually operating the operation means may allow the player to easily capture the continuous hit effect and the like.

(6) The game table is characterized in that the game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made. For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

  Note that the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the embodiment and the modified examples, can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG. 358.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of reels 1002 that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel as shown in FIG. 358. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal lottery for winning combinations) for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning are won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined prize mode is selected. In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and the production means is a predetermined one. A launching device 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter the ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting the ball entering the winning opening 1016. When the detection unit 1018 detects a sphere, a payout unit 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022. And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when a game ball enters a winning opening and wins a prize. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 359 (a), "A banknote is inserted into the banknote slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and a lottery result is displayed on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired data about the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which a real machine such as a pachinko machine or the like is simulatedly executed for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  In the conventional game table, there is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the operation means. Further, in the conventional gaming table, depending on conditions such as time-up of the operation valid period of the operating means, even if the player does not operate the operating means, the same effect as when operating the operating means may be executed. there were. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means tends to be monotonous, and the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing, so that the player is started. There was a problem that it was easy to predict the content of the production, and it was easy to get tired of the production.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect that is executed based on the operation of the operation means is varied, and the effect execution timing is randomized, so that the player starts the effect. This makes it difficult to predict the content of and makes it possible to perform timeless presentations.

  The present invention according to the above embodiments is summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
A gaming machine provided with an operation means provided at least at a position operable by a player, and an effect means capable of at least executing at least one of a plurality of effects, wherein: At least one is a first effect, at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, the effect means, when the first condition is satisfied, At least the first effect can be executed, the effect means, if the second condition is satisfied, at least the second effect can be executed, the first effect is , At least different from the second effect, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player, the second condition is , The operation means is not operated by the player When the a condition which may be satisfied, amusement machine, characterized in that.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with at least one effect mode control means capable of executing switching control of a plurality of effect modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of effect modes is One production mode, at least one of the plurality of production modes is a second production mode, the first production, when the production mode is the first production mode, Is an effect that is not executed, the second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, the first effect mode, the operation means is automatic, A game machine characterized in that it is an effect mode that has not been operated, and the second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 2, wherein the rendering means is capable of performing at least operation promotion notification, and the rendering means performs the operation when the rendering mode is the first rendering mode. At least a promotion notification can be executed, and the performance means can execute at least the operation promotion notification when the performance mode is the second performance mode, and the operation promotion notification is A gaming table, which is a notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 2 or 3, wherein at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect, and the effect means is provided when a third condition is satisfied. , The third effect is at least executable, the third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, and the third condition is that the operating means is operated by the player. A gaming table, which is a condition that may be satisfied in the case of being satisfied.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine according to attachment 4, wherein the third effect is an effect that is executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode. Is a production executed when is the second production mode.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

<Other embodiment (embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display)>
Next, another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold icon) (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine or a spinner game such as a slot machine). Will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 360 to 365 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are not used in the description of the present embodiment. The symbols shown in 360 to FIG. 365 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 360 to 365 are the same as those of the above-described embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  In the present embodiment, another example will be described in which the display unit (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) performs a display related to the operation of the operation unit according to the operation of the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as another example, another example of the operation means image display for performing display related to the operation of the operation means by the same processing as the operation means image display processing described in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and a reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 are provided near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 for displaying is displayed, and a hold display is displayed, for example, at the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display is, for example, a hold icon PI. In addition, the hold icon PI in the present embodiment includes a default hold display (here, normal hold icon PI_D (for example, a circular icon)) that suggests a normal (default) hold, and a look-ahead hold display (pre-read notice effect). It includes a look-ahead hold icon PI_P (for example, an icon of the character “Hani”) that is one type). The operation means image display of the present embodiment covers at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and this display example will be described in detail below.

<Example A-1 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 361 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-1 in time series. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, a reserved display area 700 is provided in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, near the lower end of the center. The hold icon PI is displayed in the hold display area 700. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, normal hold icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 indicating that there are two special maps (for example, special map 1) being held, and a look-ahead notice for special maps (for example, special map 1) are held. The look-ahead hold icon PI_P indicating that there is one is displayed. In addition, in the following description, the case of displaying the number of holdings of special figure 1 will be described as an example, but the number of holdings of special figure 2 may be displayed, or the holding of special figures 1 and 2 can be displayed. The numbers may be displayed respectively.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  The timing shown in the same figure (b), one of the special figure 1 hold is digested and the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, and decoration is made in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The pattern has shown the state which started variable display. At this timing, the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. As a result, a hold icon PI_D1 in which the hold icon PI_D2 in FIG. 11A has moved to the left adjacent position and a look-ahead hold icon PI_P that has moved to the left adjacent position from the position shown in FIG. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C is the first operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed near the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in front of the decorative symbol). In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 in this example) for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image in which the scale of the meter is filled according to the elapsed time of the operation acceptance period) is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 and behind the prefetch hold icon PI_P. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by at least a part of the prefetching hold icon PI_P moved by the moving animation of the hold icon (a part of the hold icon PI is the first. By overlapping the elapsed time notification image TG1), at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult for the player to see. In this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered only with the prefetching hold icon PI_P, and is not covered with the normal hold icon PI_D1.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in a reduced display. In this example, the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image display in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Say. In this case as well, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (reduced display) is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (scale of the meter) is displayed. It is invisible or difficult to see.

  By doing so, a variety of effects can be achieved, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state immediately before the reception period ends, when the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 disappears. In this case as well, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the prefetching hold icon PI_P, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. There is. Note that at this timing, the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has disappeared, and the reduced display of the scale of the meter (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is indicated by the prefetch hold icon PI_P. Will not be covered.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7F, the chance button 136 is operated between the timing shown in FIG. 6D and the timing shown in FIG. 6E (during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136). Shows the closed state.

  By the operation of the chance button 136, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed small, for example, in the upper right part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 (reduced display of the decorative pattern), and the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are displayed. The notification image TG1 is erased, and the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the character display "It's hot after two rotations!" And the character image (customer) are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The effect displayed in the area) is executed.

  Further, in the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are continuously displayed.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is the state after (e) or (f) of the figure, the notice effect is finished, and again in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (for example, the state where the special reach is entered) is shown. In the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are continuously displayed. Further, in FIGS. 7C to 7G, the prefetching hold icon PI_P is executing the standby animation.

  In this example, the prefetch hold icon PI_P covers the vicinity of the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the end of the acceptance period of the operating means), but the prefetch hold icon PI_P is the first. It covers the vicinity of the right end of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the start point of the acceptance period of the operating means) and the center of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the middle point of the acceptance period of the operating means). This is also true for the following examples.

<Example A-2 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example A-2. In each of the examples of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 362 and subsequent to FIG. 365, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in front of the decorative symbol, The state where the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed is shown.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, a plurality of hold icons PI are displayed in the hold display area 700, and any one of the hold icons PI covers the first elapsed time notification image TG1. More specifically, three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one look-ahead hold icon PI_P are displayed, and only the read-ahead hold icon PI_P is part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (for example, in the operation acceptance period). The first elapsed time notification image, which covers the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicating the start time (only the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) A part of TG1 is invisible or difficult to be seen by the player.

  The timing shown in (a-1) of the same figure is such that the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the figure, that is, the first elapsed time notification. The state where the reduced display of the image TG1 is being executed is shown. At this timing, three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one look-ahead hold icon PI_P are displayed, and only the read-ahead hold icon PI_P is, for example, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (that is, reception of the operation means). Although it covers the period start point), the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter (filled portion)) is not covered by the prefetch pending icon PI_P (and the normal pending icons PI_D1 to PI_D3). In this example, the fourth (right end) hold icon PI is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, but the first to third hold icons PI (hold icons at the positions of the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3) are displayed. The read-ahead hold icon PI_P may be used. When the hold icon at the position of the normal hold icon PI_D1 is the readahead hold icon PI_P, the end point of the acceptance period of the operating means (the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the readahead hold icon PI_P, and the normal hold icon is displayed. When the hold icon at the position of PI_D2 or PI_D3 is the read-ahead hold icon PI_P, the point in the middle of the acceptance period of the operating means (the middle part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the read-ahead hold icon PI_P, but otherwise In the period of, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (scale of the meter (filled portion)) is not covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P.

  That is, in this example, a part of the reduced display (the scale of the meter (filled portion)) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch pending icon PI_P, but with the passage of time (in other periods), The reduced display of the elapsed time notification image TG1 of 1 is not covered by the prefetching hold icon PI_P and can be visually recognized by the player.

  By doing so, a variety of effects are possible, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to (the reduced display of) the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7B, the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, PI_P4 cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, that is, all hold icons PI have the first progress. The state where it overlaps with the time notification image TG1 is shown. In this example, the look-ahead hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 are used for the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the intermediate portion (operation) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Both the middle point of the acceptance period of the means) and the left end portion (the end point of the acceptance period of the operating means) are invisible or difficult to be seen by the player.

  The timing shown in (b-1) of the same figure gradually decreases from the timing shown in (b) of the same figure on the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. In this case, all of the plurality of read-ahead hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 overlap the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and even when the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed. Overlap with this. As a result, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times with and without being covered by the plurality of hold icons PI, and the player is notified of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (of Decrease display) can be made to be noticed more than once.

  Note that at least one of the plurality of read-ahead hold icons PI_P1 to PI_P4 may not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the plurality of hold icons PI are the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and none of them (all the hold icons PI) cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this case, the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the left end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Any of (at the end of the acceptance period of the operating means) is visible to the player.

  The timing shown in (c-1) of the figure is that the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Also in this case, since the plurality of hold icons PI do not cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

  In this example, the case where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed at a position overlapping only the prefetching hold icon PI_P has been described, but only the prefetching hold icon PI_P of this embodiment is displayed depending on the game state (effect). Only one of an overlapping position, a position overlapping a normal hold icon PI_D shown in Example A-3 described later, and a position not overlapping any of the hold icons PI shown in Example A-4 described below. , Or only two may be selected, or any two may be switched by the effect, or three may be switched by the effect.

<Example A-3 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 363 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-3, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps with any of the hold icons PI (the normal hold icon PI_D and the prefetch hold icon PI_P). It is an example displayed at the position.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows a state in which the three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and the one prefetch hold icon PI_P all cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this case, the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the left end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Any of (at the end of the acceptance period of the operating means) is invisible or difficult to see by the player.

  The timing shown in (a-1) of the same figure gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the same figure, as the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. All the hold icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and also overlap with the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As a result, the reduced display (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times with and without being covered by the plurality of hold icons PI, and the player is informed of the first elapsed time. It is possible to make the image TG1 (reduced display thereof) a plurality of times easier to be noticed.

  Further, the timing shown in (b) of the figure shows a state in which a plurality of hold icons PI (in this case, four prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, PI_P4) cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this example, the look-ahead hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, and PI_P4 are used for the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the intermediate portion (operation) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Both the middle point of the acceptance period of the means) and the left end portion (the end point of the acceptance period of the operating means) are invisible or difficult to be seen by the player. In addition to this, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part of the hold icon PI, and is not visible or difficult to be viewed by the player.

  The timing shown in (b-1) of the same figure gradually decreases from the timing shown in (b) of the same figure on the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. All the hold icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and also overlap with the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As a result, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times with and without being covered by the plurality of hold icons PI, and the player is notified of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (of Decrease display) can be made to be noticed more than once.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the plurality of hold icons PI are the normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and all of them cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this case, the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the left end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Any of (at the end of the acceptance period of the operating means) is invisible or difficult to see by the player.

  The timing shown in (c-1) of the figure is that the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Also in this case, the plurality of hold icons PI cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the plurality of hold icons PI and not covered. Is repeated multiple times.

<Example A-4 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-4, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 does not overlap any of the hold icons PI (normal hold icon PI_D and prefetch hold icon PI_P). It is an example displayed at the position.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, none of the three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and the one prefetch hold icon PI_P covers the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (Displayed at a position not overlapping the hold icon PI). In this case, the right end portion (the start point of the acceptance period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle point of the acceptance period of the operation means) and the left end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Any of (at the end of the acceptance period of the operation means) becomes visible to the player.

  The timing shown in (a-1) of the same figure gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the same figure, as the scale (painted portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. It shows a state in which the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Since all the hold icons PI do not overlap the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

  The same figure (b) and the same figure (b-1) in the figure (a) and the same figure (a-1) all the reservation icons PI are the pre-reading reservation icons PI_P (PI_P1-PI_P4) with example. Other than that, the other parts are the same as those in (a) and (a-1) in FIG.

  Further, FIGS. 7C and 7C show the case where all the holding icons PI are normal holding icons PI_D (PI_D1 to PI_D4) in FIGS. 2A and 1A. Since this is an example, and other than that is the same as in FIGS. 7A and 7A, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Example A-5 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 365 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example A-5, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a kind of hold display and a variable display corresponding to the special figure variation game (this example Then, it is a display example that overlaps with the variable icon CI).

  In this case, for example, the left end portion of the hold display area 700 is secured as the variation icon display area 702, and the variation icon CI indicating the variation is displayed in the variation icon display area 702. The variation icon CI covers a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicating the end point of the reception period). Although illustration is omitted, in this example, in the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 which is not covered by the change icon CI, when the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed, the reduction is performed. The display (filled portion) becomes visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, another holding icon PI (prefetching holding icon PI_P or normal holding icon PI_D) also covers a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but only the change icon CI has the first setting. The pre-reading hold icon PI_P or the normal hold icon PI_D may cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 and may not cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

<Other Embodiments (Embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display for animation)>
Next, another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with an animation pending display) (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) The rotating drum game machine) will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 366 to 369 are used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 366 to 369 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 366 to 369, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  In this embodiment, another example of the operation means image display for displaying the operation of the operation means will be described.

  FIG. 366 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and a reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 are provided near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. While displaying the first elapsed time notification image TG1 that displays, the hold icon PI is displayed, for example, at the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The type of the hold icon PI is the same as in the immediately above embodiment. In the operation means image display of the present embodiment, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and the animation of the hold icon PI covers the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The displayed area changes, and this display example will be described in detail below.

<Example B-1 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the operation means image display of Example B-1. The figure (a) is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, a reserved display area 700 is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, near the lower end of the center. The hold display area 700 is an area in which the hold icon PI is displayed as in the embodiment immediately above, and the left end portion is secured as a variable icon display area 702.

  In this example, three normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Then, the prefetch hold icon PI_P executes an animation (a hold icon increase animation) that is executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed.

  That is, at the timing shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 9A, the character “Hani” that is the look-ahead hold icon PI_P appears from the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the vicinity of the head is displayed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (filled portion)) is covered by the change icon CI at the left end, but the area other than the left end Is not covered by any of the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and is visible to the player.

  At the timing shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 9A, the character “Hani” moves further upward and the upper part of the upper body is displayed. At this timing, a part of the vicinity of the right end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (filled portion)) is covered with the prefetch hold icon PI_P (overlap). ), It is invisible or difficult for the player to see. Further, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continuously overlaps with the variation icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3 near the central portion.

  At the timing shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 10A, the character “Hani” moves further upward and the whole body is displayed. At this timing, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 covered (overlapped) by the prefetching hold icon PI_P has changed from the case of the middle diagram of FIG. Area is increasing). Further, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continuously overlaps with the variation icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3 near the central portion.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the increasing animation of the hold icon whose display mode changes with the passage of time (hold icon PI. Part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps), whereby at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to be recognized by the player. By doing so, a variety of effects can be achieved, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  It should be noted that FIG. 10A shows a case where all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (scale of the meter) is filled, but the first elapsed time notification image TG1 starts the decrease display. Then, the reduced display (filled-in portion) may be covered by the prefetching pending icon PI_P with the passage of time or may be visible to the player without being covered by the prefetching pending icon PI_P. Even when the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch reservation icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time is generated by executing the increase animation of the prefetch reservation icon PI_P. The area covered by the reduced display of the notification image TG1) changes over time. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 7A, the lower diagram of FIG. 9A is more likely to be displayed in the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time) than in the middle diagram of FIG. The area covered by the look-ahead hold icon PI_P in the reduced display of the notification image TG1) increases. This is the same in each example of this embodiment.

  By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to (the reduced display of) the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Note that, in this example, the case where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch reservation icon PI_P increases, but the prefetch reservation icon is displayed. The area covered by PI_P may increase or change so as to repeat decrease and increase.

  FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the prefetching hold icon PI_P shown in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the look-ahead hold icon PI_P, appears from the bottom of the decorative pattern display device 208, gradually moves upward, and after the whole is displayed, the effect image is displayed on the background and the effect image is displayed. It shows a case where an increase animation is displayed that erases and displays the entire prefetch pending icon PI_P.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the normal hold icons PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). When the number of the normal hold icons PI_D also increases, the hold icon increasing animation whose display mode changes may be executed. In this example, a circular normal hold icon PI appears from below the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect image is displayed on the background after the whole is displayed, and an increase animation of the hold icon that returns to the original circular image is executed. ing. In addition, during the increase animation of the normal hold icon PI_D (for example, at the timing of displaying an effect image), a part of the normal hold icon PI_D causes the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image TG1). The reduced display of TG1) may be covered, and in that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) normally covered by the hold icon PI_D changes. It may be one.

  Alternatively, when the variation icon CI is displayed, an increase animation of the variation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1), The area covered by the change icon CI may change.

<Example B-2 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 368 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example B-2 in time series. The figure (a) is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the standby animation of the prefetching hold icon PI_P, and the prefetching is performed with the lapse of time. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the hold icon PI_P changes.

  That is, in the figure (a), in the upper figure, the middle figure, and the lower figure, the standby animation of the prefetching pending icon PI_P is executed, and in each case, the prefetching pending icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap each other. However, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetching hold icon PI_P displayed in a different display mode depending on each timing. At the same time, the covered area is changing. Other than this, the description is omitted because it is the same as in Example B-1.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a standby animation of the prefetching hold icon PI_P shown in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani” that is the look-ahead hold icon PI_P rotates while walking, and an animation is executed in which the character changes from the front to the back (repeatedly) to the front. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the first to third display modes from the left of the character “Hani” in FIG. 6B are displayed. Due to the difference in this display mode, the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. The overlapping area with TG1 is different.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of an increase animation of the normal hold icons PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). In this embodiment as well, the normal hold icon PI_D may perform an increase animation of the hold icon when the number of holds increases. In this example, the circular normal hold icon PI is gradually deformed into a vertically elongated ellipse shape, and again. You are running an increasing animation of the hold icon that returns to the original circular image (and repeats). Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be covered by a part of the normal suspension icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal suspension icon PI_D. In that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

  Alternatively, when displaying the variation icon CI, a standby animation of the variation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image covered by the variation icon CI is displayed. The area of the decrease display of TG1) may be changed.

<Example B-3 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of Example B-3 in time series. The figure (a) is a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are examples of animation display of the hold icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the moving animation of the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and the prefetching is performed with the lapse of time. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the hold icon PI_P changes.

  That is, at the timing shown in the upper part of FIG. 7A, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon CI of the variation and three normal hold icons PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3) and 1 One look-ahead hold icon PI_P is displayed.

  The timing shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 7A shows that the one hold has been digested and the next variable game (variable display of decorative symbols) has started. At this timing, in front of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed, and the variable icon CI displayed in the upper diagram of FIG. , A downward (erase) animation that moves downward in the variable icon display area 702 is executed, and the first normal hold icon PI_D1 that has been exhausted moves to the variable icon display area 702 and the second normal hold icon PI_D2 A movement animation (digestion animation) in which the third normal hold icon PI_D3 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P move to the left by one is executed.

  Part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the moving animation of the prefetching hold icon PI_P.

  The timing shown in the lower part of FIG. 10A shows a state in which the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon CI indicating the change is displayed in the change icon display area 702, and the change icon CI in the hold display area 700 indicates 2 Two normal hold icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 and a look-ahead hold icon PI_P are displayed (each performing a standby animation).

  Part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetching hold icon PI_P having a display mode different from the middle view of FIG. The covered area is changing.

  FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of a moving animation of the prefetching hold icon PI_P shown in FIG. In this example, the character “Hani” that is the look-ahead hold icon PI_P rotates while walking, and an animation is executed in which the character changes from a substantially frontal direction to a substantially horizontal direction (these are repeated).

  FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of a moving (digesting) animation of the normal hold icon PI_D. In this example, the normal hold icon PI_D changes (erases) the normal hold icon corresponding to the released hold to a variable icon when the hold is released, as shown in FIG. Execute a moving animation that moves the display position of another hold icon. In this example, the circular normal hold icon PI is gradually deformed into a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and a movement animation is performed to move the display position while returning to the original circular image (repeating this).

  The first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be covered by a part of the normal suspension icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal suspension icon PI_D. In that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

  Alternatively, the standby animation of the variation icon CI may be executed at the timing shown in the upper part of FIG. 9A, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image covered by the standby animation) may be executed. The area of the decrease display of TG1) may be changed.

  Alternatively, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the decrease (erase) animation of the variation icon CI at the timing of the middle figure of FIG. May change.

<Other Embodiments (Embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with the hold display, and the hold display changes the display position according to the change in the number of holds)>
Next, a gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display, and the hold display changes the display position according to a change in the number of holds) A detailed description will be given of a ball game table such as the above and a spinning game table such as a slot machine. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 370 to 372 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are not used in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 370 to 372 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  In the present embodiment, another example of the operation means image display for displaying the operation of the operation means will be described.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an outline of the operation means image display of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and a reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 are provided near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. While displaying the first elapsed time notification image TG1 that displays, the hold icon PI is displayed, for example, at the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the operation means image display of the present embodiment, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and the display number of the hold icon PI changes (the display number of the hold icon PI changes). The area covered by the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes depending on the increase / decrease). This display example will be described in detail below.

<Example C-1 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 371 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the embodiment C-1 in time series, and here, the case of the priority variator of special FIG. 2 is shown as an example.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7A, the three normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 of FIG. 1 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Has been done. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (filled portion)) is covered with the change icon CI at the left end portion, and is changed to the prefetch hold icon PI_P near the right end portion. Covered and difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the central portion, the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 are not covered and are visible to the player.

  After the timing shown in the same figure (a), as shown in the same figure (b), when one game ball wins in the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu), the number of pending figures in the special figure 2 is one. To increase.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the reserved number display area 700 when the number of reserved pieces of the special figure 2 is increased by one.

  This embodiment is a priority variator of Toku-zu 2, and when the number of holdings of Toku-zu 2 (priority side) increases, the first hold to be consumed next becomes the holding of Toku-zu 2. The normal hold icon PI_D21 of special figure 2 (priority side) is displayed at the left end of the hold display area 700 (on the right of the variable icon display area 702). Accordingly, the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 of the special figure 1 (non-priority side) and the prefetch hold icon PI_P perform a save animation to save to the right in this example.

  As a result, the prefetching hold icon PI_P is moved to the right by one holding icon and overlaps with the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 as compared with the case of FIG. The overlapping area with the elapsed time notification image TG1 of 1 changes. That is, in FIG. 10A, the entire width of the look-ahead hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in FIG. The area of / 2 overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As described above, in this embodiment, the area where the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI (both overlap) changes (here, the area decreases) as the hold icon PI increases. .

  Further, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in the same figure (a), but is invisible or difficult to be seen by the player in the same figure (c). .

  The same figure (d)-(f) shows the same timing as that shown in the same figure (a)-(c), but two game balls in the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu). This is a display example when is won. The timing shown in FIG. 9D is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  After the timing shown in the same figure (d), as shown in the same figure (e), when two game balls are won in the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu), the special figure 2 has two reserved numbers. To increase.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows a state in which the normal hold icons PI_D21 and PI_D22 of special figure 2 are displayed.

  When the number of holdings of the special figure 2 (priority side) increases, and the normal holding icons PI_D21 and PI_D22 of the special figure 2 (priority side) are displayed at the left end of the holding display area 700 (next to the right of the variable icon display area 702), In the case of the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, and PI_D13 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P of the special figure 1 (non-priority side), a save animation is executed to save to the right side in this example.

  As a result, the prefetching hold icon PI_P is moved to the right by two holding icons as compared with the case of FIG. 11D, and the area where the prefetching hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap is changed. . That is, in (d) of the figure, the entire width of the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in (f) of the figure, the prefetch hold icon PI_P shows the first elapsed time. The notification image TG1 does not overlap with the notification image TG1, and there is no area where the notification image TG1 and the notification image TG1 overlap (the area in which both overlap) is reduced.

  Further, in the vicinity of the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, in the figure (d), it is invisible or difficult for the player to see, but in the figure (f), it is visible to the player. There is.

  By doing so, a variety of effects can be achieved, and it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  It should be noted that, although the figure shows a case where all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (scale of the meter) is filled, when the first elapsed time notification image TG1 starts decreasing display, The reduced display (filled portion) may be covered by the prefetching hold icon PI_P with the passage of time or may be visible to the player without being covered by the prefetching hold icon PI_P. Further, even when the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch reservation icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or first The reduced area of the elapsed time notification image TG1) changes the area covered. This is the same in each example of this embodiment.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the hold icon of special figure 1 and the hold icon of special figure 2 are displayed in one hold display area 700 has been described as an example, but the hold icon of special figure 1 and the hold of special figure 2 are held. The icons may be displayed in different hold display areas.

<Example C-2 of displaying operation means image>
FIG. 372 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the embodiment C-2 in time series, and here also shows the case of the priority variation machine of the special figure 2 as an example.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, only the prefetch hold icon PI_P of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (filled portion)) is not covered by the change icon CI and the look-ahead hold icon PI_P, and all of them are displayed to the player. It is visible.

  After the timing shown in the same figure (a), as shown in the same figure (b), when one game ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu), the special figure 2 (priority side) is suspended. The number increases by one.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7C, when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is increased by 1, the normal holding icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 is displayed at the left end portion of the holding number display area 700, and the special figure 1 (non-display) is displayed. The read-ahead hold icon PI_P (on the priority side) shows a state in which a save animation for saving to the right is executed in this example.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P is moved to the right by one hold icon as compared with the case of FIG. 9A, and overlaps with the vicinity of the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the overlap area of the prefetching hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes (in this case, increases).

  Further, the vicinity of the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in FIG. 11A, but is invisible or difficult to see in FIG. There is.

  As described above, the area where the hold icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may increase as the number of hold increases.

  (D) of the figure shows timings after the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and includes the change icon CI, the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 of the special figure 1, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P of the special figure 1. And are displayed. In this state, the variation icon CI and the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 do not overlap the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but the look-ahead hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1. There is.

  After the timing shown in the same figure (d), when one game ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (Den Chu) as shown in the same figure (e), the number of reservations of special figure 2 is one To increase.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows a state in which the normal hold icon PI_D21 of special figure 2 is displayed.

  When the number of the special hold 2 (priority side) is increased and the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special view 2 (priority side) is displayed at the left end of the hold display area 700 (on the right side of the variable icon display area 702), For the 1 (non-priority side) normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P, a save animation is executed to save to the right in this example.

  As a result, the prefetching hold icon PI_P is moved to the right by two holding icons as compared with the case of FIG. 11D, and the area where the prefetching hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap is changed. . That is, in FIG. 7D, the prefetching hold icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in FIG. 6F, the prefetching hold icon PI_P shows the first elapsed time notification image TG1. And the area where they overlap does not exist (the area where they overlap decreases).

  In this way, as the number of holdings increases, the area where the holding icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap increases ((a) to (c) in the same figure), and then continues in the game. The area where the hold icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be reduced ((d) to (f) in the figure) as the number of hold increases.

  Further, for example, in the case where the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is reduced by two from the state of FIG. 372 (d), and the prefetch holding icon PI_P is displayed on the right side of the change icon CI as shown in FIG. 372 (a). In addition, the area where the prefetch reservation icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be reduced as the number of reservations is decreased. In addition, the area where the prefetch hold icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may increase as the number of hold increases.

  As described above, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400) and the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, setting). An operation unit 137), and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is A second display (for example, a hold icon PI) capable of displaying at least a display, the first display is a display related to the operation means, and the second display is a display related to hold; When the first display is in a second state (for example, a state in which the second display overlaps the first display), the first state (for example, the second display in the first display) Display overlaps There is not a state) is a display visibility is at least lower than it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. In addition, a variety of effects are possible, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved and the visibility of the first display can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the first display may be a display in which the display mode can be changed from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means may be means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, which may increase the interest of the player and may cause the player to pay attention to the first display.

  In addition, the game table of the present invention (for example, Pachinko machine 100), the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), and the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137). And the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, a hold icon PI) is a means capable of displaying at least, the first display is a display related to the operation means, the second display is a display related to hold, and the second display is The display is a display that can be animated, and the first display is a second state (for example, a state in which the second display overlaps the first display). One state (eg , Visibility than state) in which the second display do not overlap the first display is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. In addition, a variety of effects are possible, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display. In addition, the visibility of the first display may be changed by the animation of the second display, so that the player can be focused on the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved and the visibility of the first display can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the first display may be a display in which the display mode can be changed from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the display means may be one in which the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine and is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, which may increase the interest of the player and may cause the player to pay attention to the first display.

  In addition, the game table of the present invention (for example, Pachinko machine 100), the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), and the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137). And the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, a hold icon PI) is a means capable of displaying at least, the first display is a display related to the operation means, the second display is a display related to hold, and the second display is The display is a display capable of moving the display position when there is a change in the number of holdings, and the first display is the second state (for example, the second display in the first display. Are overlapping Is a display having visibility that is at least lower than that in the first state (for example, a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display). .

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. In addition, a variety of effects are possible, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display. In addition, the visibility of the first display may be changed by moving the display position of the second display, and the player may be made to pay attention to the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved and the visibility of the first display can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the first display may be a display in which the display mode can be changed from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, various effects can be achieved, and the player may be able to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the display means may be one in which the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine and is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, various effects are possible, which may increase the interest of the player and may cause the player to pay attention to the first display.

  As described above, the respective examples of the three embodiments immediately above can be combined with other examples with respect to the respective configurations in the example. In the immediately preceding three embodiments, the hold display includes a default hold display (for example, a normal hold icon) and a readahead hold display (for example, a readahead hold icon).

  Further, the hold display includes a variable display (for example, a variable icon) corresponding to the special figure variation game.

  Further, "a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the first state" means "a display in which at least a part of the second display overlaps with at least a part of the first display". It is a thing.

  In addition, a part of the prefetch hold display is a display that overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the third case, and the default hold display is the first elapsed time in the third case. The display does not overlap the notification image, and the third case may be a case where the display means can display the default hold display and the prefetch hold display at the same time.

  Further, as the first display, in addition to the first elapsed time notification image, second, third ... Elapsed time notification image may be displayed, and the second display is displayed on each of these. They may overlap.

  The default hold display may be a display that does not overlap the first elapsed time notification image or a display that overlaps.

  Further, the display position of the first elapsed time notification image may be any of two or more positions, and a part of the hold display is a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the fourth case. In the fifth case, the hold display is a display that does not overlap the first elapsed time notification image, and the fourth case is the display position of the first elapsed time notification image. Is the first position, and the fifth case may be the case where the display position of the first elapsed time notification image is the second position.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display overlapping a portion including the start position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display overlapping a portion including the ending position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display overlapping a portion including a position between the start position and the end position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, a part of the hold display may be a display overlapping a part of the first operation means image.

  Further, the display means can display the hold animation by the hold display, and the display means displays a part of the hold display in the first time of the hold animation more than in the second time of the hold animation. The area that partially overlaps the first elapsed time notification image may be large.

  Further, at least one of the hold animations may be a standby animation. Also, at least one of the pending animations may be an increasing animation. Also, at least one of the pending animations may be a decreasing animation. Further, at least one of the holding animations may be a moving animation.

  Further, the second display may be a display that may not be displayed in animation. The second display may be a display in which at least one of the standby animation, the increase animation, the decrease animation, and the movement animation is performed, and at least one other than the one is not performed. Further, the second display may be a display in which the standby animation is not performed and the increase animation is performed.

  Also, in the hold animation period, the overlapping area may increase with time, or the overlapping area may decrease with time.

  Further, any one or more of the standby animation, the increase animation, the decrease animation, and the movement animation may overlap, or any one or more of them may not overlap.

  Further, in the case of the first number of holdings, the display means has a size of the area in which a part of the holding display overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image as compared with the case of the second number of holdings. It may be big.

  The first number of reservations may be smaller or larger than the second number of reservations.

  Further, the display means may be capable of performing display according to a change in the number of holdings during the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing display in accordance with the increase in the holding of the special figure 2 during the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the size of the overlapping area may be different between the case where the holding of special figure 2 is increased by 1 and the case where it is increased by 2 or more.

  Further, only specific displays in the hold animation (increase animation, standby animation, change animation, movement animation, decrease animation) may be overlapped.

  Further, the hold animation (increase animation, standby animation, change animation, movement animation, decrease animation) is composed of two or more displays, and at least one of the displays overlaps. Good.

  Also, only the first of the multiple displays (pending animation), the last only, any one or more other than the first, only one or more other than the last, only one or more other than the first and last overlap. It may be one that does.

  A button icon may be displayed as the hold icon. The button icon may also display the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, another hold icon may overlap the first elapsed time notification image of the button icon.

  Further, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 1 to the case where the hold is 0 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 2 to the case where the hold is 1 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 3 to the case where the hold is 2 may or may not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 4 to the case where the hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 5 to the case where the hold is 4 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the increasing animation from the case where the hold is 1 to the case where the hold is 2 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 2 to the case where the hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 3 to the case where the hold is 4 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the movement animation from the case where the hold is 4 to the case where the hold is 5 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the first elapsed time notification image may display a plurality of two or more.

  Further, the display means is not limited to the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image (display of the image in which the meter (filled portion) is gradually reduced (decreased)), and the increase display of the first elapsed time notification image ( A meter (filled portion) may gradually increase (display an image).

  Further, the hold icon may or may not overlap at least one of the first elapsed time notification image and the second elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the hold icon may overlap in the first elapsed time notification image, and the hold icon may not overlap in the second elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the first hold icon may overlap the first elapsed time notification image, and the second hold icon may overlap the second elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the plurality of hold icons can be displayed in a moving animation at the same time, and there may be a hold icon that overlaps the first elapsed time notification image before and after the move animation and a hold icon that does not overlap.

  Further, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap after the first elapsed time notification image is displayed, or the first elapsed time notification image may be overlapped after the hold icon is displayed. It may be displayed.

  Further, the hold animation may or may not overlap at least one of the start position, the end position, and the intermediate position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  Also, the hold animation may be performed simultaneously for two or more hold.

  Further, when two or more game balls are won at the starting opening substantially at the same time, the hold increase animation may be displayed for a plurality of hold icons at the same time, or only the hold increase animation may be displayed for the game balls won later. Good.

  Further, the second display may be a display in which the display position may not be changed when the number of holdings is changed. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 increases while the second display of the special figure 2 is being displayed, the display position of the second display of the special figure 2 being displayed may not be changed.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention has at least operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type, which is a gaming machine provided with at least executable display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400). Display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, the first type of display is a display related to the operating means, the first type of display. The display is configured to be displayable when the operation of the operation means is accepted, and the first type of display is the first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation). Means image BG ) Is included in the display, and the first type of display is a display including at least a second display (for example, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2). Is a display in which the mode can be changed from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time, and the second type of display is the third display (for example, shown in FIG. 82. A display including at least a part of the change icon CI), the second type of display is an effect display, and the third display is displayed with priority over the first display. Yes, the third display is to be displayed preferentially over the second display, and the third display is prioritized over the second display, whereby the second display The start position of the display is not displayed, The one type of display is displayed at a position that partially overlaps the second type of display, and the second type of display is prior to the first type of display by the display means. It is a game table characterized by being displayable in.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation unit. Further, it may be possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the hidden display mode. In addition, it may be possible to make the notification of the reception period difficult to see and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, it may be possible to focus more attention on the game by paying more attention to the display mode hidden by the player. Further, it may be possible to prevent the player's motivation from deteriorating due to the player overlooking the previously displayed effect display (second type display (variable icon CI)). In addition, a third display (variable icon) rather than the first display (a part of the first operation means image BG1 (image imitating a chance button)) and the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1). (Part of CI) is preferentially displayed to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that the operation acceptance period of the operation means is in effect, and particularly the start position of the second display (at the start of acceptance of the operation) is played. In order to make it invisible to the player, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means and concentrate on the game, and to determine whether or not the operation is necessary, which may improve the interest of the game. is there.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type of display and the second type of display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means.

  In addition, the game table (for example, pachinko machine 100) of the present invention is provided with at least operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation section 137) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type, which is a gaming machine provided with at least executable display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400). Display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, the first type of display is a display related to the operating means, the first type of display. The display is configured to be at least displayable when the operation of the operation means is accepted, and the first type of display is the first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG1). Operation of A display including at least a step image BG2), and the first type of display is a display including at least a second display (for example, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), The second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position in accordance with the passage of time, the second type of display is a third display (for example, It is a display including at least a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 82, the second type of display is a performance display, and the third display is displayed with priority over the first display. The third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the start position of the second display is the third display rather than the second display. By preferentially displaying the third display, Is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than when the display is not displayed, and the change of the display mode of the second display is that the third display is preferentially displayed over the second display. By doing so, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display, and the display of the first type is displayed at a position partially overlapping with the display of the second type. The display of the second type is at least displayable on the display means prior to the display of the first type.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation unit. Further, in the case where the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the acceptance period of the operating means by a decrease display from the start position, the start position of the second display is changed to the second position. Since the third display (effect display) is preferentially displayed over the display of, it becomes more difficult for the player to visually recognize it than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display. The change of the display mode toward the end position is made easier for the player to visually recognize than the third display by preferentially displaying the third display over the second display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be more prompted to operate the game means. In addition, it may be possible to focus more attention on the game by paying more attention to the display mode hidden by the player. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display form of the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change of the display form from the start position of the second display to the end position on the third display. In some cases, it is possible to allow the player to carefully watch the display means and concentrate on the game, and to determine the necessity of the operation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include a display imitating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to focus more attention on the game by paying more attention to the display mode hidden by the player.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a big hit notice.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to perform various displays. In addition, it may be possible to make the player pay more attention to the acceptance period of the operation means.

  Further, the display means may be one that does not display at least the first type of display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.

With such a configuration, by hiding the first display when the reception period ends, it may be possible to prevent confusion or misconception of the player that the reception period continues. is there. Further, if the first display continues after the acceptance period ends (continuation of determining whether or not the operation is necessary), there is no option that the player does not operate the operation means, which makes the game more interesting. Although there is a risk of lowering it, it may be possible to increase the choices of the player in the game by hiding the first display.
[Sixth Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100, a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) will be described. . The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has, for example, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 100 described in the first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 53 to 68, and therefore the description of the constituent elements will be omitted. Omit it. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 373 to 417 will be used only for the description of the sixth embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment will be described. In the description, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 373 to 417 are given priority.

  First, a configuration that is used in almost common among the configurations shown in the drawings used in the subsequent embodiments will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 373 (a) and 373 (g). In FIG. 373 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device that form a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55. 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the universal figure holding lamp 216 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the public figure holding lamp 216 are shown below the decorative pattern display device 208. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown above the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown above the special figure 2 display device 214, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 is shown on the general figure display device 210. Shown at the top. Further, the unlit portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are shown in white. , The illuminated part is shown in black. In addition, since a maximum of four general-use figures can be reserved in this embodiment, four LEDs of the general-purpose reservation lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 373 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing variable display and stop display of decorative symbols are assigned to the central portion of the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect display area 208d is enlarged and a predetermined effect is executed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in areas other than the central portion of the image display area, for example, in the lower right corner, as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for general figure, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. Is. An image representing "○" as the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1 while the special symbol 1 variation game is not operating. While the special figure 2 variation game is not operating, an image representing "△" as the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2. While the universal figure variation game is not operating, an image representing "◇" is displayed in the universal symbol fourth symbol display area t3 as the regular symbol fourth symbol. Further, during execution of the special figure variation game or during execution of the ordinary figure variation game, a white background image is displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 as the fourth symbol.

  An area surrounded by a square frame in the lower center of the effect display area 208d is a variable icon display area C in which a variable icon can be displayed. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area C when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variable icon in the variable icon display area C, it is possible to notify (advance the relevant variation) of the win / fail of the special figure variation game with a predetermined reliability. The frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area C). , May be always displayed, or may not be always displayed.

  A special figure 1 reserved icon display area A having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the variable icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. Further, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon allows notification (pre-reading notice) of whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game relating to the hold is valid with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. The plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from the right to the left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order becomes lower. In this example, only the special figure 1 reserved icon display area is displayed, but of course the special figure 2 reserved icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a special rectangular shape 2 reserved icon display area B having a vertically long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 hold icon display area B is not displayed when the special figure 2 is not held, and is displayed only when the special figure 2 is held, but it is always displayed. Good.

  In addition, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 373 (b)). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214 and the universal figure display device 210. Further, the variable display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 373 (f)).

  FIG. 373 (g) shows a state in which the button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes a display regarding the chance button 136 as the first type of display. There is a button display as the first display of the displays regarding the chance button 136. The button display may include an operation request image in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button image”) and a valid period for accepting button operation (hereinafter, may be referred to as “operation valid period”). At least one of a valid period image showing the rest of (Yes) and a display prompting other button operation is included. Further, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice of notification which is executed in association with the button display as the second display. The button effect is displayed by either one of a still image display and an animation display, or a combination thereof.

  The special figure variation game shown in each example of the present embodiment is executed by the same control operation as that described in the first embodiment. In the example of the present embodiment, the effect performed in the special figure variation game will be specifically described, and the control operation will also be referred to only when particularly necessary.

(Example 1)
The special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 373 to 377. First, an example of a flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 373 and 374. 373 (a) to 374 (h) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 373 (a) shows a state in which the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not operating, and the universal figure variation game is also not operating. The special figure 1 display device 212 is displaying the special symbol “Special figure F” in a stopped state. The special figure 2 display device 214 is stopping and displaying the special symbol "special figure d". The public figure display device 210 stops and displays the off-design “Public figure B”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the fourth symbol which indicates that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, and it is informed that the result of the determination of the previous special figure variation game is wrong. There is.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 informs that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that there is no special figure 2 hold. The universal figure holding lamp 216 informs that the universal figure is not held.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  373 (b) to (f) show the state where the special figure 1 variation game is started. The start order of the special figure 1 variation game is, in this embodiment, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display, and further the fourth symbol display for special figure 1 The fourth symbol of the area t1 starts the variable display (see FIG. 373 (b)), then the decrease animation of the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed (see FIG. 373 (c) to (e)), and then The variable display of the decorative pattern is started (see FIG. 373 (f)). The order of the start points of these operations may be changed.

  In the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 hold icon, the displayed special figure 1 hold icons start moving to the right all at once (see FIG. 373 (c)), and the special order 1 which has the first holding order. While the hold icon a1 crosses the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and enters the variable icon display area C, the remaining hold icons move to the position one right side from the original position and raise the hold order by one. To stop (see FIGS. 373 (c) to (e)). The icon image that has entered the variable icon display area C is referred to as a variable icon.

  FIG. 373 (g) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. The button display is displayed to display and the effective period image. The valid period image is displayed below the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. Although the player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 373 (g), at this stage, the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, so the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted.

  FIG. 373 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 373 (g) was started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 373 (i) shows a state in which the valid period during which the button operation is accepted has just passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the valid period image is somewhat shortened to the right.

  FIG. 373 (j) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility that the SP (super) reach effect may be developed. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image.

  FIG. 373 (k) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

  In FIG. 373 (l), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in a swinging fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  FIG. 373 (m) shows a state in which the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the change icon are not displayed during the SP reach production shown in FIGS. 373 (m) to 374 (h).

  FIG. 373 (n) to FIG. 374 (a) show a state in which the SP reach effect with a scene in which two samurai fight each other is being executed. 374 (b) to (d) is a continuation of the SP reach effect, in which the effect that one samurai has won is made, and there is a high possibility that the judgment result of the fluctuation is likely to win. are doing. Also, FIG. 374 (d) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the reduced-size symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 374 (e) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 374 (f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. It shows the state.

  FIG. 374 (g) shows a state in which the special design 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special design "special design A". In the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 of the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is inactive is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" indicating a hit as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 374 (h) shows a state in which a character string image of “probably strange jackpot” is displayed on almost the entire image display area to notify that the 15R special jackpot is won.

  374 (f ′) to (h ′) are the same as in FIG. 373 (l) when the reach effect of “decoration 6” is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Instead of the effects shown in FIGS. 374 (f) to 374 (h), the effects when the 15R jackpot is won are illustrated. FIG. 374 (f ′) continues from FIG. 374 (e). In FIG. 374 (f '), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. It shows the state.

  FIG. 374 (g ′) shows a state in which the “special drawing B” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" indicating a hit as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 374 (h ') shows a state in which a character string image of "big hit" is displayed on almost the entire image display area and it is notified that the 15R big hit is won.

  375 (a)-(b) exemplify the continuation of another SP reach effect continued from FIG. 374 (a), and an effect in which one samurai has lost is made, and it is determined whether or not the change has occurred. It gives advance notice that there is a high possibility that the results will be lost. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 1 hold icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 375 (a) to (c). Further, FIG. 375 (b) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" in the reduced-size symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 375 (c) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 375 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to their original positions in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. It shows the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the change icon is restarted, and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 375 (h). It

  FIG. 375 (e) shows a state where the special symbol 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special symbol “Special symbol F”. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" indicating a deviation as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIGS. 375 (f) to 375 (h) show the display of the erasing animation of the variable icon. In this example, after the special figure variation game ends, the display of the variation icon erasing animation is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display of the erasing animation of the variable icon may be executed at another timing. FIG. 375 (f) shows a state in which the variation icon starts moving downward from the variation icon display area C, and the lower third of the circular outline of the variation icon disappears outside the image display area. There is. FIG. 375 (g) shows a state in which the variation icon has moved further downward, and the variation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to the extent that the upper portion of the circular contour can be visually recognized slightly. FIG. 375 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon completely disappears from the variable icon display area C and the display of the variable icon deletion animation ends.

  Next, using FIG. 376 and FIG. 377, a series of display of a button operation animation (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button operation animation”) performed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a display unit. An example of the flow of the button effect and the SP reach effect will be described. 376 (a) to 377 (e) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 376 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 376 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o) is executed. In FIG. 376 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 374 (a) is executed. In the image by the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 376 (b), the image display area is divided into upper and lower parts by a substantially horizontal boundary line, and a character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 376 (b), the buttons are not displayed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the off state.

  FIGS. 376 (c) to 377 (d) show a series of button effects and a flow of SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation that is performed subsequent to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 376 (b). FIG. 376 (c) shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are displayed simultaneously on the front by the fade-in process, with the image by the SP reach effect as the background image. The button image and the effective period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. The chance button 136 may be in the light emitting state even outside the valid period for accepting the button operation. The emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the acceptance valid period.

  FIG. 376 (d) shows a button display in which a button image, an effective period image below the button image, and an image of a character string of “long press” are displayed above the button image in the button effect. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is housed in the circular opening and protrudes upward by a predetermined distance. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. For example, the display is gradually shortened in the right direction. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge (meter) image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation that reduces the length of the gauge. . The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes 0 (zero). The image of the button display related to these button effects has a transparency of 0 (zero) and is set to a display priority higher than the display priority of the background image in which the SP reach effect is being executed. Therefore, the image behind the button display image related to the button effect is hidden and invisible. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 376 (d), but at this stage, the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, so the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (shown in white in the drawing).

  FIG. 376 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 376 (d) was started. As a first button mode, the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing) on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface. The button display related to the button effect is changed in display mode such that a portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the display mode of displaying the button image is changed after the emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed. However, the display mode of the button image may be changed at the same time, or the display mode of the button image may be changed. The change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be earlier.

  FIG. 376 (f) shows a state in which the valid period during which the button operation has been accepted has passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is somewhat shortened to the right. The player puts his / her hand on the chance button 136 so as to cover the depression surface of the chance button 136 and depresses the chance button 136. The emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode, and only the outer peripheral portion of the depression surface when not pressed. Has changed from the state of the first button mode in which the button is emitting light to the state in which the entire button is emitting light (illustrated in black in the drawing).

  When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button operation animation changes the display mode of the button image and the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect. However, immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed, only the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes, and the button operation animation display does not change immediately. In FIG. 376 (f), the display mode in which only the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state is maintained. Also, the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect has not changed. In this example, the display mode of the button image of the button operation animation and the display mode of the background image are changed after the emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed. The change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 and the change of the display mode of the button operation animation button image and the background image may be the same, and the change of the display mode of the button operation animation button image and the background image may be displayed. The emission mode of the chance button 136 may be changed after the start.

  376 (g) to 377 (d), the player continues to press the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the "long press" operation (the operation of continuously pressing the chance button 136) in the button effect. The display example of the button operation animation in the state is shown. The button image in FIG. 376 (g) is displayed in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and the emission brightness gradually increases from the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface emits light. ing. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is somewhat depressed in the circular opening. Further, the valid period for accepting the button operation has further elapsed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image produced by the SP reach effect in FIG. 376 (g), the horizontal boundary gradually moves downward and the upper display area gradually expands downward, while the lower display area gradually decreases downward. It is displayed in a display mode that is gradually changed.

  The button images of the button operation animations shown in FIGS. 376 (h) to 377 (a) are displayed in a display mode in which the emission brightness of the entire button is the maximum brightness (shown in black in the drawing). . Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. In addition, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-shaped portion is further shortened to the right as the valid period during which the button operation is accepted elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation in FIGS. 376 (h) to 377 (a), the horizontal boundary line gradually moves downward and the upper display area further expands downward. On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode that further decreases downward. The chance button 136 maintains a state in which the entire button emits light. In FIG. 377 (a), the state in which the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely expanded to the lower side and the lower display area disappears is displayed even though the valid period for accepting button operation remains. There is.

  As described above, the button display as the first display in the button operation animation is the button image in the display mode in which the button as the first image is not pressed as shown in FIG. 376 (f), and FIG. 376 (g). The button image in the display mode in which the button as the second image is slightly depressed and the color of the button is changed, and the button as the third image as shown in FIG. 376 (h) are completely When the chance button 136 is pressed and held for a long time, the button image is changed from the first image to the second image to the third image. It is displayed in the display mode.

  In this example, after the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image in the button operation animation is changed so that the background image of the SP reach effect is changed. However, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image and the background image are changed. The change may start. Further, the change of the button image or the background image may be started immediately after pressing the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 377 (b), when the chance button 136 is pressed for a predetermined time, the button operation animation shifts to the next effect even during the valid reception period. In this case, the button operation animation is displayed by deleting the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image and displaying the same as at the end of the reception effective period, informing that the next production is to be performed. The chance button 136 that the player continues to press is in a non-luminous state.

  FIG. 377 (c) illustrates a state in which the button display related to the button effect is hidden after the valid period for accepting the button operation ends in the button operation animation. The button display related to the button effect may be hidden at the same time when the valid reception period ends. Further, the button image and the effective period image may be erased at the same time, or one image may be erased before the other image.

  In FIG. 377 (d), on condition that a series of button images are displayed, the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely downward as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. Display the enlarged image. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  377 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (c), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 374 (e), the state shown in FIG. 374 (f) to (h) or FIG. An effect similar to that shown in (h ') is executed.

  As described above, the button display as the first display regarding the chance button 136 according to the present embodiment is, for example, a button in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down when the chance button 136 is pressed (first case). The button image is changed from the image (first image) to the button color in which the button color is changed, and the button image is changed from the image in the display mode (second image). Image) of the first change. Also, the chance button 136 is a second change button mode in which, for example, when a chance button 136 is pressed, the light emission mode (first mode) changes to another light emission mode (second mode). Is feasible. According to the present embodiment, since the display regarding the chance button 136 displays the animation of the button effect when the chance button 136 is pressed down, the player can easily recognize that the chance button 136 is pressed down. You may be able to. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the mode (emission mode, etc.) of the chance button 136 is changed, and thus it may be possible to prompt the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display the button display regarding the chance button 136 during the operation valid period (first period) in which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be accepted. By doing so, since the button display is displayed during the acceptance period for pressing the chance button 136, it may be possible to prompt the operator to press the chance button 136.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the button display is performed but the chance button 136 is not pressed (the third case), it is possible to display a display including a button image in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down. is there. According to the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the display of the button display, the button image in the display mode in which the button is not pressed is displayed, so that the pressing of the chance end 136 can be prompted. There is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect display (second display) displayed after pressing the chance button 136, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the button is completely pressed down and the color of the button further changes. It is displayed after the button image (third image) is displayed. By doing so, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect display that is displayed after pressing can be displayed, and thus it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the chance button 136 has been pressed.

(Example 2)
A special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 378. 378 (a) to 378 (d) are button operations in the case where the player has stopped pressing the chance button 136 midway, although the "long press" operation is requested in the button effect. The display example of animation is shown. FIG. 378 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 376 (i). The player continues to press the chance button 136, and in the background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation, the horizontal boundary line gradually moves downward and the upper display area expands downward. On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode that decreases downward.

  FIG. 378 (b) shows a state immediately after the player releases the chance button 136 and stops pressing the button. When the player releases the button, the emission mode of the chance button 136 first changes from a state in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light. On the other hand, the button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the same state as when the button is pressed, the entire button is displayed with the highest brightness, and the chance button is displayed in a display mode in which it is completely pressed into the circular opening. . The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation is still while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 378 (a).

  FIG. 378 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 maintains the light emission mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light but the emission brightness thereof gradually decreases. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed up somewhat from within the circular opening. Further, the valid period for accepting the button operation has further elapsed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation is still while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 378 (a).

  FIG. 378 (d) shows a state in which the chance button 136 maintains the light emitting mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light. In the button image of the button operation animation, the display mode is changed so that only the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface emits light. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed up from inside the circular opening. Further, the valid period for accepting the button operation has further elapsed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation is still while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 378 (a).

  In this way, the background image is stopped in the display of the button operation animation when the player stops pressing the chance button 136 on the way in spite of the request for the “long press” operation. In this case, the button display is moved in the opposite manner to the movement shown in FIGS. 376 (f) to (h). In other words, when the chance button 136 stops being pressed, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the third image changes to the first image through the second image. By doing so, it may be possible to urge the player to restart long pressing of the chance button 136. It should be noted that the button operation animation may be an animation that performs an operation different from the operation of FIGS. 376 (f) to (h) when the chance button 136 is pressed down midway and does not execute the animation. (That is, the third image is changed to the first image without passing through the second image).

(Example 3)
An example of animation when the button image used in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment appears in the image display area will be described with reference to FIG. 379. In FIG. 379 (a), a small effect image is first displayed in the image display area, the effect image is gradually enlarged, and then the button image is displayed in the center in front of the effect image, and the effective period is below the effect image. The state where an image is displayed is shown. After that, the effect image disappears and the button effect of the button image and the effective period image is started. In this way, an animation in which an image different from the button image (for example, an effect image) is first displayed and then the button image is displayed may be performed. The effective period image may be displayed after the effect image disappears.

  FIG. 379 (b) is similar to the example of the first embodiment and shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are simultaneously displayed by the fade-in process.

  In FIG. 379 (c), first, from the center of the left edge of the image display area indicated by a dashed rectangle to the right side of the button image with a predetermined transmissivity, simultaneously from the center of the right edge of the image display area. The left side of the button image is shown with a predetermined transmittance. Next, the button image on the left moves horizontally to the right, the button image on the right moves horizontally to the left, and the two overlap, almost at the center of the screen, and finally match to form one button image. Stop. Next, the reduction rate of the button image becomes zero, and then the effective period image is displayed below the button image. The predetermined transmittance of the button image may be 0%, may be other than 0%, may be larger than 0% and smaller than 100%, or may be 100%. The valid period images may be displayed below the left and right button images, respectively.

  The animation for erasing the button image and the effective period image may be a rewinding effect in which the animation at the time of appearance is reversed. Also, a deletion animation different from the animation at the time of appearance may be performed. Further, when the button is erased, the animation may not be displayed and the button may be erased.

(Example 4)
An example of the animation of the button image used in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 shows an example of a button display animation when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  FIG. 380 (a) shows an animation similar to the example of the first embodiment. First, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which only the portion corresponding to the outer periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. In addition, a state in which the valid period for accepting the button operation has passed for a while and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is somewhat shortened to the right is shown.

  Next, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and the emission brightness gradually increases from the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface emits light. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed into the circular opening. The button operation acceptance valid period has further elapsed, and the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction.

  Then, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the emission brightness of the entire button is the highest. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses.

  In the animation shown in FIG. 380 (b), the point that the button image is displayed in the display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed into the circular opening as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses is shown in FIG. 380 ( It is the same as that shown in a). On the other hand, in the animation shown in FIG. 380 (b), the display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressing surface is lit is maintained even after the acceptance period of the button operation has passed. Further, the character image of "push" is displayed in the center of the pressing surface in a display mode in which the brightness gradually increases.

  The animation shown in FIG. 380 (c) has the same display mode as the display mode of the button image shown in FIG. 380 (a), and the size of the button image gradually decreases as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. It has a feature in the display mode. The size of the display of the button image becomes smaller as the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image becomes shorter, and the length of the rod-shaped portion becomes zero, and disappears when the operation effective period is lost. After that, the effective period image also disappears. The display of the effective period image may be reduced together with the reduction in the display of the button image.

  The animation shown in FIG. 380 (d) has the same display mode as that of the button image shown in FIG. 380 (a), and the size of the button image gradually increases as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. It has a feature in the display mode. The size of the display of the button image increases as the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image becomes shorter, and the display of the effective period image expands together with the increase in the display of the button image. The button image and the valid period image disappear with the operation valid period disappearing. Note that only the button image may be enlarged, and the effective period image may be displayed in a non-enlarged display mode.

  380 (d ') has the same display mode of the button display as in FIG. 380 (d), and in the case where the effective period image is expanded together with the expansion of the button image and is out of the image display area, auxiliary It is characterized in that the effective period image is further displayed. The auxiliary effective period image is displayed in a display mode that keeps a certain size in the image display area and notifies the remaining period of the operation effective period. Note that the auxiliary effective period image may be displayed even when the main effective period image becomes difficult to see (for example, reduction, movement of movable means, light emission by decoration means such as a light guide plate).

  FIG. 380 (d ″) exemplifies, as the auxiliary effective period image shown in FIG. 380 (d ′), a character image indicating the remaining time of the button operation reception effective period (in this example, “2 seconds left”). ) Is displayed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described first to fourth embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 373 to 380 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136),

Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136),

  The first display (for example, a button display including a button image simulating the chance button 136) of the first type of display is a first image (for example, a button image in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down). (For example, FIG. 376 (f))),

  The first display is a display including at least a second image (for example, a button image (for example, FIG. 376 (g)) in a display mode in which the button is slightly depressed and the color of the button is changed). ,

  The first display is a display including at least a third image (for example, a button image in which the button is completely pressed down and the color of the button is further changed (for example, FIG. 376 (h))),

  The first display is a display including at least a first change in the first case,

  The first change is to change from the first image through the second image to the third image,

The first case is a case where the operation unit is operated (for example, the chance button 136 is pressed).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display relating to the operating means is displayed as an animation when an operation is performed, so that it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a characteristic display. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the operating means is being operated.

  The first display may be a display composed of only the first image, the second image, and the third image. Alternatively, the first display may be a display composed of a plurality of images including the first image, the second image, and the third image.

  Further, "changing from the first image to the third image through the second image" means an animation in which the first image, the second image, and the third image change continuously in this order. May be shown. It should be noted that one (for example, the fourth image) or a plurality of images (for example, the fourth image, the fifth image ...) May be included between the first image and the second image, and are included. It does not have to be. In addition, one (for example, the fourth image) or a plurality of images (for example, the fourth image, the fifth image, ...) May be included between the second image and the third image. It does not have to be.

Further, “when the operation means is operated” may be a case where the operation means is operated, or a case where the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means. However, the operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detection unit, and the detection may be transmitted to the sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) as information (command). It may be a case where the sub-control unit receives information (command) that the unit has been operated. In addition, "the first display is a display including at least the first change in the first case" means "the first display is a display in which at least the first change can be executed in the first case". It may be.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the operating means is a means capable of performing at least the first mode (for example, a button mode for emitting light (FIG. 376 (e)),

  At least a part of the operating means is a means capable of performing at least a second mode (for example, a button mode (FIG. 376 (f)) that emits light different from the first mode,

  At least a part of the operating means is a means capable of at least executing the second change in the first case,

The second change is at least changing from the first aspect to the second aspect,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the operation means is operated, the mode of the operation means (e.g., light emission mode) is changed, so that the operation of the operation means can be prompted in some cases.

Here, the first mode may be the first light emission mode. The second mode may be the second light emission mode. The light emitting mode may indicate a light emitting pattern (for example, a color change of the light emitting means or a change of the light emitting means to be turned on) of the light emitting means (for example, LED) provided in the operating means. Further, the first aspect may be the first display aspect. The second aspect may be the second display aspect. For example, in the display by the display means or the display by lighting the light emitting means, when the light emitting means is lit in red, "PUSH" is displayed on the display means, and when the light emitting means is lit in blue, "heat" is displayed on the display means. It may be one that is done. Further, the first aspect may be the first shape. Moreover, the second aspect may be a second shape. For example, the operation means may be a “pop-out button” and a “normal button”.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second case,

  The second case is a case during the period of the first period,

The first period is a period during which at least the operation of the operating means can be accepted (for example, an operation valid period),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is displayed at least during the reception period of the operating means, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operating means.

Note that the first display may be displayed before (or just before) the start of the first period. Moreover, the first display may be displayed after (or immediately after) the first period ends.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display including the first image (for example, a button image in a display mode in which the button is not pressed down (for example, FIG. 376 (f))) in the third case. Yes,

  The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means,

The third case is a case where the operation means is not operated,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when the operation means is not operated during the display of the first display, the display including the first image is displayed, so that the operation of the operation means can be prompted. There is.

  The “display including the first image” may be a display (for example, a still image) composed of only the first image, or one or a plurality of displays including the first image. It may be a display (animation) constituted by. The third case may be "a case where the first display is displayed on the display means and a case where the operation means is not operated". In addition, "when the first display is displayed on the display means" may be "through a period during which the first display is displayed on the display means". "When the first display is displayed on the display means".

Further, “when the operation means is not operated” may be a case where the operation means is not operated, or a case where the operation of the operation means is not detected by the detection means. It may be the case where the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means, and the detected information is not transmitted as information (command) to the sub-control means. This may be the case where the sub-control unit does not receive the information (command) indicating that the operation has been performed. Note that at least the second image may not be displayed when the operation unit is not operated. Note that at least the third image may not be displayed when the operation means is not operated.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display (FIG. 377 (d)) displayed after pressing the chance button 136) of the first type of display,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case,

The second display is a display that is displayed after the third image is displayed,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display means can display at least the second display when the operating means is operated, so that the player can easily recognize that the operating means has been operated. May be possible. The second display may be a display different from the first display, and the second display may be a display included in the first display.

  Further, the first image and the third image may be images simulating the mode of the operating means. The first image is an image imitating the first aspect of the operating means. The third image is an image imitating the second aspect of the operating means. The first change is a change imitating the second change. By doing so, the player may be able to focus on the display means. Further, it may be possible to prompt the user to operate the operation means.

  The first change may be an animation display including the first image, the second image, and the third image.

  Further, the operation means can execute at least the first aspect when the operation means is not operated. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the player is not operating.

  Further, the second display may be a display that is displayed after at least a part of the first display is at least erased. The second display may be a display according to the operation of the operation means.

Further, the operation means can execute the third aspect when it is outside the acceptance period of the operation means. Note that the third mode may be the third light emission mode. The third light-emission mode may include that the light-emission means is turned off, or the like in which the brightness or the light-emission color is different. The third aspect may be the third display aspect or the third shape.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the variation or prefetch notice display, a hold icon, a variation icon, a fourth design, a decorative design, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system. Display, display related to customization in user mode, display of playing method, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.

(Example 5)
An example of the flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying the button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 384. 381 (a) to 382 (b) and FIGS. 383 (a) to 384 (h), the special figure variation game is shown in time sequence in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 381 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 381 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o) is displayed with two samurai fighting.

  381 (b) to 382 (a) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation that is performed subsequently to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 381 (a). In FIG. 381 (b), the button operation animation is started, and an image of a character string “Long press to accumulate power!” Is displayed as a button display prompting the button operation. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 381 (b), the valid period for accepting button operation has not yet started, so the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the off state.

  In FIG. 381 (c), as a button display that prompts a button operation, the character string image is switched from "long press to accumulate power!" To the image of the character string "Good" and the button image is displayed. , The effective period image is displayed below it.

  In FIG. 381 (d), the character string image is switched from "Good" to "Long press" as a button display prompting a button operation. Further, the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 381 (d). However, at this stage, the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started yet, so the chance Even if the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 381 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permitted state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 381 (b) was started. The chance button 136 has a first button mode in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed after the display mode of the button image is changed, but these may be simultaneously, or the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed first. The change in the display mode of the button image may be later.

  In FIG. 381 (f), the player presses the chance button 136 by placing his / her hand so as to cover the pressed surface of the chance button 136, and the emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode. The state has changed from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light to the state in which the entire button emits light.

  381 (f) to 381 (j) show a state in which the player continues to press the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the "long press" operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIGS. 381 (f) to 381 (j), an image in which a small flame generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grows to become a large flame behind the samurai is displayed. In FIG. 381 (f), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 381 (g), an image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai grow up to the back of the samurai and become larger. In FIGS. 381 (h) to 381 (j), images are displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows behind the samurai to a size so as to wrap the entire samurai's body.

  FIG. 381 (i) shows a state immediately before the end of the valid period for accepting button operation. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 381 (j) shows a state in which the chance button 136 that the player continues to press is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 382 (a) shows a state in which the cut-in effect display of the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is being executed as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  382 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIGS. 374 (b) to (e), 374 (f) to (h) or 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  383 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 381 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect display shown in FIG. 381 (b). The button operation acceptance permission state that has passed is shown. The chance button 136 has a first button mode in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 383 (b) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hit so that the player clasps his hand and hits the pressed surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 383 (b), the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 383 (c) shows a state immediately after the hand clenched for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 383 (c) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained.

  FIG. 383 (d) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 383 (d), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai have disappeared. The timing of erasing the flame image may be such that the flame image may be erased after the player's hand is released from the chance button 136, that is, after the button operation is no longer detected by the detection means. You may.

  FIG. 383 (e) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 383 (e) is the same effect as shown in FIG. 383 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 384 (a) shows a state immediately after the hand clenched for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 384 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained.

  FIG. 384 (b) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 384 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai have disappeared.

  FIG. 384 (c) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 384 (c) is the same effect as shown in FIG. 383 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  When the player keeps hitting the buttons repeatedly, the states shown in FIGS. 384 (a) to 384 (c) are repeated. FIG. 384 (d) shows a state in which the player's hand hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136 when the remaining valid operation period is short.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 384 (d) is the same effect as that shown in FIG. 383 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 384 (e) shows the state immediately after the end of the valid reception period of the button operation. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period has ended. The button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 384 (e), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained.

  FIG. 384 (f) shows a state in which the chance button 136 being hit by the player is changed to a non-light emitting state. The valid period image of the button operation animation maintains the display of the notification that the valid period of the operation ends. The button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 384 (f), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 384 (g) shows the same cut-in effect as that shown in FIG. 382 (a) as a second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation, which is a display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded. The display shows the executed state. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  384 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIGS. 374 (b) to 374 (e), 374 (f) to (h) or 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be long-pressed (first operation) and repeated hits (second operation), and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a button prompting long-pressing ( A first display) and a cut-in display (second display) can be displayed, and when the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting a long press and a long press of the chance button 136 is performed. The cut-in display can be displayed, and the same cut-in display can be displayed even when the button display prompting a long press is displayed and the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. According to the present embodiment, even when a continuous hit, which is an operation different from the long press, is performed, the same display as the result of the long press is displayed, so that the player who is unfamiliar with the operation of the chance button 136 can also operate it. It may be able to improve motivation.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a button prompting the operator to press and hold the chance button 136 for a long time while the operation is valid (the third case), which is a period during which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be accepted. By doing so, since the button display prompting the long press is displayed at least during the valid reception period of pressing the chance button 136, it may be possible to prompt the press of the chance button 136.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a display (third display) regarding repeated hits of the chance button 136. By doing so, it may be possible to prompt the user to press the chance button 136.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the button display (first display) prompting the long press (first operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed and the chance button 136 is not pressed, the cut-in display (first display) is displayed. Second display) is not displayed. By doing so, the cut-in display is not displayed when the chance button 136 is not pressed. Therefore, when the cut-in display is performed by the button operation, it is possible to prompt the press of the chance button 136. There is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the long press (first operation) of the chance button 136 and the continuous hit (second operation) are different operations. Therefore, even when a continuous hit different from the long press is performed, it is the same as the result of the long press. Since the display is performed, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. Further, the display when the button is operated is the same whether the player presses the button for a long time or repeatedly, so that the player who is unfamiliar with the operation of the chance button 136 can improve the motivation for the operation. There are cases.

  Note that the cut-in display may not be displayed when the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing of FIG. 384 (e). Also, the cut-in display may be performed when it is within a predetermined time (for example, within a period in which the flame display mode is displayed) from the pressing of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 384 (e). The cut-in display may not be performed when it is outside the predetermined period (for example, when the flame display mode is the non-display period).

(Example 6)
An example of the flow of a series of button effect and SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 385 to 386. 385 (a) to 386 (c), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  385 (a) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 381 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed after the button effect display shown in FIG. 381 (b) has started. The button operation acceptance permission state that has passed is shown. The chance button 136 has a first button mode in which the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In the button display related to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 385 (b) shows a state in which the player starts a continuous hit so that the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 385 (c) shows a state immediately after the hand clenched for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (c) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained.

  FIG. 385 (d) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (d) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained. As described above, in this example, the image of the flame that increases in response to the button operation is maintained in the state before the player's hand leaves the chance button 136 and before it leaves.

  FIG. 385 (e) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (e), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at the feet of the samurai grow up to the waist of the samurai and become larger.

  FIG. 385 (f) shows a state immediately after the hand clenched for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (f), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 385 (g) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 385 (g), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 385 (h) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (h), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai has grown further to the chest of the samurai and has grown.

  The image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame gradually grows behind the samurai in the SP reach production as the player continues to press the buttons repeatedly. FIG. 385 (i) shows a state in which the player's hand hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136 when the remaining valid operation period is short. In the SP reach effect in FIG. 385 (i), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai. The display mode of the flame shown in FIG. 385 (i) is the maximum size of the flame image. The size of the flame image is maximized when either the long press time reaches 6 seconds or the number of repeated hits reaches 20, whichever is satisfied.

  FIG. 385 (j) shows the state immediately after the end of the valid period for accepting button operation. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period has ended. The button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 385 (j), the display mode in which the player has grown to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is displayed and the image of the flame is displayed.

  FIG. 386 (a) shows a state in which the chance button 136 being hit by the player is changed to a non-light emitting state. The valid period image of the button operation animation maintains the display of the notification that the valid period of the operation ends. The button image is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 386 (a), the display mode in which the player has grown to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained and the image of the flame is displayed.

  FIG. 386 (b) shows the same cut-in effect as that shown in FIG. 382 (a) as the second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation, which is the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded. The display shows the executed state. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  386 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIGS. 374 (b) to (e), 374 (f) to (h) or 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be long-pressed (first operation) and repeated hits (second operation), and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a button prompting long-pressing ( A first display) and a cut-in display (second display) can be displayed, and when the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting a long press and a long press of the chance button 136 is performed. The cut-in display can be displayed, and the same cut-in display can be displayed even when the button display prompting a long press is displayed and the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. According to the present embodiment, even when a continuous hit, which is an operation different from the long press, is performed, the same display as the result of the long press is displayed, so that the player who is unfamiliar with the operation of the chance button 136 can also operate it. It may be able to improve motivation.

  Note that the flame image may change in correspondence with the long-pressed time or the number of repeated hits. In addition, when the long-pressed time or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined time or the maximum number of times, it is displayed in a finally changing display mode (for example, the maximum size of the flame image) determined in advance by the effect lottery. You may not be allowed to. In addition, even if the long-pressed time or the number of continuous hits is less than the predetermined time or the maximum number of times, the display mode that finally changes in advance and is determined in advance by the effect lottery after the acceptance period of the operation means is finished (for example, The maximum size of the image of the flame) may be displayed.

  Note that when the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing of FIG. 385 (j), the cut-in display may or may not be displayed.

(Example 7)
An example of the flow of a series of button effect and SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 387. 387 (a) to 387 (e), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 387 (a) shows a state in which the player starts a continuous hit so that the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 387 (a), the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 387 (b) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect shown in FIG. 387 (b) is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai are maintained. As described above, in this example, the image of the flame that increases in response to the button operation is maintained in the state before the player's hand leaves the chance button 136 and before it leaves.

  FIG. 387 (c) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and hits the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the second button mode from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is illuminated when the button is not pressed to the state in which the entire button is illuminated. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 387 (c), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai grow up to the waist of the samurai and become larger.

  FIG. 387 (d) shows a state immediately after the hand clenched for repeated hits is released from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed, as the first button mode. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in a display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pressed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 387 (d), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 387 (e) shows a state in which the hand clenched for repeated hits is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed so that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the outside of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state. In addition, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. Instead of the character string image of "long press", the character string image of "continuous hit" is displayed. In the present embodiment, when the number of button operation detections reaches a specified number (for example, 5 times) within a certain period (for example, 2 seconds), the character string of “long press” is displayed instead of “continuous hit”. In some cases, the interest of the game can be improved by realizing the game that suits the taste of the player. In addition, the display changed from the character string of "long press" does not have to be "continuous hit", and a display corresponding to other operations including continuous hit (for example, "press button!" ! ”) Or the like.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 387 (e), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

(Example 8)
A specific example of the flow of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 390.

  FIG. 388 (a) shows a timing chart (No. 1) regarding the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" is a state in which the image is still, and the level "moving image" is a state in which the image changes with the passage of time. The period (i) is a period from the non-pressed state of the chance button 136 to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by a time lag from sensor detection to command reception, for example. In the period (i), the button operation animation image is in a static state. In a period (ii) subsequent to the period (i), the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state and a predetermined delay time elapses, and then the chance button 136 is returned to the non-pressed state again and the predetermined time elapses. Until. A period (iii) following the period (ii) is a period from the non-pressed state of the chance button 136 to the pressed state until a predetermined delay time elapses. A period (iv) subsequent to the period (iii) is a period from the time when the chance button 136 is pressed down again until a predetermined delay time elapses until a predetermined time elapses.

  FIG. 388 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation in each period of FIG. 388 (a). As shown in (i), in the button operation animation of period (i), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation of the period (ii), a moving image in which a flame is generated at both feet of the samurai and the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes larger is displayed. As shown in (iii), in the button operation animation of the period (iii), a still image of a samurai whose flames from both feet disappear is displayed. In this example, the flame animation disappears after a certain period of time has passed since the chance button 136 was not pressed. As shown in (iv), in the button operation animation of the period (iv), a moving image in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai grows further above the samurai's head is displayed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed again, a moving image subsequent to the moving image executed in the period (ii) immediately before the period (iii) is displayed. As shown in (iv ′) as a modified example, in the button operation animation of the period (iv), the flames are generated on both sides of the samurai, and the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes larger during the period (ii). The moving image may be displayed again.

  FIG. 389 (a) shows a timing chart (No. 2) regarding the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" is a state in which the image is still, and the level "moving image" is a state in which the image changes with the passage of time. The period (1) is a period from the non-pressed state of the chance button 136 to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by a time lag from sensor detection to command reception, for example. In the period (1), the image of the button operation animation is in a static state. In a period (2) subsequent to the period (1), after the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state and a predetermined delay time has elapsed, the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state again for a predetermined period. This is the period until the delay time elapses. In the period (3) subsequent to the period (2), the chance button 136 is changed from the non-pressed state to the pressed state again and a predetermined delay time has elapsed, and then the chance button 136 is changed to the non-pressed state and the predetermined time passes. Until.

  FIG. 389 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation in each period of FIG. 389 (a). As shown in (1), in the button operation animation of the period (1), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (2), in the button operation animation of the period (2), a flame is generated at both legs of the samurai, and the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes larger. As shown in (3), in the button operation animation in the period (3), a moving image in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai grows further above the samurai's head is displayed. In this way, the same continuous display as when pressing and holding may be performed.

  FIG. 390 (a) shows a timing chart (No. 3) related to the pressing of the chance button 136 and the display of the button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by displaying the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" is a state in which the image is still, and the level "moving image" is a state in which the image changes with the passage of time. The period (i) is a period from the non-pressed state of the chance button 136 to the pressed state (single press) until a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time is caused by a time lag from sensor detection to command reception, for example. In the period (i), the button operation animation image is in a static state. A period (ii) subsequent to the period (i) is a period until the chance button 136 becomes the non-depressed state again after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the chance button 136 changed from the non-depressed state to the depressed state. A period (iii) following the period (ii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is again in the non-pressed state to when the chance button 136 is again pressed and a predetermined delay time elapses. A period (iv) following the period (iii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is pressed again and after a predetermined delay time elapses until a predetermined time elapses.

  FIG. 390 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation in each period of FIG. 390 (a).

As shown in (i), in the button operation animation of period (i), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation of the period (ii), a moving image in which a flame occurs on both feet of a samurai is displayed. As shown in (iii), in the button operation animation of the period (iii), a still image of a samurai in a state where flames from both feet is generated is displayed. In this example, when a certain animation is executed, the still image state is maintained until the next button operation. As shown in (iv), in the button operation animation of the period (iv), a moving image in which the flames generated at both legs of the samurai grow up to the waist of the samurai and grows larger is displayed.

  The level “still image” may be in a state in which the button operation animation is not executed. Also, although the button operation animation is not executed, it may be in the state of executing the standby animation (the animation in the state of waiting for the button to be operated), and in the state where the still image is displayed. It may be.

  The level “moving image” may be a state in which a button operation animation is being executed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth to eighth embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 390 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

Operation means (for example, chance button 136),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  The operation unit is a unit capable of performing at least a first operation (for example, long pressing of the chance button 136),

  The operation unit is a unit capable of performing at least a second operation (for example, continuous hitting of the chance button 136),

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136),

  A first display (for example, a button display (FIG. 381 (e)) prompting a long press of the first type of display is a display related to the first operation,

  The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, cut-in display (FIG. 382 (a), FIG. 384 (g))) of the first type of display,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the first case,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the second case,

  The first case is a case where the first display is displayed,

  The first case is a case where the first operation is performed,

  The second case is a case where the first display is displayed,

The second case is a case where the second operation is performed,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, even when the second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is displayed, so that a gaming table having a characteristic display can be provided. realizable. Further, the display when the operation is performed is the same whether the first operation is performed or the second operation is performed, so that the motivation for the operation is improved even for a player who is unfamiliar with the operation of the operation means. You may be able to.

  The "at least a part of the second display" may be the entire first display or only a part of the first display. Further, "when the first operation is performed" may be a case where the player performs the first operation by the operation means, or the first operation is detected by the detection means. The first operation may be detected by the detection means, and the detected information may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub-control means. It may be a case where the sub-control unit receives information (command) that an operation has been performed.

Further, "when the second operation is performed" may be a case where the player performs the second operation by the operation means, or the second operation is detected by the detection means. The second operation may be detected by the detection means, and the detected information may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub-control means. It may be a case where the sub-control unit receives information (command) that an operation has been performed. In addition, "the first display is displayed" may be "when the first display is displayed" and may be "through the period when the first display is displayed". It may be that, or "during the period when the first display is displayed". The "first case" may be "a case where the first display is displayed and a case where the first operation is performed". The “second case” may be “the case where the first display is displayed and the case where the second operation is performed”.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the third case,

The third case is a case where at least a period during which the operation of the operating means can be accepted (for example, an operation valid period).
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display is a display that is displayed at least during the period when the operation reception of the operation unit is valid, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation unit.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display,

The third display is a display related to the second operation,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the third display is a display related to the second operation, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation unit.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means for not displaying the second display in the fourth case,

  The fourth case is a case where the first display is displayed,

The fourth case is a case where the operation means is not operated,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second display is not displayed when the operating means is not operated. Therefore, by displaying the second display by the operation, You may be able to prompt the operation. The "third case" may be "a case where the first display is displayed and no operation by the operation means".
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

The first operation is an operation different from the second operation,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, even when the second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is displayed, so that a gaming table having a characteristic display can be provided. realizable. Further, the display when the operation is performed is the same whether the first operation is performed or the second operation is performed, so that the motivation for the operation is improved even for a player who is unfamiliar with the operation of the operation means. You may be able to.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the variation or prefetch notice display, a hold icon, a variation icon, a fourth design, a decorative design, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system. Display, display related to customization in user mode, display of playing method, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.

(Example 9)
The effect performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393. 391 (a) to 392 (h), the special figure variation game is shown in time series in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 391 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 391 (a), a display in which two samurai are fighting is displayed as the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o).

  FIGS. 391 (b) to 392 (g) show a series of button effects and a flow of SP reach effects by the display of the button operation animation performed subsequent to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 373 (a). In FIG. 391 (b), the button operation animation is started, and an image of a character string “Long press to accumulate power!” Is displayed as a button display prompting the button operation. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 391 (b), since the button operation acceptance valid period (button operation acceptance period, operation valid period) has not yet started, the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 (for example, chance). The button lamp 138) is off.

  In FIG. 391 (c), as a button display prompting a button operation, the character string image is switched from "long press to accumulate power!" To the image of the character string "Good", and the button image is displayed. An effective period image is displayed at the bottom of it.

  In FIG. 391 (d), the character string image is switched from "Good" to "Long press" as a button display prompting a button operation. Further, the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 391 (d), but at this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has not started yet. State), the pressing operation cannot be accepted even if the chance button 136 is pressed. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  FIG. 391 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permitted state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 391 (b) was started. The chance button 136 is in a light emitting state on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing surface. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes after the display mode of the button image changes, but these changes may be simultaneous, or the change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 precedes. The display mode of the button image may be changed later.

  In FIG. 391 (f), the player puts his / her hand so as to cover the pressed surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136, and the emission mode of the chance button 136 is the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface when not pressed. The state where only the button is lit has changed to the state where the entire button is lit.

  Further, FIGS. 391 (f) and 391 (g) show a state in which the player continues to press the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the “long press” operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button 136 is pushed into the circular opening. The valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-shaped portion is gradually shortened to the right as the valid period for accepting the button operation elapses. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect between FIG. 391 (f) and FIG. 391 (g), an image in which a small flame generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grows to become a large flame behind the samurai is displayed. In FIG. 391 (f), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 391 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows behind the samurai to a size that wraps around the entire samurai's body.

  Further, FIG. 391 (g) shows a state immediately before the end of the valid period for accepting button operation. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 391 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period has ended. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (the chance button lamp 138 is in a non-light emitting state).

  In FIG. 391 (i), the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is turned off. Further, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed up somewhat from within the circular opening. In this example, the display mode of the button image is changed after the chance button 136 is changed to the extinguished state, but these may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the extinction state of the chance button 136 is performed first. The display mode of the image may be changed later.

  In FIG. 391 (j), the effect of restoring the meter (gauge) of the effective period image is executed. A bar-shaped portion of a predetermined color of the effective period image is displayed so as to gradually become longer in the left direction, for example. Further, an image of a character string "Release the power" is displayed above the button image in the effect display area 208d, which suggests that the effect of releasing the power accumulated by long pressing is started. In this way, by performing the animation in which the bar-shaped portion of the meter becomes long, the effect of recovering the meter is executed. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the button operation acceptance period will start again. Note that at the time shown in FIG. 391 (j), it is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  FIG. 392 (a) shows the state following FIG. 391 (j). In FIG. 392 (a), the effect of restoring the meter (gauge) of the effective period image is executed. Note that at the time shown in FIG. 392 (a), it is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  In FIG. 392 (b), the effect of the meter of the effective period image recovering is finished. The bar-shaped part of the predetermined color of the effective period image has the same length as the rectangular frame. Note that at the time shown in FIG. 392 (b), it is outside the button operation acceptance period.

  In FIG. 392 (c), the character string image displayed in the effect display area 208d is switched from "release power" to "one shot". This suggests that, by pressing the chance button 136 only once in the button operation reception period that is started after this, the effect of releasing the accumulated power is executed. Further, the display mode is changed such that the portion of the button image corresponding to the outer periphery of the pressing surface of the chance button 136 is in the light emitting state. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 392 (c), since the countdown of the operation valid period has not started yet, it is outside the button operation reception period, so even if the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state.

  In FIGS. 392 (d) to 392 (f), the button operation reception period has started. A bar-shaped portion of a predetermined color of the effective period image is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right, for example, and the remaining period of the operation effective period is notified. In addition, an image of the character string "one shot" is displayed above the button image in the effect display area 208d, and the chance button 136 is required to be pressed once. Further, the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state on the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes after the display mode of the button image changes, but these changes may be simultaneous, or the change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 precedes. The display mode of the button image may be changed later.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 only once during the button operation reception period, an up image of the face of the samurai who has accumulated strength is displayed, as shown in FIG. 392 (g). Further, if the chance button 136 is pressed only once in the button operation acceptance period in which the chance button 136 is required to be pressed once, the button operation acceptance period ends regardless of the remaining period. Therefore, the button image and the effective period image displayed in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Also, the chance button 136 is changed to the off state. The deletion of the button image and the effective period image and the change of the chance button 136 to the off state may be performed at the same time or one of them may be performed first.

  In FIG. 392 (h), an animation in which a samurai who has accumulated power wins is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Thereby, it is announced that the probability of winning the big hit in the special game 1 variation game is high, or that the big hit is won.

  In the present embodiment, the button operation reception period started from FIG. 391 (e) and the button operation reception period started from FIG. 392 (d) have the same length, but in the second embodiment, The button operation acceptance period of each time may have a different length. In this case, the length of the operation-effective period image may be changed during the meter's recovery effect, or the decreasing speed of the meter (the decreasing speed of the rod-shaped portion of the predetermined color) may be changed. Note that when the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected during the period of FIGS. 391 (e) to (g), the meter recovery effect of the effective period image performed in FIGS. 391 (j) to 392 (b) is performed. A different effect (for example, an effect after FIG. 374 (a)) may be performed without executing the effect. Further, even when the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected in the period of FIGS. 391 (e) to (g), the same effect as that when the operation of the button is detected may be performed.

  FIG. 393 shows a timing chart regarding a chance button operation acceptance period, a chance button operation acceptance, and a display regarding the operation acceptance period in the button effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392. The upper part shows in chronological order whether the chance button operation reception is valid or invalid. The level "valid" indicates the button operation acceptance period, and the level "invalid" indicates outside the button operation acceptance period. The middle row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected. The lower part shows in chronological order whether or not the display regarding the operation acceptance period is executed. The level "display" is a state where the display regarding the operation reception period is being executed, and the level "non-display" is a state where the display regarding the operation reception period is not being executed.

  The period (1) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 391 (c) to 391 (f). In the period (1), first, execution of the display regarding the operation reception period is started. In the present embodiment, the display regarding the operation acceptance period corresponds to the display of the valid period image and the button image shown in FIG. 391 (c). It should be noted that the display regarding the operation valid period may be only the display of the valid period image or only the display of the button image. Further, within the period (1), the chance button operation reception period is started after the display regarding the operation reception period is started. As described above, in this embodiment, the display regarding the operation reception period is started before the start of the operation reception period. In addition, after the operation acceptance period of the period (1) starts, the player has started long pressing the chance button 136.

  The period (2) following the period (1) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 391 (e) to 391 (h). The period (2) ends when the chance button operation acceptance period ends. In the period (2), since the chance button 136 is continuously pressed and held, the detection signal of the chance button sensor is at the level ON, and the display regarding the operation acceptance period is continuously displayed.

  The period (3) following the period (2) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 391 (i) to 392 (c). Period (3) is outside the button operation acceptance period. In the period (3), the detection signal of the chance button sensor is turned off after a predetermined delay time from the end of the button operation acceptance period. The delay time is caused by a time lag from sensor detection to command reception, for example. In the period (3), the effect of restoring the meter of the effective period image is executed. Therefore, the display regarding the reception period is continuously displayed.

  The period (4) following the period (3) corresponds to the period of FIGS. 392 (d) to 392 (g). The period (4) starts at the same time as the start of the button operation acceptance period. In the latter half of the period (4), the player presses the chance button 136 only once (FIG. 392 (g)). As a result, the button operation acceptance period ends after a predetermined delay time, and the display regarding the operation acceptance period is erased. Note that in FIG. 393, the length of setting of the button operation reception period started in the period (4) is indicated by a dashed line.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

Operation means (for example, chance button 136),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136, a display related to an operation acceptance period),

  In the first case, the display means may display a first display of the first type of display (for example, display of an effective period image (display in FIG. 391 (c)), + button image, It is a means that can display at least button images),

  The first case is a case of a first period (for example, the period of FIGS. 391 (c) to 392 (g) and the periods (1) to (4) of FIG. 393),

  The first period is a period including a second period (for example, the period (3) in FIGS. 391 (i) to 392 (c) and 393),

  The second period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit is not accepted (for example, a period other than the button operation acceptance period (period outside the button operation acceptance period),

The first period is a period including at least a period in which the operation of the operation unit can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display regarding the operation is continuously displayed even during the period when the operation of the operating means is not accepted, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a display characteristic. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the production related to the operating means and to increase the motivation for operating the operating means.

Note that “including the second period” may indicate that a part of the period included in the first period is the second period. Further, "at least the operation of the operating means can be accepted" may be a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or when it is detected that the operating means is operated, the sub-control means ( For example, it may indicate a period during which the information (command) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400) indicating that the operation is performed is valid. Further, "at least the operation of the operation means is not accepted" may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is invalid, or when the operation of the operation means is detected, the sub-control means is instructed. It may indicate a period during which the transmitted information (command) indicating the operation is invalid.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display relating to a reception period of the operating means (for example, display of an effective period image (gauge image, meter image, time display image)),
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display is the display regarding the reception period, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display regarding the reception period of the operating means and to increase the motivation for operating the operating means. There are cases. The first display includes a meter image showing the acceptance period, a time display (for example, display of an effective period image), and the like.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, display of a button image) of the first type of display in the first case,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second display can be displayed in the first case, so by displaying a plurality of displays regarding the operating means, the player is paid attention and the motivation for operating the operating means is increased. You may be able to. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the production related to the operating means. The second display is, for example, a display imitating an operating means. The first type of display may be three or more displays including the first display and / or the second display.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first period is a period including at least a third period,

  The first period is a period including at least a fourth period,

  The third period is a period before the second period is started (for example, the period of FIGS. 391 (e) to 391 (h), the period (2) of FIG. 393),

  The fourth period is a period after the second period is completed (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 392 (d) to 392 (g) and the period (4) shown in FIG. 393).

  The third period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period),

The fourth period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period),
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first period includes a plurality of periods for accepting an operation, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and may focus on the first display.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first period is a period including at least a fifth period,

The fifth period is a period in which at least the operation of the operating device is not accepted (for example, a period other than the button operation acceptance period, the period in FIG. 391 (c)).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first period includes a plurality of periods in which the operation is not accepted, and thus the player may feel a sense of discomfort and may be able to pay attention to the first display.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts at the same time as the start of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed before the operation acceptance period starts. Alternatively, the second period may be a period that starts during the period of the first period. For example, it may be a display of a reception period regarding two consecutive different operations.

  Also, the second period may be a period that is ended during the period of the first period. Alternatively, the second period may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed even after the operation acceptance period ends.

  Further, the first period may be a period including the third period. Further, the third period may be a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted. The third period may be a period that begins during the period of the first period. Moreover, the second period may be a period that starts after (or immediately after) the third period ends.

  Further, the first period may be a period including the fourth period. The fourth period may be a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted. The fourth period may be a period that begins during the period of the first period. The second period may be a period ended before (or just before) the fourth period starts.

  Further, the display means may display a display regarding the first operation when the third period is started. Further, the display means may display a display regarding the second operation when the fourth period is started. The first operation and the second operation may be different operations. For example, the required operation may be different, such as displaying the character string "Long press" during the first reception period and displaying the character string "Ichi blow!" During the second reception period.

  Moreover, the first operation and the second operation may be the same operation.

Further, the first display may be an image simulating the operation means. Further, the second display may be an image relating to the acceptance period of the operating means. The first display may be started simultaneously with the second display. Further, the first display may be displayed before the second display. Further, the first display may be displayed after the second display. Further, the first display may be erased at the same time as the second display. Also, the first display may be erased before the second display. Further, the first display may be erased after the second display.
(6) The pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a second type of display (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the variation or prefetch notice display, a hold icon, a variation icon, a fourth design, a decorative design, a hitting notification, an error display, a mission system. Display, display related to customization in user mode, display of playing method, option menu, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.

(Example 10)
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 394 to 401. FIG. 394 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a display device m700 with a touch panel on the door 108 with a ball storage dish. The display device with a touch panel m700 is arranged on the right side of the chance button 136 in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is installed in the island facility. The display device with a touch panel m700 has a horizontally long rectangular surface area. A liquid crystal display device, for example, is used for the display device with a touch panel m700. In the present embodiment, the display device with a touch panel m700 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The display device with a touch panel m700 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  A touch panel m700a having substantially the same size and shape as the display area is arranged on the display screen of the display device with a touch panel m700. The touch panel m700a can be touched with a finger or the like by the player or can be slid (dragged).

  Next, an effect (1) performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 395 and 396. 395 (a) to 396 (c), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, a display device m700 with a touch panel as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 395 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 395 (a), a display in which two samurai are fighting is displayed as the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o). In addition, the display device with a touch panel m700 displays the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (“CR Yoshimune” in this example) as a default display.

  395 (b) to (j) show a flow of a series of effects and SP reach effects by the display of the touch operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 373 (a). In FIG. 395 (b), a touch operation animation that prompts a touch operation on the touch panel m700a is started, and the characters "Slide your finger!" The image of the column is displayed. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. Further, on the display device with a touch panel m700, an image of a character string “Slide with your finger!” And an image of an arrow indicating the sliding direction are displayed. Note that the touch panel m700a does not have to be operated as indicated by the image of the arrow.

  The display switching timing from FIG. 395 (a) to FIG. 395 (b) may be the decorative symbol display device 208 first and the touch panel display device m700 later, or the touch panel display device m700 first and the decorative symbol display device. 208 may be after or simultaneously. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 395 (b), the acceptance valid period of the touch operation (touch operation valid period) has not yet started.

  In FIG. 395 (c), as the display prompting the touch operation, the character string image is switched from the image of the character string “Slide your finger!” To “Good”, and the display device with touch panel m700 is provided in the effect display area 208d. An image imitating the above (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “panel image”) is displayed, and an effective period image is displayed below the image. The effective period image of the present embodiment is an image showing the touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 395 (d), as the display prompting the touch operation, the character string image is switched from "Good" to the image of the character string "Slide". Further, on the display device with a touch panel m700, images of character strings "5 seconds left" and "slide" are displayed. The image of the character string of "5 seconds left" is an image for counting down and displaying the touch operation valid period. By seeing the image shown in FIG. 395 (d), the player knows that the effect accompanied by the operation of the touch panel m700a has started, but at this stage, the touch operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the touch operation effective period has not started yet. Since it is outside (touch operation cannot be accepted), touch operation cannot be accepted even if the touch panel m700 is touched.

  FIG. 395 (e) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 395 (b) and the touch operation acceptance valid period has started. When the touch operation acceptance period starts, as shown in FIGS. 395 (e) to (j), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating the sliding direction and an image of a hand are displayed from left to right. An animation in which the panel image is slid is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “slide”, and the image of the arrow displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700 are the operation request display of the touch operation on the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the touch operation valid period is displayed by the valid period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of “5 seconds left” displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700. The touch operation valid period may be displayed on only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the display device with a touch panel m700. In addition, the touch operation valid period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  In FIG. 395 (f), an animation of a mode in which an image simulating a hand in the effect display area 208d is operated by sliding the panel image from left to right during the touch operation valid period is displayed. The touch operation valid period is 4 seconds left.

  In FIGS. 395 (g) to (i), the player slides the touch panel m700a with the right index finger according to the operation request display. As a result, an image is displayed in which the small flames on both sides of the samurai gradually grow and become large flames behind the samurai. In FIG. 395 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 395 (h), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows to about half the height of the samurai, and in FIG. 395 (i), the flame surrounds the samurai's body behind the samurai. The image is displayed in a display mode that has grown to a size. The animation in which the image of the flame greatly grows is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 395 (j), the player has finished the slide operation of the touch panel m700. An image of a character string “Good!” Is displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700 as a display corresponding to the slide operation. The image of the character string “Good!” May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700 has been operated according to the operation request. . Further, in FIG. 395 (j), the touch operation valid period has ended.

  FIG. 396 (a) shows the state following FIG. 395 (j). The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating a hand, and the image of the arrow indicating the slide direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, the display mode in which the character grows to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained and the image of the flame is displayed.

  FIG. 396 (b) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. In the display device m700 with a touch panel after the cut-in effect is finished, the character string image of “Good!” Is switched to the display of the model name of the pachinko machine 100.

  396 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIGS. 374 (b) to (e), 374 (f) to (h) or 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, an effect (No. 2) performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398. 397 (a) to 398 (b), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a display device with a touch panel m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below it. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 397 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 395 (e). In FIG. 397 (a), the touch operation valid period has started. Further, the button operation effective period is started together with the start of the touch operation effective period. In FIG. 397 (b), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating the sliding direction and an animation of a mode in which an image imitating a hand slides the panel image from left to right is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a Has been announced.

  In FIGS. 397 (c) to 397 (e), the player does not follow the operation request display of the touch operation, and the player presses the chance button 136 by long-pressing. Although the touch operation is in the valid period, but the button operation is also in the valid period, the depression is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the samurai in the effect display area 208d. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) indicated by the operation request display is being operated, the flame image does not become large. Further, in FIG. 397 (d), as in FIG. 395 (i), the image of the character string “Good!” Is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel. The display on the display device with a touch panel m700 may be different from the case where the touch panel m700a is operated according to the operation request display (the case illustrated in FIG. 395 (j)) (for example, an operation request such as “Bad” or “Miss”). As is the case, a display indicating that the touch panel m700a is not operated may be displayed). Also, in FIG. 397 (d), the touch operation valid period has ended.

  FIG. 397 (e) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, and the image simulating the hand in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, a part of the effect (effect including the image of the flame shown in FIG. 396 (a)) when the image of the flame is displayed at the foot of the samurai and the touch panel m700a is operated is executed.

  FIG. 398 (a) shows the state following FIG. 397 (e). In the effect display area 208d, a state in which the cut-in effect is displayed in a display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded is shown. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. In the display device m700 with a touch panel after the cut-in effect is finished, the character string image of “Good!” Is switched to the display of the model name of the pachinko machine 100. If the touch panel m700a is not operated according to the operation request, the cut-in effect may not be displayed.

  398 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, the display shown in FIGS. 374 (b) to 374 (e) is followed by FIG. 374 (f) to (h) or FIG. 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, the effect (3) performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400. 399 (a) to 400 (i), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, a display device m700 with a touch panel as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 399 (a) illustrates a continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 399 (a), a display in which two samurai are fighting is displayed as the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o). In addition, the display device with a touch panel m700 displays the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (“CR Yoshimune” in this example) as a default display.

  399 (b) to 400 (f) show a flow of a series of effects and SP reach effects by the display of the touch operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 373 (a). In FIG. 399 (b), a touch operation animation that prompts a touch operation on the touch panel m700a is started, and "touch the touch panel for 6 seconds!" The image of the character string is displayed. In the SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai holds a sword is displayed. Further, on the display device with a touch panel m700, an image of a character string “Please touch with your finger for 6 seconds!” And an image of a zigzag arrow indicating the sliding direction are displayed. Note that the touch panel m700a does not have to be operated as indicated by the image of the arrow.

  Further, the display switching timing from FIG. 399 (a) to FIG. 399 (b) may be the decorative pattern display device 208 first and the touch panel display device m700 later, or the touch panel display device m700 first. The display device 208 may be provided later or simultaneously. In the state shown in FIG. 399 (b), the acceptance valid period of the touch operation (touch operation valid period) has not yet started.

  In FIG. 399 (c), as a display prompting the touch operation, the character string image is switched from "touch the touch panel for 6 seconds" to an image of the character string "Good", and a display device with a touch panel is provided in the effect display area 208d. An image imitating m700 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “panel image”) is displayed, and an effective period image is displayed below the image. The effective period image of the present embodiment is an image showing the touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 399 (d), the character string image is switched from "good" to "touch!" As a display prompting the touch operation. Further, an image of a character string "6 seconds left" is displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700. The image of the character string is an image that countdown-displays the touch operation valid period. The player knows that the effect accompanied by the operation of the touch panel m700a has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 399 (d), but at this stage the touch operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the touch operation valid period has not started yet. Since it is outside (touch operation cannot be accepted), touch operation cannot be accepted even if the touch panel m700 is touched.

  FIG. 399 (e) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the effect shown in FIG. 399 (b) and the touch operation acceptance valid period has started. When the touch operation acceptance period starts, as shown in FIGS. 399 (e) to 400 (f), in the effect display area 208d, an image of a hand slides the panel image in a zigzag manner from left to right. The animation of the mode is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the image of the arrow displayed on the touch-panel-equipped display device m700 are the operation request display of the touch operation on the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the valid period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of "6 seconds left" displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700 display the valid period of the touch operation. The touch operation valid period may be displayed on only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the display device with a touch panel m700. In addition, the touch operation valid period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  FIG. 400 (a) shows the state following FIG. 399 (e). In FIGS. 400 (a) to (f), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating the slide operation direction and an image simulating a hand in the effect display area 208d during the touch operation effective period zigzag from left to right. An animation in which a panel image is slid is displayed. The touch operation valid period is 5 seconds left.

  In FIGS. 400 (b) to 400 (f), the player slides the touch panel m700a in zigzag with the index finger of the right hand according to the operation request display. As a result, an image is displayed in which the small flames on both sides of the samurai gradually grow and become large flames behind the samurai. In FIG. 400 (b), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. As shown in FIGS. 400 (c) to 400 (e), the image of the flame gradually increases, and in FIG. 400 (f), the flame grows so as to wrap the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai. The image is displayed in a manner. The animation in which the image of the flame greatly grows is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 400 (f), the touch operation valid period has ended. FIG. 400 (g) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating a hand, and the image of the arrow indicating the slide operation direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the display device with a touch panel m700, the image of the character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display according to the operation. The image of the character string “GREAT!” May be an image displayed as a notice of the special game 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700 has been operated according to the operation request. . Further, the display mode in which the character grows to a position higher than the head of the samurai behind the samurai is maintained and the image of the flame is displayed.

  FIG. 400 (h) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect in the display mode in which the samurai's face is widely spread is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 400 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 374 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 374 (b) to (e), the state shown in FIG. 374 (f) to (h) or FIG. 374 ( Effects similar to those shown in f ′) to (h ′) are executed.

  Next, an effect (3) performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 401. 401 (a) ~ (j), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time sequence in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a display device with a touch panel m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below it. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 401 (a) shows a state in which the touch operation acceptance valid period has started. When the touch operation reception period starts, as shown in FIGS. 401 (a) to (i), in the effect display area 208d, an image of a hand slides the panel image in a zigzag manner from left to right. Is displayed and the operation method of the touch panel m700a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the image of the arrow displayed on the touch-panel-equipped display device m700 are the operation request display of the touch operation on the touch panel m700a. Further, since the operation valid period in this example is 6 seconds, the image of the character string "6 more seconds" is displayed on the display device with a touch panel m700. Further, the button operation effective period is started together with the touch operation effective period.

  In FIG. 401 (c), the player does not follow the operation request display of the touch operation, and the player presses the chance button 136 only once. Although it is during the touch operation valid period, but also during the button operation acceptance valid period, the pressing is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the samurai in the effect display area 208d.

  In FIG. 401 (d), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIG. 401 (e) the player presses the chance button 136 only once. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) indicated by the operation request display is being operated, the image of the flame does not become larger than the state shown in FIG. 401 (c). An animation in which the flame image is enlarged may be displayed based on the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 401 (e).

  In FIG. 401 (f), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIGS. 401 (g) to (i), the player starts the slide operation of the touch panel m700a in accordance with the operation request display. Since the correct operation according to the operation request has been executed, the animation in which the flame becomes larger is restarted, and the image of the flame gradually becomes larger, as shown in FIGS. 401 (g) to (i), and the image in FIG. In, the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame grows behind the samurai to a size that wraps around the entire samurai's body. The animation in which the image of the flame greatly grows is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m700a.

  In FIG. 401 (i), the touch operation valid period has ended. FIG. 401 (j) shows a state after the touch operation valid period ends. The panel image, the effective period image, the image imitating a hand, and the image of the arrow indicating the slide operation direction in the effect display area 208d are deleted. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the display device with a touch panel m700, the image of the character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display according to the operation. The image of the character string "GREAT!" May be an image displayed as a notice of the special game 1 variable game, or may be an image indicating that the touch panel m700a is operated according to the operation request. . In addition, the display mode in which the display has grown to a position higher than the samurai's head is maintained behind the samurai, and the image of the flame is displayed. After that, in the display mode in which the samurai's face is greatly expanded as shown in FIG. 400 (h). The display of the cut-in effect is executed.

  As described above, in this example, when the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m700a) for which the operation request display prompts the operation is operated, the animation in which the flame image becomes large is stopped and the flame grows. Is stopped (FIGS. 401 (c) to (e)), and thereafter, when the operation unit that prompts the operation is operated by the operation request display, the animation in which the flame image is enlarged is restarted (FIGS. 401 (g) to (g). i)). The operation request display operates the operation means (touch panel m700a) that prompts the operation to display an animation in which the image of the flame becomes larger, and then the operation request display is different from the operation means that prompts the operation (chance button 136). ) Is manipulated, the animation of the flame image becoming larger may be stopped and the flame growth may stop.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 394 to 401 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  A plurality of operating means (for example, the chance button 136 and the touch panel m700a of the display device m700 with a touch panel),

Display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display,

  The first type of display is a display related to a first operation unit (for example, the touch panel m700a) of the plurality of operation units,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a display of a panel image simulating the touch panel m700a) of the first type of display in the first case,

  The first case is a case of the first period,

  The first period is a period (for example, a touch operation valid period) in which at least an operation of the first operation unit (for example, an operation of the touch panel m700a) can be accepted,

  The first period is a period (for example, a button operation reception period) during which at least an operation of the second operation unit (for example, the chance button 136) of the plurality of operation units can be accepted.

  In the second case, the display means displays a second display of the first type of display (for example, display of an image of a flame behind a samurai (flames shown in FIGS. 395 (g) to (j)). Is a means capable of displaying at least the image of

  In the third case, the display means displays a third display of the first type of display (for example, a display of an image of a flame behind a samurai (flames shown in FIGS. 397 (c) and (d)). Is a means capable of displaying at least the image of

  The third display is a display including at least a part of the second display,

  The second case, in the first case, is a case where there is at least operation of the first operation means,

The third case, in the first case, is a case where there is at least operation of the second operation means,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, at least a part of the second display is displayed when the operation means different from the operation request is operated, so that it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display. Further, even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the first display, the third display is displayed, which may improve the player's motivation for operation. In addition, the player may be able to select the operation means he / she wants to operate to improve the interest of the game. The first display may be a display imitating the operation means. Further, the second display and the third display may be displays according to the operation of the operation means (display of operation results). The “display related to the first operation means” may be a display (or an image) imitating the first operation means, or a display (or an image) of the name of the first operation means. May be that. The "first period" means "a period during which at least the operation of the first operating means can be accepted and at least during which the operation of the second operating means of the plurality of operating means can be accepted". May be that.
(2) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second type of display,

The second type of display is a display related to the second operation means (for example, a button image),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second type of display can be displayed, it may be possible to improve the motivation for operation.

The "display related to the second operating means" may be a display (or an image) imitating the second operating means, or a display (or an image) of the name of the second operating means. May be that.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fourth display (for example, display of an effective period image) of the first type of display in the first case,

The fourth display is a display regarding a period during which at least the operation of the first operation unit can be accepted,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the reception period is displayed in the first case, at least the period during which the operation of the first operation means can be received is displayed, and the first operation means is displayed to the player. It may be possible to prompt the operation of.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means for not displaying at least the second display in the fourth case,

  The display means is means for not displaying at least the third display in the fifth case,

  The fourth case is a case where the first operation means is not operated,

The fifth case is a case where the second operation means is not operated,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the second display and the third display are not displayed when there is no operation, so that it may be possible to improve the motivation for operation.

  Further, in the above description, “when the operation means is operated” may be a case where the operation means is operated, or a case where the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means. Alternatively, the operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detection unit, and the detection may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400). The sub-control means may receive information (command) that the operation means has been operated.

Further, in the above description, "when the operation means is not operated" may be a case where the operation means is not operated, or a case where the operation of the operation means is not detected by the detection means. It may be present, or the case where the operation of the operating means is detected by the detecting means and the detected information is not transmitted as information (command) to the sub-control means, It may be a case where the sub-control unit does not receive information (command) that the operation unit has been operated. Note that at least the second image may not be displayed when the operation unit is not operated. Note that at least the third image may not be displayed when the operation means is not operated.
(5) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display including at least a display imitating the first operation means (for example, a panel image),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first display includes a display imitating the first operation means, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the first operation means.

  The second display may be an animation display. The third display may be an animation display. Further, the third display may be an animation in which the animation display of the second display is being performed halfway.

  Next, a general operation method of the touch panel will be described. The operation method described below is an operation method operable on the touch panel m700a of the present embodiment.

  “Tap” means an operation of tapping the touch panel with a finger (corresponding to a click on a PC). In addition, it may be used also as an effect operation equivalent to a pressing operation of an effect button (for example, a chance button 136) in a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  "Double tap" means operating the touch panel twice (corresponding to a double click on the PC). In addition, in a pachinko machine or a slot machine, a double tap may be used as a staging operation corresponding to a streaking staging of a staging button by operating it once or a plurality of times in succession.

  “Touch” means an operation of touching the touch panel. When touched for a time longer than the operation time of "tap", it is called "touch". In addition, in a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it may be used in a long press operation and the like. In some cases, it is considered that the operations are the same as the “long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” described later, and the same effect is performed based on these operations.

  “Drag” means an operation of moving a finger while pressing the touch panel (corresponding to dragging of a PC). In addition, in a pachinko machine or a slot machine, even a "flick" or "swipe" operation described later may be regarded as an operation equivalent to "drag", and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.

  “Flick” refers to an action of gently touching the touch panel with a finger.

  “Swipe” means an operation of sliding a finger while touching the touch panel.

  “Long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” refer to operations of holding the touch panel. In addition, in a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it may be used as an effect equivalent to a long press operation of an effect button.

  “Multi-tap” is a general term for operations with a plurality of fingers, and there are the following operation examples.

  “Rotating” refers to an operation of rotating one finger with one finger as a fulcrum. It should be noted that "rotation" while operating the steering wheel on a pachinko machine or slot machine (especially on a pachinko machine) may be less versatile because operability is difficult, but, for example, the jackpot reliability is high. It may be configured to be associated with the effect when the player is highly likely to stop the firing operation, such as during SP reach.

  “Pinch” is a general term for pinching operations with two fingers, and mainly includes the following two operations.

  “Pinch out” and “pinch open” refer to operations when the touch panel is pressed with two fingers and the gap between them is expanded. In the case of a pachinko machine or slot machine, an area hidden by an effect display or the like may be displayed in an area hidden by an operation of “pinch out”.

  “Pinch-in” and “pinch-close” refer to an operation of pressing with two fingers and contracting between them to reduce the size. In addition, in the pachinko machine and the slot machine, there is a case where an effect display that hides the area displayed by the effect display or the like is performed by the operation of “pinch in”.

  "Pinch in using four or five fingers" is used to return to the home screen on tablet terminals, etc., but on pachinko machines and slot machines, for example, switching of multiple effect modes is described above. In a configuration that can be switched in a fixed order by any operation (for example, double tap), even when used for production such as "pinch in with four or five fingers" to return to a predetermined production mode Good.

  "Swipe up / down or left / right using four or five fingers" is used for multitask bar display and application switching on tablet terminals, but on pinch machines and slot machines, for example, jackpot history It may be configured to be used for a switching display related to the execution of the information display screen such as the winning payout or the obtained payout, and a switching display related to the execution of the mode setting screen of the individual setting such as Daitomo.

  The “tracing” may be configured to shift to, for example, a game explanation display or an effect explanation display when traced as displayed on the display means.

  "Shake" has the function of canceling by shaking (vibrating) the device body, but especially in a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act that changes the flow of the game ball (the vibration sensor provided in the pachinko machine responds) There is a risk of misunderstanding. However, for example, the game ball is not fired, the demo display screen or the original mode setting screen is being displayed, etc. Good. Even in this operation, the operability may be improved by combining with another operation. For example, it is possible to provide a function of canceling only one by the above-mentioned operation (for example, "pinch-in"), while canceling all by "shaking".

  The touch panel may be capable of sensing the force of pressing the touch panel screen, and the image displayed may be different when the touch panel is strongly pressed and when it is weakly pressed. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated instead of the touch panel, for example, the same effect as when the touch panel is weakly pressed may be performed, or the same effect as when the touch panel is strongly pressed may be performed, and a different image is displayed. It may be displayed.

  Incidentally, when the first display is displayed on the display means, when the first operation means and the second operation means are operated at the same time, it is determined that the first operation means is operated, The second display may be displayed, it may be determined that the second operation means has been operated, and the third display may be displayed. The first operation means and the second operation may be displayed. The second display may be displayed by determining that both of the means are operated, and the third display is displayed by determining that both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Alternatively, it may be determined that both the first operation means and the second operation means have been operated, and a fourth display different from both the second display and the third display may be displayed. Alternatively, it is determined that both the first operation means and the second operation means have been operated, and nothing is displayed. May be the odd, it is determined that no operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means, anything may not be displayed.

(Example 11)
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 to 406.

  FIG. 402 shows a chance button 136 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. FIG. 402 (a) is an external perspective view of the chance button 136, and FIG. 402 (b) is a sectional view of the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 402 (a), the chance button 136 has a button cover m800 and a button m802. The button cover m800 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material and has a hollow columnar shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 402 (a) and 402 (b), the button m802 has a cylindrical shape and is made of, for example, a resin material. The button m802 is housed in the button cover m800 so that the bottom surface and the side surface of the button m802 face the bottom surface and the side surface of the button cover m800, respectively. Further, the button cover m800 and the button m802 project upward, and the player can press the button cover m800 to push down the button m802 and operate the chance button 136.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 402 (b), a plurality of (for example, 3) LEDs m804 are arranged in the button m802. The LED m804 is used as a light source of the chance button 138. A detection piece m806 is provided on the bottom bottom surface of the button m802. A sensor m808 is arranged so as to face the detection piece m806. For the sensor m808, for example, a photo sensor is used. When the button cover m800 is pressed and the button m802 is pressed down, the sensor m808 detects the detection piece m806. As a result, the first sub control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed.

  Further, a columnar protrusion extending vertically downward is formed in the center of the lower bottom surface of the button m802. A compression coil spring m810 is fitted in the protrusion. When the button cover m800 is pushed down and the button m802 is pushed down, the compression coil spring contracts. When the pressing of the button cover m800 is stopped, the compressed coil spring m802 returns to the original state, so that the button m802 and the button cover m800 project upward. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening portion and is biased upward. When the push button is depressed, the chance button 136 sinks downward, but when the pushing force ceases to act, the bias button 136 projects upward and stops at a predetermined position. Has become. As a result, the button cover m800 and the button m802 are urged in the upward direction, and when pressed down, they are sunk in the downward direction, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force causes the button cover m800 to project upward and stop at a predetermined position. ing.

  The chance button 136 has a motor m812. The button cover m800 is driven (rotated) by a motor m812 via a gear. As a result, the button cover m800 can rotate, for example, counterclockwise with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. The motor m812 is controlled by, for example, the first sub control unit 400. When the button cover m800 is pressed, the motor m812 also moves downward with the pressing.

  Next, an effect performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 403. FIGS. 403 (a) to 403 (j) show the special figure variation game in chronological order in this order. Further, a chance button 136 as an operating means is shown on the right side of each drawing. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 403 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach effect continued from FIG. 373 (n). In FIG. 403 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 373 (o) is executed. In FIG. 403 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 374 (a) is executed. In the image by the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 403 (b), the image display area is divided into upper and lower parts by a horizontal boundary line at the center, and a character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 403 (b), no buttons are displayed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the off state.

  FIGS. 403 (c) to 403 (j) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation that is performed subsequent to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 403 (b). FIG. 403 (c) shows a state in which the button image and the effective period image are displayed on the front face at the same time by the fade-in process, with the image produced by the SP reach effect as the background image. In the present embodiment, the button image has a display mode imitating the button m802. The button image and the effective period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. The chance button 136 may be in the light emitting state even outside the valid period for accepting the button operation. The emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the acceptance valid period.

  In FIG. 403 (d), the button image and the effective period image below the button image are displayed in the button effect. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 403 (d), but at this stage, the button operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the button operation acceptance period has not started has been disabled, so the chance Even if the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted. The chance button 136 is in a non-light emitting state (shown in white in the drawing).

  In FIG. 403 (e), an animation in which the button image rotates counterclockwise, for example, is displayed. Further, a character string image "press" is displayed above the button image. In the chance button 136, the outer peripheral portion of the button m802 is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). The button display related to the button effect is changed in display mode such that a portion of the button image corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressing surface is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the button operation acceptance state is in a state where the countdown of the button operation acceptance period has not started, even if the chance button 136 is depressed, the depression operation cannot be accepted. In this example, the chance button 136 emits light after the animation of rotating the button image is started, but these may be emitted at the same time, or the opportunity button 136 changes to the emission state first, and the button image is displayed. The rotation animation of may start later. The rotation animation of the button image may be an animation that rotates faster than the rotation of the button cover m800.

  In FIG. 403 (f), the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 has started rotating counterclockwise (in the figure, the rotation direction of the button cover m800 is indicated by an arrow). The button m802 in the button cover m800 does not rotate. Also, at this stage, the button operation acceptance period has started. In this example, the rotation of the button cover m800 is started after the animation of rotating the button image is started, but these starts may be performed at the same time, or the rotation start of the button cover m800 is started first. The rotation animation of the button image may start later.

  FIG. 403 (g) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed for a while and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened to the right.

  In FIG. 403 (h), the button operation acceptance period has further elapsed, and the player has pressed the chance button 136. Based on this depression, the light emitting mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the mode in which the entire button m802 emits light. On the other hand, the rotation animation of the button image is continued, and the rotation operation of the button cover m800 is continued.

  FIG. 403 (i) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has ended. In FIG. 403 (i), the rotation operation of the button cover m800 is completed and the chance button 136 is changed to the off state. The rotation animation of the button image ends after a lapse of a predetermined time after the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 403 (j), after the operation effective period ends, the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the up image of the face of one samurai is displayed. The up image of the samurai's face is displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 404 is a table comparing the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of the button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a movable means that rotates.

  FIG. 404 shows the states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. The intervals from time t0 to t8 are equal. In FIG. 404, “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means”, “operation means (plan view)”, “rotation means” and “rotation means (plan view)” are shown from the top. A perspective view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means”, and a plan view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means (plan view)”. In the chance button 136, the button cover m802 is rotating. A column of "rotating means" shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and a column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 404, black dot markers are illustrated on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means. The rotation angle of the marker at time t0 is set to 0 °, and the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit are compared.

  At time t1, the operating means is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees and the rotating means is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. At time t2, the operating means rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise and the rotating means rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the operating means rotates 135 degrees counterclockwise and the rotating means rotates 270 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operation means rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise and the rotation means rotates 360 degrees counterclockwise. Thus, the operating means makes a half rotation at t4 seconds and the rotating means makes one rotation at t4 seconds. At time t8. The operation means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise and the rotation means is rotated 720 degrees counterclockwise. From time t0 to time t8, the operating means makes one rotation and the rotating means makes two rotations.

  In this example, the rotating speed of the rotating means is faster than the rotating speed of the operating means. The operating means and the rotating means may have the same rotational speed, or the operating means may have a higher rotational speed than the rotating means of the rotating means.

  405 (a) to 405 (c) are tables comparing the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. In FIG. 405 (a), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 of this example is provided with the letters “PUSH”. The rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image imitating the button m802 with the letters "PUSH", or a movable means with "PUSH".

  FIG. 405 (a) shows the states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals from time t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. In FIG. 405 (a), "time (s)" (seconds), "operating means (plan view)", and "rotating means (plan view)" are shown from the top. A plan view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means (plan view)”. In the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The "rotating means (plan view)" column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 405 (a), black dot markers are shown on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means. The rotation angle of the marker at time t0 is set to 0 °, and the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit are compared. In FIG. 405 (a), the rotation speed of the operating means is the same as the rotation speed of the operating means shown in FIG. 404. Also, in FIG. 405 (a), the rotation speed of the rotating means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotating means shown in FIG. 404.

  In this example, the button cover m800 of the chance button 136, which is the operation means, is rotated, and the character "PUSH" attached to the button cover m800 is also rotated. Further, the letter "PUSH" attached to the rotating means is also rotating.

  In FIG. 405 (b), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button “m802” of the chance button 136 of this example is provided with the letters “PUSH”. The rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image imitating the button m802 with the letters "PUSH", or a movable means with "PUSH".

  FIG. 405 (b) shows the states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals from time t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. In FIG. 405 (b), "time (s)" (seconds), "operating means (plan view)", and "rotating means (plan view)" are shown from the top. A plan view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means (plan view)”. In the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The "rotating means (plan view)" column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 405 (b), black dot markers are shown on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means. The rotation angle of the marker at time t0 is set to 0 °, and the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit are compared. In FIG. 405 (b), the rotation speed of the operation means is the same as the rotation speed of the operation means shown in FIG. 404. Further, in FIG. 405 (b), the rotation speed of the rotating means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotating means shown in FIG. 404.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136, which is the operation means, is rotating, the character "PUSH" attached to the button m802 is not rotating. On the other hand, the letter "PUSH" attached to the rotating means is rotating. Thus, the character "PUSH" on the operating means is not rotating, but the character "PUSH" on the rotating means is not rotating. It should be noted that the character "PUSH" of the operating means may rotate and the character "PUSH" of the rotating means may not rotate.

  In FIG. 405 (c), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button “m802” of the chance button 136 in this example is provided with the letters “PUSH”. Further, the rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of an image simulating a trefoil Aoi, or a movable means to which a trefoil is attached.

  FIG. 405 (c) shows the states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t8. The intervals from time t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. In FIG. 405 (c), "time (s)" (seconds), "operating means (plan view)", and "rotating means (plan view)" are shown from the top. A plan view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means (plan view)”. In the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The "rotating means (plan view)" column shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 405 (c), black dot markers are shown on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means. The rotation angle of the marker at time t0 is set to 0 °, and the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit are compared. In FIG. 405 (b), the rotation speed of the operation means is the same as the rotation speed of the operation means shown in FIG. 404. Further, in FIG. 405 (b), the rotation speed of the rotating means is the same as the rotation speed of the rotating means shown in FIG. 404.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136, which is the operation means, is rotating, the character "PUSH" attached to the button m802 is not rotating. Further, the rotating means of this example is not an image or the like imitating the operating means. Thus, the operating means and the rotating means do not have to have a common form, shape or aspect.

  FIG. 406 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit change. The upper part of FIG. 406 (a) shows a state in which the rotating means is rotating. The rotation means in FIG. 406 (a) is a rotation animation of the button image. In FIG. 406 (a), the display area of the display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) is indicated by a dotted line. An effective period image is displayed below the button image. Further, the operation means of this example is the chance button 136.

  FIG. 406 (a) shows the passage of time from left to right. At the left end of FIG. 406 (a), the rotating operation of the rotating means and the operating means at the start of the button operation reception period is shown. At the center and the right end of FIG. 406 (a), a state in which the rotation speeds of the rotating means and the operating means have increased during the button operation reception period is shown. The rotational speeds of the rotating means and the operating means increase with the passage of time. In this example, the rotation speeds of the rotating means and the operating means are always the same. When the rotation speed changes, the rotation speed of the operation means may change after the rotation speed of the rotation means changes, the rotation speed may change at the same time, or the rotation speed of the operation means may change. The rotation speed of the operating means may change after the change. Further, the rotation speeds of the rotating means and the operating means may be gradually changed or may be changed all at once. Further, the rotation speed may be increased or decreased.

  FIG. 406 (b) is a table comparing the rotation speeds when the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit change. The operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of the button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a movable means that rotates.

  FIG. 406 (b) shows the states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t0 to t5. The intervals from time t0 to t5 are equal. In FIG. 406 (b), "time (s)" (seconds), "operation means", "operation means (plan view)", "rotating means" and "rotation means (plan view)" are shown from the top. A perspective view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means”, and a plan view of the chance button 136 is shown in the column of “operation means (plan view)”. In the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. A column of "rotating means" shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and a column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 406 (b), black dot markers are illustrated on the circumferences of the operating means and the rotating means in order to compare the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means. The rotation angle of the marker at time t0 is set to 0 °, and the rotation speeds of the operation unit and the rotation unit are compared.

  At time t1, the operating means is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees and the rotating means is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. At time t2, the operating means rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise and the rotating means rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means are increasing. At time t3, the operating means rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise and the rotating means rotates 360 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operation means rotates 270 degrees counterclockwise and the rotation means rotates 540 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operating means rotates 360 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means rotates 720 degrees counterclockwise.

  From time t0 to time t2, the rotation speed of the operation means is 45 degrees / t1, and the rotation speed of the rotation means is 90 degrees / t1. At time t3, the rotation speed increases, and from time t3 to time t5, the rotation speed of the operating means is 90 degrees / t1 and the rotation speed of the rotation means is 180 degrees / t1. In this example, the rotation speeds of the operating means and the rotating means are doubled from t3.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the operating means and the rotating means rotate in one direction (rotate left), but they may be configured to rotate in reverse (rotate right). Further, when the operating means is controlled to rotate in the direction opposite to the specific direction while rotating in the specific direction, the rotating means may also rotate in the opposite direction. In that case, the operating means may start the reverse rotation before the rotating means, the operating means and the rotating means may start the reverse rotation at the same time, and the rotating means may start the reverse rotation. The reverse rotation may be started first.

  In addition, when the operation unit controls the rotation in the direction opposite to the specific direction while the operation unit is rotating in the specific direction, the operation unit may temporarily stop or reduce the speed at the switching timing. In that case, the rotation means may perform the same operation as the operation means, or may perform the opposite rotation without performing the operation at the switching timing.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 to 406 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 136) and a rotating means (for example, a button image displayed on the display means), The operating means is a means capable of performing at least a first operation, the rotating means is a means capable of performing at least a second operation, and the first operation is at least a part of the operating means. Is an operation of rotating in a first mode, and the second operation is an operation of rotating at least a part of the rotating means in a second mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the rotation speed of the operation means and the rotation speed of the rotation means are different from each other, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a feature in the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production and improve the interest of the game. Here, the rotating means includes an operating means different from the chance button 136, a rotating movable means, an image (including an image simulating the operating means), and the like. In addition, "at least a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed" may mean that only a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed, or all of the operating means may rotate at the first speed. It may be shown to rotate at one speed. Further, "at least a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed" may indicate that only a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed, or the entire rotating means has the second speed. It may be shown to rotate at two speeds. The "first aspect" may be the first speed. The “second mode” may be the second speed.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, the first portion of the operating means is a portion that makes one round in a first time (for example, t0 to t8 seconds shown in FIG. 404) in the first case, The second part of the rotating means is a part that makes one round in a second time (for example, t0 to t4 seconds shown in FIG. 404) in the second case, and the first case means the operating means. Is a case where the rotating means rotates in the first mode, and the second case is a case where the rotating means rotates in the second mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the time for one round is different, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 100 includes display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208), and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first type of display, and the first type. Is a display related to the operating means, the display means is a means capable of displaying a first display of the first type of display in the third case, The third case is a case where at least the first operation is executed by the operation means, and the rotating means is the first display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a display unit and the rotating unit is an image displayed on the display unit, so that it may be possible to focus the operation unit and improve the motivation for the operation.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a display that is displayed at least during an operation reception period (for example, a button operation reception period), and the operation reception period is an operation of the operation unit. Is a period during which at least can be accepted.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first display is a display that is displayed at least during the reception period of the operating means, and thus it may be possible to focus the operating means and improve the motivation for the operation.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the operation means is a button (for example, a chance button 136), the first display is a display including at least a button image, and the button image is , An image simulating at least a part of the button (for example, the button m802).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the first display is an image simulating at least a part of the button, so that it may be possible to focus on the button and improve the motivation for operation.

  Further, as a comparison between the rotating means and the operating means, regarding the (1) rotation start timing, the operating means may start rotating before the rotating means. Further, the operating means may start rotating simultaneously with the rotating means. Alternatively, the operating means may start rotating after the rotating means. When the rotation unit is displaying, the rotation start timing can be read as the display start timing.

  Further, as a comparison between the rotating means and the operating means, regarding the (2) rotation end timing, the operating means may end the rotation before the rotating means. Further, the operating means may end the rotation at the same time as the rotating means. Alternatively, the operating means may end the rotation after the rotating means. When the rotation means is displayed, the rotation end timing can be read as the timing at which the display is erased.

  Further, regarding (3) rotation speed, the first speed may be faster than the second speed. Further, the first speed may be the same as the second speed. Alternatively, the first speed may be slower than the second speed.

  The rotating means may be movable means. Further, the rotating means may be the second operating means. The operating means may be the first operating means.

  Further, regarding the operation means and the image, the operation means may be composed of a first means (cover) and a second means (operation section). The cover may be configured to cover at least a part of the operation portion, and here, “at least a part” may mean only a part and indicates that the entire surface operable by the player is covered. May be. Further, only the first means (cover) may be rotated. Further, the first display may include a display that at least imitates the second means.

  Further, the first display may be a display that does not include a display imitating the first means. Further, the display displayed on the second means (for example, the light emission mode or the PUSH display) may be included in the first display. In that case, the display imitating the display displayed on the second means may be rotated or may not be rotated. For example, if the image is rotated and displayed, it is possible to make a false display that the image is actually rotated but not rotated. If the image is not rotated, only a part of the image is rotated so that the player does not rotate. You may be able to give a sense of incongruity.

  Further, regarding the display when the rotation speed of the operating means is increased, the operating means may be a means capable of rotating at the third speed. Further, the rotating means may be a means capable of rotating at a fourth speed. The operating means may change from the first speed to the third speed (hereinafter referred to as “first change”), and the rotating means changes from the second speed to the fourth speed (hereinafter referred to as “second change”). Change)).

  Further, the first change may be a change performed before the second change. Further, the first change may be a change that is performed simultaneously with the second change. Further, the first change may be a change performed after the second change. Further, the third speed / fourth speed may be faster than the first speed / second speed. The third speed / fourth speed may be slower than the first speed / second speed. The third speed / fourth speed may be the same as the first speed / second speed. Further, the third speed / fourth speed may be in the same rotation direction as the first speed / second speed. Further, the third speed / fourth speed may be a rotation direction (reverse rotation) different from the first speed / second speed. Further, the operating means may be means for gradually changing from the first speed to the third speed. Further, the operating means may be a means that changes from the first speed to the third speed at once. Further, the rotating means may be a means that gradually changes from the second speed to the fourth speed. Further, the rotating means may be a means that gradually changes from the second speed to the fourth speed.

  Further, regarding the display of the large button and the display of the reduction button, the display means may be a means capable of displaying the second display of the first type of display in the third case. The second display may be a display obtained by enlarging or reducing the first display. Further, the second display may be displayed in rotation at the fifth speed.

  Further, the fifth speed in the second display may be the same speed as the second speed in the first display. The fifth speed in the second display may be slower or faster than the second speed in the first display. Further, a display in which the rotation speed changes may be displayed. Further, the timing at which the rotation speed changes may be the same between the first display and the second display, and one display may change before the other display. Further, the change amount of the rotation speed may be the same in the first display and the second display, or may be the change amount in which one display becomes faster / slower than the other display.

  Note that when the condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, the command is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500, the command is received from the second sub control unit 500, etc.), the operation is performed. If the means does not rotate (due to a failure or the like), the rotating means may perform the second operation or may not perform the second operation, and the operation different from the second operation. (For example, a vibration operation or the like) may be performed.

  Note that when the condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, the command is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500, the command is received from the second sub control unit 500, etc.), the operation is performed. If the means does not rotate (due to a failure, etc.), the first display showing the second operation may be displayed, and the first display showing the second operation is displayed. The display may not be displayed, or a display different from the first display (for example, a display such as “button is broken”) may be displayed.

  The first display may be a display including a display for performing the second operation. Further, the first display may be a display capable of at least executing the second operation. Here, the “display for performing the second action” may be an animation for performing the second action.

  The display imitating the first operation means may be a display including the second operation. Here, the “display including the second action” may be an animation in which the second action is performed.

(Example 12)
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 to 416.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game table in which the original mode can be set. In the original mode, a game table in which the original mode can be set, and history information of a result of playing the game with the original mode set is stored in the game table. On the gaming table, various benefits (for example, effects having a low appearance rate, execution of effects indicating information on game profit, etc.) are provided according to history information. When ending the game in which the original mode is set, the individual setting information, which is the player's individual information including the history information stored in the game table, is input to the server. Every time the game in which the original mode is set is finished, the gaming machine issues individual setting information including new history information in which the history of the game is reflected. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. By inputting the individual setting information stored in the server to the game table at the time of playing the next game, the privilege corresponding to the history information included in the input individual setting information is given at the time of the next game. This individual setting information is included in the encrypted password of a predetermined number of digits and is exchanged between the gaming table-the player (external device) and the server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the game machine, and the corresponding machine code is stored in the game machine. In the specifications that history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes, and in the specification that history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  FIG. 407 (a) is a screen transition diagram of the original mode displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the original mode is set. When the chance button 136 is operated after the demo screen is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  Here, the demo screen is a customer waiting screen and is executed as one of the demonstration effects. The demonstration effect is an effect that is executed when the next symbol variable display does not start by a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the symbol variable display ends. To explain in more detail, the demonstration effect is not limited to simply performing a simulated variation of the symbol variation display, for example, a title display of the game console, a predetermined character, etc. are displayed to explain the features of the game console. The performances to be performed, lamp performances associated with these performances, voice performances, and the like are applicable. A demonstration flag is prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. When the demonstration flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 displays a demonstration screen (demo screen) on the decorative pattern display device 208. ) Is instructed to be displayed, and a demo screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the demonstration effect ends with a predetermined trigger. For example, the process ends when there is a new winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232. With the end of the demonstration production, the demonstration flag is set to off.

  On the initial screen of the option menu, a "user menu (display of game-related information for players)" and "customized machine" are prepared. The initial screen of the option menu may include, as selectable menus, model information display, jackpot history display, sound adjustment, and brightness adjustment.

  As shown in the transition diagram of FIG. 407 (a), with the “user menu” selected, the confirmation (OK) button or the chance button 136 of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed (hereinafter, “decision operation”). May be called)), and the screen shifts to the user menu screen. Details of the user menu screen will be described later.

  In addition, when the determination operation is performed by pressing the confirm button or the chance button 136 in a state where “customize actual machine” is selected, a screen for customizing actual machine is displayed.

  In the user menu or the customization of the actual machine, if the setting operation is performed after the predetermined setting, the option menu is displayed again. If the cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the option menu is displayed, the screen returns to the demo screen.

  In the state where the initial screen of the option menu, the user menu screen, the actual machine customization screen, etc. are displayed (including the operation such as the selection operation), the game ball is placed in the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232. When the player enters the ball and the symbol variation start condition is satisfied (when the variable display of the symbol is started), these screen displays are canceled and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 407 (b) is a screen transition diagram of the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the user mode is set. In the user menu, "member registration", "password input", "two-dimensional code issue", "personal data clear", and "end" are provided as selectable menus.

  When the determination operation is performed with "member registration" selected, the screen moves to the "two-dimensional code display (for member registration)" screen. A two-dimensional code that needs to be read at the time of member registration is displayed on the screen. When the decision operation is performed during the display of the screen, the “password input screen” is displayed, and when the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds), the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. If it is done, the “option menu” is displayed. On the "password input screen", the password obtained by reading the two-dimensional code can be input.

  Also, when the user operates the “password input” selected in the user menu, the screen shifts to the “password input screen”. When the password is entered and the determination operation is performed, if the password is correct, the "authentication success message" is displayed, and if the password is incorrect, the "authentication failure message" is displayed. When the "authentication failure message" is displayed, you can select to enter the password again or exit the user menu. If you select the password entry again, it will move to the "password entry screen", and if you select the end of the user menu, it will move to the "option menu". If the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) while the "password input screen" is displayed, or if the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, "Option menu" is displayed. ".

  In addition, if a decision operation is performed while "Issuing 2D code" in the user menu is selected, an "Issue confirmation message" will be displayed to confirm whether the 2D code may be issued when the player is logged in to the user mode. Is displayed, and if the user mode is not yet logged in, a “password not entered message” is displayed. When the decision operation is performed while the "issue confirmation message" is displayed, the "two-dimensional code (for game end)" screen is displayed, and when the decision operation is further performed, the "end confirmation message" is displayed. , If the decision operation is “No”, the “two-dimensional code display (for game end)” is displayed again, and if the decision operation is “Yes”, the “option menu” is displayed. Further, if the determination operation is performed while the "password not entered message" is displayed, the "option menu" is displayed.

  In addition, if a decision operation is performed while selecting "Clear personal data" from the user menu, a "erase confirmation message" that asks if the player is allowed to confirm the personal data deletion when logged in to user mode. Is displayed, and if the user mode is not yet logged in, a “password not entered message” is displayed. When the "erase confirmation message" is displayed and the operation is determined by "Yes", the "erase completion message" is displayed, and then the "option menu" is displayed. When the "Erase confirmation message" is displayed and the decision operation is "No", the screen moves to the "User menu". Further, if the determination operation is performed while the "password not entered message" is displayed, the "option menu" is displayed.

  Further, if a decision operation is performed while the user menu “end” is being selected, the “option menu” is displayed.

  Next, the demo screen will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 shows the screen transition of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 408 (a) shows the state after the end of the special figure 1 variation game. The special figure F (outside pattern) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 is stopped and displayed as a special figure d (departure symbol) which is the result of the latest special figure 2 variation game, and the general figure display device 210 is the result of the latest general figure variation game. Ordinary figure B (outside pattern) is stopped and displayed. Further, since the holding of the special figure 1 is 0, all the lamps of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned off, and since the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, all the lamps of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off. Since the number of reservations for the universal map is 0, all the lamps for the universal map reservation lamp 216 are turned off. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon display area A does not display the special figure 1 hold icon, and the variable icon display area C does not display the change icon.

  408 (b) to 408 (d) show a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from FIG. 408 (a). During the predetermined time, if the game ball does not enter into the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the special figure variation game is not started, the display shifts to the demo screen and is displayed in the lower center of the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long display area is provided, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 and an image of a character string “display menu” are displayed in the display area. As a result, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is notified that the initial screen of the option menu will be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 408 (d), when the second variable time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the variable display of the special figure or the universal figure is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the symbol is not started, FIG. ) To (c), the background image in the effect display area 208d (in this example, an image in which two characters are sitting facing each other in the parlor) disappears, and only the display area remains. In addition, after FIG. 408 (b), the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the variable icon display area C may be hidden. The background image in the effect display area 208d illustrated in FIGS. 408 (a) to 408 (c) may be the background image displayed during the symbol variable display.

  If the chance button 136 is not pressed for a predetermined time in the states shown in FIGS. 408 (b) to (d), the demonstration effects shown in FIGS. 408 (e) and (f) are started. When the demonstration effect is started, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and as shown in FIG. 408 (e), an image of the logo mark of the maker of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 408 (f), a demonstration effect animation is displayed. Further, during the demonstration effect, a horizontally long rectangular display area is provided in the lower center of the effect display area 208d, and an image simulating the chance button 136 and an image of a character string "display menu" are displayed in the display area. Continue to be done. When the chance button 136 is pressed during the demonstration effect, the demonstration effect is stopped and the initial screen of the option menu is displayed.

  When the animation for the demonstration effect ends, the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 408 (g). The state shown in FIG. 408 (g) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 408 (b). In this state, if the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are not pressed for a predetermined time and the special figure variation game is not started, the demonstration effects shown in FIGS. 408 (e) and (f) are started again. To be done.

  Next, the screen transition of the user menu will be described using FIG. 409. In FIGS. 409 (a) to 409 (g), screen transitions of the user menu are shown in time series. It should be noted that in each drawing of FIG. 409, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  FIG. 409 (a) shows an initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the option menu of this example, user MENU and actual machine customization are provided. In the effect display area 208d, an image of the character string "MENU" is displayed in the upper center, an image of the character string "user MENU" is displayed in the lower rectangular frame, and the lower rectangular shape is displayed. The image of the character string "customized" is displayed in the frame. Further, an image simulating the setting operation unit 137 is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display area 208d. In the image, the parts corresponding to the up, down, left, and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are displayed in a predetermined color, and the image of the character string “select” is displayed on the right side. Each menu can be selected by pressing the up / down / left / right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. Further, on the right side of the image, an image simulating the setting operation unit 137 in which the portion corresponding to the confirm (OK) button has a predetermined color and an image simulating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side. By pressing the confirm button or chance button 136, the selected menu is determined. Further, in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, an image simulating the cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 and an image of the character string “close” are displayed. If the cancel button is pressed while the image simulating the cancel button is displayed, the menu screen is closed and the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 408 (a).

  On the initial screen of the option menu, when "user MENU" is selected and the determination operation is performed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 409 (b). The user menu relates to game-related information for the player, and in the initial screen shown in FIG. 409 (b), "member registration", "password input", "two-dimensional code issue", "personal data clear" and A selection window m2081 with "End" displayed is prepared, and a message window m2082 is prepared on the right side. When this “user MENU” is selected and a determination operation is performed, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to the original mode.

  In FIG. 409 (b), “member registration” in the selection window m2081 on the left side is selected. In addition, an image of a character string that recommends membership registration (in this example, "If you are a new user, please register as a member") is displayed in the message window m2082 on the right side.

  When the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed in the state where "member registration" is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the member registration display screen shown in FIG. 409 (c). On the member registration screen, the two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration is displayed and the password input screen is displayed. Also, in the horizontally long rectangular frame below the effect display area 208d, an image of a character string "Please read the two-dimensional code with your mobile phone to get the password from the mobile site." Is displayed, and the mobile phone terminal is displayed. Etc., the two-dimensional code mQ1 is read, and it is notified that the password can be acquired from the mobile site. Since the password input can be selected on the initial screen of the user menu, the initial screen of the user menu may be returned to.

  The two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration shown in FIG. 409 (c) includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the server side. It contains no information and can be reissued. The two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration is for acquiring a password.

  To set the original mode, you must first register as a member. The player reads the two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration with a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone having a camera function and a bar code reader function, and acquires the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile phone terminal. The server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify the person who has accessed the first registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone, or information input by an access person. The password issued here includes personal identification information (ID) and initial values of history information. The history information is stored in the server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone.

  In addition, a player who has already registered as a member and wants to set the original mode must enter a password. The password can be obtained by accessing the password issuing page of the server from the mobile phone terminal or smartphone. When the server acquires the personal identification information of the accessing person, the server issues a history information stored in association with the personal identification information and a password including the personal identification information (ID), and the mobile phone terminal or the smartphone. The password is displayed on the display screen of.

  The password is encrypted with a predetermined number of digits and is, for example, "GI \ LS". The amount of information that can be included in a password depends on the number of digits in the password x the number of input character types. Note that the password may include only personal identification information for identifying the player, and the history information may be stored in the gaming machine side in association with the personal identification information. By storing it, it becomes possible to play the game in the original mode under the same conditions even when the game table is moved.

  FIG. 409 (d) shows a password input screen displayed when “password input” is selected and determined from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where “password input” in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 409 (b) is selected, a password entry screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. It

  On the password input screen, while looking at the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, operate the up / down / left / right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move to the position of the desired character, and press the enter button or chance button 136. The input character is decided by pressing. When the input of the five-character password is completed, the up / down / left / right buttons are operated to move the cursor to the position of “OK”, and the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed, so that the entered password is the first password of the pachinko machine 100. It is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  The pachinko machine 100 to which the password is input decrypts the encrypted password and acquires history information. If the history information cannot be acquired or the model code included in the history information is not supported, it is notified that the password cannot be recognized, and the screen returns to the password input screen. If the player makes a mistake in inputting the password a plurality of times (for example, three times), the option menu may be returned without displaying the password input screen. Furthermore, if the password is entered a plurality of times, the password may not be entered for a predetermined period (for example, one game) or a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the history information can be acquired, the fact that the password has been successfully recognized ("authentication success message" shown in FIG. 409 (e)) is notified, and the setting of the original mode is completed. . In this embodiment, the original mode cannot be set unless the correct password is entered. When the original mode is set, the history including the result of the game after the setting is temporarily stored in the pachinko machine 100. Also, it becomes possible to enjoy the game in which the history information included in the password is reflected. For example, the player can enjoy the continuation of the game represented by the history information included in the password, or can be given a privilege according to the history information. When the password is successfully recognized, the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 409 (a) is displayed again. In this way, the message differs depending on whether the password authentication succeeds or fails.

  FIG. 409 (f) shows a two-dimensional barcode issuing screen displayed when “issue two-dimensional code” is selected and determined from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where "Issuing a two-dimensional bar code" in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 409 (b) is selected, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a two-dimensional bar. The code issue screen is displayed.

  The two-dimensional code issuance screen displays the two-dimensional code mQ2 generated by the Pachinko machine 100, and an image of a character string that recommends access to the server ("Read the two-dimensional code on your mobile phone to play on the mobile site. Please save the record. ") Is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code mQ2 is prepared on the assumption that the player will select it when finishing the game in the state where the original mode is set. Hereinafter, the two-dimensional code mQ2 shown in FIG. 409 (f) may be referred to as the game ending two-dimensional code mQ2.

  The maximum capacity of the two-dimensional code is 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size should be changed in 4 cell increments within the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. You can A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code is an image composed of a predetermined pattern that cannot be identified by the player by itself. The URL itself, a one-dimensional barcode, an encrypted character string, or a color code may be used instead of the two-dimensional code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, the larger the amount of information to be included, the more the character string is, which cannot be remembered by human beings and cannot be written out. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden by notifying by a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game includes personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and the privilege to be given to the player (for example, the accumulated value of the original mode points). Contains the information to represent. Further, the number of winnings to the special drawing 1 starting opening 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the total number of rotations of the reel in the case of a slot machine, the number of bonuses (big hits), the number of small wins (small hits), store identification information, It may include information unique to the gaming machine, the movable status, the number of errors, and the like. The information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game also includes the URL of the update acceptance page prepared in the server.

  When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game by using the camera function of the mobile phone terminal or the smartphone, the bar code reader function is activated. On the display screen of the mobile phone terminal, the personal identification information (included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is included in "http: //www.~/jp" representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the server ( A URL to which an argument indicating ID) or history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted from the read two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game by the barcode reader function, it is stored in the server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument part. The history information is updated to the history information included in the argument part.

  It should be noted that the server side may be provided with a customized page for accepting customization of effect contents (for example, characters that appear).

  Also, in the two-dimensional code issuing screen shown in FIG. 409 (f), the cursor mC is in a state of being aligned with the end button, and in this state, by pressing the confirm button or chance button 136, the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. Displays a confirmation message asking whether the display of the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game may be really ended. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is issued, the information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 is erased from the pachinko machine 100. This confirmation message has an item of "Yes" and an item of "No". When the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor on the item of "Yes", FIG. 409 (a) is displayed. Return to the initial screen of the option menu shown. On the other hand, when the confirmation button or chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor on the item "No", the screen returns to the two-dimensional code issuing screen shown in FIG. 409 (f).

  In addition, when the two-dimensional code issuance screen is ended (returning to the initial screen of the option menu), the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game may not be reissued or may be reissued.

  FIG. 409 (g) is a diagram showing a state in which deletion of personal data is selected from the user menu. While the user menu shown in FIG. 409 (b) is displayed, the cursor mC is operated with the up / down / left / right buttons, and “clear personal data” is selected in the left selection window 2081. Further, a message window 2082 on the right side displays that the current game information (including personal information, history information, etc.) is deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  When the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where “personal data clear” is selected, a personal data clear screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 409 (b) is a diagram showing a personal data clear screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the confirm button or the chance button 136 is pressed in the state where “clear personal data” in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 409 (b) is selected, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a personal data clear screen. Is displayed.

  On the personal data clear screen, a confirmation message asking whether to delete the current game information (including personal information and history information) from the Pachinko machine 100 (a character string image "Do you want to delete game information?") Is displayed. This confirmation message is also displayed when the password is entered. On the other hand, when the password is not input, a message notifying that the password has not been input is displayed, and the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 409 (a) is displayed.

  The confirmation message shown in FIG. 409 (b) also has a “Yes” button and a “No” button. When the cursor is placed on the “Yes” button (the state shown in FIG. 409 (g)), the confirmation button or the When the chance button 136 is pressed, a deletion completion message is displayed, and then the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 409 (a) is displayed again. On the other hand, if the confirm button or chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is positioned on the “No” button, the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 409 (a) is displayed again. In the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is issued, the game information is automatically erased, but by preparing a personal data clear screen that can be forcibly erased, a player who has not registered as a member There is a case that the player who has registered as a member can obtain accurate information by deleting the information of.

  When the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed while the user menu is displayed to be terminated, a demo screen may be displayed.

  Whether the option menu or the user menu described above is displayed, if variable pattern display is started during various screen displays or operations, the option menu and user menu (various screen displays and operations) are canceled. Then, the variable display of symbols is started. For example, the symbol variation display is not performed, after the last one ball is shot in the game area 124, an option menu or a user menu is displayed, and the last one ball is the special map 1 starting port 230 or the special map 2 start. In the case of winning in the mouth 232, or when the game ball that happened to be clogged or caught in the game nail 238 begins to flow down and wins in the special figure 1 starting hole 230 or the special figure starting hole 232. Conceivable. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the variable display is not performed for a certain period, the option menu and the user menu can be displayed. Therefore, the game is started while the option menu and the user menu are displayed, and the game is continued. Even in the case where it is, the variable display of symbols can be started.

  Next, the setting for actual machine customization will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in each drawing of FIG. 410, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 410 (a) shows an initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the password is entered by entering the password in the user menu, and the login to the user mode is completed. Further, a predetermined BGM is output (not shown) from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 410 (b), the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 410 (a) to select actual machine customization, and the decision operation is performed by pressing the confirm button or chance button 136. The determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 410 (c) shows a screen for customizing the actual machine. In the effect display area 208d, character string images of “button operation sound”, “decorative pattern”, and “chance button” indicating customizable customizable items are displayed in order from the top. In the actual machine customization of this example, the operation sound (button operation sound) when the chance button 136 is operated, the display pattern of the decorative pattern, and the display of the chance button 136 (for example, the button image or the effective period image) can be set. It is like this. It should be noted that the other effects (for example, background display, BGM during pattern change display, effect mode, etc.) may be configured to be customizable. In FIG. 410 (c), the button operation sound, the display mode of the decorative pattern, and the display mode of the chance button 136 are all set to default. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, all the customization items are set to default when the power is turned on or when the user mode is not logged in.

  In FIG. 410 (e), only the button operation sound can be set, and the decorative symbol display mode and the chance button operation mode cannot be set. Therefore, in the effect display area 208d, the "button operation sound" and the "default" character string image of the setting state of the button operation sound are displayed in black, and the "decorative pattern", the "chance button" character string image and The "default" character string image showing these setting modes is displayed in gray. The customizable item increases when the game level indicating the game achievement level exceeds a predetermined value.

  In FIG. 410 (f), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 410 (e), and the button operation sound is selected as the bark of the cat. From the speaker 120, a sound "Nya ~", which is a cat button operation sound, is output. In this way, the button operation sound can be selected by pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  In FIG. 410 (g), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 410 (f), and the button operation sound is selected as the bark of the dog. From the speaker 120, a sound of "one" which is a dog button operation sound is output.

  In FIG. 410 (h), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 410 (g), and the button operation sound is selected as the default. From the speaker 120, the sound "ton" which is the default button operation sound is output.

  In FIG. 410 (i), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 410 (h), and the button operation sound is selected as the bark of the cat. From the speaker 120, a cat button operation sound "Nya ~" is output.

  In FIG. 410 (j), the button operation sound is determined to be a bark of a cat. If the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed while the “cat” of the button operation sound is selected, the button operation sound of the “cat” is determined. From the speaker 120. The sound of the cat's cry, "Nyaa", which is the decision sound, is output.

  When the cancel button is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 410 (j), the initial screen of the original menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 410 (k), and when the cancel button is pressed again, the original menu is closed. Then, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. When the original mode is set, an image showing the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string "Lv.51" indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  Next, the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment when the original mode is not set (password is not input (user mode is not logged in)) will be described with reference to FIG. 411. 411 (a) to 412 (i), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of each drawing. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 411 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 411 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 373 (f). Also, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation game, the BGM for fluctuation is output from the speaker 120. 411 to 413, the schematic diagram in which the changing BGM is output from the speaker 120 is omitted, and the schematic diagram in which the button operation sound is output from the speaker 120 is illustrated.

  FIG. 411 (b) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. The button display is displayed to display and the effective period image. The valid period image is displayed below the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 411 (b), but at this stage, since the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted.

  FIG. 411 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 411 (b) was started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 411 (d) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed for a while, and the rod-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened to the right.

  FIG. 411 (e) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility that the SP (super) reach effect may be developed. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a default button operation sound "ton".

  FIG. 411 (f) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

  411 (g), "decoration 7" in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c is temporarily stopped in a fluctuation state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  In FIG. 411 (h), the button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the valid period image is displayed below the button image. In FIG. 411 (h), the button operation acceptance period has started. This allows the player to know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  FIG. 411 (i) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has slightly passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened to the right.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 411 (j), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the character string “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed in front of the left middle right pattern. The image is displayed. The image of this character string is displayed as a notice of the change. The speaker 120 outputs a button operation sound "Sharan". The "Sharan" button operation sound is a default button operation sound during the reach production. In this way, the default button operation sound may differ depending on the effect being executed. In this example, the default button operation sound when the reach effect is not executed is “ton”, and the default button operation sound when the reach effect is executed is “Sharan”. The default button operation sound may always be the same regardless of the effect being executed.

  FIG. 412 (a) shows a state following FIG. 411 (j). In FIG. 412 (a), the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to a white display due to the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the change icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 412 (a) to (j).

  FIGS. 412 (b) to 412 (i) show a state in which an SP reach effect with a scene in which two samurai fight is performed. In FIG. 412 (e), the button image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  FIG. 412 (g) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed for a while, and the rod-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened to the right.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation acceptance period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect in which the up image of the face of one samurai shown in FIG. 412 (h) is cut-in displayed. Is executed. In addition, a voice “Kean”, which is a button operation sound during the SP reach effect, is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 412 (i) is a continuation of the SP reach effect, in which an effect in which one samurai has won is made, and the advance notification is made that the result of the change determination is likely to be a win.

  Next, the effect in the original mode setting (password input (user mode login)) state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 413. 413 (a)-(h), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time series in this order. Further, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of each drawing. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 413 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 413 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 373 (f). Also, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation game, the BGM for fluctuation is output from the speaker 120. Further, when the original mode is set, an image showing the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string "Lv.51" indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  FIG. 413 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. The button display is displayed to display and the effective period image. The valid period image is displayed below the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. The player knows that the button effect has started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 413 (b), but at this stage, since the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted.

  FIG. 413 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 413 (b) was started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 413 (d) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility that the SP (super) reach effect may be developed. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image. In addition, in this example, the button operation sound is set to the bark of the cat in the actual machine customization. For this reason, the speaker 120 outputs the sound "Nya ~" which is the button operation sound of the cry of a cat.

  Then, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 411 (f) and (g) is executed, and in FIG. 413 (e), the button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image. It is displayed. In FIG. 413 (h), the button operation acceptance period has started. This allows the player to know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 413 (f), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the character string of “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed in front of the left middle right pattern. The image is displayed. The image of this character string is displayed as a notice of the change. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "cat", which is the sound of the cat that is the button operation sound being set.

  413 (g) and 413 (h) have shown the state where SP reach production | presentation with the scene which two samurai fight is performed. In FIG. 413 (g), the button image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation acceptance period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect in which the up image of the face of one samurai shown in FIG. 413 (h) is cut-in displayed. Is executed. In addition, a voice “Kean”, which is a button operation sound during the SP reach effect, is output from the speaker 120. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the button operation sound is set to other than the default by customizing the actual machine, the button operation sound during execution of the SP reach effect is a voice of "Kean".

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the button operation sound set in the actual machine customization (“Nya-” in this example) is output during the SP reach effect non-execution during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and during the SP reach effect. Outputs the default button operation sound for SP reach (in this example, “Kein”). On the contrary, the operation sound during the SP reach effect may be made selectable by actual machine customization, and the default button operation sound may be output when the SP reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, during the big hit game, the button operation sound set by the actual machine customization may be output, and the default operation sound may be output. In addition, depending on the game state (during change, shortening of working hours, normal state, during power support, during non-power support, during big hit game, during demonstration production, etc.), the button operation sound set by the actual machine customization is output and output. You may not be allowed to do so.

  The operation sound of the chance button 136 in the option menu may not be customized or may be customized.

  If both the chance button 136 and other operating means (touch panel, confirm button, etc.) are enabled and the other operating means is operated instead of the chance button 136, the customized chance button 136 is displayed. May be output, the same operation sound as the operation sound of the default chance button 136 may be output, and operation sounds for other operation means may be output. You may do it. In this way, the operation sound of the chance button 136 and the operation sound of other operation means may be the same regardless of the presence or absence of customization. Also, they may be different.

  FIG. 414 shows a timing chart regarding the detection of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) and the button operation sound output. The upper part of FIGS. 414 (a) and 414 (b) shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected, and the level ON indicates a state in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected. The middle row shows whether or not the default button operation sound (ton) is output in a time series. The level “output” is a state in which a button operation sound of “ton” is output, and the level “non-output” is a state in which a button operation sound of “ton” is output. The lower row shows the presence or absence of the output of the button operation sound (catalog) of the call of the cat in chronological order. The level "output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is being output, and the level "non-output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is being output.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (a), a button operation sound is output after a predetermined delay time from when the chance button sensor detection becomes the ON level. When the button operation sound is not set or the default button operation sound is selected by customizing the actual device, the button operation sound of "ton" is output. Further, when the button operation sound of the cry of a cat is set by the actual device customization, the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is output. Further, the button operation sound of "ton" is shorter than the button operation sound of "nyah".

  FIG. 414 (b) shows a timing chart when the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. In this example, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit six times. When the button operation sound is not set or the default button operation sound is selected by customizing the actual device, if the chance button 136 is pressed before a part of the button operation sound is output, the corresponding “n” is selected. Is canceled, and the first "to" of the button operation sound is output based on the depression. In FIG. 414 (b), a part of the button operation sound "n" is canceled five times. The canceled "n" part is indicated by a double-headed arrow. When the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit as shown in FIG. 414 (b), the speaker 120 outputs a button operation sound "totototototon".

  In addition, when the button operation sound of the cat's bark is set in the actual device customization, if the chance button 136 is pressed before a part of the button operation sound is output, The sound is canceled, and the first "ni" of the button operation sound is output based on the pressing. If the chance button 136 is pressed before the next "ni" after the "ni" is output, the "ni" is canceled and the first "ni" of the button operation sound is output. As a result, the button operation sound "Nya ~" based on the second opportunity button 136 being pressed is output after canceling the button operation sound "Nya ~" based on the first pressing of the chance button 136. Based on the press of the chance button 136, the part “” is canceled. In this way, in this example, the button operation sound that is canceled and output is further canceled. In FIG. 414 (b), a part of the button operation sound "-" is canceled five times. A double-headed arrow indicates the part of "Cha" that was canceled. When the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit as shown in FIG. 414 (b), the speaker 120 outputs a button operation sound "Ninni Ninya ~".

  Next, the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment when the original mode is not set (password is not input (user mode is not logged in)) is described with reference to FIG. 415. 415 (a) ~ (f), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time sequence in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 415 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 415 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 373 (f).

  FIG. 415 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect has started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. The button display is displayed to display and the effective period image. The valid period image is displayed below the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 415 (b), the player knows that the button effect has started, but at this stage, the button operation cannot be accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, so the chance button Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation cannot be accepted.

  FIG. 415 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 415 (b) was started. The button operation acceptance period has just passed, and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened to the right.

  FIG. 415 (d) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility that the SP (super) reach effect may be developed. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 411 (f) to 412 (c) are executed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 415 (e) and (f) are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 415 (e) and (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (e) and (f).

  In this example, the display mode regarding the chance button 136 is not set in the actual machine customization, and is the default mode. The button images and the effective period images shown in FIGS. 415 (b), (c), and (f) have default display modes.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an effect when the display mode regarding the chance button 136 is set to “panda” in the actual machine customization when the original mode is set will be described with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 (a) shows a display screen for actual machine customization. "Panda" is selected as the display mode for the chance button.

  416 (b) ~ (g), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time sequence in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 416 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 416 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 373 (f). Further, when the original mode is set, an image showing the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string “Lv.51” indicating a game level and a gauge image indicating points up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  FIG. 416 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, the character image is displayed in the left quarter area within the button effect area, and the chance button is displayed in the remaining three quarter area. An image of 136 is displayed. When “panda” is set, a panda character image having a chan button 136 is displayed as an image related to the chance button 136. The number "6" is displayed on the belly part of the panda, and the remaining time of the button operation reception period is displayed. As described above, in the actual machine customization, the effect display can be customized.

  The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Therefore, due to the image of the button effect area, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and invisible. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 416 (c), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation valid period has started, and since it is the button operation reception period, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  In FIG. 416 (d), the remaining time of the button operation acceptance period is 5 seconds, and the number "5" is displayed on the belly of the panda.

  FIG. 416 (e) exemplifies the display of the button effect that is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The character image of the panda is erased, and the image of the character string "Chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility that the SP (super) reach effect may be developed. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by displaying the character string image. If the chance button 136 is detected to be pressed during the valid operation period, the number displayed on the belly of the panda is set to “0”, the character image of the panda is displayed, and then “chance is !!”. The image of the character string of may be displayed, or only the number displayed on the belly of the panda may be erased and then the image of the character string of "Chance is !!" may be displayed. It's a chance after you erase the numbers for each character image! ! The image of the character string “” may be displayed.

  The countdown of the operation valid period may end at 0, or nothing may be displayed on the panda's belly after the number is "1".

  Thereafter, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 411 (f) to 412 (c) is executed, and in FIG. 416 (f), the image display area is vertically divided by the horizontal boundary line at the center to display the upper row. The character image of one samurai is displayed in the area, and the character image of the other samurai is displayed in the lower display area.

  In FIG. 416 (g), the button image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the display mode regarding the chance button 136 is set to other than the default (in this example, “panda”), the chance is displayed during the SP reach production. As a display relating to the button 136, as shown in FIG. 96 (g), a button image and a valid period image in a default display mode are displayed.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 to 416 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game table provided with a rendering means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120) and an operating means (for example, a chance button 136), The production means is a means capable of at least executing the first type of production, and the first type of production is an production related to the operation means (for example, a display production related to the chance button 136 or a production of button operation sound). The first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects (for example, a customizable button operation sound, a customizable chance button image), and the plurality of selection effects are games. Is at least an effect that can be selected by the player, and the effect means is the plurality of selected effects that are selected at least by the player (for example, an actual machine scrap). One effect of Mize (see FIG. 410) (hereinafter, “first effect (for example, sound effect in which button operation sound is“ Nya ””, display regarding chance button 136 in display mode of “panda” ( 416 (c) (see FIG. 416 (c)))), which is a means capable of executing at least one of the first-type effects (hereinafter, "second effect (for example, button)"). Sound effect (refer to FIG. 414) in which the operation sound is “Kein”, default button image and effective period image (refer to FIG. 416 (g))))), and the effect means is In one case, it is a means capable of performing at least the first effect, the effect means is a means capable of performing at least the second effect in the second case, and in the first case Is the first period (eg SP It is a period during which an effect other than a reach is being performed), and the second case is a case during a second period (for example, a period during which an SP reach effect is being performed). , Is characterized.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, when the operation means is operated, the first effect selected by the player is performed in the first period, and the second effect is executed in the second period. , It is possible to realize a game table with a display feature. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production and improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the first type of effect may include an operation sound and a display related to the operation. Further, "at least the first effect can be executed" may indicate that only the first effect can be executed, or that one or a plurality of effects including the first effect can be executed. May be shown. Further, "at least the second effect can be executed" may mean that only the second effect can be executed at least, or one or more effects including the second effect can be executed. May be shown. The "plurality of selection effects" may mean "there are a plurality of effects that the player can select", and "a plurality of selection effects (for example, customizable button operation sounds by the player ( Default (cat, dog)), one production (for example, a cat) can be selected. "

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is means for not executing at least the first rendering in the second case.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the first effect is not performed in the second period, it may be possible to keep the effect clear and prevent the player from getting tired.

  Here, "does not execute at least the first effect" may indicate that only the first effect is not executed, and one or more effects including the first effect are not executed (for example, Audio may not be output or displayed).

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is means for not executing at least the first rendering in the third case, and the rendering means is the second rendering device in the fourth case. Means for not performing at least the effect, the third case is a case where there is no operation of the operating means in the first period, the fourth case is the second period In the case where the operation means is not operated.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the effect is not executed when the operation means is not operated, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the first period is a period including at least a third period, and the second period is a period including at least a fourth period, The third period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted (for example, a button operation acceptance period), and the fourth period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation unit can be accepted. (For example, a button operation acceptance period).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first period and the second period are periods including the reception period, it may be possible to increase variations in production and improve the interest of the game.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 includes the second effect means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208), and the effect means is the first effect means (for example, the speaker 120). The second effect means is a means capable of at least executing a second type effect, and the second type effect means an effect related to the operation means (for example, a display effect related to the chance button 136 (button image). And effective display of the effective period image))).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation of the operation device may be further promoted by providing the second effect device and performing the operation related to the operation device by the plurality of effect devices. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of production and improve the interest of the game. The second effect means may be a means capable of executing only the second type effect. Further, the second effect means may be a means capable of executing one or a plurality of kinds of effects including the second kind of effect.

  Further, the rendering means (first rendering means) is a sound output means (for example, the speaker 120). The first type of effect is a sound that is output when the operation means is operated.

  Further, the second rendering means is a display means. The second type of presentation is a display related to the operating means (for example, a display simulating the operating means, a display according to the operation of the operating means, a display regarding a period during which the operation of the operating means can be accepted (display of an effective period image The numbers on the belly of the panda (see FIG. 416 (c)), etc.).

  Further, regarding customization in the original mode, when a password is entered, if an experience value is obtained based on the information (game information, game level (for example, game time, appearance produced, etc.) included in the password, and exceeds a certain value. The player can select an effect corresponding to (the game level goes up), information about what has been done on the Internet, etc.).

(Example 13)
A specific example of the button display by the button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 417. 417 (a) to (g) show another effect image when the button image is displayed in the upper part of the image display area and the effective period image is displayed in the lower part as the button display of the button operation animation, for example. It shows a state in which at least a part of the display of the button image and the effective period image is hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 417 (a), the display of the button image and the display of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (b), the display of the button image and the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image before the start of the valid period for accepting the button operation. Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (c), the display of the button image and the effective period image may be hidden by displaying another effect image at the start timing of the effective period for accepting the button operation. Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (d), the display of the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the effective period for accepting the button operation. Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (e), the display of the button image and the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the button press animation (during the display of the second image). Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (f), the display of the button image and the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the button press animation (during the display of the third image). Further, as shown in FIG. 417 (g), the display of the button image and the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image at the end timing or after the end of the effective period for receiving the button operation.

  417 (h) to (i) show a panel image by displaying another effect image when a panel image, an animation notifying the operation method, and an effective period image are displayed as the touch operation request display on the touch panel. , An animation for notifying an operation method and a part of the effective period image are hidden. In this way, not only the button image but also the display for prompting the player to operate the operation means (for example, the operation request display on the touch panel) may be hidden by another effect image. In addition, the animation in which the finger moves (notification animation of the touch operation method) may be hidden in another effect image.

  417 (k) to (m) show a state in which a part of the button image as the rotating means is hidden by another effect image. Also, the valid period image displayed below the button image is hidden. In this way, the display indicating that the button is operating (rotating, vibrating, etc.) may be hidden by another effect display. Note that the rotation speed of the button image increases in the order of FIGS. 417 (k), (l), and (m).

  As shown in FIGS. 417 (n) to 417 (n), the display of the button image and the display of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. In the case where the effective period image is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame shape so that the rod-shaped portion gradually becomes shorter in the right direction as the period elapses, the start position of the left end of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image is changed to another effect image. It may be at least hidden in the display (see FIG. 417 (n)), and the middle part of the horizontally long rectangular frame shape of the effective period image (the middle part of the effective period, the part near the start position, the part near the end position) is separated. Of the effect image may be hidden (see FIG. 417 (o)), or the end position of the right end of the rod-shaped portion of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image (FIG. 417 (p)). reference). Further, both the effective period image and the button image may be hidden by displaying another effect image, and only one of the images of the effective period image and the button image may be hidden by displaying another effect image. May be. Further, the animation display of the effective period image and the button image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. Also, in the case of a valid period image, an animation that changes over time (such as an animation in which the valid period image decreases) or an animation that changes according to button operation (when the button is operated, the length of the rod-shaped portion of the valid period image becomes long. A part or all of (for example, animation) may be hidden by the display of another effect image. In the case of a button image, an animation that prompts the user to operate the button (such as an animation that changes the LED from the non-lit state to the lit state), an animation during the button operation (such as a dented button animation), or the appearance or deletion of the button image. Part or all of the animation of may be hidden by the display of another effect image.

  When the operation means (chance button 136, touch panel m700a, confirm button, etc.) is not detected, the effect display according to the operation (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to notice effect, flame image, etc.) is displayed. May not be displayed, or may be displayed after the expiration of the valid period even when no operation is detected.

  Even if the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the button operation animation is not performed, and the image of the button before the operation (for example, the first image) and the image of the button after the operation are displayed according to the operation of the button. (For example, the third image) may be switched.

  Although the present embodiment describes the chance button 136, the present invention is not limited to the chance button and can be applied to other operating means (trigger type operating means, jog stick type operating means, touch panel type operating means, etc.). Is.

  Note that at least a part or all of the effect display (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to the notice effect, image of flame, etc.) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit (for example, the chance button 136) is another effect display (for example, Notice display (pre-reading notice, notice of the change), error notice (illegal notice such as ball removal notice and magnet detection error), icon (holding icon, change icon), hit notification (right hit notification, left hit notification), etc. May be overlapped by at least a part or all of the above).

  The effective operation period of the operation means is not limited to the meter, and may be notified by a number or an image other than the number.

  The display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) is a second type of display (for example, the display that does not use the operating means in the variation or the prefetch notice display, the hold icon, the variable icon, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol). , Hitting notification, error display, mission display, display regarding customization in the user mode, game method display, option menu, etc.) may be at least displayed. Here, the display of the second type may be a display of a type different from the effect of the first type.

  In addition, the game table (for example, Pachinko machine 100) is a third type of effect (for example, display that does not use operation means in the variation or prefetch notice display, hold icon, variation icon, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, striking) Direction notification, error display, mission system display, user mode customization display, game method display, option menu display system production, production moving means production operation, decoration means (eg, lamp) production, etc. ) May be executable. Here, the third-type effect may be an effect different from both the first-type effect and the second-type effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  The above-described embodiment relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine. In the conventional gaming table, various displays are displayed by the display means. However, the conventional game table has room for improvement in display. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game table having a display feature. According to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming machine equipped with operating means. However, the conventional game table has room for improvement in the operating means. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game table having a characteristic operation means. According to the above-mentioned embodiment, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic operation means.

  Further, the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. The pachinko machine may be an enclosed type pachinko machine that encloses the balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use. The payout may be performed by credit.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the detailed description above and thereafter, particularly the matters described in the embodiments and the modified examples.

  The gaming table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Supplementary note A1) A gaming machine provided with an operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display, and the first type of display is A display related to the operation means, a first display of the first type of display is a display including at least a first image, and the first display is a display including at least a second image. The first display is a display including at least a third image, the first display is a display including at least a first change in the first case, and the first change The means is to change from the first image to the third image through the second image, and the first case is a case where the operation means is operated. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note A2) In the game machine according to Supplementary Note A1, at least a part of the operating means is a means capable of performing at least the first aspect, and at least a part of the operating means is the second aspect. Is at least a viable means, at least a part of the operating means is a means capable of at least performing a second change in the first case, the second change is the first A game table characterized in that at least the mode is changed to the second mode.

(Supplementary note A3) The game machine according to supplementary note A1 or A2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second case, and the second case is A gaming machine characterized in that it is during the period of the first period, and the first period is a period in which at least the operation of the operating means can be accepted.

(Supplementary note A4) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display including the first image in the third case, The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means, and the third case is a case where the operation means is not operated, A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A5) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display, The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case, and the second display means a display displayed after the third image is displayed. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note A6) The game machine according to supplementary notes A1 to A5, characterized in that the display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.

(Supplementary note B1) A game machine provided with a production means and an operation means, wherein the production means is a means capable of at least executing a first type production, and the first type production is , The effect related to the operation means, the first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects, the plurality of selection effects is an effect that can be at least selected by the player. The production means is a means capable of executing at least one production (hereinafter, referred to as “first production”) of the plurality of selected productions selected by the player, and the production means is It is a means capable of executing one of the first type of effects (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect"), and the effecting means executes at least the first effect in the first case. It is a possible means, the production means, In the case of two, it is a means capable of performing at least the second effect, the first case is a case of a first period, the second case is a second A gaming machine characterized in that it is a period.

(Supplementary note B2) The game machine according to supplementary note B1, wherein the effect means is means for not executing at least the first effect in the second case.

(Supplementary Note B3) The game machine according to Supplementary Note B1 or B2, wherein the rendering means is a means that does not execute at least the first rendering in the third case, and the rendering means is the fourth case. In the means for not performing at least the second effect, the third case is a case where the operation means is not operated in the first period, and the fourth case is The gaming table, characterized in that it is a case where the operation means is not operated in the second period.

(Supplementary note B4) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the first period is a period including at least a third period, and the second period is a second period. It is a period including at least four periods, the third period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted, and the fourth period is at least the operation of the operation means is accepted. A gaming machine characterized by being a possible period.

(Supplementary note B5) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B4, further comprising a second effect means, wherein the effect means is a first effect means, and the second effect means. The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a second type effect, and the second type effect is an effect related to the operation means.

(Supplementary Note C1) A game table including a display unit and an operating unit, wherein the operating unit is a unit capable of performing at least a first operation, and the operating unit is a second operation. Is a means capable of performing at least, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display, the first type of display is a display related to the operating means, The first display of the first type of display is a display related to the first operation, and the display means displays at least the second display of the first type of display. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a part of the second display in the first case, and the display means is the second case in the second case. At least part of the display of The first case is a case where the first display is displayed, and the first case is a case where the first operation is performed. Yes, the second case is a case where the first display is displayed, and the second case is a case where the second operation is performed. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note C2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the third case, and the third case means the operation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a period during which at least operation of the means can be accepted.

(Supplementary Note C3) The game machine according to Supplementary Note C1 or C2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display, and the third display. Is a display related to the second operation, wherein the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note C4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C3, wherein the display means is a means in which the second display is not displayed in the fourth case, and the fourth case. The game table, wherein the first display is displayed, and the fourth case is a case where the operation means is not operated.

(Supplementary Note C5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C4, wherein the first operation is an operation different from the second operation.

(Supplementary Note C6) The gaming machine according to supplementary notes C1 to C5, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.

(Supplementary note D1) A game machine including display means and operation means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying at least a first type of display, and the first type of display is It is a display regarding the operation means, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display in the first case, and the first case, It is the case of the first period, the first period is a period including a second period, the second period is a period in which at least the operation of the operating means is not accepted. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first period is a period including at least a period during which the operation of the operating means can be accepted.

(Supplementary Note D2) The game console according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein the first display is a display regarding a reception period of the operating means.

(Supplementary note D3) The game machine according to supplementary note D1 or D2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display in the first case. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note D4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D3, wherein the first period is a period including at least a third period, and the first period is a fourth period. A period including at least a period, the third period is a period before the second period is started, and the fourth period is after the second period ends. The third period is a period in which at least the operation of the operating unit can be accepted, and the fourth period is a period in which the operation of the operating unit can be at least received. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note D5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D4, wherein the first period is a period including at least a fifth period, and the fifth period is the operation. A game table characterized by being a period during which at least operation of the means is not accepted.

(Supplementary note D6) The game machine according to supplementary notes D1 to D5, characterized in that the display means is means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.

(Supplementary note E1) A game machine including a plurality of operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display, and the first type of display. Is a display relating to the first operating means of the plurality of operating means, the display means, in the first case, at least a first display of the first type of display. Displayable means, the first case is a case of a first period, the first period of at least a period during which the operation of the first operating means can be accepted. That is, the first period is a period in which at least the operation of the second operating means of the plurality of operating means can be accepted, the display means, in the second case, the By means capable of displaying at least the second display of the first type of display In the third case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display of the first type of display, and the third display is one of the second displays. It is a display including at least a part, the second case is a case where there is at least an operation of the first operation means in the first case, and the third case is the In the first case, this is a case where at least the operation of the second operation means is performed, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note E2) The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second type of display, and the second type of display means the second operation. A game table characterized in that it is a display relating to means.

(Supplementary note E3) The game machine according to supplementary note E1 or E2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fourth display of the first type of display in the first case. The gaming table is characterized in that the fourth display is a display relating to at least a period during which the operation of the first operating means can be accepted.

(Supplementary note E4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3, wherein the display means is a means in which at least the second display is not displayed in the fourth case, and the display means is In the fifth case, the third display is a means that is not displayed at least, and the fourth case is a case where the first operation means is not operated, and the fifth case The gaming table is characterized in that the second operating means is not operated.

(Supplementary note E5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E4, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display imitating the first operation means. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note F1) A game table including an operating means and a rotating means, wherein the operating means is a means capable of performing at least a first operation, and the rotating means performs at least a second operation. Executable means, the first operation is an operation in which at least a part of the operating means is rotated in the first mode, and the second operation is at least one of the rotating means. Is a motion of rotating the part in the second mode,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note F2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, wherein the first portion of the operating means is a portion that makes one round in a first time in the first case, and a second portion of the rotating means. Is a part that makes one round in a second time in the second case, and the first case is a case where the operating means is rotated in the first aspect, and the second case The gaming table is characterized in that the rotating means rotates in the second mode.

(Supplementary Note F3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first type of display, and the first type of display means the operating means. The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display of the first type of display in the third case, and the third case means the operation. It is a case where at least the first operation is executed by means, and the rotating means is the first display, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

(Supplementary Note F4) The game machine according to Supplementary Note F3, wherein the first display is a display that is displayed at least during the operation reception period, and the operation reception period is at least the operation of the operation means can be received. A game table characterized by a long period of time.

(Supplementary Note F5) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3 or F4, wherein the operating means is a button, and the first display is a display including at least a button image, and the button image is A game machine characterized by being an image simulating at least a part of the button.

(Supplementary Note F6) The game console according to Supplementary Notes 3 to 5, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second type of display.
[Seventh Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 418 to 462 are basically used only for the description of the seventh embodiment, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment In the description, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 418 to 462 are given priority. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 418. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be openable / closable, and has a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 419 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 418 seen from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, having an opening opening upward at the upper rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 420 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the upper side of the rendering device 206 to the right side, and the game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 has a first flow-down path on the left side of the production device 206 as a decoration member as a path along which a shot game ball flows down, and a decoration member as a path along which a shot game ball flows down. And a second flow-down path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first flow-down path may be referred to as “left hitting”, and hitting a game ball on the second flow-down path may be called “right hitting”.

  In the production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol. The holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 are arranged. Further, the rendering device 206 operates the panel lamp 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  Further, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening. 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a winning in the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226 is won. In this case, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental ball”). There is) and is included.

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is provided in the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. In addition, it can be said that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is arranged in the electric power tube. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. In addition, the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Since the universal figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 thereunder are in the second downflow route on the right side of the rendering device 206, proceed to the first downflow route on the left side of the rendering device 206. However, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting port 228 or enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. In addition, because the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is in the first downflow route which is on the left side across the production device 206, the game ball which has proceeded to the second downflow route which is on the right side across the production device 206 is the special diagram 1 It does not enter the starting opening 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged below the game board 200 between the special drawing 1 starting opening 230 and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232. . The variable winning port 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed. When the display is stopped, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  A plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a straight line in a region narrower than the diameter of the game ball in a region from the special opening 1 starting port 230 to the left end of the variable winning port 234. For this reason, at the time of a big hit, right hitting (how to hit the game ball to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper part of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202) and hit the second downflow route. If the ball does not fly, the game ball does not win the variable winning port 234.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146 and The launch mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Reach the outlet 240 by winning at (the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or only passing through the universal drawing starting opening 228. To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and four flower patterns are vertically arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball of the board lamp 224. The board surface lamps 224b arranged side by side are arranged, and the board surface lamps 224a composed of a plurality of (10 in this example) circular lamps arranged along the outer rail 202 on which the game balls can roll are arranged on the right side of the board surface.

  The board surface lamp 224a is adapted to perform lighting or blinking in a predetermined right-handing notification lighting pattern when performing a notification for prompting a right-handing. When the right-handing notification lighting pattern is used, for example, the emission brightness of 10 circular lamps is sequentially changed from the upper side to the lower side to perform the right-handing notification, or two or three adjacent circles are combined into a circle. The luminous intensity of the lamp group is set to be different from that of the remaining circular lamp group, and gradation control is performed so that the group of circular lamp groups sequentially moves from the upper side to the lower side. It is also possible to perform a right-handed notification that allows the user to visually recognize it as if it were falling.

  In addition, the panel lamp 224a can be turned on or blinked in a predetermined look-ahead advance notice lighting pattern when performing advance notice advance notification. For example, in the normal production, when the odd-numbered and even-numbered 10 circular lamps are alternately turned on, the pre-reading advance notice informs that all 10 circular lamps are turned on. It is possible to use a lighting pattern that is different from the normal presentation and the right-handed notification.

  The board surface lamp 224b is adapted to perform lighting or blinking in a predetermined right-handing notification lighting pattern when performing a notification for prompting right-handing. When the right-handing notification lighting pattern is used, for example, the emission brightness of the four petal-shaped lamps is sequentially changed from the upper side to the lower side to perform the right-handing notification so that the petals run down along the right-handing direction. It is possible to make a right-handed notification to be visually confirmed.

  In addition, the panel lamp 224b can be turned on or blinked in a predetermined look-ahead notice notification lighting pattern when performing a look-ahead notice. For example, in the normal production, when the odd-numbered and even-numbered four petal-shaped lamps are alternately turned on, the pre-reading notice informs the petal-shaped lamps for the number of holdings in order from the bottom to hold the number of holdings. It is possible to use a lighting pattern in which the petal-shaped lamp corresponding to the hold related to the look-ahead notification is lighted with a specific light emission color while performing the notification.

  In addition, the panel lamp 224 is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined normal lighting effect when the right-handed notification or the pre-reading notification is not issued.

  Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board lamp 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200 can roll, and the passed ball is moved to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends of the left and right doors 246a and 246b, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portions of the holes of the lattice are completely closed (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible. Good.

  A status notification lamp 222 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 200. The status notification lamp 222 is composed of four lamps (for example, LEDs) arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Each lamp of the status notification lamp 222 functions as a right-handed lamp, a big hit medium lamp, a non-electric support lamp, and an electric support lamp in order from the left. The right-handed lamp is turned on when the player should make a right-handed turn, and is turned off otherwise. The big hit lamp turns on during the big hit game and turns off at other times. The non-electric support lamp is turned on during the non-electric support state and turned off in other cases. The electric support lamp is turned on during the electric support state and turned off in other cases.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality of program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received). Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. Symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined pattern display device, for example A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the universal figure display device 210 and various status display parts 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the state notification lamp 222, etc. ) For controlling the display circuit 330 for performing display control, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. Drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like and a pachinko machine. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Note that the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, but the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600. A signal such as a command may be bidirectionally transmitted between them.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the board surface lamp 224), A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430, A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, image data stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and the like. To read the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates a display image by use to display an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 is for controlling the ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like, and the game board lamp 532 are controlled. Between the game board lamp drive circuit 530, the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, and between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540. Is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication.

  Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 422 (a) to 422 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 422 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all the seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. . These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts (corresponding to the variation time in the present embodiment), the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is started after starting "variable display of special figure 2". Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol variable display. As will be described later, the variable display of symbols may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 422 (a), 10 types of special drawings from "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 422 (a), the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the special figure variation game started after the jackpot game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to an electric power support state (sometimes called a time saving state). Although the electric support state will be described later in detail, a state of transitioning to the electric support state is called a high probability state of a normal figure, and a state of not transitioning to the low power state of a support is called a low probability state of a normal figure. The 15R special jackpot design "Special drawing A" is the special drawing high-probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R special jackpot pattern "Special drawing B" is the special figure low-probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

  “Special map C” is a 2R jackpot pattern called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, and is in a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R. “Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These “special map E” and “special map F” are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the electric support state. These “special map E” and “special map F” are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the electric support state. When the game state is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, when the special figure E or the special figure F is stopped and displayed in the special figure variation game, the electric support state is maintained. Further, when the special figure E or the special figure F is stopped and displayed in the special figure variation game in the special figure low probability general figure high probability state, the electric support 100 times is given again.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, and both are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without 2R electric support. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, "special drawing" By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small. The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or an outfall in the hit determination, and then based on the result of the hit determination, After the symbol variation display, it is configured to determine which of the "special figure A" to the "special figure J" is to be stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display device 212, 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, special figure probability change state). The presence / absence of electricity and the presence / absence of electric power support) are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, for example, in addition to the determination of the stop symbol. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game when the stop symbol is determined, for example, and determines the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, such as the stop symbol, the number of rounds, and The profit status may be appropriately associated with each other.

  FIG. 422 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  And when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A" or the 15R big jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7") -Decoration 7 ", etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" suddenly changed or a sudden 2R big hit called "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “special drawing I” and the second deviation of “special drawing J”, stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 422 (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 422 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 repeats the illumination of all seven segments and the illumination of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 422 (c), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 423. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 423 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Operation permission, initial value setting, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When the voltage is less than (9V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) Outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub-control unit 400), setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the game store clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 421. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined to be a big hit by the hit determination of whether it is a big hit or not, a random number value for hit special character determination used for lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special character fluctuation game is generated. A random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of the random number counter for determining the special figure for hitting (hereinafter, referred to as “random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to random number counter for determining special figure for hitting”). ) Is updated. Also, a random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of the universal figure winning random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value used for determining whether or not the universal figure variation game is won (hereinafter, referred to as "the universal figure winning random number counter. The random number counter for initial value generation ") is updated. For example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the random number for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, a value is stored from the random number counter storage area for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308. The value is acquired, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Similarly, the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the universal figure winning random number counter is updated. The initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the hit special figure determining random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter are also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 424. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 subsequent to step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (processing abnormality is not detected). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 421 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). If there is a match with (the information indicating that there is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the passing through the universal figure starting opening 228. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205 and step S209 subsequent thereto, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating processing in step S207, the random number counters for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for hitting special figure determination and the random number for general figure winning performed in step S115 are updated, and In the basic random number updating process of step S209, the hit special symbol determining random number counter and the universal figure winning random number counter used in the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as the random number for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308 to generate the random number for determining special figure for hitting. Value is added to the acquired value and stored in the original random number for determining special drawing for hitting. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number for determining special drawing for hitting. Further, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the hitting special figure determining random number counter makes one round, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the hitting special figure determining random number counter The value of is acquired and set in the random number counter for determining the special drawing for the time of hit. For example, the value obtained from a random number counter for determining a special figure for hitting that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for determining special figure for hitting, and the special value for hitting is obtained. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the figure determining random number counter and to determine that the hit special figure determining random number counter has completed one round. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for determining special symbols for hitting has made one round, an initial value for determining that the random number counter for general figure winning has made one round. A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The random number counter for determining the special figure for hit may be provided with a counter for obtaining the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value for special figure 2, or they may be the same. Counter may be used.

  In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation time determination random number counter that generates a special figure fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game is updated. Further, the random number counter for determining the universal figure fluctuation time for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time for determining the symbol variation time in the universal figure fluctuation game is updated.

  In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying / stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning openings 226, 234 or the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number is 4), a random number value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) A random number for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 of 318 is acquired and provided in the RAM 308. The random number for determining the special figure for hitting is acquired from the random number for determining special figure for hitting and is stored in the random number storage area for special figure in the order of acquisition. A combination of a random number value for hit determination and a random value for determining special character for hitting in a special figure 1 random number value storage area (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 random value set" or "special figure 1 start information"). Yes) is stored by the same number as the number of special figure 1 reservations stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 random value group with the highest holding order (first and stored in the oldest) is stored. At the same time as the deletion, the processing is performed so that the retention order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 random number set is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 reserved numbers increases by one, a new special figure 1 random number value group data is added to the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. Written.

  If there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special opening 2 of FIG. The random number for hit special drawing determination is acquired from the figure determination random number counter and stored in the special drawing 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of a random number value for hit determination and a special value determination for hitting special figure in the special figure 2 random number value storage area (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 set of random number values" or "special figure 2 start information" Yes) is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by 1, the data of the special figure 2 random number value with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. It is processed so that the reservation order of the data of the group is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by one, a new set of special figure 2 random number values is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest reservation order.

  When there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Stored in the universal figure random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED configuring the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  In addition, in the ordinary figure state update processing at the timing when the ordinary figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the winning symbol The seven-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the general-purpose display device 210 has a display mode. Lighting / light-out driving control of the seven-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 422 (c)) and the deviating symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 422 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of alignment, the universal figure per hit flag is turned off, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of the general figure fluctuation game that is held. When is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. When the hit determination is performed and the winning is determined, the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no winning, the universal flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 subsequent to step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special map pre-reading process, if there is a prize in the special map 1 starting opening 230 or the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the starting information related to the hold increased due to the winning is pre-read and the result of the special drawing variation game related to the hold is determined. The stop symbol and the variation time and the like based on are determined in advance before the determination of win / fail in the special figure related lottery process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 443 and 444.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following plural (nine in this example) processing according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is used. Re-store it in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the turning on / off of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 420 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from left to right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Further, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 422 (a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special map B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special map probability fluctuation flag is on, the special map C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure Stochastic flag is off, Special figure F when the figure probability variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first deviation flag is on In the case of the special figure I, when the second deviation flag is turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is in each mode. A setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), sudden probability variation design (special figure C), sudden shortening design (special figure D) ), Hidden probability variation design (special map E), suddenly normal design (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first off pattern (special map I) ), And the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number of electric support (details described later) storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (eg, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the electric support frequency is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 (for example, 100 times), and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the number of power support times is set in the power support frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned on. The electric power support state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of universal figure (normal figure probability change). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric Chu extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The game state due to these uncertain changes in general figures, short changes in general figures, and spread of electric chu is collectively called electric support (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is greater than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. The notification of the jackpot determination result of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the special lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the start opening 230 shown in FIG.

  In the case of special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), a set of special figure 2 random number values is acquired from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random number storage area and acquired. For the hit judgment random number value in the set of special figure 2 random number values, refer to the hit / miss judgment table shown in FIG. 427 (a) or 427 (b) to make a big hit or a small hit. Or, it is decided whether or not to leave. Next, when the winning / judgment determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 shows the special value shown in FIG. 428 (b) for the random value for special figure determination for hitting in the obtained special figure 2 random value storage area. The design (stop design) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 is determined with reference to the determination table in FIG. Although details will be described later, in the case where the hit / miss judgment result is out, a random value for outlier symbol determination is acquired separately, and the random number value is stopped by referring to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 428 (b). Determine the design.

  After extracting the earliest set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 Decrement the number of reservations. At this time, the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, The above-mentioned determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in this temporary area.

  The special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is the same as the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) except that the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. Omit it.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300, special figure probability variation flag values, and special figure related items. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, including the special figure fluctuation time selected in the lottery process, including the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc., the winning effect command and the end effect start In the case of a command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  Further, in the prefetch result information command, the prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the command data (predetermined stop symbol and variable time information) and the number of the prefetched stop symbol are reserved. And the number-of-holding-pieces information indicating whether it corresponds to. The prefetch result information and the pending number information in the prefetch result information command may be only the increment, or may include the prefetch result information and the pending number information for all pending.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability variation flag values, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are related. Information indicating the special figure fluctuation time selected in the lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, or the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 423.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 425. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, which is subsequent to step S309, if it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 following step S313, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 subsequent to step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321 subsequent to step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400, the process of updating other random number values for presentation is performed, and the like.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input signal. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  The processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 426. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709 following step S707, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S711 following step S709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 subsequent to step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

  Next, a special figure variation game or the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 427 to 460. First, a win / loss determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 427. The data table shown in FIG. 427 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 427 (a) and FIG. 427 (b) are the success / failure determination process of special figure 2 or special figure 1 in special figure 2 or special figure 1 related lottery processing (steps S229, S231) of the main controller timer interrupt process. It shows an example of a win / loss determination table used. FIG. 427 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 427 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

  In the win / loss determination tables shown in FIGS. 427 (a) and 427 (b), the items of "special figure probability" in the first column from the left, "random number range" in the second column, and "win / fail result" in the third column. It is composed of. The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 427 (a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning / decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four numbers, 0 to 10000, 10001 to 11638, 11639 to 11940, and 11941 to 65535. In the 3rd column, "hit result", "high probability" and numerical values 0 to 10000, "outliers" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11941 to 65535, and "big hits" are assigned to the numerical values 10001 to 11638, "Small hits" are assigned in correspondence with the numerical values 11639 to 11940.

  "Low probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 427 (b) indicates that the game state at the time of winning / decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical value range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The "random number range" is divided into four numbers, 0 to 10000, 10001 to 10162, 10163 to 10464, and 10465 to 65535. In the 3rd column, “acceptance result”, “low probability” and numerical values 0 to 10000, “deviance” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10465 to 65535, and “big hit” is assigned to the numerical values 10001 to 10162, "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is for the obtained hit determination in order to determine whether the result of the variation game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is to be won (hit) or to be unwinned (lost). The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure determination table for the random number value. For example, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of win / loss shown in FIG. 427 (a) from the ROM 306 when the gaming state at the time of winning / loss determination is the special figure high probability state, and the gaming state at the time of winning / loss determination is special. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for win / loss determination shown in FIG. 427 (b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to respectively.

  FIG. 428 shows a special symbol determination table used for determining the symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation ends. FIG. 428 (a) shows a special figure 1 determination table, and FIG. 428 (b) shows a special figure 2 determination table. The special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 428 (a) and the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 428 (b) are the “right / wrong judgment result”, “range of symbol random numbers”, and “stopped symbol” from the left column It consists of items. The "right / wrong judgment result" in the left column is divided into "big hit", "small hit", and "outside hit". "Big hit" indicates a case where "big hit" is judged as a result of the hit / miss judgment using the special figure hit / miss judgment table shown in FIG. 427 (a) or 427 (b), and "small hit" is hit / not hit As a result of the hit / miss judgment using the judgment table, the case where it is judged as "small hit" is shown. Shows.

  The item "range of symbol random numbers" in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 428 (a) indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the obtained random number value for determining special figure 1 for hitting or the random number value for deviating symbol. There is. The “range of symbol random numbers” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the “right / wrong judgment result” on the left column, and the numerical values 0 to 49, the numerical values 50 to 69, the numerical values 70 to 77, the numerical values 78 to 83, the numerical values 84 to 91 and It is divided into 6 numbers 92 to 99, and is divided into 2 numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to "small hits", and 0 to 49 and numbers corresponding to "off." It is divided into two, 50 to 99.

  The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 428 (a) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 variation game. "Stop symbol" corresponds to "big hit" and "special symbol A" corresponding to the numerical value range 0 to 49, "special symbol B" corresponding to numerical value 50 to 69, and numerical value 70 to 77. "Special drawing C", "Special drawing D" corresponding to numerical values 78 to 83, "Special drawing E" corresponding to numerical values 84 to 91, "Special drawing F" corresponding to numerical values 92 to 99 Each pattern mode is assigned. In addition, the "stop symbol" is "small hit" and the symbol range of the symbol random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, "special symbol G", and the numerical value 50 to 99 corresponds to "special symbol H". Each is assigned. Furthermore, "stop symbol" is "off" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, "special symbol I", and the numerical symbols 50 to 99 correspond to "special symbol J". It is assigned.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 1 display device 212 "special figure A" ~ "special figure", when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol mode “F” is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special diagram 1 determination table for the obtained random number for special symbol determination for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 1 display device 212, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" when the hit determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Which of the stop symbol modes is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special figure 1 determination table for the acquired random number for special figure determination for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, if the result of the winning / disapproval determination based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of the range, the special figure 1 display device 212 has a stop symbol of either special figure I or special figure J. Whether the mode is stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special figure 1 determination table for the acquired outlier symbol determination random value. It should be noted that the random number value for determining the off symbol is acquired from the random number counter for determining the off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stop symbol of the off symbol.

  The item “range of random number of symbols” in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 428 (b) indicates the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the obtained random number value for hitting special figure 2 determination or the random value for deviating symbol determination. There is. The "range of symbol random numbers" is divided into two, numerical values 0 to 65 and numerical values 66 to 99, corresponding to the item "big hit" in the left column "winning judgment result", and corresponding to "small hit", It is divided into two numbers of 0 to 49 and 50 to 99, and is divided into two of 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to "off".

  The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 428 (b) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. "Stop symbol", "big hit" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 65, "special symbol A", corresponding to the numerical values 66 to 99, "special symbol B", the stop symbol mode is assigned, respectively. ing. In addition, the "stop symbol" is "small hit" and the symbol range of the symbol random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, "special symbol G", and the numerical value 50 to 99 corresponds to "special symbol H". Each is assigned. Furthermore, "stop symbol" is "off" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 49, "special symbol I", and the numerical symbols 50 to 99 correspond to "special symbol J". It is assigned.

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 2 display device 214 "special figure A" and "special figure" when the hit / miss determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. Which stop symbol mode “B” is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special diagram 2 determination table for the obtained random number for special symbol determination for hitting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), the random number value in the "range of symbol random numbers" when the "winning / absence determination result" is "big hit", the "stop symbol" is "special symbol A" or "special symbol". It is assigned only to "B". Therefore, in the special figure 2 variation game, the stop symbol in the case where the hit determination result is a big hit is determined to be either "special figure A" or "special figure B", and "special figure C" to "special figure" "F" is not selected. Therefore, the big hit game of the special figure 2 variable game is set to be advantageous to the player as compared with the big hit game of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a small hit, "special figure G" and "special figure H" on the special figure 2 display device 214. Of which stop symbol mode is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special diagram 2 determination table for the acquired random number for special symbol determination for hitting.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, if the winning / deciding determination result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of the range, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a stop symbol of either special figure I or special figure J. Whether the mode is stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special figure 2 special figure determination table for the acquired outlier symbol determination random value. It should be noted that the random number value for determining the off symbol is acquired from the random number counter for determining the off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stop symbol of the off symbol.

  FIG. 429 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol variable display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 429 is stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 429, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table, from the left column, "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variable time" and "decorative mode on decorative symbol display device" It consists of 5 items.

  "Stop symbol" in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol 1 determination table of FIG. 428 (a), and is "special symbol A / special symbol B (common with or without electric support)", "Special map C to special map H (common with or without electric support)", "Special map I / Special map J (No electric support: Hold 3)", and "Special map I / Special map J (No electric support: Hold)" 0-2, or with power support: Hold 0-3) ". If the "stop symbol" is "special map A / special map B", whether the game state at the time of the change time determination is the electric support state (whether or not there is electric support) and the number of special game 1 variable games held Instead, the table “1” is selected. Further, when the "stop symbol" is "special map C to special map H", the table "2" is selected regardless of the presence or absence of electric power support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of reserved special game 1 variable games.

  If "Stop symbol" is "Special map I / Special map J", table "3" or table "4" is selected depending on the presence or absence of electric support at the time of fluctuation determination and the number of pending special game 1 fluctuation games. It is supposed to be done. If either special map I or special map J is determined as the stop symbol, and if there is no electric support and the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 3, table "3" is selected, and there is no electric support and the hold. If the number is 0 to 2, or if there is electric power support and the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the table "4" is selected.

  "Random number selection range" on the right side of the "table" in the figure shows a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure variation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired at the same time as the acquisition of the start information of the special figure 1 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read from the predetermined storage area when determining the special figure 1 variation display time. It has become. In the table “1”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table “2”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four numerical values 0 to 65000, numerical values 65001 to 65400, numerical values 65401 to 65500, and numerical values 65501 to 65535. In the table “4”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535.

  "Variation time" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. "Variation time" is "1" in the table "1" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and "65000 ms" corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. Are each assigned. Further, "12000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in the table "2" and the random number selection range corresponds to all numerical values 0 to 65535. In addition, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “3” and the random number selection range corresponds to “3000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65400, and corresponding to the numerical values 65401 to 65500. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65501 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “4” and the random number selection range is “8000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 50001 to 60000, and corresponding to the numerical values 60001 to 65000. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  "Variation time" on the right-hand side in the figure of "Demonstration mode in decorative symbol display device" is a decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the combination of "stop symbol" and the selected "fluctuation time" The effect | action aspect performed by is shown. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" corresponds to "Special symbol A" and "Special symbol B" for "Stop symbol" and "1500 ms" for variation time, "Per normal reach", and "45000 ms" variation time. “Per reach A” and “per reach B” corresponding to the fluctuation time “65000 ms” are respectively assigned. Further, in the "effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is assigned to "special drawing C to special drawing H" and corresponding to the variation time "12000 ms", "all chance stop" is assigned. Further, in the "drafting mode on the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" is "special figure I / special figure J" and the variation time "3000 ms" corresponds to "shortening" and variation time "8000 ms". Correspondingly "out of bounds", fluctuation time "10000 ms" corresponding to "normal reach missing", fluctuation time "40000 ms" corresponding to "reach A deviation", fluctuation time "60000 ms" corresponding to "reach B deviation" Are assigned respectively.

  FIG. 430 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol variable display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main controller timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 430 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 430, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table, from the left column, "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variable time" and "decorative mode on the decorative symbol display device" It consists of 5 items.

  "Stop symbol" in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol 2 determination table in FIG. 428 (b), and is "special symbol A / special symbol B (common with or without electric support)", "Special map G / Special map H (common with or without electric support)", "Special map I / Special map J (with electric support: Hold 1-3)", "Special map I / Special map J (with electric support: Hold 0) ”and“ Special map I / Special map J (No electric support: Hold 0-3) ”. The table "5" corresponds to "special drawing A / special drawing B" of "stop design", and the table "6" corresponds to "special drawing G / special drawing H". If the "stop symbol" is "special map A / special map B", the table "5" is selected regardless of the presence or absence of electric power support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games. Further, when the "stop symbol" is "special map G / special map H", the table "6" is selected regardless of whether or not there is an electric power support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games. .

  If the "stop symbol" is "special map I / special map J", one of the tables "7" to "9", depending on the presence or absence of electric support at the time of determining the variable time and the number of pending special game 2 variable games. Is to be selected. If either special map I or special map J is determined as a stop symbol, and there is electric support and the number of pending special map 2 variable games is 1 to 3, table "7" is selected and electric support is provided. In addition, when the number of reservations is 0, the table “8” is selected, and when there is no power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “9” is selected.

  "Random number selection range" on the right side of the "table" in the figure shows a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special figure variation time. The random number value for determining the special figure variation time is acquired, for example, at the same time as the acquisition of the start information of the special figure 2 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read from the predetermined storage area when determining the special figure 2 variation display time. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In each of the tables “6” to “8”, the “random number selection range” is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “9”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four numbers 0 to 50000, numbers 50001 to 60000, numbers 60001 to 65000, and numbers 65001 to 65535.

  "Variation time" on the right side of the figure of "random number selection range" indicates the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game. “Variation time” is “5” in the table “5” and the random number selection range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. Are each assigned. Further, "12000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "6" and the random number selection range of all numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, “1500 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” in correspondence with the table “7” and the random number selection range of all numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, "8000 ms" is assigned to the "variation time" in correspondence with the table "8" and the random number selection range of all numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “9” and the random number selection range is “8000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 50001 to 60000, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000. “40000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned corresponding to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  "Variation time" in the figure on the right next to "Demonstration mode in the decorative symbol display device" is a special symbol 2 variable game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "variation time" decorative symbol display device 208 The effect | action aspect performed by is shown. The "decorative pattern on the decorative symbol display device" includes "special symbol A / special symbol B" for "stop symbol" and "normal reach" corresponding to a variation time of 15000 ms, and "reach A" for a variation time of 45000 ms. "Hit" and "Reach B hit" are assigned corresponding to the variation time of 65000 ms. Further, in the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" is assigned to "special symbol G / special symbol H" and a variation time of 12000 ms, and "all chances stop" is assigned. In the special figure 2 variation game of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the stop symbols of "special figure C" to "special figure F" are not selected, the stop symbol "special figure G" or "which notifies the small hit. Only in the case of any one of "Special drawing H", "all chances stop" is selected as the "production mode on the decorative symbol display device". Therefore, when the effect is executed in the effect mode of "all chances stop", the small hit is determined. Further, in the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" is "special symbol I / special symbol J" and the variation time of 1500 ms corresponds to "ultra-shortening deviation" and the variation time of 8000 ms. “Out of range”, “normal reach out” corresponding to a variation time of 10,000 ms, “reach A out” corresponding to a variation time of 40000 ms, and “reach B out” corresponding to a variation time of 60,000 ms are assigned.

  Next, it is referred to when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display images (details will be described later) displayed in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 pending display areas 208d1 and 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pending change lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 431 shows a holding change lottery table (prefetching notice: at the time of winning of the starting mouth) that is referred to in the holding change lottery for drawing whether to change the display mode of the hold display image. The pending change lottery table is used in step S1205 in the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution processing at the time of acquisition of start information described later. The pending change lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  The hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 431 is divided into five parts from the left column: “variation time”, “effect mode on decorative pattern display device”, “no change”, “hold A” and “hold B”. There is. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device" on the right side of the "variable time" in the figure indicates the mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special symbol variable game. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  “No change” on the right side of the figure of “Demonstration mode on the decorative pattern display device” means that the default display mode does not change the display mode of the hold display image shown as “normal hold” in FIG. 432 (a) described later. Shows that the special figure variation game is displayed as it is (for example, a circular hold display that is filled in with a predetermined color), and "Hold A" on the right side thereof is shown in FIG. 432 (b) described later. It indicates that the pre-reading notice of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "evil merchant Echigoya" shown as "holding A", and "holding B" on the right side thereof is shown in FIG. 432 (c) described later. In the display mode of the character image of "Yoshimune" shown as "Hold B", the pre-reading notice of the special figure variation game is executed. "No change", "Hold A", and "Hold B" are each classified by the numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the random number for hold change lottery, corresponding to the "fluctuation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is adapted to acquire the pending change lottery random number value from the pending change lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numbers 0 to 89 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to "hold A", and the numbers are not assigned to "hold B". . When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 40 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. Has been. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. Has been. When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numbers 0 to 69 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 70 to 95 are assigned to "hold A", and the numbers 96 to 99 are assigned to "hold B". Has been. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “holding B”. Has been. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 19 are assigned to "no change", the numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to "holding A", and the numerical values 50 to 99 are assigned to "holding B". Has been. Note that, in the tables shown in FIG. 431 and thereafter, “-” is displayed at a place to which a numerical value is not assigned.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific hit / miss judgment result (e.g., a hit) in the look-ahead announcement effect due to the pending change. . Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the look-ahead announcement effect due to the change in hold is a probability of winning or a probability of being out of contact, a probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, a probability of selecting a predetermined hold mode, etc. It is decided based on. In the present embodiment, “hold A” and “hold B” are compared with “no change” so that “hold A” and “hold B” have higher reliability than “no change”. In the case of the reach effect (“normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach B”) in which random numbers are distributed as shown in FIG. And “reach B out”)). Furthermore, in order that "Hold B" has higher reliability than "Hold A", "Hold B" has a reach effect in which random numbers are distributed as compared to "Hold A" ("normal reach hit"). , "Per reach A" and "per reach B"), it is set to be less in the case of reach production ("normal reach out", "reach A out" and "reach B out"). There is.

  Since the reliability of “holding B” is set higher than the reliability of “holding A”, the pachinko machine 100 is a big hit when executing “holding B” rather than executing “holding A”. Players can be expected to win. "Hold A" and "Hold B" can also indicate the level of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 432 shows an example of the display mode of the pending display of the special figure variation game. The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, three display modes as a pending display of the special figure variation game. FIG. 432 (a) shows a display mode of the hold display image when “no change” is selected in the hold change advance notice lottery (when the hold change notice lottery fails). As shown in FIG. 432 (a), the display mode of the pending display image in "no change" is, for example, a display mode showing a circular pattern painted in a predetermined color. The display mode of the hold display image shown in FIG. 432 (a) is the display mode in the default display when the display mode of the hold display of the special figure variation game is not changed. Therefore, the hold display image when the hold change lottery is not executed also has the display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a). The hold display mode of "no change" corresponds to a normal display mode. FIG. 432 (b) shows a display mode of the hold display image when "Hold A" is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 432 (b), the hold display image when "Hold A" is won is in a display mode showing the character "Evil merchant Echigoya". FIG. 432 (c) shows a display mode of the hold display image when "Hold B" is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 432 (c), the hold display image when "Hold B" is won is a display mode showing the character "Yoshimune". The display mode of "holding A" or "holding B" corresponds to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 433, a board surface lamp pre-reading lottery table to be referred to when drawing the lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification effect by changing the lighting mode of the board surface lamps 224a, 224b will be described. FIG. 433 shows a board surface lamp pre-reading lottery table (pre-reading notice: at the time of winning at the starting opening) which is referred to in the board surface lamp pre-reading lottery for drawing whether or not to change the lighting mode of the board surface lamp 224a. The board surface lamp pre-reading lottery table is used in step S1207 in the first sub-control unit pre-reading advance notice execution processing at the time of acquiring start information described later. The board surface lamp prefetch lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example.

  In the board surface lamp prefetch lottery table shown in FIG. 433, from the left column, “variable time”, “effect form on decorative pattern display device”, “no change”, “lighting (blue)”, “blinking (blue)” and “ Fast flashing (red) ”. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device" on the right side of the "variable time" in the figure indicates the mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special symbol variable game. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  "No change" on the right side in the figure of "Demonstration mode in decorative pattern display device" indicates that the panel lamp 224a is the default lighting (predetermined lighting or blinking mode) in the normal performance, "Lighting (blue)" to the right of that indicates that all 10 circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a are lit in blue to execute the pre-reading notice effect, and "flashing (blue)" to the right of it. Indicates that at least a part of the panel lamp 224a is blinked in blue to execute the pre-reading notice effect, and "high-speed blink (red)" on the right side of the panel lamp 224a is at a high speed in red. It indicates that the prefetching notice effect is executed by blinking. "No change", "Lighting (blue)", "Blinking (blue)" and "High-speed blinking (red)" correspond to "Variation time" and are random number values to be compared with the random number for the board ramp prefetch lottery. Each is divided into a range (0 to 99). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire a board surface ramp pre-reading random number value from a board surface lamp pre-reading random number counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the look-ahead notice effect is executed when the lighting mode of the board lamp 224a is "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "high-speed flashing (red)", the board lamp 224b is also synchronized with it. Execute pre-reading notice production. Four petal-shaped lamps are arranged on the board surface lamp 224b, and the same number of petal-shaped lamps as the number of the reserved numbers for Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 relating to the pre-reading notice are arranged in the pre-reading notice production. For example, the lamps are lit in order from the bottom, and the petal-shaped lamp corresponding to the hold related to the advance notice is lit in a different color from the other lamps.

  When "Variation time" is "10000 ms", the values 0 to 99 are assigned to "No change", and the values are assigned to "Lighting (blue)", "Blinking (blue)" and "High-speed blinking (red)". Not assigned. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 40 to 89 are assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and the numerical value 90 to “flashing (blue)”. .About.98 are assigned, and the numerical value 99 is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numerical values 30 to 95 are assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the numerical value 96 is assigned to "flashing (blue)". .About.98 are assigned, and the numerical value 99 is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 96 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical value 97 is assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and the numerical value 98 is assigned to “flashing (blue)”. The numerical value 99 is assigned to “fast blink (red)”. When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the numerical value 70 to "flashing (blue)". To 84 are assigned, and the numerical values 85 to 99 are assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, the numerical values 0 to 19 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to “lighting (blue)”, and the numerical value 50 to “flashing (blue)”. To 69 are assigned, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to "fast blink (red)".

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the reliability that the possibility of deriving a specific hit / miss judgment result (e.g., a hit) is high or low in the pre-reading notice effect by the board lamps 224a and 224b. Has become. Although detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the look-ahead notice effect by the panel lamps 224a and 224b is selected as a probability of winning or a probability of losing, a probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, and a predetermined holding mode. It is determined based on the probability of In the present embodiment, “lighting (blue)”, “blinking (blue)”, and “fast flashing (red)” have higher reliability than “no change”, so that “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)”, ”Flashing (blue)” and “fast flashing (red)” are compared with “no change”, and reach effects (“normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach A” shown in FIG. It is set to be less in the case of a reach effect that is more frequently lost ("B hit") ("normal reach missed", "reach A missed" and "reach B missed"). Furthermore, "fast blink (red)" is more reliable than "blink (blue)", so "fast blink (red)" is more random than "blink (blue)". The distribution is set to be large in the case of the reach production of winning and is set to be small in the case of the reach production of out of reach. Also, so that “blinking (blue)” is more reliable than “lighting (blue)”, “blinking (blue)” is more random than “lighting (blue)”. In the case of the hit reach effect, it is set to be less in the case of the hit reach effect.

  The reliability of "flashing (blue)" is higher than the reliability of "lighting (blue)", and the reliability of "fast flashing (red)" is more reliable than the reliability of "flashing (blue)". Since it is set to a high value, the pachinko machine 100 performs “blink (blue)” more than “blinks (blue)” rather than “blinks (blue)”. It is possible to expect the player to win the big hit by executing “(red)”. “Lighting (blue)”, “blinking (blue)”, and “fast blinking (red)” can indicate the level of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the degree of expectation.

  434 to 442 show an example of the normal notice lottery table and the like used in step S1311 in the first sub-control unit look-ahead notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game described later. The "regular notice" of the regular notice lottery means a notice of the result of the judgment of the special figure variation game to be started. The normal notice lottery table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example. The normal advance notice lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the normal advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game to be started. Further, the normal notice effect based on the normal notice lottery table is executed before or after the reach formation. The normal notice lottery table is commonly used in the special maps 1 and 2.

  The normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434 is used for pre-reach notice production, and from the left column, "variation time", "decorative mode on decorative symbol display device", "no button system", and "button system" It is divided into four. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the effect mode of the special figure variation game on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  The "button-less system" on the right side of the "mode of effect on the decorative pattern display device" in the figure indicates a preliminary notice not accompanied by the effect using the chance button 136 or the like as the operating means, and "on the right side of the button". The "system" indicates that the advance notice including the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 or the like is executed. The “no button system” and the “with button system” are each classified by the numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the obtained first random number for normal advance notice execution determination, and correspond to “variable time” by 6 It is divided into two. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain the first normal random announcement execution determination first random number value provided from the RAM 408, for example.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the normal announcement execution judgment random number value is 0 to 99 assigned to "the system without button" and the numerical value is assigned to "the system with button" Has not been done. When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", numerical values 0 to 89 are assigned to the "buttonless system" and numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to the "buttoned system" as the numerical range. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 94 is assigned to the “buttonless system” and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to the “buttoned system” as the numerical range. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 98 is assigned to the “buttonless system” and the numerical value 99 is assigned to the “buttoned system” as the numerical range. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 49 is assigned to the “buttonless system” and the numerical values 50 to 99 are assigned to the “buttoned system” as the numerical range. When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 29 is assigned to the “buttonless system” and the numerical values 30 to 99 are assigned to the “buttoned system” as the numerical range.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the pre-reach notice production by the “without button system” and the “with button system”, it is possible to determine the reliability that is highly likely to derive a specific hit / miss judgment result (e.g., hit). I am able to suggest. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect by the “no button system” and the “with button system” is the probability of being a hit or the probability of being out of reach, the probability that a predetermined reach effect is selected, It is determined based on the probability that a predetermined button effect is selected. In the present embodiment, the “button type” is compared with the “buttonless type” so that the “button type” has higher reliability than the “buttonless type”. Reach production with a lot of out of reach effects (“normal reach”, “reach A” and “reach B”) (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”) Is set to be less in the case of.

  Since the reliability of the “button type” is set higher than the reliability of the “buttonless type”, the pachinko machine 100 executes the “button type” rather than the “buttonless type”. Players can be expected to win the jackpot. "Without button" and "with button" are able to indicate the level of expectation of winning the big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  The normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 435 is used when the effect button-less system is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434. In the normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 435, from the left column, “variation time”, “effect form on decorative pattern display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (confirmed) ) ”. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the effect mode of the special figure variation game on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  “None” on the right side of the figure of “effect mode on the decorative pattern display device” indicates that the normal notice effect is not executed, and “Character A” on the right side of the figure indicates ““ ”in FIG. It is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "panda" shown as "character A", and the "character B" on the right side thereof is shown in Fig. 437 (b) described later. It is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Sabohani" shown as "Character B". ) Indicates that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Princess" shown as "Character C". "None", "Character A", "Character B", and "Character C (accurate)" correspond to the "variable time" and are numerical values of random numbers to be compared with the obtained second random number value for normal notice execution determination. Each is divided into a range (0 to 99), and is divided into 6 corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain the second normal random number execution determination second random number value provided from the RAM 408, for example.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the second random number value for advance notice execution determination is assigned “none” to the numerical values 0 to 84 and “character A” to the numerical values 85 to 85. 96 is assigned, “chara B” is assigned numerical values 97 to 99, and “chara C (accurate)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 89 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character C (probability)”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 94 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character C (probability)”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical range 0 to 96 is assigned to “none”, the numerical value 97 is assigned to “character A”, and the numerical value 98 is assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. , The numerical value 99 is assigned to “character C (accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical range 0 is assigned to “none”, the numerical values 1 to 49 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 50 to 97 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. The numbers 98 to 99 are assigned to the “character C (accurate)”. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical range 0 to 4 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 5 to 39 is assigned to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" is assigned to "character A". 94 is assigned, and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “character C (probability)”.

  As shown in FIG. 435, when the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device" is "out of reach", "out of reach A", or "out of reach B", the display mode of "character C (accurate)" Is not selected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (probability)" is displayed in the pre-reach notice effect, the result determination result of the special figure variation game is determined to be a hit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific hit / miss determination result (e.g., a hit) in the pre-reach notice effect of "no button system". It has become. Although detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of being a hit or the probability of being out of contact, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Will be decided. In the present embodiment, the “character A”, the “character B”, and the “character B” and the “character B” and the “character B (actual accuracy)” have higher reliability than “none”. Compared to "None", "Character C (winning)" is much out of reach in the case of random reach distribution ("normal reach," reach A "and" reach B ") shown in FIG. 435. It is set to be less in the case of the reach effect (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”). Furthermore, "Character B" is more likely to reach "Character B" than "Character A" in the case of reach production in which the random numbers are distributed, so that "Character B" has higher reliability than "Character A". It is set so as to decrease in the case of out-of-range reach production. In addition, "Character C (Token)" has a higher reliability than "Character B", so that "Character C (Token)" is assigned a random number in comparison with "Character B". It is set so that it is less in the case of reach production, and less in the case of reach production.

  Since the reliability of “character B” is set higher than the reliability of “character A”, the pachinko machine 100 is a big hit when executing “character B” rather than executing “character A”. Players can be expected to win. Moreover, since the reliability of “character C (acknowledgement)” is set to be higher than the reliability of “character B”, the pachinko machine 100 executes “character C (acknowledgement)” rather than executing “character B”. The player can be expected to win the jackpot. "Character A", "Character B", or "Character C (probability)" can also indicate the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the degree of expectation.

  The normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436 is used when the system with effect buttons is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434. In the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436, from the left column, “variable time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C” ) ”. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the effect mode of the special figure variation game on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  “None” on the right side of the figure of “effect mode on the decorative pattern display device” indicates that the normal notice effect is not executed, and “Character A” on the right side of the figure indicates ““ ”in FIG. It is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "panda" shown as "character A", and the "character B" on the right side thereof is shown in Fig. 437 (b) described later. It is shown that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Sabohani" shown as "Character B". ) Indicates that the normal notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Princess" shown as "Character C". "None", "Character A", "Character B", and "Character C (accurate)" correspond to the "variable time" and are numerical values of random numbers to be compared with the obtained second random number value for normal notice execution determination. Each is divided into a range (0 to 99), and is divided into 6 corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is adapted to acquire the third normal random announcement execution determination random number value provided from the RAM 408, for example.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the third random number value for the advance notice execution determination is assigned the numerical value 0 to 89 to “none” and the numerical value 90 to “character A”. 94 is assigned, “chara B” is assigned numerical values 95 to 99, and “character C (correct)” is not assigned a numerical value. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character C (probability)”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 69 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 70 to 99 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character C (probability)”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 49 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 50 to 89 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. The numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to the “character C (accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical range 0 is assigned to “none”, the numerical values 1 to 39 are assigned to “character A”, and the numerical values 40 to 89 are assigned to “character B” as the numerical range. The numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to the “character C (accurate)”. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical range 0 to 4 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 5 to 39 is assigned to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" is assigned to "character A". 89 is assigned, and the numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “character C (probability)”.

  As shown in FIG. 436, when the “mode of effect on the decorative pattern display device” is “normal reach out”, “reach A out”, or “reach B out”, the display mode of “character C (accurate)” Is not selected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (probability)" is displayed in the pre-reach notice effect, the result determination result of the special figure variation game is determined to be a hit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific win / no judgment result (e.g., a hit) in the pre-reach notice production of "with button". It has become. Although detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of being a hit or the probability of being out of contact, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Will be decided. In the present embodiment, the “character A”, the “character B”, and the “character B” and the “character B” and the “character B (actual accuracy)” have higher reliability than “none”. Compared to “None”, “Character C (winning probability)” is much out of reach in the case where the random number distribution shown in FIG. It is set so as to be less in the case of the reach effect (“out of normal reach”, “out of reach A” and “out of reach B”). Furthermore, "Character B" is more likely to reach "Character B" than "Character A" in the case of reach production in which the random numbers are distributed, so that "Character B" has higher reliability than "Character A". It is set so as to decrease in the case of out-of-range reach production. In addition, "Character C (Token)" has a higher reliability than "Character B", so that "Character C (Token)" is assigned a random number in comparison with "Character B". It is set so that it is less in the case of reach production, and less in the case of reach production.

  Since the reliability of “character B” is set higher than the reliability of “character A”, the pachinko machine 100 is a big hit when executing “character B” rather than executing “character A”. Players can be expected to win. Moreover, since the reliability of “character C (acknowledgement)” is set to be higher than the reliability of “character B”, the pachinko machine 100 executes “character C (acknowledgement)” rather than executing “character B”. The player can be expected to win the jackpot. "Character A", "Character B", or "Character C (probability)" can also indicate the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 437 shows an example of a character image used in the normal notice effect before reach. FIG. 437 (a) shows a character image representing "panda" displayed at the time of "chara A" normal notice effect, and FIG. 437 (b) is displayed at the time of "character B" usual notice effect. A character image showing "sabohani" (a character having a cactus and a haniwa as a motif) is shown, and in Fig. 437 (c), a character image showing "princess" which is displayed at the time of the usual notice presentation of "character C" is shown. It is shown. These character images are displayed in the effect display area 208d, which is an area that overlaps with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, during the normal notice effect execution.

  In the normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438, the system with effect buttons is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434, and further, based on the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. It is used when either "B" or "character C (accurate)" is selected. The normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438 is divided into four from the left column: “display mode / button mode”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C”. “Display mode / button mode” indicates a combination of the display mode and the button mode shown in FIGS. 439 and 440. Here, the display mode and the button mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 439 and 440.

  FIG. 439 shows a display mode of an image that imitates the chance button 136 that can be displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 439 (a), the display mode is “normal”, a chance button image imitating the chance button 136 in the normal state in which no vibration or rotation is performed is arranged in the center, and the word “PUSH” is placed above it. A row is arranged, and an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting the pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is arranged below the column. The effective period image in this example has a horizontally long frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and as the period elapses, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is designed to be displayed gradually shorter. FIG. 439 (b) is a display mode in which the display mode is “vibration” and the center chance button image is visually recognized as vibrating. The other display modes are the same as those of "normal". FIG. 439 (c) is a display mode in which the display mode is “vibration + rotation”, and the center chance button image is visually recognized as rotating while vibrating. The other display modes are the same as those of "normal". In FIG. 439 (d), the display mode is “vibration + rotation”, and the chance button image and the effective period image are displayed larger than the image in FIG. 439 (c). Further, the character string “PUSH” and the valid period image may not be displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 439 (d) is hereinafter also referred to as "deca button display".

  FIG. 440 shows an operation mode (button mode) of the chance button 136. FIG. 440 (a) shows the chance button 136 in the normal state in which the button mode is “normal” and is not vibrating or rotating. FIG. 440 (b) shows that the button mode is “vibration” and the chance button 136 is vibrating. In FIG. 440 (c), the button mode is “vibration + rotation”, and while the chance button 136 vibrates, the chance button lamp 138 that emits light inside the chance button 136 rotates and the chance button 136 rotates. To be visible. It is a mode.

  Now, returning to FIG. 438, the “display mode / button mode” indicates the display mode of the operation request image that prompts the operator to press the chance button 136 displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the image is displayed. The combination of the actual chance button 136 and the button mode when the button is on is shown. In “normal / normal”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In “normal / vibration”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration”. . In “normal / vibration + rotation”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of “normal”, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration + rotation”. Has become. In “vibration / normal”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of “vibration”, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In “vibration / vibration”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the display mode of “vibration”, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration”. . In “Vibration + Rotation / Vibration”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the display mode of “Vibration + Rotation”, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “Vibration”. Has become. In the “deca button display / vibration + rotation”, the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the display mode of “deca button display”, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration +”. It is "rotation".

  “Character A” on the right side of the “display mode / button mode” in the figure is the display obtained when “Character A” is selected in the result of the lottery performed using the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the random number for determining the mode / button mode is shown. The first sub-control unit 400 is adapted to acquire a display mode / button mode determining random value from a display mode / button mode determining random value counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  In the case of "Character A", the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the display mode / button mode determining random number is assigned "normal / normal" with a value of 0 to 89, and "normal / vibration" and "normal / vibration" are assigned. No value is assigned to "+ rotation" and "vibration / normal", but values 90 to 99 are assigned to "vibration / vibration", and "vibration + rotation / vibration" and "deca button display / vibration + rotation" Is not assigned a number.

  "Character B" on the right side of "Character A" is the display mode / button acquired when "Character B" is selected in the result of the lottery performed using the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436. The numerical range (0-99) of the random number compared with the random value for mode determination is shown.

  In the case of "Character B", as the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the display mode / button mode determining random number, the values "0/49" are assigned to "normal / normal" and the numerical values 50 to 54 are assigned to "normal / vibration". Are assigned, numerical values 55 to 59 are assigned to “normal / vibration + rotation”, numerical values 60 to 64 are assigned to “vibration / normal”, numerical values 65 to 89 are assigned to “vibration / vibration”, Numerical values 90 to 94 are assigned to "vibration + rotation / vibration", and numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to "deca button display / vibration + rotation".

  "Character C" to the right of "Character B" in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when "Character C" is selected in the result of the lottery performed using the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436. The numerical range (0-99) of the random number compared with the random value for mode determination is shown.

  In the case of "Character C", as the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the display mode / button mode determining random number, no value is assigned to "normal / normal", and a value from 0 to 19 is added to "normal / vibration". Are assigned, numerical values 20 to 39 are assigned to “normal / vibration + rotation”, numerical values 40 to 59 are assigned to “vibration / normal”, and numerical values are assigned to “vibration / vibration”. Numerical values 60 to 79 are assigned to "vibration + rotation / vibration", and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to "deca button display / vibration + rotation".

  As shown in FIG. 438, in the case of "character A", "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration" is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of "character C", only "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is selected. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when an effect of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is executed in the pre-reach notice effect, the special figure variation There is a high possibility that the game win / fail judgment result will be a win.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific win / no judgment result (e.g., a hit) in the pre-reach notice production of "with button". It has become. Although detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach notice effect is based on the probability of being a hit or the probability of being out of contact, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Will be decided. In the present embodiment, “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is more reliable than “display mode / button mode” of “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. In order to increase the frequency, the “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is compared with “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration”, and the random numbers shown in FIG. Is set to be large in the case of “character C” and small in the case of “character A”.

  The reliability of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is higher than the reliability of "display mode / button mode" of "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration". Since the pachinko machine 100 is set to a high value, the pachinko machine 100 performs the “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” rather than executing “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. The player can be expected to win the jackpot if he / she executes it.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the operation request image can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a plurality of types of display effects as display effects related to the operation of the chance button 136, and one of the plurality of types of display effects is the first. For example, as the display effect, "Character A" display with effect buttons is provided, and one of the plurality of types of display effects is, for example, as the second display effect, "Character C" display with effect buttons. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the display effect of “character C” is executed than the display effect of “character A”, and the first operation has the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. A second operation request image (for example, “normal / vibration”, “vibration / vibration”) having a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 than the request image (for example, “normal / normal”, “vibration / vibration”). Communication ", Those of" normal / vibration + rotation ", etc.), display effect of" character C "is so easy to be carried out.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice of whether or not the second display effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed. As a result, the operation request image itself may also function as a notice.

  The normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 441 is used for the post-reach notice lottery for the post-reach notice effect (cut-in notice) performed after the reach effect in the special figure variation game is started. In the normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 441, from the left column, “variation time”, “effect mode on decorative pattern display device”, “none”, “character D”, “character E”, and “character F (confirmed) ) ”. The “variation time” is the “variation time” determined using the special display 1 or special display 2 change display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430, and the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 424. In the command transmission setting process (step S233), the variable time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. "Variation time" is divided into six "10000 ms", "40000 ms", "60000 ms", "15000 ms", "45000 ms" and "65000 ms".

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” in the figure indicates the effect mode of the special figure variation game on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" is defined as "variation time" and "draft mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 429 or FIG. 430. It is associated with the "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000ms" is "normal reach out", "40000ms" is "reach A out", "60000ms" is "reach B out", "15000ms" is "normal reach", and "45000ms" is "reach A". And "65000 ms" means "per reach B".

  “None” on the right side of the figure of “Demonstration mode on the decorative pattern display device” indicates that the post-reach notice effect (which can be regarded as a part of the normal notice effect) is not executed, and the “next” on the right side "Character D" indicates that the post-reach notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the "grandpa" character image shown as "Character D" in FIG. "Character E" indicates that the post-reach notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Boxer" shown as "Character E" in FIG. "Character F (accurate)" indicates that the post-reach notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the "bancho" character image shown as "character F" in FIG. 442 (c) described later. ing. “None”, “Character D”, “Character E”, and “Character F (accurate)” correspond to “Variation time” and are a numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for pre-reach execution determination Each is divided into (0 to 99), and is divided into 6 corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 acquires a post-reach advance notice execution determination random number value from a post-reach advance notice execution determination random number counter provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, the numerical range of the random number to be compared with the post-reach pre-execution execution determination random number value is “none”, “character D”, “character E”, “character F (correct)”. No numerical value is assigned to any of the. That is, when the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, so the post-reach notice effect is not executed. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 89 are assigned to “character D”, and the numerical values 90 to 99 are assigned to “character E” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character F (accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 94 are assigned to “character D”, and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to “character E” as the numerical range. No value is assigned to “Character F (accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical range of the random number for comparison with the after-reach execution determination random number value is “none”, “character D”, “character E”, and “character F (correct)”. No numerical value is assigned to any of the. That is, when the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, so the post-reach notice effect is not executed. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 39 are assigned to “character D”, and the numerical values 40 to 94 are assigned to “character E” as the numerical range. The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the “character F (accurate)”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical range is not assigned to “none”, the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to “character D”, and the numerical values 30 to 94 are assigned to “character E” as the numerical range. The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the “character F (accurate)”.

  As shown in FIG. 441, in the case where the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is “normal reach out”, “reach A out”, or “reach B out”, the display mode of “character F (accurate)” Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character F (probability)" is displayed in the post-reach notice effect, the determination result of the special figure variation game is reach A hit or reach reach B. The hit is confirmed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific hit / miss judgment result (e.g., a hit) in the post-reach notice effect. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the post-reach notice effect is based on the probability of winning or the probability of being out of contact, the probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, the probability of selecting a predetermined character image, etc. Will be decided. In the present embodiment, “Character D”, “Character E”, and “Character F” (accurate) are “Character D”, “Character E”, and “Character E” so that the reliability is higher than “None”. Compared to "None", "Character F (accurate)" is far out of reach when the random number distribution shown in FIG. It is set to be smaller in the cases of "reach A out" and "reach B out"). Furthermore, as compared to "Character D", "Character E" has a higher reach than "Character D" so that "Character E" has higher reliability. It is set so as to be less in the case of a reach effect that is more out of place in the case of “win” and “out of reach B” (“out of reach A” and “out of reach B”). In addition, “Character F (Token)” has higher reliability than “Character E”, so that “Character F (Token)” is assigned a random number in comparison with “Character E”. It is set to be less in the case of reach production (“reach A out” and “reach B out”) in the case of reach production (“reach A out” and “reach B”).

  Since the reliability of “character E” is set higher than the reliability of “character D”, the pachinko machine 100 is a big hit when executing “character E” rather than executing “character D”. Players can be expected to win. Further, since the reliability of “character F (acknowledgement)” is set higher than the reliability of “character E”, the pachinko machine 100 executes “character F (acknowledgement)” rather than executing “character E”. The player can be expected to win the big hit. "Character D", "Character E", or "Character F (probability)" can also indicate the level of expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 442 shows an example of the character image used in the normal notice effect after the reach. FIG. 442 (a) shows a character image representing a "grandpa" that is displayed during the normal notice presentation during the reach production of "character D", and FIG. 442 (b) shows the reach presentation of "character E". A character image representing a "boxer" displayed during the normal announcement production of is shown, and in FIG. 442 (c), a character representing a "bancho" displayed during the normal announcement production during the reach production of "character F". The image is shown. These character images are displayed in the effect display area 208d, which is an area overlapping any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, when the after-reach notice effect is executed in the normal notice effect.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. 443 and 444. 443 and 444 are flowcharts showing the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 424.

  As shown in FIG. 443, in the special figure prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is electric support (step S1000). In step S1000, for example, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the time saving flag is in the on state, and if it is determined that the time saving flag is in the on state and the power supply is being supported, the process proceeds to step S1001 and the time saving flag is in the off state. If it is determined that the non-electricity support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1101.

  As shown in FIG. 420, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is made to hit the right side so as to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 at the time of electric support, and enter the special figure 1 starting port 230 at the time of non-electric support. It is designed to be left-handed. For this reason, the winning of the special map 1 starting port 230 during electric power support and the winning of the special map 2 starting port 232 during non-electric power support are irregular. Excluded from processing.

  In step S1001 subsequent to step S1000, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting opening 232. Whether or not the prize has been won is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 preread number stored in the special figure 2 preread number storage area described later. And compare. For example, the main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 reserved number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, there is a prize at the special figure 2 starting port 232. If so, the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number, the main control unit 300 determines that there is no winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and causes the processes of steps S1003 to S1013 described below. The special figure prefetching process is ended without doing anything.

  In step S1003 subsequent to step S1001, the start information related to the hold increased due to the winning is pre-read to determine in advance whether or not the special figure 2 variation game related to the hold is determined, and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit. . For example, the main control unit 300 moves to step S1005 if it judges that the hit / no hit result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, and moves to step S1007 if it judges that the hit / no hit result is not a big hit.

  In step S1005 following step S1003, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 428 (b) for the pre-reading hit special figure determination random number value, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 2 variation game ( The stop pattern) is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  On the other hand, if the result of the prior determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit. For example, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S1009 if it judges that the hit / no hit result is a small hit, and moves to step S1011 if it judges that the hit / no hit result is not a small hit.

  If the result of the prior determination is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined in step S1009. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 428 (b) for the pre-reading hit special figure determination random number value, and refers in advance to the stop symbol after the special figure 2 variation game. It is determined and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the winning / failing result determined in advance is not a small hit, but a loss, the process proceeds to step S1011 to determine a loss symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the outlier symbol determining random number value stored in the RAM 308, and refers to the special symbol 2 determining table shown in FIG. 428 (b) for the random number value, and changes to the special symbol 2 The stop symbol after the game is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1005, S1009, or step S1013 next to S1011, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game is selected based on the stop symbols preliminarily determined in these steps. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game using the stop symbol, the random number value for determining the special figure variation time, and the special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 430, The special figure prefetching process ends.

  Further, in step S1013, for example, the main control unit 300 sets the special figure 2 variation game success / failure result related to the suspension of execution of the special figure 2 prefetch process and the special figure variation time pre-determined in step S1013 as the special figure 2 prefetch result. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of FIG. The main control unit 300 is adapted to store the pre-determined special figure 2 variation game stop symbol and special figure variation time as the special figure 2 prefetch result in the earliest empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage section. There is. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four special figure 2 pre-reading results.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 preread number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 preread results stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit as the special figure 2 preread number is provided. The main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information to the next rank of the lowest (last) special figure 2 preread result information each time the number of special figure 2 preread results increases by one. In the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increase of the holding, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all the holdings every time.

  In step S1000, for example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the time saving flag is in the off state and is not in the power support state, the process proceeds to step S1101 shown in FIG. 444. Since each process performed in steps S1101 to S1113 shown in FIG. 444 is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of steps S1001 to S1013 described using FIG. 443 is replaced with “special figure 1”, The description is omitted. In addition, the special figure prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 443 and 444 is executed when the number of pending storage of special figure variation games to be executed is within the upper limit range.

  The special figure prefetching process in FIGS. 443 and 444 is executed by referring to the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetch processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 445, the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process when the game ball enters the special opening 1 or 2 starting opening 230, 232 and the starting information is acquired will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution processing at the time of acquisition of the start information, which is executed in the effect control processing (step S309) shown in FIG. 425, for example. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 or the like by the CPU 404 and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of starting information acquisition and at the start of a special figure fluctuation game described later. The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 445, in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of winning the start (at the time of obtaining the start-up information), first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice notification effect is currently being executed (step S1201). . The first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the prefetch execution flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value indicates the ON state, the prefetch notice notification effect is being executed. If it is determined that the value indicates the off state, it is determined that the prefetching notice notification effect is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process of the main control unit 300 (step S233) is a predetermined variation time. to decide. The predetermined fluctuation times of the present embodiment are six such as 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms, and 65000 ms. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined variation time, the process proceeds to step S1205. If it is determined that the variation time is not the predetermined variation time, steps S1205 to S1213 described below are performed. Without executing, the process moves to step S1215.

  In step S1205, the pending change lottery process 1 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the hold change lottery random number value from the hold change lottery random number counter provided in, for example, the RAM 408, and uses the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery result of either "A" or "holding B" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408 and the change time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the pending change lottery table read from the ROM 406 shown in FIG. The pending change lottery process 1 is executed by using the pending change lottery random number value acquired from the pending change lottery random number. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the pending change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1207, which is subsequent to step S1205, the lottery process 2 for holding change is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value for board surface ramp prefetch lottery from the random number counter for board surface ramp prefetch lottery provided in the RAM 408, and uses the board surface ramp prefetch lottery table shown in FIG. 433 to “no change”. , “Lighting (blue)”, “Blinking (blue)”, “High-speed blinking (red)” is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 stores in the RAM 408 the variable time included in the pre-reading result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the board surface lamp pre-reading lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery process 2 for holding change is executed by using the random number value for the board ramp pre-reading lottery acquired from the provided random number counter for the board ramp pre-reading lottery. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the pending change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1209 following step S1207, it is determined whether the lottery result is other than "no change", that is, whether or not the lottery process 1 or the lottery process 2 of the pending change is winning. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the pending change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is either “Hold A” or “Hold B”. And it is determined that the lottery is won. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the pending change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is “lit (blue)” or “blinking (blue)”. It is determined that the lottery is won if either "" or "fast blinking (red)". If the lottery result is a win in at least one of the pending change lottery process 1 or the pending change lottery process 2, the process proceeds to step S1211, and the lottery results of both the pending change lottery process 1 and the pending change lottery process 2 are Also "no change", that is, in the case of non-winning, the process proceeds to step S1215 without executing steps S1211 and S1213 described later.

  In step S1211, which is subsequent to step S1209, the number of executions of the prefetching notice is set. The number of times the pre-reading notice is executed is set based on the number of special figure reservations. When the first sub-control unit 400 wins in the lottery process 1 or 2 of the hold change, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number-of-holds information included in the prefetch result information command sent from the main control unit 300 and provides it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. It is stored in the prefetching notice execution count storage unit. When the special figure type included in the prefetch result information command is special figure 2, the same number as the reserved number of special figure 2 included in the command is stored in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit and included in the prefetch result information command. If the special figure type to be displayed is special figure 1, the same number as the reserved number of special figure 1 included in the command is stored in the prefetching notice execution count storage unit. For example, the lottery processes 1 and 2 (steps S1205 and S1207) of the pending change are executed for the second pending (special map type of the prefetch result information command is "1" and pending quantity information is "2") of the special map 1. In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 sets “2” as the prefetching notice execution count in the prefetching notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408. In addition, the lottery processes 1 and 2 (steps S1205, S1207) of the pending change are executed for the third pending (special map type of the prefetch result information command is "2" and pending quantity information is "3") of the special drawing 2. In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 sets “3” as the prefetching notice execution count in the prefetching notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the hold display image as many times as the number of prefetching notice executions based on the winning content of the hold change lottery.

  In step S1213 subsequent to step S1211, the first sub control unit 400 sets the prefetch execution flag stored in the RAM 408 to the ON state in order to indicate that the prefetch notice notification effect is being executed. The first sub-control unit 400 sets “1” as the value of the flag to a predetermined storage of the RAM 408, for example, in order to set the flag of the read-ahead notification indicating that the read-ahead notification is being executed to the ON state. Store in the area. As a result, the prefetch advance notice is set during execution. When the pre-reading notice is not being executed, the first sub-control unit 400 stores “0” as the value of the flag in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and turns off the pre-reading notice executing flag. Set to state. The first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1215 after setting the prefetching notice in-execution flag to the ON state.

  In step S1215, which is subsequent to step S1213, an output process of a hold command based on the lottery result of the lottery process 1 for holding change is executed. When the lottery result of the lottery process 1 for holding change is non-winning, the first sub-control unit 400 decorates the holding command including the information that the held display image related to the winning start information is the default display of "no change". The result is output to the symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquiring the start information is ended. Thereby, the pending display image in the display mode of the circular pending display filled in with a predetermined color is displayed at a predetermined location in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 pending display areas 208d1 and d2 of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed.

  When the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the hold change is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the hold display image related to the winning start information as “Hold A” or “Hold” based on the hold change lottery result. "H" is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold command including the information on the hold display mode corresponding to any of "B" is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the time of acquiring the start information is ended. . Thereby, the special display 1 and the special drawing of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 are the hold display images in the display mode of either "holding A" of "evil merchant Echigoya" or "holding B" of "Yoshimune". The two reserved display areas 208d1 and d2 are displayed at predetermined locations.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a hold command output process based on the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the hold change. When the lottery result of the hold change lottery process 2 is a non-winning result, a hold command including information that sets the lighting state of the board lamps 224a and 224b to the default state of "no change" is output to the board lamps 224a and 224b to start. The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of information acquisition is ended. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b emit light in the default display lighting mode.

  Further, when the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the pending change is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the lighting state of the panel lamp 224a to “lighting (blue)”, “blinking (blue)”, or “fast blinking”. (Red) ”is output to the panel lamp 224a, and a predetermined lighting mode corresponding to the suspension command of the panel lamp 224a is designated and output to the panel lamp 224b to obtain start information. The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process is ended. As a result, the board surface lamp 224a is turned on in the lighting mode of "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "high speed flashing (red)", and in synchronization therewith, the board surface lamp 224b emits light in a predetermined lighting mode. .

  According to the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins both the lottery process 1 (step S1205) for the pending change and the lottery process 2 (step S1207) for the pending change, the special control in the main control unit 300 is performed. Information on the number of holdings can be notified at three places including either the 1st holding lamp 218 or the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. By doing so, since it is possible to notify three or more points to one piece of information about the game, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by giving a plurality of notifications to one piece of game information, it may be possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of superiority.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery process 1 for the pending change in step S1205 and the lottery process 2 for the pending change in step S1207 are performed independently of each other. However, for example, the lottery in the pending change lottery process 1 is won. Only in such a case, the lottery process 2 for the pending change may be executed. Alternatively, the lottery process 2 of the pending change may be executed first, and the lottery process 1 of the pending change may be executed only when the lottery process 2 wins the lottery.

  Next, the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game will be described with reference to FIG. 446. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control unit prefetch advance notice execution processing at the start of the special figure variation game which is executed in the effect control processing (step S309) shown in FIG. 425, for example. This process is executed once for one special figure variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 446, in the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice executing flag is on (step S1301). For example, the first sub-control unit 400 reads the value of the prefetching announcement executing flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “1”, the prefetching announcement executing flag is in the ON state. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the prefetching announcement in-progress flag is in the off state, and the processing of steps S1303 to S1309 described below is not executed and step S1311 is executed. Move to.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, either the “holding A” or the “holding B” is won in the pending change lottery process 1 in step S1205, or “lighting (blue)”, “in the pending change lottery process 2 in step S1207. When "blinking (blue)" or "high-speed blinking (red)" is won (Yes in step S1209), the prefetching notice execution count is set (step S1211) and the prefetching execution flag is set to the ON state ( Step S1213).

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 reduces the prefetching notice execution count by "1". For example, the first sub control unit 400 reads the value of the number of times of pre-reading notice execution stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, subtracts “1” from the read value, and proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, which follows step S1303, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice execution count subtracted by "1" in step S1303 is "0". For example, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the value after subtraction of the prefetching notice execution count in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and when determining that the prefetching notice execution count after subtraction is “0”, moves to step S1307. If it is determined that the prefetching notice execution count after subtraction is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1307, which follows step S1305, output processing of a change command according to the type of advance notice is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub-control unit 400 also outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a, 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 for the panel lamps 224a, 224b. Accordingly, the panel lamps 224a and 224b perform lighting display in a normal display mode that is neither "lighting (blue)", "blinking (blue)", or "fast flashing (red)".

  In step S1309, which follows step S1307, the prefetching announcement in-execution flag is set to the off state. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the value of the flag stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0” in order to set the prefetching announcement in-execution flag to the off state and indicate that the prefetching announcement notification has ended. Is stored and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, the normal advance notice lottery process is executed, and the first sub-control unit prefetch advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game is ended.

  Next, the normal advance notice lottery process of step S1311 of the first sub-control unit prefetch advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 446 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In step S1401, the first sub-control unit 400 sets a predetermined variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process of the main control unit 300 (step S233). It is determined whether it is a variable time. The predetermined fluctuation times of the present embodiment are six such as 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms, and 65000 ms. The first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1403 if it determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined variation time, and ends the normal advance notice lottery process if it determines that the variation time is not the predetermined variation time. .

  In step S1403, advance notice lottery 1 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the pending change lottery random number value from, for example, the pending change lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. Obtain one of the lottery results of "with button".

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408 and the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the advance notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 1 process is executed using the obtained first random number for normal notice execution determination and the first random number for normal notice execution determination. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 1 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1405, which follows step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 1 process is “system with button”, and if it is determined that it is not “system with button”, the process proceeds to step S1407. If it is determined that the system is a "button system", the process proceeds to step S1409.

  If it is determined that the system is not a "button system" and the process proceeds to step S1407, the advance notice lottery 2 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the second random number value for normal advance notice execution determination, for example, from the second random number counter for normal advance notice execution determination, which is provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 435. A lottery result of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (probability)" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408 and the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the advance notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The advance notice lottery 2 process is executed using the obtained normal advance notice execution determination second random number value acquired from the normal advance notice execution determination second random number value. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 2 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  If it is determined that the system has a button and the process proceeds to step S1409, the notice lottery 3 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the third normal random number execution determination random number value provided from the RAM 408 and uses the advance lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436. A lottery result of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (probability)" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408 and the variation time included in the pre-reading result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 3 process is executed by using the obtained normal notice execution determination third random number value obtained from the normal notice execution determination third random number value. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 3 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1411, which is subsequent to step S1409, advance notice lottery 4 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the fourth normal randomization execution determination fourth random number value provided in the RAM 408, for example, and uses the advance notification lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438. “Normal / Normal”, “Normal / Vibration”, “Normal / Vibration + Rotation”, “Vibration / Normal”, “Vibration / Vibration”, “Vibration + Rotation / Vibration”, or “Deca Button Display / Vibration + Rotation” Get either lottery result.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400, the result of the advance notice lottery 3, the advance notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438 read from the ROM 406, and the normal advance notice execution determination fourth random number counter provided in the RAM 408. The advance notice lottery 4 process is executed using the normal advance notice execution determination fourth random number value acquired from. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 4 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  When the notice lottery 2 process in step S1407 or the notice lottery 4 process in step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1413. In step S1413, it is determined whether the variation time of the special figure variation game is equal to the variation time including the normal reach effect (in this example, "10000 ms" and "15000 ms"). In this judgment, since the normal reach production has a shorter production execution time than other reach productions, the timing at which the cut-in notice can be executed after the start of the reach production cannot be obtained. Therefore, when the normal reach production is executed, the post-reach notice is not issued. To process. Therefore, when it is determined that the variation time of the special figure variation game is the variation time including the normal reach effect, the normal notice lottery process is ended, and when the variation time of the special figure variation game is not the variation time including the normal reach effect, the notice lottery is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1415 for performing five processes.

  In step S1415, advance notice lottery 5 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the display mode / button mode determining random number value from the display mode / button mode determining random value counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 441. , "Character D", "Character E", or "Character F (accurate)" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided in the RAM 408, and the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the advance notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. The advance notice lottery 5 process is executed using the obtained post-reach advance notice execution determination random number value acquired from the post-reach advance notice execution determination random number value. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 5 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. When the processing in step S1415 is executed, the normal notice lottery processing is ended.

  Next, the game effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 448 to 460. Each of FIGS. 448 to 460 shows a decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100, and a board surface lamp 224 (224a, 224b), and a special feature is provided below it. FIG. 1 shows a display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220. First, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 448 to 450. 448 (a) to 450 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  In FIG. 448 (a), the first off-design symbol “special figure I” is stopped and displayed on both the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, three LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, which indicates that there are three special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, indicating that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at this time is a non-electric power support state that is not the electric power support state, and the special map low probability state.

  The special figure 1 reserved display area 208d1 is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 reserved display area 208d1 notifies the player of the number of pairs of the special figure 1 random number values stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area as the special figure 1 reserved number (special figure 1 start information reserved number). It is possible. At the time shown in FIG. 448 (a), since three special figure 1 variable games are reserved, the special display 1 reserved display area 208d1 is a reserved display image corresponding to the first special figure 1 variable game. a1 is displayed, a reserved display image a2 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game suspended for the second is displayed, and a reserved display image a3 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game suspended for the third is displayed. It is informed that three special figure 1 variable games are held. All the hold display images a1 to a3 are in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  Further, a special figure 2 hold display area 208d2 for displaying a hold related to the special figure 2 variable game is provided on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. The special figure hold display area 208d2 has the same function and function as the special figure 1 hold display area 208d1 except that the hold of the special figure 2 variable game is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this example, since the special figure 2 variable game is not held, the hold display image is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 208d2.

  The board lamps 224a and 224b are normal lighting control according to a predetermined performance procedure from the end of the special figure variation game as shown in FIG. 448 (a) to the start of the next special figure variation game. Lighting or blinking is executed. In this example, the normal effect on the panel lamp 224a is executed in a lighting manner in which the odd number and the even number of the 10 circular lamps alternately blink. Further, the normal effect on the board lamp 224b is executed in a lighting mode in which the upper two groups and the lower two groups of the four petal-shaped lamps alternately blink.

  As shown in FIG. 448 (a), after a predetermined time has elapsed after the "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, it is shown in FIG. 448 (b). As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 448 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number storage area, and executes the success / failure determination related to the special figure variation game to be started, The memory of the acquired special figure 1 random number value set is erased, and the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the remaining special figure 1 random number value data is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reserved number is decremented by one. Further, the main control unit 300 deletes the data of the first special figure 1 random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area at the same time as deleting the first special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. The resultant information is erased, and the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. In the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. In the present example, for example, the hit determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns on the two LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further includes information on the success / failure determination result and the special figure variation time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In FIG. 448 (b) and subsequent figures, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display device 212, 214 during the special figure variation game is next to the center of the 7 segment shown in the special figure 1 display device 212 of FIG. 448 (b). The bars are black and the others are white, indicating that the special symbols are changing.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-execution flag is in the off state (No in step S1301), shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game is ended.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 448 (b), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the command including the information that the number of the special figure 1 reservations is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 448 (b), the reservation display image a3 is deleted and two pieces are displayed. The reserved display images a1 and a2 are displayed in the reserved display mode of the normal suspension.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure variation game (for example, after 8000 ms time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display), as shown in FIG. 448 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212, for example, "Special map I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. Is notified.

  In the midst of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 448 (b) to (c), the board lamps 224a, 224b are lit, blinked, and the like by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 448 (c), after a lapse of a predetermined time after the "decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, it is shown in FIG. 448 (d). As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 448 (d), the same processing as the processing executed before the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 448 (b) is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the earliest set of special figure 1 random number values and executes the win / fail judgment relating to the special figure 1 variation game, and, for example, the win / fail judgment result is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I ”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, sets the LED lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to one, and further includes information on the success / failure determination result and the special figure variation time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The 1st sub control part 400 which received the said command from the main control part 300 performs the 1st sub control part side notice execution process at the time of the start of special figure fluctuation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-execution flag is in the off state (No in step S1301), shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 448 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the command including the information that the special figure 1 pending number is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 448 (d), the pending display image a2 is erased and one Only the hold display image a1 in the hold display mode of the normal hold of.

  When one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variation game, the following processing is executed during execution of the special figure variation game. In the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 424, the main control unit 300 lights two of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 to turn on the special figure 1. Indicates that the number of holds is two. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetch processing shown in FIGS. 443 and 444 for the derived special figure 1 starting information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current game state is not in electric support (No in step S1000), then determines that the winning is in the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S1101), and is derived. Based on the special figure 1 starting information, it is determined that the advance determination result is a failure by referring to the hit probability low probability table shown in FIG. 427 (b) (No in step S1103, No in step S1107), and FIG. The stop symbol is determined to be, for example, "special figure I" by referring to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a) (step S1111), and the variation time is referred to by referring to the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. 429. Is determined to be, for example, 40,000 ms (step S1113), and the special figure prefetching process ends. The command (prefetch command) including the information on the pre-determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first sub-control unit 400, which has received the command including the information of these pre-determination results, executes the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquiring the start information shown in FIG. 445. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetch execution flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and since the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40000 ms, it corresponds to the predetermined variation time. Judgment (step S1203), referring to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 431, it is judged that the hold change lottery process 1 is executed to win “Hold A” (step S1205), and the board lamp shown in FIG. 433. With reference to the prefetch lottery table, the lottery process 2 for holding change is executed to determine that "no change" has been selected (step S1207), and since "held A" has been won, one of the lottery is selected. It is determined that the player has won the prize (step S1209), "2" is set as the number of prefetching notice executions (step S1211), and the prefetching execution flag is set to the ON state. (Step S1213), and outputs the read-ahead notice command including a display mode of the hold display image a2 decorative pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 448 (e), the hold display image a2 is the hold display area 208d1 with the character image representing "bad merchant Echigoya" in the display mode corresponding to the "hold A" shown in FIG. 432 (b). Is displayed in. In addition, since "no change" is selected in the lottery process 2 of the pending change, the board surface lamps 224a and 224b are displayed in FIGS. 448 (b) to (c) during the period shown in FIGS. 448 (e) to 450 (c). As in the middle of the special figure 1 variation game shown in), lighting, blinking, etc. are executed by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 448 (f) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variation game, "special figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208b, 208c, "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" are stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special figure 1 variation game is out of sync.

  As shown in FIG. 448 (f), it is shown in FIG. 449 (a) after a lapse of a predetermined time after "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 449 (a), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number storage area, and executes the success / failure determination related to the special figure variation game to be started, The memory of the acquired special figure 1 random number value set is erased, and the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the remaining special figure 1 random number value data is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reserved number is decremented by one. Further, the main control unit 300 deletes the data of the first special figure 1 random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area at the same time as deleting the first special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. The resultant information is erased, and the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. In the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. In the present example, for example, the hit determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 10,000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, and at the same time transmits a command including information on the hit / miss determination result and the special figure variation time to the first sub control section 400. Further, the main control unit 300 lights one of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 in the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It indicates that the number of 1's is now one.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetch execution in progress flag is in the ON state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the prefetch advance notice execution count (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch advance notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-reading notice executions (= 1) at the present time is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal announcement lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 10000 ms, so determines that the variation time corresponds to a predetermined variation time, and executes the announcement lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process of selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434. In this example, "no button system" is selected. In the case of a buttonless system (No in step S1405), the first sub-control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 2 process (step S1407). In step S1407, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. In this example, “none” is selected. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 10,000 ms, so it is determined to be the variation time of normal reach (No in step S1413), and the advance notice lottery in step S1415. 5 The normal advance notice lottery process is ended without executing the process.

  By the above processing, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the special game 1 variable game, and neither the pre-reach notice effect nor the post-reach notice effect preceding the normal reach effect is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 449 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the command including the information that the number of the special figure 1 reservations is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 449 (a), the reservation display image a2 is deleted and the reservation A The hold display image a1 is displayed in the hold display mode.

  FIG. 449 (b) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 variation game. The reach type in this example is normal reach, and "decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display regions 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol is rotated in the middle symbol display region 208b.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure variation game (after 10,000 ms from the start of the symbol variation display), as shown in FIG. 449 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212, for example, "Figure I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game may be out of order. Be informed.

  In the midst of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 449 (a) to (c), the board lamps 224a, 224b are lit, blinked, and the like by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 449 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed after the "decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, as shown in FIG. 449 (d). As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 449 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number storage area, and executes the success / failure determination related to the special figure variation game to be started, The memory of the acquired special figure 1 random number value set is erased, and the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the remaining special figure 1 random number value data is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reserved number is decremented by one. Further, the main control unit 300 deletes the data of the first special figure 1 random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area at the same time as deleting the first special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. The resultant information is erased, and the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. In the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. In this example, for example, the hit determination result is out of alignment (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40,000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns off all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further includes a command including the result of success / failure determination and the special figure variation time. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the prefetching notice execution count (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-reading notice executions (= 0) at the present time is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is 0 (Yes in step S1305), and a change command output process according to the type of notice is executed. To execute. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub-control unit 400 also outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a, 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 for the panel lamps 224a, 224b. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the prefetching notice in-execution flag to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40,000 ms, and therefore determines that the predetermined variation time is satisfied, and executes the notice lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process of selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434. In this example, "system with button" is selected. If the system has buttons (Yes in step S1405), the first sub-control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first sub control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436 and executes the lottery regarding the advance notice before reach. In this example, "character A" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438 and executes the lottery regarding the button mode and the display mode of the chance button 136 in the pre-reach advance notice. In this example, "normal / normal" is selected as the "display mode / button mode". Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40,000 ms, so it is the variation time of reach A instead of normal reach (Yes in step S1413), and step S1413. The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 441 and executes the lottery for the post-reach notice. In this example, "character D" is selected.

  By the above processing, the reach effect of the reach A is executed in the special figure 1 variable game, and the pre-reach notice effect of “with button” is performed prior to the reach A effect. In the effect of "with button", the effect of "display mode / button mode" of "normal / normal" is performed for the chance button 136, and subsequently, the effect of "character A" is performed. In addition, after the reach A effect, the post-reach notice effect by the “character D” is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 449 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the information that the number of the special figure 1 reservations is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 449 (d), the reservation display image a1 is deleted and the special figure No hold display image is displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 449 (e) schematically shows a chance button 136 in the lower right part of the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 449 (d). FIG. 449 (e) shows a state in which an operation request image for prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a pre-reach notice effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 440 (a), and the display mode of the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. Is also "normal" shown in FIG. 439 (a).

  FIG. 449 (f) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 and the "character A" of the pre-reach notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player schematically shows a state in which the player's finger is placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 450 (a) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special game 1 variation game. The reach type in this example is reach A, and “decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol is rotated in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 450 (b) shows a state in which "character D" is displayed as the post-reach notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 450 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 variation game was started (after 40000 ms has elapsed since the symbol variation display was started), the special figure 1 display device 212, for example, " "Special map I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 8-decoration 7-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 450 (a) to (c), the board lamps 224a, 224b are lit, blinked, etc. by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure.

  Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 451 to 452. 451 (a) to 452 (f) show, in this order, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 451 (a) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variation game is performed. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at this time is a non-electric power support state that is not the electric power support state, and the special map low probability state.

  In FIG. 451 (a), the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the first off symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, one LED lights up on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 to indicate that there is one to-be-held Toku-zu 1. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, indicating that there is no special figure 2 hold. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the same processing as the processing executed prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game described in the first embodiment is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the earliest set of the special figure 1 random number values and executes the hit / non-judgment related to the special figure 1 variation game. For example, the hit determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is "special figure I"), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, and at the same time transmits a command including information on the hit / miss determination result and the special figure variation time to the first sub control section 400.

  The 1st sub control part 400 which received the said command from the main control part 300 performs the 1st sub control part side notice execution process at the time of the start of special figure fluctuation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-execution flag is in the off state (No in step S1301), shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal notice effect is not executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 451 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 has received the command including the information on the number of special figure 1 reservations, as shown in FIG. 451 (a), one reservation display image of the normal reservation display mode is displayed. Display a1.

  When one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variation game, the following processing is executed during execution of the special figure variation game. In the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 424, the main control unit 300 lights two of the four LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 to turn on the special figure 1. Indicates that the number of holds is two. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetch processing shown in FIGS. 443 and 444 for the derived special figure 1 starting information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current game state is not in electric support (No in step S1000), then determines that the winning is in the special figure 1 starting port 230 (Yes in step S1101), and is derived. Based on the special figure 1 starting information, it is determined that the pre-determination result is a hit by referring to the hit probability low probability table shown in FIG. 427 (b) (No in step S1103, No in step S1107), and FIG. By referring to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a), the stop symbol is decided as, for example, "special figure A" (step S1111), and by referring to the special figure 1 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined to be, for example, 45000 ms (step S1113), and the special figure prefetching process ends. The command (prefetch command) including the information on the pre-determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first sub-control unit 400, which has received the command including the information of these pre-determination results, executes the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquiring the start information shown in FIG. 445. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetch execution in progress flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms, so it corresponds to the predetermined variation time. Judgment (step S1203), referring to the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 431, it is determined that the hold change lottery process 1 is executed to win “Hold B” (step S1205), and the board lamp shown in FIG. 433. The pre-reading lottery table is referred to, the lottery process 2 of the pending change is executed, and it is determined that "lighting (blue)" has been selected (step S1207), and furthermore, "holding B" and "lighting (blue)" are won. Therefore, it is determined that one of the lottery has been won (step S1209), and “2” is set as the number of pre-reading notice executions (step S1211), and the pre-reading execution is performed. Flag the ON state (step S1213), the look-ahead warning command including a display mode of the display mode and the board lamp 224 of the hold display image a2 and outputs the decoration pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 451 (b), the hold display image a2 is displayed in the hold display area 208d1 with a character image representing "Yoshimune" in the display mode corresponding to "hold B" shown in FIG. 432 (b). To be done. Further, since "lighting (blue)" is selected in the lottery process 2 of the pending change, the board surface lamp 224a is provided between the two consecutive special figure variation games shown in FIGS. 451 (b) to 451 (e). Causes all of the 10 circular lamps corresponding to "lighting (blue)" to light in blue, and the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Further, in synchronization with the look-ahead notice effect of the board surface lamp 224a, two petal-shaped lamps corresponding to the number to be reserved are sequentially turned on from the bottom of the board surface lamp 224b to notify the reservation number, and to correspond to the reservation related to the pre-reading notification. The second petal-shaped lamp is lit with a specific luminescent color to give the player a sense of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 451 (c) after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variation game, "special figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208b, 208c, "decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variable game is out.

  As shown in FIG. 451 (c), shown in FIG. 451 (d) after a lapse of a predetermined time after "decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 451 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number storage area, and executes the success / failure determination related to the special figure variation game to be started, The memory of the acquired special figure 1 random number value set is erased, and the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the remaining special figure 1 random number value data is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reserved number is decremented by one. Further, the main control unit 300 deletes the data of the first special figure 1 random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area at the same time as deleting the first special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. The resultant information is erased, and the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. In the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. In the present example, for example, the hit determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns on the LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to one, and further provides information on the success / failure determination result and the special figure variation time. The command including the command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetch execution in progress flag is in the ON state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the prefetch advance notice execution count (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch advance notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-reading notice executions (= 1) at the present time is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal announcement lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms, and thus determines that the variation time does not correspond to the predetermined variation time, and ends the normal announcement lottery process.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 451 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the information that the number of special figure 1 reservations is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 451 (d), the reservation display image a2 is erased and the reservation B is held. The hold display image a1 is displayed in the hold display mode.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variation game (after 8000 ms has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display), as shown in FIG. 451 (e), the special figure 1 display device 212, for example, “ "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Is notified.

  In the midst of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 451 (b) to (e), the look-ahead notice display is executed by the lighting control of the board lamp 224a according to the production procedure of "lighting (blue)". In synchronization with the lighting control of the panel lamp 224a, in the panel lamp 224b, the number of petal-patterned lamps equal to the number reserved in special figure 1 is lit, and the petal-shaped lamp indicating the reservation related to the pre-reading notice has a predetermined color. Light.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 are provided as the notification means capable of notifying the information on the number of holdings as the game information regarding the game, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit are provided. By the control of 400, with respect to the information on the number of holdings, a total of the lighting mode of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the display mode in the special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the board surface lamp 224b is calculated. It is possible to notify the number of holdings at three places. According to this embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one piece of information about the game, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by giving a plurality of notifications to one piece of game information, it may be possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of superiority. Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means capable of executing at least the effect related to the game, for example, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board lamps 224a, 224b, a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided, and a plurality of effect means are provided. As the rendering means, for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the board surface lamp 224, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 can be used to execute notification of information on the number of holdings at three or more places. In this way, in some cases, the notification can be made noticeable by using a plurality of presentation means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control unit capable of at least executing the main control unit timer interrupt process which is the control process related to the game, and, for example, the start of special figure fluctuation started from the main control unit 300. It is provided with a first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control unit that can execute at least a first sub-control unit main process that is a control process related to a game by receiving a command or a prefetch result information command. Then, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 as at least one of the plurality of effecting means is controlled by the main controller 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, which is controlled by the main control unit 300 and has a high reliability of the information on the number of holdings, is used as one of a plurality of rendering means.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the board lamps 224a and 224b, and the special symbol 1 hold of the decorative symbol display device 208 among the notification of the number of holdings executed at three places of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notification of the number of holdings by at least two by turning on the display area 208d1 and the panel lamp 224b is performed, for example, at least including the period from the increase of the number of holdings to the decrease of the number of holdings, the pre-reading notification period, and the like. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing the effects by at least two notifications during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of rendering means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as the image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute at least one notification, for example, notification of the number of holdings. According to the present embodiment, it may be possible to perform the notification at a portion where the player's eyes are most likely to go.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the game information is a start hold display indicating the number of times the variable display is held. The plurality of effect means includes a special figure 1 hold lamp 218 as hold display means for indicating the number of hold times, and board surface lamps 224a, 224b as lamp notification means, and the notification by the start hold display indicates the hold display means and the image. It can be executed at least in three places, the display means and the lamp notification means.

  According to the present embodiment, the symbol variation display is an important effect that informs the player whether or not the advantageous jackpot is given, and notifies the player of the number of holdings of the important effect in a plurality of places in an easy-to-understand manner. Sometimes you can.

  Further, the present embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the notifications by the start pending display can function as a pre-reading notice. According to the present embodiment, there are cases where reliable notification can be executed while increasing the expectation for a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 451 (e), shown in FIG. 451 (f) after a lapse of a predetermined time after "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 variation game is started. Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 451 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number storage area, and executes the success / failure determination related to the special figure variation game to be started, The memory of the acquired special figure 1 random number value set is erased, and the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the remaining special figure 1 random number value data is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reserved number is decremented by one. Further, the main control unit 300 deletes the data of the first special figure 1 random number value set in the special figure 1 random value storage area at the same time as deleting the first special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. The resultant information is erased, and the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. In the same process, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determining the special figure variation time and determines the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game. In the present example, for example, the result of the hit determination is a hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure A”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, turns off all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and further includes a command including the result of success / failure determination and the special figure variation time. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes the first sub control unit side advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts 1 from the prefetching notice execution count (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of pre-reading notice executions (= 0) at the present time is 0, it is determined that the number of pre-reading notice executions is 0 (Yes in step S1305), and a change command output process according to the type of notice is executed. To execute. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the hold display mode to normal hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub-control unit 400 also outputs a change command for setting the lighting state of the panel lamps 224a, 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 for the panel lamps 224a, 224b. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the prefetching notice in-execution flag to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal announcement lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms, so determines that the variation time corresponds to the predetermined variation time, and executes the announcement lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the notice lottery 1 process of selecting whether or not to use the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 434. In this example, "system with button" is selected. If the system has buttons (Yes in step S1405), the first sub-control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first sub control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 436 and executes the lottery regarding the advance notice before reach. In this example, "character B" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 438 and executes the lottery regarding the button mode and the display mode of the chance button 136 in the pre-reach advance notice. In this example, “vibration + rotation / vibration” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms, so it is not the normal reach but the variation time of reach A (Yes in step S1413), and the step The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the advance notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 441 and executes the lottery for the post-reach notice. In this example, "character F" is selected.

  By the above processing, the reach effect of the reach A is executed in the special figure 1 variable game, and the pre-reach notice effect of “with button” is performed prior to the reach A effect. As for the effect of "system with button", the effect of "vibration + rotation / vibration" in "display mode / button mode" is performed for the chance button 136, and subsequently, the effect by "character B" is performed. Further, after the reach A effect, a post-reach notice effect by the “character F” is performed.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 451 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special Figure 1 variation game of the effect of moving (rotating) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the information that the number of the special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1, as shown in FIG. 451 (f), the reservation display image a1 is deleted and the special figure No hold display image is displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  452 (a) schematically shows a chance button 136 in the lower right part of the drawing in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 451 (f). FIG. 452 (a) shows a state in which an operation request image for urging the chance button 136 to be pressed is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a pre-reach notice effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is "vibration" shown in FIG. 440 (b), and the display mode of the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is shown. Is "vibration + rotation" shown in FIG. 439 (c).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 including a chance button 136 as an operating unit, and an image display unit, for example, a decorative symbol display device, as at least an effect unit capable of executing an effect related to a game. 208, the production means includes a production button (chance button 136) as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is an operation request image for requesting a press operation of the chance button 136. The image of the chance button 136 can be displayed, and the operation request image includes the image of the shape of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 can be identified, and the operation request image is the display of the operation request image. Display mode (“vibration” in this example) different from the button mode (“vibration” in this example) of the inside chance button 136. + Can be displayed in rotation ").

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, an operation request image different from the appearance is displayed on the rendering means, which may improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, it may be possible to draw attention to the effect means. In addition, the operation request image may function as a notice or notification. Further, even when the image display is simplified, it may be possible to convey necessary information to the player.

  FIG. 452 (b) shows a state in which the display effect by the pre-reach notice effect “character B” is executed in the effect display area 208d in association with the player pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 452 (c) shows a state where the reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 variation game. The reach type in this example is reach A, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decorative symbol is rotated in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 452 (d) shows a state in which "character F" is displayed as the post-reach notice effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 452 (e), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the special figure 1 variation game (after 45000 ms has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays, for example, “ "Special drawing A" is stopped and displayed, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Is notified.

  In the midst of the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 451 (f) to 452 (e), the board lamps 224a, 224b are lit, blinked, or the like by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure. .

  FIG. 452 (f) shows a state in which an effect for notifying that the big hit is won is being performed. The big hit effect is started in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the big hit effect in which all the lamps of the surface lamps 224a and 224b are turned on at the highest brightness is performed.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 453. 453 (a) to 453 (e), in this order, show a big hit start effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. 453 (a) to 453 (e) schematically show a state notification lamp 222 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 448 and the like. FIG. 453 (a) to FIG. 453 (d) show an example of a big hit start effect performed before the 1R (first round) of the big hit game is won by winning the big hit as a result of the special figure variation game. . Although illustration is omitted, prior to the start of the big hit start effect, a process for right-handing instruction is executed.

  When the main control unit 300 determines that the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, after the special figure fluctuation game is finished, the driving circuit 330 is controlled to control the right hitting lamp and the big hitting lamp among the status notification lamps 222. Turn on and turn off the non-electric support lamp and the electric support lamp. Next, the jackpot start command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 with the information of the status notification lamp 222 included.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300, in the first sub-control unit main processing, an image simulating the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to display an image showing a state in which the player's hand is turning the ball firing handle 134 largely to the right, an arrow indicating that the game ball should fly to the right, and a character string of "right hit". Control processing of.

  In the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the emission brightness of the 10 circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a from top to bottom. For example, the luminous intensities of the first and second circular lamps from the top are set to be higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, and then the luminous intensities of the third to fifth circular lamps are set to be higher than that of the remaining circular lamps. Then, the luminous intensities of the 6th to 8th circular lamps are set to be higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, and then the 9th and 10th circular lamps are compared to those of the remaining circular lamps. The control is performed so that the brightness is higher than the brightness. In the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the emission brightness of the four petal-shaped lamps of the surface lamp 224b from the upper side to the lower side.

  After the above processing is completed, during the big hit start effect shown in FIGS. 453 (a) to 453 (d), the gradation control is performed by the panel lamp 224a so that a group of circular lamp groups sequentially moves downward from above. Then, the right-handing notification is made so that the light is visually recognized to flow down along the right-handing direction. In addition, the board surface lamp 224b gives a right-handing notification in which the petals are visually recognized to flow down along the right-handing direction. Further, the right-handing instruction is also issued in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, under the control of the main control unit 300, the right-handed lamp is turned on and the right-handed notification is also executed in the status display lamp 222.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 are provided as the notification means capable of notifying the right-handed information as the game information regarding the game, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit are provided. By the control of 400, for the right-handed information, the lighting mode of the state display lamp 222, the display mode in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the board lamps 224a, 224b at four positions in total. Right-handed notification can be executed. According to this embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one piece of information about the game, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by giving a plurality of notifications to one piece of game information, it may be possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of superiority. Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means capable of executing at least an effect related to a game, for example, a state display lamp 222, board lamps 224a, 224b, a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided, and a plurality of effect means. As an example, the combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the board lamp 224, and the state display lamp 222 can be used to execute the notification regarding the right-handed information at three or more places. In this way, in some cases, the notification can be made noticeable by using a plurality of presentation means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control unit capable of at least executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which is the control process related to the game, and, for example, a big hit start command sent from the main control unit 300. And a first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control unit capable of executing at least a first sub-control unit main process which is a control process relating to a game. Then, the state display lamp 222 as at least one effect means of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main controller 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the state display lamp 222, which is controlled by the main controller 300 and has high reliability of right-handed information, is used as one of a plurality of rendering means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least two of the status display lamps 222, the board surface lamps 224a and 224b, and the board surface lamps 224a and 224b among the right-handing notifications executed at three or more places of the decorative symbol display device 208 are turned on. The notification of right-handedness is made by the same period. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing the effects by at least two notifications during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of rendering means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute at least one notification, for example, a right-handed notification. According to the present embodiment, it may be possible to perform the notification at a portion where the player's eyes are most likely to go.

  FIG. 453 (e) shows a state in which the first round of the big hit game has started. When the big hit game is started, the right hitting notifications at three or more places by the plurality of effecting means are finished, and the big hit effect of the first round is started. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, the effect of displaying the face of a young man wearing a school cap and a display notifying that the round is 1R are performed. In addition, the display of "right-handed" for the right-handed instruction is also performed. Moreover, the board lamp 224 performs a lighting operation based on a big hit effect. In addition, a state is shown in which the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won by right-handing and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 has one hold.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 454. FIG. 454 (a) shows an effect example in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 when a ball, that is, an error occurs during the big hit game. When a ball or an error occurs during the big hit game, a display "Ball or error Call a clerk" is made in the effect display area 208d to inform the ball or the error. In this case as well, the "right-handed" display of the right-handed instruction continues in the effect display area 208d.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as at least a part of the effect means of the plurality of effect means, for example, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, error notification can be executed when a sphere, that is, an error occurs. Even if there is an error notification, for example, a right-handed instruction can be continued as notification of at least one piece of game information. According to the present embodiment, even if the error notification is given, the information of the notification of the right-handing instruction remains, so that it may be possible to give the player a sense of security. The board lamps 224a and 224b are turned on in an error notification light emission mode corresponding to an error.

  454 (b) to 454 (f) show, in this order, the effect using the chance button 136 in the jackpot game on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, a chance button 136 as an operation means that can be operated by the player and a decorative design display device 208 as an image display means capable of displaying an image are provided, and the effect display area 208d of the decorative design display device 208 is An operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 can be displayed. In the effect display area 208d, a plurality of operation request images for the chance button 136 can be displayed, and effects corresponding to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136 by the player can be executed.

  FIG. 454 (b) exemplifies an image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of starting the effect using the chance button 136. In the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds (= 8), the image of right-handing instruction, and the face of the young man wearing a school cap are displayed, and further, a character string image of “If ○ are aligned, it is certain” is displayed. ing.

  Next, FIG. 454 (c) shows a state in which an operation request image for urging the chance button 136 to be pressed is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect during a big hit. A chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower right part of the figure.

  Three operation request images are arranged in the horizontal direction. The display mode of the operation request images on the left side and the middle side is "normal" shown in FIG. 439 (a), and the display mode of the operation request images on the right side is "vibration + rotation" shown in FIG. 439 (c). At the bottom of each operation request image, an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting the pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed. In addition, below each operation request image, an area for displaying the result of the player pressing the chance button 136 is provided, and a downward arrow is displayed before the result is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 454 (c), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 440 (a).

  FIG. 454 (d) shows a state in which the player depresses the chance button 136 once, the operation request image on the left side disappears, and an image of “◯” is displayed below it. As described above, in this embodiment, each time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request image disappears in order from the left. The valid period images of the operation request images on the middle side and the right side both show that some time has passed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 454 (e), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal”. Further, the player further presses the chance button 136, the operation request image on the inner side disappears, and the image of “◯” is displayed below the operation request image. The effective period image of the operation request image on the right side shows that the operation effective period has further elapsed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 454 (f), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed is “vibration + rotation”. That is, the button mode is changed according to the display mode of the operation request image. As described above, the chance button 136 can operate in a mode in which the operation request image is displayed. Since the chance button 136 can operate in the same manner as the manner indicated by the operation request image, it may be possible to notify the player of the operation of the chance button 136. In addition, the player further presses the chance button 136, the operation request image on the right side disappears, and “◯” is displayed below the operation request image. Further, a character string of "probably changed!" Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of image displays prompting an operation can be simultaneously executed for one operation means, which may improve the interest of the game. In addition, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform the operation at least a plurality of times. In addition, the interest of the game may be improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times of pressing may be easy to understand.

  In the above embodiment, regarding the operation of the player with respect to the operation means, the effective period display image showing one or a plurality of operation effective periods is configured such that the rod portion is gradually shortened to show the passage of time. Alternatively, for example, a countdown of numbers may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the valid period display image is provided for each of the plurality of operation request images. By doing so, it may be possible to inform the player of the effective period for each operation in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in order to avoid complicated display, a smaller number of effective period displays (for example, one) may be displayed for a plurality of operation request images.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation valid period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136, and one valid period display image can be displayed for a plurality of operation request images. By doing so, it may be possible to easily inform that the effective period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side of the plurality of operation request images is “vibration + rotation”, and the display mode of the other operation request images on the left side and the middle side is “normal”. ". By doing so, the display mode of the operation request image may function as a predetermined notice. In this example, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side functions as a notice of a probable change.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, one operation request image disappears in response to one operation of the chance button 136. By doing so, it may be possible to easily inform the player of the remaining number of operations to be performed. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to understand whether or not the operation of the operation unit is effective.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation request image, which is a display mode different from the others, corresponds to the last operation of the plurality of operations of the chance button 136. By doing so, a display mode different from the others may function as a notice. Then, by making the operation corresponding to the different display mode the last of a plurality of times, it may be possible to contribute to the player positively performing the necessary number of operations.

  It should be noted that when the valid period of the operation request image expires, a predetermined effect may be automatically executed without pressing the chance button 136.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 (a) shows an example in which, when the big hit game is seven or more villas, the fact that the seven or more villas are played is notified at three places as game information.

  In FIG. 455 (a), the speaker 120 outputs a special song for notifying that there are seven or more condominiums, and in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character string "8 condominiums!" Is displayed, and the panel lamp 224b is lit in a special lighting mode for notifying that the number of consecutive villas is seven or more, and it is informed that the current jackpot game is seven or more villas at a total of three places. . According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify at three or more places that there are 7 or more solitaires, which is one of the information related to the game, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by giving a plurality of notifications to one piece of game information, it may be possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of superiority. In the effect display area 208d, the current number of consecutive villas is displayed as a number, but with the speaker 120, the panel lamp 224, and the like, the same effect is executed regardless of the number of consecutive villas in seven or more consecutive villas.

  FIGS. 455 (b) to 455 (d) show modified examples of the effect using the operation request image for prompting the user to press the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 454 (c) to 454 (f). In the examples shown in FIGS. 454 (c) to 454 (f), the operation request images disappear in the order of the left side, the middle side, and the right side each time the player presses the chance button 136, but in the present modification, the player After the chance button 136 is pressed three times, the three operation request images disappear at the same time.

  FIG. 455 (b) shows the same state as FIG. 454 (c). FIG. 455 (c) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 three times, and the images of "O" are displayed below the operation request images on the left middle and right sides. FIG. 455 (d) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 three times and then three operation request images disappear at the same time.

  Also according to this modification, a plurality of image displays prompting an operation can be simultaneously executed for one operation means, which may improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform the operation at least a plurality of times. In addition, the interest of the game may be improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times of pressing may be easy to understand.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 (a) shows a modification of the effect using the operation request image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. Although the character string "Press 5 times or more!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d, only two operation request images are displayed. Also, the validity period is not displayed. As described above, the number of times the chance button 136 is requested to be pressed does not have to match the number of operation request images. The player may recognize that the operation needs to be performed a plurality of times as in this example.

  FIG. 456 (b) illustrates a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “vibration + rotation” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. As described above, the display mode of the operation request image may be more flashy than the button mode of the chance button 136. Further, FIG. 456 (c) illustrates a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “normal” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. In this way, the display mode of the operation request image may be lighter than the button mode of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 456 (d) illustrates a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “Big button display (vibration + rotation)” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration + rotation”. This "display mode / button mode" also includes the operation request image in a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 during the display of the operation request image.

  Next, a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 457. FIG. 457 (a) shows a state in which one common effective period display image is used for a plurality of operation request images. By doing so, it may be possible to easily inform that the effective period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136. In this way, the valid period display need not be the same number as the number of operation requests, and for example, two valid period display images may be displayed for three operation requests. By doing so, it may be possible to set the number of effective period displays according to the display area of the image display means, which contributes to an increase in interest in the production.

  FIG. 457 (b) shows a case where a plurality of operation request images have the same display mode. Of course, such an effect may be used. FIG. 457 (c) shows a case in which the pachinko machine 100 has a sub liquid crystal display device 209 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub liquid crystal display device 209 displays “2” indicating the number of holdings. In this way, the number of holdings may be notified at three places, that is, the special figure 1 holding lamp by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 209 by the sub control.

  Next, an effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 458. In the above-described embodiment, in the plurality of operation request images, the display mode of the last operation request image is different from the display mode of the operation request image that disappears before that, but the display mode is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in a), the display mode of the operation request image other than the last operation request image may be different from the display modes of the other operation request images. In FIG. 458 (a), the second operation request image is displayed in a display mode different from other operation request images.

  458 (b) to (d) show a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. In FIGS. 449 (d) to (f) of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which one operation request image is displayed and pressing of the chance button 136 is requested in the symbol variation game, but in FIG. 458 (c). As shown, a plurality of operation request images may be displayed during the special figure variation game to perform an effect of requesting the chance button 136 to be pressed multiple times.

  Also, for example, 10 seconds is set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the operation request image as at least a part of the operation valid period, for example, in the first 5 seconds. It is possible, the operation request image, as an effective period image showing information about the operation effective period, for example, includes a display in which the rod-shaped portion becomes shorter with time, the effective period image of the left and middle operation request image, As shown in FIG. 458 (c), for example, the rod-shaped portion is displayed in blue as the first effective period image, and the effective period image of the operation request image on the left side is, for example, the rod-shaped portion as the second effective period image. In red display, the first and second effective period images can be displayed when the same operation effective period is reached, and the first operation request image includes the first effective period image, A second operation requested image may be to include a second validity period image. By doing so, the valid period image may sometimes function as a notice.

  Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 459. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification is provided with a direction key 137 in addition to the chance button 136 as an operation means. The direction key 137 is used when selecting a desired option in the selection effect or the like displayed in the effect display area 208d. FIGS. 459 (a) to 459 (c) according to the modification correspond to FIGS. 449 (d) to (f) of the above embodiment. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 459 (b), not only the chance button 136 but also the direction key 137 can be used as the operation means. In this example, a plurality of effect buttons are provided, and even when the direction key 137 different from the chance button 136 indicated by the operation request image is operated, the operation is valid, and the display effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 459 (c). To be executed. In this case, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the display effect of "character A" is executed, and when the direction key 137 is operated, the effect display of "character C" is displayed. The display effect may change, the lottery ratio may change, or the display effect itself may be different.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 459 (d), when the direction button 137 is provided as the operation means in addition to the chance button 136, the effect in which the chance button 136 and the direction key 137 are arranged in parallel is also used for the operation request image. May be.

  Next, an effect in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 460. FIG. 460 (a) shows an image of the right-handing instruction displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 460 (b) shows a simplified image of the right-handing instruction image shown in FIG. 459 (a). The horizontally long rectangular frame portion showing the variable winning a prize mouth in the simplified image is displayed in a mode different from the display mode of the variable winning a prize hole 234 shown in the image of the right hitting instruction in FIG. 460 (a).

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 to 460 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of at least executing the notification of the game information (for example, the information on the number of holdings, the information on the right hitting) related to the game (for example, one or a plurality of rendering means). (Notification control mechanism for notifying using), the notification means, the notification information of the game information in three or more places for the same type of the game information (for example, the game information is a hold number In some cases, the special number 1 holding lamp 218 notifies the number of holdings, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the panel lamps 224a and 224b also notify the number of holdings. Also, the number of holdings by the sub liquid crystal display device 209. Notification, notification of the number of holdings at three or more places in the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination thereof, and the like) can be at least executed. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it is possible to notify one or more pieces of information related to the game at three or more places, so that the interest of the game may be improved in some cases. In addition, by giving a plurality of notifications to one piece of game information, it may be possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of superiority.

  Note that the notification means may be one effect means or a plurality of effect means.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, a plurality of effect means capable of executing at least effects related to games (for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board surface lamps 224a and 224b, decorative symbol display device 208, sub liquid crystal display) Device 209), the notification means, using the plurality of effect means (for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the board surface lamp, the special figure holding lamp) of the same type of game information at three or more locations. It is characterized in that it can execute notification.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to make the notification noticeable by using a plurality of effecting means.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, main control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control (for example, main control unit timer interrupt processing) related to progress of the game, and control for effect of the game. (For example, a first sub-control unit main processing) at least capable of executing a sub-control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), at least one of the plurality of effect means (for example, The special figure 1 holding lamp 218) is controlled by the main control means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the information of the rendering means (notifying means) controlled by the main control means may be highly reliable.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the notification means notifies the same type of game information executed at three or more places (for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board surface lamp 224a, and decorative symbol display) At least two notifications (for example, special figure 1 hold) of the number of holdings by the device 208, or of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc. Notification of the number of holdings by the lamp 218 and the decorative pattern display device 208, notification of the number of holdings by the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the board surface lamp 224a, or notification of the number of holdings at two places in the decorative pattern display device 208), It is possible to execute at least including the same period (for example, a period from the increase in the number of holdings to the decrease in the number of holdings, a prefetching notification period). That.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the entertainment of the game may be improved by executing the effects by at least two notifications during the same period.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of rendering means is an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to execute the notification at a portion where the player's eyes are most likely to reach.

(6) The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display, and the game information of the same type is information on the number of times of holding regarding execution of the symbol variation display. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the variable display of symbols is an important effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous jackpot is given to the player, and the number of holding the important effects is held at a plurality of places. It may be possible to inform the person in an easy-to-understand manner.

(7) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that at least one of the notifications of the number of times of holding can be notified as a pre-reading notice. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to perform reliable notification while increasing the expectation for a big hit.

(8) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of rendering means is a first rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of rendering means. At least one of the rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208), and the notifying means is the first rendering means when an error (for example, a ball or an error) occurs. It is possible to execute at least the error notification by using, the notification means, even when the error occurs, the second effect means to notify the same type of game information (for example, , Right-handed instruction) can be continued.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the information of the notification remains even if the error notification is performed, so that it may be possible to give the player a sense of security.

(9) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with a plurality of notifying means capable of at least notifying game information, and at least one notifying means of the plurality of notifying means, The first notifying means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218), at least one notifying means of the plurality of notifying means is the second notifying means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), At least one of the plurality of notifying means is a third notifying means (for example, a panel lamp 224a), and the game information is at least information related to the game (for example, information on the number of holdings). This is information including, and the first notifying unit notifies the first game information (for example, information on the number of holdings) for a first period (for example, one operation effective period of a plurality of operation effective periods). Small The second notifying means executes at least the notification about the first game information in a second period (for example, one operation effective period of a plurality of operation effective periods). The third notification means is capable of performing at least the notification regarding the first game information in a third period (for example, one operation valid period of a plurality of operation valid periods). The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods, and the first period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods, and The period and the third period are periods at least partially overlapping with each other.

(10) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern) capable of displaying at least an image. A display device 208) and a production means capable of performing at least production (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208), wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine, and the image display means is A first image (for example, an operation request image) can be displayed at least, and the first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means, The effect means can execute at least the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated (for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined image (○, character, etc.) at each operation). Than it, characterized in that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a plurality of image displays prompting the operation can be simultaneously executed for one operation means, which may improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform the operation at least a plurality of times. In addition, the interest of the game may be improved by allowing the player to perform a plurality of operations. In addition, the number of times of pressing may be easy to understand.

(11) In the pachinko machine 100, the image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, a valid period display image), and the second image is an operation of the operation means. It is an image including at least an image showing a valid period (for example, a display in which a bar is shortened, a countdown of numbers, etc.), and the image display means includes one or more images when a plurality of the first images are displayed. The second image can be displayed at least.

(12) The game machine according to the pachinko machine 100, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying the one second image for the one first image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to inform the player of the effective period for each operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(13) In the pachinko machine 100, the operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation unit, and the image display unit has a plurality of units. When the first image (1) (for example, a display prompting the user to press the chance button a plurality of times) is displayed, the one second image can be displayed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, it may be possible to easily inform that the effective period is common to a plurality of operations of the operation means.

(14) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the image display means is capable of displaying one of the first images in response to a single operation request from the operation means.

(15) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the image display means is capable of erasing the first image by one operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to easily inform the player of the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to understand whether or not the operation of the operation unit is effective.

(16) In the pachinko machine 100, the image display means is at least one display mode (for example, a chance button) of the plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting the user to press the chance button a plurality of times). Vibrating) can be displayed at least in a display mode different from the display mode of the other first image (for example, the chance button does not vibrate).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display mode of the operation request image may function as a notice.

(17) In the pachinko machine 100, the first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation unit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a display mode different from other cases may function as a notice. Then, by making the operation corresponding to the different display mode the last of a plurality of times, it may be possible to contribute to the player positively performing the necessary number of operations.

(18) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  The operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, the image display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least an image, and the operation means are operated. According to that, the game machine is provided with a production means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least production, and the operation means is in a first state (for example, a chance button 136 vibrates). It is at least possible to adopt a button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither rotating nor rotating, and the operating means can at least take a second state (for example, a display mode in which the chance button 136 is vibrating and rotating). The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different, and the image display means is the first state. An image (for example, an operation request image for requesting an operation of the operation unit) can be displayed at least, and the first image is at least one of a period during which the operation unit can be operated (for example, an operation request period). The first image is an image that can be displayed during the period of a copy, and the first image is an image that can suggest that the operating means is in the first state (for example, the same display mode as the button mode in the first state). ) Is included at least, the image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, an operation request image requesting an operation of the operation means), and the second image is The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation unit can be operated, and the second image is an image that can indicate that the operation unit is in the second state (for example, the first image). Second state button Image including at least the same display mode as described above), the image display means is configured such that the operation means is in the first state and the first condition (for example, advance notice lottery in step S1141 of the normal advance notice lottery process shown in FIG. If one of the lottery results in 4) is established, at least the first image can be displayed, and in the image display means, the operation means is in the first state and the second condition ( For example, when the other lottery result in the notice lottery 4 of step S1141 of the normal notice lottery process shown in FIG. 447) is established, at least the second image can be displayed. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, an operation request image different from the appearance is displayed on the rendering means, which may improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, it may be possible to draw attention to the effect means. In addition, the operation request image may function as a notice or notification. Further, even when the image display is simplified, it may be possible to convey necessary information to the player.

(19) In the pachinko machine 100, the image display unit may display the operation request image in the same mode as the mode of the operation unit (for example, the button mode in which the chance button 136 does not vibrate or rotate) (for example, The image of the chance button 136) is at least displayable.

  Furthermore, the production means is capable of performing at least a plurality of types of productions, and at least one production of the plurality of types of display productions is a first production (for example, "character A with a production button"). Display), and at least one effect of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, a “character C” display with an effect button), and the first effect rather than the first effect. When the second effect is executed, it is easier to connect to the big hit (for example, the reliability of the big hit is high), and when the effect means executes the second effect, it is more than the first condition. The second condition is easier to be satisfied.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to function as a notice of whether or not the second effect having a high jackpot reliability is executed. As a result, the operation request image itself may also function as a notice.

  In the first state, the button mode of the operating means may be relatively plain compared to the display mode (for example, the display mode is vibration or rotation, and the button mode is not vibration or rotation). In this case, the so-called breaking of the law may become hot when the button mode is plain. That is, when the button mode is sober and the display mode is flashy, the breaking of the law is hotter than when the button mode is sober and the display mode is sober.

  Further, in the first state, the button mode of the operating means may be relatively flashy as compared with the display mode (for example, the button mode has vibration or rotation, and the display mode does not have vibration or rotation). In this case, the so-called breaking of the law may become hot when the button mode is flashy. That is, when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is light, the breaking of the law is hotter than when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy. Alternatively, when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy, the breaking of the law may be hotter when the button mode is flashy and the display mode is plain.

(20) The pachinko machine 100 is further provided with an operating means (for example, a direction key 137) different from the operating means (for example, the chance button 136), and the player operates at least the other operating means. It is possible that the effect means can execute the effect even when the other operation means is operated.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to properly use the effect buttons according to the player's preference.

(21) In the pachinko machine 100, the image display means may display at least a third image indicating the operable period of the operating means (for example, the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is displayed in a blue bar). The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image indicating the operable period of the operating means (for example, the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is displayed in a red bar). And the third image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the first image, and the fourth image can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image. The third image and the fourth image are different images.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the valid period image may also function as a notice.

(22) In the pachinko machine 100, the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the operable period of the operating means is the first period. The image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the operable period of the operating means is the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation means can perform the same operation as the operation request image indicates, so that the player may be notified of the operation of the effect means. .

  It should be noted that one of the first condition and the second condition can be satisfied when the operation valid periods of the operation means are the same.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. Although the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment is a game table installed in an island facility, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pachinko machine 100 is an enclosed game machine, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the example of the above-described embodiment, the notifications executed at three or more locations are all started at substantially the same timing, but the notifications executed at three or more locations may all be started at different timings. Further, any two notifications may be started at substantially the same timing, while the remaining notifications may be started at different timings.

  Further, in the example of the above-described embodiment, the notifications executed at three or more locations are all ended at substantially the same timing, but the notifications executed at three or more locations may all be ended at different timings. Further, any two notifications may end at substantially the same timing, while the remaining notifications may end at different timings.

  Further, in the example of the above-described embodiment, the notification using a plurality of rendering means is described, but the notification may be performed at three or more locations within one rendering means. In addition, in the normal time, the predetermined game information may be notified at two locations, and the notification may be performed at three or more locations only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Further, the number of notifications may be reduced at a predetermined trigger of the variable display of symbols. When a predetermined trigger is established, at least the effect means controlled by the main control means may continue the notification. In addition, at least one of the rendering means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220) may be constantly informed. Further, the plurality of hold notifications controlled by the sub control may be capable of executing the prefetching notice.

  In addition, a modified example in which the predetermined game information is on hold will be described below. As a combination of the notifications executed at three or more places when the game information is on hold, for example, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 or the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the board lamp 224. May be used in combination. Further, a combination of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 or the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and two places in the decorative pattern display device 208, or the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 or the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the decorative pattern display device A combination of 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 209 is possible.

  Further, the read-ahead notice may be given by a hold display of various lamps such as the panel lamp 224, the decorative pattern display device 208, or the sub liquid crystal display device 209. For example, the lamp may perform an effect as a function different from the pre-reading notice during a predetermined period (for example, a symbol variation display for confirming the special reach). It is also possible to have a hold display function when a predetermined condition is satisfied while performing an effect as a decoration function in a normal state.

  Further, the one notifying means does not have to correspond to the one holding number. You may display three or more places in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the number of notifications may be reduced from the notification at three or more locations to a predetermined trigger (for example, at the start of special reach) (only the notification by the main control is left and the notification by the sub control is erased).

  Further, at least one notifying means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 under the main control) indicates the accurate information on the number of holdings, and other effecting means are used for other effects (for example, pre-reading notice or pseudo-holding). Good.

  Note that indirect notification is also included in the notification of this embodiment. For example, when a notice effect or a decorative pattern variable display that appears only in the hold 3 or more is displayed, it is included as one notification of "hold 3 or more".

  Further, a modified example in which the predetermined game information is a continuous big hit (so-called condominium) will be described below. As the combination of the notifications executed at three or more places when the game information is the condominium information, for example, 7 condominium displays or a special background display on the decorative pattern display device 208 during a big hit or electric support, or 7 Combinations such as the panel lamp 224 emitting a rainbow light and a special music piece flowing from the speaker 120 are possible in the case of the continuous play.

  It is not always necessary that the notification of the condominium information is completely the same for all the rendering means. The notification at 7 consecutive villas may be the same as the notification at 7 consecutive villas or more. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the notification from becoming too dull for the player. In addition, as an example of indirect notification, for example, in the case where about 2000 game balls are displayed with a specification that about 2000 game balls can be obtained in one big hit, it is included as notification of 5 consecutive villas. Good.

  Further, a modification in which the predetermined game information is a right-handed instruction will be described below. As the combination of the notifications executed at three or more places when the game information is a right-handing instruction, for example, the right-handing lamp of the status notification lamp 222 by the main control, the decorative pattern display device 208, the light emission gradation control of the board surface lamp 224. It is possible to make a combination such as voice output of a right-handed instruction from the speaker 120.

  The notification that has been once ended may be executed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the case where the player has left-handed during the notification lighting of the right-handed lamp of the state notification lamp 222 by the main control and the notification display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub-control, in order to promote the right-handedness of the attention In addition, those that perform notification sound by the speaker 120 and notification lighting by the panel lamp 224 are also included.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the notification is mainly shown at three places, but the notification may be made at four or more places.

  As the content of the notification, not only the notification about only the predetermined game information but also the notification about the other game information including at least the notification about the predetermined game information may be performed. For example, a configuration may be used in which game information such as probability variation is notified by the emission color of the right-side notification board lamp 224. Further, if the symbol variation display is in progress, the notification regarding the predetermined game information may function as a pre-reading notice or a big hit notice. By doing so, it may be possible to provide not only the function as a mere notification but also diversity.

  All of the plurality of rendering means may be controlled by the main control means, or all of them may be controlled by the sub control means. Further, it may be configured to be controlled by a plurality of sub control means. If controlled by the main control means, the certainty of notification is maintained, and if controlled by the sub control means, the burden on the main control means is reduced.

  The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed in a different period from the other. The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed based on a condition different from the execution condition of the other notifications. Further, it may be configured to include a plurality of notification execution conditions. By doing so, it may be possible to effectively notify the establishment of different conditions, such as a right-handed attention.

  The start time and end time of a plurality of notifications may be the same. Further, only the start times may be the same and the end times may be different, or the start times may be different and the end times may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to give variety to the notification depending on the combination of the start time and the end time of the notification.

  With respect to the notification of the number of starting suspensions by the display of starting suspensions, it is possible to notify by various combinations. For example, it is possible to perform two notifications on the decorative symbol display device 208 and further combine the notifications by the main control means. In the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a plurality of pending displays, it may be possible to give variety to the prefetching notice such as the pending prefetching. Further, the main control means side may give two or more notifications.

  Regarding the notification of the number of starting suspensions by the display of starting suspensions, there is no need to display one starting suspension for every one starting suspension. For example, in the lamp device, one display may be made for one start hold, and the start hold number may be directly notified by a number in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Diversity may increase by notifying with different patterns. In addition, it may be possible to execute a combination of notifications that is easy for the player to understand, depending on the effect on the game.

  As the notification of the predetermined game information, a notification regarding the suspension of the general figure may be used. For example, with respect to the one that can be opened for a relatively long period of time or the one that has the privilege of winning the drawing of the public figure, the enjoyment of the game may be improved by displaying the reservation at three or more places.

  In the above embodiment, the operation valid period is common in the operation of the plurality of operation means. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that the continuous operation of the operation means is necessary in an easy-to-understand manner. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the risk of invalidating the operation of the operating means a plurality of times.

  Further, the operation of the operation means may be settable during at least one symbol variation display. In the case of a configuration in which the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times, it may be possible to expect the player to straddle a plurality of variations, for example, by performing an operation related to the operation means in association with the prefetching notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means are provided, the operation mode and the operation request image are associated with each other, and the display mode (only) different from other modes may display the operation request image different from the association. . It may be possible to emphasize the function as a notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means may be provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image may be associated with each other. Then, one operation request image may be deleted by operating the operation means once or a plurality of times. Further, the operation mode of the operation means may be changed according to the display mode of the operation request image corresponding to the next operation, and may be changed when the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. By doing so, the operation request image may function as a notice of a change in the operation mode in some cases.

  The effective operation periods of the plurality of operation means may not be common, and the effective operation periods may be set individually. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the player from rushing because the effective period is set individually while urging the player to operate the operating means a plurality of times. In addition, in some cases, the operation of the operating means can be evenly allocated a plurality of times for the effect time (mainly the operation effective period) of the symbol variation display. Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the excessive operation valid period.

  Further, the above-described embodiment can be applied to a game table having a plurality of operating means. It is sufficient that at least one of the plurality of operating means has the contents of the above-mentioned embodiment. Further, the operation request image and the effective period display image corresponding to the plurality of operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the operation valid period may be configured to be performed over a plurality of symbol variable displays. By doing so, it may function as a pre-reading notice.

  Further, in the above embodiment, one effective period display image is erased by operating the operating means once, but one effective period display image is erased by performing the operation a predetermined number of times twice or more. It may be configured to be. Further, the configuration may be such that all the valid period display images are continuously displayed until the required number of operations for operating the operating means are performed. By doing so, for example, it may be possible to emphasize that the plurality of valid period displays prompt the operation by leaving all the valid period displays even when the remaining valid period is short.

  Further, the correspondence relationship between the operation mode of the operation means and the operation request image may be partially different. By doing so, it may be possible that a so-called “law breakdown (correspondence (rule))” can be made to function as a notice of confirmation of a big hit or a notice of increasing expectation of a big hit.

  Further, the condition as to whether or not the operation of the operation means is valid can be arbitrarily set. It may be effective after one or a plurality of times of operations, and may be effective (performing an operation) by performing a lottery and winning every one or a plurality of times of operations. By doing so, it may be possible to adjust the number of operations according to the presentation time and the like.

  Further, in the case of having a plurality of operating means, even if the operation request image is common (even if the image display prompts the operation of any one of the operating means), it is possible to enable the operation of other operating means. It may be. By doing so, there may be a case where the operation request image is made common and the amount of data is small.

  Further, the operation of the other operation means may be valid or invalid. In some cases, the same effect as the above-mentioned "breaking of the law" may be achieved.

  In the above embodiment, the operating means may be attached to the frame side of the pachinko machine 100. For example, in the process of developing a game table, the design of the production means itself may be changed due to a change in the design of the frame or the like. Even if the mode of the image display and the effect means is different, the purpose of important notification to the player (pressing the effect button, right-handed, etc.) may be maintained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation effective period is set for the effect button, and the image display means executes at least the display effect after the effective period ends when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may be possible. By doing so, the display effect may be performed even when the button is not operated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation button is for setting the operation effective period, and the image display means does not execute the display effect when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. Good.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, since the reference is placed in the second display effect, the second operation request image is easy to appear when the second display effect is performed. Further, the operation request image regarding the effect button may be displayed during at least a part of the effective operation period of the effect button.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, as an example of the case where the operation request image is displayed in a mode different from the mode of the operation means during the display of the operation request image, different colors of the effect buttons and logo parts, the operation request image is the first There is a display that suggests the position, and a production button and logo accessory are in the second position.

  Further, the rendering means is operable at least in the first mode and the second mode in which a new mode is added to the first mode, and the image display means displays the operation request image in the first mode. When the display corresponding to the mode is performed, the effect means may be at least operable in the second mode. By doing so, when the production means (operation means) is more flashy, it may be possible to make the player notice when the operation means is operated.

  Alternatively, the rendering means is at least operable in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means displays the operation request image in the first aspect. When performing the display corresponding to the second aspect, the effect means may be at least operable in the first aspect. By doing so, when the operation request image is more flashy, the player can increase expectations by first looking at the operation request image while giving a sense of incongruity by operating the operation means. Sometimes it can be increased.

  The operation request image may have a pattern of the same aspect as well as the aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means. By doing so, it may be possible to function as a notification or a notice by properly using the same mode or a different mode. For example, there is a case where it can be used to give a notice that the symbol variation display is a big hit, a pre-reading notice, a notification of the number of holdings or a condominium.

  The operation request image may be performed only in one mode (for example, button effect performed during symbol variable display) in a mode different from the mode of the effect means, or in the same mode only. By doing so, the operation request image may be associated with each trigger, so that the player may easily recognize the trigger.

  Regarding the operation request image, at any one of a plurality of triggers corresponding to one effect means (for example, a button effect performed before the reach and a button effect performed after the reach during the symbol variation display), an operation request in at least different modes It is only necessary that the image can be displayed.

  The operation means that can be operated by the player includes not only the effect buttons and the operation buttons used in the service in which the game console and the mobile site are linked, but also the ball firing handle 134. As an example, there is a case in which an image is displayed to notify the right hit at the start of a big hit or at the start of electric support. At this time, the contents in which the display for twisting the ball firing handle 134 to the right is displayed on the image display means are also included in this embodiment. At this time, as an example of a mode different from the mode of the rendering means, there is an image display in which the display of the ball firing handle 134 itself is deformed. In this case, even if the design of the ball firing handle 134 is changed, it may be possible to reliably carry out the most important notification regarding the game property, that is, the notification of the right hit.

  As an example of the rendering means, a winning means such as an attacker arranged on the game board may be used. By doing so, there may be an effect that the design change can be dealt with.

  In the above embodiment, when two effect buttons are used, it is not necessary for the two effect buttons to be effective for all the operations of the effect buttons, and both effect buttons are effective only in a predetermined effect. Good. Further, whether or not the operation of the second effect button is effective when the first effect button is displayed as the operation request image may or may not be notified to the player. . By doing so, the number of effective effect buttons may function as a notice. And as an effect when not informing the player whether or not the second effect button is valid, it is possible to have an expectation when the display effect is performed by the player operating the second effect button. The player can select whether or not to operate the second effect button.

  The correspondence relationship between the operation request image and the effective period image is such that the first effective period image corresponds to the first operation request image and the second effective period image corresponds to the second operation request image. It doesn't have to be. For example, changing some of the combinations may give the player a feeling of strangeness and may function as a notice.

  Further, the operation request image and the effective period image (and the combination thereof) may be changed according to conditions such as a game state. By doing so, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, regarding the button operation of the chance button 136 in each example of the above-described embodiment, even if the player does not operate the button during the valid period of the button operation, it is equivalent to the case where the button operation is performed. The effect may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, this will be referred to as an auto button, which will be described in detail below.

  First, regarding the setting method of the auto button, it may be configured so that the player can arbitrarily set it, or may be set according to the game state or the like. As an example that can be arbitrarily set by the player, it is possible for all the players to set it by operating the chance button 136 or the direction keys 137 or other operation means such as the cross key during the demonstration production. It is set by the player under certain conditions, such as the original mode in which the game console can be customized and the game history can be stored for each player, provided that the player has unique configuration such as password, etc. Possible configurations are listed. With the configuration set according to the game state, for example, the presence or absence of the electric support state, the same game state and when the production mode continues for a predetermined period or a predetermined number of times, by using an automatic button, the same type of button effect can be obtained. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of the operation for continuous operation.

  Regarding the notification that the button is an auto button, the decoration pattern display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 209, or the like may be constantly notified, or only when the auto button is set. Further, the configuration may be such that a notification is given when the setting of the auto button is released, or a configuration in which no notification is given at all.

  Regarding the display during the auto button, the image of the button and the effective period may be displayed in the same manner as during the non-auto button, or a part of the image may not be displayed. In some cases, not displaying some images may be a notification that the auto button is being operated. Further, as an example of the configuration in which some images are not displayed, if the configuration is such that only the button display is displayed and the effective period display is not performed, while notifying that there is originally a button effect, it will not be an extremely annoying display effect. There are cases. Further, the display may not be performed at all.

  The operation timing of the auto button may be any timing during the effective period. For example, at the beginning of the effective period, it is possible to perform the effect associated with the button operation without giving the player the fear that the effect of the auto button may not be performed. In the middle of the effective period, there may be a case where there is no extension between before and after the effect accompanying the button operation, and the balance can be maintained. At the end of the effective period, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by playing with it. However, when the effect accompanying the button operation appears at the end of the effective period, there is a risk that the appearance becomes the same as the case where the effect is forcedly issued due to the expiration of the effective period when the non-auto button is pressed. In this case, for example, when the auto button is pressed, an effect corresponding to the reliability is applied, and when the validity period of the non-auto button expires, the effect with the lowest reliability is forced to appear regardless of whether it is right or wrong. It is also possible to put out.

  As a game example of the auto button, when the auto button is set as described above, all button effects may be auto, or some button effects may be auto. As an example of the partial auto, for example, the advance notice before the reach may be auto, the post-reach may be non-auto, or may be non-auto only during intense heat production (want the player to operate). In addition, it may be possible to add variety to the performance by combining auto and non-auto. For example, the effect that the hold icon changes in accordance with the button operation performed with the pre-reading pending notice may have an effective period set over a plurality of symbol variable displays. During this time, if the button effect is displayed in the variable display of symbols, the button effects may overlap, which may cause confusion for the player. Therefore, it may be possible to add variety to the effect while solving the problem by making one of the button effects automatic. It is also possible to make individual settings for each device, such as setting only the sub liquid crystal button effects to auto.

  Regarding the auto of the button effect that requires a plurality of button operations, a predetermined number of times determined for each effect, the number of times the player is installed according to the number of times the player operates the non-auto button, and the like are assumed. Generally, the effective period of the effect requiring a plurality of button operations is secured a little longer. For this reason, there is a limit (parameter does not advance any more) in the parameter display associated with the button effect when the hit determination is made. In such a case, if the number of autos is increased, there is a risk that the parameter display will not proceed even though the effective period remains, and the player will be discouraged. Therefore, it may be preferable to perform a predetermined number of automatic operations in consideration of the effective period. In addition, only a part of the plurality of operations may be set to be auto, for example. In some cases, the auto button function can be used as a structure for prompting a button operation.

  In addition, when the auto button is set, a command may be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the control system of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display control on the decorative symbol display device 208 side may be dealt with thereafter. The command may be sent at the same timing as when the non-auto button is pressed.

  Alternatively, the automatic button may be used when an accidental condition is satisfied. For example, when an error such as a lower tray full tank error during a big hit occurs, there are cases where both hands are used due to a game ball discharging operation and a game ball firing. In such a case, the automatic button may be used automatically. In addition, even during the automatic button, if the player operates the button before (automatic) button operation, the effect may be performed. Further, the auto button may be released (non-auto) by the player operating the button during the auto button.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel, as shown in FIG. 461. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal lottery for winning combinations) for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning are won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined prize mode is selected. In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and the production means is a predetermined one. A launching device 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter the ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting the ball entering the winning opening 1016. When the detection unit 1018 detects a sphere, a payout unit 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022. And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when a game ball enters a winning opening and wins a prize. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 462 (a), "A banknote is inserted into the banknote slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired data about the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which a real machine such as a pachinko machine or the like is simulatedly executed for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  The above embodiments can be combined with each other.

  The gaming table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Supplementary note A1) A gaming machine provided with an informing means capable of at least informing game information related to a game, wherein the informing means indicates the game information in three or more locations for the same type of the game information. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of performing at least notification.

(Supplementary note A2) The gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, comprising a plurality of effect means capable of performing at least an effect associated with a game, wherein the notification means uses the plurality of effect means at the three or more locations. A gaming table, which is capable of executing notification of the same type of gaming information.

(Supplementary Note A3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, comprising: a main control unit capable of executing at least control related to progress of a game; and a sub-control unit capable of executing at least control related to game production. At least one of the effect means of (1) is controlled by the main control means.

(Supplementary note A4) The game machine according to supplementary note A2 or A3, wherein the informing means issues at least two of the same type of game information informing to be executed at the three or more locations in the same period. A game machine characterized by being executable including at least.

(Supplementary note A5) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A2 to A4, wherein at least one effect means of the plurality of effect means is an image display means. .

(Supplementary note A6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A5, comprising a symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display, and the game information of the same type executes the symbol variation display. A game table characterized in that it is information on the number of times of holding regarding.

(Supplementary note A7) The game machine according to supplementary note A6, characterized in that at least one of the notifications of the number of times of holding can be notified as a pre-reading notice.

(Supplementary note A8) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A2 to A7, at least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means, and the plurality of presentation means. At least one of the rendering means is a second rendering means, and the notification means is capable of at least executing the error notification using the first rendering means when an error occurs. The gaming table is characterized in that the notifying means is capable of continuing to inform the game information of the same type by using the second effecting means even when the error occurs.

(Supplementary note A9) A gaming machine provided with a plurality of notifying means capable of at least notifying game information, wherein at least one notifying means of the plurality of notifying means is a first notifying means, and At least one of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means, at least one of the plurality of notification means is a third notification means, the game information, It is information including at least information about a game, the first notification means is capable of performing at least a notification about the first game information in a first period, and the second notification means is the first The notification about the game information can be executed at least in a second period, and the third notification means can execute at least the notification about the first game information in a third period, first The period and the second period are periods at least partially overlapping, the first period and the third period are periods at least partially overlapping, the second period and the third period A game console characterized in that the periods are periods at least partially overlapping with each other.

(Supplementary note A10) A game table provided with an operation means provided at least at a position operable by a player, an image display means capable of displaying at least an image, and a production means capable of executing at least an effect, The gaming table is a pachinko machine, the image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image, the image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the first image, The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means, and the effect means performs at least the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated. A gaming table characterized by being possible.

(Supplementary note A11) The game machine according to supplementary note A10, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image, and the second image indicates an operation valid period of the operation means. An image including at least an image, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying at least one or a plurality of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note A12) The game machine according to supplementary note A11, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying one of the second images with respect to one of the first images. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note A13) In the game machine according to supplementary note A11, the operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operating means, and the image display The means is capable of displaying one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note A14) The game machine according to supplementary notes A10 to A13, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying one of the first images in response to a single operation request from the operation means. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A15) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A10 to A14, wherein the image display means is capable of erasing the first image by one operation of the operation means. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note A16) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A10 to A15, the image display means may display at least one display mode of the plurality of first images in another first image. At least a display mode that can be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of 1.

(Supplementary note A17) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, the first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation means. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note A18) Operation means provided at least at a position operable by the player, image display means capable of displaying at least an image, and effect means capable of performing at least an effect in response to the operation of the operation means. And a game table provided with, wherein the operating means is at least capable of taking a first state, and the operating means is at least capable of taking a second state. The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first image, The one image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the period in which the operation unit can be operated, and the first image can indicate that the operation unit is in the first state. Few images The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image, and the second image can be displayed during at least a part of a period during which the operation means can be operated. Image, the second image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operating means is in the second state, the image display means, the operating means is the first When the first condition is satisfied in the state, at least the first image can be displayed, and in the image display unit, the second condition is satisfied when the operation unit is in the first state. In this case, the gaming table is capable of displaying at least the second image.

(Supplementary note A19) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A18, the rendering means is capable of performing at least a plurality of types of productions, and at least one production of the plurality of types of productions is a first one. It is an effect, and at least one effect of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect, and it is easier to get a big hit when the second effect is executed than the first effect. The gaming table, wherein when the effect means executes the second effect, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.

(Supplementary note A20) The game machine according to supplementary note A18 or A19, further comprising operating means different from the operating means, wherein the different operating means is at least operable by a player, and The means is capable of executing the effect even when the other operation means is operated, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note A21) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A20, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying at least a third image indicating a period during which the operation means is operable. The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image indicating the operable period of the operation means, and the third image is capable of displaying at least the first image in correspondence with the first image. Which is an image, the fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image, the third image and the fourth image are different images, A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A22) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A21, in the case where the image display means is a first period during which the operation means can operate the first image. At least, the image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image when the operable period of the operating means is the first period. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note A23) A game table including at least an operation unit provided at a position where a player can operate, an image display unit capable of displaying at least an image, and a production unit capable of performing at least an effect, The gaming table is a pachinko machine, the image display means is capable of displaying at least a first image, the image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the first image, The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means, and the effect means performs at least the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated. A gaming table characterized by being possible.

(Supplementary note A24) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A23, the image display means can display at least a second image, and the second image indicates an operation valid period of the operation means. An image including at least an image, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying at least one or a plurality of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note A25) The game machine according to supplementary note A24, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying one of the second images with respect to one of the first images. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note A26) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, the operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operating means, and the image display The means is capable of displaying one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note A27) The game machine according to supplementary notes A23 to A26, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying one of the first images in response to a single operation request from the operation means. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A28) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A23 to A27, wherein the image display means is capable of erasing the first image in response to a single operation of the operation means. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note A29) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A23 to A28, wherein the image display means displays at least one display mode of the plurality of first images in another first image. At least a display mode that can be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of 1.

(Supplementary note A30) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A29, the first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation among the operations of the operation unit. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note A31) An operation means provided at least at a position operable by a player, an image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images, and an effect means capable of performing at least the first effect are provided. A gaming table, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine, at least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image, and at least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image. Second image, the first image includes at least an image suggesting the operating means, and the second image is a period during which the operation of the operating means is effective (hereinafter, referred to as “third The image of the first image is at least displayable in the first period, and the second image is in the second period. At least display is possible And the first period is a period including at least a part of the third period, the second period is a period including at least a part of the third period, and the image display The means is capable of displaying at least the first image that is a first number, the first number is two or more, and the first effect is the operation in the third period. A gaming machine, which is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of operations of the means reaches the first number.

(Supplementary Note A32) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A31, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying at least the second image, which is a second number, and the second number is the second number. The same number as the one,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A33) The game machine according to supplementary note A31 or A32, wherein the image display means is capable of erasing one of the first images in response to one operation of the operation means. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note A34) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A31 to A33, wherein the effect means can execute at least a second effect, and the second effect is the operation means. Is a production that can be executed for each operation, and the first number is three.

(Supplementary note A35) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A31 to A34, including a notice device capable of executing a notice, and the first image can be displayed at least in a plurality of modes. , At least one of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect, at least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect, the second aspect is the first aspect. It is a mode different from the mode, and the notice means is capable of executing the notice by causing the image display means to display the first image according to the second aspect. .

(Supplementary note A36) The game machine according to supplementary note A35, wherein the first image according to the second aspect is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operations of the operation means that is the first number. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note A37) The gaming machine according to supplementary note A35 or A36, wherein the operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state. Of the plurality of states, at least one of the plurality of states is a second state, the first aspect is at least suggestable that the operating means is in the first state. Yes, the second mode is a mode capable of at least suggesting that the operating means is in the second state.

(Supplementary note A38) A gaming machine provided with at least an operating means provided at a position operable by a player, an image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images, and an effect producing means capable of performing at least an effect. There, the gaming table is a pachinko machine, at least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image, and at least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image And the first image includes at least an image suggesting the operating means, and the second image is a period during which the operation by the operating means is effective (hereinafter, “third period”). The first image can be at least displayed during the first period, and the second image can be displayed at least during the second period. What is possible Yes, the first period is a period including at least a part of the third period, the second period is a period including at least a part of the third period, the image display means Is capable of displaying at least the first image of the first number, the first number is two or more, the image display means, the second number of the second number. At least an image can be displayed, the second number is one, and the effect is executed at least when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period becomes the first number. A game stand characterized by possible production.

(Supplementary Note A39) An operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, an image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images, and a performance means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects are provided. A gaming table, the gaming table is a pachinko machine, at least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image, and at least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image. The second image, the first image is an image including at least an image suggesting the operating means, the second image is a period during which reception of the operation of the operating means is effective (hereinafter, " The image which includes at least an image suggesting a "third period"), the first image is an image which can be displayed at least during the first period, and the second image is the second image. Open at least display during the period It is a possible image, the first period is a period including at least a part of the third period, the second period is a period including at least a part of the third period, The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first image of the first number, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, and the plurality of types of At least one of the effects is a second effect, and the first effect is executed at least when the number of operations accepted by the operation means during the third period reaches the first number. It is possible production, the second production is a production executed every time the operation of the operation means is received, and the first number is three.

(Supplementary note A40) The game machine according to supplementary note A39, wherein the image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second image, which is a second number, and the second number is three. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note A41) In the game machine according to supplementary note A39 or A40, the image display means is means capable of erasing one of the first images in response to reception of one operation of the operation means. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note A42) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A39 to A41, wherein the image display unit is a unit capable of starting display of at least one of the first images in a fourth period, The game machine characterized in that the fourth period is a period different from the third period as a period during which the reception of the operation of the operating means is valid.

(Supplementary note A43) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes A39 to A42, wherein the first image is a button image.

(Supplementary note A44) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes A39 to A43, wherein the second image is a gauge image.

(Supplementary note A45) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes A39 to A44, wherein the effect production means is means including at least the image display means.
[Eighth Embodiment]

  Next, a game effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 463 to 487. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 463 to 487 are basically used only in the description of the eighth embodiment, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in the other drawings, the present embodiment is described. In the description, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 463 to 487 are given priority. First, the configuration shown in each of FIGS. 463 to 487 (excluding FIGS. 482 and 483) will be described.

  In each figure, as shown in FIG. 463 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, and a special figure 2 display which form a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 420. The device 214, the Tokusatsu 1 holding lamp 218, and the Tokusatsu 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown below the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is the special figure 1 The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is shown on the right side of the display device 212, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, the unlit parts of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit parts are shown in black. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 is displayed in white while it is changing, but in reality, the special figure is changing by repeatedly blinking the segments in a predetermined order. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1, and the right side is the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2. If the result of the special figure variation game is off, an image representing "x" is displayed as the fourth symbol, and in the case of a hit, an image representing "A" is displayed. Further, during execution of the special figure variation game, an image representing "-" is displayed as the fourth symbol.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 1 hold icons corresponding to the number of holds is displayed. Further, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon allows notification (pre-reading notice) of whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game relating to the hold is valid with a predetermined reliability. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from the left to the right in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order becomes lower. In this example, only the special figure 1 reserved icon display area is displayed, but of course the special figure 2 reserved icon display area may be displayed together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 463 (b), the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed. The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 463 (c), the variable display of each decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c during execution of the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow.

  The special figure variation game shown in each example of the present embodiment is executed by the same control operation as that described in the seventh embodiment. In the example of the present embodiment, the effect performed in the special figure variation game will be specifically described, and the control operation will also be referred to only when particularly necessary.

(Example 1)
First, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 463 and 464. 463 (a) to 464 (e), in this order, show a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 463 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In both the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. The "x" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is off is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1, and the special symbol 2 variation in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area t2. An "x" image showing that the result of the game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  463 (b) ~ (g), from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variation game shows. FIG. 463 (b) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, the variable display is first started in the left symbol display area 208a, then the variable display is started in the middle symbol display area 208b, and then the variable display is started in the right symbol display area 208c. . Of course, the variable display may be simultaneously started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  463 (c) to (f) show a state where the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. FIG. 463 (d) shows that the symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 463 (e) is a state in which symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display region 208b, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display region 208c. Is shown. In FIG. 463 (f), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. It shows the state of being done. The decorative pattern at the temporary stop is not in a stationary state, but is in a swinging fluctuation state that slightly vibrates in the vertical direction, for example.

  FIG. 463 (g) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the special map 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special drawing I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display area t1, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. . The special figure 1 variation game shown in FIGS. 463 (a) to (g) is a basic pattern in a normal variation state. In the following description, a detailed description of the order of operation will be omitted for the special figure variation game in the normal variation state.

  FIG. 463 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the particular figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the hold is exhausted, and all LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are turned off to notify that there is no hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area.

  FIG. 463 (i) shows a state where "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 463 (j) shows that while the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the letters “reach” are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b to achieve the reach effect. The state has been started.

  463 (k) to 464 (c) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 463 (k) shows a state where the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance buttons 136 are displayed in a line in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. A character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" Is displayed on the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, and a character string of "Ready" is displayed on the upper part thereof. In the following description, the “state in which the button effect is started” indicates that the reception of the button operation is not yet valid, and the “state in which the button effect is started” is the button. This indicates that the acceptance of the operation is valid. In addition, the execution of the button effect indicates that the reception of the button operation is valid.

  FIG. 463 (l) shows a state where the button effect has started. In the button effect according to the present embodiment, three operation request images (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “button images”) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are arranged in a horizontal line in substantially the center of the effect display area 208d. Is displayed. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 463 (m) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 463 (n) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “button erasing animation”) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (o) shows an effect executed next to the button deletion animation during execution of the button effect (the effect may be referred to as a "second effect" with respect to a "first effect" described later). Is shown. As a second effect, a panda image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “panda image”) is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (p) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced size display of the panda image allows the central button image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (q) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 463 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (a) shows a state in which the second effect has been executed after the button deletion animation following FIG. 463 (r). As a second effect, a character image of "evil merchant Echigoya" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Echigoya image") is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 464 (b) shows an execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image corresponding to the left button image is displayed at the position of the central button image, it is displayed in the button effect explanation display regardless of whether or not the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time. The condition of "SP reach development with all three!" Is no longer met. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the right button image is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead of waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 464 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the Echigoya image is displayed largely on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the right side of the center. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed to SP (super) reach. In this way, the first effect may be executed with the number of times of pressing (two in this example) that is smaller than the number of displayed button images (three in this example). In the first effect, the button image, the effective period image, and the image displayed in the second effect are not displayed. The effect mode of the first effect is determined by a combination (arrangement) of the panda image and the Echigoya image displayed instead of the button image in the second effect.

  "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display is displayed. In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 464 (b ′) shows a modification of the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. In FIG. 464 (b ′), an Echigoya image with a pattern different from the panda image for the left button image is displayed at the position of the central button image, and the condition for three images to be aligned is not satisfied. , A state in which the valid operation period has expired without the player pressing the chance button 136 for the third time. In this case, the second effect is not performed on the button image on the right side.

  FIG. 464 (c ′) subsequent to FIG. 464 (b ′) illustrates a state in which the first effect is not executed after the second effect is finished and the expiration notification animation is executed instead. In this way, when the operation valid period is exhausted when the chance button 136 has been pressed less than a predetermined number of times, the first effect and the second effect may not be performed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display is displayed. In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 464 (c) or FIG. 464 (c) which is continued from FIG. 464 (c) or FIG. 464 (c ′), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that is normally displayed. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 464 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special drawing I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display area t1, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above is provided with a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and an effect display area 208d as a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The decorative pattern display device 208 is provided as a rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of renderings. One of the plurality of types of display is the display of the button image as the first display, and the display of the button image is the display including the display suggesting the chance button 136. One of the plurality of types of display is the display of the valid period image as the second display, and the valid period image is displayed in the operation valid period as the third period during which the reception related to the pressing of the chance button 136 is valid. Is displayed. The display of the button image is a display that can be started in the first period, and the first period is a period including a part of the operation valid period. The display of the effective period image is a display that can be started in the second period, and the second period is a period including a part of the operation effective period. The decorative pattern display device 208 can display, for example, three button images as the first number (two or more). One of a plurality of types of effects is an effect that is executed next to the button deletion animation as the second effect, for example, an effect that causes a predetermined image to appear at the position where the deleted button image was displayed. Is. Also, one of the plurality of types of effects is an effect that notifies the result of the button operation executed after the second effect as the first effect. The first effect can be executed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period is, for example, two times as the second number (two or more). The second effect is an effect that may be executed with a part of the three button images hidden.

  The second effect is an effect executed each time the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, it may be possible to expect the first effect by executing the second effect before the first effect is performed.

  Further, the second effect is an effect executed for each operation of the chance button 136, but the display of the button image and the gauge image is hidden in all of the second effects performed for each operation. Alternatively, the display of the button image and the gauge image may be hidden only in the second effect that is started by some operations.

(Example 2)
Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 465 and 466. In this embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those in FIG. 463 (j) of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 465 (a) continues from FIG. 463 (j). 465 (a) to 465 (p) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 465 (a) shows a state where the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance buttons 136 are displayed in a line in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. A character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" Is displayed on the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, and a character string of "Ready" is displayed on the upper part thereof.

  FIG. 465 (b) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter toward the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 465 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 465 (d) shows a state in which the button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (e) shows the second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (f) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced size display of the panda image allows the central button image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (g) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (h) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (i) shows a state where the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size that a part of the panda image on the left and a part of the effective period image are hidden. In this way, another second effect may be hidden by the second effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. As described above, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are erased are the same.

  FIG. 465 (j) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced panda image allows the left panda image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In FIG. 465 (k), the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d changes from “normal” to “vibration + rotation” to give a notice of the result of the change. In this way, the display mode of the button image may change during the operation valid period. Also, the button mode may be changed in response to the change in the display mode of the button image.

  FIG. 465 (l) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 465 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the button image on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, for the gauge display, the image deletion animation for the effective period is executed. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the player presses the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In the valid period image deletion animation, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 is displayed as the third display. The gauge display is erased after the empty frame image is displayed for a predetermined time. There is a case where it is possible to easily inform that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display or the button display to be erased has been accepted by displaying the animation of 0 in the display of the gauge length.

  Also, in the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 465 (m), since the button image of the display mode “vibration + rotation” is displayed, the button deletion animation for deleting the button image of the “normal” display mode is displayed. An effect image that is larger than the effect image is displayed. As described above, in the button effect of the present embodiment, the button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and the button mode in which the display mode is “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation mode is used. As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is “normal” can be used. By doing so, the button display or the button deletion animation display may function as a notice depending on the difference in the button display animation mode.

  FIG. 465 (n) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the right button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size that a part of the central panda image is hidden. In this way, another second effect may be hidden by the second effect. When the button image is erased by the last button operation and there is no button image in the display area, the effect of hiding the button image is not performed. Since the operation valid period has passed, the valid period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 465 (o) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second presentation, the panda image on the right side is displayed in a reduced size, and three panda images of the same size are arranged in a horizontal row to notify that the conditions for "SP reach development with three sets!" Are met. Has been done.

  FIG. 465 (p) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In the present example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 437 (a) is displayed large on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the characters "SP development" are displayed on the right side of the center. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  465 (q) to 466 (e) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 465 (q) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 466 (a) subsequent to FIG. 465 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In this button effect, there is only one button image, and no valid period image is displayed. The big button display is different from the normal button display and has a function as a notice expected by the player. Therefore, it may be possible to promptly prompt the player to perform a button operation by using an effect in which the effective period is not displayed. Further, it can be said that the deca button display itself is an effect that urges the player to perform a button operation more strongly. In FIG. 466 (b), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts “I'm in battle!” Is displayed. FIG. 466 (c) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 466 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and are normally displayed. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 466 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .

(Example 2-3)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 467. In this embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 463 (k), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 467 (a) continues from FIG. 463 (k). FIG. 467 (a) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display that can suggest the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 467 (b) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 467 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 467 (d) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the second press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 467 (e) shows a second effect that is executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 467 (a) to (e), one button image is erased by a plurality of button operations (twice in this example) to start the second effect. In this way, by changing the number of times the button is operated to execute the deletion animation of the button image, or by executing the deletion animation of the button image for each button operation, the player can enjoy the button effect more. You may be able to.

  FIG. 467 (a ′) continues from FIG. 463 (k). FIG. 467 (a ') shows the start of the button effect similar to that in FIG. 467 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 467 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 467 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the left button image as well as the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erasing animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 467 (d ′) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As the second effect, panda images are displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed and the position where the center button image was displayed.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 467 (a ′) to (d ′), a plurality of (two in this example) button images are erased by one button operation, and each second effect is started. In this way, by changing the number of button images erased by one button operation and executing the button image erasing animation, the player may be able to enjoy the button effect more.

  FIG. 467 (a ″) continues from FIG. 463 (k). In FIG. 467 (a ″), the button image on the left side is an image of a display mode imitating the light emitting state of the chance button 136, in contrast to the button effects shown in FIG. 467 (a) and FIG. 467 (a ′). It is characterized by the fact that Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 467 (b ″) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The button image on the left side is displayed with a higher brightness and stands out than the other button images. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 467 (c ″) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the left button image simulating the light emitting state of the button is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erasing animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 467 (d ″) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 467 (a ″) to (d ″), as an example in which the display modes of the three button images aligned in a horizontal row are different, only the portion simulating light emission is different. , Different display modes are assumed. In this example, the effect part corresponding to the first button operation is suggested by making the light emission mode different from other button images.

(Example 4)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 468. 468 (a), while "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, the letters "reach" are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and reach effect is produced. The state has been started.

  FIG. 468 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the initial display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIGS. 468 (c) to (e) show the effect immediately after the start of the animation related to the button image. FIG. 468 (c) shows a state in which a relatively small button image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 468 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which the button image is gradually enlarged is being executed. FIG. 468 (e) shows a state in which three button images are displayed in a horizontal row and the size of the central button image is larger than the size of the left and right button images. In this example, the button display is performed by animation, and the display of the deca button display and the normal display of the button image are mixed. Also in this example, the display mode of the button image of the central deca button display is different from the display mode of the left and right normal button images.

  FIGS. 468 (a ′) to (d ′) show the effect immediately after the start of the animation related to the button image. In this example, a production movable body simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The effect movable body is driven and moved to the front surface of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 so that the image displayed in the image display area can be partially hidden. FIG. 468 (a ′) shows a state in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect display area 208d. Three button images are displayed in a horizontal row in the center of the effect display area 208d. The effective period image is displayed so as to occupy the lower 1/3 region of the effect display region 208d.

  FIG. 468 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. In the effective period image, the gauge portion is shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is shortened.

  FIG. 468 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erasing animation, the effect images are displayed at the respective display positions instead of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 468 (d ′) shows the second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, the arm of the effect movable body extends to the front of the image display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 to hide the right button image and a part of the effective period image.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 468 (a ′) to (d ′), the gauge image is an image (deca-gauge image) larger than usual, the second effect is the effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and the effect movable body. The button image and gauge image are partially hidden by. The deca-gauge image may be configured to function as a notice by itself. For example, it may be possible to make the player expect a big hit etc. by displaying the deca-gauge image at the timing when the normal gauge image appears. In this case, it is desirable that even the deca gauge image has the same effective period as the normal gauge image, but the time is adjusted by, for example, shaking fluctuation (temporary stop), etc. (special figure fluctuation time and decoration symbol fluctuation time). Since it is also possible to match the time with), the valid periods may be different from each other. The first effect may also be performed by the effect movable body.

(Example 5)
Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 469. The present embodiment describes a case where the same reach effect (same variation time period) as in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 465 and 466) is executed, but the button effect is not performed.

  The special figure variation game shown in FIGS. 469 (a) to 469 (d) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 463 (g) to 46 (j), and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure variation game (including SP reach effect) shown in FIGS. 469 (i) to (n) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 465 (q) to 466 (e), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  469 (e) to (h) show effects from the start of the reach effect to the development of the SP reach effect. The second effect is an effect that is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a step-up notice, a look-ahead notice, a cut-in notice, a notice such as a public figure effect, the number of winning balls, the number of condominiums, a certain change, etc. Information related to games such as time saving and latent mode) may be used. In this example, a case where a cut-in effect after reach (step-up) is performed as the second effect will be described. FIG. 469 (e) shows the cut-in effect executed during the reach effect. The face image of the "bancho" character image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a cut-in effect. Next, in FIG. 469 (f), a full-body image of the character image of “bancho” is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a cut-in effect, and is displayed as a step-up notice. Next, in FIG. 469 (g), the image of the character F shown in FIG. 442 (c) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a cut-in effect, and is displayed as a step-up notice.

  FIG. 469 (i) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the initial display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  As described above, even if the button effect is not performed during the reach effect execution, the second effect is, for example, a step-up notice, a look-ahead notice, a cut-in notice, a notice such as a general-purpose notice. Alternatively, it can be performed in association with the game information such as the number of coins obtained, the number of condominiums, the probability change, the time saving, and the latent mode.

(Example 6)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 470. In this embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those in FIG. 463 (j) of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 470 (a) continues from FIG. 463 (j). 470 (a) to 470 (l) show a state in which the button effect of this embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 470 (a) shows a state where the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, the tutorial display of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, one image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. The image simulating the chance button 136 has the same display mode as the button image of “vibration + rotation”. At the top of the image imitating the chance button 136, the character string "SP reach development with three sets! Press three times" is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed at the upper part.

  FIG. 470 (b) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, one operation request image (button image) having a display mode imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display area 208d. The display mode of the button image is “vibration + rotation”. At the top of the button image, the character string “SP reach development with three sets! Press three times” is displayed, and the character string “Go” is displayed at the top. Below the button image, one valid period image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has an elongated rectangular frame shape (long gauge) that is relatively long in the horizontal direction. Initially, the entire effective period is indicated by a rod of a predetermined color within the frame shape, A bar-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed so as to gradually shorten in the right direction as time passes. More specifically, the display of the effective period image is a long gauge display, and the long gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation effective period by performing an animation in which the length of the long gauge is reduced. . The display of the long gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the length of the long gauge becomes zero. It should be noted that the long gauge can also function as a notice like the deca gauge image. In order to make the validity period of the button the same as that of the normal gauge image, the speed at which the gauge in the long gauge decreases is faster than the speed at which the gauge in the normal gauge image decreases. By using a plurality of display modes in which the number of button displays and the mode of gauge display are different as described above, it may be possible to use it for advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 470 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 470 (d) shows a second effect executed during execution of the button effect. As a second effect, the panda image is displayed at the position on the right side of the display of the central button image. In this embodiment, the button image deletion animation for deleting the button image is not executed when the chance button 136 is first pressed. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the second effect is started thereafter. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (e) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the central button image and the panda image of the second effect, the character string of "2 more times" is displayed on the right side of the character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" On the other hand, it is notified that the number of remaining operations is two. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (f) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (g) shows a second effect executed while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, another panda image is displayed on the right side of the panda image on the right side of the center button image. In the present embodiment, the button deletion animation for deleting the button image is not executed by the second pressing of the chance button 136. Upon reception of the second press of the chance button 136, the second effect is started. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (h) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the central button image and the two panda images of the second effect, the character string of "Last" is displayed to the right of the character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" On the other hand, it is notified that the number of remaining operations is one. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (f) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 470 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this embodiment, the animation for deleting the button display is performed only for the last button operation.

  FIG. 470 (k) illustrates the case where the effective period image deletion animation is not executed for the gauge display. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the player presses the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In this example, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of gauge display is 0 as shown in FIG. 465 (m) is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the effect display area 208d, three panda images arranged at the positions of the respective vertices of the inverted triangle are displayed as second effects, respectively, and the condition of "SP reach development with three sets!" It informs that it is satisfied.

  FIG. 470 (l) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, three panda images having the same shape and the same size are displayed in a horizontal row in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the characters "SP reach confirmed" are displayed below them. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 470 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 465 (q) to 466 (e) is executed.

  According to the present embodiment, in the case where the button effect is used to determine whether or not the SP reach is developed during the reach effect, by preparing a plurality of effect patterns with different numbers of button displays and gauge display modes, It is also possible to give advance notice by a button presentation, which may improve the interest of the game.

(Example 7)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 471. In this embodiment, the effect up to the button effect is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 463 (k), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  471 (a) continues from FIG. 463 (k). 471 (a) to 471 (l) show a state in which the button effect of this embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 471 (a) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter toward the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 471 (b) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 471 (c) shows a state in which the button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (d) shows a second effect executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the young man is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (e) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (f) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a production change animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "production change animation") in which the image of the head of the young man on the left side is deleted and a large effect image is displayed is executed. Has been done. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (g) shows a state where the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of a young man is displayed near the positions where the left and center button images were displayed. The vertical image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the effective period image. As described above, in this embodiment, the character images of the same type (youth) are changed and displayed for each button operation. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the present embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are erased are the same.

  FIG. 471 (h) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (i) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the button image on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, in parallel with the button erasing animation, a production change animation in which a youth standing image is erased and a large effect image is displayed is being executed. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (j) shows a state in which the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a youth standing image similar to the character F in FIG. 442 (c) is displayed near the positions where the left and center button images were displayed. The vertical image is displayed in such a size as to hide a part of the effective period image. As described above, in this embodiment, the character images of the same type (youth) are changed and displayed for each button operation. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (k) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the fourth time during execution of the button effect. This button operation is a condition for generating the first effect. In this example, there are three button displays, and the button operation is performed for each button display, so three button operations are required, and the fourth button operation is required to generate the first effect. It has become. In other words, it requires four button operations (presses) to generate the first effect. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 471 (l) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In the present example, as the first effect, the character image of the young man is displayed in a large size on the right side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character string “Gekiatsu SP Reach!” Is displayed on the left side. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 471 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 465 (q) to 466 (e) is executed.

(Example 8)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 472. 472 (a) to 472 (q) show the special figure variation game in chronological order in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 472 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special map 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special drawing I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 472 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  472 (c) shows a state where "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special figure 1 variation game.

  472 (d), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the letters "reach" are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b to achieve the reach effect. The state has been started.

  FIG. 472 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the original display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  472 (f) to 472 (k) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, a case where a continuous stroke effect animation is executed as a button effect after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 472 (f) shows a state in which the continuous hit effect animation is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of the present example, an operation request image in a circular display mode in which the character “push” is displayed inside as an image suggesting the chance button 136 as the operation means, slightly to the right of the effect display area 208d (hereinafter referred to as “request image”). , Which may be referred to as a “push” button image) is displayed. A character string of "repeated stroke" is displayed in the diagonally upper left of the "push" button image. One valid period image is displayed below the "push" button image. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter toward the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge display, and the gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The gauge display is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 472 (g) shows a state in which the continuous stroke effect animation is being executed. The display of the "push" button image increases with the lapse of the operation valid period. At least one of the plurality of “push” button images hides a portion of the gauge display. Further, only one gauge image is displayed for displaying a plurality of “push” button images. Indication of multiple "push" button images requires multiple button operations, whereas the gauge display is one so that the player can easily understand that the operation is in common. May be possible. There may be a plurality of gauge displays. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 472 (h) shows a state in which the continuous stroke effect animation is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, one "push" button image of the deca button display is displayed as the first animation mode among the display of the plurality of "push" button images. The first animation mode of the big button display is an image larger than the second animation mode which is the button display mode other than the big button display. Further, in the button display modes other than the big button display, the black "push" character is displayed on a white background, whereas in the big button display mode, the black "push" character is displayed on the green background. In some cases, the button display itself can be made to function as a notice of the change due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display. In addition, in the button display modes other than the large button display, there are button display modes in which, for example, a red "press" character is displayed on a white background in addition to a black "press" character display on a white background. May be. Depending on such a difference in the button display mode, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice of the change or the like. Further, a part of the hold icon and a part of the gauge display are hidden by the “push” button image.

  Further, FIG. 472 (h) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  Further, FIG. 472 (h) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. Every time the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image is deleted by the button deletion animation. In the middle of the erasing animation, instead of displaying the button image as the first display, the effect image is displayed as the third display. The effect image is a button erase image and is included in the button erase animation. The display of the button image is a display that can be deleted in association with the operation of the chance button 136, and the display of the button deletion image is a display that can be executed when the display of the button image is deleted. The display of the button erased image is a display that can be started in association with the pressing (operation) of the chance button 136. In this way, since the button deletion animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform the button operation. It should be noted that the display of the button erased image may be a display that is executed irrespective of the operation of the operation means. By executing a deletion animation of the button display, it may be possible to notify that the player has pressed the chance button.

  Furthermore, as a second effect after the effect image disappears, the button image is an image of the character "excellent" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "excellent" image) or an image of the character "good" (hereinafter referred to as "good" image). May be called)) is being executed. The effect that changes to the “excellent” image or the “good” image is an effect that can be started in association with the pressing of the chance button 136. The effect in which the button image changes to the “excellent” image or the “good” image is an effect that can be started after the button deletion animation is performed. Since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the erasing animation of the button display, the second effect may be noticeable in some cases. Further, the second effect may be an effect which can be started during execution of the button erasing animation or before the button erasing animation is started. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to execute the button erasing animation every time the chance button 136 is pressed, and it may be executed for some or all of the plurality of button images.

  FIG. 472 (i) shows a state in which the player continuously hits the chance button 136 during execution of the continuous hit effect animation. By the player repeatedly hitting the chance button 136, a plurality of "push" button images are changed from effect display to button display of "excellent" image and "good" image by the button erasing animation. Notice that there is a high possibility that the "push" button image of the deca button display will change to an image of the "character" (may be referred to as "the image" below) through the effect display and develop into SP reach. are doing. Also, a picture simulating a speaker and a character string “Keen” are shown in the lower part of FIG. 472 (i), and a confirmation sound indicating that there is a high possibility of SP reach rush from the speaker 120 is used as an image notice presentation as a sound effect. Running synchronously. In the effective period image, the rod-shaped portion is shortened to the right, and the operation effective period is reduced.

  FIG. 472 (j) shows a state in which while the player is hitting the chance button 136 in succession, the operation valid period is lost and the continuous hit effect animation ends. When the operation valid period expires, the valid period image deletion animation starts. In the effective period image erasing animation, instead of displaying the effective period image as the second display, the effect image is displayed as the third display. The effect image is a valid period image erased image and is included in the valid period image erased animation.

  FIG. 472 (k) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of the button repeated tapping operation. In this example, as the first effect, the image of the character F shown in FIG. 442 (c) is displayed large on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character "corresponding" is displayed on the right side of the center. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  472 (l) to 472 (o) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 472 (l) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 472 (m) shows a state in which the big button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 472 (n), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts "I'm in battle!" Is displayed. FIG. 472 (o) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 472 (p) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 472 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .

(Example 9)
Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 473 and 474. 473 (a) to 474 (c) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 473 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 473 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 473 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the initial display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIG. 473 (d) shows a state where the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance buttons 136 are arranged in a horizontal row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction keys 137 are displayed side by side on the right side thereof. A character string of "PUSH" is displayed at the upper part of each of the images simulating the two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a line, and the characters of "Stop the pattern by button operation" are displayed at the upper part of them. A column is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed above the column.

  FIG. 473 (e) shows a state where the button effect has been started. In the button effect according to the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side in a row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d, and on the right side thereof. An operation request image in a display mode imitating the direction key 137 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed above each of the two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. The image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. The character string "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 473 (f) shows a state where the player presses the direction key 137 first instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 473 (g) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and there is a reception, the button image (direction key image) on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. As a result, the fact that the number of required operations has been reduced by one is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (h) shows a second effect executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (i) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the opportunity button 136 is pressed, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (k) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (l) shows a special effect that is performed during the execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation valid period. In the effect, the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is "normal", but is changed to "vibration + rotation". In addition, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the color of the gauge being “blue” is changed to “yellow”. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. In this way, it may be possible to give advance notice of the change by changing the display mode of the button image or the gauge image.

  FIG. 473 (m) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 473 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. Further, in parallel with the button erasing animation, a gauge image erasing animation is executed in which the effect image is disappeared after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 473 (o) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, a large character string "SP" is displayed between the two "decorations 3" displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  473 (p) to 474 (a) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 473 (p) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 473 (q) shows a state in which the big button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 473 (r), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts "I'm in battle!" Is displayed. In this example, the display mode of the button image is “signal + rotation”, whereas the button mode of the chance button 136 is “normal”. In this way, the display mode of the button image and the button mode of the chance button 136 may be different. 474 (a) following FIG. 473 (r) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 474 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 474 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .

(Example 10)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 475. In this embodiment, a characteristic effect that is performed from the start of the button effect to the start of the first first second effect will be described. FIG. 475 (a) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually becomes shorter toward the right. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero.

  FIG. 475 (b) shows a state in which the player has pressed the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image indicates that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the right direction and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 475 (c) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the pressing of the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 475 (d) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the young man is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. The effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the right direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed as the button image, the second effect is executed even when the direction key 137 other than the chance button 136 is pressed. It has become.

(Example 11)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 476. 476 (a) to 476 (r) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 476 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 476 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 476 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the original display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIG. 476 (d) shows a state where the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance buttons 136 are arranged in a horizontal row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction keys 137 are displayed side by side on the right side thereof. A character string of "PUSH" is displayed at the upper part of each of the images simulating the two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a line, and the characters of "Stop the pattern by button operation" are displayed at the upper part of them. A column is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed above the column.

  FIG. 476 (e) shows a state where the button effect has started. In the button effect according to the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side in a row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d, and on the right side thereof. An operation request image in a display mode imitating the direction key 137 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed above each of the two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. The image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. The character string "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 476 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 476 (g) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and there is a reception, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. As a result, the fact that the number of required operations has been reduced by one is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image replacing the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 476 (h) shows the second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 476 (i) shows a state that the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to inform that the operation effective period during the execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 476 (j) shows a state in which an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicates that the valid operation period has expired and the remaining gauge display period is 0.

  In FIG. 476 (k), the button deletion animation starts when the next button operation is not performed within the operation valid period after the first chance button 136 is pressed and the operation valid period has expired. It shows the state of being performed. In the button deletion animation, the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d and the direction key image displayed on the right side of the button image are deleted. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. In this way, the display mode of the button erasing animation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of button operation during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 476 (l) shows a third effect (e.g., corresponding to the first effect of Example 2-1) that is executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. In the third effect of this example, the forced display of the decorative pattern is performed. As a third effect, "decoration 3" is displayed as a stop in the right symbol display area 208c of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" has already been temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the reach effect is started from this point. Further, an image simulating "decoration 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d is displayed, and an image simulating "decoration 3" in the area where the direction key image on the right side is displayed. Is displayed, and in the area where the central button image was displayed, an image simulating the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in animation. In this example, when the number of button operations within the operation valid period is smaller than the number of button images displayed in the effect display area 208d, the variable display of the decorative pattern is simulated in the effect display area 208d as the third effect. The displayed image is displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  476 (m) to 476 (p) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 476 (m) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 476 (n) shows a state in which a deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 476 (o), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production advances to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts "I'm in battle!" Is displayed. FIG. 476 (p) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 476 (q) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 476 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .

(Example 12)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 477. 477 (a) to 477 (n) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In the figures showing the special figure variation game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 477 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 477 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 477 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the initial display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing.

  FIG. 477 (d) shows a state where the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance buttons 136 are arranged in a horizontal row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction keys 137 are displayed side by side on the right side thereof. A character string of "PUSH" is displayed at the upper part of each of the images simulating the two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a line, and the characters of "Stop the pattern by button operation" are displayed at the upper part of them. A column is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed above the column.

  FIG. 477 (e) shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect according to the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side in a row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d, and on the right side thereof. An operation request image in a display mode imitating the direction key 137 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed above each of the two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. The image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. The character string "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 477 (f) shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 477 (g) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and there is a reception, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. As a result, the fact that the number of required operations has been reduced by one is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image replacing the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 477 (h) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 477 (i) shows a state in which the bar-shaped portion of the effective period image is further shortened to the left, indicating that the operation effective period during the execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 477 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. In this example, when the button operation is not performed for a predetermined time within the operation valid period, the button deletion animation is executed as an effect based on the button operation when the predetermined time elapses. As a result, the button image (direction key image) on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 477 (k) shows a second effect that is forcibly executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the second effect of this example, the symbols are forcibly displayed. As the second effect, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" has already been temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the reach effect is started from this point. Further, an image simulating "decoration 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 477 (l) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 477 (j), the button deletion animation is executed without performing the button operation once, and then the second effect is executed, but if the operation effective period remains, the remaining buttons are A new button operation for displaying an image may be performed to proceed to the next button erasing animation effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 477 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. Further, in parallel with the button erasing animation, a gauge image erasing animation is executed in which the effect image is disappeared after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 477 (n) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, a large character string "SP" is displayed between the two "decorations 3" displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  The ninth to twelfth examples described above are summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137 as a plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate. At least one of the plurality of operating means is, for example, a chance button 136 as a first operating means, and at least one of the plurality of operating means is, for example, a direction key 137 as a second operating means. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, an effect display area 208d as display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a chance button image display as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, for example, a direction key image. Is. The first display is a display of a button image including at least a display indicating the chance button 136, and the second display is a display including at least a display of a direction key image indicating the direction key 137. The first display is a display that can be started at least during the execution period of the button effect, for example, as the first period, and the second display is also a display that can be started at least during the first period.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as a means for performing at least a plurality of types of effects. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect that erases the button image and displays another image as the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect. The effect is, for example, an effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image. The first effect is, for example, an effect that can be started at least in association with the pressing of the chance button 136, and the second effect can be at least started, for example, in association with the pressing of the direction key 137. It is a production.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in a correspondence relationship, and the effect order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. We can provide a game console with In addition, it may be possible to select an effect corresponding to the operating means.

  Further, the chance button 136 is, for example, at least valid for reception of the operation of the chance button 136 during the operation valid period as the second period, and the direction key 137 is at least valid for reception of operation of the direction key 137 during the operation valid period. Become. The execution period of the button effect is a period including at least a part of the operation valid period. When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image, and the direction key 137 is operated during the operation valid period. In this case, the direction key image can be erased and at least the effect of displaying another image can be started.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the operation valid periods of the plurality of operating means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operating means in one operation valid period.

  If the chance button 136 is operated before the direction key 137 is operated during the effective operation period as the first condition, the decorative pattern display device 208 erases the direction key image and changes the other direction. The effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image can be started earlier than the effect of displaying the image of, and as a second condition, the direction is directed before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. When the key 137 is operated, the effect of deleting the directional key image and displaying another different image can be started earlier than the effect of deleting the button image and displaying the other image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effect corresponding to the operation unit operated first is performed first, the player may be able to select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

  If only the chance button 136 is operated before the direction key 137 is operated during the operation valid period, the decorative pattern display device 208 erases the button image and executes only the effect of displaying another image. If only the direction key 137 is operated before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, only the effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image is executed. It is possible.

  In the effect display area 208d, at least a chance button image having a first number of 2, for example, can be displayed, and at least a direction key image having a second number of 1, for example, can be displayed. In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect that the decorative design is forcibly displayed as the third effect (see FIG. 476), and the effect that the decorative design is forcibly displayed is a third condition. This is an effect that can be executed at least when the chance button 136 is operated twice, which is the first number, and the direction key 137 is operated once, which is the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as an effect that appears by a plurality of operations, and since there are a plurality of operation means, the first operation means and the second operation means are necessary. In some cases, it can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operations and the number of displays.

  The third condition may be satisfied when the operation valid period ends. The third effect may occur due to the expiration of the operation valid period. The third effect may not be performed if the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation valid period.

  The chance button 136 can at least take, for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.) as a plurality of states. At least one of the first state is, for example, the button mode is “normal”, and at least one of the plurality of states is the second state, for example, the button mode is “vibration”. The second state is different from the first state. The chance button image can be displayed in at least one of a plurality of display modes such as “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, and “deca button display”), and at least one of the plurality of display modes can be displayed. One is, for example, “normal” as the first display mode, at least one of the plurality of display modes is, for example, “vibration” as the second display mode, and the second display mode is This is a display mode different from the first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the first state, and the second display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the second state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations in the states of the buttons and the display manners, depending on the display manner according to the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means may be a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be a direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operating means can be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operating means and the second operating means may have a plurality of states.

  Further, the first display mode may have a configuration corresponding to the second state, and the second display mode may have a configuration corresponding to the first state.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the display of the effective period image as the third display, and the display of the effective period image can at least suggest the operation effective period,

  The effect display bizarre 208d can execute at least the display of the effective period image that is, for example, 1 as the third number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player can understand that the common operation effective period is provided by setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations). In some cases, it can be easily notified. The third display may be plural.

(Example 13)
Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 478 to 481. 478 (a) to 481 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variation game and the following jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In the figures showing the special figure variation game and the subsequent big hit game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 478 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In both the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. The "x" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is off is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1, and the special symbol 2 variation in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area t2. An "x" image showing that the result of the game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  478 (b) to (f) show from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variation game. FIG. 478 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 478 (c) shows a state in which a game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs are lit from the left on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that the Toku-zu 1 holding is two. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 in correspondence with the increase in holding. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 relating to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed in an image simulating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button hold icon”) instead of the normal display mode. Therefore, the pre-reading notice is given with a predetermined reliability, which indicates a big hit in the special figure 1 variation game related to the suspension. The button hold icon is also an image display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and the appearance of the image starts the effect with the button hold icon. In the presentation using the button hold icon, the operation valid period using a gauge display or the like is not displayed. The operation valid period in the effect by the button hold icon is set to end with the start of the special figure variation game related to the button hold icon unless the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 478 (d) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time when the chance button 136 is pressed, no other button effect is started, so that the reception of the pressing is used for effect by the button holding icon.

  FIG. 478 (e) shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is changed from the button hold icon image to the normal display image upon reception of the pressing of the chance button 136. The effect with the button hold icon here is that the button hold icon image is changed to the normal display image and it is determined that the pre-reading notice is false.

  FIG. 478 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In both the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display area t1, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  FIG. 478 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 478 (h) shows a state in which a game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one. Two LEDs are lit from the left on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that the Toku-zu 1 holding is two. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 in correspondence with the increase in holding. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 relating to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed not as a normal display but as a button hold icon, and the special figure 1 variable game relating to the hold with a predetermined reliability is displayed. It gives a pre-reading notice that suggests a big hit. Further, the effect by the button hold icon is started before the button effect. The effective period image is not displayed in the effect using the button hold icon. The effective operation period of the effect by the button hold icon ends, for example, before the special figure variation game related to the hold is started.

  FIG. 478 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c.

  In FIG. 478 (j), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the decoration symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The variable display continues, and a character string of "reach" is displayed in the center to indicate a state where the reach effect is started.

  478 (k) to 479 (c) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 478 (k) shows a state where the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance buttons 136 are displayed in a line in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. A character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" Is displayed on the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, and a character string of "Ready" is displayed on the upper part thereof.

  FIG. 478 (l) shows a state where the button effect has started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 478 (l) to the state shown in FIG. 479 (c), the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 478 (m) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 in a state in which the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are overlapped and executed. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 478 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the present example, if the opportunity to press the chance button 136 is received when the effect using the button hold icon and the button effect are overlapped, the button effect is preferentially processed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 478 (o) shows the effect by the button hold icon and the second effect executed next to the button deletion animation during the execution of the button effect. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 478 (p) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced size display of the panda image allows the central button image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 478 (q) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the effect with the button hold icon and the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 478 (r) shows a state in which the button erasing animation is being executed during the execution of the button holding icon effect and the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed a second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 479 (a) shows a state in which the second effect has been executed after the button deletion animation subsequent to FIG. 478 (r). As a second effect, the Echigoya image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 479 (b) shows an execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image for the left button image is displayed at the position of the central button image, regardless of whether the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time, the "3 The condition of "SP reach development together!" Is no longer met. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the right button image is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead of waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 479 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the Echigoya image is displayed largely on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the right side of the center. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed to SP (super) reach. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display is displayed. In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 479 (d) subsequent to FIG. 479 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are normally displayed by being enlarged from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 479 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the first special symbol "Special drawing I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display area t1, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol 1 variation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variable game is out of sync. .

  479 (f) to (j) show from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variation game. FIG. 479 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the button hold icon image on the right side moves to the left and is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a1. To be done. The production using the button hold icon is ongoing.

  FIG. 479 (g) shows a state in which a game ball enters the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs are lit from the left on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that the Toku-zu 1 holding is two. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 in correspondence with the increase in holding. In this example, the second special map 1 hold icon a2 is regulated because the button hold icon is already displayed in the first hold even if the button hold icon is scheduled to appear in the prefetch notice lottery. The display mode is a normal display.

  FIG. 479 (h) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time when the chance button 136 is pressed, no other button effect is started, so that the reception of the pressing is used for effect by the button holding icon.

  FIG. 479 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon a1 is changed from the button hold icon image to an image simulating the head of a young man when the pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted. The effect of the button holding icon in this example is changed from the button holding icon image to an image simulating the head of a young man, and a predetermined look-ahead notice is given.

  FIG. 479 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. In both the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  FIG. 479 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is started. The special figure variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the "-" image indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 479 (l) shows a state in which a game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, and the holding of special figure 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs are lit from the left on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that the Toku-zu 1 holding is two. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the left special figure 1 hold icon a1 in correspondence with the increase in holding. The special figure 1 hold icon a2 relating to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed not as a normal display but as a button hold icon, and the special figure 1 variable game relating to the hold with a predetermined reliability is displayed. It gives a pre-reading notice that suggests a big hit. In addition, the effect by the button holding icon is started.

  FIG. 479 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol continues in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c.

  In FIG. 479 (n), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the decoration symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The variable display continues, and a character string of "reach" is displayed in the center to indicate a state where the reach effect is started.

  479 (o) to 480 (n) show a state where the button effect of this embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 variation game. In the button effect of this embodiment, a predetermined lottery process for button effect is performed in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects that prompt the user to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In this embodiment, the case where the button effect is executed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 479 (o) shows a state where the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images simulating the chance buttons 136 are displayed in a line in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. A character string of "SP reach development with three sets!" Is displayed on the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, and a character string of "Ready" is displayed on the upper part thereof.

  FIG. 479 (p) shows a state where the button effect has started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) in a display mode simulating the chance button 136 are displayed in a horizontal row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed on the upper part of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed on the upper part thereof. Below the three button images, one valid period image common to the three button images is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 479 (p) to the state shown in FIG. 480 (r), the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are in a duplicated state.

  FIG. 479 (q) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are overlapped and executed. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  FIG. 479 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. This shows a state in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon a2 is changed from the button hold icon image to an image simulating the head of a young man when the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted. The effect of the button holding icon in this example is changed from the button holding icon image to an image simulating the head of a young man, and a predetermined look-ahead notice is given. In this example, when the opportunity button 136 is pressed when the effect by the button holding icon and the button effect are overlapped, the effect by the button holding icon is preferentially processed. There is. The button effect effective period image informs that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the leftward direction and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (a) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (b) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the first press of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (c) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (d) shows a state where the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced size display of the panda image allows the central button image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (e) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (f) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed during the execution of the button effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed a second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (g) shows a state where the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size that a part of the panda image on the left and a part of the effective period image are hidden. In this way, another second effect may be hidden by the second effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the reduced panda image allows the left panda image and the effective period image to be all visible. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. In this way, the display mode of the button image may change during the operation valid period. Also, the button mode may be changed in response to the change in the display mode of the button image. This may give advance notice of the change.

  FIG. 480 (j) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 480 (k) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the button image on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  Also, in the button erasing animation shown in FIG. 480 (k), since the button image with the display mode of “vibration + rotation” is displayed, the button erasing animation for erasing the button image with the display mode of “normal” is displayed. An effect image that is larger than the effect image is displayed. As described above, in the button effect of the present embodiment, the button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and the button mode in which the display mode is “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation mode is used. As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is “normal” can be used. By doing so, there are cases where the button display itself can function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 480 (l) shows a state where the second effect is executed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the right button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed in such a size that a part of the central panda image is hidden. In this way, another second effect may be hidden by the second effect. Since the operation valid period has passed, the valid period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 480 (m) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second presentation, the panda image on the right side is displayed in a reduced size, and three panda images of the same size are arranged in a horizontal row to notify that the conditions for "SP reach development with three sets!" Are met. Has been done.

  FIG. 480 (n) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In the present example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 437 (a) is displayed large on the left side of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the characters "SP development" are displayed on the right side of the center. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach. Further, in this example, the image of the hold icon is erased and is not displayed until the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 480 (o) to 480 (r) is finished from the first effect.

  480 (o) to 480 (r) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 480 (o) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 480 (p) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 480 (q), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts “I'm in battle!” Is displayed. FIG. 480 (r) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 481 (a) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged from the reduced display to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and are normally displayed. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 481 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. . After this, the 15R special jackpot game is started.

  FIG. 481 (c) shows a big hit game end effect in which the 15R special big hit game is ended. After the big hit game, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character string of "probability change: right strike" is displayed above it. It is displayed. Regarding the hold of special figure 1, since the big hit game has been passed, the display mode of all the hold icons is the default normal display.

  The thirteenth embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and, for example, a performance display area 208d as a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a plurality of display areas. For example, a decorative pattern display device 208 is provided as a production means capable of executing at least a type of production. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a chance button image display as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a button hold as the second display. It is an icon display. The display of the chance button image is a display including at least a display indicating the chance button 136, and the display of the button holding icon is a display including at least a display indicating the chance button 136.

  The effect display area 208d can display at least the display of chance button images that are the first number (for example, three). The display of the chance button image can be started at least during the period of the special figure variation game as the first period, and the display of the button holding icon can be performed as the second period during the period of the special figure variation game, for example. At least you can start. The chance button 136 is controlled so that the reception related to the operation is valid for a plurality of periods, and at least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, the operation valid period in the button effect as the first valid period. At least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, the operation valid period in the effect by the button holding icon as the second valid period. The first period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the button effect, and the second period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon.

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect that notifies the result of a button operation as a first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, a second effect. , Is a pre-reading notice effect using the hold icon. The effect for notifying the result of the button operation is an effect performed at least in association with the display of the chance button image, and the prefetching notice effect by the hold icon is an effect performed at least in association with the display of the button hold icon. The effect for notifying the result of the button operation is at least an effect that can be executed when the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated becomes the second number (for example, three) during the operation effective period of the button effect. The first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is a period that may overlap with the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, and a button display related to another second effect appear, a gaming machine having a display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of button effects.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can at least display the effective period image as a third display capable of suggesting the operation effective period in the button effect, and the effect display unit 208d displays the effect by the button holding icon. Do not display the operation valid period. In the button effect, the effective period is displayed, and in the effect using the button holding icon, the effective period is not displayed, which may improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon is longer than the operation effective period in the button effect. Since the operation effective period in the effect with the button hold icon without the effective period display is longer than the operation effective period in the button effect with the effective period display, the button operation for the effect that notifies the result of the button operation by displaying the effective period Sometimes it can be urged.

  Further, for example, as a notice, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of executing at least a notice of success or failure of the special figure variation game, and as a pre-reading notice, for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure variation game to be held. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided as a prefetching notice means that can be executed at least, and the notice means causes the effect display area 208d to perform the effect of notifying the result of the button operation. It is possible to execute at least the advance notice, and the pre-read notice means can execute at least the pre-read notice by causing the effect display area 208d to perform the pre-read notice effect with the hold icon.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes the notification of the advance notice of the change, and the effect by the button holding icon includes the notification of the prefetch advance notice. Therefore, depending on the combination of the type of the button display and the type of the advance notice. It may be possible to increase the variation of production.

  Further, for example, as a hold display means capable of displaying at least special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2 as a plurality of kinds of hold icons, for example, a special effect display area 208d defining a special figure 1 hold display area is provided. 208d can at least notify the number of holdings related to the execution of the variable display of symbols by the number of holding icons to be displayed. At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons, for example, as a first hold icon is a button hold icon, at least one of the plurality of types of hold icons, for example, as a second hold icon, It is a hold icon of an image simulating a youth's head. The display of the button hold icon is a button hold icon. The pre-reading notice effect using the hold icon includes at least an effect that changes the button hold icon to the hold icon of an image simulating a youth's head in association with the operation of the chance button 136.

  Since the effect by the button hold icon includes the pre-reading notice of the hold icon, the hold icon is a display that is erased in association with the start of the variable display of symbols and does not require the display of the effective period for the second effective period. In some cases, it can be recognized by the player.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d does not display a new button holding icon while the button holding icon is displayed. Since multiple button holding icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button performance from becoming too complicated.

  Further, the pre-reading notice effect with the hold icon is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the effect with the button hold icon becomes the third number, and The number is smaller than the second number. The number of button operations for performing the second effect is less than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

  In addition, when the operation valid period in the button effect and the operation valid period in the effect using the button hold icon overlap, the decorative symbol display device 208 provides the look-ahead notice effect using the hold icon rather than the effect that notifies the result of the button operation. It is feasible first. In the button operation when the effective period overlaps, the pre-reading notice effect with the hold icon has priority, so by performing the pre-reading notice effect with the hold icon that does not indicate the effective period first, the operation in the button effect is effective. In some cases, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform a button operation in order to perform both the pre-reading notice effect by the hold icon and the effect of informing the result of the button operation.

  Further, the decorative pattern display device 208, when the operation effective period in the button effect and the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon overlap, the effect of notifying the result of the button operation rather than the look-ahead notice effect by the hold icon. It is feasible first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, in the button operation when the effective periods overlap, the effect of notifying the result of the button operation is prioritized, so that the operation effective period in the button effect and the effect by the button holding icon are used. Even when the operation effective periods of the two overlap, by giving priority to one effect, it may be possible to continue the button operation until the other effect is performed.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d can display at least the display of the effective period image which is the fourth number, and the fourth number is one. By using one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations), it may be possible to easily inform the player of a common operation valid period. The second display may be plural.

  Also, the second number may be the same number as the first number. By doing so, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the number of button operations necessary for executing the first effect may be easily informed to the player in some cases.

(Example 14)
Next, a specific example of the button image according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 482. Although FIG. 439 of the seventh embodiment shows a display mode of a plurality of button images, a button image in a display mode in which the chance button 136 is viewed obliquely from above as shown in FIG. May be In the button image shown in FIG. 7A, the character "press" is displayed in the area showing the pressing surface. The button image shown in FIG. 9B has the same outline as the button image shown in FIG. 9A, but the display color is different. In addition, the character string “PUSH” is displayed in the area indicating the pressed surface. In this way, it is possible to give a notice of whether or not the variation is appropriate by changing the display of the color and the pressed surface with the same contour. FIG. 11C is a button image in a display mode in which the vertically long chance button 136 is viewed obliquely from above, and character images are added to the button side surface and the pressed surface. It is possible to recognize that the button is a button if at least a notification for prompting a button operation is included, and the button image may include a character image or the like.

(Example 15)
Next, a specific example of the gauge image (effective period image) according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 483. FIG. 483 shows a specific example of a gauge image that can be displayed instead of the gauge image shown in, for example, FIG. 480 (a). In the gauge image shown in FIG. 483 (a), a character image is displayed in the gauge. A gauge with a pattern or a pattern may be provided outside the character image. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 483 (b), a button image is integrally displayed on the gauge image. In this example, three button images are displayed in one horizontal line, but the number of button images may be one or more. The gauge image shown in FIG. 483 (c) includes an image that suggests the timing of button operation within the operation valid period. In this example, the three button images are arranged at the position of the time when the button operation should be performed in the gauge. In FIG. 6C-1, the operation valid period has passed for a while, and the rod-shaped portion of the gauge image is shortened to the right to some extent, so that the operation valid period is slightly shortened. FIG. 6C-2 shows a state in which the bar-shaped portion of the gauge image is shortened to the right as the operation valid period further elapses, and the tip of the bar overlaps the button image on the left side. This display indicates that it is the timing when the chance button 136 is first pressed. FIG. 6C-3 shows a state in which the bar-shaped portion of the gauge image is shortened to the right after the operation valid period has further elapsed, and the tip of the bar overlaps the second button image from the left. . This display indicates that it is the timing to press the chance button 136 for the second time.

(Example 16)
Next, a special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 486. FIGS. 484 (a) to (f), FIGS. 484 (a ') to (f'), and FIGS. 484 (a '') to (f '') respectively show the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in this order. Figure shows the variation game in time series. FIGS. 485 (a) to (f), FIGS. 485 (a ') to (f'), and FIGS. 485 (a '') to (f '') respectively show the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order. Figure shows the variation game in time series. Further, FIG. 485 (a) continues from FIG. 484 (f), FIG. 485 (a ′) continues from FIG. 484 (f ′), and FIG. 485 (a ″) shows FIG. f ''). FIGS. 486 (a) to (f), FIGS. 486 (a ') to (f'), and FIGS. 486 (a '') to (f '') show the characteristics of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order. Figure shows the variation game in time series. In addition, FIG. 486 (a) continues from FIG. 485 (f), FIG. 486 (a ′) continues from FIG. 485 (f ′), and FIG. 486 (a ″) corresponds to FIG. 485 ( f ''). In addition, FIGS. 486 (d) to (i) show, in this order, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Further, FIG. 486 (d) is continued from each of FIG. 486 (c), FIG. 486 (c ′), and FIG. 486 (c ″). In the figures showing the special figure variation game and the subsequent big hit game in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next does not necessarily match between the figures.

  484 (a) to 486 (c) show the special figure variation game in the non-auto button mode in time series. 484 (a ')-FIG. 486 (c') show the special figure variation game in the first auto button mode in time series. FIG. 484 (a ″) to FIG. 486 (c ″) show the special figure variation game in the second auto button mode in time series.

  Each of FIG. 484 (a), (a ′), and (a ″) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 484 (a) shows a state in the non-auto button mode. FIG. 484 (a ′) shows a state in the first auto button mode. The first auto button mode is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode, and it is difficult for the player to know that the auto button mode is currently in effect. FIG. 484 (a ″) shows a state in the second auto button mode. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "automatic" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify the player that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  Each of FIG. 484 (b), (b '), (b' ') shows the state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the particular figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. In the second auto button mode of FIG. 484 (b ″), the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (b ') is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (b), and the player knows that it is currently in the auto button mode. Is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (b ″), the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. Has been done.

  In each of FIGS. 484 (c), (c ′), and (c ″), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area is displayed. A state in which 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area is shown.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (c ′) is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (c), and the player knows that the current auto button mode is in effect. Is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (c ″), the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. Has been done.

  FIG. 484 (d) shows a state where the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance buttons 136 are arranged in a horizontal row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction keys 137 are displayed side by side on the right side thereof. A character string of "PUSH" is displayed at the upper part of each of the images simulating the two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a line, and the characters of "Stop the pattern by button operation" are displayed at the upper part of them. A column is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed above the column.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (d ′), the explanation of the button effect is also displayed, but since the button operation during the button effect is automatically performed, the display mode of the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (d) is displayed. Is displayed in a display mode in which the character string "PUSH" is deleted. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (d ″), no button effect is executed. Therefore, the explanation of the button effect is not displayed. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 484 (e) shows a state in which the button effect has started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side in a row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is imitated on the right side thereof. The operation request image in the display mode (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed above each of the two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. The image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. The character string "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  Also in the display mode of the start of the button effect in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (e ′), the valid period image showing the operation valid period in which the character string “PUSH” shown in FIG. 484 (e) is deleted Is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (e ″), only the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the button effect does not start. Therefore, neither button display nor gauge display is performed.

  FIG. 484 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. Depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (f ′), the button effect is executed in a display mode in which the character string “PUSH” shown in FIG. 484 (f) is deleted. Further, an effective period image showing the operation effective period of the button effect is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 484 (f ″), another effect different from the button effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (a) shows a state in which a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and there is a reception, the button image (direction key image) on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. As a result, the fact that the number of required operations has been reduced by one is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (a ′), the button image on the left side is automatically deleted without performing any button operation. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. Also, the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 485 (a) is not executed in the first auto button mode. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (a ″), another effect is being executed. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (b) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  Also in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (b ′), the second effect executed after the button deletion is being executed while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a triggered by an automatic button operation. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (b ″), another effect is being executed. In another presentation, the character string "3 on the left" is displayed to inform that the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (c '), the button operation is performed automatically. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (c ″), another effect is being executed. In another presentation, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed on the left side. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (d) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the opportunity button 136 is pressed, the button image on the left side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (d ′), the button image on the right side is automatically deleted without performing any button operation. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (d ″), another effect is being executed. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (e) shows the second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  Also in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (e ′), in the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a triggered by an automatic button operation. There is. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (e ″), another effect is being executed. In another presentation, the character string "3 on the right" is displayed to notify that the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 485 (f) shows a special effect performed during execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation valid period. In the effect, the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is "normal", but is changed to "vibration + rotation" to give a notice of the change. Further, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the color of the gauge is changed from "blue" to "yellow" to give a notice of the change. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (f ′), the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208b is “normal”, but is changed to “vibration + rotation”, The change is announced in advance. In the first auto button mode, it is possible to notify the player of the change in advance by displaying the buttons without changing the button mode of the chance button 136. The advance notice may be given by changing the button mode. Further, as a display mode of the gauge display, for example, the color of the gauge is changed from "blue" to "yellow" to give a notice of the change. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (f ″), another effect is being executed. In another presentation, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed on the right side. In the second auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 486 (a) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (a '), the button operation is performed automatically. In the first auto button mode, the character string “PUSH” is not displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 485 (c ″), another effect is being executed. In the second auto button mode, the character string "in auto" in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d is deleted.

  FIG. 486 (b) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the button effect is being executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed a third time, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. Further, in parallel with the button erasing animation, a gauge image erasing animation is executed in which the effect image is disappeared after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (b ′), the button deletion animation is executed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (b). In this way, the button erasing animation may be executed in the first auto button mode, or the button erasing animation may or may not be performed every button operation. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (b ″).

  FIG. 486 (c) shows the first effect executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect notifies the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, a large character string "SP" is displayed between the two "decorations 3" displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  Also in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (c '), the same first effect as that shown in FIG. 486 (c) is executed. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach. As another effect in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 486 (c ″), the same image as the character F shown in FIG. 442 (c) is provided between the two “decoration 3” displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d as another effect. Is displayed, and the character string “SP reach” is displayed above it. As a result, the player is informed that the reach effect will develop into SP (super) reach.

  486 (d) to 486 (i) show SP reach effects. FIG. 486 (d) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c which are reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . A character string of "sublimation reach" is displayed at the upper part of the effect display area 208d. An image of two samurai facing each other is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 486 (e) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 486 (f), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach production advances to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts "I'm in battle!" Is displayed. FIG. 486 (g) shows a state in which the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who has won to the right and the figure of the samurai who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string "win" is displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 486 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and displayed from the reduced display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 486 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the special map 1 display device 212, the big hit symbol "special map A" is stopped and displayed. The "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and it is reported that the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. .

(Example 17)
Next, the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display areas t1, t2, an "x" image indicating that the result of the special symbol fluctuation game is out is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure variation game is out of order.

  Further, the two LEDs on the left side are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 to notify that there are two special figure 1 holdings. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon a1 corresponding to the hold of the first rank is displayed, and a special figure 1 hold icon a2 corresponding to the hold of the second rank is displayed on the right side thereof. It is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are both in the normal hold display mode shown in FIG. 432 (a).

  FIG. 487 (a) shows a state in the third auto button mode. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "automatic" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify the player that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  FIG. 487 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started and the special figure 1 variable game is executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure variation display is being executed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. In the third auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, one hold with the 1st place in the holding order is exhausted, and only one LED on the left end of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is turned on to hold the special figure 1. It is reported that the number is one. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon on the left disappears in response to the completion of the hold, and the special figure 1 hold icon on the right side moves to the left to become the special figure 1 hold icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 487 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced from the initial display area center to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the display area center. ing. In the third auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 487 (d) shows a state in which the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanation display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images simulating the chance buttons 136 are arranged in a horizontal row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction keys 137 are displayed side by side on the right side thereof. A character string of "PUSH" is displayed at the upper part of each of the images simulating the two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a line, and the characters of "Stop the pattern by button operation" are displayed at the upper part of them. A column is displayed, and the character string "Ready" is displayed above the column. In the third auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 487 (e) shows a state where the button effect in the third auto button mode has started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) in a display mode imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side in a row in the substantial center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is imitated on the right side thereof. The operation request image in the display mode (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed above each of the two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. The image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially the entire period of the effective period is shown in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the frame shape, and with the passage of the period, a rod-shaped portion of a predetermined color is displayed. It is displayed so that it gradually shortens to the left. More specifically, the effective period image is a gauge image, and the gauge image is displayed so that the remaining period of the operation effective period can be suggested by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced. The display of the gauge image is a display capable of notifying that the operation valid period ends when the gauge length becomes zero. The character string "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image. In the third auto button mode, the character string "in auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 487 (f) shows a state in which the player has pressed the direction key 137 first instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect in the third auto button mode. Depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion has become slightly shorter in the left direction, and the operation effective period has become slightly shorter. In the third auto button mode, the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 487 (g) shows a state in which the button operation performed by the player during the execution of the button effect is enabled in the third auto button mode, and the button image deletion animation (button deletion animation) is being executed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed to accept a button, the button image (direction key image) on the right side is deleted by the button deletion animation. During the button deletion animation, the effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string “PUSH” above the button image to be erased also changes to an effect image during the button erasing animation and then disappears. As a result, the fact that the number of required operations has been reduced by one is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 487 (h) shows a second effect executed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed in the third auto button mode. In the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image simulating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. The effective period image reports that the rod-shaped portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is further shortened.

  FIG. 487 (e ′) shows a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 487 (e). This modification shows that the number of button images may be smaller than the number of button images in the effect with the non-auto button. Since the button operation is automatically performed in the auto button state, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that it is a button effect, and therefore only one button display is required.

  As described above, the button effect in the auto button mode can be performed in the same display mode as the button effect in the non-auto button mode. Further, in the automatic button mode of this example, the button operation by the player is effectively accepted and a predetermined effect is performed.

  The examples (2-16 to 17) described above are summarized as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and, for example, a performance display area 208d as a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a first display area 208d. As one effect, for example, as a means for performing at least the effect of notifying the result of the button operation, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, and as a mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of types of modes. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided. At least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, a non-auto button mode as the first mode, and at least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, an auto button mode as the second mode. Is. The non-auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and the auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, a button image display including a character string “PUSH” as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display. The display is, for example, the display of a button image that does not include the characters "PUSH" or the non-display of the button image. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display corresponding to at least the non-auto button mode, and the display of the button image not including the character “PUSH” is a display corresponding to at least the auto button mode. . The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game as the first period, and the display of the button image not including the character “PUSH” is It can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display including at least a display indicating the chance button 136. The execution period of the special figure variation game is, for example, a period that includes at least a part of the operation valid period as the third period of the period in which the reception related to the operation of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The effect display area 208d can display at least the display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" that is the first number (for example, 3). The effect of notifying the result of the button operation can be executed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated reaches the second number (for example, 2) in the operation valid period. The first number is two or more and the second number is two or more. At least a part of the display of the button image not including the character "PUSH" is different from the display of the button image including the character string "PUSH".

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display of the button effect is different between the automatic button mode and the non-automatic button mode, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a display means. Further, the mode may be easily recognized depending on the difference between the first display and the second display.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with, for example, an effect display area 208d as a decorative symbol display means capable of performing at least decorative symbol variable display. In the effect display area 208d, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c can be at least executed as the first decorative symbol variable display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the non-auto button mode, The display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the button operation is necessary by clarifying the portion where the display is different depending on the mode in the same type of decorative pattern variable display. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of executing at least a notice as to whether or not the special figure variation game is announced, and a notice as to whether or not the SP reach will be developed. ing. The display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" is a display that is at least a part of the notice of whether or not the special figure variation game is won, and the display of the button image that does not include the character of "PUSH" is the variation of the special figure. This is a display that is at least a part of the notice of success or failure of the game. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" may not be started during the execution period of the special figure variation game in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the character "PUSH" may be displayed. The display of the button image not including may not be started during the execution period of the special figure variation game in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can execute at least variable display of other decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c as the second decorative symbol variable display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" is, for example, as the execution period of another special figure variation game as the execution period of another special figure variation game of the variation display of another decorative symbol in the non-auto button mode. It is possible to start at least, and the display of the button image not including the character string of "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of another special figure variation game of the variation display of another decorative symbol in the auto button mode. By doing so, the button effect can be executed even in another decorative pattern variable display.

  Further, the display of the button image including the character string of “PUSH” is, for example, a display including the display of the operation period image as a display capable of suggesting the operation valid period, and the button not including the character string of “PUSH”. The display of the image is a display that does not include at least a display that can suggest the operation valid period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the valid period is not displayed in the auto button mode. In the automatic button mode, since the buttons are automatically operated, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentification by the player (misidentification that button operation is required). .

  The display of the button image not including the character "PUSH" is a display including at least the display suggesting the chance button 136, and the effect display area 208d has the character "PUSH" that is the third number (for example, 0). It is possible to display at least the display of the button image that does not include, and the third number is a number smaller than the first number. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of buttons displayed in the non-auto button mode.

  Also, if the third number is one, the number of button displays in the auto button mode is one, so the player recognizes that it was a button effect in the non-auto button mode while thinning the number of button displays. It may be possible to The number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode may be greater than the first number or may be the same. Further, button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if the manual button operation is enabled, it may be possible to function as a hidden button effect.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute at least a second effect, for example, replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image. The effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image can be executed at least every time the chance button 136 is operated in the non-auto button mode, and the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is In the auto button mode, it is a performance that can be executed at least during the operation valid period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect is an effect that is performed for each operation of the operating means (an effect that is performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), and thus the second button is not operated in the non-auto button mode. In some cases, effects that can be executed for each operation can be executed at a timing that does not interfere with the automatic button mode.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode, the decorative pattern display device 208 replaces the display of the button image with the display of another image in association with the operation of the chance button 136. Is at least feasible. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the automatic button mode, so that the player may be given a sense of accomplishment by the button operation.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 to 487 again.

(1-1) In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays ( For example, a game display provided with an effect display area 208d) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects, and at least one of the plurality of kinds of displays. One is a first display (for example, display of a button image), at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image), and Is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, and the second display is a reception regarding the operation of the operating means (for example, pressing the chance button 136). Is displayed at least during the period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period (for example, operation valid period)”), the first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period, and the second display The display of is a display that can be started at least in a second period, the first period is a period including at least a part of the third period, and the second period is the third period. It is a period including at least a part of the period, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first number of the first number (for example, 3), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects. One is a first effect (for example, an effect for notifying the result of a button operation (see FIG. 464 (c))), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, , Pan to the position of the erased button image In the first effect, the number of times the operation means is operated becomes the second number (for example, 2) in the third effect, in which the image appears (see FIG. 463 (o)). If it is at least an executable effect, the first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, the second effect is the first number It is an effect that may be executed by hiding at least a part of the first display (for example, an effect that hides a part of the three button images).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, at least a part of the plurality of button displays is hidden by the second effect, so that it is possible to provide a gaming table having a display means. In addition, the interest of the game may be improved by the appearance of the second effect during the effective period of the button operation. In addition, the second effect may be more prominent than the button display.

  In addition, the above-mentioned "the second effect may be executed by hiding at least a part of the first display which is the first number" is "the second effect is The production that may hide at least a part of the first display of the first display that is the first number "may be" the second production is the first number that is the first number. The effect may be that at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays of one display may be hidden.

  Further, "the second effect is an effect that is always executed by hiding at least a part of the first display that is the first number", or "the second effect is the first effect". Of the first display that is the number of the first display that always hides at least a part of the first display, or "the second display of the first display that is the first number." It is also possible to “make sure to hide at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays”.

(1-2) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operation of the operation unit is accepted.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second effect is an effect that is performed for each button operation. Therefore, by executing the second effect before the first effect, the first effect is achieved. In some cases, it can be expected to produce.

  The second effect is an effect that is executed for each operation of the operation means, but the first display may be hidden in all of the second effects that are performed for each operation. The first display may be hidden only by the second effect that is started by an operation.

  The second effect is an effect that is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a step-up notice, a look-ahead notice, a cut-in notice, a notice such as a public figure effect, the number of winning balls, the number of condominiums, a certain change, etc. Information related to games such as time saving and latent mode) may be used.

  Even when the second effect is executed, there is always an effect that is not hidden (fourth symbol or the like).

  The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the second effect is an effect that can be started after the first display is started.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect that is started after the display of the button display is started, even if the button display is hidden by the second effect, the display of the button display is performed. Since the second effect is started after the start, it may be possible for the player not to miss the button display. The second effect may be an effect that can be started before the display of the first display is started.

(1-3) In the pachinko machine 100, the display unit displays one of the first displays in response to receiving one operation of the operation unit (for example, the first depression of the chance button 136). For example, the display of the left button image) is a means that can be at least erased, and the second effect is one of the other first displays (for example, the display of the central button image) that is being displayed. Is a production that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the above.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it is possible to hide a part of the button display still displayed after the button display is erased. In addition, there are cases where the area where the button display is deleted can be effectively used as the execution area for the second effect.

  The second effect may be a configuration in which the display of a plurality of buttons is erased by receiving one operation of the operation means, or a configuration in which one button display is erased by receiving an operation of a plurality of times. Alternatively, the plurality of button displays may be erased by accepting a plurality of operations.

  The second effect may not hide the first display even if there is a first display that is being displayed even after the first display is erased. For example, the second effect is an effect that causes one of a plurality of types of notices to appear, the first notice can hide the first display, and the second notice can cause the first display to appear. The configuration may not be hidden. Even when the same type of second effect (for example, a third notice) is hidden or not hidden due to a difference in the number of button operations (first operation and second operation), for example. There may be.

  In the pachinko machine 100, in the case where there is no first display in which the second presentation is continued after the first display is erased (according to reception of the operating means) It is an effect that the first display is not hidden.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, if there is no button display after the button display is erased, it may be possible to prevent the button display from being hidden.

(1-4) In the pachinko machine 100, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the second display that is a third number, and the third number is one. Characterize.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player can understand that the common operation effective period is provided by setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations). In some cases, it can be easily notified. The second display may be plural.

(1-5) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect is an effect that may hide at least a part of the second display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the gauge display may be hidden in the second effect, so that the second effect may be more prominent.

  The second effect may be configured to hide at least a part of the second display, only the first display, or only the second display. It may be. When a plurality of second displays are displayed, one of them may be hidden or a plurality of them may be hidden. Further, the second presentation may not hide the second display.

(1-6) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a button display, the second display is a gauge display, the third number is one, and the display means Is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the button displays side by side in the first direction, and the gauge display is a display capable of at least indicating the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge. The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge is reduced in a second direction, and the second direction is the same direction as the first direction.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the direction in which the button display is erased is the same as the direction in which the gauge is reduced. Therefore, even when the second display is hidden by the second effect, the gauge is displayed. In some cases, the rest (the remaining period of the valid period) can be easily informed to the player. The first direction and the second direction may be different directions.

(1-7) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the second number is the same as the first number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the number of button operations required for executing the first effect is given to the player. It may be possible to inform you in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to notify that multiple button operations are required by displaying multiple buttons, and if the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first number is three.

(1-8) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, and at least one of the plurality of modes is a first mode. (For example, the button display mode is “normal”), and at least one of the plurality of modes is the second mode (for example, the button display mode is “vibration”). The aspect is characterized in that it is different from the first aspect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where the button display itself can function as a notice due to the difference in the button display mode.

  When the button display functions as a notice, it is not necessary for all the button effects to have different modes. Moreover, you may provide the 3rd aspect.

(1-9) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is means including at least the display means.

  The rendering means may not include the display means. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(1-10) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect is an effect that is at least unrelated to the operation of the operation means, and the second effect is a notice.

  The notice includes not only a notice about the variable game, but also a prefetch notice (such as an effect including at least a hold icon or an effect regarding the prefetch notice).

(1-11) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is an animation display,

  The second display is an animation display.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes at least movable means in front of the display means, and the second effect hides at least a part of the first display by the operation of the movable means. It is a production that may be executed.

(2-1) In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays ( For example, it is a game table including an effect display area 208d) and an effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing a first effect (for example, an effect for notifying a result of a button operation). At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, Valid period image), the first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, and the second display is an operation (for example, a channel) of the operating means. It is displayed at least during a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period” (for example, operation valid period)) during which the reception of the button 136 is effective, and the first display is at least an animation display (for example, button). Animation), the second display is at least an animation display (for example, a valid period end animation), the first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period, and the second display is The display is a display that can be started at least in a second period, the first period is a period including at least a part of the third period, and the second period is the third period. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first number that is a first number (for example, 3). Is a production that can be executed at least when the number of times the operating device is operated in the third period reaches a second number (for example, 2), and the first number is 2 or more. And the second number is two or more.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the animation display related to the first display can be executed, and the animation display can be performed for the plurality of button displays. Can be provided. In addition, there are cases where the button display can be prompted more by the animation display as compared with the still image display.

(2-2) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, a button erased image), and the third display is an animation display ( For example, a button erasing animation or a valid period image erasing animation), and the third display is a display that can be started at least in association with the operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, and thus the button operation may be prompted in some cases.

  Further, the third display may be a display that is executed without being related to the operation of the operation means.

(2-3) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a display that is at least erasable in association with the operation of the operation unit, and the third display is the first display. It is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as “first erasing animation (for example, button erasing animation)”) that can be executed when the display of is erased.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to notify that the player has pressed the chance button by executing a deletion animation of the button display.

(2-4) In the pachinko machine 100, the effect means is a second effect (for example, an effect in which the button image is changed to the display of the "excellent" image or the display of the "good" image (Fig. 472 (h ))) Can be executed at least, the second effect can be at least started in association with the operation of the operating means, and the second effect is the first effect. Is a presentation that can be started at least after the deletion animation is performed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the button display erasing animation, the second effect may be noticeable in some cases.

  The second effect may be an effect that can be started during the execution of the first erasing animation or before the start of the first erasing animation.

(2-5) In the pachinko machine 100, the second display is a display that is at least erasable in association with the operation of the operation means, and the third display is the second display. It is an erasing animation that can be executed when the display of is erased (hereinafter, referred to as “second erasing animation (for example, effective period image erasing animation)”).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a gauge display erasing animation can be executed.

(2-6) In the pachinko machine 100, the second display is a gauge display (for example, a horizontally long rectangular frame-shaped image), and the gauge display is an animation in which the length of the gauge decreases. By being performed, it is a display that can at least indicate the remaining period of the third period, and the gauge display at least informs that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0. This is a possible display, and the second erasing animation indicates the length of the gauge even if the length of the gauge remains in association with the operation of the operating means during the third period. It is characterized in that it is an animation including at least an animation in which is zero.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by displaying the animation of 0 in the gauge length display, it is possible to easily understand that the gauge operation to be erased or the button operation corresponding to the button display has been accepted. Sometimes you can.

(2-7) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes, and at least one of the plurality of animation modes is, A first animation mode (for example, a big button display), at least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode (for example, a button display mode other than the big button display), and the second The animation mode is different from the first animation mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where the button display itself can function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

(2-8) In the pachinko machine 100, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the second display that is a third number, and the third number is one. Characterize.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player can understand that the common operation effective period is provided by setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations). In some cases, it can be easily notified. The second display may be plural.

(2-9) In the pachinko machine 100, the second number is the same as the first number,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for performing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of button operations required to execute the first effect. It may be possible to notify easily.

  The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to notify that multiple button operations are required by displaying multiple buttons, and if the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first number is three.

(2-10) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is a means including at least the display means.

  The rendering means may not include the display means. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(3-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has at least a plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a direction key 137) provided at a position where the player can operate, and at least a plurality of types of displays. A gaming table provided with displayable display means (for example, effect display area 208d) and effecting means capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the plurality of operations are performed. At least one of the means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136), and at least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a direction key 137). Yes, at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a chance button image display), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays. One is a second display (for example, a display of a direction key image), the first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operation means, and the second display is , A display including at least a display suggesting the second operation means, the first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, a button effect execution period), and Is a display that can be started at least during the first period, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, the button image is erased to display another image). At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of deleting the directional key image and displaying another image), and the first effect. Is operated by the first operating means (for example, The second effect is related to the second operation means being operated (for example, the direction key 137 is pressed). It is a production that can be started at least,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in a correspondence relationship, and the effect order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. We can provide a game console with In addition, it may be possible to select an effect corresponding to the operating means.

  The correspondence between the first display and the first operating means and the correspondence between the second display and the second operating means need not be unique. For example, the first display may correspond to the second operation means, or any operation means is effective regardless of the type of the first display or the second display. May be.

(3-2) In the pachinko machine 100, the first operation means is a means that at least reception of the operation of the first operation means becomes effective during the second period (for example, the operation effective period). Yes, the second operation means is a means for receiving at least the operation regarding the operation of the second operation means at least valid in the second period, and the first period is at least one of the second period. It is a period including a part, the production means is a means capable of starting at least the first production when the first operation means is operated in the second period, and the production means is When the second operation means is operated during the second period, it is a means that can start at least the second effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the operation valid periods of the plurality of operating means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operating means in one operation valid period.

(3-3) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is a means capable of starting the first rendering earlier than the second rendering when the first condition is satisfied, When the second condition is satisfied, the effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect before the first effect, and the first condition is that the second period It is a condition that is satisfied when the first operating means is operated before the second operating means is operated, and the second condition is the first operation during the second period. It is a condition that is satisfied when the second operating means is operated before the means is operated.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effect corresponding to the operation unit operated first is performed first, the player may be able to select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering unit is a unit capable of executing only the first rendering when only the first condition is satisfied in the second period, and the rendering unit is When only the second condition is satisfied in the second period, it is a means capable of executing only the second effect.

  Here, "only the first effect" or "only the second effect" may be only one of the first effect and the second effect. Further, "only the first effect" or "only the second effect" may be only one of the first effect, the second effect, and the following third effect.

(3-4) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means is a means capable of at least executing the first display that is a first number (for example, 2), and the display means is a second Is a means capable of at least executing the second display that is the number (for example, 1), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, an effect of forcibly displaying a decorative symbol). (Refer to FIG. 476)), and the third effect is an effect that can be executed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is that the first operation unit is the first operation unit. The condition is at least satisfied when the second operation means is operated the number of times that is the number of times and the second operation means is operated the number of times that is the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as an effect that appears by a plurality of operations, and since there are a plurality of operation means, the first operation means and the second operation means are necessary. In some cases, it can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operations and the number of displays.

  The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second period ends.

  The third effect may occur due to the expiration of the operation valid period. The third effect may not be performed if the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation valid period.

(3-5) In the pachinko machine 100, the first operation means has a plurality of states (for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.). )) Is at least possible, at least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, the button mode is “normal”), and at least one of the plurality of states is One is a second state (for example, the button mode is “vibration”), the second state is a state different from the first state, and the first display is a plurality of display modes. (Eg, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “deca button display”, etc.), and at least one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode. (For example, “normal”), and among the plurality of display modes At least one is a second display mode (for example, “vibration”), the second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode, and the first display mode is It is a display mode corresponding to at least the first state, and the second display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the second state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations in the states of the buttons and the display manners, depending on the display manner according to the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means may be a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be a direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operating means can be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operating means and the second operating means may have a plurality of states.

  Further, the first display mode may have a configuration corresponding to the second state, and the second display mode may have a configuration corresponding to the first state.

(3-6) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, a display of a valid period image), and the third display is the A display capable of at least indicating a second period, the display means being a means capable of performing at least the third display that is a third number, and the third number is one. Is characterized by.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player can understand that the common operation effective period is provided by setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations). In some cases, it can be easily notified. The third display may be plural.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the sum of the first number and the second number is three.

(3-7) In the pachinko machine 100, the gaming table is a pachinko machine, and the rendering means is means including at least the display means.

  The rendering means may not include the display means. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(4-1) In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays ( For example, a game console provided with an effect display area 208d) and an effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects, and the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is It is valid at least during one effective period (for example, the operation effective period in the button effect), and the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is performed during the second effective period (for example, the operation effective period in the effect by the button holding icon). At least valid, the second valid period is a valid period at least partially different from the first valid period, the plurality of types of At least one of the displays is a first display (for example, a chance button image display), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display (for example, a button hold icon display). ), The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, the display means , A means capable of displaying at least the first display that becomes a first number (for example, three), and the first display is during a first period (for example, during a period of special figure variation game). At least a display that can be started, the second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during the period of special figure variation game), and the first period is the first period. Includes at least part of the validity period The second period is a period that includes at least a part of the second effective period, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, button operation). At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect by a hold icon), and the first effect is the first effect. It is an effect performed at least in relation to display, the second effect is an effect performed at least related to the second display, and the first effect is the effect in the first effective period. When the number of times the operating means is operated becomes a second number (for example, three), it is at least an executable effect, the first number is two or more, and the second number is Two or more, the second period is the first It is a period that may overlap with the period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, and a button display related to another second effect appear, a gaming machine having a display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of button effects. Further, the second period may not overlap with the first period. For example, when the second effect is an effect with a button hold icon, the display timing of the button hold icon (due to the winning timing of the starting winning opening of the game ball) is irregular, so the two periods overlap. In this case, any configuration may be used as long as the above contents are satisfied at a minimum. Note that a third display suggesting the operating means may be further provided.

(4-2) In the pachinko machine 100, the display means can display the first valid period (hereinafter, referred to as "third display (e.g., display of valid period image)".) Is at least a means capable of displaying, and the display means is a means not performing a display capable of suggesting the second valid period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the effective period is displayed in the button effect and the effective period is not displayed in the effect using the button holding icon, the interest of the game may be improved.

In the pachinko machine 100, the second valid period is longer than the first valid period,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effective period without the effective period display is longer than the first effective period with the effective period display, the button operation for the first effect is performed by the effective period display. In some cases.

  Further, the display means may perform a display capable of suggesting the second effective period, or there is one display capable of suggesting the period in both the first effective period and the second effective period. May be. The second valid period may be a shorter valid period than the first valid period. For example, in the example of the button hold icon, when the display of the button hold icon is hold 1 (erased in association with the start of the next symbol variation display), the operation valid period corresponding to the button hold is the first May be shorter than the effective period of.

(4-3) In the pachinko machine 100, a notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure variation game) and a prefetch notice (for example, The advance notice advance means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least an advance notice regarding whether or not the special figure variation game related to the hold is provided, and the advance notice means performs the first effect on the effect means. By making the advance notice at least executable, the prefetch advance notice means is a means capable of at least executing the prefetch advance by causing the effecting means to perform the second effect. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes the notification of the advance notice of the change, and the effect by the button holding icon includes the notification of the prefetch advance notice. Therefore, depending on the combination of the type of the button display and the type of the advance notice. It may be possible to increase the variation of production.

  Further, the first effect may be a look-ahead notice, the second effect may be a notice, both effects may be a notice, and both effects may be a look-ahead notice.

(4-4) In the pachinko machine 100, the hold display means (for example, the special map 1 hold display area) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons (for example, the special map 1 hold icons a1 and a2) is defined. The effect display area 208d) is provided, and the hold display means is a means that can notify at least the hold number related to the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the hold icons to be displayed, and at least one of the plurality of types of hold icons. One is a first hold icon (for example, a button hold icon), and at least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon (for example, a display mode that indicates a predetermined jackpot reliability). The second display is the first hold icon, and the first hold icon is a button hold icon. Ri, the second effect is the effect that at least the effect of changing the said button Hold icon in connection with the operation means is operated to the second hold icons,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effect by the button holding icon includes a pre-reading notice of the holding icon, the holding icon is a display that is erased in association with the start of the symbol variable display, and the second In some cases, the player may be able to recognize the validity period without displaying the validity period.

(4-5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon while the button hold icon is displayed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, since a plurality of button holding icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button effect from becoming too complicated.

  Further, the configuration may be such that a new first hold icon is displayed even during the period in which the first hold icon is displayed.

(4-6) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the second effective period becomes a third number. And the third number is smaller than the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button operations for performing the second effect is less than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

  The third number may be one or two or more. In another presentation, the third number may be larger than the second number.

(4-7) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means performs the second rendering rather than the first rendering when the first valid period and the second valid period overlap. It is characterized in that it is a means that can be executed first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect is prioritized in the button operation when the effective periods overlap, so that the second effect in which the effective period is not suggested is executed first. Thus, it may be possible to prompt a button operation to perform both the second effect and the first effect during the first effective period.

(4-8) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means performs the first rendering rather than the second rendering when the first effective period and the second effective period overlap. It is characterized in that it is a means that can be executed first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first effect is prioritized in the button operation when the effective periods overlap, so that even if the first effective period and the second effective period overlap. In some cases, the button operation can be continued until the other effect is performed by giving priority to the effect.

  Further, in addition to the operation means, it is possible to select whether to execute the first effect first or the second effect first by operating the second operation means (for example, the direction key 137). Good. Further, it may be configured to perform an effect corresponding to the previously generated button effect.

(4-9) In the pachinko machine 100, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the third display that is a fourth number, and the fourth number is one. Characterize.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the player can understand that the common operation effective period is provided by setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (requests for a plurality of button operations). In some cases, it can be easily notified. The second display may be plural.

(4-10) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the second number is the same number as the first number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for performing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of button operations required to execute the first effect. It may be possible to notify easily.

  The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to notify that multiple button operations are required by displaying multiple buttons, and if the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be surely executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first number is three.

(4-11) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering means is a means including at least the display means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the rendering unit may not include the display unit. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(4-12) In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, at least a plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a direction key 137) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of display are at least displayed. A gaming table provided with displayable display means (for example, effect display area 208d) and effecting means capable of executing at least a plurality of kinds of effects (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the game table is A pachinko machine or a slot machine, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display of a chance button image), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is It is a second display (for example, a button hold icon display), and the first display suggests a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136). Is a display including at least a display, the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting a second operation means (for example, a direction key 137), and the display means is a first number (for example, 3) is a means capable of displaying at least the first display, and the first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special figure variation game), The second display is a display that can be started at least during the second period (for example, during the period of the special figure variation game), and during the first period, reception related to the operation of the first operation means is effective. Is a period including at least a part of a period (for example, an operation valid period in the button effect), and the second period is a period during which the reception related to the operation of the second operation unit is valid (for example, the button). With the production by the hold icon It is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period), and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect for notifying a result of a button operation), and At least one of the effects is a second effect (for example, a pre-reading notice effect using a hold icon), and the first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display, and The second effect is an effect that is performed at least in relation to the second display, and the first effect is that the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period is the second. When the number becomes three (for example, three), it is at least an executable effect, the first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is , A period that may overlap with the first period It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, and a button display related to another second effect appear, a gaming machine having a display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, it may be possible to increase the variation of button effects.

(5-1) In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays ( For example, a game display provided with an effect display area 208d), an effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the effect means notifies an effect of the first effect (for example, button operation). ) Is possible at least, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display of a button image including a character string “PUSH”). At least one of the displays is a second display (for example, a button image that does not include the characters "PUSH" or a non-display of the button image), and the first display is the first display. Of the mode (for example, non-auto button mode), the second display is at least a display corresponding to the second mode (for example, auto button mode), and the first mode and Is a mode in which the operating means is not automatically operated, and the second mode is a mode in which the operating means is automatically operated, and the first The display is a display that can be started at least during the first period (for example, the execution period of the special figure variation game), and the second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period. One display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, and the first period is a period during which reception of the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, “third period (for example, operation Effective period) ”), and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first number of the first number (for example, 3). Is a production that can be executed at least when the number of times the operating device is operated in the third period reaches a second number (for example, 2), and the first number is 2 or more. And the second number is two or more, and the second display is a display that is at least partially different from the first display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the display of the button effect is different between the automatic button mode and the non-automatic button mode, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a display means. Further, the mode may be easily recognized depending on the difference between the first display and the second display.

  Moreover, you may provide separately the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports whether it is a 1st mode or a 2nd mode. Further, the second display may be omitted (no display may be the second display).

(5-2) The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a decorative symbol display means (for example, an effect display area 208d) capable of performing at least decorative symbol variable display, and the decorative symbol display means is the first decorative symbol variation. Display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c) is a means that can be executed at least, and the first display is the first decorative symbol variation in the first mode. It is a display that can be started at least in the first period of display, and the second display is a display that can be started at least in the first period of the first decorative symbol variable display in the second mode. There is a feature.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the button operation is necessary by clarifying the portion where the display is different depending on the mode in the same type of decorative pattern variable display. .

In the pachinko machine 100, a notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure variation game, a notice of whether or not to develop into SP reach). The first display is a display that is at least a part of the advance notice, the second display is a display that is at least a part of the advance notice, and the first display is the first Is a display that may not be started in the first period in the decorative pattern variable display, the second display is a display that may not be started in the first period in the first decorative pattern variable display There is a feature.
The pachinko machine 100,

  The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of at least executing a second decorative symbol variable display (for example, variable display of another decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c), and the first display Is a display that can be started at least in the second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the first mode (for example, the execution period of another special symbol variation game), and the second display is It is a display that can be started at least during the second period of the second decorative pattern variable display in the second mode.

  By doing so, the button effect can be executed even in another decorative pattern variable display.

(5-3) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period (for example, a display of an operation period image), and the second display. The display is a display that does not include at least a display capable of suggesting the third period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the valid period is not displayed in the auto button mode. In the automatic button mode, since the buttons are automatically operated, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentification by the player (misidentification that button operation is required). .

(5-4) In the pachinko machine 100, the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means, and the display means is a third number (for example, 0). It is a means capable of displaying at least the second display, and the third number is a number smaller than the first number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of buttons displayed in the non-auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the third number is one.

  Since there is only one button display in the auto button mode, it may be possible to make the player recognize that the button display was performed in the non-auto button mode while reducing the number of button displays.

  The number of buttons displayed in the auto button mode may be greater than the first number or may be the same. Further, button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if the manual button operation is enabled, it may be possible to function as a hidden button effect.

(5-5) In the pachinko machine 100, the rendering unit is a unit capable of performing at least a second rendering (for example, rendering the display of a button image with another image) and the second rendering. The effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operating means is operated in the first mode, and the second effect can be executed at least in the third period in the second mode. Is,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect is an effect that is performed for each operation of the operating means (an effect that is performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), and thus the second button is not operated in the non-auto button mode. In some cases, effects that can be executed for each operation can be executed at a timing that does not interfere with the automatic button mode.

(5-6) In the pachinko machine 100, the effect means is related to the operation means being operated when the operation means is operated in the third period in the second mode. Then, it is a means capable of at least executing the second effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the automatic button mode, so that the player may be given a sense of accomplishment by the button operation.

(5-7) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the rendering means is a means including at least the display means.

  The rendering means may not include the display means. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

  Further, the setting of the auto button mode can be set by operating the direction keys 137, the chance button 136, or the like while the demo screen in the non-gaming state is displayed. Further, the cancellation of the automatic button mode can be canceled similarly to the above setting, or can be canceled by the button operation in the automatic button mode. In the latter case, the release may be possible only during the effect, or the non-auto button mode may be continued thereafter.

  The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first number is three.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. For example, in the first embodiment, the order is such that the second effect is executed after the button operation is received, and the next second effect is executed after the next button operation is received. The next button operation may be performed when the second effect occurs.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the aspect in which the effect or the display is not performed when the effect or the display may be performed is interpreted as the effect or the display of "no effect" or "no display" is executed. To do.

  Further, the valid period of the button operation in the above-described embodiment is an example, and when the button effect appears at another occasion, the individual valid period of operation is naturally set. As the button effect, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of buttons, and at another occasion, one button operation may be performed, or one button operation may be performed despite a plurality of operations being required. The button display and the single gauge display may be executed in some cases. Further, even button effects that are performed at the same timing and trigger may be performed by a combination of these. By doing so, the number of button displays and gauge displays may be able to function as a notice.

  Even when a plurality of button displays are displayed at the same time, at least a part of the operation valid period may be different from each other. As an example, at least one of the displayed button displays may be configured to start display during a period other than the operation valid period. For example, it may be possible to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform the button operation a plurality of times by displaying the button display before the operation valid period.

  The button display is the same in that one of the multiple button displays is different from the other, but, for example, one side (the button display related to the most recent button operation) is illuminated by an effect and the other button display is dark. A mode in which the buttons are displayed (relatively dark) is included in one of the plurality of button displays different from the others.

  The contents described in relation to the button display may be appropriately applied to the gauge display as long as there is no hindrance, and the contents described in relation to the gauge display may be appropriately displayed in the button display as long as there is no hindrance. You may apply. The various effects are configured to be started in association with button operation, but may be configured to be started under other conditions. For example, the start time of the effect may be determined in advance in time, and no button operation may be performed during that time, or may be performed by an operation of an operation means different from the button.

  The operation unit is not limited to the button, and a touch sensor type operation unit, a liquid crystal touch panel, a lever type operation unit, a proximity sensor operation unit, or the like can be appropriately used.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, but when the number of button operations for which the first effect is performed is reached, the second effect and the first effect are performed. Both of the effects may be executed, or only the first effect may be performed.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of operating means are provided and the button effect is performed using the plurality of operating means. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which one of a plurality of options is selected on the touch panel and an operation for confirming the selected one is performed by the effect button.

  The effect corresponding to the button operation may be configured to be executed at another opportunity where the button operation is not performed (for example, a completely different opportunity different from the timing when the operation effective period expires automatically).

  The first effect that appears by a plurality of button operations may appear before the plurality of operations are performed. In this case, before a plurality of operations are performed, for example, when the number of button operations is less than the prescribed number of operations, or when the valid period ends before the prescribed number of button operations are performed. To do.

  The second effect performed for each button operation may be an effect in which one display changes for each button operation. For example, the character A may appear by the first button operation, and the character A may be enlarged or the color may be changed by the second and subsequent button operations, or the character A can be trusted by the second and subsequent operations. The composition may be changed to another character B or character C having a high frequency.

  The combination of the result of the second effect performed for each button operation and the result of the first effect performed thereafter may be related. For example, the configuration may be such that the SP reach is developed, a big hit is announced, or the like, based on the combination of the second effect results.

  Further, the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. It is possible to combine the matters described in the detailed description above and thereafter, particularly the matters described in the embodiments and the modified examples.

  The gaming table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Supplementary Note B1) A game table provided with operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of display, and performance means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the first display is , The display including at least a display indicating the operation means, and the second display is displayed at least during a period during which the reception of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”). The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period, the second display is a display that can be started at least in a second period, and the first period is the first A few periods It is a period including at least a part, the second period is a period including at least a part of the third period, and the display means at least the first display that is a first number. A displayable means, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect. The effect of is at least an effect that can be executed when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number, the first number is two or more, The number of two is two or more, and the second effect is an effect that may be executed by hiding at least a part of the first display that is the first number. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note B2) The game machine according to supplementary note B1, wherein the second effect is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operation of the operation means is accepted.

(Supplementary Note B3) The game machine according to Supplementary Note B1 or 2, wherein the display means is a means capable of erasing at least one of the first displays in response to reception of a single operation of the operating means. The gaming table characterized in that the second effect is an effect that may be executed by hiding at least a part of the other first display that is being continued to be displayed.

(Supplementary note B4) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display that is a third number, The game table is characterized by the fact that there is only one.

(Supplementary note B5) The gaming machine according to supplementary note B4, wherein the second effect is an effect in which at least a part of the second display may be hidden.

(Supplementary Note B6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4 or B5, wherein the first display is a button display, the second display is a gauge display, and the third number is one. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the button displays arranged in a first direction, and the gauge display has at least a remaining period of the third period due to a reduction in gauge length. It is a display that can be suggested, the gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge is reduced in a second direction, the second direction is the same direction as the first direction, A gaming table.

(Supplementary note B7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B6, wherein the second number is the same number as the first number.

(Supplementary Note B8) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, wherein the first number is three.

(Supplementary note B9) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B8, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, At least one of them is the first mode, at least one of the plurality of modes is the second mode, and the second mode is a mode different from the first mode. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note B10) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B9, wherein the effect production means is means including at least the display means.

(Supplementary note B11) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B10, wherein the second effect is an effect that is at least unrelated to the operation of the operation means, and the second effect is a notice. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note B12) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B11, wherein the first display is an animation display and the second display is an animation display. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note B13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary note B14) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B12, wherein the game table is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note C1) A game provided with at least an operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a production means capable of at least executing the first effect. A platform, at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display, the first display Is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, and the second display is at least displayed during a period during which reception of the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”). The first display is at least an animation display, the second display is at least an animation display, and the first display is at least a display that can be started in the first period. Yes, the second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period, the first period is a period including at least a portion of the third period, the second period is A period including at least a part of the third period, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the first number of the first number, and the first effect is the It is an effect that can be executed at least when the number of times the operating means is operated in the third period becomes the second number, the first number is two or more, and the second number is two. That's all for the above-mentioned gaming machines.

(Supplementary Note C2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is an animation display. The display of is a display which can be started at least in connection with the operation of the operation means, and the game table.

(Supplementary Note C3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C2, wherein the first display is at least erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means, and the third display is the A gaming table, which is an erasing animation that can be executed when the first display is erased (hereinafter referred to as "first erasing animation").

(Supplementary Note C4) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C3, wherein the effect means is means capable of at least executing the second effect, and the second effect is related to the operation of the operation means. And at least an effect that can be started, and the second effect is an effect that can be started at least after the first erasing animation is performed.

(Supplementary Note C5) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C2 to C4, wherein the second display is at least an erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means, The gaming table, wherein the third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as "second erasing animation") that can be executed when the second display is erased.

(Supplementary Note C6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C5, wherein the second display is a gauge display, and the gauge display is an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced, thereby performing the third period. Is a display capable of at least indicating the remaining period of time, and the gauge display is a display capable of at least informing that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0. The deletion animation includes at least an animation in which the length of the gauge becomes 0 even when the length of the gauge remains in association with the operation of the operation means in the third period. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary Note C7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C6, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes, and the plurality of animations. At least one of the modes is a first animation mode, at least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode, and the second animation mode is the first animation mode. A game machine characterized by an animation mode different from the animation mode.

(Supplementary Note C8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C7, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display that is a third number, The game table is characterized by the fact that there is only one.

(Supplementary Note C9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C8, wherein the second number is the same number as the first number.

(Supplementary Note C10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C9, wherein the first number is three.

(Supplementary Note C11) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C10, wherein the rendering means is means including at least the display means.

(Supplementary Note C12) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note C13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note D1) A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position operable by the player, a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a production means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects are provided. At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means, and at least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means. At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the first display is the first display It is a display including at least a display suggesting an operating means, the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operating means, and the first display is at least a first period. Is a display that can be started, The second display is a display that can be started at least in the first period, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects. One is a second effect, the first effect is an effect that can be started at least in association with the operation of the first operation means, and the second effect is the first effect. A game stand characterized in that it is an effect that can be started at least in connection with the operation of the second operation means.

(Supplementary Note D2) The game machine according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein the first operating means is means for enabling at least reception of operation of the first operating means during the second period, The operating means of is a means for accepting at least reception of the operation of the second operating means during the second period, and the first period is a period including at least a part of the second period. Yes, the production means is a means that can start at least the first production when the first operation means is operated in the second period, and the production means is the second period. When the second operation means is operated, the game table is a means capable of at least starting the second effect.

(Supplementary note D3) The game machine according to supplementary note D2, wherein the effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect earlier than the second effect when the first condition is satisfied. Yes, the effect means is a means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect when the second condition is satisfied, and the first condition is the second condition. It is a condition that is satisfied when the first operating means is operated before the second operating means is operated during the period, and the second condition is the first condition during the second period. A game table characterized in that the condition is met when the second operation means is operated before the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary note D4) The game machine according to Supplementary note D2 or D3, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least executing the first display that is a first number, and the display means is a second one. Is a means capable of at least executing the second display, which is a number, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, and the third effect satisfies the third condition. Is at least an executable effect, and the third condition is that the first operating means is operated a number of times that is the first number, and the second operating means is the second number. A game table characterized in that it is a condition that is satisfied at least when it is operated a number of times.

(Supplementary Note D5) The game machine according to Supplementary Note D4, wherein the first operation means is at least capable of taking a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a first state. One state, at least one of the plurality of states is a second state, the second state is a state different from the first state, the first display, At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode, and at least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode. It is a display mode, the second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode, the first display mode is a display mode corresponding to at least the first state, The second display mode is at least in the second state. Is a display mode to respond, amusement machine, characterized in that.

(Supplementary note D6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary note D4 or D5, wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display indicates the second period. At least a display that can be suggested, and the display means is a means that can execute at least the third display that is a third number, and the third number is one. Stand.

(Supplementary note D7) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes D4 to D6, wherein the sum of the first number and the second number is three.

(Supplementary note D8) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D7, wherein the effect means is a means including at least the display means.

(Supplementary note D9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary note D10) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D8, wherein the game table is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note E1) A game table provided with an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a performance means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. And, the reception regarding the operation of the operating means is at least valid during the first valid period, and the reception regarding the operation of the operating means is at least valid during the second valid period, and the second valid period. Is a validity period at least partially different from the first validity period, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, at least one of the plurality of types of display Is a second display, the first display is a display including at least a display indicating the operating means, and the second display is a display indicating the operating means. It is a display including at least, the display means is a means that can display at least the first display that is a first number, and the first display is a display that can be started at least in the first period. Yes, the second display is a display that can be started at least in the second period, the first period is a period including at least a portion of the first valid period, the second period Is a period including at least a part of the second effective period, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is , A second effect, the first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display, and the second effect is performed at least in association with the second display. It is an effect, and the first effect is the first effective When the number of times the operating means is operated between the second number is a second number, it is at least executable performance, the first number is two or more, the second number is two or more. There is, and the said 2nd period is a period which may overlap with the said 1st period, The gaming table characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Supplementary note E2) The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display") capable of suggesting the first valid period. There is, and the display means is a means that does not perform a display capable of suggesting the second effective period.

(Supplementary note E3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or E2, comprising a notice device capable of executing at least a notice and a look-ahead notice device capable of performing at least a look-ahead notice. Is a means capable of at least executing the advance notice by causing the first effect to be performed, and the prefetching advance notice means is capable of performing at least the prefetching advance notice by causing the effector to perform the second effect. A game table characterized by being means.

(Supplementary note E4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3, including a suspending display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of suspending icons, wherein the suspending display means displays the suspending icons to be displayed. It is a means capable of at least informing the number of holdings related to the execution of the symbol variable display by the number, at least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon, among the plurality of types of holding icons At least one is a second hold icon, the second display is the first hold icon, the first hold icon is a button hold icon, the second effect, It is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in association with the operation of the operation means. Gaming table that.

(Supplementary Note E5) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E4, wherein the hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed. Game table.

(Supplementary note E6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E5, wherein in the second effect, the number of times the operation means is operated in the second effective period is a third number. A gaming table characterized in that it is at least a viable production when it becomes, and the third number is a number smaller than the second number.

(Supplementary note E7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E6, wherein the effect means is the first effective period when the first effective period and the second effective period overlap. A game machine characterized in that it is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the effect.

(Supplementary note E8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E7, wherein the effect means is the second effective term when the first valid term and the second valid term overlap. A game table, which is a means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the effect.

(Supplementary note E9) The gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display that is a fourth number, and the fourth number is one. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note E10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E9, wherein the second number is the same number as the first number.

(Supplementary note E11) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E10, wherein the first number is three.

(Supplementary note E12) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E11, wherein the effect production means is means including at least the display means.

(Supplementary note E13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary note E14) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note E15) A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a performance means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays. One is a second display, the first display is a display including at least a display suggesting a first operating means, the second display is a display suggesting a second operating means. It is a display including at least, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display that is a first number, and the first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period. , The above Is a display that can be started at least in a second period, the first period is a period including at least a part of the period during which the reception of the operation of the first operating means is effective, The second period is a period including at least a part of the period during which the reception related to the operation of the second operation means is valid, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect. , At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, the first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the first display, the second effect is When the number of times the first operating means is operated in the first period is a second number, the first effect is an effect performed at least in association with the second display. Is at least a viable production, The number of one is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is a period that may overlap with the first period, the gaming machine. .

(Supplementary Note F1) A game table provided with an operation means provided at least at a position where a player can operate, a display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and a rendering means, wherein the rendering means is , At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display. Display, the first display is a display corresponding to at least a first mode, the second display is a display corresponding to at least a second mode, the first mode, The operation means is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated, the second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated, the first display is , At least in the first period A display that can be started, the second display is a display that can be started at least in the first period, the first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operating means, The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception of the operation of the operating device is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”), and the display device displays the first number and Which is a means that can display at least the first display, and the first effect can be executed at least when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number. It is a performance, the first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, the second display is a display at least partly different from the first display, A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note F2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, comprising decorative symbol display means capable of performing at least decorative symbol variable display, wherein the decorative symbol display means can perform at least the first decorative symbol variable display. The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variable display in the first mode, and the second display is the second display. In the mode, it is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variable display, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note F3) The game machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period, and the second display is the first display. A gaming machine characterized by being a display which does not include at least a display capable of suggesting the three periods.

(Supplementary note F4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the second display is a display including at least a display indicating the operation means, and the display means is a third Is a means capable of displaying at least the second display and the third number is a number smaller than the first number,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note F5) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F4, wherein the effect means is a means capable of at least executing the second effect, and the second effect is the first effect. In each mode, it is an effect that can be executed at least every time the operation means is operated, and the second effect is an effect that can be executed at least in the third period in the second mode. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note F6) The game machine according to supplementary note F5, wherein the effecting means operates the operating means when the operating means is operated during the third period in the second mode. A gaming table, which is a means capable of at least executing the second effect in relation to.

(Supplementary note F7) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F6, wherein the effect production means is means including at least the display means.

(Supplementary Note F8) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F7, wherein the first number is three.

(Supplementary Note F9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note F10) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F8, wherein the game console is a slot machine.
[Ninth Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a game table according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 488 to 517 are basically used only in the description of the ninth embodiment, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment will be described. In the description, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 488 to 517 have priority.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 488. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened / closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) in a region below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launch device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. A ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and to the launcher 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a cha that gives a change to the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 488) by the operation of the player. Button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like to be performed by the operation of a setter (for example, a player, a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) Ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit ( (Not shown). Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push-button switch that can be pressed by a setting person, and includes a confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, a lower button located below the confirm button, and a confirm button. A right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button are provided. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the effect devices 206 (see FIG. 490) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 489 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 488 seen from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, having an opening opening upward at the upper rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 491). The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing of the whole game, and an effect based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub that accommodates a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs a control process and that includes a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game shop clerk. A board case 162, a second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 that performs control processing related to performance based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400, An error release switch that configures a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and that cancels an error by the operation of a game store clerk A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 68, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power supply for various electric gaming devices. And a RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub-board 160, the second sub-board 164, etc. are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. It is provided on the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 490 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 at substantially the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and a left path on the left side of the rendering device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), a variable winning a prize port 234, 235 (open state), etc. The easiness of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235, these ordinary symbol starting port 229, the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball that drops on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the presence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, etc., the game is dropped on the left side path. It is relatively easy to enter the ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handing machine is used as an example, but a machine other than a right-handing machine may be used.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the respective display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 490, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 490, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (two in total) is provided, but the first special symbol and the second symbol. Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both special symbols may be provided. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  At the bottom of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 , A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The toku-zu 1 display device 212 and the toku-zu 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the toku-zu, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The general-figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-figure fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in this embodiment, the special figure variation games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, 229, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, a variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize ball”) and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “rental ball”). May be included) and.

  The universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 are constituted by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the form, one universal figure starting port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one universal figure starting port 229 is arranged on the right side path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 or the universal figure starting port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 1 variation game") is started. Note that the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure 2 variation game") is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one of them is installed. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member is closed. When the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol and wins the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls that enter the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches the launch rod. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed through by the 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, variable winning holes 234, 235) and Out by simply winning at the starting opening (Special Drawing 1 starting opening 230, Special Drawing 2 starting opening 232), without winning at any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through Universal Drawing starting openings 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and the front stage 244 are arranged in the rolling area of the game ball, and the rendering movable body 224 is placed in the rolling area of the gaming ball. It is arranged. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200, and the passing ball is located at the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball is provided.

  The production movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The production movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that it can move in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, A counter timer 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high level). The driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the confirmation lamp 222, etc., and various kinds of opening / closing driving of a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 or a door member of the variable winning ports 234, 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 491) for adjusting the volume to be output, an operation unit sensor (not shown) that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 which outputs to the basic circuit 402 and the ROM 406 which is stored based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a gaming circuit lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming underframe lamp driving for controlling the gaming underframe lamp 542. The circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIGS. 492 (a) to (d), the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed in a stopped state. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. 492 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and FIG. 492 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. The special figure 1 variation game is started under the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are all lit and one central segment is repeatedly lit. . These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". A series of displays until the above is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 492 (a), seven types of special symbols “Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special symbol 1. In FIG. 492 (a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special drawing A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, “Special drawing B” is a 7R special jackpot design, and “Special drawing C” is a 7R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot and the number of rounds is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the special figure change game after the end of the jackpot game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game is over, after the 7R special jackpot game is over, and after the 7R jackpot game is over, both shift to a time saving state (electric power support state). Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special drawing A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "special drawing B" are the symbols that become the special symbol high probability general symbol high probability state after the jackpot game, and are the 7R jackpot symbols. “Special map C” is a symbol that becomes a special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B" and "special drawing C" are symbols in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  “Special drawing D” is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, “Special drawing D” is 2R, as compared with “Special drawing A” which is 15R and “Special drawing B” which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot pattern called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "Special map E" is stopped and displayed in the special map low probability general figure low probability state, the special map high probability general figure low probability state (so-called after the jackpot game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. When the special figure low probability probability state is displayed and "Special figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability normal state is reached after the jackpot game (opening time 29000 ms x 2R) ends. The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 498 (a) and 498). That is, "special map E" is a game state when the game is stopped and displayed (in this example, whether or not it is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state) It is a different design.

  "Special map F" is a small hit symbol, and is in a special map low probability general pattern low probability state. In addition, "special figure G" is a deviating symbol, which is a symbol having a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 492 (b), four types of special drawings, “special drawing a” to “special drawing d”, are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 2. The "special drawing a" is a 15R special jackpot design, the "special drawing b" is a 7R special jackpot design, the "special drawing c" is a 7R jackpot design, and the "special drawing d" is a falling design. In the present embodiment, 7 types of special drawings (5 types of which are big hits) are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 while special figure 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four kinds of special drawings “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” (of which three kinds are big hits) are used. With such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in advantage between the special figures 1 and 2 without changing the probability of a big hit and the probability of a probability change of the big hit. In this example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that rarely yield balls, whereas the big hit in Toku-zu 2 does not include sudden probability changes or latent probability changes. The advantage of Toku-zu 2 is higher than that of Toku-zu 1.

  FIG. 492 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The "decoration 1" to "decoration 9" and "decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... → "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  And 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing B", 7R jackpot of "Special drawing C", 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", 7R special jackpot of "Special drawing b" , In the case of notifying the 7R big hit of "special drawing c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-" Decoration 2-decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. In order to explicitly notify the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing a", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns is lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3- "Decorative 3" and "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7") are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called “special figure E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special figure F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a sudden 2R big hit of "special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the deviation of “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 492 (c) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 492 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" and "Public figure B" which are hit symbols, and "Public figure C" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the universal figure starting port 229, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments turned on and one in the center. Repeatedly illuminate the segment of "Public variable display". And, in case of notifying the winning of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure A" or "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of notifying the failure of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 492 (d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 493. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Operation permission, initial value setting, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1 to the sub control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is all added to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the calculated checksum result has a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 ( In step S233), the information is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value updating process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the universal figure winning random number value, the universal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are generated. The four initial value generating random number counters, the two random number counters for generating the normal figure fluctuation time determining random number value, and the special figure changing time determining random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and is acquired. The value is added to 1 and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value updating process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in this example, about every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 after step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). Specifically (in this example, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous-previous-time detection signal, there is a previous-time detection signal, and there is a present-time detection signal). (The information indicating that), it is a general winning a prize port 226, a variable winning a prize port 234, 235, a special figure 1 starting port 230, and a special figure 2 starting port 232, or a universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there is a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no detection signal for the previous time, and no detection signal for the present time). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing is performed, and in subsequent step S209, basic random number update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the general control unit 300 then uses the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to.

  For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, a random number counter for generating the universal figure random number value, special figure 1 random number value generating The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for generating a random number and the random number counter for generating a special figure 2 random number has completed one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for obtaining the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying / stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the number storage area is read, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls storage area.

  In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a prize winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the universal figure starting openings 228, 229, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special value 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special value 1 special value random number counter for random number generation is provided in the RAM 308. One random number value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased every time the number of special figure 1 holding decreases by one. At the same time, the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 1 reserved increases by one, a new special map 1 is added to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. The data of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value are written.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by subjecting the value stored in the value storage register to predetermined processing is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of special figure 2 winning random number values and special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the special figure 2 reservation number is reduced by one, the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number having the highest reservation order is deleted, and the remaining data is deleted. The processing is performed so that the pending order of the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value moves up by one. In addition, each time the number of special map 2 held increases by one, a new special map 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest holding order. And the data of the special figure 2 random number set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 starting information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 or universal figure starting port 229, and if the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the universal figure winning random number generation random number counter It is acquired as a winning random number value, and the universal figure random number value is acquired from the universal figure random number generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the universal figure random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The same number of sets of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value in the universal figure random number storage area are stored as the same as the number of reserved universal figure numbers stored in the universal figure hold number storage area. In the universal figure random number storage area, each time the number of pending figure numbers decreases by one, the data of the universal figure winning random number value and universal figure random number value with the highest (first) holding order is erased and the remaining The data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value are processed so that the holding order of the data is incremented by one. In addition, as the number of reserved universal figures increases by one, a new universal figure winning random number value and a new universal figure winning random number value are added to the next pending order of the data of the universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number value with the lowest (last) pending order. The data of a set of random numbers for general use is written. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. When there is a winning in the variable winning port 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED configuring the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  In addition, in the ordinary figure state update processing at the timing when the ordinary figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the winning symbol The seven-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so that the general-purpose display device 210 has a display mode. Lighting / light-out driving control of the seven-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By carrying out this control, the public figure display device 210 is either a winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A or the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 492 (d)) or a deviating symbol (the ordinary symbol C shown in FIG. 492 (d)). The symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is set to the solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the open state 232a is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member of the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of order, the universal figure per-match flag is turned off. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the general figure variation game and special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of public figure variation games that are held. Is set to 1 or more as the start condition, the first universal figure winning random number value and the universal figure random number set in the universal figure random value storage area are used for execution.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the universal figure starting information (a pair of a universal figure winning random number value and a universal figure random number value) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the universal figure random number storage area, Based on the universal figure winning random number value in the acquired universal figure start information, the value of the universal figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like, a table for determining a win or failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 496 (a) and (b) described later). Refer to) to determine whether to hit or not (judgment). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general figure random number value in the acquired general figure starting information and the determined result of hit / miss, etc., the general figure determination table (shown in FIG. 496 (c)) stored in the ROM 306. (See the time operation table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the general figure. Next, the main control unit 300, for example, based on the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, and the like, various tables stored in the ROM 306 (for example, timer number selection (not shown)). The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the general figure is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, deletes the earliest universal figure starting information from the universal figure random number storage area, and stores the number of retained universal figure numbers. Subtract the number of reserved universal maps in the area by 1. At this time, the universal figure starting information extracted from the universal figure random number storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the universal figure starting information stored in this temporary area. Good.

  The main control unit 300 turns on the universal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 when the win / no determination result is a win (win), and sets the universal figure hit flag off when the win is not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinction drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on In FIG. 492 (b), the special map a, the 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off. The special figure c and the special flag d are turned on when the off flag is turned on so that the 7 segment LED configuring the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off, and the special area is set in the RAM 308. FIG. 2 A setting indicating that the stop display is being performed is made. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability changes stored in the probability change storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability changes, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag Turn off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 is detected) Solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 (a part of various solenoids 332) And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the open state, and sets information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Toku-zu, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Toku-zu 1), and ended. In the special figure 2 state update process started at a timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is to be ended is waited for. In order to set the setting, information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric Chu extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start opening 232 until the game ball enters There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number storage unit (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of this big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. However, in this example, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, so the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update processing started at different timings is different from the special figure 2 state update processing. In the special figure 1 state update processing started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A and 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. 492 (a) are on, When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure E, and the small hit flag is on In the special area F, the 7-segment LED forming the special figure 1 display device 212 is turned on / off to control the special area G in the special area G when the off flag is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 2 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, when the number of special game 2 variable game holding is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game holding are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is played prior to the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 The jackpot determination table (see FIGS. 497 (a) to (d) described later) stored in the table is set as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is determined (whether it is true or false). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result, etc., the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 498 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 499 (a), the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the start opening is started. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update The special process and the special figure-related lottery process may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or may be configured to display a plurality of special lottery results in one area. In addition, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a prize production start command, an end production start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a prefetch result information command , Etc.), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as the command type, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command relating to a universal figure are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a special figure design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability change flags, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the value of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability change flags, etc. In the case of the start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. is included. I try to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning ports 234, 235. It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, the command data is information indicating the type of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Included in.

  If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the ordinary figure, the command data includes values such as the ordinary figure hit flag, the ordinary figure out-of-position flag, the ordinary figure probability variation flag, and the general figure related lottery process. Including the information on the determined stop symbol and the fluctuation time, and in the case of the design fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the general figure, information indicating the value of the general figure hit flag, the general figure deviation flag, the general figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stores values of various types of big hit flag, small hit flag, out-of-match flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc., special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figure The information showing the timer number selected in FIG. 2 related lottery processing, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize ports 234, 235, and the general figure display device 210, special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 493. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 493.

  FIG. 495 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-judgment result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section (see FIGS. 495 (b) to 495 (d)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are special figures. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number stored area. The comparison is performed with the number of prefetches in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of special figure 2 has increased when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and when the number of special figure 2 reservations is equal to the number of special figure 2 prefetches. It is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. It is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit timer allocation is ended. The process returns to the prize receiving process (step S217) of the included process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the power support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetching notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (group of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning / judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIGS. 495 (b) to 495 (d) exemplify a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 495 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 495 (b), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 495 (b), "special figure G" (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 1", and "special figure G" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 2". "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing F" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 495 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 495 (c), the special-reading 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 495 (c), the storage area “holding 1” stores “special drawing d” (disappearance) as stop design information, and the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4” have stop designs. No information is stored. Note that, in FIG. 495 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 495 (d) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 495 (d), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the judgment result and the variation timer number (variation time) are pre-determined and those The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 496 to 499 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 496 (a) and 496 (b) show an example of a win / loss determination table used in the win / loss determination in the universal figure related lottery process (step S223). 496 (a), (b) the judgment table for judgment is constituted by each item of "universal figure probability", "random number range", "acceptance result". The item of “universal figure probability” indicates a general figure probability (low probability of general figure or high probability of general figure) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired universal figure winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the universal figure winning random number value of this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  The hit-or-miss determination table shown in FIG. 496 (a) is a hit-or-miss determination table for a universal figure that is used when the probability of the figure ratio at the time of the hit-or-miss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 496 (a), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of failure is 99/100.

  The hit-or-miss determination table shown in FIG. 496 (b) is a hit-or-miss determination table for a general figure that is used when the probability of the figure at the time of the hit or miss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 496 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 496 (a), the probability of winning is 100 times. In this way, in the universal figure high probability state (during time saving operation), only the hit may be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be set to be higher than 0% at the time saving operation, but the probability that the hit is selected is made higher at the time saving operation than at the time saving non-operation (normal probability low state).

  FIG. 496 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hitting operation for a general figure. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the universal figure random number value when determining the stop symbol in the universal symbol related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, for each symbol) (Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 496 (c), the distribution rate of each hit symbol in the case where the hit determination result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a win is 50% for the universal figure A and 50% for the universal figure B. Universal drawings A and B are symbols in which the electric Chu opening operation is executed after the universal character variation game. In addition, since there is only one disengagement pattern in the general drawing C when the hit determination result is out, the general drawing C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of disagreement. When the universal figure C is selected, the electric charge opening operation is not executed after the universal figure variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 496 (c), after the universal figure A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electricity chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is not in time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000-10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing A is the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and again opened for 1800 ms, then, It is closed only for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 496 (c), after the universal figure B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting opening (electric power tube) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is not in the time saving operation, the blade member 232a of the power tube 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display of the general drawing B is the time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for 1450 ms, and again. It is closed for about 2000 ms and opened again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 497 (a) to (d) show an example of a win / loss determination table used when the win / loss determination is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The win / loss determination tables shown in FIGS. 497 (a) to 497 (a) to (d) include respective items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “win / fall determination result”. The item of “special map probability” indicates a special map probability (low probability of special map or high probability of special map) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical value range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are both 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (a) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 497 (a), when this hit determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (b) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 497 (b), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (a), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (c) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is low. As shown in FIG. 497 (c), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

  The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (d) is a win / loss determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of win / loss determination is high. As shown in FIG. 497 (d), when this hit / miss determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this win / loss determination table with the win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 497 (c), the jackpot probability is about 10 times.

  FIG. 498 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the random number value of Special Figure 1 when determining the stopped symbol in the Special Figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 498 (a), the distribution ratio of each jackpot symbol in the case where the winning / discarding judgment result of the special game 1 variation game is a big hit is 30% in the special map A (15R special big hit), and the special map B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special chart E (latent probability change big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E except for special drawing C are symbols in which the positive change operates after the jackpot game is over. The ratio of the probability variation big hit (special features A, B, D, E) in the big hit in the special game 1 variation game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special figures A, B, D are game states (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, general figure high probability (time saving operation), general figure low probability (time saving non-operation) at the time of judgment of judgment (when symbol stop is displayed) Regardless of the time)), it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special drawing C, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving frequency 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time saving works after the big hit game ends only when the game state at the time of the hit determination is the special figure high probability state or the general figure high probability state. That is, when the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the time saving does not operate after the jackpot game ends. For example, if special map E is displayed as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability general figure low probability state in succession multiple times, the time saving does not work after the first stop display (special figure high probability general figure (It becomes a low probability state), but after the second stop display or later, the time saving works (it becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Special figure 1 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 90% in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one small hit symbol and one missing symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, if the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is a small hit, the special map F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special diagram 1 random number value, and the special game 1 variation game win / loss determination result is If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and out-of-match symbols may be provided like the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using the random number value of Toku-zu.

  FIG. 498 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of Toku-zu 1. As shown in FIG. 498 (b), in the big hit game after the special map A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special map B or the special map C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special map D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened. Is performed for 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this jackpot game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the jackpot game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special map F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special map E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 499 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is a distribution rate of random number ranges for each symbol (that is, each distribution ratio) which is compared with the random number of Special Figure 2 when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 499 (a), the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol in the case where the winning / discarding judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability variation operates after the jackpot game is over. Proportion of probability variation big hit (special figure a and b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation game big hit, namely, probability variation probability is 75% which is the same as the probability variation probability of special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  Special figures a and b are game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of ordinary figure (at time shortening operation), low probability of ordinary figure (at time of non-operation of special figure) at the time of judgment of judgment (at the time of symbol stop display) ) Regardless of, it is a design in which time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the big hit game is over. Special figure c, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit determination, is a symbol that the time saving (time saving number 100 times) operates after the big hit game ends. Special figure 2 The probability that the time saving is given in the big hit of the variation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variation game. Therefore, in the case where the winning / deciding result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of alignment, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random number value of the special figure 1. However, like the big hit symbols, a plurality of outlier symbols may be provided, and may be determined by a lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 499 (b) shows an example of a big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 499 (b), in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIGS. 498 and 499, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being provided with a shorter working time than the special figure 1, and has a long attacker opening time (or a large R number). Therefore, it can be considered that Toku-zu 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Toku-zu 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 500 and 501. FIG. 500A is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 500 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Among various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric tulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 501.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 500 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 500 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 500 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. Therefore, the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the processing ends.

  FIG. 501 (a) shows the flow of the electric tulong opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 501 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chu long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the universal figure changing game, and the special figure 2 starting opening (electrical chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or a plurality of times when the regular figure changing game is won (hereinafter , Sometimes referred to as a long opening) is a production that fuels whether or not to do. It should be noted that, even after the universal figure fluctuation stop, the electric chu long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during electric chu opening!") May be continued based on the general figure stop symbol.

  The electric tulong opening effect process shown in FIG. 501 (a) is the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 of FIG. It is executed when the (start rotation) command is received.

  First, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag that restricts the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric tulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether or not the execution of the electric tulong opening effect is restricted. For example, in the display darkness when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game during display darkness. Further, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not in the dark display, and the variation time of the universal figure variation game is long enough to execute the electric tulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to execute an electric chulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect based on the hit / miss determination result of the special figure variation game or the demonstration effect.

  When the electric chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  In step S801, if the electric turong opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric turong opening effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step S803, and symbol variation start (rotation start) of the universal figure is started. By referring to the information about the universal figure hit flag and the ordinary figure out of sync flag from the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the hit / no hit determination result of the ordinary figure fluctuation game is hit.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit / miss determination result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the universal symbol is changed from the command data of the symbol variation start (rotation start) command of the regular figure. By referring to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the public figure variation game is the general symbol A.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure variation game is the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S807, and the production of the production type “success pattern” is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for electric tulong opening effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of main processing. It returns to a process (step S409).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the universal figure fluctuation game is not the universal figure A, the process proceeds to step S811, and the production of the production type "failure pattern A" is selected to open the electric chulong. Set as a performance. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on "failure pattern A", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the hit / non-win determination result of the universal figure variation game is not a hit, the process proceeds to step S815, and executes the electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric chulong opening false effect execution lottery process, a random number value is taken out from the random counter for the electric chulong opening pseudo effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 and stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect, based on the result of the hit determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric tulong opening fake effect, the process proceeds to step S817, and selects the effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B" and sets it as the electric tulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric tulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern B", ends this processing, and effects of the main processing. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric tulong opening fake effect is not to be executed, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric tulong opening effect, ends this processing, and ends the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric chu long opening effect shown in FIG. 501, if the electric chu long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, if it is a win, the electric chu long opening effect is always performed. It is also possible to perform an execution lottery in the same manner as in the case of failure and execute the effect only when the lottery is won. In addition, in this example, the effect of "Failure pattern A" is set when the electric Chu is opened for a short time (short opening B), and the failure pattern is set when the electric Chu does not open (General drawing C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general drawing B) and a hit (general drawing C).

  FIG. 501 (b) shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 501 (b) shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and a background effect named "land stage" is being executed. On the front of the background effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern in which "decoration 0" to "decoration 9" sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern simulating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, the electric tulong opening effect area d is arranged. The public figure variation game is started on the public figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chu long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric chu long opening effect is executed in the electric chu long opening effect area d. As a Den Churon opening production, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with the display of "helping chance lottery", and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is selected to win the universal figure variation game. A stirrup production is performed that makes the player expect to open long. As shown in FIG. 501 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. A part of the right side area of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. As described above, the opening of the electric tulong may make it difficult to confirm at least a part of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or the case where the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the fluctuating display of the electric tulong. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 502 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 502 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 subsequent to step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S903.

  FIG. 502 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 502 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an update process of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 503 to 515. FIG. 503 (a) shows the flow of the button effect control process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. In the button effect control processing, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether or not the button effect flag in-execution flag is in the on state (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (within the valid operation period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button effect flag has a value of "0", the button effect flag is determined to be in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button reception flag is in the on state. The button reception flag is turned on when the chance button 136 or each button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button reception flag is “1”, the button reception flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button acceptance flag has a value of "0", the process proceeds to step S1207 and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 executes a button reception control process. In the button reception execution process, control for executing the effect executed based on the operation of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is performed.

  In step S1207, which follows step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the valid operation period, when the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are operated in a predetermined order, or when the valid operation period ends, the button effect end condition is To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if it is determined that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub-control unit 400 turns off the button effect executing flag. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the operation valid period has ended in step S1207, the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 is overwritten with “0” to set the button effect flag in-execution flag. Turn off.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect executing flag is in the off state, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the button effect executing condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is satisfied when the execution of the effect that is the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is won in the predetermined lottery process. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213, and if it is determined that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to the process of step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect executing flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied by winning the execution of the effect that is the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, and thus the button effect is being executed. The button effect executing flag indicating that is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like for deciding whether or not to execute the effect with the operation valid period is performed. After finishing the other button effect control processing, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control processing and returns to the effect control processing of the main processing (step S409).

  FIG. 503 (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, the first sub control unit 400 first determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the automatic button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is “0”, the automatic button mode is set. When it is determined that the setting flag is in the off state, the process proceeds to step S1303. When the value of the auto button mode setting flag is "1", it is determined that the auto button mode setting flag is in the on state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The automatic button mode setting condition is satisfied when the automatic button mode setting is called in the user mode (menu) that can be called by the player during non-execution of the special figure variation game. Further, the automatic button mode setting condition may be established when a predetermined lottery is won or when the number of jackpots after the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number. Further, the automatic button mode setting condition may be forcibly satisfied when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the automatic button mode itself to satisfy the automatic button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305, which follows step S1303, the automatic button mode is set. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of modes 1 to 4 can be set by the player's operation. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the automatic button mode has been set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the automatic button mode setting flag indicating that the automatic button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect executing flag is in the off state, in next step S1309, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the automatic button mode setting release condition is satisfied. The automatic button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied when the player cancels the automatic button mode. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the automatic button mode setting release condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if it is determined that the automatic button mode setting release condition is not satisfied, the automatic button mode setting process ends. Then, the process moves to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311, which follows step S1309, the automatic button mode setting flag is turned off. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the automatic button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, it turns off the automatic button mode setting flag indicating that the automatic button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “0” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the first sub control unit 400 turns off the automatic button mode setting flag, the first sub control unit 400 ends the automatic button mode setting process and proceeds to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 504 shows a processing flow of the chance button control processing (S411) of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. In the chance button control process, the first sub control unit 400 first turns off the button reception flag (step S1401). In this way, the button reception flag is once turned off each time the chance button control processing is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 with “0” to turn off the button reception flag, and proceeds to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the button effect flag in-execution flag is in the on state. The button effect flag is turned on within a period during which the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is valid (within the valid operation period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the ON state. When it is determined that the button effect flag is “0”, the button effect flag is determined to be off, and the chance button control process is ended.

  In step S1405, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the auto button mode setting flag is on. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the automatic button mode setting flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is "1", the automatic button mode is set. It is determined that the setting flag is in the ON state, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value of the automatic button mode setting flag is "0", it is determined that the automatic button mode setting flag is the OFF state. Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first sub control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is automatically operated.

  In step S1409, which follows step S1407, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not to accept a button operation. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button operation has been accepted, the process moves to step S1413, and if it determines that the button operation has not been accepted, the chance button control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that the automatic button mode setting flag is in the off state, in step S1411, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. When the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is ON, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 has been operated, and when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is ON, the setting operation unit 137 is operated. to decide. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, it proceeds to the process of step S1413, and if it determines that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated, it executes the chance button control process. finish.

  In step S1413, the button reception flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated automatically or manually, the first sub-control unit 400 turns on the button reception flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the button reception flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  FIG. 505 shows various settings in the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners and no settable conditions are provided. Therefore, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for intermediate players, and can be set by a player who has reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 3 is for advanced players, and can be set by a player who has reached level 100 by Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is intended for all players, but cannot be set unless a predetermined ban date arrives.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation valid period, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of "sexuality" in the figure, "carefree" is set in the mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the effective operation period. Further, in Mode 2, “Immediate” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the beginning of the effective operation period. In Mode 3, “Mood shop” is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation valid period. Further, in the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to “relax”, “impressed” or “mood shop”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of operations of the chance button 136 per unit time is set to “low speed” in mode 1, “medium speed” in mode 2, and “high speed” in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player repeatedly hits without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player only continuously hits the chance button 136. Has become. Further, in mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to "low speed", "medium speed" or "high speed".

  Also, in the effect of matching the operation timing of the chance button 136 (for example, Hime Dance SP reach described later), the operation timing is set to “GOOD” in the allowable range in Mode 1, and the operation timing is slightly shifted in Mode 2 “GREAT”. , And the mode 3 is set to “PERFECT” in which the operation timing is perfectly matched. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set to "GOOD", "GREAT" or "PERFECT".

  In addition, the setting of the "back button" in which the operation promotion leaving to encourage the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period is not performed is that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in the mode 1 during the operation valid period, In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed.

  In addition, when a hold icon indicating the number of holdings of the special figure variation game is displayed with a pattern simulating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, during the operation valid period. The chance button 136 is automatically operated in mode 1, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 2, and the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 3. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed. If the chance button 136 is operated during the display of "button hold", the display mode of the hold icon of "button hold" is changed.

  Further, the cross key (command input of the cross key) for operating each button of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be automatically operated in mode 1 and set to be automatically operated in mode 2. , Mode 3 is set so as not to be automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the automatic operation is performed.

  In addition, in the selection effect in which the player draws a lottery or the like, the mode 1 is set to "indecisiveness" in which the options are not determined immediately, the mode 2 is set to "quick decision in which the options are determined immediately", and the mode 3 Is set to "default" where the choices are determined by initial selection. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set "indecision", "quick decision", or "default".

  In addition, the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 by the player who is setting each mode is effectively accepted in the mode 1, accepted effectively in the mode 2, and not accepted effectively in the mode 3. Has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the player's button operations of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are effectively accepted.

  Further, as described in the "Remarks" column in the figure, mode 1 is an automatic button setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the non-execution of the special figure variation game (during non-play), or a special figure. On / off can be set by inputting a cross key command during a variable game (during a game). Further, in mode 2, when the player actually operates the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 in the automatic button mode on state, the automatic button mode is switched to the off state. Further, in the mode 3, the continuous hitting speed is set so that it cannot be achieved when the chance button 136 is physically (directly operated by the player) operated. Also, an effect that appears only when the operation timing is "PERFECT" is provided.

  FIG. 506 shows a method of setting the auto button mode in mode 1 in time series. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 506 (a) shows the display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect that is performed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6" which is the latest stop symbol is displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d, “Call a menu with a chance button” is displayed, and it is notified that the menu screen is called (displayed) by operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 506 (b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect, and the menu screen when Daitomo is not logged in (when the password is not input) is displayed. The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operate the chance button 136 to set the selection item. Further, this is informed by a tutorial display including a grandpa character displayed in the effect display area 208d and a balloon message "Select item to decide". The menu of this example is provided with "member registration", "password input", "QR code (registered trademark) issuance", "data clear", "volume and light amount adjustment", and "auto button mode". “Issuing QR code (registered trademark)” and “data clear” are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 506, since the Daitomo is not logged in, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance” and “data clear” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by hatching to the right in the figure), and menus that cannot be selected are displayed. Is shown.

  FIG. 506 (c) shows a state where the "auto button mode" is selected on the menu screen. At the time point shown in 19 (c), the cursor e1 is located at “mode 1” and “mode 1” is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message “Mode 1 is recommended for beginners”. In addition, Modes 2 and 3 are modes that can be selected only while logged in to Daitomo, and the ban date of "Mode 4" has not arrived. Therefore, “mode 2”, “mode 3”, and “mode 4” cannot be selected. When "Return" is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 506 (b) is returned.

  FIG. 506 (d) shows a state in which the mode 1 is determined. The item "mode 1" is displayed so as to light up (indicated by a dotted frame in the figure), and a princess balloon message "decided on mode 1!" Is displayed. Further, "mode 1" is displayed at the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode being set is displayed.

  FIG. 506 (e) shows a state where the mode 1 is determined and the screen returns to the menu screen. When the menu item "end" is selected, the grandfather character and the balloon message "I'll do my best!" Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is restarted as shown in FIG. 506 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 506 (e), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may be hidden by a display different from the display regarding the auto button mode (for example, "end" of the menu item). As shown in FIG. 506 (f), the display of "mode 1" in the lower left part may hide a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of "call menu by chance button").

  FIG. 507 shows a method of setting the mode 4 of the auto button mode in time series. FIG. 507 (a) shows a state in which "password input" is selected and determined on the menu screen shown in FIG. 506 (b). The player can operate the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password to log in to Daitomo.

  FIG. 507 (b) shows a state in which the password has been successfully input. After "Password input has been accepted" is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, the menu screen shown in FIG. 507 (c) is displayed. Since the login to Daitomo is completed, the menu items “Issue QR code (registered trademark)” and “Data clear” can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display including a grandfather character and a balloon message "Select item to decide" is displayed. Further, "level: 250" is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the logged-in player is shown. A title corresponding to each level is provided, and since the title of level 250 is a general, "title: shogun" is displayed below "level: 250".

  In this state, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the “auto button” of the menu items and operates the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 507 (d), the auto button mode setting is performed. The screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is located at "mode 4" and "mode 4" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the selected mode is explained by a tutorial display including a princess character and a balloon message "Mode 4 can customize all functions." Also, since the login to Daitomo is in progress and the Daitomo level is 250, "mode 2" and "mode 3" can be selected. Further, since the ban date of "mode 4" has arrived, "mode 4" can also be selected.

  FIG. 507 (e) shows a state after the mode 4 is selected and decided. The player can operate the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select a function to be set and operate the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set each function. The selection items of each function selected by the player are displayed brighter than the non-selected items (indicated by dot hatching in the figure). When "decision" shown below the effect display area 208d is selected and decided, the setting (customization) of mode 4 ends, and when "cancel" is selected and decided, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 507 (d). To return to.

  FIG. 507 (f) shows a state in which “decision” is selected and decided, and the setting of the auto button mode 4 is completed. "Mode 4" is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the mode being set is displayed. Further, instead of the “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be individually notified.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 1)
FIG. 508 shows an example of the effect display in Example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 508 and each drawing described later, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward thick white arrow. In FIG. 508 and each drawing described later, the relative layout relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is shown. Are shown differently than the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 508 and each drawing described later, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are shown in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the special figure 2 display are shown on the right side thereof. Device 214 is shown. Further, the light-off parts of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit parts are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of special figure 1 or special figure 2 is being performed. The illustration of the fourth symbol is omitted. Further, on the left side of FIG. 508, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown, and on the left side, the chance button 136 seen from the player is shown.

  FIG. 508 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 508 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  FIG. 508 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. Therefore, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 508 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 508 (d), the face of the hall f1 is displayed in a cut-in effect. Is executed. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 508 (c) and (d).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 2)
FIG. 509 shows an example of the effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 509 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 509 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 509 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image simulating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation prompt notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 509 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 505, the “sexuality” of mode 3 is “mood shop”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period, like “carefree”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 509 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 509 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the player operates the chance button 136 within the valid operation period (see FIG. 508 (d)). Further, different cut-in effects may be executed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting status of the auto button mode. In particular, the mode may not be displayed unless the automatic button mode is set, or vice versa.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not depending on the player) in the automatic button mode within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In this embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the chance button 136 is lit and the meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed during the operation valid period. Without being limited thereto, when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 is lit and a meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or You don't have to do both.

(Example 3)
FIG. 510 shows, in time series, an example of the effect display in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 510 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 510 (a), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 510 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white. Further, during the effective operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image simulating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation prompt notifications of the character string “PUSH!” May not be displayed.

  FIG. 510 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 505, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the beginning of the operation valid period as in the case of “improvement”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 510 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 510 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the player operates the chance button 136 within the valid operation period (see FIG. 508 (d)). If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the cut-in effect is not executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not depending on the player) in the automatic button mode within the operation valid period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 4)
FIG. 511 shows a chance button 700 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate it, and is configured to be able to be pressed. The chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the revolving light. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is arranged.

  FIGS. 511 (a) to 511 (d) show examples in which the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 511 (a) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 511 (b) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has started (the operation valid period has started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 511 (c) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 700. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 511 (c) and 511 (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. In this way, when the chance button 700 is operated, the effect of lighting the lamp 700a while rotating is started. However, if the player holds his / her hand on the chance button 700 after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by the hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 511 (e) to (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 511 (e) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700a is turned off without rotating.

  FIG. 511 (f) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without rotating.

  FIG. 511 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating. Thus, when the auto button mode is set, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button, the lamp 700a is turned on while rotating based on the automatic operation. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lamp 700a from being lowered by the player's hand.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the auto button mode can be set, visibility is sacrificed, and the accessory (for example, the lamp 700a) is moved by operating the chance button 700, and the chance button. The player can select whether to secure the visibility of the accessory while sacrificing the operation of 700.

(Example 5)
FIG. 512 shows an example of the effect according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 512 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, a shooting reach in which the hall f1 defeats the Echigoya f3 with a beam is executed.

  In the shooting reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is emitted from the sword of the f1 as many times as the operation of the chance button 136. In order to inform this, at the start of shooting reach, a character string "shooting reach-defeat Echigoya with continuous button hits-" is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 1" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 512 (b) shows a state in which shooting reach is started. When the shooting reach is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and "PUSH!" A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed below the image, and the operation promotion notification is executed.

  The continuous hit speed in the mode 1 of the auto button mode is "low speed" as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 512 (b) and 512 (c), since the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, the number of beams emitted from the sword of the buttocks f1 is small.

  FIG. 512 (d) shows a state in which the player himself has started consecutively hitting the chance button 136. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the player's operation of the chance button 136 is also valid. For this reason, more beams are emitted from the sword of the hall f1 than when the chance button 136 was automatically operated.

  FIG. 513 is a timing chart showing the states of the chance button sensor 426, the automatic button processing determination result (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button reception flag when the effect shown in FIG. 512 is executed. FIG. 513 shows the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the result of the auto button determination process (determined in steps S1407 to S1409), and the on / off state of the button reception flag in order from the top. The horizontal axis of FIG. 513 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The auto button determination processing result is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button reception flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the automatic button mode.

  Time t1 in FIG. 513 is the time shown in FIG. 512 (b). When the automatic button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes determination in step S1407 to step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the opportunity button sensor 426 remains off at time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 513 is the time shown in FIG. 512 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes determination in step S1407 to step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t2 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the opportunity button sensor 426 remains off at time t2. Further, the operation of the chance button 136 from time t3 to t4 is also an automatic operation in the auto button mode. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is executed at equal intervals. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be performed randomly or in a pattern with a different cycle.

  At time t5, the player has started operating the chance button 136. Therefore, at the times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on and the button reception flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only either the operation of the chance button 136 by the player or the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, both may be determined to be valid. Further, for example, even when the chance button 136 pushed down at time t6 is maintained as it is, the auto button processing determination result at time t7 and time t10 may be ON, or conversely, the chance button 136 may be changed. When it is maintained in the ON state, the button reception flag may be turned OFF without being turned ON even at the timing when the automatic button processing determination result is turned ON.

  At time t8, the player operates the chance button 136. At time t9, the player operates the chance button 136. Further, time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 512 (d).

  Although the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, the button acceptance flag is not turned on at time t10. Therefore, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalid. In this way, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be disabled for a predetermined period after the player operates the chance button 136. After that, at time t11, the player operates the chance button 136.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player's operation of the chance button 136 is valid even when the automatic button mode is set. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the automatic button mode is set, by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to deal with the player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136. . Further, in addition to the operation performed automatically, the chance button 136 may be manually operated to easily capture continuous hitting effects (for example, shooting reach).

  Here, the configuration may be such that the result of the auto button process determination process turns on when the acceptance period of the chance button 136 starts. When the player pushes the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 at the same time as the start of the period, even if the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is awaited. It takes time from the start of the acceptance period of 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In that respect, when the automatic button mode is set, since the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost at the same time as the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the effect may be seen earlier. is there.

(Example 6)
FIG. 514 shows an example of the effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 514 (a) to 514 (d) show an example in which the auto button mode operates. FIG. 514 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a swordsman confrontation where the lord f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 514 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. An image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string “PUSH!” Are displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the operation valid period is below the image. A meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of operation promotion notification. The entire meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, the white portion increases with the passage of time, and when the operation valid period ends, the entire meter image is displayed in white.

  FIG. 514 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 505, the “sex” in mode 3 is “mood”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 514 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 514 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect when the player operates the chance button 136 within the valid operation period (see FIG. 508 (d)).

  514 (e) to (h) show an example in which the auto button mode does not operate. FIG. 514 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, variable display of decorative symbols (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is executed. Further, since the auto button mode mode 3 is set, "mode 3" is displayed in the upper left part of the effect display area 208d. When the super reach effect is executed, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set is on the lower left side, and when the super reach effect is not being executed, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set is on the upper left side. It has become. In this way, the position of the display indicating that the automatic button mode is being set may change depending on the state.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the variable icon display area a. In the variable icon display area a, one variable icon can be displayed, and it is possible to give advance notice (preliminary notice of the change) of the validity of the change with a predetermined reliability depending on the display mode of the change icon. In the variable icon display area a, the variable icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  In addition, a horizontally long area that is adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area a below the effect display area 208d is a special figure hold display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special figure hold display area c, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure hold display area c, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure change game depending on the number of hold icons, and also to notify the success or failure of the hold with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon (prefetching). Notice) is possible. Further, in the special figure hold display area c of this example, hold icons indicating hold of the hold orders 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of current special figure 1 variable games is two, as shown in FIG. 514 (e), two special hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed as white circles (default) in the special figure hold display area c. It is displayed in a manner.

  FIG. 514 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is increased by one. . In the special figure reservation display area c, a reservation icon b3 is newly displayed.

  The hold icon b3 is a button hold that is displayed in a display mode of a pattern simulating the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a look-ahead notice. While the button holding is displayed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is entered. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. Further, when a plurality of button holdings are displayed while the automatic button mode (excluding mode 3) is set, and the automatic button mode is activated, only the display mode of the previously displayed button holding is displayed. May be changed, or conversely, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. Further, in that case, the display mode of both button suspensions may not be changed, or the display mode of both button suspensions may be simultaneously changed. Further, these controls may be different or the same during the setting of the auto button mode and other states. Further, the display mode after the change may be different between the change of the display mode due to the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the fact that the chance button 136 is actually pressed, or the same. Good. In addition, there may be a mode in which it is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, the mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, but in the mode 3, as shown in FIG. 505, the automatic operation at the time of the button hold display is not performed and the operation by the player is not valid. Therefore, when mode 3 is set, the display mode of button holding does not change.

  FIG. 514 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game, in which the hold icon b3 has been held, is started. The hold icon b3 of button hold becomes the variable icon a2 while keeping the display mode. The variable icon a2 gradually moves toward the variable icon display area a.

  FIG. 514 (h) shows a state in which the variable icon a2 has moved to the variable icon display area a. The display mode of the variable icon a2 changes after the movement to the variable icon display area a is completed. The variation icon a2 is changed to a display mode of a picture drawn as "heat" in a red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure) circle, and a notice display of the special figure 1 variation game being executed ( Notice display of the fluctuation).

  As shown in FIGS. 514 (a) to 514 (d) of the present embodiment, the auto button mode may be activated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 is automatically operated. However, as shown in FIGS. 514 (e) to 514 (h), the auto button mode may not operate during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may not be automatically operated. The auto button mode may be activated when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, or when the button hold is changed when the chance button 136 is operated. May operate. In addition, when the cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode does not have to be activated, and when the button hold is changed when the chance button 136 is operated, The auto button mode does not have to operate.

(Example 7)
FIG. 515 shows an example of the effect display in Example 7 of the present embodiment in time series. The decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 515, and the chance button 136 seen from the player is shown on the right side.

  FIG. 515 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach is reached due to the variation of the decorative symbol. In the super reach production of this embodiment, a princess dance super reach in which a princess dances is executed.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the effect of operating the chance button 136 with good timing is executed. In order to notify this, at the start of the princess dance super reach, the character string "Princess dance SP reach-press the flowing button with good timing!" Is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 3" is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 515 (b) shows a state in which the princess dance super reach has started. When the princess dance super reach is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 lights up.

  Further, an image of a princess, a chance button image g, and an aiming frame h are displayed in the effect display area 208d. In this embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from above toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is manually or automatically operated at the timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, the evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 515 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 can be moved by a driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. The opportunity button 136 is retracted as if the opportunity button 136 was pressed at the timing when the opportunity button 136 is automatically operated. Note that, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may perform an operation of protruding upward. When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Further, when the chance button 136 is provided with a driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed down by operating the driving means according to the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the driving means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the automatic button mode being set to ON. For example, a force can be applied from the inside to the outside of the chance button 136 to fix the chance button 136 so that it does not move, or the chance button 136 may be retracted, and the chance button 136 may be fixed in the retracted state to be pressed. You can lose it.

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 operates as if it were actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the player operates the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is automatically activated by the operation in the auto button mode. By turning off the chance button lamp 138 based on the operation, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  Further, in order to give the player the illusion that the chance button 136 is actually operated, there are a case where the chance button 136 is actually operated and a case where the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. It suffices that the chance buttons 136 have the same appearance. In this case, the lighting status of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, the presence or absence of issuance, emission color, and brightness) depending on whether the chance button 136 is actually operated or when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. At least one element among a plurality of elements such as a posture, a posture, and a movement condition may be made common.

  FIG. 515 (d) shows a state after the chance button 136 is automatically operated. As shown in FIG. 505, in mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing of all “PERFECT”. Therefore, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the effect image including the character string “PERFECT” is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a player who feels annoyed to operate the chance button 136 does not operate the chance button 136, and the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played. May be visible to others.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 488 to 515 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation section 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,

At least one of a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effect, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP reach effect) and at least executable effect means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, cut-in effect, change of button hold,),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold),

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the first effect (for example, cut-in effect (see FIG. 508)) when the first condition is satisfied.

  The effect means is capable of at least executing the second effect (for example, a change in button holding in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied.

  The first effect is an effect at least different from the second effect,

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player,

The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing various effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to show the same effect as when the operating means is operated, without causing the player to operate the operating means even to the player who feels the operation of the operating means is troublesome. There are cases. In addition, by providing an effect that can be visually recognized by not operating the operation means, there is a case where a new way of enjoying the game in which the operation means is not intentionally operated can be performed.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,

  A gaming machine provided with a production mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of production modes,

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode (for example, non-setting of the auto button button mode),

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, an auto button button mode),

  The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatic and is not operated,

The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A gaming table characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, by providing an effect that is executed only in the effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated, a player who does not want to operate the operation means does not operate the operation means. May not be lost in On the contrary, a player who does not want to operate the operating means may gain the advantage by not operating the operating means.
(3) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The production means is capable of at least executing operation promotion notification (for example, an image simulating the chance button 136, a meter image),

  When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,

  When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,

The operation promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the operation is automated by executing the operation prompting notification that prompts the operation of the operation means even in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. In some cases, a player who feels humble can be rescued. In addition, it may be difficult for another player to understand that the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode) is set. Moreover, since control can be made common in a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to reduce the control load and the number of design work steps.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, cut-in effect),

  The production means is capable of at least executing the third production when a third condition is satisfied.

  The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,

The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is operated by a player,
It is characterized by the following.
(5) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The third effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

The first effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-mentioned configuration, even when the operation mode is automatically operated, the operation of the operation means by the player is accepted, so that the player suddenly wants to operate the operation means. Can also be used by people. Further, in addition to the automatic operation, manually operating the operation means may allow the player to easily capture the continuous hit effect and the like.
(6) In the above gaming machine,

The gaming table is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
It is characterized by the following.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.

  Note that the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the embodiment and the modified examples, can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel as shown in FIG. 516. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal lottery for winning combinations) for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning are won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined prize mode is selected. In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and the production means is a predetermined one. A launching device 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter the ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting the ball entering the winning opening 1016. When the detection unit 1018 detects a sphere, a payout unit 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022. And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when a game ball enters a winning opening and wins a prize. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 517 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired data about the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which a real machine such as a pachinko machine or the like is simulatedly executed for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  In the conventional game table, there is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the operation means. Further, in the conventional gaming table, depending on conditions such as time-up of the operation valid period of the operating means, even if the player does not operate the operating means, the same effect as when operating the operating means may be executed. there were. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means tends to be monotonous, and the predetermined effect is executed at a predetermined timing, so that the player is started. There was a problem that it was easy to predict the content of the production, and it was easy to get tired of the production.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect that is executed based on the operation of the operation means is varied, and the effect execution timing is randomized, so that the player starts the effect. This makes it difficult to predict the content of and makes it possible to perform timeless presentations.

  The present invention according to the above embodiments is summarized as follows.

(Appendix G1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
At least one of the plurality of effects, at least effectable execution means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The production means is capable of at least executing the first production when a first condition is satisfied,
The effect means is capable of at least executing the second effect when the second condition is satisfied.
The first effect is an effect at least different from the second effect,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated by the player,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix G2)
The gaming table described in Appendix G1,
A gaming machine provided with a production mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of production modes,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatic and is not operated,
The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix G3)
The gaming table described in Appendix G2,
The production means is capable of at least performing operation promotion notification,
When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,
When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can execute at least the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix G4)
The gaming table described in Appendix G2 or G3,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The production means is capable of at least executing the third production when a third condition is satisfied.
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is operated by a player,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix G5)
The gaming table described in Appendix G4,
The third effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect is an effect executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix G6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices G1 to G5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine or slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by that.
[Tenth Embodiment]

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 518 to 521. FIG. 518 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a surface closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as a “front surface”, and a surface farther from the player than the “front surface” is a “rear surface”. It is written as.

  As shown in FIG. 518, a decorative pattern display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged side by side in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decoration portion 814 is arranged on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 518, the decorative portions 810 and 814 are illustrated as a horizontally long flat plate in a simplified manner. On the front surfaces of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, a decorative member formed of resin or the like in a predetermined shape, a lamp, or the like is installed. Further, the decorative portion 810 has an opening 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decorative portion 810 is arranged such that the opening 810a overlaps the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The area of the opening 810a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decorative portion 810. A portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 that is visible through the opening 810a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the drawing) is an area that is visible to the player. The frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is not visible to the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. A lens cut having a predetermined pattern is formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812. As a result, the light rays incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp are reflected to the player side by the lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812, and are emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, or blue) from the light guide plate 812 to a predetermined pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 518, the pattern 705 of the lord's face (hereinafter referred to as the lord's face 705)). It is visually recognized by the player as if it were. As a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In this example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of the lord's face 705, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be different depending on the pattern of the LED lamp that is turned on. Further, the pattern (light emitting pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be different depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamps are not lit, the decorative portion 810, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the like arranged behind the light guide plate 812 are visible to the player. The pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible to the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, may be easily visible, or may be difficult to visually recognize. Alternatively, it may be invisible.

  A decorative portion 814 is arranged on the front side of the light guide plate 812. The decorative portion 814 has an opening 814a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decorative portion 814 is arranged so that the opening 814a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814 a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. Therefore, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decorative portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visible through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the drawing) is a display area that is visible to the player. Therefore, the outer peripheral portion 812a (outside the dotted line in the drawing) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is invisible to the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a does not matter whether the LED lamp emits light or not, the decorative portion 810 and the decorative pattern display device. Those arranged behind the light guide plate 812, such as 208, are visible or easily visible to the player.

  The decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. A plurality of effect movable bodies such as effect movable bodies 224 and 800 may be arranged between the decorative portion 810 and the light guide plate 812. Further, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. Further, a transparent plate made of a transparent resin or the like may be arranged between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. Further, one or a plurality of effect movable bodies (for example, effect movable body 806) may be arranged between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. Further, a transparent plate made of transparent resin or the like may be arranged on the front side of the effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative pattern display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. 519. FIG. 519 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 as seen from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 519 (a), the lord's face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is visually recognized through the opening 814a of the decorative portion 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 519 (b) shows a state in which the effect is actually being executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 519 (c) is a diagram showing the decorative parts 810, 814 and the light guide plate 812 removed from FIG. 519 (b). An area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 519 (c) shows a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 519 (c), “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided. Further, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, reserved number display areas 712a and 712b are provided, respectively. Further, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the decoration pattern display device 208 is performing an effect as shown in FIG. 519 (c), when the lord's face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player is shown as shown in FIG. 519 (b). Is visible. Since the lord's face 705 is displayed by emitting light in a predetermined color on the transparent light guide plate 812, it is displayed so that the rear side is transparent (the rear side is visible). Therefore, in the image and the pattern displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the visibility of the portion overlapping the lord's face 705 is relatively low, and the visibility of the portion not overlapping the lord's face 705 is low. It is relatively high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 519 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the number-of-holds display area 712a, and almost the entire number-of-holds display area 712b (a portion in which the number-of-holds is displayed by numbers) And are displayed so as not to overlap the face 705 of the lord. Therefore, even when the lord's face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player does not deteriorate the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a special figure variation game is executed and the number of special figure reservations.

  A position where the whole or a part of the reserved number display area 712a (displaying the reserved number of special figure 1) and the whole or a part of reserved number display area 712b (displaying the reserved number of special figure 2) do not overlap with the face 705 of the lord. May be displayed on the screen.

  At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the lord's face 705, and the other may be displayed at a position not overlapping the lord's face 705. Further, both the hold icon and the hold number display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the face 705 of the lord, or both may be arranged at a position not overlapping.

  Next, a specific effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 520 and 521. 520 (a) to 520 (g) show, in this order, specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  520 to 521, the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the illustrations of the decorative portions 810, 814 and the light guide plate 812 are omitted. Further, when the LED lamps arranged on the side surfaces of the light guide plate 812 emit light and the lord's face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the lord's face 705 is illustrated on the decorative pattern display device 208. .

  520 (a), after the special figure 2 variation game is finished, the decorative pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the central portion of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed in a stopped state, and shows that the winning / losing determination result related to the special figure 2 variation game is informed that it is a special jackpot. Special figure 2 fluctuation game ends, because the special figure fluctuation game of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not executed, both of the two 4th design indicator areas b1 and b2 are filled with specified color .

  The game state at the time shown in FIG. 520 (a) is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with electric support). Therefore, "probably changing" is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that it is in the special figure high probability state (probably changing state).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to display only the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 in the high probability state of normal figure (during electric power support). For this reason, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the number of holds of special figure 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (first hold) in the hold order, the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold in the hold order, and the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold in the hold order. The hold icon a14 indicates that the hold order is the fourth hold. Further, the display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is a white circle. Further, since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the reservation number display area 712a, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, so that the reservation number display area 712b is displayed. Is displayed as "4". Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during electric power support.

  520 (b) following FIG. 520 (a) shows a state in which it has been notified that the special jackpot is won in the special figure 2 variable game ended in FIG. 520 (a). As for the special big hit (big hit of special figure A), the game state shifts to the state of probability change (special figure high probability state) after the big hit game. From the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear and the stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed. Further, the hold icon display area 710 also disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead of them, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the special jackpot winning notification effect is executed by the character string of "probably strange jackpot".

  FIG. 520 (c) continuing from FIG. 520 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 520 (c), the first round (1R) of the 15R jackpot game is being executed. A background image of the beach is displayed in the effect display area 208d which is spread over the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the upper right of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 that displays the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, "1R" is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It has been announced that there is. Further, a big hit type display area 718 that displays a big hit type is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d, and "decoration 7" is displayed here to notify that the big hit is the 15R special big hit.

  520 (d) continuing from FIG. 520 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). In the round number display area 717, "6R" is displayed to inform that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  520 (e) continuing from FIG. 520 (d) shows a state in which the lord's face 705 (second display), which was not displayed in FIGS. 520 (a) to 520 (d), is displayed on the light guide plate 812. Is shown. Since the lord's face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display by the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the number of rounds display, the big hit type display) is reduced. Since the time point shown in FIG. 520 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, "6R" is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, when the lord's face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is determined as a result of the special figure prefetching process, the prefetch result for the special figure variation game currently held is determined to be a big hit (so-called, It is displayed only when it is determined that there is a holiday resort. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning / disabling determination process. The pre-judgment result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308. In addition, the special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 424. For example, in the special figure prefetching process executed up to the time shown in FIG. 520 (a), if there is a big hit in the hold, display the lord's face 705 that there is a hold in the big hit game. To inform you. In the present embodiment, the lord's face 705 is used as a premier effect (effect of confirming a big hit) to notify that there is a big hit in the hold.

  From FIG. 520 (e) to FIG. 520 (f), prize balls based on the winning of the game balls into the variable winning port 234 during the big hit game are paid out to the lower plate 128, and the lower plate 128 becomes full, This shows the state where the lower plate full tank error has occurred. When the lower plate full tank error occurs, a lower plate full tank error display (ball-out notification) 704 (first display) is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string “Please remove the ball” displayed in the frame. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. The lower plate full tank error display 704 has relatively low visibility when the lord's face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed until the gaming plate (prize ball) stored in the lower plate 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by the operation of the ball discharging lever 132, and the lower plate full tank error is released. Continue to be done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 520 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 has changed from white (indicated by upward hatching in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a13 to notify that the pre-reading result related to the special figure 2 variable game with the hold order of 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color is changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (a big hit confirmation effect) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. Since the time point shown in FIG. 520 (f) is the sixth round during the big hit game, "6R" is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  520 (g) subsequent to FIG. 520 (f) shows a state in which the display color of the hold icon a13 has further changed from the time point shown in FIG. 520 (f) (indicated by cross hatching in the figure). In this way, in the premiere effect executed by using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used in the premier effect is changed at any time. The change in the display color of the hold icon may be, for example, a color that continuously changes from blue to green or red, or may change as if the hold icon is emitting light. It may be. Since the time point shown in FIG. 520 (g) is the sixth round during the big hit game, "6R" is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 521 shows a concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example of the present embodiment. 521 (a) to 521 (c) are effects executed subsequently to FIG. 520 (g), and are arranged in time order in this order.

  FIG. 521 (a) shows a state in which the change of the display color of the hold icon a13 is completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in the color when the change in the display color was completed until the corresponding hold was consumed and erased. In addition, if the display mode of the hold icon during the special game (for example, during the big hit game) is different from the display mode of the hold icon during the normal game (for example, during probability change, time saving, special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state, etc.) You may allow it. Since the time point shown in FIG. 520 (g) is the sixth round during the big hit game, "6R" is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 521 (a) continuing from FIG. 521 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 is turned off and the lord's face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. There is. In this example, the lord's face 705 is erased after the change of the display color of the hold icon used for the premiere effect is completed. The erasing timing of the face 705 of the lord may be before, at the same time, or after the completion timing of the change of the hold icon. In addition, by deleting the face 705 of the lord, the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the number of rounds display, and the big hit type display is improved. The lord's face 705 may be displayed over a plurality of rounds.

  Further, the character string “please remove the ball” included in the lower plate full error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. The sea part of the background image displayed on the back of the character string is displayed in dark blue, for example. Since the black character string “Please pull out the ball” is displayed overlapping the dark blue color, the character string that is a part of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is difficult to see. As described above, depending on the color of the background image, a part of the lower plate full tank error display 704 may be difficult to see.

  In FIG. 521 (c) continuing from FIG. 521 (b), the sixth round of the big hit game is finished, and the state in which the interval between rounds is entered is shown. The interval between rounds means a period from the closing of the variable winning port 234 in one round during the big hit game to the opening of the variable winning port 234 in the next round of the round. In the inter-round interval, the round number display area 717 is erased and the round number is no longer displayed. Further, the lower plate full tank error display 704 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds. Further, the lord's face 705 may be continuously displayed during the inter-round interval, may not be displayed during the inter-round interval, and may be displayed again after shifting to the next round. The round number display of the finished round (for example, 6R) may be continuously displayed even during the inter-round interval, and the round number display of the round that starts at the same time as or after the variable winning port 234 is opened ( For example, 7R) may be displayed. Further, the number of rounds to be started next time (for example, 7R) may be displayed at the same time as or after closing the variable winning port 234 (for example, closing the variable winning port 234 in the sixth round).

  In FIG. 521 (d) continuing from FIG. 521 (c), the state where the seventh round of the big hit game has started is shown. Since the interval between rounds has ended and the seventh round has started, a round number display area 717 is provided and is displayed as "7R".

  521 (e) continuing from FIG. 521 (d) shows a state in which the lower plate full tank error is released. For example, since the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 and the prize balls (game balls) stored in the lower plate 128 are discharged to the dollar box, the lower plate full tank error is released. As a result, the lower plate full tank error display 704 is erased.

  521 (f) following FIG. 521 (e) shows the state immediately before the end of the 15th round, which is the final round of the jackpot game. "15R" is displayed in the round number display area 717 to notify that the 15th round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 521 (g) continuing from FIG. 521 (f) shows a state in which the big hit game is over. Since the result of the latest win / loss determination relating to the special figure 2 variation game is the special big hit (big hit of special figure A), after the end of the big hit game, the game state becomes the special figure high probability state (probability change state). Further, the game state at the end of the latest special map 2 variation game is also the special map high probability state. For this reason, the effect display area 208d enlarged to the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as "Continuous change!", And it is notified that the game state shifts to the special figure high probability state. Further, at the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. In addition, you may make it display a hold icon continuously also at the time of a big hit game.

  The lower plate full tank error display 704 may be hidden during the inter-round interval. Further, when the lower plate full tank error occurs, a voice error notification may be given together with the lower plate full tank error display 704.

  The face 705 of the lord may be displayed by repeating lighting and extinguishing (by repeating lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surface of the light guide plate 812). Also, the lord's face 705 may be displayed so as to blink (blinking a plurality of LED lamps). Further, the lord's face 705 may continue to be displayed with a predetermined brightness (the plurality of LED lamps continue to be lit with a predetermined brightness).

  In addition, the lord's face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed such that the color continuously changes with the passage of time, or may be displayed in gradation.

  Further, when a serious error (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a clerk of the game shop) occurs, the lord's face 705 may be deleted.

  Even if a serious error occurs, the lord's face 705 may be continuously displayed.

  Further, when a serious error occurs, the number-of-rounds display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display.

  Further, when a serious error occurs, all the displays including the number of rounds display may be hidden and only the display notifying that the serious error has occurred may be displayed. Also, the number of rounds may be displayed even if a serious error occurs.

  In addition, when power failure recovery occurs during the game (during big hits, pattern fluctuations) (for example, when an electrical system abnormality such as power supply voltage drop due to lightning strike occurs, and then power recovery), the predetermined timing The effect display may be hidden until (the start of the next round if the big hit round is in progress, the start of the next change if the symbol is being changed), and a power recovery display such as "power is being restored" may be displayed. In addition, a message such as "Please hit the ball" may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, the fact that an error has occurred may be displayed. Alternatively, only serious errors may be displayed. Further, instead of displaying an error, another display means (for example, LED lamp, sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, speaker 120) may be used to notify that an error has occurred. Good.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative pattern display device 208 as a first display means and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower plate full tank error display (bulb removal notification) 704 as the first display.

  The sub display device 808 can display at least the lord's face 705 as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower plate full tank error display (bulb removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state in which at least the lord's face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be low, the decorative pattern display that is difficult to see is displayed. It may be possible to focus the player on the game by having the device 208 focus on the player. In addition, since the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may be less visible, the player's line of sight can be seen more easily than the lower plate full tank error display 703 in the lord's face 705. In some cases it can be directed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 208, as the first display, a later-described alerting notification effect 722, a right-handing alerting effect 724, an alerting notification effect 750, an alerting notification effect. 772 and the first display 790 may be displayed. Further, the sub-display device 808, as the second display, pre-reading notice notification effects 730, 740, electric chu long opening effect, electric chu long opening false effect 760, user level notification effect 775, and second display 792, which will be described later. It may be displayable.

  In addition, the lower plate full tank error display 704 can be replaced with an operation request display (button image, meter of valid period image, touch operation animation, etc.).

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 518 to 521 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  A first display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208),

Second display means (for example, sub-display device 808, light guide plate 812),
A gaming machine equipped with,

  The first display unit displays the first display (for example, lower plate full tank error display (bulb removal notification) 703, 704, attention calling notification effect 722, right-handing notification effect 724, attention calling notification effect 750, attention calling notification). At least the effect 772 and the first display 790) can be displayed,

  The second display means uses a second display (for example, a performance display, a lord's c1, a villager c5, a lord's face 705, a pre-reading notice notification 730, 740, an electric chu-long opening effect, an electric chu-long opening fake effect 760. , A user level notification effect 775, a second display 792) can be displayed at least,

  At least a part of the first display is at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the second display means,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, so that the player tries to recognize the content of the notification by the first display, and the first display is displayed. It may be possible to focus the player on the game by paying attention to the means. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. Sometimes you can.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the first display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying one or more displays different from the second display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display.

  All or only part of the first display may be at least less visible when the second display means is in the first state.

  The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display means.

  The first state may be a state in which one or a plurality of displays including the second display are displayed by the second display means.

  At least a part of the first display may have low visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  At least a part of the first display may be one in which visibility is at least low when the second display means is in the first state.

The first state may be a state in which at least the second display is displayed by the second display means.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display related to a game (for example, lower plate full tank error display (bulb removal notification) 703, 704),

The second display is a performance display (for example, performance display, lord c1, villager c5, lord's face 705).
It is characterized by the following.

According to this configuration, the display related to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see due to the effect display displayed on the second display means, so the effect display displayed on the second display means It may be possible to make the player pay attention.
(3) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  At least a part of the first display, when the second display means is in the second state, visibility is at least higher than in the first state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not at least displayed on the second display means,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be possible to make it easier for the player to guess that there is.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible than the first state when the second display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible than the one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state. .

  Part or all of the first display has a higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state, and one or more states different from the first state. May have low visibility.

  The second state may be a state in which one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means.
(4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first region, in the first state, at least at a position that overlaps the second region, is provided at least,

  The first region is at least a part of the first display means (for example, a region for displaying a display regarding a game, an image display region, a frame region 805),

The second area is at least a part of the second display means (for example, a display area for displaying effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, an outer peripheral portion 812a),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, so that the player can focus on the first display means and concentrate on the game. Sometimes you can. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. Sometimes you can.

  The first region may be only a part of the first display unit or the entire region.

  The second area may be a part of or the entire area of the second display means.

  The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only the second region in the first state.

The first region may be one provided in the first state so as to overlap with one or a plurality of regions including the second region.
(5) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

The first display is an error display (for example, lower plate full tank error display 703, 704).
It is characterized by the following.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the visibility of the error display is reduced, so that the player can make an effort to recognize the error display and cause the player to carefully watch the error display. Sometimes you can. Further, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being missed due to the error display being displayed.
(6) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,

  The second display is at least displayed on the front side of the first display.

  According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, by displaying the second display on the front side of the first display, it may be possible to make the player easily notice the second display. . Further, in the case of the first state, by displaying the first display behind the second display, it may be possible for the player to carefully watch the first display.

  The second display means may be provided on the front side of the first display means.

  The second display means includes one or a plurality of parts including the first display means (for example, display means, rendering means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate. Members, etc.) may be provided on the front side.

  The second display means is provided on the front side of the first display means, and is a component different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, rendering means, movable means, winning prize). It may be provided behind the means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.

  The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the rear side of one or a plurality of displays different from the first and second displays.

The second display may be displayed in front of one or a plurality of displays including the first display.
(7) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display regarding a game),

  The second display means is provided with at least a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying effect display).

  The first display area is capable of displaying at least the first display,

  The second display area is capable of displaying at least the second display,

  The third display area is provided at least at a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,

  The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,

The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at a position where they overlap, so that the first display displayed in the first display area is displayed by the player. Can be made to look carefully. In addition, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the second display displayed in the second display area.

  The first display means may be provided with only the first display area.

  The first display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the first display area.

  The second display means may be provided with only the second display area.

  The second display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the second display area.

  The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display.

  The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.

  The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display.

  The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display.

  The third display area may be part or all of the first display area.

  The fourth display area may be a part or the whole of the second display area.

Part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with part or all of the fourth display area in the first state.
(8) The pachinko machine 100,

The first display is information of higher importance to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting operation by a clerk of the game store or the player (ball-out notification, error notification, chance button press). Request notification etc.),
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including the information of high importance to the player has a low visibility due to a part of the effect display (second display), In some cases, the player's line of sight can be easily directed to the display means.

  The first display may be a display containing only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display is one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background). ) May be included.

The first display is one or more information that is more important to the player than the second display, and one or more information that is less important than one or more display different from the second display (for example, , A character image, a background, etc.).
(9) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  An operating means (for example, a ball discharging lever 132) provided at a position where the player can operate,

The first display includes at least a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, by lowering the visibility of at least a part of the notification for prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate on the effect display and entertain.

  The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate.

  The first display may include only a notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The first display may include one or a plurality of notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a rendering means (for example, a rendering movable body 806). The rendering means is at least movable (for example, moving, rotating, vibrating). It should be noted that the rendering means may perform one or more of movements, rotations, and vibrations, or may be capable of performing all movements, rotations, and vibrations. Further, the rendering means may be provided with a second display means (for example, the sub display device 808 and the light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208) does not move. Also, the first display means is fixed.

  At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transparent. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmissive and non-transmissive display areas. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transparent, the player can see the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

  At least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. A transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used for the second display means. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamps arranged in the vicinity are lit, the transparent plate or the glass plate is provided with a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. It emits light on the design.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the second display unit may not be 0%.

  The entire second display means may be transparent.

  The transmittance of at least part of the second display means may be 100%.

  At least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.

  At least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.

  The transmittance of at least part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may change from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance of the second display means may be changed from the low transmittance state to the high transmittance state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high transmittance state to the low transmittance state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same or different from the low state before the change of the transmittance.

  The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) liquid crystal display device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with a third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transparent.

  Both the second display means and the third display means may be at least transparent.

  Only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transparent.

  The third display means may be the same as the second display means.

  The third display means may be installed in movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) effect means.

  The third display means may execute an effect that can be executed by the second display means.

  The technical matters applied to the second display means can also be applied to the third display means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with further display means (for example, a display means configured by a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate).

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display does not have to be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display does not have to be transparent).

  The entire second display may be transparent.

  Note that only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  In addition, a part or all of the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that a part of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  It should be noted that all of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  Note that a part of one or a plurality of displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  It should be noted that all or one or more of the displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display is the first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of part or the whole of the second display may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of part or the whole of the second display may change from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance of the second display may be changed from the low transmittance state to the high transmittance state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high transmittance state to the low transmittance state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same or different from the low state before the change of the transmittance.

  This may make it easier for the player to see the second display and make it difficult for the player to miss the second display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display does not have to be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

  In addition, a part or all of the transmittance of the first display may be 0%. (The second display does not have to be transparent).

  Note that only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  In addition, a part or all of the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that a part of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  Note that all of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change from only one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing the state of the first display from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same or different from the low state before the change of the transmittance.

  The above-mentioned “at least a part of the first display is at least low in visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display from the player is at least difficult to view.

  The above-mentioned "at least a part of the first display is at least low in visibility" may indicate that at least a part of the first display is invisible to the player.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The second region may be a region including at least a part of the second display region.

  The first region may be a region including at least a part of the second display region.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first region corresponds to a part of a so-called center accessory.

  The second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second area corresponds to a decorative portion of the sub display device 808.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of reporting at least an error.

  The error notifying means includes a decoration lamp (notification by light emission), a speaker (notification by sound), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (characters and patterns are raised by light emission), a liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like.

  There is a first error in which an error is displayed on the display means such as the first display means and the second display means.

  There is a second error that does not display an error on the display means.

  The error display is the first error.

  The first error may be an error that is difficult for the player to notice if no error is displayed (no error notification). For example, the first error is a door opening error, a lower plate full tank error, or the like.

  The first error may be an error for warning the player of injustice. The pachinko machine 100 issues an error notification to warn the player of injustice when a radio wave, magnetism, vibration or the like from the outside is detected by a predetermined sensor.

  In addition, the first error may be an error for notifying a clerk of the gaming shop of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification for notifying an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a radio wave, magnetism, vibration, etc. from the outside are detected by a predetermined sensor.

  It should be noted that the second error may be an error that need not be resolved immediately. The second error is, for example, a door opening error or a lower plate full tank error.

  The second error is an error that is easily noticed by the player without displaying an error (for example, a game ball cannot be shot, an image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize ball is not paid out, and a production movable body 224. Error) such as does not work.

  Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error relating to the number of game balls to be paid out, a lower plate full tank error (bulb removal notification) that is notified when the lower plate is full, and an open condition for an attacker or electric chew. Abnormal winning error that is notified when the winning of the game ball to the attacker or Den Chu is detected when the above is not established. When a sensor (for example, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) detects fraud, an error that informs the fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), or when vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside The vibration detection error notified to (the vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning port 234 is openable, such as during a big hit game, or any of them. It may be left on the display means even in the gaming state), a game machine failure error for notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error related to an abnormality in the payout means, an error related to a defective connection of the board, and the effect movable body 224. There are errors related to abnormal stop positions.

  Either of the above errors may be the first error. Further, any of the above errors may be the second error.

  The error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning port 234 is openable, such as during a big hit game, or left on the display means in any game state. May be done.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a storage dish (for example, a lower dish 128) capable of storing at least game balls.

  The above-mentioned operation means is capable of discharging at least the game balls stored in the storage tray when operated.

  The first display described above includes at least a notification prompting the player to eject the game ball from the storage dish.

  According to this configuration, since at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray is hidden by the effect display, the visibility of the notification is reduced, so that the player is concentrated on the effect display. Sometimes it can be entertained.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first operation means (for example, the ball ejection lever 132).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes second operation means (for example, a chance button 136).

  The operating means may be at least one of the first operating means and the second operating means.

  The operation means may be a chance button.

  The operation means may be a return button (for example, return operation button 142).

  The operating means may be a lending button (eg, ball lending operation button 140).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable display devices that are movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and vibrable). A liquid crystal display device, for example, is used as the movable display device.

  The visibility of a part of the first display may be reduced by moving one of the plurality of movable display devices.

  The visibility of the entire first display may be reduced by moving one of the plurality of movable display devices.

  By moving the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of part or all of the first display may be reduced.

  The visibility of part or the whole of the first display may be reduced by moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices.

  One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

  At least part of the display area of the movable display device is at least transparent. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the movable display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmissive and non-transmissive display areas. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transparent, the player can see the back surface (rear side) of the display area.

  At least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. A transparent plate or a glass plate made of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used for the movable display device. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamps arranged in the vicinity are lit, the transparent plate or the glass plate is provided with a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. It emits light on the design.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%.

  The movable display device may be entirely transparent.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%.

  At least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  At least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device has a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may be changed stepwise, and this stepwise change means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change from only one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other value.

  Note that the transmittance of the movable display device may be changed from a low transmittance state to a high transmittance state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high transmittance state to a low transmittance state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same or different from the low state before the change of the transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are respectively displayed, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high, and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  Display related to games includes, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, effect display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power-on display (power supply) During power-on, during power recovery, etc.), etc.

  While the player is operating the ball firing handle 134, there may be provided operation means (firing strength changing operation means) capable of at least changing the firing strength of the game ball. The launch strength of the game ball may be changed so as to become stronger only when the launch strength changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed to be stronger based on the launch intensity changing operation means being operated once. In this case, when the firing intensity changing operation means is further operated once, the firing intensity of the game ball may be returned to the original state.

  As an example of the first display, a display capable of notifying that the firing intensity changing operation means is being operated, a display prompting the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means, and a prompting of the operation cancellation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, pressing Display that prompts you to remove your hand from the firing intensity changing operation means, a display that reminds you of the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, an image that reminds you of the firing intensity changing operation means in the roulette effect of the electric tulong opening effect (for example, , In the case of performing a big hit game by right-handed, when the notice display of the big hit confirmation of the special figure variation game being executed) is stopped), etc.

  The display regarding the firing strength changing operation means may be different in display mode according to a plurality of game states (for example, during electric power support and during non-electric power support). In this case, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the emission intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during power support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-powered state). The display regarding the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of (in support) may not be hidden by the second display. Further, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the emission intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during electric support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-display) The display relating to the emission intensity changing operation means in the display mode of (electric power support) may be hidden by the second display.

  The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means may be in a display mode different from that of the right-handing notification (for example, a right-handing notification effect 724 described later), or may be a display mode included in the right-handing notification. The display mode may be the same as that of the hit notification.

The right-handed notification and the display relating to the emission intensity changing operation means may be such that the displayed periods partially overlap. The period in which "Please return the steering wheel to the left" at the end of electric support is, for example, the period from the end of electric support until the end of the fourth special figure variation game, "from the firing intensity changing operation means The period in which "Please release." Is, for example, the period from the end of the electric support to the end of the first special figure variation game.
[Eleventh Embodiment]

  Next, a game table according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 522 to 523. An example in which the visibility of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described with reference to FIG. 522. First, an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes will be described using FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (f).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (a), a first display 790 and a second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display 790 as shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (a). In this manner, by displaying the second display 792 on the front surface of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 792. In some cases, it may be less visible than the display 792 and the second display 792 may be more visible than the first display 790. Further, when the display is switched from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (a) to the state shown on the right side, the display may be switched stepwise. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 when the display switching is started. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the first display 790 that is moving is focused and the first display 790 is stopped. In some cases, it may be easier to see than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the display of the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (a) to the state shown on the left side. As a result, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. Further, when the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (a) to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched stepwise. For example, the first display 790 may be gradually separated from the second display 792 when the display switching is started. As a result, when the first display 790 overlaps the second display 792 and moves, the moving first display 790 is less visible than the stopped second display 792. In some cases, the display 790 of No. 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, and thus the moving first display 790 may be made easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (b), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, for example, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be darker as shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (b) based on the pressing of the chance button 136. Thereby, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed, the second display 792 whose display color is changed is made easier to see than the first display 790 which is not changed, It may be possible to make the second display 792, which is displayed behind the first display 790, less visible than the first display 790 after the display color has been changed.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the display of the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (b) to the state shown on the left side. In this way, by changing the display color of the second display 792 to be lighter while the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped, the second display 792 is overlapped with the front surface. It may be possible to make the first display 790 more visible and the second display 792 less visible.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (c), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined gap D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the distance between the first display 790 and the second display 792 becomes D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (c). Become. This may change the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the display of the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (c) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed so that the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be easily distinguished.

  In addition, when stepwise switching from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (c) to the state shown on the right side or from the state shown on the right side to the state shown on the left side, attention is paid to the moving display. In some cases, the display that is moved among the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be made easier to see than the display that is not moved.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (d), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped and displayed. In this case, for example, based on the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in the right side of FIG. 522 (d), the front and rear relationship between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed, The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. As described above, by displaying the second display 792 displayed on the back surface of the first display 790 on the front surface of the first display 790, the second display 792 is made easier to see than the first display 790. In some cases, the first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the display of the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (d) to the state shown on the left side. By displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back surface of the second display 792 on the front surface of the second display 792, the first display 790 is made easier to see than the second display 792, and the second display 792 is displayed. In some cases, the display 792 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped, When the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, for example, the first display 790 is displayed as shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (e) based on the pressing of the chance button 136. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, by displaying the first display 790 brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed, the first display 790 can be kept in a state in which it is easier to see than the second display 792. There are cases.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the display of the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (e) to the state shown on the left side. As described above, by displaying the first display 790 brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed so that both the first display 790 and the second display 792 are brightened, the first display 790 is displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to maintain a state that is easier to see than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include a decorative design, a hold icon, a variable icon, a performance display such as a character image or a background image, an error display, an operation request notification display, and a tutorial display. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, an error display and a display of a decorative pattern), or the same type of display (for example, three decorative patterns). It is also possible to use a combination of two of the above and the hold icons). Further, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a part or only a part of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . This may make one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 less visible (more visible) than the other.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light black is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. Has become. In this way, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in a light black color close to white becomes relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black. Is relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 522 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 522 (f), and only the background is displayed. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790, which is displayed in a light black color that is close to white, is relatively easy to see, and the second display 792 that is displayed in gray that is close to black is relatively visible. It becomes difficult to see. As described above, even when the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may change due to the change of the background color. is there.

  In addition, in FIGS. 522 (a) to (f), an example in which the visibility of the two displays, the first display 790 and the second display 792, changes is shown, but a display not related to the change in visibility (for example, , A third display). For example, when three of display A, display B, and display C are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, display A corresponds to the first display 790 and display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be. In this case, it may be possible to maintain the visibility of the display C while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790 and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, it may be possible to maintain the visibility of the display A while changing the visibility of the display B and the display C. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790 and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, it may be possible to maintain the visibility of the display B while changing the visibility of the display C and the display A.

  In addition, in FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (f), an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes is shown, but the display related to the change in visibility is 3 There may be more than one. For example, the display A and the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. As a result, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 522 (g), the background color of the holding icon display area 794 displaying the holding icons a1 to a4 is different from the other background colors, and the holding icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes them. When the display shown in FIGS. 522 (a) to 522 (e) is switched in the hold icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display is changed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, the area to be displayed can be limited to the reserved icon display area 794.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of two displays changes depending on the brightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. 523. FIG. 523 shows a color chart when the gradation levels of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation values and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example will be described in which the gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed so as to overlap the circular image are changed. The circular image and the square image are displayed in an overlapping manner so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the square coincide with each other. Moreover, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. Further, the circular image is displayed in a layer in front of the square image. The transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 523, the R value, G value, and B value of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and the R value, G value, and B value of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are made the same, and the gradation values of the respective colors are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, 255. Similarly, the R value, G value, and B value of the square image are made the same, and the gradation value of each color is changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, 255.

  For example, as shown in the first row, first column of FIG. 523, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image are When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, so that they cannot be distinguished and recognized. Further, as shown in the eighth row and eighth column of FIG. 523, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value and G value of the square image are When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, and therefore the two cannot be distinguished and recognized. In this way, when the difference in brightness between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row, first column of FIG. 523, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value and G value of the square image are When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white and the square image is displayed in black, so that they can be easily identified. Also, as shown in the first row, eighth column of FIG. 523, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0,0,0)), and the R value and G value of the square image are When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black and the square image is displayed in white, so that they can be easily identified. In this way, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  In this way, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, if the brightness difference between the two images is the same or small, it is difficult to identify the two images and the visibility of the two images is also reduced. be able to. Further, if the difference in brightness between the two images is increased, the two images can be easily identified and the visibility of the two images can be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the brightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer of the two images displayed in an overlapping manner. It is effective to put on. Further, in order to improve the visibility of the display of the player, an image displayed in the inner layer and an image displayed in the front layer may have a hue difference or a saturation difference. However, even if the image displayed on the back layer and the image displayed on the front layer have different hues, if the lightness and the saturation are almost the same, the visibility of the two images deteriorates. . Therefore, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to give the two images a brightness difference.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 522 to 523 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208), and the display means has a first display (for example, lower plate full tank error display). (Ball-out notification) 704, attention calling notification effect 722, right-handing notification effect 724, attention calling notification effect 750, attention calling information effect 772, first display 790) can be displayed at least, and the display means is , A second display (for example, an effect display, a tutorial display 709, a pre-reading notice notification effect 730, 740, an electric chu long opening effect, an electric chu long opening false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, and a second display 792). The display means is at least displayable, and the display means displays a third display (for example, a ball shortage error display 706, a fourth symbol display area 208e It is possible to display at least a fourth symbol, the number of reserved special figures displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f, and at least a part of the first display is the first display means. In the case of the state, the visibility is at least low, the first state is a state in which the second display is at least displayed on the display means, of the third display At least a part of the display means is more visible than the first display when the display means is in the first state.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player should focus on the display means in order to recognize the content of the notification by the first display and concentrate the player on the game. May be possible. In addition, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be low, it may be possible to direct the player's line of sight to the second display. Further, even in the first state, the third display is easy to confirm, and therefore, it may be easier for the player to confirm the third display while looking at the second display.

  The first display may be displayed at the first display position on the display means. The second display may be displayed at the second display position on the display means. The third display may be displayed at the third display position on the display means.

  The third display position may be a position with higher visibility than the first display position when the display means is in the first state. The first display position may be a position with lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state. The first display position may be a position with lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state. Part or all of the third display may be at least more visible than the first display when the display means is in the first state.

(2) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first display is a display relating to a game, and the second display is an effect display.

  According to this configuration, since the display related to the game is hard to see by the effect display, the effect display may be able to be paid attention to by the player. Further, since the player can easily confirm the third display even when the effect display is displayed, it may be easier to confirm the third display while watching the effect display.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, at least part of the first display is at least more visible than the first state when the display means is in the second state. Yes, the second state is a state in which the second display is not at least displayed on the display means.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be easier for the player to guess what is happening.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible than the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be more visible when the display means is in the second state than in one or more states including the first state.

  Part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state, and one or more different from the first state and the second state. The visibility may be lower than that in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means.

  The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means.

(4) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the second display is at least displayed on the front side of the first display.

  According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display, so that it may be possible to make the second display easier for the player to pay attention to. . Further, in the case of the first state, the first display is displayed behind the second display, which may allow the player to carefully watch the first display.

  The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display. The second display may be displayed in front of one or a plurality of displays including the first display. The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and on the back side of one or a plurality of displays other than the first display.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the first display is an error display.

  According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, the visibility of the error display is reduced to make the player think that the notification content of the error display is to be recognized, and carefully watch the error display to the player. It may be possible to Further, since the visibility of the second display is higher than that of the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the second display. Also, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display even when an error display is displayed.

(6) In the pachinko machine 100, the first display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display, and the third display is the second display. It is characterized by containing at least information of higher importance to the player than the display of.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of a part of the first display including information of high importance to the player is hidden by a part of the effect display and deteriorates, so that the line of sight of the game is directed toward the display means. You may be able to. Further, since the third display, which is highly important to the player, can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with peace of mind.

  The first display may be a display containing only information that is more important to the player than the second display. The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display. The first display is one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background). ) May be included.

  The first display is one or more information that is more important to the player than the second display, and one or more information that is less important than one or more display different from the second display (for example, , A character image, a background, etc.). The third display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display. The third display may be a display that includes only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display is one or more pieces of information of higher importance to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information of lower importance than the second display (for example, a character image or background). ) May be included.

  The third display is one or more information that is more important to the player than the second display, and one or more information that is less important than one or more display different from the second display (for example, , A character image, a background, etc.).

(7) The pachinko machine 100 is provided with at least operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132, a chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first display is for the player. On the other hand, it is characterized by including at least a notification prompting the user to operate the operating means.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification for prompting the operation of the operation means is hidden by the effect display, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is reduced, so that the player is concentrated on the effect display to play the game. May be entertaining. Further, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned "position where visibility is at least higher than the first display" is a position where the player can always confirm at least the third display when the second display is displayed. As a result, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. It may be possible to make it difficult to miss the display of.

  The above-mentioned “information of high importance to the player” may include at least information regarding payout of the game balls (for example, notification regarding a ball removal, an error regarding a payout means, etc.). This may prevent the player from missing information relating to the profit of the game.

  In addition, the above-mentioned "information of high importance to the player" is information on the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is changing), the variable display of the decorative symbol, the hold icon, and the hit notification. It may include at least a notification of right-handed driving, a notification of "return the steering wheel to the left", and the like.

  In addition, the “information of high importance to the player” may include at least information regarding an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (abnormality of board connection, abnormal position detection of the production movable body, etc.).

  In addition, the above-mentioned “information of high importance to the player” may include at least information regarding fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a first display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a second display unit (for example, the sub display device 808). The "display means" may be at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols for ordinary figures. For example, if one of the winning symbols is won, the blade member 232a is opened so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 even in the non-electrical support, and if the other winning symbol is won, the non-electrical support is achieved. The blade member 232a may be opened to the extent that the game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. If the other winning symbol is won during the non-electric power support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the normal figure variation game may be executed in the electric Chulong opening effect.

<Other Embodiments (Embodiment 1 of Character Select Effect)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 524 to 545, a gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the button operation is enabled even when the button operation display is not displayed) The ball game table and the rotating drum game table such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. Note that, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 524 to 545 are used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 524 to 545 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 524 to 545, the same reference numerals are used as the same components as in the above-described embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 524. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 525 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 524 seen from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power management unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game shop and an RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 526 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. And the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with blades that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blades are closed. When stopped and displayed, the blade opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed. In this case, the door member is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 527. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that the counter is built-in), and signals output from various sensors 320 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening are received, and the amplification result and the reference voltage are received. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result with the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the diagram display device 210 and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding run). 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high-precision middle lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the production movable body 224. The circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the chance button 136, and the detection from the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a signal to the basic circuit 402 and a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power management unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, by using FIGS. 528 (a) to (c), the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped (special figure 1, special figure 2). The decorative symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of public symbols that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 528 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The first special figure variation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the first special figure starting port 230, and that the ball entered the second special figure starting port 232. The second special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects. When the first special figure variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. . Also, when the second special figure variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2". I do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, Further, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present invention) has passed, the second special figure display device 214 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 in a stopped state. To do. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as "symbol fluctuation stop display". As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 528 (a), three types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol C” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design (big hit design 1), "Special drawing B" is a 15-round (15R) big hit design (big hit design 2), which is a predetermined number of times after the big hit game ( In the present embodiment, the state is changed to 100 times). The electric power support state means a state in which the blade 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electricity chew) is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 seconds open, 0.5 second closed). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. . The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, the state of transitioning to the electric support state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the electrical support state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. That is, the above-mentioned big hit symbol 1 is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state, and the big hit symbol 2 is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These big hit symbols 1 and big hit symbols 2 are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large. In addition, “special figure C” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the amount of profit to be given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  FIG. 528 (b) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. On the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the first special figure starting port 232 (conditions for starting the first special figure variation game), decorative symbol display “Decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration” in each symbol display region of the left symbol display region, the middle symbol display region, and the right symbol display region of the device 208. “Variable display of decorative pattern” is performed to switch the display in the order of “10” → “decoration 1” → ... In addition, for example, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a pattern combination in which three identical decorative patterns corresponding to the 15R big hit are arranged (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or "decoration" 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ") is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-" Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the deviation of “special drawing C”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

  FIG. 528 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure, the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In addition, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process described below at regular intervals in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a first sub-control) Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, setting for interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value for stack pointer (main setting), all storage areas of RAM 308 Performs initialization, etc.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, the general figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer The two random number counters for generating random number values (timer number determining random number values) are updated. For example, if the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the interrupt permission is set and the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 stores a first special figure advance notice lottery random number counter that generates a first special figure advance notice lottery random value that can take a value in the range 0 to 127, and also a value in the range 0 to 127. A second special figure advance notice lottery random number counter for generating the obtained second special figure advance notice lottery random number value is provided. In this step S105, the value of each of these counters is updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S103 and step S105 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors is performed via the input port of the I / O 310. A signal is input to monitor the presence / absence of a detection signal, and the signal is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared with each other. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-mentioned step S201, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 527 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S203 and S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process of this embodiment, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S103 is updated and then used in the main control unit 300. Two random number counters for respectively generating a numerical value (a big hit determination random value) and a special figure 2 random number (a big hit determination random value) are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the special figure 1 random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the special figure 1 random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number value of Toku-zu 1 that varies in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for special figure 1 random value generation, and the special figure The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating one random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value has made one round next time. I'll do it.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is set. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S211, general figure related processing is performed. In this universal figure related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure is performed. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is kept open in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S213 without doing anything.

  Further, in the universal figure-related process of step S211, the universal figure-related lottery process is subsequently performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, special figure state update processing (special figure 2 state update processing and special figure 1 state update processing) and special figure related lottery processing (special figure 2 related lottery processing and special figure 1 related lottery processing) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure-related processing in the middle of the special figure variation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), turning on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeated. Lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag, a first off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and the like. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs finalized display of the big hit symbol, the outlying symbol, and the like. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  In addition, in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215), 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is used in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a standby period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 In order to do so, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. And a signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and the closing period is indicated in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. Further, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern. Information indicating the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished. To set. Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the first out flag is turned on. When the first deviation flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) However, the special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  In step S213, subsequently, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process) is performed. In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure status update processing is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special diagram 2 is performed first, and then the special figure related lottery process (special diagram 1-related lottery process) for the special diagram 1 is performed. Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. It should be noted that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, finish effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are made up of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command setting transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the symbol variation. In the case of a stop command, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of the round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure-related process, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, and the pending state are held. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is set. In the above general command rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation Information indicating the number of games and the like is set. In the above-described general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the suspended first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation Information indicating the number of games and the like is set. Further, in this step S215, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, output schedule information and payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. It should be noted that the output schedule information and the payout request information are composed of 1 byte. Strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set), and power-on information is set in bit 6 (when set, It indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of payout requests after encryption processing. I am trying.

  In step S217, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  A step S219 carries out a device monitoring process. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the input port state updating process of step S201 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error, When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. To do. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process of step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

<Data table of main controller>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Table for pre-reading the results>
The win / loss prefetch table shown in FIG. 530 (a) associates the type of special drawing lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the win / fail prefetch result. It is an example of a data table stored by storing.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variation game is a win (big hit) based on this win / fail prefetch table and the information (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state (non-win). A special figure pre-reading lottery is performed to determine in advance whether or not the result is out.

  In addition, the special figure lottery state information is information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure variation game is determined to be won at a predetermined low probability (in this example, about 1/300 (= 218/65536)), and a low probability. Higher probability (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536)) includes information indicating a high probability state that the special figure variation game is won, but hereinafter, these are simply low probability ( Or there is no probability change) and high probability (or there is probability change).

  The lottery data of the win / loss look-ahead table is lottery data used to determine the win / loss look-ahead result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot as the result of the pre / failure prefetching. On the other hand, when the special drawing lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the winning / failing prefetching result is a deviation.

  In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the low probability is 1000 to 1217 (the size of the numerical range is large). 218), the probability of determining a big hit with a low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data in the high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining the big hit is approximately 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).

<Table for pre-reading results of special drawing validity>
The special figure win / loss prefetch result table shown in FIG. 530 (b) is an example of a data table in which the win / fail prefetch result of the above-mentioned special figure variation game, lottery data, and the special figure prefetch result are stored in association with each other. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation game win / failure pre-reading result is a big hit, this special figure pre-reading table, special figure fluctuation game win / fail pre-reading result, and big hit special drawing decision The big hit type pre-reading lottery for judging the big hit type (special map pre-reading result) in advance based on the random number for use is performed.

  For example, if the result of pre-reading special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, and the random number for special figure determination for big hit is a numerical value of 0 to 49, select big hit symbol 1 as the special figure pre-read result and use it for big hit When the random number for special figure determination is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as the special figure prefetching result. In the present embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for determining the special drawing for big hit is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the winning / discarding pre-reading result of the special figure fluctuation game is out of place, the special figure C (outside design) is selected as the special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.

<Validity judgment table>
The win / no-judgment table shown in FIG. 531 (a) associates types of special-drawing lottery states (special-drawing probabilities) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, lottery data, and win / loss determination results. It is an example of a data table stored by storing.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variation game is a win (big hit) based on this win / failure determination table and the special figure lottery state information (special figure probability) (non-win). A special drawing win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not to leave.

  The lottery data of the win / loss determination table is lottery data used to determine the win / loss determination result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained big hit determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure variation game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, if the special figure lottery state is a low probability state, and the obtained random number for jackpot determination is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined to be out of the special figure variation game and the jackpot flag is set to OFF. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the low probability is 1000 to 1217 (the size of the numerical range is large). Since it is 218), the winning probability of the big hit in the low probability special figure variation game is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability special figure variation game is about 1/60. (= 1090/65536), and the winning probability of the big hit in the special figure variation game is set so that the higher probability is higher than the lower probability.

<Table for determining special maps>
The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 531 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-mentioned special figure variation game win / fail judgment result, lottery data, and special figure decision result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation game hit determination result is a big hit, this special figure determination table, the special figure fluctuation game hit determination result, and big hit time special figure determination The jackpot type lottery for determining the jackpot type (special figure determination result) is performed based on the random number for use.

  For example, if the hit determination result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, and the random number for the big hit special figure determination is a numerical value of 0 to 49, the big hit design 1 is selected as the special figure determination result, and the big hit is used. When the random number for special figure determination is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as the special figure determination result. In the present embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for determining the special drawing for big hit is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). Further, when the hit determination result of the special figure variation game is out, the special figure C (outgoing symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.

<Table set selection table>
FIG. 531 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the table set selection table. The table set selection table is a data table that stores the above-described special figure determination result, the number of times of special figure change, and the timer selection table in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses this table set selection table, and based on the selected special figure determination result, the number of special figure fluctuations and the timer selection table. A table set selection lottery is performed.

  For example, when the selected special figure determination result is the big hit symbol 1 (special figure A), the number of fluctuations is 90, the timer selection table is a combination of table 2, and the number of fluctuations is 10 and the timer selection table is a table. The combination of No. 3, the number of fluctuations of 0, and the combination of Table 2 are selected by the timer selection table.

<Special figure timer number selection table>
FIG. 532 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure timer number selection table. This special figure timer number selection table, the special figure determination result based on the special figure determination table described above, the timer selection table described above, and the special figure variation game holding stored in the above-mentioned special figure holding number storage area It is the data table which linked | related and memorize | stored the lottery data classified by the number, and the timer number determination result.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes a special figure timer number selection table, a special figure determination result based on the special figure determination table described above, a timer selection table selected by the table set selection lottery, the special figure described above. The special figure timer number lottery for determining the timer number is performed based on the number of holdings and the random number value for determining the timer number. For example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is a special figure C (departure pattern), the above-mentioned timer selection table is Table 1, the number of special figure reservations is 0 to 2, and the acquired random number value for timer number determination is 0 to 89. If it is in the range of, the timer 3 (variation time 10 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In addition, for example, the above-mentioned special figure decision result is the big hit design 1 (special drawing A) or the big hit design 2 (special drawing B), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1, the special drawing reservation number is 3, acquired When the random number value for determining the timer number is in the range of 0 to 1, the timer 4 (fluctuation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range of the random number for determining the timer number is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100).

<Variable time table>
FIG. 533 is a diagram showing an example of the variable time table. This fluctuation time table is a data table in which the above-mentioned timer number determination result and the fluctuation time are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a fluctuation time based on this fluctuation time table and the above-mentioned timer number determination result. For example, when the above-mentioned timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the variation time, and when the above-mentioned timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the variation time.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 534. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, chance button control processing is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, the image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Character select production>
Next, the character select effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. 535 is a diagram showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 536 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination), the main control unit 300 causes the first sub control unit 400 to execute the character select effect in the command setting transmission process of step S215. A character select effect start command for instructing is transmitted. Next, in the special figure-related processing of step S213, the main control unit 300 detects winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 29 seconds, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234). After a signal for holding the door member in the open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, at a timing when the predetermined opening period ends, a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second). ), The signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the opening / closing control (big hit game) of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). The effect shown in FIG. 535 is an example of the character select effect executed in the 10th round (round) of the big hit game.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the character select effect start command described above starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the start condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied). . The character select effect according to the present embodiment is the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 535 (a) to (c) and the character selection effect shown in (d), (f), (h), and (j) of FIG. It consists of different types of performance.

<Character introduction production>
First, the character introduction effect will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (in this example, the hall) on the front center of the display area, as shown in FIG. An image in which the second character (the grandfather in this example) is located on the left rear side and the third character (the princess in this example) is located on the right rear side (hereinafter referred to as the “introductory image of the first character (lord)”). (May be called), image data of an image containing the character "Please select your favorite character!", And an image showing the current round number (in this example, an image containing the character 10R). Processing such as reading image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction of step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. In the next step S601, the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 9A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the second character (grandpa) and the first character (lord) in the effect control process of step S309, as shown in FIG. The third character (princess) was located at the second character (grandpa), and the third character (princess) was located at the right rear where the third character (princess) was located at the front center. Image data of moving images (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second character (grandfather) introduction image”) moving to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction of step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. After that, in the next step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG. 7B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the third character (princess) and the second character (grandpa) in the effect control process of step S309, as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the second character (grandpa) was located on the right rear side where the first character (lord) was located, and the first character (lord) was located on the third character (princess). Image data of moving images (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “third character (princess) introduction image”) moving to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Next, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets a command instructing to transfer (overwrite) the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then In step S601, the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, during execution of the character introduction effect, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect data updated in step S309 (even if it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed in the opportunity button control process in step S311). In the example, the processing of changing the (effect data for character introduction effect) to effect data in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 is not performed. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effect shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 536 is set to the button non-reception period in which the chance button 136 is not accepted (the depression operation of the chance button 136 is ignored). .

<Character selection production>
Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 executes the character selection effect after executing the above-described character introduction effect for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the effect control process of step S309, the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. , The second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear, the third character (princess) is located on the right rear, and an image in which the first character (lord) at the center of the front is conspicuously displayed brightly (hereinafter, " The image data of the first character (temporarily selected image) may be referred to as "temporary selected image of first character", the image data of the image showing the current round number, the image data of the image imitating the chance button 136, and the "button. The image data of the image including the characters "Press to select a character!" Is read from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436, and then, in the next step. In S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 7D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this display, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character identification information (for example, numerical value 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character (donor) is being displayed in the RAM 408. It is stored in the character identification information storage area provided in.

  During execution of this character selection effect, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect data updated in step S309 when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed in the opportunity button control process in step S311. In the example, it is configured to perform a process of changing (effect data for character selection effect) to effect data according to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 536 is set to the button reception period for receiving the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 535 (e), if the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates it in step S309. As for the previous presentation data, the first character (lord) is located at the third character (princess) in the center of the front where the second character (grandpa) was located at the first character (lord). A moving image in which the third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the second character (grandpa) was located, and the second character (grandpa) moves to the front center in the right rear. A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “temporary selected moving image of second character (grandpa)”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG. 6F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character identification information (for example, the numerical value 2 which indicates that the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) is being displayed. ) Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 537 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character moving display) of the above-mentioned second character (grandpa). Note that (a), (b), and (f) in the same figure are views corresponding to the above-mentioned FIGS. 535 (d), (e), and (f), and (c) to (e) in the same figure show It is a figure showing the mode of change of the moving picture between Drawings 535 (d)-(f).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. ), The second character (grandpa) is displayed brightly, and the second character (grandpa) is gradually moved from the left rear to the center of the front surface. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the third character (princess) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (grandpa). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (lord) in a dark state and synchronizes with the moving display of the second character (grandpa) and the third character (princess), and at the front center. Move to the right rear from to display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG. 5F and FIG. 535F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 535, subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control processing of step S311, as shown in FIG. The last effect data updated in S309 is displayed in the center of the front where the third character (princess) was located where the second character (grandpa) was, The third character (princess) is moved to the right rear, which was located, the first character (lord) is moved to the left rear, where the third character (princess) was located, and to the center of the front. The process of changing to the image data of the brightened moving image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “third character (princess) temporarily selected moving image”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7H is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) of the same figure, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed in the chance button control processing of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the previous button updated in step S309. The production data is displayed on the right rear side where the third character (princess) is located at the second character (grandpa) in the front center where the first character (lord) is located at the third character (princess). In addition, a moving image (first image) in which the third character (princess) moves to the left rear of the position where the first character (lord) was located, and the first character (lord) that moves to the front center is brightened ( The process of changing to the image data of the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (lord) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 11 (j) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, every time the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the temporary selection moving image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. Of the character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that the second character (grandpa) is temporarily selected and displayed, and the character identification indicating that the display is performed is displayed. Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIG. 6 (h) and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed. ) Memory → ... in the order of switching the display of the decorative pattern display device 208, and overwriting and storing character identification information for specifying the temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area. Carried out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 535 (k), the main control unit 300, in the special figure-related processing of step S213 described above, when the jackpot game end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time (for example, after starting a round) (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have been won in the variable winning port 234 during one round), for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234. A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332, and the general command special winning opening close setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process of step S215, and the character is displayed in the first sub-control unit 400. A character select effect end command for ending the execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this character select effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from a plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition when the command is received. In the present embodiment, the character identification information stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (lord)) is provided in the RAM 408 as the character determination information. Store (copy) in the confirmed information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (lord) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (lord)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, “character to be determined!”) Indicating the automatically selected character (lord). And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the character determination image as shown in FIG. 1L is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the above-mentioned button non-operation during the period indicated by (k) to (l) in FIG. 536, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

<Button operation during character movement display>
Next, a change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-described character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 538 is a diagram showing an example of interrupting the character movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the moving display of the second character (grandpa) is started. Then, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the moving display of the second character (grandpa) ((e) in the figure), the second sub-display during the moving display is displayed. Instead of the character (grandpa), a moving display of the third character (princess) is performed as shown in FIGS.

  More specifically, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (grandpa) ((e) in the figure), the second character is displayed. (Grandpa) is moved from the position shown in (d) of the figure to the center of the front shown in (f) of FIG. ), The display is moved to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the center of the front as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. Move display is performed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (lord) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (grandpa) from the center of the front to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (lord). Move display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7I is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 539 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the moving display of the second character (grandpa) is started. Then, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (grandpa) (FIG. 6E), FIG. ), The moving display of the second character (grandpa) is continued, and subsequently, as shown in (h) to (k) of FIG. A movement display for moving the character (princess) from the left rear to the center of the front is displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (lord) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (grandpa) from the center of the front to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (lord). Move display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 9K is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

<Second example of character select effect>
Next, a second example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 540 and 541. Note that FIG. 540 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 541 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 535 and 536, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect is finished. Although shown, in this second example, the jackpot game end condition (in this example, during one round, during the character introduction effect (during the button non-reception period effect) shown in FIGS. 540 (a) to (c). This is an example in which a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are won in the variable winning port 234, that is, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 535 and 536, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character select information storage area in the character identification information storage area at the time when the character select effect end command is received based on the establishment of the jackpot game end condition. The stored information is stored (copied) in the above-mentioned character confirmation information storage area as the character confirmation information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). However, in this second example, the character select effect end When the command is received, the character identification information (a numerical value indicating the second character (grandfather) in this example) determined by a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from 1 to 3) 2) as the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) as the character It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  In addition, the "predetermined condition" is not limited to the lottery, and the character identification information may be determined based on, for example, the gaming state (the number of rounds during the big hit game, the number of pending special figure variation games, etc.). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected last time, or may be determined in advance as the character identification information selected by the player.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (grandpa) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (grandpa)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, “character determined to be grandpa!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (grandpa). And the image data of the image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, the image containing the character 10R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 540 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the period shown by (a) to (e) in FIG. 541, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example), by using the above-mentioned button non-operation. The acceptance period is set and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

<Third example of character select effect>
Next, a third example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 542 and 543. 542 is a diagram showing a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 543 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 535 and 536, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect is finished. Although shown, in the third example, after the character introduction effect (button non-acceptance period) shown in FIGS. 542 (a) to (c) ends, the character selection effect (button acceptance period) shown in FIG. 542 (d). In this example, the jackpot game ending condition is satisfied without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 535 and 536, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character select information storage area in the character identification information storage area at the time when the character select effect end command is received based on the establishment of the jackpot game end condition. An example is shown in which the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character confirmation information storage area as the character confirmation information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). However, in the third example, At the time of receiving the character select production end command, the character identification information (in this example, the third character (princess) in a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery that determines one numerical value from 1 to 3) is determined. The numerical value 3) indicating) is set as the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) as described above. Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (princess) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 3 indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “decided to be a princess!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (princess). And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 542 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the period shown by (e) to (f) in FIG. 543, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect until the start of the next round (11R in this example), by pressing the button The acceptance period is set and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the character select effect is finished at the timing when the variable winning a prize hole 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state is shown. However, as shown in FIG. After changing to the state, the closed state may be held for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and then the character select effect may be ended.

<Other example of character select production>
Next, another example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIG. 545. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the first sub-control unit 400 is arranged such that the first character (lord) located at the center of the front surface of the display area is surrounded by an elliptical cursor as shown on the left side of FIG. In addition, a process of displaying an image in which the second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear and the third character (princess) is located on the right rear is performed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), the first character (lord) as shown on the right side of FIG. Is on the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, on the left rear where the third character (princess) was located on the second character (grandpa), and the second character (grandpa) is on the left. The first character (lord) was moved to the center of the front where the character (lord) was located, and the second character (grandpa) at the center of the front was displayed in the display area of the image decoration pattern display device 208 surrounded by the elliptical cursor. Perform processing to display. As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by using a graphic such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an elliptical cursor for the first character (lord) located in the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the drawing. A process of displaying an image in which the second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear side and the third character (princess) is located on the right rear side is surrounded in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), as shown on the right side of the figure, the first to third characters are displayed. Without moving, the cursor located at the location of the first character (lord) is moved to the third character (princess) on the right rear side. As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the display position of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6C, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the figure, has an area (in this example, an area located in the center of the display area among a plurality of rectangular areas). , "M3: Sense or Reality") is set to a background color different from the background colors of other images. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating in order from the bottom to the top, the background color of the area located in the center of the display area (in this example, the area including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background colors of other images. Set to. As in this example, the color of a specific area may be different from the color of the other area to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5D, the character to be selected based on the predetermined condition described with reference to FIG. 542 is surrounded by a cursor, and the automatically selected character is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the automatically selected character can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the selection of the character. A player who wants to select another character can change to a desired character in advance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, a predetermined symbol display device (for example, special figure 1 display device, When the specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device, the decorative symbol display device), from a predetermined time (for example, after the symbol variation stop display in which the specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed), a predetermined period When the symbol fluctuation stop display of the number of times is performed, etc., the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage (for example, the state in which the door member of the variable winning port 234 is closed, a predetermined value) From the control state in which the symbol fluctuation stop display is being performed on the symbol display device, the control state with certainty change, the control state with electric power support, etc.), the second advantage is higher than the first advantage. Second control state ( For example, control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure related processing) for shifting the control state to a big hit game state in which the door member of the variable winning port 234 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and a game is rendered. Effect image (for example, an image of a character select effect, during a period in which the symbol variation stop display is performed on a predetermined symbol display device, when a specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation stop display, a plurality of Effect display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image among the character images (A separate image display device) and a plurality of images (for example, the first to third images) during a predetermined image selection effect period (for example, character select effect). Storage means (for example, a character identification information storage area provided in the RAM 408) for storing specific image information (for example, character identification information) capable of specifying the image selected by the player from among the (character image). Depending on the player, the effect control means (eg, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500) that causes the effect display unit to display the image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage unit. A game console including an operation receiving unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation, wherein the image selection effect period is a predetermined first period (for example, a character introduction effect execution period). The effect control means includes a predetermined second period (for example, a character selection effect execution period) started after the start of the first period, The specific image information for specifying the image to be displayed on the effect display unit is stored in the storage unit based on the selection operation by the player received by the operation receiving unit during the second period. If the predetermined ending condition of the image selection effect period is satisfied before the start condition of the predetermined second period is satisfied (for example, the character introduction effect which is the button non-reception period is ended) (for example, One or both of a case where a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after starting the round and a case where a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have been won in the variable winning port 234 during one round. To be satisfied or other predetermined conditions are satisfied), a predetermined image (for example, the central character in FIG. 540 (e) or FIG. 542 (f)) is selected from the plurality of images on behalf of the player. An image, a predetermined character image (for example, a character image showing a hall, a character image selected by the player in the previous character select effect) is selected, and the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display means. It is a game table characterized by that.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for a game player who advances a game quickly because he / she wants to enjoy the game property rather than the effect side, the image selection effect (character select effect) is canceled by the rapid progress of the game. In this case, the control means selects the image instead of the player, so that it is not necessary to force all the players to select the image. For this reason, it may be possible to allow a game to proceed in accordance with a variety of player personalities.

  Further, the effect control means is configured to ignore the selection operation by the player accepted by the operation accepting unit during the first period (for example, a character introduction effect execution period (button non-acceptance period)). Good.

  With such a configuration, by setting the effect period of the specific effect to be surely executed to the first period, the specific effect can be surely executed regardless of the selection operation of the player. There is.

  In addition, a variable prize that can change the open / closed state from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which game balls can be won more easily than the closed state. An opening (for example, a variable winning opening 234) is provided, and the second control state is a predetermined number of round operations for changing the open / closed state of the variable winning opening from the closed state to the open state a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), the first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the ending condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured such that it is established when the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning opening after the operation is started reaches or exceeds a specific number.

  With such a configuration, the image selection effect is performed during the small hit, the variable winning opening operation, the variable winning opening opening, or the big hit, so that the image can be displayed to the player who has completed the game in a scene advantageous to the player. May be selected, and it may be possible to entertain the game more. In addition, for the player who enjoys the game rather than the effect, that is, for the player who quickly enters the game ball into the variable winning opening, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection. It may be possible to proceed with the game.

  In addition, based on the operation of the player, a launching device (eg, launching device 110) that launches a game ball every time a predetermined launch period elapses, and the game ball launched by the launching device is made to flow down and the variable winning opening is A provided game area (for example, a game area 124) is provided, and the first period is shorter than a period (for example, 6 seconds) required to shoot a specific number of the game balls. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the game balls are accumulated to some extent just above the variable winning opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and the game balls are operating during the variable winning opening operation (for example, starting the round). By setting a difficult time if you do not have game skills, such as making multiple entrances to variable winning openings, it is possible to avoid losing the opportunity of image selection if the player who wants to select an image pays attention. In some cases, it is possible to allow the game progress according to the player.

  Further, a plurality of the variable winning opening, a game nail (for example, a game nail 238) that changes the direction of the game ball falling, and an entry area for the game ball shot by the launch device to enter. The plurality of variable winning openings provided in the game area are a first variable winning opening (for example, a variable winning opening arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 100) and a second variable winning opening (for example, a pachinko machine). 100 includes a variable winning opening arranged on the right side toward 100, the gaming nail, the gaming ball that has entered from the entry area may contact until reaching the second variable winning opening Is arranged so that the number of game nails that the game ball that has entered from the entry area may come into contact with before reaching the first variable winning port is increased, and the specific round motion is During the second control state Close state of Oite the first variable winning hole may be a round operation for a predetermined number of times change.

  With such a configuration, the game balls are accumulated to some extent just above the variable winning opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and the game balls are operated by the variable winning opening operation (for example, starting the round). Since a large number of variable winning openings are made to enter, if the player who wants to select an image pays attention, the opportunity for image selection is not lost, and it may be possible to progress the game according to the player.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the character select effect is performed by using the image (still image or moving image) has been shown, but the sound effect by the speaker 120, the effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and various lamps 418 are shown. You may perform the production by. Further, an example has been shown in which the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect control of the character select effect based on the command from the main control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and it goes without saying that various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 (1 type), it can be applied to a pachinko machine (2 types, 3 types), an enclosed pachinko machine, a pachi-lot machine, etc., and an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, It can also be applied to smart balls and the like.

  Further, for example, it is also applicable to a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of reels corresponding to each A stop switch that is provided to individually stop the rotation of the reels, a lottery unit that determines whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations are won by lottery, and the reels when stopped are displayed. An example is one that includes a determination unit that determines the winning of the winning combination depending on whether or not the symbol combination is a symbol combination of the winning combination internally won by the lottery unit.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which an operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the examples of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the examples of the present invention. It is not limited to one.

<Other Embodiments (Second Embodiment of Character Select Effect)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 546 to 567, a game table (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc.) according to another embodiment (second embodiment of character selection effect) of the present invention. The body game table) will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 546 to 567 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 546 to 567 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 546 to 567 are the same as those in the above-described embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 546. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 and serves as a vertically-oriented rectangular game machine base body. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 547 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 546 as viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power management unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game shop and an RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 548 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, special figure variation games are performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. And the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with blades that can be opened and closed on the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blades are closed. When stopped and displayed, the blade opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning a prize mouth 234 is provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed. In this case, the door member is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 549. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that the counter is built-in), and signals output from various sensors 320 including a ball detection sensor provided inside each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening are received, and the amplification result and the reference voltage are received. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result with the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the diagram display device 210 and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding run). 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high-precision middle lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 126. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 128, the counter circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the production movable body 224. The circuit 422, the effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the chance button 136, and the detection from the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a signal to the basic circuit 402 and a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental ball. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power management unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, by using FIGS. 550 (a) to (c), the special symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed (special symbols 1 and 2). The decorative symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of public symbols that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 550 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special drawing (special drawing 1, special drawing 2). The first special figure variation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the first special figure starting port 230, and that the ball entered the second special figure starting port 232. The second special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects. When the first special figure variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all the seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. . Also, when the second special figure variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2". I do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, Further, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present invention) has passed, the second special figure display device 214 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 in a stopped state. To do. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as "symbol fluctuation stop display". As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 550 (a), three types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol C” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design (big hit design 1), "Special drawing B" is a 15-round (15R) big hit design (big hit design 2), which is a predetermined number of times after the big hit game ( In the present embodiment, the state is changed to 100 times). The electric power support state means a state in which the blade 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 (electricity chew) is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 seconds open, 0.5 second closed). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. . The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, the state of transitioning to the electric support state is referred to as a universal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the electrical support state is referred to as a universal figure low probability state. That is, the above-mentioned big hit symbol 1 is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state, and the big hit symbol 2 is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These big hit symbols 1 and big hit symbols 2 are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large. In addition, “special figure C” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the amount of profit to be given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  FIG. 550 (b) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. On the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the first special figure starting port 232 (conditions for starting the first special figure variation game), decorative symbol display “Decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration” in each symbol display region of the left symbol display region, the middle symbol display region, and the right symbol display region of the device 208. “Variable display of decorative pattern” is performed to switch the display in the order of “10” → “decoration 1” → ... In addition, for example, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a pattern combination in which three identical decorative patterns corresponding to the 15R big hit are arranged (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or "decoration" 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ") is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-" Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the deviation of “special drawing C”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

  FIG. 550 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure, the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 551 (a). It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In addition, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process described below at regular intervals in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a first sub-control) Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, setting for interrupt prohibition, setting of stack initial value for stack pointer (main setting), all storage areas of RAM 308 Performs initialization, etc.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, the general figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer The two random number counters for generating random number values (timer number determining random number values) are updated. For example, if the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the interrupt permission is set and the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 stores a first special figure advance notice lottery random number counter that generates a first special figure advance notice lottery random value that can take a value in the range 0 to 127, and also a value in the range 0 to 127. A second special figure advance notice lottery random number counter for generating the obtained second special figure advance notice lottery random number value is provided. In this step S105, the value of each of these counters is updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of step S103 and step S105 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 551 (b). The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors is performed via the input port of the I / O 310. A signal is input to monitor the presence / absence of a detection signal, and the signal is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared with each other. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-mentioned step S201, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 549 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S203 and S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process of this embodiment, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S103 is updated and then used in the main control unit 300. Two random number counters for respectively generating a numerical value (a big hit determination random value) and a special figure 2 random number (a big hit determination random value) are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the special figure 1 random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the special figure 1 random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number value of Toku-zu 1 that varies in the numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for special figure 1 random value generation, and the special figure The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating one random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value has made one round next time. I'll do it.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is set. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S211, general figure related processing is performed. In this universal figure related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure is performed. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member is kept open in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S213 without doing anything.

  Further, in the universal figure-related process of step S211, the universal figure-related lottery process is subsequently performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, special figure state update processing (special figure 2 state update processing and special figure 1 state update processing) and special figure related lottery processing (special figure 2 related lottery processing and special figure 1 related lottery processing) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure-related processing in the middle of the special figure variation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), turning on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeated. Lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag, a first off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and the like. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs finalized display of the big hit symbol, the outlying symbol, and the like. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  In addition, in order to execute the general command rotation stop setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215), 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is used in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a standby period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 In order to do so, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member is held in the open state by the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. And a signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and the closing period is indicated in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. Further, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern. Information indicating the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished. To set. Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the first out flag is turned on. When the first deviation flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) However, the special region 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  In step S213, subsequently, the special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process) is performed. In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure status update processing is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special diagram 2 is performed first, and then the special figure related lottery process (special diagram 1-related lottery process) for the special diagram 1 is performed. Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. It should be noted that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), bit 11 -14 are command types (in this embodiment, commands such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, finish effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are made up of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command setting transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the symbol variation. In the case of a stop command, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of the round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure-related process, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, and the pending state are held. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is set. In the above general command rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation Information indicating the number of games and the like is set. In the above-described general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the suspended first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation Information indicating the number of games and the like is set. Further, in this step S215, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, output schedule information and payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. It should be noted that the output schedule information and the payout request information are composed of 1 byte. Strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set), and power-on information is set in bit 6 (when set, It indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of payout requests after encryption processing. I am trying.

  In step S217, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  A step S219 carries out a device monitoring process. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the input port state updating process of step S201 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error, When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. To do. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process of step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

<Data table of main controller>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Table for pre-reading the results>
The win / loss prefetch table shown in FIG. 552 (a) associates the type of special drawing lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the win / fail prefetch result. It is an example of a data table stored by storing.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variation game is a win (big hit) based on this win / fail prefetch table and the information (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state (non-win). A special figure pre-reading lottery is performed to determine in advance whether or not the result is out.

  In addition, the special figure lottery state information is information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure variation game is determined to be won at a predetermined low probability (in this example, about 1/300 (= 218/65536)), and a low probability. Higher probability (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536)) includes information indicating a high probability state that the special figure variation game is won, but hereinafter, these are simply low probability ( Or there is no probability change) and high probability (or there is probability change).

  The lottery data of the win / loss look-ahead table is lottery data used to determine the win / loss look-ahead result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot as the result of the pre / failure prefetching. On the other hand, when the special drawing lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the winning / failing prefetching result is a deviation.

  In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the low probability is 1000 to 1217 (the size of the numerical range is large). 218), the probability of determining a big hit with a low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the big hit lottery data in the high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining the big hit is approximately 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).

<Table for pre-reading results of special drawing validity>
The special figure win / loss prefetch result table shown in FIG. 552 (b) is an example of a data table in which the win / fail prefetch result of the above-mentioned special figure variation game, lottery data, and special figure prefetch result are stored in association with each other. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation game win / failure pre-reading result is a big hit, this special figure pre-reading table, special figure fluctuation game win / fail pre-reading result, and big hit special drawing decision The big hit type pre-reading lottery for judging the big hit type (special map pre-reading result) in advance based on the random number for use is performed.

  For example, if the result of pre-reading special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, and the random number for special figure determination for big hit is a numerical value of 0 to 49, select big hit symbol 1 as the special figure pre-read result and use it for big hit When the random number for special figure determination is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as the special figure prefetching result. In the present embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for determining the special drawing for big hit is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the winning / discarding pre-reading result of the special figure fluctuation game is out of place, the special figure C (outside design) is selected as the special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.

<Validity judgment table>
The win / loss determination table shown in FIG. 553 (a) associates the type of special drawing lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the game state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the win / loss determination result. It is an example of a data table stored by storing.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the lottery result of the special figure variation game is a win (big hit) based on this win / failure determination table and the special figure lottery state information (special figure probability) (non-win). A special drawing win / loss lottery is performed to determine whether or not to leave.

  The lottery data of the win / loss determination table is lottery data used to determine the win / loss determination result of the special figure variation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained big hit determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure variation game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, if the special figure lottery state is a low probability state, and the obtained random number for jackpot determination is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined to be out of the special figure variation game and the jackpot flag is set to OFF. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination random number value is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the low probability is 1000 to 1217 (the size of the numerical range is large). Since it is 218), the winning probability of the big hit in the low probability special figure variation game is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the jackpot lottery data in the high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability special figure variation game is about 1/60. (= 1090/65536), and the winning probability of the big hit in the special figure variation game is set so that the higher probability is higher than the lower probability.

<Table for determining special maps>
The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 553 (b) is an example of a data table in which the winning / decision result of the special figure variation game, the lottery data, and the special figure determination result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation game hit determination result is a big hit, this special figure determination table, the special figure fluctuation game hit determination result, and big hit time special figure determination The jackpot type lottery for determining the jackpot type (special figure determination result) is performed based on the random number for use.

  For example, if the hit determination result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, and the random number for the big hit special figure determination is a numerical value of 0 to 49, the big hit design 1 is selected as the special figure determination result, and the big hit is used. When the random number for special figure determination is a numerical value of 50 to 99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as the special figure determination result. In the present embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for determining the special drawing for big hit is 0 to 99 (the size of the numerical range is 100). Further, when the hit determination result of the special figure variation game is out, the special figure C (outgoing symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.

<Table set selection table>
FIG. 553 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the table set selection table. The table set selection table is a data table that stores the above-described special figure determination result, the number of times of special figure change, and the timer selection table in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses this table set selection table, and based on the selected special figure determination result, the number of special figure fluctuations and the timer selection table. A table set selection lottery is performed.

  For example, when the selected special figure determination result is the big hit symbol 1 (special figure A), the number of fluctuations is 90, the timer selection table is a combination of table 2, and the number of fluctuations is 10 and the timer selection table is a table. The combination of No. 3, the number of fluctuations of 0, and the combination of Table 2 are selected by the timer selection table.

<Special figure timer number selection table>
FIG. 554 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure timer number selection table. This special figure timer number selection table, the special figure determination result based on the special figure determination table described above, the timer selection table described above, and the special figure variation game holding stored in the above-mentioned special figure holding number storage area It is the data table which linked | related and memorize | stored the lottery data classified by the number, and the timer number determination result.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes a special figure timer number selection table, a special figure determination result based on the special figure determination table described above, a timer selection table selected by the table set selection lottery, the special figure described above. The special figure timer number lottery for determining the timer number is performed based on the number of holdings and the random number value for determining the timer number. For example, the above-mentioned special figure determination result is a special figure C (departure pattern), the above-mentioned timer selection table is Table 1, the number of special figure reservations is 0 to 2, and the acquired random number value for timer number determination is 0 to 89. If it is in the range of, the timer 3 (variation time 10 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In addition, for example, the above-mentioned special figure decision result is the big hit design 1 (special drawing A) or the big hit design 2 (special drawing B), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1, the special drawing reservation number is 3, acquired When the random number value for determining the timer number is in the range of 0 to 1, the timer 4 (fluctuation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the numerical value range of the random number for determining the timer number is 0 to 99 (the numerical value range is 100).

<Variable time table>
FIG. 555 is a diagram showing an example of the variable time table. This fluctuation time table is a data table in which the above-mentioned timer number determination result and the fluctuation time are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a fluctuation time based on this fluctuation time table and the above-mentioned timer number determination result. For example, when the above-mentioned timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the variation time, and when the above-mentioned timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the variation time.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 556. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, chance button control processing is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, the image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Character select production>
Next, the character select effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. 557 is a diagram showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 558 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination), the main control unit 300 causes the first sub control unit 400 to execute the character select effect in the command setting transmission process of step S215. A character select effect start command for instructing is transmitted. Next, in the special figure-related processing of step S213, the main control unit 300 detects winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 29 seconds, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234). After a signal for holding the door member in the open state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, at a timing when the predetermined opening period ends, a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second). ), The signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the opening / closing control (big hit game) of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). The effect shown in FIG. 557 is an example of the character select effect executed in the 10th round (round) of the big hit game.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the character select effect start command described above starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the start condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied). . The character select effect according to the present embodiment is the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 557 (a) to (c) and the character selection effect shown in (d), (f), (h), and (j) of FIG. It consists of different types of performance.

<Character introduction production>
First, the character introduction effect will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (in this example, the hall) at the front center of the display area, as shown in FIG. An image in which the second character (the grandfather in this example) is located on the left rear side and the third character (the princess in this example) is located on the right rear side (hereinafter referred to as the “introductory image of the first character (lord)”). (May be called), image data of an image containing the character "Please select your favorite character!", And an image showing the current round number (in this example, an image containing the character 10R). Processing such as reading image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction of step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. In the next step S601, the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 9A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the second character (grandpa) and the first character (lord) in the effect control process of step S309, as shown in FIG. The third character (princess) was located at the second character (grandpa), and the third character (princess) was located at the right rear where the third character (princess) was located at the front center. Image data of moving images (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second character (grandfather) introduction image”) moving to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction of step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. After that, in the next step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG. 7B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the third character (princess) and the second character (grandpa) in the effect control process of step S309, as shown in FIG. In the center of the front, the second character (grandpa) was located on the right rear side where the first character (lord) was located, and the first character (lord) was located on the third character (princess). Image data of moving images (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “third character (princess) introduction image”) moving to the left rear is read out from the ROM 406. Next, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets a command instructing to transfer (overwrite) the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then In step S601, the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, during execution of the character introduction effect, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect data updated in step S309 (even if it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed in the opportunity button control process in step S311). In the example, the processing of changing the (effect data for character introduction effect) to effect data in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 is not performed. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effect shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 558 is set to a button non-reception period in which the chance button 136 is not accepted (the depression operation of the chance button 136 is ignored). .

<Character selection production>
Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 executes the character selection effect after executing the above-described character introduction effect for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the effect control process of step S309, displays the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. , The second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear, the third character (princess) is located on the right rear, and an image in which the first character (lord) at the center of the front is conspicuously displayed brightly (hereinafter, " The image data of the first character (temporarily selected image) may be referred to as "temporary selected image of first character", the image data of the image showing the current round number, the image data of the image imitating the chance button 136, and the "button. The image data of the image including the characters "Press to select a character!" Is read from the ROM 406. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned plurality of image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436, and then, in the next step. In S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 7D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this display, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character identification information (for example, numerical value 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character (donor) is being displayed in the RAM 408. It is stored in the character identification information storage area provided in.

  During execution of this character selection effect, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect data updated in step S309 when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed in the opportunity button control process in step S311. In the example, it is configured to perform a process of changing (effect data for character selection effect) to effect data according to pressing of the chance button 136. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 558 is set to the button reception period for receiving the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 557 (e), when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates it in step S309. As for the previous presentation data, the first character (lord) is located at the third character (princess) in the center of the front where the second character (grandpa) was located at the first character (lord). A moving image in which the third character (princess) moves to the left rear where the second character (grandpa) was located, and the second character (grandpa) moves to the front center in the right rear. A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as “temporary selected moving image of second character (grandpa)”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG. 6F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character identification information (for example, the numerical value 2 which indicates that the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) is being displayed. ) Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 559 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the above-mentioned second character (grandpa). Note that (a), (b), and (f) in the same figure are views corresponding to the above-mentioned FIGS. 557 (d), (e), and (f), and (c) to (e) in the same figure show It is a figure which showed the mode of the change of the moving image between FIG. 557 (d)-(f).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. ), The second character (grandpa) is displayed brightly, and the second character (grandpa) is gradually moved from the left rear to the center of the front surface. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the third character (princess) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (grandpa). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the first character (lord) in a dark state and synchronizes with the moving display of the second character (grandpa) and the third character (princess), and at the front center. Move to the right rear from to display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) as shown in FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 557, subsequently, when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control processing of step S311, as shown in FIG. The last effect data updated in S309 is displayed in the center of the front where the third character (princess) was located where the second character (grandpa) was, The third character (princess) is moved to the right rear, which was located, the first character (lord) is moved to the left rear, where the third character (princess) was located, and to the center of the front. The process of changing to the image data of the brightened moving image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “third character (princess) provisionally selected moving image”) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7H is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) of the same figure, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed in the chance button control processing of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the previous button updated in step S309. The production data is displayed on the right rear side where the third character (princess) is located at the second character (grandpa) in the front center where the first character (lord) is located at the third character (princess). In addition, a moving image (first image) in which the third character (princess) moves to the left rear of the position where the first character (lord) was located, and the first character (lord) that moves to the front center is brightened ( The process of changing to the image data of the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (lord) is performed. As a result, the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (lord) as shown in FIG. 11 (j) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, every time the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the temporary selection moving image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. Of the character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that the second character (grandpa) is temporarily selected and displayed, and the character identification indicating that the display is performed is displayed. Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIG. 6 (h) and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed. ) Memory → ... in the order of switching the display of the decorative pattern display device 208, and overwriting and storing character identification information for specifying the temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area. Carried out.

  Subsequently, the main control unit 300, as shown in FIG. 557 (k), in the special figure-related processing of the above-described step S213, if the jackpot game end condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time (for example, after starting a round) (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have been won in the variable winning port 234 during one round), for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234. A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332, and the general command special winning opening close setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process of step S215, and the character is displayed in the first sub-control unit 400. A character select effect end command for ending the execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this character select effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from a plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition when the command is received. In the present embodiment, the character identification information stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (lord)) is provided in the RAM 408 as the character determination information. Store (copy) in the confirmed information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (lord) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (lord)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, “character to be determined!”) Indicating the automatically selected character (lord). And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the character determination image as shown in FIG. 1L is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the above-mentioned button non-operation during the period indicated by (k) to (l) in FIG. 558, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set, and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

<Button operation during character movement display>
Next, a change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-described character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 560 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the moving display of the second character (grandpa) is started. Then, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the moving display of the second character (grandpa) ((e) in the figure), the second sub-display during the moving display is displayed. Instead of the character (grandpa), a moving display of the third character (princess) is performed as shown in FIGS.

  More specifically, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (grandpa) ((e) in the figure), the second character is displayed. (Grandpa) is moved from the position shown in (d) of the figure to the center of the front shown in (f) of FIG. ), The display is moved to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the center of the front as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. Move display is performed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (lord) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (grandpa) from the center of the front to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (lord). Move display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 7I is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 561 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed while the temporary selection image of the first character (lord) shown in FIG. As shown in d), the moving display of the second character (grandpa) is started. Then, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed during the movement display of the second character (grandpa) (FIG. 6E), FIG. ), The moving display of the second character (grandpa) is continued, and subsequently, as shown in (h) to (k) of FIG. A movement display for moving the character (princess) from the left rear to the center of the front is displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (lord) from right rear to left rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (grandpa) from the center of the front to the right rear in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (princess) and the first character (lord). Move display is performed. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 9K is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being displayed. Is overwritten and stored in the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

<Second example of character select effect>
Next, a second example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 562 and 563. FIG. 562 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 563 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect is finished. Although shown, in the second example, the jackpot game end condition (in this example, during one round, during the character introduction effect (during button non-reception period effect) shown in FIGS. 562 (a) to (c). This is an example in which a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are won in the variable winning port 234, that is, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character identification information storage area in the character identification information storage area at the time when the character select effect end command is received based on the fact that the jackpot game end condition is satisfied. The stored information is stored (copied) in the above-mentioned character confirmation information storage area as the character confirmation information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). However, in this second example, the character select effect end When the command is received, the character identification information (a numerical value indicating the second character (grandfather) in this example) determined by a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from 1 to 3) 2) as the character confirmation information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  In addition, the "predetermined condition" is not limited to the lottery, and the character identification information may be determined based on, for example, the gaming state (the number of rounds during the big hit game, the number of pending special figure variation games, etc.). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected last time, or may be determined in advance as the character identification information selected by the player.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (grandpa) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (grandpa)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, “character determined to be grandpa!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (grandpa). And the image data of the image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, the image containing the character 10R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 562 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the above-mentioned button non-operation during the period shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 563, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set, and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

<Third example of character select effect>
Next, a third example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 564 and 565. 564 is a diagram showing a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 565 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the character introduction effect is finished. Although shown, in the third example, after the character introduction effect (button non-reception period) shown in FIGS. 564 (a) to 564 (c) ends, the character selection effect (button reception period) shown in FIG. 564 (d). In this example, the jackpot game end condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 even once.

  In the character select effects shown in FIGS. 557 and 558, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the character identification information storage area in the character identification information storage area at the time when the character select effect end command is received based on the fact that the jackpot game end condition is satisfied. An example is shown in which the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character confirmation information storage area as the character confirmation information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). However, in the third example, At the time of receiving the character select production end command, the character identification information (in this example, the third character (princess) in a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery that determines one numerical value from 1 to 3) is determined. ) Is set as the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) as described above. Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects the character (princess) based on the above-described character confirmation information (in this example, the numerical value 3 indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image to be represented (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character “decided to be a princess!”) Suggesting an automatically selected character (princess). And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read from the ROM 406.

  Then, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, an instruction to transfer the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434, and then next time. In step S601, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436 is swapped. As a result, the character determination image as shown in FIG. 564 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the above-mentioned button non-operation during the period shown in (e) to (f) of FIG. 565, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect to the start of the next round (11R in this example). The acceptance period is set and the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the depression of the chance button 136).

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the character select effect is finished at the timing when the variable winning a prize hole 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state is shown, but as shown in FIG. After changing to the state, the closed state may be held for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and then the character select effect may be ended.

<Other example of character select production>
Next, another example of the character select effect will be described with reference to FIG. 567. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the first sub-control unit 400 is arranged such that the first character (lord) located at the center of the front surface of the display area is surrounded by an elliptical cursor as shown on the left side of FIG. In addition, a process of displaying an image in which the second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear and the third character (princess) is located on the right rear is performed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), the first character (lord) as shown on the right side of FIG. Is on the right rear where the third character (princess) was located, on the left rear where the third character (princess) was located on the second character (grandpa), and the second character (grandpa) is on the left. The first character (lord) was moved to the center of the front where the character (lord) was located, and the second character (grandpa) at the center of the front was displayed in the display area of the image decoration pattern display device 208 surrounded by the elliptical cursor. Perform processing to display. As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by using a graphic such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an elliptical cursor for the first character (lord) located in the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the drawing. A process of displaying an image in which the second character (grandpa) is located on the left rear side and the third character (princess) is located on the right rear side is surrounded in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), as shown on the right side of the figure, the first to third characters are displayed. Without moving, the cursor located at the location of the first character (lord) is moved to the third character (princess) on the right rear side. As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the display position of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6C, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the figure, has an area (in this example, an area located in the center of the display area among a plurality of rectangular areas). , "M3: Sense or Reality") is set to a background color different from the background colors of other images. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 is pressed in the above-described character selection effect (button reception period), as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating in order from the bottom to the top, the background color of the area located in the center of the display area (in this example, the area including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background colors of other images. Set to. As in this example, the color of a specific area may be different from the color of the other area to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6D, a character selected based on a predetermined condition described with reference to FIG. 564 is surrounded by a cursor, and the automatically selected character is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the automatically selected character can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the selection of the character. A player who wants to select another character can change to a desired character in advance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is won in the big hit determination, a predetermined symbol display device (for example, special figure 1 display device, The special control 2 display device, the decorative symbol display device), the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage (for example, the state in which the door member of the variable winning port 234 is closed, a predetermined symbol display) From the control state in which the symbol fluctuation stop display is performed in the device, the control state with probability change, the control state with electric power support, etc.), the second advantage is the second advantage, which is higher than the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure related processing) for shifting the control state to a control state (for example, a big hit game state in which the door member of the variable winning port 234 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times), Produce a game Effect image (for example, an image of a character select effect, during a period in which symbol variation stop display is being performed on a predetermined symbol display device, when a specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation stop display, a plurality of Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image among the character images An image display device provided separately) and by a player from a plurality of images (for example, images of the first to third characters) during a predetermined image selection presentation period (for example, during character selection presentation). A storage unit (for example, character identification information provided in the RAM 408) for storing specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can specify the selected image. Storage area) and an effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) that causes the effect display unit to display the image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage unit. ) And an operation reception unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation by the player, and during the image selection effect period (for example, during execution of the character selection effect). , A selected state image (for example, a second image shown in FIGS. 561 (c) to (g)) indicating that a predetermined image (for example, an image of the second character (grandpa)) among the plurality of images is in the selected state. (The temporary selection moving image of the character (grandpa)) is displayed on the effect display means, and when the predetermined image is indicated by the selection state image, the operation accepting unit causes the player to perform a selection operation. When a work is accepted, a predetermined selection change animation (for example, a temporary selection moving image of a third character (princess) as shown in FIGS. 561 (h) to (k)) is displayed on the effect display unit, and then the above-mentioned effect is displayed. Among the plurality of images, an image different from the predetermined image (for example, an image of the third character (princess)) is in the selected state, the selected state image (for example, as shown in FIG. 560 (k)). A final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is displayed on the effect display means, and when a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time after starting the round (for example, 30 seconds)). When one or both of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning port 234 during one round, or when another predetermined condition is satisfied. ) Selected images After the selection change animation, it is configured to store the specific identifiable image information (for example, character identification information) in the storage means, and the operation receiving unit receives the selection operation by the player. When the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation when the selection state image indicating that a specific image is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display means, the selection change animation is displayed. After that, the selected state image indicating that an image (for example, an image of the third character (princess)) different from the specific image (for example, the image of the second character (grandpa) is in the selected state is produced as the effect. A gaming machine characterized by displaying on a display means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to increase the awareness of participation in the game by making it easier to reflect the intention of the player in the effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and improve the interest of the game. There are cases.

  Also, based on the operation accepting unit accepting a selection operation by the player when the selection state image indicating that the predetermined image before change is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display unit, After the selection change animation is displayed, the selection state image indicating that the predetermined changed image is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display means. In the selection change animation, the changed image ( For example, when the second character (grandpa) image shown in FIG. 560 (d) is included, and the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the selection is performed. The image after the change in the change animation is shown as an image in the selected state by the selected state image after the animation (for example, shown in FIG. It may be configured to replace the third character image (princess)).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that the selection operation by the player has been accepted, and it may be possible to improve the interest by focusing on the game without giving the player any anxiety.

  In addition, a variable prize that can change the open / closed state from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which game balls can be won more easily than the closed state. An opening (for example, a variable winning opening 234) is provided, and the second control state is a predetermined number of round operations for changing the open / closed state of the variable winning opening from the closed state to the open state a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), the first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the ending condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured such that it is established when the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning opening after the operation is started reaches or exceeds a specific number.

  With such a configuration, the image selection effect is performed during the small hit, the variable winning opening operation, the variable winning opening opening, or the big hit, so that the image can be displayed to the player who has completed the game in a scene advantageous to the player. May be selected, and it may be possible to entertain the game more. In addition, for the player who enjoys the game rather than the effect, that is, for the player who quickly enters the game ball into the variable winning opening, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection. It may be possible to proceed with the game.

  In addition, based on the operation of the player, a launching device (for example, launching device 110) that launches a game ball each time a predetermined launch period elapses, and the game ball launched by the launching device is made to flow down and the variable winning opening is A provided game area (for example, a game area 124) may be provided, and a reproduction time of the selection change animation may be a period longer than the firing period (for example, 6 seconds).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually display that the selection has been accepted by animation so that even a beginner can easily understand it, and the staging effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, especially near the end of the selection period, the player who is in a hurry to select may find the animation reproduction period troublesome. When it is possible to raise the player's awareness of participation by configuring to accept the selection of the player so that the selection period does not end due to the winning of one game ball to the variable prize hole during the animation. There is.

  Further, the image selection effect period includes a first period and a second period that is started after the first period, and during the first period (for example, FIGS. 561 (c) to (g)). ) During reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (grandpa) or during the button non-reception period), the selection operation in the selection change animation is ignored (temporary selection of the second character (grandpa)). The reproduction of the selected moving image is continued without interruption) during the second period (for example, during reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIGS. 561 to (k)). , Button reception period) changes the image (for example, the image of the third character (princess)) indicated to be in the selected state by the selected state image based on the selection operation in the selection change animation. It may be configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, in the final stage of the selection period end time, there are many occasions where the selection can be made for various reasons such as wanting to hurry the selection due to selection mistakes, etc., but it is particularly easy to accept the selection just before the end of the game In some cases, it may be possible to raise the awareness of participation of the person.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the character select effect is performed by using the image (still image or moving image) has been shown, but the sound effect by the speaker 120, the effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, and various lamps 418 are shown. You may perform the production by. Further, an example has been shown in which the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect control of the character select effect based on the command from the main control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and it goes without saying that various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 (1 type), it can be applied to a pachinko machine (2 types, 3 types), an enclosed pachinko machine, a pachi-lot machine, etc., and an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, It can also be applied to smart balls and the like.

  Further, for example, it is also applicable to a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of reels corresponding to each A stop switch that is provided to individually stop the rotation of the reels, a lottery unit that determines whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations are won by lottery, and the reels when stopped are displayed. An example is one that includes a determination unit that determines the winning of the winning combination depending on whether or not the symbol combination is a symbol combination of the winning combination internally won by the lottery unit.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which an operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the examples of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the examples of the present invention. It is not limited to one.

<Other Embodiments (Embodiments in which button operation is enabled even if no button operation display is displayed)>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 568 to 585, a gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the button operation is enabled even if the button operation display is not displayed) The ball game table and the rotating drum game table such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 568 to 585 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. The reference numerals 568 to 585 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 568 to 585 are the same as those in the above-described embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  FIG. 568 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in (a) and (d) of the figure, an operation means image BG (in this example, a chance button 136 is imitated) that suggests the operation of the operation means (here, chance button 138) on the decorative symbol display device 208. Image) and an elapsed time notification image TG (in this example, the elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the acceptance period of the operation means, the graduation (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Operation means operation display (hereinafter, referred to as button operation display) by an image (scale reduction display) is displayed, and when the production during the operation acceptance period of the opportunity button 136 is being executed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. When the operation is performed ((b) and (e) in the same figure), the operation is accepted, and as shown in (c) and (f) in the figure, the operation is accepted by the player by changing the effect mode. To inform that was.

  Here, as an example, the production mode is changed such that the reduced display of the scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is temporarily stopped and another production display is executed. That is, in this case, when the display prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) (hereinafter referred to as the button operation display 800) is being executed, the button operation display 800 is supported (indicated by the button operation display 800). ) The operation (operation reception) of the chance button 136 is valid. In the following description, the button operation display 800 will be described as an example of a display including an operation means image BG imitating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed state of the acceptance period. However, the button operation display 800 is not limited to this example as long as it is an effect display that prompts the player to operate a certain specific operation means (notifies that the operation means is in the acceptance period). Further, the button operation display 800 may not include the elapsed time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, in the same figure (g), there are a plurality of operation buttons that can be operated by the player (here, the chance button 136 and other operation buttons 810), and the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of is displayed, the button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation buttons 810 is not displayed. In this case, even if the chance button 136 corresponding to the button operation display 800 (indicated by the button operation display 800) is operated, the operation is invalid, and the operation of the other operation buttons 810 is valid.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the operation means operation display (button operation display) of the first operation means (other operation button 810) is not executed, the first operation means (other operation buttons) is displayed. The reception of the operation of the operation button 810) is validated.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the first operation means (other operation buttons 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the operation operation means operation display (button operation display 800) relating to the second operation button is executed. If it is, the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 800 is invalidated, but the first operation means (another operation button) in which the button operation display is not performed. The operation of 810) is made effective. As a result, it may be possible to add variety to the button operation effect and enhance the interest of the player. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 569. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into various devices according to a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. Depending on the first sub-control unit 400 that controls, the second sub-control unit 500 that mainly controls the effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command that the main control unit 300 transmits. Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, in the basic circuit 302, a counter circuit (random number generation circuit) 318 (random number value generation circuit) 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening, and the front frame door is opened. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302. , A predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of the pattern display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure hold lamp 216, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp). 220, high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), a drive circuit 330 for controlling display, and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game frame lamp 122). A circuit 420; a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the chance button 136 and the movable part of the button unit 190; a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 for detecting the depression of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190; The sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a production movable body 224, a shielding device 246, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of a movable portion of the movable display device 288, the production movable body 224, the shielding device 246, etc. A production movable body sensor 424 for detecting a position, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the production movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532. And a serial communication control circuit 520 for controlling lighting by serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<LCD control unit>
Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data with the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. A RAM 708 for performing the operation, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, data for image display, and the like are stored, and a VDP (video display processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

  The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, reads image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses the work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and the image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

<Transmission and reception of data between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700>
Next, as a premise of the present embodiment, a general data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, FIG. 570 (a) shows an example of data held in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 570 (b) shows an example of a liquid crystal command. Further, FIG. 7C is a timing chart showing a data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses the box data (for example, the box data A1) shown in FIG. 7A at each performance execution timing, such as when the fluctuation starts, when the hold is increased, when the big hit is started, and when the button operation effect is generated. Is set in the box data setting area of the RAM 408. The box data is composed of a liquid crystal command (here, liquid crystal command 05), a position (here, as an example, position 00, position 01) and the like. As a result, the storage position (position) of each part is set in the box data. Here, the position 00 (the start address of the part) is set as the storage position of the part 01 in the box data, and the position 01 (the start address thereof) is set as the storage position of the part A2. The box data is also set when the first sub control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Positions are arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and parts corresponding to a plurality of positions (here, positions 00 to 9F) are stored. For example, in the example of the figure, part 01 is stored in position 00, part 01 is stored in position 01, and part A1 is stored in position 04. In addition, parts may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  The parts data list is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and the parts data corresponding to a plurality of parts (here, parts 00, 01, A1, and A2 are stored. Further, the parts data correspond to respective effects. Output sound (sound) from the speaker 120 to be executed as a result, a light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138), game board lamp 532, etc.), a movable object (production movable bodies 246, 224, movable) This is information on the movable mode of the display device 288).

  Each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a run player having lamp device data, an accessory action layer having shutter device data, sub liquid crystal movable part device data, and the like. The sound device data, shutter device data, sub liquid crystal movable part device data, and the like have one or more device data here. For example, in the case of having a plurality of lamp device data, the first lamp device data is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of BGM output, and the second lamp device data is information on the light emission mode of the lamp at one notification. is there. Further, for example, the number of each layer is one or more, and when there are a plurality of layers, the respective priorities are different.

  As shown in (b) of the figure, the liquid crystal command (here, the liquid crystal command 05 of the box data A1) corresponds to the fluctuation start, the hold increase, the big hit start, and the button operation effect generation, respectively. A command (for example, liquid crystal display 0D) for displaying the effect display on the decorative pattern display device 208, and return commands 00 and 01 are included.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above box data (liquid crystal command) at each performance execution timing (for each performance), transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and sets each part at the position. To do. Further, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 refers to the corresponding position of the RAM 408, and if the part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data is stored. , The emission mode of the run player and the movable mode of the accessory motion layer are set in the transmission command and transmitted to each device, and an effect corresponding to the effect display is performed.

  It should be noted that the fixed data is not stored in the position, but the data is switched at each performance execution timing (for each performance).

  As shown in FIG. 6C, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit main process, and the liquid crystal control unit so as to perform each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 700, the speaker 120, the lamp, the movable object, and the like. Here, in the present embodiment, as an example of effects, button operation effects (effects related to the operation reception of the chance button 136) will be described. As effects related to the operation reception of the chance button 136, a button operation display 800 ((liquid crystal) effect display in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, a light emission effect of the chance button lamp 138 ((sub) button LED in the figure), There are other sounds and light emission effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound lamps), and the timing charts in FIGS. 570 to 576 mainly show these effects.

For example, the 1st sub control part 400 transmits a plurality of box data A1 ... (namely, liquid crystal command) to liquid crystal control part 700, when performing the effect of starting a pattern change (A). A plurality of liquid crystal commands are prepared according to the type of effect. For example, in this case, the liquid crystal command includes, for example, information such as data returned after pressing the chance button 136 and the decorative symbol display device 208. A command for instructing the start of variable display of decorative patterns is included.

  Although not shown, the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes control such as variable display of the decorative symbol and notice effect in the decorative symbol display device 208, and sends a return command to the first sub controller 400 (B). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. Set the command transmission. For example, when the return command includes position information, various parts data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp, etc.) corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 is set in the transmission command, and the speaker 120 is set. , Chance button lamp 138, respectively. As a result, the first sub control unit 400 executes various effects. Although a position that can be called a single command may be transmitted as the return command, a plurality of positions may be transmitted, such as box data.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 is at the timing of performing the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the effect associated therewith) (timing (C) of validating the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 (starting the acceptance)). In the decorative pattern display device 208, effect display (button operation display 800) that prompts the user to press a button is executed (D).

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of performing this button operation effect (C). The return command includes position information as data for performing a button operation effect, and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving this information validates the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 (E), and stores it in the RAM 408. Data of various parts data (light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the parts stored in the position is set in the transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138. Further, the drive command of the chance button lamp 138 is transmitted. As a result, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (F).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 (G), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (G). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 (disables the operation acceptance), and sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (H). Further, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended (I).

  Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (disables the operation acceptance (J)), and various parts data (chance button lamp) corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408. Data such as the light emission mode of 138, sound, etc.) is set in the transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120. Also, these drive commands are transmitted. Also, the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120 are controlled. As a result, the emission of the chance button lamp 138 ends (K), and effects such as sounds and other lamps L are executed for a predetermined period ((K) to (L)). After that, the symbol variation ends (M).

<Example 1 of timing chart>
FIG. 571 is a timing chart showing an example of general data transmission / reception between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and shows a command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. ), The button operation effect is executed. The figure (a) shows the case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, and the figure (b) shows the case during the valid period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136. , Shows the case where the chance button 136 is operated. In the timing chart described below together with the drawings, only main timings are extracted, but as described above, the transmission and reception of the liquid crystal command and the return command are appropriately performed. Further, in the timing chart below, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 (state of operation of the chance button 136, that is, input (operation) exists, input (operation) waits, input (operation) does not exist) is also described. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the first sub-control unit 400 enables the liquid crystal control unit at a timing (A) at which the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 is enabled (acceptance is started). The liquid crystal command is transmitted to 700. After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (D). ).

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation reception becomes invalid) (E). After that, the first sub control unit 400 ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disables the operation acceptance) (G), and performs a button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208. Ends the execution of (H).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained in the state of waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first sub-control unit 400 makes the liquid crystal display at a timing (A) at which the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 is enabled (the acceptance is started). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the control unit 700. After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (D). ).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes a state with input. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (disables the operation acceptance) and transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). After that, the first sub control unit 400 ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F). Further, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disables the operation acceptance) (G), and performs a button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208. Ends the execution of (H). Although illustration is omitted, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, after the button operation effect is finished, another effect corresponding to the operation of the opportunity button 136 (for example, display of a cut-in image) is performed. Perform (same in the following examples).

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 571, the operation acceptance valid period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 has started based on the command (liquid crystal command) from the first sub control unit 400. In this example, as shown in FIG. 7B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) from the first sub control unit 400 at an unintended timing (I). Even so, I try to ignore this.

<Example 2 of timing chart>
572 and 573 are timing charts showing another example of general data transmission / reception between the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. This is an example of a case where a button operation effect is executed based on a command). FIGS. 572 (a) and 573 (a) show the case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, and FIG. 572 (b) and FIG. 573 (b) are shown. , The case where the chance button 136 is operated during the valid period of accepting the operation of the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 572 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. Send a return command. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (B).

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (operation reception becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (E), and then the decorative symbol display The device 208 finishes executing the button operation effect (F). Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disables the operation acceptance) (G), and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light. End (H).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained in the state of waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 has the first sub-control unit at a timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. Return to 400 and send the command. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (B).

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period (making the operation reception invalid) and sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (G).

  The first sub-control unit 400 receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H), and then ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (I). . In addition, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound at this timing (I).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (H) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of input.

  FIG. 572 (a) is an example of a timing chart of a configuration in which, when the operation of the chance button 136 is executed immediately before the end of the operation reception effective period in the first sub-control unit 400, this is effectively received.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (B).

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal controller 700 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal controller 700 transmits a return command to the first sub controller 400 (E). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation reception valid period, but immediately before that, when the operation of the chance button 136 is executed, the liquid crystal command (broken line) is displayed on the liquid crystal control unit 700. (G), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disables the operation acceptance (G)), and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light. End (H).

  In this example, in order to effectively accept the operation of the chance button 136 pressed immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is as shown in FIG. It is longer than the case. Specifically, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends after the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation acceptance is disabled (G)) (for example, in the chance button lamp 138). It ends at the timing (H) when the light emission ends. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (I).

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 effectively accepts the operation and the chance button after the button operation effect is finished. Although an effect (not shown) based on the operation of 136 is started, the first sub-control unit 400 may not effectively accept the operation (do not start the effect).

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not effectively accept the operation and does not start the effect based on the operation of the chance button 136. However, the button operation effect is displayed until the time when the effect is scheduled to start. It may be executed. Further, at the timing (H) at the end of the button display effect, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 does not receive the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the state of waiting for input is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 573 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to validate (start reception) the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing (A) of the first sub-control unit. Return to 400 and send the command. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (B).

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns the command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (G), and then ends the emission of the chance button lamp 138 (H). Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (H).

Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period (H), and then the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (J).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (G) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of input.

  As described above, the timing charts shown in FIGS. 572 to 573 show an example in which the operation reception valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 starts based on the command (return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 572 (b) and 573 (b), in this example, a command (for example, a button operation is issued from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at a timing (J) not intended by the first sub-control unit 400. Even if a return command) is received, it is ignored.

  574 to 576 are timing charts showing a data transmission / reception relationship between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 according to the present embodiment.

<Example 3 of timing chart>
FIG. 574 is an example of the case where the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. Shows a case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, and FIG. 9B shows a case where the chance button 136 is operated during the valid period of accepting the operation of the chance button 136. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the liquid crystal at a timing (A) at which the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 is validated (acceptance is started). The liquid crystal command is transmitted to the section 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not start executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At the timing when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation reception becomes invalid), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disables the operation acceptance) (D).

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the first sub-control unit 400 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 (timing (A) at the timing (A)). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700, which has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, starts the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 (C), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes a state with input. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (disables the operation reception) and transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. After that, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (D).

  Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disables the operation reception) (E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 400) (and the liquid crystal control unit) even when the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 regarding the chance button 136 and the light emission of the opportunity button lamp 138) is not executed. In 700), the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 becomes valid. In this example, as shown in FIG. 7B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) from the first sub control unit 400 at an unintended timing (F). Even so, I try to ignore this.

<Example 4 of timing chart>
575 and 576 are examples of cases in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and FIGS. 575 (a) and 576 (a). Shows a case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of accepting the operation of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 575 (b) and 576 (b) show during the valid period of accepting the operation of the chance button 136. , Shows the case where the chance button 136 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 575 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 tells the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  At the timing when the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (operation reception becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (C). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disables the operation reception (D)).

  In this example, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation reception valid period, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is maintained in the state of waiting for input (waiting for the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 makes the first sub-control at the timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. It returns to the section 400 and transmits the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit the part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period (making the operation reception invalid) and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (D).

  The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E). In addition, in this example, thereafter, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (E) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of input.

  As shown in FIG. 576 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 at a timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ′).

  At the timing when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation reception becomes invalid), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period. Further, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138 (D).

  The chance button lamp 138 is lit when it is constantly lit during the operation acceptance valid period, when it flashes within the operation acceptance valid period, and when it is lit only for a part of the period including the start point of the operation acceptance valid period (for a moment). The same applies to other examples.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 576 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept (start reception) the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing (A) of the first sub control unit. Return to 400 and send the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ′).

When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (E). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (F). After that, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (G). Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (G).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated at the timing (F) when the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of input.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 regarding the chance button 136 and the light emission of the opportunity button lamp 138) is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control). In the section 700), the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 becomes valid. In this example, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command (for example, a return command corresponding to a button operation) from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at an unintended timing (H). Even so, I try to ignore this.

  An example of the button operation acceptance state and the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 577 to 585.

<Example 1 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 577 is a diagram showing in time series an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 571.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, a fourth symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, on the upper right side. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, for example, "○" is displayed in blue for example while the special game (Special 1 or Special 2) is being executed, and white is displayed while the variable game is stopped. . Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform variable display of the decorative symbol in a part of the display area, for example, as indicated by a downward arrow at the upper left of FIG.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212 and a special figure 2 display device 214 are provided, and variable display and stop display of the special figure are executed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 inform the number of variable games that are held by turning on and off the LED.

  Here, in the display examples shown in FIGS. 577 to 585, the variable display on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are not particularly distinguished. As will be described, the variable display on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 is executed by the main control unit 300, and the variable display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400. To be executed.

  The timing shown in the same figure (a) has shown the state where the variable game of the special figure has ended, and the stop display of the variable game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays that the stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. Also, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is off. That is, it shows a state in which the button operation effect is not executed. In the present embodiment (FIGS. 577 to 585), when nothing is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 5A, at least the button operation display 800 (only) is hidden. Means that other display may be displayed.

  This timing is a period other than the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400, that is, the operation reception state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid. Similarly, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, it is a period other than the operation reception valid period, that is, the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in the figure (b) indicates the state where the variation game of the special figure has started, and that the variation game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being executed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. The stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b). In this state, the special game is in the variation game, and the button operation effect has not been started yet, but the operation reception valid period has started in the first sub control unit 400, that is, the first sub control unit 400. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b). In this state, during the variation game of the special figure, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light is on. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is valid, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 571. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is on. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance valid period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 has also started, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid. It is valid.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 571. In this state, the button operation display 800 has started to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the operation means image BG (for example, an image simulating the chance button 136 and "PUSH !!" which indicates that the button is pressed and a down arrow are provided in the approximate center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Image) and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the scale of the meter is filled in with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Image) is displayed.

  Further, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to light. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is the timing (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b), for example. That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is gradually reduced is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. Continues to light, and the state in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is in a state in which the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. Shows.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (F) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 571, and shows the state immediately after (g) of the figure. The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative pattern display device 208, the reduced display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to light. In the 1st sub-control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 becomes invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (G) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 571. The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduced display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is off. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is, for example, the timing between (G) and (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b). The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reduced display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off, and the first sub. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the control unit 400 is invalid. At this timing, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 has expired, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5K is, for example, the timing immediately before (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b), and the image just before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. are doing. That is, in the operation means image BG, the chance button 136 is filled in white, the character "PUSH !!" is hidden, and the reduced display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is finished. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (l) of the same figure is, for example, the timing after (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 571 (b). The button operation display 800 is hidden on the decorative pattern display device 208, and another effect display (for example, display of the cut-in image 806 of the character (lord)) is being executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

<Example 2 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 578 is a diagram showing in time series an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 572.

  The timing shown in the same figure (a) has shown the state where the variable game of the special figure has ended, and the stop display of the variable game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays that the stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not being executed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in the figure (b) indicates the state where the variation game of the special figure has started, and that the variation game of the special figure (for example, special figure 2) is being executed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. The stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). In this state, the special game is in the variation game, and the button operation effect is not started yet, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is starting to be displayed, while the chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light is off. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 continues, and the reduced display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is turned off. ing. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (f) is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light is lit. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is valid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is gradually reduced is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. Continues to light, and the state in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is in a state in which the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. Shows.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5H is, for example, the timing of (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative pattern display device 208, the reduced display of the meter scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light continues to illuminate, but the liquid crystal In the control unit 700, the operation acceptance valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 becomes invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing immediately before (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b), and the image just before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. (The reduction display of the scale on the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG has finished). The chance button lamp 138 is turned on, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5L is, for example, the timing of (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). The button operation display 800 is hidden on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is lit, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid. Has become.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (k) is, for example, the timing of (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). The button operation display 800 is hidden on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5L is, for example, the timing after (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 572 (b). The button operation display 800 is hidden on the decorative pattern display device 208, and another effect display (for example, display of the cut-in image 806 of the character (lord)) is being executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

<Example 3 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 579 is a diagram showing in time series an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the third embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 574.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows the state in which the variation game of the special figure has ended. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is hidden, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, and the button operation effect is not being executed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure shows the state in which the variation game of the special figure has started. The button operation effect has not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 574 (b). In this state, during the variation game of the special figure, the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is activated. The operation acceptance state of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in the first sub control unit 400.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 574 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains undisplayed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. On the other hand, in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 574 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the opportunity button lamp 138 are turned on) is not executed, and the opportunity button 136 is operated (pressed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing after (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 574 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 574 (b). The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) does not show the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136. It becomes effective.

<Example 4 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 580 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows the state in which the variable game of the special figure is being executed. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first image 804 other than the button operation display 800 is displayed. Also, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11B shows the state after the chance button 136 is operated at the timing following FIG. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a second image (for example, a cut-in image of the character (lord)) 806 is displayed, and the same figure ( It overlaps at least part of the first image 804 displayed in a). As a result, at least a part of the first image 804 is covered by at least a part of the second image 806, and the player has low visibility (not visible or difficult to view).

  Further, the first image (hidden image) 804 may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the status notification image SG, the hold display, the prefetch notice presentation display, and the other presentation display, or a combination thereof. . The state notification image SG is a meter display, and is a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. Satisfying the change condition is, for example, when a time has elapsed from the start of displaying a predetermined image (state notification image SG) or when a predetermined operation means is operated (one or more operations or long press, etc.). ). Specifically, it refers to an image in which the filled portion of the meter increases (or decreases) depending on the number of times the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is repeatedly hit or the time of long pressing. Further, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the hold display, the state notification image SG, the prefetching notice effect display, and the other effect display, or a combination thereof. Further, when the first image is a meter display such as the elapsed time notification image TG or the state notification image SG, either the start end portion (start time point) or the end end portion (end time point) is displayed by the second image 806. It may be hidden, or the middle part (intermediate point between the start time and the end time) may be hidden by the second image 806.

<Example 5 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 581 is a diagram showing in time series an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the fourth embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 575.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows the state in which the variation game of the special figure has ended. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is hidden, the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off, and the button operation effect is not being executed. At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure shows the state in which the variation game of the special figure has started. The button operation effect has not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b). In this state, during the variation game of the special figure, the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. The operation acceptance state of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains undisplayed, and the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light is also turned off. On the other hand, in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the opportunity button lamp 138 are turned on) is not executed, and the opportunity button 136 is operated (pressed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 575 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 becomes invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in (g) of the same figure is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure is the timing following (g) in the figure. The button operation effect is not executed, and another effect display (for example, the cut-in image 806 of the character (lord)) is displayed. The operation accepting state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) does not show the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136. It becomes effective.

<Example 6 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 582 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect. In the present embodiment, the game table is provided with a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player, and more specifically, in addition to the chance button 136, it has at least another operation button 810.

  The other operation button 810 is an operation button different from the chance button 136 whose operation is suggested in the button operation display 800. Further, with the other operation button 810, an effect is executed by the operation of the other operation button 810 even when there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810. In the present embodiment, such another operation button 810 will be described as a back button.

The timing shown in (a) and (b) of the figure shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure has started and the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is off even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows the state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being executed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed while the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation is invalid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the back button 810, which is not suggested in the button operation display 800, is operated (pressed).

  FIG. 6F shows the state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of the character (lord)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display suggesting the button operation is not performed (the button is not lit) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810, which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810, is validated.

<Example 7 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 583 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect. This embodiment also has a configuration including the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

The timing shown in (a) and (b) of the figure shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure has started and the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the chance button 136, which is suggested to be operated in the button operation display 800, is pressed. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is off even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows the state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being executed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed while the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed ((c) in the figure), the operation is invalid.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the back button 810 is illuminated by the back button lamp 812, which is not suggested in the button operation display 800. The back button lamp 812 is lit, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136. Alternatively, the back button lamp 812 may be lit at the timing when the operation reception valid period of the back button 810 starts.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed) while the back button lamp 812 is lit.

  FIG. 7G shows the state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of the character (lord)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display suggesting the button operation is not performed (the button is not lit) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810, which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810, is validated. Further, the back button lamp 812 of the back button 810 lights up when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied. The lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 can be, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136, or after the operation acceptance valid period of the back button 810 has started.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid in FIGS. 7C and 7D, but it may be valid.

<Embodiment 8 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 584 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. This embodiment also has a configuration including the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

The timing shown in FIG. 5A shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure has started and the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11B shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 of the chance button 136 whose operation is suggested in the button operation display 800 is lit. On the other hand, the button operation display of the back button 810 is not performed, and the back button lamp 812 is also turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed), which is not suggested in the button operation display 800.

  FIG. 6D shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of the character (lord)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display suggesting the button operation is not performed (the button is not lit) is validated. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810, which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810, is validated. That is, even when there is a button operation effect (button operation display 800 and the opportunity button lamp 138 lighting) that suggests the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. The operation of the button (back button 810) different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by is validated.

  In this example as well, the operation of the chance button 136 may be enabled, or the back button lamp 812 may be turned on when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied.

<Example 9 of button operation acceptance state and effect>
FIG. 585 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In this embodiment, only the chance button 136 is provided.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows the state in which the variable game of the special figure is stopped. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed and the chance button lamp 138 is off. Further, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure shows the state in which the variation game of the special figure has started. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed and the chance button lamp 138 is off. Further, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows a state in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 starts to be displayed and the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the variation game of the special figure. At this timing, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the button operation display 800 has started to be displayed and a predetermined time has elapsed. The button operation display 800 continues, and the chance button lamp 138 also keeps lighting. Further, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of the same figure show a state in which the deletion condition of the button operation display 800 is satisfied and the button operation display 800 is hidden. The erasing condition of the button operation display 800 may be an operation of the chance button 136 (or another button), a lapse of a predetermined time, or the like. Even at this timing, the acceptance state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. At these timings, the chance button lamp 138 may continue to light up even after the button operation display 800 is hidden.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). , A control means (for example, in the first sub-control unit 400), the display means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of display, the control means is a plurality of types At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display that is displayed when a normal button operation effect is executed). At least one of the displays is a second display (for example, a display displayed when a normal button operation effect is not executed, a display at the time of a back button effect, etc.), and among the plurality of types of displays. At least one is a third display (for example, a display at the time of a button operation effect (including the button operation display 800)), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, , A display that does not include the button operation display 800, such as a display at the time of a back button operation effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is the first state (for example, a normal button operation effect can be executed). State), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not executed), and the first state is the first state. When the operation unit is operated, it is a state where at least the first control (for example, control for executing a normal button operation effect) can be executed, and the second state is the first state. Operation of the operation means In this case, the second control (for example, the control in which the normal button operation effect is not executed) can be at least executed, and the first control executes the first display on the display means. In the case of the first state, the second control is control including at least control for causing the display unit to execute the second display. , A display that may be displayed, the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the second state, and the third display is a first image ( For example, the display includes at least a button operation display 800, the fourth display does not include at least the first image, and the first image (for example, the first operation unit (for example, , Chance button 136) The first operation means is a means including at least a light emitting means (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the case of the first state. Yes, the light emitting means is a means which does not emit light in the case of the second state, which is a gaming table.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to the button operation effect.

  The chance button lamp 138 may emit light in the first state and may not emit light in the second state. The chance button lamp 138 is controlled in emission by the first sub-control unit 400, but may be controlled in emission by other control means.

  Further, a second operation means (a back button 810, another chance button, a button used when changing the volume, etc.) is provided, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display (for example, , A display corresponding to the operation of the back button 810), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a third state, and the first state is an operation of the second operating means. If there is, at least the first control is not executed, and the third state is the third control (for example, the back button 810) when the second operation means is operated. Is a state in which the third control is not executed at least when the operation of the first operation means is performed. And the third control is Including at least control a control to execute display the fifth to the means may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to the button operation effect.

  Further, the control means, after receiving the first command from another control means (for example, the liquid crystal control unit 700), at least shifts to the second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not executed). It may be a means to do.

  Further, it is assumed that the second state (for example, a state in which the normal button operation effect is not executed) is different from the first state (for example, a state in which the normal button operation effect is executed). Good.

  Further, the second operation means (for example, the back button 810) may be different from the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a sixth display (for example, an effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated).

  Further, the sixth display (for example, the effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated) is a display including at least a second image (for example, an image including information advantageous to the player). Good.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a fourth state (for example, a demo image display state or a variation game state).

  Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine, and the game table may be a slot machine.

  It should be noted that there are cases where the button operation is effectively accepted even in cases other than the button operation effect, and there is a case where the button operation is effectively accepted even if the button acceptance information is not referenced in a certain control process. Further, when the button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, the button operation may not be effectively received.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a second operation means (back button 810), and the back button 810 in this case is used for other chance buttons, selection buttons, volume change, etc. It may be a button or the like. The back button 810 may or may not include a lamp (back button lamp 812) that causes the back button 810 to emit light. Further, even if the back button 810 is operated in a state where there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the back button 810, an operation corresponding to the back button 810 (for example, when the back button 810 is a volume change button, volume change, etc. ) May be performed, or the operation may not be performed.

  When the back button 810 is another chance button, even if the back button 810 is operated in the first state (a state in which a normal button operation effect can be executed), the effect corresponding to the back button 810 is executed. Or the effect may not be executed. Further, when the back button 810 is provided, the back button operation effect may be provided corresponding to the back button 810, or the back button operation effect may not be provided.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 may shift to the second state (back button state) when receiving a command (for example, a return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, the first state in which the normal button operation effect can be executed and the second state in which the normal button operation effect is not executed are performed. It is possible to shift at least between the above states. Then, in the first state, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display the first display that is displayed when the normal button operation effect is executed, and in the second state, the decorative symbol display device 208 normally displays. It is possible to display a second display that is displayed when the button operation effect is not executed. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 can display a third display which is a display (including the button operation display 800) at the time of the button operation effect, and the third display is in the case of the first state. , Is a display that may be displayed. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 has a display different from the display during the normal button operation effect (a display not including the button operation display 800, or an operation of a button different from the button whose operation is actually effective). A fourth display (e.g., a suggested display) can be displayed, and the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the second state.

  The second state is the back button state, in which the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted. Alternatively, although the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation of another button (physical back button 810) different from this is effectively accepted. In other words, a game console having a physical back button 810, and a button operation display 800 that suggests a different operation of the chance button 136 when the operation of the back button 810 is effectively accepted is referred to here. It can be said to be the second display.

  Further, even when the button operation display 800 is not performed, the acceptance of the button operation may be validated (in the button acceptance state).

  Further, when the button operation display 800 is being performed, acceptance of button operation may be enabled (button acceptance state) and the button lamp may be turned on.

  Further, when enabling the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810, the back button lamp 812 may or may not be lit. Further, when enabling the operation of the back button 810, the back button lamp 812 is turned on for a moment and then turned off. However, the operation of the back button 810 may be enabled during the turning off. .

  Further, in the above description, when the first operation button and the second operation button are present, the operation of the first operation button is operated even if there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the first operation button. The thing that the effect is executed by is called the "back button", but there is no button operation display that suggests the operation of the first operation button, and the lamp that emits the first operation button is off. Whatever the effect is performed by the operation of the first operation button may be the “back button” regardless of whether it is in the state of being present or not.

  If the operation button is pressed when the first image 804 is displayed and the button operation display is not displayed, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed and the other effect display is displayed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it.

  Further, when the back button 810 in which the first image 804 is displayed and the button operation display is not operated is operated, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is displayed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it. For example, the first image 804 (hidden image) is the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 (the operation means image (image imitating the chance button 136) BG and the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG), and the chance When the button operation display 800 of the button 136 (the operation means image (image that imitates the chance button 136) BG and the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG is displayed, another effect display by operating the back button 810 ( The display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display 806 overlaps with a part of the meter (start time, end time, intermediate time, etc. of the button operation acceptance period), and In this case, the first image 804 may be only the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG). . In addition, the first image (hidden image) 804 may be at least one of the state notification image SG, the hold display, the prefetching effect display, or a combination effect thereof. Further, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of hold display, state notification image SG, prefetch display effect, or a combination effect thereof.

  Further, a plurality of kinds of back buttons 810 may be provided, in which case the first back button executes the first hidden effect and the second back button executes the second hidden effect. Good.

  In addition, even after the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter) indicating the operation acceptance period is finished or after the button operation display 800 is erased based on the button operation, the operation button indicated by the button operation display 800 is suggested. The operation of the (or back button) may be validly accepted (during the actual operation acceptance valid period), in which case the operation button (or the back button) may be lit or unlit. Good.

  When the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136) are present, the operation of the second operation button does not send a command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and The command may be transmitted only during the operation acceptance valid period of the operation button (during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub-control unit 400), and in that case, the operation acceptance valid period of the first operation button (back button 810). Button operation effects (light emission, sound, etc.) of the back button 810 may be executed therein.

  In addition, regardless of whether the operation of the first operation button or the operation of the second operation button is performed, a command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (hereinafter, the first sub-control unit). When the command is transmitted, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may transmit a command to the first sub-control unit 400 (hereinafter referred to as the liquid crystal control unit 700-led control). However, information about whether or not the operation command is during the operation acceptance valid period may be added.

  Further, in the control led by the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may receive the command only during the operation reception valid period of the liquid crystal control unit 700. Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command and shifts to a process of analyzing the received command only during the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, or branches based on information included in the command. May be Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to a process of analyzing the received command only during the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and branches based on the information included in the command. Good.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button is turned on may or may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned on may or may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button is turned off may or may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may or may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  In addition, the button operation immediately before the button is turned on may or may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned on may or may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button is turned off may or may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400.

  In addition, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may or may not be accepted by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Further, even when the button operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period of the button, the command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the end of the operation acceptance valid period, or the command may be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit side. May be transmitted, or the same processing may be performed when the fluctuation ends. As a result, when a command is missed, the effect can be reset (safety control).

  Further, the button may light up at a predetermined timing within the operation acceptance valid period of the button, and the special effect may be executed when the button is operated at that timing, and the special effect is not executed even if the button is operated at the timing ( There is no change in the production).

  Further, in the configuration including the back button 810, the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 may be started even when the automatic button is set. For example, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on during the operation acceptance valid period of the back button 810 even when the auto button is set.

  Further, when the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, even if operation acceptance is enabled for both the second operation button and the first operation button (back button 810). Good.

  Further, when the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, the operation acceptance of the second operation button is invalid and only the operation acceptance of the first operation button (back button 810) is performed. You may enable it.

  In the configuration in which control is led by the liquid crystal control unit 700, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700. The button operation acceptance valid period may be started with. By doing so, for example, in the case other than the back button effect, after the effect (other than the button operation display 800) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 effects the sound output or the like. In some cases, the process can be executed, and when the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is reduced, it is possible to prevent the premature bleeding due to the sound output (the display cannot be enjoyed if a loss sound is heard first during the stirrer effect display). .

  Further, in the above description, the configuration described for the control initiated by the first sub-control unit 400 can be applied to the control initiated by the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix)
The game table (for example, Pachinko machine 100) is a control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700), a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and an operation unit (for example, Chance button 138), and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the first display is a display related to at least the operation means (for example, a button). The display means does not include the operation display 800), and the control means is means for validating the reception of at least the operation of the operation means during the first period, and the display means displays the first period during the first period. It is a game console characterized in that it is a period during which at least one display can be started.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is valid.

  The operation means includes first operation means (back button 810), the operation means includes second operation means (chance button), and the first display is at least the first operation. It is a display that does not include a display regarding the means (for example, the button operation display of the back button 810), and the first display includes at least a display regarding the second operation means (for example, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136). It is a display including, and the control means is means for validating the reception of at least the operation of the first operation means during the first period, and is a gaming table.

  That is, in the gaming table having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the first operation button different from the second operation button suggested to be operated by the button operation display 800. The operation (acceptance) of the operation button (that is, the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) is validated.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to the button operation effect. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, a button for which the acceptance of an operation is valid even though the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800 is called a back button in the present embodiment. The back button is a physical back button and a control back button. Including any of the buttons. That is, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, when the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is valid, the physical chance button 136 is controlled. It is a structure that also functions as a back button. On the other hand, in the gaming machine having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the operation of the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800 (acceptance of In the configuration in which () is enabled, the operation button 810 different from the chance button is a physical back button.

  Further, the control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400 and / or the liquid crystal control section 700) is means for invalidating the acceptance of the operation of the second operation means in the first period. Good.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to the button operation effect.

  Further, a first light emitting means (for example, a back button lamp 812) is provided, and the first light emitting means is for a second period (for example, after an operation acceptance period of the back button 810 has elapsed and after a predetermined time has elapsed). During the period), the control means is means for validating at least the operation of the first operation means during the second period. May be Further, the control means may be means for invalidating at least reception of an operation of the second operation means during the second period.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to the button operation effect. Further, since the button (back button) for which the operation is currently effective can be suggested step by step, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play due to the operation not being effective from being discouraged.

  Further, a second light emitting means (for example, a chance button lamp 138) is provided, and the second light emitting means is a means for enabling the first operating means to emit light during the third period, and the third light emitting means. The period may be a period that starts after at least the first period starts. Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to such a configuration, the button in which the operation is invalid is caused to emit light as if the button is effective so that the player can recognize the button, so that the player has more variety in the button operation effect and enhances the interest of the player. May be possible.

<Other embodiment (embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from button press to performance execution such as sound output)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 586 to FIG. 593, a gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine or the like) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from button depression to performance execution such as sound output). The ball game table and the rotating drum game table such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 586 to 593 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. The reference numerals 586 to 593 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 586 to 593, the same reference numerals are used as the same components as those in the above-described embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  FIG. 586 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of an effect (button operation effect) related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation acceptance of the operation means. Here, the button operation effect in the present embodiment is an effect related to the operation reception of the button (chance button 136), and the button operation display 800 by the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sound (effect sound) based on the button operation. And the like.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a normal button operation effect. The normal button operation effect is, for example, an effect that allows one button operation to be accepted during the button operation valid acceptance period.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800) prompting the user to operate the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is notified that the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 is in progress.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (once) during the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 accepts the button operation, and the liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. It The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command erases the button operation display 800 and executes the first effect display 820 (here, an effect of displaying a cut-in image of the character (lord)) based on the button operation. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and outputs an effect sound at the execution timing of the first effect.

  As described above, in the normal button operation effect, the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the first effect display 820 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 are effected.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of button repeated operation effects. The button repeated operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of a plurality of consecutive button operations (button continuous operation) during a button operation valid acceptance period.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800A) for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is informed that the continuous hitting operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 is in progress.

  When the player repeatedly hits the chance button 136 during the valid operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first sub-control unit 400 accepts the button operation, and the liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Then, after the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound, the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command causes the second effect based on the button operation (a continuous tapping operation of the button is being executed). A display 822 indicating (notifying) that is is displayed.

  As described above, in the button repeated hit operation effect, the effect sound output effect by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the second effect display 822 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 do not match, and, for example, the effect sound output is the second. It is executed prior to the effect display 822.

  FIG. 587 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, FIGS. 5A and 5B are timing charts showing the relationship between button operation and effect sound output, and FIG. This is an example of the case of the operation effect, and FIG. 7B is an example of the case of the button repeated hit operation effect. Further, FIG. 7C is an example of the effect data management table.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the first button operation (normal operation of the chance button 136), execution of button operation effect (output of effect sound corresponding to button operation) is started from button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the first period t1.

  On the other hand, as shown in (b) of the figure, in the second button operation (continuous hit operation of the chance button 136), execution of button operation effect (effect sound output corresponding to the operation) is started from the first button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the second period t2, and the second period t2 is shorter than the first period t1.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the first period t1 and the second period t2 are set depending on the timing of command transmission / reception between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. The first sub-control unit 400 holds a data table as shown in FIG. 7C, and the first period t1 and the second period t2 are set based on the data table. It may be one. For example, in the same figure (c), the number of interruptions from the detection of the button operation to the output of the effect sound is held as a table. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 can output the effect sound at a predetermined timing by referring to the table when executing the effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the period from the button operation to the output start of the effect sound is different between the normal button operation effect and the button repeated hit operation effect, and the button repeated operation effect is the normal button operation effect. It is shorter than Further, in the normal button operation effect, the effect display and the output of the effect sound are executed at substantially the same timing, but in the button repeated operation effect, the effect sound is output before the effect display. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the dynamic feeling of the button repeated hitting operation effect, which may increase the interest of the player.

  Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The circuit configuration of the control unit of this embodiment is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.

<Example 1 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>
With reference to FIG. 588, a timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 11A is a timing chart in the case of continuous button operation, and FIG. 11B is a timing chart in the case of normal button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit main process, and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object so as to perform various effects according to the result. Although a control command is transmitted to M, here, a button operation effect (an effect associated with the operation acceptance of the chance button 136) will be described as an example of effects. As effects related to the operation reception of the chance button 136, a button operation display 800 (in the drawing, (liquid crystal) button display) by the decorative pattern display device 208, a light emission effect of the chance button lamp 138 ((sub) button LED in the drawing), There are output (and other light emission) effects (effects such as (sub) sound in the figure) of effect sounds, and the timing chart of FIG. 588 shows only these effects. Further, FIG. 588 is an example of a case where the button operation effect is executed based on a command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700).

As shown in FIG. 10A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to notify the first sub-control unit 400 at a timing (A) at which the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 is validated (start acceptance). Send a return command. Then, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests a button repeated operation of the chance button 136. In addition, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes according to the state of the button repeated hit operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button repeated hit operation changes accordingly. It may be. In this example, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes to three stages (in the figure (a), the state (a) to (c) shown in the (sub) effect state), as the number of times the button is repeatedly hit increases. The button operation display 800 has three display modes (display states) in accordance with the change in the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 (states (a) to (c) shown in the (liquid crystal) button display state in the same figure (a)). Shall be changed to. The button operation display 800 displayed at the timing (B) is a state A display.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the consecutive hitting of the chance button 136 is started during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 (when the first operation of the consecutive hitting operations is performed) (E1), the first sub-control unit 400 A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E1). Further, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120 (F1).

  Similarly, each time the chance button 136 is repeatedly pressed (E2 to E6), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E2 to E6), and the first sub control unit 400 causes the speaker to operate. The parts data is transmitted to 120, and the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 (F2 to F6).

  Further, in this example, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is the state A from the first to the second time of the repeated hit operation, but at the third timing (E3) of the consecutive hit operation, the first sub-control unit. The rendering state of 400 changes from state A to state B. At the timing after the output of the effect sound (F3) based on the third repeated tapping operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of state B (G).

  In addition, at the timing after the output of the effect sound (F6) based on the sixth continuous hit operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of state C, and at the same time, the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is changed. The process ends (operation reception becomes invalid) (H). The liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (H). After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (erases) the button operation display 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  After that, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (disables the operation acceptance), and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes from state A to state C (J). Then, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off (K).

Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, in the normal button operation effect, the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts reception) the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 at a timing (A). Then, the return command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Then, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests a normal operation (for example, one press) of the chance button 136. Therefore, in this case, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 does not change according to the operation state of the button, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button operation changes. There is nothing to do.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (erases) the button operation display 800 (G).
Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H) and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (I).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the button repeated operation effect, from the button operation (timing (E1) in FIG. 10A) to the output of the effect sound (timing (F1) in FIG. 11A). The period (t2) is shorter than the period (t1) from the button operation of the normal button operation effect (timing (E) in FIG. 7B) to the output (I) of the effect sound.

  That is, in the case of the button repeated operation effect, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when the button is operated, but the first sub control unit 400 does not wait for the return command for the liquid crystal command. The control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 to output the effect sound.

  On the other hand, in a normal button operation effect, when a button operation is performed, a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 issues a return command for the liquid crystal command to the first sub control. After the transmission to the section 400, the effect sound is output.

<Example 2 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>
Another example of the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 589. In the present embodiment, a plurality of button operations can be performed within the button operation acceptance valid period, and an effect is executed (the effect state changes) each time the button operation is performed. That is, the state of the effect of the first sub-control unit 400 changes from the initial state to the states A to C each time the button is operated, and accordingly, the button operation display 800 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The mode (display state) changes from the initial state to states A to C.

As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing (A) at which the liquid crystal control unit 700 validates (starts acceptance of) the operation of the chance button 136. Send. Then, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts displaying the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is an initial state display, for example, a display suggesting the first button operation of the chance button 136.

  Upon receiving the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the parts data to the chance button lamp 138 and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (D).

  When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the initial state to the state A (G). The display of state A is, for example, a display suggesting the second button operation of the chance button 136.

  Upon receiving the return command at the timing (F), the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120, outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120, and sets the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 to the initial state. Change from state a to state a (H).

  When the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 (I), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (I ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (J). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state A (K). The display of state B is, for example, a display suggesting the operation of the third button of the chance button 136.

  Upon receiving the return command at the timing (J), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120, outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120, and changes the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 to the status state. Change from state to state (M).

  If the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub-control unit 400 (N), the first sub-control unit 400 sends a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (N). ). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (O). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state C (P). The state C is a display that indicates, for example, that the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136 has ended.

  Upon receiving the return command at the timing (O), the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400, transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. In addition, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed from the state a to the state c (Q). After that, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138.

  In this embodiment, the button operation can be performed a plurality of times within the operation reception valid period, and the state of the effect changes for each button operation, while the button is continuously pressed during the period from the button operation to the effect sound based on the button operation. It will be slower than in the case of operation performance. That is, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the normal button operation effect, when the button operation is performed, the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the return command for the liquid crystal command is sent. After the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits to the first sub control unit 400, the effect sound is output.

<Example 1 of button operation and button operation effect>
FIG. 590 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of a button repeated hit operation and a button repeated hit operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 7A, a fourth symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, on the upper right side. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are provided. Since these configurations are similar to those shown in FIG. 578, description thereof will be omitted.

  This timing is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (a), and shows the state where the variation game of the special symbol has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the special symbol (for example, , That the variable game of special figure 2) is being executed, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in the upper left part of the display area. Variable display has started. Further, a button operation display 800 is displayed in the approximate center of the display area. This button operation display 800 is a display suggesting a button repeated operation, and is, for example, an operation means image BG (for example, an image simulating the chance button 136 and a character "repeatedly hit!" And an image of a down arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the meter is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. The image with the scale filled in) is displayed. Further, in this example, a state notification image SG indicating the state of repeated hits is also displayed. The state notification image SG is a meter display, and is a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition means, for example, a case where a time has elapsed from the start of displaying a predetermined image (state notification image SG), or a case where the number of times of repeated button operation has increased. Further, at this timing, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) in the timing chart shown in (a) of FIG. 588, which is a state in which the continuous hitting operation has been started (a state in which the first pressing is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (F1) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (a). The figure shows a state in which the effect sound is being output from the speaker 120 after the period t2 has elapsed from the button operation shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in (d) of the same figure shows the state from after the timing of (F1) to before the timing of (E2) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (a), for example, and the effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Not showing the state.

<Example 2 of button operation and button operation effect>
FIG. 591 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the button operation and the button operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (b).

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is, for example, the timing shown in (B) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 588, and the state of the effect is displayed in the character display of "repeated strike!" In (a) of 590. Instead of displaying the character "PUSH !!", which suggests one button operation, it is the same as FIG. 590 (a), so the explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state from after the timing of (E) to before the timing of (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (b), and the button operation display 800 is continued. However, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound corresponding to the button operation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5D is, for example, the timing of (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 588 (b). It shows a state in which the effect sound is being output from the speaker 120 after a period t1 has elapsed from the button operation shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is hidden and the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation and the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation have almost the same timing.

<Example 3 of button operation and button operation effect>
FIG. 592 is a diagram showing another example of the button operation and the button operation effect in time series, which is an example of the effect using the accessory (movable body).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5A, in addition to the effect display shown in FIG. 591A, the character “Autumn falls when the character falls!” Is displayed to indicate that the character appears. Other than that is the same as that of FIG. 591 (a), and therefore description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the button operation is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the button operation display 800 is hidden, and another effect display (other than the button operation display 800) displayed based on the button operation (for example, a third effect such as an effect image) is displayed. The display 816) is displayed.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period (for example, the period t1) has elapsed from the button operation shown in (b) of the figure. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button operation display 800 is hidden, and the first effect display 820 (for example, other than the button operation display 800) that is displayed based on the button operation is overlaid on the third effect display (eg, the button operation display 800). , An image of a character) is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first effect display 820 other than the button operation display 800 displayed based on the button operation and the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation have almost the same timing.

  Further, in this effect example, regardless of whether the button operation shown in FIG. 7B is a normal button operation or a button repeated hit operation, the period until the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is, for example, , Which is equivalent to the period t1 shown in FIG. 588 (b). In this way, in the case of the effect using the accessory, the period from the button operation to the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation may be a constant period regardless of the state of the button operation.

<Example 4 of button operation and button operation effect>
FIG. 593 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of button operation and button operation effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 589.

  The timing shown in (a) of the same figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, and the state of the effect is the same as in FIG. Further, the button operation display 800 of FIG. 9A is in the initial state.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, which is a state in which the first button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state from after the timing (F) to before the timing (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, for example. Although the button operation display 800 from FIG. 10A is continued, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound corresponding to the button operation.

  The timing shown in (d) of the same figure shows the state in the periods (G) to (H) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, for example. Although the button operation display 800 continues, the first display 824 is additionally displayed, and the state of the button operation display 800 has changed from the initial state to the state A (timing (G) in FIG. 589). The first display 824 is, for example, a display of “in normal reach” of a face image of a character (lord) and a balloon. Thereafter, the speaker 120 outputs the effect sound corresponding to the first button operation shown in FIG. 9B (timing (H) in FIG. 589).

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, and is the state in which the second button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows the state during the period from the timing of (I) to the timing of (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, for example. The button operation display 800 and the first display 824 are continued, and no effect sound is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (g) of the same figure has shown the state of the period of (K)-(L) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 589, for example. Although the button operation display 800 is continued, the second display 826 is additionally displayed, and the state of the button operation display 800 has changed from state A to state B (timing (K) in FIG. 589). The second display 826 is, for example, a display that the face image of the character (lord) and the balloon “When Chibi Princess appears”. Thereafter, the speaker 120 outputs the effect sound corresponding to the second button operation shown in FIG. 8E (timing (L) in FIG. 589).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as an example of the button operation effect, the case where the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is output has been described, but other effects may be used. That is, it may be the light emission effect of the lamp L (including the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the button operation, the motion effect of the movable body, or the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It can be carried out and the same effect can be obtained.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), the production means (for example, the speaker 120), and the control means (for example, , A first sub-control unit 400), and the production means is a means capable of performing at least a plurality of types of production, and the control means is capable of at least shifting to a plurality of types of states. Means, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state, the plurality of types of performance At least one of them is a first effect (for example, an effect including at least a sound effect at the time of button operation in a button repeated hit effect), and at least one of the plurality of kinds of effects is a first effect. (For example, an effect including at least a sound effect at the time of button operation in a normal button effect), and the first state is a first control (for example, button operation when the operation unit is operated. In the second state, at least the second control (for example, normal button effect control) is executed when the operation means is operated. Is a state in which it is possible to do, the first control is a control including at least control for causing the effect means to execute the first effect (for example, button continuous hit effect), and the second control is The control includes at least control for causing the effecting means to execute the second effect (for example, a normal button effect), and the first control is performed after a first time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means. The control is started, the second control is a control that is started to be executed after a second time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means, the second time is longer than the first time. It is a game machine characterized by a long time.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be performed according to the button operation, which may increase the player's interest.

  In addition, the first state is a state in which a transition is made in the case of a button repeated hit effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect that outputs a sound (hereinafter, referred to as "first sound output effect"). The second effect may be an effect that includes at least an effect that outputs a sound (hereinafter, referred to as “second sound output effect”).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect in the button repeated hit operation effect in the case of the button repeated hit operation.

  In the case of the first state (button repeated operation effect), the first control causes the first sound output effect to be executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second sound output effect. In the case of the state (normal button operation effect), the second control causes the second sound output effect to be executed after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time is the first time. It is longer than the first time.

  The button repeated hit operation effect here is a first effect including at least a sound effect (effect sound) at the time of button operation in the button repeated hit operation effect, and the normal button operation effect is the button operation in the normal button operation effect. It is a second effect that includes at least the sound effects of time. The first control is control that is started after a first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second control is after a second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136. In the control that is started to be executed, the second time may be shorter than the first time or may be substantially the same time.

  The second effect also includes sound effects other than the sound effect when the button is operated. Further, the second effect also includes a motion of the movable body and a sound effect accompanying the motion of the movable body. Further, the other effect sound may not be output (priority to the second effect) before the second effect is started after the chance button 136 is operated.

  In the case of the first state (button repeated operation effect), the first sound output effect is executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second state (normal button operation). In the case of (effect), the second sound output effect is executed after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time is longer than the first time.

  Further, the second sound output effect may be an effect different from the first sound output effect.

  Also, the second sound output effect may be the same effect as the first sound output effect.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a third state (for example, a demo state or a variation game state).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a third effect (for example, a demo screen display or a variable display).

  Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine, and the game table may be a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, the player's interest may be increased depending on the button operation. That is, in the button repeated hit operation effect in the case of the button repeated hit operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal button operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  Further, in the first state, the time from the first button operation (normal button operation) to the start of effect execution corresponding to the button operation effect (effect start period) is the first time, and in the second state, The time from the second button operation (button repeated hit operation) to the start of performance execution may be the second time, and the first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time. The time may be the same (same) time.

  Further, the normal button operation effect and the button repeated hit operation effect may have different effect start periods.

  Further, in the case of a button operation effect in which an effect is executed each time the button is operated within the button operation acceptance valid time, the effect start period may be the same for each button operation. In this case, the effect start period for each button operation may be the same as the effect start period of a normal button operation, longer than that, or shorter than that.

  Further, only during the last button operation in the button repeated operation effect, the effect start period may be as long as the effect start period of the normal button operation effect.

  In addition, during the button continuous hit operation presentation, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 for each button operation, but the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 each time. Instead, the return command may be transmitted depending on the content of the command from the first sub-control unit 400. The following is an example of transmitting the return command in accordance with the content of the command from the first sub-control unit 400.

(1) The case where the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by the button repeated hit operation.

(2) A case where a predetermined command is transmitted by changing the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 by a continuous button press operation, and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by a return command to the predetermined command. As a result, the effect state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 can be matched.

(3) This is a case where a return command is transmitted at the final time of the effect (when the operation reception valid time ends), whereby the first sub control unit 400 side can acquire the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side. That is, by branching the subsequent processing based on the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side.

  In this way, the configuration is such that the return command is not received each time during the button repeated operation effect, so that the first sub-control unit 400 can allocate the time required for the return command reception processing to the time for executing other processing. In some cases, other effects (for example, lamp lighting and output of other effect sounds) can be made more elaborate.

  In addition, since the production start period is shorter in the button repeated operation performance than in the normal button operation production, and the effect sound is output in a short period (immediately) after the button operation operation, a physical sound generated by the button operation is generated. When the effect sounds overlap, the effect may be more powerful.

  In addition, during the button repeated operation performance, the production sound is output in a short period (immediately) after the button operation except for the final time of the button operation, while the final time of the button operation is performed by the liquid crystal control unit 700. Since the effect sound is output by the return command, the effect start period becomes long only for the final button operation, and as a result, it may be possible to prevent monotonous effect.

  If the production start period is long (in the case of normal button operation production), the player can be made to recognize that the other production sound output before the button operation is heard longer. Sometimes you can. Alternatively, in a long production start period, it may be possible for the player to recognize so that other production sounds output before the button operation will not be heard.

  Further, in the button repeated hit operation effect, a plurality of effect sounds continuously output in a short period corresponding to the button operation may be overlapped, or may not be overlapped.

  In addition, it is not limited to the configuration in which the length of the production start period is controlled by the transmission and reception of the command between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. You may manage and control the length of the production start period (refer to FIG. 587 (c)).

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix)
The gaming table (for example, Pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with an operating device (for example, a chance button 136) and a rendering device (for example, a speaker 120 or the like) for performing a rendering. The operation means is a means capable of accepting a first operation (for example, a normal operation), and the operation means is a means capable of accepting a second operation (for example, a button repeated operation), The effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect (for example, output of effect sound) in the first state, and the effect means is the second effect (for example, output of effect sound) in the second state. ) Is a means capable of executing, the first state is a state after the first time has elapsed after the operation means has received the first operation, and the second state is the After the operation means receives the second operation, A state after the second time has elapsed, the first time and the second time is gaming table characterized by a different time, that.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be performed according to the button operation, which may increase the player's interest.

  Further, the first time may be longer than the second time. Further, the first operation is an operation that is operated a first number of times during the acceptance period of the operating means, and the second operation is a second number of times during the acceptance period of the operating means. The first operation may be an operation that is performed, and the first operation may be less than the second operation. Further, the second operation may be a continuous operation of the operation means.

That is, when there are a plurality of button operation modes (the first button operation mode and the second button operation mode), the button operation from the first button operation mode (for example, normal button operation) The period until the effect corresponding to (for example, output of effect sound) (hereinafter, this period is referred to as an effect start period) is the first period, and the button operation is performed by the second button operation mode (for example, continuous button pressing operation). The production start period from to the production corresponding to the button operation (for example, output of the production sound) may be the second period, and the first period may be longer than the second period.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect in the button repeated hit operation effect in the case of the button repeated hit operation.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided, and the display means has a first display (first effect based on button operation) corresponding to the first operation (for example, normal button operation). A display 820) is a means capable of displaying, and the display means displays a second display (for example, a second effect display 822 based on repeated tapping operation) corresponding to the second operation (for example, button repeated tapping operation). The display means is a displayable means, and the production means (for example, the speaker 120) is means for starting execution of the first production (for example, output of production sound) at the start of the first display, The effect means may be means for starting execution of the second effect (for example, output of effect sound) before the start of the second display.

  That is, in the normal button operation effect, by increasing the effect start period, the effect display that is displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation and the normal button operation (the normal button operation based Control to match the timing with the one effect display). On the other hand, in the button repeated hit operation effect, by shortening the effect start period, an effect display (timing button operation) that is displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation (button hit operation) and the button operation (button hit operation). The control is performed so as not to match the timing with the second effect display based on the repeated hitting operation (different timing).

  With such a configuration, the player's interest may be increased depending on the button operation. That is, in the button repeated hit operation effect in the case of the button repeated hit operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal button operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

<Other Embodiments (Embodiment for canceling the character change effect when a predetermined interrupt occurs during the character change effect (character determination effect))>
Next, a game table (for example, a ball game table such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character change effect). Etc. will be described in detail. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 594 to 602 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even if the duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, they are not described in the description of the present embodiment. Reference numerals 594 to 602 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 594 to 602, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as those in the above embodiment. Further, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted. In addition, the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are used in principle only for the description of the present embodiment, but the examples of the present embodiment and the examples of other embodiments may be applied in combination with each other. You can

  FIG. 594 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of a character change effect.

  The gaming table of the present embodiment executes an effect such as a symbol variation display when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied. Then, when a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit game effect or a bonus game effect) is started, a character change effect that allows a character to appear in the predetermined effect from a plurality of characters to be selected and determined. It is feasible. This character change effect is composed of effects including a character introduction effect and a character selection effect. In the character introduction effect, a plurality of characters are displayed (sequentially) and introduced (including the case where the player moves between the characters with the selection button), while the effect indicating the characters selectable to the player and the character is selected. It refers to an effect that displays an image (temporary selection image) that is in a state in which selection is not made (temporary selection state). The character selection effect is that after selecting and determining a specific character from a plurality of characters ( The effect that is executed after the selection with the decision button).

  The main control unit 300, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination), the first sub control unit 400 gives a character change effect start command for instructing execution of the character change effect. To send. Upon receiving the character change effect start command, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the character change effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when each round start condition in the jackpot game is satisfied).

  The character introduction effect is, for example, based on the fact that the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a or the selection button (right button) 136b is accepted during execution of the character introduction effect, and a plurality of selectable characters are sequentially moved to the center. It is a production that moves and stands out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the first character (lord) is in the front center of the display area, the second character (grandfather) is left rear, and the third character (princess) is An image in which the first character (lord) in the center of the front, which is positioned at the right rear, is conspicuously displayed brightly (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “temporary selected image of the first character (lord)”) When the operation of the select button (left button) 136a is accepted during execution of the character introduction effect, the currently displayed (temporarily selected) first character (character (lord)) to the second character ( This is an effect of executing an animation for changing to a character (grandpa).

  Further, as shown in (b) in the figure, the character selection effect is based on the fact that the operation of the decision button 136 is accepted during the execution of the character introduction effect, and the character being temporarily selected (here, the character (grandfather)). ) Is selected and determined as the changed character, and a character string of a balloon saying "I'll leave it to the grandfather" is displayed, and a production sound "Leave it to the grandfather" is output from the speaker 120.

  Then, in the normal character change effect, the character is changed to the character determined in the character selection effect, but in the present embodiment, in the character selection effect (state of FIG. 7B), FIG. When the game ball is won in the starting opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232) as shown in, and the variable display of the decorative design is started on the decorative design display device 208. In this case, processing for canceling the character selection effect is performed.

  In this way, by making it impossible to change the character until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, it is possible to secure a sufficient game interval when changing the character, and suppress the player's ambition. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Example 1 of timing chart for character change production>
FIG. 595 is an example of a timing chart of a character change effect in the present embodiment, in the case where processing is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control initiated by the first sub control unit 400). Here is an example. The same figure (a) is in the case of normal character change production, the figure (b) shows the timing chart when there is a specified interruption while executing the character change production. In the figure, the outline of the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. Further, in the figure, “effect” indicates character selection effect, and “operation” indicates operation of the decision button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the normal effect, the character introduction effect is being executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (1). In this state, since the character has not been decided, the state of the character (here, character A) decided in the previous character change effect is maintained as the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400. Further, in this example, the character A is in the temporary selection state on the decorative pattern display device 208, but the temporary selection character can be moved between the characters A and B by operating the selection button, and the temporary selection character During that time, the internal selection state does not change.

  When the decision button 136 is operated while the character B is temporarily selected by operating the selection buttons 136a and 136b (2), the character selection (decision) effect of the character B is started. When the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends (3), the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated to the character B, and the decorative symbol display device 208 causes another effect (for example, a demo screen). Is executed (4). After that, the determined character B appears and the game proceeds (5).

  In the same figure (b), as in the case of the figure (a), the decision button 136 is operated while the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a, 136b (2), and the character selection (decision) of the character B is performed. ) Start production. Then, when the interruption occurs before the execution period of the predetermined character selection effect ends, the character selection effect is canceled midway (3). Since the character selection effect has been canceled, the determination of the character B is also canceled, and the internally selected state of the first sub-control unit 400 also maintains the previously determined character A. Then, the character A appears and the game proceeds (4).

<Example 2 of timing chart of character change production>
FIG. 596 is an example of a more detailed timing chart of FIG. 595. The same figure (a) is in the case of normal character change production, the same figure (b) is one example of the timing chart when there is a specified interruption while executing the character change production. In addition, the “cursor position” in the figure indicates the position (any of the characters A to C that are temporarily selected) that is temporarily selected by the selection buttons 136a and 136b.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub-control unit. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction presentation to move the cursor position (temporarily selected character) from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to operate. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown here).

  When the enter button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The production (“C production” in the figure) is started to be executed. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as "decide on character C" from the speaker 120 (4). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” in the figure) of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). When the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 ends (6) and the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the first sub control unit 400 changes the internal selection state from the previous character A to The character C updated this time is updated, and a liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (8). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub-control unit. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction presentation to move the cursor position (temporarily selected character) from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to operate. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown here).

  When the enter button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 is performed. The production (“C production” in the figure) is started to be executed. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as "decide on character C" from the speaker 120 (4). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” in the figure) of the character C on the decorative symbol display device 208 (5).

  When an interrupt (a cancel factor) occurs during execution of the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400 (6), the first sub-control unit 400 cancels (cancels) the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400. Then, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 stops (cancels) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (7). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is stopped, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the previously determined character A is not updated. Retained. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.

<Third embodiment of timing chart of character change presentation>
FIG. 597 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example of a case where control is executed based on a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700). The same figure (a) is in the case of normal character change production, the figure (b) shows the timing chart when there is a specified interruption while executing the character change production. Further, FIGS. 7C and 7D are examples of specific effects.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub-control unit. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative pattern display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction presentation to move the cursor position (temporarily selected character) from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to operate. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 which receives the liquid crystal command receives the return command. Is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (4). After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect of the character C on the decorative pattern display device 208 (5). Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the character selection effect of the character C in the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as "decide on the character C" from the speaker 120). Start (6). When the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and the first sub-control. It returns to the section 400 and transmits a command (8). When the predetermined execution time ends, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (8). Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the currently determined character C (9).

  In the figure (b), the timings (1) to (6) are the same as those in the figure (a), so the description thereof is omitted, and the character selection effect is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. When an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs (7), the first sub-control unit 400 sends a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a command back to the first sub-control unit 400 (8) to cancel (cancel) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (9). Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 cancels the character selection effect of the first sub-control unit 400 (10). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is stopped, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the previously determined character A is not updated. Retained. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect sound as the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in the figure, the effect sound is composed of the introduction reproducing unit 850 and the loop reproducing unit 852. In one character selection effect, the introduction reproducing unit 850 is first reproduced once, and then the loop reproducing unit 852 is repeated a predetermined number of times. And finish.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the character selection effect is canceled (cancelled) in the middle, for example, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction reproducing unit 850, the introduction reproducing unit 850 is canceled (hereinafter However, if an interrupt occurs during the reproduction of the loop reproducing unit 852, the reproduction of the loop reproducing unit 852 may be continued. Further, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction reproducing unit 850, the introduction reproducing unit 850 may be canceled without canceling the loop reproducing unit 852 thereafter. In this way, when the effect sound is composed of a plurality of parts, it may be canceled or not canceled depending on the part.

  Further, as shown in (d) of the figure, when the reproduction time is set for each effect (sounds A to C), an interruption (from the start of the output of the effect sound until the set time elapses) When a (cancellation factor) occurs, the subsequent output may be canceled. Note that the reproduction time is an example and may be shorter than this.

  Further, although the effect sound is described as an example in FIGS. 7C and 7D, the same effect can be applied to animation.

<Example 4 of timing chart of character change production>
FIG. 598 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example of the case where control is executed based on a command from the first sub-control unit 400 (control initiated by the first sub-control unit 400). is there. The same figure (a) is in the case of normal character change production, the figure (b) shows the timing chart when there is a specified interruption while executing the character change production.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub-control unit. 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative pattern display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction presentation to move the cursor position (temporarily selected character) from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to operate. The liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the currently determined character C, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 displays the liquid crystal. Send a command (3). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (4). Further, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 starts execution of the character selection effect (4). After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the character selection effect of the character C on the decorative pattern display device 208 (5). When the predetermined execution time ends, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (7), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the predetermined execution time. The character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is finished (7).

  In the figure (b), the timings (1) to (5) are the same as those in the figure (a), so the description thereof is omitted, and the execution of the character selection effect by the first sub-control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. When an interruption (a cancel factor) occurs during this, the first sub-control unit 400 stops (cancels) the character selection effect and sends a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 stops the character selection effect (7).

  In the present embodiment, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the start of the character selection effect (timing (3)). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state based on the update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 (timing (4)). Therefore, even if an interruption occurs during execution of the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) is newly determined. The updated character (here, character C) is maintained. Such a character selection effect configuration may be included.

<Example 1 of character change production>
FIG. 599 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the character change effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 596 (a).

  The timing shown in the same figure (a) shows the state during the fluctuation game, the timing shown in the same figure (b) shows the state during the fluctuation stop, and the figure (c) shows the notification that the menu screen is displayed during the fluctuation stop An image 880 (here, an image simulating the decision button 136 and an image composed of characters such as “menu screen display”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the enter button 136 has been operated, and a menu screen for setting volume consideration adjustment, member registration, and character (character) change is displayed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the character change is selected and the character introduction effect is being executed, and shows the state before the timing of (1) in FIG. 596 (a). Here, for example, the currently selected (previously determined) character (lord) is brightly displayed on the front, the character (princess) is displayed on the right rear, and the character (lord) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the selection button 136a is operated, and shows the timing of (1) in FIG. 596 (a).

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is a state in which the character (grandpa) is selected (temporary selection) by operating the selection button 136a during the character introduction effect, and the timing of (2) in FIG. 596 (a) is set. Shows. The temporarily selected character (grandpa) is brightly displayed on the front, the character (lord) is displayed on the right rear, and the character (princess) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the enter button 136 has been operated, and shows the timing of (3) in FIG. 596 (a). As a result, the character (grandpa) is selected and determined.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (grandpa), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 596 (a). The liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the character selection effect of displaying the character (grandpa) brightly on the front in the decorative pattern display device 208 and displaying the balloon character "I'll leave it to the grandpa !!", and also the first sub-control. The section 400 outputs the effect sound "Let's leave it to the grandfather !!" from the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state immediately before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and shows the timing of (6) to (7) in FIG. 596 (a).

The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect has ended and the menu screen shown in (d) of the figure is displayed again.

  The timings shown in (l) and (m) of the same figure are the starting opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232, etc.) while the menu screen shown in (j) of the drawing is displayed. ) Shows that the game ball has won ((l) in the same figure) and the next variable game has started ((m) in the same figure).

<Example 2 of character change production>
FIG. 600 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the character change effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 596 (b).

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 5A to 5H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 599A to 599, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (grandpa), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 596 (b). The liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the character selection effect of displaying the character (grandpa) brightly on the front in the decorative pattern display device 208 and displaying the balloon character "I'll leave it to the grandpa !!", and also the first sub-control. The section 400 outputs the effect sound "Let's leave it to the grandfather !!" from the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which the game ball has won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing of (6) in FIG. 596 (b) is set. Shows.

The timing shown in (k) of the same figure shows the timing after (7) in FIG. 596 (b). That is, it shows a state in which the character selection effect is canceled midway and the variable game associated with the winning of the starting opening is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined interrupt occurs during execution of the character selection effect, the character selection effect is stopped. In this example, the detection of the winning of the game ball to the starting opening or the start of the variable game based on that) is the interrupt factor. In the character selection effect, the effect display by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also stopped, and the effect sound by the first sub-control unit 400 is also stopped ((i) in the figure).

<Example 3 of character change production>
FIG. 601 is a diagram showing another example of the character change effect in time series, which corresponds to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 596 (b).

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 5A to 5H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 599A to 599, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) in the figure are the states in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection decision of the character (grandpa), and show the timing of (5) in FIG. 596 (b). . The liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the character selection effect of displaying the character (grandpa) brightly on the front in the decorative pattern display device 208 and displaying the balloon character "I'll leave it to the grandpa !!", and also the first sub-control. The section 400 outputs the effect sound "Let's leave it to the grandfather !!" from the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure is a state in which the game ball has won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing of (6) in FIG. 596 (b) is set. Shows.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the timing after (7) in FIG. 596 (b). That is, it shows a state in which the character selection effect is canceled midway and the variable game associated with the winning of the starting opening is started.

  As shown in (i) and (j) of the same figure, in the effect (see FIG. 597 (c)) in which the effect sound is repeatedly reproduced, the character selection effect may be canceled in the middle thereof.

  FIG. 602 is an example of various setting screens. Instead of the demo screen shown in FIG. 595 (a), the setting screen in FIG. 595 may be displayed.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C show a display example (FIG. 11A) in which the menu screen display is suggested after the fluctuation stop, a display example of the menu screen based on the display example (FIG. 9B), and the menu screen. A display example of the selected setting screen ((c) of the same figure). Further, the setting screens of (d) to (g) in the figure may be displayed as the selection items (setting screen corresponding to (c) in the figure) of the menu screen. Further, as shown in (h) and (i) of the figure, it is assumed that setting screens (i) to (k) of the figure are displayed without going through the menu screen (b) of the figure. Good.

  As described above, the game table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100), the operation means (for example, the determination button 136), the rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the control means (for example, , A first sub-control unit 400), and the production means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of production, and the control means is capable of changing at least a plurality of types of states. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect related to the selected one), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first effect. It is a selected state (for example, a state in which the character selection effect is being executed (a state in which the character A is selected in the temporary selection state, a state in which no character is selected, etc.)). At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed), and the effect means is configured to: The first effect is a means for starting at least execution, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the control means is the first case. , A first control (control for changing the first selection state to the second selection state, a control for changing the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, changing from the non-selection state to the character B). Or a control for changing from the character A to the character B), an execution control of the character selection effect, etc.), and the control means does not execute at least the first control in the second case. The first control is control including at least control for changing from the first selection state to the second selection state, and in the first case, the last first condition is satisfied. It is a case where the first time has elapsed from the, in the second case, before the first time has elapsed from the satisfaction of the first condition, the second condition is satisfied (starting symbol fluctuation, big hit). It is a case where there is the next R start in the selected effect in the middle, the end of the R, the end of the big hit / small hit, and the game ball passing to the gate for operating the accessory continuous operation device). It is a game machine characterized in that it is an effect that is started to be executed before the first time has elapsed from the establishment of the first condition.

  Incidentally, the accessory continuous operation device operating gate is a mechanism that triggers opening of the attacker after the jackpot pattern is stopped. After the jackpot pattern is stopped, the condition device operates, and when the game ball passes through the gate for the accessory continuous operation device operation, the accessory continuous operation device operates to perform processing such as opening of the attacker. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interrupt factor is completed, and when changing the character, leave a game interval and suppress the player's ambition. May be possible. Further, the player finishes the character selection effect by the passage of the scheduled effect period by displaying another demo screen or setting screen, and changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). You can recognize that is completed. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped and the pattern variation display is started (without displaying another demo screen or setting screen), the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400). Since it is possible to recognize that the character has not been performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the character is changed (the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated) without being noticed by the player.

  The first effect is an effect related to the second selection state (for example, a character selection effect that is started to be executed before the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed (updated)). It also includes dialogue and sound effects that are specific to the character (character B) that has been selected and determined, which is executed during the rendering. In addition, the effects related to the second selection state include dialogue and sound effects peculiar to (character B) when the cursor is moved from the character A to the character B (temporary selection state).

  Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of outputting a sound. Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of displaying an image.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interrupt factor is completed, and when changing the character, leave a game interval and suppress the player's ambition. May be possible.

  Further, the control means may be means that does not at least change to the second selected state in the second case.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interrupt factor is completed, and when changing the character, leave a game interval and suppress the player's ambition. May be possible. Further, the player finishes the character selection effect by the passage of the scheduled effect period by displaying another demo screen or setting screen, and changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400). You can recognize that is completed. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped and the pattern variation display is started (without displaying another demo screen or setting screen), the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400). Since it is possible to recognize that the character has not been performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the character is changed (the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated) without being noticed by the player.

  The second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when the symbol variable display is executed. Here, the symbol variable display includes the start of rotation of the reel of the slot machine.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, effect of symbol variation display), the effect means, of the second condition (for example, symbol variation start condition) It may be a means capable of at least starting the execution of the second effect when it is established.

  With such a configuration, when the player stops the character selection effect (without displaying another demo screen or setting screen) and starts the variable display of the character, the player changes the character (first sub-control unit). Since it can be recognized that the internal selection state of 400 has not been updated, the occurrence of a situation in which the character is changed (the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated) without the player's knowledge. May be reduced.

  Further, the game table may be a pachinko machine, and the game table may be a slot machine.

  The game console of the present embodiment cancels the effect when a predetermined interruption occurs during the effect (character change effect) executed when changing the character, and particularly during the character change effect. When a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect executed after the character is selected and decided, the selection is canceled. It should be noted that if a predetermined interruption occurs during the character introduction effect that causes the player to recognize the selectable character in the character change effect, the effect may be canceled.

  The predetermined interruption is, for example, the start of symbol variation (special symbol variation), and when the symbol variation starts during the character change effect (particularly, the character selection effect after the character is selected and decided), the character change is canceled. . By making the character change impossible until the symbol variation ends, it may be possible to leave a game interval when changing the character and suppress the gambling spirit.

  The "predetermined interrupt" that is a factor for canceling the character selection effect is, for example, a winning or a random number to the special figure starting port (for example, the first special figure starting port 230 and / or the second special figure starting port 232). Acquisition, command transmission to the first sub-control unit 400, command reception of the first sub-control unit 400, command analysis of the first sub-control unit 400, execution processing of the command (for example, command transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 700) This is the case where the command reception of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the command analysis of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the execution process of the command, and the like are performed (detected).

  Further, as a cause for canceling the character selection effect on the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined process in the liquid crystal control unit 700 such as a command execution process in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is included in the predetermined interrupt.

  The cause of cancellation of the internal information update (update of the internal selection information) of the first sub-control unit 400 is that the predetermined process in the first sub-control unit 400, such as the command execution process in the first sub-control unit 400, is the predetermined value. Included in interrupt.

  In addition, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 may change immediately after the character selection determination operation using the determination button 136. For example, when the character change effect is started in a certain round during the jackpot game (for example, the 5th round), the character is selected and decided (changed from the character A to the character B), and the character selection effect is being executed, immediately. In the 1st sub control part 400, the internal selection state is updated to the changed character (character B). Then, even if an interruption such as a start of variation occurs during the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the next round (for example, the sixth round) (since the internal selection state has been updated). Then, the character change may be completed (the character B is selected).

  In addition, the character selection effect includes a plurality of effect parts (a first effect part and a second effect part), which are canceled by a predetermined interrupt during effect execution of the first effect part, but the effect effect of the second effect effect is performed. The predetermined interrupt may not be canceled. Further, it may not be canceled by a predetermined interrupt during the execution of the effect of the former effect section, but may be canceled by a predetermined interrupt during the effect of the effect effect of the latter step. Even a predetermined interrupt may be canceled. For example, when the effect is output of effect sound from the speaker 120, the effect section in the former stage is the introduction section, and the effect section in the latter stage is the loop section.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to cancel the character selection effect when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect (during the predetermined effect execution time), strictly speaking, the actual effect execution time A configuration is also included in which the character selection effect (update of the internal selection state) is canceled even when a predetermined interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs just before the end. That is, considering the time required for command transmission / reception between the control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the character selection effect is produced when the cancel factor occurs during the actual effect execution time + α. It also includes those that cancel.

  Further, in the configuration in which the processing is executed based on the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (the control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is performed), the operation of the enter button 136 is detected by the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit When the liquid crystal command is transmitted to 700 and the fluctuation starts in the main control unit 300 before the first sub-control unit 400 receives the corresponding return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (when a predetermined interrupt occurs). ) May cancel the character selection effect.

  Specific examples when the character selection effect is canceled are listed below. For example, the character (Den) is selected and determined in the previous character change effect, the current character change effect is started from the character (Den), and the character is selected by the player operation (select button 136a, 136b operation) in the character introduction effect this time. (Grandpa) is selected, and further, the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (selection buttons 136a and 136b operation) in the current character introduction effect, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (decision button 136). When the determined effect is canceled during the execution of the character selection effect, the character selection state includes the following cases.

(1) The character (princess) selected and determined before the termination condition is satisfied (before the cancellation factor occurs) becomes the changed selected character.

(2) The previously selected character (lord) determined at the time of starting the character change effect becomes the changed selected character.

(3) The previously selected character (don) becomes the changed selected character.

(4) The character (Den) as the default character when there is no player operation becomes the changed selected character.

(5) No character has been selected.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Appendix)
The gaming table (for example, Pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a rendering unit (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and an operating unit (for example, a determination button 136) capable of accepting a selection operation by the player. In the gaming table provided, the effect means is means capable of executing a selected state effect (for example, character introduction effect) during a selected effect period (for example, character change effect), and the selected state effects are plural. Is an effect indicating that the image is in a selected state, and the effect means can execute a selection determination effect (for example, a character selection effect) when the selection operation is executed during execution of the selection state effect. The selection determination effect is an effect showing one image selected from the plurality of images (hereinafter, referred to as “selected image”), and the effect means is If an interrupt condition during the selection decision demonstration execution is met (for example, if the symbol variable display has started) to a means to cancel the selection decision effect, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interrupt factor is completed, and when changing the character, leave a game interval and suppress the player's ambition. May be possible.

  Further, a storage unit (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400) capable of storing information on the selected image determined by the selection operation is provided, and the storage unit stores the information in the first case. Means, the storage means is a means that does not store the information in the second case, the first case is a case where a predetermined performance execution time of the selection determination performance has elapsed, The second case may be a case where the interrupt condition is satisfied while the selection decision effect is being executed. Further, the rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a means capable of displaying the first display in the first case, and the first display suggests the end of the selection determination rendering. It may be a display (for example, a demo screen or a setting screen).

  That is, the first sub-control unit 400 displays another demo screen or setting screen when a predetermined period (production execution time) of the character selection effect has passed, and then the first sub-control unit 400. The internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is not updated by canceling the character selection effect when a predetermined interruption occurs during execution of the character selection effect. And

  With such a configuration, the player finishes the character selection effect by the lapse of the scheduled effect period by displaying another demo screen or setting screen, and changes the character (the first sub control unit 400). It is possible to recognize that the update of the internal selection state of is completed. In other words, when the character selection effect is stopped and the pattern variation display is started (without displaying another demo screen or setting screen), the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400). Since it is possible to recognize that the character has not been performed, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the character is changed (the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400 is updated) without being noticed by the player.

  Further, at least one winning opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, etc.) is provided, and the interrupt condition is a condition based on the fact that a game ball wins the winning opening. , May be Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect of the variable display of the symbols is finished, and when changing the character, leave a game interval and suppress the player's ambition. May be possible.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine including display means and operation means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the display means at least a second display. Displayable means, the first display is a display related to the operating means, the second display is a display related to hold, the first display is a second state In this case, the display is such that visibility is at least lower than in the first state.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display. Is that
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 1 or 2, wherein the first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the first display is to change a display mode from a start position to an end position in accordance with the passage of time. Is a possible display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means displays at least a plurality of the second displays. A gaming table characterized by being possible means.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine including display means and operation means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the display means at least a second display. Displayable means, the first display is a display related to the operating means, the second display is a display related to hold, the second display is an animation display is possible The gaming table, wherein the first display is a display having a visibility at least lower than that in the first state in the second state.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the first display is to change a display mode from a start position to an end position in accordance with the passage of time. It is a display that can be displayed.

(Supplementary note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means displays at least a plurality of the second displays. A gaming table characterized by being possible means.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine including display means and operation means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the display means at least a second display. Displayable means, the first display is a display related to the operating means, the second display is a display related to hold, the second display is a change in the number of hold If it is, it is a display that can move the display position, the first display is a display that is at least less visible than the first state in the second state, A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the first display is to change a display mode from a start position to an end position in accordance with the passage of time. It is a display that can be displayed.

(Supplementary note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means displays at least a plurality of the second displays. A gaming table characterized by being possible means.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A game machine including an operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays. Is a first display, the first display is a display relating to the operating means, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period, the display The means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second period when the display condition is satisfied, and the second period is longer than the first period. The gaming table, wherein the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the first display is a display including at least a meter display.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 2, wherein the meter display is a display in which the display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time.

(Supplementary Note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3, wherein at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display, and the second display is staging. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note 5) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 4, wherein the display means is means capable of at least displaying the second display when the display condition is satisfied. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note 6) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5, wherein the operation means is means provided at least at a position operable by a player. .

(Supplementary note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 8) The game table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, wherein the game table is a slot machine.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine including an operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area, and the display means is Means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, the display means is means capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area, the first display, It is a display regarding the operation means, the second display is a display regarding the operation means, at least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display area"), The third display area is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area, and at least a part of the second display area (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display area”) is the third display area. Of the display area of at least part of Display area, the second display area is a display area larger than the first display area, the fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area, A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 2) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is the first one. A display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is the third display, A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the display means is means capable of at least displaying the first display while the third display is being displayed. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least displaying the third display while the first display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least displaying the second display while the third display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least displaying the third display while the second display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 6, wherein the third display is at least less visible than the first state when in the second state. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note 8) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 7, the second state is a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps with at least a part of the third display. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 9) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 7 or 8, wherein the first state is a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display. Is,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 9, wherein the third display is at least less visible than the third state when in the fourth state. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note 11) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 10, the fourth state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps with at least a part of the third display. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 12) The game machine according to Supplementary Note 10 or 11, wherein the third state is a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the third display. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note 13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 10 to 12, wherein the third display is at least more visible than the second state when in the fourth state. It is a low display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 14) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 13, wherein the first display is a display including at least a meter display.

(Supplementary Note 15) The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 14, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine including an operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area, and the display means is Means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, the display means is means capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area, the first display, It is a display relating to the operation means, the second display is a performance display, the third display is a symbol display, at least a part of the display area of the second display area is the first Is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area, at least a part of the display area of the third display area is a display area overlapping at least a part of the display area of the first display area. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 2) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is the first one. A display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is the third display, A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the display means is means capable of at least displaying the second display while the first display is being displayed. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least displaying the first display while the second display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 4, wherein the display means is a means capable of at least displaying the first display while the third display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 6) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 5, wherein the display means is a means capable of starting at least the third display while the first display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 6, wherein the first display has at least lower visibility than the first state when in the second state. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note 8) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 7, the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 9) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 7 or 8, wherein the first state is a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note 10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 9, wherein the third display is at least less visible than the third state when in the fourth state. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary Note 11) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 10, the fourth state is a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps with at least a part of the third display. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 12) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 10 or 11, wherein the third state is a state in which at least part of the first display does not overlap with at least part of the third display. Is,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 13) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 12, wherein the first display is a display including at least a meter display.

(Supplementary Note 14) The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 13, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) A game machine including an operating means and a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays. Is a first display, the first display is a display relating to the operation means, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the first mode, and the display The means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second mode, the first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated, and the second mode Is a mode in which the operating means is automatically operated.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display prompting a player to operate the operation means.

(Supplementary note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary note 1 or 2, wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is a performance display. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note 4) The game machine according to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the display means is means for at least displaying the second display when a display condition is satisfied. Stand.

(Supplementary Note 5) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 4, wherein the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is operated in the first mode. Game table.

(Supplementary Note 6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 4 or 5, wherein the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operating means is not operated in the second mode. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 4 to 6, wherein the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the second mode. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 8) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 7, wherein the operating means is means provided at least at a position operable by a player. .

(Supplementary note 9) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 8, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, from the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage, to the second advantage, which is higher than the first advantage. A control state transition unit that shifts the control state to a certain second control state, an effect display unit that displays an effect image that effects a game, and a player selects from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period. Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying the specified image, effect control means for displaying the image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means on the effect display means, and a game An operation acceptance unit for accepting a selection operation by a person, wherein the image selection effect period is a predetermined first period and a predetermined period started after the start of the first period. Including the second period of The effect control means stores the specific image information for specifying an image to be displayed on the effect display means, based on the selection operation by the player accepted by the operation accepting unit during the second period. If the end condition of the predetermined image selection effect period is satisfied before the start condition of the predetermined second period is satisfied, the plurality of the plurality of characters are stored on behalf of the player. A gaming machine, characterized in that a predetermined image is selected from the images and the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display means.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the effect control unit ignores the selection operation by the player accepted by the operation accepting unit during the first period.

(Supplementary Note 3) A variable winning opening whose open / closed state can be changed from one of a predetermined closed state and a predetermined open state in which winning of game balls is easier than the closed state to the other, and the second control state Is a control state in which a round operation for changing the open / closed state of the variable winning opening from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times. In the first control state, the round operation is performed. There is no control state, and the ending condition of the image selection effect period is that the number of game balls that have won the variable winning port since the start of the specific round operation in the second control state is the specific number or more. The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2, which is established when

(Supplementary Note 4) A game device in which a game ball that shoots a game ball is ejected every time a predetermined shooting period elapses based on an operation by a player, and the game ball that is emitted by the shooter is allowed to flow down and the variable winning port is provided. And the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the first period is a period shorter than a period required to shoot a specific number of the game balls.

(Supplementary Note 5) A plurality of the variable winning openings, a game nail that changes the direction of the game ball falling, and an entry area for the game ball shot by the launching device to enter are provided in the game area. , The plurality of variable winning openings include a first variable winning opening and a second variable winning opening, and the game nail is until the game ball that has entered from the entry area reaches the second variable winning opening. Arranged so that the number of game nails that may come into contact with the game ball that has entered from the entry area reaches the first variable winning port is greater than the number of game nails that may come into contact with the game nails. The specific round operation is a round operation of changing the open / closed state of the first variable winning opening a predetermined number of times in the second control state, and the supplementary note 3 or 4. Game table.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) Display means capable of at least displaying an image, control means capable of performing at least control of the display means, storage means capable of storing information, operation means operable by a player,
A game table provided with, the display means is capable of performing at least a selection effect, the display means is capable of displaying a first selection state image during the selection effect, The display means is capable of displaying a second selection state image during the selection effect, and the display means is capable of displaying a third selection state image during the selection effect. Is capable of displaying a first selection change animation during the selection effect, and the display means is capable of displaying a second selection change animation during the selection effect. The state image indicates at least that the selected image is the first image, and the second selected state image indicates at least that the selected image is the second image. Three selection state image , At least indicating that the selected image is a third image, and the first selection change animation has at least a mode in which the selected image is changed from the first image to the second image. The second selection change animation shows at least a mode in which the selection image is changed from the second image to the third image, and the selection image is in a selected state. An image, the control means is capable of at least executing control for accepting a selection operation, and the selection operation indicates an operation performed by the player using the operation means, and the control means is When the selection operation is accepted during the first period, at least the first control can be executed, and the display means is configured to perform the first selection during the first period. It is possible to display a state image, the first control is a control for displaying the second selection state image on the display means after the first selection change animation, the control means, When the selection operation is accepted during the second period, at least the second control can be executed, and the display means can display the first selection change animation during the second period. The second control is a control for stopping the display of the first selection change animation and displaying the third selection state image on the display means after the second selection change animation. The storage means is capable of storing first information when the selection operation is accepted by the control means during the selection effect, and the storage means stores the first information during the selection effect. control When the selection operation is not accepted by the means, second information can be stored, the first information is information corresponding to the selected image, the second information, the A game table characterized in that the information is information corresponding to any one of a plurality of images selectable by the player during the selection effect.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the second control stops the display of the first selection change animation, does not display the second selection state image, and displays the second selection state image. Is a control for displaying the third selection state image on the display means after the selection change animation of.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein one of a plurality of control states including at least a first control state and a second control state when a transition condition is satisfied. A control state transfer means capable of transferring a control state to the first control state, wherein the first control state has a first degree of advantage for the player, and the second control state has an advantage for the player. The second degree of advantage is greater than the first degree of advantage and the state is from one of the first state and the second state to the other. A variable winning port, the second state is easier to win the game ball than the first state, the second control state, the variable winning port is at least the It is a control state that can execute at least the round operation that is the second state, The first control state is a control state in which the round motion is not executed, and the satisfaction of the ending condition of the period of the selection effect is the variable after the specific round motion in the second control state is started. A gaming table, including at least a case where a specific number of gaming balls are won in a winning opening.

(Supplementary note 4) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the second information is information corresponding to the selected image.

(Supplementary note 5) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the second information is information stored in the storage means in the previous selection effect. Stand.

(Supplementary note 6) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5, wherein the number of selection state images that can be displayed during the selection effect is four or more.

(Supplementary note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 6, wherein the number of selection change animations that can be displayed during the selection effect is 3 or more.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, from the first control state in which the advantage to the player is the first advantage, to the second advantage, which is higher than the first advantage. A control state transition unit that shifts the control state to a certain second control state, an effect display unit that displays an effect image that effects a game, and a player selects from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period. Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying the specified image, effect control means for displaying the image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means on the effect display means, and a game An operation receiving unit for receiving a selection operation by a person, and a selection state image indicating that a predetermined image among the plurality of images is in a selection state during the image selection effect period. The above production When the operation accepting section accepts a selection operation by the player when the selection state image indicates that the predetermined image is in the selection state, a predetermined selection change animation is displayed on the effect display means. The selected state image indicating that the image different from the predetermined image among the plurality of images is displayed on the effect display means after the display on the display, and when the predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied. It is configured to store the specific image information capable of specifying the image in the selected state in the storage means, and specify after the selection change animation based on that the operation receiving unit receives the selection operation by the player. When the selected state image indicating that the image of “1” is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means, the operation accepting unit is operated by the player during the selection change animation. When receiving the selection operation, and displaying the selected image indicating that another image from the specific image after the selection change animation is selected in the effect display means gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 2) Based on that the operation accepting unit has accepted the selection operation by the player when the selection state image indicating that the predetermined pre-change image is in the selection state is displayed on the effect display means. The selected state image indicating that the predetermined changed image is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means after the selection changed animation is displayed. When an image is included and the operation receiving unit receives the selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the changed image in the selection change animation is selected by the selection state image after the animation. The gaming table according to appendix 1, wherein the gaming table is replaced with an image shown as being in a state.

(Supplementary Note 3) A variable winning opening whose open / closed state can be changed from one of a predetermined closed state and a predetermined open state in which winning of a game ball is easier than the closed state to the other, and the second control state Is a control state in which a round operation for changing the open / closed state of the variable winning opening from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times. In the first control state, the round operation is performed. There is no control state, and the ending condition of the image selection effect period is that the number of game balls that have won the variable winning port since the start of the specific round operation in the second control state is the specific number or more. The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2, which is established when

(Supplementary Note 4) A game device in which a game ball that shoots a game ball is ejected every time a predetermined shooting period elapses based on an operation by a player, and the game ball that is emitted by the shooter is allowed to flow down and the variable winning port is provided. The gaming machine according to appendix 3, wherein the playing time of the selection change animation is longer than the firing period.

(Supplementary Note 5) The image selection effect period includes a first period and a second period started after the first period, and during the first period, the image in the selection change animation is changed. Note that the selection operation is ignored, and during the second period, the image indicated as being in the selection state by the selection state image is changed based on the selection operation in the selection change animation. The game table according to any one of 1 to 4.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game table described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1) Display means capable of at least displaying an image, control means capable of performing at least control of the display means, storage means capable of storing information, operation means operable by a player,
In the gaming machine provided with, the storage means is capable of storing information capable of specifying the image in the selected state when the confirmation condition is satisfied, and the display means displays the selection effect. At least executable, the display means is capable of displaying at least a first selection state image indicating that the first image is in the selection state, the display means, the second image It is capable of displaying at least a second selection state image indicating a selection state, and the display means is capable of displaying at least a third selection state image indicating that the third image is in a selection state. The display means is capable of displaying at least a first selection change animation for changing the selection state from the first image to the second image, and the display means is the second From the image above At least a second selection change animation for changing the selection state to the three images can be displayed, and the display means can display the first selection state image during execution of the selection effect. Yes, the display means displays the first selection change animation and then displays the second selection state when the operation means receives a selection operation by the player while the first selection state image is being displayed. An image can be displayed, and the display means displays the first selection change animation when the operation means accepts a selection operation by a player while the first selection change animation is being displayed. A game table characterized by being capable of displaying the third selection state image after the second selection change animation is displayed after being stopped.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the display means is configured to display the first selection change animation when the operation means accepts a selection operation by a player while the first selection change animation is displayed. It is possible to display the third selection state image after displaying the second selection change animation without stopping the display of the selection change animation and displaying the second selection state image. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note 3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 1 or 2, wherein, when a transition condition is satisfied, a first control state in which the degree of advantage to the player is the first degree of advantage and the first A control state transition means capable of transitioning the control state to any one of a plurality of control states including a second control state which is a second advantage having a higher advantage than the advantage; the first state and the first state; It is equipped with a variable winning port whose state can be changed from one of the second states where the winning of the game ball is easier than the one state to the other, and the second control state is such that the variable winning port is at least the first state. The second control state is a control state in which at least a round operation is performed, the first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not executed, and the end condition of the selection effect period is satisfied by the first control state. Start a certain round motion in the second control state Amusement machine in which the variable winning hole comprises at least when there is a winning game ball of a particular number, and wherein the from.

  Hereinafter, another embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The following embodiments are roughly classified into three embodiments, that is, embodiments A to C, but the embodiments and examples and modifications included in the embodiments can be appropriately combined with each other. is there. Note that the reference numerals indicating the respective configurations are used uniformly only in the embodiment A, B, or C. Therefore, for example, the same code as that of the embodiment A may be used as a code indicating another configuration in the embodiment B.

<Embodiment A>
<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 603. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. Hereinafter, the front side of the game board 200 may refer to this game area 124. In addition, in the present embodiment, a light source having an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. Built into the chance button 136, a ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 604) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136. Then, a chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player for the card unit. A return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 603 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated to be fired by the player. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface (front side) and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 603, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 605.

  FIG. 604 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 603 as seen from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed this payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 constituting the main control section 300 (see FIG. 606) for performing control processing for the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 606) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400 A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 606) that performs control processing related to performance, and a payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( (Refer to FIG. 606), and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by the operation of the game shop staff A firing board case 176 accommodating a firing board 174 that constitutes a firing control section 630 (see FIG. 606) that performs control processing relating to the firing of a ball, and a power management section 660 (see FIG. 606) that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply for accommodating a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 605 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 605 is a so-called right-handed game board. The game board 200 includes a game board 201 which is a main body of the game board 200 (or a support body of the components of the game board 200). The game board 201 is a plate-shaped member, and the front side on the player side thereof may be referred to as the front surface, and the back surface (back side surface) on the opposite side may be referred to as the back surface. The game board 201 may be an entirely transparent member, a partly transparent member, or an entirely non-transparent member. The game board 201 is provided with the following components.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 201 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that the gate and the second special figure starting opening and the first special figure related to the general figure fluctuation are changed. It can be divided into a figure starting port. Specifically, in a generally known right-handing machine, a first area (game area) that is a route to enter the first special figure starting port by disposing a game nail 238 or the like in the game area 124. The game ball that rolls in the left side region in is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the second special figure starting port, and conversely, the second region provided with the second special figure starting port (game area). The game ball that rolls in the right side region in is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 605, a first special figure starting port 230, a so-called electric tulip (electric Chu) type second special figure variable starting port 232 provided with a pair of blade members 2321, and a pair of blades. The second special figure fixed starting port 233 without the member 2321 is prepared, and the game ball rolling in the first area (the left side area in the game area) is mainly directed to the first special figure starting port 230. The game balls that can be expected to win the prize and roll in the second area (the right area in the game area) mainly pass through the gate 228 and the second special figure variable starting port 232 and the second special figure fixed starting port. You can expect to win a prize in 233. Note that the present invention is not limited to the right-handing machine of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 605, and includes the above-described generally known right-handing machine and a wide-range general game board. It can also be applied to pachinko machines.

  The production device 206 is arranged from the upper right of the game area 124 to the central portion, and further below the central portion. In this rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged from diagonally above right to the central portion, and around it, a universal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device. 214, a normal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The public figure display device 210 and the first special figure display device 212 correspond to an example of a first symbol variation display means, and the second special figure display device 214 corresponds to an example of a second symbol variation display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect.

  The display areas of the public figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 (informing means) (here, the size of 7 segments corresponds) and the decorative pattern display device 208 (symbol display means) ) Display area (corresponding to the size of the display screen here), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative pattern The display device 208 can display a moving image.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed variable games to be described later in detail) that are held, and in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the universal figure fluctuation. It is possible to hold a game up to a predetermined number (for example, two). The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 is the lamp in order to indicate the number of specified 2nd fluctuation game which is reserved (details fluctuation game which it mentions later), this execution In the form of the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "suspend" here means suspending the start of various determination processes (e.g., success / failure determination process) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 performs notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, is configured not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a gate 228, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general). When the winning hole 226 is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 604 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 603 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player may be referred to as a "prize ball" and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental" as a consideration for a prize. "Sphere" is generically called "sphere (gaming ball)".

  The gate 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the gate 228 of the game board 200 is provided. One is arranged on the right side. The gate 228 is a starting opening that is expected to enter by right-handing. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the gate 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the gate 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general figure fluctuation game by the general figure display device 210.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is a winning opening expected to be hit by hitting it to the right. The variable winning port 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning port 234 is one of a predetermined first open / closed state (here, closed state) and a second open / closed state (here, open state) in which winning of a game ball is easier than the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one side to the other side, and when the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 displays the big hit symbol as a stop, the door. The member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. In addition, the closed state of the variable winning port 234 does not necessarily have to be completely closed, and may be a little open as long as it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. Further, although the variable winning port 234 is a door type attacker in the present embodiment, it may be a shutter type attacker.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, only one second special figure variable starting port 232 is provided on the right side. The second special figure variable starting port 232 is a starting port that is expected to enter the ball by hitting it to the right. The second special figure variable starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid, and corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the opening of the second special figure variable starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the opening of the second special figure variable starting port 232 when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult.

  On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure variable starting port 232. It is possible to enter a ball into the opening (the easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the easy winning state. That is, the second special figure variable starting port 232 is one of the small size (corresponding to the first size) and large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering the game ball is variable, which changes from one of the sizes to the other size, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230.

  In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the variable start port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure variable starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure variable starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the following description, the second special figure variable starting port 232 and the second special figure fixed starting port 233 may be collectively referred to as a second special figure starting port.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage structure 1 is provided below the decorative pattern display device 208. The passage structure 1 is a passage forming structure that forms a passage for a game ball. Although the details of the passage structure 1 will be described later, in summary, in the case of the present embodiment, a passage unit including a passage portion 10, a distribution portion 11, and passage portions 12 and 13 is configured. Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 may have a sectional shape or a sectional size through which one game ball can pass. The entrance 10a is provided at the upper end of the passage portion 10 so that the game ball flowing down the game area 124 can enter. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion 10a passes through the passage portion 10 and is distributed to the passage portion 12 or the passage portion 13 in the distribution portion 11.

  The first special figure starting port 230 is inside the passage portion 12, and a start winning area R1 is set at the lower end portion of the passage portion 12 (in the present embodiment, it is located on the back side of the game board 201). The game ball passes through the starting winning area R1 to win the first special figure starting hole 230. More specifically, a ball detection sensor in which the detection position of the game ball is set in the start winning area R1 is arranged, and when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor, the first special figure starting hole 230 is won. Is detected.

  When the first special figure starting port 230 is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 604 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls and display the first special figure. The special figure variation game by the device 212 is started. The ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, the starting winning area R1 is set in the middle of the passage portion 12, the game ball passing through the passage portion 12 is detected, and the winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is detected. However, even if the start winning area R1 is set outside the passage portion 12 and the game ball discharged through the passage portion 12 is detected, it is detected that the first special figure starting opening 230 is won. Good.

  In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, an opening OP1 described later with reference to FIG. 617 and the like is formed on the side portion of the passage portion 12 adjacent to the first special figure starting port 230. Therefore, when winning in the first special figure starting port 230, when entering the first special figure starting port 230 through the opening OP1 and passing through the starting winning area R1, the passage from the entrance 10a In some cases, it may enter the structure 1, be distributed to the passage 12, enter the first special figure starting port 230, and pass through the starting winning area R1. Since there are a plurality of types of winning modes (winning routes), it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Although it entered the passage structure 1 from the inlet portion 10a and was distributed to the passage portion 12, it may be discharged to the outside of the passage structure 1 from the opening OP1. In this case, the first special figure starting port 230 Won't win.

  The second special figure fixed starting port 233 is inside the passage portion 13, and a start winning area R2 is provided at the lower end portion of the passage portion 13 (in this embodiment, it is located on the back side of the game board 201). It is set, and when the game ball passes through this starting winning area R2, the second special figure fixed starting opening 233 is won. More specifically, a ball detection sensor in which the detection position of the game ball is set in the start winning area R2 is arranged, and when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor, the second special figure fixed starting opening 233 is won. It is detected that it did.

  When the second special figure fixed starting port 233 is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 604 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls, and the second special figure. The special figure variation game by the display device 214 is started. The ball winning the second special figure fixed starting port 233 is guided to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning area R2 is set in the middle of the passage portion 13, the game ball passing through the passage portion 13 is detected, and the fact that the second special figure fixed starting opening 233 is won is detected. However, the start winning area R2 is set outside the passage portion 13, the game ball discharged through the passage portion 13 is detected, and it is detected that the second special figure fixed starting opening 233 is won. May be.

  In the case of the present embodiment, an opening OP2, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 617 and the like, is formed on the side portion of the passage portion 13 adjacent to the second special figure fixed starting port 233. Therefore, in the case of winning the second special figure fixed starting port 233, in addition to the case of passing through the starting OP area R2 through the opening OP2, it enters the passage structure 1 from the inlet portion 10a and is distributed to the passage portion 13. In some cases, the game passes through the starting winning area R2. Since there are a plurality of types of winning modes (winning routes), it may be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Although it entered the passage structure 1 from the inlet portion 10a and was distributed to the passage portion 13, it may be discharged to the outside of the passage structure 1 from the opening OP2. In this case, the second special figure fixed starting port Do not win 233.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the game area is more likely to enter the entrance portion 10a opening upward than the opening OP1 and opening OP2 opening laterally. .

  That is, when a game ball is won in any of the opening OP1, the opening OP2, and the entrance 10a, it almost (reliably or with high probability) passes through the starting winning area R1 or R2, but the relative number. As a result, the number of winning game balls from the entrance 10a is increased.

  The passage structure 1 may be entirely or partially permeable. Due to the transparency, the player may be able to visually recognize the inside of the passage structure 1 and may be able to visually recognize or guess the distribution of the game balls.

  It should be noted that the variable winning port 234 may be arranged only one below the central portion of the game board 200. According to this aspect, it is recommended to the player that the player hits left during the big hit game and hits right when the electric jackpot state is entered after the big hit game is over.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An outlet 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the game board 200 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 to reach the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows down the game area 124 while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc. The winning opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing variable starting opening 232, second special drawing fixed starting opening 233) is won, or there is no winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or the gate Only through 228 will the outlet 240 be reached.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 603, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 605 correspond to the rendering means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 among them corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means. .

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 606. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are It may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (for example, main control unit, first sub control unit, second sub control unit). However, one of the three control units (300, 400, 500) combined can be regarded as a predetermined control unit, or one of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 combined. An object can be regarded as a predetermined control unit (sub-control unit).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built-in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, For example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the universal figure display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high accuracy The drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the middle lamp 222 and the like and the drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure variable starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234 are connected. There is.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the first special figure starting port 230 is won, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It stores in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230.

  Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port, the value of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port at that timing is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the sphere has passed through the gate 228, similarly, the random number generation circuit corresponding to the gate 228 latches the value at that timing, and outputs the latched value. , And is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the gate 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the sphere detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure variable starting port 232, a second special figure fixed starting port 233, a variable Examples of the sensor include a sensor that detects a ball that has won a predetermined winning port such as the winning port 234 and a sensor that detects a ball that passes through the gate 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electrical system abnormality signal indicating that the electrical system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is abnormal, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electrical system abnormality signal output means.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the Is also configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and detection of pressing of a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 603. The chance button detection sensor 426 is connected. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected to the basic circuit 402.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit including the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command signal from the main control unit 300 which is the game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device. Control the production means such as 208.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 604 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout of the ball or the ball has been completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on a control signal for instructing the firing intensity according to the amount, control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mall 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power supply management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500 with the predetermined voltage. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). The power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit 630. It may be supplied, or a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation branch, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted to a 12V DC voltage by the power management unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 606, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the direct current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5V). The DC current of () is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the DC current converted to a voltage of 12V by the power management unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the activation signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9v in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply management unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and flowing a DC current of 12V, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Equivalent to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 may output the input 24V AC current as it is, or may convert it into a 36V DC current and output it. Furthermore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power management unit 660 upon power-on reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake, or a voltage drop caused by lightning strikes, cheating, or the like. In this embodiment, the WDT 3141 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 via a common signal line, but may be input via dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described above correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Then, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a random time randomly selected to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 607 (a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  FIG. 607 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure. The special game 1 variation game is started on the condition that the first ball detection sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the first special map starting opening 230, while the second special map fixed start is started. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second sphere detection sensor which is the sphere detection sensor detects that the sphere has entered the mouth 233, and the sphere entered the second special figure variable starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the third ball detection sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure 1 symbol variation display) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Display the variation of special figure 2). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 607 (a), ten types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variable display. In FIG. 607 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols (“Special symbol A” to “Special symbol F”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (R) special jackpot design, "Special drawing C" is a 2R special jackpot design, and is called sudden change. After these symbols (special maps A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state. "Special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design, "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design, and is called suddenly shorter working hours. After the special map B or the special map D is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special map low probability general figure high probability state. "Special drawing E" is a 2R jackpot design called hidden probability change, and "Special drawing F" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly normal. After the special map E is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. After the special map F is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure low probability state.

  The term "round" here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable winning a prize port 234 shown in FIG. 605 is represented, and 15 rounds means that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning a prize port 234 is performed once (or once). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / closed state changes from the first open / closed state (here, closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, open state), and the variable winning port 234 is During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is one of a predetermined round end condition (for example, entry of a predetermined number of game balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc.) 1 or a plurality of) is established, the process ends. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot or the short-time jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot or reduced-time jackpot) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, it shifts to a special figure low probability state, and when special figure A, special figure C, and special figure E are won, after the big hit game is over, the special figure is reached until the next big hit. High probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special map B, the special map D, and the special map F are won, the special map low probability state remains after the jackpot game is over. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of the first probability control state. In addition, the special figure high probability state after the big hit game is sometimes called special figure probability change, and the state where the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game is high (special figure high probability state) is the player. Is a control state in which the advantage of is high and corresponds to an example of the second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called game state. The main control unit 300 performs the transition of the probability control state, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, when the special figures A to D are won, after all the big hit games are finished, the state shifts to the state with the electric choo support (electric sapo) (hereinafter referred to as the electric sapo state). The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. Say.

  This electric power support state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and is sometimes called a time saving state. That is, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/101 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/101 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.2 seconds in the electric power support state.

  Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure variable starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-powered support state, the power-chew open period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the power-supported state. Furthermore, in the electrically supported state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to be opened than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electric tube is increased). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state per passage of the ball to the gate 228 opens three times in the electrically supported state (for example, opening 1.7 seconds three times). Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure variable starting opening 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening.

  The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is the electric power support state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the second special figure variable start opening 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if the probability of entering the second special figure variable starting port 232 is increased, or either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed, the electric power support state (time saving state) is obtained. Good. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure variable starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the second special figure variable starting port 232 is such that the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure variable starting port 232 is large in the electric support state for a longer period of time than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the special map A and the special map C are stopped and displayed, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter. , When the special map B and the special map D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special map variation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, and the non-electric support state is the 101st time. (General probability low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without special electric support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric power support state, the entrance of the second special figure variable starting port 232 is maintained in a small size. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric power support state, the entrance of the second special figure variable starting port 232 has a large size, and the entry rate of the game ball is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure variable starting port 232 which is the variable starting area at the first entry rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball is the second special figure. The variable starting port 232 enters at a second entry rate that is higher than the first entry rate. Therefore, the non-electric power support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the power support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the player hits the right side during the non-electric power support and aims to win the game ball to the second special figure variable starting opening 232. (10 seconds), normal figure low probability state (1/101), it is difficult to win a prize due to the configuration of the opening time (0.3 seconds) in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure variable starting port 232. It is in a state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as the small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. As shown in FIG. 607 (a), the special figure G is the first small hit pattern, and the special figure H is the second small hit pattern. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this happens, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state before the small hit game starts is restored.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 performs one or more opening / closing operations, and the player's advantage becomes relatively high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. In FIG. 607 (a), the special figure I is the first missing symbol and the special figure J is the second missing symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 does not open and close, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It should be noted that a lost symbol other than the "special symbol I" and the "special symbol J" (for example, a third lost symbol etc.) may be further prepared, and in the present embodiment, the lost symbol includes a plurality of types of symbols. It is a waste.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) having the second advantage, which is highly advantageous to the player, is lower than the second advantage. A loss control state of the first advantage with a low degree of advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 has one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of control state transition means. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, after the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stop-displays the symbol mode of the big hit, the special game state in which the big hit game state advantageous to the player is given. It also corresponds to an example of the giving unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 opens and closes, almost no ball can be expected to enter the variable winning port 234. It can be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the big hit symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the big hit symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are informing means for informing the win / loss determination result (lottery result), and the symbol mode corresponding to the win / loss determination result after starting the symbol variation ( It corresponds to an example of a symbol display means for performing symbol variable display for stopping and displaying the special symbols A to J).

  FIG. 607 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port, that is, that the first ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230. The second ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure fixed starting port 233, or the third ball detection sensor has detected that a ball has entered the second special figure variable starting port 232. On the condition that, in each symbol display area of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" →・ ・ ・ “Decorative decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → ...

  That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) which is a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying "special drawing B" which is a 15R jackpot or "special drawing A" which is a 15R special jackpot, a combination 1 of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "Ornament 1-Ornament 1-Ornament 1" or "Ornament 2-Ornament 2-Ornament 2" is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying "special drawing A" which is a 15R special jackpot, a combination of decorative patterns in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns are arranged in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") Or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying "special drawing E" that is a hidden probability change, "special drawing F" that is suddenly normal, "special drawing G" and "special drawing H" that are small hits, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c When a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and a sudden change "Special map C" or sudden special time "Special map D" is notified, the pattern is displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the case of notifying "special drawing I" and "special drawing J" which are lost, the combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of the decorative patterns which is a big hit or a small hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse) Stop the display). Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this "variable display of decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a variable symbol stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 607 (a)) of the special symbols 1 and 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each symbol display area 208a-c on the left middle right of the decorative symbol display device 208. As for the pattern mode (see FIG. 2B), the decorative pattern (see FIG. 2B) is larger.

  FIG. 607 (c) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and "general figure B" which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the gate 228, the universal graphic display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the lost symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 607 (c), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable stop display of the universal figure. The public figure display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606 will be described using FIG. 608. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606, there are a big hit special figure 1 random number counter, a small hit special figure 1 random number counter, a loss special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for special figure 2 of these counters. It is provided. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating each of the special figure variation time first determination random number value and the special figure variation time second determination random number value. Further, in the RAM 308, the reserved number of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random number value, the small hit special figure 1 random number value, the loss special figure 1 random number value, the special figure 1 hit / miss The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reserved numbers, random numbers, and results for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, in the RAM 308, the reserved storage units divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the winning / disapproval determination (lottery) can be suspended are separately prepared in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. There is. As will be described later, the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 has a special figure 1 winning random number value, a big hit special figure 1 random value, a small hit special figure 1 random value, a lost special figure 1 random value, and a special figure. One set of five random number values of the one variation time determining random number value is set, and these five random number values are stored one by one in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 608 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power supply control unit 660 to supply the voltage value of the power supply to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power-off (before power interruption), and if it does not return to the state before power-off (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state). ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 604 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the initial state in step SA13. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 so that the pachinko machine 100 is initialized. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step SA11, the power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  At step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step SA15, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update processing, 4 for generating the initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the loss special figure random value counter, respectively. The three random number counters for generating the initial value generating random number counter, the universal figure timer random number value, the special figure 1 variable time determining random number value, and the special figure 2 variable time determining random number value are updated. For example, if the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during the timer interrupt process which starts at every predetermined cycle.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 609. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step SB03, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the main controller timer is restarted once every about 2 ms, which is the timer interrupt period.

  In step SB05, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 606 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and this detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-mentioned step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 606 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step SB05, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (Information indicating that), the special winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure variable starting port 232, the second special figure fixed starting port 233 It is determined that the player has entered the ball or passed through the gate 228. That is, it is determined that these winning openings 234, the starting openings 230, 232, 233, and the passage through the gate 228 have been made. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step SA15 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value to be used next in the main control unit 300, General figure timer random number, big hit special figure 1 random number value, small hit special figure 1 random number value, lost special figure 1 random number value, special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random value, big hit special figure 2 random number value, small hit The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value, the special figure 2 random number value for losing, and the special figure 2 variable time determining random number value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number Shi

Keep it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value for Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value for Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step SB11, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step SB13, timer updating processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol display on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to change / stop the symbol display on the first special symbol display device 212 Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning opening 234 and the starting openings 230 and 232 are won and the gate 228 is passed, the number of prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening or gate. The value of the storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize receiving process, if there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of pending special figure 1 variable games is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), a predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the loss special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time Get the random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (the value of the hardware random number + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random number value, the small hit special figure 1 random number value, the loss special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time determining random number value are derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. It is a value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). A combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 606, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing is for generating and deriving start information, and a start information deriving means. This corresponds to an example of (first starting information deriving means, second starting information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308. It The reserved storage unit of this special map 1 up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four) of the starting information acquired when the game ball enters the first special map starting port 230 (first starting area) It corresponds to a storable first start information storage means. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserved storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of Toku-zu 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number of the special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is incremented by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. In addition, as for the special figure 2, as in the case of the special figure 1, each random number value which is the starting information is acquired, and the obtained random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. Further, 1 is added to the value of the reserved number of the special figure 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 can store the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure starting port (second starting area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). Corresponds to the second starting information storage means. At this time, various random number values (starting information) are temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308 and then stored in the temporary area.

The reserved value may be stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2, in which case the temporary area may be used as the second starting information storage means, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area of the special figure 2 may be used as the second start information. It may be an information storage means.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a winning order variation machine. In other words, the special figure variation game (special figure change game (Variable display of symbols) is performed. In the winning acceptance process, start information is stored between the special maps 1 and 2 so that the order of winning can be understood.

  Further, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the gate 228, and the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is less than a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), the universal figure winning random value at that timing. The value of the random number counter for generation is acquired as the random number value for universal figure winning as starting information, and stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for special figures. In addition, in this prize winning process, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure variable starting port 232, the second special figure fixed starting port 233, the gate 228, or the variable winning port 234 is detected by a predetermined ball detection sensor. When a winning (ball entry) or passing is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port, the gate 228, and the variable winning port 234. The winning acceptance information indicating whether or not the winning (ball) or passing of is set.

  Whether the starting information is the special drawing or the starting information of the general figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the starting information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step SB19.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 606 are made up of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 607 (c)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 607 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While setting the normal figure operation in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure variable starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this manner corresponds to an example of the variable starting area control unit that performs the variable starting area control. On the other hand, in the case of the non-electric power support state, the general area non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure variable starting port 232 does not have any operation. No signal is output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains in the closed state. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  Further, in the case of being in the power support state, in the processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period has ended (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, For 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 and is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the period.

  Further, in the power support state, in the normal state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is updated. In the setting area, set Normal operation inactive. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose diagram is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  Succeedingly, in a step SB23, a universal figure related lottery process is executed. In this universal figure related lottery process, the universal figure variation game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure variable starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the universal figure variation game is on hold. If the number is 1 or more, whether the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Then, the special figure prefetching process (step SB24) is executed. In the special map prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased reservation is prefetched, and the stop symbol etc. of the special figure variation game is special figure related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the acceptance / rejection determination in processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure pre-reading result storage section that stores a special figure pre-reading result (also referred to as a preliminary determination result) as a result of executing the special figure pre-reading process. The special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results of special figure 1 in this example. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 1 preread number storage area for storing the number of preread results of special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit as the special figure 1 preread number. Every time the number of special figure 1 prefetch results is increased by 1, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information to the next rank of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result information.

  When deleting the earliest special figure 1 start information of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main control unit 300 simultaneously deletes the information of the earliest special figure 1 preread result of the special figure 1 preread result storage section. At the same time, the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. Further, after the information on the earliest Toku-zu 1 pre-reading result is erased, processing is performed so that the rank of the information on the remaining Toku-zu 1 pre-reading result is incremented by one.

  In the present example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results of special figure 2. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 preread number storage area for storing the number of preread results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit as the special figure 2 preread number. The main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information to the next rank of the lowest (last) special figure 2 preread result information each time the number of special figure 2 preread results increases by one.

  When deleting the earliest special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main control unit 300 simultaneously deletes the information of the earliest special figure 2 preread result in the special figure 2 preread result storage section. At the same time, the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area is decremented by 1. Further, when the information of the earliest special figure 2 pre-reading result is erased, the processing is performed so that the rank of the information of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetching process is performed only for the increase of the holding, but the special figure prefetching process may be performed for all the holdings every time. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) described later, a command including the information of the prefetch result is transmitted, but the information of the prefetch result may be transmitted only in increments, or the information of the prefetch result for all suspensions is transmitted. You may do it.

  Next, a special figure state update process is performed (step SB25). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a winning order variation machine. In the following, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 will not be distinguished, and the special figure will be simply drawn. The 230 and the second special figure starting port may be simply referred to as the special figure starting port and described, respectively.

  In the special figure state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure. For example, in the special figure state update processing in the middle of the special figure variation display (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device is repeatedly turned on / off I do. By performing this control, the variation display of the special figure by the special figure display device (symbol variation display of the special figure) is performed.

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step SB33), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the general command rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first lost flag, the second lost flag, the probability variation flag, and the time saving flag, respectively. Is prepared. In the special figure state update processing which starts at the timing when the special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure related lottery processing (step SB29) described later is performed. Based on the figure determination result (stop pattern mode of special figure), the 7 segment LED which constitutes the special figure display device is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure is being stopped is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. By performing this control, the special figure display device, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure A), 15R big hit pattern (special figure B), 2R special big hit pattern (special figure C), sudden shortening pattern (special figure D) , Hidden probability variation pattern (Special map E), Sudden normal pattern (Special map F), 1st small hit pattern (Special map G), 2nd small hit pattern (Special map H), 1st missing pattern (Special map I) , And the second lost symbol (special figure J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the confirmed special display is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special map variation game. Further, when a value is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortened time count and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game and the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric power support state (first entry rate control state) in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (during the second control state).

  Further, in addition to predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33) described later is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is The special figure identification information indicating whether the figure is the special figure 2 or the special figure 1 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described below, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When this big hit flag is on, in the special figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. In addition to setting the special figure in operation, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the RAM 308 to stand by while displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure waiting time management timer provided in. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or The door member 2341 is held in an open state by a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. And a signal indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In addition, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) is variable. A signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the winning opening 234, and the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information shown. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, The effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set the standby period for displaying the image for notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 will end the big hit. Set the information shown.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 starts the hit control state advantageous to the player after the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol aspect corresponding to the hit determination result. It corresponds to an example of game control means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling the change of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 during the big hit game state. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable winning a prize port 234 is stored, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds from the ROM 306 to determine whether or not the special figure variation game is hit. Get the open / close pattern.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is "special figure E", only the probable change flag of the probable change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the time saving flag of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the power support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the power support frequency to 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state (special figure high probability state) in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), the special figure low probability state is set. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the win / fail judgment (lottery of special figure). Also, when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state, the power tube is easy to open (e.g., easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of opening based on one hit is large. Variable start area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, when the time saving flag is set to OFF, it is in the non-electric power support state, and the variable starting area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time saving flag also affects the variable starting region control. Therefore, the information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time saving flag corresponds to an example of the game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control information determining means.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In addition, in the special figure state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area is inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set the special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update processing in the case where the special figure is not operating, the next process is executed without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing (step SB29) is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the winning / disapproving means. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine, the special figure related lottery processing is also executed in the order of winning the special figure starting port.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In the special figure-related lottery process, the success / failure determination (lottery) is executed for the special figure, the special figure to be stopped and displayed, and the variation time are determined. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a win / loss determination unit. In the special figure related lottery process, it is first determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the determination here, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit / miss determination determination condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether the special figure display device is in the special figure change display or in the stop display, and if any of them is displayed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is returned to, and If it is not displayed, it is judged whether it is set during special figure operation or during non-special figure operation. If it is set during special figure operation, it returns to the main controller timer interrupt process. If it is set during non-operation of the special figure, it means that the hit / absence judgment prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is judged whether or not a predetermined hit / miss judgment condition is satisfied. For the determination of the hit / miss determination condition, it is determined whether or not the number of pending special game variation games is greater than 0 by referring to the special figure pending storage unit provided in the RAM 308. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, it means that the predetermined win / fail judgment condition is satisfied, and the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 corresponds to one set which is the start information stored in the oldest. The random number values (special figure winning random number value, large figure special figure random number value, small hit special figure random number value, special figure random number value for losing, and special figure fluctuation time determining random number value) are extracted and stored in the reserved storage section. The starting information (set of random number values) still stored is transferred from the area currently stored to the adjacent area. That is, the starting information stored in the oldest in combination with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is taken out from the special figure holding storage unit, and if the starting information is stored in the special figure holding storage unit, the Nth oldest starting information. Is set as the (N-1) th oldest starting information in the special figure reservation storage unit. Also, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1. One set of random number values from the special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 308 (special figure winning random number value, big hit special figure random number value, small hit special figure random value, loss special figure random value, and special figure fluctuation time determination The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the random number value) corresponds to an example of the starting information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 611 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 611 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for win / loss determination. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the probability variation flag when the start information is extracted from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308, and if the probability variation flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. The numerical range is 0 to 65535), which is based on which random number range in the high probability table for win / loss determination shown in FIG. Lost ”is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, the special figure low probability state is set, and therefore, based on which random number range in the high probability table for winning / disapproval determination shown in FIG. Special figure 2 "Big hit", "Small hit" or "Loss" is derived as the result of the hit / miss judgment. Derivation of "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" corresponds to the success / failure determination.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is determined based on the result of the special figure propriety determination.

  FIG. 611 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 1 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 607 (a)) of special figure 1 is defined for each winning / decision result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the Toku-zu 1 hit determination result is a big hit, the Toku-zu 1 random number value for the big hit among the one set of random number values previously acquired from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308. The range of numerical values to be obtained is 0 to 99), but it is determined to which random number range of the big hits the winning / decision determination result in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. "Special map A" to "Special map F" are determined. If the special figure 1 hit determination result is a small hit, the small hit special figure 1 random number value out of one set of random number values previously acquired from the reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 (the possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits the win / no judgment result in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. "Figure G" or "special figure H" is determined. Further, if the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment result indicates a loss, the special figure 1 random number value for a loss out of one set of random number values previously acquired from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308 (the possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines to which random number range of the loss the hit determination result belongs in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. Alternatively, “special map J” is determined. The special figure 1 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol aspect of the special figure 1 to be stopped and displayed by the first special figure display device 212.

  FIG. 612 is a diagram showing a special figure 2 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 2 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 607 (a)) is defined for each hit determination result. In the present embodiment, for the special figure 2, no small hit is prepared, and no 2R big hit is prepared. That is, among the stop symbol modes of the special figure shown in FIG. 607 (a), the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), the first lost symbol (special symbol I), and the second Only the lost design (special drawing J) is prepared. Therefore, the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the big hit in the special figure 1 (the number of rounds is large), and is advantageous for the player. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is hit, the added value is different between the special figures 1 and 2. In addition, when the big hit, the special numbers 1 and 2 have almost the same number of balls, but the effects and game characteristics during the big hit game (for example, a premium effect that does not appear unless the big hit is made in the special map 2), etc. May be provided with a difference.

  However, in the present embodiment, the probability of being decided as a jackpot with probability variation in the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 611 (c) is 66% (special figure A: 50% + special figure C: 8% + special figure). E: 8%), and the probability of being determined for the jackpot with probability variation in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 612 is 66% (special figure A: 66%). It is the same in FIG. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning order is changed, and during non-electricity support, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are alternately performed by the left-handed operation (excluding irregular winning), but In the support state, the special game 2 variation game is mainly executed by a right-handed operation. Therefore, the game characteristics such that it is easy to obtain an advantageous jackpot during the electric power support are no different from those of a general special-purpose second priority variation machine.

  If the special figure 2 hit determination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 selects the big hit special figure 2 random number value from the one set of random numbers previously acquired from the hold storage section of the RAM 308. The range of numerical values to be obtained is 0 to 99), but it is determined to which random number range of the jackpot the winning / decision determination result in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. "Figure A" or "special drawing B" is determined. If the special figure 2 hit / miss judgment result indicates a loss, the special figure 2 random number value for a loss out of one set of random number values previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (the possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines in which random number range of the losing results the hit / miss determination result in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 612 belongs, and as the special figure 2 decision result, “special figure I” or “special figure” is determined. Figure J ”is determined. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is the information showing the symbol aspect of the special figure 2 which is stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Then, the symbol variation time (special symbol variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is determined based on the special symbol determination result. To determine the variation time here, a random number value for determining the special figure variation time (a possible numerical value range is 0 to 65535) is used from the one set of random number values previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308. .

  FIG. 613 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 4, and table 1 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 15R big hit symbol (special figure A, B). Yes, table 2 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (special figure C to special figure F) or a small hit symbol (special figure G, H), and table 3 or 4 is It is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J).

  Each table of Tables 1 to 4 defines the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the random number selection range of the random number value for determining the special figure 1 fluctuation time. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 613 (a), the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Although the main control unit 300 may determine up to the presentation mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure, in the present embodiment, the information indicating the variation time determined here is the first sub-information. It transmits to the control part 400, and the 1st sub-control part 400 determines the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to a fluctuation time. In this embodiment, 10 types of fluctuation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with a reach effect and a fluctuation pattern without a reach effect. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. With normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 605) stop and display the same decorative symbol, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. The state (reach state) that is variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (a symbol that is the same as the symbol display region that is stopped and displayed) is stopped and displayed, the predetermined big hit symbol This is a state in which the combination (the "decorative pattern combination 1" and the "decorative pattern combination 2" shown in FIG. 607 (b)) is stopped and displayed.

  Super reach A and super reach B are a type of reach in which the effect of presentation is improved by adding a special variable display to the normal reach, and a specific character may appear.

  As the super reach, long reach, normal reversing reach, double line reach, etc. are known, and further special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. are also known. In the present specification, when simply referred to as reach, it means a variation mode of the decorative design including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. In this reach, the player is notified that the result of the hit / no hit judgment (lottery) of the special map will be the hit judgment result, after the hit / no hit judgment is made and before the result of the hit / no hit judgment is notified. Therefore, whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the success or failure. In the case of no reach, the variation time of the special map is relatively short, the variation time of the special map is relatively long in the super reach, and the variation time of the special map is the time between the no reach and the super reach in the normal reach.

  When the special map 1 determination result is special map A or special map B (see Table 1), both are 15R big hit symbols with electric support, and as shown in Table 1, the maximum fluctuation time of 65 seconds. Is most easily selected, and the fluctuating time of 15 seconds is most difficult to be selected. In this case, the reach design is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  If the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit pattern (special figure C to special figure F) or a small hit pattern (special figure G, H) (see Table 2), the variation time of 12 seconds is uniform. To be elected. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols (the decorative symbol combination 3, the decorative symbol combination 4) stopped and displayed after the change without reach is temporarily turned off, that is, all the chances are turned off. Done.

  If the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), the table to be used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holdings of special figure 1. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines the table to be used by referring to the time saving flag and the number of reservations of special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308.

  If the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), the non-electric power support state and the number of holding of special figure 1 is 3, table 3 is used. In this case, in order to accelerate the digestion of Toku-zu 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach effect. Instead, shortening fluctuations will occur.

  Toku-zu 1 decision result is a lost design (Toku-zu I, J), if the non-electric power support state and the number of holding of special figure 1 is 0 to 2 or if the electric power support state (the number of holding is irrelevant) For this, Table 4 is used. As shown in Table 4, a fluctuation time of 8 seconds (miss without reach) is selected with a high probability, and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected with a low probability. . When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach effect.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  FIG. 613 (b) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table is composed of tables 5 to 8, and table 5 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a 15R big hit symbol (special figure A, B). And has the same contents as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. Table 6 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3 in the electric power support state. In Table 6, in the electric power support state, the shortest variation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected in order to speed up the digestion of Toku-zu 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the reach effect, resulting in an extremely short variation. Will be done. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0 in the electric power support state. In Table 7, in order to accumulate the suspension of special figure 2, a somewhat long variation time of 8 seconds is uniformly selected, and the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform reach production. The table 8 is a table that is used regardless of the number of holdings of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J) and is in the non-electric power support state. If there is a winning in the second special map starting port 232 in the non-electric power support state, it is a rare case that the general figure fluctuation game is won under the low general probability state. In Table 8, a fluctuation time of 8 seconds (miss without reach) is selected with high probability without shortening or ultra-shortening the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2, and although it is a low probability, 10 seconds, 40 seconds, Alternatively, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach effect.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  Returning to FIG. 609, in step SB33 that is performed subsequent to the special figure-related lottery processing in step SB29, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. It should be noted that the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), bit 11 -14 are command types (in the present embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a per round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, a special figure Information that can specify the type of command, such as a hold increase command, a universal figure hold increase command, a prefetch advance notice command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. Including the information indicating the information, in the case of the symbol variation stop command, including the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, the information indicating the current hold number, etc., In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a winning round number designation command, information indicating a control state, the number of winning rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and information indicating the special figure fluctuation time stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. , And sets information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held.

  In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the control state. Information indicating the information, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is being held is set. The first sub-control unit 400, which has received the winning production start command, transmits the winning production control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the winning production start command. The second sub-control unit 500, which has received the winning effect control command, causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game begins.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes effect control information and control states stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the information, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is being held is set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500, which has received the end effect control command, causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image informing the player of the end of the big hit for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), and the big hit game is finish.

  In the above-mentioned general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, in the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held Information indicating the number of games and the like is set.

  Further, in this step SB33, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure pending increase command, control state Is set, and the information of special figure 1 or special figure 2 that has been preliminarily determined is set.

  Further, in this step SB33, general command universal figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, the command data of the hold increase command is set with information indicating the control state. Further, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub control unit 400, as a command related to the universal figure, a universal figure fluctuation start command indicating that the variable display of the universal figure has started (does). In addition, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a universal figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the variable display of the universal figure has stopped (doing), and the pair of blade members 2321 have started (doing) opening. An electric chew opening start command indicating that or a pair of blade members 2321 may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the winning rounds are completed based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 606. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and power-on information is set in bit 6. (When it is turned on, it indicates that the command has been transmitted for the first time after the power is turned on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the data after encryption processing. The number of payout requests is shown.

  Next, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 609, an external output signal setting process (step SB35) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 described above are read out, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored to determine whether a glass frame opening error or When the lower plate full tank error is detected, the device information indicating the presence or absence of the glass frame opening error or the lower plate full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Further, by driving various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 606 to control opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or through the drive circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, The display data to be output to the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, various status display parts 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on, in order to determine whether or not the power-off (power-off) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41, and when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43.

  In step SB41, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, interrupt enable is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 608 is performed. Return.

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 608.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step SC01 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, the initial setting of step SC01 is executed. In this initial setting, the initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 606 and the initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408 are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  At step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed.

  In step SC09, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Further, in this effect control process, a sub prefetching notice execution process at the time of starting winning and a sub notice process at the time of variation disclosure are also performed.

  In step SC11, when the press of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 603 is detected, the effect data updated in step SC09 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

  In step SC15, if the effect data read in SC09 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, if the effect data read in SC09 includes an instruction to drive circuit 420 for various lamps 418, this instruction is output to drive circuit 420.

  In step SC21, if the effect data read in SC09 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 610 (b). FIG. 610 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 610 (c). FIG. 610 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step SE01 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step SC21, the random number value for performance is updated, and the like. Ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
The second sub-control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. An image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is connected to the second sub control unit 500. The image controller has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 and displays the display image using the display area (work area) of the VRAM. The generated image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM) and the like in the attribute register of the GPU based on the table of position information etc., and then the image from ROM to VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU, and when the transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU has information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, if the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  Then, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is given, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When the generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts the number of scene images generated is incremented (+1) and the processing ends. To do.

<Example of game flow>
Next, the special drawing prize in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. There is no special drawing prize unless otherwise specified.

  FIG. 614 shows the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the first special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 2 special figure fixed starting port 233 are alternately won by left-handing in the non-electric support state (normal state). FIG.

  On the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 614 (a), two special figure 1 hold displays 201h showing that two special figure 1 holds are shown, and the right side thereof. Shows two special figure 2 reservation displays 202h indicating that two special figure 2 reservations are accumulated. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 614 (a), a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”) corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 614 (b), the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is started, one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears, and in FIG. 614 (c), a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 8-decoration 0-decoration 6 ") is stopped.

  In FIG. 614 (d), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started this time, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. During the symbol variation display of this special map 2, one game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance portion 10a, and is distributed to the passage portion 12 by the distribution unit 11, and the game ball is the first special figure starting port 230. The first ball detection sensor detects that the player has won the prize. As a result, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 7E, the special figure 1 hold display 201h is increased by one, and the number of the special figure 1 hold display 201h is two in total. Eventually, the reach production (here, reach A) is developed (see (f) in the same figure). Even at this timing, one game ball has entered the passage structure 1 from the entrance portion 10a, is now distributed to the passage portion 13 by the distribution unit 11, and the game ball has won the second special map fixed starting opening 233. Is detected by the second sphere detection sensor 82, and the special symbol 2 hold display 202h is increased by one in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The number of the special figure 2 reservation display 202h at this stage is two in total. The decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Appearing characters appear. Then, immediately before the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 2D, another game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance portion 10a and is distributed to the passage portion 12 by the distribution portion 11. The first ball detection sensor detects that the game ball has won the first special figure starting port 230. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 7H, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R special jackpot (“decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, three special figure 1 reserved displays 201h are shown on the left side, and two special figure 2 reserved displays 202h are shown on the right side.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has a change in winning order, in the non-electric power support state, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are almost alternately won, and they are consumed in the winning order. In some cases, it is possible to play the game while being thrilled for each change, whether it is a big hit in the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the big hit in the special figure 1 which is disadvantageous.

  FIG. 615 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 614.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 615 (a), an end effect screen of the big hit game which has been a big hit at the stage of FIG. 614 (h) is shown.

  In FIG. 615 (b), the jackpot game ends, and the control state shifts to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the state changes to the probability change state and the power support state. During the big hit game, the player changes from left hitting to right hitting in order to aim at the variable winning port 234 arranged on the right side. In addition, since the big hit game is over and the electric support state has been entered, the player continues to hit the right by aiming at the second special figure variable starting port 232 (so-called electric chew) arranged on the right side. In FIG. 615 (b), the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is started, one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears, and in FIG. 615 (c), a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss (“decoration 7-decoration” 4-decoration 3 ") is stopped.

  In FIG. 615 (d), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started this time, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. In the same figure (e), the combination of the decorative patterns corresponding to the loss ("decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 615 (f), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started again, and one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears. During the symbol variation display of this special map 1, one game ball wins in the second special figure variable starting port 232 (so-called electric Chu). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6G, a combination of decorative patterns (“decoration 7-decoration 4-decoration 3”) corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by one, and the number of the special figure 2 hold display 202h is two in total.

  In FIG. 615 (h), the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is started, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears.

  FIG. 616 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 615.

  During the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 615 (h), two game balls are continuously won in the second special figure variable starting opening 232. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 616 (a), the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by two, and the number of the special figure 2 hold display 202h is three in total. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 7B, a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the loss (“decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 616 (c), the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is started, one special figure 1 hold display 201h disappears, and the number of holding of special figure 1 becomes zero. During the symbol variation display of this special map 1, the game ball continuously wins in the second special map variable starting port 232, but the special ball at the stage where one game ball has won in the second special map variable starting port 232. The number of reservations for 2 is full, and subsequent winnings are not reserved. A combination of decorative patterns (“decoration 7-decoration 4-decoration 3”) corresponding to a loss is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 hold display 202h is increased by one, and the number of the special figure 2 hold display 202h is four in total (full).

  In FIG. 616 (e), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started, and one special figure 2 hold display 202h disappears. Eventually, the reach production (here, normal reach) was developed (see FIG. 6 (f)), and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6 (g) has a combination of decorative patterns corresponding to the 15R jackpot (“decoration 6-decoration”). 6-decoration 6 ") is stopped and displayed. When the big hit game by the big hit here ends, the control state shifts to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the state shifts to the uncertain change state and the power support state. Therefore, the player aims at the second special figure variable starting port 232 (so-called electric chu) arranged on the right side, and still continues right-handed until the electric support state ends, and then the second special figure variable start. The symbol variable display of the special figure 2 based on the winning in the mouth 232 is repeated.

  In the above explanation, the pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery is missed, the pre-reading notice by the pending change display was never executed, but if the pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery using the hold display is won, the hold display The display mode is changed to a display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, a triangular figure or a square figure).

<Passage structure>
Details of the passage structure 1 will be described. 617 (a) and (617) are explanatory views of the structure and distribution operation of the passage structure 1, and are sectional views taken along a vertical plane parallel to the plane direction of the game plate 201. 617 (c) to FIG. 617 (e) are a sectional view taken along the line I-I, a sectional view taken along the line II-II, and a sectional view taken along the line III-III of FIG. 617 (a), respectively.

  The passage structure 1 of the present embodiment constitutes a hollow passage unit and is provided on the game board 201. Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 constitutes a tubular body having a square (here, rectangular) cross section formed by surrounding the internal space with four plate-shaped wall bodies. In the case of the present embodiment, each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 has a configuration in which the inner space is surrounded by four plate-shaped wall bodies, but it is configured by three wall portions of the front wall portion and the left and right side wall portions. The back wall portion may be configured to use the game board 201. The passages 10, 12 and 13 may have a cylindrical shape or an elliptic cylindrical shape.

  The passage portion 10 extends in the vertical direction, and an inlet portion 10a is provided at the upper end portion thereof. Between the passage portion 10 and the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, a distribution portion 11 that distributes the game balls that have entered the passage portion 10 to the passage portion 12 or the passage portion 13 is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the distribution unit 11 includes the movable body 20. The movable body 20 is a distribution member that performs a game ball distribution operation.

  The movable body 20 includes a plate-shaped rotating plate 21 and guide plates 22 and 23 provided at the left and right ends of the rotating plate 21. The rotary plate 21 is rotatably supported by a wall portion surrounding the distribution unit 11 around a shaft 24 extending in the left-right direction as a rotation center. The rotating plate 21 has a size that divides the internal space of the distributing unit 11 into upper and lower parts, and the game balls falling from the passage unit 10 always interfere with each other. The rotary plate 21 has a one-side surface and an opposite-side surface that form a game ball mounting portion.

  The guide plates 22 and 23 are semicircular members that protrude from the rotary plate 21 so as to be in mutually opposite directions. The guide plate 22 projects from one end of the rotary plate 21 in the left-right direction in one direction of the normal line of the rotary plate 21, and the guide plate 23 extends from the other end of the rotary plate 21 in the left-right direction to the normal direction of the rotary plate 21. It projects in the other direction of the line. In the state of FIG. 617 (a), the guide plate 22 is in a state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 12, and in the state of FIG. 617 (b), the guide plate 23 is in a state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 13.

  As shown in FIGS. 617 (a) to 617 (b), when the game ball falls on the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 rotates, the game ball falls below the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 is inverted. To do. In the state of FIG. 617 (b), the game ball is guided to the passage portion 12. If the game ball enters the passage portion 10 in the state of FIG. 617 (b), the game ball falls on the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 rotates, the game ball falls below the rotary plate 21 and rotates. The plate 21 is reversed and returns to the state of FIG. 617 (a), and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 13. In this way, the game balls are basically allotted to the passage portions 12 and the passage portions 13 alternately.

  The passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are configured such that the game balls passed by the passage portion 10 can pass through the distribution portion 11. In this embodiment, the distribution destination passages are the two passages 12 and 13, but the distribution destination passages may be three or more. When the game balls are distributed to three or more passage portions, for example, the rotary plate 21 of the movable body 20 is configured in a water wheel shape including three mounting portions, and the first mounting portion of the water wheel is downward and the second mounting portion is second. The placement section may be configured to distribute game balls to the left and the third placement section to the right, respectively. In this case, the first mounting portion has a pair of wall portions that regulate the movement of the game ball to the left and right, and the second mounting portion L-shape that regulates the movement of the game ball to the right and below. The third mounting portion may have an L-shaped two-wall portion that restricts the movement of the game ball to the left and the bottom. Further, as another example of distributing the game balls to three or more passage portions, two movable bodies 20 are provided, and one movable body 20 distributes the game balls to the left and another movable body 20, and separates the movable balls. The game balls may be distributed to the center and the right by the body 20.

  Next, the passage portion 12 includes passage portions 12a and 12b located on the front side (player side) with respect to the surface of the game plate 201, and a passage portion 12c extending through the game plate 201 to the rear side. including. Similarly, the passage portion 13 has passage portions 13a and 13b located on the front side (player side) of the surface of the game plate 201, and a passage portion 13c extending through the game plate 201 to the back side. Including.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the passage portion 12a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 12a may be referred to as the vertical portion 12a. The vertical portion 12a of the present embodiment extends linearly in the vertical direction. The passage portion 12b is a portion that connects the vertical portion 12a and the distribution portion 11, and extends obliquely in the present embodiment. The passage portion 12c extends from the lower end of the vertical portion 12a to the back side of the game board 201 and includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The passage portion 12c may be a vertical portion.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 617 (c), an annular first ball detection sensor SR1 is arranged in the middle of the passage portion 12c, and an area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is set as a start winning area R1. ing. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 617 (c), the first ball detection sensor SR1 may be arranged at a position away from the passage portion 12c, and in this case, the starting winning area R1 is at a position away from the passage portion 12c. Will be set. When the first ball detection sensor SR1 is arranged as shown by the solid line in FIG. 617 (c), the game ball passing through the passage 12 can be detected, and the first ball detection is shown by the broken line in FIG. 617 (c). When the sensor SR1 is arranged, the game ball passing through the passage 12 can be detected.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the passage portion 13a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13a may be referred to as the vertical portion 13a. The vertical portion 13a of the present embodiment extends linearly in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13b is a portion that connects the vertical portion 13a and the distribution portion 11, and is curved in an inverted C shape in the present embodiment. The passage portion 13c extends from the lower end of the vertical portion 13a to the back side of the game board 201 and includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The passage portion 13c may be a vertical portion.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 617 (d), an annular second sphere detection sensor SR2 is arranged in the middle of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second sphere detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2. ing. The second ball detection sensor SR2 may be arranged at a position away from the passage portion 13c, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 617 (d), and in this case, the starting winning area R2 is located at a position away from the passage portion 13c. Will be set. When the second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged as shown by the solid line in FIG. 617 (d), the game ball passing through the passage portion 13 can be detected, and the second ball is detected as shown by the broken line in FIG. 617 (d). When the sensor SR2 is arranged, the game ball that has passed through the passage 13 can be detected.

  Each of the vertical portions 12a and 13a is a rectangular tubular type having a rectangular cross section, and has a total of four side portions on the left, right, front and back sides. As the left and right side portions of the four side portions, the vertical portion 12a has side portions S21 and S22, and the vertical portion 13a has side portions S31 and S32. In the case of this embodiment, the side portions S21, S22, S31, and S32 are flat vertical surfaces and form the side surfaces of the vertical portions 12a and 13a. The side portions S21 and S31 are outer side surfaces, and the side portions S22 and S32 are inner side surfaces. In the present embodiment, the side portions S21 and S22 are formed with the opening OP1 penetrating the respective side portions, and the internal space of the vertical portion 12a immediately below the opening OP1 is the first special figure starting port 230. ing. Similarly, an opening OP2 penetrating each side is formed in the side portions S31 and S32, and the internal space of the vertical portion 13a immediately below the opening OP2 is defined as a second special figure fixed starting port 233. There is.

  Next, the arrangement of the vertical portions 12a and 13a will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, two vertical portions 12a and 13a having the same cross-sectional shape and cross-sectional size are arranged in parallel in parallel with each other in the left-right direction, and one of them is arranged close to the other. The details will be described below.

  In FIGS. 617 (a) and 617 (e), a virtual vertical line CL is shown as a position reference. The virtual vertical line CL is parallel to the game board 201 (parallel to the plane direction. When the game board 201 has undulations, the flat surface portion having the largest area is used as a reference), and the center of the distribution unit 11 is formed. It is a virtual vertical line passing through. The center of the distribution unit 11 may be the center in the left-right direction of the distribution unit 11, but in the illustrated example, the left-right direction and the depth direction of the distribution unit 11 (normal direction of the game board 201. game board. When 201 has undulations, it is based on the flat surface portion having the largest area.)

  In the case of the present embodiment, among the four side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21. Further, of the four side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. Comparing the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21, and therefore, the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portion 13a is closer than the vertical portion 12a. The position is closer to the virtual vertical line CL.

  In FIGS. 617 (b) and 617 (e), regions R11 and R12 are illustrated as position references. A region R11 is a region in the passage structure 1 and is a region where the distribution unit 11 is located. In the case of this embodiment, it is a space including the movable body 20. The region R12 extends the region R11 downward and further in the depth direction of the game plate 201 (as described above, the normal direction of the game plate 201. When the game plate 201 has undulations, the flat surface portion having the largest area) It is a space expanded to.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap the region R12, but in the present embodiment, a part thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap the region R12, but in the present embodiment, it is located at a position where it does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is located more eccentrically to the virtual vertical line CL than the vertical portion 12a.

  In this embodiment, the passage structure 1 may be made compact in the left-right direction by moving the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a toward the vertical portion 12a side, and the degree of freedom in arrangement of other configurations is improved. It may be possible, and replacement and maintenance may be easy. FIG. 622 shows an example in which the degree of freedom of arrangement is improved. The game board 200A of the same figure is provided with two variable winning a prize holes (attackers) 234 and 234A, and the variable winning a prize port 234A is arranged in the lower part of the game area 124 and in the left-right direction from the center. . Since the vertical portion 13a is biased to the left side to form a space on the right side, the variable winning port 234A is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction. Although the variable winning port (attacker) 234A is arranged adjacent to the vertical portion 13a here, various devices such as a V attacker and a dead ball production device may be arranged.

  Returning to FIG. 617, in the present embodiment, the passage portion 13 includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12. Specifically, the passage portion 13b does not substantially overlap the region R12. In this way, the provision of the portion that overlaps the region R12 and the portion that does not overlap the region R12 means that the passage portion 13 becomes a passage that is partially curved or bent, making it difficult to carry out illegal acts such as a threaded ball goto. May be possible.

<Other configuration example of passage structure>
Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 618.

  The example of FIG. 618 (a) illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12 is curved in a C shape and the vertical portion 12a is closer to the vertical portion 13a side than the example of FIG. 617. In the example of the figure, a part of the vertical portion 12a overlaps with the region R12. In this way, both the vertical portions 12a and 13a may be brought close to each other, and in this case, it may be possible to create an arrangement space of another configuration on both the left side and the right side of the passage structure 1.

  The example of FIG. 618 (b) illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 13 has a plurality of vertical portions. In the example of the figure, in addition to the vertical portion 13a, a midway portion 13d of the passage portion 13b constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13b is not formed in an arc shape but is formed by bending a straight line portion, and a part thereof constitutes a vertical portion 13d. In some cases, it is easy to arrange other adjacent structures by using an outer shape in which a straight line portion is bent instead of an arc shape.

  The example of FIG. 618 (c) illustrates a configuration in which the vertical portion 12a and the vertical portion 13a have different vertical lengths. The difference in the length in the vertical direction means that the length from the upper end to the lower end of each side part of one vertical part of the two vertical parts to the upper end and the lower end of each side part of the other vertical part. It may mean that the length and the length do not have the same length and the entire length is different.

  The example of FIG. 618 (c) also illustrates a configuration in which the range of the passage portion 13b in the passage portion 13 is wider than the range of the vertical portion 13a (for example, the passage length is long). Since the passage portion 13b is large, the passage structure 1 may be noticeable in some cases.

  The example of FIG. 618 (d) illustrates the configuration in which the vertical portion 13a is arranged closer to the vertical portion 12a than the virtual vertical line CL. By increasing the deviation of the vertical portion 13a toward the vertical portion 12a side, it may be possible to increase the space for disposing other components adjacent to the vertical portion 13a. Further, the passage structure 1 may have a unique outer shape as a whole, and the passage structure 1 may be conspicuous in some cases.

  In addition, in the example of FIGS. 617 and 618, the opening OP1 and the opening OP2 are located at the same height when viewed in the vertical direction, but they may be displaced in the vertical direction. Further, the two openings OP1 may be arranged vertically offset from each other, and similarly, the two openings OP2 may be arranged vertically offset from each other.

  Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 to 621. In the examples of FIGS. 617 and 618, the configuration example of guiding the game ball to the starting winning regions R1 and R2 is illustrated, but the configuration may be configured to guide to the other regions.

  In the example of FIG. 619 (a), the passage portion 12 guides the game ball to the general winning area 2a, and the passage portion 13 has the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a opening downward, so that the game ball is on the back side of the game board 201. Instead, it illustrates a configuration in which it flows down to the game area 124 as it is. The general winning opening 2 is formed in the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 instead of the first special figure starting opening 230, but the structure is the same.

  In the example of FIG. 619 (b), the passage portion 12 guides the game ball to the general winning area 2a, and the passage portion 13 has the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a opened downward, so that the game ball is on the back side of the game board 201. Instead, it illustrates a configuration in which it flows down to the game area 124 as it is. In the game area below the vertical portion 13a, a variable winning port (here, a door-type electric chew) 3 is provided, and in the middle of the vertical portion 13a, an annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor). ) SR3 is located. When the ball detection sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball in which the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning opening 3 There is a case to win. The variable winning a prize port 3 may be a bell-type electric chute, a tulip, a vane-type electric chew, a shutter-type electric chew, or the like, in addition to the door-type electric chew.

  In the example of FIG. 619 (c), the lower end portions of the vertical portions 12a and 13a of the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are open downward, and the game ball is not left on the back side of the game board 201 but on the game area 124 as it is. The structure which makes it flow down is illustrated. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR4 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 12a, and an annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. There is. When the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 or SR4, the hit of the universal figure variation game may be determined.

  In this way, the passage structure 1 may guide the game ball to any part. Depending on the guide destination, for example, the passage structure 1 can be arranged at the position illustrated in FIG. 623. In the game board 200B of the figure, the passage structure 1 is arranged at the right end of the game area 124, and the vertical portion 13a is biased to the left side to form a space on the right side thereof, while avoiding the right rail. A passage structure 1 is arranged. In the configuration example of the figure, the passage structure 1 is arranged so that the entrance portion 10a is located below the gate 228, and the entered game ball is discharged to the front surface side of the game board 201. The distribution destination can be selected from various patterns such as attackers, electronic chu, and general winning openings.

  Next, the passage structure 1 may be configured by only the tubular passage unit as in the above example, or may be configured by a combination of the passage unit and the game nail. The examples of FIGS. 620 and 621 show an example in which the passage portion is partially formed by a plurality of game nails 238.

  The example of FIG. 620 (a) includes a passage portion 13e in which the passage portion 13 is formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is opened downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed so as to follow the opening. The passage portion 13e is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning opening 2. The distance between the adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example of the figure, there is a portion where the distance between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is the passage portion 13e. There is a possibility that it will flow out of the passage on the way. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 opens downward, and a variable winning port (attacker) 4 is arranged below the lower end portion.

  Also in the example of FIG. 620 (b), the passage portion 13 includes a passage portion 13e formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is opened downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed so as to follow the opening. The passage portion 13e is configured to guide the game ball to the variable winning a prize port (here, the door-type electric chu) 3. The distance between the adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example of the figure, there is a portion where the distance between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is the passage portion 13e. There is a possibility that it will flow out of the passage on the way. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When the ball detection sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball in which the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning opening 3 There is a case to win.

  Further, in the example of the figure, the passage portion 12 also includes a passage portion 12d formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is opened downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed so as to follow the opening. The passage portion 12d is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning opening 2. The interval between the adjacent game nails 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but there may be a place where the interval between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the interval between the lower end of the vertical portion 12a and the adjacent game nail 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example of the figure, the interval between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. There are some places, and when the game ball enters the passage portion 12d from the vertical portion 12a, it may flow out of the passage.

  In the example of FIG. 620 (c), the passage portion 12 includes a passage portion 12d formed by a plurality of game nails 238. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is opened downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed so as to follow the opening. The passage portion 12d is not configured to guide the game ball to a specific winning opening, and the game ball passing through the passage portion 12d further flows down the game area 124. A lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 opens downward, and a variable winning port (here, a door-type electric tube) 3 is arranged below the lower end portion. An annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is arranged in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When the ball detection sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball in which the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning opening 3 There is a case to win.

  621 (a) and 621 (b) have shown the example which comprised the passage part 13 by the some game nail 238 whole. In the examples of FIGS. 621 (a) and 621 (b), the passage portion 13 is configured to guide the game ball to the general winning opening 2, but the example of FIG. 621 (a) is shown in FIG. 621 ( The vertical length of the vertical portion 13a is longer than that in the example of b), and the lower end is closer to the general winning opening 2. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the passage portion 13 may be more likely to win the general winning opening 2 in the example of FIG. 621 (a).

<Structure example 1 in which a game board is passed multiple times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which the game ball passes through the game plate 201 a plurality of times will be described with reference to FIGS. 624 to 627. The same components as those of the above passage structure 1 are designated by the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 624 is a perspective view of the passage structure 1 in this example. The passage structure 1 of this example is attached to the game board 201 via the plate-shaped attachment portion 14. FIG. 625 is a perspective view showing a state in which the passage structure 1 of FIG. 624 is attached to the game board 201. FIG. 626 (a) is a perspective view of the passage structure 1, and FIG. 626 (b) is a front view of the mounting portion 14.

  An opening (not shown) into which each passage portion of the passage structure 1 and the like is inserted is formed in the game plate 201, and a part of the structure of the passage structure 1 projects to the back of the game plate 201 while being attached. The portion 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with screws or the like.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10a are located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus are located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14a that positions the passage portion 10 on the front side.

  The distribution section 11 is located on the back side with respect to the mounting section 14, and therefore is located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201, and is a game ball that flows down the game area 124 and enters the entrance section 10a. Is once guided to the back side of the game board 201. Since the distribution unit 11 is located on the back side of the game board 201, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the distribution of the game balls, and it may be possible to improve the expectation in the distribution direction. Sometimes it can be difficult to do something.

  A fixed distribution member 30 is arranged in the distribution unit 11. In the case of this example, the distribution member 30 is a triangular prism-shaped member, the top of which faces the passage portion 10, and slopes are formed from the top to the left and right. The game ball that has passed through the passage portion 10 collides near the top of the distribution member 30 and is distributed to the left and right. The distribution unit 11 may be provided with the movable body 20 as described above, or may be a fixed member as in this example.

  The vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus is located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14b that positions the passage portion 10 on the front side. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 12b and 12c are mainly located on the back side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus are located on the inner side than the surface of the game board 201. A first ball detection sensor SR1 is arranged at the lower end of the passage portion 12c, and an area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is a start winning area R1.

  The vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus is located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14c that positions the passage portion 10 on the front side. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 13b and 13c are mainly located on the back side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus are located on the inner side than the surface of the game board 201. A second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged at the lower end of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  With reference to FIG. 627, the structure of the passage portion and the passage mode of the game balls will be described. 627 (a) is a front view of the passage structure 1, and FIG. 627 (b) is a sectional view taken along line IV-IV of FIG. 627 (a). 627 (c) and 627 (d) are a left side view and a right side view of the passage structure 1, respectively.

  In the present example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 form a cylindrical body having a square (here, rectangular) cross section, but may be circular or elliptical.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g that vertically divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c, and a rib 12h that guides the passage of the game ball is formed. Openings OP1 are formed in the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, respectively, and the internal space immediately below the openings OP1 is the first start winning opening 230.

  Similarly, the passage portion 13 is also provided with a partition wall 13g that vertically divides the passage portion 13b and the passage portion 13c, and a rib 13h that guides the passage of the game ball. Further, ribs 13f for guiding passage of game balls are also formed in the vertical portion 13a. Although not shown, ribs similar to the rib 13f are also formed in the vertical portion 12a. Openings OP2 are formed in the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, respectively, and the internal space immediately below the openings OP2 is the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  In FIGS. 627 (a) and 627 (b), the virtual vertical line CL and the regions R11 and R12 are shown. Of the side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21, and of the side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. Comparing the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21, and therefore, the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portion 13a is closer than the vertical portion 12a. The position is closer to the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space including the distribution member 30, and the region R12 is a space that extends the region R11 downward as described above and further extends in the depth direction of the game board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap the region R12, but in the present example, a part thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap the region R12, but in the present example, it is located at a position where it does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is located more eccentrically to the virtual vertical line CL than the vertical portion 12a. By bringing the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a side, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom in arrangement of other configurations may be improved. In addition, replacement and maintenance may be easy.

  The passage mode of the game ball in the passage portion 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 627 (b) and 627 (d). The game ball that has entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10a is guided to the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) and is sorted to the left or right by the sorting portion 11. When it is sorted to the right, it enters the passage portion 13b of the passage portion 13. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13b is guided to the vertical portion 13a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game plate 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12, and the game ball passes while moving to a position that does not overlap the region R12.

  The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 13a is guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game plate 201) again. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the middle thereof.

  The passage mode of the game balls in the passage portion 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 627 (c). The manner of passage of the game balls in the passage portion 12 is basically the same as the manner of passage in the passage portion 13.

  The game ball that has entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10a is guided to the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) and is sorted to the left or right by the sorting portion 11. When it is sorted to the left, it enters the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12b is guided to the vertical portion 12a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game plate 201).

  The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 12a is guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game plate 201) again. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 on the way.

  As described above, in this example, since the game balls meander in the depth direction and pass through the passage portion 13, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the passing mode of the game balls, and the expectation in the passing direction may be improved. Further, since the game ball passes through the back side of the game board 201, it may be possible to make it difficult to carry out illegal activities.

  In this example, in both the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball is configured to pass through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of the passage portions does not meander in the depth direction (for example, 617 to 621).

  As a modified example of this example, the configurations of the respective examples illustrated in FIGS. 617 to 621 are also applicable.

  For example, the first ball detection sensor SR1 and the second ball detection sensor SR2 may detect the game ball after passing through the passage structure 1 instead of the game ball during passing. 628 (a) to 628 (c) show an example thereof. The figure shows an example of the arrangement of the second ball detection sensor SR2, but it is also applicable to the first ball detection sensor SR1. In the example of FIG. 617 (a), the second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged outside the passage portion 13c, and the game ball discharged from the passage portion 13c is detected. After the game ball is detected, it is treated as a ball after death. In the example of FIG. 617 (b), the passage portion 13c is omitted, the second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged at the exit of the vertical portion 13a, and moreover, the game ball passes through the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the depth direction. The orientation is set so that After the game ball is detected, it is treated as a ball after death. In the example of FIG. 617 (c) as well, the passage portion 13c is omitted, and the second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged at the outlet of the vertical portion 13a, but the outlet of the vertical portion 13a is located on the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the game plate). The second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged below the exit of the vertical portion 13a. The game sphere can be treated as an effective sphere that flows down the game area 124 even after detection. In the case of this configuration example, it is also applicable to an example in which a general winning opening, a variable winning opening, or an electric chew is provided below the second ball detection sensor SR2.

  Further, for example, the vertical portion 13a shown in FIG. 618 (d) may be largely biased toward the vertical portion 12a side. FIG. 629 is a diagram showing an example thereof, FIG. 629 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 629 (b) is a perspective view. In the example shown in the figure, the passage portion 13b has a portion that extends obliquely long, whereby the vertical portion 13a is largely biased toward the vertical portion 12a. As shown in FIG. 618 (d), although the vertical portion 13a is not located closer to the vertical portion 12a side than the virtual vertical line CL, the side portion S31 side overlaps with the region R12, and the side portion S32 side overlaps with the region R12. It is in a position where it cannot be. Further, in the example of the figure, unlike the examples of FIGS. 624 to 627, the vertical portion 12a and the vertical portion 13a are arranged side by side at the same height in the vertical direction.

  Further, for example, instead of the fixed distribution member 30, a movable distribution member can be adopted. FIG. 630 is a diagram showing an example thereof. The example of FIG. 630 (a) illustrates the movable body 31 which is a movable distribution member. The movable body 31 has a T-shaped horizontal cross-section, and is rotatable about a rotation center shaft 31a in the vertical direction. Depending on the direction of the plate-shaped portion 31b protruding to the front side, the game balls are distributed to the left and right. The example of FIG. 630 (b) illustrates the movable body 32 that is a movable distribution member. The movable body 32 is configured by providing a semicircular plate-shaped portion on the back of a T-shaped vertical section, and is rotatable about a rotation center axis 32a in the depth direction. Depending on the direction of the plate-shaped portion 32b protruding upward, the game balls are distributed to the left and right.

  Such a movable body may be an active one that is rotated by a drive source such as a motor, or may be a passive one that is rotated by utilizing the urging force of a game ball to be distributed. When the pachinko machine 100 is rotated by a drive source such as a motor, the pachinko machine 100 may be constantly rotated in a fixed cycle.

  In the case of a passive one that rotates by utilizing the urging force of the game ball, a blocking mechanism may be provided to prevent the movable body from resting in the unsortable position. FIG. 631 is an explanatory view showing an example thereof, and is a view of the periphery of the distribution unit 11 as viewed from above.

  The movable body 33 shown in FIG. 631 (a) has a structure similar to that of the example in FIG. 630 (a), and is a distribution member that rotates around the rotation center axis 33a in the up-down direction. The recesses 33b are arranged side by side on the left and right sides. When the game ball is brought into contact with the recess 33b, a rotational biasing force is applied to the movable body 33. FIG. 631 (a) shows a state in which the game ball entering the distribution unit 11 from the passage unit 10 is in contact with the left recess 33b. The movable body 33 is urged by the contact of the game ball to rotate to the left as shown in FIG. 631 (c), and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 12. Next, the game ball that enters the distribution unit 11 from the passage unit 10 contacts the recess 33b on the right side, so that the movable body 33 rotates to the right and the game ball is guided to the passage unit 13, and FIG. Return to the state of a). In this way, the game balls are sequentially distributed to the left and right.

  A magnet 33c is arranged on the back side of the movable body 33. A magnet 34 having a polarity repulsive to the magnet 33c is arranged below the magnet 33c. The combination of the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 prevents the movable body 33 from resting at the positions shown in FIGS. 631 (b) and 631 (d). That is, since the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 overlap each other in the vertical direction and repel each other, the movable body 33 does not stop at the position of FIG. 631 (b) or FIG. 631 (d) but moves to the left / right position ( 631 (a) or 631 (c) position) will be displaced.

  The positions of FIG. 631 (b) and FIG. 631 (d) are positions where the boundaries of the left and right recesses 33b face the passage portion 10 and the game balls passed by the passage portion 10 do not sufficiently contact any of the recess portions 33b. Is. When the movable body 33 is in the position shown in FIG. 631 (b) or FIG. 631 (d), it becomes difficult for the game ball to move laterally as it is sandwiched between the surrounding wall portion and the movable body 33. The distribution may not be performed smoothly. Particularly, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in a store or the like, if the movable body 33 is accidentally located at the position shown in FIG. 631 (b) or FIG. 631 (d), then the game ball by the movable body 33 is moved. However, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to prevent the movable body 33 from being positioned at the positions shown in FIGS. 631 (b) and 631 (d) by the magnets 33c and 34.

  It should be noted that, in order to ensure that the movable body and the game ball are caught at the time of distribution, the movable body may be provided with a friction improving portion for improving friction with the game ball. FIG. 632 shows an example thereof. The movable body 33 in the figure is a modification of the movable body in FIG. 631, and a friction improving portion 33d is provided at the outer end of the recess 33b. In the example of the figure, the friction improving portion 33d is a protrusion protruding inward, and when the game ball abuts the concave portion 33b, the biasing force of the game ball moves due to the catch between the game ball and the friction improving portion 33d. There is a case where the body 33 is surely transmitted and the rotation of the movable body 33 is promoted.

<Structure example 2 in which a game board is passed multiple times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which the game ball passes through the game plate 201 a plurality of times will be described with reference to FIGS. 633 to 640. The same components as those of the above passage structure 1 are designated by the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 633 is a front view, left and right side views, a plan view and a bottom view of the passage structure 1 in this example. FIG. 634 (a) is a rear view of the passage structure 1 in this example, and FIG. 634 (b) is a perspective view of the rear surface side.

  The passage structure 1 of this example is roughly divided into three members, and includes a cover member 5 on the front side, a passage forming portion 7 on the back side, and a passage forming portion 6 therebetween. ing. Each of the cover member 5, the passage forming portion 7, and the passage forming portion 6 can be made of a light-transmitting material. 635 (a) is a rear view of the cover member 5, FIG. 635 (b) is a front view of the passage forming part 6, and FIG. 635 (c) is a front view of the passage forming part 7. 636 (a) to (d) are a VV line sectional view, a VI-VI line sectional view, a VII-VII line sectional view, and a VIII-VIII line sectional view of FIG. 633 in order.

  The cover member 5 is a member that covers the front surface of the passage forming portion 6, and can be used as, for example, a decorative member. The game ball passing through the passage portion behind may be visible through the cover member 5.

  The back of the cover member 5 has a plurality of mounting portions 5a having screw holes. The passage forming portion 6 is a unit that integrally has a plate-shaped attachment portion 14 and a portion that forms the passage portion, and the attachment portion 14 has a shaft 14e at a position corresponding to the attachment portion 5a. The cover member 5 is fixed to the passage forming portion 6 by fitting the mounting portion 5a and the shaft 14e. The mounting portion 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with screws or the like. The passage forming portion 7 is a unit that integrally has portions that form a passage portion and a distribution portion, and is fixed to the back surface of the game board 201 with screws or the like. In the game board 201, an opening is formed in a portion that connects the passage between the passage forming portion 6 and the passage forming portion 7.

  In the case of this example, the passage forming portion 6 has a passage portion 10, a vertical portion 12a, and a vertical portion 13a. The passage forming portion 7 has a distribution portion 11, passage portions 12b and 12c, and passage portions 13b and 13c.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10a are located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus are located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201.

  The distribution unit 11 is provided in the passage forming unit 7, and is located on the back side with respect to the mounting unit 14, that is, on the back side of the front surface of the game board 201. The game ball that has flowed down the game area 124 and entered the entrance 10a is once guided to the distribution unit 11 on the back side of the game board 201. Since the distribution unit 11 is located on the back side of the game board 201, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the distribution of the game balls, and it may be possible to improve the expectation in the distribution direction. Sometimes it can be difficult to do something.

  In the distribution unit 11, a movable body 40 that is a movable distribution member is arranged. The game balls that have passed through the passage portion 10 come into contact with the movable body 40 and are distributed to the left and right. 637 (a) and 637 (b) are explanatory views of the movable body 40. The movable body 40 has a structure similar to that of the movable body 33 described with reference to FIG. 631, and is a passive one that rotates by utilizing the bias of the game ball. Of course, instead of the movable body 33, an active movable body or a fixed distribution member may be adopted.

  The movable body 40 is a distribution member that rotates about a rotation center axis 40a in the up-down direction, and recesses 40b are provided side by side on the front side of the movable body 40. When the game ball comes into contact with the recess 40b, the rotational biasing force is applied to the movable body 33. When the movable body 40 is in the position of FIG. 637 (a), the game balls are distributed to the right side, and when it is in the position of FIG. 637 (b), the game balls are distributed to the left side. The game balls are distributed to the left and right in order. The movable body 40 is also provided with a blocking mechanism that blocks the movable body 40 from resting in a non-sortable position, a magnet 40c is provided on the back side thereof, and as shown in FIG. 634 and the like, repels the magnet 40c. The magnet 41 is arranged below it.

  Returning to FIG. 633 to FIG. 636, in the passage portion 12, the vertical portion 12a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14 in the passage forming portion 6, and thus is located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. ing. Of the passage portion 12, the passage portions 12b and 12c are mainly provided in the passage forming portion 7, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. A first ball detection sensor SR1 is arranged at the lower end of the passage portion 12c, and an area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is a start winning area R1.

  The vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14 in the passage forming portion 6, and thus is located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. Of the passage portion 13, the passage portions 13b and 13c are mainly provided in the passage forming portion 7, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. A second ball detection sensor SR2 is arranged at the lower end of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  In the case of the present example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 form a tubular body having a square (here, rectangular) cross section. A rib 10f that guides the game ball to the distribution unit 11 is formed in the passage unit 10.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g that vertically divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c, and a rib 12h that guides the passage of the game ball is formed. The rib 12f may guide the game ball so as to pass through the center of the passage. Further, ribs 12f for guiding passage of game balls are also formed in the vertical portion 12a. Openings OP1 are formed in the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, respectively, and an internal space immediately below the openings OP1 is a first starting winning opening 230. An opening is formed in the mounting portion 14 around the opening OP1 so as to be continuous with the opening OP1.

  The passage portion 13 is also provided with a partition wall 13g that vertically divides a similar passage portion 13b and passage portion 13c, and a rib 13h that guides the passage of a game ball is formed. The rib 13f may guide the game ball so as to pass through the center of the passage. Further, ribs 13f for guiding passage of game balls are also formed in the vertical portion 13a. Openings OP2 are formed in the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, respectively, and the internal space immediately below the openings OP2 is the second fixed start winning opening 233. An opening is also formed around the opening OP2 in the mounting portion 14 so as to be continuous with the opening OP2.

  Reference is made to FIGS. 638 (a) and (638). FIG. 638 (a) is a front view of the passage forming part 6, and illustrates the virtual vertical line CL and the regions R11 and R12. FIG. 638 (b) shows the distribution portion 11 and the passage portions 12 and 13 of the passage forming portion 7.

  Of the side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21, and of the side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. Comparing the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21, and therefore, the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portion 13a is closer than the vertical portion 12a. The position is closer to the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space including the movable body 40, and the region R12 is a space which extends the region R11 downward as described above and further extends in the depth direction of the game board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap the region R12, but in the present example, a part thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap the region R12, but in the present example, it is located at a position where it does not overlap. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is located more eccentrically to the virtual vertical line CL than the vertical portion 12a. By bringing the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a side, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom in arrangement of other configurations may be improved. In addition, replacement and maintenance may be easy.

  The passage portion 12b includes a bulging portion 12b 'which bulges downward. There is a case where the game ball is hard to be clogged by providing the bulging portion 12b 'to widen the passage width. The passage portion 12c has a curved shape that is biased inward at the outlet portion 12c ', and in some cases the degree of freedom in arranging peripheral components can be improved.

  The passage mode of the game balls in the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 will be described. This is the same passage manner as the example illustrated in FIGS. 627 (c) and 627 (d).

  That is, the game ball that has entered the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10a is guided to the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) and is sorted to the left or right by the sorting portion 11.

  When it is sorted to the left, it enters the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12b is guided to the vertical portion 12a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game plate 201). The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 12a is guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game plate 201) again. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 12c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 on the way.

  When it is sorted to the right, it enters the passage portion 13b of the passage portion 13. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13b is guided to the vertical portion 13a toward the front side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game plate 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12, and the game ball passes while moving to a position that does not overlap the region R12. The game ball that has entered the vertical portion 13a is guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the mounting portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game plate 201) again. The game ball that has entered the passage portion 13c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the middle thereof.

  As described above, in this example, since the game balls meander in the depth direction and pass through the passage portion 13, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the passing mode of the game balls, and the expectation in the passing direction may be improved. Further, since the game ball passes through the back side of the game board 201, it may be possible to make it difficult to carry out illegal activities.

  In this example, in both the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball is configured to pass through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of the passage portions does not meander in the depth direction (for example, 617 to 621). Also, each example shown in FIGS. 617 to 632 can be applied to this example.

  Next, the rib 14f and the opening OP2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 635 (b), 639 and 640. FIG. 639 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line IX-IX of FIG. 635 (b), and FIG. 639 (b) is an explanatory view of the manner in which the game ball enters the opening OP2. FIG. 640 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 635 (b).

  In the case of this example, as the route of the game ball to win the second fixed start winning port 233, (1) when the game ball enters the entrance part 10a and is distributed to the passage part 13, (2) side part S32 side When the game ball enters the opening OP2 of

(3) When the game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side,

There are three patterns. In the case of (2), since there is a height difference between the opening OP1 and the opening OP2, the game ball in the passage 12 may jump out of the opening OP1 and enter the opening OP2. In the case of (1), the game ball may pop out from the opening OP2 and may not win the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  When the winning patterns of (2) and (3) are set as the game play in which the winning pattern is positioned as an irregular winning, it is possible to structurally reduce the probability that the game ball enters the second fixed start winning port 233.

  In the case of this example, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the opening OP2 on the side S32 side due to the presence of the vertical portion 12a and the like. On the other hand, if the player hits to the right, the game ball may reach the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. Therefore, the rib 14f is provided obliquely above the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. As shown in FIG. 639 (b), by providing the rib 14f, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. Also, by making the distance L between the lower end of the rib 14f and the lower end of the opening OP2 shorter than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball enters the opening OP2 from the side (right side) of the opening OP2. Will also be difficult. Since the rib 14f is not provided on the side part S32 side, the game ball can enter more easily than the opening OP2 on the side part S31 side, but as described above, the game ball can be inserted in the opening part OP2 on the side part S32 side. Since it is difficult to reach, the probability that the game ball will enter the second opening OP2 on the side S32 side is low.

  Next, refer to FIG. 640. As described above, the rib 13f is provided in the vertical portion 13a. In FIG. 640, the diameter of the game ball is p, the distance from the surface of the mounting portion 14 to the opening end on the front side of the side portion S31 or S32 of the opening OP2 is c, and from the surface of the mounting portion 14 to the rib 13f. Is a, the distance from the left end of the opening of the opening OP2 provided in the mounting portion 14 to the side S31 or S32 is a, and the left end of the opening provided in the mounting portion 14 is The distance to the rib 13f is d, and the distance from the rear end of the opening OP2 formed in the side portion S31 or S32 to the rib 13f is e. The dimensional relationship is c≈d> p> e> b.

  Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to horizontally enter the opening OP2 in the left-right direction due to the interference with the rib 13f, and the game ball is relative to the game plate 201 so as to pass through the gap of the distance d. It is possible to enter by diagonally entering (bouncing up). That is, the rib 13f functions as a game ball entry blocking unit. Due to the combination of the rib 13f and the rib 14f, the probability that the game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side is extremely low.

<Summary of Embodiments>
A1. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above-described embodiment has a gaming area (for example, 124) in which gaming balls can flow down, a gaming board (for example, 201) provided with the gaming area, and a passage means provided for the gaming board. (Eg 1) and a game stand provided with the passage means, wherein the passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (eg 10) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. The means is a means provided with a distribution section (for example, 11) capable of distributing the game ball that has entered the first passage section to any one of a plurality of passage sections (for example, 12, 13), The plurality of passage portions are passage portions through which the game balls that have passed through the first passage portion can pass, and one of the plurality of passage portions is a second passage portion (for example, 12), One of the plurality of passages is a third passage (eg 13) and the second passage is a first passage. Is a passage portion including at least a vertical portion (for example, 12a), the third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third vertical portion (for example, 13a), and the distribution portion is in the passage means. The distribution unit is located in the first region (eg, R11), and the second vertical part includes a plurality of parts including one side part (hereinafter, referred to as “second side part”) (eg, S21). A vertical portion having side portions (for example, S21 and S22), and the third vertical portion includes a plurality of side portions including one side portion (hereinafter, referred to as “third side portion”) (for example, S31). (Eg, S31, S32) is a vertical portion, the second side portion is a side portion farthest from a virtual vertical line (for example, CL) among the plurality of side portions of the second vertical portion. Yes, the third side portion is the side portion farthest from the virtual vertical line among the plurality of side portions of the third vertical portion, and the virtual vertical portion. Is a virtual vertical line that is parallel to the game board and passes through the center of the distribution unit, and the third side portion is closer to the virtual vertical line than the second side portion. It is a near side portion, the third vertical portion is a vertical portion that at least partially overlaps the second region (for example, R12), and the second region extends downward from the first region. Further, it is a region expanded in the normal direction of the game board.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic passage means. Further, one of the passage portions may be biased to one side, the degree of freedom in arranging surrounding parts may be improved, the passage means may be compact, and replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

  A2. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above-described embodiment, the second passage portion is a portion (for example, 12b and 12c in FIGS. 627 and 636, etc.) on the back side of the surface of the gaming plate and the gaming plate. It is characterized by being a passage portion including a portion on the front side of the surface (for example, 12a in FIGS. 627 and 636).

  According to this configuration, the goto act may be difficult.

  A3. In the game table (for example, 100) of the above-described embodiment, the third passage portion is a portion (for example, 13b and 13c in FIGS. 627 and 636, etc.) on the inner side of the surface of the game plate and the game plate. It is characterized in that it is a passage portion including portions on the front side of the surface (for example, 13b and 13c in FIGS. 627 and 636).

  According to this configuration, the goto act may be difficult.

  A4. In the gaming table (eg 100) of the above embodiment, at least one side part (eg S21, S22) of the plurality of side parts of the second passage part is an opening (eg It is characterized in that it is a side part provided with OP1).

  According to this configuration, the interest of the game may be improved by causing an irregular prize. The opening may function as an entrance of the game ball or may function as an exit.

  A5. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, at least one side portion (for example, S31, S32) of the plurality of side portions of the third passage portion has an opening portion (for example, S31, S32) through which the game ball can pass. It is a side part equipped with OP2).

  According to this configuration, the interest of the game may be improved by causing an irregular prize. The opening may function as an entrance of the game ball or may function as an exit.

  A6. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the third passage portion is a passage portion including a portion (for example, 13b) that does not overlap with the second region.

  According to this configuration, bending the passage of the game ball may make it difficult to thread the ball with the thread.

  A7. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized by including a second detection means (for example, SR1) that can detect the game ball that has passed through the second passage portion or that has passed.

  According to this configuration, by providing the detection means, it may be possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the game ball.

  A8. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized by including a third detecting means (for example, SR2) that can detect the game ball that has passed through the third passage portion or that has passed.

  According to this configuration, by providing the detection means, it may be possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the game ball.

  A9. In the gaming machine of the above embodiment (for example, 100), the distribution unit is a distribution unit (for example, 11 of FIG. 627, FIG. 636, etc.) located on the back side of the surface of the game board. And

  According to this configuration, the distribution part may be difficult to see, and the goto action on the distribution part may be difficult.

  When A2 and A3 are combined, it may be possible to achieve both space saving of the passage portion and difficulty of the goto action in the game area.

  When the above A2 to A5 are combined, the passage portion may have a complicated shape, and the goto action may be difficult. Even if the passage has a complicated shape, the ball clogging may be difficult to occur due to the opening.

A10. A game table provided with a game area (for example, 124) in which a game ball can flow down, a game board (for example, 201) provided with the game area, and passage means (for example, 1) provided for the game board. There, the passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (for example, 10) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the passage means enters the first passage portion. Is a means provided with a distribution unit (eg, 11) capable of distributing the game ball to any one of a plurality of passage parts (eg, 12, 13), wherein the plurality of passage parts are the first A passage part through which a game ball that has passed through the passage part can pass, one of the plurality of passage parts is a second passage part (for example, 12), and one of the plurality of passage parts is A third passage portion (eg 13), wherein the second passage portion has a second outlet portion (eg 12c end portion) And a third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third outlet portion (for example, an end portion of 13c), and the distribution portion is the first region in the passage means ( For example, a distribution unit located at R11), the third outlet portion is an outlet portion closer to a virtual vertical line (for example, CL) than the second outlet portion, and the virtual vertical line is It is an imaginary vertical line that is parallel to the game board and that passes through the center of the distribution portion, and the third outlet portion is an outlet portion that at least partially overlaps the second region (for example, R12). The second region is a region that extends the first region downward and further extends in the normal direction of the game board.
Further, the following configuration can also be adopted.

  The first region may be a space that is between the first passage portion and the second and third passage portions and includes the distribution portion. A region where the game ball passes while the game ball is in contact with the distribution member may be the first region. The range in which the distribution member operates may be the first region.

  The distribution unit may include a distribution member. The distribution member may be one that distributes the game balls according to the bias of the game balls (for example, speed and weight). The distribution member may operate vertically to the game board. The distribution member may be one that is prevented from resting at a specific position by a magnet. The distribution member may be a fixed member or a movable member. The distribution member may be one that distributes the game balls according to the shape. The distribution member may be a member that constantly moves after the power is turned on, or an electric member. The distribution member may be a rotating body (for example, a klune) in which a hole corresponding to the passage is formed.

  The passage portion may be a space through which a game ball can pass, and a wall body forming the space. The second and third side portions may be wall portions forming the vertical portion.

  The third vertical portion may have a shorter overall length (for example, a vertical length) than the second vertical portion. The total length of the second vertical portion may be shorter than that of the third vertical portion. The second passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions, and the third passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions.

  The second passage portion and the third passage portion may each have a portion that overlaps the second region. The second passage portion and the third passage portion may have a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

  An illumination board may be attached to the back (rear side) of the second passage portion and the third passage portion. A lens cut may be provided on the back side (rear side) of the passage means, and the effect light emitting element may illuminate the lens cut to diffuse the light.

  The passage portion may have a curved portion. The passage means may have a cover member. The cover member may have a light-transmitting property so that a game ball passing through the passage portion can be visually recognized. The cover member may have a light-transmitting property such that the passage of the game ball can be visually recognized in a part of the area.

  When there are passages on the front side and the back side of the game board, the passages may be biased not only on the front side but also on the back side.

  The second passage portion and the third passage portion may have different passage lengths or the same passage length. The second and third passage portions may have a portion formed by a game nail that is continuous with a width that does not allow the game ball to pass.

  A guide (for example, a rib) that guides or guides the game ball may be provided in the passage portion.

  The opening of the second passage may have a higher probability that a game ball will enter than the opening of the third passage. A rib may be provided adjacent to the opening. The ribs may be outside or inside the passage.

  The position of the opening of the second passage may be different from the position of the opening of the third passage in the vertical direction. The opening portion of the second passage portion may be provided on each side portion that is separated left and right. The opening of the third passage may be provided on each of the left and right sides. A game ball that has come out of the second opening may enter the third opening.

  At least one of the second and third detecting means may be on the back side of the game board. At least one of the second and third detecting means may be on the front side of the game board.

  The distribution unit may alternatively distribute the game balls to the second passage portion and the third passage portion. The passage means may be one in which game balls are alternately detected by the second and third detection means.

  The distribution unit may be one that continuously distributes game balls to the same passage.

  The big hit with the second special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the big hit with the first special symbol. The big hit with the first special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the big hit with the second special symbol. By the detection by the second detection means, the normal symbol may be changed. By the detection of the third detection means, the normal symbol may be changed.

  The distribution unit may distribute the game balls to the two passages. The distribution unit may distribute the game balls to three passages.

<Embodiment B>
<Overall structure>
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 641. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices by a player's operation, and a chance button that causes the opportunity button 136 to emit light. Lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. , And a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 642 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 641 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  643 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A display device 208 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 124. The display area of the display device 208 includes a display area R1 capable of executing the first display. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the display device 208, but is a partial area in the present embodiment. In the case of the present embodiment, the first display includes a variable display of the decorative design.

  In the lower right area of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218. And, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The display area R1 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b and a right symbol. The display area 208c can display different decorative patterns, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for effect.

  Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, 7 Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are composed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  A predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting openings 231 and 232, and a variable winning opening are provided in the game area 124. 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 231 are provided in the starting port unit U1. The starting opening unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game balls that have entered from above to the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 231, like the passage structure described in the embodiment A.

  Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the variable winning port 234 and 235 are provided in the variable winning port unit U2.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are set on the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Along with discharging, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 231 or 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are set on the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Along with discharging, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called big winning openings or attackers. The variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device wins the special symbol display device to stop displaying the jackpot symbol. In this case, the door member 234a is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The variable winning a prize port 235 also has a mechanism that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while it is closed. For example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a certain time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. As a result, there are cases where a V prize is won.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning hole or start. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the balls to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning holes 226, variable winning holes 234, 235) and Either the winning opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 231, 232) is won, or there is no winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or only the universal drawing starting opening 228 is passed. To reach the outlet 240.

  The game board 200 is also provided with movable bodies 1 to 3 for performance. The movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are located above the display region R1 in their initial positions, and the movable body 3 is located below the display region R1 in the initial position. In the initial position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100, and the movable body 1 is located on the front side and the movable body 2 is located on the rear side. A cover 203 is arranged on the front side of the movable body 3, and in the initial position, only the upper portion of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203, and the portions other than the upper portion are covered by the cover 203 and the like. . Therefore, when it is in the initial position, it is more difficult to visually recognize the parts other than the upper part of the movable body 3 compared to the upper part, and when the cover 203 is made of a non-translucent member, the parts other than the upper part are invisible. . On the other hand, when the cover 203 is made of a translucent member, when the movable body 3 emits light, the light emission of the portion covered by the cover 203 can also be visually confirmed, and the movable body 3 covers the cover. It may be possible to suggest to the player that they are hidden by 203.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (2 in this circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received. One counter is built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display A device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the diagram display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp). 222 and the like), a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, similarly, the counter values at the timings of the counters corresponding to the second special figure starting ports 231 and 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting ports 231 and 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a chance button 136. A chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the display device 208.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of various actuators 224 such as motors provided in the movable bodies 1 to 3 and a position detection sensor provided in the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the like. The sensor circuit 518 that outputs the detection signals from the various sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502, the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and the game underframe lamp 542 are controlled. For connecting the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for, and the serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540. There is.

<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 645 (a) to (c), the special display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of diagrams and general drawings will be described. FIG. 645 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening starting sensor 230 detects that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, and the ball enters the second special drawing starting openings 231 and 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on the condition that the second starting opening sensor detects that it has been done. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do.

  These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the variation start of special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special symbol 2.

  Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display, and hereinafter, a series of from the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 The display is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 645 (a), 10 types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 645 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  "Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "Special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special figure B" is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  "Special map C" is a 2R jackpot design called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shortened working hours, which is a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

  “Special map E” is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. “Special map F” is a 2R jackpot design that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, and both are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the display device 208 are different in both, and even in the same state, the "special drawing G" is dared. , "Special map H" and "Special map F" are provided to enhance the fun of the game.

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than the "special drawing A" are prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 645 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c of the display device 208. In each symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of decorative pattern" is performed. Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical ornamental symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is displayed.

  In addition, "special drawing E" 2R big hit called hidden probability change, "special drawing F" suddenly called 2R big hit, or "special drawing G" first small hit, "special drawing H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R jackpot which is called a sudden change of "Special drawing C" or a 2R jackpot which is called a sudden shortening of "Special drawing D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 643 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 645 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in FIG. 645 (c), the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments to be turned on.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 646. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 646 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power-off (before power interruption), and if it does not return to the state before power-off (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state). ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined.

  If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 so that the pachinko machine 100 is initialized. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off.

  That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 644 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step SA11, the power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  At step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step SA15, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except during the timer interrupt process which starts at every predetermined cycle.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 647. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step SB03, the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the processing abnormality is not detected), the WDT is periodically (mainly). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step SB05, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and this detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times.

  Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-mentioned step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 644 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step SB05, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). Information indicating that it is), the general winning a prize port 226, the variable winning a prize port 234 or 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 231 or 232. It is determined that the start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step SA15 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value to be used next in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated.

  For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step SB11, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step SB13, timer updating processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 231, 232, 228, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value of the number storage area is read, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls storage area.

  In step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting ports 231, 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234, 235 have been won. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not the winning determination pattern information in step SB03 matches. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value is obtained as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  If there is a prize in the second special drawing starting ports 231, 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected. The value is acquired as a random number value, and a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234, 235 is won, the information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234, 235 is stored in each winning storage area for the variable winning port.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 645 (c)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 645 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose diagram is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB23.

  In step SB23, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time.

  It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step SB25). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step SB33), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the general figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 645 (a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special map B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the special map probability fluctuation flag is on, the special map C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special map probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure Stochastic flag is off, Special figure F when the figure probability variation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first deviation flag is on In the case of, the special figure I, when the second deviation flag is on, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so as to have the respective aspects of the special figure I. , The setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first off pattern (special map) I), and the fixed display of any one of the first outlier symbols (special figure J). After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special region 2 in operation in the setting area, and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is started. Information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 waiting time management provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the production standby period is shown in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished. Set the information.

  Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number 100 times is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning port 234 during the jackpot game, a lot of games in the second special figure starting port 232 until the game ball enters There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a jackpot increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step SB27.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step SB27). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process (special diagram 2 related lottery process) for the special diagram 2 is performed first (step SB29), and then the special diagram related lottery process for the special diagram 1 (special diagram 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step SB31).

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting ports 231 and 232 is notified. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special character The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting ports 231, 232, and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Including whether or not there is a prize.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related that are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which are held, etc. is set.

  In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, The information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, in the command data, the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, The information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is held is set.

  In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step SB33, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  In step SB41, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step SB01 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main controller shown in FIG. 646.

<Process of the first sub control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 648. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the strobe interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step SC01 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in SC01. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  At step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step SC09, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step SC11, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step SC09 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step SC13, if the effect data read in SC09 includes an instruction to VDP434, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step SC15, if the effect data read in SC09 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step SC19, if the effect data read in SC09 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, if the effect data read in SC09 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step SE01 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step SC19, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step SC13 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 makes information about the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step SF11, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
The processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 649. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step SG01 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in SG01. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step SG03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step SG09, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in SG07, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step SG11, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step SI01 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number value update process and the like are performed.

<Direction device>
The configuration of the rendering device, in particular, the configuration of the movable body 1 to the movable body 3 and the moving mechanism thereof will be described. First, the overall configuration of the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 650 to 652. 650 is a perspective view of the game board 200, FIG. 651 is a rear view of the game board 200, and FIG. 652 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 includes a front unit 201A, a game board 201B, and a rear unit 201C that are sequentially stacked in the depth direction from the front side.

  The front unit 201A is a unit that constitutes the game area 124 and the like, and is provided with a winning opening, a starting opening unit U1, a variable winning opening unit U2, a rail, each display device of symbols, nails, and the like, and the gaming board 201B is It is a plate-shaped support member that supports the front unit 201A.

  The game board 201B is formed of, for example, a transparent resin plate or a wooden plate, and an opening for exposing a production device behind it is formed in the center thereof. At the lower side of this opening, the cover 203 has a protruding portion 203a protruding to the front side, and restricts a game ball flowing down the game area 124 from bouncing backward from the opening of the game board 201B. ing.

  FIG. 653 is a partially exploded rear view of the game board 200, and mainly shows the configuration provided on the back side of the game board 201B. Ball passage units RT1 to RT3 are formed on the back surface of the game board 201B. The ball passage unit RT1 is a passage for discharging the game balls winning the plurality of general winning openings 226 located on the left side of the game area 124 from the game area 124, and the ball passage unit RT2 is provided at the second special figure starting opening 232. It is a passage for discharging the winning game balls from the game area 124, and the ball passage unit RT3 is a passage for discharging the game balls winning the general prize hole 226 provided in the variable winning prize unit U2 from the game area 124. is there.

  The upper walls 201c and 201d of the ball passage units RT1 and RT2 are inclined toward the outlet 240, and the game balls that have passed over the protrusion 203a and entered the back side of the game board 201B are the upper walls 201c and 201d. The guide makes it easy to collect the particles around the back of the outlet 240 and discharge them.

  A plurality of holes 201a for fixing a part of the structure of the front unit 201A with screws are formed in the game board 201B, and a part of the structure of the front unit 201A is fixed by inserting screws into the holes 201a. . An annular rib 201b is formed around part of the holes 201a. A part of the rib 201b is an inclined wall for guiding the screw to the hole 201a, which makes it easy to align the screw with the hole 201a. Although a part of the rib 201b is a vertical wall, it may be an inclined wall over the entire circumference.

  The rear unit 201C will be described with reference to FIGS. 650 to 652 and 654. FIG. 654 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 201C. The rear unit 201C is a unit that mainly includes a rendering device, and has a support member 7A that is a rectangular frame body having an opening in the center, and a rectangular frame body that is fixed behind the support member 7A and has an opening in the center. And a support member 7B that is

  The movable body 1 is supported by the support member 7A via the moving mechanism 4. The movable body 1 can be moved in any of vertical, horizontal, diagonal, rotating, and rotating modes. In the present embodiment, the moving mechanism 4 is an elevating mechanism for vertically moving the movable body 1. is there. The moving mechanism 4 includes a drive mechanism 4A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7A and a guide mechanism (driven mechanism) 4B supported on the right side, and the drive mechanism 4A and the guide mechanism 4B are separated from each other in the left-right direction. Then, they extend in the vertical direction in parallel with each other. The movable body 1 is installed between these mechanisms 4A and 4B. A decoration unit 8A is arranged in front of the drive mechanism 4A, and a decoration unit 8B is arranged in front of the guide mechanism 4B. The decoration units 8A and 8B produce light.

  The movable body 3 is also supported by the support member 7A via the moving mechanism 6. The moving mode of the movable body 3 may be any of up, down, left and right, diagonal, rotation, and rotation. In the case of the present embodiment, the moving mechanism 6 is an elevating mechanism for vertically moving the movable body 3. is there. The moving mechanism 6 is supported below the opening of the support member 7A.

  The movable body 2 is supported by the support member 7B via the moving mechanism 5. The moving mode of the movable body 2 can be any of vertical, horizontal, diagonal, rotation, and rotation, but in the case of the present embodiment, the moving mechanism 5 is an elevating mechanism for vertically moving the movable body 2. is there. The moving mechanism 5 includes a drive mechanism 5A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7B and a guide mechanism (driven mechanism) 5B supported on the right side, and the drive mechanism 5A and the guide mechanism 5B are separated from each other in the left-right direction. Then, they extend in the vertical direction in parallel with each other. The movable body 2 is installed between these mechanisms 5A and 5B.

  With such a configuration, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are arranged so as to be offset from each other in the depth direction, and are arranged to be able to overlap each other in the depth direction. This may facilitate securing a movable space for each movable body.

  In the case of this embodiment, the moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 have the same configuration, and the driving mechanism 5A overlaps the driving mechanism 4A behind the guiding mechanism 4B and the guiding mechanism 5B overlaps behind the guiding mechanism 4B in the depth direction. Is located. With such a configuration, the moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 may be able to adopt the same mechanism. On the other hand, since the drive mechanisms 4A and 5A are mechanisms including a motor and the like as described later, the thickness in the depth direction may increase. Therefore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the guide mechanism 5B is located behind the drive mechanism 4A and the drive mechanism 5B is located behind the guide mechanism 4B so as to overlap in the depth direction. In this case, the arrangement of the moving mechanisms 4 and 5 may be adopted. It may be possible to make the installation space thinner in the depth direction.

  The display device 208 is fixed to the back surface of the support member 7B, and the substrate case unit 7C is further fixed. The substrate case unit 7C can accommodate the moving mechanisms 4 and 5, the decorative units 8A and 8B, the substrate related to the display device 208, and other substrates.

  With the above configuration, the display area of the display device 208 is arranged behind the movable bodies 1 to 3. Although the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the display area of the display device 208 may always overlap in the depth direction, the movable bodies 1 to 3 can be moved to positions overlapping the display area of the display device 208 in the depth direction. Alternatively, at least part of the movable bodies 1 to 3 may be arranged so as not to always overlap the display area of the display device 208 in the depth direction.

<Movement mechanism 4, movable body 1 and decoration units 8A, 8B>
The moving mechanism 4, the movable body 1, and the decoration units 8A and 8B will be described with reference to FIGS. 655 to 658. 655 and 656 are exploded perspective views of the moving mechanism 4. FIG. 657 is a detailed view of a part of the drive mechanism 4A. FIG. 658 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 1.

<Movement mechanism 4>
The drive mechanism 4A of the moving mechanism 4 is fixed to the left side portion of the support member 7A, and the guide mechanism 4B is fixed to the right side portion of the support member 7A. The decorative member 70 is fixed to the upper side of the support member 7A.

  The drive mechanism 4A is a mechanism that generates a drive force for moving the movable body 1 up and down, and various drive force transmission mechanisms such as a belt transmission mechanism and a ball screw mechanism can be adopted. In this case, a rack-pinion mechanism using the motor 43A as a drive source is adopted.

  The drive mechanism 4A includes a base portion 40A and a cover portion 40B. The base portion 40A is a cover body that covers the mechanism arranged in the space between the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B from the rear side, and the cover portion 40B is the cover body that covers from the front side. The motor 43A is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back of the base 40A. The output shaft of the motor 43A passes through the base portion 40A and is fixed to a gear 41B arranged in a space between the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B. The gear 41B meshes with a gear 41A rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B, and the gear 41A meshes with a gear 41C rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B.

  Each of the gears 41A to 41C is a spur gear, but the gear 41C has a toothless portion 41a in which a part of the tooth portion on the peripheral edge is missing, and the side surface thereof protrudes parallel to the rotation axis direction. It has an engaging portion 41b. The gear 41C meshes with the rack portion 44a of the movable member 44A. The movable member 44A is supported by a slide rail 44B extending vertically so as to be vertically slidable. The slide rail 44B includes a fixed rail 44e fixed to the base portion 40A, an intermediate rail 44d slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 44e, and a movable rail 44c slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 44d. The movable member 44A is supported by the movable rail 44c.

  The rack portion 44a of the movable member 44A is arranged in the vertical direction and is moved in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 41C driven by the motor 43A. In FIG. 657, when the gear 41C rotates in the direction of arrow d1 (counterclockwise), the movable member 44A rises, and when it rotates in the direction of arrow d2 (clockwise), the movable member 44A descends. The left end portion of the movable body 1 is supported by the movable member 44A via the bracket 44b, and the movable body 1 basically operates in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 41C. As shown in FIG. 657, when the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 44A and the gear 41C is interrupted, and the movable member 44A is in a free fallable state. The free fall of the movable member 44A means the free fall of the movable body 1, and in this case, the movable body 1 operates without interlocking with the rotation of the gear 41C. A cushioning material 44f is arranged below the base portion 40A to define the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 44A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 1) and to reduce the impact at the time of fall.

  The base portion 40A also supports sensors 43B and 43C that detect the position of the movable body 1. The sensors 43B and 43C may be any sensors, but in the present embodiment, they are optical sensors (photointerrupters) that detect the detection piece 44g provided on the movable member 44A. The sensor 43B and the sensor 43C are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the sensor 43B detects whether or not the movable body 1 is located at the initial position, and the sensor 43C detects that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position (lowering position). (Also referred to as the position). The harness 43a is wiring for the sensors 43B, 43C and the like.

  The base portion 40A also includes a restriction unit 42 capable of restricting the operation of the movable body 1. Although any restricting operation may be performed, in the case of the present embodiment, the restricting unit 42 can restrict the descent (downward operation) of the movable body 1. Although the lowering of the movable body 1 can be regulated also by the motor 43A, in the present embodiment, by providing the regulating unit 42 separately from the motor 43A, the motor 43A is de-energized and the movable body 1 can be lowered with power saving. It is regulated.

  The regulation unit 42 includes an actuator 42A as a drive source. The actuator 42A may be a motor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is a solenoid, particularly a pull solenoid, which raises the plunger 42a when energized (excited state). The plunger 42a is provided with a return spring 42D that constantly biases the plunger 42a downward.

  The regulation unit 42 also includes a regulation member 42C. The regulation member 42C is rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B via a shaft 42c, and includes a regulation portion 42d that can be engaged with the engagement portion 41b of the gear 41C. An operating member 42B connected to the regulating member 42C via a pin 42b is attached to the lower end of the plunger 42a. The pin 42b is loosely fitted in the regulation member 42C. The vertical movement of the plunger 42a causes the operation member 42B to move up and down, whereby the regulating member 42c rotates around the shaft 42c.

  The regulation operation will be described with reference to FIG. When the actuator 42A is not energized (non-excited state), the regulating member 42C is located at the regulating position by the bias of the return spring 42D. This restriction position is a position at which the restriction portion 42d of the restriction member 42C can engage with the engagement portion 41b of the gear 41C.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of arrow d2, the rotation of the gear 41C is restricted by the engagement of the restriction portion 42d and the engagement portion 41b. At the time of regulation, the reaction force input from the engagement portion 41b to the regulation portion 42d is almost an upward reaction force that passes through the shaft 42c, so that rotation of the gear 41C can be regulated only by the biasing force of the return spring 42D. Is. In this way, the operating range of the gear 41C is restricted. The rotation of the gear 41C is restricted by the arrow d2, but this rotation direction is the rotation direction in which the movable body 1 is lowered. Therefore, the restriction unit 42 can restrict the lowering of the movable body 1. In the case of this embodiment, the descent of the movable body 1 can be regulated at the initial position by the regulation unit 42. That is, it is possible to maintain the movable body 1 at the initial position without energizing the motor 43A.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of the arrow d1, the engagement portion 41b contacts the side portion SD of the regulation member 42C. Since this contact direction is the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft 42c, the regulating member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3 against the urging force of the return spring 42D and is positioned at the non-regulating position (release position). The rotation of the gear 41C in the arrow d1 direction is not restricted. This rotation direction is a rotation direction that raises the movable body 1. Therefore, when the motor 43A is driven to raise the movable body 1 from the initial position, the movement of the movable body 1 is not regulated by the regulation unit 42.

  Next, the restriction release operation will be described. When the actuator 42A is energized (excited) while the restricting member 42C is located at the restricting position, the plunger 42a is pulled up, whereby the operating member 42B is pulled up against the biasing force of the return spring 42D. Therefore, the regulating member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3 and is positioned at the non-regulating position (release position). When the restriction member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3, the engagement between the engagement portion 41b and the restriction portion 42d is released, the rotation restriction of the gear 41C is released, and the descent restriction of the movable body 1 is released. . Therefore, by driving the motor 43A, the gear 41C can be rotated in the arrow d2 direction to lower the movable body 1.

  The operation member 42B is provided with an operation portion 42e protruding toward the back side. The operation portion 42e is arranged so as to be operable from the back of the base portion 40A through the opening 40a formed in the base portion 40A. Therefore, a store clerk or the like in the hall can manually move the operation portion 42e in the vertical direction at the time of maintenance or inspection, and thereby can move the restriction member 42C to the non-restricted position.

  For the descent of the movable body 1, it is possible to select a descent by driving the motor 43A or a free fall using the toothless portion 41a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is located at the maximum raised position in which the movable body 1 is raised by a certain amount from the initial position, the toothless portion 41a and the rack portion 44a are in a positional relationship of facing each other, and the movable body 1 is free to move. To fall. Since it is possible to select the descent mode of the movable body 1 from a descent by control and a descent by free fall, it may be possible to diversify the effect.

  Next, the guide mechanism 4B will be described with reference to FIGS. 655 and 656. The guide mechanism 4B is a mechanism that supports the right end of the movable body 1 and follows the drive mechanism 4A to guide the vertical movement of the movable body 1.

  The drive mechanism 4B includes a base portion 45A and a cover portion 45B. The base portion 45A is a cover body that covers the mechanism arranged in the space between the base portion 45A and the cover portion 45B from the rear side, and the cover portion 45B is the cover body that covers the front side.

  Grooves 45b for supporting the shaft 46B are formed in the base portion 45A at two positions separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the shaft 46B is arranged with its axial direction being the vertical direction. The base portion 45A is also formed with a recess 45a that forms a moving space for the movable member 46A. It should be noted that the cover portion 45B is also formed with grooves and recesses similar to the grooves 45b and recesses 45a.

  The movable member 46A includes a base portion 46a and a cover portion 46b, and two pairs of rollers 46d are rotatably supported in the internal space thereof. The roller pair 46d is arranged so as to sandwich the shaft 46B, and the movable member 46A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 46B.

  The movable member 46A supports the right end of the movable body 1 via a bracket 46c, and the movable member 46A moves following the operation of the movable body 1 by the drive mechanism 4A. A cushioning member 46e is arranged at the lower end of the recess 45a to define the lower limit of the free fall of the movable member 46A (that is, the lower limit of the free fall of the movable body 1) and to reduce the impact at the fall.

<Decorative unit 8A, 8B>
The decoration units 8A and 8B will be described with reference to FIGS. 655 and 656. In some cases, the moving mechanism 4 may be difficult to see, and in some cases, the game may be excited.

  The decoration unit 8A includes decoration parts 80a and 80b fixed to the cover part 40B and a substrate 80e as a configuration located on the front side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 80f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 80e. The substrate 80e is covered with a lens member 80d, and the lens member 80d is further covered with a cover body 80c. The lens member 80d and the cover body 80c have translucency.

  The decoration unit 8A also includes a lens member 81a fixed to the base portion 40A and a substrate 81b supported by the lens member 81a as a configuration located on the right side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 81c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 81b, and are covered by the lens member 81a. The lens member 81a has translucency.

  In some cases, driving the light emitting elements 80f and 81c can boost the game. Since the light emitting elements 80f and 81c are arranged in the vertical direction, the movement of the movable body 1 is emphasized by controlling the turning on and off of the light emitting elements 80f and 81c in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable body 1. You may be able to

  The decoration unit 8B has the same structure as the decoration unit 8A (the structure corresponding to the decoration portions 80a and 80b, the substrate 80e, the lens member 80, and the cover body 80c) as the structure located on the front side of the guide mechanism 4B. , Illustration is omitted.

  The decoration unit 8B also includes a lens member 82a fixed to the base portion 45A and a substrate 82b supported by the lens member 82a, which is located on the left side of the guide mechanism 4B. A plurality of light emitting elements (not shown; for example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 82b, and are covered by the lens member 82a. The lens member 82a has translucency. The wiring unit 82c is connected to the substrate 82b.

<Movable body 1>
The movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 658. The movable body 1 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed. The movable body 1 includes a base portion 10, movable portions 11, 12, 14 and a structure 16. The base portion 10 is a member that extends in the left-right direction, and the drive mechanism 4A is connected to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 4B is connected to the right end portion thereof.

  The movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are provided so as to be displaceable with respect to the base part 10. These may be provided with their own drive sources, but in the present embodiment, a single motor 15a is used as a drive source. The movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are configured to be displaceable in conjunction with each other, which may reduce the number of drive sources.

  Gears 15e to 15h (spur gears) for transmitting the driving force of the motor 15a to the movable portions 11 and 12 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the base portion 10. The gear 15e meshes with the gears 15f and 15h. The gear 15h meshes with the gear 15g. Further, on the back surface of the base portion 10, there are provided a relay board 17a, a cover 17b for covering the back portion thereof, a harness cover 17d for covering a harness 17c which is wiring for the motor 15a and the like.

  A support portion 10a that rotatably supports the movable portion 11 and a support portion 10b that rotatably supports the movable portion 12 are provided. The support portions 10a and 10b are circular recesses in which the rotating shafts 10a 'and 10b' are fixed, and a part of the peripheral wall thereof is cut out. A part of the gear 15f enters the support part 10a through the notch in the peripheral wall of the support part 10a, and a part of the gear 15g enters the support part 10b through the notch in the peripheral wall of the support part 10b. It is entering.

  The movable part 11 is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base part 11a, a substrate 11c, a lens member 11e, and a cover body 11f. A spur gear-shaped gear portion 11b is integrally formed with the base portion 11a. The rotating shaft 10a 'is inserted into the center hole of the gear portion 11b, and the gear portion 11b is housed in the support portion 10a. It The gear portion 11b arranged in the support portion 10a meshes with the gear 15f. A plurality of light emitting elements 11d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 11c. The plurality of light emitting elements 11d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 11. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover body 11f covers the lens member 11e. The lens member 11e and the cover body 11f have a light-transmitting property, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape symmetrical with the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and is formed by stacking a base portion 12a, a substrate 12c, a lens member 12e, and a cover body 12f. Has been done. The base portion 12a is integrally formed with a spur gear-shaped gear portion 12b. The rotating shaft 10b 'is inserted into the center hole of the gear portion 12b, and the gear portion 12b is housed in the support portion 10b. It The gear portion 12b arranged in the support portion 10b meshes with the gear 15g. A plurality of light emitting elements 12d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 12c. The plurality of light emitting elements 12d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 12. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover body 12f covers the lens member 12e. The lens member 12e and the cover body 12f have a light-transmitting property, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e, a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a left and right two-member structure, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 14e. The plurality of light emitting elements 14f are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 14. The lens member 14g and the cover body 14h have translucency, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion.

  The structure 16 includes a front base portion 16A and a rear base portion 16E. The front base portion 16A is fixed to the base portion 10, and the structure 16 is supported by the base portion 10.

  The base portion 14a of the movable portion 14 includes a pillar portion 14b extending vertically, and the pillar portion 14b is movably supported in the vertical direction so as to be sandwiched between the front base portion 16A and the rear base portion 16E. It Specifically, the front base portion 16A is formed with a vertically extending groove 16a in which the pillar portion 14b slides, and the rear base portion 16E is in contact with the back surface of the pillar portion 14b at a position facing the groove 16a. It has a contact portion 16c.

  A rack portion 14c is vertically formed on a side portion of the pillar portion 14b, and a detection piece 14d is formed on an upper portion of the pillar portion 14b. A sensor 18 for detecting the position of the movable portion 14 is attached to the rear base portion 16E. The sensor 18 may be any sensor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photointerrupter) that detects the detection piece 14d, and detects whether or not the movable portion 14 is located at the initial position.

  The motor 15a is fixed to the back of the front base portion 16A. The motor 15a is, for example, a stepping motor. The output shaft of the motor 15a passes through the front base portion 16A and is fixed to the gear 15b located on the front side of the Maekawa base portion 16A. Gears 15c and 15d, which are spur gears, are rotatably supported on the front base portion 16A. The gear 15b meshes with the gear 15d, and the gear 15d meshes with the gear 15c. The front base portion 16A has a notch that exposes a part of the gear 15c to the back portion, and the gear 15c meshes with the rack portion 14c of the column portion 15b. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the rack portion 14c via the gears 15b, 15d, 15c, and the movable portion 14 is operated.

  A shaft 15d is fixed to the gear 15c. The shaft 15d is rotatably supported by the front base portion 16A, penetrates through the rear base portion 16B and the base portion 10, and is fixed to the gear 15e. Therefore, the gear 15c and the gear 15e rotate integrally. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, its driving force is transmitted to the gear 15e via the gears 15b, 15d and 15c, and further transmitted to the gear portions 11b and 12b via the gears 15f to 15h, and the movable portion 11 and 12 is operated. In this way, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with each other using the single motor 15a as a drive source. The movable parts 11 and 12 are located at the same position in the depth direction, and the movable part 14 is located at a position (front position) displaced in the depth direction with respect to the movable parts 11 and 12. In operation, the movable parts 11 and 12 may not overlap each other in the depth direction, but the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 may overlap each other in the depth direction.

  The structure body 16 also includes a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover body 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16b (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 16B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16b are arranged in a plane, and the structure 16 can emit light as a whole. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover body 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover body 16D can be provided with a decorative shape, pattern, or color, and in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 650, it has an eye-shaped shape.

<Movement mechanism 5 and movable body 2>
The moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 659 and 660. FIG. 659 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2. FIG. 660 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 2.

<Movement mechanism 5>
The moving mechanism 5 has the same configuration as that of the moving mechanism 4 although the shape and the like are partially different, and will be briefly described. In the structure of the moving mechanism 5 corresponding to the structure of the moving mechanism 4, the head 4 is replaced with 5 and the same reference numerals are given. The matters described for the moving mechanism 4 can be appropriately applied to the moving mechanism 5. The drive mechanism 5A of the moving mechanism 5 is fixed to the left side portion of the support member 7B, and the guide mechanism 5B is fixed to the right side portion of the support member 7B.

  The drive mechanism 5A is a mechanism that generates a drive force for moving the movable body 2 up and down. The drive mechanism 5A includes a base portion 50A and a cover portion (not shown). The base portion 50A is a cover body that covers a mechanism arranged in a space between the base portion 50A and a cover portion (not shown) from the rear side, and the cover portion corresponds to the cover portion 40B of the moving mechanism 4 and the front side. It is a cover body that covers from. The motor 53A is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back of the base 50A. The output shaft of the motor 53A passes through the base portion 50A and is fixed to a gear 51B arranged in a space between the base portion 50A and the cover portion. The gear 51B meshes with the gear 51A, and the gear 51A meshes with the gear 51C.

  The gear 51C has a toothless portion 51a in which a part of the tooth portion on the peripheral edge is missing, and has an engaging portion 51b protruding parallel to the rotation axis direction on its side surface. The gear 51C meshes with the rack portion 54a of the movable member 54A. The movable member 54A is supported by the slide rail 54B so as to be vertically slidable. The slide rail 54B includes a fixed rail 54e, an intermediate rail 54d, and a movable rail 54c, and the movable member 54A is supported by the movable rail 54c.

  The rack portion 54a of the movable member 54A is arranged in the vertical direction, and is moved in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 51C driven by the motor 53A. When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the movable member 54A rises, and when it rotates clockwise, the movable member 54A descends. The left end of the movable body 2 is supported by the movable member 54A via the bracket 54b, and the movable body 2 basically operates in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 51C. When the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 54A and the gear 51C is interrupted, and the movable member 54A is in a free state where it can freely fall. The free fall of the movable member 54A means the free fall of the movable body 2, and in this case, the movable body 2 operates without interlocking with the rotation of the gear 51C. A cushioning material 54f is arranged below the base portion 50A to define the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 54A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 2) and to reduce the impact at the time of fall.

  The base portion 50A also supports sensors 53B and 53C that detect the position of the movable body 2. The sensors 53B and 53C are optical sensors (photointerrupters) that detect the detection piece 54g provided on the movable member 54A. The sensor 53B and the sensor 53C are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction, the sensor 53B detects whether or not the movable body 2 is located at the initial position, and the sensor 53C detects that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position (lowering position). (Also referred to as the position).

  The base portion 50A is also provided with a regulation unit 52 capable of regulating the operation of the movable body 2. In the case of the present embodiment, the lowering of the movable body 2 (downward movement) can be regulated by the regulation unit 52. Although the lowering of the movable body 2 can be regulated also by the motor 53A, in the present embodiment, by providing the regulating unit 52 separately from the motor 53A, the motor 53A is de-energized and the movable body 2 can be lowered with power saving. It is regulated.

  The regulation unit 52 includes an actuator 52A as a drive source. In the case of the present embodiment, the actuator 52A is a solenoid, particularly a pull solenoid, and raises the plunger 52a when energized (excited state). The plunger 52a is provided with a return spring 52D that constantly urges the plunger 52a downward.

  The regulation unit 52 also includes a regulation member 52C. The regulation member 52C is rotatably supported by the base portion 50 and the cover portion via a shaft 52c, and includes a regulation portion 52d that can engage with the engagement portion 51b of the gear 51C. An operating member 52B connected to the restricting member 52C via a pin 52b is attached to the lower end of the plunger 52a. The pin 52b is loosely fitted in the regulation member 52C. The vertical movement of the plunger 52a causes the operation member 52B to move up and down, whereby the regulating member 52c rotates around the shaft 52c.

  When the actuator 52A is not energized (non-excited state), the restricting member 52C is located at the restricting position by the bias of the return spring 52D, and the restricting portion 52d of the restricting member 52C engages with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. It is possible.

  When the gear 51C rotates clockwise, the rotation of the gear 51C is restricted by the engagement of the restricting portion 52d and the engaging portion 51b, and the descent of the movable body 2 can be restricted at the initial position. That is, it is possible to maintain the movable body 2 in the initial position without energizing the motor 53A.

  When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the engagement portion 51b contacts the side portion of the regulation member 52C, the regulation member 52C rotates to the non-regulation position (release position), and the counterclockwise movement of the gear 51C. Does not regulate rotation around. Therefore, when the motor 53A is driven to raise the movable body 2 from the initial position, the operation of the movable body 2 is not regulated by the regulation unit 52.

  When the actuator 52A is energized (excited state) when the regulating member 52C is located at the regulating position, the plunger 52a is pulled up and the regulating member 52C is rotated, whereby the engagement portion 51b and the regulating portion 52d are separated from each other. The engagement is released. Therefore, the movable body 2 can be lowered by rotating the gear 51C clockwise by driving the motor 53A.

  The operation member 52B is provided with an operation portion 52e that projects to the back side. The operation portion 52e is arranged so as to be operable from the back of the base portion 50A through the opening 50a formed in the base portion 50A. Therefore, a store clerk or the like in the hall can manually move the operation portion 42e in the vertical direction at the time of maintenance or inspection, which allows the regulating member 52C to be moved to the non-regulating position.

  As the descent of the movable body 2, it is possible to select a descent by driving the motor 53A or a free fall using the toothless portion 51a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is located at the maximum raised position in which the movable body 2 is raised by a certain amount from the initial position, the toothless portion 51a and the rack portion 54a face each other and the movable body 2 is free to move. To fall.

  Next, the guide mechanism 5B will be described. The guide mechanism 5B is a mechanism that supports the right end portion of the movable body 2 and follows the drive mechanism 5A to guide the vertical movement of the movable body 2.

  The drive mechanism 5B includes a base portion 55A and a cover portion (not shown). The base portion 55A is a cover body that covers a mechanism arranged in the space between the base portion 55A and the cover portion from the rear side, and the cover portion is a cover body that covers the front side.

  Grooves 55b for supporting the shaft 56B are vertically spaced apart from each other in the base portion 55A, and the shaft 56B is arranged with its axial direction being the vertical direction. The base portion 55A is also formed with a recess 55a that forms a moving space for the movable member 56A. It should be noted that the cover portion is also formed with grooves and recesses similar to the grooves 55b and recesses 55a.

  The movable member 56A includes a base portion 56a and a cover portion 56b, and two pairs of rollers 56d are rotatably supported in the internal space thereof. The roller pair 56d is arranged so as to sandwich the shaft 56B, and the movable member 56A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 56B.

  The movable member 56A supports the right end portion of the movable body 2 via a bracket 56c, and the movable member 56A moves following the operation of the movable body 2 by the drive mechanism 5A. A cushioning material 56e is arranged at the lower end of the recess 55a to define the lower limit of the free fall of the movable member 56A (that is, the lower limit of the free fall of the movable body 2) and reduce the impact at the time of the fall.

<Movable body 2>
The movable body 2 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed, and particularly in the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 2 is a deployed movable object unit in which the movable portion changes from the stored state to the deployed state. The movable body 2 includes a cover portion 20A, a base portion 20B, and a pair of movable portions 23. The base portion 20B is a member extending in the left-right direction, the drive mechanism 5A is coupled to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 5B is coupled to the right end portion thereof.

  The pair of movable portions 23 are provided so as to be displaceable with respect to the base portion 20B. In the case of the present embodiment, the pair of movable portions 23 rotate and the pair of movable portions 23 deploys / stores. The unfolding operation and the storing operation are possible.

  The base portion 20B is a cover body that covers the mechanism arranged in the space between the base portion 20B and the cover portion 20A from the front side, and the cover portion 20A is the cover body that covers the rear side. A circular opening is formed in the center of the base portion 20B, and the rotating member 21A is rotatably supported in this opening. The cover 20A is formed with an opening concentric with the opening of the base 20B, and the rotary connector 25A is arranged in this opening. The rotary connector 25A is fixed to the back of the cover 20A by a mounting member 25B, and constitutes a slip ring that supplies a control signal and electric power to the electrical components supported by the rotary member 21A via a harness 25C. The center of the rotary member of the rotary connector 25A is defined by the shaft 24e.

  The movable body 2 includes a drive mechanism 24 capable of executing the rotating operation of the pair of movable portions 23. The drive mechanism 24 is a gear mechanism including a motor 24a as a drive source. The motor 24a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 24a is fixed to the back of the cover 20A, and its output shaft passes through the cover 20A and is fixed to the gear 24b in the space between the cover 20A and the base 20B. Gears 24c and 24d are arranged between the cover portion 20A and the base portion 20B, the gear 24b meshes with the gear 24d, and the gear 24d meshes with the gear 24c.

  Teeth 21a are formed on the entire circumference of the rotating member 21A, and the hub 21a meshes with the gear 24c. With the above configuration, when the motor 24a is driven, the rotating member 21A can be rotated.

  The sensor unit 27 includes a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 21A and a substrate on which the sensor is mounted, and is supported by the base portion 20B. The sensor unit 27 includes, for example, an optical sensor such as a photo interrupter that detects the detection piece 21b provided on the rotating member 21A, and detects whether the rotating member 21A is located at the initial position. The relay board 29 is a board that relays various wirings and is supported by the base portion 20B.

  A base portion 21B is fixed to the rotating member 21A, and the base portion 21B rotates integrally with the rotating member 21A. A drive mechanism 26 for expanding / storing the pair of movable portions 23 is arranged on the base portion 21B. The drive mechanism 26 is a gear mechanism including a motor 26a as a drive source. The motor 26a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 26a is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 21B, and its output shaft passes through the base portion 21B and the gear 26b is fixed to the front side of the base portion 21B.

  A rotating member 22A is rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 21B. The rotating member 22A is provided with a cylindrical bulging portion 22b bulging backward at the center thereof, and this bulging portion 22b enters a circular recess 21e formed on the front side of the base portion 21B. . Teeth (not shown) are formed on the peripheral surface of the bulging portion 22b, and the gear 26b meshes with the teeth.

  A shaft portion 22a protruding rearward is formed at the center of the bulging portion 22b, and the shaft portion 22a is rotatably supported by a shaft hole 21f provided in the center portion of the base portion 21B. The shaft portion 22a and the shaft hole 21f are located coaxially with the rotation center of the rotating member 21A. By the drive of the motor 26a, the rotating member 22A rotates about the shaft portion 22a via the gear 26b and the teeth of the bulging portion 22b.

  A shaft 24e is fixed to the center of the shaft portion 22a, and a stopper 28B is fixed to the shaft 24e. The stopper 28B is a retaining member that sandwiches the base portion 21B between the stopper 28B and the rotating member 22A, whereby the rotating member 22A is rotatably fixed to the base portion 21B.

  A sensor 28A is arranged in the space between the rotating member 21A and the base portion 21B in addition to the motor 26a and the stopper 28B. The sensor 28A is a sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotating member 22A. The sensor 28A may be any sensor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photointerrupter) that detects the detection piece 28a provided on the stopper 28B, and whether the rotating member 22A is located at the initial position. Detect whether or not.

  The base portion 21B has a pair of arm portions extending opposite to the center thereof, and a connecting hole 21c is formed at an end portion of each arm portion. One end of the link 21D is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 21c via a bush 21d.

  The rotating member 22A has a pair of shaft support portions 22c at positions symmetrical with respect to the center thereof. A shaft support member 22D is attached to the shaft support portion 22c, and the shaft support member 22D is fixed to the movable portion 23, so that the movable portion 23 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 22A.

  The rotating member 22A also has a pair of stopper portions 22d formed at positions symmetrical with respect to the center thereof. The stopper portion 22d is a portion that abuts on the link 21D and regulates its displacement when the link 21D is located at a predetermined position, and defines the maximum deployed position of the movable portion 23.

  A substrate 22B is supported on the front side of the rotating member 22A. A plurality of light emitting elements L1 to L5 (LEDs in this case) are mounted on the board 22B. In the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are arranged in a cross shape. The substrate 22B is covered by the cover body 22C. The cover 22C is a translucent member, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion. 22B and the cover body 22C are formed with notches for avoiding interference with the shaft support member 22D.

  The movable portion 23 is a blade-shaped arm member as a whole, and is a laminated body of a base portion 23a, a substrate 23b, a lens member 23d, and a cover body 23e. The base portion 23a is provided with a fixed portion 23f to which the shaft supporting member 22D is fixed and a shaft supporting portion 23g on which the other end of the link 21D is rotatably supported. A plurality of light emitting elements 23c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the board 23b. The lens member 23d covers the substrate 23b and covers the cover body 23e. The lens member 23d and the cover body 23e are translucent members, but may partially have a non-transmissive portion.

  With the above configuration, the rotation member 21A is rotated by the drive of the motor 24a, whereby the base portion 21B, the rotation member 22A, the pair of movable portions 23 and the like are integrally rotated. Then, the rotation member 22A rotates (rotates) with respect to the base portion 21B by the rotation of the motor 26a. At this time, the movable portion 23 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 22A with respect to the fixed portion 23f, and is connected to the base portion 21B via a link 21d. For this reason, the movable portion 23 performs a rotating operation with the fixed portion 23f as the center of rotation, thereby performing the expanding operation and the storing operation.

<Movement mechanism 6 and movable body 3>
The moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 661 and 662. FIG. 662 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3. FIG. 662 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 3.

<Movement mechanism 6>
The moving mechanism 6 includes a base portion 60A. The movable member 60B is supported by the base portion 60A via the slide rail 63. The movable member 60B is supported by a slide rail 63 extending vertically so as to be vertically slidable. The slide rail 63 includes a fixed rail 63c fixed to the base portion 60A, an intermediate rail 63b slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 63c, and a movable rail 63a slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 63b. And the movable member 60B is supported by the movable rail 63a. The base portion 30 of the movable body 3 is fixed to the movable member 60B.

  One end of the arm member 61 is rotatably supported on the left end of the base portion 60A via a shaft 61a, and one end of the arm member 62 is rotated on the right end of the base portion 60A via a shaft 62a. It is movably supported. Grooves 30a and 30b extending in the left-right direction are formed in the lower portion of the base portion 30, and the other end portion of the arm member 62 is rotatably connected to the groove 30a via a slide member 62b, and is connected to the groove 30b. The other end of the arm member 61 is rotatably connected via a slide member 61b.

  The moving mechanism 6 includes a drive mechanism 64 that rotates the arm member 61. The drive mechanism 64 is a gear mechanism using a motor 64b as a drive source, and the motor 64b is, for example, a stepping motor. The drive mechanism 64 includes a base portion 64a supported by the base portion 65A, and the motor 64b is supported on the front side of the base portion 64a. A gear cover 64f is fixed to the back of the base portion 64a, and gears 64d and 64e are rotatably supported in the space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The output shaft of the motor 64b passes through the base portion 64a, and the gear 64c is fixed in the space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The gear 64c meshes with the gear 64d, and the gear 64d meshes with the gear 64e. The arm member 61 has a tooth portion 61d that meshes with the gear 64e, and the arm member 61 is rotated by driving the motor 64b.

  The base member 30 is biased in the vertical direction by the rotation of the arm member 61, and the movable member 3 is moved up and down by the arm member 62 being driven and rotated. With the rotation of the arm members 61 and 62, the slide members 61b and 62b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the grooves 30b and 30a, and convert the rotation of the arm members 61 and 62 into the vertical movement of the movable body 3.

  A harness cover 61c is attached to the back of the arm member 61, and a harness (not shown) is arranged in the space between the arm member 61 and the harness cover 61c. An arm cover 62b is arranged on the front side of the arm member 62.

  A sensor 65 that detects the position of the arm member 61 is supported by the gear cover 64f. The sensor 65 may be any sensor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) that detects the detection piece 61e formed on the arm member 61. The sensor 65 detects whether the arm member 61 is located at the initial position.

  A cover member 68 that protects the attachment portion of the shaft 61a, a relay board 67, and a biasing unit 66 are provided on the back of the base portion 60A.

  The biasing unit 66 is a unit that biases the arm member 62 in a predetermined direction using a spring 66E as a drive source. In the present embodiment, when the movable body 3 rises, the spring 66E extends and the movable body 3 descends. It is configured to exert a biasing force in the direction. Specifically, the urging unit 66 includes a base portion 66A fixed to the back portion of the base portion 60A. A vertical groove 66a is formed in the base portion 66A, and a movable member 66d is attached to the groove 66a to guide the vertical movement of the movable member 66d. A gear 66B is rotatably supported by the base 66A via a shaft 62a.

  The gear 66B is connected to the arm member 62 via the shaft 62a, and the rotation of the arm member 62 also rotates the gear 66B. A gear 66C is rotatably supported by the base 66A via a shaft 66c. The gear 66C meshes with the gear 66B and also meshes with the rack portion 66d formed on the movable member 66D. The spring 66E connects the movable member 66D and the base portion 60A, and always urges the movable member 66D downward. When the movable body 3 rises, the arm member 62 rotates, whereby the movable member 66D rises through the rotation of the gear 66B, the spring 66E extends, and the biasing force increases.

<Movable body 3>
The movable body 3 has a circular shape as a whole and is a rotary display unit including a rotatable display device 34, and in particular, is a versatal lighter movable object unit that constitutes a versatile device. The display device 34 is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs, which will be described later in detail) are mounted, and is configured to be rotatable by a drive mechanism using a motor 35 as a drive source.

  The motor 35 is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back portion of the base portion 30. The output shaft of the motor 35 passes through the base portion 30, and the gear 35a is fixed on the front side of the base portion 30. A gear 35b is fixed to the back of the display device 34 coaxially with the rotation center thereof, and the gear 35a meshes with the gear 35b.

  A shaft 36 is fixed to the shaft center of the gear 35b. The shaft 36 is rotatably supported by a rotary connector unit 37. The rotary connector unit 37 is fixed to the base portion 30 and includes a slip ring that supplies a control signal and power to a light emitting element mounted on the display device 34, and a sensor that detects a rotational position of the display device 34.

  A display device 32 is arranged on the front side of the base portion 30. Unlike the display device 34, the display device 32 is a device fixed to the base portion 30, and is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs, which will be described later in detail) are mounted. The cover body 33 is a translucent member and is arranged so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the display device 32. However, the plurality of light emitting elements 32 a are located on the outer peripheral portion of the display device 32, and Not covered by 33.

  The cover body 31 is fixed to the front side of the base portion 30 and covers the display devices 32 and 34. The cover body 31 is a translucent member.

  671 (a) is a front view of the movable body 3, and FIG. 671 (b) is a front view of the movable body 3 with the cover body 31 removed. FIG. 671 (c) is a front view of the movable body 3 through the cover body 31.

  The outer shape of the cover body 31 is circular, and its front wall has a shape in which twelve circular portions 31a are formed around a central circular portion 31b. Concavities and convexities are continuously formed on the peripheral wall of the cover body 31 in the circumferential direction.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the circular portion 31b is entirely transparent, and the configuration behind it is visible. The circular portion 31a is partially opaque. In the case of the present embodiment, the letters I to XII are formed on each circular portion 31a, and the letter portions are colored and therefore opaque. Depending on the letters I to XII, the cover body 31 may look like a clock face. The characters can be formed by sticking a seal or painting.

  Further, concentric multi-circular thin grooves are engraved in each circular portion 31a, and this thin groove also reduces the permeability of the circular portion 31a and makes it difficult to see behind it.

  The display device 32 includes 12 light emitting elements L14. Each light emitting element L14 is arranged corresponding to the circular portion 31a, and one light emitting element L14 is arranged behind the center of one circular portion 31a. Since the display device 32 is fixed to the base portion 30, the relative position between each light emitting element L14 and the base portion 30 or the cover body 31 does not change, and each light emitting element L14 is formed by the letters I to XII or the narrow groove. It is difficult to see through the cover body 31. When the light emitting element L14 is caused to emit light, the light may be diffused by the narrow groove of the circular portion 31a and the entire circular portion 31a may appear to be emitting light, so that the letters I to XII can be visually highlighted. There are cases.

  The display device 34 includes a light emitting element L11 arranged at a position serving as a rotation center thereof, and a plurality of light emitting element rows LA arranged radially from the rotation center. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of light emitting element rows LA is 6, and they are arranged at equal pitches in the circumferential direction. Each light emitting element row LA is composed of a plurality of light emitting elements L12 and a light emitting element L13 located at the outermost periphery, and these are arranged linearly.

  By rotating the display device 34, the light emitting element array LA can change its relative position with respect to the base portion 30 and the cover body 31. On the other hand, since the light emitting element L11 is located at the center of rotation, it is impossible to change the relative position to the base portion 30, the cover body 31, or the light emitting element L14.

  In this way, by mixing the light emitting elements L12 and L13 whose relative positions change with respect to the base portion 30 and the cover body 31 and the light emitting elements L11 and L14 whose relative positions do not change, various light emitting effects may be possible. is there. Also, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 671 (c), the light emitting elements L11, the light emitting element rows LA, and the light emitting elements L12 are arranged in the same straight line depending on the rotation angle of the display device 34, so that various light emitting effects are obtained. May be possible. In this case, the light emitting element L13 is located at a position overlapping the circular portion 31a in the depth direction. In other words, the light emitting element L13 may or may not overlap the circular portion 31a depending on the rotation of the display device 34. Since the circular portion 31a has lower transparency than the circular portion 31b, the appearance of the light emission of the light emitting element L13 may change before and after passing through the position overlapping the circular portion 31a, and various light emission effects are possible. May be On the contrary, since the light emitting elements L11 and L12 are always overlapped with the circular portion 31b in the depth direction, the light emitting elements L11 and L12 may be easily visible at all times through the cover body 31, and the display contents of the light emitting elements L11 and L12 may be easily seen by the player. There is.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 671 (d), the light emitting elements L11 are arranged on the rotation center axis AX of the display device 34, and the light emitting element rows LA are arranged in the radial direction of the rotation center axis AX. However, other configurations are possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 671 (e), the light emitting element array LA may be arranged in parallel with the rotation center axis AX. Further, as shown in FIG. 671 (f), the light emitting elements L11 may be arranged on the rotation center axis AX, and the light emitting element rows LA may be arranged radially inclining from the radial direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation center axis AX is a horizontal direction and a depth direction axis, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a vertical axis as shown in FIG. 671 (g), a vertical direction or a horizontal direction. The axis may be a direction inclined from the direction.

<Example of performance operation>
An operation example of the movable bodies 1 to 3 will be sequentially described.

<Movable body 1>
FIG. 663 exemplifies a deforming operation of the movable body 1, and shows an operation example of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 in front view and rear view of the movable body 1 together with main mechanisms. FIG. 663 (a) shows the initial position of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14, and FIG. 663 (c) shows the position (moving position) after the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are moved. 663 (b) shows an intermediate position between the initial position and the moving position. The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be deformed from the initial position to the moving position via the intermediate position, and can be returned to the initial position from the moving position via the intermediate position. When the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are located at the initial position, the sensor 18 is configured to detect the detection piece 14d, and the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are located at the initial position for control purposes. Whether or not it is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 18.

  In the case of this embodiment, the movable portion 11 and the movable portion 14 perform different operations. Further, the movable portion 12 and the movable portion 14 perform different operations. The movable portion 11 is a rotating operation that moves along the curved orbit OR1 and has the rotating shaft 10a ′ as the rotation center. The movable portion 12 moves along the curved orbit OR2 and is a rotation operation about the rotation axis 10b ′ as a rotation center, and is a symmetrical operation with the movable portion 11. The movable portion 14 is a translational movement that moves along the linear trajectory OR3. As described above, there is a difference between the movable portion 14 and the movable portions 11 and 12 in the translational movement and the rotational movement. Providing movable parts that perform different operations in this way may improve the effect. In particular, the moving effect provided by the same movable body 1 may be improved by performing different operations.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable parts 11 and 12 perform only the rotating motion, but the movable parts 11 and 12 may be configured to perform the rotating motion and the translational motion along a trajectory including a linear trajectory. The motion and the translational motion may be motions performed sequentially or motions performed in parallel. Similarly, although the movable portion 14 performs only the translational motion, it may be configured to perform the translational motion and the rotational motion along a trajectory including a curved trajectory. In this case, the rotational motion and the translational motion are not included. The operations may be performed sequentially or may be performed in parallel.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are in the posture of extending in the left-right direction at the initial position, while the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are triangular at the moving position. In some cases, it may be possible to give unexpectedness to the player. Further, in the intermediate position, the movable parts 11 and 12 may look like wings spread, and in the moved position, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 may look like a pyramid, which gives a mysterious impression to the player. In some cases.

  Further, in the course of the operation, the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 partially overlap each other in the depth direction as seen at the intermediate position, so that the player can be given a sense of depth and enhance the effect of production. You may be able to. Further, in the moving position, the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 are in a posture that they do not overlap each other in the depth direction, and moreover, the end portions of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 are in a posture in which they are close to each other. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player an impression of the accuracy of the operation, and in some cases, the effect of the effect may be enhanced. By disposing the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 at positions displaced in the depth direction, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable body.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with each other, and the operation period from the initial position to the moving position or from the moving position to the initial position is the same period. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of unity of the operation of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14. The operation periods of the movable parts may or may not partially overlap. FIG. 675 shows an example of the timing of the operation period. The control of the operation period can be realized mechanically or by providing an individual drive source in each movable part so that the movable parts can operate independently.

  In FIG. 675, the first operation is, for example, the operation of the movable section 11, the second operation is, for example, the operation of the movable section 12, the third operation is, for example, the operation of the movable section 14, and t Indicates the passage of time.

  FIG. 675 (a) is an example that has already been described, in which the operating periods of the three movable parts are the same. FIG. 675 (b) is an example in which the operating periods of the two movable parts are the same and the operating period of the remaining one movable part is different. FIG. 675 (c) is an example in which the operation periods of the three movable parts are different from each other. In the example of FIG. 675 (d), the operation periods of the first operation and the second operation partially overlap, and the operation periods of the second operation and the third operation partially overlap. In these operations, the operation periods of the movable parts may be the same or different, and FIG. 676 (e) shows an example in which the operation periods of the three movable parts are different from each other. Shows.

  Next, an operation example including a moving operation of the movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 664 and 665. 664 and 665 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 1.

  FIG. 664 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 1 is at the initial position. The fact that the movable body 1 is located at the initial position is detected by the sensor 43B as described above.

  FIGS. 664 (b) to 664 (f) show the elevation position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the mode of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 664 (b) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the raised position. The raised position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position where the display area R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. When the movable body 1 is in the initial position or the raised position and the movable body 2 is in the initial position described later, the movable body 2 is located behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIG. It is difficult to see because it is covered with 1.

  When the movable body 1 is raised beyond the raised position, the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, and the movable body 1 falls freely. FIG. 664 (d) shows a case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and FIG. 664 (c) shows a case where the movable body 1 is located at an intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, as described above, the free fall and the control descent due to the drive of the motor 43A can be selected, and the effect is enhanced by properly using the two descents. You may be able to. The fact that the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position is detected by the sensor 43C as described above.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 1 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship where they interfere with each other in the depth direction. Therefore, when the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position described later and is not raised. Conversely speaking, when the movable body 3 is raised, the movable body 1 is not positioned in the lowered position. Alternatively, the operation of the movable body 1 may be restricted by contact with the movable body 3.

  At the intermediate position, the movable body 1 partially overlaps the display region R1, and the movable body 2 at the initial position starts to be exposed. In the lowered position, the movable body 1 may be entirely overlapped at the center of the display area R1, and the player's attention may be attracted to the movable body 1. Further, the movable body 1 may display the display content of the display area R1. Sometimes it can be partially hidden. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 in the initial position is wholly exposed.

  FIG. 664 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the intermediate position (FIG. 663 (b)). (F) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the movement position (FIG. 663 (c)). The operations of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are possible regardless of the position of the movable body 1. However, when the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, the movable parts 1 and 12 and 14 can be operated by performing these operations. May be able to stand out.

  Since the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 and the structure 16 are displaced from each other in the depth direction, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 and the structure 16 do not interfere with each other during the operation and are partially moved in the depth direction. In addition, the overlapping range varies depending on the progress of the operation. This may allow the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 to operate without reducing the visibility of the structure 16. Further, the overlapping range of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 and the display region R1 and the overlapping range depending on the progress of the operation are also different. As a result, in the display area R1, the range in which the player can see (or the range in which the player hides) changes, and the effect may be enhanced.

  665 (a) and 665 (b) show an example of restriction release by the restriction unit 42. In the initial position, the movable body 1 is restricted from descending by the restriction of the restriction unit 42. FIG. 665 (a) shows a state in which the regulation is released at the initial position, in which the regulation member 42C is rotated and is not engaged with the engagement portion 41b of the gear 41C. The gear 41C can be rotated clockwise, and FIG. 665 (b) shows a state in which the gear 41C is rotated until the engagement portion 41b is located at the 0 o'clock position of the clock. As a result, the movable body 1 is slightly lowered from the initial position. By repeating a small amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation around the position of the gear 41C in FIG. 665 (b), it is possible to produce an effect of vibrating the movable body 1 up and down. FIG. 665 (c) to FIG. 665 (e) show the vertical position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the mode of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time.

  Similar to FIG. 665 (b), FIG. 665 (c) shows a state in which the gear 41C is in the rotation position in which the engaging portion 41b is located at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece. The movable body 1 and the display region R1 do not overlap each other, but are closer to each other as the lower end of the structure 16 contacts the upper side of the display region R1 in a front view. FIG. 665 (d) shows a state in which the gear 41C is rotated clockwise and the engagement portion 41b thereof is located at the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece in the rotation position. The movable body 1 slightly descends and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 665 (e) shows the state of the rotating position in which the gear 41C is rotated counterclockwise and the engaging portion 41b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the clock. The movable body 1 is slightly raised and is positioned again so as not to overlap the display area R1. When the engaging portion 41b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the timepiece, although the engaging portion 41b abuts the side portion SD of the regulating member 42C to rotate the regulating member 42C, it is more than the regulating portion 42d. It is not located on the left side and therefore does not engage with the restriction portion 42d. Therefore, when the gear 41C is repeatedly rotated so that the engaging portion 41b reciprocates between the 11 o'clock position and 1 o'clock position, it is not necessary to perform the restriction releasing operation of the restriction unit 42, and Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction of the restriction unit 42 may be released.

<Movable body 2>
FIG. 666 illustrates the unfolding operation of the movable body 2, and shows an operation example of the movable body 2 together with the main configuration of the movable body 2 through the movable portion 23. In order to facilitate understanding, the rotating member 21A is not rotated and only the rotating member 22A is shown to be expanded. However, the rotating member 21A can be rotated to perform the entire rotating operation. .

  State A shows the initial position where the pair of movable parts 23 are in the initial state (stored state), state D shows the maximum deployed position where the pair of movable parts 23 is in the deployed state, and state B and state C indicates an intermediate position between the initial position and the maximum deployment position. The pair of movable portions 23 can be deformed from the initial position to the expanded maximum position via the intermediate position, and can be returned to the initial position from the expanded maximum position via the intermediate position. In addition, when the pair of movable portions 23 are located at the initial position, the sensor 28A is configured to detect the detection piece 28a, and whether or not the pair of movable portions 23 is located at the initial position is controlled. It is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 23A.

  In the initial position, the pair of movable portions 23 are in a state where their side surfaces are close to each other and are closed, and the light emitting elements L1 to L5 behind the movable portions 23 overlap any one of the pair of movable portions 23 in the depth direction. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are overlapped with the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover body 23e. In particular, when the substrate 23b does not have a light-transmitting property, the presence of the light emitting elements L1 to L5 becomes difficult to visually recognize. However, when the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are driven, the light may leak from the periphery of the pair of movable portions 23 and may be visible, and the staging effect may be enhanced.

  When the rotating member 22A is rotated from the state A, the position of the shaft support member 22D connecting the rotating member 22A and the movable portion 23 moves, while the connecting point of the link 21D and the rotating member 21A (the bush 21d). The position of) does not change. Therefore, the movable portion 23 expands to the state B to the state D while the movable range is restricted by the link 21D.

  As the state moves from the state B to the state D, the side surfaces of the pair of movable portions 23 start to separate from each other, and the movable portions 23 move to the open state. Here, the light emitting element L3 is arranged at the center of rotation of the rotating member 22A. The light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 are arranged on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3, and the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are arranged on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3. The line connecting the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 and the line connecting the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are orthogonal to each other, and the light emitting element L3 is located at the intersection.

  In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L3 arranged at the rotation center of the rotation member 22A does not overlap with the pair of movable portions 23 in the depth direction and is in an exposed state. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting element L3. In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are not exposed in any of the pair of movable portions 23 in the depth direction and are exposed. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting elements L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, in the state B and the state C, the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 do not overlap with the pair of movable portions 23 in the depth direction and are in an exposed state. It overlaps with any of 23 in the depth direction. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 and L2 overlap with the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover body 23e. Especially, when the substrate 23b does not have a light-transmitting property, it is difficult to visually recognize the existence of the light emitting elements L1 and L2. However, when the light emitting elements L1 and L2 are driven, the light may leak from the periphery of the pair of movable portions 23 and may be visually recognized, and the staging effect may be enhanced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the states of the light emitting elements L1 and L2 change such that the light emitting elements L1 and L2 overlap with the movable portion 23, do not overlap with the movable portion 23, and overlap with the movable portion 23 as the light emitting elements L1 and L2 shift to states A to D. To do. Therefore, the appearance of the light emitted from the light emitting elements L1 and L2 may change during the transition from state A to state D (or vice versa), and the staging effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Next, the distances A to D are distances from the rotation center of the rotation member 22A in the states A to D to the farthest position of the movable portion 23, and have a relationship of distance A <distance B <distance C <distance D. is there. When the movable body 2 is unfolded, it may interfere with the surrounding structure within the distance D from the center of rotation of the rotating member 22A, and the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 interfere in the depth direction. There is a positional relationship, and if they are close to each other, they may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, when the movable body 2 is deployed, it is possible to avoid interference by rotating the rotating member 21A and moving the farthest position of the movable portion 23. The rotation center of the rotation member 21A is coaxial with the rotation center of the rotation member 22A.

  For example, when there is a configuration that interferes left and right, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so that the farthest position is located vertically. On the contrary, if there is a configuration that interferes vertically, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so that the farthest position is located on the left and right. When the movable portion 23 is in the unfolded state and the rotating member 21A is further rotated to rotate the pair of movable portions 23 as a whole, if there is a configuration that interferes with the surroundings, the state B is set to avoid the interference depending on the rotation position. It suffices to rotate while temporarily shifting to state C. For example, when interference occurs at a position of 0 to 10 degrees in the rotation angle, state B or state C is set in the range of 0 to 10 degrees and the state D is set in the range of 10 to 360 degrees. You can

  Next, an operation example including a moving operation of the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 667 and 668. 667 and 668 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 2. The movable body 2 can move similarly to the movable body 1.

  FIG. 668 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 2 is at the initial position (the movable portion 23 is at the initial position). The fact that the movable body 2 is located at the initial position is detected by the sensor 53B as described above.

  FIGS. 668 (b) to 668 (f) show the vertical position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 5 and the mode of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 668 (b) shows the case where the movable body 2 is located at the raised position. The raised position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position where the display area R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. When the movable body 2 is in the initial position or the raised position and the movable body 1 is in the initial position, the movable body 2 is positioned behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIGS. 664 (b) and 667 (b). However, it is difficult to see because it is covered with the movable body 1.

  When the movable body 2 is raised beyond the raised position, the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, and the movable body 2 falls freely. FIG. 667 (d) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and FIG. 667 (c) shows the case where the movable body 2 is located at the intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position, as described above, it is possible to select the case of free fall and the case of the control descent by the drive of the motor 53A, and enhance the effect by selectively using the two descents. You may be able to. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship where they interfere with each other in the depth direction. Therefore, when the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position described later and is not raised. Conversely, when raising the movable body 3, the movable body 2 is not positioned in the lowered position. Alternatively, the operation of the movable body 2 may be restricted by contact with the movable body 3.

  At the intermediate position, the movable body 2 partially overlaps the display area R1. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 may be entirely overlapped from the center of the display area R1 to the upper portion, and the player's attention may be attracted to the movable body 2, and the movable body 2 may display the display area R1. It may be possible to partially hide the display content of.

  FIG. 667 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position and the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is moved to the intermediate position (state C in FIG. 666), and FIG. 667 (f) shows The movable body 2 is located at the lowered position, and the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is moved to the unfolded state (state D in FIG. 666). It is possible for the movable body 2 to further rotate the movable portion 23, and the expansion / contraction operation of the movable portion 23 and the rotation operation of the pair of movable portions 23 as a whole do not affect the position of the movable body 2 as long as there is no interference with the surroundings. It is possible to carry out the movement regardless of the fact that the movable body 2 can be made conspicuous by executing these operations when the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position.

  FIGS. 668 (f) and (g) show the movable portion 23 in the accommodated state, and the entire rotation position of the movable portion 23 is different. In the aspect of FIG. 668 (f) and the aspect of FIG. 668 (g). There is a difference in the rotational position of 45 degrees.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 665 (f) and (g), it may be possible to enhance the effect by moving the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the lowered position and operating the movable portions.

  FIGS. 668 (a) and 668 (b) show an example of restriction release by the restriction unit 52. At the initial position, the movable body 2 is restricted from descending by the restriction of the restriction unit 52. FIG. 668 (a) shows a state in which the regulation is released at the initial position, in which the regulation member 52C is rotated and is not engaged with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. It becomes possible to rotate the gear 51C in the clockwise direction, and FIG. 668 (b) shows a state in which the gear 51C is rotated until the engaging portion 51b is located at the 0 o'clock position of the clock. As a result, the movable body 2 is slightly lowered from the initial position. By repeating a small amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation about the position of the gear 51C in FIG. 668 (b), it is possible to vibrate the movable body 2 vertically. FIG. 668 (c) to FIG. 668 (e) show the up / down position of the movable body 2 by the moving mechanism 5 and the mode of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. Here, the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is in the stored state, but it may be vibrated in the expanded state or the intermediate state.

  Similar to FIG. 668 (b), FIG. 668 (c) shows a state in which the gear 51C is in the rotational position in which the engaging portion 51b is located at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece. The movable body 2 and the display region R1 do not overlap each other, but are closer to each other as the lower end of the movable body 2 contacts the upper side of the display region R1 in a front view. FIG. 668 (d) shows the state of the rotating position in which the gear 51C is rotated clockwise and the engaging portion 51b is located at the 1 o'clock position of the clock. The movable body 1 slightly descends and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 668 (e) shows the state of the rotating position in which the gear 51C is rotated counterclockwise and the engaging portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the clock. The movable body 2 slightly moves up and is positioned again so as not to overlap the display area R1. When the engaging portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the timepiece, the engaging portion 51b contacts the side portion of the regulating member 52C to rotate the regulating member 52C, but is on the left side of the regulating portion 52d. Is not located in the control section 52d and is therefore not engaged with the restriction portion 52d. Therefore, when the engagement portion 51b is repeatedly rotated so that the engagement portion 51b reciprocates between the 11 o'clock position and the 1 o'clock position, it is not necessary to perform the regulation release operation of the regulation unit 52, and Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 52 may be performed.

<Example of combination operation of movable body 1 and movable body 2>
An example of the production operation in which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are combined will be described with reference to FIGS. 669 and 670. FIG. 669 (a) shows a case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are in the initial position and each movable portion is also in the initial position. In this state, all or part of the light-emitting elements 11d, 12d and 16b of the movable body 1 and all or part of the light-emitting elements L1 to L5 and 23c of the movable body 2 are colored as shown in FIG. It may be driven (lighted or blinked). There is a case where the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 can make the player feel a sense of unity by making the emission colors the same, and by making the emission colors different colors, the player can enjoy the liveliness of the production. It can be made to feel. Although the movable body 2 is hidden by the movable body 1, the light emitted from the light emitting element may be visible because it leaks from the surroundings of the movable body 1 or is partially transmitted through the movable body 1. is there.

  669 (b) to 669 (n) show an example in which the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position and sequentially operated in the deployed state → the stored state → the entire rotation → the deployed state → the stored state, and FIG. ), The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position. The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 669 (b) may be a free fall. After moving to the lowered position of FIG. 669 (b), the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may emit light continuously or for a predetermined time as in the case of FIG. 669 (a). When the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, the display device 208 may perform variable display of decorative symbols in a region different from the display region R1. The expanding / storing operation of the movable body 2 may be repeated. The rotating operation of the movable body 2 may be repeated. The expanding / storing operation of the movable body and the rotating operation may be performed sequentially or in parallel.

  670 (p) to 670 (r) show an example in which the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 are moved to the moved positions and returned to the initial position, and FIG. The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position. The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 670 (P) may be a free fall. As in the case of FIG. 669 (a), the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be made to emit light continuously or for a predetermined time even after the movement to the lowered position of FIG. 670 (p). When the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the display device 208 may perform variable display of decorative symbols in a region different from the display region R1.

  The mode of FIG. 670 (q) may notify the player that advantageous settings have been made. Some or all of the modes of FIGS. 669 (b) to 669 (n) may notify the player that advantageous settings have been made, and in the case of the mode of FIG. 670 (q). In comparison, the player may be informed that a more advantageous setting has been made, and the aspect of FIG. 670 (q) will inform the player that a more advantageous setting has been made. May be

<Movable body 3>
An example of the moving operation of the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 672 is a diagram showing an operation example of the movable body 3.

  FIG. 672 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is at the initial position. In this embodiment, the initial position is the lowest position in the vertical movement range of the movable body 3. When the movable body 3 is located at the initial position, the sensor 65 is configured to detect the detection piece 61e, and whether or not the movable body 3 is located at the initial position is controlled by the sensor 65. It is recognized from the detection result of.

  672 (c) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the raised position, and FIG. 672 (b) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the intermediate position between the initial position and the raised position. The raised position is the highest position in the vertical movement range of the movable body 3 in the present embodiment.

  The vertical movement of the movable body 3 is performed by rotating the arm members 61 and 62 by driving the motor 64b. Further, the lowering operation of the movable body 3 can be performed only by the urging force of the spring 66E without driving the motor 64b. While the movable body 3 moves from the initial position to the raised position, or while returning from the raised position to the initial position, the slide members 61b and 62b move from the outer ends of the grooves 30b and 30a to the inner ends of the grooves 30a to the outer ends of the grooves 30a. Then, it makes one round trip through the grooves 30b and 30a.

  FIGS. 673 (a) to 673 (c) show the elevation position of the movable body 3 and the mode of the movable body 3 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 673 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the initial position. Most of the movable body 3 is covered with the cover 203 and the like, and only a part of the upper side is exposed. The movable body 3 and the display region R1 do not overlap in the depth direction.

  Even if the display device 32 or the display device 34 performs the display at the initial position, it may not be clearly visible to the player. However, the display may be performed by the display device 32 or the display device 34, and when the cover 203 is made of a translucent member, the player can recognize the light emission of the display device 32 or the display device 34. In some cases, it may be possible to indicate to the player that the movable body 3 is hidden by the cover 203. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be different from the display when the movable body 3 is located at the intermediate position or the raised position, or may be the same display.

  FIG. 673 (b) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the intermediate position. More than half of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203. The upper part of the movable body 3 and the display region R1 overlap in the depth direction. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be performed at the intermediate position. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be different from the display when the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the raised position, or may be the same display.

  FIG. 673 (c) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the raised position. The movable body 3 is entirely exposed from the cover 203. Since the outer shape of the movable body 3 is circular, the movable body 3 may appear from the initial position to the rising position, and the movable body 3 may look like a sunrise. The movable body 3 entirely overlaps the display region R1 in the depth direction. When the movable body 3 is moved to the raised position, the display device 208 may perform variable display of decorative symbols in a region different from the display region R1.

  When the display device 32 or the display device 34 performs the display at the raised position, the display is easy to see as a whole, so that the effect of the display may be enhanced in some cases. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be different from the display when the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the intermediate position, or may be the same display. When the movable body 3 moves to the raised position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be positioned at the initial position in order to avoid interference.

  FIG. 674 is a diagram showing the movable body 3 in the raised position with the cover 31 removed, and shows a mode in which the display device 34 is rotating. The position of the display device 34 is different by about 30 degrees between FIG. 674 (a) and FIG. 674 (b). The display device 34 can function as a versa writer and can perform various displays.

<Operation when power is turned on>
As an initial operation when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the operations of the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the moving mechanisms 4 to 6 may be checked. The operation confirmation may be performed in the following order. By not operating fully from the beginning, by operating it little by little, it may be possible to avoid failures, and it may be easier to detect abnormalities.

  1. When it is detected that the movable body 3 has been raised by the moving mechanism 6 and has moved from the initial position, it is returned to the initial position.

  2. The display device 34 is rotated, and when the sensor in the rotary connector unit 37 detects that the display device 34 has completed one rotation, the display device 34 is stopped at the initial position.

  3. The moving mechanism 4 moves the movable body 1 to the lowered position.

  4. When the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved and it is detected that they have moved from the initial position, they are returned to the initial position.

  5. The moving mechanism 4 returns the movable body 1 to the initial position.

  6. The movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position by the moving mechanism 5.

  7. The movable part 23 of the movable body 2 is moved (deployment operation), and when it is detected that the movable part 23 has moved from the initial position, the movable part 23 is returned to the initial position.

  8. The movable mechanism 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.

  9. The moving mechanism 6 moves the movable body 3 to the raised position.

  10. The display device 34 is rotated multiple times.

  11. The moving mechanism 6 returns the movable body 3 to the initial position.

  12. The movable body 1 is raised by the moving mechanism 4 and the movable body 1 is allowed to fall freely.

  13. After moving the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 to the moving positions, they are returned to the initial positions.

  14. The moving mechanism 4 returns the movable body 1 to the initial position.

  15. The movable body 2 is raised by the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 is freely dropped.

  16. After the movable body 2 is expanded and rotated, the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position.

  17． The movable mechanism 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.

  When a movable body is additionally provided, the operation check may be performed in parallel with these operations 1 to 17.

<Summary of Embodiments>
A1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a game table including a driving unit (for example, 14), a first movable part (for example, 14), and a second movable part (for example, 11 or 12). Then, the drive unit is a unit capable of causing the first movable unit to execute the first operation (for example, FIG. 663), and the drive unit causes the second movable unit to perform the second operation. It is a means capable of executing an operation (for example, FIG. 663), and the first operation is different from the second operation (for example, FIG. 663).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a gaming table having a movable portion. In addition, it may be possible to show various operations to the player while suppressing the number of driving means to a small number, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  A2. In the gaming table (eg 100) of the above embodiment, the first operation is an operation in which the first movable part moves along a first orbit (eg OR3), and the second operation is The second movable portion is an operation of moving along a second trajectory (for example, OR1 or OR2), and the first trajectory is a trajectory different from the second trajectory. .

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player various movements having different trajectories.

  A3. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first trajectory is a trajectory including a linear trajectory (for example, OR3).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player a simple motion.

  A4. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second trajectory is a trajectory including a curved trajectory (for example, OR1 or OR2).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show a surprising motion to the player.

  A5. In the gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, at least a part of the operation period of the first operation is a period overlapping with at least a part of the operation period of the second operation. There is a feature.

  According to this configuration, there is a period in which the plurality of movable parts operate simultaneously, so it may be possible to show the player an interesting operation.

  A6. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the operation period of the first operation is the same period as the operation period of the second operation.

  According to this configuration, since the plurality of movable parts operate simultaneously, it may be possible to show the player an interesting operation.

  A7. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment includes a movable body (for example, 1), the movable body is a movable body including the first movable section, and the movable body is the second movable section. Characterized in that the movable body is a movable body including the driving means, and the movable body is a movable movable body.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show a variety of actions to the player.

  A8. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the movable body is a movable body including a third movable portion (for example, 12 or 11).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show a variety of actions to the player.

  A9. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the drive means is means capable of causing the third movable portion to execute the third operation, and the third operation is the first operation. The operation is different from the operation.

  According to this configuration, it is possible that the player can show various operations while suppressing the number of driving means to be small.

  A10. In the gaming machine (eg, 100) of the above embodiment, the third operation is an operation in which the third movable part moves along a third orbit (eg, OR3 or OR2), and the third orbit Is a trajectory that includes a curved trajectory.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show a surprising motion to the player.

  A11. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first movable section is a movable section whose position is different from the second movable section in the front-rear direction of the game table.

  According to this structure, it may be easy to secure the movable space of each movable portion.

  A12. In the game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, at least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the second movable part in the front-rear direction of the game table. Characterize.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable part, an operation with a sense of depth may be performed, and a part of the movable part may become invisible during the operation. , It may be possible to perform interesting actions.

  A13. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment includes a structure (for example, 16), and at least a part of the first movable portion overlaps at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table. In some cases (eg, FIG. 665), at least part of the second movable portion may overlap at least part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game table (eg, FIG. 665). And

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure a movable space for each movable portion, and an operation with a sense of depth may be performed.

  A14. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment includes a display unit (for example, 208) capable of displaying the first display, and at least a part of the first movable portion is the front-back direction of the game table, It may overlap with at least a part of the first display (for example, FIG. 665), and at least a part of the second movable part overlaps with at least a part of the first display in the front-rear direction of the gaming table. In some cases (eg, FIG. 665).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the operation of the movable portion and the effect of the display of the display unit.

  A15. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a pachinko machine.

  A16. The gaming table of the above embodiment is a slot machine.

  A17. The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The first trajectory may be a straight trajectory only. The first motion may be a motion including a translational motion. The first motion may be a translational motion only. The second trajectory may be a curved trajectory only. The second operation may be an operation including a turning operation. The second operation may be an operation of only a rotating operation. The first trajectory and the second trajectory may be trajectories including a common trajectory.

  The operation period of the first operation may not overlap with the operation period of the second operation. The operation period of the second operation may start after the operation period of the first operation starts. The operation period of the first operation may start after the operation period of the second operation starts. The operation period of the first operation may or may not overlap with the operation period of the third operation.

  The first movable part and the second movable part are part or all of a specific shape (for example, a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, a polygon, a character shape, a number shape, a face shape, a title, a mark) after operation. May be represented.

  The first display is a hold display, a hold icon, a variable icon, a notice icon, an icon area display, a decorative design, a fourth design, a mini decorative design, a notice display, a prefetch notice display, a tutorial display, a pseudo continuous display, a reach display. , Right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive games display, number of balls acquired, number of acquired balls display, volume adjustment display, light intensity It may be at least one of an adjustment display, a button press display, an error display, a ball removal display, a door opening display, and an abnormality occurrence display.

  The driving means may be means capable of simultaneously operating three or more movable parts.

  In the movable body, the width in the vertical direction after the movement of the first movable portion and the width of the second movable portion in the vertical direction after the movement may be longer or shorter than the width in the vertical direction before the movement. But it is okay. In the movable body, the width in the left-right direction after the movement may be shorter, longer, or the same as the width in the left-right direction before the movement of the first movable portion and the second movable portion. But it is okay.

  The movable body may include a driving unit different from the driving unit.

  The movable body may be a movable body that can move in at least one of a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-back direction. The movable body may be a movable body capable of performing at least one of a vibration operation and a reciprocating operation.

  Another movable body (for example, 2) may be provided, and at least a part of the first movable section may overlap at least a part of the other movable body in the front-rear direction. The part may overlap at least a part of the other movable body in the front-rear direction. The other movable body may be a movable body that is movable in at least one of a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-back direction.

  The movable body (for example, 1) may include the structure (for example, 16). A part of the first movable portion may always overlap with the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table. In the first state of the second movable body, a part of the second movable portion may overlap with the structural body, and in the second state of the second movable body, the second movable body The other part of the movable part may overlap the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table.

  The first movable portion may include one or a plurality of first light emitting means (for example, 14f). The second movable part may include one or a plurality of second light emitting means (for example, 11d or 12d). The third movable part may include one or more third light emitting means (for example, 12d or 11d). The structure may include one or more light emitting means (eg 16b).

  The first light emitting means may overlap the structure during the operation of the first movable portion. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table. The second light emitting means may overlap at least one of the structure and the first movable portion during operation of the second movable portion. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table. The third light emitting means may overlap at least one of the structure and the first movable portion during the operation of the third movable portion. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table.

  The first movable part may have a first non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 14h), and a part of the first light emitting means is the first non-transmissive part in the front-back direction of the game table. It may be located behind the section. The second movable part may have a second non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 11f or 12f), and a part of the second light emitting means is provided in the front-rear direction of the game table. It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion. The third movable part may have a third non-transmissive part (for example, a part of 12f or 11f), and a part of the third light emitting means is arranged in the front-rear direction of the game table. It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion.

  The movable body may be a triangular-shaped movable body (for example, FIG. 663 (c)). A movable body (eg, 2) different from the triangular-shaped movable body may be provided, and the movable body may be a deployable movable body (eg, FIG. 666). When viewed from the front, there may be a case where the contour of a part of the unfolding movable object is integrally seen as a tangent to the contour of a part of the triangular forming movable object. The movable part may be an arm part. The arm portion of the triangular-shaped movable object in the initial position may overlap a part of the arm portion of the deployed movable object in the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table. The arm part of the triangular-shaped movable object in the initial position may not overlap with another part of the arm part of the deployable movable object in the initial position. The non-overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table. The arm portion of the triangular-shaped movable object in the initial position may overlap all the arm portions of the deployable movable object in the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-back direction of the game table.

  The time taken to complete the triangle of the triangle forming accessory may be faster, slower, or the same as the time taken to complete the unfolding operation of the unfoldable movable object. The time for the triangular forming accessory to drop from the initial position to the maximum moving position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the deployable movable object to drop from the initial position to the maximum moving position by driving the motor, It may be late or the same. The time for the triangular forming accessory to rise from the maximum moving position to the initial position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the deployable movable object to rise from the maximum moving position to the initial position by driving the motor, It may be late or the same. In a state in which the triangular formation movable object overlaps the expansion movable object, the expansion movable object may perform the light emission effect while the triangular formation movable object is performing the light emission effect, and a part of the light emission mode is common. May be. At this time, only some LEDs of the deployable movable object may emit light, and the other LEDs may not emit light. The overlapped state may be a state in which the game table is overlapped in the front-rear direction. The unfolded movable object may perform the light emission effect while the triangular formation movable object is performing the light emission effect and the vibration effect.

  B1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above-described embodiment is a game table including a movable body (for example, 1) and a driving unit (for example, 43A) capable of operating the movable body. It is characterized in that a regulation means (for example, 42) capable of executing regulation is provided, and the regulation means is a means different from the drive means.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a gaming table that is characterized by the regulation of the operation of the movable body. In addition, it may be possible to prevent an unintended operation of the movable body and prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, if necessary, the restriction may be lifted to allow operation.

  B2. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the regulation means is means capable of executing the regulation release (for example, FIG. 665 (a)).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to operate the movable body that has been restricted.

  B3. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above-mentioned embodiment is characterized in that the regulation means is means capable of regulating the movement of the movable body in the first direction.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent an unintended operation of the movable body in the first direction.

  B4. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first direction is downward.

  According to this configuration, the operation in the direction in which gravity is applied may be restricted in some cases.

  B5. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above-mentioned embodiment is characterized in that the movable body is a movable body capable of executing an operation in a second direction (for example, an upward direction) during execution of the regulation by the regulation means. To do.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to perform only the necessary regulation without completely regulating the operation of the movable body.

  B6. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the movable body is a movable body capable of executing the operation in the first direction after executing the operation in the second direction.

  According to this configuration, the operation in the first direction may be able to be performed by intervening the operation in the second direction even during the execution of the restriction by the restriction unit.

B7. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment includes a gear (for example, 41C) that can be driven by the driving unit, and the movable body is a movable body that may operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear, The restriction means is a means capable of executing restriction on the operating range of the gear,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to this configuration, the operation may be restricted with a relatively simple configuration.

  B8. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above-mentioned embodiment is characterized in that the regulation means is means provided with another driving means (for example, 42A) different from the driving means.

  According to this structure, the regulation means may be driven independently.

  B9. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the other driving means is a solenoid, and the solenoid is in a non-excited state during execution of the regulation by the regulating means, and the regulation by the regulating means is performed. The solenoid is in an energized state during the release.

  According to this configuration, power consumption may be reduced in some cases.

  B10. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation during execution of the release.

  According to this configuration, the first operation may be able to be executed by the cancellation.

  B11. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first operation is a vibration operation.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

  B12. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a pachinko machine.

B13. The gaming table of the above embodiment is a slot machine,
It is characterized by the following.

  B14. The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The movable body may be a movable body that may not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear. The movable body may be a movable body capable of performing an operation in the first direction when the movable body does not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear.

  When the solenoid is de-energized, the rotation of the gear may be applied to the regulating means. When the rotation direction of the gear is the first direction, the regulation member of the regulation means is maintained at the regulation position, and when the rotation direction of the gear is the second direction, the regulation member is displaced from the regulation position to the non-regulation position. Good.

  A cover (for example, 40A) that covers the regulation means may be provided, and one or a plurality of openings (for example, 40a) may be formed in the cover, and the regulation means can be contacted from the outside through the opening. Good.

  Another movable body (for example, 2) may be provided, and the regulation means (for example, 52) may be provided for the other movable body.

  Two or three or more regulating means may be provided for the movable body, and the regulation range of the operation of the movable body by each regulating means may be different or the same.

  The regulation means may be composed of another movable body (for example, 3), and regulates an operation range of the movable body by contacting a part of the movable body with a part of the other movable body. May be.

  C1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a game table provided with an operable movable body (for example, 2), and the movable body has a first light emitting means (for example, L1 or L2). And the movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (for example, 23), and the first light emitting unit is configured such that in the first state (for example, state B in FIG. 666), The first light emitting means is a means that does not overlap with the movable part, and the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the first movable part in the second state (for example, state D in FIG. 666).

  According to this structure, it may be possible to provide a game table having a movable body. In addition, the appearance of the light emitting means can be changed depending on the state, which may improve the interest of the player.

  C2. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first light emitting means is means for overlapping with the first movable portion in an initial state (for example, state A of FIG. 666). .

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means can be further changed depending on the state.

  C3. In the gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above-described embodiment, the first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, FIG. 666), It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means may be continuously changed depending on the state.

  C4. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first light emitting means is means capable of emitting light in the second state.

  According to this structure, even if it overlaps with the first movable portion, it may be possible to produce an effect by the light of the first light emitting means.

  C5. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L3), and the second light emitting means, in the first state, is the first light emitting means. The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap with the one movable part (for example, the state B in FIG. 666), and a means that does not overlap with the first movable part in the second state (for example, the state B in FIG. 666). State D), which is characterized.

  According to this configuration, the player's interest may be improved by the light emitting means overlapping the first movable portion and the light emitting means not overlapping the first movable portion.

  C6. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means (for example, L2 or L1), and the movable body has a second movable portion (for example, 23). The third light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the second movable portion in the first state (for example, state B in FIG. 666), and the third light emitting means is In the second state, it is a means that overlaps with the second movable portion (for example, state D in FIG. 666).

  According to this configuration, the way the light emitting means is shown can be changed depending on the state, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.

  C7. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the first movable portion is a movable portion having a light emitting substrate (for example, 23b), and the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate in an initial state. It is a means.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means may be changed depending on the state.

  C8. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the light emitting substrate in the second state.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means may be changed depending on the state.

  C9. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the first movable portion is a movable portion having a cover (for example, 23e), and the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover in the initial state. There is a feature.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means may be changed depending on the state.

  C10. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover in the second state.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the light emitting means may be changed depending on the state.

  C11. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a pachinko machine.

  C12. The gaming table of the above embodiment is a slot machine.

  C13. The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The first movable portion may be a movable portion capable of executing the first operation while transitioning from the initial state to the second state. The second movable section may be a movable section capable of executing a second operation while transitioning from the initial state to the second state. The first movement may include a rotation movement or a translation movement. The first operation may include a deployment operation. The second movement may include a rotation movement or a translation movement. The second operation may include a deployment operation.

  The position of the first light emitting means may be different or the same in the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The position of the second light emitting means may be the same as or different from the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The position of the third light emitting means may be different or the same in the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The second light emitting unit may be a unit that overlaps with the first movable unit or the second movable unit in the initial state.

  The first light emitting means has an overlap with the movable part, with / without overlap, without / without overlap, with / without overlap, and without overlap, in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state. There may be any one of: No Yes, Overlap Yes No No, Overlap No Yes Yes, Overlap Yes No Yes, Overlap No Yes Yes No.

  The second light emitting means has an overlap with the movable part, with or without overlap, without, with overlap, with and without overlap, in the order of initial state, first state, and second state. There may be any one of: No Yes, Overlap Yes No No, Overlap No Yes Yes, Overlap Yes No Yes, Overlap No Yes Yes No.

  The third light emitting means has an overlap with the movable part, with or without overlap, without and with overlap, with or without overlap, in order of an initial state, a first state, and a second state. There may be any one of: No Yes, Overlap Yes No No, Overlap No Yes Yes, Overlap Yes No Yes, Overlap No Yes Yes No.

  A cover (for example, 22C) having a non-transmissive portion may be provided in front of the first light emitting means.

  The longest second width of the end portion of the first movable portion and the end portion of the second movable portion in the second state is the end portion of the first movable portion in the first state. The width may be longer or shorter than the longest first width of the end portion of the second movable portion.

  The movable region of the movable body may have a shorter distance or a longer distance from the center of the movable body in the downward direction than in the lateral direction from the center of the movable body.

  The movable body is a movable body having a rotating portion (for example, 21A), the rotating portion may be a rotating portion having the first movable portion and the second movable portion, and the rotating portion is Alternatively, the rotating unit may be rotatable while repeating the first state and the second state.

  When the first movable part and the second movable part are located above and below and in the second state, they contact another structure (for example, another movable body or a center accessory). It may be a positional relationship. Further, the positional relationship may be such that they are in contact with each other when they are located on the left and right.

  D1. The game table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a game table including an operable movable body (for example, 3), and the movable body is a movable body having a base portion (for example, 30). The body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L11), the movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L12, L13), and the first light emitting means is The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with respect to the base portion, and the second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with respect to the base portion. .

  According to this structure, it may be possible to provide a game table having a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to make the appearances of the plurality of light emitting means different, which may improve the interest of the player.

  D2. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the movable body is a movable body having a cover body (for example, 31), and the first light emitting means can change the relative position with respect to the cover body. It is an impossible means, and the second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with respect to the cover body.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the appearances of the plurality of light emitting means different, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  D3. In the gaming table (100, for example) of the above embodiment, the cover body is a cover body that overlaps with the first light emitting means, and the cover body is a cover body that overlaps with the second light emitting means. Characterize.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to change the way the light emitting means is shown through the cover body.

  D4. In the gaming table (eg 100) of the above embodiment, the movable body is a movable body having a display means (eg 34), and the display means is a means including the second light emitting means. And

  According to this configuration, it is possible that the display means can be displayed differently.

  D5. The gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the display means is means including the first light emitting means.

  According to this configuration, it is possible that the display means can be displayed differently.

  D6. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second light emitting means is a means that cannot change the relative position to the first light emitting means.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the plurality of light emitting units may be different.

  D7. In the gaming table (100, for example) of the above-described embodiment, the display means is a means for executing display when the movable body is located at a position different from the initial position (for example, FIGS. 672 (b) and (c)). It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the display unit may be used as a notification unit of internal information.

  D8. The game table (for example, 100) of the above-mentioned embodiment is characterized in that the display means is a means capable of executing display in a state where the movable body is located at the initial position.

  According to this configuration, the display means may be used as a means for suggesting internal information.

  D9. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the cover body is a cover body having a first portion (for example, 31a), and the movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means. The third light emitting means is a means incapable of changing the relative position with respect to the cover body, the first portion is a portion overlapping the third light emitting means, the first portion Is an opaque part at least in part.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the plurality of light emitting units may be different.

  D10. In the gaming table (for example, 100) of the above embodiment, the cover body is a cover body having a second portion (for example, 31b), and the second portion is a portion that overlaps with the second light emitting means. The second part is a transparent part.

  According to this configuration, the appearance of the plurality of light emitting units may be different.

  D11. The gaming machine (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is a pachinko machine.

  D12. The gaming table of the above embodiment is a slot machine.

  D12. The following configuration can also be adopted.

  The movable body may include a substrate (for example, 34), the substrate may be a substrate having the first light emitting means, and the substrate may be a substrate having the second light emitting means. The first light emitting means may be a means located at the center of the substrate. The substrate may be a rotatable substrate. The first light emitting unit may be a unit located at the center of rotation of the substrate. The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying by rotating the substrate.

  The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting units are arranged in at least one row (for example, LA). The second light emitting means may be arranged on a straight line or a curved line. The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting means are arranged side by side in two or more rows, and the second light emitting means in adjacent rows do not overlap each other when the substrates rotate. (For example, FIG. 671 (b)). The color of the resist (solder resist) on the substrate may be black. The color of the silk screen printed on the substrate may be black.

  The rotation axis (eg, AX) of the board may be at least one of the front-back direction, the up-down direction, and the left-right direction of the game table.

  The third light emitting means may be a means that may be located on an extension of the row of the plurality of second light emitting means (for example, FIGS. 671 (b) (c)).

  The opaque portion may be displayed with any of letters, numbers, marks, and icons.

  The first portion may have a lens shape.

  The second light emitting means (for example, L13) may be a means capable of moving to the rear of the first portion. The second light emitting means may be a means capable of moving to the rear of the lens-shaped portion of the first portion.

<Embodiment C>
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to an embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 676. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 677 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 676 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, which is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which has an opening that opens upward on the upper rear surface of the pachinko machine 100. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, and a launch board constituting a launch controller 630 for performing control processing relating to launch of a game ball. A launch board case 176 accommodating 74, a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 678 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from the upper side of the rendering device 206 to the right side, and the game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper portion of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 has a first flow-down path on the left side of the production device 206 as a decoration member as a path along which a shot game ball flows down, and a decoration member as a path along which a shot game ball flows down. And a second flow-down path on the right side. Hereinafter, hitting a game ball on the first flow-down path may be referred to as “left hitting”, and hitting a game ball on the second flow-down path may be called “right hitting”.

  In the production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantially center, a production movable body 224 is arranged in the upper portion thereof, and a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol display device 212 are arranged in the lower portion thereof. A second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy medium lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", a first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later. In FIG. 678, the effect movable body 224 is at an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the initial position, the effect movable body 224 cannot be visually recognized by the player. ing. The production movable body 224 is moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). You can do it. The configuration and drive system of the production movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the respective display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within, for example, a horizontally long rectangular display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first general-purpose figure starting opening 227, a second general-purpose figure starting opening 229, and a special figure 1 starting opening 230, The special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234 are arranged.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a winning in the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226 is won. In this case, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental ball”). There is) and is included.

  The first universal figure starting port 227 and the second universal figure starting port 229 are configured by devices called gates and through chuckers for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first universal figure starting port 227 is arranged in the first flow-down path on the left side of the rendering device 206, and the second universal path is on the second flow-down path on the right side of the rendering device 206. A starting port 229 is arranged. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be passed to the first universal figure starting port 227 by left-handing, and the game ball can be passed to the second universal figure starting port 229 by right-handing. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, a ball that has passed through the first universal opening 227 or the second universal opening 229 will not be discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first universal figure starting port 227 or the second universal figure starting port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210. . Further, when the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first universal figure starting port 227 during a period other than the predetermined period (for example, during the electric power support state, during the super reach effect execution, during the big hit game) The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the universal symbol decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 starting port 230 is provided in the lower center part of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. In addition, the ball that has entered the starting port 230 of Toku-zu 1 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the second universal figure starting port 229. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for the ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed, and the universal figure display device 210 is won. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. In addition, the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Since the second universal figure starting port 229 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 therebelow are in the second downflow route on the right side of the rendering device 206, the first downflow route on the left side of the rendering device 206 is provided. The game ball that has advanced to 2 does not pass through the second universal figure starting port 229 or enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. Further, since the first universal figure starting port 229 and the special figure 1 starting port 230 are in the first downflow route on the left side of the rendering device 206, the second downflow route on the right side of the rendering device 206 is provided. The advanced game ball does not pass through the first universal map starting port 227 or enter the special map 1 starting port 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the special figure 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. While the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. In this case, the door member 234a is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146 and The launch mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. (Special drawing 1 starting opening 230, special drawing 2 starting opening 232), or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or first general drawing starting opening 227, second general drawing starting opening 229 To reach the outlet 240 only by passing through.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the rendering movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a nail or the like of the game board 200 can roll, and the passed ball is moved to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 679. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality of program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received). Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. Symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined pattern display device, for example A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the universal figure display device 210 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the high accuracy middle lamp 222. Etc.) and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. The drive circuit 334 for connecting the drive circuit is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends a command etc. to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator receiver 414 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect movable body 224, and a movable object 703 described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, a production movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position and initial position of the production movable body 224 and the movable object 703, and a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136. A predetermined detection sensor, for example, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the production movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various production data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. . A drive circuit for controlling the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 680, the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general drawing display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment stop and display. Also, the types of general drawings will be described. FIG. 680 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started under the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the fact that the ball has entered the special opening 2 starting opening 232. 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are all lit and one central segment is repeatedly lit. . These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 After a lapse of time, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is started after starting "variable display of special figure 2". Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display according to the present embodiment, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol variable display. As will be described later, the variable display of symbols may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 680 (a), ten types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variable display. In FIG. 680 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on. “Special drawing A” and “Special drawing B” are 15 round (15R) special jackpot designs, and “Special drawing C” and “Special drawing D” are 15R jackpot designs. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the special figure variation game after the jackpot game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, both shift to an electric power support state (sometimes called a time saving state). Although the electric support state will be described later in detail, a state of transitioning to the electric support state is called a high probability state of a normal figure, and a state of not transitioning to the low power state of a support is called a low probability state of a normal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbols "Special map A" and "Special map B" are special map high probability general figure high probability states, and the 15R jackpot patterns "Special map C" and "Special map D" are Figure Low probability General figure High probability state. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", "special drawing C", and "special drawing D" are symbols in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively large.

  "Special drawing E" is a 2R jackpot design and is called sudden change. Sudden probability changes, after the big hit game ends, becomes the special figure high probability general figure high probability state like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called hidden probability variation. Hidden probability changes to special figure high probability general figure low probability state (latent probability change state) after the big hit game ends. The hidden probability change does not shift to the electric power support state after the jackpot game is over.

  "Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol. After the small hit game is finished, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state (which may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state) is entered. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as "special drawing E" and "special drawing F" (two times in this embodiment).

  In addition, "special figure I" is the first off symbol, "special figure J" is the second off symbol, and the degree of advantage for the player is relatively small.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a lottery to determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and then, based on the result of the hit / nozzle determination, after the symbol variation display, “special figure A”. It is configured to determine which of the "special figure J" to be stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display devices 212 and 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, a special figure probability change state). The presence / absence of electricity and the presence / absence of electrical support) are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, for example, in addition to the determination of the stop symbol. Further, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game when the stop symbol is determined, for example, and determines the profit state after the big hit game by lottery, such as the stop symbol, the number of rounds and The profit status may be appropriately associated with each other.

  FIG. 680 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

  Then, when notifying the 15R big hit and the 15R special big hit, a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration" (2-decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a pattern combination in which the same odd-numbered three decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") Stop display.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called "special figure F" hidden probability change and the small hit of "special figure G" and "special figure H", "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped. indicate. In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called a sudden change of "special drawing E", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of notifying the deviation of "special drawing I" and "special drawing J", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 680 (b) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined, but the player may not know which decorative symbol combination is which jackpot.

  FIG. 680 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. In the stop display mode of the universal figure of the present embodiment, there are three types of "universal figure A" which is a winning symbol 1, "general symbol B" which is a winning symbol 2, and "general symbol C" which is a deviating symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to hit in the universal figure variation game and determination of the stop symbol are performed by lottery of software random numbers. For example, the hit patterns 1 and 2 are different in the opening pattern of the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric Chu). Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor detects that the sphere has passed through the first universal figure starting port 227 or the second universal figure starting port 229, the universal figure display device 210 causes all seven segments to light up. The "variable display of the general map" is displayed by repeating the lighting of one segment in the center. And, in case of notifying the winning of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure A" or "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of notifying that the universal figure fluctuation game is out, "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 680 (c), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  FIG. 680 (d) shows an example of a decorative design for a normal design. There are three types of decorative patterns for ordinary patterns of the present embodiment, "Public decoration 1", "Public decoration 2", and "Public decoration 3". The universal figure decoration 1 has a pattern mode that evokes, for example, "○", the universal figure decoration 2 has a pattern mode that evokes "◎", and the universal figure decoration 3 has, for example, "x". It has a pattern mode that brings to mind. On the condition that the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first universal figure starting port 227 except for a predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, during the super reach effect execution, during the big hit game), On the decorative pattern display device 208, a general / decorative decorative pattern changing game for switching the display in the order of “universal / universal decoration 1” → “general / universal decoration 2” → “general / universal decoration 3” is performed with a predetermined probability.

  When notifying the hit of "Public figure A", the "Public figure decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the hit of "Public figure B", the "Public figure decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, When notifying that the "universal figure C" is out, the "universal figure decoration 3" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 681. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 681 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314 Operation permission, initial value setting, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (millisecond) as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply which the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When the voltage is less than (9V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) Outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub-control unit 400), setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not the power is restored to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off). If the state is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is When it is set to the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 679. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, which is subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value update processing, the initial value generation for generating the initial value of the special figure determination random number counter for generating the random number for the special figure determination used in the lottery for determining the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game Update the random number counter for. In addition, the random number counter for generating an initial value for generating the initial value of the universal figure winning random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value used for determining whether or not the universal figure variation game is won is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determination random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a universal figure winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two of these initial value generating random number counters are updated. For example, if the range of possible values for the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is added. Remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generating random number counter. The other initial value generating random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 682. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area. In step S203 subsequent to step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (processing abnormality is not detected). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 679 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that there is), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the first general figure starting opening 227 or It is determined that the second universal map starting port 229 has been passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 227, 229 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the initial value generation random number of the main control unit main process of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order to generate the initial value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure determination random value used in the symbol determination lottery of the universal figure The random number counter for initial value generation is updated. For example, if the range of possible numeric values for the universal figure determination random number is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for universal figure determination, and the acquired value is 1 Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, a special figure determining random number counter for generating a special figure determining random number used by the main control unit 300, and a general figure generating a general figure winning random number value. The random number counter for winning and the random number counter for determining public figure that generates a random number for determining universal figure are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a random number value for special figure determination is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from a random number counter for special figure determination provided in the RAM 308 to generate a random number value for special figure determination. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining special figure. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter makes one round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. Then, the special figure determination random number counter is set. For example, the result obtained by acquiring a value from the special figure determination random value counter that varies in the numerical range of 0 to 99 and adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special figure determination, and is stored in the random number counter for special figure determination. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for determining a special figure has made one round next while being set. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for determining a special figure has made one round, an initial value storage for determining that the universal figure winning random number counter has made one round is stored. The area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random value counter may be provided with a counter for obtaining the random value for special figure 1 and a counter for obtaining the random value for special figure 2, or the same counter. May be used.

  Further, for example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 65535, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and the acquired value is set to 1 Is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to. For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in the numerical range of 0 to 65535 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation, and the general-purpose winning random number value generation is performed. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has made one round next time.

  Further, for example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for general figure determination is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value for general figure determination, and the acquired value is acquired. 1 is added to and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Further, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area is acquired. Set to. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for universal figure determination that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the previously set initial value stored, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation that corresponds to the random number counter for random number generation for general figure determination The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating a random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating a universal figure determination random value has made one round. I'll do it.

  In step S211, which is subsequent to step S209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the random number counter for determining the special figure variation time for generating the random number value for determining the special figure variation time for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game or its initial value is updated. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game is, for example, 20000 ms in the universal figure low probability state, and 1000 ms in the universal figure high probability state. Pachinko machine 100 may determine the variation time of the universal figure variation game by lottery using a predetermined table, and generate a random number value for determining the universal figure variation time for determining the symbol variation time in the universal figure variation game. The value of the random number counter for determining the universal figure fluctuation time or its initial value may be updated.

  In step S213 subsequent to step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, a universal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for varying / stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, and a time for varying / stopping the symbol on the special figure 1 display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change / stop display of symbols on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Various timers including a closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, which is subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when the prize holes 226, 234 and the starting holes 230, 232, 227, 229 are won, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each prize hole or for each starting hole. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, which is subsequent to step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the first universal figure starting port 227, the second universal figure starting port 229, and the variable winning port 234. . Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number is 4), a random number value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) A big hit determination random number value generated by performing a predetermined process on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230 of 318 is provided and provided in the RAM 308. The random number for special figure determination is acquired from the random number counter for determining special figure and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 random number value storage area random number value and special figure determination random value group (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") The same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the FIG. 1 reservation number storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 random value group with the highest holding order (first and stored in the oldest) is stored. At the same time as the deletion, the processing is performed so that the reservation order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 random number values is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of special figure 1 reserved numbers increases by one, a new special figure 1 random number value group data is added to the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value with the lowest (last) reservation order. Written.

  If there is a winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the holding number is 4), a random value generation circuit A big hit determination random number value generated by performing a predetermined process on the value stored in the internal counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of 318, and a big hit time special value provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random number value for jackpot is acquired from the figure determination random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 Random value for jackpot determination and special value determination for big hit in the random number storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random number set" or "special figure 2 start information") Are stored as many as the number of special figure 2 reservations stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number storage area, each time the number of special figure 2 holding decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 random number set with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. It is processed so that the reservation order of the data of the group is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 reservations is increased by one, a new set of special figure 2 random number values is written in the next reservation order of the data of the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest reservation order.

  When there is a prize in the first universal figure starting port 227 or the second universal figure starting port 229, and when the corresponding universal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the universal figure winning random number counter is set to a value. It is acquired as a figure winning random value and stored in the corresponding universal figure random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 subsequent to step S219, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED configuring the universal figure display device 210 is repeatedly lit and turned off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the first universal figure hit flag is on, the hit occurs. When the second universal symbol hit flag is on so that the symbol 1 (universal symbol A) is displayed, the hit symbol 2 (general symbol B) is displayed when the flare flag is on The 7-segment LED constituting the universal figure display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in the display mode of the out-of-drawing pattern (universal figure C). The 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in the display mode. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal-drawing stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the public figure display device 210 confirms and displays any one of the winning symbol 1 (general symbol A), the winning symbol 2 (FIG. 680 universal symbol B), and the deviating symbol (general symbol C). I do. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, either the first universal figure hit flag or the second universal figure hit flag is turned on based on the universal figure determination result. When the first and second universal figure hit flags are on, the universal figure state update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the process, the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the solenoid for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 (part of various solenoids 332) is set for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). ), A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out of alignment, the universal figure per hit flag is turned off, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is off, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the universal figure stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the number of the general figure fluctuation game that is held. If is 1 or more, whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the universal figure random number storage area described above. The hit judgment (judgment of the universal figure variation game) to be decided is performed. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the symbol is determined by a random number lottery based on the random number value for universal figure determination stored in the random value storage area. When the universal figure determination result is a hit symbol 1, the first universal symbol hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and when the universal figure determination result is a hit symbol 2, the second universal symbol provided in the RAM 308. Set the hit flag to on. If the result of the hit determination is out of alignment, the universal out-of-range flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation time of the universal symbol in the high probability state of the regular symbol is 1000 ms, and the symbol variation time of the regular symbol in the low probability state of the regular symbol is 20000 ms. When the symbol variation time of the public figure is determined by lottery, the value of the random number counter for the universal figure fluctuation time determination that generates the random number value for the universal figure fluctuation time determination is acquired as the random number value for the universal figure fluctuation time determination, Based on the obtained random number for determining the universal figure fluctuation time, one of the plurality of variation times is selected for displaying the regular figure on the universal figure display device 210 in a variable manner, and this variation display time is changed to the universal figure variation display time. Is stored in the universal figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following plural (nine in this example) processing according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is used. Re-store it in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 678 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from left to right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Further, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the normal figure. Probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A or special figure B and 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. 680 (a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is When it is on, the special figure C or special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on, the universal figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure F, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on , If the first disengagement flag is on, When the second deviation flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure J is in each mode, and the special area 2 is set in the RAM 308. Set to indicate that the display is stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure A, special figure B), 15R big hit pattern (special figure C, special figure D), sudden probability variation design (special figure E) , Hidden probability variation pattern (special figure F), first small hit pattern (special figure G), second small hit pattern (special figure H), first off symbol (special figure I), and first off symbol (special figure) J) Any one symbol is confirmed and displayed. After that, the information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number of electric support (details described later) storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. In addition, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the design for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit is displayed. In order to do so, information indicating the winning effect production period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is held in the open state by the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. At the same time as outputting the signal, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) Information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308, while outputting a signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state to the solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. To set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while displaying the image informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the electric support frequency is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 (for example, 100 times), and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the number of power support times is set in the power support frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned on. The time saving state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of universal figure (normal figure probability change). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric Chu extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The control state based on the normal figure change, the short figure change, and the electric chute spread is collectively called the electric support (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, the control state that shortens the variation time of the special figure variation game is also called a time saving state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of special game 2 variable games to be held is greater than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game to be held are not performed. The notification of the jackpot determination result of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the special lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the start opening 230 shown in FIG. In the case of special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), a special figure 2 random value group (starting information) is set from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Obtained and determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit or not by using a determination table (not shown), and a time from the start of the variable display of special figure 2 to the stop display The symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special figure 2 are determined. After the earliest set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number storage area is taken out, the storage of the special figure 2 random number set in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 Decrement the number of reservations. At this time, the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, The above-mentioned determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in this temporary area.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. Further, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data contains the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure relation. Includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, includes the value of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a prize effect command and an end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a big hit round number specification command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. There is. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure probability related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related stored in the RAM 308 in the command data Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game that are held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. Is set. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, or the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 683. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, which is subsequent to step S309, if it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416.

  In step S315 following step S313, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S315, if the effect data read out in step S309 contains an instruction to effect movable body 224, this instruction is output to drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 subsequent to step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle. In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400, the process of updating other random numbers for performance is performed, and the like.

  Next, the structure and operation of the production movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 684 to 704. FIG. 684 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front like FIG. 678. 684, the production movable body 224 descends from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display screen front plane in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. It shows the state of being stopped inside.

  The production movable body 224 has, for example, a shape imitating a sword, and with respect to the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the blade faces upward and the tip of the sword is located on the right side and the left side. The handle of the sword is located at. The production movable body 224 can move up and down in the rectangular opening frame while maintaining this arrangement relationship. In addition, the effect movable member 224 moves from the upper side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame at the initial position, and becomes invisible. It should be noted that, at the maximum descending position, the effect movable body 224 may be moved from the lower side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame so that it cannot be visually recognized.

  Similar to FIG. 684, FIG. 685 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. FIG. 685 shows a state in which the base 701 of the production movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 684, and the movable object 703 simulating a blade is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the center of the base 701 as the center of rotation. Is shown.

  Next, the structure of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 686 and 687. In the following description, the side closer to the player when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in an island facility or the like of a game store is referred to as “front” (front, front, front end, etc.), and vice versa is “rear” (rear). , Rear side, rear end, etc.), and vertically upward as seen from the player is “upper” (upper, upper side, upper end, etc.), and vice versa is “lower” (lower side, lower side, lower end, etc.) From the perspective of a person, the horizontal left is "left" (left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa is "right" (right, right, right end, etc.). FIG. 686 is an external perspective view of movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side. FIG. 687 is an external perspective view of movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 686 (a) and FIG. 687 (a) show the case where the production movable body 224 is at the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, a right drive system base 713 and a left drive system base 712 having elongated metal plates are made to face each other in the left-right direction, and an upper end of the right drive system base 713 and an upper end of the left drive system base 712 are elongated metal plate connecting members. 710, and the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 made of an elongated metal plate to be assembled in a rectangular frame shape.

  A guide member 717 having an elongated cylindrical metal rod is fixed to the right drive system base 713 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor mr is arranged at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is meshed with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is arranged at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt vr is stretched over the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is spanned in parallel with the extending direction of the guide member 717.

  A guided member 721 is attached slidably around the cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr to move the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr can be guided by the guide member 717 and moved vertically along the columnar member of the guide member 717. . A movable body right end holding member (not shown) that holds the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

  A guide member 715 having an elongated cylindrical metal rod is fixed to the left drive system base 712 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor ml is arranged at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is meshed with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is arranged on the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is stretched over the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt vl is stretched in parallel with the extending direction of the guide member 715.

  A guided member 719 is slidably mounted around the cylindrical metal rod of the guide member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt vl. By driving the motor ml to move the belt vl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl is guided by the guide member 715 and can be moved vertically along the columnar member of the guide member 715. . A movable body left end holding member (not shown) that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

  A motor 723 that rotates the movable object 703 around the center of the base 701 is fixed to the right end of the effect movable body 224. FIGS. 686 (b) and 687 (b) show a state in which the effect drive body 224 is translated in parallel downward from the initial position by a predetermined distance in cooperation with the right drive system and the left drive system in synchronization. There is. 686 (c) and FIG. 687 (c), the movable object 703 is rotationally moved in a state where the base 701 of the production movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIGS. 686 (b) and 687 (b). It shows the state.

  FIG. 688 is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as seen from the rear side. Although illustration is omitted, the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 is also provided with a similar configuration. The guided member 719, which is fixed to the belt vl and slidably holds the guide member 715, is provided with a box-shaped region, and the box-shaped region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719. The claw portion 725 that can project in a predetermined direction by a predetermined distance is housed. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a wedge shape. In addition, an upper portion of the tip of the claw portion 725 is formed with an inclined surface that can contact a pin 729 described later. A spring 723 that contacts the rear end of the claw portion 725 is arranged in the box-shaped region. The claw portion 725 is constantly biased in the protruding direction by the action of the spring 723. The box-shaped region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed by the lid member 727.

  A movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably attached to the guide member 715 below the guided member 719. The movable body left end holding member 731 is provided with a claw portion 731a having a wedge-shaped tip that is engageable with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719.

  When the movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is located at the lowermost end of the guide member 715, the motor ml is rotated in one predetermined direction to move the belt vl, and the guided object is guided. The member 719 descends and the claw 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged with each other. Accordingly, the movable body left end holding member 731 can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction to move the belt vl to raise the guided member 719 after the engagement is completed, the movable member left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 also rises. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, the effect movable body 224 located at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

  A pin 729 is projectingly fixed at a position above the left drive system base 712 and above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 by a predetermined distance, and at a position where the pin 729 of the guided member 719 can come into contact therewith. When the guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and the claw portion 725 contacts (collides) with the pin 729, the pin 729 moves the claw portion 725 by a predetermined amount in the direction of being pushed toward the box member side. As a result, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By similarly driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700, it is possible to freely drop the effect movable body 224 located at the highest position.

  In order to return the production movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a, and then the guided member 719. Is moved to the upper side, and the same operation is performed in synchronization with the right drive system as well, whereby the effect production movable body 224 can be moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 689 (a) is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as seen from the back side. 689 (b) to 689 (d) are enlarged views of the circular portion of FIG. 689 (a). A disengagement operation of the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a by the pin 729 will be described with reference to FIGS. 689 (b) to 689 (d). FIG. 689 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the movable body left end holding member 731 is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by the driving of the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged with each other. The bottom of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw 725 of the guided member 719, so that the claw 725 engages with the claw 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731. It is moved in the direction to eliminate.

  In FIG. 689 (c), the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the fixed pin 729 bottom pushes the upper slope of the claw 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw 725 and the claw 731a. Indicates that the has been resolved.

  In FIG. 689 (d), the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable. The body left end holding member 731 is in the middle of free fall.

  FIG. 690 is a front view of production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 690 (a) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is in the initial position where it is not displaced with respect to the base 701. FIG. 690 (b) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the center of the base 701 as the center of rotation. A motor 723 and a drive system including a pulley and a belt (not shown) are used to drive the movable object 703. FIG. 690 (c) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle. The movable object 703 is provided with an LED substrate inside, and it is possible to perform an effect in which the LED emits light.

  FIG. 691 is an external perspective view of the production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is stretched over a gear gc that transmits the rotation of a motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) rotatably fixed to the central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven and the gear of the central portion 703c is rotated, so that the movable object 703 can be rotationally moved with respect to the base portion 701.

  On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base portion 701, a photo sensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are arranged to face each other via a space portion 740a is arranged. The photo sensor 740 has a light emitting element and a light receiving element that are arranged to face each other with the space portion 740a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 691) are directed toward the space portion 740a so that the optical path from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is in the horizontal front-rear direction in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility or the like. It is arranged. In order to prevent the light emitted from the decorative pattern display device 208 located on the rear side of the production movable body 224 from entering the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photo sensor 740, a black resin, for example, in a predetermined area is provided behind the light receiving element. The light opaque member used is provided. In this example, the wall portion 740b behind the light receiving element of a part of the housing of the photo sensor 740 is used as a light opaque member.

  In the vicinity of the photo sensor 740, a shutter 750 including a light blocking piece 750c that blocks light that enters the space 740a of the photo sensor 740 and is emitted from the light emitting element so as not to be received by the light receiving element is attached. The shutter 750 is rotatably fixed at a rotation center 750a. On the opposite side of the light shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a, a protruding piece contact portion 750b with which the protruding piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 can contact is provided. The rotation center 750a includes a spring mechanism (not shown) inside, and the spring mechanism biases the shutter 750 so that the light blocking piece 750c does not enter the space 740a of the photo sensor 740 unless a force is applied from the outside. Has been done. When the protruding piece 703s comes into contact with and presses the protruding piece contact portion 750b, the light blocking piece 750c enters the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. A lid member 701a is attached to the base 701 to protect the vicinity of the shutter 750.

  In this embodiment, the photo sensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light blocking piece 750c, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is at the initial position when the photo sensor 740 detects the light blocking piece 750c. When the photo sensor 740 does not detect the light blocking piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is at a position other than the initial position.

  FIG. 692 is a rear view of production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 693 (a) is an external perspective view of the production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 693 (b) to 6 (d) are enlarged views of the circular portion of FIG. 693 (a). The operation of the projecting piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 692 and 693 (b) to (d). FIGS. 692 (a) and 693 (b) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the protruding piece 703s abuts the protruding piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light blocking piece 750c.

  FIGS. 692 (b) and 693 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 rotates about the central portion 703c from the initial position by a predetermined angle. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. Therefore, the protruding piece 703s separates from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force does not act on the projecting piece contact portion 750b, the projecting piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light blocking piece 750c is raised and is retracted from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light blocking piece 750c.

  FIGS. 692 (c) and 693 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by the maximum angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c, comes into contact with the mechanical end, and is stopped. Since the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force acts on the protruding piece contact portion 750b, the protruding piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring to maintain the stopped state. At the same time, the light blocking piece 750c also rises and maintains the state of exiting from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. The photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light blocking piece 750c.

  FIG. 694 is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 694 (a) is a rear view of the production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 692 (a). 694 (b) shows a cross section taken along line AA of FIG. 694 (a), and FIG. 694 (c) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 694 (b). 694 (a) to 694 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the protruding piece 703s abuts the protruding piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the protruding piece abutting portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the light blocking piece 750c.

  FIG. 694 (d) is a rear view of the production movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 692 (b). 694 (e) shows a cross section taken along line BB in FIG. 694 (d), and FIG. 694 (f) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 694 (e). 694 (d) to (f) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated about the central portion 703c from the initial position by a predetermined angle. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. Therefore, the protruding piece 703s separates from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force does not act on the projecting piece contact portion 750b, the projecting piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light blocking piece 750c is raised and is retracted from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the light blocking piece 750c.

  695 to 698 schematically show the cross section of the area including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative pattern display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the production movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 695 to 698. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 695 to 698 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed horizontally from left to right. 695 (a), the effect movable body 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the effect movable body 224. It shows a state in which light is emitted from the front. A photo sensor 740 is arranged on the base 701 of the effect production movable body 224. The photo sensor 740 has a pair of wall portions that are arranged opposite to each other with a space portion 740a having a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction sandwiched therebetween. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the front wall of the pair of walls, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the rear wall 740b. In the wall portion 740b on which the light receiving element 740d is arranged, as a third means, at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light opaque member. The entire housing of the photo sensor 740 may be a light opaque member. In addition, the production movable body 224 is provided with a movable object 703 as a fourth means. In addition, since the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position and the movable object 703 is also in the initial position, the light blocking piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects vertically in the space portion 740a to block the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c. For this reason, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding a predetermined threshold intensity.

  The production movable body 224, with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208, an initial position (first position) that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction, and a position that overlaps at least part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction ( (2nd position) and the range including is movable.

  In addition, in this example, an example in which the production movable body 224 can move a linear trajectory in the vertical direction is shown, but the production movable body 224 is not limited to the linear trajectory, and the production movable body 224 can move a trajectory including a curve or a trajectory including an arc. It may be enabled, or may be movable in the left-right direction or the diagonal direction without being limited to the vertical direction. In addition, the production movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the production movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light even while the movable object 703 is moving. May be.

  Further, the photo sensor 740 detects whether or not the movable object 703 is at the initial position, depending on whether or not the light receiving element 740d receives the light from the light emitting element 740c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light blocking piece 750c and cannot be received by the light receiving element 740d. When the movable object 703 is moving, the light from the light emitting element 740c is emitted. Is not blocked by the light blocking piece 750c, and can be received by the light receiving element 740d. Note that when the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light blocking piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 is moving, the light is emitted from the light emitting element 740c. The light may be blocked by the light blocking piece 750c so that it cannot be received by the light receiving element 740d.

  The light blocking piece 750c of the shutter 750 changes its position according to the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light shielding piece 750c may be integrally provided. Further, the reflectance of at least a part or all of the surface of the light shielding piece 750c may be lower than the reflectance of at least a part or all of the surface of the production movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

  The movable object 703 can move in a range including a third position (initial position) and a fourth position (moving position). In this example, the central portion 703c is rotated about the rotation axis, and the degree of overlap with the base 701 of the production movable body 224 is smaller at the fourth position than at the third position. That is, the degree of protrusion of the movable object 703 from the base 701 increases. Further, the movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving. The light emitting mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

  In FIG. 695 (b), the production movable body 224 is moved downward from the initial position as shown by the arrow, and is located in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the production movable body 224. It shows the state. Light is emitted forward from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in the figure. The light emitted from the decorative pattern display device 208 illuminates the effect movable body 224 located in the front from the rear, but the wall portion 740b behind the pair of wall portions of the photosensor 740 is at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b. Function as a light opaque member. As described above, since a part of the members forming the photo sensor 740 is located behind the light receiving element 740d as a light non-transmissive member, the light receiving element 740d is prevented from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208. can do.

  696, the movable object 703 rotates around the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 695 (b), and the effect movable body 224 is moved to the position (third position) shown in FIG. 695 (b). It shows a state in which it has moved to a fourth position where the degree of overlap with the base 701 is small. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 693 (b) to (d), the movable piece 703 abuts the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and presses the protruding piece contact portion 750b. Since the projecting piece 703s moves, the projecting piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring, and the light blocking piece 750c is raised to retract from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

  FIG. 697 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including effect movable body 224 and decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modified example of the configuration of effect movable body 224. In the photo sensor 740 of the production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 697 (a), the light receiving element 740d is arranged on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and the light emitting element 740c is arranged on the rear wall portion 740b. By doing so, when the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photo sensor 740 including the light emitting element 740c and the light blocking piece 750c are located behind the light receiving element 740b, and thus the decoration is more decorative. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the light receiving element 740b from receiving the light from the symbol display device 208.

  The photo sensor 740 of the production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 697 (b) has a pair of wall portions that are arranged opposite to each other with a space portion 740a formed in the vertical direction having a predetermined width interposed therebetween. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the upper wall portion 740b. In the wall portion 740b on which the light receiving element 740d is arranged, a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light opaque member as a third means. The entire housing of the photo sensor 740 may be a light opaque member. The light blocking piece 750c is configured to move in the horizontal front-rear direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing so, since the wall portion 740b made of the light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light-receiving element 740d is positioned behind the light-receiving element 740d, the light from the decorative pattern display device 208 is more light-receiving element. It may be difficult for 740d to receive light. Moreover, since the direction of the light from the decorative pattern display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740c are orthogonal to each other, it may be difficult for the light receiving element 740d to receive the light from the decorative pattern display device 208. is there.

  FIG. 698 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including effect movable body 224 and decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modified example of the configuration of effect movable body 224. 698 (a) ~ (c) the production movable body 224 has the same configuration as the production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 695, for example, and as a third means, is a thin plate separate from the photo sensor 740. The feature is that the light opaque member 760 is provided. The light opaque member 760 shown in FIG. 698 (a) is arranged on the rear side of the base 701 so as to cover at least the rear of the photosensor 740. The light opaque member 760 shown in FIG. 698 (b) is arranged on the rear side and the lower side of the base portion 701 so as to cover at least the rear side and the lower side of the photo sensor 740. The light non-transmissive member 760 shown in FIG. 698 (c) is arranged on the rear side and the upper and lower sides of the base 701 so as to cover at least the rear and upper and lower sides of the photo sensor 740. By arranging such a light opaque member 760 at least behind the photo sensor 740, it may be possible to prevent the light from the decorative pattern display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740d more reliably. The light opaque member 760 is not limited to a thin plate shape, and may be, for example, a light shielding film or the like coated on the rear surface of the base 701 at least behind the photo sensor 740.

  Next, the production operation in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 699 to 704. FIG. 699 shows an effect and the like in the special game 1 variation game. 699 (a) to 699 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order almost in time series. 699 (a), (c) to (f), (h), the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 678, the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display. The device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the general figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown. FIG. 699 (b) shows that the game ball passes through the first universal figure starting port 227. FIG. 699 (g) shows a state in which the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is open to the left and right.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reservation number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the general figure are arranged. In addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 is located on the left side from the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. From the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the right side is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for displaying a general figure effect or a variable icon.

  FIG. 699 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol moves from top to bottom is displayed (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variation game is stopped, the special figure 2 display device 214, for example, the first off symbol "special figure I" as a stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is stopped is displayed. Also, the universal figure variation game is stopped, and the universal figure display device 210 displays, for example, a missing symbol "Public symbol C" as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is stopped is displayed.

  Three LEDs are lit on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218, which indicates that the to-be-held number in Toku-zu 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the number "3" indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 number-of-holds display area 801 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1, and, for example, a character image of "grandpa" is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are normal hold displays, for example, black circle images are displayed.

  All the LEDs of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, which indicates that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 2 is “0”. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display is not displayed and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the special figure 2 number-of-holds display area a3, the number "0" indicating the number of reserved figures of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  All the LEDs are turned off on the universal figure holding lamp 216, which indicates that the number of retained figures of the universal figure is “0”. Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the general-purpose effect display nor the variable icon display is displayed, and the default display is displayed. The number "0" indicating the number of reserved universal figures is displayed in the retained number of general figures display area a5 of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 699 (b) shows that three game balls have continuously passed through the first universal figure starting port 227.

  FIG. 699 (c) is the first time when three game balls pass through the first universal figure starting port 227 as shown in FIG. 699 (b) during the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 699 (a). The figure shows the state in which the variation game is started. The universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the universal design decorative design in which the decorative designs of the three universal designs shown in FIG. 680 (d) are sequentially moved from top to bottom (in the figure) , Indicated by the downward arrow). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is being executed is displayed. Two LEDs are lit on the universal figure holding lamp 216, which indicates that the number of reserved figures for the universal figure is “2”. In addition, the number "2" indicating the number of reserved universal figures is displayed in the number of reserved universal figures display area a5 of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  699 (d) is a special symbol 1 variation game shown in FIG. 699 (a) during the special figure variation game shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the missing symbol "general drawing C" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the ordinary figure decoration 3 (for example, an image representing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the ordinary figure variation game is out of the ordinary figure stop period is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 699 (e) shows a state in which the second universal figure variation game is started during the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 699 (a). The universal figure display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the universal symbol decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol of the universal symbol sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is being executed is displayed. One LED is lit on the universal figure holding lamp 216, and it is shown that the number of reserved figures in the universal figure is “1”. In addition, the number "1" indicating the number of reserved universal figures is displayed in the retained number of general figures display area a5 of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 699 (f) is a special symbol 1 variation game shown in FIG. 699 (a) during the special figure variation game shown in FIG. The hit symbol "general drawing B" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the figure decoration 2 (for example, an image showing a double circle) indicating that the result of the figure fluctuation game is a hit during the figure stop period is stopped. It is displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is stopped is displayed. In the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and around the special effect area 803, the effect image g1 at the time of winning the universal figure is displayed.

  When the universal figure variation game is won as shown in FIG. 699 (f), as shown in FIG. 699 (g), the blade member 232a of the special FIG.

  FIG. 699 (h) shows an example of an effect performed when the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the electric-chu open state shown in FIG. 699 (g). In the special effect area 803, a character image of “Den Chu” indicating that Den Chu is open is displayed, and in a balloon region indicating the voice of Den, for example, a tutorial (game table explanation) image g2 “Den Chu open!” Is displayed. Has been done. As described above, in this example, the general figure effect display corresponding to the general figure variation game as shown in FIG. 699 is performed.

  FIG. 700 shows effects and the like in the special figure 1 variation game. 700 (a) to 700 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in time series in this order. Each of FIGS. 700 (a) to (h) shows the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 678, the universal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 display device. 214, the special figure reservation lamp 216, the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 are extracted and shown.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. The fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reservation number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the general figure are arranged. In addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 is located on the left side from the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. From the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the right side is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for displaying a general figure effect or a variable icon.

  FIG. 700 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating stoppage is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is stopped is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variation game is stopped, the special figure 2 display device 214, for example, the first off symbol "special figure I" as a stop symbol mode is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is stopped is displayed. Also, the universal figure variation game is stopped, and the universal figure display device 210 displays, for example, a missing symbol "Public symbol C" as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the universal figure, a display indicating that the universal figure variation game is stopped is displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the general-purpose effect display nor the variable icon display is displayed, and the default display is displayed.

  Three LEDs are lit on the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218, which indicates that the to-be-held number in Toku-zu 1 is “3”. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the number "3" indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 in the special figure 1 hold count display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, black circle images are displayed. The third hold display h3 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of Toku-zu 1, for example, a character image of "grandpa" is displayed.

  All the LEDs of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, which indicates that the number of holdings in Toku-zu 2 is “0”. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display is not displayed and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the special figure 2 number-of-holds display area a3, the number "0" indicating the number of reserved figures of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  All the LEDs are turned off on the universal figure holding lamp 216, which indicates that the number of retained figures of the universal figure is “0”. Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the general-purpose effect display nor the variable icon display is displayed, and the default display is displayed. The number "0" indicating the number of reserved universal figures is displayed in the retained number of general figures display area a5 of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  FIG. 700 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one segment in the center. It shows the state of displaying. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol moves from top to bottom is displayed (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by 1, so the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 has two LEDs turned on and the special figure 1 hold number is "2". It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two hold displays h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the number "2" indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying the lookahead result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon is displayed by a black circle image as if the digested hold has moved.

  700 (c) shows the state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special game 1 variation game has passed a predetermined time.

  FIG. 700 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is respectively displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing.

  In FIG. 700 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is further stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decorative symbol. It shows a state where variable display is being performed.

  FIG. 700 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7", which indicates a deviation, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 700 (g) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variation display of the special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 perform variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by 1, so one LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one hold display h1 is displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is one. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the number "1" indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first pending display h1 in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 is a prefetch pending display for notifying the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803, a black circle image is displayed as if the digested hold has moved.

  700 (h) shows the state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the special game 1 variation game has passed a predetermined time. Further, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, respectively.

  FIG. 701 shows an effect and the like in the special figure 1 variation game. 701 (a) to 701 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in time series in this order. The state shown in FIG. 701 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 700 (h).

  701 (a), decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, further decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is a decorative symbol. The normal reach state in which the variable display is performed is shown.

  FIG. 701 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" indicating stoppage is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 701 (c) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation display is being performed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed. With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one, so all LEDs on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are turned off and the number of holds of special figure 1 is “0”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the reserved display is not displayed and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a number "0" indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon is displayed by the image of "grandpa" as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button pressing suggestion display is displayed with an image simulating the chance button 136 together with the message "Press the button!". Further, a button acceptance period display image showing a period for accepting pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 or the button reception period elapses within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image, as shown in FIG. 701 (d), an image simulating the Japanese flag is displayed in the special game 1 variation game. It is displayed as a notice image for notifying the result of. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 701 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs the variable display of the decoration symbol. The normal reach state is shown.

  FIG. 701 (f) shows a state where the normal reach has evolved to the super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In this example, a super-reach image is displayed in which a samurai is screaming loudly, "I'm gonna fight!"

  In FIG. 701 (g), the samurai wins the game and the word "win" is displayed, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Shows the closed state.

  In FIG. 701 (h), the left-middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, which have been reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area and indicate a big hit, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration". 7 ”is enlarged and is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variation game is stopped is displayed. Thus, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure variation game as shown in FIGS. 700 and 701 is performed.

  FIG. 702 shows an example of effects on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 702 (a) illustrates the time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 702 (b) exemplifies the effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 702 (c) exemplifies the volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 702 (d) illustrates the brightness setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can perform various settings for the pachinko machine 100 by the screens shown in FIGS. 702 (a) to 702 (d).

  FIG. 702 (e) exemplifies the hitting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A large screen in the center of the display area is used as the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image in which a samurai riding a horse is moving on a mountain path is displayed. Around the display area, for example, in the upper left corner, a special big hit image of the number "7" indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed. Further, the acquired sphere number display image is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, "80 balls" is displayed). A round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, "1R" is displayed). Further, a big hit count (number of consecutive villas) display image is displayed in the lower right corner (in this example, “big hit count: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 702 (f) exemplifies a power-supporting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure variation game is performed at the time of the electric power support state, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c at the center of the display area. In the electric support state, it is necessary to hit the right side to pass many game balls through the second universal figure starting port 229 and allow many game balls to win in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Therefore, with the variable display of the decorative pattern as the background display, a large character string "Please hit right!" In the central portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the launch direction by the clockwise arrow on the enlarged game ball. A suggestion is displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 803, a variable icon display based on the normally reserved image of the special figure 2 is displayed, and further, one normal reserved display h4 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved display area.

  FIG. 702 (g) exemplifies the demo display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string “Daito” is displayed. 702 (h) illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the door opening error screen and the tray full error screen are displayed.

  FIG. 703 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 703 (a) to (j), as shown in FIG. 684, the production movable body 224 is from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state in which it has descended and stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  703 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 699 (f) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (a), the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area are reserved display, special At least a part of the universal figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 are hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, general figure reserved number display area a5, And the fourth symbol display area a6 of the ordinary figure is not hidden by the production movable body 224. Special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, fourth design display area a2 of special drawing 1, special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, fourth design display area a4 of special figure 2, general figure reserved number display area a5, and general The fourth symbol display area a6 in the drawing is designed so as not to be hidden by the production movable body 224 regardless of the type of production.

  703 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 699 (h) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (b), variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, reserved display of the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area, special At least a part of the display of the electric Chu opening in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  703 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 701 (a) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol in any one of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801, and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display At least part of the default display in the special effect area 803 is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  703 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 701 (b) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (d), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801, and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special effect The default display in the area 803 is such that at least a part of the effect movable body 224 is hidden.

  703 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 701 (c) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (e), the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the variable icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are At least a part of the production movable body 224 is hidden.

  703 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 701 (d) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are at least partially generated by the effect movable body 224. Is hidden.

  703 (g) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 701 (f) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (g), the effect reachable body 224 at least partially hides the super reach image. On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left-middle-right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c, which are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display region, are not hidden by the production movable body 224.

  703 (h) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 702 (e) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (h), at least a part of the hitting display image and the big hit count display image are hidden by the effect movable member 224. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the production movable body 224.

  703 (i) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 702 (f) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (i), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c and the display screen during the electric support are hidden by the production movable body 224. There is.

  703 (j) shows a state where the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 when the image shown in FIG. 702 (h) is displayed. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 703 (j), at least a part of the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c and the plate full tank error screen are hidden by the production movable body 224. . On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the production movable body 224.

  FIG. 704 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 704 (a) to (j), as shown in FIG. 685, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 684, and the movable object 703 imitating a blade is of the base 701. The state is shown in which the central portion is rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle around the center of rotation.

  704 (a), when the image shown in FIG. 699 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (a), variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, reserved display of the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area, special At least a part of the universal figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 are hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, general figure reserved number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the ordinary figure is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, fourth design display area a2 of special drawing 1, special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, fourth design display area a4 of special figure 2, general figure reserved number display area a5, and general The fourth symbol display area a6 in the drawing is designed so as not to be hidden by the base 701 of the production movable body 224 or the movable object 703 regardless of the type of production.

  704 (b), when the image shown in FIG. 699 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area reserved display, special At least a part of the display of the electric power open in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 are hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  704 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 701 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 of the production movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (c), the stop display of any one of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area are reserved display. At least part of the default display in the special effect area 803 is hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  704 (d), when the image shown in FIG. 701 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (d), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the special figure 1 hold number display area 801, and the special figure 2 hold number display area hold display, special effect The default display in the area 803 is such that at least a part thereof is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224.

  704 (e), when the image shown in FIG. 701 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (e), the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the variable icon display in the special effect area 803, the button press suggestion display, and the button reception period display image are At least a part of the effect movable body 224 is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703.

  704 (f), when the image shown in FIG. 701 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect region 803, and the notice image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or At least a part of the movable object 703 is hidden.

  704 (g), when the image shown in FIG. 701 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 of the production movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left-middle-right symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c reduced in the upper right corner of the display region is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  704 (h), when the image shown in FIG. 702 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (h), at least a part of the hit display image and the big hit count display image are hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 of the effectable moving body 224 or the movable object 703.

  704 (i), when the image shown in FIG. 702 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (i), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the display screen during electric support are at least one of the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. I try to hide the department.

  704 (j), when the image shown in FIG. 702 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed on the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the production movable body 224. Shows the hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 704 (j), the variable display of decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, and the plate full tank error screen are at least partially formed by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Is hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 of the production movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 603 to 704 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game table provided with a plurality of effect means (for example, the pachinko machine 100), and at least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect. It is a means (for example, effect movable body 224), at least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and the first effect means is At least a moving operation can be executed, the second effect means can execute at least a light emitting operation, and at least a part of the first effect means is a photo sensor (for example, a photo sensor 740). ), At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting element 740c), and at least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving unit (for example, a light receiving element 74). d), the photo sensor is movable at least in accordance with the movement operation of the first rendering unit, and at least a part of the first rendering unit is a light shielding unit (for example, a photo sensor). 740 is a wall portion 740b), the light blocking means is at least movable along with the moving operation of the first rendering means, and the light blocking means is in the first state, the second light blocking means. It is located between the rendering means and the light receiving means (for example, behind the light receiving element 740d), and the first state means that the position of the first rendering means is the first position. That is, the first position is a position to which at least a part of the light emitted by the second rendering unit is emitted toward the first rendering unit (for example, a position in the front plane of the display screen). It is characterized by To.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, since the light-shielding unit is located between the photo sensor included in the first rendering unit capable of performing at least the moving operation and the second rendering unit serving as the display unit, the photo sensor However, there is a case where it is possible to carry out a stable effect without erroneously detecting the light of the second effect means and to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means (for example, a movable object 703), and the first rendering means is the third rendering. At least means is included, the third effect means is movable along with the movement operation of the first effect means, and the third effect means is capable of performing at least a movement operation. The photosensor is capable of at least changing into a plurality of sensor states, and in at least one of the plurality of sensor states, the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit. A first sensor state, at least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit, and the photosensor is In the second state, it is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state, the photosensor, in the third state, the first sensor state. At least it is possible to change to the other sensor state of the sensor state and the second sensor state, the second state, the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means. A second position, the third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position, To do.

  According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, the third effect means that moves by the move operation of the first effect means can further execute the move operation, so that the interest of the game can be improved in some cases.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect means is capable of performing at least display (for example, display of a decorative pattern or various effects).

  According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, by hiding the display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement operation of the first effect means, which may improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the second effect means is a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a holding icon, a variable icon, a special figure holding number display, a general figure holding number display, and a special drawing number). At least one of the four symbols, the fourth symbol of the universal figure, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, etc.) can be executed, and at least one of the plurality of displays is the first display. The first rendering means can cover at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative pattern, a notice display, a prefetch notice display, etc.) from the front during the first period. It is characterized in that the first period is at least a part of the operation period of the moving operation of the first effect means.

  According to the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, by hiding the first display, the player can be made to pay attention to the movement operation of the first effect means, and the interest of the game can be improved in some cases.

(5) The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a movable body.

  Further, not limited to the above embodiment, a movable light shielding plate (for example, light shielding piece 750c) is provided at a position between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the light shielding ratio of the light shielding plate is the first reflectance. The first rendering means has at least a first area, the first rendering means has at least a second area in which the light reflectance is the second reflectance, and the first reflectance is the second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (difficult to reflect light).

  Further, the direction of the light from the light emitting means toward the light receiving means may be different from the direction of the light from the second rendering means toward the front. Further, the direction of the light from the light emitting means toward the light receiving means may be opposite to the direction of the light from the second rendering means toward the front. Further, the direction of the light from the light emitting means toward the light receiving means may be a direction orthogonal to the direction of the light from the second rendering means toward the front. Further, the direction of the light from the light emitting means toward the light receiving means may be the same direction as the direction of the light from the second rendering means toward the front.

  Further, at least a part of the photo sensor may be a light shielding unit. Further, the light shielding means may be provided in the first rendering means separately from the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least only the rear of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the lower side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the upper side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the front, rear, left, right, top and bottom of the photo sensor and one or more directions. Further, the light blocking means may be at least located behind and below the photo sensor. In other words, when a photo sensor is mounted on a conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine can not identify the path of light reaching the light receiving part of the photo sensor because the game ball that reflects light always flows down the game area. However, there are cases where erroneous detection can be prevented by covering the light from the display device and the light from the rolling game ball on the rear side and the lower side of the photo sensor, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering only two directions of front, rear, left, right, top, and bottom), the weight of the first rendering means may be quantified to reduce power consumption and cost during movement. . Further, the light blocking means may be a part of a member forming the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may be a part of the member provided with the light emitting means. Further, the light shielding means may be a part of the member provided with the light receiving means.

  Further, at least one of the plurality of displays may be the second display. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

  Further, the third rendering means may be capable of performing the movement operation to a position that covers at least a part of the second rendering means from the front. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the third rendering means may be capable of hiding both at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

  Further, the second effect means may be capable of simultaneously displaying the first display and the second display. Further, each of the plurality of displays may be a display showing game information (hereinafter, referred to as “display showing a plurality of game information”). In addition, a display or a plurality of game information indicating a plurality of game information is a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a holding icon, a variable icon, a special figure holding number display, a special figure holding number display, a special figure fourth symbol, a fourth figure fourth. Design, notice display, prefetch notice display, tutorial display, special figure production display, ordinary figure production display, background display, button press suggestion display, variation display, pseudo variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Out-of-range display, big hit medium performance display, big hit round number display, count number display for each round, acquired number of balls display, big hit consort number display, probability changing middle performance display, time saving medium performance display, launch direction suggestion display, pre-reading mode display , Periodic effect display that is executed periodically (for example, every hour), demo screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting Shown, error display, may include at least one of. Further, the first display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed in the entire display area. Further, the second display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the entire display area. Further, at least one of the plurality of rendering means may be a fourth rendering means.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. Note that the matters described in the above detailed description, particularly the matters described in the embodiment and the modified examples, can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of the game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG. 705.

  The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel, as shown in FIG. 705. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal lottery for winning combinations) for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winning are won by lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control relating to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined prize mode is selected. In addition to a payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium, a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on a lottery result of the lottery means is provided, and the production means is a predetermined one. A launching device 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter the ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting the ball entering the winning opening 1016. When the detection unit 1018 detects a sphere, a payout unit 1020 for paying out the sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 that is movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022. And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when a game ball enters a winning opening and wins a prize. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The present invention according to the above embodiments is summarized as follows.

  (Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine provided with a plurality of rendering means, wherein at least one of the rendering means is a first rendering means, and at least one of the rendering means is at least one. A second rendering means, the first rendering means is capable of performing at least a moving operation, and the second rendering means is capable of performing at least a light emitting operation, At least a part of the production means is a photo sensor, at least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means, at least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means, and the photo sensor is the first Is movable at least in accordance with the moving operation of the rendering means, at least a part of the first rendering means is a light shielding means, and the light shielding means is the moving operation of the first rendering means. To Is at least movable, and the light shielding means is located between the second rendering means and the light receiving means in the first state, and the first state is the It means that the position of the first effect means is the first position, and the first position means at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means toward the first effect means. Is a position at which is illuminated, a gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein at least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means, and the first rendering means is the third rendering means. At least, the third rendering means is movable along with the moving operation of the first rendering means, and the third rendering means is capable of at least performing the moving operation. The photosensor is capable of at least changing to a plurality of sensor states, and at least one of the plurality of sensor states is configured such that the light receiving unit is capable of receiving light from the light emitting unit. One sensor state, at least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means cannot receive light from the light emitting means, and the photosensor is a second sensor state. In the state of At least one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state can be changed to a sensor state, and the photosensor, in a third state, the first sensor state and the second sensor state. At least it is possible to change to the other sensor state of the sensor state, and the second state, the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is the second position. The gaming machine is characterized in that the third state is a state in which the relative position of the third rendering means with respect to the first rendering means is not the second position.

  (Supplementary note 3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 1 or 2, wherein the second effect means is capable of performing at least display.

  (Supplementary Note 4) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the second effect means is capable of executing at least one of the plurality of displays, and at least one of the plurality of displays. One is a first display, and the first rendering means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display from the front in the first period. The period is a period of at least a part of the operation period of the moving operation of the first effect means, the gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

<Embodiment D>
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, in order to avoid duplicated description, hereinafter, only different configurations from the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiments A to B will be described, and the same or similar configurations will be denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and The description is omitted.

<Game board>
First, the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 706. Note that FIG. 706 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 707) are arranged around it. The details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, but it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Further, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage 244 is arranged in a region where the game balls can roll. On the stage 244, a game ball or the like that is out of the game area 124 can be temporarily rolled. Further, behind the stage 244, a wall portion 200a3 described later is erected, and a game ball rolling on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall portion 200a3 and the front side. It is guided to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 has a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The public figure display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in the present embodiment, they are constituted by 7-segment LEDs.

  The public figure holding lamp 216 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating the number of public figure variable games (details described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of general figure variable games (for example, 2). It is possible to hold up to two). The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, It is possible to hold a figure fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is a low probability that a big jackpot is unlikely to occur. Lights when changing from the high probability state to the high probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Further, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the front surface of the game board 200. One is arranged on the right side of the view. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the lower center part of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. , The special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, they are arranged at the lower right of the game board 200 when viewed from the front. The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed. When the display device stops and displays the jackpot pattern, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are picked up as prize balls. Discharge to plate 126. The balls that enter the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, a game nail, etc., and wins the winning holes (general winning hole 226, first variable winning hole 234, second). The variable winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or the universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach the outlet 240 only by passing through.

<Accessory unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. 707. Note that FIG. 707 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

  The role object unit 950 of this example is configured by a drop deploying role unit 700, a rising role unit 750, a launch role unit 800, and a V forming role unit 850. In this example, the climbing accessory unit 750 and the launch accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Accessory unit / Drop deployment accessory unit>
708 to 712 are exploded perspective views of the drop deploying accessory unit 700.

  As shown in FIG. 708, the fall deploying accessory unit 700 is mainly composed of a base 702 having a U-shape in a front view, and a pair of lower left lower drive parts arranged on the left side in the front view and the right side in the front view of the base 702. 704 and a right / bottom drive unit 706, a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, a relay board 710 for electrically connecting the drop deployable accessory unit 700 and another board, and a pair. The lower left upper drive unit 704 and the right upper vertical drive unit 706 are configured to be slidable in the up-down direction, and a drop deploying accessory 712 (see FIG. 710).

<Accessory unit / Drop deploying accessory unit / Left (right) vertical drive unit>
As shown in FIG. 708, the left up-and-down drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to an upper portion of the drive base 704a, and a drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 709, the lower left upper drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702, and a slider 704e fixed to the slider 704e and a drop deploying member 712. And a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is disposed so as to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d. And is configured to slide vertically. The upper right lower drive unit 706 has the same structure as the lower left lower drive unit 704, and is as shown in FIGS. 708 and 709.

  A drop deploying accessory 712, which will be described later, is supported at both ends by an accessory supporting portion 704f of an upper left lower drive portion 704 and an accessory supporting portion 706f of a right up and down driving portion 706. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the drop deploying accessory 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as “up and down operation of the drop deploying accessory 712”.

<Accessory unit / Drop expansion accessory unit / Unlock unit>
As shown in FIG. 708, the unlocking unit 708 includes a solenoid 708a driven by a drive circuit 516, a shaft 708b slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 708a, and a shaft 708b engaged with the shaft 708b. A movable portion 708c that slides in the vertical direction together with 708b, a rotating portion 708d that rotates in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and a claw that can slide in the direction indicated by reference numeral A by the rotating portion 708d. And a part 708e.

  The claw portion 708e of the lock release portion 708 is slidably arranged inside and outside the through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is operated to move the claw portion 708e into the through hole 702a, the base 702 is blocked (locked) from sliding downward, and the drop deploying component 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is actuated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the downward sliding of the base 702 is allowed (unlocked), and the drop deploying component 712 slides downward by its own weight. To do. In addition, in the above-mentioned "vertical movement of the drop deploying accessory 712", in addition to the downward sliding due to the operation of the left drive motor 704b and the right drive motor 706b, the downward expanding slide 712 due to its own weight is also slid down. included.

<Accessory unit / fall expansion accessory unit / fall expansion accessory>
As shown in FIG. 710, the drop deploying accessory 712 has a long plate-shaped fourth structure 712a whose both ends are supported by the accessory supporting portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 709, and the fourth structure 712a. A long plate-shaped first structure 712b rotatably attached to the front side of the vehicle, a pair of left and right third structures 712c rotatably disposed on the fourth structure 712a, and A pair of left and right second structures 712d that are rotatably disposed in the structure 712b, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotationally driving the left side of the first structure 712b in a front view, and the first structure 712d. It has a right rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b in front view, and a plate-shaped cover means 718 (see FIG. 711) arranged on the front side of the first structure 712b. Consists of

  The left rotation drive unit 712e decorates the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory supporting unit 704f shown in FIG. 621, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. The left rotation motor base ornament 712e3, the gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b when viewed from the front. And a rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has almost the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, and as shown in FIG. 710, the rotation arm 712f5 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51 and the position of the detection piece 712f51 is set. The left rotation drive unit 712e differs from the left rotation drive unit 712e in that it includes a detectable sensor 712f6. The right rotation drive unit 712f can detect whether or not the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 713 (a)) by including the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6. It is possible.

  In the drop deployment component 712, the left rotation motor 712e2 is actuated to rotate the rotation arm 712e5 via the gear 712e4, and the left side in front view of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is the front surface. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 rotates via the gear 712f4, and the right side in front view of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed rotates to the front side (tilt). ) Is configured to.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, it is possible to rotate (tilt) the first structure body 712b toward the front side (the direction away from the fourth structure body 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (tilting) the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 to the front side may be referred to as “rotating operation of the drop deploying accessory 712”.

  A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base portion 712g. To be done. On the other hand, an engaging portion 712m that can engage with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structural body 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 713 (a), the arm portion 712k on the first structural body 712b side and the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structural body 712a side become The engagement holds the first structure 712b in the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure body 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement of the arm portion 712k on the first structure body 712b side with the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure body 712a side. It will be canceled.

  As shown in FIG. 711, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that is vertically slidable with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure body 712b side and is urged downward by the spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 is released, the slider 722 is urged by the slider. 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. Although the face of the character is applied to the cover means 718 in this example, other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 710, the base portion 712g is provided with the magnet 712n for attracting the iron metal piece 712c7 arranged in the pair of third structure bodies 712c by magnetic force. When the 712b is inclined to the front by about 180 °, the pair of third structures 712c is held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  Further, a pair of magnets 712b1 are respectively arranged at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are arranged at the respective positions. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and is held in the initial position.

  Further, the third structure 712c on the left side in the front view is rotatably supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the left side in the front view and a support shaft 712c2 on the support portion 712c1. The arm portion 712c3 is provided, the upper left half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper left half body portion 712c4.

  The third structure 712c on the right side in front view is supported by a support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the right side in front view of the fourth structure 712a, and rotatable on the support portion 712c1 via a support shaft 712c2. The arm portion 712c3 is provided, the upper right half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, the hat portion 712c5 and the school badge portion 712c6 fixed to the upper right half body portion 712c4.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side in the front view is rotatably supported by a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the left side in the front view of the first structure 712b and a support shaft 712d2 on the support portion 712d1. It is configured to have an arm portion 712d3 to be arranged, a left lower body 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It

  As shown in FIG. 711, the second structure 712d on the right side in the front view includes a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure 712b, and a support shaft 712d2 on the support portion 712d1. An arm portion 712d3 that is rotatably disposed, a lower right half body portion 712b4 that is fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 that connects the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. Configured to have.

  In the drop deploying accessory 712, the left upper body 712c4, the hat 712c5, and the school emblem 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side in front view, and the upper right body 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side in front view. , A hat portion 712c5, and a school emblem portion 712c6, a left lower body 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the left side in front view, and a lower right body 712d4 included in the second structure 712d on the right side in front view. The character is configured to be formed.

<Electrical object unit / falling expansion accessory unit / light emitting means of falling expansion accessory>
FIG. 712 (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the first structure 712b extracted, and FIG. 712 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a extracted. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 624 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure body 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure body 712a.

  On the front side of the first structure 712b, a light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting means 714a (LEDs in this example) is attached, and by the plurality of second light emitting means 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through the cover means 718 arranged in the front. Further, a light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (LEDs in this example) is attached to the back surface side of the fourth structure 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a are attached. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a arranged in front.

  As shown in FIG. 712, the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure body 712a can be connected to a first harness to electrically connect the fourth structure body 712a and the first sub-control unit 400. The connector CN1, a second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left side. A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotary motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotary motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Operation of fall deploying accessory>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 will be described with reference to FIGS. 713 to 717. As described above, the drop deploying accessory 712 can be vertically moved to slide in the vertical direction and can be rotated to rotate the first structure 712b forward.

<Movement of fall / deployment / up / down movement>
FIG. 713 is a diagram showing the vertical movement of the drop deployment accessory unit 712 by extracting only the drop deployment accessory unit 700, and FIG. 714 is the drop in the drop deployment accessory unit 700 in the state of being installed on the game board 200. It is a figure showing the up-and-down operation of development part 712.

  FIG. 713 (a) and FIG. 714 (a) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement. The initial position in the vertical movement is the position where the entire fall deploying accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center accessory 900 above the game board 200.

  At this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the face of the character) provided on the front surface of the cover means 718 of the fall deploying accessory 712 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. It becomes possible, and the central effect 900 and the drop development effect 712 provide an integrated effect. In addition, the initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front. The entire display area 208 is visible.

  FIGS. 713 (b) and 714 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the intermediate position in the vertical movement. When the drop / deployment accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement, the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 708) is actuated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, and the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the drop deploying accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches an intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the vertical movement is a position where the drop deploying accessory 712 at the initial position is lowered and a part of the drop deploying accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) with the center accessory 900. At this intermediate position, a part of the decoration applied to the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop deploying accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decorative symbol is displayed from the front. The top of the display area of device 208 is invisible, but most of the display area is visible.

  FIGS. 713 (c) and 714 (c) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deploying accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the vertical movement. The maximum movement position in the vertical movement is a position where the fall deploying accessory 712 at the intermediate position is further lowered and a part of the drop deploying accessory 712 does not overlap with the center accessory 900 (does not overlap). The maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening portion 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) with the drop deploying accessory 712, and the decoration is seen from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Motion / rotation motion of fall deploying accessory>
FIG. 715 is a diagram showing a rotation operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 by extracting only the drop deploying accessory unit 700, and FIGS. 716 and 717 are drop deployable accessory units installed in the game board 200. It is a figure showing rotation operation of drop deployment accessory 712 in 700.

  715 (a) and 716 (a) show a front view in the case where the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d that are interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b move the first structure 712b. The three left and right third structure bodies 712c, which rotate in the direction of coming closer to each other as a fulcrum and interlock with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d, come close to each other with the fourth structure body 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  In addition, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 711) is released, the slider moves. 721 pushes down on the cover means 718. Therefore, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined toward the front by about 45 °, but the decoration provided on the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 715 (b) and 716 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotating operation. In the process of the first structure 712b rotating from the front side to 45 ° to 90 °, the two left and right second structure 712d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The two left and right third structure bodies 712c that rotate in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated by 45 ° toward the front side and that are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to that in the state in which the structure 712b has rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is tilted toward the front by about 90 °, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a (disposed on the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) becomes visible from the front.

  Note that the cover means 718 has a structure that slides downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, so that when the cover means 718 is inclined to the front by about 90 °. Even if there is, the amount of protrusion of the cover means 718 to the front side can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thickness of the game board 200 from becoming unnecessarily large, and it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the cover means 718 comes into contact with another member.

  715 (c) and FIG. 717 (a) show a front view in the case where the first structure 712b of the drop deploying accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The two left and right third structure bodies 712c that rotate in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated 90 ° toward the front side and that are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structure bodies 712d are The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to that in the state in which the structure 712b has rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is tilted toward the front by about 135 °, and the decoration provided on the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a (disposed on the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 715 (d) and 717 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the first structure 712b of the drop-deployment accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b are The third left and right third structure 712d interlocked with the left and right second structure 712d while being brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to each other than the state of being rotated 135 ° toward the front side. The structure bodies 712c are brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to each other than the state in which the first structure body 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  Further, the two left and right second structures 712d and the left and right two third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and a character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c. To be done. Note that the cover means 718 is inclined to the front by about 180 °, the decoration provided on the bar means 718 is invisible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (main body) provided on the fourth structure 712a is not visible. In the example, a part of the LED) is also covered with the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus is not visible from the front.

<Various substrates>
Next, various substrates included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Various boards / control boards, drive boards>
FIG. 718 (a) is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits around the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 of this example includes a sub-control board 245a and a motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub-control board 245a by a board-to-board (hereinafter referred to as "BtoB") connector. ,,. The connection between the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b is not limited to the connection by the BtoB connector, and may be the connection by a harness or the like.

  The sub-control board 245a is mounted with the basic circuit 402 and the driving circuit 516 described with reference to FIG. 644. In this example, the basic circuit 402 and the driving circuit 516 are each configured by a one-chip microcomputer. , Can communicate with each other.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, the motor drive board 245b is mounted with electrical parts for electrically connecting the sub control board 245a to another board, and the motor drive board 245b is mounted on the sub control board 245a. Input of effect control data from the circuit 516 and output of a drive signal (for example, a board surface LED PWM signal described later) for operating a motor or the like that is a drive source of the game board side movable body 444 (for example, the accessory unit 950 or the like). It is possible to

  In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of two types of substrates, that is, a sub-control substrate 245a on which at least one microcomputer is mounted and a motor drive substrate 245b on which no microcomputer is mounted. When there is a change in the specifications of the game board side movable body (for example, the accessory unit 950), it may be possible to deal with the change of the specifications by replacing only one motor drive board 245b, and the other sub control board 245a. By providing versatility, it may be possible to shorten the development period and reduce the cost.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the sub-control board 245a, a game frame lamp 542, a game board lamp 532, a speaker 120, and a game frame side movable body 442 (for example, glass using a front frame door (glass frame)). Buttons, shield devices (shutters, etc.), second sub-control unit 500, motor drive board 245b, etc. are connected. Further, the motor drive board 245b is connected with a sub-control board 246a, a harness for electrically connecting the motor drive board 245b to another board, and the like.

<Various boards / connections and location>
Next, the connection relationship and arrangement location of various boards provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 718 (b) is a block diagram schematically showing the connection relationship of various boards provided in the pachinko machine 100. In this example, a board peripheral board 672 on which electric components including a switching circuit are mounted is electrically connected to a motor drive board 245b electrically connected to the sub control board 245a (FIG. 721 (a), FIG. 722). (See (a)), and the accessory peripheral board 674 on which no electric component is mounted is electrically connected to the board peripheral board 672 (see FIGS. 722 (a) and 723 (a)), and the peripheral area of the accessory is defined. The board 674 is electrically connected to the accessory lighting board 676 on which electrical components including power LEDs are mounted (see FIG. 723 (a)).

  FIG. 719 (a) is a diagram of the game board 200 as seen from the back surface, and is a diagram for explaining the arrangement location of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. In this example, a sub-control board case 245 is provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and a sub-control board 245a and a motor drive board 245b are housed in the inner space of the sub-control board case 245. A substrate denoted by reference numeral 246a in FIG. 719 (a) is a liquid crystal control substrate that constitutes the second sub control unit 500, and a substrate denoted by reference numeral 678 in FIG. 719 (a) is supplied from the power supply control unit 660. It is a sub power supply board that can supply the power to the sub control units such as the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 719 (b) is a diagram showing a part of the game board 200 taken out and viewed from the front, and is a view for explaining the arrangement location of the board peripheral board 672. In this example, the board peripheral board 672 is arranged near the stage 244 of the game board 200, and is electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 719 (a) via a board peripheral board connection harness 678 described later. Has been done.

  FIG. 720 (a) is a view seen from the front through a part of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining the location of the accessory peripheral board 674. In this example, the accessory peripheral board 674 is arranged at the upper left of the game board 200 in a front view, and is electrically connected to the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 719 (b) via a harness (not shown).

  FIG. 720 (b) is a front view showing a part of the drop-deployment accessory unit 700, and is a diagram for explaining the location of the accessory illumination board 676. The accessory lighting board 676 of this example is a board that constitutes a part of the drop deploying accessory unit 700, and is a board corresponding to the light emitting board 716 described with reference to FIG. 711. The accessory lighting board 676 (light emitting board 716) is electrically connected to the accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 720 (a) via a harness (not shown), and also has a first light emission including a power LED. Means 676a (716a).

<Motor control board>
Next, the motor control board 245b will be described. FIGS. 721 (a) and 721 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a connection relationship between the motor drive board 245b and another board and electrical components mounted on the motor drive board 245b.

  The motor drive board 245b includes a BtoB connector 245b1 connectable to the BtoB connector 245a1 of the sub control board 245b, and a connector 245b2 connectable to the connector 678a of the board surface peripheral board connection harness 678 connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. .

  The BtoB connector 245b1 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 80 pins of 80, of which No. The 31st pin is connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal output from the drive circuit 516 mounted on the sub control board 245a. The connector 245b2 of the motor drive board 245b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal lines of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 721 (b), the B.B connector 245b1 No. No. 31 of the connector 245b2. A first resistor 245b3, an IC 245b4, and a second resistor 245b5 are arranged in series as electrical components between the pins of 26.

<Board surface peripheral board>
Next, the board peripheral board 672 will be described. 722 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the connection relationship between the board surface peripheral board 672 and another board, and an example of electric components mounted on the board surface peripheral board 672.

  The board peripheral board 672 includes a motor drive board side connector 672a connectable to the connector 678b of the board peripheral board connection harness 678 and a accessory peripheral board side connectable to a harness connector (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674. And a connector 672b.

  The motor drive board side connector 672a is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal lines of the panel LED PWM signal of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678. Moreover, the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal of the harness (not shown) connected to the accessory peripheral board 674.

  As enlarged and shown in FIG. 723 (b), the motor drive board side connector 672a No. No. 26 of the accessory peripheral board side connector 672b. A first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e formed of an N-channel MOS FET, and a third resistor 672f are provided as electrical components between the 26 pins.

  The first resistor 672c is a resistor for stabilizing the operation of the switching circuit 672e. The second resistor 672d is a ground resistor for setting the gate-source voltage of the switching circuit 672e to 0v when the input signal of the switching circuit 672e is opened. The third resistor 672f is a current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676.

  No. of the motor drive board side connector 672a. A board LED PWM signal having a predetermined drive voltage (5 v in this example) is input to the 26 pins, and a voltage that is higher than the predetermined voltage (the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 872c and that allows a sufficient drain current to flow). , 1.2 v) is applied, the switching circuit 672e is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) is configured to light up.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed for turning on / off the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is higher than that in the case where other switching elements are applied. In addition to being able to speed up, there are cases where heat dissipation can be improved.

  Although the N-channel MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit 672e in this example, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used.

  Further, the third resistor 672f is applied as the current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676, but as shown in FIG. 722 (c). In addition, two third resistors 672f and 672g connected in series may be applied as the current setting resistors.

<Accessory peripheral board>
Next, the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 723 (a) is a diagram showing a connection relationship between the accessory peripheral board 674 and the accessory lighting board 676 and another board, and FIG. 723 (b) is mounted on the accessory lighting board 676. It is the figure which showed an example of the electric component.

  The accessory peripheral board 674 is connectable to a board peripheral board side connector 674a connectable to a connector of a harness (not shown) connected to the board peripheral board 672 and a connector of a harness 680 connected to the accessory lighting board 676. And a connector board 674b on the accessory board.

  The board side peripheral board side connector 674a is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 30 30 pins, of which No. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board surface LED PWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the board surface peripheral board 672. Further, the accessory-side illumination board side connector 674b is No. 1 to No. It is composed of 22 pins of No. 22, of which No. The pins of No. 17 are No. 17 of the illumination board 676 on the accessory. It is connected to the electrical components mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 through the 17 pins.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 723 (b), No. A first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) are provided as electrical components between the 17 pin and the power source (7v power source in this example). There is.

  In this example, a plurality of resistors (first resistor 245b3 and second resistor 245b3 in this example) arranged in series between the sub-control board 245a and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example). 245b5, the first resistance 676b) total resistance value of 15 ohms, the current passing through the first resistance 676b is set to about 270 milliamperes, the brightness of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, power LED). (Light intensity) is increased.

<Lighting board on accessory>
Next, a circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described with reference to FIG. 724. FIG. 724 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 14 and an LED driver IC 3 that controls the light emission of these LEDs 1 to LED 14 are mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 of this example. LEDs 1 to 14 are full-color LEDs in which LED elements for the three primary colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are built.

<Lighting board / LED on accessory>
The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 1 to 3 are connected in series by separate signal lines L1 to L3, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements are connected. The side is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT2 of the LED driver IC3. Further, on the cathode side of the signal line L1 which connects the red (R) LED elements built in the LEDs 1 to LED3, a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is provided between the LED line and the LED driver IC3. The resistor R6 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, no resistance is provided in the signal lines L2 and L3 to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected, while the green (G) and blue (B) LEDs are used. By disposing the resistor R6 only in the signal line L1 to which the red (R) LED element having a higher voltage drop than the element is connected, the heat generation of the LED driver IC3 is suppressed.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) incorporated in each of the LEDs 4 to 6 are connected in series by separate signal lines L4 to L6, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements are connected. The side is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT3 to XOUT5 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L4 that connects the red (R) LED elements built in the LEDs 4 to 6 and between the LED driver IC3 and the first resistance value (680 ohms in this example). The resistor R7 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in the LEDs 7 and 8 are connected in series by separate signal lines L7 to L9, and the anode side of each LED element is It is connected to a power supply of a first voltage (7 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT6 to XOUT8 of the LED driver IC3. Further, on the cathode side of the signal line L7 that connects the red (R) LED element built in the LED7 and the LED8, a second resistance value (270 ohms in this example) is provided between the LED line and the LED driver IC3. The resistor R10 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, the value of the voltage supplied to the LEDs is varied depending on the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line, so that an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs is supplied. are doing.

  In this example, the power of the second voltage (12v) is supplied from the power supply board (not shown) to the sub-control board 245a, and then passes through the motor drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674. And is supplied to the accessory lighting board 676. In addition, the power source of the first voltage (7v) is generated in the sub control board 245a, and then is supplied to the accessory lighting board 676 through the motor drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674. Supplied. Furthermore, after the power supply of the third voltage (5v) is generated in the sub control board 245a, it passes through the motor drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, and the accessory peripheral board 674, and then the accessory lighting board 676 ( LED driver IC3, etc.).

  In addition, in this example, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line is changed depending on the number of red (R) LED elements connected to the signal line, so that the connected red (R) LED element The voltage drop value due to the red (R) LED element is configured to be uniform between the signal lines having different numbers.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 9 to 11 are connected in series by separate signal lines L10 to L12, and the anodes of the respective LED elements are connected. The side is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT9 to XOUT11 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L10 that connects the red (R) LED elements built in the LEDs 9 to 11 and between the LED driver IC3 and the first resistance value (680 ohms in this example). The resistor R8 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 12 to 14 are connected in series by separate signal lines L13 to L15, and the anodes of the respective LED elements are connected. The side is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT12 to XOUT14 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L13 that connects the red (R) LED elements built in the LEDs 12 to 14 with the LED driver IC3, a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is provided. The resistor R9 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series are connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v). Then, by connecting the signal lines L7 to L9, which connect the two full-color LEDs in series, to the first voltage (7v), an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs is supplied. .

<Lighting board / LED driver on accessory>
The LED driver IC3 includes a serial clock input terminal SCLK, a serial data input terminal SDA, an external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting a constant current output, and constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23. The constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) incorporate a fixed frequency PWM controller with 7-bit resolution (128 steps) and a constant current driver in order to set the LED to a specified brightness. Further, the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) are fixed by one resistor (in this example, the resistor R5 having a resistance value of 2.2 k ohms) connected to the external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting the constant current output. It is possible to adjust the value of the current passed through the current driver.

  The LED driver IC3 inputs the 8-bit length serial data through the serial clock input terminal SCLK and the serial data input terminal SDA to individually select the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels). The connected LEDs can be individually controlled by using different light emission data, or the connected LEDs can be collectively controlled by using the same light emission data by simultaneously selecting all the channels.

  That is, the LED driver IC3 includes the first LED (eg, LED1 to LED3) connected to the first signal line (eg, signal lines L1 to L3) and the second signal line (eg, signal line L7 to). By transmitting the same light emission data to the second LED (for example, LED7, LED8) connected to L9), the first LED and the second LED emit the same light. Can be controlled.

<Modification 1 of the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, a modified example 1 of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 725 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modified example 1 of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 724, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series are used as the power source of the second voltage (12v). While connecting, the signal lines L7 to L9, which connect two full-color LEDs in series, are connected to the first voltage (7v).

  In this example, the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect the three full color LEDs in series and the signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 that connect the two full color LEDs in series are set to the second voltage. The signal lines L7 to L9, which are connected to the power supply of (12v) and connect only one full color LED, are connected to the first voltage (7v).

  Further, among the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series, the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal lines L1 and L13 that connect the red (R) LED elements. In between, resistors R6 and R9 having a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) are respectively connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Further, among the signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 which connect two full color LEDs in series, the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal lines L4 and L10 which connect the red (R) LED element. In between, resistors R7 and R8 having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) are respectively connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Further, among the signal lines L7 to L9 for connecting only one full-color LED, a fourth resistor is provided between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 for connecting the red (R) LED element. A resistor R10 having a value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  That is, in this example, the resistance value of the resistor arranged in the signal line is changed in accordance with the voltage of the power source to be supplied and the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line. The voltage drop due to the red (R) LED element is configured to be substantially uniform between the voltage and the signal line in which the number of connected red (R) LED elements is different. It should be noted that a resistor having a resistance value necessary for reducing the voltage to the extent that heat generation of the LED driver IC3 is suppressed may be arranged, and the voltage of the supplied power source and the number of connected red (R) LED elements may be set. The value of the voltage drop due to the red (R) LED element may not be uniform between different signal lines.

<Modification 2 of the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, a modified example 2 of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 726 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modified example 2 of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 724, the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series are used as the power source of the second voltage (12v). While connecting, the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting the two full-color LEDs in series are connected to the power source of the first voltage (7v).

  In this example, the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series are connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v), and the signal lines that connect the two full-color LEDs in series. L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 are connected to a power source of a first voltage (7v), and signal lines L7 to L9 connecting only one full color LED are connected to a power source of a third voltage (5v). ing.

  That is, in this example, the voltage of the power supply connected to the signal line is changed according to the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line, so that an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs is supplied. are doing.

<Modification 3 of the lighting board on the accessory>
Next, a modified example 3 of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. FIG. 727 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modified example 3 of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 724, the green (G) or blue (B) LED is not provided with a resistor in the signal line to which the green (G) or blue (B) LED element is connected. An example has been shown in which a resistor is provided only in the signal line to which the red (R) LED element having a higher voltage drop than that is connected.

  In this example, in addition to the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, a resistor is provided also to the signal line to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected. ing.

  Of the signal lines L1 to L3 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series, on the cathode side of the signal line L1 that connects the red (R) LED element, between the LED driver IC3 and the first line. The resistor R6 having a resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L2 connecting the green (G) LED element. In between, a resistor R having a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with a green (G) LED element, and a signal line L3 connecting a blue (B) LED element is connected. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a first resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the LED element for blue (B) between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  Further, among the signal lines L4 to L6 connecting the two full-color LEDs in series, on the cathode side of the signal line L4 connecting the red (R) LED element, a third line is provided between the signal line L4 and the LED driver IC3. The resistor R7 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L5 connecting the green (G) LED element. In between, a resistor R having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the signal line L6 connecting the blue (B) LED element is connected. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the LED element of blue (B) between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  Further, among the signal lines L7 to L9 for connecting only one full-color LED, a fourth resistor is provided between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 for connecting the red (R) LED element. A resistor R10 having a value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L8 connecting the green (G) LED element. In between, a resistor R having a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the cathode of the signal line L9 connecting the blue (B) LED element. On the side, a resistor R having a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the LED element of blue (B) between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED driver IC 3.

  That is, in this example, the signal lines L1 to L3 that connect three full color LEDs in series, the signal lines L4 to L6 that connect two full color LEDs in series, and the signal that connects only one full color LED. In the lines L7 to L9, the resistance value of the resistor provided in the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected and the resistance value of the resistor provided in the signal line to which the green (G) LED element is connected And the resistance values of the resistors arranged on the signal lines to which the blue (B) LED elements are connected are set to the same resistance value.

  Further, among the signal lines L10 to L12 connecting the two full-color LEDs in series, on the cathode side of the signal line L10 connecting the red (R) LED element, a third line is provided between the signal line L10 and the LED driver IC3. The resistor R8 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L11 for connecting the green (G) LED element. In between, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with a green (G) LED element, and a signal line L12 connecting a blue (B) LED element is connected. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED element of blue (B) in series.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L10 to L12 that connect two full-color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor arranged in the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected and the green (G) The resistance values of the resistors arranged on the signal lines to which the blue and blue (B) LED elements are connected are different from each other, while the resistance values are arranged on the signal lines to which the green (G) LED element is connected. And the resistance value of the resistance disposed in the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected are set to the same resistance value.

  Further, among the signal lines L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series, the first side between the LED driver IC3 and the cathode side of the signal line L13 that connects the red (R) LED element. The resistor R9 having a resistance value (680 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the LED driver IC3 is connected to the cathode side of the signal line L14 for connecting the green (G) LED element. In between, a resistor R having a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with a green (G) LED element, and a signal line L15 connecting a blue (B) LED element is connected. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected between the LED driver IC 3 and the LED element of blue (B) in series.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L13 to L15 that connect the three full-color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor disposed in the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected and the green (G) The resistance value of the resistor disposed in the signal line connected to the LED element of No. 2 and the resistance value of the resistor disposed in the signal line connected to the blue (B) LED element are set to different resistance values.

  In this example, with respect to the resistance values of the resistors arranged in the signal lines to which the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) LED elements are connected, (1) when all have the same resistance value , (2) all have different resistance values, and (3) one of them has different resistance values, three cases have been described. Any one of these (1) to (3) One, a plurality, or all may be applied to the game table.

<Modification Example 4 of Illumination Board on Feature Material>
Next, a modified example 4 of the accessory illumination board 676 will be described. FIG. 728 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modified example 4 of the circuit configuration of the accessory lighting board 676.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 724, the No. of connector 674b on the accessory lighting board is shown. An example has been shown in which the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are arranged on the signal line L16 connecting the 17 pin and the power supply (7v power supply).

  In this example, by connecting the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) to the signal line L16 that connects the LED driver IC3 and the power source of the second voltage (7v), the first light emission is performed. The light emission of the means 676a (power LED) is controlled by the LED driver IC3.

  That is, in this example, the signal lines L7 to L9 that connect two full-color LEDs in series and the signal line L16 in which one first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is arranged are connected to the LED driver IC3 and It is connected in parallel with the power supply of the second voltage (7v).

<Other modifications of the accessory lighting board>
Next, another modification of the accessory lighting board 676 will be described with reference to FIG. 729.

  FIG. 729 (a) is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example in which the supply voltage is made different for each LED element forming the full-color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements forming the full-color LED, the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the first voltage (7v), and the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected. Is connected to a power source of a second voltage (12v).

  That is, in this example, the voltage to be supplied is varied according to the type of the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED, so that an appropriate voltage according to the characteristics of the LED element is supplied.

  FIG. 729 (b) is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example in which the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each LED element forming the full-color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements forming the full-color LED, the red (R) LED element is connected to the power source of the first voltage (7v) and the first LED driver (driver 1), and the green ( The G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to a second voltage (12v) power source and a second LED driver (driver 2). The first LED driver (driver 1) and the second LED driver (driver 2) may be electronic components mounted on the same board, or may be electronic components mounted on different boards. It may be.

  That is, in this example, the voltage to be supplied and the LED driver are made different according to the type of the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED, thereby supplying an appropriate voltage according to the characteristics of the LED element and an appropriate light emission. It is configured to control.

  In this example, the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each LED element, but the supply voltage and the LED driver may be different for each LED element, not for each LED element. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 729 (c), among the three types of LED elements forming the first full-color LED, only the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the third voltage (5v). Then, the other green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to the power source of the second voltage (12v), and all the three types of LED elements constituting the second full-color LED are set to the second voltage. Of the three types of LED elements forming the second full-color LED, only the red (R) LED element may be connected to the LED driver via a resistor by connecting to the (12v) power source.

<Example of LED arrangement on the accessory lighting board>
Next, with reference to FIG. 730, an example of the arrangement of LEDs on the accessory lighting board 676 will be described. Note that FIG. 730 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 712 and is a diagram for describing an arrangement example of LEDs on the accessory lighting board 676.

  In this example, the three full-color LEDs 1 to LED3 connected in series in FIG. 724 are arranged in the first substrate area AR1 on the upper left of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. This first substrate region AR1 is the substrate region of the light emitting substrate 716 that is closest to the first connector CN1 and the third connector CN3. In addition, the three full-color LEDs 4 to LED6 connected in series in FIG. 724 are arranged in the second substrate area AR2 at the lower left of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The second substrate area AR2 is a substrate area of the light emitting substrate 716 that is closest to the second connector CN2.

  Since the three full-color LEDs 1 to 3 and the LEDs 4 to 6 connected in series may have a lower brightness than the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 connected in series, it is necessary to intentionally place them in the board area near the connector. Therefore, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the connector is conspicuous due to the light emission of the LED and the aesthetic appearance of the decorative body is impaired.

  Further, in this example, the three full-color LEDs 9 to LED11 connected in series in FIG. 724 are arranged in the fourth substrate area AR4 on the upper right of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The fourth substrate area AR4 is a substrate area on the light emitting substrate 716 that is closest to the fourth connector CN4.

  Since the three full-color LEDs 9 to 11 connected in series may have lower brightness than the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 connected in series, by arranging them in the substrate area near the connector, In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the connector is conspicuous due to the light emission and the aesthetic appearance of the decorative body is impaired.

  Further, in this example, the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 connected in series in FIG. 724 are arranged in the third substrate area AR3 at the center of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The third substrate region AR3 is the substrate region farthest from the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the light emitting substrate 716, and is the substrate closest to the first light emitting means 676a (716a) composed of power LEDs. Area.

  With such a configuration, the synergistic effect of the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 and the power LED may increase the brightness in the vicinity of the center of the decorative body rather than the outer edge thereof, and may improve the effect.

  In addition, in this example, the LED driver IC3 in FIG. 724 is arranged between the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 in the third substrate area AR3, and another full-color LED is attached to the LED driver in the light-emitting substrate 716. IC3 is arranged evenly around the periphery. With such a configuration, the brightness of the LEDs on the light emitting substrate 716 can be made uniform, and the effect of production can be improved in some cases.

  The location of the LEDs on the accessory lighting board 676 is not limited to this example. For example, the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 connected in series in FIG. It may be arranged in any of the fifth substrate regions AR1, AR2, AR4, AR5. Further, in order to make the light emission of the power LED conspicuous, one LED7 of the two full-color LEDs 7 and 8 is arranged side by side on the right side of the LEDs 4 to 6 and the other LED 8 is arranged on the left side of the LEDs 12 to 14. May be arranged side by side.

  As described above, the gaming table (eg, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes LEDs (eg, full-color LEDs 1 to LED14 shown in FIG. 724) and a driver for controlling light emission of the LEDs (eg, figure A gaming board provided with an LED driver IC 3 shown at 724 and a substrate provided with a plurality of signal lines (also referred to as “pattern lines”) (for example, the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 724). Then, one of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line (for example, signal lines L7 to L9 shown in FIG. 724), and one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line. Signal lines (for example, the signal lines L1 to L3, or L4 to L6, or L10 to L12, or L13 to L15 illustrated in FIG. 724), and the first signal line is a first number (for example, two). ) The LE Is a signal line connected in series, and the second signal line is a signal line in which the LEDs of a second number (for example, three) are connected in series, and the first signal line is Is a signal line connected to the driver, the second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and the first signal line has a first voltage (for example, 7v). The second signal line is a signal line to which a second voltage (for example, 12v) is supplied, and in the first number and the second number, the second signal line is supplied. Is larger (for example, 2 <3), and the second voltage is higher (for example, 7v <12v) between the first voltage and the second voltage. It is a game table.

  According to the game table according to the present example, it is possible to supply an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs, and it may be possible to efficiently illuminate a plurality of LEDs. In addition, it may be possible to emit light differently depending on the location of the LED, and it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic on the substrate.

  The “signal line” according to the present invention can be restated as a “pattern line”. Further, the light emission control of the LED may be performed using the third voltage. Further, the first voltage, the second voltage, or the third voltage may be any of 5v, 7v, 12V, or any other voltage. Further, the driver may not be used. In addition, the first signal line and the second signal line may be connected to different drivers. For example, when the first driver and the second driver are provided as the driver, the first signal line One of the signal line and the second signal line is connected to the first driver, and the other signal line of the first signal line and the second signal line is connected to the second driver Good.

  Further, the driver includes the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter, referred to as “first LED”) and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter, “second LED”). It may be a driver that controls the light emission of the first LED and the light emission of the second LED to be the same by transmitting the same light emission data to the LED.

  With such a configuration, even when the number of LEDs connected by the signal line and the supplied voltage are different, the same light emission can be performed when the same light emission data is transmitted, In some cases, control can be simplified. In this example, it is possible to make the same light emission by the function of the driver (IC), but it is possible to make different light emission (light emission in which the brightness is made different for each LED) without using this function. It may be. Here, the difference in the way of shining is applied even if it cannot be visually confirmed.

  Further, the substrate is a substrate provided with a power LED (for example, the first light emitting means 676a shown in FIG. 724), and the power LED is a switching circuit (for example, a switching circuit 672e shown in 121 (b)). LED of which light emission is controlled by one, one of the plurality of signal lines is a third signal line (for example, the signal line L16 shown in FIG. 724), and the third signal line is the power. One LED is connected to the signal line, the third signal line is a signal line not connected to the driver, and the third signal line is connected to the first voltage and the second voltage. It may be a signal line to which one of the voltages (for example, 7v) is supplied.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to control the LED without increasing the number of signal lines having different voltages more than necessary. Note that, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 728, a structure in which the third signal line is connected to the driver may be used. Further, the same light emission control as that of the power LED may be performed without connecting a part of the LED to the driver.

  In addition, it may be provided with a movable means for performance (for example, a drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 710), and the substrate may be a substrate for causing the movable means for performance to emit light.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently control the light emission of the effect production movable means. The production movable means may include not only a structure in which the production movable means is movable by control, but also a means movable by a player's operation, for example, provided at a position operable by the player. You may include the said production | operation production means etc. which were produced. Further, it is not limited to the LED of the movable means for effect, and can be applied to, for example, an LED fixed to the frame of the game table or a monitor LED on the back side of the game table.

  Further, the substrate according to the present invention does not have to be a substrate that moves together with the production movable unit, and is also applied to a state in which the positional relationship with the substrate can emit light when the production movable unit moves. It Further, even if the signal line is connected to the same driver, it may be configured to emit light of different means in the game table, for example, one is the movable means for performance, the other is fixed in the vicinity thereof. It may be a decorative means.

  The LED is a full-color LED, and the full-color LED is an LED including LED elements of three primary colors (for example, red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the three primary color LEDs. The element is an LED element connected to different connection terminals of the driver, and in the first signal line and the second signal line, only a resistor (for example, a figure The resistors R6 to R9 shown at 724 may be provided.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce the voltage applied to the driver by arranging a resistor for the LED element of a color with a small voltage drop. The configuration may be such that resistors are provided in all the signal lines to which the LED elements of the three primary colors are connected, or resistors may not be provided in all the signal lines, which can be appropriately changed depending on the performance of the driver. is there.

  Further, the first LED and the second LED may be LEDs of the same type. With such a configuration, it may be possible to simplify the light emission control by the driver and reduce the control load.

  In addition, the game table (for example, a pachinko machine, a slot machine) according to this example is a game table including an LED, a driver that controls the light emission of the LED, and a board provided with a plurality of signal lines. Then, one of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, the first signal line, The first number of the LEDs (hereinafter, referred to as “first LED”) is a signal line connected in series, and the second signal line is the second number of the LEDs (hereinafter, referred to as “first LED”). “Second LED”) is a signal line connected in series, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and the second signal line is connected to the driver. The first LED and the second LED are the same kind of LED connected to each other. The first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, the second signal line is a signal line to which the first voltage is supplied, and the first number and The second number is a different number, and even if the same light emission data is transmitted to the first LED and the second LED, how the first LED shines and the second LED The gaming table may be characterized by different lighting methods.

  According to the game table according to the present example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as an effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, it may be possible to increase the variation due to the difference in how the light is emitted. In addition, the circuit configuration may be simplified by making the voltages supplied to the first and second signal lines the same.

  In addition, the game table (for example, a pachinko machine, a slot machine) according to this example is a game table including an LED, a driver that controls the light emission of the LED, and a board provided with a plurality of signal lines. Then, one of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, the first signal line, The LED is a signal line connected to the second signal line, the second signal line is a signal line connected to the LED, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, the first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, and the second signal line is a second signal line. A signal line to which a voltage is supplied, and in the first voltage and the second voltage, the second voltage is In addition, the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as “third LED”) and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter referred to as “fourth LED”). Even if the same light emission data is transmitted to the above), the way of illuminating the third LED and the way of illuminating the fourth LED are different from each other.

  According to the game table according to the present example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as an effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, it may be possible to increase the variation due to the difference in how the light is emitted. Further, by making the voltages supplied to the first and second signal lines different, it may be possible to perform optimal light emission control for the LEDs.

  In addition, the game table (for example, a pachinko machine, a slot machine) according to this example is a game table including an LED, a driver that controls the light emission of the LED, and a board provided with a plurality of signal lines. Then, one of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, the first signal line, The LED is a signal line connected to the second signal line, the second signal line is a signal line connected to the LED, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and between the LED (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth LED”) connected to the first signal line and the driver. A first resistor is provided and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter , "Sixth LED") and the driver, a second resistor is provided, and the resistance value of the first resistor and the resistance value of the second resistor are different from each other. And, even when the same light emission data is transmitted to the fifth LED and the sixth LED, the way the fifth LED shines and the way the sixth LED shines are different. It may be a gaming table.

  According to the game table according to the present example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as an effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, it may be possible to increase the variation due to the difference in how the light is emitted. Further, by making the resistance values of the resistors connected to the first and second signal lines different, it may be possible to perform optimal light emission control for the LED.

<Modification of board around the board>
Next, a modified example of the board peripheral substrate will be described. FIG. 731 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the board peripheral board 872 according to the modification.

  A board peripheral board 872 shown in FIG. 731 is a board corresponding to the board peripheral board 672 described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 722. On the board of the board peripheral board 872, a first resistor 872a, a second resistor 872b, a switching circuit 872c including an N-channel MOS FET, a third resistor 872d, and a fourth resistor 872e are provided as electrical components. Is provided.

  The first resistor 872a is a resistor for stabilizing the operation of the switching circuit 872c. The second resistor 872b is used when the input signal of the switching circuit 872c is open or in a floating state (for example, a half-inserted state of the connector, or until the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 872c is reached after supplying the drive voltage). (State of), it is a ground resistance for setting the gate-source voltage of the switching circuit 872c to 0v. The third resistor 872d and the fourth resistor 872e are current setting resistors of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) mounted on the accessory lighting board 676 (see FIG. 45 and FIG. 723).

  A board LED PWM signal having a predetermined drive voltage (5 v in this example) is input from the motor drive board 245b (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 721), and the predetermined voltage (greater than the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 872c) is sufficient. A voltage through which the drain current flows. In this example, when an ON signal of about 1.2v) is applied, the switching circuit 872c is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) is configured to light up. ing.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed of turning on / off the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) can be made faster than in the case where other switching elements are applied. In addition to being able to do so, it may be possible to improve the heat dissipation.

  Further, on the board peripheral board 872, as signal lines (patterns) for relaying signal lines connected to the sensors of various movable bodies, for example, the frog lifting / lowering connected to the frog lifting / lowering sensor of the fall deploying accessory 712 is performed. A signal line for relaying the upper sensor signal (a signal line connecting NO.15 of connector CN3 and NO.18 of connector CN4) and a Haniwa launch sensor connected to the Haniwa launch sensor of launch vehicle unit 800. Signal lines for relaying signals (a signal line connecting No. 18 of connector CN3 and No. 6 of connector CN7) are provided.

  Further, on the board peripheral board 872, as a signal line (pattern) for relaying a signal line connected to a motor for driving various movable bodies, for example, for the frog expansion right motor A of the drop expansion accessory 712. A signal line for relaying a drive signal to be connected (a signal line connecting NO.13 of connector CN2 and NO.1 of connector CN4) and a drive signal connected to Haniwa motor A of launch accessory unit 800. Signal line (signal line connecting No. 17 of connector CN2 and No. 1 of connector CN7) for relaying.

  Although an N-channel MOS FET is used as the switching circuit 872c in this example, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used. In addition, as shown in FIG. 732, the first resistor 872a serving as the operation stabilizing resistor may be arranged at a position closer to the switching circuit 872c (a position closer to the power supply voltage) than the second resistor 872b serving as a ground resistor. Alternatively, only the third resistor 872d (only one resistor) may be applied as the current setting resistor.

  Further, instead of (or in addition to) disposing the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) on the accessory lighting board 676, the first light emitting means 676a is provided on the board peripheral board 872. (Power LED) may be provided.

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 722, the plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 14 (full color LEDs) and the LED driver IC 3 that controls the light emission of these LEDs 1 to LED 14 are mounted on the accessory lighting board 676, and No. of connector 674b on the accessory lighting board side. The first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) may be provided on the signal line L16 that connects the 17 pin and the power supply (7v power supply).

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 728, the first resistor 676b and the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) are connected to the signal line L16 that connects the LED driver IC3 and the power supply of the second voltage (7v). By doing so, the light emission of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED) may be controlled by the LED driver IC3.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51) according to this example includes a plurality of rendering means (for example, a drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIGS. A board (for example, a sub-control board 245a, a motor drive board 245b, a board peripheral board 672, a accessory peripheral board 674, and an accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIGS. 40B and 718B). In the gaming table, one of the plurality of boards is a first board (for example, board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 46A, board peripheral board 872 shown in FIG. 731), and One of the plurality of substrates is a second substrate (for example, the accessory-side illumination substrate 676 shown in FIG. 46A and FIGS. 724 to 728), and one of the plurality of substrates is , A third substrate (eg, FIG. 40 (b) or FIG. 18 (b) is a sub-control board 245a), wherein the first board is a board that does not move (for example, a board fixed to a fixed object such as a game board 200, an illumination board), and the second board Is a substrate that does not move (for example, a substrate fixed to a fixed object such as the game board 200, an illumination substrate), the second substrate is a substrate that constitutes a part of the rendering means, The second substrate is a substrate electrically connected to the first substrate, and the second substrate is a microprocessor (for example, a basic circuit shown in FIG. 40A or FIG. 718A). 402) is a substrate to which a control signal (for example, a board LED PWM signal shown in FIG. 45A, FIG. 724 to FIG. 728, etc.) relating to the rendering means output from the output device can be input, and the third substrate is the Control board with microprocessor Yes, the first substrate is a substrate provided with a switching circuit (for example, the switching circuit 872c illustrated in FIGS. 731 and 732), and the second substrate is a light emitting unit (for example, FIG. 46A). , A board provided with the first light emitting means 676a) of the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIGS. 724 to 728, and the light emitting means is a means connected in series with the switching circuit. It is a characteristic game console.

  According to the game table of this example, since the switching circuit is provided on the first substrate that does not move, it may be possible to prevent the switch from malfunctioning or failing in connection with the operation of the rendering means. In addition, it is possible to reduce the influence of specification changes etc. on the first and second boards on the third board, and to suppress design changes etc. on the third board as much as possible, shortening the development period and lowering the cost. You may be able to

  Further, the light emitting means may be a high brightness LED (for example, a power LED) or a combination of a high brightness LED and a full color LED. Further, the first substrate is provided with a first resistor (for example, the third resistor 672f of the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 46A, the third resistor 872d of the board peripheral board 872 shown in FIG. 731). The second substrate is a substrate provided with a second resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIGS. 46A and 724 to 728). Yes, the second resistor is a resistor connected in series with the first resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the light emitting means, the second resistor is It may be a resistor connected in series with the light emitting means. The first substrate is a substrate provided with a resistor for stabilizing the operation of the switching circuit (for example, the first resistor 872a of the board peripheral substrate 872 shown in FIGS. 731 and 732). One substrate is a resistor (for example, a board peripheral substrate 872 shown in FIGS. 731 and 732) for setting 0 V between the gate and the source of the switching circuit when the input signal of the switching circuit is open. It may be a substrate provided with two resistors 872a).

  Further, only one of the light emitting means is connected in series with the switching circuit, and the second substrate is a light emitting means different from the light emitting means (hereinafter, referred to as “second light emitting means”). .) Is provided, and the second light emitting means is a means (for example, LED1 to LED14 (shown in FIGS. 724 to 728) configured by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, three LEDs of three primary colors). Full color LED)), and the second substrate may be a substrate provided with a driver IC (for example, the LED driver IC 3 shown in FIGS. 724 to 728) for controlling the second light emitting means. Good.

  The control board is a sub-control board (for example, the sub-control board 245a shown in FIG. 40B or 718 (b)), and the sub-control board is different from the control signal. The board may be provided with a terminal capable of inputting and outputting a control signal related to effect control (for example, effect control preliminary output port and effect control auxiliary input port shown in FIG. 43 (a)). Further, a current value required to turn on the switching circuit may be smaller than a current value required to turn on the light emitting means.

  Further, the first substrate may be a substrate not provided with a microprocessor, and the second substrate may be a substrate not provided with a microprocessor. Further, a relay board (for example, a accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 45A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board via the relay board. The relay substrate may be a substrate on which no resistor is provided, and the resistance value of the second resistor may be the same as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  Further, the first resistor may be a resistor for setting a current value flowing in the power LED, and the second resistor may be a resistor for setting a current value flowing in the power LED. . Further, one of the plurality of substrates is a fourth substrate, and the fourth substrate is a motor drive substrate without a CPU (for example, the motor drive substrate shown in FIG. 40B or the like). Board 245b), the fourth board is a board electrically connected to the third board via a board-to-board connector, and the first board is a board from the motor drive board. A board to which the output control signal is input may be used, and the second board may be a board to which the control signal output from the motor drive board is not input.

  Further, the game table according to the present example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, or the slot machine 2000 shown in FIG. 51) is a production means (for example, a drop deployment accessory 712 shown in FIG. 20 or 710), A plurality of boards (for example, the sub-control board 245a, the motor drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, the accessory peripheral board 674, and the accessory illumination board 676 shown in FIGS. 40B and 718B), A gaming table comprising a plurality of light emitting means and a driver IC (for example, an LED driver IC3 shown in FIGS. 724 to 728), wherein one of the plurality of substrates is a first substrate (for example, 46A, a board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 46A and a board peripheral board 872 shown in FIG. 731, wherein one of the plurality of boards is a second board (for example, FIG. 46A). 724 to shown in FIG. 728 An on-illumination board 676), one of the plurality of boards is a third board (for example, the sub-control board 245a shown in FIG. 40B or 718 (b)), and One substrate is a non-moving substrate (for example, a substrate fixed to a fixed object such as the game board 200, an electric decoration substrate), and the second substrate is a non-moving substrate (for example, fixing the game board 200 or the like). A substrate fixed to an object, an illumination substrate), the second substrate is a substrate forming a part of the rendering means, and the second substrate is electrically connected to the first substrate. The second substrate is a connected substrate, and the second substrate is a control signal (for example, a diagram) related to the rendering means output from a microprocessor (for example, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 40A or 718A). 45 (a), the board LED shown in FIGS. 724 to 728, etc. A substrate capable of inputting a WM signal), the third substrate is a control substrate provided with the microprocessor, and the first substrate is a switching circuit (for example, switching circuits shown in FIGS. 731 and 732). A circuit 872c) is provided on the substrate, and a part of the plurality of light emitting means is a light emitting means on the first light emitting means (for example, the accessory shown in FIG. 46A and FIGS. 724 to 728). A first light emitting means 676a) of the illumination substrate 676, a part of the plurality of light emitting means is a second light emitting means, and the second light emitting means is the first light emitting means. Light emitting means different from the means (for example, LED1 to LED14 (full color LED) shown in FIGS. 724 to 728), the first light emitting means is a light emitting means connected to the switching circuit, and the second light emitting means The light emitting means is a light emitting means connected to the driver IC, and is a gaming table.

  According to the game table of this example, since the switching circuit is provided on the first substrate that does not move, it may be possible to prevent the switch from malfunctioning or failing in connection with the operation of the rendering means. In addition, it is possible to reduce the influence of specification changes etc. on the first and second boards on the third board, and to suppress design changes etc. on the third board as much as possible, shortening the development period and lowering the cost. You may be able to In addition, since a plurality of light emitting means are provided, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, the driver IC may be an IC provided on the second substrate. Further, the first substrate is provided with a first resistor (for example, the third resistor 672f of the board peripheral board 672 shown in FIG. 46A, the third resistor 872d of the board peripheral board 872 shown in FIG. 731). The second substrate is a substrate provided with a second resistor (for example, the second resistor 676c of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIG. 46A). The substrate is a substrate provided with a third resistor (for example, the first resistor 676b of the accessory lighting board 676 shown in FIGS. 46A and 724 to 728), and the second resistor is A resistor connected in series with the first resistor, the first resistor is a resistor connected in series with the first light emitting means, the second resistor is the first light emission. Means connected in series with the means, the third resistance being the resistance of the driver IC. A resistor connected to the child, the third resistor may be a resistor provided between the driver IC said second light emitting means. Further, the first light emitting means may be one high brightness LED (for example, a power LED). The second light emitting means is a full-color LED, and the three primary color elements (for example, R (red), G (green), and B (blue) LED elements) of the full-color LED are respectively provided in the driver IC. It may be connected to another terminal.

  The control board is a sub-control board (for example, the sub-control board 245a shown in FIG. 40B or 718 (b)), and the sub-control board is different from the control signal. The board may be provided with a terminal capable of inputting and outputting a control signal related to effect control (for example, effect control preliminary output port and effect control auxiliary input port shown in FIG. 43 (a)). Further, a current value required to turn on the switching circuit may be smaller than a current value required to turn on the light emitting means.

  Further, the first substrate may be a substrate not provided with a microprocessor, and the second substrate may be a substrate not provided with a microprocessor. Further, a relay board (for example, a accessory peripheral board 674 shown in FIG. 45A) is provided, and the second board is a board electrically connected to the first board via the relay board. The relay substrate may be a substrate on which no resistor is provided, and the resistance value of the second resistor may be the same as the resistance value of the first resistor.

  Further, the first resistor may be a resistor for setting a current value flowing in the power LED, and the second resistor may be a resistor for setting a current value flowing in the power LED. . Further, one of the plurality of substrates is a fourth substrate, and the fourth substrate is a motor drive substrate without a CPU (for example, the motor drive substrate shown in FIG. 40B or the like). Board 245b), the fourth board is a board electrically connected to the third board via a board-to-board connector, and the first board is a board from the motor drive board. A board to which the output control signal is input may be used, and the second board may be a board to which the control signal output from the motor drive board is not input.

<Substrate of movable body 1>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 1 will be described. FIG. 733 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing a part of the members forming the movable body 1.

  As described with reference to FIG. 658, the movable body 1 is a deformable movable object unit whose outer shape is deformed, and includes the base portion 10, the movable portions 11, 12, and 14 and the structure body 16. The movable parts 11, 12, and 14 are configured to be displaceable with respect to the base part 10.

  The movable portion 11 is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 11a, a substrate 11c (hereinafter, also referred to as "second substrate 11c"), a lens member 11e, and a cover body 11f. Has been formed. A plurality of light emitting elements 11d (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 11c in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover body 11f covers the lens member 11e.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape symmetrical with the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and includes a base portion 12a and a substrate 12c (hereinafter, referred to as a "third substrate 12c"). Yes, the lens member 12e and the cover body 12f are laminated. A plurality of light emitting elements 12d (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 12c in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover body 12f covers the lens member 12e.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-shaped arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e (hereinafter, also referred to as "first substrate 14e"), a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h. Has been formed. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a left and right two-member configuration, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14f (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the substrate 14e in the longitudinal direction.

  The structure 16 includes a front base body 16A, a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover body 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16b (LEDs in this example) are mounted on the board 16B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16b are arranged in a plane, and the structure 16 can emit light as a whole. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover body 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover body 16D can be provided with a decorative shape, pattern, or color, and in this example, is provided with an eye-shaped shape.

<Substrate of movable body 1 / first substrate>
Next, the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 734 (a) is a front view showing the front surface of the first substrate 14e, and FIG. 734 (b) is a rear view showing the back surface of the first substrate 14e.

  The first substrate is a double-sided substrate composed of a front surface (a surface on the side covered by the cover body 14h) and a back surface (a surface on the side not covered by the cover body 14h). On the front surface shown in FIG. 734 (a), almost the entire area is a mounting area OA on which electronic components and the like can be mounted, while on the back surface shown in FIG. 734 (b), the mounting area provided in the central part It is divided into an OA and a non-mounting area NOA (blackened area in FIG. 734 (b)) provided on both left and right sides of the mounting area OA.

  As shown in FIG. 734 (a), on the surface of the first substrate 14e, eight full-color LEDs 1 to LED8 are provided as light emitting elements 14f at substantially equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the first substrate 14e. And the eight full-color LEDs 1 to LED8 and signal line patterns and vias that electrically connect various electrical components (LED driver IC1 and the like) mounted on the back surface of the first substrate 14e. Has been formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 734 (b), in the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e, an LED driver for controlling light emission of the full-color LEDs 1 to LED8 mounted on the front surface of the first substrate 14e. The IC1 and various electric components (resistors, capacitors, etc.) are mounted, and the pattern of signal lines connecting the driver IC1 and various electric components, the driver IC1, and various electric components mounted on the surface of the first substrate 14e. Patterns such as signal lines for connecting (eight full-color LEDs 1 to LED8, etc.), vias, and a ground region connected to the ground are formed.

  The non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed. In this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided on both the left and right sides of the mounting area OA. There is. Further, a plurality of through holes 14g used for positioning when fixing the first substrate 14e to the cover body 14h are formed in the non-mounting area NOA.

<Circuit structure of movable body 1 / first substrate>
Next, the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 735. Note that FIG. 735 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 8 and an LED driver IC 1 that controls light emission of these LEDs 1 to LED 8 are mounted on the first substrate 14e of this example. LEDs 1 to 8 are full-color LEDs in which LED elements of three primary colors of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are built. Although not shown, the circuit configurations of the second substrate 11c (the substrate 11c of the movable portion 11) and the third substrate 12c (the substrate 12c of the movable portion 12) are the same as those of the first substrate 14e. Is.

  The LED elements of the three primary colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 1 to 8 are respectively connected to different signal lines L1 to L24, and the anode side of each LED element is It is connected to a power supply of one voltage (5v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is individually connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 of the LED driver IC1. In this example, the resistor is not provided between the LED element and the LED driver IC 1, but a resistor may be provided.

  Since the LED driver IC1 is the same LED driver as the LED driver IC3 described with reference to FIG. 724, the description thereof will be omitted. However, in this example, the LED driver IC1 has an external resistor connection terminal REXT for setting a constant current output. It is unused.

<Substrate of Movable Body 1 / Relationship between First Substrate and Movable Parts 11 and 12>
Next, the relationship between the first substrate 14e and the movable portions 11 and 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 736 is a rear view of the movement of the movable portions 11 and 12 as seen from the rear of the movable body 11.

  736 (a) shows the initial position of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14, and FIG. 736 (d) shows the position (moving position) after the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are moved. 736 (b) and (c) show intermediate positions 1 and 2 between the initial position and the moving position, respectively. The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be deformed from the initial position to the moving position via the intermediate position 1 and the intermediate position 2, and can be returned from the moving position to the initial position via the intermediate position 2 and the intermediate position 1. .

  As shown in FIGS. 736 (a) to (d), the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is located behind the mounting area OA when the movable parts 11 and 12 are operated (first (When viewed from the rear of the substrate 14e), it is a region that does not overlap the movable portions 11 and 12 (region that does not overlap).

  On the other hand, the non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is located behind the non-mounting area NOA (when viewed from the rear of the first substrate 14e) when the movable portions 11 and 12 are operated. , 12 may overlap with a part (region that may overlap).

<Modification 1 of non-mounting area>
Next, Modification 1 of the non-mounting area will be described with reference to FIG. 737. It should be noted that FIG. 737 is a diagram for explaining the modified example 1 of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming table according to this example is a first ornament 602 fixedly arranged at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 when viewed from the front, and a second ornament that is horizontally movable below the ornamental symbol display device 208. And 604. In this example, the first decorative body 602 is a decorative body having a shape imitating a rabbit and a stump, and the second decorative body 604 is a decorative body having a shape imitating a turtle.

  The second ornament 604 is configured to be capable of reciprocating at least between a first position shown in FIG. 737 (a) and a second position shown in FIG. The first position is a position where the second decoration 604 does not overlap (do not overlap) the first decoration 602, and the second position is a part of the second decoration 604 is the first position. It is a position where it overlaps (overlaps) with a part of the decorative body 602.

  As shown in FIG. 737 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (blackened area in FIG. 737 (c)) is provided on the back surface of the second decorative body 604. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the second decorative body 604 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 737 (d), When the second decoration body 604 is moved to the second position, it may overlap a part of the first decoration body 604 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in a rear view of the second decoration body 604). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the second decoration body 604, which is a movable object, is provided with the non-mounting area NOA, but the first decoration body 602, which is a fixed object, is not provided with the non-mounting area NOA. . Note that the second decorative body 604 may be formed using one substrate or a plurality of substrates. Further, the non-mounting area NOA may be composed of a plurality of substrates.

<Modification 2 of non-mounting area>
Next, Modification 2 of the non-mounting area will be described with reference to FIG. 738. Note that FIG. 738 is a diagram for explaining the second modification of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming table according to this example is a third decorative body 612 fixedly arranged at the lower right of the decorative pattern display device 208 when viewed from the front, and a fourth decorative body that can be horizontally moved below the decorative pattern display device 208. 614, and. In this example, the third decorative body 612 is a decorative body having a shape imitating an octopus pot, and the fourth decorative body 614 is a decorative body having a shape imitating an octopus.

  The fourth ornament 614 is configured to be capable of reciprocating at least between a first position shown in FIG. 738 (a) and a second position shown in FIG. 738 (b). The first position is a position where the fourth decoration body 614 does not overlap (do not overlap) the third decoration body 612, and the second position is a part of the fourth decoration body 614 is the third position. It is a position where it overlaps (overlaps) with a part of the decorative body 612.

  As shown in FIG. 738 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (blackened area in FIG. 738 (c)) is provided on the back surface of the fourth decoration body 614. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the fourth decoration body 614 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 738 (d), When the fourth decoration body 614 moves to the second position, the fourth decoration body 614 may overlap a part of the third decoration body 614 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in a rear view of the fourth decoration body 614). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 738 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (blackened area in FIG. 738 (c)) is also arranged on the back surface of the third decorative body 612. It is set up. The non-mounting area NOA of the third decorative body 612 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 738 (d), When the fourth decoration body 614 moves to the second position, the fourth decoration body 614 may overlap a part of the fourth decoration body 612 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in a rear view of the third decoration body 612). It is a certain area (area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided in both the fourth decorative body 614, which is a movable object, and the third decorative body 612, which is a fixed object. Note that the third decoration body 612 or the fourth decoration body 614 may be formed using one substrate or a plurality of substrates. Further, each non-mounting area NOA may be composed of a plurality of substrates.

<Movable body 3>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 3 will be described. FIG. 739 is a circuit configuration diagram of the substrate of the display device 34 that constitutes the movable body 3, and FIG. 740 (a) is a front view of the substrate of the display device 34 that constitutes the movable body 3.

  As shown in FIG. 740 (a), on the surface of the substrate of the display device 34, a light emitting element L11 arranged at a position serving as a rotation center of the display device 34 and a plurality of light emitting elements arranged radially from the rotation center. Columns LA1 to LA6. In this example, the number of light emitting element rows LA is 6, and they are arranged at equal pitches in the circumferential direction.

  In this example, the light emitting element L11 arranged at the center is configured by one full color LED 32 whose emission is controlled by the LED driver IC5. In addition, the first light emitting element row LA1 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 1, LED2 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2 and LEDs 9 to 16 whose total light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC3, totaling 10 It is composed of individual full-color LEDs.

  In addition, the second light emitting element row LA2 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 3 to LED5 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2 and LED17 to LED24 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC4, which is 11 in total. It is composed of individual full-color LEDs. The third light emitting element row LA3 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 25 to LED31 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC5 and LED59 to LED61 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC9. It is composed of individual full-color LEDs.

  In addition, the fourth light emitting element row LA4 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 33 to 40 whose emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 6 and LEDs 62 to LED 64 whose emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 9 in total of 11 It is composed of individual full-color LEDs. The fifth light emitting element row LA5 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 41 to 48 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 7 and LEDs 57 and 58 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 9 in total of 10 LEDs. It is composed of individual full-color LEDs.

  The sixth light emitting element row LA6 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes LEDs 49 to LED56 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC8 and LED6 to LED8 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC2. It is composed of individual full-color LEDs.

  FIG. 740 (b) is a rear view of the substrate of the display device 34 that constitutes the movable body 3. As shown in FIG. 7B, the LED drivers IC2 to IC9 and the latch circuit IC1 shown in FIG. 739 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate of the display device 34 at equal pitches in the circumferential direction of the display device 34. By arranging the electronic components at equal pitches in the circumferential direction in this way, the load applied to the slip ring 620 when the display device 34 is rotated can be reduced, and the life of the display device 34 can be extended. Sometimes you can.

  As described above, the gaming table (eg, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to this example is a gaming table including movable means (eg, movable body 1 shown in FIG. 736) capable of executing the first operation. The movable means is a means provided with a first substrate (for example, the first substrate 14e shown in FIG. 736), and one surface of the first substrate has a first region (for example, The non-mounting area NOA shown in Fig. 736. The patterning area, the ground, the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed) and the second area (for example, the mounting area OA shown in Fig. 736). In the case where a certain means (for example, the movable portions 11 and 12 shown in FIG. 736) is located behind the first area in relation to the first operation performed by the movable means. And the second region is the first region Except for the area, in the first area and the second area, the area of the pattern line formed in the first area is larger than that of the pattern line formed in the second area. It is a game table characterized by being smaller than the area.

  According to the game table according to the present example, even if the first substrate and a certain means come into contact with each other due to vibration or the like, it may be possible to prevent the pattern of the first substrate from being damaged, and the pattern may be moved. It is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the means.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned “a certain means may be located behind the first area in relation to the first operation being performed by the movable means” means the first operation. It suffices that a certain means is located on the way, a certain means is located at the time when the first operation is finished, or a certain way is located on the way. Further, the “second area” according to the present invention may include an area in which a certain means is not located behind. For example, it is difficult to provide the pattern line and the ground when the region where some means is not located is divided by the first region due to the operation of the movable body.

  In addition, the game table which does not have the movable means, that is, the first substrate is provided, and one surface of the first substrate is composed of a first region and a second region. There is a case where a certain means (for example, a movable body) is located behind the area of, the second area is an area excluding the first area, and the first area and the second area. In the area, even if the gaming table, the area of the pattern line formed in the first area is smaller than the area of the pattern line formed in the second area. Good.

  Further, in the first region and the second region, the first region may be wider than the second region.

  With such a configuration, by arranging the patterns of the first substrate in the second region collectively, it may be possible to further prevent the patterns of the first substrate from being damaged. The second area may be wider than the first area.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with LEDs (for example, LED1 to LED8 shown in FIG. 734 (a)), and the LED is the other surface of the first substrate, and The LED is arranged at least in a region opposite to the first region, and the LEDs are connected by a pattern line on the other surface of the first substrate via a via formed in the second region. May be.

  Further, the LED may be arranged on the other surface of the first substrate and on the opposite side of the second area.

  With such a configuration, the emission range of light from the LED can be widened, and the effect effect can be improved in some cases. The LED may be provided on the back side of the board of the game table.

  Further, a driver (for example, the LED driver IC1 shown in FIG. 734 (b)) that controls the light emission of the LED may be provided, and the driver may be provided in the second region.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the driver inconspicuous by providing the driver on the back side of the substrate (the side not visible to the player). Note that the driver may be provided in the first region, and in this case, when the movable means and the first substrate come into contact with each other, the light emission of the LED may be affected, which may lead to detection of malfunction of the movable means. There is. Further, the driver may be provided on the other surface side, which is effective in the case where the space behind the movable means cannot be secured. In some cases, the driver can be arranged by using the distance from the LED to the lens (decorative means).

  Further, the pattern line may be formed only in the second region. In addition, a part of the pattern lines may be formed in the first region. In this case, for example, one of the pattern lines of the plurality of LEDs is formed in the first region and the movable means is formed. When the first substrate and the first substrate come into contact with each other, the malfunction may be found due to the abnormal light emission of the LED regarding this pattern line.

  Further, the ground on the first substrate may be formed only in the second region. Further, part of the ground may be formed in the first region, or the first region may be entirely configured as the ground. In this case, if the area of the ground is sufficient, malfunction may occur. On the other hand, it may have little impact.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with an LED, and the movable means is a means provided with a first decoration means (for example, a cover body 14h shown in FIG. 733) on the front side of the LED. Yes, at least a part of the area behind the first area may not be covered by the first decoration means.

  With such a configuration, the space in the front-back direction of the movable means may be reduced. The first region may be covered with the decoration means.

  Further, the movable means is a means composed of a plurality of movable bodies, and one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, the movable portion 14 shown in FIG. 733), One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the movable portion 11 or the movable portion 12 shown in FIG. 733), and the first substrate serves as the first movable body. The provided substrate, the certain means is the second movable body, and the second movable body is the first movable body in relation to the first operation of the movable means. It may be a movable body located behind the movable body.

  Further, the game area is provided with a second decoration means (for example, a first decoration body 602 shown in FIG. 737 or a third decoration body 612 shown in FIG. 738), and the certain means means the second decoration means. The second decoration means may be a means located behind the first area in relation to the first operation performed by the movable means.

  With such a configuration, the pattern and the ground may be protected when the first substrate interferes with other means.

  In addition, the first region may be in a state in which the entire copper foil serves as a ground. Further, the first substrate may be a multi-layer substrate having three or more layers. Further, the light emission control of the LED does not need to use a driver, and may be configured to emit light using a switching circuit such as an FET. The driver may be serial communication or parallel communication. Further, the LEDs may be power LEDs or other LEDs in addition to full-color LEDs. Alternatively, a resistor may be provided between the driver and the LED to suppress heat generation of the driver.

  Further, the movable means can be applied to a movable body other than the movable body 1, and may be a movable body arranged in the frame of the game table in addition to the movable body arranged in the game board. Further, the “first operation” of the movable means is not limited to the rotation of the movable means, and includes other operations such as reciprocating movement, vibration, expansion / contraction, opening / closing, and attachment / detachment from the game table.

<Board via>
Next, with reference to FIG. 741, a via of a certain substrate included in the game table according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 741 is a diagram in which a part of a certain substrate is extracted and shown.

  An outer edge portion 630a of the decoration means 630 (for example, the movable portions 11, 12, 14, etc. of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. 736) included in the game table according to the present embodiment is plated. Here, the plating treatment means a treatment of depositing a thin metal film of gold, silver, nickel, chromium or the like on the surface of the decoration means 630. For example, electroplating such as zinc plating or copper plating, nickel plating, or the like. Electroless plating, chemical conversion treatment, and other surface treatments are applicable.

  Further, on the double-sided board included in the decoration means 630, a plurality of vias 632 for electrically connecting the front surface and the back surface of the board are formed in the vicinity of the outer edge portion 630a of the decoration means 630. The via 632 is configured to be connected to the ground on the front surface of the double-sided board and not to be connected to a pattern such as a signal line on the rear surface of the double-sided board. The method of forming the via 632 is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known plating through hole method, a conductive paste filling method, or the like can be applied.

  Further, on the back surface of the double-sided board, a plurality of full-color LEDs 634 are arranged at positions farther from the outer edge portion 630a than the vias 632. The vias of this example can be applied to various types of illumination boards (boards provided with LEDs) in a game table, or can be applied to other types of boards.

<Modification of via on substrate>
Next, a modified example of the via of the substrate will be described with reference to FIG. 742. It should be noted that FIG. 742 is a diagram showing a part of the substrate on which the vias of the modified example are formed.

  The decoration means 640 shown in FIG. 742 (a) is made of a circular member, and the outer edge portion 640a thereof is plated over the entire circumference. In addition, a plurality of vias 642 are formed at equal pitches on the double-sided substrate of the decoration means 640 so as to follow the shape of the outer edge portion 640a. Further, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full-color LEDs 644 are arranged at positions farther from the outer edge portion 640a than the vias 642.

  The decoration means 650 shown in FIG. 742 (b) is made of a rectangular member, and a plating treatment portion 650b that is subjected to a plating treatment is formed on a part of the outer edge portion 650a. In addition, on the double-sided substrate of the decoration unit 650, a plurality of vias 652 are formed at equal pitch inside the plating processing unit 650b. Further, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full-color LEDs 654 are arranged at positions farther from the outer edge portion 650a than the vias 652. The via 652 of this example is formed in one corner of the full-color LED 654 and has an L-shape in plan view.

  The decoration means 660 shown in FIG. 742 (c) is made of a rectangular member, and the outer edge portion 660a thereof is plated over the entire circumference. Further, on the double-sided substrate of the decoration means 600, a plurality of vias 662 are formed at equal pitches inside the outer edge portions 660a on two opposite sides so as to be along the outer edge portions 660a. Further, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full-color LEDs 664 are arranged at positions farther from the outer edge portion 660a than the vias 662.

<Other measures against static electricity>
Next, another countermeasure against static electricity applied to the gaming table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 743. 743 is a diagram showing the movement of a certain accessory (decoration means) in time series.

  The accessory (decoration means) 670 according to this example includes a disk-shaped rotating body 672 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor (not shown), and a metal light-shielding piece 674 attached to the outer edge of the rotating body 672. A photo sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the passage of the light blocking piece 674 and an illumination substrate (not shown) provided on the back surface of the rotating body 672 are configured.

  In this example, in order to reliably detect the passage of the metal light shielding piece 674 by the photo sensor, the interval between the light emitting element and the light receiving element forming the photo sensor is narrowed. For this reason, static electricity is easily generated between the light shielding piece 674 and the photo sensor, but in this example, by connecting the ground wire from the illumination substrate to the light shielding piece 674, the light is accumulated in the light shielding piece 674. The static electricity is configured to escape to the lighting board side.

  As described above, the gaming table (eg, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present example is provided with decoration means (eg, movable parts 11, 12, 14 of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. 736) provided in the game area. ) And a substrate (for example, the substrate 630 shown in FIG. 741), wherein the decoration means is at least partially plated (for example, electroplating such as zinc plating or copper plating, nickel plating). Electroless plating), the substrate is a substrate provided with an electronic component, the substrate is a substrate formed with a via that is not connected to the pattern line, the via, It is a game table characterized by being formed in plural in a certain direction.

  According to the game table according to the present example, there is a case where the via can be used to absorb the static electricity accumulated in the game table and the game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.), and the game table having a characteristic board is provided. it can.

  Further, the via may be formed at a position closer to the decoration means than the electronic component. With such a configuration, the malfunction of the electronic component may be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the decoration means by the via.

  Further, the plating may be applied to the outer edge of the decoration means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb the static electricity accumulated on the game table, the game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.) and the like.

  Further, the via may be formed along an outer edge of the decoration means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb the static electricity accumulated on the game table, the game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.) and the like.

  Further, the vias may be formed at equal pitches in the certain direction. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb the static electricity accumulated on the game table, the game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.) and the like.

  Further, the via may be formed in the vicinity of the plated portion in the decoration means. With such a configuration, the via may be able to absorb static electricity accumulated in the plated portion.

  Further, the via may be connected to the ground. With such a configuration, static electricity accumulated on a game table, a game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.) may be released to the ground.

Further, the electronic component may be an LED. With such a configuration, the malfunction of the LED may be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the gaming table, the gaming medium (gaming ball, gaming medal, etc.) with the via.
<Overall structure>

  Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 744. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the rendering mode of various rendering devices 206 by a player's operation, and a cham that causes the chance button 136 to emit light. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return operation button for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 745 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 744 as viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the whole game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, the payout control section 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with 168, a launching base constituting a launching control section 630 for performing control processing relating to launching of game balls. A launch board case 176 for accommodating 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop and the RWM clear by being operated at the time of turning on the power A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are arranged. ing.

  FIG. 746 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  Although details will be described later, a decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect device 206 having an effect movable body 224 imitating a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218. And, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an Electro Luminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured to have a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234 are provided below the game area 124. The second variable winning opening 235 is provided, and the universal figure starting opening 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 have the same structure and are provided with openable and closable door members 234a and 235a. It is impossible to enter a ball while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special map display device wins the special map variation game and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds), a predetermined time. It is opened and closed by the number of times (for example, 15 times).

  In the present embodiment, when the special game 1 variation game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special game 2 variation game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable winning port 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Further, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls. The balls are discharged to the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the ball. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning prize (general winning prize 226, first variable winning prize 234, first prize). 2 variable winning openings 235) or starting openings (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning at any winning opening or starting opening, or normal opening Only through 228 will the outlet 240 be reached.
<Direction device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 747. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality of program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are incorporated) and a predetermined ball detection sensor such as each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening A (first variable winning opening 234 and / or second variable winning opening 235). Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through, a magnetic sensor, a front frame door opening sensor 109, an inner frame opening sensor, a lower plate full tank sensor, etc., and compares them with an amplification result and a reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the result to the random number generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, universal figure reservation The lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like) and a drive circuit 330 for performing display control, and a predetermined movable member such as a blade of the special figure 2 starting port 232. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the member 232a, the door member 234a of the attacker A, and the like is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the Is also configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

  Further, the main control unit 300, through the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349, to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer or a data display (not shown)), the game of the pachinko machine 100. It outputs an external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like. Note that the “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as “external centralized terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name of “external terminal board”.

  Further, the payout control unit 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and chance button. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 that stores a control program and various effect data, and a liquid crystal control unit (liquid crystal control unit) 700 are connected. The liquid crystal control unit 700 is configured to include, for example, a VRAM 436 and a VDP 434 (video display processor), and the VRAM 436 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 and is a work area of the VRAM 436. Is used to generate a display image and display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. The first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 may be provided on different substrates, or may be controlled by one CPU 404 (provided on the same substrate). It may be configured. Further, the ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub-control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the production movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive section 708 of the chance button, and the current position of the production movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 for detecting, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table. A game base frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game base frame lamp drive circuit 540. The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a launch motor (not shown) that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110. Control (not shown) is performed.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 748 (a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, the figure (b) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 748 (a), five types from “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” are shown as the stop symbol modes of special drawing 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and in FIG. 748 (b), As the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 in the symbol variation stop display, four types from "special figure a" to "special figure d" are shown. The white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Among the stop symbol modes of special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special figure B" is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  Explaining the stop symbol aspect of another special figure 1, "special figure C" is a 2R jackpot design called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. “Special drawing D” is a small hit symbol, and is in a low special probability state with a low special probability probability figure. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. “Special figure E” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  Further, explaining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, "special figure a" is a 16R special jackpot design, "special figure b" is an 8R special jackpot design, "special figure c" is an 8R jackpot design , "Special figure d" is a deviating pattern.

  FIG. 748 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched.

  Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B" and the 8R jackpot of "special drawing c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" 1-decoration 1 "," decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", 16R special jackpot of "special drawing a", and 8R special jackpot of "special drawing b", a symbol combination in which the same three odd-numbered decorative patterns are lined up (For example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the small hit of "special drawing D", when "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" that is suddenly changed is reported. , "Decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of "special drawing E" or "special drawing d", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 7C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 748 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and "general symbol B" which is a non-defective symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black-painted part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.

Further, although illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display means for suggesting that the special symbol 1 variation game is in progress (during variation of the special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 variation. It is provided with a fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for suggesting that the game is in progress (during change of special figure 2). The fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 are LEDs respectively, and the indication is made by turning on and off the LEDs. In this example, the fourth symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 are both the same informing mode, LED lighting is repeatedly turned on and off during a variable game, and in the case of a big hit, it is lit and displayed. If it is out of the range, it goes out.
<Main processing of main controller>

  Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 749. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 747 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two general-purpose winning random number counters and two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the special-character random number counter, the general-purpose timer random value, and the special-character timer Update two random number counters to generate each random value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 750. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 750. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically set (to prevent the processing abnormality from being detected) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 747 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232. It is determined that the player has entered the ball or passed through the universal figure starting port 228. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the time to change / stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is made in the winning openings 226, 234 or the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value is obtained as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 2 random number value. And the value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value is acquired as the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a prize in the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, a ball enters the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning port. Information indicating that the action has been performed is stored.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 748 (d)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 748 (d)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting and extinguishing drive control that repeats extinguishing is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure a shown in FIG. 748 (a) ~ Special figure d (in the special figure 1 state update process, special figure A to special figure E shown in FIG. 748 (a)) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. For this purpose, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) of game balls is detected in the second variable winning port 235 (the first variable winning port 234 in the special drawing 1) The door member 235a of the second variable winning port 235. (Tokudoku 1 is a door member 234a of the 1st variable winning a prize port 234) The solenoid (332) for opening and closing is output a signal for holding the door member 235a (Tokudoku 1 is the door member 234a) in an open state. , Information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (the special member 1 is the door member 234a) is attached to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable winning port 235 (the special member 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable winning hole 234). A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times by repeating the opening / closing control of the door member, the predetermined finish production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. Information indicating the production standby period is set in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by while the image notifying the player is displayed. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is provided. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the general figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable figure game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than in the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability state during the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 a predetermined number, until the game ball enters the second A lot of game balls enter the special figure starting port 232, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big hit increases, and the gambling performance is increased. Is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special character The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and the first variable winning port 234 (or The presence / absence of winning of the second variable winning port 235) is included.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Also, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special symbol starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing is resumed.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main controller.
<Process of the first sub control unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 751. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. Further, the effect lottery process is performed based on the command from the main control unit 300, and the process (described later) of setting the liquid crystal command and the part data at a predetermined position is performed. If there is part data at the position after the return command (described later) is received, the part data to be transmitted to the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the effect movable bodies 246, 224, etc. is set.

  In step S311, if it has been detected that the chance button has been pressed, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button is performed. In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the tone generator IC 416, this instruction is output to the tone generator IC 416. In this step, for example, a channel for outputting sound data is acquired, and data set in the channel is updated. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 contains an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by a predetermined timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and an effect random number updating process is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 752. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.
<Example of display during game>

  753 to 755 are time series examples of displays on the decorative symbol display device 208 during one game.

  753 (a), (b), with reference to the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, the right symbol display region 208c below the display region, special A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 for suggesting the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In this embodiment, one special figure 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900 can display four hold icons, which is the maximum number of special figure 1 variable games, and the display area 900 can be displayed. It is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d respectively correspond to the 1st to 4th holding orders of the special figure 1 variation game. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold can be displayed in the first area 900a, and similarly, 2 to 4 pieces are displayed in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d. Each hold icon corresponding to the hold of the eyes can be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 that indicates the number of reserved special figures 2 is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. The special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, like the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, can display four hold icons, which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased. In the following description of the present embodiment, mainly an example of a change in the state of each configuration due to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings of the special figure 1 (for example, an example of display change of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) will be described. The same can be displayed when there is an increase or decrease in the number of reservations in special figure 2. Further, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area above the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the special figure 1 fourth symbol for suggesting that the special figure 1 variation game is in progress (during variation of special figure 1) Display area 208e, special figure 2 variation game (during variation of special figure 2) fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 to suggest that it is during special figure variation game, and general figure variation game (during variation of general figure) ), And a fourth symbol display area 208g for a general figure for suggesting that it is). In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e, the image of ○ is turned off (or blinking) during the special game 1 variable game, and the image of ○ is turned on when the special game 1 variable game is stopped. Similarly, the fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 is an image of △, the fourth symbol display area 208g for a general figure is an image of ◇, is turned off (or blinks) during each variation game, and the variation game If is stopped, it will be lit up.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided, respectively.

  These configurations are the same as those in the tenth embodiment unless otherwise specified.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 753 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 ends, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up two LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 has two holding pieces. The numbers of the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding lamp 216 are both 0, which indicates that the numbers of the special figure 2 and the general figure are 0.

  The special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display region 208e (and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display region 208f, the general symbol for the fourth symbol display region 208g) displays the image in a lighted state to inform that the variable game has stopped. There is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 (first area 900a and second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of Toku-zu 1 are shown, respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, a circular (spherical) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. Further, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

  Then, the timing shown in the same figure (b), the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted, the suspension of special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Is started, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns off one LED of the two LEDs, and turns on one LED, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variation game. Indicates that the image of ○ is turned off (or blinks).

  As for the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI1 in the first area 900a corresponding to the consumed hold is moved to the change icon display area 800, and a moving animation between hold and change icons ( Alternatively, a state in which a hold icon erasing animation) and a hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are being executed are shown. Specifically, an animation is executed in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are continuously executed.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuating icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the variable icon CI is displayed in the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

  The timing shown in the same figure (f), in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of special figure 1 is started. Is shown. As shown in FIGS. 7B to 7F, when the holding is exhausted in the present embodiment, first, the variable display of symbols is started on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on. After turning off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off (or blinks) the image of ◯. After that, the hold icon PI executes each animation of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and these state changes may be executed first or sequentially in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the opportunity button is pressed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. The imitated image) is displayed.

  Further, at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the first color (this In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and all (from the left end portion to the right end portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is filled with the first color. Also, an image of the character (lord) is also displayed.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter is gradually reduced in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (executes the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is in a state before a further time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, before 6 seconds which is the acceptance period has elapsed) ((h) in the figure). After the timing of)), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, The character display "Chance!" And the character image (customer) are displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the notice effect is displayed will be described as an example, but another effect display may be used.

  The timings shown in (j) and (k) of FIG. 11 are in a state where the production according to the result of winning / disagreement determination, the change time, and the noticed production that has been won is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Yes, FIGS. 11 (j) and 11 (k) show an example of reach display in the variable display of decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1 (l) is a production start state of super reach, and the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variable display of the decorative design is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. For example, it is displayed small in the lower right part of the display area (reduced display of the decorative pattern). Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI are hidden (erased). In addition, the pending icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the pending icon PI, the variable icon CI erasing timing, the white background timing, and the decorative display reduced display timing, whichever comes first , And may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI may be displayed or a part of them may be hidden during the super reach effect.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (M), (n), and 754 (o) to 754 (q) start execution of, for example, a swordsman reach production in which a swordsman character faces a sword. It is in a state of being. Here, as an example, a swordsman character and the characters “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. 753 (m)), and then a confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed (FIGS. 753 (n) to 754 ( q)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 754 (q) displays a scene in which the character (Den) has won the swordsman character, and in FIG. 7 (r), a symbol combination of a big hit (probable variation big hit) in the reduced display of the decorative design (for example, The fluctuation display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 3 (t) is a big hit to the design display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative design display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") of "probability variation big hit" is displayed in a swinging manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in (v) of the same figure, the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the characters of "probable variation jackpot" for notifying the start of the jackpot are displayed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 754 (t) ′ to (v) ′ continue from FIG. 754 (s) when the jackpot reach effect (reach effect of decoration 6) is started in FIG. 753 (k). It's timing. At this timing, after a big hit symbol combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ((t) 'in the figure), The stop display of the decorative design is performed ((u) ′ in the same figure), the stop display of the decorative design in the design display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the character of “big hit” for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same). Figure (v) ').

  FIG. 755 shows a display example when there is a shift in the swordsman reach production.

  The timing shown in FIG. 755 (a) is the timing following FIG. 754 (p), and the scene in which the character (lord) loses to the swordsman character is displayed. Further, in FIG. 755 (b), the fluctuation variation display of the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7") that is out of alignment with the reduced display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are shaken and displayed while shifting the deviating symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7"), and the hold icon is displayed. The state where the hold icon PI1 is displayed again in the area 900 and the variable icon CI is displayed again in the variable icon display area 800 is shown. Further, in the same figure (e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the image of ◯ is lit up and displayed in the fourth symbol display region 208e for special figure 1.

  The timings shown in (f) and (g) of the same figure are, in the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon deletion animation executed when the variation icon CI is erased after the special figure variation game ends. The execution state is shown, and the timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the state in which the deletion animation of the variable icon is completed.

In the above example, the fluctuation icon CI is deleted after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but the fluctuation icon CI is deleted at another timing (for example, after the stop display of the decorative symbol or during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, etc.). ) May be sufficient. The variable icon CI may be erased in one frame instead of the animation for erasing the variable icon.
<Direction data>

  FIG. 756 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 7A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 7B is an example of a part data table. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses the box data in the RAM 408 to store the box data shown in FIG. 7A at each performance execution timing, such as at the start of fluctuation, at the time of holding change, at the time of notice effect, at the time of reach effect, and at the time of button effect occurrence. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data including liquid crystal commands and information such as voice, light emission, and accessory (movable body) executed corresponding to the effect based on the liquid crystal commands (here, as an example, parts A to H ...). Composed of etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for displaying the effect display corresponding to each on the decorative pattern display device 208 at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of hold change, at the time of notice effect, at the time of reach effect, at the time of button effect occurrence (for example, No. Command of box data such as 101, 102, 201 to 203).

  In addition, the liquid crystal command controls the operation of the accessory M (effect movable body 246, 224) corresponding to each of the change start, the hold change, the notice effect, the reach effect, the button effect occurrence, and the like. Command (for example, a box data command such as No. 255) is included.

  Specifically, in this example, No. The box data 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting the special figure variation, a part A (data for storing a bicep accessory) and a part B (data for storing a shutter). In addition, No. The box data of No. 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying the background of the hall and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the background of the hall). The box data of No. 201 includes the liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and the part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of the character (lord) and the character "?"), And No. The box data of 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and part E and part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (display of characters (princess) and "genki?")). , No. The box data 203 is a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and part E and part G (direction data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (display of characters (princess) and "Gekiatsuyo!")) No. The box data 255 includes a liquid crystal command for vertically moving the bicep character and a part H (data for vertically moving the bicep character).

  As shown in (b) of the same figure, the part data includes the movable mode of the accessory (effect movable body 246, 224, etc.) to be executed corresponding to each effect, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, and the lamp L. This is information on the light emission mode of various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game underframe lamps 542, and the like.

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, lamp layers, and accessory action layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. The number of layers of each part data may be one, and the number (or type) of device data may be one.

  Specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing a bicep accessory) returns the bicep accessory (production movable body 224) to the initial position to the accessory operation layer 1 (bicep accessory operation layer). Contains device data. Further, the part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). There is.

  Further, the part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the saloon background) includes sound device data as BGM for the saloon background in the sound layer 1 and lamp device data of the light emitting pattern for the saloon background in the lamp layer 1. I have.

  Further, the part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) corresponds to the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the dialogue (such as "n?") Emitted by the character (donor) corresponding to the notice and the lamp layer 2. It includes lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  The part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) is the sound device data of the dialogue (“Genki?”) Issued by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

  In addition, the part G (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Produced by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  In addition, parts H (data for vertical movement of the bicep character) include lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the vertical movement of the bicep character, and the role object operation layer 1 (the bicep character operation layer). ) Includes device data for vertically moving a bicep accessory (effect movable body 224).

  Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the head address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E. In addition, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E, and the start address of the position 0002 (for example, the address 1002) is set as the storage position of the part G. ing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above box data at each performance execution timing (for each performance) and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Each box data is also set when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. At this time, the part data is stored in the RAM 408 at addresses (parts data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. The part data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400. The return command also includes position information, and when the return command is received, the first sub control unit 400 sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when the position (parts data) corresponding to the box data is set. If the part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory motion layer are set to the transmission command and transmitted to each device, Produce corresponding to the presentation display.
<Example of command transmission>

  FIG. 757 is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment, and is an example of a case where an image is displayed on the liquid crystal control unit 700 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to perform the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 751 and perform each effect according to the result. Send control commands.

  For example, in the case where the presentation of the conversation notice 01 is performed, the first sub control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to change the No. shown in FIG. The liquid crystal command of the box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”).

  Further, when setting the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 sets No. Based on the position set in the box data of 201, the part data is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address (1). As a result, in the area of the RAM 408 whose address is 1001 as the start address, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "N?") Issued by the character (Den) corresponding to the conversation announcement 01 and the light emission pattern corresponding to the announcement. The lamp device data of is stored.

  No. from the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the liquid crystal control unit 700 displays the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (display of the conversation notice 01). The display control) is performed, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. Set the command transmission (3). In this example, since the return command includes the information of the position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp, etc.) corresponding to the part E stored in the position 0001 (the area having the address 1001 as the start address) of the RAM 408. The data of the light emission mode of L) is set in the transmission command, and is transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect (4). In addition, since the effect by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving the command from the main control unit 300, there is a time lag.

  FIG. 758 shows another example in which an image is displayed on the liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the liquid crystal command.

  For example, when performing the effect of the conversation notice 03, the first sub-control unit 400 tells the liquid crystal control unit 700 that No. 1 shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an image of the character (lord), a command for instructing display of the characters of the dialogue (“?”), And an image of the character (princess). It includes a command for instructing the display of the characters of that dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”).

  Further, when setting the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 sets No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address, and the No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data of 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the start address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") Issued by the character (Den) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area of the RAM 408 having the start address of 1001. In a region of the RAM 408 having a head address of 1002, sound device data of a dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Issued by a character (princess) and lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding thereto are stored.

  No. from the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the liquid crystal control unit 700 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (display of the conversation notice 03a). ), The display of the image of the character (princess) and the characters of the dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) (Display control of conversation notice 03b)) is performed. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub-control unit 400 (2) and a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). In this example, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a, includes the information of the position 0001 in the return command. Data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part E stored in the area (address) is set in the transmission command, and is transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect. (4). Further, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b, in this example, includes the information of the position 0002 in the return command, so that the position 0002 (address 1002 address) of the RAM 408 is included. Data of various device data (sound, light emitting mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address) is set in the transmission command and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L respectively to produce the effect. Execute (5).

  As described above, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of the conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) is set for each command, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the performance.

  FIG. 759 is an example of command transmission when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command that is not used in the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal command not used by the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not include, for example, a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display characters or images (for example, only an instruction for operation control of the accessory M is included). Command).

  FIG. 759 (a) is an example in which the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 and immediately executes operation control of the accessory M.

  For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect of vertical movement of the bicep accessory, the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to change the No. 1 shown in FIG. The liquid crystal command of the box data of 255 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command does not include a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image or characters of a character, but includes an instruction (only) for bicep accessory vertical movement.

  When setting the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the No. Based on the position set in the box data of 203, the part data (part H) is not stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408, and various device data corresponding to the part H (the operation mode of the bicep character, the voice output mode, Data of (light emitting mode of the lamp L) is set in the transmission command, and is transmitted to the effect movable body 224, the speaker 120, and the lamp L to execute the effect (1).

  On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command does not execute the display control corresponding to the liquid crystal command, and discards the liquid crystal command (2).

  Conventionally, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, including a command for executing display control and a command for executing operation control of a accessory, for example, a decorative symbol display. The display on the device 208 is not performed, and the operation of the accessory is only performed (or the operation of the accessory includes sound output or light emission), and the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed (voice output or light emission). It is necessary to prepare box data of a different format for each case of production, and the data structure and production control processing are complicated.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, one command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the display data and the accessory to be displayed and controlled by the liquid crystal control unit 700. Since data is not mixed, the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed, and the effect of only the operation of the accessory (or the operation of the accessory includes voice output or light emission) and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 are included. Even when performing the action (including voice output and light emission) effect of, the structure of the effect data transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 is the same format (same as the one shown in FIG. 756. Structure), the structure of data can be simplified, the process of command transmission can be simplified, and stable control can be performed.

  Further, in this example, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is not executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 operates the effect movable body 224 without waiting for the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700. Therefore, the effect of the effect movable body 224 can be executed earlier than the case where it is executed after the return command is received, and the variation of the effect can be increased in some cases.

  Even in this case, similarly to the above, when the first sub control unit 400 transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the No. The part data (part H) may be stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408 based on the position set in the box data of 203.

  FIG. 759 (b) is another example in which the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command that is not used by the liquid crystal control unit 700. In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 and receives a return command other than the transmitted liquid crystal command from the liquid crystal command, the operation control of the accessory M is executed.

  For example, when the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect of vertical movement of the bicep accessory, the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to change the No. 1 shown in FIG. The liquid crystal command of the box data of 255 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command does not include a command for instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image or characters of a character, but includes an instruction (only) for bicep accessory vertical movement.

  When setting the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the No. Based on the position set in the box data of 255, the part data (part H) is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position (for example, the position 0005) set in the box data of 255, the part H is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 800 as the start address (1). As a result, the sound device data at the time of the bicep up and down operation and the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the sound device data are stored in the area of the RAM 408 having the start address of 800.

  On the other hand, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command of 255, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the display control corresponding to the liquid crystal command and discards the liquid crystal command (2).

  And No. Execution of display control (display of super reach aspiration effect) based on a liquid crystal command (for example, a liquid crystal command such as a super reach aspiration effect accompanied by a display on the decorative pattern display device 208) for instructing a display control other than the box data of 255 Then, (3), the return command (return command for starting the super reach agitation effect) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (4).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a return command (return command for starting super-reach stirrup production) of another liquid crystal command other than an unused liquid crystal command (a liquid crystal command for instructing bicep up and down movement of No. 255). In this example, since the return command includes the information of the position 0005, the control unit 400 corresponds to various parts H stored in the position 0005 (the area having the address 800 as the start address) of the RAM 408. Data of device data (operation mode, voice output mode, light emission mode of lamp L) of the brute force effect is set in the transmission command, and is transmitted to the effect movable body 224, the speaker 120, and the lamp L to execute the effect (5 ).

In this way, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may operate the accessory M based on the return command of another liquid crystal command other than the unused liquid crystal command.
<Example of command transmission and performance>

  An example of command transmission and effect in the effect control of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 760 to 763.

  FIG. 760 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the timing of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment. In the figure, an example of each command transmitted with the passage of time indicated by an arrow from the left side to the right side is shown. Further, FIGS. 761 to 763 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each timing of FIG. 760 in time series, and FIGS. 761 (2) to 763 (12) are shown in FIG. 760. It corresponds to each timing shown in (2) to (12). Further, the right diagrams of FIGS. 761 to 763 show the contents of each part data set in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 when the effect of the left diagram is executed. In the left diagrams of FIGS. 761 to 763, the same components as those shown in FIGS. 753 to 755 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, the first sub-control unit (sub) 400 and the liquid crystal control unit (liquid crystal) 700 from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the notice of conversation, the super-reach inclining effect, the super-reach effect, and the stop of the change. The timing of command transmission during the period and each effect example will be described.

  The first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to perform the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S309) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 751 and perform each effect according to the result. Send LCD command.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 761 (1), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 1-decoration 8-decoration 7", which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. . At this timing, the holding icons PI1 and PI2 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 900, respectively, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 turns on two LEDs and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is two. I am informing you. Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data by the first sub-control unit 400, the data of the large hall background BGM is set in the sound layer 1 (sound 1) and the lamp layer 1 (light emission). In the pattern 1), the data of the emission pattern for the background of the hall (for example, the part C shown in FIG. 756 (b)) is set. The first sub-control unit 400 may execute various controls (light emission, sound output, accessory operation, etc.) related to the effect (for example, stop display of a decorative pattern) based on the part data. Specifically, when the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set, the command transmission setting corresponding to the part data is set, and various device data corresponding to the part stored in the position of the RAM 408 is set. Data (output mode of sound, light emitting mode of lamp L and movable mode of movable object M) is set in a transmission command and transmitted to the speaker 120, the lamp L and the movable object M, respectively. For example, at this timing (timing during the stop display of the decorative pattern), an effect of outputting the BGM for the large hall background from the speaker 120 is executed together with the effect display of (1) in the figure, and the lamp L (for example, the lamp for the game board) In 532), the effect of the light emission mode of the large hall background light emission pattern is executed.

  When data is set in both the sound layer 1 and the sound layer 2, the data in the sound layer 2 having a larger number is preferentially executed. In addition, as an example, the lamp layer 1 is data for causing the gaming board lamp 532 to emit light, and the lamp layer 2 is a lamp around the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, various lamps 418, game underframe lamps 542). ) Is the data for causing the light emission. In this example, when data is set in both the ramp layer 1 and the ramp layer 2, the data in the ramp layer 2 having a larger number is preferentially executed. That is, the data of the lamp layer 1 is overwritten with the data of the lamp layer 2, and the effect based on the data of the lamp layer 1 is not executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 761 (2) is a state in which the sub command (variation start command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. Moreover, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has shown the state which turned off one LED and started the next variation game. At this timing, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 to start variable display of decorative symbols. Further, when performing the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the liquid crystal control unit 700 to perform the liquid crystal command for all the effects performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol at the start of the variation. Is transmitted ((2) in FIG. 760). In this example, for example, a background image, a timer (advance timer + reach timer = variation time), a change in the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (the number of holdings of the fluctuation), a holding icon of special figure 1 and special figure 2 Position and color, advance notice content (for example, conversation advance notice 01-03, etc.), reach content (for example, super reach, etc.), temporary stop design (reach or), final stop design (design that is fixed and displayed when the design is stopped), etc. Is a liquid crystal command related to the production of. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the box data and part data shown in FIG. 756 corresponding to each liquid crystal command.

  At this timing, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408, the data of the large hall background BGM is continuously set in the sound layer 1, and the data of the large hall background light emission pattern is set in the lamp layer 1, and the speaker 120 and the lamp are set. In L, the effect from FIG. 761 (1) continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 761 (3) is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command has started control for performing variable display of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, (continue) a control for displaying the hall background as a background image is executed, and a control for performing variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c on the front thereof is performed. It is executed ((3) in FIG. 760). The liquid crystal control unit 700 may transmit a return command to the first sub-control unit 700 when executing control for displaying an effect (image) (when displaying an image). Here, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (displaying the background of the hall), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 700 ((3) in FIG. 760). In the case where the first sub-control unit 400 executes various controls (light emission, sound output, accessory operation, etc.) related to the effect (for example, variable display of decorative patterns) based on the part data in response to the return command. There is. In this example, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408, the data of the large hall background BGM is continuously set in the sound layer 1, and the data of the large hall background light emission pattern is set in the lamp layer 1, and the speaker 120 and the lamp are used. In L, the effect from FIG. 761 (1) continues.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 761 (4), the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the conversation notice effect (for example, the liquid crystal command (conversation notice 03) of the box data of No. 203 in FIG. 756 (a)). This is a state in which execution of display control (corresponding effect) has started. In this example, an image of a character (lord) and its character "?" Are displayed in front of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 ((4) in FIG. 760).

  When transmitting the liquid crystal command (at the timing (2) in FIG. 760), the first sub-control unit 400 displays the conversation notice (conversation notice 03) in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the box data position. The part data of each effect corresponding to is set (when the box data is expanded, the liquid crystal command is transmitted and the part data is set to the position). In this example, the parts C and E shown in FIG. 756 (b) are set. That is, the data of the BGM for the large hall background is set in the sound layer 1 (sound 1), and the voice data of the character (lord) dialogue (for example, "n?") Is set in the sound layer 2 (sound 2). , Lamp layer 1 (light emission pattern 1) is set with the data of the light emission pattern for the large hall background, and lamp layer 2 (light emission pattern 2) is set with the light emission pattern data corresponding to the dialogue ("?") Of the character (don). Has been done. The sound layer 2 includes data for reducing the volume of the sound layer 1. Further, although the data of the light emission pattern for the large hall background is set in the lamp layer 1, it is overwritten by the lamp layer 2, so the lamp L executes the effect of the light emission mode of the light emission pattern for the large hall background of the lamp layer 1. It is not possible.

  The first sub-control unit 400 responds to the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (the return command at the timing when the display control of the conversation notice 03 is started) based on the set part data (conversation notice 03). There are cases where various controls related to are executed. The return command also includes position information, and when the return command is received, the first sub control unit 400 sets the corresponding position in the RAM 408 when the position (parts data) corresponding to the box data is set. If the part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory motion layer are set to the transmission command and transmitted to each device, Produce corresponding to the presentation display. In this example, the sound level of the background BGM in the hall is output from the speaker 120, and the voice data of the character (customer) of the sound layer 2 (for example, "n?") Is output in addition to the sound data. To be done. In addition, the light emission effect of the light emission pattern for the large hall background by the game board lamp 532 ends, and the various characters 418, the game frame lamp 542, and the like change the character (don't) dialogue (for example, “n?”). A corresponding light emission mode effect is executed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 761 (5), the liquid crystal control unit 700 continues the conversation notice effect on the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, the liquid crystal command of the box data of No. 203 in FIG. 756 (a) (conversation notice 03)). (Display effect corresponding to) is being executed. In this example, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character (princess) and the characters of the line “Gekiatsuyo!” Are displayed in front of the line “?” Of the character (don). Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 ((5) in FIG. 760).

  In the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, for example, part C and part G shown in FIG. 756 (b) are set in correspondence with the conversation notice (conversation notice 03). That is, the data of the BGM for the large hall background is set in the sound layer 1 (sound 1), and the voice data of the character's (princess) 's speech (speech "Gekiatsuyo!") Is set in the sound layer 2 (sound 2). , Lamp layer 1 (light emission pattern 1) is set with data of the light pattern for the large hall background, and lamp layer 2 (light emission pattern 2) is set to the light emission pattern corresponding to the character (princess) 's dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”). The data is set. Also in this case, the sound layer 2 includes data for reducing the volume of the sound layer 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 performs various controls based on the set part data in response to a return command from the liquid crystal control unit (a return command at the timing when the display control of the character (princess) of conversation notice 03 is started) ( Light emission, sound output, accessory operation, etc.). In this example, the sound level of the background BGM for the hall is output from the speaker 120, and the voice data of the character (princess) of the sound layer 2 (the line "Gekiatsu!") Is output overlaid on it. Then, the light emission effect of the light emission pattern for the large hall background by the game board lamp 532 is finished, and the various characters 418, the game frame lamp 542, and the like change the character (princess) to the dialogue (the dialogue "Gekiatsu!"). A corresponding light emission mode effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 760, based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 stops and displays (temporary stop display) the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the display control is executed, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 ((a) in FIG. 760).

  The timing shown in FIG. 762 (6) is the display control in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs a stop display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. This is the state in which the command is executed and the return command is transmitted ((6) in FIG. 760). At this timing, "decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is executed.

  In addition, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the reach effect BGM is set in the sound layer 1 in correspondence with the reach effect, and the lamp layer 1 is used in the reach effect. The data of the light emission pattern of is set.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command of the (temporary) stop display of the right decorative pattern from the liquid crystal control unit, it outputs the reach effect BGM from the speaker 120 and, for example, reaches by the game board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern for effect is executed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 762 (7), the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the display control for starting the super reach fanching effect that develops into the super reach, based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400, and then returns. This is a state in which the command has been transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. At this timing, the background display (hall background) is changed (erased), and in the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208, “decoration 7” is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, respectively, and the change in the medium decorative pattern. In a state where the display is continued, a super-reach swaying effect in which these are displayed small is executed.

  In addition, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the BGM data for super reach agitation effect is set in the sound layer 1 in correspondence with the super reach agitation effect, and the lamp layer 1 is set. Is set to the data of the light emission pattern for the super-reach-inspiring effect.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super-reach-inspiring effect from the liquid crystal control unit, it outputs the BGM for super-reach-inspiring effect from the speaker 120 and, for example, super-reach-inspiring by the game board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern for effect is executed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 762 (8), the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the display control for starting the super reach effect based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400, and the return command is the first sub control. It is in the state of being transmitted to the section 400 ((8) in FIG. 760). At this timing, the decorative pattern display device 208 is executing the super reach effect.

  Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the super reach effect BGM is set in the sound layer 1 and the superimposition in the lamp layer 1 in correspondence with the super reach effect. The light emission pattern data for reach effect is set.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super-reach effect from the liquid crystal control unit, it outputs the BGM for super-reach effect from the speaker 120 and, for example, for the super-reach effect by the game board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 760, when the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display control of the button effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 during execution of the super reach effect ((b) in FIG. 760), the liquid crystal In this state, the return command transmitted from the control unit 700 to the first sub control unit 400 is transmitted. At this timing, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image simulating the chance button 136 (operation means image BG), an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and a “one hit”. "!" Is displayed and the button effect is executed.

  Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the super reach effect BGM is set in the sound layer 1 in correspondence with the button effect, and the lamp layer 1 is set to the super reach value. Data of the light emission pattern for effect is set. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the return command to start the button effect from the liquid crystal control unit continues to output the super reach effect BGM from the speaker 120, and for example, for the super reach effect by the game board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 762 (9) is a state in which the return command for starting the display control of the button effect is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 ((9) in FIG. 760). This return command is a command indicating that the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 (the operation acceptance period or the operation valid period) starts, and the first sub control unit 700 receives the chance based on the reception of this return command. Control is performed so that the operation of the button 136 can be accepted.

  As shown in FIG. 760, when the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the acceptance period of the chance button 136 operation, the first sub control unit 400 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to display a liquid crystal command (in response to the button operation). "Press chance button" command) ((c) in FIG. 760). As a result, when the chance button 136 is operated, the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 ends, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the display control of the button effect. If the chance button 136 is not operated until the operation acceptance period ends, the chance button 136 is received based on the first sub-control unit 400 receiving a return command indicating that the operation acceptance period ends. Performs control to end the operation of.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 762 (10), the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display control of the effect for displaying the operation result of the chance button 136 based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and then returns. This is a state in which the command has been transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ((10) in FIG. 760). At this timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a combination of the decorative patterns indicating that the super reach has been won, is displayed in a small shaking fluctuation in the upper right and the character (donor) and ". The word "I did it!" Is displayed to inform that the player has won the super reach as a result of operating the chance button 136.

  Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the super-reach hit BGM is set in the sound layer 1 corresponding to the effect of displaying the operation result, and the lamp layer 1 is set. The data of the light emission pattern for super reach is set in. That is, the first sub-control unit 400, which receives the return command from the liquid crystal control unit, outputs the BGM for super-reach hit from the speaker 120, and, for example, the light emission effect of the light pattern for super-reach hit by the game board lamp 532. To execute.

  The timing shown in FIG. 763 (11) is that the liquid crystal control unit 700 has won the super reach in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. Display control for displaying the decorative pattern indicating swaying is performed, and the return command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 ((11) in FIG. 760). At this timing, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the super reach has been won, is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, in the setting area of the part data of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the fluctuation variation display BGM is set in the sound layer 1 in correspondence with the effect of the fluctuation variation display of the decorative pattern, and the lamp layer. The data of the light emission pattern for the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative pattern is set in 1. That is, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit, outputs the BGM for the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern from the speaker 120, and, for example, for the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol by the gaming board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern of is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 760, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped ((d) of FIG. 760).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 763 (12), the liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command to stop changing the decorative pattern executes display control to stop changing the decorative pattern, and sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. This is the state ((12) in FIG. 760). At this timing, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the super reach has been won, is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the symbol fixing BGM is set in the sound layer 1 and the lamp layer 1 in correspondence with the effect of the stop display of the decorative symbol. The data of the light emission pattern for design determination is set. That is, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit, outputs the symbol fixing BGM from the speaker 120, and executes, for example, the light emission effect of the symbol determining light emission pattern by the game board lamp 532. To do.

  After this, if there is a pending variable game, the flow returns to FIG. 761 (1) to execute the effect. In this case, since the large hall background BGM is not set in the part data setting area at the timing shown in FIG. 763 (12), the large hall background BGM starts outputting from the beginning of the data in FIG. 761 (1). To be done. In addition, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 762 (6), the large hall background BGM data is set in the sound layer 1, and the corresponding effect BGM (for example, reach BGM) is set in the sound layer 2 and the sound layer. By setting the data for reducing the volume of 1, the BGM for the hall background is not output (reproduced) from the beginning of the data each time the effect of displaying the hall background after the decorative pattern is started is started, but continued. It is possible to output (reproduce) the background BGM for the hall.

  FIG. 764 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of the present embodiment in time series, in which the first sub-control unit 400 causes the accessory to operate in response to the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 shown in FIG. 759 (b). This is an example of the effect of operating M (here, the effect movable body 224), and shows in time series from the start of the super reach aspiration effect of FIG. 762 (7) to (8) to the start of the super reach effect. Further, the right diagram of the figure shows the contents of each part data set in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 when the effect of the left diagram is executed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 764 (1), the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the background display based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 (the liquid crystal command for starting the super reach fanning effect that develops into super reach). A state in which display control (corresponding to display control at timing (3) in FIG. 759 (b)) for starting (erasing) and starting the super reach aspiration effect is executed and the return command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Is. At this timing, in the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, respectively, and these are displayed small in a state where the variable display of the middle decorative pattern is continued. We are carrying out a stir-up production of super reach.

  In addition, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the BGM data for super reach agitation effect is set in the sound layer 1 in correspondence with the super reach agitation effect, and the lamp layer 1 is set. Is set to the data of the light emission pattern for the super-reach-inspiring effect.

  Here, the first sub-control unit 400 separates from the liquid crystal command of the display control for starting the super reach twisting effect, and the liquid crystal command of the vertical movement of the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224) (for example, in FIG. 756 (a)). No. 225 box data liquid crystal command) is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  When setting the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the first sub control unit 400 also sets No. Based on the position set in the box data of 255, the part data (eg, part H) is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408.

  On the other hand, No. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 255, the liquid crystal control unit 700 discards the liquid crystal command (without executing the display control corresponding to the liquid crystal command). And No. Based on liquid crystal commands other than 255 liquid crystal commands (liquid crystal commands for display control to start super-reach-raising effect), display control (display of super-reach-raising effect) is executed as described above, and the return command (super-reach-raising effect) A start return command) is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super reach agitation effect from the liquid crystal control unit 700, it outputs the BGM for the super reach agitation effect from the speaker 120 and, for example, by the game board lamp 532, the board surface. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern for the super reach-inspiring effect of causing the bicep accessory to emit light is executed.

  The timing shown in (2) of the figure is based on that the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super reach-inspiring effect from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and moves up and down the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224). It is a state in which the execution of the effect has been started.

  In the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the sound layer 1 is set with the data for the super reach-inspiring effect BGM corresponding to the super-reach-inspiring effect, and the lamp layer 1 is set in the super region. The data of the light emission pattern for reach agitation is set. In addition, in response to the effect of vertical movement of the bicep accessory, the sound layer 2 is set with the data of the vertical movement sound of the bicep role, and the lamp layer 2 is set with the data of the light emission pattern for the vertical movement of the bicep character. There is. It should be noted that the data of the bicep work vertical movement sound of the sound layer 2 may include data for reducing the volume of the sound layer 1 (or muffling it).

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super reach-inspiring effect from the liquid crystal control unit, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the BGM for super-reach-inspiring effect and the up / down movement sound of the bicep accessory from the speaker 120. In addition, the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224) is caused to emit light in the light-emitting pattern for vertical movement of the bicep effect, and the effect of vertically moving the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224) is executed. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700, the No. New display control (corresponding to the liquid crystal command of No. 255) based on the liquid crystal command of 255 is not executed.

  The timing shown in (3) of the figure is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 continues to execute the effect of the bicep accessory vertical movement.

  In the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the same data as the timing of (2) in the figure is set. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs the BGM for super-reach-inspiring effect and the bicep effect vertical movement sound from the speaker 120, and emits the bicep effect object (effect movable body 224) in the light emission pattern for bicep effect vertical movement. The light is emitted and the effect of vertically moving the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224) is continued. In this example, when the bicep accessory (effect movable body 224) returns from the position shown in (2) of the figure to the original position (initial position) (when storing the bicep effect object), the bicep effect (effect movable object). 224) is turned off and the return is performed. As an example of the light emission pattern for the vertical movement of the bicep accessory, the light is emitted for 10 seconds of the operation time (vertical movement) and turned off for the storage time of 3 seconds. It should be noted that if the light emission pattern data is only for the operation time of 10 seconds, the light may be emitted for 10 seconds, and after 10 seconds have elapsed, the light may be emitted in the light emission pattern for the super reach aspiration effect.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 764 (4), the liquid crystal control unit 700 executes the display control for starting the super reach effect based on the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400, and the return command is the first sub control. It is in the state of being transmitted to the section 400. At this timing, the decorative pattern display device 208 is executing the super reach effect.

  Further, in the part data setting area of the RAM 408 specified by the position of the box data, the data of the super reach effect BGM is set in the sound layer 1 and the superimposition in the lamp layer 1 in correspondence with the super reach effect. The light emission pattern data for reach effect is set.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command for starting the super-reach effect from the liquid crystal control unit, it outputs the BGM for super-reach effect from the speaker 120 and, for example, for the super-reach effect by the game board lamp 532. The light emission effect of the light emission pattern is executed. It should be noted that at this timing, the effect of vertical movement of the bicep accessory is finished.

  In the above-described embodiment, the command discarded by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is, for example, a liquid crystal command for bicep character vertical movement, and the effect data corresponding to the liquid crystal command is, for example, bicep character vertical movement sound or bicep character. Although the case of the accessory light emission pattern has been described as an example, the command discarded by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is, for example, a liquid crystal command for opening / closing the shutter accessory, and the corresponding effect data is, for example, the shutter. Other accessory and voice output or light emission pattern corresponding to it may be a character opening / closing operation sound or a shutter accessory light emission pattern.

  <Peripheral circuits of sound control circuit and lamp drive circuit>

  FIG. 765 is a block diagram showing peripheral circuits of the sound control circuit 431 and the lamp control circuit 420 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402, a sound control circuit 431, a sound ROM 431a, an amplification circuit 442, a lighting control unit 450, and a lamp drive circuit 420. Note that the sound control circuit 431 may include the sound ROM 431a or the amplifier circuit 442, or a storage unit (for example, SDRAM) for temporarily storing information may be externally attached.

  The sound control circuit 431 is a CPU I / F connected to the CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402, a control register for temporarily storing commands from the CPU 404, and a sound for storing sound information and volume information such as sound effects and BGM described later. The ROM 431a includes a reproduction control unit that controls reproduction of sound according to a command in the control register, and a D / A conversion unit that converts a digital sound signal into an analog sound signal. The amplifier circuit 442 includes a volume amplifier that amplifies the analog audio signal input from the sound control circuit 431, and an output unit that outputs the analog audio signal input from the volume amplifier to the speaker 120.

  The lighting control unit 450, based on the command from the basic circuit 402, the lamp 440 (for example, the setting operation unit lamp, each segment of the remaining prize ball display unit, each lamp of the information notification lamp group, the payout display lamp, the error display). The lamp is controlled to be turned on without the lamp drive circuit 420, and the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138, the frame lamp, and the effect lamp) are controlled via the lamp drive circuit 420.

  The lamp drive circuit 420 includes a CPU I / F 420a connected to the lighting control unit 450, a control register 420b that temporarily stores a command from the lighting control unit 450, and a brightness control of the lamp 418 according to a command in the control register 420b (for example, The brightness control unit 420c that controls the duty ratio (the ratio of the time during which the current flows) is provided. The lamp driving circuit 420 is provided for each substrate provided with the plurality of lamps 418.

  In this example, the brightness of the lamp 418 can be changed by the control of the lamp drive circuit 420, while the lamp 440 is controlled without the lamp drive circuit, so that the brightness cannot be changed (only turning on / off can be controlled). Is.

  FIG. 766 (a) is a block diagram showing various circuits (sound control-related circuits) used for sound control extracted from the circuits included in the first sub control unit 400 described above.

  The input terminals P1 to P4 of the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 are connected to the output terminals b0 to b3 of the first output setting switch 190. The output terminal b0 of the first output setting switch 190 outputs information of bit 0 (least significant bit) of the detection signal (hexadecimal number 0 to F in this example) detected by the first output setting switch 190. Output terminal b1

Is a terminal for outputting the information of bit 1 of the detection signal (hexadecimal number from 0 to F) detected by the first output setting switch 190. The output terminal b2 is a terminal for outputting the information of bit 2 of the detection signal (hexadecimal number 0 to F) detected by the first output setting switch 190, and the output terminal b3 is the first output setting. This is a terminal for outputting information of bit 3 (most significant bit) of the detection signal (hexadecimal number of 0 to F) detected by the switch 190.

  That is, the CPU 404 outputs the numerical value (one of the numerical values of hexadecimal 0 to F in this example) indicated by the instruction unit 190b of the first output setting switch 190 via the input terminal P1 to P4 in the binary number 4 It can be detected as a bit detection signal.

  The serial terminals TxD, RxD, SCK, the interrupt input terminal IRQ, and the input / output terminals P5, P6 of the first sub-control unit 400 are connected to the corresponding terminals of the sound control circuit 431. Further, the sound control circuit 431 is connected to a 1ch amplifier 433a (amplification circuit 442) to which one speaker 120 is connected and a 2ch amplifier 433b (amplification circuit 442) to which two speakers 120 are connected. ing. The sound control circuit 431 outputs an audio signal to the speaker 120 via the 1ch amplifier 433a and the 2ch amplifier 433b.

Although the 1ch amplifier 433a and the 2ch amplifier 433b are separate bodies (separate substrates) in this example, they may be formed on a single substrate, or some or all of them may be built in the sound control circuit 431. Good. Although not shown, a ROM or RAM dedicated to the sound control circuit 431 may be incorporated in or externally attached to the sound control circuit 431 in addition to (or instead of) the ROM 406 and the RAM 408.
<Reset signal of sound control related circuit>

  FIG. 766 (b) is a block diagram showing an example of connection of the reset signal line of the sound control related circuit. In this example, the reset input terminal RESET of the CPU 404 is connected to the reset output terminal of the reset circuit 403. Therefore, the CPU 404 is in either the reset state or the reset released state depending on the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403.

  The output terminal P7 of the CPU 404 is connected to the reset input terminal RESET of the sound control circuit 431, the reset input terminal RESET of the 1ch amplifier 433a, and the reset input terminal RESET of the 2ch amplifier 433b, respectively. Therefore, the sound control circuit 431, the 1ch amplifier 433a, and the 2ch amplifier 433b are in either the reset state or the reset released state according to the voltage level of the reset signal output from the CPU 404.

  FIG. 767 is a block diagram showing a modification of the connection of the reset signal line. In this modification, the reset output terminal RESET of the reset circuit 403 is connected to the sound control circuit 431, the 2ch amplifier 433b, and each reset input terminal RESET of the ROM 406 in addition to the CPU 404, and the reset input terminal RESET of the 1ch amplifier 433a is connected. Is connected to the output terminal of the 2ch amplifier 433b.

  Therefore, the sound control circuit 431 and the 2ch amplifier 433b are in either the reset state or the reset released state depending on the voltage level of the reset signal output from the CPU 404 or the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403. It becomes a state. Further, the ROM 406 becomes either a reset state or a reset release state according to the voltage level of the reset signal output from the reset circuit 403, and the 1ch amplifier 433a outputs the voltage of the reset signal output from the 2ch amplifier 433b. Depending on the level

Then, the state becomes either the reset state or the reset release state.
<Sound control circuit>

  Next, the sound control circuit 431 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 10A is a block diagram schematically showing the sound control circuit 431, and FIG. 11B is a block diagram schematically showing various processes in the reproduction sound output setting of the sound control circuit 431. is there.

  In this example, the sound control circuit 431 is a so-called DSP (Digital Signal Processor), and includes various modules to be described later, and is configured in one package. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the sound control circuit 431, the control unit 1 that controls the reproduction sound output setting is connected to the CPU 404, which is an external host CPU, via the I / F 2 and SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface). It is connected.

  The control unit 1 is connected to an encode data input unit 3, and the encode data input unit 3 is connected to an external sound ROM 431a via an EMIF (External Memory Interface). The encoded data input unit 3 is also connected to various processing units 4 that perform various processes such as decoding process, mixing process, stereophonic process, sequencer process, and filter process. The various processing units 4 are connected to the PCM output unit 5, and the PCM output unit 5 is connected to the external speaker 120 via McASP as an interface. The control unit 1 is connected to the I / F 2, the encoded data input unit 3, the various processing units 4, and the PCM output unit 5 described above via a bus, and controls the respective processes.

  Here, the reproduced sound output setting performed by the control unit 1 in the sound control circuit 431 will be described in more detail. First, under the control of the CPU 404, the control unit 1 inputs the sound source data acquired from the sound ROM 431a into the encoded data input unit 3 via the EMIF, and then loads it into the various processing units 4. The various processing units 4 perform the above-described various processes on the input sound source data.

  The various processes will be described in detail. First, as shown in FIG. 6B, the channel module 41 first performs channel processing on the sound source data captured via the EMIF. In the case of this example, the control unit 1 has a total of 32 channels of 1 to 32, and by assigning a channel to each of the plurality of data called from the sound ROM 431a, it is possible to manage a plurality of sound source data at the same time. Has become.

  Here, in the channel processing, first, decoding (playback) processing is performed on the input sound source data (phrase data). The phrase data is a file compressed in the Muzip format, and has types of sound source data such as a stereo sound source, a monaural sound source, and a binaural sound source (stereo sound source to which 3D sound processing is applied).

  Then, the volume of the phrase or slot is adjusted for the next decoded phrase data. Here, the slot is data including a phrase number, a movement information code number that is data describing movement information of monaural 1ch, reproduction range designation information, and the like, and the phrase number and the movement information code number are designated. It is used to play back a 3D sound source as a slot and specify a playback range. This 3D sound source becomes a binaural sound source by performing 3D sound processing in the sound control circuit 431.

  Then, the phrase or slot pan adjustment is performed on the phrase-adjusted phrase data. At this time, the pan adjustment is applied only when reproducing a monaural sound source, and is not applied to a stereo sound source and a 3D sound source. Then, the phrase data after pan adjustment

Then, fade processing such as play, stop, pause, and pause release is added, and then loop processing that can specify a loop of 1 to 65,535 times or an infinite loop is performed. When the playback is completed, another phrase is automatically played to perform phrase chain playback that allows multiple phrases to be played continuously without gaps, and then output as a stereo sound source / monaural sound source. When executing phrase chain reproduction, a desired phrase number and the number of loops can be set in advance.

  At this time, the control unit 1 monitors the compressor operation (whether or not the compressor function is operating) in parallel with the channel processing, and performs the compressor operation monitoring processing described below. That is, in the compressor operation monitoring process, the control unit 1 first determines whether or not the input level of the input phrase data (sound source data) exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold level). At this time, if a negative result that the input level of the input phrase data does not exceed the predetermined threshold value is obtained, this routine is repeated, and the process stands by until the phrase data of the input level exceeding the threshold value is input.

  On the other hand, when the input level of the input phrase data has an affirmative result exceeding the predetermined threshold value, the control unit 1 moves to the next step and exceeds the threshold value (that is, the compression process as the compressor function). The phrase number in the phrase data being decoded (played) is written (enqueued) to the address port for the phrase data prepared in the sound RAM, and the playback sound information (phrase data) for the phrase data that activated the compressor function ( (Status information) is created as a DRC status information queue (hereinafter referred to as DRC status queue).

  Next, the control unit 1 writes (enqueues) various information regarding phrase data exceeding the threshold into a data port regarding phrase data prepared in the sound RAM, and completes the DRC status queue. Then, the control unit 1 outputs the created DRC status cue to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 as reproduced sound information regarding phrase data (sound source data) that operates the compressor function.

  The control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the decoding processing in the channel module 41 to the mixer module 43, and the mixer module 43 multiplies the input phrase data (sound source data) by a master volume. After performing the volume adjustment, the stereo sound source and the monaural sound source after the pan adjustment are mixed, while the 3D sound source is multiplied by the 3D gain to perform a mixing process of adjusting the gain of the 3D sound source stored in the monaural buffer.

  On the other hand, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the mixing processing by the mixer module 43 to the effect module 44 for the monaural mixing processing, and the stereo sound source (stereo sound after the mixing processing by the mixer module 43 is input. Signal) into a monaural mix. At this time, the monaural mix processing is executed by (Lch data + Rch data) / 2.

  Then, the control unit 1 inputs the phrase data after the monaural mix processing into the LPF 45 and inputs the phrase data after the mixing processing into the HPF 46. Here, the LPF 45 is a low-pass filter (Low-Pass Filter: LPF) that cuts off (attenuates) a frequency band higher than a predetermined frequency component (cut-off frequency), and executes a filter process according to a table of LPF control information. . The HPF 46 is a high-pass filter (HPF) that cuts off (attenuates) a band of a frequency lower than a predetermined frequency component (cutoff frequency), and executes a filter process according to a table of HPF control information.

  The LPF 45 and the HPF 46 function as a band division filter. Thus, the phrase data after the monaural mix processing and the phrase data after the mixing processing can be divided into desired frequency bands to generate phrase data.

  Thereafter, the control unit 1 inputs the filtered phrase data, which has been band-divided by the LPF 45 and the HPF 46, to the corresponding volume adjusting units 47a and 47b, and multiplies the output channel volume by the output volume. Then, the controller 1 inputs the phrase-adjusted phrase data to the corresponding DRC modules 48a and 48b, respectively.

  The control unit 1 causes the DRC modules 48a and 48b to perform compression processing as a compressor function on phrase data whose input level exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold level) of the phrase-adjusted phrase data, and then perform phrase processing. The data is output to the corresponding speaker 120 via McASP.

  Here, when the input level (input volume) of the phrase data (sound source data) exceeds a preset threshold value (threshold level), the compressor function (compression process) outputs the reproduced sound based on the phrase data. The difference between the maximum and minimum output volume (dynamic range) of the playback sound is compressed by the process of suppressing the volume change at a set ratio (ratio, ratio, compression ratio) and releasing it at a predetermined set time. It is a process to do.

  The control unit 1 inputs the sequence code fetched from the sound ROM 431a via the EMIF to the sequencer module 42. In the case of this example, the control unit 1 has eight systems of sequencer modules 42, and allocates a plurality of sequence codes input from the sound ROM 431a via the EMIF to the respective sequencer modules 42. .

  The sequence code is information including parameters for the sequencer to reproduce, and the sequencer module 42 uses the sequence code to generate another module (for example, the channel module 41 or the mixer module 43). , Volume adjustment units 47a, 47b, etc.) that perform reproduction / stop / pause / pause release / fade-out / volume adjustment.

  Here, the reproduction means to reproduce the sequence code, and the stop means to stop the sequence code. The stop causes the sequencer module 42 to stop the channel module 41 in use. Further, the temporary stop means to temporarily stop the sequence code, and the temporary stop causes the sequencer module 42 to execute the following processing for the channel module 41 in use. That is, the sequencer module 42 first stops the channel module 41 in the fade-out stopped state by the temporary stop. Next, the channel module 41 during playback, fade-in, fade-out suspension, and fade volume adjustment is suspended.

  Further, releasing the pause means restarting the reproduction of the paused sequence code. By releasing the pause, the sequencer module 42 performs the following processing on the channel module 41 in use. Is designed to run. That is, the sequencer module 42 first releases the pause of the channel module 41 which was being played back, faded in, or was adjusting the fade volume when the sequencer module 42 was paused. (At this time,

No code is added). Next, the channel module 41, which was being paused when the sequencer module 42 was paused or was being faded out, is left as it is without being released.

  Further, the fade-out is to stop the fade-out of the channel module 41 being used by the sequencer module 42 and stop the sequence code. Furthermore, the volume adjustment means adjusting the volume of the channel module 41 being reproduced by the sequencer module 42.

In this way, the sound control circuit 431 controls the various modules by the control unit 1 to cause the PCM output unit 5 to output the phrase data (sound source data) after performing the various processes in the various processing units 3 as described above. input. Then, the phrase data after the pulse code modulation (PCM: Pulse Code Modulation) process is performed by the PCM output unit 5 is output to the external speaker 120 via McASP.
<Control RAM>

  FIG. 769 (a) shows an example of a memory map of the control RAM included in the sound control circuit 431. The address shown in FIG. 9A is an offset value from the start address of the control RAM. The control RAM may be replaced with a known register.

  The sound control circuit 431 has a control RAM (not shown) built therein, and the CPU 404 writes data to and reads data from various control RAMs assigned (mapped) to this control RAM. Thus, the sound control circuit 431 can be controlled.

  For example, the master control RAM allocated to a 4-byte area (0x0000 0000 to 0x0000 0003) from the start address of the control RAM is a control RAM used for control related to the master volume. The CPU 404 can read the current master volume and set the master volume via this master control RAM.

  The output channel control RAM is a control RAM used for controlling a monaural output volume and a stereo output volume. The CPU 404 can set a monaural output volume or a stereo output volume via the output channel control RAM.

  The mute control RAM is a control RAM used for control related to mute (silence). The CPU 404 can individually mute the channels 1 to 32 or individually cancel the mute of the channels 1 to 32 via the mute control RAM.

  The channel control RAM is a control RAM used for controlling playback of phrases (compressed monaural sound source and stereo sound source), and corresponds to channels 1 to 32, channel 1 control RAM to channel 32 control. 32 channel control RAMs of RAM are allocated. The CPU 404, via the channel control RAM, specifies a phrase to be reproduced on each of the channels 1 to 32, sets the volume of each of the channels 1 to 32, and controls reproduction of each of the channels 1 to 32. It is possible to

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the correspondence between the channels 1 and control RAM to 32 and the control RAM, and FIG. 7C is a diagram showing the correspondence between the channels and the use of sound. Is.

  In this example, 20 channels of channels 1 to 20 are used as channels (stereo 01 to stereo 20) for reproducing a stereo sound source, and 12 channels of channels 21 to 32 are used for reproducing a monaural sound source ( It is used as monaural 01 to monaural 12). For example, stereo 01 and stereo 02 are mainly used as a channel for reproducing BGM of a stereo sound source, monaural 01 is mainly used as a channel for reproducing the lines of a monaural sound source, and monaural 02 is mainly used. , The monaural sound source is used as a channel for reproducing the sound effect, and the monaural 12 is used as a channel for reproducing the error sound of the monaural sound source.

FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of a sound list stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400. In the sound control process described later, the first sub control unit 400 refers to this sound list, acquires various control information (volume information, pan information, etc.) corresponding to the sound source to be controlled, and then acquires the acquired control information. , Set to the corresponding control RAM.
<Sound control processing>

  Next, the sound control processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 770 to 802. The sound control process is a process executed in step S315 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 751.

  Conventionally, when setting sound (song, voice) data to channels (channels, the same applies hereinafter) 1 to 32 as shown in FIG. 769, the sound data is assigned to a specific channel number corresponding to each sound data. It was configured to be fixedly set. That is, which channel is used for reproduction is determined when the sound data is set, and the BGM associated with the channel A is reproduced only on the channel A.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the conventional configuration described above, when setting sound (songs (music (BGM, etc.), voice) data) to channels (channels, the same applies hereinafter) 1 to 32 as shown in FIG. In addition to the configuration of fixedly setting a corresponding specific channel number, it is possible to set the channel number by allocating it to a vacant channel. Further, even if sound data has already been set in the free channel, it is possible to overwrite the sound data.

  Thereby, it may be possible to increase the variation of the output of the sound data (for example, BGM). Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described in detail.

  770 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 7A is an example of the box data table in the present embodiment, and FIG. Is an example. The outline of box data and part data is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 756.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the box data of this example is the same as the box data shown in FIG. A liquid crystal command for displaying the castle town background as box data of 103, a part I (production data corresponding to the display of the castle town background), and a part J (for stopping the shot BGM (for stopping the BGM at each change). ) Data) are included.

  Further, the box data (not shown) includes a liquid crystal command for displaying a symbol demo and a part J (data for stopping the shot BGM).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the part data of this example is added to the part data shown in FIG. 756, and in the sound layer 1 as part I (effect data corresponding to the display of the castle town background). The sound device data which is BGM for the castle town background and the lamp device data of the light emission pattern for the castle town background are included in the lamp layer 1.

  Further, as the part J (data for stopping the shot BGM), the sound layer 1 includes sound device data which is a BGM for symbol demonstration.

  FIG. 771 is an example of the sound device data included in the sound layer (sound layers 1 and 2) of FIG. 770 (b). Each sound device data is distributed to a plurality of channels (fixed channel and free channel described later) and output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 772 is a diagram showing an example of a sound list stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the sound control process described later, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to this sound list and acquires various control information (volume information, pan information, etc.) corresponding to the sound source (sound data, sound data) to be controlled. After that, the acquired control information is set in the corresponding control RAM.

  In this sound list, type (monaural / stereo), playback time (f: frame), volume (volume) information (VOL), left and right speaker pan information (LPan, RPan) are set for each sound source data. There is.

  The sound source data also includes data that constitutes the sound device data shown in FIG. 771. For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The sound device data in the background of the saloon of No. 052 is No. 052 shown in FIG. 104, Hall Background Intro BGM, and No. 104. It is configured to include 105 saloon background loops BGM. Further, No. 1 shown in FIG. The sound device data of the family crest monument operation of No. 101 is No. 101 shown in FIG. No. 301 family crest monument operation sound, and No. 302 family crest part operation end sound (success), and No. It is configured to include a family crest auditor operation end sound (failure) 303.

  FIG. 773 shows an example of the channel control RAM (see FIG. 769) included in the sound control circuit 431 of this embodiment. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between channels 1 / control RAM to channel 32 / control RAM and channels in the first method of the present embodiment, and FIGS. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between layers and sound applications in the second method of the present embodiment, and FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between channels and layers. ) Is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between layers and uses of sounds.

  With reference to FIG. 1A, in the first method of this example, channels 1 to 4 are used as channels (stereo 01 to stereo 02) for reproducing a stereo sound source, and channels 5 to 5 are used. 7 channels of 10 and channel 31 are used as channels (monaural 01 to monaural 07) for reproducing a monaural sound source. The channels 1 to 10 and the channel 31 are fixed channels in which the set sound data and the channel are associated with each other in a one-to-one correspondence, and the sound data corresponding to the channel number is set. That is, the stereo 01 is, for example, sound data designed as stereo sound source data set in the fixed channel 01 and the fixed channel 02, and the sound data designed as the stereo 01 is set in the channel 1 and the channel 2. Further, monaural 01 is sound data designed as data of a monaural sound source set to fixed channel 05, for example, and the sound data is set to channel 5 even if there is another vacant channel.

  In addition, 20 channels of channels 11 to 30 are used as free channels (free 01 to free 20). The free channel is a channel that can be set as a vacant channel (unused channel), in which the sound data to be set and the channel are not linked one-to-one. For example, sound data designed as free 01 is set to channel 11 in the figure, but other sound data has already been set to channel 11 and channel 12 is vacant (there is an unused channel). ), The channel 12 is set. The free channel numbers (free 01, 02, etc.) are given for the sake of control, and are not distinguished as free channels.

  In addition, the channel 32 is used as a system channel (system) in which a system sound (for example, a notification sound related to an error (error sound)) is set.

  In the case of a stereo sound source, 2 channels are used for reproducing data, and in the case of a monaural sound source, 1 channel is used for reproducing data. Since the channel 32 is a system channel, the channel 31 is used as a channel for reproducing a monaural sound source and cannot reproduce a stereo sound source.

  Further, referring to FIGS. 2B and 2C, in the second method of this example, sound data is managed and controlled by layers. A layer is a management name used to manage data, unlike a channel, and performs playback frames of phrases, frame management of volume / pan, and the like. In addition, in the layer, stereo sound sources and monaural sound sources can be mixed in management.

  As shown in FIG. 7C, the layers are classified into fixed layers, free layers, and system layers. Other layers may be a free total stop layer and a free total volume layer.

  The fixed layer is provided more than the actual number of channels (32 channels) (for example, 64 channels). By having a layer (fixed layer) in which more sound data can be set than the actual number of channels (32 channels), the designer can more freely design sound data (sound source data). In FIG. 7C, seven layers, that is, fixed layers 01 to 07 are shown as (a part of) the fixed layers. The fixed layer 01 to fixed layer 07 are layers in which the set sound data and the layer are associated with each other in a one-to-one correspondence, and the sound data corresponding to the fixed layer number is set.

  Further, in this example, the fixed layer 01 is used as a stereo sound source (stereo 01), the fixed layer 02 is used as a stereo sound source (stereo 02), the fixed layer 03 is used as a monaural sound source (monaural 01), and the fixed layer 04 as a monaural sound source (monaural 02), fixed layer 05 as a monaural sound source (monaural 03), fixed layer 06 as a monaural sound source (monaural 04), and fixed layer 07 as a monaural sound source (monaural 05). To use as.

  The free layer is a layer that can be set as an empty layer (unused layer), in which the set sound data and the layer are not linked one-to-one. For example, sound data designed as free 01 is set in the free layer 01 in the figure, but when other sound data is already set in the free layer 01 and the free layer 02 is empty (not yet (In the case of a used layer) is set to the free layer 02. Alternatively, even if other sound data is already set in the free layer 01, the sound data is overwritten and set in the free layer 01. Note that the free layer numbers (free 01, 02, etc.) are given for the sake of control, and are not distinguished as free layers.

  As described above, in the second method, the fixed layer (fixed layer 01 to fixed layer 07) is set with the sound data corresponding to the number (the sound data set in the fixed layer is determined). In the free layer (free layer 01 to free layer 30), the sound data is set in a vacant layer.

  The system layer is a layer in which a system sound (error sound or the like) is set as in the system channel of FIG. Also in the second method, in order to prevent the system sound (error sound) from being overwritten, the sound data of the system layer is set to a predetermined channel (channel 32). Although the system sound is output as a monaural sound source, it may be a stereo sound source.

  Further, as functions that affect the entire free layer, there are an entire free layer stop function and an entire free layer volume setting function. The free layer whole stop function is a function layer that stops all the layers being played in free layer 1 to free layer 31 and sets the whole volume to the default. This is a function of changing the volume of all the layers being reproduced on the layer 31 and holding it until the entire volume is set to the default. The free layer entire stop function may be managed as a layer different from the above layer (free entire stop layer), or the free layer whole volume setting function may be a layer different from the above layer (free whole layer). It may be managed as a volume layer).

  Each layer shown in (c) of the figure is assigned to channel 1 to channel 32 according to the correspondence shown in (b) of the figure. In the second method, 31 channels from channel 1 to channel 31 are used as channels in which a fixed layer or a free layer is set. That is, in channel 1 to channel 31, the set sound data and the channel are not linked in a one-to-one manner, and both the fixed layer and the free layer shown in FIG. Channel).

  Further, even if other sound data is already set in the channels 01 to 31, the sound data of the fixed layer 01 to the fixed layer 07 and the free layer 01 to the free layer 30 can be set by overwriting the sound data. . Specifically, if a fixed layer with the same number (for example, fixed layer 01) is already set for a channel that is already in use, the fixed layer is the fixed layer that is set this time for the currently used channel (for example, fixed layer). The data of 01) can be set (overwritten). In the case of the free layer, the free layer data to be set this time can be set (overwritten) in the specific channel in use by the identification information described later.

  Further, the free layers 0 to 30 can control the sound data set in the free layers as a whole (collectively 31) of the free layers (in this case, 31). That is, by using the entire free layer stop function and the entire free layer volume setting function, the sound data being reproduced set as the free layer 0 to free layer 30 is stopped for all the free layers, and the volume is set for all the free layers. Can be changed or set to an initial value.

  By the way, with regard to the fixed channel of the first method, the sound data to be set is linked one-to-one, so when the reproduction of the sound data becomes unnecessary, the sound data set to a certain fixed channel can be changed. In the case of erasing or overwriting (updating) with another sound data, the first sub control unit 400 can specify the fixed channel. Further, also in the case of the fixed layer of the second method, the first sub-control unit 400 can search and specify a channel in which the fixed layer of the same number is set for the channel in use. On the other hand, in the free channel of the first method and the free layer of the second method, the first sub-control unit 400 cannot specify to which channel the sound data to be overwritten is set.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound data is associated with identification information for specifying an area (free channel or free layer) in which the sound data is set, and based on the identification information (for example, the same identification information may be used). (B) Sound data can be overwritten. As a result, it is possible to identify the area (free layer, free channel) in which the unnecessary sound data (the first sound data set in the empty first setting area) is set. The data (first sound data) can be overwritten with other sound data (second sound data). The identification information is set at the same time when the sound data is set in the free layer.

<Sound update processing>
774 to 779, the sound update process (mainly, the sound update process when the second method is adopted) executed in the sound control process of step S315 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 is performed. An example will be described.

  When an arbitrary device number is set from the outside, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the sound device data (sound device data) shown in FIG. 771 and sets the execution data. The start address of the sound layer data (sound layer data) is registered in the sound device data. The sound layer data (layer data) is one or a plurality of data arrays provided corresponding to the respective sound device data, and includes a layer number (for example, fixed layer 01, free layer 02, etc.) for setting the data, an overwrite Overwrite prohibition level and overwrite prohibition release level for judging the propriety, the same command discard permission flag to be discarded when the same sound device data is received, the start address of sound data (sound source data, sound data), volume pan data It includes management information such as the start address of the. For example, No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 52 in FIG. 104, Hall Background Intro BGM and No. 104. The large hall background loop BGM 105 is included, and the sound layer data for the large hall background intro BGM and the sound layer data for the large hall background loop BGM are associated with each other as management information of the sound device data of the large hall background.

  Then, when an arbitrary device number is set, the address information of the sound device data of that number is acquired, and the sound data is expanded starting from the address information until the end data is searched.

  First, the sound update process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the sound update process.

  In step S1001, the layer number to be updated is updated, and the process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not updating of all layers is completed. If completed, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1003, the volume data is updated for all free layers, and the process ends.

  In step S1005 following step S1002, parameters of sound data (sound data) corresponding to the sound device data are set, and the process proceeds to step S1007. As the management information (parameter) of the sound data, for example, a running flag indicating that the set sound data is being executed, a sound device data number, a start address of the sound data, an overwrite prohibition cancellation level, the same command discard permission It includes a flag, a phrase loop counter that indicates the number of times the sound data is repeated, a sound data number that is being output, a frame counter that is being executed, a midway reproduction time that indicates a restart frame of sound data that has been temporarily stopped, and the like. Also, this parameter is set for each sound layer data.

  In step S1007, the in-execution flag of the sound data is determined. If the in-execution flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1009, sound data update processing is performed. The sound data update process will be described later. In step S1011, as the volume / pan data management information (parameter), an in-execution flag indicating that the set volume / pan data is being executed, a playback volume value, a pan value, a performance start time, etc.). After setting, the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1011, the execution flag of the volume / pan data is determined. If the execution flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1017.

  In step S1015, volume / pan data update processing is performed, and the flow advances to step S1017.

  In step S1017, it is determined whether or not the settings of the sound data and the volume / pan data are both on standby. If both are on standby, the process proceeds to step S1019, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1019, various information set in the free layer is initialized, and the process returns to step S1001.

  Since the sound data and the volume / pan data are managed separately, if either one of the sound data and the volume / pan data is set (remains) in the free layer, the free layer is It does not initialize (open). That is, the free layer is initialized (opened) only when both the sound data and the volume / pan data are on standby (data is not set) in the determination of step S1017. The fixed layer and the system layer are not initialized (opened) in this step.

<Sound data update processing>
FIG. 775 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sound data updating process (step S1009) of the sound updating process shown in FIG. 774.

  In step S1101, the sound data of the layer to be updated (layer number) is set, and the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the start frame of the next effect has been reached. If it has reached, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1131.

  Here, the next "effect" refers to a block of data set for each preset frame. More specifically, the effect is No. as the sound source data number shown in FIG. 105 (Ballroom background loop BGM), the number of repetitions is set to 1 (that is, no repetition), the stop data number (symbol, constant) is set as the sound source data number at the 300th frame, and the number of repetitions is set to 1 Is a block of sound data in which end data (symbol, constant) indicating the end of the frame is set in the sound source data number of the frame and the number of repetitions. Then, for this effect, a start frame is set in advance in the data array that constitutes the sound data. When this effect is executed, the large hall background loop BGM is output without repeating once from the 0th frame to the 299th frame, the large hall background loop BGM is stopped at the 300th frame, and the end data is updated at the next update. Set.

  In this step S1103, it is determined whether or not the preset start frame has been reached for this effect.

  In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the effect start time is at the beginning (0th frame). If it is not at the beginning, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it is the beginning, the process proceeds to step S1109.

  In step S1107, a part of the parameters of the sound data (phrase loop counter, in-execution frame counter, halfway reproduction time) is set in order to perform halfway reproduction, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

  In step S1109, the writing position is moved to the next data (for example, in the case of the above-mentioned effect, the data sequence of the 300th frame), and the sound data is expanded. In this step, a data address to be set at the next production start time is set, and the process proceeds to step S1111.

  In step S1111, it is determined whether or not the stop data number (stop phrase number) is set for the sound data (sound source data) number. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1113, and if not set, the step is performed. It proceeds to S1119.

  In step S1113, a channel (channel) acquisition process is executed, and the flow advances to step S1115. The channel acquisition process will be described later. In step S1115, it is determined whether or not the layer to be updated is assigned to the channel. If it is assigned, the process proceeds to step S1117, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1119.

  In step S1117, the reproduction of the sound data set in the assigned channel is stopped, and the process proceeds to step S1119.

  In step S1119, it is determined whether or not the stop data number is set as the sound data number. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1131, and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S1121.

  In step S1121, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of the sound data is started from the beginning. If not (if not started from the beginning), the process proceeds to step S1123, and if it is started from the beginning, the process proceeds to step S1125.

  In step S1123, a midway reproduction time is set, and the flow advances to step S1125. In step S1125, a channel (channel) acquisition process (described later) is executed, and the flow advances to step S1127.

  In step S1127, to reproduce the sound data, the sound data is set in the sound control circuit 431. In step S1129, the sound data number being output is acquired and stored. If another sound data (for example, system sound data such as an error sound) is output by an interrupt while sound data is being output and the original sound data is restored again, the previous sound (sound source) data should be stored. For example, the volume data (sound output volume data) originally set for the sound data being output can be restored. The output volume data is calculated from the setting value of the volume knob provided on the back side of the board, the volume value set in the sound data, and the volume value set by the user.

  In step S1131 following step S1129, the in-execution frame counter is incremented (+1), and the process proceeds to step S1133.

  In step S1133, it is determined whether the sound data has ended (whether the end code has been set). If it has ended, the process proceeds to step S1135, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  In step S1135, the in-execution flag of the sound data parameter is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1137. In step S1137, the in-execution frame counter, which is a parameter of the sound data, is set to "end data", and the process proceeds to step S1139. In step S1139, channel opening processing is executed. The channel release processing will be described later.

<Channel acquisition processing>
FIG. 776 is a flowchart showing the flow of the channel (channel) acquisition process (step S1125) of the sound data update process shown in FIG. 775.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether the layer number is out of the range, or whether the setting is for the entire free layer (whether it is a number corresponding to the entire free layer stop function or the entire free layer volume setting function). If it is, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the layer number outside the range is not set or the setting is not for the entire free layer, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1201, if a layer number that cannot be processed is specified, or the sound reproduction is stopped for the entire free layer (the sound reproduction is stopped for all channels reproduced as the free layer). If the number corresponds to (all free layer stop function), or change the sound volume for the entire free layer (change the sound volume for all channels playing as the free layer) (free layer It is determined whether the number corresponding to the whole volume setting function) is set. The free layer entire stop function and the free layer entire volume setting function are set at the time of data creation.

  In step S1203, a channel number indicating that the channel (channel) has not been acquired is set, and the process ends.

  In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is the system layer. If it is the system layer, the process proceeds to step S1207, and if not (not the system layer), the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1207, the channel number (channel 32) for the system layer is set, and the process ends.

  In step S1209, in-use channel acquisition processing (described later) is executed, and the flow advances to step S1211. In step S1211, it is determined whether or not a channel having the same layer number as the layer number of the layer (fixed layer) to be set is detected. If not detected, the process proceeds to step S1213, and if not detected (detected). If), the process ends.

  In step S1213, unused channel acquisition processing is executed. The unused channel acquisition processing will be described later.

  In the case of fixed layer, if there is a channel used with the same layer number, use that channel as it is, and if there is no channel used with the same layer number, use a free (unused) channel To do. However, even if there are channels used in the same layer number, if the sound source type is a stereo sound source (when it is necessary to secure two consecutive channels), unused channels may be used. is there. In the case of the free layer, unused channels are used.

<In-use channel acquisition processing>
FIG. 777 is a flowchart showing the flow of in-use channel acquisition processing (step S1209) of the channel acquisition processing shown in FIG. 776.

  In order to set the sound device data (sound data) device data in the channel, the layer number of the layer in which the sound data is set this time and the management information including the sound source type are used.

  In step S1301, a channel number indicating that a channel has not been acquired (i.e., a channel that has not been acquired for setting sound data) is set, and the flow advances to step S1302. In step S1302, the confirmation target channel number is updated, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the confirmation of all channels is completed. If completed, the process is ended. If not (if not completed), the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, it is determined whether or not the layer number set in the target channel matches the layer number set this time. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if they match, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In this way, if the layer numbers match (if there is a channel used with the same layer number), that channel is used as it is. That is, in the case of fixed layer, if there is a channel used with the same layer number, that channel is used as it is, and if there is no channel used with the same layer number, an empty (unused) channel To use.

  Also in the case of a free layer, it is determined in this step whether the layer numbers match. In other words, even if it is a free layer, if there is a channel used with the same layer number, that channel is used as it is, and if there is no channel used with the same layer number, it is vacant (unused ) May use channels. Therefore, when there are a small number of free layer areas, the already set free layer sound data may be overwritten. For example, when the sound data is set in the free 01 and is output, if the sound data is newly set in the free 01, the sound data of the previous free 01 may be overwritten. Further, in this case, only the coincidence of the free layer numbers (for example, free 01, free 02 ...) Set for control is determined, and the content of the sound data is not determined. That is, arbitrary sound data designed as a free layer is set in the free 01, and it may be overwritten when the layer numbers match, regardless of the contents of the free 01.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a large number of free layers are provided to prevent the free layers from being overwritten. On the other hand, in order to enable overwriting on specific sound data arbitrarily set in the free layer, the sound data can be specified using the identification information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a large number of free layers are provided to prevent the free layers from being overwritten. However, when the free layer numbers match, the overwriting is performed regardless of the contents of the sound data. It may be configured to do so. Further, the layer number match determination may be performed only on the fixed layer, and the layer number match determination may not be performed on the free layer.

  In step S1307, the sound data being reproduced is stopped, and the flow proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether the sound source type is a monaural sound source, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1311, and if not (if it is not a monaural sound source), the process proceeds to step S1317.

  In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the sound source type of the currently reproduced sound data (the sound data acquired in step S1129 of the sound data update processing shown in FIG. 775) is a stereo sound source, and if so, step S1313. If not (if not a stereo sound source), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1313, the sound source type of the sound data to be reproduced is updated to a monaural sound source, and the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, odd-numbered channels are set as unused channels (empty channels), and the flow advances to step S1303.

  If it is determined in step S1309 that the sound source type is not a monaural sound source, the process proceeds to step S1317, where it is determined whether the sound source type of the sound data currently being reproduced is a monaural sound source, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1319. If not (if it is not a monaural sound source), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1319, it is determined whether or not the channel currently in use is an odd-numbered channel, and if it is an even-numbered channel, the process proceeds to step S1321. If it is an odd-numbered channel, the process proceeds to step S1325.

  In step S1321, it is determined whether or not the number of the channel currently in use is the channel 31, and if it is not the channel 30, the process proceeds to step S1323, and if it is the channel 31, the process proceeds to step S1325.

  When the sound source type is a stereo sound source, two channels, an odd channel and the next channel (for example, channel 1 and channel 2) are set. If the sound source data of the stereo sound source is to be put in the channel 31, the channel 32 set as the system channel will be overwritten. Therefore, in step S1321, it is determined whether or not the channel number currently in use is the channel 31.

  In this embodiment, the stereo sound source is described as an example in which the odd channel N-1 and the even channel N are set, but the even channel N and the odd channel N + 1 may be set, and the first channel may be It may be set as long as it is two consecutive channels regardless of whether it is an odd number or even number, or may be set as two discontinuous free channels. In the case of a stereo sound source, the number of occupied channels is not limited to two and may be two or more.

  Further, in step S1321, it may be determined whether or not the number of the channel currently in use is the channel 32.

  In step S1323, it is determined whether or not the channel number next to the channel currently in use is in use. If it is in use, the process proceeds to step S1325, and if it is not in use, the process proceeds to step S1329.

  In step S1325, the currently used channel is set as an unused channel (empty channel), and the process proceeds to step S1327. In step S1327, a channel number indicating that the channel has not been acquired is set, and the flow advances to step S1303. Even if the channel next to the currently used channel is being used, the currently used channel may not be set as an unused channel. In that case, a process for resuming the reproduction of the sound data stopped in S1307 (for example, reproduction from the stop point, advancement for the stopped period, intermediate reproduction, reproduction from a predetermined intermediate reproduction timing) Etc.) may be performed.

  In step S1323, when it is determined that the channel number next to the channel currently in use is not in use, the process proceeds to step S1329, where the sound source type is updated to the stereo sound source, and the process proceeds to step S1331. In step S1331, since continuous channels are used in the case of a stereo sound source, the sound source type of the channel next to the target channel is updated to the stereo sound source, and the process proceeds to step S1333.

  In step S1333, the layer number of the channel next to the target channel is set to the same layer number as the target channel this time, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

<Unused channel acquisition processing>
FIG. 778 is a flowchart showing the flow of unused channel acquisition processing (step S1213) of the channel acquisition processing shown in FIG. 776.

  In step S1401, a channel number indicating that the channel is unused is set, and the flow advances to step S1402. In step S1402, the confirmation target channel number is updated, and the flow advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not confirmation of all channels has been completed. If completed, the process ends, and if not (if not completed), the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, it is determined whether or not there is a layer number setting (of a fixed layer) in the target channel. If there is a setting, the process proceeds to step S1403, and if there is no setting, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, it is determined whether the sound source type is a monaural sound source, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1409, and if not (if it is not a monaural sound source), the process proceeds to step S1413.

  In step S1409, the channel number is set, in step S1411, the layer number and sound source type of the channel to be confirmed are updated, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

  If it is determined in step S1407 that the sound source type is not a monaural sound source, the process proceeds to step S1413, where it is determined whether the confirmation target channel is an even-numbered channel, and if it is an even-numbered channel, the process proceeds to step S1415. If the channel has an odd number, the process advances to step S1403.

  In step S1415, it is determined whether or not the number of the channel to be confirmed is channel 31, and in the case of channel 30, the process proceeds to step S1417, and in the case of channel 31, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the channel number next to the channel currently in use is in use. If not in use, the process proceeds to step S1419, and if in use, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1419, the layer number and sound source type of the channel to be confirmed are updated, and the flow advances to step S1421. In step S1421, the layer number and sound source type of the channel next to the confirmation target channel are updated, and the flow advances to step S1403.

  If the layer to be set this time is a fixed layer, if there is a channel used with the same layer number, that channel is used as it is, and if there is no channel used with the same layer number, an empty channel (unused channel) To use.

  Here, when an unused channel is used, when the sound source type is a monaural sound source, one unused channel (the channel number may be an even number or an odd number) is acquired. On the other hand, when the sound source type is a stereo sound source, it is necessary to secure two consecutive channels, so that even if there is a channel used with the same layer number, that channel cannot be used as it is.

  That is, when the unused channel is used, in the case of a stereo sound source, two consecutive unused channels starting with an even channel number are acquired. Specifically, if the unused channel has an odd channel number, another unused channel with an even channel number is acquired. If the next channel after the unused channel is in use, the next unused channel is acquired.

  If the currently used sound source type is a stereo sound source and the sound source type to be set this time is also a stereo sound source, the channel is used as it is. If the sound source type currently being played is a stereo sound source and the sound source type set this time is a monaural sound source, that channel is used as it is and the odd channel side is set to unused. If the currently playing sound source type is a monaural sound source and the sound source type set this time is a stereo sound source, the next unused channel is used, but the first layer number of the next unused channel is an odd number. Or the continuous next channel is in use, the in-use channel is not used, and a channel having an even number of the first layer number and two consecutive free channels (unused channel) is acquired. If the next consecutive channel is in use, the channel in use is set to unused (sound stopped).

  When the unused channel is channel 31, a monaural sound source can be used, but a stereo sound source cannot be used because channel 32 is a system channel. When the currently used channel is the channel 31, in the case of a stereo sound source, the channel 31 is made unused (sound stopped), and then another vacant channel is acquired.

<Channel release processing>
FIG. 779 is a flowchart showing the flow of the channel opening process (step S1139) of the sound data updating process shown in FIG. 775.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether the layer number is out of the range or the setting is for the entire free layer, and if so, the process is terminated, and the layer number out of the range is not set, or If the setting is not for the entire free layer, the process advances to step S1503. In step S1501, if a layer number that cannot be processed is specified, or if it is the number of the function of stopping the sound reproduction of the entire free layer (the free layer entire stop function), or if it is the entire free layer. It is determined whether the number of the function for changing the sound volume (the free layer overall volume setting function) is set.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the layer is the system layer. If the layer is the system layer, the process ends, and if not (not the system layer), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, the confirmation target channel number is updated, and the flow advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not confirmation of all channels has been completed. If completed, the process ends, and if not completed, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the layer number matches the layer number of the channel to be confirmed. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S1505, and if they match, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, it is determined whether the channel to be confirmed is an even-numbered channel. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1511. If not (if it is an odd-numbered channel), the process proceeds to step S1513.

  In step S1511, the layer number and the sound source type of the channel next to the confirmation target channel are updated, and the flow advances to step S1513. Here, the layer number of the channel next to the confirmation target channel is the layer number indicating that the channel is unused (the same as the layer number indicating that the channel has not been acquired). Although the sound source type is set (updated) to monaural sound source, it is not updated to monaural sound source and the same sound source as before setting the sound source type (if the sound source before setting is monaural sound source, If the sound source type is a stereo sound source, the sound source type may be set to monaural sound source or empty data, or the sound source type may be empty data. In step S1513, the layer number and sound source type of the channel to be confirmed are updated, and the flow advances to step S1505.

  It should be noted that in the above embodiment, an example of the sound update processing when the second method is mainly used has been described, but the sound update processing described above is similarly performed even in the first method. be able to. In that case, in each process shown in FIGS. 774 to 779, the part described as “layer” is replaced with “channel”, and in step S1209 and subsequent steps of the channel acquisition process of FIG. The channel number to be acquired and set to the acquired fixed channel in use is set, and the processing is ended without executing the unused channel acquisition processing in step S1213.

<Sound setting processing>
Next, an example of the sound setting process executed in the effect control process of step S309 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 780 to 786.

  FIG. 780 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sound setting process. The sound setting process is one of the processes called when the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit.

  In step S1601, a data table corresponding to the output sound type is set. The sound type refers to, for example, the type of system sound data such as an error sound and the effect sound data (BGM, voice, etc.).

  In step S1603, it is determined whether the sound type is a system sound. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1605, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1605, the system sound flag is set, and the flow advances to step S1607. In step S1607, a layer number acquisition process for allocating a fixed layer and a free layer is performed, and the process ends. The layer number acquisition process will be described later.

<Layer number acquisition process>
FIG. 781 is a flowchart showing the flow of layer number acquisition processing (step S1607) of the sound setting processing shown in FIG. 780.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the entire free layer stop function is set, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1705. The free layer entire stop function is set at the time of data creation.

  In step S1703, the process of stopping the reproduction of the sound for all the channels reproduced as the free layer (all free layer stop process) is performed, and the process is ended. In the all free layer stop processing, the data set in each of the free layers is stopped (interrupted), and the free layer and the channel are released. Also, the volume value of each free layer is returned to the default. Note that the term “all free layers” when described as all free layer stop processing means “set for all free layers” and does not mean the existence of another layer.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether the free layer overall volume setting function is set, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1707, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1709. The free layer overall volume setting function is set when data is created.

  In step S1707, a process (all free layer volume data setting process) of setting (changing) the sound volume of all channels reproduced as the free layer is performed, and the process ends. In the all free layer volume data setting process, the volume of data set in each of all free layers is changed. Note that “all free layers” in the case of being described as “all free layer volume data setting processing” means “set for all free layers” and does not mean the existence of another layer.

  In step S1709, it is determined whether the layer is the system layer. If the layer is the system layer, the process proceeds to step S1711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1715. In step S1711, the system layer number is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, data setting processing is performed and the processing ends. The data setting process is a process of setting the sound data shown in FIG. 772, and the details will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1709 that the system layer is not the system layer, in step S1715 it is determined whether the layer is the free layer. If the layer is the free layer, the process proceeds to step S1717, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1721.

  In step S1717, an available free layer acquisition process (described below) is executed, and the process proceeds to the data setting process (described below) in step S1719.

  If it is determined in step S1715 that the target layer is not the free layer, the target layer is the fixed layer, and thus the fixed layer number is acquired in step S1721, and the process proceeds to the data setting process (described later) in step S1723.

  In the case of a fixed layer, the number of the fixed layer (fixed layer number) is directly acquired as the layer number for setting the sound data (step S1721). On the other hand, in the case of the free layer, its number is arbitrary, and therefore the free layer has identification information (attribute) for specifying the free layer in which the sound data is set and a busy flag as management information. The identification information is information associated with the sound data, which is set at the same time when the sound data is set in the free layer.

  As for the free layer for setting the sound data, if there is a free layer having the same identification information (the same number is set as the identification information), that free layer is used, and there is a free layer having the same identification information. If not, use an unused free layer. Also, when “none” is set as the identification information (instead of overwriting the free layer having the identification information “none”), an unused free layer is used.

  That is, in the available free layer acquisition process (step S1717), a layer having the same identification information is searched, and if there is a layer used by the same identification information, the layer number is used as the free layer number, and the same identification information is obtained. If the layer used in is not found, use an unused free layer number.

<Data setting process>
782 and 783 are flowcharts showing the flow of the data setting process (steps S1713, S1719, S1723) of the layer number acquisition process shown in FIG. 781.

  Referring to FIG. 782, in step S1801, management information (start address) of the sound data and volume / pan data of the layer to be set is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1803.

  In step S1803, the same data discard permission flag of the layer to be set (of the layer data set in the target layer) is determined. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1805, and if it is off, step S1811. Proceed to. Here, the same data discard permission flag is a flag for permitting discard when a playback request for the same phrase is received during playback of a phrase of sound data (at least a part of the sound data). That is, when the same data discard permission flag is ON, if the sound device data (or its contents) scheduled to be set later is the same, the sound device data scheduled to be set later is discarded. It

  In step S1805, sound data matching determination processing (described later) is performed, and the flow advances to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the sound data match. If they match, the process proceeds to step S1809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1809, the sound data scheduled to be set next to the sound data of the target layer is discarded, and the process proceeds to step S1811.

  In other words, when the same data discard permission flag is on, the currently set sound device data (sound data) is compared with the sound device data (sound data) of the layer to be set this time, and the device data numbers match. In this case, the data to be set is discarded in any of the cases where the sound data match, the contents of the sound data (number of effect start frames, phrase number, number of phrase repetitions) completely match.

  In step S1811, the currently set overwriting prohibition level of the sound device data is compared with the overwriting prohibition release level of the layer to be set this time (layer data set in), and the overwriting prohibition level is the overwriting prohibition release level. If it is more than the above, the process is terminated without setting the data, and if the overwrite protection level is lower than the overwrite protection release level, the process proceeds to step S1813.

  Here, the overwrite prohibition level is a level that prohibits the overwrite of the management information (layer data) of the layer being executed, and the range is 0 to 2. To set overwrite protection, use the overwrite protection level. Specifically, when the overwrite prohibition level is 0, overwriting is possible, and when the overwrite prohibition levels are 1 and 2, it is possible to overwrite conditionally. When the layer data ends (phrase reproduction ends, etc.), the overwrite prohibition state is retained.

  Further, the overwrite prohibition cancellation level indicates a level at which the overwrite prohibition is canceled, and the range is 0 to 2. The overwrite protection release level releases the overwrite protection when it is equal to or higher than the overwrite protection release level to be compared. That is, in order to cancel the overwriting prohibition with new data, layer data of the currently set overwriting prohibition level or higher is set.

  For example, if the overwriting prohibition level of the current layer data is “2” and the overwriting prohibition release level of the layer data currently set is “1”, the overwriting prohibition release level of the layer data currently planned to be set is currently Since it is smaller than the overwriting prohibition level of layer data, the overwriting prohibition cannot be canceled (data cannot be overwritten).

  Further, for example, when the overwrite prohibition level of the current layer data is “2”, the overwrite prohibition level of the layer data scheduled to be set this time is “3”, and the overwrite prohibition release level is “2”, the schedule is set this time. Since the overwriting prohibition cancellation level of the layer data of is equal to the overwriting prohibition level of the current layer data, the overwriting prohibition can be canceled (the data can be overwritten). In this case, the overwrite prohibition level is updated to "3".

  Further, for example, if the overwrite prohibition level of the current layer data is “2”, the overwrite prohibition level of the layer data scheduled to be set this time is “1”, and the overwrite prohibition release level is “3”, the schedule is set this time. Since the overwriting prohibition cancellation level of the layer data of is higher than the overwriting prohibition level of the current layer data, the overwriting prohibition can be canceled (data can be overwritten). In this case, the overwrite prohibition level is updated to "1".

  In step S1813, the overwrite prohibition level and the overwrite prohibition release level of the target layer data set this time are acquired, and the flow advances to step S1815.

  In step S1815, it is determined whether or not the sound data is set in the target layer. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1817, and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S1825. If the target layer is a fixed layer, sound data may not be set, and the determination is made in step S1815.

  In step S1817, various parameters of the sound data are set, and the process proceeds to step S1819. In step S1819, it is determined whether or not the sound data is end data (whether or not an end code is set in the sound data). If the end data is the end data, the process proceeds to step S1821, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1825. . In step S1821, the in-execution flag of the sound data is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S1823.

  In step S1823, channel release processing is performed. In the past, the channel may be occupied even when the sound data ends (even if it is the end data), but in the present embodiment, when the sound data ends, the channel is opened by this step, It allows the setting of other data. Details of this channel release processing will be described later. After step S1823, the process proceeds to step S1825.

  In step S1825, it is determined whether volume / pan data is set in the target layer. If not set, the process proceeds to step S1833, and if set, the process proceeds to step S1827.

  In step S1827, various parameters of volume / pan data are set, and the flow advances to step S1829. In step S1829, it is determined whether the volume / pan data is the end frame. If the volume / pan data is the end frame, the process proceeds to step S1831, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1833. In step S1831, the in-execution flag of volume / pan data is set to OFF, and the flow advances to step S1833.

  FIG. 783 is a flowchart showing the process flow following the flowchart of FIG. 782. In step S1833, it is determined whether or not the reproduction start position of the sound data is the head. If it is, the process proceeds to step S1841. Otherwise, it proceeds to step S1835.

  In step S1835, the midway reproduction start position of the sound data is searched, and the flow advances to step S1837. In step S1837, it is determined whether or not the data related to the halfway reproduction has an error value. If the data has an error value, the process proceeds to step S1839, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1841. For example, when the sound data is composed of 100 frames and the midway playback start position is set to 120 frames or the like, it is determined that the data related to the midway playback is an error value.

  In step S1839, channel release processing is performed. The channel release processing will be described later. In step S1841, various parameters corresponding to the reproduction start position of the sound data are reset, and the process proceeds to step S1843. For example, when the sound data is composed of a song A of 0 to 100 frames and a song B of 101 to 200 frames, and when halfway reproduction is started from 120 frames, in this step, 20 frames of song B are used. Reset the sound data parameters to start with the eyes. Then, in step S1843, the overwrite prohibition level acquired in step S1813 of FIG. 782 is set in the target layer, and the process ends.

<Available free layer acquisition process>
FIG. 784 is a flowchart showing the flow of available free layer acquisition processing (step S1717) of the layer number acquisition processing shown in FIG. In the available free layer acquisition process, a layer in which layer data with matching identification information is set is searched, and if there is a layer used with the same identification information, that layer number is used as the free layer number and the same identification is used. If the layer used in the information cannot be searched, an unused free layer number is used.

  First, in step S1901, a layer number with identification information is searched to retrieve a layer number (layer number with identification information) for which identification information is set, and the process proceeds to step S1903. The layer number search process with identification information will be described later.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not there is a layer number for which identification information is set. If there is no layer number with identification information, the process proceeds to step S1905, and if there is, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1905, unused free layer search processing is performed, and the flow advances to step S1907. The unused free layer search process will be described later.

  In step S1907, it is determined whether or not all the free layers are in use. If all free layers are in use, the process ends. If not in use, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1909, the number of the available free layer is acquired, and the process ends.

  FIG. 785 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the identification information-containing layer number search process (step S1901) and the unused free layer search process (step S1905) in the available free layer acquisition process shown in FIG. 784.

<Layer number search process with identification information>
As shown in FIG. 9A, in step S2001 of the layer number search process with identification information, a layer number indicating that the data set in the free layer has no identification information (is not set), It proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the identification information is set in the free layer acquired this time. If it is not set, the process ends, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, the free layer to be checked is updated, and the flow advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the presence / absence of identification information is searched for in all the free layers. If all the free layers are searched, the process ends, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2007.

  In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the identification information of the free layer acquired this time and the identification information of the confirmation target free layer match. If they match, the process proceeds to step S2009. If not, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2009, the layer number of the free layer to be confirmed is acquired, and the flow advances to step S2005.

<Unused free layer search processing>
As shown in FIG. 785 (b), in step S2101 of the unused free layer search processing, the layer number indicating that all the free layers are in use is acquired, and the flow advances to step S2102. In step S2102, the free layer to be checked is updated, and the flow advances to step S2103.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether the in-use flags have been searched for all the free layers. If all the free layers have been searched, the process ends, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, it is determined whether the confirmation target free layer is an unused free layer. If it is an unused free layer, the process proceeds to step S2107. If not, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In this way, when setting the sound device data in the free layer, search the free layer where the identification information matches, and if there is a corresponding one, set the new sound device data using the free layer number, If no match is found, an unused free layer number is used to set new sound device data. However, when the identification information is “none”, it is set to an empty (unused) free layer.

  The sound device data (sound data) set in the free layer is set in an unused channel and output from the speaker 120.

  It should be noted that step S1909 is executed even when the identification-information-containing layer number is present in the determination processing of step S1903 of the available free layer acquisition processing shown in FIG. 784. When there is a free layer (unused free layer) and a layer having identification information (matching), the sound data is set to overwrite the layer having identification information (matching).

<Sound data matching determination process>
FIG. 786 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the sound data match determination processing (step S1806) in the data setting processing shown in FIG. 782.

  In step S2201, the return value is set to "mismatch", and the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the numbers of the sound device data shown in FIG. 771 match. If they match, the process proceeds to step S2205, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2207.

  In step S2205, the return value is set to "match", and the process ends. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the numbers of the sound data (for example, the numbers in FIG. 772) match, the process proceeds to step S2209 if they match, and the process proceeds to step S2211 if they do not match. In step S2209, the return value is set to "match", and the process ends.

  In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the effect start times match. If they match, the process proceeds to step S2213, and if they do not match, the process ends.

  In step S2213, it is determined whether or not the data is the end. If it is the end, the process proceeds to step S2215, and if it is not the end, the process proceeds to step S2217. In step S2215, the return value is set to "match", and the process ends.

  In step S2217, it is determined whether or not the phrase number and the number of repetitions do not match, and whether the phrase number or the number of repetitions do not match. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2211, and if they do not match, The process proceeds to step S2219. In step S2219, the return value is set to "match", and the process ends. Note that the processing after the determination in step S2211 may be omitted.

  In the sound data matching determination process, even if the numbers of the sound device data shown in FIG. 771 do not match, if the contents (for example, the numbers of one or more sound data included) all match, the next setting schedule is set. Sound device data is discarded. In addition, even if the numbers of the sound device data do not match and the numbers of the sound data match, if the contents of the sound data (for example, at least one of the presentation start time, the phrase number, and the number of repetitions) are different. Does not discard the sound device data to be set next time, but discards it when the production start time, the phrase number, and the number of repetitions all match.

  FIG. 787 is a diagram showing a specific example of the sound control processing according to the second method of the present embodiment. FIG. 787 shows the sound data reproduced as the game progresses (sound data shown in FIG. 772. ) Is a timing chart, and FIG. 6B is a diagram showing in time series an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and setting of sound data.

  In the following embodiments (FIGS. 787 to 790, FIG. 793 to FIG. 802, and corresponding embodiments), the “layer” is replaced with the “channel” to apply the first method.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in this example, the saloon background loop BGM is reproduced from the timing (0). The hall background loop BGM is designed as sound data set in a fixed layer (fixed layer 01), for example. Further, since it is a fixed layer, it does not have identification information. It should be noted that in the figure and the subsequent figures, the identification information is displayed as "attribute". Further, when the identification information is not set because it is a fixed layer, it is displayed as "-".

  At the timing shown in (1) of FIG. 2B (timing (1) of FIG. 1A), the background of the hall is displayed in the display area of the decorative design display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative design is stopped (stop display). ), The saloon background loop BGM continues to be played.

  At the timing (timing t1 in FIG. 2A) shown in (2) of FIG. 2B, the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the saloon background loop BGM is continuously reproduced.

  At the timing (timing t2 in FIG. 3A) shown in (3) of FIG. 2B, the left decorative design (for example, “decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped in the left display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. It is in the displayed state. The temporary stop display is a shake fluctuation display in this example. At this timing, the symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the left decorative symbol in the left display area 208a. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “absent”. When the identification information (attribute) is “absent”, the sound data of the symbol stop sound is set to an unused free layer (free 01).

  That is, at this timing, the symbol stop sound is reproduced from the beginning and overlapped with the hall background loop BGM (from the middle), and is output through the speaker 120.

  At the timing (timing t3 in FIG. 4A) shown in (4) of FIG. 2B, the right decorative design (for example, “decoration 3”) is temporarily stopped in the right display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208. It is in a state of being displayed (shaking fluctuation display). At this timing, a new symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the right decorative symbol in the right display area 208c. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “absent”. Since the identification information (attribute) is “absent”, the sound data of the new symbol stop sound is set to the unused free layer (free 02). In this embodiment, the same command discard permission flag is set to OFF (not to be discarded even if the layer data (sound device data) to be newly set is the same) (the following). The same applies to the examples). That is, at this timing, the background stop loop BGM and the symbol stop sound set to free 01 are overlapped (from the middle of them), and the symbol stop sound set to free 02 is reproduced from the beginning and output via the speaker 120. Has been done.

  At the timing (timing t4 in FIG. 5A) shown in (5) of FIG. 7B, the medium decoration pattern (for example, “decoration 5”) swings in the middle display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is in the displayed state. At this timing, a new symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the middle decoration symbol in the middle display area 208b. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “absent”. Since the identification information (attribute) is “absent”, the sound data of the new symbol stop sound is set to the unused free layer (free 03).

  That is, at this timing, the hall background loop BGM, the symbol stop sound set to free 01 and the symbol stop sound set to free 02 (from the middle of them) are overlapped with the symbol stop sound set to free 03 at the beginning. Is output from the speaker 120. In this example, after the timing t4, the three symbol stop sounds may overlap, and the volume may be unnecessarily high.

  FIG. 788 is a diagram showing another specific example of the sound control process according to the second method of the present embodiment, and FIG. 788 shows the sound data reproduced as the game progresses (shown in FIG. 772). (B) is a timing chart of (sound data), and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and setting of sound data in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in this example, the saloon background loop BGM is reproduced from the timing (0). The hall background loop BGM is designed as sound data set in a fixed layer (fixed layer 01), for example, and has no identification information (“−”).

  At the timing shown in (1) of FIG. 2B (timing (1) of FIG. 1A), the background of the hall is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (stopped). In the display state, the saloon background loop BGM is continuously reproduced.

  At the timing (timing t1 in FIG. 2A) shown in (2) of FIG. 2B, the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the saloon background loop BGM is continuously reproduced.

  At the timing (timing t2 in FIG. 3A) shown in (3) of FIG. 2B, the left decorative design (for example, “decoration 6”) swings in the left display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. It is in the displayed state. At this timing, the symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the left decorative symbol in the left display area 208a. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "4". At this timing, since there is no free layer to which the same identification information is set, the sound data of the symbol stop sound is set to an unused free layer (free 01).

  That is, at this timing, the symbol stop sound is reproduced from the beginning and overlapped with the hall background loop BGM (from the middle), and is output through the speaker 120.

  At the timing (timing t3 in FIG. 4A) shown in (4) of FIG. 4B, the right decorative design (for example, “decoration 3”) swings in the right display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208. It is in the displayed state. At this timing, a new symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the right decorative symbol in the right display area 208c. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "4". At this timing, since the same identification information “4” is set in the free 01, the sound data of the symbol stop sound acquired this time is set to the free 01 (overwriting the sound data of the previous symbol stop sound). In this embodiment, it is assumed that overwriting is permitted. That is, the overwriting prohibition release level of the symbol stop sound newly reproduced at the timing t3 is equal to or higher than the overwriting prohibition level of the symbol stop sound previously reproduced at the timing t2 (also in the following embodiments. The same).

  In other words, at this timing t3, the symbol stop sound that was previously set to Free 01 (the symbol stop sound that was being reproduced from Timing t2) stopped midway, and was superimposed on the hall background loop BGM and set to Free 01 this time. The symbol stop sound is reproduced from the beginning and is output via the speaker 120.

  At the timing (timing t4 in FIG. 5A) shown in (5) of FIG. 7B, the medium decoration pattern (for example, “decoration 5”) swings in the middle display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is in the displayed state. At this timing, a new symbol stop sound is reproduced corresponding to the middle decoration symbol in the middle display area 208b. The symbol stop sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "4". At this timing, since the same identification information “4” is set in the free 01, the sound data of the symbol stop sound acquired this time is set to the free 01 (overwriting the sound data of the previous symbol stop sound).

  In other words, at this timing t4, the symbol stop sound that was previously set to Free 01 (the symbol stop sound that was being reproduced from timing t3) stops midway, and is overlapped with the hall background loop BGM and set to Free 01 this time. The symbol stop sound is reproduced from the beginning and is output via the speaker 120.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 787, since the three symbol stop sounds are played back one after another with the timings shifted, the player may sometimes hear noise, but in the case of the embodiment shown in FIG. 788, they were played back first. Since the design teacher sound is stopped and a new design stop sound is reproduced, the sound may be easier to hear.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 788, when the same command discard permission flag is set to OFF, even if the symbol stop sound is set to the fixed layer, the same operation can be performed.

  FIG. 789 is a diagram showing another specific example of the sound control process according to the second method of the present embodiment, and FIG. 789 shows the sound data reproduced as the game progresses (shown in FIG. 772). (B) is a timing chart of (sound data), and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and setting of sound data in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in this example, the swordsman reach BGM is reproduced from timing (0). The swordsman reach BGM is designed as sound data set in a fixed layer (fixed layer 01), for example (identification information "-").

  At the timing shown in (1) of FIG. 2B (timing (1) of FIG. 1A), the swordsman reach effect is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the operation button (chance button 136) is repeatedly hit. In this example, the continuous hit display is started, and in this example, the operation means image BG imitating the chance button 136, the character “continuous hit”, and the repeated hit operation (operation of the chance button 136) are accepted. It includes an elapsed time notification image TG that displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the period.

  Further, at this timing, the guide sound before the start of repeated hits is reproduced corresponding to the start of the continuous hit display. The guide sound before the repeated hits is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “none”. As a result, the sound data of the repeated hitting start guide sound is set to an unused free layer (free 01).

  That is, at this timing, the guide sound before start of repeated hits is reproduced from the beginning and is output via the speaker 120, overlapping with the swordsman reach BGM (from the middle thereof).

  The timing (timing (2) in (a) in the figure) shown in (2) in (b) in the figure is a state in which the valid period for accepting the repeated hitting operation has started.

  At this timing, the repeated hitting start sound is reproduced corresponding to the start of the effective period. The repeated hitting start sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “none”. Further, at this timing, the guide sound before the repeated hitting, which is reproduced from the timing (1), ends at the timing t1, and the free 01 is released (not used). The data is set in an unused free layer (free 01).

  That is, at this timing, the repeated hitting start sound is reproduced from the beginning and is output via the speaker 120, overlapping with the swordsman reach BGM (from the middle thereof).

  The timing (3) in FIG. 3B (timing (3) in FIG. 3A) is a state in which the player has performed a continuous hit operation.

  At this timing, the button tap sound is reproduced corresponding to the button tap operation. The button tap sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "1". Further, at this timing, the continuous tapping start sound reproduced from the timing (2) continues, and the free 01 is not released (in use), so the sound data of the continuous tapping sound is not used. Is set to the free layer (free 02).

  That is, at this timing (3), the swordsman reach BGM and the repeated hit start sound are overlapped (from the middle), and the repeated hit start sound is reproduced from the beginning and is output through the speaker 120.

  The timing (timing (4) in (a) of the figure) shown in (4) of the same (b) is a state in which the player repeatedly performs a continuous hit operation.

  At this timing, the button tap sound is reproduced corresponding to the button tap operation at the timing (4). The button tap sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "1". At this timing, since the same identification information "1" is set in the free 02, the sound data of the button tap sound acquired this time is set in the free 02 (overwriting the previous button tap sound).

  That is, at this timing (4), the button repeated tap sound set this time to free 02 is reproduced from the beginning and output through the speaker 120, overlapping the swordsman reach BGM (from the middle). The previous button tap sound started at timing (3) is stopped midway.

  The timing (5) in FIG. 5B (timing (5) in FIG. 5A) is a state in which the player repeatedly performs a continuous hit operation.

  At this timing, the button tap sound is reproduced corresponding to the button tap operation at the timing (5). The button tap sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "1". At this timing, since the same identification information "1" is set in the free 02, the sound data of the button tap sound acquired this time is set in the free 02 (overwriting the previous button tap sound).

  That is, at this timing (5), the button repeated tap sound set this time to free 02 is reproduced from the beginning and output from the speaker 120, overlapping with the swordsman reach BGM (from the middle). The previous button tap sound started from timing (4) is stopped halfway.

  The timing shown in (6) of FIG. 9B is before the timing t2 of FIG.

  At this timing, the button tap sound started at timing (5) is continuously reproduced.

  In the past, the data set in the free layer was sequentially assigned to the unused free layers, so if the repeated hitting operation is repeated, all the free layers will be in use, and it may not be possible to set new data. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to overwrite the free layer having the same identification information, so that the number of settable free layers can be increased compared to the conventional case.

  FIG. 790 is a diagram showing another specific example of the sound control process according to the second method of the present embodiment, and FIG. 790 shows the sound data reproduced as the game progresses (shown in FIG. 772). (B) is a timing chart showing an example of display and effect on the decorative symbol display device 208, and setting of sound data.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in this example, the hall background loop BGM and the symbol stop sound are reproduced from timing (0). The hall background loop BGM is designed, for example, as sound data set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) (identification information “−”), and the symbol stop sound is set as sound data set in the free layer (free 01), for example. Is designed. The identification information of the symbol stop sound is "4".

  At the timing shown in (1) of FIG. 2B (timing (1) of FIG. 1A), the background of the hall is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the hit / miss judgment is out of order. The symbol combination of the suggested decorative patterns (“decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1”) is displayed in a swinging manner, and the chance stop production is started.At this timing, the reproduction of the symbol stop sound ends. .

  The timing shown in (2) of FIG. 11B (timing (2) of FIG. 11A) is a state in which the stirrup motion production of the family crest part has started to be executed by the chance stop production. With the family crest montage operation effect, the family crest monument (movable body) starts descending from above the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example, and descends to a predetermined position (motion completion position) for the player. It is a production that fuels the expectation that it will be done. At this timing, based on the return command corresponding to the start (decrease) of the operation of the family crest, the reproduction of the operating noise of the family crest (output from the speaker 120) and the descent of the family crest have started.

  In this example, the family crest monument operation sound is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to “7”. At this timing, the symbol stop sound reproduced from the timing 0 ends at the timing (1), and the free 01 is released (not used). , Is set to an unused free layer (free 01).

  That is, at this timing, the family crest auditors operation sound is reproduced from the beginning and overlapped with the background loop BGM of the hall (from the middle thereof), and is output through the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (3) of (b) of the figure is as a stirrer motion effect of the family crest effect, when the family crest effect starts to vibrate while descending and is behind the family crest effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 The effect image is displayed above the display area.

  At this timing, the operation sound of the family crest monument and the reproduction of the hall background loop BGM (output from the speaker 120) continue.

  At the timing (4) in FIG. 7B (timing (4) in FIG. 4A), the effect image is erased, and the family crest actor is set to the initial position based on the return command to erase the effect image. This is the state in which the operation to return to step has started. The family coat emblem has started an operation of returning to the initial position without descending to a predetermined position (operation completion position) expected by the player.

  At this timing, in response to the movement of the family crest montage to the initial position, a crest monument operation end sound (failure) indicating that the family crest montage operation has failed is reproduced. The crest operation end sound (failure) is designed as sound data set in the free layer, and the identification information (attribute) is set to "7". At this timing, since the same identification information “7” is set in the free 01, the sound data of the family crest monument operation end sound (failure) acquired this time is set in the free 01. Will be overwritten).

  In other words, at this timing (4), the family crest auditors operation end sound (failure) set to Free 01 this time is played back from the beginning and output from the speaker 120, overlapping with the background loop BGM of the hall (from the middle). ing. The family crest monument operation sound started from timing (2) is stopped halfway.

  At timing (5) in FIG. 11B (timing (5) in FIG. 10A), the crest monument is moved to the initial position, and the crest monument operation end sound (failure) is reproduced (speaker 120). (Output from) is finished.

  The timing shown in (6) of FIG. 6B is another state in which the curling motion effect of the family crest effect is finished. At this timing, the reproduction of the family crest monument operation end sound (failure) ends, the free 01 is released, and the hall background loop BGM is continuously reproduced.

  In the present embodiment, the reproduction time (length) on the data of the family crest monument operation sound started to be reproduced at timing (2) is designed to be, for example, the timing (2) to timing (6). . However, since the reproduction of the crest monument operation end sound (failure) is started at the timing (4), the reproduction of the crest monument operation sound is stopped halfway. Then, the timing (timing (5)) at which the reproduction of the family crest auditors operation end sound (failure) ends is earlier than the timing (timing (6)) at which the reproduction of the original family crest auditors operation sound data ends. Even if there is (even if there is a remaining time in the reproduction time (length) on the data of the crest monument operation sound), the crest monument operation sound is not reproduced again.

  Note that the display start timing of the effect image started to be displayed in (3) of FIG. 7B may be, for example, the timing between (1) and (2) of FIG. The timing may be the timing of (2) in FIG. 7B, the timing may be before or after the crest actor starts to vibrate in FIG. The vibration may be started at the same time. Further, it may be the timing (4) of FIG.

  FIG. 791 is a diagram showing another specific example of the sound control processing of the present embodiment. FIG. 791 shows an example of the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 by the first method and the setting of the sound data. It is the figure shown in time series, and the figure (b) is the figure in the decorative design display device 208 by the 2nd system, and is the figure which showed an example of the setting of sound data in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the entire display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is filled with one color (for example, black), and a notice that the other display is invisible to the player (for example, a dark color such as black). It is possible to execute a blackout notice).

  During such a dark notice, another effect (for example, a hold prize effect, a variable display of a decorative design, a stop display, etc.) may be executed, and a display of these different effects on the decorative design display device 208 may be performed. Is not visible, but in the past, a production sound of another effect (a hold winning sound associated with a hold winning effect, or a symbol stop sound accompanying a stop display of a decorative symbol) could be output from the speaker 120. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when another effect (for example, a pending winning effect, a variable display of a decorative symbol, a stop display, etc.) is executed during a dark notice, another effect sound (for example, It is possible to reduce (to 0) the volume of the pending winning sound associated with the pending winning effect, or the design stopping sound accompanying the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  Specifically, at the timing shown in the left part of FIG. 7A, the darkening notice effect is being executed, the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the darkening notice, and the speaker 120 outputs the darkening notice. The BGM is being reproduced. In the first method shown in FIG. 7A, the dark notice BGM is designed as sound data set in a fixed channel (for example, fixed channel 01).

  The timing shown in the right part of FIG. 10A is a state in which another effect, for example, a pending winning effect, a variable display and a stop display of a decorative symbol are being executed while the darkness notice effect is being executed. . On the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the dark notice is executed, and other effects are not visible to the player. Further, although the blackout notice BGM is reproduced from the speaker 120, the pending winning sound corresponding to the pending winning effect and the symbol stop sound corresponding to the stop display of the decorative symbol are reproduced, but the volume thereof is very small. Or it is set to "0" so that it cannot be heard by the player. More specifically, at this timing, the blackout notice BGM is set in the fixed channel 01, the reserved winning sound is set in the fixed channel 02, and the symbol stop sound is set in the fixed channel 03, and the blackout notice BGM is the default. Volume (volume heard by the player) is set, and volume 0 is set for the pending winning sound and the symbol stop sound. As a result, even if the hold winning prize effect or the effect of the stop display of the decorative symbol is executed during the darkness notice effect, the hold winning prize sound and the symbol stop sound are not output (not heard by the player). You can

  FIG. 2B shows an embodiment according to the second method. At the timing shown in the left part of FIG. 10B, the darkness notice effect is being executed, the decoration notice display device 208 displays the darkness notice, and the speaker 120 reproduces the darkness notice BGM. It is in a state of being. In the second method shown in FIG. 7B, the dark notice BGM is designed as sound data set in a fixed layer (for example, fixed layer 01).

  The timing shown in the right side of FIG. 10B is a state in which other effects, for example, a pending winning effect, variable display and stop display of decorative symbols are being executed while the darkness notice effect is being executed. . At this timing, the blackout notice BGM is set in the fixed layer 01, the reserved winning sound is set in the free layer 01, and the symbol stop sound is set in the free layer 02. The blackout notice BGM has the default volume (for the player). The audible volume) is set, and the hold winning sound and the symbol stop sound are set to volume 0. As a result, even if the hold winning prize effect or the effect of the stop display of the decorative symbol is executed during the darkness notice effect, the hold winning prize sound and the symbol stop sound are not output (not heard by the player). You can

  According to such a configuration, the sound of the first effect (for example, the winning prize winning sound or the symbol stop sound) is prevented from being output while the second effect (for example, the dark notice) is being performed, and the second effect is not generated. In some cases, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (for example, the pending winning effect or the stop display of the decorative pattern).

  Further, in the first method of FIG. 7A, the designer needs to always recognize the channel for setting the sound data, but in the second method of FIG. 9B, the free layer is used. , It becomes unnecessary to always recognize the channel for setting the sound data. In particular, the volume can be set to 0 at once by using the free layer overall volume setting function. In addition, for example, by using the free layer entire stop function, the free layer can be released all at once, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not hear any sound but the channel is occupied. it can. Further, for example, if the reserved winning sound is set to the fixed layer 02 and the symbol stop sound is set to the free layer, the reserved winning sound is output even when the notice of darkening is being made by using the free layer overall volume setting function. The volume of the symbol stop sound set in the free layer can be set to 0. Further, even if there is other sound data set in the free layer (afterwards), the volume of the entire free layer is set to 0, so that the player cannot hear.

In this way, if there are multiple sound data that may be output during the dark warning, and you want to output only a part of them, set the sound data you want not to output (the sound you want to erase) in the free layer. As a result, the state of the free layer can be collectively set by the free layer overall stop function and the free layer overall volume setting function, and the sound control design becomes easy.
<BGM1 output during performance>

  Next, an example of another control of the sound control processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 792 to 798.

  FIG. 792 is a timing chart showing an example of output of the sound device data shown in FIG. 771. Specifically, in the symbol variation game in which the hit determination result is off, between the stop display of the decorative symbol of the Nth rotation (the effect) and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the N + 1th rotation (the effect) (the symbol is stopped). It is an example of a timing chart of a special figure display device, a variable display of a decorative symbol, and a symbol demo BGM when BGM is output to.

  First, as shown in the same figure (a), at the timing a, the special figure variation game of the Nth rotation by the special figure display device (the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and so on) At the start, at timing b, the variable display of the N-th rotation decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started.

  Then, at a timing c after a lapse of a predetermined time, the special figure variation game by the special figure display device is finished and the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2, the same applies below) is stopped and displayed, and at the timing d, the decorative symbol display The stop display of the decorative pattern by the device 208 is performed. Further, at the timing d, the symbol demo BGM is output. That is, the symbol demo BGM is output simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  Timing e is the timing when the special figure variation game of the N + 1th rotation is started, and timing f is the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the N + 1th rotation is started and the symbol demo BGM is stopped.

  The period T1 in FIG. 9A is a time lag period associated with the command transmission from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the command transmission from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. is there. More specifically, in the command transmission from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the process of setting a subcommand in the timer interrupt process (4 ms, 1 interrupt) and the subcommand transmission process (undefined) Therefore, in the command transmission from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, when both controls are integrated, a time lag corresponding to the processing time occurs.

  Further, the period T2 in FIG. 7A is a special figure finalization display period (in the main control unit 300) (a time determined in advance for each symbol). This special figure fixed display period is set for all symbols (whether big hits, small hits, or not). Further, the period T3 of FIG. 10A is a period in which the processing time of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (liquid crystal control unit 700), the command transmission time, and the like are added to the special figure confirmation display period. Is

  (B1) and (b2) of the same figure are reproduction examples of the symbol demo BGM of the same figure (a) from timing d to f (period T3).

  As shown in (b1) of the figure, the symbol demo BGM is, for example, sound data having a total length of 1000 frames, and a continuous (collective) music (voice) from 0 to 1000 frames is reproduced. Data (data whose entire period is the music output period).

  Further, as shown in (b2) of the figure, the symbol demo BGM is sound data having a length from 0 frame to 1000 frames, but there is no sound from 0 frame to a predetermined frame (60 frames in this example). It is a period, and may be data in which music (voice) is continuously reproduced from 61 frames to 1000 frames (is a music output period). In the case of the data (symbol demo BGM) having the silent period shown in FIG. 2B, the symbol demo BGM is reproduced from the timing d in FIG. 4A, but from the timing d to 60 frames (for example, 1 second). ), Silence is reproduced (the player does not hear any sound), and then (after 1 second), the sound data of the symbol demo BGM is reproduced (the player starts to hear BGM).

  Here, the “silent period” in the present embodiment means that a predetermined period (for example, 60 frames) intentionally continuous is designed as a period without sound so that the player does not hear any sound. That is, it does not mean a period in which there is no sound as a part of a continuous (collective) music (sound) such as a pause in a music or a phrase break in a sound.

  Further, a silent period may be included as a silent period as a part of a continuous (collective) musical piece (voice) such as a pause in a musical piece or a phrase break in a voice.

  Note that this silent period may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period T3 (however, the shortest period) in FIG.

  793 and FIG. 794 are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of the effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound data output from the speaker 120 during the period corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 792.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1 (1) is a state before the timing a in FIG. 792 (a), the castle town background is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is in a state. That is, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") indicating that the hit / miss judgment result is out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the reduced decorative design display area 208h at the lower right of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, the same decorative designs as the design display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") are stopped and displayed. ing.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120. This symbol demo BGM may be data configured such that sound is output for the entire period (without a silent period) as shown in FIG. 792 (b1), or in FIG. 792 (b2). As shown, the data may include a silent period in a part of the period.

  The timing shown in (2) of the figure is the state of timing a in FIG. 792 (a), in which the fluctuation start command for the Nth rotation is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 is started. The special figure variation game of the Nth rotation using the special figure display device (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212) has started. Further, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082 that suggests that the special symbol variation game is in progress (during the variation of the special symbol) (in this example, the variation of the special symbol symbol 1). The fourth symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1 which indicates that the game is being played (during fluctuation of special figure 1) has started blinking the LED). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the reduced display area 208h, the stop display of the decorative symbol is continued.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 3C is a state immediately before the timing b in FIG. 792A, and is a state in which the first sub-control unit 400 has transmitted the liquid crystal command of the symbol variation start to the liquid crystal control unit 700. At this timing, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the reduced display area 208h. At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (4) of the figure is the state of timing b in FIG. 792 (a), in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command of the start of symbol variation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the reduced decorative symbol display area At 208h, the variable display of the decorative pattern at the N-th rotation has started.

  At this timing, the castle town BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01) with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the speaker 120 outputs the castle town BGM. In this case, for example, the symbol demo BGM set in (3) of the figure is stopped midway and the castle town BGM is output from the beginning.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is a state after the timing b in FIG. 792 (a), and the variable display of the N-th decorative symbol starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued.

  At this timing, the castle town BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the castle town BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (6) is a state after timing b in FIG. 792 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a left symbol temporary stop return command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the left symbol display In the area 208a, the left decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 6") is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the left decorative design, the design stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”, and the speaker 120 is overlapped with the castle town BGM to stop the design stop sound. Is being output.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (7) is also a state after timing b in FIG. 792 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a right symbol temporary stop return command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the right symbol display In the area 208a, the right decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 3") is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the right decorative design, the design stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”. As an example, the symbol stop sound in this free layer (free 01) is sound device data (sound data) newly set to be played at this timing, and identification information “4” is set. Therefore, the symbol stop sound for the left symbol temporary stop set in FIG. 6 (6) is overwritten and newly set to free 01 (see FIG. 788).

  In other words, at this timing, the symbol stop sound for the left symbol temporary stop set in the same figure (6) stops halfway, and the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop is superimposed on the castle town BGM from the speaker 120. It is output from the beginning.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8) is also a state after timing b in FIG. 792 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command of the temporary stop of the middle symbol to the first sub-control unit 400, and the middle symbol display In the area 208b, a middle decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 5") is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display). Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the medium decoration symbol, the symbol stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”. As an example, the symbol stop sound in this free layer (free 01) is sound device data (sound data) newly set to be played at this timing, and identification information “4” is set. Therefore, the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop set in FIG. 7 (7) is overwritten and newly set to free 01 (see FIG. 788).

  In other words, at this timing, the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop set in the same figure (7) is stopped halfway, and the speaker 120 outputs the symbol stop sound for the middle symbol temporary stop, overlapping the castle town BGM. It is output from the beginning.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is the state of timing c in FIG. 792 (a), the main controller 300 transmits a symbol stop command to the first sub controller 400, and the main controller 300 displays a special symbol. The special figure variation game using the device (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol display means (for example, the fourth symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1) has turned off the LED. Further, the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h. .

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the symbol stop sound ends in the free layer (free 01), and the free layer (free 01) is released.

  That is, at this timing, only the castle town BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 794 (10) is a state after the timing c in FIG. 792 (a), in which the liquid crystal command for stopping the symbol is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 400. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and in the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

  Further, at this timing, only the castle town BGM is continuously output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11) is the state of timing d in FIG. 792 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a symbol stop return command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 3") that suggests that the result of the hit determination is out of order is stopped and displayed. Also in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, a symbol combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 3") suggesting the same deviation as the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) along with the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the speaker 120 outputs the symbol demo BGM instead of the castle town BGM.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) is a state of the symbol stop period of the decorative symbol after the timing d of FIG. 792 (a). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the decorative symbol indicating the continuation (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 3") is performed.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (13) of the figure is the state of timing e in FIG. 792 (a), in which the main controller 300 transmits the fluctuation start command at the (N + 1) th rotation to the first sub controller 400, and the main controller 300 The special figure variation game of the N + 1th rotation by has started. Further, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol display means (in this example, the fourth symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1) has started blinking the LED). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the reduced display area 280h, the stop display of the decorative symbol is continued.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (14) of the figure is a state immediately before the timing f of FIG. 792 (a), and is a state in which the liquid crystal command of the symbol variation start is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. At this timing, the decorative symbols are continuously stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the reduced display area 280h.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  In this way, from the end of the first effect (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern of the Nth rotation) to the start of the next third effect (the variable display of the decorative pattern of the N + 1th rotation). In (for example, a period of variation stop of the decorative symbol), by outputting a song (for example, BGM for symbol demonstration) different from the song corresponding to the effect display, the next effect after the first effect ends In some cases, it may be possible to give a predetermined period until the third effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the symbol demo BGM output during the period of variation stop of the decorative symbol is the sound data having the silent period shown in FIG. 792 (b2), the symbol demo BGM is output FIG. 793 (2). The period of (3) in the same figure and the period of (794) in FIG. 794 (14) may be a silent period, or the music may be performed after a silent period of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). (Voice) may be output.

  FIG. 795 shows, in the time series, an example of the effect produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound data output from the speaker 120 when the hit / no hit determination result is a big hit in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 794 and 795. FIG.

  The timing shown in (7a) of the figure is a state corresponding to the timing shown in (7) of FIG. 793. At this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command of the right symbol temporary stop to the first sub-control unit 400, and the left decorative symbol (for example, swing fluctuation display) that has already been temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a (eg swing fluctuation display) In addition to "decoration 2"), the right decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 2") is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in the right symbol display area 208a. Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the right decorative design, the design stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”. As an example, the symbol stop sound in this free layer (free 01) is the sound device data (sound data) newly set to be played at this timing, and the identification information “4” is set. There is. That is, the symbol stop sound for left symbol temporary stop set before that (assuming that the free 01 is set by the identification information “4”) is newly set to the free 01 (FIG. 788). reference).

  That is, at this timing, the symbol stop sound for the left symbol temporary stop set before that is stopped on the way, and the speaker 120 outputs the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop from the beginning, overlapping the castle town BGM. Has been done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (8a) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 793 (8). At this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to start the reach effect to the first sub-control unit 400, and the reach effect is started to be executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this timing, the reach start sound “reach” is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “absent” with the start of the reach effect. As an example, the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop set in the same figure (7a) has ended before this timing, and the free layer (free 01) is released. Therefore, the reach start sound “reach” is newly set to free 01.

  That is, at this timing, the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop set in the same figure (7a) has ended, and the reach start sound "reach" is output from the beginning from the speaker 120 over the castle town BGM. Has been done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9a) is a pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2- The decoration 2 ") is displayed in a swaying manner, and the Yoshimune SP reach effect for the big hit has started.

  At this timing, sound device data (sound data) of Yoshimune SP reach (for big hit) is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) with the start of Yoshimune SP reach effect.

  That is, at this timing, only the sound data of Yoshimune SP reach (for big hits) is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 794 (10a) is a state in which a white background is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable display of decorative symbols is continuously displayed in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h.

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 has sent a return command for ending the Yoshimune SP reach production to the first sub control unit 400, the display of the white background has ended, and the decorative pattern display has ended. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the device 208, the swing fluctuation display of the symbol combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") that suggests that the result of the hit determination is a big hit is re-displayed. ing.

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 12A, a symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and a special figure display device (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) by the main control unit 300 is used. It is a state in which the special figure variation game was stopped and displayed. Further, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol display means (for example, the fourth symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1) has turned off the LED. Further, the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h. .

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  The timing shown in (14a) of the figure is a state in which the liquid crystal command for stopping the symbol is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 400. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and in the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (15a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a symbol stop return command to the first sub-control unit 400, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the result of the hit / miss judgment is It is a state in which a symbol combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") suggesting that it is a big hit is stopped and displayed. Also in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, a symbol combination of decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") that suggests the same big hit as the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed.

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 16A, a return command for starting the big hit start effect is transmitted from the liquid crystal controller 700 to the first sub controller 400, and the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in a state of being.

  At this timing, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  In this way, during the period from the end of the reach effect to the start of the jackpot start effect (the period of FIG. 753 (a) to FIG. 759 (a)), for example, the symbol demo BGM is not output, All outputs from the speaker 120 may be stopped. Further, during the period from the end of the reach effect to the start of the big hit start effect (the period of FIG. 753 (a) to 759 (a) of the same figure), for example, the symbol demo BGM may be output. Good.

  796 and 797 are diagrams showing an example of effects for executing the symbol demo and the animation demo, and FIG. 796 is a special symbol display device in the case of outputting the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM while the symbol is stopped, FIG. 797 is an example of the timing chart of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the symbol demo BGM and the animation demo BGM, and FIG. 797 is output from the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 during the period corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 796. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | generation by the sound data which sounds.

  First, as shown in FIG. 796, at a timing c, the special figure variation game by the special figure display device is finished and the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped and displayed (from the main control unit 300). From the first sub-control unit 400 to the symbol stop command), at a timing d, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs stop display of the decorative symbol (from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub-control unit 400, decoration) Return command to stop the fluctuation of the symbol is sent). Further, at the timing f, the symbol demo BGM is output, and at the timing h, the symbol demo BGM is stopped and the animation demo BGM is output. Then, at the timing i, the animation demo BGM is stopped, the symbol demo BGM is output, and at the timing k, the symbol demo BGM is stopped and the animation demo BGM is output.

  The period T2 from the timing c to the timing e in the figure is a special figure fixed display period (a predetermined time for each symbol). This special figure fixed display period is set for all symbols (whether big hits, small hits, or not). Further, the period T3 from the timing d to the timing f in the figure is the processing time of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (the liquid crystal control unit 700), the command transmission time, etc. during the special figure confirmation display period. Is a period that takes into account

  The timing shown in FIG. 797 (1) is the state of timing f in FIG. 796, and the castle town background is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") indicating that the hit / miss judgment result is out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the reduced decorative design display area 208h at the lower right of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, the same decorative designs as the design display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") are stopped and displayed. ing.

  At this timing, the symbol demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the symbol demo BGM is output from the speaker 120. This symbol demo BGM is, for example, as shown in FIG. 792 (b2), data including a silent period in a part of the period. Specifically, the symbol demo BGM of the present embodiment is sound data (for example, 1000 frames) from timing f to timing h (timing i to timing k) as shown in FIG. A predetermined period (for example, 0 frame to 60 frames) from timing g (timing i to timing j) is a silent period, and from timing g to timing h (timing j to timing k) (for example, 61 frames to 1000 frames). Until) is a period with sound.

  That is, at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol demo BGM is output, but it is in a silent period, and the player cannot hear the symbol demo BGM.

  The timing shown in FIG. 797 (2) is a state immediately before the timing g in FIG. 796, the decorative symbol is continuously stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h displays the symbol display regions 208a to 208a. The same decorative pattern as 208c is stopped and displayed. Further, in the display area on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guidance display (adjustment display) G for guiding the setting (adjustment) method of volume and brightness has started to be displayed.

  Further, at this timing as well, the symbol demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), but during the silent period, the player cannot hear the symbol demo BGM.

  The timing shown in FIG. 797 (3) is a state immediately after the timing g in FIG. 796, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduced decorative symbol display region 208h displays the symbol display regions 208a to 208a. The same decorative pattern as 208c is stopped and displayed. Further, in the display area on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the guidance display G for guiding how to set the volume and the brightness continues to be displayed.

  Further, also at this timing, the symbol demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01). In the symbol demo BGM, the silent period ends at timing g, and there is sound after timing g. Therefore, at this timing, the symbol demo BGM is output through the speaker 120 while being heard by the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 797 (4) is a state immediately after the timing h in FIG. 796, and the animation demonstration is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, at this timing, the symbol demo BGM set in the fixed layer (for example, fixed layer 01) ends, and the new animation demo BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, fixed layer 01). The animation demo BGM is, for example, data with sound throughout the period, and at this timing, the animation demo is output while being heard by the player through the speaker 120.

  Here, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 792 to 795, the symbol demo BGM output from the speaker 120 while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped also serves as the BGM for the symbol demonstration effect of this embodiment. In this way, the output is performed between the first effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the Nth rotation) and the third effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the N + 1th rotation) (that is, while the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped). As the sound data, sound data for another second effect (design demonstration) may be used. As a result, it is not necessary to separately store new sound data in the storage means as the sound data to be output while the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the limited storage means can be effectively utilized.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol demo BGM may be data configured to output sound for the entire period (without a silent period) as shown in FIG. 792 (b1). Further, the animation demo BGM may be data having a silent period, as shown in FIG. 792 (b2).

  FIG. 798 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of executing the symbol demo and the animation demo, and the special symbol display device in the case of outputting the symbol demo BGM (there is a silent period) and the animation demo BGM while the symbol is stopped, It is an example of a variable display of a decorative symbol, a timing chart of a symbol demo BGM and an animation demo BGM. Since timing c to timing f in FIG. 798 is the same as timing c to timing f in FIG. 796, description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, the symbol demo BGM is output at the timing f, and at the timing α during the silent period of the symbol demo BGM, the guidance display G (volume adjustment) shown in FIG. Specifically, the return command for starting the display of the guidance display G is transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub control unit 400). In this case, the symbol demo BGM that has been reproduced from the timing f may be stopped, and the symbol demo BGM may be newly reproduced from the beginning from the timing α. The symbol demo BGM reproduced from the timing α has a predetermined period (0 frame to 60 frames, for example, 1 second) from the timing α to the timing g ′, and the sound is output from the timing g ′ at the timing h ′ ( Reproduction ends when 1000 frames are reached). That is, originally, the timing g at which the silent period of the symbol demo BGM ends and the sound starts to be output and the timing h at which the reproduction of the symbol demo BGM ends are in a delayed state (slow timing). Along with this, the start timing h ′ of the animation demo BGM that starts the reproduction after the end of the symbol demo BGM, the next symbol demo BGM start timing i ′, the end timing j ′ of the silent period and the end timing k ′ of the symbol demo BGM are The respective timings are later than the original respective timings h, i, j, k (see FIG. 796).

  In this example, at timing α, if the guidance display G (for volume adjustment) does not start displaying (a return command to start displaying the guidance display G is not transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub-control unit 400). , And a timing chart similar to FIG. 796.

Further, in the present embodiment and the embodiment of FIG. 796, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 next time does not trigger the reception of the return command of the variation stop of the decorative design at the timing d. It may be determined that the fluctuation of No. is not started, and thereby the symbol demonstration effect (output of the symbol demo BGM) may be started.
<BGM2 output during performance>

  Next, an example of another control of the sound control processing of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 799 to 802.

  FIG. 799 is a timing chart showing an example of output of the sound device data shown in FIG. 771. Specifically, in the symbol variation game in which the hit determination result is a big hit, the special figure display device, the accessory continuous operation device, the condition device in the case of outputting BGM (sway variation BGM) between the SP reach effect and the promotion effect 3 is an example of a timing chart of a special electric accessory, a variable display of a decorative pattern, and a swing fluctuation BGM.

  At the timing a, the special figure variation game by the special figure display device (for example, the first special figure display device 212) starts, and at the timing b, the variable display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 208 starts.

  Then, at a timing c after the lapse of a predetermined time, the special figure variation game by the special figure display device is finished and the special figure (for example, special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and at the timing d, the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed.

  In addition, at timing g, the accessory continuous actuating device and / or the condition device changes from the non-operating state to the operating state, and at the timing h, the special electric auditors product changes from the non-operating state to the operating state. Here, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the operation of the condition device, and the operation of the special electric accessory are the states seen from the game rules, and show that the big hit is in progress.

  More specifically, the accessory continuous operation device is a special device that can continuously operate the special electric auditors (in this embodiment, one round), and the condition device is its operation. Is a device that is required for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a specific symbol combination is displayed, or a game ball (the entrance of which is opened or expanded when the accessory continuous operation device is operating. (Excluding the one that has won the special winning opening) that operates when a specific region passes, but in the present embodiment, both the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device end when the operation starts. Since the timings match, they are shown in the same timing chart.

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing at which the condition device is activated, the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device is activated, or the special electric accessory is activated first. The timing may be a timing when the attacker starts the first opening, or a timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the condition device becomes inactive, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device becomes inactive, or the condition device and / or the role. In the case where the object continuous operation device is in operation, it may be the timing when the special electric auditors product is finally deactivated, or in the case where the condition device and / or the accessory continuous operation device is in operation, finally It may be the timing when the attacker is changed from "open" to "closed", or the last timing when the attacker solenoid is deactivated when the condition device and / or the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the variable waiting time has elapsed since the condition device and / or the accessory continuous operation device became inactive.

  Further, in this example, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the timing C during the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the timing d.

  The period T1 in the figure is a time lag period associated with the command transmission from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the command transmission from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. More specifically, in the command transmission from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the process of setting a subcommand in the timer interrupt process (4 ms, 1 interrupt) and the subcommand transmission process (undefined) Therefore, in the command transmission from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, when both controls are integrated, a time lag corresponding to the processing time occurs.

Further, a period T2 in the figure is a special figure finalization display period (in the main control unit 300) (a time period predetermined for each symbol). This special figure fixed display period is set for all symbols (whether big hits, small hits, or not). Further, the period T3 in the figure is a period in which the processing time of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 (liquid crystal control unit 700), the command transmission time, and the like are added to the special figure confirmation display period. .

  Further, the period T4 of the figure is a period from the start of the big hit game in the main control unit 300 to the first round (interval period before the start of the big hit), and the period T5 of the same figure is the first sub control unit in the period T4. This is a period in which the processing time of 400 and the second sub control unit 500 (liquid crystal control unit 700), the command transmission time, and the like are added.

  800 to 801 are time-series diagrams showing another example of effects produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sound data output from the speaker 120 during the period corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 799.

  The timing shown in (1) of the figure is the state of timing b in FIG. 799, and the special figure variation game of the Nth rotation using the special figure display device (for example, special figure 1 display device 212) by the control unit 300 is Starting, the castle town background is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the variable design of the Nth rotation decorative pattern is being displayed. Also, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the Nth rotation is also performed.

  At this timing, the castle town BGM is set in the fixed layer (for example, the fixed layer 01), and the castle town BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 2B is a state after timing b in FIG. 799, in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command of left symbol temporary stop to the first sub-control unit 400, and in the left symbol display area 208a. The left decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 2") is temporarily displayed (swing fluctuation display). Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the left decorative design, the design stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”. That is, from the speaker 120, the design stop sound is output from the beginning, overlapping the castle town BGM (from the middle).

  The timing shown in FIG. 3C is also a state after timing b in FIG. 799, the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command of the right symbol temporary stop to the first sub control unit 400, and the right symbol display area 208a shows the right command. The decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 2") is in a temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display). Further, in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Further, at this timing, with the temporary stop display of the right decorative design, the design stop sound is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “4”. As an example, the symbol stop sound in this free layer (free 01) is the sound device data (sound data) newly set to be played at this timing, and the identification information “4” is set. There is. That is, the symbol stop sound for the left symbol temporary stop set at the timing shown in (2) of the same figure is overwritten and newly set to free 01 (see FIG. 788).

  Therefore, at this timing, the symbol stop sound for the left symbol temporary stop set at the timing shown in (2) of the figure stops halfway, and the speaker 120 overlaps the castle town BGM, and the symbol for the right symbol temporary stop. The stop sound is output from the beginning.

  The timing shown in (4) of the figure is the state of timing A in FIG. 799, in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to start the reach effect (reach effect before SP reach) to the first sub control unit 400. The reach effect (reach effect before SP reach) has started to be executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this timing, the reach effect start BGM is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 02) along with the start of the reach effect, and the fixed layer 01 is released by the end of the castle town BGM (the castle town BGM has no loop. The data ends with a predetermined length (for example, 1000 frames). It should be noted that the volume may be set to 0 when the sound data of the fixed layer 01 is looped or the sound data has a length that does not end at this timing.

  Further, the reach start sound “reach” is set in the free layer (free 01) with the identification information “none”. As an example, the symbol stop sound for the right symbol temporary stop set in (3) of the figure has ended before this timing, and the free layer (free 01) is released. Therefore, the reach start sound “reach” is newly set to free 01.

  That is, at this timing, the reach effect start BGM is output from the head from the speaker 120, and the reach start sound "reach" is output from the head in addition to this.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is after the timing A in FIG. 799, and is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 has sent the SP reach development return command to the first sub-control unit 400. A white background is displayed over the entire display area of 208, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues in the reduced decorative pattern display area 208h.

  Further, at this timing, the reach start sound “reach” of the free layer (free 01) ends and the free 01 is released.

  That is, at this timing, only the reach effect start BGM continues to be output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (6) of the figure is the state of timing B in FIG. 799, in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command for starting the Yoshimune SP reach production to the first sub-control unit 400, and in the decorative symbol display device 208. , Yoshimune SP reach production has started.

  At this timing, the sound device data (sound data) of the Yoshimune SP reach is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) along with the start of the Yoshimune SP reach effect, and the Yoshimune SP start is set in the free layer (free 01). SE is set with identification information “none”.

  That is, at this timing, the sound data of the Yoshimune SP reach is output from the head from the speaker 120, and the Yoshimune SP start SE is output from the head in addition to this.

  The timing shown in (7) of the same figure is after timing B of FIG. 799, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Yoshimune SP reach effect is continuously executed, and the character (Tono, Yoshimune) wins the character (Swordsman). The image has been started to be displayed.

  At this timing, the output of the Yoshimune SP reach set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) and the output of the Yoshimune SP start SE set in the free layer (free 01) are finished, and the respective layers are released. , The character device (sound, Yoshimune) wins the character (swordsman), and the sound device data (sound data) of Yoshimune SP reach (for big hits) is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01), and the free layer is set. In (Free 01), the sound device data of Yoshimune “Yatteze!” Is set with the identification information “None”.

  That is, at this timing, the sound data of Yoshimune SP reach (for big hits) is output from the beginning from the speaker 120, and the sound data (voice data) of “Yoshimune“ Yatteze! ”” Is output from the beginning in addition to this. It is being output.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8) is after timing B in FIG. 799, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination of the decorative symbols suggesting that the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit. In this state, the shake variation display of (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") has been started.

  At this timing, the output of “Yoshimune“ Yatteze! ”” Set in the free layer (free 01) ends at the timing shown in (7) of the figure, free 01 is released, and new free In 01, the sound device data of the pattern matching SE is set with the identification information “none”.

  That is, at this timing, the sound data of the Yoshimune SP reach (for big hits) is continuously output from the speaker 120, and the sound data of the symbol matching SE is output from the beginning in addition to this.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is also timing B or later in FIG. 799, a white background is displayed in the display area of the decorative design display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative design is continuously displayed in the reduced decorative design display area 208h. It is being appreciated.

  Further, at this timing, the pattern matching SE set to the free 01 ends the output, and only the sound data of the Yoshimune SP reach (for big hit) set to the fixed layer 01 is continuously output.

  The timing shown in FIG. 800 (10) is the state of timing C in FIG. 799, and is the state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 has transmitted the return command for ending the Yoshimune SP reach production to the first sub control unit 400. At this timing, the display of the white background ends, the castle town background is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c ( It is a state in which the swing fluctuation display of the pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) is re-displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the output of the Yoshimune SP reach (for big hit) of the fixed layer 01 is stopped, the fixed layer 01 is opened, and the swing fluctuation BGM is newly set in the fixed layer 01.

  That is, at this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the head from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (11) of the figure is the state of timing D of FIG. 799, and is the state in which the return command for starting the promotion lottery effect is transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub control unit 400. The promotion lottery effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and the promotion lottery BGM is newly set in another fixed layer (fixed layer 02).

  That is, at this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120, and the promotion lottery BGM is output from the beginning in superimposition.

  The timing shown in FIG. 12 (12) is a state after the timing D of FIG. 799, the promotion lottery effect is continuously executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is determined whether or not it is in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the front thereof. A swing variation display of a pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") that suggests that the determination result is a big hit is displayed.

  At this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and the promotion lottery BGM is set in the fixed layer 02.

  That is, at this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120, and the promotion lottery BGM is output in addition to the fluctuation fluctuation BGM.

  The timing shown in (13) of the figure is also a state after timing D of FIG. 799. At this timing, a white background is displayed in the display area of the decorative design display device 208, and a variable display of the decorative design is displayed in the reduced decorative design display area 208h.

  At this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and the promotion lottery BGM is set in the fixed layer 02.

  That is, at this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120, and the promotion lottery BGM is output in addition to the fluctuation fluctuation BGM.

  The timing shown in (14) of the figure is the state of timing E in FIG. 799, which is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 has transmitted a return command for ending the promotion lottery effect to the first sub control unit 400. At this timing, the castle town background is displayed in place of the white background of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the front side of the decorative symbol indicating that the result of the hit determination is a big hit. A swing variation display of the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed.

  At this timing, the promotion lottery BGM set in the fixed layer 02 finishes outputting, the swing fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and only the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) is after the timing E in FIG. 799, the main controller 300 sends the symbol stop command to the first sub controller 400, and the special symbol display device (special figure 1 display device 210 ) Is a state in which the special figure variation game is stopped (variation stopped). In the decorative pattern display device 208 display area, the castle town background is continuously displayed, and in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c in front of it, a pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 7- The swing fluctuation display of "decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed.

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and only the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (16) is after timing E in FIG. 799, and is a state in which the liquid crystal command for stopping the symbol is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") indicating that the castle town background and the result of the hit determination are a big hit is stopped and displayed.

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and only the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (17) of the figure is the state of timing d in FIG. 799, which is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 has transmitted the symbol stop return command to the first sub-control unit 400. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the castle town background, and in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c in front of it, a pattern combination of decorative patterns that suggests that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7- The decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed. Also in the reduced decorative design display area 208, the same as the design display areas 208a to 208c, a design combination of decorative designs that suggests that the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"). Is stopped.

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM of the fixed layer 01 ends the output, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  Referring again to FIG. 799, a period T6 of FIG. 799 is a period from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the right symbol, and corresponds to the period of FIGS. 800 (1) to 800 (4). A period T7 in FIG. 799 corresponds to the period in FIGS. 800 (4) to 800 (5). The period T6 and the period T7 are the reach production period before the SP reach.

  A period T8 of FIG. 799 is a period of SP reach effect, and corresponds to the period of FIGS. 800 (6) to 800 (9). Further, the period T9 of FIG. 799 is a period before the background is displayed and the promotion lottery effect is started and corresponds to the period of FIG. 800 (10), and the period T10 of FIG. 799 is the promotion lottery effect period. Yes, and corresponds to the period in FIGS. 800 (11) to 800 (13). A period T11 of FIG. 799 is a period after the promotion effect lottery and corresponds to the period of FIGS. 800 (14) to 800 (16).

  Then, in the present embodiment, the promotion lottery effect (the third effect) is performed after the period from the period T9 to the period T11 (timing C to timing d) shown in FIG. 799, that is, after the SP reach effect (first effect) is completed. In the period until the start of production, the swing fluctuation BGM (first music as the first production and second music different from the third music as the third production) different from the music as these both productions. Output).

  801 (12) to 801 (16) also continuously output the swing fluctuation BGM (second music), but these are BGM of the swing fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is the output of (the second music as the second effect).

  Here, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM may be sound data having a silent period in a part thereof, like the symbol demo BGM shown in FIG. 792 (b2). In that case, for example, FIGS. 800 (10) to 800 (13) can be a silent period, and FIG. 800 (14) and the subsequent periods can be a period with sound. Note that the silent period may have another length. Further, the swing fluctuation BGM may be sound data that does not have a silent period in a part thereof like the symbol demo BGM shown in FIG. 792 (b1).

  Further, regarding the periods T6 to T8 in FIG. 799, the period T6 corresponds to the period in FIGS. 800 (1) to 800 (4), the period T7 corresponds to the period in FIG. 800 (5), and the period T8. May correspond to the periods of FIGS. 800 (6) to 800 (9).

  Further, regarding the periods T6 to T8 in FIG. 799, the period T6 corresponds to the period in FIGS. 800 (1) to 800 (3), the period T7 corresponds to the period in FIG. 800 (4), and the period T8. May correspond to the periods of FIGS. 800 (5) to 800 (9).

  FIG. 802 is a diagram showing, in a time series, an example of an effect in the case where the win / no determination result is out of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 800 and 801.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (7a) is the timing corresponding to FIG. 800 (7), in which the Yoshimune SP reach effect is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character (Tono, Yoshimune) loses to the character (Swordsman). The image of the appearance is starting to be displayed.

  At this timing, the output of the Yoshimune SP reach previously set to the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) and the output of the Yoshimune SP start SE set to the free layer (free 01) are finished and each layer is released. When the character (Dono, Yoshimune) loses to the character (swordsman), sound device data (sound data) of Yoshimune SP reach (for detachment) is set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01) and the speaker is set. From 120, only the sound data of Yoshimune SP reach (for loss) is output from the beginning.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8 (8a) is the timing corresponding to FIG. 800 (8), and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol that suggests that the result of the hit / miss judgment is out. In this state, the fluctuation display of the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2") is started.

  Further, at this timing, sound device data (sound data) of Yoshimune SP reach (for loss) is continuously set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01), and only sound data of Yoshimune SP reach (for loss) is set from the speaker 120. Is being output.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (a) is a timing corresponding to FIG. 800 (9), a white background is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h. Is being performed.

  Further, at this timing, sound device data (sound data) of Yoshimune SP reach (for loss) is continuously set in the fixed layer (fixed layer 01), and only sound data of Yoshimune SP reach (for loss) is set from the speaker 120. Is being output.

  The timing shown in (10a) of the figure is the timing corresponding to (10) of FIG. 801, and is a state in which a return command for ending the SP reach effect is transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub control unit 400. At this timing, the display of the white background ends, the castle town background is displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorations suggesting that the result of the hit / miss judgment is out of order in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. It is a state in which the shake variation display of the symbol combination of the symbols (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2") is displayed again.

  Further, at this timing, the output of the Yoshimune SP reach (for big hit) of the fixed layer 01 is stopped, the fixed layer 01 is opened, and the swing fluctuation BGM is newly set in the fixed layer 01.

  That is, at this timing, the swing fluctuation BGM is output from the head from the speaker 120.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11A, a symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the special figure variation game by the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device 210) is stopped ( It is in a state of fluctuation stop). In the decorative pattern display device 208 display area, the castle town background is continuously displayed, and in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c in front of it, a pattern combination of decorative patterns that suggests that the result of the hit / miss judgment is out (for example, "decoration 2- The swing fluctuation display of "decoration 1-decoration 2") is displayed.

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and only the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (16a) of the figure is the timing corresponding to (16) of FIG. 801, and is a state in which the liquid crystal command for stopping the symbol is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the decorative pattern display device 208, a fluctuation display of a pattern combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2") indicating that the castle town background and the result of the hit determination are out of alignment is continuously displayed. .

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is continuously set in the fixed layer 01, and only the fluctuation fluctuation BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in (17a) of the figure is the timing corresponding to (17) of FIG. 801, and is a state in which the liquid crystal control unit 700 has sent a return command for stopping the symbol to the first sub control unit 400. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the castle town background, and in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c in front of it, the pattern combination of decorative patterns suggesting that the result of the hit / miss judgment is out (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 1- The decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. Also in the reduced decorative symbol display area 208, the same as in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination of decorative symbols that suggests that the result of the hit / miss judgment is a big hit (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2"). Is stopped.

  At this timing, the fluctuation fluctuation BGM of the fixed layer 01 ends the output, both the fixed layer and the free layer are released, and the speaker 120 does not output.

  The fluctuation fluctuation BGM output from (10a) of the same figure may not be output (in the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment is out of range).

  As described above, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is a game table including the effect control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and the effect control unit is provided. Is a means capable of setting a plurality of types of sound data (for example, the sound device data shown in FIG. 771), and the effect control means is a means of setting a plurality of types of setting areas (for example, fixed layer, free layer (free channel), The first type of setting area is a means capable of executing control for setting free layer (free channel) sound data in a first type setting area of the system layer. It is a setting area configured from a first setting area (for example, free layers (free channels) 01 to 30), and the effect control unit is configured to control a plurality of the first setting areas. The sound data (hereinafter, “first sound data (for example, sound data (SE, BGM, etc.) set in the free channel (free layer))” is set in the empty setting area (hereinafter, “unset area”). The control means is capable of executing control for setting the first sound data in the first setting area (for example, the free layer 01) in which the first sound data is set. Sound data different from the first sound data (hereinafter, “second sound data (for example, sound stop data set in the free channel (free layer), silence data, sound data (SE, BGM), etc.)) ".") Is a means for executing control for overwriting.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a feature in the effect control means.

  That is, since the developer can intentionally overwrite the sound data set in the unset area, it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of sound production due to a design mistake.

  Further, the effect control unit can execute control for searching the unset area (hereinafter, referred to as “first search control (for example, unused free layer search processing shown in FIG. 785 (b))”). It may be a means.

  Note that the unset area may be acquired by performing control to search the used setting area.

  Further, the first search control may be a control for searching the unset area by determining the setting status of the sound data in each of the set areas for the plurality of first set areas. Good.

  The first search control may not be ended until the search is completed for all the first set areas.

  Further, the first search control may be ended when a predetermined number (for example, one first setting area for monaural and two first setting areas for stereo) are available.

  Further, the first search control may be terminated when a predetermined number of consecutive first set areas (for example, two first set areas for stereo) are free.

  At least a part of the plurality of types of sound data is data in which identification information is set, and the first sound data includes the identification information (hereinafter, referred to as “first identification information”). The second sound data is set data, and the identification information (hereinafter, referred to as “second identification information”) is set in the second sound data. When the information and the second identification information are the same information, it is a means for executing control to overwrite the second sound data with the first sound data set in the first setting area. Good.

  There may be sound data for which identification information is not set. Further, when the identification information is different, the overwriting may not be performed. Further, even if the identification information is the same, it may not be overwritten. Specifically, for example, in the case of overwriting-prohibited data (sound data for which overwriting-prohibition is set), it may not be overwritten even if the identification information is the same. Further, when the identification information is the same, the information may be overwritten without fail.

  Further, the effect control unit can execute control for searching the identification information (hereinafter, referred to as “second search control (for example, identification information-containing layer number acquisition processing shown in FIG. 785 (a))”). It may be a means.

  The second search process may not be performed on the sound data for which the identification information is not set, or the second search process may be performed.

  Further, the second search control means, for sound data set in each of the plurality of first setting areas of the plurality of types of sound data, the identification information of the sound data and the first setting area. It may be a control for searching the first sound data in which the same information as the second identification information is set as the first identification information by comparing the two identification information.

  Note that the second search control may not be ended until the search is completed for all the first setting areas.

  Also, during the search of all the first setting areas, there was sound data (first sound data) in which the same information as the second identification information was set as the first identification information in the first setting area. Also in this case, the second search control may not be ended until the search is completed for all the first set areas.

  Also, during the search of all the first setting areas, there was sound data (first sound data) in which the same information as the second identification information was set as the first identification information in the first setting area. In this case, the first set area (number) in which the first found sound data (first sound data) is set may be acquired, and the second search process may be ended.

  Also, during the search of all the first setting areas, there was sound data (first sound data) in which the same information as the second identification information was set as the first identification information in the first setting area. Also in the case, the same information as the second identification information is set as the first identification information in the first setting area is a predetermined number, or until the search of all the first setting areas is completed. It is also possible not to end the search processing of.

  The unset area may be an area in which sound data indicating silence is set among the plurality of types of sound data.

  Further, the unset area may be an area in which any sound data of the plurality of types of sound data is not set in the first setting area.

  Further, one type of data among the plurality of types of sound data is third sound data, and the effect control unit is configured to include all the sound data set in each of the plurality of first setting areas. It may be a means capable of executing control for overwriting with the third sound data (for example, a free layer overall stop function and a free layer overall volume setting function).

  According to such a configuration, for example, when it is desired to erase all the sound data, it is not necessary to set the third sound data in each setting area, so that the user forgets to overwrite a part of the sound data. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the rendering effect.

  The third sound data may be data for stopping the sound data (stop data) or new sound data.

  Further, all the sound data may not be overwritten, and only a part (for example, the volume or pan value) of all the sound data may be changed.

  Further, it may be data that controllably stops all the sound data or controllably changes all the sound data.

  Also, one type of data among the plurality of types of sound data is fourth tone data (for example, BGM data), and one type of the plurality of types of setting regions is a second Is a setting area (for example, a fixed layer (fixed channel)), and the effect control means is a means capable of executing control for setting the fourth sound data in the second type setting area. Good.

  The second type setting area is composed of N (for example, two) second setting areas, and the fourth sound data is set over the N second setting areas. The data may be For example, stereo data is set over two second setting areas.

  Further, the second type setting area may be composed of one second setting area. For example, monaural data is set in one second setting area.

  Further, the sound data set in the first setting area may not be set in the second setting area.

  Further, a plurality of fixed layers (fixed channels) may be provided, and specific sound data may be output only on a specific channel. For example, the BGM for channel A may be output only on channel A and not on channel B. Further, when the sound data for the channel A is set while the sound data for the channel A is being output, the sound data may be overwritten, but may not be overwritten.

  For example, when deleting the sound data, the production control unit cannot grasp which first setting area the sound data set in the first setting area is set to. Therefore, when deleting, the identification information is searched. Then, the corresponding sound data is specified and deleted, or all the sound data set in the first setting area is deleted. However, it is clear where the sound data set in the second setting area is set, and when deleting the sound data, it suffices to set a specific second setting area, which can be used properly depending on the application. . As a result, the timing of erasing the sound data can be varied and the effect of the effect can be enhanced in some cases.

  One type of data among the plurality of types of sound data is fifth sound data (for example, sound data regarding an error), the fifth sound data is sound data regarding an error, and One kind of the plural kinds of setting areas is a third kind of setting area (for example, a system layer (system channel)), and the effect control unit is set to the third kind of setting area. It may be a means capable of executing control for setting the fifth sound data.

  Note that the third type setting area may be an area in which only sound data related to an error can be set. By setting only the sound data related to the error in the setting area of the third type, it is possible to prevent the sound data other than the error from being overwritten and to reliably notify the error to the player or the clerk with the sound. You may be able to.

  Further, the sound control means may be provided with a sound control means (for example, sound source IC 416), and the sound control means may be a means provided with a plurality of channels (for example, fixed channels, free channels, etc.).

  Further, some of the plurality of channels may be channels (for example, free channels) assigned as the first setting area.

  Further, the effect control means is a means provided with a plurality of the first setting areas (for example, free layer), the effect control means, the sound data set in the plurality of first setting areas May be set to a vacant channel (for example, a free channel) of the plurality of channels.

  Further, the effect control unit may be a unit that sets the sound data set in the plurality of second setting areas (for example, a fixed layer) to a vacant channel of the plurality of channels.

  The effect control means may be a means capable of executing the third search control for searching for a vacant channel.

  Further, the production means is provided, the production means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of production, the production means is a means configured by a plurality of production means, one of the plurality of production means. The production means is a sound output means (for example, the speaker 120), and one type of production of the plurality of types of production is a first production (for example, a winning prize presentation production, a variable display of decorative symbols, and a stop). Display effect), one type of effect of the plurality of types of effect is a second effect (for example, dark notice notification effect), and the sound output means is the first effect as the first effect. The first sound is a sound corresponding to the first sound data, and the first sound may be output during execution of the second effect. Even if the production of The sound may be one that is configured to not output.

  According to such a configuration, the sound of the first effect may not be output while the second effect is being performed, and the effect of the second effect may be enhanced.

  Note that the A-th sound (corresponding to the A-th sound data) as the A-th effect (for example, a pre-reading notice sound when the hold is increased) (for example, a hold-look-ahead notice sound corresponding to an increased hold of the pre-reading target) is generated. It may be output during execution of the second effect (for example, the dark notice effect).

  Further, the first sound may be output when the first effect is started during the B-th effect (for example, during the pre-reading notice effect by an effect or the like). At that time, the B-th sound (for example, the pre-reading notice effect sound) may be output, or the B-th sound may not be output.

  Further, the effect control unit may be a unit configured by one board (for example, the first sub-board 160).

  Further, the effect control unit may be a unit configured by a plurality of substrates (for example, a first sub-board 160, an effect control substrate, a liquid crystal control substrate (a substrate that constitutes the liquid crystal control unit 700), etc.).

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine. Further, the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  Further, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is a game table including a rendering unit, and the rendering unit is a unit configured by a plurality of rendering units, and the plurality of rendering units are provided. One of the rendering means is a sound output means (for example, a speaker 120), and one of the plurality of rendering means is a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). Yes, the production means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions, and one production of the plurality of types of productions is a first production (for example, a variable display production of N-th decorative pattern). And, one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a variable display effect of the N + 1 rotation decorative pattern), and the display means is the first effect as the first effect. Effect display (for example, decoration for the Nth rotation) (Variation display of pattern), the display means is means for displaying a third production display (for example, variation display of decorative pattern of N + 1th rotation) as the third production, and the sound The output means is a means for outputting a first music piece (for example, the NGM-th rotation symbol variation BGM) as the first effect, and the sound output means is a third music piece as the third effect ( For example, it is a means for outputting the symbol variation BGM of the N + 1th rotation, and is a period from the end of the first song to the start of the third song (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”). .), The sound output means may output a second music piece (for example, a BGM for symbol demonstration).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic of sound output means.

  In other words, it may be possible to allow a time until the next effect display is started, which may entertain the player.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the “first effect display ends” is the timing at which the first sub control unit 400 receives a sub command (symbol stop command) from the main control unit 300, the timing at which the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, the first The timing is such that the sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the display start timing of video (image) data on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the like. Further, "timing at which the second effect display starts" means timing at which the first sub control unit 400 receives a sub command (fluctuation start command) from the main control unit 300, timing at which fluctuation of a special figure starts, The timing is such that the sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, the display start timing of video (image) data on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the like.

  Alternatively, the timing of "end of the first effect display" means the timing of ending the moving image of the first effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208, transmission of the liquid crystal command (first effect display), the first The timing is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 indicating that the effect display is finished, the timing at which the display of the video (image) data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished, and the like.

  Further, “timing of starting the third effect display” means timing of starting a moving image of the third effect display, timing of the first sub-control unit 400 transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 00, and third timing. The timing is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 indicating that the effect display is finished, the timing at which the display of the video (image) data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished, and the like.

  The second music may start from the beginning, but may start from the middle.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed during the first period.

  In addition, the second music (for example, the symbol demo BGM shown in FIG. 792 (b2)) is a silent period (hereinafter, referred to as “second period”) and a period for outputting the music (hereinafter, “ It is referred to as a “third period”), and the third period is started after the second period ends.

  Further, the first period may be included in the second period of the second music piece.

  Further, the second music (for example, the BGM for the symbol demonstration shown in FIG. 792 (b2)) is composed of a silent period and a music output period, and the music output period is started after the silence period ends. It may be configured to be.

  The music output period may be followed by a silent period. In addition, there may be a silent period between the music output periods. For example, the second music may be sound data composed of N seconds of silence and music, or sound data designed to output sound data after N seconds. Good.

  Further, the period from the end of the first effect display to the start of the third effect display may be the silent period of the second music.

  It should be noted that if there is a hold at the time of the symbol stop, it ends in a silent period, and if there is no hold at the time of the symbol stop, the music output period may be entered. Also, the time from the end of this symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display when there is a hold at the time of symbol stop is selected in the normal (special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy) state It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest variation time of the time (variation time) in which a certain symbol variation display is performed. Further, in the electric power support state (universal figure high accuracy) state, it may be configured so as to be shorter than the shortest variation time of the time (variation time) in which the symbol variation display that may be selected is performed. Here, the power support state may include both a time saving state and a probability changing state, or may be a state showing only one of the time saving state and the probability changing state.

  Further, the first effect display is a variable display of the Nth rotation decorative pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative pattern variable display"), and the third effect display is N + 1. It is a variable display of the decorative pattern of the spinning eye (hereinafter referred to as "third decorative pattern variable display"), and the first song is a song corresponding to the first decorative symbol variable display. The third song is a song corresponding to the third decorative symbol variable display, and the first period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, "decoration"). The term "symbol stop display period").

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a period in the period from the variation stop of the Nth rotation decorative pattern to the start of the variable display of the N + 1th rotation decorative design, and thus the player. It may be possible to prevent the interest of the person from being diminished.

  The third song may be the same song as the first song. Further, one music may be configured to include the first music and the third music. Further, the music output in the first decorative pattern variable display may be the first music, and the music output in the third decorative symbol variable display may be the third music.

  Also, the first, second, and third songs may each be composed of a plurality of songs. For example, the first music is composed of a BGM for the first background image and a BGM for the second background image, and in the first decorative pattern variable display, the background display changes from the first background image to the second background image. When the background change effect that changes to the background image is performed, the BGM for the first background image that was output before the background change (during the display of the first background image) ends with the background change effect as a trigger. The BGM for the second background image may be output after the background change (during display of the second background image).

  Further, each of the first, second, and third music may be composed of a plurality of sound data (for example, music data for BGM and audio data).

  Further, the main control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) and the effect control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) are provided, and the main control unit sends a plurality of types of commands to the effect control unit. It is a possible means, the effect control means is a means for controlling the display means, the effect control means is a means for controlling the sound output means, one of the plurality of types of commands Command is a symbol stop command, and the symbol stop command is a command indicating that the symbol is in a stopped state, and one type of the plurality of types of commands is a variation start command. The fluctuation start command is a command indicating that fluctuation of the symbol has started, and the decorative symbol stop display period is the symbol stop frame by the effect control means. A period beginning with the de is received, the decorative symbol stop display period may be a period ending by the fluctuation start command is received by said presentation control means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the actual game state and the effect from being significantly deviated, and to make it easier to understand that the symbol is stopped by outputting the second music. There is.

  The effect control means may be composed of a plurality of control means (for example, the first sub-board 160, the effect control board, the liquid crystal control board (the board that constitutes the liquid crystal control unit 700), etc.), or the effect control. The means may be composed of one control means (for example, the first sub-board 160).

  Further, the first effect display is a reach effect display (for example, FIGS. 800 (6) to 800) which is displayed in the variation of the symbol of the Nth rotation (hereinafter, referred to as “symbol variation of the Nth rotation”). (9) SP reach effect display), the first song is a song corresponding to the reach effect display (for example, Yoshimune SP reach (for jackpot) sound data), The third effect display is a display displayed in the Nth rotation symbol variation, and the third effect display is an effect display different from the reach effect display (for example, FIG. 801 (11). ) -FIG. 801 (13) promotion lottery effect display), the second song (for example, swing fluctuation BGM) is a song different from the first song, and the first period is , The decorative pattern is displayed with shaking fluctuation Between (hereinafter referred to as. "Shaking change display period") may be of it.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to recognize that the decorative pattern is the fluctuation display, and it may be possible to continue the player's expectation until the next effect is started.

  The reach effect display described above may be a big hit reach effect display or may be a lost reach effect display. In the case of the loss reach display, the second music may be not output during the swinging fluctuation display period, but the second music may be output. Also, the music output during the swing fluctuation display period after the big hit reach effect display and the swing fluctuation display period after the loser reach may be different.

  In addition, as examples of conditions other than the above conditions, there are normal state (special figure low accuracy general figure low accuracy), probability variation state (special figure high accuracy general figure high accuracy), time saving state (special figure low accuracy general figure high accuracy). Sure) but may be different. It may be configured to be different depending on the background mode, the variation pattern table used, the simultaneous effect and the RTC effect.

  Further, the production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) is provided, the production control means is means for controlling the display means, and the production control means is means for controlling the sound output means. The swing fluctuation display period is a period started when the control for displaying the reach effect display is finished by the effect control unit, and the shake fluctuation display period is the third by the effect control unit. It may be a period that starts when control for displaying the effect display is started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a large deviation between the actual production state and the sound output, and to make it easier to understand that the second fluctuation is output and the fluctuation display period is in progress. You may be able to.

  The effect control means may be composed of a plurality of control means (for example, the first sub-board 160, the effect control board, the liquid crystal control board (the board that constitutes the liquid crystal control unit 700), etc.), or the effect control. The means may be composed of one control means (for example, the first sub-board 160).

  The reach effect display is configured not to be displayed on the display unit during the swing fluctuation display period, and the third effect display is not displayed on the display unit during the swing fluctuation display period. It may be one that has been.

  In addition, during the fluctuation display period, it is possible not to perform an effect other than the effect due to the display of the decorative pattern, which is related to the result of winning / deciding determination (for example, a reach effect or a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the hit / miss determination, a look-ahead effect). .

  Further, one of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect (for example, a symbol demonstration effect), and the display means is a fourth effect display (for example, FIG. 796) as the fourth effect. (1) to 796 (3) is a means for displaying the symbol demonstration effect display), the sound output means, the fourth output as the fourth effect (for example, during the symbol demonstration effect) Design demo BGM, big hit BGM, design changing BGM, demo BGM, island simultaneous production BGM, reach BGM, BGM output when setting changes on store side, BGM output when user changes settings, etc. ) May be output, and the second music may be at least partly the same music as the fourth music.

  The fourth song may be the second song. Further, the fourth music may include a part of the second music.

  Further, the sound output means outputs the first music at a volume of a first value according to an operation of the player to set the volume of the sound output means (hereinafter referred to as “volume setting operation”). The sound output means is a means that may output the second music at the volume of the first value, and the sound output means may output the volume of the first value. It may be a unit that may output the third music.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the volume setting operation after the power is turned on, the volume of the above-mentioned first value becomes the “initial value”.

  Further, when the volume setting operation is performed during the period in which the second music is being output, the sound output unit plays the second music with a volume of a second value according to the volume setting operation. It may be output.

  The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying a volume display, and may be configured so that the display mode of the volume display changes according to the volume setting operation.

  Further, the sound output means is a means that may output an error sound when an error occurs, and when an error occurs while outputting the second music, the sound output means Even if the second music piece is a means that may not output, and when an error occurs during the output of the second music piece, the sound output means may output the error sound. Good.

Note that the sound output means may be configured to be able to set the volume of the second music being output to 0 or lower. Depending on the error, an error that outputs an error sound (an error monitored by the main control unit or the payout control unit (may include a lower plate full tank error)) and an error that does not output an error sound (lower plate full tank error ( Displayed only on the liquid crystal), error due to monitoring by sub-control (for example, a shock sensor is provided on the front frame door side, and when a shock generated by the player hitting the front frame door hard is detected, a warning display is displayed on the liquid crystal. There may be a shock warning)).
<Overall structure>

  Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 803. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertically-long rectangular gaming machine base that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in the shape of a frame so that the inside thereof is closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is provided for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”), and is provided with a door side ball passage unit for guiding the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball firing handle 134 that shoots the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the presentation mode of the various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back side>

  FIG. 804 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 803 as seen from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing a game ball at the upper rear part of the pachinko machine 100, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, The other one of the high and low signals is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 806) described later. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 806) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 806) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 806) that performs the control process related to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs the control process related to the payout of the game balls ( (Refer to FIG. 806) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop staff, A launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 806) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 806) that supplies power to various electric game machines. And a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game shop staff and a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting the RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 805 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  As will be described later in detail, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a rendering device 206 having a rendering movable body 224 imitating a human arm are arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the lower right of the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218. And, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an Electro Luminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured to have a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays images used for effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a first variable winning opening 234 are provided below the game area 124. The second variable winning port 235 is provided, and the universal figure starting port 228 is provided in the right area of the game area 124.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. This second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed. When 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called big winning openings or attackers, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 have the same structure and are provided with openable and closable door members 234a and 235a. It is impossible to enter a ball while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special map display device wins the special map variation game and the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds), a predetermined time. It is opened and closed by the number of times (for example, 15 times).

  In the present embodiment, when the special game 1 variation game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special game 2 variation game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable winning port 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Further, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls. The balls are discharged to the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the ball. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the rod 146 and the launching mallet 148 to be launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the winning prize (general winning prize 226, first variable winning prize 234, first prize). 2 variable winning openings 235) or starting openings (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning at any winning opening or starting opening, or normal opening Only through 228 will the outlet 240 be reached.
<Direction device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. On the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like can be rolled, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to enter the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding means shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 806. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 for controlling the above, the second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, Mainly includes a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data storage. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality of program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 (in this circuit, a random number value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are incorporated) and a predetermined ball detection sensor such as each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening A (first variable winning opening 234 and / or second variable winning opening 235). Receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through, a magnetic sensor (wide range magnetic sensor), a front frame door opening sensor 109, an inner frame opening sensor, a lower plate full tank sensor, etc., which are separately described, A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various types. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the status display unit 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member. For example, a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the attacker A, etc. is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. When it is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When the signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the Is also configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

  Further, the main control unit 300, through the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349, to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external device (for example, a hall computer or a data display (not shown)), the game of the pachinko machine 100. It outputs an external terminal board signal (details will be described later) indicating information and the like. Note that the “external terminal board” denoted by reference numeral 349 may be referred to as “external centralized terminal board” in the slot machine, and is not limited to the name of “external terminal board”.

  Further, the payout control unit 600 also outputs an external terminal board signal to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and chance button. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Create a display image using the work area of VRAM436. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock and operates to control the entire second sub-control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the production movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive section 708 of the chance button, and the current position of the production movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 for detecting, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table. A game base frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game base frame lamp drive circuit 540. The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300. Further, the payout control unit 600 receives a detection result of an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the inner frame (main body 104), and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a launch motor (not shown) that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount, and a ball feeding device that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110. Control (not shown) is performed.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 807 (a) to (d), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, the figure (b) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first special opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special drawing starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special drawing starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the variation start of 2 (which also corresponds to the variation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or after the "variable display of special figure 2" is started, the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 is changed. Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 807 (a), five types from “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” are shown as stop symbol modes of special drawing 1 in the symbol variation stop display, and in FIG. 807 (b), As the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 in the symbol variation stop display, four types from "special figure a" to "special figure d" are shown. The white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Among the stop symbol modes of special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special figure high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special figure B" is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

  Explaining the stop symbol aspect of another special figure 1, "special figure C" is a 2R jackpot design called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing C" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing A" which is 15R. “Special drawing D” is a small hit symbol, and is in a low special probability state with a low special probability probability figure. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the 2R timeless big hit. “Special figure E” is a deviating symbol, and is a symbol in which the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  Further, explaining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, "special figure a" is a 16R special jackpot design, "special figure b" is an 8R special jackpot design, "special figure c" is an 8R jackpot design , "Special figure d" is a deviating pattern.

  FIG. 807 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that the ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched.

  Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B" and the 8R jackpot of "special drawing c", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" 1-decoration 1 "," decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", 16R special jackpot of "special drawing a", and 8R special jackpot of "special drawing b", a symbol combination in which the same three odd-numbered decorative patterns are lined up (For example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the small hit of "special drawing D", when "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, a 2R big hit called "special drawing C" that is suddenly changed is reported. , "Decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of "special drawing E" or "special drawing d", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 7C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 807 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and "general symbol B" which is a non-defective symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Example of display during game>

  808 to 810 are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during one game.

  808 (a), with reference to (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, the right symbol display region 208c below the display area, special A special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 and a variable icon display area 800 for suggesting the number of holds in FIG. 1 are provided. In this embodiment, one special figure 1 hold icon display area (hold icon display area) 900 can display four hold icons, which is the maximum number of special figure 1 variable games, and the display area 900 can be displayed. It is roughly divided into four areas: a first area 900a, a second area 900b, a third area 900c, and a fourth area 900d. The first area 900a to the fourth area 900d respectively correspond to the 1st to 4th holding orders of the special figure 1 variation game. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold can be displayed in the first area 900a, and similarly, 2 to 4 pieces are displayed in the second to fourth areas 900b to 900d. Each hold icon corresponding to the hold of the eyes can be displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as an example, a special figure 2 hold icon display area 902 that indicates the number of special figures 2 to be held is provided in the display area on the right side of the right symbol display area 208c. The special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, like the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900, can display four hold icons, which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 holding icon display area 902 is not displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0, and is displayed when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased. In the following description of the present embodiment, mainly an example of a change in the state of each configuration due to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings of the special figure 1 (for example, an example of display change of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900) will be described. The same can be displayed when there is an increase or decrease in the number of reservations in special figure 2. Further, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 900 may be simply referred to as a hold icon display area 900.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, in the display area above the special figure 2 hold icon display area 902, the special figure 1 variation game is suggested to indicate that the special figure 1 variation game is in progress (during variation of special figure 1). Four symbol display area 208e, the special symbol 2 fourth game display area 208f for special figure 2 to suggest that it is in special figure 2 variation game (during variation of special figure 2), and general figure variation game (of ordinary figure) It has a fourth symbol display area 208g for a universal figure for suggesting that it is (in fluctuation). In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e, the image of ○ is turned off (or blinking) during the special game 1 variable game, and the image of ○ is turned on when the special game 1 variable game is stopped. Similarly, the fourth symbol display area 208f for special figure 2 is an image of △, the fourth symbol display area 208g for a general figure is an image of ◇, is turned off (or blinks) during each variation game, and the variation game If is stopped, it will be lit up.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided, respectively.

  These configurations are the same in all the following embodiments (examples) unless otherwise specified.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 808 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 ends, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up two LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 has two holding pieces. The numbers of the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding lamp 216 are both 0, which indicates that the numbers of the special figure 2 and the general figure are 0.

  The special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol display region 208e (and the special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol display region 208f, the general symbol for the fourth symbol display region 208g) displays the image in a lighted state to inform that the variable game has stopped. There is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 (first area 900a and second area 900b), the hold icons PI1 and PI2 of Toku-zu 1 are shown, respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 9A, a circular (spherical) hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900. Further, a circular hold icon PI2 is displayed in the second area 900b.

  Then, the timing shown in the same figure (b), the suspension of special figure 1 is exhausted, the suspension of special figure 1 variation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special figure display device 212. Is started, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns off one LED of the two LEDs, and turns on one LED, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 is in the special figure 1 variation game. Indicates that the image of ○ is turned off (or blinks).

  As for the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon PI1 in the first area 900a corresponding to the consumed hold is moved to the change icon display area 800, and a moving animation between hold and change icons ( Alternatively, a state in which a hold icon erasing animation) and a hold icon moving animation in which the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b moves to the first area 900a are being executed are shown. Specifically, an animation is executed in which the hold icons PI1 and PI2 move to the right.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are continuously executed.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuating icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are completed. That is, the variable icon CI is displayed in the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI1 is displayed in the first area 900a of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon PI2 in the second area 900b is deleted.

  The timing shown in the same figure (f), in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of special figure 1 is started. Is shown. As shown in FIGS. 7B to 7F, when the holding is exhausted in the present embodiment, first, the variable display of symbols is started on the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on. After turning off, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 turns off (or blinks) the image of ◯. After that, the hold icon PI executes each animation of movement, change, and deletion, and thereafter, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and these state changes may be executed first or sequentially in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the state in which the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 (in this example, the opportunity button is pressed) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. The imitated image) is displayed.

  Further, at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the first color (this In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is at the start of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136, and all (from the left end portion to the right end portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is filled with the first color. Also, an image of the character (lord) is also displayed.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image is displayed. The TG1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter is gradually reduced in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (executes the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is in a state before a further time has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, before 6 seconds which is the acceptance period has elapsed) ((h) in the figure). After the timing of)), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. At this timing, based on the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the image 730 corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, The character display "Chance!" And the character image (customer) are displayed in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without operating the chance button 136. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the notice effect is displayed will be described as an example, but another effect display may be used.

  The timings shown in (j) and (k) of FIG. 11 are in a state where the production according to the result of winning / disagreement determination, the change time, and the noticed production that has been won is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Yes, FIGS. 11 (j) and 11 (k) show an example of reach display in the variable display of decorative symbols.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1 (l) is a production start state of super reach, and the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to white (white background), and the variable display of the decorative design is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. For example, it is displayed small in the lower right part of the display area (reduced display of the decorative pattern). Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI are hidden (erased). In addition, the pending icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the pending icon PI, the variable icon CI erasing timing, the white background timing, and the decorative display reduced display timing, whichever comes first , And may be executed in any order (the order may be changed). Moreover, at least one copy may be performed simultaneously. Further, the hold icon display area 900, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon PI, and the variable icon CI may be displayed or a part of them may be hidden during the super reach effect.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (M), (n), and 809 (o) to 809 (q) start execution of, for example, a swordsman reach production in which a swordsman character faces a sword. It is in a state of being. Here, as an example, a swordsman character and the characters “VS swordsman” are displayed (FIG. 808 (m)), and then a confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the swordsman character is displayed (FIGS. 808 (n) to 809 (). q)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 809 (q) displays the scene in which the character (Den) has won the swordsman character, and in FIG. 809 (r), a symbol combination of a big hit (probable variation big hit) in the reduced display of the decorative symbol (for example, The fluctuation display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in FIG. 3 (t) is a big hit to the design display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative design display device 208 ( After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") of "probability variation big hit" is displayed in a swinging manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Further, at the timing shown in (v) of the same figure, the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the characters of "probable variation jackpot" for notifying the start of the jackpot are displayed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 809 (t) ′ to (v) ′ continue from FIG. 809 (s) when the jackpot reach effect (the reach effect of the decoration 6) is started in FIG. 808 (k). It's timing. At this timing, after a big hit symbol combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 ((t) 'in the figure), The stop display of the decorative design is performed ((u) ′ in the same figure), the stop display of the decorative design in the design display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the character of “big hit” for notifying the start of the big hit is displayed (same). Figure (v) ').

  FIG. 810 shows a display example when there is a deviation in the swordsman reach production.

  The timing shown in FIG. 810 (a) is the timing following FIG. 809 (p), and the scene where the character (lord) loses to the swordsman character is displayed. Further, in FIG. 810 (b), a fluctuation variation display of a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) that is out of alignment in the reduced display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the timing shown in FIG. The entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is changed to white.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are shaken and displayed while shifting the deviating symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7"), and the hold icon is displayed. The state where the hold icon PI1 is displayed again in the area 900 and the variable icon CI is displayed again in the variable icon display area 800 is shown. Further, in the same figure (e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the image of ◯ is lit up and displayed in the fourth symbol display region 208e for special figure 1.

  The timings shown in (f) and (g) of the same figure are, in the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon deletion animation executed when the variation icon CI is erased after the special figure variation game ends. The execution state is shown, and the timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the state in which the deletion animation of the variable icon is completed.

In the above example, the fluctuation icon CI is deleted after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but the fluctuation icon CI is deleted at another timing (for example, after the stop display of the decorative symbol or during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, etc.). ) May be sufficient. The variable icon CI may be erased in one frame instead of the animation for erasing the variable icon.
<Structure definite machine with number of times>

  With reference to FIGS. 811 to 813, a structure-equipped probability variation machine (pachinko machine 100) according to another example of the present embodiment will be described. Each example (modification) of the present embodiment and each example (modification) of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

  The structure probability variation machine with the number of times whether or not to enter a specific area (probability variation operation area, probability variation area, V area) by the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker (not shown)) It is a pachinko machine 100 that is distributed.

  FIG. 811 is a front view showing a game board 200 according to another example of the present embodiment. In this example, the game board 200 is provided with an attacker unit 810 in place of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) 234 and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 of the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 805. Is. The other same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the game board 200, a decorative pattern display device 208 is arranged near the center thereof, a first special figure starting port 230 and an out port 240 are arranged below it, and a universal figure starting port is located on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. 228 and the second special figure starting port 232 are arranged, and the attacker unit 810 is arranged on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 (below the second special figure starting port 232).

  In this attacker unit 810, whether or not the attacker unit 810 can enter the specific area (probability variation operation area 808) is distributed by the operation of the structure (opening / closing operation of the second attacker 804).

  The attacker unit 810 is provided above the front surface and includes an door member 802a that opens and closes so as to be visible to the player (first attacker) 802, and below the first attacker 802 is invisible to the player. And an attacker (second attacker 804) having a shutter-type door member.

  In this attacker unit 810, a big hit is started when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214). Then, in a predetermined round "the second attacker 804 is opened and the V shutter provided inside the second attacker 804 (not shown) is opened", the game ball is in the second attacker 804. When a player enters a V pass switch (probability variation operation area 808, probability variation area, V area or V winning area) that is invisible to the player, the probability of a game state after the big hit ends (special figure high accuracy normal figure high Sure) state is given. Even when the V shutter is closed, when the gaming ball passes through the V passage switch when the probability variation operating region is in the valid state, the probability variation state is given. In this way, the structure probability variation machine (also referred to as V (winning) probability variation machine) divides whether or not the game ball can enter the probability variation operation area 808 by the opening pattern of the second attacker 804.

  That is, in the pachinko machine (V winning probability variation machine) 100 of the present embodiment, a big hit game including a round in which the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that easily wins the probability variation operation area (V winning area) 808 is started by a special drawing is started. It is determined whether to start a jackpot game including a round of performing the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is difficult to win, and the opening pattern of the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 is determined for each symbol. Has been done. Then, the second attacker 804 is opened in a predetermined round (for example, 4R) during the big hit, and the shutter (not shown) in the back is opened so that the game ball enters the probability variation operating area 808. Then, the operation of the probability variation function starts (moves to the probability variation state) after the end of the big hit game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 812, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in the pachinko machine 100 (structure probability variation machine with number of times shown in FIG. 811, V winning probability variation machine) of the present embodiment, The types of special symbols and ordinary symbols that the decorative symbol display device 208 and the ordinary symbol display device 210 stop display will be described. The same figure (a) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1, the figure (b) shows one example of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2.

  In FIG. 812 (a), three types from “special drawing A” to “special drawing C” are shown as stop symbol modes of special drawing 1 in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and in FIG. 812 (b), Two types of "special figure a" and "special figure b" are shown as the stop symbol modes of special figure 2 in the symbol variation stop display. The white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Among the stop symbol modes of special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 12 round (12R) big hit symbol (substantially 8R probability variation big hit symbol), and "special figure B" is 12R big hit symbol (substantial 8R normal big hit symbol) Yes, "special drawing C" is a deviating pattern. Both "Special map A" and "Special map B" are in the special map high probability general figure high probability state, but "Special map A" is a game ball in the probability variation operating region (V region) 808 of the attacker unit 810. Is a big hit of the opening pattern of the second attacker 804 that is easy to enter (for example, 100 ms open → 3400 ms closed → 28000 ms open), while “Special figure B” is a game ball in the probability variation operating area (V area) 808. Is a big hit of the opening pattern (for example, 100 ms opening) of the second attacker 804 that is hard to enter. Here, the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker 804 in the present embodiment operates with a constant opening pattern (for example, 50 ms opening → 2950 ms closing → 28500 ms opening) regardless of the design. The opening pattern of the shutter (V shutter) provided in the second attacker may be determined for each symbol. In addition, in “Special map A”, the prescribed number of rounds is 12R, but in 9R to 12R, the opening time of the special winning opening (second attacker 804) is 1R to 8R (for example, 1R to 5R). The 8R opening pattern is significantly shorter than the 29000 ms opening) (for example, 100 ms), and it can be said that it does not substantially open. Therefore, it is also called a “substantial 8R probability variation big hit symbol”. Similarly, the special round B has a prescribed number of rounds of 12R, but 9R to 12R have opening times of the special winning opening of 1R to 3R and 5 to 8R (for example, 1 to 3R and 5 to 8R). The opening pattern is significantly shorter than that of 29000 ms (for example, 100 ms), and it can be said that it does not substantially open. In this embodiment, the opening patterns 9 to 12R of the special drawing A and the special drawing B are the same, but the opening pattern of the special drawing B is substantially the same as the opening pattern of 12R (for example, 9R to 12R is 1). -3R, 5-8R and the same open pattern that allows the game ball to easily enter the attacker. It may be an open pattern different from 1-3R, 5-8R) or vice versa. The opening pattern of special figure A may be an opening pattern for substantially changing the 12R probability.

  Further, explaining the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, "special figure a" is a 16R special jackpot design (substantially 16R probability variation big hit pattern), "special figure b", is a deviating symbol. “Special drawing a” is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state, which is a big hit of the shutter opening pattern in which the game ball easily enters the probability variation operation area (V area) 808. In addition, in the case of "special figure a", after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to an electric support (probability change) state, so it is also called "substantially 16R probability change big hit symbol".

  It should be noted that any of "special map A", "special map B", and "special map a" regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the probability variation operation area 808, after the jackpot game is over, the electric support state (normal High accuracy state).

  FIG. 812 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. As for the decorative pattern of the present embodiment, different decorative patterns are displayed depending on the game state (normal state (non-electric support state) or electric support (probable variation / time saving) state). As shown in (c) (1) of the same figure, there are 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the normal state. Further, as shown in (c) and (2) of the same figure, in the electric support state, there are seven types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 7" having different patterns from the normal state.

  Then, as shown in (c) and (3) of the same figure, in the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, in the case of notifying the substantial 8R probability variation big hit of the "special figure A" or the substantial 8R normal big hit of the "special figure B" In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combinations (3) of the same decorative symbols other than the "decorative 7", which are the decorative symbols of (c) (1) of the same figure (for example, "decorative 1- "Decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the substantial 8R probability variation big hit of "special figure A", for example, a pattern combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in which three "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern in FIG. -Decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the stop symbol mode of special drawing 2, when notifying the actual 16R probability variation big hit of "special drawing a" in the electric power support state, "decoration 7" of the decorative design of FIG. 2 (c) (2) is 3 The symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") arranged side by side are stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the actual 16R probability variation big hit of "special drawing a" in the normal state, a pattern combination in which three "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern of FIG. The decoration 7-decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the big hit of "special drawing A" or "special drawing B" in the electric power support state, it is the same as the decorative pattern of FIG. A symbol combination in which three decorative symbols are lined up (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. Further, in this case, the same decorative pattern is used except for a pattern combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") in which three "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern of FIG. It is also possible to stop and display the three symbol combinations that are not aligned (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5").

  On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special drawing C" or the "special drawing b", symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 7C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the big hit of "special map A" or "special map B" is notified in the electric power support by a pattern combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5") of the same decorative pattern that is not aligned. In this case, if the special character C or the special character “b” is out of the range, the symbol combination of the random numbers for notifying the big hit of the “special character A” or the “special character B” is not displayed, but may be displayed. Good. In addition, when notifying the deviation of “special map C” or “special map b” in the electric support, only a specific symbol combination (eg, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6”) may be displayed, Any one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations may be displayed.

  FIG. 812 (d) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the universal figure of the present embodiment, "general figure A" which is a winning symbol and "general symbol B" which is a non-defective symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the full lighting of the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is won, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is out. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure shows the position of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black-painted part shows the position of the segment where the light is turned on.

FIG. 812 (e) shows an example of the notification of the fourth symbol. In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for suggesting that it is during special figure 1 variation game (during variation of special figure 1), and special figure 2 variation game (variation of special figure 2) It is provided with a fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 for suggesting that it is "middle". The fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display means for special figure 1 are LEDs respectively, and the indication is made by turning on and off the LEDs. In this example, the fourth symbol for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 are both the same informing mode, LED lighting is repeatedly turned on and off during a variable game, and in the case of a big hit, it is lit and displayed. If it is out of the range, it goes out.
<Example of performance display>

  FIG. 813 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display in the pachinko machine (structure probability variation machine with number of times) 100 shown in FIGS. 811 and 812.

  The timing shown in FIG. 813 (1), in the normal state (non-electric power support state) during the first rotation (first time) of the variation game of Toku-zu 1 wins "Toku-zu A" (actual 8R probability variation big hit symbol) The jackpot production has been started.

  At this timing, the jackpot start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the display of the characters "battle bonus" indicates that the effect is being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display means (special figure 1 LED812) for suggesting that the special figure 1 variation game (during variation of special figure 1), and the special figure 2 It has a fourth symbol display means for special figure 2 (LED 814 for special figure 2) for suggesting that it is during a variation game (during variation of special figure 2), and. The LED 812 for special figure 1 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 1 variation game, and is turned on when the special figure 1 variation game is stopped and a big hit is won, and is turned off when the special figure 1 variation game is missed. Similarly, the LED 814 for special figure 2 is repeatedly turned on and off during the special figure 2 variation game, and is turned on when the special figure 2 variation game is stopped and the big hit is won, and is turned off when the special figure 2 is lost (FIG. 812). (See (e)). At this timing, the LED 812 for Toku-zu 1 is turned on to notify that the Toku-zu 1 variation game has stopped and that the jackpot has been won. The LED 814 for special figure 2 is off.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a general figure display device 210 are provided. Above these display devices, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and a general figure holding lamp 216 are provided, respectively. At this timing, the Toku-zu 1 display device 212 stops displaying “Toku-zu A”.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 2B, an image simulating the game board 200 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, and a hitting suggestion display is performed in the display area of the decorative design display device 208. There is. The hitting suggestion display is a display for notifying the player that the period to right-handed or the period to left-handed has started. Here, the right-handed suggestion display (for example, the display of the character “Right-handed!” In the first hit-direction suggestion display area 710 provided near the center of the display area and the arrow indicating the right-handed play on the game board 200). Display) to inform that the period for right-handing has started. The hitting suggestion display may be an effect display included in the big hit start effect, but may be an effect different from the big hit start effect. Further, a hit suggestion effect is produced by another effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106) or a speaker 120 (for example, lighting of a lamp in the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200). Alternatively, the speaker 120 may output a voice "right hit!" (A right hit notification sound) while the hit suggestion display is being performed.

  The timing shown in (3) of the same figure has shown the state where the 1R 1st of the big hit game started. Here, the right hitting suggestion display (first right hitting suggestion display) in the first hitting suggestion display area 710 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased (not displayed), and the battle effect is executed in the display area. . In this example, the characters "battle effect" are displayed in the display area to indicate that the effect is being executed. Further, the number of acquired balls (here, “0pt”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and a small right-handed suggestion display (here, “right-handed strike” is displayed in the second hitting suggestion display area 712 at the upper left of the display area. Character and a right-pointing arrow are displayed) to inform that it is during the period when the player should continue to the right.

  The timing shown in (4) of the same figure shows the state where the 3R of the big hit game has started. At this timing, as an example, by the winning of “special map A”, it is suggested that the game ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the probability variation operation area 808 (shifting to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game). (V prize winning suggestion production) has started. Here, the display of the characters "battle victory effect" indicates that the effect is being executed. The acquired number of balls is displayed as a cumulative value (“252 pt” in this example), and the right-handing suggestion display (second right-handing suggestion display) is continued in the second way-of-hit suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in (5) of the same figure has shown the state where the 4th R of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the V-winning suggestion effect (here, the characters “Aim for the V attacker !!” and the arrow pointing to the lower right pointing to the position of the attacker unit 810) is continued. Further, the right-handing suggestion display is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712. It should be noted that a V-winning suggestion effect (for example, blinking of a lamp around the attacker or "V from the speaker 120" by another effect means such as a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 200 or the frame (front frame door 106) or a speaker 120. A voice such as "Aim for attacker !!" (output right-handed alarm sound) may be output.

  The timing shown in (6) of the same figure shows the state where the game ball has entered the probability variation operation area 808 (the state where V has been won) in the 4th round of the big hit game. At this timing, an effect for notifying that the V prize has been won (here, the character "V" is displayed) is suggested, and it is suggested that the state will be changed after the jackpot game is over. Further, the right-handing suggestion display is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in (7) of the same figure shows the state where the 6th round of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the round effect after V winning (the effect until the remaining number of rounds (regulated 12R, substantially 8R) is completed) is executed. Here, as an example, the display of the character "Round effect after battle victory" indicates that the effect is being executed. Further, the right-handing suggestion display is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712.

  The timing shown in (8) of the same figure has shown the state where the 8th round of the big hit game has ended. At this timing, the round effect after the V winning is continuously executed. Further, the right-handing suggestion display is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712.

  FIG. 9 (9) shows an effect executed on the 9th to 12th rounds of the big hit game. During this period, the round effect after the V winning is continuously executed. Further, the right-handing suggestion display is continued in the second way-taking suggestion display area 712. "Special figure A" is a jackpot pattern with a specified round number of 12R, but the opening time of the attacker unit 810 is set to be extremely short for 9R to 12R, and the jackpot game ends in 8R, so the number of balls won Also does not increase after 8R. In the second hitting suggestion display area 712, the right hitting suggestion display is continued.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 10 (10), an effect (in this example, the display of the characters “Yoshimune RUSH rushing in !!”) for notifying the end of the big hit game is executed, and in the second hitting suggestion display area 712, the right Continuation indication is continued.

  In FIG. 813, during the period of the 5th R (between FIG. 813 (6) and FIG. 8 (7)), the same effect as that of the 4R is informed that the V winning is informed.

  In addition, in the case where the V winning is not made at the 4th R of FIG. 6 (6), at the 5th R (between FIG. 813 (6) and FIG. 7 (7)), the effect of notifying that the V winning is not made (for example, , The entire display area is displayed in gray).

Further, when the "special drawing B" (actual 8R normal big hit) is won, the battle failure effect is executed at the timing shown in (4) of the figure, and the V winning suggestion effect is produced at the timing shown in (5) of the figure. Is not executed. Further, in that case, after (5) in the same figure, a normal round effect (an effect different from the round effect after the battle victory, an effect until the remaining number of rounds (regulated 12R, substantially 8R) is finished) It may be executed.
<Main control unit main loop processing>

  Next, a process executed by the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. First, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 814. FIG. 814 is a flowchart of the main control unit main loop processing.

  In step S101 of the main control part main loop process that starts execution of the main control part main loop process, the main control part 300 sets the interrupt prohibition, and then in step S103, clears the value of the counter of the WDT 314. , WDT 314 restarts the time measurement. In step S105, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. For updating the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  After setting the interrupt permission in step S107, subcommand transmission processing is performed in step S109). In this sub-command transmission processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing for transmitting the command, etc. (details will be described later). To). In step S111, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S113. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating the random number for special figure variation time determination and the random number for universal figure variation time determination is performed.

In step S113, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S113). : Yes), the process returns to step S101 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and when the value is less than the predetermined value (step S113: No), the process proceeds to step S115. In step S115, the power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after setting the interrupt prohibition. In addition, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register of 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308. Store in the area. After that, after setting the access to the RAM 308 is prohibited, the HALT state is set.
<Subcommand transmission process>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 815 and 816, the sub command transmission process (step S109) executed in the main controller main loop process will be described. 815 and 816 (a) are flowcharts of the subcommand transmission process. Further, FIG. 816 (b) is a timing chart of subcommand transmission.

  The command (subcommand) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is stored in a predetermined buffer. In the sub-command transmission process of the present embodiment, after transmitting a certain command indicated by the pointer of the buffer three times (the same command three times), the pointer moves to the next and the next command is transmitted. Therefore, the buffer in which the subcommands are stored indicates the subcommand setting pointer indicating the storage area of the command to be transmitted (set) next and the storage area of the already transmitted (same command is transmitted three times) command. It has a subcommand send pointer. Then, when the sub-command setting pointer matches the sub-command transmission pointer, the command indicated by the sub-command setting pointer is already transmitted.

  In step S201, the subcommand setting pointer is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S203. In step S203, the subcommand setting pointer is compared with the subcommand transmission pointer, and the process proceeds to step S205.

  In step S205, it is determined whether there is a subcommand to be transmitted. That is, when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer match, there is no subcommand to be transmitted next, but when the subcommand setting pointer and the subcommand transmission pointer do not match (for example, the subcommand setting pointer In the case of the larger address), the subcommand to be transmitted next is set in the buffer. In this step, if there is no subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S245, and if there is a subcommand to be transmitted, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S207, to move to the subcommand to be transmitted next, the subcommand transmission pointer is acquired and updated by adding 1 and the process proceeds to step S209. In step S209, 1 is subtracted from the subcommand continuous transmission counter to update. A numerical value of 0 to 3 is set in the sub command continuous transmission counter, and "3" is set when the sub command is transmitted first. That is, when the subcommand is transmitted first (the first transmission), the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "2" by this step. In the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "1" by this step, and in the case of the second transmission of the subcommand, the subcommand continuous transmission counter becomes "1" by this step. It becomes "0".

  In step S211, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the third transmission of the same subcommand (whether the subcommand continuous transmission counter is “0”), and it corresponds to the third transmission of the same subcommand (“0”). (In the case of "), the process proceeds to step S213, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S213, the initial value "3" is set in the subcommand continuous transmission counter, and the process proceeds to step S215. In step S215, the subcommand transmission data in the buffer corresponding to the current subcommand transmission pointer (the subcommand transmission pointer acquired in step S207) is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S217. In step S217, the subcommand transmission pointer is updated (1 is added in step S207 to move to the updated pointer).

  In step S219, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) and the number of command transmissions are set. Here, the number of wait loops before strobe output (period) is set to the period (1) shown in FIG. 816 (b) (for example, the time required to set data in the port (60 μs as an example)). The number of command transmissions is “2” which is the number of times the strobe signal turns off and then turns on at this timing (the number of times the strobe signals of (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b) turn on and off). Is set.

  In step S221 following step S219, interrupt prohibition processing is performed, and the flow advances to step S2223. In step S223, the subcommand continuous transmission counter is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S225 shown in FIG. 816 (a).

  In step S225 of FIG. 816 (a), it is determined whether or not the number of times of continuous transmission of the subcommand is the first time (the subcommand continuous counter is "3"), and in the case of the first time, the process proceeds to step S227. If not, the process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S227, the subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S229. In step S229, is the set loop count (the wait loop count before strobe output (period) set in step S219 or the data hold wait loop count (period) set in step S237) set to 0 (FIG. 816)? The period (1) shown in (b) (the period from t1 to t2) or the period (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b) (the period from t2 to t3) and the period (4) (the period from t4 to t5). ), (6) (whether the respective periods of t6 to t7 have elapsed), and if 0, the process proceeds to step S231, otherwise returns to step S227. In steps S227 and S229, periods (1) and (3) (periods t3 to t4), period (5) (periods t5 to t6) shown in FIG. 816 (b), or FIG. During each of the periods (2), (4), and (6) shown in b), the subcommand data is continuously output.

  In step S231, the command transmission count set in step S219 is decremented by 1 and updated, and the process proceeds to step S233. In step S233, it is determined whether or not the command transmission count is 0. If not 0, the process proceeds to step S235, and if 0, the process proceeds to step S239.

  In step S235, the strobe signal is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S237. In step S237, the number of data holding wait loops (period) is set. The number of data holding wait loops (period) is the periods (2), (4), and (6) shown in FIG. 816 (b). After step S237, the process proceeds to step S227.

  For example, in steps S227 and S229, the sub-command data is continuously output during the period before the strobe output wait loop count (the period (1) shown in FIG. 816 (b)) (the command transmission count is “2”). When the number of loops becomes 0 (when the period (1) shown in FIG. 816 (b) has elapsed), the number of command transmissions becomes “1” in step S231, and 1 in the data holding wait loop in step S237. The number of times (the period (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b)) is set, and the subcommand data is output in step S227. In this example, the sub-command data continues to be output during the period of the number of wait loops before strobe output (the period (1) shown in FIG. 816 (b)), but the first sub-control unit 400 can receive it. , The sub-command data that is output during the first number of data holding wait loops (period (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b)) after the strobe signal is turned on.

  In step S239, the strobe signal is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the subcommand continuous transmission counter updated by subtracting 1 in step S209 is set, and the process proceeds to step S243. Step S241 is a step to proceed when the number of command transmissions is 0 in the determination of step S233, that is, after the first number of data holding wait loops (the period (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b)) elapses. Yes, in this step, the value obtained by updating the subcommand continuous transmission counter by -1 is set. That is, the "first time" of continuous transmission of subcommands is the number of wait loops before strobe output (time period) and the first time of the data holding wait loop (time periods (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 816 (b)). ). The “second time” of continuous transmission of subcommands includes a period during which the strobe signal is turned off after the first time (period) of the data holding wait loop and the second time of the data holding wait loop (FIG. 816 (b)). (Periods (3) and (4)). The “third time” of continuous transmission of subcommands is the period during which the strobe signal is turned off after the second number (period) of the data holding wait loop and the third number of times of the data holding wait loop (FIG. 816 (b)). (Periods (5) and (6)). Further, the command transmission count set in step S219 is “2”, which is the number of times the strobe signal is turned off and on in each of the first to third subcommand continuous transmission counts.

  After step S241, the process proceeds to step S243. In step S243, it is determined by the subcommand transmission counter set in S241 whether or not the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is the third time (that is, the third time of the data holding wait loop is completed), and the continuous transmission of the subcommands is performed. If the number of times is the third time, the process proceeds to step S245, and if the number of continuous transmissions of the subcommand is not the third time, the process proceeds to step S247.

  In step S245, the subcommand data set in the port is cleared, and the flow advances to step S247. In step S247, the subcommand data is output, and the process proceeds to step S249. In step S249, interrupt permission processing is performed, and the processing ends. The sub-command data output in step S247 is the sub-command data set in the port in step S247 when the determination in step S243 is “No” (first to third data holding wait loops). , If the determination in step S243 is "Yes", the process proceeds from step S245. In step S247, a signal (clear signal) indicating that no data is set in the port is output because the subcommand data was cleared in step S245. (After t7 in FIG. 816 (b)).

  In this example, the strobe signal after the first strobe signal in the data holding wait loop is off (the period (3) shown in FIG. 816 (b)) and the strobe signal after the second strobe signal in the data holding wait loop. Is off (the period (5) shown in FIG. 816 (b)), the subcommand transmission process is terminated and the next step (other determination random number update process (step) of the main control unit main loop process shown in FIG. 814 is performed. It is a period (for example, 90 μs) until the sub command transmission process (step S109) is executed again in the main control unit main loop process after returning to S111). The number of continuous transmission of subcommands is required because it takes time (60 μs as an example) to set data in the port before the first data holding wait loop. Is executed for the first time, the processing from step S225 to step S229 is executed to secure the time for setting the data in the port. On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous transmission of the subcommand is the second and third times, When the sub command transmission process is completed, the process returns to the loop of the main control unit main process, and therefore the process (step S227 and step S229) when the number of times of continuous transmission of the sub command is the first time is unnecessary.

In this example, the same subcommand is transmitted three times, but it may be configured to be transmitted only once. In that case, the processes of S209 to S217, S223 to S225, and S241 to S243 are unnecessary. Also, the same subcommand may be configured to be transmitted multiple times other than 3.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 817, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described. FIG. 817 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle. In step S301, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In steps S303 and S305, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S105 is updated, and then the special figure determining random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is updated. , The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the general figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, if the range of numerical values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the acquired value before the original It is stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be separately provided.

  In step S307, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub control unit 400 is not activated). If (step S307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S341. If the interrupt function is not being limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S307: No), the process proceeds to step S309. move on. Here, that the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set when the power of the main control unit 300 is turned on is not 0, that is, in step S307, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S309. When the bidirectional communication with the first sub-control unit 400 is possible, a command for confirming whether the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has started. In step S309, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S309: Yes), the process proceeds to step S339. If the specific error is not occurring (step S309: No), the process proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying / stopping the symbols on the universal symbol display device 210, and the time for varying / stopping the symbols on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period for timing the time to change / stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

  In step S313, processing such as updating the input port status is performed. In this input port status update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general figure starting port 228, and out port 240 are input through the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of signals relating to switches such as the first variable winning port (first attacker) 234, the second variable winning port (second attacker) 235, and the winning port (general winning port 226) is monitored and provided in the RAM 308. Store in the signal state storage area.

  Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning in the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased because the winning is invalid.

  Further, in step S315, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S313, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, when the detection signal is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs), it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S315, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning of the mouth 226 is not performed and the process branches to the subsequent process.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In addition, in the winning a prize winning process of step S315, a winning a prize counter updating process is also performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, if there is a winning in the winning a prize 226, the first variable winning a prize 234, the second variable winning a prize 235, the special figure 1 starting mouth 230, the special figure 2 starting 232, it is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In addition, in the winning opening winning process of step S315, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this prize winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. It is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value is obtained as the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In addition, when there is a prize in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is set to the special figure 2 win. The value is acquired as a random number value, and a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning in the first variable winning port 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the first variable winning port 234. The same applies to the second variable winning port 235. In addition, when the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (whether or not the winning / defective determination, the symbol, and the pre-reading lottery of the variable time) are also performed. The special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  In step S317, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a process for confirming and monitoring the prize-related abnormality and setting the abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S319, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input updating process, the number of gaming balls (the number of ejected balls) that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

  In step S321, probability variation area related setting processing is performed. The probability variation area related setting processing will be described later.

  In step S323, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600, which is transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub control unit 400 after the power is turned on. And a command for notifying the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300, a prize ball number command for instructing the payout of gaming balls for a designated prize ball, and the like.

  The commands received by the main controller 300 from the payout controller 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the command from the main controller 300 has been received by the payout controller 600) and a test shooting test signal. Command (award ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout system error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation status command (whether the payout of a prize ball is in operation / not in operation). There is a command to display or a display (lighting / non-lighting of LED etc.) to the first sub-control unit 400 to indicate that the payout is in process.

  Next, in step S325, a special figure state update process for special figures 1 and 2 is performed. The special figure status update process executes one of a plurality of processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 823.

  In step S327, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update process at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. Further, thereafter, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the tongue member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the bellows member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening / closing of 2232, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the general-university-drawing flag is on, even in the general-university-state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the general-purpose stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S329 without doing anything.

  Further, in step S327, a universal figure related lottery process is also performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit judgment, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are acquired based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected for displaying the variation of the figure on the figure display device 210, and this variation display time is stored in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S329, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S313 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Further, by driving various solenoids 332, the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, 235 is controlled, or the normal symbol display device 210, the first special via the display circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display parts 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Details of the device monitoring process will be described later.

  In step S331, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal and the like are performed. Details of the external output signal management processing will be described later. In step S333, subcommand management processing is performed. In this sub-command management processing, the command (sub-command) for which transmission is requested in various processing is set in the transmission buffer, and preparations are made for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400. In the subcommand management process, if the subcommand transmission request flag is set in each process in the timer interrupt process, the subcommand corresponding to the command type corresponding to each process (for example, in the device monitoring process If the transmission request flag of the subcommand is turned on, an error command is issued, and the transmission request of the subcommand (special chart 1 or 2 prefetch information command) is turned on in the special symbol random number acquisition process in the winning a prize winning process. If it does, the corresponding pre-read command of special figure) is set in the buffer and the subcommand setting pointer is set.

  The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) such as a RAM clear command that can specify the type of command.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned subcommand transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of the variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including the presence or absence of winning. In the present embodiment, when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are won, the transmission request flag of the special winning port winning command is turned on in the winning port winning process, and the sub command management is performed. In the process, the special winning opening winning command is set in the buffer.

  In addition, when the special figure processing state is updated to the fluctuation waiting state in the special figure state update process, the transmission request flag of the subcommand (game state command) is turned on, and the command data is stored in the RAM 308. Status (probability change state, time saving state and extended opening state of ordinary electric auditors (state where the opening time of the electric Chu is extended)) value, special map status (special map probability fluctuation flag, special map time saving state) Value, set fluctuation pattern table, special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation frequency (time saving frequency, in this case, the number of times the probability variation state with power support continues (for example, 150 times) and the number of times the power support state continues (for example, 100 times)), and information indicating the special drawing processing state is set.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure variation start command) is set to ON in the special figure per lottery processing, the variation pattern table, the special pattern stored in the RAM 308 in the command data is processed in the subcommand management processing. Per figure type (for example, 15R special jackpot pattern (special figure A) in FIG. 807, 12R big jackpot pattern (special figure A) in FIG. 812), special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2), special figure 1 related The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held, and the like is set.

  When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set to ON in the symbol changing process, information indicating the special figure per type, the special figure type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is included in the command data. Set.

  When the transmission request flag of the sub command (winning prize winning command) is set to ON in the winning opening winning process, the winning opening stored in the RAM 308 in the command data or the switch (sensor) being turned on or Set the information indicating the gate.

  Further, when the transmission request flag of the sub-command (hit start command) is turned on in the special figure display confirmation wait processing, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. .

  When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (hit end command) is turned on in the special electricity combination operation end processing, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  When the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special winning opening opening command) is turned on in the special electric vehicle opening processing, the number of big hit rounds (number of special electric figure operation times) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, special figure winning type, etc. Is set.

  When the transmission request flag of the sub-command (special winning prize closing command) is turned on in the special electricity combination operation processing, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the type of special drawing hit, etc. is set in the command data. .

  In addition, when the transmission request of the subcommand (Special figure 1 preread information command or Special figure 2 preread information command) is turned on in the special figure random number acquisition process in the winning a prize winning process, the special figure to be prefetched is selected. Correspondingly, the pre-reading reserved number of balls, the pre-reading hit determination result, the pre-reading hit type, the pre-reading timer number, etc. of the special figures 1 and 2 stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In the subcommand management processing, rotation start setting transmission processing, rotation stop setting transmission processing, winning effect setting transmission processing, special winning opening opening setting transmitting processing, special winning opening closing setting transmitting processing, end effect setting transmitting processing, etc. It may be performed. For example, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related lottery processing stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the 1st special figure variation game or the 2nd special figure variation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. The value, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. Further, in the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, the general command special figure pending increase process may be performed in the sub command management process. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S335, a display display setting process is performed. In this display device display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "number of reserved balls, symbol combination", state (in electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing such as setting the output data. In step S337, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S339, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S301 is set in each original register, setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. .

Further, in step S341, a wait process for waiting for sub-control activation is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait processing, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to be activated and become ready for communication, the activation waiting counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1 and the activation waiting counter becomes 0. If so, prepare to send a predetermined command. It should be noted that as the predetermined command, a power-on command or any one or more of commands related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs. Command indicating that the status is a status, a command indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error is occurring, a command indicating that a lower tray full tank error is occurring, and a dispensing ball shortage error is occurring Error, main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), command indicating that a CR unit unconnection error is occurring, firing position command (depending on the state There is a command for notifying the launch position).
<Special map prefetching process>

  FIG. 818 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning opening winning process (step S315) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit determination process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 819 (a) to 8 (c) and 820 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308. 819 (a) to (c) is an example of the look-ahead result storage unit of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 805 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 807, and FIGS. c) is an example of the look-ahead result storage unit of the pachinko machine 100 (structure probability variation machine with number of times) having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 811 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 812.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 819 and 820, in the RAM 308, the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 1 for storing the pre-reading result of special figure 1 and the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 1 are stored. The special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area which stores the number of pre-reading results in FIG. 1 as the special figure 1 pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 2 and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are shown. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  As shown in FIG. 818, in the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S501). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S503, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S503, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is added to the special figure state updating process (step S325) of the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 817). Prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process performed in step 2, the special figure 2 random value storage area is prefetched. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is changed to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the determination processing in the processing. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S505 subsequent to step S503, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S507.

  In step S507, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S509, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to main processing.

  In step S509, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S511, and if it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S515. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S511, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random number value) is updated to the special figure state of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 (step S325). Prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process performed in step 1, prefetching is performed from the special figure 1 random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is drawn in the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the determination processing in the processing. It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S513 following step S511, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the main control unit main process is resumed.

  In step S515, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit main interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described subcommand transmission process, only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or all the prefetch result storage units for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be transmitted. The prefetch result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during the power support, but the special figure 1 is increased. Alternatively, whether or not to pre-read the start information of the special figure 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and effect using the prefetch result. Further, even if the area for storing the starting information and the pre-reading result is not provided for each special figure, the starting information and the pre-reading result of each special figure may be stored in one starting information and pre-reading result storage section. good.
<Prefetch result information>

  819, in the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 805 and the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 807, the prefetch result information in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. 818. Exemplifies a state in which is stored. FIG. 11A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 4A, the prefetching result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 4A, "special figure E" (out of order) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 1", and "special figure E" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 2". "(Off)" is stored, "special drawing D" (small hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing A" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 2B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 7B, the special-reading 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in the figure (b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing d" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in the same figure (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 7C shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 3C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  FIG. 820 is a game board 200 shown in FIG. 811 and a pachinko machine 100 having a stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 812 (structure probability variation machine with a number of times), prefetching in the RAM 308 by executing the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 818. The state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the result storage unit is illustrated. FIG. 820 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 820 (a), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 820 (a), "special drawing C" (delay) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 1", and "special drawing C" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "holding 2". "(Out)" is stored, "special drawing A" (substantially 8R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. “C” (disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 820 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 820 (b), the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 820 (b), "special drawing b" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 820 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 820 (c) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 820 (c), in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the above description, only the stop symbol is pre-determined and only the stop symbol information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit. However, pre-determination of the judgment result, the variation time, etc., and the pre-reading result storage of those information are given. It may be stored in a unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Probability region related setting processing>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 821 to 822, the probability variation area related setting processing (step S321) in the main controller timer interrupt processing will be described. 822 and 822 are flowcharts of the probability variation area related setting processing. The probability variation area refers to a probability variation operation area 808 (V area or V winning area) provided in the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 811 so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  In step S601, the special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag and the solenoid abnormality flag are cleared. The special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag indicates that the number of game balls discharged from the game area 124 (the number of discharged balls) has won the special winning opening (eg, the second attacker 804 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 811). This flag is set (turned on) when the number of balls is greater than the number of balls (number of balls entered). Here, the number of entered balls is detected and counted by the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the second attacker 804. In addition, the discharge number is the ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO1) provided in the V passage switch (probability variation operation area (probability variation area) 808) provided invisible to the player in the second attacker 804, and The ball detection sensor 320 (out switch SO2) provided at the out port 240 detects and counts. A normal state is when the value of the number of balls entered (count switch SW) and the value of the number of balls discharged (the total of the out switch SO1 and the out switch SO2) are equal (when the difference between the two is 0).

  In this example, the case of having one count switch is described as an example, but a plurality of count switches (count switch SW1, count switch SW2 ...) May be provided. Further, in this example, a case where the two out switches SO1 and SO2 are provided will be described as an example, but one out switch SO may be provided.

  The solenoid abnormality flag is a flag that is set (turned on) when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 or the solenoid of the attacker unit 810 performs an abnormal operation.

  In step S603, the probability variation area related passage number (the number obtained by subtracting the number of discharged balls from the number of entered balls) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, the edge of the switch to be determined (for example, either the count switch SW2 or the out switch SO when the second variable winning port 235 (big winning port 2) is valid) is switched on or off. ) Is detected, the process proceeds to step S607 if detected, and to step S611 if not detected.

  In step S607, it is determined whether the switch whose edge has been detected is the count switch (count switch SW2) of the special winning opening 2 in this example, and if it is the count switch SW2, the process proceeds to step S609, and otherwise. In this case, the process proceeds to step S615.

  In step S609, 1 is added to the number of entered balls (IN number) to update, and the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the update result is saved, and the process proceeds to step S613. In step S613, it is determined whether or not there is an undetermined switch among the determination target switches whose edges have been detected. If there is an undetermined switch, the process proceeds to step S605, and if there is no undetermined switch, It proceeds to step S621.

  In step S615, since the switch whose edge has been detected is the out switch, 1 is subtracted from the number of entered balls to update the number, and the process proceeds to step S617. In step S617, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region-related passing number is negative. If not negative, the process proceeds to step S611, and if negative, the process proceeds to step S619. In step S619, the special winning opening discharge excess abnormality flag is set to ON, and the flow proceeds to step S621.

  In step S621, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening winning excess abnormality monitoring timer is 0 (is not an error). If it is 0 (is not an error), the process proceeds to step S623. If not, the process proceeds to step S625. move on.

  In step S623, the special winning opening winning excess abnormality monitoring timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG. 822.

  In step S625, the number of passages related to the probability variation region updated so far is set, and the flow proceeds to step S627. In step S627, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area related passage number is positive. If not positive, the process proceeds to step S633. If positive, the winning excess excess abnormality is detected, and thus the process proceeds to step S629. In step S629, the special winning opening excess winning abnormality flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S633 shown in FIG. 822.

  Referring to FIG. 822, in step S633, the valid period state of the probability variation region is acquired, and the flow proceeds to step S635. In step S635, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation region is set to valid. If it is set to valid, the process proceeds to step S637, and if not, the process ends.

  In step S637, the test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric accessory (special electricity combination 2) related to the second variable winning opening (second attacker) 235 is acquired. The test signal output timer (information output timer) of the special electric wire combination 2 outputs a test signal for a model test of the gaming machine for a predetermined period after the second variable winning a prize mouth (second attacker) 235 is closed (special electric power). It is an information output timer (here, for example, 2 seconds) for outputting the test signal by adding it to the signal indicating that the hand 2 is in operation.

  In step S639, it is determined whether or not the signal output timer of the special electric wire combination 2 is 0 (whether the special electric wire combination 2 is still valid). If it is 0 (if it is still valid), the process proceeds to step S641. If not, the process proceeds to step S643.

  In step S641, the number of opening of the probability variation region and the release timer are cleared, the state of the probability variation region is set to invalid, and the process ends.

  In step S643, it is determined whether the edge of the probability variation area switch has been detected. If detected, the process proceeds to step S645, and if not detected, the process ends.

  In step S645, post-hit setting data (time saving, number of probability changes, etc.) is set according to the hit type information. In this step, the status is set according to the hit type information (hit symbol (for example, special drawing A, special drawing B, etc.)) shown in FIG. 807 or FIG. 812. For example, the status may be status 0 (no setting), status 1 (100 times / hour), status 2 (50 times / hour), status 3 (100 times probability change), status 4 (50 times probability change), etc. When passing, the status 4 corresponding to the probability change 50 times is set according to the winning symbol.

  In step S647, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the flow advances to step S649. In step S649, a short open passage flag is set according to the hit type information, and the process ends. The short-open passage flag is a flag for notifying a clerk of the passage of a game ball, for example, when the game ball has a pattern in which it is difficult for the player to win a prize, and when a prize is won.

In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 805, for example, a count switch SW for detecting the number of balls entered into the first variable winning port 234 and a second variable winning port 235, and an out switch SO for detecting the number of ejected balls are provided. One is provided for each and there is no probability variation region. As described above, in the case of a model which does not have a probability variation area, the processing relating to the probability variation area (the probability variation area related setting processing (FIGS. 821 and 822) and the probability variation area control processing (FIG. 824) are unnecessary. A process for detecting the special winning opening discharge excess error and the special winning opening prize excess error is separately required.As an example of the processing for detecting the special winning opening discharge excess error and the special winning opening prize excess error, a series of steps shown in FIG. In the process, the process may be terminated after step S623, and may be terminated after step S629 (the process after step S623 shown in FIG. 822 is not executed). As described above, the "probability variation-related passage number" is the number obtained by subtracting the number of discharges (the value of the out switch SO) from the number of balls entered (the value of the count switch SW). Household. In each process and subsequent figures 814, processing related solenoid (step) becomes unnecessary.
<Special map status update processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 823, the special figure state update process (step S325) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 will be described. FIG. 823 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S701, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and the flow advances to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is the "variation waiting state", and if it is the "variation waiting state", the process proceeds to step S705, and if not, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S705, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening award excess flag is on. If it is on, the process ends. If not, the process proceeds to step S707. In this way, in the present embodiment, the special winning prize winning excess flag is determined only when the special figure processing state is the “change waiting state”, that is, only after the symbols stop after the big hit ends. Then, if the special winning opening award excess abnormality flag is ON in step S705, the subsequent processing is interrupted.

  In step S707, the special figure processing state before the execution of the process corresponding to the special figure processing state is stored in the buffer, and the process proceeds to step S709.

  In the next step S709, a process corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, a special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a), a symbol variation process shown in FIG. 828, and a special figure shown in FIG. 829, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight process, hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 830, special electric power combination operation process shown in FIG. 832, special electric power combination remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 835, special electric power operation end process shown in FIG. One of the end display wait processing is executed.

  In the next step S711, the probability variation region control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S713. The probability variation area control processing will be described later. In step S713, the special figure high probability status (probability variation state) and the special figure variation time reduction status when the symbol is stopped (state of special figure variation game (in the present embodiment, normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time saving game state and The special figure status is set according to the status) indicating any of the latent probability variation game states).

  In step S715, the prize winning status is set to ON. In this step, the easy winning a prize status is set according to the open extension status, the universal figure fluctuation time reduction status, and the universal figure high probability status. In step S717, the special figure processing state before and after the process corresponding to the special figure processing state is compared, and in the next step S719, the state change of the special figure processing state (value indicated by the special figure processing state is shown. If there is no change in the special figure processing state (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S719: No), the special figure state update process is executed. When the special figure processing state is changed (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state is changed) (step S719: Yes), the process proceeds to step S721.

  In step S721, an initial value of the special figure-related timer is set, and the process proceeds to step S723. Step S721 is, for example, a timer that is updated every 20 ms (4 ms × “5”) (for example, a symbol variation time timer, a special figure display confirmation timer, a hit start display timer, a special electric wire combination operation delay timer, a special electric wire combination operation interval timer). , Big hit end display timer, etc.), the initial value “5” is reset every time the status of the special figure changes because the opening time of the attacker is indefinite. If all timers are updated every 4 ms, step S721 is unnecessary.

  In step S723, it is determined whether or not the special drawing processing state has been updated to the “variation waiting state” (step S723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S725, and if not (step S723: No), and proceeds to step S727. The special map processing state is managed according to numerical values such as "7" for "hit start display weight state", "3" for "remaining ball detection state", "0" for "variation waiting state", etc. Therefore, it is determined in this step whether or not the numerical value has been changed. The special figure processing state may not be managed corresponding to the numerical value. In step S725, a variation pattern table is set according to the game state and the number of variations, and the process proceeds to step S729.

  In step S727, it is determined whether or not the special drawing processing state is set to the "hit start display wait state", and if it is true (step S727: Yes), the process proceeds to step S729, and if not, ( Step S727: No), and the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S729, a subcommand transmission request is set (in the present embodiment, after setting a game state command transmission request including a special figure and a general figure game state, a launch position including information on whether to right-handed state) After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update processing is terminated. Note that the order of subcommand transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process. The same applies to subcommand transmission requests in other processing flows.
<Probability region control processing>

  Subsequently, the probability variation region control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 824 is a flowchart of the probability variation region control process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 823.

  In step S801, the state (valid or invalid) of the probability variation region is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation region is invalid. If it is invalid, the process proceeds to step S825, and if it is not invalid (if valid), the process proceeds to step S805.

  In step S805, the probability variation region solenoid open / close timer is acquired, and the flow advances to step S807. In step S807, it is determined whether or not the probability variation area solenoid opening / closing timer is in operation. If the probability variation area solenoid opening / closing timer is in operation, the processing ends, and if the probability variation area solenoid opening / closing timer is not in operation, step S809. Proceed to. As an example, when the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening is, for example, opening with an opening time of 500 ms, closing with a closing time of 2000 ms, and opening with an opening time of 27000 ms, the values of the probability variation region solenoid opening / closing timer are 500 ms, 2000 ms, and 27000 ms. The timing of switching from opening to closing and the timing of switching from closing to opening are the non-operating timings of the probability variation region solenoid opening / closing timer.

  In step S809, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the number of positive change operations is acquired, and the process proceeds to step S813. In the above example, the number of positive change operations is 3 (opening for 500 ms, closing for 2000 ms, opening for 27,000 ms). In step S813, it is determined whether or not the number of operations of the probability variation region is a specific number (for example, 3 times). If the specific number of times, the process proceeds to step S825. If not, the process proceeds to step S815.

  In step S815, the probability variation region opening / closing timer is acquired according to the number of times of operation of the probability variation region. For example, in the above example, when the number of operations of the probability variation region is "2", the acquired probability variation region opening / closing timer is 2000 ms, which is the closed state.

  In the next step S817, it is determined whether or not the acquired timer is an opening timer (a timer including opening information, for example, 27000 ms). If it is an opening timer, the process proceeds to step S819, and if not (in the case of a closing timer, ), The process proceeds to step S821. In step S819, the probability variation solenoid signal is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S821.

In step S821, the acquired probability variation area opening / closing timer is set, and the flow advances to step S823. In step S823, 1 is added to the number of probable variation region operations to update the number, and the process ends. In step S825, the probability variation area solenoid signal is set to OFF, and the processing ends.
<Special drawing related lottery processing>

  Next, the special figure-related lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 825 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state updating process of FIG. 823.

  This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process of FIG. 823. Is.

  In step S901 of the special figure related lottery process, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S903, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved sphere number is 0, In the case of (when there is no suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is other than 0 (when there is suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S903: No), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 2.

  In step S905, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S907, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved sphere number is 0. If there is no suspension of the variation game (step S907: Yes), the special figure related lottery process is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1) (step S907: No). , The process proceeds to step S909 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 1.

  In step S909, the value of the special figure 2 holding sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1 when the process related to the special figure 2 is executed, and the value is stored in the RAM 308 when the process related to the special figure 1 is executed. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S911, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process relating to special figure 2 is executed, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the pending figures 2 to 4 of special figure 2 are changed from the pending figures 1 to 1 of special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to No. 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 of Toku-zu 2 and executing the process related to Toku-zu 1, it corresponds to the reservations 2 to 4 of Toku-zu 1 The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage areas corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 in the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, each of the special maps 2 and 1 can store up to four reservations.

  In step S913, special drawing per lottery processing is performed. As will be described later in detail, in this special figure per lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is hit is determined. In step S915, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery processing, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and based on the result of the special symbol per lottery process in step S913 and the random number value, the second special symbol The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is selected by lottery.

  827 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, FIG. 827 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the display symbol data of special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery process of step S915, the special symbol per lottery process of step S913 is referred to by referring to the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 827 (a). The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the hit result of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, either one of Toku-zu A and Toku-zu B is selected. C is selected.

  Further, in the case of determining the display symbol data of special figure 2 in the display symbol lottery process of step S915, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 827 (b) is referred to, and the special symbol per lottery process of step S913 is performed. The display symbol data of the special drawing 2 is selected by lot based on the hit / miss result of the special drawing 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, Toku-zu a is selected, and when the hit / fail result of Toku-zu 2 is missing, Toku-b is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, the symbol data displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S335) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817, and the control to display the special symbol display device is performed. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if the symbol is lost, this process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the process of setting the data set to the end of the hit (the data setting process after the end of the hit) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting the gaming state set after the hit according to the symbols determined by the lottery.

Returning to FIG. 825 (a), in step S917, special figure variation time lottery processing is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the success / failure result of special diagram 2 (or special diagram 1) by the special figure per lottery process in step S913 and the numerical range of the random number value are used. After selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.
<Special drawing lottery processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 825 (b), the per-special-drawing lottery process (step S913) will be described. FIG. 825 (b) is a flowchart of the special figure-based lottery processing (step S913) in the special figure-related lottery processing of FIG.

  In step S1001 of the per-special-drawing lottery process, the per-special-drawing lottery is performed with reference to the win / no determination table. In the present embodiment, an example in which the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 use the same win / loss determination table to perform the lottery per special drawing will be described. May be prepared.

  FIG. 826 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 826 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win / loss determination. In the special drawing per lot drawing process of step S1001, when the winning / damaging determination of the special drawing 1 is performed, in the case of the special drawing high probability state, the high probability table for win / loss determination shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 826 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referred win / loss judgment table and the obtained random number value, the win / loss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of the special drawing per lot drawing process of step S1001 to determine whether or not the special drawing 2 is true or false, in the case of the special drawing high probability state, refer to the high probability table for win / loss determination shown in FIG. 826 (a). However, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 826 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value indicated by the referred win / loss determination table, the win / loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Returning to FIG. 825 (b), in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the win / no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S1001 is other than the "big hit" (step S1003). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1005, and if “big hit” (step S1003: No), the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1005, a special drawing small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 826 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S1005, the special hitting determination table shown in FIG. 826 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value shown in the referred small hitting determination table, the special drawing Select the result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 825 (b), in step S1007, the RAM 308 is determined based on the determination result (lottery result) of the special figure per lottery in step S1001 and the determination result (lottery result) of the special figure small hit lottery in step S1005. Information of any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" is set in the hit / miss determination type stored in. In the next step S1009, information indicating "during special figure change" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing (FIG. 823), the symbol changing processing shown in FIG. 828 is called and executed.

  In step S1011, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, in the next step S1013, a subcommand (special figure variation start command) transmission request is set, and in the next step S1015, the special figure is specified. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation is 2 (or special figure 1), the special figure per lottery process is ended.

  In the special figure related lottery process, if there is no small hit, the processes of step S1003 and step S1005 are unnecessary.

  Next, a win / fail judgment table and a symbol determination table for special drawings used in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 826 and 827. The tables shown in FIGS. 826 and 827 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 826 (a) and 826 (b) are used in the success / failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery processing (steps S229, S231) of the main controller timer interrupt processing. An example of the hit / miss determination table is shown. FIG. 826 (a) shows a high probability table for win / loss determination used in the special figure high probability state, and FIG. 826 (b) shows a low probability table for win / loss determination used in the special figure low probability state.

  826 (a) and FIG. 826 (b), the table for determination of wins / losses shows “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “winning / absence determination result” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column. It consists of items. The "high probability" in the "special figure probability" in the first column shown in FIG. 826 (a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning / decision determination is the special figure high probability state. The “winning / absence determination result” in the second row is divided into “big hit” and “off”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 11638 are assigned to “high probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 11639 to 65535 are assigned to the “high probability” and the “off”.

  “Low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 826 (b) indicates that the game state at the time of winning / decision determination is the special figure low probability state. The “winning / absence determination result” in the second row is divided into “big hit” and “off”. “Random number range” in the third column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure winning random number value. Numerical values 10001 to 10162 are assigned to “low probability” and “big hit”. Numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 10163 to 65535 are assigned to “low probability” and “out of bounds”.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in order to determine whether the result of the variation game of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu is to be won (big hit) or to be unwinned (out), obtained special map win The success / failure determination is performed on the random number using the success / failure determination table. For example, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of win / loss shown in FIG. 826 (a) from the ROM 306 when the gaming state at the time of winning / loss determination is a special figure high probability state, and the gaming state at the time of winning / loss determination is special. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for win / loss determination shown in FIG. 826 (b) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to respectively.

  FIG. 826 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery processing (step S1005) of the special drawing per lottery processing shown in FIG. 825 (b), the small hitting determination table shown in FIG. 826 (c) is referred to and shown. Based on the numerical value range and the acquired random number value, the result determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  FIG. 827 shows a symbol determination table of a special symbol used for determining the symbol stopped and displayed after the symbol variation ends. FIG. 827 (a) shows a special figure 1 symbol determination table. FIG. 827 (b) shows a special figure 2 symbol determination table. In FIG. 827 (a), the special figure 1 symbol determination table is configured from the left column by items of “win / miss judgment result”, “stop symbol”, and “random number range”. The “right / wrong judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “outside hit”. “Big hit” indicates a case where the result is “big hit” as a result of the hit / miss judgment using the hit / miss judgment table shown in FIG. 826 (a) or 826 (b), and “outfall” is shown in FIG. 826 (a) or FIG. 826 (b) shows a case where the result of the hit / damage determination using the hit / miss determination table is “missed”.

  The item "stop symbol" in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 827 (a) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Two stop symbol modes of "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" correspond to the hit determination result of "big hit". Further, the stop symbol mode of "special drawing C" corresponds to "off".

  The item “random number range” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 827 (a) indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value of Toku-zu 1. The win / no judgment result is “big hit”, and the stop symbols “special drawing A” are assigned numerical values 0 to 59, and the “special drawing B” are assigned numerical values 60 to 99. Numerical values 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers are assigned to the stop symbol "special drawing C" whose hit / miss determination result is "off."

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the special figure 1 display device 212, "special figure A" or "special figure" when the hit / miss determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is a big hit. Which stop symbol mode of "B" is to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the special symbol 1 symbol determination table for the obtained special symbol 1 random number value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, if the winning / decision result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of order, the special symbol 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of "special figure C". Decide to let.

  In FIG. 827 (b), the special figure 2 symbol determination table is configured from the left column by the items of “win / miss determination result”, “stop symbol”, and “random number range”. The “right / wrong judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit” and “out”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 826 (a) or FIG. 826 (b), and “out” is shown in FIG. 826 (a). ) Or FIG. 826 (b), the result of the hit / miss judgment using the hit / miss judgment table is shown as a result of the judgment of “out”.

  The item "stop symbol" in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 827 (b) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The stop symbol mode of "special drawing a" corresponds to the "big hit" result. In addition, the stop symbol mode of "special drawing b" corresponds to "off".

  The item "random number range" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 827 (b) indicates the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random number value. Regarding the hit / miss determination result of "big hit", numerical values 0 to 99 are assigned to the stop symbol "special drawing a". Numerical values 0 to 99 in the entire range of random numbers are also assigned to the stop symbol "special drawing b" whose hit / miss determination result is "off."

  In this way, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the hit determination result based on the ball into the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit, the special symbol 2 display device 214 "special figure a" stop symbol mode It is decided to stop the display. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, when the winning / decision result based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of order, the special symbol 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of "special figure b". Decide to let.

  For example, in the case of the related lottery process (FIG. 825 (a)) of special figure 2, the main control unit 300 starts from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. The special figure 2 starting information is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., shown in FIG. The determination table is used to determine whether or not to make a big hit, and whether or not to make a big hit. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 827 (b) stored in the ROM 306 to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variable diagram of the special symbol 2 is displayed, Using the special figure variation pattern lottery table (see FIG. 827. 828) and the timer table (see FIG. 829) stored in the ROM 306, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game is determined.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  Further, after the related lottery process (FIG. 825 (a)) of the special diagram 2, the related lottery process (FIG. 825 (a)) of the special diagram 1 is similarly performed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game or the special figure 1 variation game, the special opening variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the start opening is started. It may be forward change. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. Then, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.
<Process during pattern change>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 828, the symbol changing process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 828 is a flowchart of the symbol changing process which is executed in the special figure state updating process. This symbol changing process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “during special figure changing” in step 709 of the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 823. Processing.

  In step S1101 of the symbol changing process, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S1103, the special figure variation time timer set in step S917 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a) is acquired by referring to the address destination calculated in step S1101. It is determined whether or not the timer is 0. As a result of the determination, if the timer for the special figure change time is 0 (when the set special figure change time has elapsed) (step S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1109, and if it is not 0 (the set special figure change time) Has not elapsed) (step S1103: No), the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, it is determined whether it is not the update timing of the special figure display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S1105: Yes), the symbol changing process is ended, and if it is the update timing (step S1105: No). ), And proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol changing process is ended.

  By this update processing of special figure display symbol data, in the case of special figure 1, using the first special figure display device 212, all the seven segments are all lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. "Fluctuation display of special figure 1" is performed, and in the case of special figure 2, using the second special symbol display device 214, all of the seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. The variable display of special figure 2 "is performed.

  In step S1109, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S915 of the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a) is acquired and set, and in the next step S1111, the special figure processing state is set to "special figure display weight". Information indicating "state" is set. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing (FIG. 823), the special figure display confirmation weight processing shown in FIG. 829 is called and executed.

  In step S1113, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S1115, basic signal information (for test) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S1117, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON to output the symbol determination frequency information signal from the external terminal board 349.

In step S1119, a subcommand (special figure variation stop command) transmission request is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set to ON, for example, information indicating the special figure per type, the special figure type, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is stored in the command data. Set. In the next step S1121, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 805, the symbol of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 807 (a), or FIG. 807 (b). ) Any of the symbols of the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 8, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 811, the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 812 (a), or the special figure shown in FIG. 812 (b). 2) is acquired), and based on this symbol type information, after setting the special symbol display confirmation timer indicating the time for which the stop display of the special symbol is maintained, the symbol changing process is ended.
<Special figure display confirmation weight processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 829, the special figure display confirmation wait process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 829 is a flowchart of the special figure display confirmation weight process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special figure display confirmation weight processing is called when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special figure display wait state" in step S709 of the special figure state update processing shown in FIG. 823. This is the process to be executed.

  In step S1201 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S1121 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0 (the special figure display confirmation time If it has not elapsed (step S1201: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended, and if not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1201: No), step S1203. Proceed to.

  In step S1203, the symbol fixed number information signal set in step S1117 of the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 828 is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1205, the special symbol variation time reduction status when the symbol is stopped (( The state of the special figure variation game (in this embodiment, a status indicating any of the normal game state, the probability variation game state and the time saving game state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a saving special figure variation time reduction status described later. .

  In step S1207, the win / no-judgment type set in step S1007 of the special drawing-related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a) is acquired, and in the next step S1209, it is determined whether or not the acquired win / no-judgment type is “big hit”. judge. As a result of this determination, if the win / win determination type is “big hit” (step S1209: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219. If the win / win determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1209: No), goes to step S1211. Proceeding, the time saving frequency of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (the time saving time is subtracted by 1).

  In step S1213, the win / no-judgment type set in step S1007 of the special drawing-related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a) is acquired, and in the next step S1215, whether the acquired win / no-judgment type is “small hit” or not. To judge. As a result of this determination, if the win / loss determination type is "small hit" (step S1215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1219, and if the win / loss determination type is other than "small hit" (step S1215: No), step In step S1217, information indicating the "variation waiting state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 823), the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 825 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1219, basic signal information (for a test) indicating the special drawing validity type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1221, the RAM clear of the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / disapproving type, the number of times the special electric prize is activated, the number of prizes at the special winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235), the operation pattern of the special electric prize, the operating state of the special electric prize, and the total number of winnings per prize, In addition to clearing the flag related to winning anomaly of the special winning opening, the type of the end-of-hit display timer, etc., at the time of a big hit, the easy winning a prize status and the special drawing general status are further cleared.

  In step S1223, the information indicating the "hit start display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 823), the hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 830 is called and executed. In step S1225, the total number of winning prizes is set to 0, and in the next step S1227, a subcommand (hit start command) transmission request is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit start command) is set to on, for example, information indicating the special figure hit classification stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In step S1229, the symbol type information is set, in step S1231, the hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1229 is set, and in step S1233, the symbol type information set in step S1229 is set. After setting the other information signal setting types, the special figure display confirmation weight processing is ended.
<Hit start display weight processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 830, the hit start display weight processing executed in the special figure state update processing shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 830 is a flowchart of the hit start display weight process executed in the special figure state updating process. The hit start display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit start display weight state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 823). It is a process that is performed.

  In step S1301 of the hit start display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1231 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1301: Yes), the hit start display weight process is terminated. If not (if the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1301: No), the process proceeds to step S1303. move on.

In step S1303, after the special electric wheel combination opening process described later is executed, the hit start display weight process is ended.
<Special train release processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 831, the special electric wheel releasing process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process shown in FIG. 830 will be described. FIG. 831 is a flowchart of the special electric role releasing process (step S1303) in the hit start display weight process.

  In step S1401 of the special electric role releasing process, information indicating the "special electric role operating state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 823), the special electric combination operating process shown in FIG. 832 is called and executed.

  In step S1403, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in RAM 308 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operating state of the special electricity combination are cleared, and in the next step S1405, the probability variation area solenoid Clear the edge detection count. In the next step S1407, a transmission request for the subcommand (special electric-role release command) is set. As a result, the first sub control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. Further, when the transmission request flag of the sub-command (special winning opening opening command) is turned on in this step, for example, the number of big hit rounds (number of special electricity combination operations) stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, and the special map hit type Set the information indicating such as.

  As for the main control section winning a prize counter which is cleared in step S1403, only the value of the main control section winning a prize counter which corresponds to the variable winning a prize opening which opens in the 1st variable winning a prize mouth 234 and the 2nd variable winning a prize mouth 235 is cleared. The value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening which is not opened remains maintained. It should be noted that any of the main control unit winning counters may be cleared. In step S1409, the symbol type information set in step S1229 of the special symbol display confirming weight process shown in FIG. 829 is acquired, and in the next step S1411, the special electricity combination operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. To do.

  The special electric power combination operation pattern data table will be described with reference to FIG. 834. For example, as shown in FIGS. 834 (a-1) to 834 (a-3), the special electric combination operation pattern data tables are prepared by the number of types of special drawings that are a big hit and a small hit. Note that FIG. 834 exemplarily shows only part of them. The special electric prize combination operation pattern data table stores special electric prize combination operation data indicating an opening / closing pattern of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 for each round. As shown in FIG. 834 (b-1) to FIG. 834 (b-3), the special electric prize combination operation data is information indicating the open / closed state of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 (opening timer pattern, One or a plurality of pieces of timer pattern data are stored, each of which includes a closing timer pattern) and time information for maintaining an open state or a closed state (special electric opening / closing timer). As a result, it is possible to give various variations to the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 during one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special map A, as shown in FIG. 834 (a-1), in the 1R to 15R, refer to the special electric power combination operation data 1 shown in FIG. 834 (b-1). After the opening timer pattern 2 opens the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) for 29500 ms, the closing timer pattern 3 closes the first variable winning opening 234 to end the operation. To be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are configured to be alternately opened for each round.

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special map C, as shown in FIG. 834 (a-2), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the 6R to 8R eyes, and the 10R eyes to 15R eyes, the above-mentioned special electric combination operation is performed. While the data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed, at the 5th and 9Rth, the special electric prize combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 834 (b-3) is referred to, and the opening and closing of the first variable winning port 234 is performed. The operation is controlled. That is, in the 5th and 9th rounds, the opening timer pattern 1 first opens the first variable winning port 234 for 180 ms, and then the closing timer pattern 1 keeps the first variable winning port 234 closed for 2820 ms. After executing 4 times, the opening timer pattern 3 opens the first variable winning port 234 for 17500 ms, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the first variable winning port 234 to close and end the operation. It

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 834 (a-3), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the operation as described above is performed with reference to the special electric combination operation data 1 described above. On the other hand, in 5R to 15R, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is controlled by referring to the special electric winning combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 834 (b-2). . That is, in the fifth to fifteenth Rs, first, the first variable winning port 234 (second variable winning port 235) is opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the first variable winning port 234 (first The closed state of the 2 variable winning a prize port 235) is maintained for 2820 ms, and thereafter, the closing timer pattern 3 allows the first variable winning a prize port 234 (the second variable winning a prize port 235) to be maintained in the closed state as it is and the operation ends. Controlled by. Before the closing pattern timer 3 is set, another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set.

  In step S1413, the operation number (round number) of the special electric vehicle combination is acquired, and in the next step S1415, the acquired operation number (round number) of the special electric vehicle combination is updated. Subsequently, in step S1417, the special electricity combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations (round times) of the electricity generation combination is read out and the operation pattern of the electricity combination is set. Then, in step S1419, special electric power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1421, the test signal output timer (test signal output timer) is cleared, and the flow proceeds to step S1423. The test signal output timer may become 0 during the round, but when the test signal output timer becomes 0, the test signal may be turned off and the signal may not be output as it is. For example, if the same attacker is opened twice in the test signal output timer, the output signal is turned off even though the attacker is open. In order to prevent such an event, the test signal output timer is set to 0 in step S1421. The test signal output timer performs a process of turning off the test signal when 0 (1 → 0) in the timer update process (step S311) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817. ing. That is, by clearing the test signal output timer in step S1421, the test signal is not turned off in the timer updating process (step S311).

  In step S1423, after clearing the winning detection timer of the special electric power combination, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of special electric power combination operations (round number) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1427. In step S1427, it is determined whether or not it is a round in which the probability variation area is opened, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1429, and if not (when it is not the round in which the probability variation area is released), the process ends.

  In step S1429, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1431 if it is in the open state, and the process ends if it is not. In step S1429, if the probability variation region solenoid is already in the open state at the time when the round is started (at the time when the special electric vehicle opening process is started), it is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1431, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the special electric role release processing is ended. It should be noted that, in the flow of the special electric power combination opening process described above, if there is only one attacker, steps S1421 and S1423 are unnecessary.
<Train service operation>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 832, a special electric wheel combination operation process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 832 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination operating process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special electric wire combination operation process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "special electric wire operation state" in step S709 of the special map state update processing shown in FIG. 823. Processing.

  In step S1501 of the special electric power combination operation processing, the maximum number of wins of the attacker to be released this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1503, the number of prizes of the attacker to be opened this time stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1505, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If it is smaller (number of winnings <maximum number of winnings) (step S1505). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1507, and if not (the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1505: No), the process proceeds to step S1513.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open, that is, the special electric prize combination operation pattern (opening timer pattern or closing timer pattern) being executed, which is set in step S1417 of the special electric prize combination opening process shown in FIG. 831. It is determined whether or not the special electric wire combination opening / closing timer corresponding to is other than 0 (when the special electric wire combination opening / closing timer has not elapsed) (step S1507: Yes), the special electric wire combination operating process is ended. If not (if the special electricity combination opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1507: No), the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, special electric power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1511, a special electric power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired, and the closing timer pattern of the acquired special electric power combination opening / closing timer patterns is referred to. It is determined whether or not it is operating (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special electric wire combination is in operation (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: Yes), the special electric wire operation processing is ended, When the special electric power combination is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1511: No), the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1513, information indicating the "remaining ball detection state" is set in the special figure processing state. Accordingly, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 823), the special electric ball remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 835 is called and executed.

  In step S1515, the special electricity combination operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. The special electricity role operation interval timer is the interval from the last time the attacker closes (the special winning opening solenoid stops driving) in a round until the round ends (until the special electricity role related to the attacker ends the operation). It is a timer for determining (for example, 100 ms, 20 ms, etc.) or a predetermined one timer regardless of the attacker. The timer may be different depending on the attacker opening pattern, may be different depending on the attacker to be opened, or may be different depending on the big hit symbol.

  In step S1517 subsequent to step S1515, a request for transmitting a sub command (a special winning opening closing command) is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the sub-command (the special winning opening closing command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the type of special drawing hit, etc. is set in the command data. .

  In the next step S1519, an information output timer (for example, 2 seconds) of the special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is set, and the flow proceeds to step S1521.

  In step S1521, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric winning combination winning detection timer means that after the special winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235) is closed, the big winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235). ) Is a timer for effectively detecting the remaining game balls. In step S1523, after setting the drive signal (big winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the special winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 and second variable winning opening 235) to OFF, The operation process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are in the easy-to-go state, the maximum winning number of game balls has passed the passing area. In addition, it functions as an example of a variable winning means that changes into a difficult-to-enter state.
<Special power combination control processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 833, the special electric vehicle combination control processing (step S1419 of FIG. 831, step S1509 of FIG. 832) executed in the special electric vehicle combination opening processing (FIG. 831) and the special electric vehicle operation processing (FIG. 832) will be described. To do. FIG. 833 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination control processing executed in the special electric power combination opening processing and the special electric power combination operation processing.

  In step S1601, the special electric power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, of the operation patterns of the special electric combination to be executed, which are set by reading the special electric combination operation data in step S1417 of the special electric combination releasing process (FIG. 831), the operation pattern to be executed this time is selected. Get control data. For example, the operation pattern of the special electric power combination shown in the special electric power combination operation data 1 is set, and at the start of the round, the “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. 834 (b-1). Will be obtained. Further, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 834 (b-1) is completed, the “closing timer indicated by“ (2) ”in FIG. 834 (b-1) is displayed. The control data of "Pattern 3" will be acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1603, opening / closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning port (first variable winning port 234, second variable winning port 235) based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric wire combination. To get. For example, if it is the "opening timer pattern", data (opening information) for opening the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 is acquired, and if it is the "closing timer pattern", the first variable winning pattern is obtained. Data (closing information) for closing the winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is acquired. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is an openable round in the odd rounds, and the second variable winning opening 235 is an openable round in the even rounds.

  Then, in step S1605, the opening / closing timer of the special electric wire combination is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric wire combination acquired in step S1601 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1603. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open / close information is "open information", the open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. Further, when the “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, the closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S1607, information indicating acceptability is set in the special electric prize winning / non-approval state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special electric prize winning / non-winning state is acceptable is set, the game ball is provided with a ball detecting sensor (the count switch SW1 of the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235). It is possible to accept that the player has passed the count switch SW2), and when the information indicating the non-acceptance is set, a ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 or count switch SW2) in which the game ball is provided in the variable winning port Passing through will be invalid. Here, only the count switch corresponding to the open variable winning port of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is set to be acceptable. In step S1609, a special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is set, in step S1611, the number of special electric power combination operations (number of rounds) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1613. In step S1613, it is determined whether or not it is the round in which the probability variation region is to be opened. If the round is to be opened, the process proceeds to step S1615, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1615, the state of the probability variation region is set to valid, and the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. Specifically, only the bits of the special winning opening solenoids corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are cleared, and drive data is set for the bits of the big winning opening solenoid to be driven. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and the drive signal is output in the output management process (step S337) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 described above. In step S1619, after setting the special electric role opening timer or the special electric role closing timer of the special electric role opening and closing timer, the special electric role control processing is ended. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1605 is set.
<Special electric vehicle remaining ball detection processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 835, the special battery role remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 835 is a flowchart of the special electricity role remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special electric role remaining ball detection processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "remaining ball detection state" in step S709 of the special figure state update processing (FIG. 823). It is a process that is performed.

  In step S1701 of the special electric role remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special electric role operating interval timer set in step S1515 of the special electric role operating process shown in FIG. 832 is operating. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S1701: Yes), the special electric role remaining ball detection processing is terminated, and if not (when the special electric role operating interval time has elapsed) (step S1701: No). , And proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, the special electric wire combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1705, information indicating the "special electric wire combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update process (FIG. 823), the special electric power combination operation end process shown in FIG. 836 is called and executed. That is, it becomes the state of the interval between rounds.

  In the present embodiment, the period set by the special electric train operation delay timer is the period between rounds. The period set by the special electric winning combination operation delay timer means that when one attacker (variable winning a prize opening 234) is provided, the special electric auditors product (special electric winning combination) related to the variable winning a prize opening 234 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. It is a period from when the special electric train is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round.

  In addition, for example, when there are a first variable winning port 234 and a second variable winning port 235, and both of them open and close alternately in each round, the special electric auditors product (special electricity role 1) related to the first variable winning port 234 is This is a period from the operating state to the non-operating state until the special electric auditors product (special electric vehicle combination 2) related to the second variable winning port 235 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round.

In step S1707, after the special electric power combination information signal (test signal) is cleared, the special electric power remaining ball detection processing is ended. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after the special power combination information signal is cleared.
<Special train combination end processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 836, the special electric wheel combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 836 is a flowchart of the special electric power combination operation ending process executed in the special figure state updating process. This special electric wire combination operation end process is called and executed when the information set in the special map processing state indicates the "special electric wire combination operation end state" in step S709 of the special map state update processing (FIG. 823). It is a process that is performed.

  In step S1801 of the special electric role combination end processing, it is determined whether or not the special electric role operation delay timer set in step S1703 of the special electric role remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 835 is operating. Step S1801: Yes), the special electric wire combination operation end processing is ended. If not (when the special electric wire combination operation delay timer is 0) (step S1801: No), the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the number of special electric power combination operations (the number of rounds) is acquired, and the flow advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the probability variation region is a round to be opened. If the round is to be opened, the process proceeds to step S1807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the opening of the probability variation region solenoid has been detected once. If it has not been detected once, the process proceeds to step S1809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1809, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is set, and the flow proceeds to step S1811.

  In step S1811, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special drawing hit type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1811: Yes), the small hit is dealt with in step S1813. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1823. On the other hand, if the special drawing hit type is not a small hit (step S1811: No), the process proceeds to step S1815, and the special winning opening maximum opening number stored in the RAM 308 is a predetermined number (for example, "8" for 8R, In the case of 16R, "16" or the like) is set. In step S1817, the maximum winning opening maximum opening number is compared with the special electric winning combination opening number, and it is determined whether the special electric winning combination opening number is less than the maximum winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the hit is not finished. . If the hit has not ended (step S1817: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1819 to execute the above-mentioned special electric power combination releasing process (FIG. 831), and ends the special electric power combination operation ending process. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the hit has ended (step S1817: No), the process proceeds to step S1821.

  In step S1821, the hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1823, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1813 or step S1821 is set. In step S1825, information indicating "hit end display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing, the hit end display weight processing shown in FIG. 837 is called and executed. In step S1827, a subcommand (hit end command) transmission request is set. In this step, when the transmission request flag of the subcommand (hit end command) is turned on, for example, information indicating the special figure hit type stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine having the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 805), in the case of a 15-round (15R) big hit, an attacker at 14R (for example, the first When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electricity role operation interval timer elapses after the variable winning port 234) is finally closed (the solenoid for the first variable winning port 234 stops driving), the attacker is affected. The special electric accessory (for example, special electric accessory 1) is not activated and 14R ends. Then, after 14R ends, when a time (for example, 1 s or the like) set by the special-electric-role action delay timer elapses, a special electric accessory (for example, special-electric role) related to the attacker of 15R (for example, the second variable winning port 235). 2) becomes the operating state, the attacker opens (opening / closing operation starts), and 15R starts. Then, at 15R, when the time set by the special electric power combination operation interval timer has elapsed since the attacker (for example, the second variable winning a prize port 235) was last closed, the special electric auditors object (for example, special electric power combination 2) related to the attacker When 15R is not activated and 15R ends, and then the time set by the special electric device operation delay timer elapses, after the time of the hit end display timer set in step S1823 elapses, the next process (see FIG. 837) is performed. The specified electric power combination operation end process) is executed.

  In the case of a 16 round (16R) big hit, for example, at 15R, the attacker (for example, the first variable winning port 234) is finally closed (the solenoid for the first variable winning port 234 stops driving). When the time (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electric auditors product (for example, special electricity combination 1) related to the attacker becomes inoperative and 15R ends. After the end of 15R, when the time (for example, 1 s etc.) set by the special electric prize operation delay timer elapses, the special electric accessory (for example, special electric prize) of the attacker of 16R (for example, the second variable winning port 235) 2) becomes the operating state, the attacker opens (opening / closing operation starts), and 16R starts. Then, in 16R, when the time set by the special electric power combination operation interval timer elapses after the attacker (for example, the second variable winning a prize port 235) is finally closed, the special electric auditors product (for example, special electric power combination 2) related to the attacker When 16R is not activated and 16R is terminated, and then the time set by the special electric device operation delay timer elapses, after the time of the hit end display timer set in step S1823 above, the next process (see FIG. 837) is performed. The specified electric power combination operation end process) is executed.

It should be noted that if there is no small hit, the above-described processing of steps S1811 and S1813 is not executed.
<Batch end display weight processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 837, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process shown in FIG. 823 will be described. FIG. 837 is a flowchart of the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit end display weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "hit end display weight state" in step S709 of the special figure state update process (FIG. 823). It is a process that is performed.

  In step S1901 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1823 of the special electric power combination operation end process shown in FIG. 836 is in operation, and if it is in operation (step S1901 : Yes), the hit end display weight process is ended, and if not (step S1901: No), the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, the symbol type information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, in step S1905 the basic signal information (for test) is cleared, and in step S1907, the special figure processing state is changed to "variation". Information indicating "waiting state" is set. As a result, in step S709 of the next special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 825 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1909 to step S1913, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the total winning number per winning are respectively cleared. In step S1915, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1917, it is determined whether or not the small hit is finished. When the small hit is finished (step S1917: Yes), the hit end display weight process is executed. If it ends and ends in a case other than the small hit (ends in the big hit) (step S1917: No), the process proceeds to step S1919.

  In step S1919, the setting data (probability change, shortening time, hidden probability change) after the end of winning is acquired, and in step S1921, the data (probability change status (special figure probability state status, general figure probability state status) according to the setting data after hit completion. , Time saving (Number of fluctuations for shortening of special figure fluctuation time, Number of fluctuations for fluctuation time correction, Number of fluctuations for easy winning state), Time saving status (Status of shortening special figure fluctuation time, Status reduction for general drawing fluctuation status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery After setting the state (information for determining the fluctuation time lottery table, etc.) and clearing the setting data after the end of the hit, the hit end display weight process is ended. The transmission request flag may be turned on.The subcommand in this case is the hit end command. In the present embodiment, it may be a by which) to turn on the transmission request flag in electrically movable device control officers operating end process may be a sub-command indicating that per end effect is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of game control means capable of executing a big hit game.
<Device monitoring process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 838, the device monitoring process (step S329) executed in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 will be described. FIG. 838 is a flowchart of the device monitoring process.

  First, in step S2001, a special winning opening winning excess error flag is acquired and set as error information, and the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the probability variation area solenoid abnormality flag is acquired and set as error information.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether a shock is detected while the state of the probability variation region is valid. If a shock is detected, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2007, the impact abnormality flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2009, the impact abnormality flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In this way, even if a shock is detected during pattern change, it is not output as an error (clears the shock abnormal flag), but outputs an error when a shock is detected only when the probability variation area is valid (set the shock abnormal flag). To do.

  In step S2010, the impact abnormality flag is acquired and the impact abnormality error information is set to "this time error information". In the next step S2011, the magnetic detection abnormality flag is obtained and the magnetic detection error information is set to "this time error information". In the next step S2012, the magnetic field detection abnormality flag is acquired and the magnetic field detection error information is set to "current error information". In the next step S2013, other error flags are acquired and other error information is set. The “current error information” is set and the process proceeds to step S2014.

  In step S2014, it is determined whether the error command transmission timer is 0 (at the transmission cycle timing). If it is 0 (at the transmission cycle timing), the process proceeds to step S2015, otherwise (transmission is performed). If the cycle timing has not come), the process proceeds to step S2017.

  In step S2015, the "error information" is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S2016. Here, the "current error information" set in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) in the "error information" during a period of one transmission cycle (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). (Step S2018 to be described later), and in this step, all “current error information” stored in “error information” are initialized (cleared).

  In step S2016, an initial value is set in the error command transmission timer. As an example, when the transmission cycle is 100 ms and the main controller timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, “25 (= 100/4)” is set as the initial value. In step S2017, the error information for the security signal is set to "current error information", and the process proceeds to step S2018.

  In step S2018, the "current error information" is set to "error information". In step S2018, error information corresponding to the error information detected in steps S2010 to S2013 is accumulated (accumulated) for one cycle of the transmission cycle (for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts)). Specifically, the "current error information" set in steps S2010 to S2013 includes "0" when no error is detected (when the error is canceled) and "1" when an error is detected. Are set (updated) at any time, and in step S2018, the logical sum of these “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information”.

  In step S2019, it is determined whether or not the magnetic detection abnormality flag is ON (is set). If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2021, and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2021, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

  In step S2023, it is determined whether or not it is the transmission timing of the error command. If the transmission timing is the transmission timing, the process proceeds to step S2025, and if it is not the transmission timing, the process ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the magnetic detection error is output without determining the transmission timing of the error command, but the magnetic detection error is output at each transmission timing of the error command except the magnetic detection error.

  In step S2025, it is determined whether or not the previously stored “error information” and the “error information” set in step S2018 this time match. If they match, the process ends, and if they do not match, step S2027. Proceed to. In step S2027, the current “error information” is stored in the previous “error information” buffer, and the flow advances to step S2029. In step S2029, a subcommand transmission request is set, and the process ends.

  In the process flow described above, the logical sum of “current error information” and “error information” is set (updated) as “error information” in step S2018, so an error is detected in any of steps S2010 to S2013. If each error is canceled after that, the "current error information" of each error is updated from "1" to "0" at any time, but once "1" is set in the "error information". After that, even if the error is released, "1" remains. In this case, if the subcommand (error command) is sent regardless of the error command transmission timing (in the case of a magnetic detection error, etc.), the error cancellation subcommand is sent, but the subcommand is sent at each transmission cycle timing. When transmitting (error command) (such as impact abnormality error), the error cancellation subcommand is not transmitted.

Therefore, in step S2014, when it is the timing of the transmission cycle (when the determination result is “Yes”), the “error information” is initialized in step S2015, and the error is canceled at the timing of the transmission cycle. In case of failure, the subcommand for releasing the error is transmitted.
<External output signal management processing>

  Next, the external output signal management process (step S331) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 will be described using FIG. 839. FIG. 839 is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal management processing.

  In the external output signal management processing, external terminal board signals 1 to 12 (see FIG. 840; details will be described later) are set and output processing is performed. The external terminal board signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 is transmitted to an external device (for example, a hall computer) via a data display device (not shown), and is collected and managed by the external device.

  In step S2101, security information signal output setting processing is performed. In this security information signal output setting processing, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is output when the power is turned on or when a fraudulent act (for example, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error, a deca-ball error) is detected. Make settings for output.

  For example, when a radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is occurring (that is, when the radio wave (magnetic field) detection error is detected and the error flag is set in the device monitoring process of step S2012 of FIG. 838), FIG. This step is executed in the external output signal management processing of step S331 each time the main controller timer interrupt processing shown is executed, and the external terminal board signal 10 ( The security information signal) is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the magnetic detection error is occurring (that is, when the magnetic detection error is detected and the error flag is set in the device monitoring process of step S2011 of FIG. 838), the magnetic field detection error immediately after the detection is performed. In the main controller timer interrupt process (FIG. 817), this step is executed in the external output signal management process of step S331, and the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error is detected is output. In the next main controller timer interrupt process, the determination in step S309 is Yes, and the processes of steps S311 to S337 are skipped. That is, when the magnetic detection error is occurring, the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) indicating that the magnetic detection error is detected continues to be output until, for example, the power is cut off.

  In the next step S2103, a symbol determination frequency information signal output setting process is performed. In this symbol determination frequency information signal output setting process, when the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 3 (symbol determination frequency information signal) is performed.

  In the next step S2105, out-ball information signal output setting processing is performed. In this out-ball information signal output setting process, when the total number of passages to the out port 240 is 10 or more, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 11 (out-ball information signal) is performed. In the next step S2107, a firing position setting process is performed. In this launch position setting process, it is determined whether or not electric support is being performed, or whether or not the player is in the right-handed state, and in either case, it is in the right-handed state (otherwise, left-handed state). The information to be shown is set, and processing for transmitting the information to the test firing test signal and the command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed.

  In the next step S2109, test firing test signal setting processing is performed. In this test-firing test setting process, the signals to be output to the equipment for the test engine (the big hit signal, the accessory continuous operation signal, etc.) are set.

  In the next step S2111, a big hit information signal output setting process is performed. In this big hit information signal output setting process, big hit information signals (external terminal board signal 4 (big hit 1 information signal), external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal)) Clear (initialize) and set jackpot information signal. In the setting of this big hit information signal, in the case of a big hit by a big hit design, the setting for outputting the external terminal board signal 4 (big hit 1 information signal) is performed, and during the big hit by the big hit design, or in the case of time saving , Make settings to output the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit 2 information signal), and output the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit 3 information signal) when the special electric accessory is operating due to the small hit design Settings to do so.

In this step, other information signals are set. The other information signal is, for example, the prize ball information signal (external terminal board signal 1) output by the payout controller 600, the door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2), or the other information signal (external terminal board signal 12). ) Is set. Then, in step S2113, an external output signal setting process is performed, and the external terminal board signal set in the processing up to this point is output to the outside via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 806). , The external output signal management processing is ended.
<Signal signal for external terminal board>

  Next, an external terminal board signal output from the pachinko machine 100 to the outside via the external terminal board will be described with reference to FIG. 840. FIG. 840 is a diagram showing signal numbers, signal names, and output conditions of external terminal board signals.

  The external terminal board 349 (see FIG. 806) is a plurality (12 in this example) of input ports (inputs) capable of inputting external terminal board signals output from the main controller 300 and the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100. And a plurality of (12 in this example) output ports (output terminals) capable of outputting external terminal board signals to an external device (for example, a hall computer) of the pachinko machine 100.

  In this example, the external terminal board 349 is a board that relays a signal to an external device, but a control that controls the transmission (output) of the signal to the external apparatus by receiving (input) the external terminal board signal. It may be a means. The input port (input terminal) and the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 may be input / output ports (input / output terminals).

  The pachinko machine 100 can output 12 types of external terminal board signals, which are numbered 1 to 12, through the external terminal board 349. For example, the external terminal board signal 1 is a signal output by the payout controller 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the payout of 10 gaming balls is detected during a prize ball. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. The external terminal board signal 2 is a signal output by the payout controller 600, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device.

  On the other hand, the external terminal board signals 3 to 11 are signals output by the main control unit 300, and are input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 when the output conditions shown in FIG. Output is made from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. For example, the external terminal board signal 3 is output when the variation of the special figure is stopped, and the external terminal board signal 4 is output when the big hit by the big hit symbol is in progress. Further, the external terminal number 10 is a security information signal, and is output when the power is turned on or when a fraudulent activity is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the wide range magnetic sensor 700). Other external terminal board signals are as shown in the figure.

  Further, the external terminal board signal 12 is a signal that the main control unit 300 outputs as necessary, and when conditions other than the above (other conditions) are satisfied, information other than the above is input to the external terminal board 349. It is input to the port (input terminal) and output to the outside from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349. Further, the external terminal board signal 12 may be the same signal as any of the external terminal numbers 3 to 11 (same output condition).

  <Error notification / Error detectable by main controller>

  Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 841 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example are a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. The rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, special winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening excess winning error, shock abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error, etc. can be mentioned.

  The magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and then the power is turned on again. This is an error that will be returned if you do. For switch (sensor) disconnection error, when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on), one of the special Fig. 1, 2 start port, universal start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). It occurs when the state of (1) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected device (Special Fig. 1/2 start port, general figure start port, attacker) is connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) This error is returned when it is detected that The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a large ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 805) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 805) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening. Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the special winning opening (for example, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 805) is an abnormal value.

  The special winning opening discharge excess error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

  The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the recovery processing of the special winning opening winning excess error, the probability variation area related passage number is set to zero.

  The impact abnormality error is when the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the valid period of the probability variation area (specific area) This error occurs when it continues for a time (for example, 12 ms), and is returned when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from during the probability variation region valid period to outside the probability variation region valid period.

  The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has not performed an operation of changing from OFF to ON or an operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the probability variation period valid period. This error is returned when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 841 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (the game cannot be played). Less often, other errors may be top-priority errors. The details of the error occurrence condition, the recovery condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. In addition, "when the winning end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

  <Error that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>

  Next, an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 842. FIG. 842 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  As the errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, plate full tank error), the number of payout insufficient error, the number of payout amount switch error, the illegal payout error, the excessive payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame opening error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc. (not shown).

  The conditions for occurrence of each error, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 842 (a). It should be noted that "stop." Described in the item "stop firing" in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

FIG. 842 (b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error occurs, and the unlocked state occurs when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are released. It is an error.
<Error notification / other examples>

  Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error is other error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to disconnection or disconnection of connector of device controlled by main control unit), shock abnormality error, The payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, ..., The door opening error, the upper plate full error) may be errors having a higher priority, but may have the same priority.

If a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error and a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occur at the same time, if the output condition is met first by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, the operation for magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, the notification by the decorative pattern display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is all devices that perform notification from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error (decorative pattern display device). 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, speaker 120, etc.) may be configured to switch (overwrite data), such that only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) are overwritten and others One or more of the devices may continue to notify the user of the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.
<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>

  Next, a specific example of a notification mode of error notification will be described using FIG. 843. FIG. 843 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). And the like, and (4) warning regarding sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error relating to payout>

  First, the error related to payout will be described. As the “error relating to payout (payout control unit 600)” in this example, a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a plate full tank error), a glass frame opening error, a payout amount insufficient error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, The payout quantity switch error, the main control communication error, the CR unit non-connection error, the CR unit communication error, and the door opening error are listed.

  In this example, when a lower tray full tank error occurs, the number “2” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Notifying by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display of a character indicating that the lower tray full tank error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, the speaker 120) is used for notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a lower tray full tank error has occurred is output). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (plate full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. .

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display in this example indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred).

  When a door opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). While displaying, the first light emitting means gives notification, and the second light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) gives notification (in this example, decorative LED (frame). (Flashing of a lamp or a panel lamp), a notification by a display unit (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output unit (in this example, The speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred).

  Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and a part of the notification mode of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, notification by the display means) is made different. The other notifications may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  When a payout amount shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed, the third light emitting means (in this example, LED for payout illumination) notifies (lights up the LED for payout illumination in this example). It should be noted that the notification mode of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 843.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error regarding power supply>

  Next, an error regarding the power supply will be described. The “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example includes blown fuse 1, blown fuse 2, and blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error related to the power source occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 843.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error relating to main control, etc.>

  Next, an error relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error relating to the main control (main control unit 300), etc.” in this example is a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, a shock abnormality. Examples of the error include an error, a prize ratio abnormality error, a special winning opening winning excess error, a special winning opening discharging excess error, and a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening abnormal error).

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp). Blinking), display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (in this example). In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred).

  Further, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Blinking of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

  In addition, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of a character indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) A notification (in this example, sound effect sound indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred) is performed. When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

  Further, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp). (Flashing of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a special winning opening excess error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (this example). Then, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

  Further, when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notification (light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) blinks (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) blinks) and display means ( In this example, the notification by the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, the display of the character indicating that the special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred) and the notification by the sound output means (in this example, the speaker 120) (this example) Then, a sound effect indicating that a special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred))) may be performed.

  Further, when a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that a solenoid error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book) In the example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

  The error regarding the main control and the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display indicating that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred is output). It should be noted that other notification modes of error notification regarding the main control, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 843.

  <Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error relating to sub-control>

  Next, an error relating to sub control will be described. The “error relating to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)” in this example includes a shock warning and a hit warning. In this example, when a shock warning is issued, the display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) gives a notification (in this example, a character indicating that a shock warning has been issued) is issued. Will not be notified.

  In addition, when the hitting warning is issued, the display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) gives a notification (in this example, a character indicating that the hitting warning has been issued) and a sound output means ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect is generated to indicate that a hitting warning has occurred), but the light emitting means does not give a notification.

  <Example of timing chart and effect display of signals related to magnetic field (radio wave) error>

  Next, an example of a timing chart and effect display of signals related to an error in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, FIG. 844 relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) relating to the main control unit 300, etc., and relates to the transmission cycle T, the first error (magnetic field detection error) flag, the security information signal, and the first sub-command. 6 is an example of a timing chart of notification of a first error (magnetic field detection error) in the control unit 400. As described above, the security information signal is a signal that is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349 and output from the output port (external terminal number 10) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device. Therefore, it is a signal output when the power is turned on or when an illegal act is detected (for example, when the main control unit 300 receives a magnetic detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor).

  In this example, a case where the device command transmission timer (transmission cycle T) is set and then the cycle is started in the first time of the first device monitoring processing after power-on shown in FIG. 838 is shown. Note that the timing of starting the cycle may be other timing, for example, it may be started from the first timer updating process after the power is turned on, and the next timer interrupt after the sub-control activation wait wait process is completed. It may be started from the start of the process. Further, the cycle may start in the middle of the sub-control activation wait wait process (step S341) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817. For example, in the sub-control activation wait wait process, the first sub-control unit In order to wait for 400 to start up and become ready for communication, the start waiting counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1, and when this start waiting counter becomes 0, preparation is made to send a predetermined command. As an example here, one may be subtracted from the activation waiting counter of the sub-control in the first main controller timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. Further, it may be started from the first subcommand management process after the power is turned on. In addition, one cycle of the transmission cycle T is, for example, 100 ms (25 interrupts).

  In the figure, timings a, c, e, and g are the timings of ending / starting the transmission cycle T of the subcommand in the main controller 300, respectively. First, when the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic field detection error (first error) at a timing in the middle of the first transmission cycle T shown in the figure, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on at the timing b. When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, the transmission request (flag) of the error detection subcommand is set in the device monitoring process (step S329) of the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817 (the device shown in FIG. 838). In step S2029) of the monitoring process, the subcommand of the magnetic field detection error is set in the transmission buffer in the subcommand management process (step S333) of the main controller timer interrupt process, and the subcommand is transmitted to the first subcontrol unit 400. Note that there is a time lag from the detection of each error detection switch (various sensors 320) to the determination of an error in the main control unit 300.

  In this way, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on within the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error is detected (within the same interrupt process).

  Then, at the timing d of the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) after the passage of the timing a, the error notification by the first sub control unit 400 is started. The error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is executed at any time in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 that is performed after the interrupt process in which the magnetic field detection error flag is set is completed. The time lag until the main control unit 300 transmits an error command to the first sub-control unit 400 and the display / output on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 after the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the command. There is a time lag up to.

  Timing f is the timing when the magnetic field detection error is turned off. Note that there is a time lag until the main control unit 300 determines that the error has been cleared. Timing h is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error cancel command.

  When the magnetic field detection error is turned off at the timing f, an error cancellation subcommand (error cancellation command) is set in the transmission buffer in the subcommand management processing (step S333) of the main controller timer interrupt processing, and the first sub It is transmitted to the control unit 400. In this way, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error cancellation command in the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) subsequent to the transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) in which the magnetic field detection error is turned off.

  Timing i is the timing when the security information signal is turned off. The security information signal turns off after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) after the magnetic field detection error flag turns off at the timing f. The security information signal may be turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of output (timing b). Further, the security information signal may be turned off within the same interrupt in which the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off.

  Timing j is the timing at which the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 ends. The error notification of the magnetic field detection ends after a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f). Note that the magnetic field detection is not limited to this, except for the time lag until the error cancellation command of the magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 and the processing time lag in the first sub control unit 400. When the error is canceled (timing f), the error notification may be ended immediately. Further, the end timing of the error notification may be different depending on the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the like, or may be the same.

  FIG. 845 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of effect display for notifying a magnetic field detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 844.

  The timing shown in FIG. 1 (1) is a state in which the variation game of the special figure (for example, special figure 1) is stopped. The symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, and the stopped symbol is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up three LEDs to notify that the special figure 1 is held three times. The numbers of the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding lamp 216 are both 0, which indicates that the numbers of the special figure 2 and the general figure are 0. Further, the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082, which indicate that the special figure variation game is in progress (during the variation of the special figure), are both extinguishing the LED. Further, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed, and is displayed at the lower right of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the reduced decorative symbol display area 208h, the same decorative symbols as those in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7") are stopped and displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold icons PI1, PI2, and PI3 of special figure 1 are displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 2B, one hold of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the special figure variation game using the special figure display device (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212) by the main control unit 300 is started. It is in a state of being. Further, in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the fourth symbol display means 2081 and 2082 that suggests that the special symbol variation game is in progress (during the variation of the special symbol) (in this example, the variation of the special symbol symbol 1). The fourth symbol display means 2081 for special figure 1 which indicates that the game is being played (during fluctuation of special figure 1) has started blinking the LED). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol still, but in the reduced display area 208h, the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

  At the timings shown in (3) to (4) of the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the front of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the display of the character (lord) and "Echigoya Land?") Has started to be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (5) is the timing (timing b in FIG. 844) when the magnetic field detection error is detected in the main control unit 300 and the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (lord) and "Echigoya Land" Is displayed continuously.

  The timing shown in (6) of the figure is a state in which error notification is started by the first sub-control unit 400 during the next transmission cycle T (interrupt processing) when a magnetic field detection error is detected ((timing d in FIG. 844). At this timing, an error display E1 (display of the character "radio wave detected" here) is displayed on the foreground of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify a magnetic detection error. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the character (lord) and "Echigoya Land" Is displayed continuously.

  At the timing shown in (7) of the figure, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously being performed by the first sub-control unit 400. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (lord)) Is running continuously.

  At the timing shown in (8) of the figure, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but the magnetic field detection error is turned off (timing f in FIG. 844). is there. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game in the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (here, the guide display by the character (lord)) Is running continuously.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (9) is, for example, in a state where the hold is further exhausted and the next variation game is being performed, immediately before the magnetic field detection error notification by the first sub control unit 400 is completed (timing j in FIG. 844). Just before) timing. At this timing, the error notification (error display E1) is continuously performed by the first sub control unit 400, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game. The effect display corresponding to the state (here, the display of the character (princess)) is being executed.

  The timing shown in (10) of the figure is the timing (after the timing j in FIG. 844) when the error notification (error display E1) by the first sub-control unit 400 ends. This timing is after a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation of the magnetic field detection error (timing f in FIG. 844), and the error display E1 is not displayed. Even at this timing, the special figure 1 variation game on the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display corresponding to the game state (display of the character (princess) here) Is continuing.

  FIG. 846 is another example of the timing chart shown in FIG. 844, FIG. 846 (a) is an example of the timing chart when the error is canceled in the middle of the transmission cycle T, and FIG. 846 (b) is the magnetic detection. 6 is an example of a timing chart in the case where an error and an error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like other than the error occur in duplicate.

  First, with reference to FIG. 846 (a), when the main control unit 300 detects a magnetic field detection error at a timing midway in a certain transmission cycle T, the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are detected at timing b in the next transmission cycle T. Turns on. In this example, the magnetic field detection error is turned off at the timing f within the same transmission cycle T when the magnetic field detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on.

  As described above, when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on and off within the same (one) transmission cycle T, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at the timing c when the next transmission cycle T is reached. Based on this, the command transmission preparation (command transmission preparation for the error notification of the magnetic detection error) is performed, and the error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is started at the timing d within the transmission cycle T. Then, at the timing g when the next transmission cycle T is reached, command transmission preparation (command transmission preparation for releasing the error of the magnetic detection error) is performed based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned off. At timing h, the error notification by the first sub control unit 400 ends.

  If the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON to OFF to ON in the same transmission cycle T, when the next transmission cycle T is reached, command transmission preparation (magnetic Prepares command transmission for error notification of detection error, but prepares command transmission based on the fact that the magnetic field detection error flag is turned off even when the next transmission cycle T is reached (preparation of command transmission for error cancellation of magnetic detection error). ) Is not performed and it is assumed that the magnetic field detection error flag remains on.

  Further, in the same transmission cycle T, when the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON → OFF → ON → OFF, the same processing as in the case of FIG.

  If the magnetic field detection error flag changes from ON to OFF to ON within the same transmission cycle T, a command is issued based on the ON / OFF status of the magnetic field detection error flag as in the case of FIG. You may prepare for transmission.

  Referring to FIG. 846 (b), a magnetic detection error (first error) and an error relating to the other main control unit 300 and the like (third error, for example, a special winning opening winning excess error, a big winning opening) An example of a timing chart of the first error flag, the first error notification, the third error flag, the third error notification, and the security information signal in the case of a duplicate occurrence of an excess discharge error) .

  At timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, when the error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) of the first error and the security information signal are turned on based on the detection of the first error (magnetic detection error), the next transmission is performed. At timing d of cycle T, the first sub-control unit 400 starts error notification of the first error.

  When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error ends at the timing i after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

  On the other hand, when the error flag of the third error is turned on based on the detection of the third error at a timing k in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the first sub-control unit is turned on at a timing m of the next transmission cycle T. The error notification of the third error by 400 is started.

  When the error flag of the third error is turned off at the timing n, the error notification of the third error is issued at the timing r after a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the third error (timing n). finish.

  In this example, the security information signal is turned on at timing b (timing at which the first error flag is turned on), and remains on until it is turned off at timing q. Since there is only one security information signal, it is not possible to output each error in correspondence with each other (first error and third error). In this way, when an error (first error and third error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like is detected in duplicate, the security information signal is turned on at the timing when the error is first detected and finally released. The error is turned off after a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) has passed from the timing of releasing the error (timing when the error flag is turned off). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the security information signal has a fixed period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500%) from the timing n when the error flag of the error (third error) that is finally released is turned off. Is turned off at the timing q when (included) has elapsed. The security information signal may be turned on at the same time when the error flag of the first error is turned on (timing b), and the security information signal may be turned off after 30 seconds have passed from the time when the security information signal was turned on.

  FIG. 847 is an example of a timing chart in the case where a magnetic detection error and an error related to other payouts (for example, a lower tray full tank error, a glass frame opening error, a payout excess error, etc.) occur in duplicate.

  Referring to FIG. 847, the main control unit in the case where a magnetic detection error (first error) and an error related to other payout (third error, for example, glass frame opening error) occur in duplicate. Transmission cycle T1 of subcommand in 300, first error flag, first error notification, security information signal, front frame door opening sensor 109 (door SW), transmission cycle T2 of payout command in payout control unit 600, third 3 is an example of a timing chart of the error flag (glass opening error flag), the third error notification (door opening error notification), and the door opening information signal.

  Timings a, c, g, l, v, and o are timings for ending / starting the subcommand transmission cycle T1 in the main control unit 300, and timings A, B, k, C, n, D, and E are timings. These are the end / start timings of the payout command transmission cycle T2 in the payout control unit 600, respectively.

  At timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T1, when the error flag (magnetic field detection error flag) of the first error and the security information signal are turned on based on the detection of the first error (magnetic detection error), the next transmission is performed. At timing d of cycle T1, the first sub-control unit 400 starts error notification of the first error.

  When the error flag of the first error is turned off at the timing f, the error notification of the first error ends at the timing i after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation of the first error (timing f). To do.

  On the other hand, if the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame at a timing s in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T2 (door SW open). At the timing u of the next transmission cycle T2, the door opening information signal (external terminal board signal 2) is output (turned on). As described above, the door opening information signal is a signal output by the payout controller 600 when the opening of the inner frame or the front frame door 106 is detected, and is input to the input port (input terminal) of the external terminal board 349. , Is output from the output port (output terminal) of the external terminal board 349 to the external device.

  When the door opening information signal is turned on, the third error flag (door opening error flag) is turned on at the timing k of the next transmission cycle T2. Then, at the timing m of the transmission cycle T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on, the third error notification (door opening error notification) is started. As described above, the third error flag is output at the timing (timing k) of the transmission cycle T2 of the payout command, but the third error notification is the notification of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on. It is turned on at the timing (timing m) of the transmission cycle T1.

  When the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the closing of the front frame door 106 at timing v (door SW closed), the output of the door opening information signal ends (off) at timing w, and the door opening information signal turns off. When the error flag of the third error is turned off at the timing n of the next payout command transmission cycle T2, the error notification of the third error ends at the timing r within the transmission cycle T2.

  Further, in this example, the security information signal is turned on at the timing b (timing at which the first error flag is turned on), and kept on until it is turned off at the timing q. When the door opening error flag is turned on, a door opening information signal is output. Therefore, the security information signal is turned off at the timing q after 30 seconds have passed from the timing f at which the first error flag was turned off (error cancellation).

  Note that since there is only one security information signal, it is not possible to output it in correspondence with each error (the first error and the third error). That is, even when an error related to the main control unit 300 and the like (first error) and an error related to payout (third error) are detected redundantly as in the present example, the security information signal is first detected as an error. Is turned on at the timing when the error is detected, and turned off at the timing when a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) has passed from the timing of the cancellation of the error that is finally canceled (the timing when the error flag is turned off). It may be. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the security information signal has a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, 7500 interrupts) from the timing n when the error flag of the error (third error) that is finally released is turned off. It turns off at the timing q that has elapsed. The security information signal may be turned on at the same time when the error flag of the first error is turned on (timing b), and the security information signal may be turned off after 30 seconds have passed from the time when the security information signal was turned on.

  Further, in the above example, the door opening information signal is output immediately (regardless of the transmission cycle T1, T2) when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects opening of the front frame door 106, and immediately when closing is detected. Although the example in which the output ends (regardless of the transmission cycles T1 and T2) has been described, the door opening information signal (the information signal of the error related to the payout) may be output every transmission cycle T2 of the payout command. .

  FIG. 848 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display for notifying the magnetic field detection error and the door opening error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 847.

  Since the timings shown in (1) to (8) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (845) to (845) of FIG. 845, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in (9) of the figure is the timing when the front frame door opening sensor 109 detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the inner frame, and the door SW is opened. (Timing s in FIG. 847) and FIG. 10 (10) is the timing of the transmission cycle T1 of the next subcommand in which the third error flag is turned on based on the opening of the door SW (timing m in FIG. 847). ), The third error notification (door opening error notification) has started. At this timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the first error notification (error display E1 of the magnetic field detection error) is continuously executed, and at the same time, the third error notification (error display E2 of the door opening error, Here, the word "the door is open") has started execution. As described above, when a plurality of error notifications (error displays E1 and E2) are simultaneously performed, the previously displayed error notification (here, the error display E1 related to the magnetic detection error) is moved upward and is moved downward. The error notification (error display E2 related to the door opening error in this case) that will be notified later is displayed. At least a part of the plurality of error notifications (error displays E1 and E2) may be displayed in an overlapping manner, and in this case, the error display notified later covers at least a part of the previous error display. May be used, or vice versa. Further, in order to prevent the display position of the error display from being moved even if the number of errors to be notified increases, the display position may be displayed differently for each error in advance, or displayed at random. It may be one.

  The timing shown in (11) of the figure is the timing when the third error flag is turned off (timing n in FIG. 847). At this timing, the first error flag is also off, but the first error notification (error display E1) and the third error notification (error display E2) continue.

  The timing shown in (12) of the same figure is the timing (timing r in FIG. 847) at which the third error notification (error display E2) is finished based on the turning off of the third error flag. At this timing, the first error flag is also off, but the first error notification (error display E1) continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 13 (13) is based on that the first error flag is turned off (timing f in FIG. 847), and after a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) has passed from the timing f of error cancellation, This is the timing when the first error notification (error display E1) ends.

  <Example of timing chart and effect display of signals related to magnetic (magnet) error>

  Next, a case where a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main controller 300 and the like occurs will be described. FIG. 849 (a) relates to a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and includes power supply, power-on state (PW_WATCH), transmission cycle T, second error (magnetic detection error). ) A flag, a security information signal, and an example of a timing chart for notifying a second error (magnetic detection error) in the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 7B is a presentation display corresponding to FIG. It is a figure which shows an example in time series.

  With reference to FIG. 3A, timings a, c, and ζ are the end / start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main control unit 300, respectively.

  When the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), the main control unit 300 causes the magnetic (magnet) detection error (second Error) is detected. As a result, the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on at the timing α of the certain transmission cycle T.

  Then, based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned on, an error command of the magnetic detection error is immediately sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, the timing β in the same transmission cycle T). The notification of the magnetic detection error (second error) is transmitted and the execution is started. As described above, in the case of the second error (for example, the magnetic detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, the notification of the second error is immediately started when the error occurs.

  The magnetic detection error is an error that returns (cancels) when the power is turned on again, the power is cut off at a timing immediately before the timing γ, and the main control unit 300 turns off the power (PW_WATCH signal is off). At the detected timing γ, the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off. Then, when the magnetic detection error flag and the security information signal are turned off, an error cancellation command for the magnetic detection error is immediately transmitted (timing δ) to the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the magnetic detection error ends.

  During the occurrence of the magnetic detection error, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817, the determination in step S309 is Yes, and the processes of steps S311 to S337 are skipped. That is, when a magnetic detection error occurs, notification of the magnetic detection error is started immediately, and since the timer update process (step S311) is not executed, the security information signal has a predetermined period ( 30 seconds, 7500 interrupt) is not counted, and output continues until the power is cut off.

  When the main control unit 300 detects the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) at the timing ε, the transmission cycle T restarts from the timing ζ at which the first (first) device management process after the power is turned on again is started. The start timing of the transmission cycle T after the power is turned on may be started from the first main controller timer interrupt process after the power is turned on again, or in the first main control unit main process after the power is turned on again. It may be started from the next interrupt after the interrupt restriction of the main controller timer interrupt process is completed.

  An example of the effect display for notifying a magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The timing shown in (1) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (845) of FIG. 845, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in (2) of the figure, the main control unit 300 determines that the magnetic detection signal changes from OFF to ON in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). Timing when the magnetic (magnet) detection error (second error) is detected and the magnetic detection error flag (second error flag) and the security information signal are turned on based on this (timing α in FIG. 9A) Is.

  When the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, the main control unit 300, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218. And all the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is turned off (the same in the following examples).

  At the timing shown in (3) of the figure, the magnetic detection error (second error) immediately starts to be notified (timing β in (a) of the figure) based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on. It is in a state of being. The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire surface of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters "a magnet has been detected" are displayed.

  The timing shown in (4) of the same figure is the timing after the power is cut off (timing δ in (a) of the same figure), and the timing shown in (5) of the figure is the timing after the power is turned on again ((a) in the same figure). Timing ε), the timing of (6) in the figure is a timing between the timing ε and the timing ζ of (a) of the figure, and (7) to (9) of FIG. The timing is after timing ζ. The timing shown in (7) of the figure is a state in which the magnetic detection error is canceled. With the cancellation of the magnetic detection error, the main control unit 300 was turned off from the timing when the magnetic detection error was detected, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, ordinary The symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218 and the second special symbol holding lamp 220 are all returned to the state before the detection of the magnetic detection error. Further, the fourth symbol display means 2081 (or the fourth symbol display means 2082) starts blinking (same in the following examples).

  With reference to FIG. 850, a case where the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like occur in duplicate will be described.

  FIG. 850 (a) relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and the transmission cycle T and the first error. An example of a timing chart of a (magnetic field detection error) flag, a first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, a second error (magnetic detection error) flag, a second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and a security information signal. FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 7A, timings a and c are the end / start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main controller 300, respectively.

  When the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at a timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. Then, when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at timing α (for example, within the same transmission cycle T) after the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, the error command of the magnetic field detection error is immediately issued (at timing β). 1 The error notification of the magnetic detection error is transmitted to the sub control unit 400 and the execution of the error notification is started. That is, for the magnetic detection error, after the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, notification is started immediately (for example, within the same transmission cycle T) without waiting for the next transmission cycle T, but the magnetic field detection error is the magnetic field detection error. A magnetic field detection error error command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the transmission cycle T (transmission cycle T after timing c) that is next to the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error is turned on To start.

  An example of a magnetic field detection error and an effect display for notifying a magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The timing shown in (1) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (845) of FIG. 845, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in (2) of the same figure is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b in the same figure (a)), and the timing shown in (3) of the figure is that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on. This is the timing (timing α in FIG. 9A).

  At the timing shown in (4) of the figure, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on, so that an error command of the magnetic field detection error is immediately transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the magnetic detection error (second (Error) is a state in which notification is started (timing β in FIG. 9A). The notification of the magnetic detection error is executed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, as an example, the entire surface of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed in gray, and the characters "a magnet has been detected" are displayed.

  In this way, when the magnetic field detection error (first error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like) and the magnetic detection error (second error relating to the main control unit 300 and the like) are detected in duplicate, FIG. Although both the magnetic field detection error flag and the magnetic detection error flag are turned on at the timings 3) and (4), the only error reported is the error notification of the magnetic detection error (error display E2).

  Referring to FIG. 851, another example of the case where a first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and a second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like occur in duplicate. Will be described.

  FIG. 851 (a) relates to the first error (magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) and the second error (magnetic (magnet) detection error) related to the main control unit 300 and the like, and the transmission cycle T and the first error. (Magnetic field detection error) flag, first error (magnetic field detection error) notification, second error (magnetic detection error) flag, second error (magnetic detection error) notification, and other timing charts of security information signals This is an example, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing another example of the effect display corresponding to FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 7A, timings a and c are the end / start timings of the subcommand transmission cycle T in the main controller 300, respectively.

  In this example, when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on at a timing b in the middle of a certain transmission cycle T, the security information signal is turned on at the same time. Then, at the timing d of the transmission cycle T following the transmission cycle T in which the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on, a subcommand for notifying the magnetic field detection error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. The error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) starts.

  Then, the magnetic detection error flag is turned on at timing α after the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started, and the error notification of the magnetic detection error (error display E2) is started at the subsequent timing β. .

  An example of a magnetic field detection error and an effect display for notifying a magnetic detection error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The timing shown in (1) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (845) of FIG. 845, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The timing shown in (2) of the figure is the timing when the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on (timing b in the same figure), and the timing shown in (3) of the figure is that the magnetic field detection error flag is turned on. This is a state where the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started on the basis of the change ((timing d in FIG. 9A)).

  The timing shown in (4) of the figure is the timing at which the magnetic detection error flag is turned on (timing α in (a) of the figure) after the error notification (error display E1) of the magnetic field detection error is started. is there. The magnetic detection error flag is turned on, and at the timing shown in (5) of the figure, the magnetic detection error error notification (error display E2) is started based on the fact that the magnetic detection error flag is turned on ((( It is the timing β) in FIG.

  Thus, when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is started, the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is covered ( The error notification of the magnetic detection error (error display E2) is performed so that the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (5 ′), when the magnetic detection error flag is turned on after the magnetic field detection error error notification (error display E 1) is started, the magnetic field detection error error notification ( The error notification (error display E2) of the magnetic detection error is performed (while the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E1) is also displayed) over the error display E1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 5 (5 ′), at least a part of the error notification (error display E 2) of the magnetic detection error is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the error notification of the magnetic field detection error (error display E 1). Alternatively, both may be made visible to the player.

  <Example of timing chart and effect display of signals, etc. related to the special winning opening prize error>

  Next, a case where an error relating to the main control unit 300 or the like (a big winning opening winning error) occurs will be described. In the following description, the special winning opening prize abnormal error means a big winning entrance winning excess error. The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. 852 to 854 are examples of the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 as shown in FIG. 805, and FIGS. 858 to 852 are the pachinko machines having the game board 200 shown in FIG. It is an example of the probability variation machine 100.

  FIG. 852 is a state where the special figure fluctuates / stops, a state where the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are activated / deactivated, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, for example, in the 15th round of the big hit game. Driving (opening) / stopping (closing) state of the special winning opening solenoid, operating / non-operating state of the special electric auditors (special electric role), ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW) provided in the variable winning opening 234. Is an example of a timing chart of the valid / invalid state, the special winning opening winning excess error flag, the security information signal, and the special winning opening winning excess error notification in the first sub control unit 400.

  In this example, a case where only one big winning opening (attacker, variable winning opening 234) is provided on the game board 200 will be described.

  At timing A, the symbol fluctuation due to the special figure display device (either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped, and, for example, a 15R certainty variation jackpot (for example, “ When the special figure A ”) is stopped and displayed, after the period set by the special figure display confirmation timer has elapsed, at timing B, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Here, the accessory continuous actuating device is a special device that can continuously operate the special electric auditors product (in this example, the variable winning a prize port 234), and the condition device is the operation of the accessory product. It is a device that is required for the continuous operation device to operate, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, or a game ball (when the continuous operation device is in operation, its entrance is opened, or an enlarged big prize. (Excluding those that have won a prize) will operate when a specific area within the prize hole is passed. In the present embodiment, since the timings of starting and ending the operations of both the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are the same, they are shown in the same timing chart.

  That is, the big hit game is started at the timing B. Then, the big hit start effect is performed, and at the timing C when the big hit start effect is finished, the big hit game first round is started, and the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Then, since the variable winning port 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the special winning port solenoid is also driven (opened) from this timing, and the variable winning port 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 has passed through the count switch SW, it can be effectively detected, and it can be treated as having been effectively won in the variable winning port 234. The count switch SW may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the variable winning port 234 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the variable winning a prize port 234, or set special electricity combination operation data (for example, "special electricity set in the first round in the case of a big hit with" special map A ") When the opening timer set by the winning combination operation data 1 ”) has elapsed, at the timing D, the special winning opening solenoid stops driving (closes) and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. It should be noted that the special electric auditors product continues to operate after the variable winning port 234 is closed, until the round is completed, that is, until the period set by the special electric device operation interval timer elapses. . Then, at the timing E when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the first round ends.

  When the first round ends (when the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state), the special electric auditors product operates from the non-operating state again at the timing F after the lapse of the period set by the special electric auditors operating delay timer. The state becomes the state, the second round is started, the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing, and the variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric auditors product is activated. After that, the above-described operation is repeatedly performed until the 14th round, which is one round before the final round, ends.

  In this example, it is assumed that the main control unit 300 detects a special winning opening winning excess error during the 14th round. In the present embodiment, even in this case, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is not turned on while the variable winning opening 234 is open. In the 14th round, it is set in the 14th round in the case where the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls is won in the variable winning port 234, or special electric hand combination operation data that has been set (for example, in the case of a big hit with "special map A"). When the opening timer set by "special electric prize operation data 1") elapses, the special winning opening solenoid stops driving (closes) at timing G, and the variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. Then, at timing H when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the 15th round ends. Then, at this timing H, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on. Further, at the same timing H, the security information signal is turned on, and at timing I, the main control unit 300 transmits an error notification sub-command to the first sub-control unit 400, causing the first sub-control unit 400 to generate a special winning opening winning error. Notification starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the special winning opening winning excess error is detected during the big hit game (while the variable winning opening is open), the big winning opening winning excess error flag is not immediately turned on, At the end of the round, more specifically, at the timing when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer elapses and the special electric auditors product changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (timing H in the figure), The winning a prize excess error flag is set to ON.

  When the 14th round is completed, the 15th round is started at timing J after the lapse of a predetermined period, the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-actuated state to the actuated state again, and the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing to perform the variable winning. The mouth 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric auditors product is activated.

  After that, when the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls into the variable winning a prize port 234 or the opening timer set by the set special electric winning combination operation data elapses, the driving of the special winning a prize solenoid is stopped at the timing K. As a result, the variable winning a prize port 234 is closed. At this time, the special electric prize combination operation interval timer described above is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special electric prize combination winning detection timer related to the variable winning port 234. Then, the special electric auditors product is in the operating state even after the variable winning port 234 is closed, until the round is completed, that is, until the period set by the special electric vehicle operating interval timer elapses.

  At the timing L when the period set by the special electric auditors operation interval timer has elapsed, the 15th round in which the special electric auditors product is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state and the count switch SW is also changed from the valid state to the invalid state is finished. After that, when the period set by the special electric device action delay timer elapses, the big hit end effect is started, and this big hit end effect is performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses.

  At the timing M when the big hit end effect ends, the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device change from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the big hit game ends.

  When the big hit game ends, generally, from the timing Q (timing after the interruption M from the timing M of the big hit game end), the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is started. It However, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved at this timing (because the special winning opening winning excess error flag is in the ON state), and the first winning prize winning excess by the first sub-control unit 400 is exceeded. The error notification continues, and the symbol variation of the special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2) that is being held becomes a standby state.

  Then, at the timing N, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off, and when the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved, at the timing O after the interruption, the special figure (special figure 1 or The pattern fluctuation of (Fig. 2) is started. Then, at timing P, an error cancellation command of the special winning opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and after a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the error cancellation (timing N), The error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game, a big winning opening winning excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error occurs. . And, even if the jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds has ended, if the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred (the big winning opening winning excess error flag is on, the big winning opening winning excess If the error is not resolved), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a pending special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the symbol variation is not started, and the standby state is set. . Then, the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off, and when the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved, the fluctuation of the symbol of the reserved special map (special map 1 or special map 2) is generated at the next interrupt. Be started. The error display E3 continues to be displayed until a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

  FIG. 853 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display that notifies the special winning opening winning excess error in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the timing chart shown in FIG. 852.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 1A, the symbol fluctuation due to the special figure display device (either the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, the same applies hereinafter) is stopped, and, for example, 15R probability variation big hit. The symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in this example, the character “probable variation big hit” is displayed and the big hit game is started (timing B in FIG. 852). Further, the timing shown in (2) of the figure is a state in which the big hit start effect (in this example, the display of the character "Right hit!" For notifying the player that he / she is right hit) is being performed. .

  The timing shown in (3) of the figure is a state in which the big hit start effect is finished and the first round of the big hit game is started (timing C in FIG. 852), and the special electric auditors' product is in the non-operating state and in the operating state. Become. Then, since the variable winning port 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the special winning port solenoid is also driven (opened) from this timing, and the variable winning port 234 is opened. Further, the count switch SW is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at this timing when the special electric auditors product is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. Further, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first round effect of the big hit game is executed.

  The timing shown in (4) of the figure is a state in which the 14th round, which is one round before the final round, has started, and the 14th round effect is being executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in (5) of the figure is a state (timing H of FIG. 852) in which the 14th round has ended (the special electric auditors' product has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state). Further, in this example, the main control unit 300 detects the special winning opening winning excess error in the period from (4) to (5) in the same figure. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, even when the main control unit 300 detects the special winning opening winning excess error while the variable winning opening is open, the special winning opening excess flag is immediately turned on. Instead, at the end of the round, that is, at the timing ((timing H in FIG. 852) shown in FIG. 5 (5), the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6), the main control unit 300 transmits an error notification sub-command to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 notifies the special winning opening winning excess error (in this example, , Is a state in which the error display E3 by the character "big winning mouth winning excess error" has been started (timing I in FIG. 852) The error display E3 is a round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed overlaid (on the front).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (7), the 15th round is started, the special electric accessory changes from the non-operating state to the operating state again, and the special winning opening solenoid is also driven at this timing to open the variable winning opening 234. The timing when the count switch SW changes from the invalid state to the valid state (timing J in FIG. 852). The special winning opening winning excess error has not been eliminated, and the round effect in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error continue to overlap with this.

  (8) is a timing (timing K in FIG. 852) when the driving of the special winning opening solenoid is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state, and (8) in FIG. The period set by is passed, the special electric auditors product is changed from the activated state to the inactivated state, the count switch SW is also changed from the valid state to the invalid state, and the 15th round is finished (timing L in FIG. 852). Even during these periods, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved, and the round presentation in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error are continuously overlapped with this. There is.

  The timing shown in (10) of the same figure is a state in which the 15th round is finished, the period set by the special electricity combination operation delay timer has elapsed, and the big hit end effect is started. In this example, the jackpot end presentation is a display (in this example, "probability variation rush") indicating that the state has transitioned to the probability variation state in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notification of a warning that the prepaid card has been forgotten (this. In the example, the display of characters such as "please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card." Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved, and the error display E3 of the big winning opening winning excess error continues in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 over the big hit end effect. . The big hit end effect is continuously performed until the period set by the hit end display timer elapses. It should be noted that in the jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 10 (10), the right hitting notification (the word "right hitting" and the right arrow) for notifying that the player is in the right hitting state may not be displayed (also in the following examples. The same).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (11) is the timing when the period set by the hit end display timer has elapsed and the big hit end effect has ended. In this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved at this timing (because the special winning opening winning excess error flag is in the ON state), and the big winning opening winning excess error of the first sub-control unit 400 is detected. The notification (error display E3) continues, and the symbol variation of the special figure (Special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is being held is in the standby state (the main control unit 300 is performing the symbol variation control). Absent). Therefore, after the end of the big hit end effect, a demo screen (design demo, maker logo, etc.) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in (12) of the figure is a state (timing M of FIG. 852) in which the bonus continuous operation device and the condition device have changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the jackpot game has ended. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to notify of the big winning opening winning excess error, and the reserved special map (special drawing 1 or special drawing 1 Since the symbol variation of FIG. 2) is in a standby state, a logo (maker logo) screen (or a demo screen or the like) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in (13) of the figure is the timing at which the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off and the big winning opening winning excess error is eliminated (timing N in FIG. 852). Further, the timing shown in (14) of the same figure is a timing after one interruption of the timing when the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off (timing O in FIG. 852), and the reserved special figure (for example, , The special figure 1) is the state where the symbol variation has started. At this timing, since the error release command of the special winning opening winning excess error is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the logo screen and the special winning opening winning excess error error display E3 are continuously displayed. Is continuing. In this example, the logo screen is displayed when the symbol variation is started, but the symbol variation may be configured to be started when the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (15) is the display area (design display area) of the decorative design display device 208 (instead of logo display) with the start of the design variation of the reserved design (eg, design 1). In 208a to 208c), the stop display of the decorative pattern is displayed. In this example, the symbol demonstration displays the same as the stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous big hit symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"). In the present embodiment, when displaying the symbol demo as shown in FIG. 15 (15), instead of the symbol demo, the stop display of the decorative symbol (for example, the symbol combination of the previous big hit (for example, “decoration 7- Decoration 7-decoration 7 ")) may be performed, and this is the same in the following examples.

  In addition, the state of the stop display of the decorative symbol is a state in which the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred and a state in which the error has not occurred (during demonstration and / or symbol stopped) And may be the same or different. For example, the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in which the first error is occurring may be a still image, and the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in which the first error is not occurring may be an animation. When the decorative pattern display is composed of "images such as characters" and "numbers or characters", the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern during the first error is "images such as characters" and "numbers". Alternatively, the state of the stop display of the decorative pattern in the state where the first error is not generated may be configured from “the image of the character or the like”. Here, the “image of a character or the like” or the “image of numbers or characters” may be a moving image or a still image. Further, the state of the stop display of the decorative symbol may be different between the demonstration and the symbol stopped. For example, part or all of the decorative design may be animated during the demonstration, and the decorative design may be displayed as a still image while the design is stopped, and vice versa. Here, the mode of the stop display of the decorative symbol during the first error is the same as that during the symbol stopped, but it may be the same as during the demonstration.

  Further, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the decorative design may be the same as the stop display (the decorative design is stopped).

  Further, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the decorative design may be a display different from the stop display, for example, a display in which the decorative design in the design demonstration is animated. It may be the same as the above, or a decorative pattern display pattern dedicated to the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error).

  In the timing shown in (16) of the figure, an error cancellation command for a special winning opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and a certain period (for example, 33 seconds) from the error cancellation (timing N). ), The error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 is finished (timing P in FIG. 852). In the display area (design display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative design display device 208, the stop display of the decorative design is displayed. Then, after this timing, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, from the timing shown in FIG. 15 (16) or (16), the variable display of the decorative symbol may be started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs during the big hit game, a big winning opening winning excess error is displayed (error display E3) at the end of the round in which the error occurs. . And, even if the jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds has ended, if the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred (the big winning opening winning excess error flag is on, the big winning opening winning excess If the error is not eliminated), the error display E3 is continued, and even if there is a pending special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the symbol variation is waited for. Then, when the big hit end effect is finished while waiting for the next symbol variation, a logo screen, a demo screen, etc. are displayed and the display is stopped as it is. When the special winning opening prize excess error flag is turned off and the big winning opening prize excess error is resolved, the symbol variation of the reserved special symbol (Special symbol 1 or Special symbol 2) is started at the next interrupt. It The error display E3 continues to be displayed until a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) elapses from the error cancellation (timing N).

  In addition, if the design combination of the decorative symbols for the normal jackpot is prepared, the probability variation promotion effect may be performed during the jackpot round even during the period when the jackpot winning excess error flag is on.

  FIG. 854 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect display of FIG. 853. FIGS. 854 (9a) to (16a) are modification examples corresponding to FIGS. 853 (9) to (16), respectively.

  The timing shown in FIG. 854 (9a) is a state in which the 15th round has ended (timing L in FIG. 852), and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) is performed overlapping with the round effect. . Further, FIG. 10A shows a state in which the big hit ending effect has been started, and the big winning opening winning excess error notification (error display E3) is performed in addition to the big hit ending effect. As shown in (10a) of the same figure, in the jackpot end effect, without warning notification of forgetting to take the prepaid card (for example, display of characters such as "please be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card.") Is also good. It should be noted that, in the big hit end production of the first big hit, the warning of the forgetting to take the prepaid card is notified, and in the big hit end production of the second and subsequent big hits, the warning of not forgetting the prepaid card is not given. Good. In addition, even if you do not notify the attention of forgetting to take the prepaid card in the jackpot end production, after the jackpot is over, you may be notified of the warning of forgetting to take the prepaid card. Good. Note that the notification of attention is not limited to forgetting to remove the prepaid card, but may be notification of other attention (for example, notification of how to hit (right hit, left hit, etc.)).

  The timing shown in (11a) of the same figure is a state in which the big hit end effect is finished. As shown in (11) of the same figure, even after the big hit end production, the special winning opening winning excess error is not resolved, and the notification of the big winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues, In the case where the symbol variation of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is being held is in a standby state, a look-ahead notice (in this example, a suggestion of an in-hold condominium in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) , The display of the character (Den) and the display of the character “Oh! Here, in the present embodiment, the "holding-interior resort" refers to the case where there is a big hit in the pre-reading result for the special-drawing variation game currently held as a result of the special-drawing pre-reading process.

  Note that the pre-reading notice may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) and the state in which the error does not occur. Good.

  Further, when the pre-reading notice is displayed up to the change to be the pre-reading target, the pre-reading notice may be given as a still image without performing the pre-reading notice animation. The look-ahead notice in this case may be a notice selected by the look-ahead effect drawing in the high probability state, or may be a notice selected by the look-ahead effect drawing in the low probability state. Here, the high-probability state and the low-probability state correspond to the special drawing status, but even if the special drawing status is the high-probability state, the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is released. The look-ahead effect lottery in the low-probability state may be performed until the variation of the symbol starts.

  The timing shown in (12a) of the figure is a state (timing M of FIG. 852) in which the big hit game has ended. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues, and the reserved special figure ( Since the symbol variation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is in a standby state, the pre-reading notice suggesting the in-reservoir is displayed continuously in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a big prize in the display area (design display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative design display device 208 with the start of the design variation of the reserved special design (eg, special design 1). A symbol demo (in this example, a stop display of the decorative symbol of the previous jackpot symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed behind the notification of the oral winning excess error (error display E3). It is in a state of being forgotten. In this case, as shown in FIG. 15A, the hold icon PI may be displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16A is a state in which the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is completed by the first sub-control unit 400 (timing P in FIG. 852) with the error release of the special winning opening winning excess error. Yes, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example as well, the error display E3 of the special winning opening winning excess error continues to be displayed during the period shown in FIG. 9 (a) to (15a) (the period where the special winning opening winning excess error is not released). There is.

  FIGS. 854 (12b) to (b3-1α) are modified examples after FIG. 853 (12). The timing shown in FIG. 854 (12b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 853 (12), and is a state in which the jackpot game has ended (timing M in FIG. 852).

  FIG. 854 (b1) shows a state following (12b) in FIG. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues, and the reserved special figure ( Since the symbol variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is in a standby state, the logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display is stopped as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 854 (b1), in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, in addition to the logo screen, an effect indicating a simultaneous effect (in this example, a telop image (animation) that says “Hime Live is being held” ( A cut-in image may be displayed), or a countdown display (animation) such as “until simultaneous production for ○ seconds” may be displayed.

  FIG. 854 (b1 ′) is the state following (12b) in FIG. Even at this timing, the special winning opening winning excess error has not been resolved, and the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) by the first sub-control unit 400 continues, and the reserved special figure ( Since the symbol variation of special figure 1 or special figure 2) is in a standby state, a logo screen is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 854 (b1 ′), in addition to the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (in this example, a wipe image (animation) of the character (princess) and a simultaneous effect) is displayed. , A countdown display (animation, etc.) “up to a total production of seconds” may be displayed.

  FIG. 854 (b2-1) is a state following FIG. 12B, and FIG. 854 (b2-2) is a state following FIG. 854 (b2-1). As shown in (b2-1) and (b2-2) of FIG. 854, in addition to the notification of the special winning opening winning error (error display E3) and the logo screen, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the user setting A screen (volume setting screen in this example) may be displayed. Here, a state is shown in which the volume (user setting value) that was "2" in FIG. 854 (b2-1) is changed to "3" in FIG. 854 (b2-2). As shown in both figures, the volume setting (user setting value) can be changed by the user, but the actual setting value remains "5". The actual set value may be changed in accordance with the change of the user set value. Further, in this example, the volume setting screen is shown as an example, but the brightness setting screen may be used. In this example, the volume setting screen is configured so that the volume can be adjusted lower by operating the left key, and can be adjusted higher by operating the right key, and the other keys (up key, down key) can be adjusted. , Chance button, and Enter button), the volume cannot be adjusted. However, on the volume adjustment screen, the left key or the down key can be used to lower the volume, and the right key or the up key can be operated. It may be configured so that adjustment for increasing the volume can be performed.

  FIG. 854 (b3-1) is the state following (12b) in FIG. As shown in FIG. 854 (b3-1), in addition to the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the logo screen (design demo screen) (that is, in the demonstration state), the display area of the design display device 208 Setting icons such as volume setting and brightness setting and menu display may be displayed in

  854 (b3-2), (b3-3) is a state following FIG. 854 (b3-1), the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo screen are displayed and predetermined. After the lapse of time, the pattern demo screen is changed to the anime demo screen (the pattern demo state is changed to the anime demo state) (Fig. 854 (b3-2)), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the animation demo screen is displayed. May be changed to the symbol demo screen (the animation demo state is changed to the symbol demo state) (FIG. 854 (b3-3)). Also in this case, if the special winning opening winning excess error has not been released, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues.

  In addition, FIG. 854 (b3-3 ′) is a state following FIG. 854 (b3-2), and a notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and an animation demo screen are displayed (FIG. 854 (b3)). -2)), after the lapse of a predetermined time, a design demo (stop display of decorative designs) may be performed instead of the anime demo screen (Fig. 854 (b3-3 ')). Also in this case, if the special winning opening winning excess error has not been released, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues. In this example, the setting change icons such as the volume setting and the brightness setting and the menu display (indicating that the actual device customization menu can be displayed) are displayed, but during the power support, the volume setting and the brightness setting are displayed. It is also possible not to display the setting change icon and menu display such as.

  Also, FIG. 854 (b3-1α) is a state following FIG. 854 (b3-1), and when the operating means is operated based on the menu display in the state of FIG. 854 (b3-1), FIG. The actual machine customization menu may be displayed as shown in 1α), or the actual machine customization menu may not be displayed. When the operating means is operated based on the setting change icon such as the volume setting and the brightness setting, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed as shown in FIG. 854 (b2-1). However, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may not be displayed. Further, both the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed by a single operation of the operating means, or only when the corresponding operating means is operated (for example, the volume setting screen). May be configured to display the right key or the left key, the light amount setting screen is the up key or the down key), the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen.

  FIG. 855 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) shown in FIGS. 853 and 854. FIG. 855 (b3-2α) is a state following FIG. 854 (b3-2), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the animation demo screen are displayed, the effect movable body 224 is displayed. May operate. In this case, the effect movable body 224 may move the entire movable range in multiple stages as shown in FIG. Moreover, the effect movable body 224 may move a part of the movable range in multiple stages, or may move the whole or a part of the movable range continuously (smoothly). Further, in this example, the animation demo screen is displayed, but the effect movable body 224 may be operated when the symbol demo screen is displayed.

  FIG. 855 (b3-1β) is a state following FIG. 854 (b3-1), and the chance button 136 is displayed when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration screen are displayed. When operated, an effect (here, an animation in which a character (Hani) appears from one of the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208) by a back button operation may be executed.

  855 (b4-1), (b4-2) is a state following FIG. 854 (12b), when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo screen are displayed, The effect of the ordinary figure (for example, the effect of expecting the long opening of the electric Chu (in this example, the display of the Amida lottery image (FIG. 855 (b4-1)) and the result of its judgment (FIG. 855 (b4-2))) It is possible to go. That is, only the special game variable game that waits in the state where the big winning mouth winning excess error is not released is the special game prize game and the accompanying universal game variable game (decorative symbol display) The decorative pattern variation display by the device 208 or the lamp (LED) may be executed without waiting.

  It should be noted that the general picture effect (for example, the above-mentioned Amida lottery image) is an effect that is performed only in the general figure low accuracy state. It is not displayed in the general figure high accuracy state, but it is also displayed in the general figure high accuracy state. Good.

  It should be noted that the variable game of the universal figure may be performed regardless of whether or not the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred, but the first error (for example, a big winning opening winning excess error) You may choose not to do it inside.

  FIG. 855 (b4-1 ′) is a modified example of FIG. 850 (b4-1), and in the effect (in this example, the display of the Amida lottery image) that expects a long opening of the electric chu, advance notice or prefetch A notice (such as "heat" in this example) may be displayed. It should be noted that in this state, a look-ahead notice regarding the increased hold may be given.

  FIG. 855 (12c) is a modified example of FIG. 853 (12). After the big hit game end effect, the logo screen is not displayed, and the big winning opening winning excess error notification (error display E3) and the big hit game end effect are displayed. The display may be continued. In addition, at this timing (timing M in FIG. 852), the display of the right-hand hit notification may be completed.

  FIGS. 855 (10d) to 855 (12d) are modified examples of FIGS. 853 (10) to (12) corresponding to after the big hit game end effect (timing M in FIG. 852), and the timing after the big hit game end effect. At (timing M in FIG. 852), an effect that allows the user to select the probability variation mode to be started thereafter may be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 855 (10d), in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, an image showing the buttocks mode and the princess mode, and an operation means image BG (which prompts the operation of the operation button (for example, the chance button 136)). In this example, an image simulating the chance button 136) and an elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time (valid period) of the acceptance period of the operation button are displayed, and when the user mode is selected. It is also possible to display an image notifying that the user has entered the control mode ((d1) in the figure) and continue the display ((12d) in the figure). During this period, the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) continues. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12D, it is possible to give a notification of the caution for forgetting to take the prepaid card (in this example, the display of the character "please be careful not to take the prepaid card."), The notification of the attention may not be given.

  FIGS. 855 (15e) to 855 (16e) are modified examples corresponding to FIGS. 853 (15) to 853 (16). After the big winning award winning excess error is released (after the big winning award winning excess error flag is turned off), decoration is started with the start of the pattern change of the reserved special map (for example, special map 1). In the display area of the symbol display device 208 (symbol display areas 208a to 208c), behind the notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3), a symbol demo (in this example, a symbol combination of the previous big hit (for example, " Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") is displayed (stop display of decorative pattern) (FIG. 855 (15e)), and when variable display of the decorative pattern of the variation is started in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, Big winning mouth prize excess notification (error display E3) and right-handed notification over the variable display of the decorative pattern (in this example, the character "right-handed →" may be displayed in large size (Fig. 855 (e1))). This The right-handed notification may be displayed, for example, at the time of the first big jackpot, etc. Then, an error release command of the special winning opening winning excess error is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the error. After a lapse of a fixed period (for example, 33 seconds) from the cancellation (timing N), the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error by the first sub-control unit 400 ends, but the variable display of the decorative symbol and the right-hand hit notification continue. (FIG. 855 (16e)) The right-handing notification may be displayed even when the error of the special winning opening excess winning error is released, but after the error is released, the right-handing notification is not displayed. Good.

  FIG. 856 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect display during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) corresponding to FIGS. 853 (10) to 853 (14). Since FIG. 856 (10f) and FIG. 850 (11f) are the same as FIG. 853 (10) and FIG. 853 (11), respectively, description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 856 (12f) to 856 (14f) are timings corresponding to FIGS. 853 (12) to 853 (14). First, as shown in FIG. 856 (12f), at the timing when the big hit game is finished (timing M in FIG. 852), a notification of a special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and a symbol demonstration (the last big jackpot combination) (For example, the stop display of the decorative pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") may be performed.

  In addition, FIG. 856 (f1-1), (f1-2) is a state following FIG. 856 (12f), and is a special figure that is suspended after the timing (timing M in FIG. 852) when the jackpot game ends. The symbol variation of (for example, special figure 1) may be started. In this case, the symbol demonstration continues, but when the number of holdings increases, the holding icon PI (increase animation of the holding icon) may be displayed. In this case, the increase animation of the hold icon may be the same as or different from the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred and the state in which the error has not occurred. May be.

  Further, when the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred, the hold icon increase animation may not be performed.

  In addition, when the number of holdings in the special map 1 and the special drawing 2 increases at the same time, the increase animation of the holding icon may be performed in parallel at the same time, and the display of the icon corresponding to the holding that is first consumed is started. The display of the hold icon that is later consumed may be started. In the case of a model that preferentially consumes the hold of Toku-zu 2 (or Toku-zu 1) (hereinafter referred to as "priority digester"), if there is a hold corresponding to the Toku-zu that is not preferentially consumed, It may be configured to display only the hold icon of the hold (the hold corresponding to the special figure 2 in the case of the special figure 2 priority digester) corresponding to the special figure that is preferentially consumed during the support. The hold that is not preferentially consumed may be displayed. Also, in the case of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) preferential digester, if there is a hold corresponding to a special figure that is not digested preferentially, priority is given to normal (special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy) during normal operation. The pending icon corresponding to the special map to be digested (pending corresponding to special map 2 in the case of special map 2 priority digester) and special map that is not preferentially digested (in case of special map 2 priority digester, (Holding corresponding to special figure 1) may be displayed, but it may be configured not to display the pending icon of the holding corresponding to the special figure that is preferentially consumed. In addition, regardless of the special map type, if the model is such that the hold is consumed in the winning order (hereinafter referred to as the winning order digester), the hold icons corresponding to all the hold regardless of the special map type are displayed. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the hold icons corresponding to all the hold are not displayed during the power support (probable change and / or time saving).

  The timing shown in FIG. 856 (13f) is the timing (timing N in FIG. 852) at which the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off and the big winning opening winning excess error is resolved. Further, the timing shown in (14) of the same figure is a timing after one interruption of the timing when the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned off (timing O in FIG. 852). At this timing, since the error release command of the special winning opening winning excess error is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol stop display and the big winning opening winning excess error error display continue. E3 continues to display.

  856 (f2) is a state following (12f) in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special map (for example, special diagram 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the pre-reading notice suspension icon PI may be displayed.

  856 (f3-1) and (f3-2) in FIG. 856 are states following (12f) in the same figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the standby animation of the suspension icon (in this example, by the character (Hani)) A standby animation of the hold icon) may be displayed. The hold icon PI in this case may be a normal hold icon or a hold icon that gives a prefetching notice. Further, the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same or different between the state in which the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is occurring and the state in which the error is not occurring. It may be. Further, when the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) is occurring, the standby animation of the hold icon may not be performed (for example, it may be displayed as a still image. ).

  856 (f4) is a state following (12f) in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the pattern variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the reservation is increased, the pattern may be displayed by the light guide plate as a pre-reading notice. The display light emission of the pattern by the light guide plate as shown in this example may be performed during the demo (design demo, animation demonstration) or during the big hit end production. For example, the light guide plate may emit light to display a pattern → not display even when a special winning opening excess error occurs. In addition to the light guide plate, various production lamps may emit light in a pre-reading light emission pattern (demonstration light emission pattern), or when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs, the light is emitted in the error light emitting pattern. You may do it. The brightness of the LED that irradiates the light guide plate with light may be adjusted by the brightness setting by the user.

  856 (f5-1) and (f5-2) in FIG. 856 are states following (12f) in the same figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the suspended special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started and the suspension is increased, the effecting movable body 224 is operated as a pre-reading notice. Good. In this case, an operation (raising operation) of moving a part of the movable range of the effect movable body 224 in multiple stages may be performed, and an operation of moving the entire movable range in multiple stages. It may be one. Further, the movement may be smooth instead of the multi-step operation.

  856 (f6-1) and (f6-2) are states following (12f) in the same figure. As shown in the figure, when the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (for example, special figure 1) is started, the song may be changed. In this case, the music title may be displayed by operating the operation means (operation buttons, keys), and the music title may be deleted after a predetermined time has passed, or the music title may not be deleted (for example, unless the operation means is operated). You may Also, various effect settings (song, effect mode, etc.) may be performed. Also, the background may be changed depending on the setting of the effect mode. It should be noted that, during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error, the music selected by the operation of the operating means may not be output from the speaker 120. Here, the notification of the special winning opening excess error by the speaker 120 may be configured to be continued for 30 seconds after the error is canceled, but it may be configured to continue for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) after the error is started. After a lapse of a second, the notification by the speaker 120 is terminated, and the music selected by the operation of the operation means (not limited to the music selected by the operation of the operation means, background display and various effects (for example, a big hit round etc.) ) Corresponding to ()) may be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but the display by the speaker 120 may be the same. Also, the music may be output at a lower volume than that in the error state. The error notification by the speaker 120 described above is not limited to the special winning opening winning excess error, but may be applicable to other errors for which the speaker 120 notifies.

  FIG. 856 (12f ') is a modification of the timing shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, at the timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 852), when the symbol demonstration is performed, the operation means image BG relating to the effect may be always displayed. At this timing (timing M in FIG. 852) or the like, if the operation button (for example, the chance button 136) cannot be operated, the operation means image BG is displayed in gray and the operation button acceptance period is displayed. The elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG for notifying the elapsed time may be hidden to indicate that the operation button cannot be operated.

  FIG. 857 is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3). First, FIG. 857 (f7-1), (f7-2) is a state following FIG. 856 (12f), in the case where the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration are displayed. Alternatively, the back button effect may be executed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 857 (f7-1), the operation means image BG and the elapsed time notification image (meter display) TG are displayed. By operating the button (operation means, chance button 136), the back button effect (animation in which the character (Hani) appears in this example) may be executed as shown in FIG. 857 (f7-2). .

  In addition, FIG. 857 (f8) is a state following FIG. 856 (12f), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demo are displayed, the special figure being held is held. If, for example, the symbol variation of (Special figure 1) is started and the number of holdings is increased, a look-ahead notice (in this example, the animation of the character “in the extreme heat approaching” moves) is performed by the display (animation). Is also good.

  In addition, FIG. 857 (f9) is a state following FIG. 856 (12f), and when the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error (error display E3) and the symbol demonstration are displayed, the special figure that is held is held. (For example, in the case of special figure 1) When the symbol variation is started and the number of holdings is increased, the pre-reading notice may be combined. For example, as shown in the same figure, a pre-reading notice by display (animation) (in this example, an animation in which the character “intense heat is approaching” moves) and a pre-reading notice by the hold icon may be given.

  Further, FIGS. 857 (11g) to (12g) correspond to FIGS. 853 (11) to 807 (12). The timing shown in FIG. 857 (11g) is a state in which the big hit game has ended (timing M in FIG. 852), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special winning opening is exceeded in excess of the demo screen (logo screen). This is a state in which an error notification (error display E3) is being performed. Further, in this example, in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208, another display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) D) is provided. The liquid crystal display device D includes a frame portion D1 (shown by hatching) that defines the outer shape thereof and a display area D2 inside the frame portion D1, and performs various effects (display) in the display area D2. The liquid crystal display device D may be a movable decoration unit configured to be movable, or may be configured to be immovable.

  FIG. 857 (g-1) is a modified example of the same figure (11g), and one or a related image is displayed using two display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 and another liquid crystal display device D. You may In this case, the notification of the special winning opening winning error (error display E3) may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

  In addition, FIG. 857 (12g) is a state (timing when the big hit game ends (timing M in FIG. 852) following the diagram (g-1) in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another liquid crystal display device D. Another image may be displayed in each of the two display areas. Here, an example is shown in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a symbol demo and the other liquid crystal display device D displays a hold icon. In this case, the notification of the special winning opening winning error (error display E3) may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the liquid crystal display device D, or both.

  The display in each display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 857 (g-1) and the other liquid crystal display device D (the image in which the sliding doors are closed here) is changed from the same figure (11g) to the same figure (12g). This is a display during the transition. As described above, when the display behind the special winning opening winning error (error display E3) is changed (here, from the logo image shown in (11g) in FIG. 814 (g)). When the display is changed to the stop display of the decorative pattern shown in), a transition display (for example, an image in which the sliding doors are closed in FIG. 857 (g-1)) may be displayed between the two. The display for transition (for example, the display in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 857 (g-1)) is also applicable to the case where the liquid crystal display device D is not provided.

  FIG. 858 shows a special winning opening excess error in the pachinko machine 100 having, for example, two big winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804) as shown in FIG. 811. Fluctuating / stopped state of the figure, activated / non-activated state of the accessory continuous operation device and condition device, special winning opening 2 Solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, special electric accessory (special electricity role 2 ) Is activated / not activated, a special signal auditor 2 operating signal (for testing) is activated / not activated, a special electricity prize 2 winning detection timer is set / not set, and provided on the second attacker 804. Sphere detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2) valid / invalid state, probability variation area solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, probability variation area valid / invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive ( Open ) / Stop (closed) state, special electric auditors' product (special electric component 1) activated / non-activated, special electric component 1 operating signal (for test) activated / not activated, special electric component 1 winning detection Timer setting / non-setting state, valid / invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the first attacker 802, special winning opening winning excess flag, security information signal and first sub-control It is an example of a timing chart of the special winning opening winning excess error notification in the section 400. In this example, in a certain round during the big hit game (between timing (2) and timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric role 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it can be treated as the one that has effectively won the second attacker 804. Become.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 in-operation signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At a timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first brought into the open state after the start of the round.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (4), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, a special electric role combination operation timer (a timer for setting a period for detecting the remaining ball, for example, 100 ms) is set, and a special electric prize winning detection timer (special electric part 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in the operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is completed, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 2 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric component combination operation delay timer is set, the special electric component combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the probability variation region solenoid stops driving (closes), and the probability variation region is disabled from the valid state. It becomes a state. Note that in this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in an open state (for example, open for 100 ms) → closed state (for example, closed for 1400 ms) → open state (for example, between timing (2) and timing (3), for example. , 28000 ms), and the probability variation region continues to be valid during this period.

  In addition, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing at which the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is started by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric train 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is turned on. When is activated, it changes from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At a timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may pass the count switch SW2 and be detected as a prize. is there.

  It should be noted that, if the same special electric vehicle operating data (“special electric vehicle operating data 1”) is used by the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 And will be the same time. Further, the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may be set to have different special electric power operation data, so that the respective opening times may be different, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 802 may be set. Of the 804, the special electricity combination operation data used only in either one may be prepared.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric host 1 is in an operating state even after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (10) is the timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 1 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

  Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven, and the second variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric winning combination 2 is activated.

  At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, a special electric role combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electric role winning detection timer (special electric role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

  Timing (14) is the timing at which the special electric power combination 2 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state after the period set by the special electric power combination operating interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

  Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric train 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is turned on. When is activated, it changes from the invalid state to the valid state.

  Timing (16) is a big winning opening due to the winning of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 in the final round or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed. This is the timing when the driving of the two solenoids is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, a special electric role combination operation interval timer (for example, 100 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electric role winning detection timer (special electric role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

  Timing (17) is a timing at which the special round combination 2 changes from the activated state to the non-activated state after the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the final round ends. At this timing, the special electricity combination operation delay timer is set, and the special electricity combination 2 operating signal (for testing) also changes from the activated state to the inactivated state.

  Timing (18) is a timing at which the jackpot game ends, when the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device change from the operating state to the non-operating state.

  Timing (19) is a timing at which the symbol variation of the next special symbol is started with the end of the big hit game, as shown by the broken line according to the conventional pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, at this timing Since the special winning opening winning excess error flag remains on, the symbol variation of the special figure remains stopped at the timing (19).

  859 to FIG. 861 are diagrams showing, in time series, an example of the effect display in the decorative symbol display device 208 when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the effect display example shown in FIG. 813. Note that the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 859 to 861 has, as an example, a first attacker 802, a second attacker 804, and a probability variation region (probability variation operation region 808) as shown in FIG. 811. The symbol (for example, "Special figure A") is stopped in the stop symbol mode as shown in FIG.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 859 (5a) to 859 (7a) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 813 (5) to 813 (7). In addition, in this example, it is assumed that a special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the fourth round of the big hit game.

  The timing shown in (5a) of the same figure shows a state in which the 4th R of the big hit game has started. At this timing, the V-winning suggestion effect (here, the characters “Aim for the V attacker !!” and the arrow pointing to the lower right pointing to the position of the attacker unit 810) is continued.

  The timing shown in (6a) of the same figure, in the 4R of the big hit game, shows the state where the game ball has entered the probability variation operating region 808 (the state where V has been won). At this timing, an effect for notifying that the V prize has been won (here, the character "V" is displayed) is suggested, and it is suggested that the state will be changed after the jackpot game is over.

  The timing shown in (a0) of the same figure shows a state in which the 4th round of the big hit game has ended, and the effect of notifying that the V winning has been continued is continued.

  At the timing shown in (a1), after the 4th round of the big hit game, in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is performed. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won.

  The timing shown in the same figure (a2) shows the state where the 5R of the big hit game has started, and an error display E3 for notifying a big winning opening winning excess error is overlaid on the effect of notifying that the V winning has been won. it's shown.

  The timing shown in (7a) of the same figure shows a state in which the 6th round of the big hit game has started, and the error display E3 for notifying a big winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the round effect after the V winning. ing.

  The timing shown in (10a) of the same figure shows the state where the big hit game ends, and a big hit end display (in this example, display of "Yoshimune RUSH plunge !!") as an effect to notify the end of the big hit game. In addition, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening excess error is continuously displayed. The timing shown in (a3) of the figure is a state following the timing shown in (10) of the figure, and shows a state in which the special winning opening winning excess error has not been released. In this way, when the special winning opening winning excess error is not released, the big winning end display and the error display E3 are displayed and stopped, and the symbol variation of the next special symbol is not started.

  FIG. 860 is a diagram showing, in time series, an example of the effect display when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the fourth round, for example, after the second consecutive change in the effect display example shown in FIG. 813.

  The same figure (1b) has shown the state where the hit production is started, in this example, the letter of “super Yoshimune bonus” is displayed in the display area of decorative design display 208.

  The timing shown in (2b) of the figure is a state in which execution of the round effect is started. This round effect is, for example, an effect for executing the character introduction effect display during the effect. In this example, a round effect is performed near the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the number of big hits (the number of consecutive holidays) is displayed above the display area (here, “BONUS × 1” is displayed) and the winning ball. A number display and a round display (here, "1R" display) are performed.

  The timing shown in (b1) of the same figure is a state in which the round effect is being executed when the third round is finished. At this timing, a display indicating that the attacker unit 810 will be released from the next round (4R) (in this example, the characters "Aim for V attacker in the next round" and the arrow pointing to the lower right) is displayed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the round effect started in the fourth round is being executed. At this timing, a display for notifying that the attacker unit 810 is open (in this example, the characters “Aim for the V attacker !!” and the arrow pointing to the lower right) is displayed.

  The timing shown in (b2) of the figure shows the state in which the fourth round has ended, and an effect of notifying that the V prize has been won (here, the display of the letter "V" in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). )It is carried out.

  At the timing shown in (b3) of the figure, after the end of the fourth round, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this timing, an error display E3 for notifying a special winning opening winning excess error is displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won.

  The timing shown in (b4) of the figure shows the state in which the fifth round has started, and the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the effect for notifying that the V winning has been won. ing.

  The timing shown in (7b) of the same figure shows the state in which the sixth round has started, and a song selection effect is displayed to display the so-called buttons and song titles to inform the player that it is possible to select a song. ing. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the music selection effect.

  When the player operates the operation button (key) as shown in (b5) in the state where the music selection effect shown in (7b) is being performed, it is displayed as shown in (b6) in the same figure. (Selectable) song changes. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 7B, the selectable song titles are displayed as “Kiseki no Universe” in the upper row and “Kimi no Kakera” in the lower row. As shown in (b6), “Kimi no Kakera” moves to the upper row and “May be there” in the lower row as the selectable song names. When the operation is performed, the selected song may be played back from the timing at which the operation is performed, or the song selected from the next round may be played back. May be configured such that when the round in which a song can be selected ends, the song selected at the end of the round starts in the next round, and when the round in which a song can be selected ends Only the next May be configured to tune to be reproduced is determined from und.

  It should be noted that, during the notification of the special winning opening winning excess error, the music selected by the operation of the operation means (music) may not be output from the speaker 120. Here, the notification of the special winning opening excess error by the speaker 120 may be configured to be continued for 30 seconds after the error is canceled, but it may be configured to continue for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) after the error is started. After a lapse of a second, the notification by the speaker 120 is terminated, and the music selected by the operation of the operation means (not limited to the music selected by the operation of the operation means, background display and various effects (for example, a big hit round etc.) ) Corresponding to ()) may be output, or may be configured to remain silent until the error is cleared. Here, the display by the display unit and the display by the light emitting unit such as a lamp are configured to be continued until the error is canceled, but the display by the speaker 120 may be the same. Also, the music may be output at a lower volume than that in the error state. Not only at the time of the notification of the special winning opening winning error, but also during the change of the symbol or the big hit, the music selection effect as shown in the same figure (7b) to (b6) may be executed. .

  The timing shown in (b7) of the figure shows the state in which the seventh round has started, and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction (for example, opening a book). (The image of the state and the display of the character “character introduction”) have started.Also in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the character introduction effect. .

  The timing shown in (b8) of the figure shows the state in which the 16th round, which is the final round, has ended, and in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character introduction effect (in this example, the introduction of the character "Yoshimune") is introduced. Production) has started. Even in this state, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening winning excess error is continuously displayed in addition to the character introduction effect. Note that the character introduction effect may not be executed during the special winning opening excess error. The effect during the round is not limited to the character introduction effect, and may be an animation or a moving image corresponding to the music being played.

  In this way, when the winning hole winning excess error is not released, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning hole winning excess error is displayed over a plurality of rounds.

  The timing shown in (10b) of the figure shows the state where the big hit game has ended, and a big hit end display (here, the character "Yoshimune RUSH continues !!") is displayed, and the big winning opening prize is overlaid on this. The error display E3 for notifying the excess error is continuously displayed. The song selected during the big hit may be played back as it is after the big hit ends.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment detects a special winning opening winning excess error for each round, and when the error occurs and the error is not released, the main control unit 300 determines that the big hit ( Even if the big hit game) ends, it is configured not to start the symbol variation control. In the example shown in FIG. 860, when the special winning opening winning excess error is detected even in the final round of 16 rounds (when the big winning opening winning excess error is not released even in 16 rounds), the same figure (b8) The display is stopped in the state, and the main control unit 300 does not start the symbol variation control (the main control unit 300 does not start the control of the symbol variation of the reserved special figure (Special figure 1 or Special figure 2)).

  Here, "the state where the big hit game is finished" will be further described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 858. At the timing (17), it is determined that the special winning opening winning excess error has occurred, and the number of entered balls and the number of discharged balls match. If not (the number of balls> the number of discharges), it is determined that there is a big winning opening winning excess error (the error continues), the special electric role 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state, jackpot game The state in which is completed corresponds to FIG. 860 (b8). In other words, in this state, the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped, and the main control unit 300 does not perform the symbol fluctuation control.

  As described above, in the processing flow described with reference to FIGS. 814 to 840 of the present embodiment, “the state where the big hit game is finished” can be said to be the state where the big hit game is finished on the main control unit 300 side.

  Even when the special electric host 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing (17) in the timing chart of FIG. 858, it is possible that the jackpot game in the main control unit 300 is not finished. . For example, if the determination in step S1701 of the remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 835 is “No”, the special electric host 2 falls from the operating state to the non-operating state at timing (17) in the timing chart of FIG. 858. However, before step S1703, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening winning excess error, and if a big winning opening winning excess error has occurred, the process is terminated, If a prize winning excess error has occurred, the special electric hand combination operation is not terminated, but the remaining ball detection state is maintained. Further, after step S1705, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening winning excess error, and if a big winning opening winning excess error has occurred, even if the processing is terminated, If a prize winning excess error has occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, since the special winning opening winning excess error is also determined in step S705 of the special drawing state updating processing shown in FIG. 823, even when it is determined that the special winning opening winning excess error is detected in the special drawing status updating processing, The control unit 300 can be configured not to perform the symbol variation control at the end of the big hit game. That is, before step S1907 of the hit end display weight processing of FIG. 837, it is determined whether or not there is a special winning opening winning excess error, and if a big winning opening winning excess error has occurred, the processing ends. By doing so, the special figure processing state is not set to the "variation waiting state", so that the main control unit 300 can be in a state where the big hit game is not finished. On the other hand, for example, by determining a special winning opening winning excess error after step S1907 of the winning end display weight processing, the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state", so that the big winning is finished. be able to.

  In addition, "the big hit ends" in the present embodiment may be when the external terminal board signal output during the big hit is turned off, or when the accessory continuous operation device is turned off. . Further, in the present embodiment, "the big hit ends" means that the ordinary figure low probability state (during the big hit) becomes the ordinary figure high probability state when the time after the big hit is shortened or the probability changes. The special map low probability state (during a big hit) may be changed to the special map high probability state. Also, in the case of a model that left-handed after the big hit, when the notification means for notifying right-handed finishes the notification of right-handed (for example, when the right-handed lamp goes from the lighting state to the unlit state). Good.

  FIG. 861 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 860. FIG. 861 (b7-2) shows the timing following FIG. 860 (b7). For example, in the seventh round, the special winning opening winning excess error is overlaid on the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction). In the case where the error display E3 for notifying is displayed, if the special winning opening winning excess error is canceled, the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening excess error is not displayed. In this case, the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction) is continuously displayed, and thereafter, normal effect display is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the big hit ends, a big hit end display (here, the character "Yoshimune RUSH continues !!") is displayed, and the next variable display of decorative symbols is executed. .

  Also, FIG. 861 (b7-3) shows the timing following FIG. 860 (b7), and for example, in the seventh round, the special winning opening prize is overlaid on the character introduction effect (switch display for character introduction). The QR code (registered trademark) may be displayed when the error display E3 for notifying the excess error is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 861 (b7-3), a notification suggesting the display of a QR code (registered trademark) (in this example, "A chance button is operated below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, When the player operates the chance button 136, the QR code (registered trademark) is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. To do. Also in this case, when the special winning opening winning excess error occurs (is not canceled), the error display E3 for notifying the special winning opening excess error is continued. In this case, other operations (for example, setting operations for volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, song change, selection effect image change, etc.) may be allowed, or the setting operations may not be allowed.

  FIG. 862 shows a variation / stop state of the special figure when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having two special winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804), Conditional device continuous operating device and condition device operating / non-operating state, special winning opening 2 solenoid driving (opening) / stopping (closing) state, special electric auditors' product (special electric role 2) operating / non-operating state , Activated / non-activated state of the signal (for testing) of the special electric prize combination 2, the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is set / not set, the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch provided in the second attacker 804) SW2) valid / invalid state, probability variation area solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) status, probability variation area valid / invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) State, special power The state (active / inactive) of the accessory (special electricity role 1), the active / inactive state of the in-use signal (for testing) of the special electricity role 1, the state / unset state of the special electricity role 1 winning detection timer, the first Of the valid / invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the attacker 802, the special winning opening winning excess error flag, the security information signal, and the special winning opening winning excess error notification in the first sub-control unit 400. It is another example of a timing chart. In this example, in a certain round during the big hit game (between timing (2) and timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric role 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it can be treated as the one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 in-operation signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At a timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first brought into the open state after the start of the round.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (4), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 2 is deactivated. Note that the special electric host 2 is in the operating state even after the second attacker 804 is closed until the round is completed, that is, until the period (for example, 100 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 2 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric device operation delay timer is set, and the probability variation region solenoid stops driving (closes). In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state → closed state → open state between the timing (2) and the timing (3), for example, and the probability variation region continues to be in the valid state. .

  In addition, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing at which the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is started by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven to open the first attacker 802, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric hand 1 is activated. In addition, in this example, at this timing (7), the special electric gear 1 in-operation signal (for testing) also changes from the inactive state to the active state.

  The timing (a) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 2 operating signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 2 becomes the non-operating state at the timing (5). In this example, since the special electric wire combination operation interval timer set at the timing (4) is as short as 20 ms (the special electric wire combination operation interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 858 is, for example, 100 ms), it is necessary to prevent the signal from being missed. For a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the 2 variable winning a prize port (second attacker) 235 is closed, the test signal is added to the special electric officer 2 operating signal and output (the probability variation region shown in FIGS. 821 and 822). (See step S637 of the related setting process).

  As a result, after the timing (5) at which the special electric wire combination 2 is inactive, the special electric wire combination 2 operating signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (a), and the probability variation region is changed from the valid state in accordance with this. It becomes invalid.

  At a timing (8) after the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW2 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (8)) set by the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer elapses after the first attacker 802 is opened. Therefore, when the first attacker 802 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the second attacker 804 in the previous round may pass the count switch SW2 and be detected as a prize. is there.

  It should be noted that, if the same special electric vehicle operating data (“special electric vehicle operating data 1”) is used by the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804, the opening time of the first attacker 802 and the opening time of the second attacker 804 And will be the same time. Further, the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 804 may be set to have different special electric power operation data, so that the respective opening times may be different, or the first attacker 802 and the second attacker 802 may be set. Of the 804, the special electricity combination operation data used only in either one may be prepared.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric host 1 is in an operating state even after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round ends, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (10) is the timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

  Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven, the second variable winning opening 234 is opened, the special electric prize 2 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW2 is in the invalid state. From the valid state.

  Timing (b) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 in-operation signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 1 is in the non-operational state at the timing (10). In this example, since the special electric wire combination operation interval timer set at timing (9) is as short as 20 ms (the special electric wire combination operation interval timer in the timing chart shown in FIG. 858 is, for example, 100 ms), it is necessary to prevent the signal from being missed. For a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the 1 variable winning port (first attacker) 234 is closed, the test signal is added to the special electric train combination 1 operating signal and output (probability variation region shown in FIGS. 821 and 822). (See step S637 of the related setting process).

  As a result, after the timing (10) at which the special electric wire combination 1 is inactive, the special electric wire combination 1 operating signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b).

  At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

  Timing (14) is the timing at which the special electric power combination 2 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state after the period set by the special electric power combination operating interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

  Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven to open the first attacker 802, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric hand 1 is activated. Further, the special electric gear 1 in-operation signal (for testing) also changes from the non-operation state to the operation state at this timing.

  FIG. 863 is a variation / stop state of the special figure when the special winning opening excess error occurs in the pachinko machine 100 having two special winning openings (first attacker 802 and second attacker 804) Object continuous operation device and condition device operation / non-operation state, special winning opening 2 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, special electric auditors (special electricity role 2) operation / non-operation state, The special signal role 2 operating signal (for testing) is activated / not activated, the special electricity role 2 winning detection timer is set / not set, and the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW2) provided on the second attacker 804. ) Valid / invalid state, probability variation region solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state, probability variation region valid / invalid state, special winning opening 1 solenoid drive (open) / stop (closed) state , Special electric Object (special electricity role 1) active / inactive state, special electricity role 1 in-operation signal (for testing) active / inactive state, special electricity role 1 winning detection timer setting / unset state, first Timing of the valid / invalid state of the ball detection sensor 320 (count switch SW1) provided in the attacker 802, the special winning opening winning excess error flag, the security information signal, and the special winning opening exceeding error notification in the first sub control unit 400. It is another example of the chart.Here, a case where the same attacker (for example, the second attacker 804) is released at a short timing will be described.In this example, a certain round (timing (2 (timing (2 ) To timing (4)), a special winning opening winning excess error is detected.

  As shown in the figure, for example, at a certain timing (1), the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are changed from the non-operation state to the operation state, and the big hit game is started.

  Then, at the timing (2) during the big hit game, the special electric role 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state. In addition, in this embodiment, the special electric power combination 1 and the special electric power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Then, at this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven (opened), and the second attacker 804 is opened. In addition, the count switch SW2 is changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special electric host 2 is activated. As a result, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker 804 passes through the count switch SW2, this is effectively detected, and it can be treated as the one that has been effectively won in the second attacker 804.

  Further, at this timing (2), the special electric wheel combination 2 in-operation signal (for testing) is also activated, and the probability variation region solenoid is driven (opened) to change the probability variation region from the invalid state to the valid state.

  At a timing (3) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period (timing (3)) set by the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the second attacker 804 is opened. Therefore, when the second attacker 804 is in the open state, the game ball that entered the first attacker 802 in the previous round may pass through the count switch SW1 and be detected as a prize. is there. The count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second attacker 804 is first brought into the open state after the start of the round.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, at the timing (4), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (timer for setting a period for detecting the remaining ball, for example, 20 ms) is set, and the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. ) Is set to a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW2 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 2 is deactivated. It should be noted that, even after the second attacker 804 is in the closed state, the special electric host 2 is in an operating state until the round ends, that is, until the period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (5) is the timing when the period set by the special electricity combination operation interval timer elapses, the special electricity combination 2 changes from the activated state to the inoperative state, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric device operation delay timer is set, and the positive variation region solenoid stops driving. In this example, the probability variation region solenoid is in the open state → closed state → open state between the timing (2) and the timing (3), for example, and the probability variation region continues to be in the valid state. .

  In addition, in this example, the special winning opening winning excess error is detected between the timing (2) and the timing (3), the special winning opening winning excess error flag is turned on at the timing (5), and at the same time, the security information The signal turns on.

  Timing (6) is the timing at which the error notification of the special winning opening winning excess error is started by the first sub-control unit 400.

  Timing (7) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (5) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric train 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is turned on. When is activated, it changes from the invalid state to the valid state.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the first attacker 802 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data elapses, the special winning opening 1 solenoid of the timing (9) The drive is stopped (closed) and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It In the present embodiment, in the state in which the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the count switch SW1 is maintained in the valid state even after the special electric prize combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric host 1 is in an operating state even after the first attacker 802 is closed until the round ends, that is, until a period (for example, 20 ms) set by the special electric device operating interval timer elapses. Has become.

  Timing (10) is the timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

  Timing (11) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (10) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 2 is changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven to open the second variable winning opening 234.

  In this example, the opening time of the special winning opening 1 solenoid (the period of timing (7) to timing (9)) is short, and the same attacker (second attacker 804) has a round interval (timing (5) to timing (11)). Period) is short.

  In such a case, as described in the timing chart of FIG. 862, if the test signal is added to the special electric power combination 2 operating signal and then output, a problem may occur. In other words, when the special electricity role operating interval timer set at the timing (4) is short, for example, 20 ms, the second variable winning a prize port (second attacker) 235 is closed for a predetermined period in order to prevent the signal from being missed. , It is desirable to add the test signal to the special electric wire combination 2 operating signal and output it, but if the same attacker (second attacker 804) has a short round interval (timing (5) to timing (11)). During the opening of the second attacker 804, which is opened later, the special electric gear 2 operating signal may become inactive. More specifically, the test signal is added to the special signal combination 2 in-operation signal (see FIG. 858) which is originally inoperative at the same time when the special voltage combination 2 is not activated (5), as described with reference to FIG. 862. For example, assuming that the additional electric power is added for 2 seconds, the special electric power working signal (for test) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state at the timing (a) in FIG. 863. That is, although the second attacker 804, which is released from the timing (11), is opened, the special electric power working signal (for test) is in a non-operating state. In order to prevent this, in step S1421 of FIG. 831, the test signal output timer is set to 0 to extend the output period of the signal (for test) of the special electric wire combination 2 working, and while the second attacker 804 is open, the special electric wire combination 2 is released. The working signal is kept inactive.

  In addition, in this example, at the timing (11), the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer ends after the set time has elapsed. This is because the round in which the second attacker 804 is opened starts at the timing (11) (the special electric host 2 changes from the non-operating state to the operating state), so that 0 is forcibly set and terminated. Yes (see step S1423 in FIG. 831).

  Timing (b) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 in-operation signal (for testing) changes from the operating state to the non-operational state after the special electric power combination 1 is in the non-operational state at the timing (10). In this example, since the special electricity role operating interval timer set at the timing (9) is short, for example, 20 ms, the predetermined variable winning port (first attacker) 234 is closed to prevent the signal from being missed. During the period (for example, 2 seconds), the test signal is added to the special electric power combination 1 in-operation signal and output (see step S637 of the probability variation area related setting processing shown in FIGS. 821 and 822).

  As a result, after the timing (10) at which the special electric wire combination 1 is inactive, the special electric wire combination 1 operating signal (for testing) becomes inactive at the timing (b). At timing (12) after the second attacker 804 is opened, the special electric prize combination 1 winning detection timer is changed from the set state to the non-set state, and the count switch SW1 is changed from the valid state to the invalid state.

  After that, when the award of the above-mentioned maximum winning number of game balls to the second attacker 804 or the opening timer set by the set special electricity combination operation data has elapsed, at the timing (13), the special winning opening 2 solenoid The drive is stopped (closed) and the second attacker 804 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity prize winning detection timer (special electricity role 2 winning detection timer) related to the second attacker 804. It

  Timing (14) is the timing at which the special electric power combination 2 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state after the period set by the special electric power combination operating interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

  Timing (15) is the timing at which the next round is started after the period of the special electric power combination operation delay timer set at timing (14) has elapsed, and the special electric power combination 1 has changed from the non-activated state to the activated state. At this timing, the special winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven, and the first attacker 802 is opened, the special electric train 1 operating signal (for testing) is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state, and the count switch SW1 is turned on. When is activated, it changes from the invalid state to the valid state.

  Timing (20) is a timing at which the special electric role 2 signal output timer set at timing (13) becomes 0 and the special electric role 2 operating signal (for test) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state. Further, at this timing, the probability variation region also changes from the valid state to the invalid state. In this example, during the period from timing (13) to timing (20), the probability variation region is in the valid state even though the special winning opening 2 solenoid is in the closed state (the second attacker 804 is in the closed state). It is a period of being. In addition, the probability variation region in this case continues to be valid over three rounds in the period from timing (2) to timing (20).

  At the timing (21), the special electric prize combination 2 winning detection timer ends after the set time elapses, and the count switch SW2 changes from the valid state to the invalid state. At timing (22), the driving of the special winning opening 1 solenoid is stopped (closed), and the first attacker 802 is closed. At this time, the special electricity role operating interval timer (for example, 20 ms) is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for the special electricity role winning detection timer (special electricity role 1 winning detection timer) related to the first attacker 802. It

  The timing (23) is a timing at which the special electric wire combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operating state after the period set by the special electric wire combination operation interval timer has elapsed, and the round ends. At this timing, the special electric wheel combination operation delay timer is set.

  In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 853 to 863, even when the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error) has occurred, after the jackpot game is over. Starts the variation control of the special figure (variable game of special figure 1 or special figure 2). In addition, when the main control unit 300 detects that a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error) has occurred, and after the jackpot game is over, the variation control of the special figure (special figure 1 or There may be a case where the variation game of special figure 2) is not started.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes a count switch SW and an out switch SO at the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235, respectively, and the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 are opened alternately. A closing operation is performed, and only the count switch (either one) corresponding to the variable winning port to be opened of the first variable winning port 234 and the second variable winning port 235 is set to be receivable. May be

  Further, the following modified examples are also applicable to this embodiment. For example, when a pattern is displayed by the light guide plate as shown in FIG. 856 (f4), the pattern may be plural. For example, different patterns may be displayed at the position of the irradiation unit (for example, LED) that emits light toward the light guide plate. Specifically, for example, the pattern A is displayed by irradiation from the LED arranged above, and the pattern B is displayed by light emission from the LED arranged on the left.

  Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 and / or the liquid crystal display device D may perform operations such as rotation, vibration and movement. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may operate during each error described in the above embodiment, in which case, for example, like the effect movable body 224 of FIG. 855 (b3-2α), for example, When notifying of a special winning opening winning excess error, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be operated as an effect moving means. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D (for example, two, three, ...) May be provided. Here, when a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D are provided, only one liquid crystal display device of the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D is configured to be operable, and another one of the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D or The plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be configured to be inoperable (fixed), or one or a plurality of liquid crystal display devices D among the plurality of liquid crystal display devices D may be configured to be operable and a plurality of liquid crystal display devices may be used. Some other liquid crystal display devices of the display device D may be configured to be inoperable (fixed). The decorative pattern display device 208 and / or the liquid crystal display device D may be inoperable.

  Further, the production moving means (for example, the production movable body 224) of the present embodiment may continue the operation of the production moving means even if an error occurs during the operation of the production moving means, but the operation is interrupted. You may make it return to an initial position. Further, depending on the type of error, there may be an error in which the production moving means returns to the initial position when the error occurs, and an error in which the production moving means does not return to the initial position when the error occurs. An example of an error that returns to the initial position is an error that stops game control such as a magnetic (magnet) detection error, and an example of an error that does not return to the initial position is a plate full tank error, but is not limited thereto. Here, "stop the game control" means, for example, that the main control unit 300 is not executing a process related to winning or winning, and as a specific example, the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 817. The output management process (step S337) is skipped from the timer updating process (step S311).

  Other examples of the error that returns to the initial position are magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, big winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening prize excess error, big ball goto error, switch (sensor) non-connection error, switch (sensor) ) Level error, winning rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (Den Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) error error, impact error error, solenoid error error, tray full tank error (lower tray full tank error, lower tray full) Ton error, upper plate full ton error), payout shortage error, payout number switch error, illegal payout error, overpayment error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is within a predetermined time (book). (1000ms in the example), error when not receiving), CR unit not connected error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening Error, door open error, the external clock failure error, an impact sensor errors, impact warning may be any such Uchikata warning.

  Other examples of the error that does not return to the initial position are magnetic (magnet) detection error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, big winning opening ejection excess error, big winning opening excess winning error, deca ball goto error, switch (sensor) ) Unconnected error, switch (sensor) level error, winning rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) error, impact error error, solenoid error error, insufficient payout error , Payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), error when reception is not possible ), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error, inner frame open error, door open error, external clock error error, Hammer sensors errors, impact warning may be any such Uchikata warning.

  Further, as a modified example of the production movable means (for example, production movable body 224) provided in the game board 200, the production movable means provided on the frame side (the front frame door 106) may be used, and the production movable means allows prefetching. It may be configured to give a notice or notice of the change. The effect movable means may be a part of the operation means unit. In that case, the production movable means may be a portion for performing an operation (for example, a button or a lever), and the operation of the production movable means at the time of the above error notification (for example, the production movable body in FIG. 855 (b3-2α)). As a modified example of (Operation 224), the button or lever may be operated such as vibrating, projecting, denting, or rotating. These operations may be performed in various effects such as pre-reading notification, notification of the change, simultaneous effect (RTC effect), and demonstration effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of holds is displayed by the hold icon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold may be displayed by turning on a light emitting means such as an LED. In that case, it may be configured such that a pre-reading notice is given according to the color of the light emitting means or the special figure types (special figures 1 and 2) are displayed separately.

  In addition, during the error described in the above embodiment, a general winning opening, a starting opening, and an effect corresponding to a ball entering an attacker (for example, outputting a winning sound, lighting a lamp, or displaying on a liquid crystal) may be performed. During the error, a part or all of the effects corresponding to the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the entry into the attacker may not be performed. Here, "general winning opening, starting opening, the effect according to the entrance into the attacker", in the case of a big hit, the payout number display (for example, the point (pt) display of FIG. 853 (4)), decoration Performance by the symbol display device 208 and other display devices, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214 and the general symbol display device 210 and other 7 segment display devices, ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, the first Special design hold lamp 218 and second special design hold lamp 220 and other lamps (LEDs) such as the color and light emitting pattern, and over-win prize notification (sound, lamp, decorative pattern display device 208, and other display devices) And so on. It should be noted that in the case of the over-prize notification production, the sound may not be output, or the error sound or the light emission pattern may be output. In addition, "general winning opening, starting opening, production according to the entrance into the attacker" means, after the big hit, notification according to the winning of the starting opening or general winning opening ((sound, lamp, decorative pattern display The display by the device 208 and other display devices), etc. It should be noted that all of the above effects may be installed, or some of them may be installed.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is an attacker (for example, the first attacker 802, the second attacker 804, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable). A gaming table including a winning opening 235) and main control means (for example, main controller 300), wherein the attacker is a ball sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, count switch SW1, count switch SW2). Is an attacker provided, the ball sensor is a sensor that can output a ball signal according to the ball of the game ball, the attacker is a discharge sensor (for example, ball detection sensor 320, out switch SO, SO1, SO2 ...) is provided, and the discharge sensor is a sensor capable of outputting a discharge signal in accordance with discharge of a game ball. Yes, the main control means is a means capable of executing control for determining a plurality of types of errors, and one type of error among the plurality of types of errors is a first error (e.g. Exceeding error), the first error, the number of game balls entered into the attacker (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of balls entered"), the number of game balls discharged from the attacker (hereinafter, It is an error indicating that there is more than "the number of discharges", the main control means, the fluctuation control of the symbol (hereinafter, "symbol fluctuation control (eg, symbol fluctuation process shown in FIG. 828, or FIG. 825 ( a) special figure-related lottery processing, the symbol variation process shown in FIG. 828, and the special symbol display confirmation weight process shown in FIG. 829).)), and the symbol variation control is the symbol. Display means (for example, the first special map) In the display device 212, the second special figure display device 214), it is a control to display a variable display of the symbol, the main control means is a means for starting the symbol variation control when the big hit ends. The main control means is a means that does not start the symbol variation control during the occurrence of the first error, which is a gaming table.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table characterized by the main control means.

  That is, it may be possible for the store clerk or the player to easily notice that the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred.

  Also, during the occurrence of a first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the symbol variation control is not started, and the player cannot play the game. Therefore, the first error (for example, a big winning opening winning excess) In some cases, the clerk can surely cancel the error) and improve the maintainability.

  It should be noted that the description of the “special winning opening winning excess error” in the above-described embodiment can be read as “a special winning opening winning / disappearing ball mismatch error”.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a liquid crystal display device D) is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is provided. The display is a jackpot end display (for example, the display of FIG. 853 (10), the display of FIG. 854 (10a) to FIG. 854 (12a), etc.), and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is It is a variable display of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "variable symbol display (for example, display indicated by a downward arrow in FIG. 855 (16a))"), and after the jackpot end display is displayed, the symbol variable display is displayed. In some cases, even if the big hit ends during the occurrence of the first error, the symbol variation display is not started, and the big hit end display is continuously displayed. It may be.

  With such a configuration, even if the big hit ends, the big hit end display (screen) is displayed as it is, so that it is easy to notice that the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred. You may be able to.

  Here, the start timing of the variable display of decorative symbols (symbol variable display) in the present embodiment is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, or the decorative symbol display device 208. The timing at which the decorative pattern starts changing in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (display starts to move), or the decorative pattern starts changing in all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. It refers to the timing at which it started (moved on display). The end timing of the variable display of decorative symbols (symbol variable display) is the timing at which the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, or the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. The timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing (display is stopped) in at least one of the 208 to 208c, or the decorative pattern stops changing in all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208 (on the display, Stopped) is the timing.

  It should be noted that when the big hit end display is being performed, the setting of the volume and the amount of light (luminance) may be changed, or the setting may not be changed.

  Also, when the big hit end display is being performed, the effect mode may be selected, or the effect mode may not be selected.

  Further, when the big hit end display is being performed, the simultaneous effect and the RTC effect may be executed by wiping or the like, or the simultaneous effect and the RTC effect may not be executed. In addition, when the simultaneous production is started during the occurrence of the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the simultaneous production may be displayed on the entire surface or by wiping, but the simultaneous production sound is output from the speaker 120. It is also possible not to do so (except for models that do not output BGM or sound effects in simultaneous production).

  Further, when the big hit end display is being performed, the effect relating to the universal figure may or may not be executed.

  Further, in the case where the user mode can be set, when the big hit end display is displayed, an effect regarding the grant of a privilege may be performed. Here, the user mode is a mode that can be arbitrarily set by the player, and information of the game performed from the start to the end of the setting of the user mode (variation number, jackpot number, preset If you complete a mission (for example, mission achievement conditions such as number of condominiums, number of big hits, number of fluctuations, occurrence of specific super reach or specific notice, playing in specific time zone, etc.), Granting of benefits (as an example of effects related to granting benefits, effects that are used to increase the user level, effects that can be selected (customized) by the player (for example, characters that perform navigation and advance notice of games, various effect displays) (Hold icon, background display, hold frame that displays the hold icon) and the music and game characteristics that are output during pattern changes and jackpots (for example, Big hit confirmation production notification (one-shot notification or premiere production) or specific performance (for example, operation of operation means or operation of production movable means, advance notice that is likely to be a big hit if it occurs as a fluctuation and / or pre-reading notice) ) Is a mode in which a) is easily generated))) is performed.The privilege may be given in response to an increase in the user level.

  In addition, it is configured such that a pre-reading notice (for example, a pre-reading notice by the characters such as "Large board behavior!" In FIG. 854 (11a)) may be given during the occurrence of the first error. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the jackpot end display is continuously displayed despite the pre-reading notice, so the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

  In addition, when the first error (for example, big winning award winning excess error) has occurred, you may stop at the screen where the pre-reading notice is displayed, and other screens (for example, prepaid card You may stop at the screen displaying the warning message for forgetting to take or the logo (maker logo) screen). Note that the alert notification (hereinafter referred to as “attention alert”) is not limited to “forgot to take the prepaid card”.

  Here, the alerting alert is an alert alerting the player to an item that is not directly related to the profit of the game. The profit of the game includes a prize ball given as a profit to the player and information about the prize ball. Since the content of the alert notification is not directly connected to the profit of the game, even if the player ignores the alert notification or does not follow the alert notification, the profit of the game is not affected. However, the alert notification includes physical, mental, or monetary information that may affect the interests of the player other than the interests of the game.

  It should be noted that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be, for example, a medal or the like. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the player with an actual object such as a prize ball or medal. For example, first, an electronic benefit is given to the player, and the electronic benefit is used by the player in the game, or You may be able to convert to prize balls. Of course, the real thing may not be given to the player, and the player may be able to exchange the electronic profit for the prize. Further, as the profit related to the game, the profit may be used to define that the game can be played again on the gaming machine. Conversely, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the game cannot be played again on the gaming machine even if the profit is used.

  As an example of the alert notification, "age restriction", "exploitation method", "game time", "production", "secondary usage restriction", "investment deterrence", "prevent forgetting", "prevention of damage", " For example, "prevent forgetting to take a picture (preventing forgetting to save)" etc.

  The alert notification with the name "age restriction" is "Notification of games under 18 years old and entrance to the game hall is regulated by law." And the notification timing is "Demo". . In other words, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variation game is inactive, and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when he / she does not follow the warning notification of "age restriction", there is a financial disadvantage that the player cannot exchange the prize even if the game profit is obtained. In the alert notification with the name "Tactical strategy", the content of the alert is "Please be cautious about malicious strategy sales." And the timing of the alert is "Demo." As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the user does not follow the alerting information of the “conquest method”, there is a financial disadvantage that money may be paid for useless information.

  The alert notification with the name "game time" is "Notice when you play for a long time, please insert a break appropriately.", And the notification timing is "During demonstration / 2 hours have elapsed since the game started." It is. Disadvantages to the player that occur when the player does not follow the "game time" alert notification include physical disadvantages such as deterioration of the player's physical function due to long-time play and fatigue.

  As for the alert notification with the name "Production", the content of the notification is "Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Please be careful not to get your fingers caught in the production device. Enjoy the game with appropriate volume and light intensity , And the notification timing is “during demo / volume, light intensity adjustment / volume, light intensity adjustment screen / volume, light intensity setting change icon displayed, etc.”. Disadvantages to the player that occur when the player does not follow the alerting notification of the "drafting" are the physical disadvantages such as hearing loss due to playing at high volume, photosensitivity attacks due to lighting or blinking of high-brightness lamps, etc. is there.

  The alert notification with the name "secondary use restriction" has the content "Notify uploading of photos and videos to the Internet on this game machine.", And the notification timing is "during demonstration / during performance execution". It is. As a disadvantage of the player when not following the warning notification of "secondary use restriction", there are financial and social status disadvantages such as fines for imprisonment and imprisonment.

  The alert notification with the name "Investment Deterrence" is "Please be careful about excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game." The notification timing is "during demonstration / from the last big hit" “Predetermined rotation speed has elapsed”. A player's disadvantage that occurs when he / she does not follow the warning message of "investment deterrence" is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

  The alert message with the name "Forgetting prevention" is "Please be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card" or "Be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card." End / end of power support state ”. As a disadvantage of the player when the user does not follow the warning message of “preventing forgetting”, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the remaining balance in the forgotten prepaid card. In addition, you may perform the alert notification of the said "preventing forgetting" at timings other than the above-mentioned timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurs in the normal gaming state, a “forgetting prevention” warning notification is notified, and at the end of a big hit in a condominium that is triggered by the big hit, “forgetting prevention” It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, in the case of a big hit that the player can get a profit smaller than other big hits by the big hit, or a big hit that does not get a profit, a "forgetting prevention" alert notification is notified It does not have to be done. In the first place, if the player forgets to take the prepaid card, if the profit is given with the balance remaining in the prepaid card, the player will be conscious of the profit, and there is a prepaid card with the remaining balance. Since it occurs by forgetting, it is desirable to be notified of the "forgetting prevention" alert immediately after the profit is given to the player, and the extent to which the player forgets the existence of the prepaid card It is desirable to be notified after the benefits of Furthermore, the "forgetting to forget" warning notification is most effective when the player stops playing the game, so at the end of the condominium (for example, when a normal big jackpot without time saving is drawn, or ST machine). It is desirable that the "forgetting prevention" warning notification is notified at the timing when the state advantageous to the player ends, such as at the end of ST. Also, "prevent forgetting to forget" at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change) (for example, during the big hit end production or at the start of fluctuation of the first rotation after the big hit) You may notify an alert notification. Also, in the special figure high probability state (probability change), the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, sudden normal big hit) based on the big hit game end "preventing forgetting" You may notify the alert notification. Also, in the special figure low probability state, the subsequent gaming state is maintained in the special figure low probability state (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, suddenly normal big hit) based on winning the big hit game Prevention ”It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. Also, in the special figure low probability state, the subsequent gaming state is maintained in the special figure low probability state (15R big hit, sudden short-time big hit, suddenly normal big hit) based on winning the big hit game Prevention ”It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, it is not necessary to notify the "forgetting prevention" warning at the end of the small hit game based on winning the small hit.

  For the alert notification with the name "damage prevention", the content of the notification is "Do not operate the operating means with strong force because there is a risk of damage." And the notification timing is "during demonstration / during performance production" is there. As a disadvantage of the player when not following the warning notification of "damage prevention", there is a physical disadvantage of being injured due to breakage of the operating means.

  The alert message with the name "Forgetting to prevent forgetting (preventing forgetting to save)" is "The user mode is being set. Be careful not to forget to take the 2D barcode at the end of the game." The timing is "during demo / setting user mode (always)". As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the user does not follow the alert notification of "prevent forgetting to shoot", there is a game disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are erased. However, this is not a gaming disadvantage related to money. The notification timing of the above-mentioned alert notification may not necessarily be executed at the above timing.

  Further, it may be executed at a timing other than the above notification timing. Further, the above-mentioned alert notification is an example, and it is needless to say that alert notification other than the above may be executed.

  In addition, the alerting notification (notifying at least not related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the illustrated example, and when the player does not follow the notified contents, there is a disadvantage different from the game profit to the player. Anything can be generated.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative pattern. Is a variable display (hereinafter referred to as “symbol variable display”), and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a stop display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter, “symbol stop display (eg, FIG. 856)”). (The symbol stop display shown in (12f)))), and when the big hit ends, if there is a hold, the symbol variable display is started after the symbol stop display is displayed. While displaying the symbol stop display after the jackpot is over, if the first error occurs, the display of the symbol variation display is not started even if there is the hold, and the symbol is displayed. Stop display continues It is configured so that, may be one.

  Further, when there is no hold, the variable display of the symbols may not be started after the jackpot end display is displayed. Further, when there is no hold, a symbol demo may be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, since the symbol stop display is displayed even if there is a hold, it is easy to notice that a first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) has occurred. May be possible.

  Note that “holding” in the present embodiment means holding off the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information.

  In addition, when there is a hold when the big hit ends, a hold icon corresponding to the number of the hold may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the jackpot end display is continuously displayed despite the pre-reading notice, so the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is canceled. Otherwise, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that he cannot proceed to the next game.

  The “holding icon” in this embodiment corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  In addition, after the big hit ends, depending on the game state (probability change / time saving / normal) and the type of special figure, the hold may not be displayed. For example, depending on the game state (probability change / time saving / normal), the hold of special figure 2 may be displayed, but the hold of special figure 1 may not be displayed (or vice versa).

  Further, after the jackpot is over, the hold may be displayed regardless of the game state (probability change / time saving / normal) and the type of special figure.

  Further, during the display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error, a read-ahead hold icon (for example, a read-ahead hold icon shown in FIG. 856 (f2)) may be displayed as the hold icon. May be

  With such a configuration, even when the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) is occurring, the pre-reading pending icon may be displayed, so until the salesclerk releases the first error. It may be possible to have a period of.

  Further, since the prefetching hold icon is displayed, it may be possible to prompt cancellation of the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error).

  The pre-reading advance notice display may be performed during the display of the symbol stop display during the occurrence of the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error). In this case, the look-ahead notice display may be a look-ahead notice display corresponding to the increased hold. In addition, the pre-reading notice display of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning may be displayed.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of display is an error display,

  The display unit is a unit that may display a first error display (for example, the error display E1 shown in FIG. 853 (6)) as the error display, and the first error display is the first error display. The display may be displayed during the occurrence of the error.

  Further, the main control means may be means for determining the first error when the number of incoming balls is larger than the number of discharged balls after a certain round in the big hit is finished.

  Further, the main control unit may be a unit configured to perform control to start the symbol variation control when it is determined that the first error has been resolved.

  Further, the discharge sensor is a unit composed of a plurality of sensors, and one sensor of the plurality of sensors is a first discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO1), and One of the sensors is a second discharge sensor (for example, an out switch SO2), and the number of discharges is the number of game balls detected by the first discharge sensor and the second discharge sensor. It may be a number obtained by adding the number of detected game balls.

  The number of discharge sensors may be one, two, or three or more.

  Further, the ball entrance sensor may be a unit composed of one sensor.

  The number of ball entrance sensors may be one, two, or three or more.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, a special winning opening discharge excess error), and the second error is the number of discharges, It is an error indicating that the number is larger than the number, the main control means, even when it is determined that the second error, may start the symbol variation control after the big hit ends It may be a means.

  For example, the main control means may start the symbol variation control when there is a hold after the jackpot is over, even if it is determined that the error is the second error.

  Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.

  Further, even if the first error occurs in the big hit, the big hit may be configured to continue.

  For example, even if the first error occurs in a certain round of jackpot, it may proceed to the next round effect (in the case of the final round, jackpot end effect). Further, the main control means may be means for continuing the big hit control until the big hit ends when the first error occurs in a certain round of the big hit.

  Further, the main control means may be means that does not start the symbol variation control when there is no hold when the big hit ends.

  In the above embodiment, even if the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error) occurs, the game state does not have to change (game control is not performed, or the special figure changing operation is interrupted). You don't have to).

  Further, the cancellation of the first error (for example, the special winning opening winning excess error) may be automatically canceled after a certain period of time has elapsed since the detection of the first error.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an effect that is started when a certain number of items are held may be performed. This effect is, for example, in a winning-order winning model equipped with a starting opening unit (eight chucker) that includes a sorting device that alternately sorts special maps 1 and 2 and displays a hold icon when eight holds are accumulated. The effect of changing the number, the effect of notifying that eight holds have been accumulated in the speaker 120 or the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect of notifying that the effect of having eight holds accumulated from the next change will be notified. and so on.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the music output during the big hit is also output as it is even in the variation of the symbols after the big hit ends, it continues as it is even during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error). You may output the said music. Here, during the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error), the volume of the song during the big hit may be output as it is for control purposes, but may be output as it is with the volume being reduced. You may. Further, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the music after releasing the first error (for example, a special winning opening winning excess error).

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention has the first control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and the second control means (for example, the first control means 300). 1 sub-control unit 400), and the first control means is a means capable of executing control for transmitting a plurality of types of commands to the second control means, One kind of command of the kinds of commands is an error-related command, the first control means is a means capable of judging a plurality of kinds of errors, and one kind of the plurality of kinds of errors Is a first error (for example, an error in which the operation of the main control unit 300 does not stop such as a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a vibration error, a switch non-connection error), and the first control means is Judged as the first error In this case, the first control unit is a unit for setting a first error flag, and the first control unit prepares to transmit the error-related command to the second control unit (hereinafter, “transmission preparation process (for example, , Device control processing (step S329) of the main controller timer interrupt processing in FIG. 817) may be performed every first cycle, and the first control means is In the state where the first error flag is set, when the first cycle is reached, it is means for executing the transmission preparation process of the first error command as the error-related command. It is a characteristic game console.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic control means.

  That is, since the first error command (for example, the error command for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error) can be periodically transmitted, the transmission load of the first control means can be reduced in some cases.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of errors is a second error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error or other error in which the main control operation is stopped), and the first control means is If the second error flag is set, when the second error flag is set, the second control unit is a unit that sets a second error flag when the second error flag is set. It may be means for executing the transmission preparation process of the second error command.

  Further, the first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the transmission preparation process of the second error command without waiting for the arrival of the first cycle.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to set whether to wait for the error command transmission cycle or not to wait depending on the type of error, so there is an error that should immediately send the error command to the second control means. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the transmission load of the first control means while dealing with the case where it occurs.

  The first control means is a means capable of executing control for outputting a signal to be output to the outside of the gaming table (hereinafter, referred to as an “external signal (for example, security information signal)”), The one control unit may be a unit that executes control for outputting the external signal when the first error flag is set.

  The first control means may output the security information signal but not the other signal (other external terminal board signal) when the first error flag is set. Further, the period of the first cycle (subcommand transmission cycle in the main control unit 300) may be shorter or longer than the period (for example, 30 seconds) in which the security information signal is output, and the same. May be.

  Further, the first control unit may be a unit configured to execute the control for outputting the external signal without waiting for the arrival of the first cycle.

  According to such a configuration, the external signal is transmitted without waiting for the first cycle (subcommand transmission cycle in the main control unit 300), so that the shop side notices that the gaming table is abnormal. Sometimes it can be easier.

  Further, the first control means is a means in which an interrupt process (for example, a main controller timer interrupt process) may be executed in a second cycle, and the interrupt process is the progress of the game. The second cycle may be repeated N times to be the first cycle.

  Further, a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is an error display. (For example, error display E1), the second control means, when receiving the first error command, displays the first error display as the error display on the display means (for example, FIG. 845 (6 It is also possible to use a means for displaying an error display E1) by the characters "radio wave detected" shown in ().

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to easily notice that an error has occurred.

  There may be an error displaying the error display and an error not displaying the error display. Further, the first control means executes a control of transmitting an error release command as the error related command when the first cycle is reached in a state where it is determined that the first error has been released. It may be a means to do.

  Next, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 864 to 936. In addition, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 864 to 936 are used only in the description using FIGS. 864 to 936, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 936, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 864 to 936 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, and a firing. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a light source having an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. The ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 866) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136, which is built-in. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player's balance return to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 864 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-hand hit button capable of maximizing the firing strength by pushing down the ball firing handle 134 may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 864, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 866.

  FIG. 865 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 864 seen from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 constituting the main control section 300 (see FIG. 867) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 867) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 867) that performs control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 867), and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop staff, A firing board case 176 accommodating a firing board 174 forming a firing control section 630 (see FIG. 867) for performing control processing relating to the firing of a ball, a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 867) for supplying power to various electric game machines. And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power supply is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 866 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game to be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 performs notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, is configured not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "controlled state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 865 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 864 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 865 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided near the second special figure starting port 232, and a pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 are combined. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning a prize port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. In addition, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 866 as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. . Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball caught by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 864, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 866 correspond to effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of this game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 867. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting opening, the winning opening, and the variable winning opening, and the front frame door is opened. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display parts 328 (for example, the universal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy middle lamp 222 and the like, and various kinds of opening and closing drives for a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the counter value stored in the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is latched. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), and the like. The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. Image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 is read based on signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. To the basic circuit 502, a gaming circuit lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the gaming board lamp 532, and a gaming underframe lamp driving for controlling the gaming underframe lamp 542. The circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

  Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout controller 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout controller 600 outputs the door opening information to the main controller 300.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of a firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of a ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110, based on a control signal that indicates a firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 868 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 868 (a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 868 (a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while you can expect to win balls in 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot pattern. There are 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) designs that can be expected to win balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, which is 8 of the 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. While you can expect to win balls in four rounds of the round, you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, and "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design. "G" is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation in which winning of a ball cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that directs the player in a manner in which it is difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected will continue at the start of a jackpot. This is a jackpot that creates a form in which the player is encouraged whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue is continued when it becomes the eye or the ninth round).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is that the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special-purpose 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the power-chew open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered tube increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric power support state for one winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric power support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and returns for 2 seconds). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening times, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed so that the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained, and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric support state is maintained, and the 101st non-powered game is performed. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without electric power support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric power support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 868 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening of the variable winning port 234 in the big hitting game in which "Special figure G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 868 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 868 (b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. E "). The "special map a" is a 15R jackpot design, is a 15R probability variation jackpot design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of the 15 rounds, and the "special map b" is a 15R jackpot pattern, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and "Special Drawing d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

  FIG. 868 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" decoration 1-decoration 1 " Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop displaying "decoration 7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) which is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol such as “special symbol I” or “special symbol f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, the separation). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this “variable display of decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 868 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 indicates that all seven segments are lit and one segment in the center is lit. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 868 (d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions are the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable display of the universal figure.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 867 will be described using FIG. 869. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 867 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. In addition, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures, which is divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win / no determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for general drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the special figure starting information storage unit, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and the starting information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 867 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 869 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 865 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 865. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating processing, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 870. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 867 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 867 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 867 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for changing / stopping displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating / stop display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 234, 226 and the starting holes 230, 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each prize hole or for each starting hole is set. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 867 are made up of 1 byte, and the bit 7 has strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 868 (c)) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 868 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinction drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off and the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on / off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( Any one of the special symbols f) is confirmed and displayed.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234, the solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts and closes the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) and starts at a timing when the door member is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one single opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 2 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, when the number of special game 2 variable game holding is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game holding are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is prioritized over the special figure variation game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-match by using the hit / miss judgment table stored in the table (judgment judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of special figure 1 and special figure 2, so comparison is made with priority variation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holdings.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update The special process and the special figure-related lottery process may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Further, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, final effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information for specifying the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as a number, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning ports 234, 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

  Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, or the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 869 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  FIG. 871 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning / disapproval determination processing, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 872 (a) to 872 (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are special figures. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, based on various flags in the RAM 308, is non-electric power support being performed?

Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (group of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning / judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 871, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. However, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 872 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 872 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 872 (a), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 872 (a), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Off) is stored," special drawing A "(15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area" holding 3 "as stop symbol information, and" special drawing I "is stored in the storage area" holding 4 "as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 872 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 872 (b), the pre-reading result storage section for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the number of reserveable special figure 2 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 872 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 872 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 872 (c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 872 (c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result and the fluctuation timer number (fluctuation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 873, for a win / fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 870, see FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 873 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 873 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win / loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state when the special figure 1 is determined, the high probability table for decision determination shown in FIG. 873 (a) is referred to, and when the special figure low probability state is determined. 873 (b), the low probability table for determination of success / failure is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referred win / loss judgment table and the obtained random number value, the win / loss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the hit determination of the special figure 2, if it is in the high probability state of the special figure, the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 873 (a) is referred to, and the high probability state of the special figure is in the low probability state. In this case, the low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 873 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value indicated by the referred win / loss determination table, the win / loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit determination result.

  FIG. 873 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the result of the big hit judgment is out of range, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 873 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value shown in the referred small hit judgment table. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / disapproval determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 870. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 874. Here, FIG. 874 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 874 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 874 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the hit / miss result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit / no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit / no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

  In addition, in the case of determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 874 (b), based on the hit / miss result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit / damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 875 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 875 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 875 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 875 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 875 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, so that the information of the image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input, and when the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), If not (step S709: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the processing ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 876 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 876 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of the input / output port, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing shifts to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813, which follows step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Then, it returns to step S803.

  FIG. 876 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 876 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, update processing of the random number value for effect is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 877 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 877, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 877 (a), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during the symbol change of special figure 2. While the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is displayed blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 877 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided.

  The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamps 218. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamps 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become older hold icons, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

  In FIG. 877 (a), two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the two special drawing 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 877 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 877 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), and thus it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. It should be noted that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 877 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking → starting or erasing the moving animation of the holding icon → starting variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

  In FIG. 877 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decoration are displayed. The design has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 877 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 has started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 877 (d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 8 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. At the time when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or until that time, the second hold icon. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 877 (f).

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 877 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 and the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 877 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 8 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 877 (j), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display “Chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero.

  In FIG. 877 (k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but the entry state may be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 877 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the pending icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 877 (n). , Has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 877 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 8 (o) is a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  FIG. 878 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 877.

  In FIG. 878 (p) continuing from FIG. 877 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 878 (s). In FIG. 878 (s), the main character wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 878 (t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from before. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 878 (v), the combination of decorative patterns of 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 878 (v) is lit. In FIG. 878 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 878 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable variation big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in FIG. 877 (l) with a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), another case of continuation from FIG. 878 (t) In 878 (u '), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 878 (v') following FIG. 878 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 ”is a combination of jackpot decorative patterns. Then, in FIG. 878 (w ′) subsequent to FIG. 878 (v ′), a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 879 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case following that of FIG. 878 (q).

  In FIG. 879 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 877 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 879 (b). In FIG. 879 (b), the main character is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 870 (c), like the FIG. 878 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 879 (d), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 879 (e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of Toku-zu 1 is turned on, and the combination of missing decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, an erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 880 and 881. Here, FIG. 880 (a) is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 880 (b) is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display region information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of the notice icon being consumed, and FIG. 9D is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of increasing the notice icon. Further, FIG. 881 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the pre-change notice icon, and FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the post-change notice icon.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 880 (a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of noticeable icons and the number of hold icons that can be displayed may be the same. Further, the number of areas forming the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 880 (a), a notice icon I6 of a hat having a hat pattern is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice box second display area YA2 displays a thousand box. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes made up of a design is displayed, the notice icon I10 of a fan made up of a design of a fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is shown. A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is indicated. It is blank. Which advance notice icon is displayed in each area in the advance notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the advance notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 880 (b). It is determined. In this embodiment, one advance notice icon is displayed for each area, but two or more advance notice icons may be displayed for each area.

  As shown in FIG. 880 (a), each notice icon displayed in each region (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display region 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 880 (c), for example. Controlled to be done. This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, 8 seconds after the variation display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 880 (a) is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is changed. A corresponding effect may be executed. After that, when the variation ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the variation icon display area 280, and the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 880 (a), the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) is moved toward the change icon display area 280. Along with the start of, the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2) is started, and 4 seconds after the symbol variation is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and thereafter, The effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the SP reach was started, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be consumed, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds elapse after all the decorative patterns are in the temporarily stopped state, the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the exhausted fan advance notice icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon notifies the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 880 (a), the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 are, for example, timings shown in FIG. 880 (d). It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 880 (a) was started, the lord appearance appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the hall effect that increases the notice icon is executed. To be done. In this hall effect, an effect is displayed in which the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, the DJ effect that the DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the hall production is executed and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons increasing in the symbol variation display which is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons increasing in the symbol variation display which is a big hit. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of sync may be one at the maximum, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the contents of effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 881. As for the notice icon, there are those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear as shown in FIG. 881 (a) and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 881 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 881 (a), the first notice icon I1 and the second notice icon I2 of the second lord are displayed in the notice icon whose corresponding contents are not clear. There is a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first notice icon I1 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in white, and the reliability of the big hit is weak. Further, the second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in green, and the reliability of the big hit is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the lord's face silhouette is represented in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either weak to strong. When the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, and the third notice icon I3 arrive at a predetermined change display timing (for example, the increase display timing of the notice icon), It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 881 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 881 (b) at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136. The first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136.

  In this way, the first reminder icon I1, the second reminder icon I2, the third reminder icon I3, and the first button reminder icon I4 start the symbol variation, which is the target of prefetching. It may be displayed before it is displayed, and it may function as a prefetch notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed accompanying the notice icon. When the second palace's notice icon I2 and the third lord's notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 881 (b), the notice icon (the notice icon after change) whose contents of the corresponding effect are clear include a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, and a ribbon notice icon. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by a bancho character, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gasse pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo continuous production, for example, as will be described later, when the pseudo continuous production starts, a character with a length appears, but the display mode of the character with the length is different from the normal one (for example, the length becomes aura). The display state is wrapped) to notify that the degree of reliability is strong. Note that, for example, in spite of the second pseudo-reproduction, the third-time pseudo-reproduction may be informed to indicate that the reliability is strong. In addition, in the pseudo continuous production of the weak pattern, the appearing length character is displayed in a normal display mode to notify that the reliability is weak. Further, the pseudo continuous effect of the gasse pattern is an effect of performing a false display while pretending that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, as described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “Continued”. There is a case. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black letters with “question” or “question mark”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates a shuriken thrown by the Oniwaban (ninja) character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, there may be a case where the notice effect being executed is changed to the strong notice effect with high reliability through the freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the shuriken notice icon I7, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the reliability is high. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as "Chamme". Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon that imitates a ribbon worn by Princess Chibi, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the background may shift to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed in which the displayed background is changed to one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (stage change weak. Production). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the text notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “STETCHEN”. There is a case. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “STETCHEN”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  Thousands of box notice icon I9 is a notice icon that imitates a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character toward the farmer, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is consumed during the execution of the weak reach production with low reliability, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach transfer effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is digested after executing the weak cut-in notification with low reliability, and then the strong cut-in notification with high reliability is executed (advance notification promotion). Production). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, if the big hit is confirmed, the pattern A may be displayed as “large board behavior”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is strong, the pattern A may be displayed as “promotion” in red or black. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “promotion”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, any one of the confirmation effect, the reach transition effect, and the notice promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is confirmed as a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the big hit is finalized or a premier reach in which the big hit is fixed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after the out-of-reach is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed in association with the fan advance notice icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, but the exhaustion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one of the second button notice icons I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation acceptance period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. There may be a case where any one of the notice icon I8, the notice icon I8 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan changes to a digested display, and a corresponding effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing any of the notice icons.

  In the present embodiment, the change notice of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice display of the notice icon. It is also possible to perform a display for erasing the notice icon (“No” notice icon shown in item 5 of FIG. 881 (b): elimination effect). In this effect, it is notified that the variation is out of alignment. In other words, it is a preliminary announcement indicating that the pattern is a loss confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the delete effect is executed, a big hit may occur.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 882 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 882, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a public figure display device 210, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a universal figure display device. The figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 877, and, for example, displays the display result of the fourth symbol by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the game board 200, and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a serves as a symbol variation notification area of a general figure, a symbol variation notification area of special figure 1, and a symbol variation notification area of special figure 2. The LED in the area in which the quadrangle figure is displayed is lit up while the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, but is blinked or turned off during the variation of the symbol of the universal figure. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the LED of the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, it is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, it is blinked or turned off. In this way, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 882 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. In FIG. 882 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display regions 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 882 (1), the first special map display device 212 is performing variable display of symbols, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols. At the same time, on the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

  Further, in FIG. 882 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode). In addition, in this effect example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lights in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by 1 to 3 and is held. It is shown that the number has become three. Further, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as described later. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1. The display mode is a round, non-patterned, white display mode. The same applies to the following description.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (3), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 882 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is further performed, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not changed yet.

  In FIG. 882 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 882 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of the prefetch. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (7), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notification icon at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 882 (10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to give a notice that the pseudo-relation effect will be executed in the future.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 882 (11) to (12), a display in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 883 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 882.

  In FIG. 883 (14) continuing from FIG. 882 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is no change in the hold icon or the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 883 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 883 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (17), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (19), and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is shown in the notice icon third display area. The fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in YA3, and is displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 882 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 883 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is further performed, but no change has occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 883 (22), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 883 (23), in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. As shown in FIG. 883 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of a hat are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the displayed notice icon, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 883 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 883 (26), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 883 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  FIG. 884 is a diagram showing, in stages, a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 883.

  In FIG. 884 (28) continuing from FIG. 883 (27), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the end of the hat notice icon I6, and is displayed in a stopped state. The effect display that pushes up the design is performed to notify the player that the pseudo-relation effect may be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, " It may be configured such that the reach state is formed by the decoration 1 ”) and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 884 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo continuous symbol representing the lord's character is displayed. The display is moving slowly from the top to the bottom.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 884 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-repetition will be executed. In addition, if the pseudo-relational pattern is not stopped and displayed, and the frame is framed out downward, the pseudo-relation is not started, and the combination of decorative symbols that are out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not consumed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 884 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 884 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the reach effect has not started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 884 (34), the display that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started to be started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 884 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 884 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 884 (37), and thereafter, in FIG. In response to the end of the notice icon I6, the bancho character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. Is informed to the player that there is a possibility that it will be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 884 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from "decoration 1" to "decoration 1". The decoration is changed to "2", a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves slowly from the upper side to the lower side is displayed. At this time, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is erased, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the “pseudo × 2” character information may be changed while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. In this effect example, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 884 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed to inform that the pseudo-link will be executed. In this embodiment, as the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted in one pattern variation display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed and the pseudo consecutive effect is performed once, and when the two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo consecutive effect is performed twice, the hat is used. It is more likely to be a big hit if the two notice icons I6 of the above are digested, and only two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed. It can be said that when the pseudo continuous production is performed three times, it is more likely to be a big hit if the three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 884 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.

  FIG. 885 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 885 (43) continuing from FIG. 884 (42), the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. Here, the reach effect is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 885 (44), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduced. Is displayed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 885 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 885 (45) shows a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene starts.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 885 (46), the display that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand box is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 885 (47), and above the notice icon I9 of the thousand box which is enlarged and displayed. The character display of “promotion” is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a production with higher reliability. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is erased together with the display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 885 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 885 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed is slightly darkened, and the lord's character appears in a cut-in display, A display for cutting off the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 885 (50), the background turns dark.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 885 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect) is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 885 (51), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display “Is it too hot?” Is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 885 (52). At the timing shown in, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 885 (53), the character display “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 885 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 885 (55), as shown in FIG. 885 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208. It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 885 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  FIG. 886 is a diagram showing, in stages, a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 885.

  In FIG. 886 (58) continued from FIG. 885 (57), all of the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 886 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 886 (60). . That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 886 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to inform that the big hit is settled. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  After that, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased at the timing of FIG. 886 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 886 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols, which have been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is restarted and re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 886 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 886 (65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 886 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special figure display device 212, 15R probability variation big hit "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display region 285 is exhausted to execute the re-fluctuation effect and become a big hit. However, the fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display region. If it is not displayed in 285, the re-variation effect may not be performed and the display result of the outlier may be derived. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is not performed, this reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of the type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols It can be said that is out of range. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice production can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to be displayed in the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the description has been made regarding the one in which the notice icon is consumed only during the execution of the pattern variation display that is the subject of the notice ahead of time, and the effect corresponding to the noticed icon that has been consumed is executed. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be consumed and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons exhausted in the pattern variation display subject to the prefetching notice and the number of notice icons consumed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the readahead notice are made different. Or they may be the same.

  Next, another effect example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 887 to 889. Here, FIGS. 887 to 889 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 887 to 889, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  887 (8a) to FIG. 10 (10a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to 882 (10). That is, in FIG. 887 (8a), an effect display is shown in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 887 (9a-1), the thrown first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 887 (9a-2), after the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 887 (10a). Then, the exploding first lord's notice icon I1 changes to a hat notice icon I6, and the lord's character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icons and displays a happy expression. Even with this example of effect, the player expects that the effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 887 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to (882). That is, in FIG. 887 (8b), the effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed.

  Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 887 (9b). When the effect button 136 is operated from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the time the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon The notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord are changed. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the big hit indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the big hit. May work, and the staging effect may be enhanced. Note that the period from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be disabled during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. When the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the notice effect of the notice icon was displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the effect button 136 is operated when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice that was scheduled to be displayed. The effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 was operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

  FIGS. 887 (8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to (8). That is, in FIG. 887 (8c), as in the case of FIG. 882 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 887 (9c), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute an increase effect that fails to increase the number of notice icons. Note that the gallet increase effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

  FIGS. 887 (7d) to (9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (7) to 882 (9). That is, in FIG. 887 (7d), similar to FIG. 882 (7), a state in which the lord's character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position is shown. Then, in FIG. 887 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 for hats but also notice icons I6 for three hats are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. Note that the effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 887 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, it may be possible to improve the sense of expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed by increasing the number of the notice icons at once, and to enhance the effect. It should be noted that, for example, as shown in FIG. 887 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that the pseudo link is performed. It may be possible to give a notice that the big hit is settled because the effect is guaranteed to be executed three times. The notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

  Note that in this case, as shown in FIG. 887 (9d ′), some or all of the three trailing hat notice icons I6 thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gall increase effect that causes a frame out.

  FIG. 887 (7e) to FIG. 8 (9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (7) to 882 (9). That is, in FIG. 887 (7 e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 882 (7), the lord's character YM having the notice icon I 6 for one hat, the notice icon I 9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I 10 for a fan in addition to the notice icon I 6 for one hat. Is displayed to be moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. You may make it display only. Then, in FIG. 887 (8e), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Note that the effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 887 (9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Displayed respectively. As described above, also in this example of effect, it is possible to increase the plurality of types of notice icons with one increase effect. Therefore, since the number of notice icons increases at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notices can be increased, so that the effect can be further enhanced. There are cases.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 887 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays. It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gall increase effect that causes a frame out from the left side of the area.

  FIG. 887 (12f-1) to FIG. 12 (2f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (12). That is, in FIG. 887 (12f-1), similarly to FIG. 882 (12), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed with the notice icon I6 of the hat being displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 887 (12f-2), the decorative pattern of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot is over.

  FIG. 888 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (8). That is, in FIG. 888 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the look-ahead notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 888 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (8). That is, in FIG. 888 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is set at a predetermined position on the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative pattern display device 208), and thereby the number of holdings may be displayed. The effect holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400, and is, for example, lighted in a default light emission mode (e.g., is lit in white) and is also a pre-reading notice light emission. Drive control can be performed according to the mode (for example, lighting while switching between 7 colors). Note that, in FIG. 888 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the holding lamp of No. 2, the second holding lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 888 (8i) to (9i-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to (8). That is, in FIG. 888 (8i), as in the case of FIG. 882 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 888 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 888 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display that changes to (holding change effect) is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat notice icon I6 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285 and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 889 (9i-2 ′), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect is held using the hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat drops below the display area, the light emitting mode of the first holding lamp of the special diagram 1 may be changed to the light emitting mode of the pre-reading notice.

  FIGS. 888 (8j) to (9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to (8). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 888 (8j), it differs from FIG. 882 (8). It is shown that not the lord's character YM but the DJ character BY having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 888 (8j), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I6 of the hat. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 888 (9j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and changes the hat's notice icon I6 to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is left on is displayed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). With the configuration, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 888 (8k) to (9k) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 882 (8) to (8). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 888 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 888 (9k), the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-box that is held is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 888 (9k ′), the DJ character is placed on a layer behind the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to pass the notice icon behind. You may display as if you are doing. Further, as shown in FIG. 888 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a thousand box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. You may make it perform the effect display which puts the notice icon I9 in the notice icon 1st display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect.

  FIG. 888 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 882 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 888 (12l), the character representations corresponding to the respective notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the word "Continue", and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. "Promotion" is additionally displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is additionally displayed with "Blessing" and the notice icon fourth display. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 is "STETCHEN". The characters are additionally displayed, and the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 has “Continue” and “Question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is predicted to be executed thereafter.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 888 (12l ') or the same figure (12l' '), some or all of the characters additionally displayed in the notice icon are changed to "question mark" to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon will be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the effect display in which the big hit is determined by the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed is executed, for example, FIG. 888. As shown in (12l ′ ″), when three notice icons I6 of the hat with the character notation of “continuation” added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit is confirmed four times. It may be possible to give a notice that the effect display including the continuous effect is performed. When the character additionally displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character "promotion" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for announcing that the result of the symbol variation display when the is exhausted is a big hit confirmation (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the above-described production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord's character YM and the DJ character BY, but in the production example shown in FIG. 889, the notice icon is increased by the display of the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 889 (A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, the notice icon pattern imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 889 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 889 (A2), the hat notice icon pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The word "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon pattern of this hat, and when the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is informed that the notice icons are increased and displayed. are doing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 889 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative pattern of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is off. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 889 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 889 (A1), the decorative pattern of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. , Normal reach production is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 889 (B2), the notice icon icon of the first palace imitating the notice icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example of production shown in FIG. 889 (B2), the character notation of "stock" is added to the notice icon design of the first lord, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that the notice icon will be increased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 889 (B3), the notice icon pattern of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 889 (B4), the decorative design of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result is a display defect. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. Needless to say, the changed notice icon is not limited to the hat notice icon I6 and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing of changing the notice icon is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, and for example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The icon may not change until it is exhausted. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of the above-mentioned notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 890 to 893. Here, FIG. 890 to FIG. 893 are diagrams showing step by step another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 890 to 893, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  890 (38m) to (40m-3) in the figure show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 884 (38) to (40). In FIG. 890 (38 m) to (39 m), the same effect as in FIG. 884 (38) to (39) is performed, but in FIG. 890 (40 m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at low speed. Although the pseudo-relational pattern appears in a variably displayed manner, after that, as shown in FIG. 890 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-relational pattern comes to the stop display position of the decorative pattern, the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-relational pattern. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 890 (40m-3), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed as a temporary stop, and fluctuations are displayed. , It is informed that it is the result of the stop display. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  890 (23n) to (24n) in the figure show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 883 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 890 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed starts, but as shown in FIG. 890 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is performed and that the effect that has been digested is not performed is notified.

  FIGS. 890 (23o) to (24o-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 883 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 890 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 890 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 of No. is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 890 (24o-2), the combination of decorative patterns that are out of order without the pseudo continuous effect being started (in FIG. 890 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2") is displayed temporarily to show the fluctuation of the swing, and then the stop display is performed to notify that the result is a deviation. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

  FIGS. 890 (22p) to (23p) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 883 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 890 (22p), when, for example, 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, in FIG. 890 (23p), the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon Instead of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1), another notice icon may be displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 890 (23p), the effect that the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icons may not be sequentially consumed from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are consumed in the order in which they are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons that are stocked later are consumed first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon that has been stocked later is first consumed, the big hit may be easily made, or conversely, the big hit may not be easily made. In addition, the digestion order of the notice icon may be determined regardless of the stock order. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the digestion order of the notice icon. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the jackpot is settled by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order. For example, a notice icon I6 of a hat and a shuriken A rule may be set such that when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order, the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, the player may be given an incentive to find out the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, which may improve the game motivation.

  890 (24q-1) to (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 883 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 890 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested to the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy is generated, as shown in FIG. 890 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left side, respectively. You may At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left side may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as when the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

  891 (Aa) to FIG. 891 (Ae) show effect examples in the case where the notice effect of the notice icon is increased and then the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 891 (Aa), after the shuriken's notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing shown in 891 (Ab), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 891 (Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 891 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon by the lord's character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 891 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted to leave a blank notice icon third. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, the increasing number of the notice icons may be displayed in the notice icon display area that is blank due to the notice icon being consumed.

  FIG. 891 (B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks appear in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 891 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are consumed, the lord's character YM is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, the display of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to the above-described order, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Further, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of displayed notice icons are different. For example, when an increasing number of notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, which is the rightmost area of the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. It may be suggested to be displayed in the display area 285, or may be suggested to have the highest reliability of the big hit.

  FIG. 891 (C) shows an example of the effect when the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of the one-time symbol variable display. That is, as shown in FIG. 891 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, It is displayed that the notice YI of the hat Y, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 when the notice YI of the character YM is increased. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is the notice icon increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. In this manner, the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during one execution of the symbol variation display. At this time, the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap with the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the notice effect of the notice icon is started, the digest effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digest effect and the increase of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an empty area at the time of starting the variable display of symbols, or after the variable display of symbols is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is increased. The area may be blank before the start.

  FIG. 891 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 886 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 891 (59r), before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inspiring whether or not the notice icon is consumed is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon that is the target of digestion starts shaking and changes, and whether or not the notice icon is digested is determined. I am trying to fuel it. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 886 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 891 (59r), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is erased without being consumed, thereafter, the result is displayed by stopping the display with a combination of the decorative decorative patterns. You may notify that.

  FIGS. 891 (59s) to (60s) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 886 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 891 (59s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand-box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1", the fan notice icon is displayed. When I10 is digested, it gives a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 891 (60s), when another notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is digested, it is left as it is. The combination of the decorative patterns may be used to notify that the display will be stopped and not displayed.

  FIGS. 891 (23t) to (32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 883 (23) to 884 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 891 (23t), in this example of presentation, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the noticed icon that has been consumed is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 891 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 is started. Is displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 891 (28t) to FIG. 891 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. Note that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 may start after the notice effect of the notice icon starts, or before the notice effect of the notice icon starts. It may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the notice effect of the notice icon is finished or before the notice effect of the notice icon is finished. Good, it may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. May be the same as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon is started, or to the digested notice icon. It may be at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or may be erased at the end of the symbol fluctuation in which the notice icon is erased (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol), or during digestion. Timing at which the notification icon display area YA0 is deleted (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digesting notice icon display area YA0 are deleted at the time of FIG. 885 (44), or only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is deleted. Etc.) may be deleted. In addition, when a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one-time symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been digested first is the notice icon A. The effect may be erased after or at the same time as the end of the effect, and no notification icon may be displayed in the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next may be started. May be deleted at the same time as or after being started, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digesting notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. The notice icon a may be left as the history even during the digestion of the notice icon B, or the notice icon A and the notice icon may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or a simultaneous island effect) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice during digestion is in progress. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

  FIGS. 892 (Aa) to 892 (Ae) show an example of effect in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 892 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are respectively consumed. The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digestion effects of the respective notice icons may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

  After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 892 (Ab), they are enlarged and additionally displayed with a character display. . Specifically, the character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stetchen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the completion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 892 (Ac), the shoji closes, and after the character Chibihime's character CH appears on the front side thereof, as shown in FIG. 892 (Ad), the shoji opens and the moon appears. The display of the background (moon background) showing how the universe is viewed from the surface starts. In addition, during execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to and reduce the display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 892 (Ae), the reduced-sized decorative design is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the notice of the hat notice icon I6, the Bancho character BC. Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. .

  In this example of the effect, the start timings of the effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIGS. 892 (66u-1) to (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 886 (66). That is, in FIG. 892 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 892 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 892 (66u-3), after the jackpot round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the big hit game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that informs that the probability variation big hit is confirmed). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted during the execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icon is consumed, for example, it may have a meaning indicating that it may be promoted. In this way, even with the same notice icon, when it is exhausted during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the variable display, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. .

  892 (Ba) to (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 892 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the hold is exhausted and symbol fluctuation. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 892 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 892 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage is changed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if it is not deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 892 (22v-1) to (23v) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 883 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 892 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 892 (22v-2), a lord's character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. Notify in advance the type of notice icon After that, as shown in FIG. 892 (23v), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is consumed is started. Even if the type of the notice icon to be digested is announced in advance, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon that was announced in advance is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon given in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 892 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 883 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 892 (22w), after the variable display of the symbols is started, the notice icon that may be consumed is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the use of the notice icon. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the banquet character BC appears and the pseudo-relational effect is executed, and other effects are not executed. Although the production corresponding to is executed and the other productions are not executed, for example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the bancho character BC does not appear, and the princess character appears. The big hit may be settled when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called a break in the law) such as when the big hit is settled.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is predetermined and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is displayed again after the probability variation state or the time saving state is finished. May be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured not to be carried over even after the probability variation state or the time saving state is completed.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect that gives advance notice of the contents of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the notice icon that is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 893 (Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 893 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 893 (Ac-1), the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach that corresponds to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 893 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 893 (Ac-2), the enlarged character YM3 of the lord's character is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Tonosama Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 893 (Ab-3), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, thereafter, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 893 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to Princess Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit which the notice icon means corresponds, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach effects is configured in the order of princess reach> lord's reach> bancho reach. There is. Note that when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a lord's character that has been enlarged and displayed after the notice icon I6 of the hat has disappeared) appears (in the case where a so-called law break occurs). May be configured so that a jackpot is confirmed. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the notice icons so that the combined notice is executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a peculiar effect (due to multiple digestion) for digesting a plurality of notice icons, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are consumed rather than a notice icon is consumed. May be configured to have high reliability.

  Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 893 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the variable display of symbols is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of consuming the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 893 (Bc), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter and the effect button 136 is displayed. It notifies that the operation can be accepted, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 893 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the above-mentioned button reach effect is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Then, at the timing of FIG. 893 (Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 893 (Cc). As described above, the projected button image 136b is displayed in a manner in which the effect button 136 is projected. That is, it is shown that the button has been promoted to a button reach effect with higher reliability of the big hit.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 894 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 895 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 894. FIG. 896 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 895, and FIG. 897 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 898 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 897.

  It should be noted that in FIGS. 894 (1) to 895 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat was used as the notice icon used in the effect of increasing the notice icon, and changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Except for the points, it is the same as FIGS. 882 (1) to 883 (14), and therefore description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, regarding the effect performed between FIG. 895 (14) and FIG. 895 (20), all the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 883 (15) to (19) in FIG. 883 except for.

  In FIG. 895 (20), a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 895 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 895 (22), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 895 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. In addition, the display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as shown in FIG. 895 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is not limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 895 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 895 (25), the character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 895 (26), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. It should be noted that when the digested notice icon is re-displayed at the original position, it may be displayed so that it can be recognized that it has been digested, for example, by changing the display area where the digested notice icon is displayed. The display may be grayed out, or the character information “done” may be added. Alternatively, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 895 (27) to 896 (33) are that the notice icon I6 of the digested cap is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. This is the same as FIGS. 883 (27) to 884 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, so here Is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 896 (34), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is consumed. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 896 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As indicated by 896 (36), a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged and displayed hat.

  After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, at the timing shown in FIG. 896 (37), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 896 (38) to (45) are that the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. 884 (38) to FIG. 885 (except that the notice icon displayed in the third icon display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as that of (45), the description thereof is omitted here.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 896 (46), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, a display is made in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice box I9 of a thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 896 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the notice icon I9 of the displayed 1000-box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production with a higher degree of reliability will be performed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "promotion" that was added to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 896 (48). Then, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  After that, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 897 (49). In the present production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 897 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the production display such as the occurrence of the power failure is performed, the strong reach with high reliability is displayed. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in the present effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 896 (50-1), after the character display "Is it a chance?" Is displayed on the dark background in the decorative pattern display device 208. 897 (50-2), the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 897 (51), the character display “Is it too hot?” Is displayed, and then the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 897 (52). After that, as shown in FIG. 897 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 897 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 897 (55), when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 897 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 897 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

  In FIG. 897 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 897 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 897 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, when the first notice icon I1 of the hall moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 897 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to inform that the big hit is settled. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the fan notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 898 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display region of the notice icon display region 285. A display for moving to YA4 is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 898 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols, which have been fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is restarted and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 898 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 898 (65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 898 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special figure display device 212, 15R probability variation big hit "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 899 to 901. Here, FIG. 899 to FIG. 901 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 899 to 901, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 899 (8a) to (9a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to (89). That is, in FIG. 899 (8a), not the first notice icon I1 of the palace, but the notice icon I3 of the third lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. The same can be done for the second lord's notice icon I2. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 898 (9a), the thrown third palace's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 899 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to (89). That is, in FIG. 899 (8b), as in the case of FIG. 894 (8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 899 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a sloppy increase effect using the lord's notice icon.

  FIGS. 899 (8c) to (9c) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to (89). That is, in FIG. 899 (8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. ing. Note that the effect display may be thrown one by one instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 899 (9c), the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, it may be possible to improve the sense of expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed by increasing the number of the notice icons at once, and to enhance the effect. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is difficult to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability (for example, the first lord's notice). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (prone to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of performance, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first hall) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different degrees of reliability may be increased at the same time. The notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 899 (9 c ′), some or all of the three first palace's thrown notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gall increase effect that causes a frame-out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 899 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 894 (8). That is, in FIG. 899 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM notifies the first lord's notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the look-ahead notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 899 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 894 (8). That is, in FIG. 899 (8f), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. Note that, in FIG. 899 (8f), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the holding lamp of No. 2, the second holding lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 899 (8g) to (9g-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8). That is, in FIG. 899 (8g), as in the case of FIG. 894 (8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 899 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 899 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first person acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to read the advance notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first palace's notice icon I1 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as an opportunity to start the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first lord, for example, the notice change icon having a higher jackpot reliability may be more difficult to execute the hold change effect. Good.

  FIGS. 899 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 894 (12). That is, in FIG. 899 (12h-1), as in the case of FIG. 894 (12), the decorative symbol in the state in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 899 (12h-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot is over.

  FIG. 900 (8i) to FIG. 900 (9i) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 894 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 900 (8i), it differs from FIG. 894 (8). It is shown that the character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, not the character YM of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 900 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 900 (9i), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner, and while holding the notice icon I1 of the first lord's possession, the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). With the configuration, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIG. 900 (8j) to FIG. 9 (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of production shown in FIG. 894 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 900 (8j), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 900 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 900 (9j), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 he / she has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the advance notice icon displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the advance notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 900 (9 j ′), by placing the character BY of DJ on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as passing.

  FIGS. 900 (8k) to (9k) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 894 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285. However, in FIG. 900 (8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 900 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third lord's notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 900 (9k), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display in which the character BY of DJ places the notice icon I3 of the third lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be overlaid on the notice icon I1. That is, an effect of promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon having a low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon having a high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relationship effect is performed.

  FIG. 900 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 894 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 900 (12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area is displayed. The notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the third lord's notice icon I2 is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added to each. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give an expectation to the changed notice icon.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 900 (12l ′), for some of the pre-change notice icons, the type of the post-change notice icon may be given in character notation. For example, the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 has the letter "question mark" added to it, and the notice icon after change cannot be recognized, but the notice icon third display area is displayed. The first palace's notice icon I1 displayed on YA3 is annotated to be changed to the shuriken's notice icon I7 with the character notation "Chan-me" added, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is displayed, is annotated with the wording "Continue" and is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the icon 6th display area YA6 is accompanied by "continuation" and the letter notation of "question mark", and the notice icon I6 of the hat is changed. There is. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 900 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. You may make it add the corresponding character notation only about things.

  901 (8m-1) to FIG. 9 (9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8). That is, in the example of production shown in FIG. 894 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 901 (8m-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 901 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the 1,000-box warning icon I9. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 901 (8m-2), after the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 901 (9 m), the character BY of DJ flies toward the upper left corner, and throws the 1,000-box notice icon I 9 that he has thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the 1,000-box box of the notice icon I9 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA1. According to this effect example, the pre-change notice icon may be overwritten with the post-change notice icon. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed a plurality of times in the symbol variable display. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  901 (8n-1) to FIG. 9 (9n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 894 (8) to 894 (8). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 894 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 901 (8n-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 901 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 901 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the thousand-box notice icon I9 displayed in YA1. In this way, the notice icon after change may be overwritten on the notice icon before change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed a plurality of times in the symbol variable display. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is consumed, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the jackpot reliability is higher when the notice icon after overwriting is consumed than when the notice icon before overwriting is consumed, or it is configured so that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may not be changed.

  Next, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 902. Here, FIG. 902 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 902, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 902 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 902 (A), a lord's character YM2 holding a placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard has a character notation of "I will change", and gives a notice that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

  After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 902 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the first person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 902 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was displayed in the default display mode is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change. As described above, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production being performed, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Further, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable of the decorative symbol, but the variable symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 902 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a Chibihime chance effect is performed. The Chibihime chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned universal figure variation game is executed. The Chibi-hime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, in which the Chibi-hime character selects one of the five start points, moves from the selected start point along the Amida route, and reaches the goal point. It is foretold that the effect corresponding to the icon shown will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 will be opened for a long time. When reaching the goal point indicated by the letter notation, it is highly possible that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross mark icon. Indicates that the variable display result of the general map is off.

  Further, in this example of performance, when the player reaches the goal point where the lord's notice icon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 902 (D1), one of the pre-change notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of them changes to the changed notice icon. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 902 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the first person displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the character Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 902 (D2), at least one of the default hold icons in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 902 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the prefetch advance display mode. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any display mode of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change.

  As described above, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production being performed, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display forms of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 903. Here, FIG. 903 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example in the case where power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 903 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is being performed. Then, two holding icons (holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1) are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Note that, of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is a mode. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 includes a thousand box. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 903 (B), the power is cut off for some reason, and in FIG. 903 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously is shown. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 903 (C), a character display of "restore, please wait for a while" which is a return display is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 restarts the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding device. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 903 (D), the variable display of symbols is completed, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed "Special figure I" which is the display result of the deviation. On the decorative symbol display device 208, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are erased. Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which was the display mode of the prefetching notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the prefetch result information stored in the special diagram 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special diagram 2 preread result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undetermined” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undetermined” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The pre-reading notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved reservations have been consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (holding that the pre-reading result was saved) after the power interruption / recovery, but the pre-reading notice is given after all the holdings including the "undetermined" information have been exhausted. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be given before the suspension including the “undetermined” information is exhausted for the suspension that is newly increased after the power interruption / recovery.

The game table according to the present embodiment is a game table including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one type of the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon (for example, FIG. 892). Is a hold icon h11) described above, one type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a notice icon (for example, notice icons I8 and I10 shown in FIG. 892), and the hold icon is An icon that displays a number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed, and the hold icon is a hold of the display means. The notice icon is an icon displayed in the icon display area, the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means, and the hold The icon display area and the notice icon display area are different display areas, and by displaying the hold icon and the notice icon in different display areas, it is possible to understand the symbol variable display in which the notice icon is consumed. In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the second number larger than the first number is extinguished as compared with the case where the first number is extinguished in the notice icon. It is more likely to be a big hit in the case where at least one of the notice icons is consumed in a state in which a plurality of the notice icons are displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and is not digested at the time when the certain symbol variation display is finished. The notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as “undigested notice icon”) may be displayed, and the hold icon and the notice icon are displayed. If power interruption state during the symbol variation display has Fukuden occurred (hereinafter. Referred to as "first case") the hold icon is displayed in the default manner, the notice in the case of the first The icon is not displayed, and in the first case, the variable display of the symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display means .
According to the game table according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.
Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon as a look-ahead notice display prior to the start of the pattern variation display which is the subject of the look-ahead, and the undigested notice icon is the pre-read notice. It may be an icon displayed as a display. Further, the certain symbol variable display may be a variable display in which the result is a big hit, and the undigested notice icon may be an icon that may be consumed during the big hit. Moreover, the reliability of the big hit may change depending on the order in which the notice icon is consumed. Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays, and the advance notice icon may display a number corresponding to the number of times the advance notice display may be displayed. Good. Further, the display means may be a means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display. Further, after the false notice display is displayed in the certain symbol variable display, the result of the certain symbol variable display may be disappointing. Further, the advance notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the variable display in which the advance notice icon is consumed is being executed .
Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 904 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a step-by-step example of another effect of increasing the notice icon and the digestion effect. FIG. 905 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 904. 904 to 905, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 904, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIG. 904 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 882 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the center of the display screen, a large decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, A second decorative symbol display region is formed above the hold icon display region 281, and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 882 (5). The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that after the fluctuation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to fluctuate until the fixed stop.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 904 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, unlike the case of FIG. 882 (6), the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I21 of "house" in which the letters "house" are circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 904 (3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (4), the notice icon I21 of the possessed “house” is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (5), and then as shown in FIG. 904 (6). In addition, on the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that the family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 904 (7) to 904 (8), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (9), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the off is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 904 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon that is displayed and is located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon that is at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 904 (11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a "monkey" notice icon I22 that encloses the characters "monkey" in a circle.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (12), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” possessed is announced at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (13). An effect display that is thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (14), the thrown "montle" notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 904 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIG. 904 (7) to FIG. 904 (8) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 904 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 904 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 904 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. ..

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 905 (19) following FIG. 904 (18), the “house” notice icon I21 and notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” have been consumed. The timing for deleting the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the movement of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "crest" may start at the same time, or the notice icon I22 of the "house" notice icon I21 starts moving. May be earlier than the start of movement, or the movement of the notice icon I22 of "monkey" may be earlier than the start of movement of the notice icon I21 of "house".

  After that, when the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 905 (22), the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Since the effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 877 to 879, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, when the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") are consumed, a corresponding notice effect (decline for crest fall effect) is performed. Is configured. It should be noted that the family crest fall effect may not be performed even if these notice icons are exhausted, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when the family crest fall effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that the symbol variation display will result in a big hit, or the result may be a loss. Further, the case where the crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the crest fall effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest fall effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a big hit. In addition, it is easier to consume the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "monkey") in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than in the symbol variation display that is a loss. It may be configured to.

  FIG. 906 and FIG. 907 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 906 to 907, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  906 (a1) is different from FIG. 904 (5) in that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 906 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 906 (a3), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the “house” that was being used is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed and the reach effect is started.

  After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in this arrangement order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 906 (a4-1). It At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the “house” and the “crest” are arranged) instead of the order in which the “crest” and the “house” are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 906 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “monk” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be enlarged and displayed in the order of arrangement of “monk” and “house”. In this effect example, the family crest fall effect described above is performed after that, regardless of whether it is shown in FIG. 906 (a4-1) or in the case (a4-2) of FIG. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of the "house" and "mon" (that is, the correct order), the crest fall effect is performed, and the order of the "mon" and "house" (that is, When the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "crest" and "house", it is more likely that the family crest fall effect will not start than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "house" and "crest". May be configured as.

  FIG. 906 (b1) to FIG. 906 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest fall effect.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 906 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is being consumed without waiting for it to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 906 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and vertically while overlapping a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is operating (stirring) as if it is vibrating in the direction. At this time, in the center upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “preparing for family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that the crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 906 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production of the lord has started. At this time, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I22 of "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 906 (b4), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position, and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 906 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the family crest monument 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol is definitely stopped. However, it is not retracted to the initial position and the flapping motion is continued. Good. On the other hand, the character display of "Preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 906 (b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the family crest monument 224B that has been retracted descends again, and the slanting operation is restarted. In this example of performance, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the family crest cast 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. It is possible that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest fall effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 906 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of “crest” displayed later is consumed. At this time, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be stocked, but may be digested as it is without being stocked.

  FIG. 906 (c1) to FIG. 906 (c2-3) show another example of the notice icon digesting effect. In this example of performance, the background notice in which the background is changed is shown by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 906 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of “don” in which the letters “don” are circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of "Princess", which circles the characters of "Princess", is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa," which circles the characters of "Grandpa" is a notice. It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

  FIG. 906 (c2-1) shows a background display state after the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. ing. As shown in FIG. 906 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the grandfather's face up from the left side of the display screen and the lord's face. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image of the princess' face are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to be displayed with a background display that indicates that is the highest. Further, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are consumed one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the order of the notice icons to be consumed. For example, the notice icon I31 of “Den”> “Hime” It is possible that the highest degree of reliability is achieved in the order of the notice icon I32 of "> the notice icon I33 of" grandpa ", but the relationship between the order of digestion and the degree of reliability for the big hit can be set as appropriate. .

  In addition, in FIG. 906 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" has been consumed is shown. As shown in FIG. 906 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the image of the princess's face up from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than that when the three notice icons are exhausted is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” are digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, “donor” The notice icon I31 of “No” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be consumed, or the notice icon I31 of “Den” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” may be consumed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are consumed, "donor". The notice icon I31 of "Grandpa" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" or the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" have higher jackpot reliability than when they are consumed, and the notice icon I31 of "Den" When the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. These can be set appropriately.

  In addition, in FIG. 906 (c2-3), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather", only the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" is shown. The state of the background display after being digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 906 (c2-3), when this one advance notice icon is consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background display in which the image of the grandfather's face is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the two notice icons are exhausted. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the "grandpa" notice icon I33 is consumed out of the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the "donor" notice icon I31 is consumed. The notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or the notice of "grandpa" is announced. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is consumed than when the notice icon I33 of the "grandpa" is consumed. However, these can be set appropriately.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Denjo" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or "grandpa" is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "is displayed". When the notice icon I32 of "princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is greater than when the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is displayed. May be set higher, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "lord" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed. Also, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, and the "donor" notice icon I31 and the "grandpa" When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the "princess" notification icon I32 and the "grandpa" notification icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  Also, in this example of performance, a background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the digested notice icon type is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, a so-called breaking of the law may be given to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

  Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. You may In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  In addition, in this example of performance, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is exhausted, the character of the lord appears and the leech reach is started, and when the alert icon I32 of "princess" is exhausted, When the princess character appears to start the princess reach and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 is consumed, the grandpa character may appear to start the grand reach. Further, when the "grandpa" notice icon I33 and the "princess" notice icon I32 are consumed, the grandfather character and the princess character appear and the grandfather & princess reach are started, and the "donor" notice icon. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the lord's character and the princess character appear and the lord & princess reach is started, and the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon of "grandpa" are started. When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord and grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are consumed, a character of the lord, a princess character, and a grandfather character will appear. Hime & Grand Reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  Further, what is displayed by digesting these notice icons is not limited to the notice of the reach effect and the background display described above, and for example, the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during the pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, other notices (for example, various notices such as a character increasing the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (for example, a music piece) corresponding to the notice icon that has been digested may be performed. You may make it produce by the corresponding light emission pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 907, regarding an example in which an effect may be performed for each of when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed and when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed explain.

  First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 907 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms the reach state by "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 907 (d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the notice icon I21 of “house” of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” is digested. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 907 (d3), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of "house" is digested to change to the chance symbol which is the special symbol.

  After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 907 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance pattern, or as shown in FIG. 907 (d4-2), a family crest with the effect image is displayed. In some cases, a family crest fall effect for dropping the accessory 224B may be performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be moved to. The effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B may be performed without displaying the effect image, and then the transition to the swordsman reach may be performed. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 907 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 907 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, at the timing shown in FIG. 907 (d4-4). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the family crest challenge has been reached is displayed. The first decorative pattern is shaken and changed while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance pattern-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 907 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lord's character YM pulls the notice icon I22 of the “crest” with a rope, and the notice of the “crest” is shown. This suggests that the attraction of the icon I22 increases the expectation for a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 907 (d6-4), when the lord's character YM succeeds in drawing the notice icon I22 of “Crest”, as shown in FIG. 907 (d7-4), the family crest actor 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “crest” has been successfully digested. In addition, after the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, the process moves to the above-mentioned swordsman reach.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 907 (d6-4a), the rope that the lord's character YM is pulling may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the “crest”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 907 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be shifted to. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully drawn. In addition, as shown in FIG. 907 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord's character YM is broken and the pulling of the “crest” notice icon I22 fails, the result is shown in FIG. 907 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “crest” notice icon I22 is first consumed. In addition, it may be configured such that the family crest fall effect is more likely to occur when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed than when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed. The reverse is also possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned “house” notice icon I21, “crest” notice icon I22, “lord” notice icon I31, “princess” notice icon I32, and “grandfather” notice icon I33, There may be a gaze notice icon that resembles the icon, for example, a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "subject" notice icon, or an "aunt". A notice icon or the like of “” may be prepared. For example, even if the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are consumed, the crest fall effect may not be performed, or the "house" notice icon and the "crest" notice icon are consumed. The crest dropping effect may be performed less frequently when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are consumed than when it is performed. Also, a gazette notice icon such as “shark” may be changed to a notice icon such as “crest”.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "mon", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word made up of three or more characters may be used to apply this effect example. For example, a “suspect” notice icon, a “like” notice icon, and a “run” notice may be used. The pseudo-relational effect may be performed when the three icons, namely the icons, are consumed.

  Further, in this example of performance, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” and there is only one stock space in the notice icon display area 285, Alternatively, neither the "house" notice icon I21 nor the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. Alternatively, only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed, and in this case, the notice icon of the one that could not be displayed is displayed as the notice icon. When there is a space in the area 285, the increase display may be performed, and when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the displayed notice icon may not be consumed at all. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be used as it is.

  Further, when the notice icon display area 285 is full and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are consumed, for example, “house” When the notice icon I21 of “No” is consumed, an effect that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is also consumed may be performed, or an effect in which only the notice icon I21 of “house” is consumed may be performed.

  FIG. 908 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows an increase effect and a digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in stages. In FIG. 908, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 908 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed in a larger size than the hold icon h11), which is a display mode of the prefetching notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 908 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is largely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In addition, the second decorative pattern is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, shows that various parts are added, and in FIG. 908 (e1), it is shown in the hold icon display area 281. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. The first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 908 (e1), a state in which the character EC of the evil merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen is shown. It carries the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 908 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image imitating a bucket put on the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 908 (e3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 908 (e4) after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position, the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 908 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts forming the hold icon. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out as described above with reference to FIGS. 904 (6) to 904 (8).

  FIG. 908 (e6) shows that the display result of the loss is derived, one pending variable display of Toku-zu 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 908 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the read-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the read-ahead notice display mode is a more reliable jackpot. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high frequency. In addition, the big hit announcement display is also performed in the symbol variation display being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 908 (e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 908 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is being digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen is shown. The DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 908 (e9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model of the head that constitutes the first hold icon h11 that is the display mode of the snowman. Of the DJ, the character BY of the DJ flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fourth notice part P4 held by the DJ character BY is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the 2 display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of symbols is still displayed.

  After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 908 (e10), the display result in which the characters “Get” are displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is informed that the fifth notice part P5 will be displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 908 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the body part of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 908 (e11 ′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, but the third notice icon P3 is once displayed, and the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. You may make it display once (stock) in the display area YA1. In this case, the display may not be performed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 but may be performed in another display area (for example, the advance notice icon third display area YA3).

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 908 (e12), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this example of effect, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 908 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 908 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is being digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman. Then, as shown in FIG. 908 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variation icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the variation icon h0 (or the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the snowman). ) Is completed. As a result, it is reported that the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is the hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the jackpot is highly reliable in the change.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during the normal symbol variation display, and may be mounted, for example, when the super reach effect is being performed, and for example, FIG. 908 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 8, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and attached to the variation icon h0 of the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 908 (e15-2). You may do it. Here, the variable icon h0 has its display position displaced downward because the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward with the transition to the super reach.

  In this example, the displayed notice parts are all attached to the hold icon that is the target of the read-ahead notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. Also, when the displayed advance notice part is consumed, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of read ahead, functions as another read ahead notice of hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of read ahead. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 909 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestive production step by step, and FIG. 910 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 909 stepwise. 909 to 910, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 909, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. In addition, FIGS. 909 to 910 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 909 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. As shown in FIG. 909 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 909 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the lord's character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and even if it is notified that the notice icon can be stocked. Of course, for example, each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord's character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. In, if the lord's character YM possesses one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is displayed when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. It may be increased only by this, or all four displayable remaining display areas may be displayed. If the lord's character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the notice icon display area including the four notice areas in which the four notice icons are displayed (first notice) (The icon display area) is reduced and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) including four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. A new stock icon may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the notice icon display area 285 is replaced and the notice icon stock number is displayed. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give a prefetching notice by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 909 (3), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 909 (4). A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. In this effect example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, it may be arranged so as not to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, the first decorative symbol display device. The notice icon entered in the predetermined warp entrance displayed in 208A may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at the predetermined position in the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 909 (5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 909 (6). On the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby giving a notice that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed in the future. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 909 (7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, as a result of the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the variable display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 909 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6 -It is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A continues to be continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 909 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 909 (10), the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285A of the second notice pattern display device 208B is displayed. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to extend over the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 909 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208A, and then is enlarged at the timing shown in FIG. 909 (12). To be done. It should be noted that the timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display is such that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 909 (11) is the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing of moving to the center of the device 208A, or the timing of displaying the notice icon in an enlarged manner as shown in FIG. 909 (12).

  In FIG. 910 (13) continued from FIG. 909 (12), the character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat. The timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or " The timing may be the timing after the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed or the timing before the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed.

  Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 910 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue", and the notice is displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208B. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative pattern is displayed over the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative pattern is displayed on one display screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 910 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 910 (16), the enlarged-length character BC2 having the length appears, and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. The player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the length-long character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 910 (16), the length-long character BC2 may not be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "display across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the image may be integrally displayed by the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, display may be performed by moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 910 (18), a pseudo continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed in which it moves slowly downward. At this time, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 910 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 910 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 884 (31).

  911 and 912 are diagrams showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 913 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestive effect in steps. 911 to 913, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 911 and 912, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the sake of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  911 (a1) to (a7-2) of FIG. 911 are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 909 to 910, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, When the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 911 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the variable display of symbols is performed. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 908, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 911 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 911 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 911 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps with the substantial center on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Note that the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 911 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 909 (2) and described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 911 (a4), after the hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B moves up and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 911 (a5-1), the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends and the display is stopped with the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends. Further, in FIG. 911 (a5-1), the result of the misalignment is displayed only in the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the first decorative pattern is displayed, and even in this first decorative pattern. The result of loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be operable during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption, regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 911 (a5-2), even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A may be maintained in the overlapping state. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the end of the pattern variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted, but at any timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be set as appropriate. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 911 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative design is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, and the second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 911 (a6-2) shows that after that, the two reservations are consumed and the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative design is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative design. The display is being done.

  After that, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 911 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged hat notice icon I6, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-relational effect is performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily visible to the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

  911 (b1) ~ (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208), the notice icon display number display. An example is shown in which a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number of notice icons displayed (the number of stocks).

  911 (b1) to (b3) in FIG. 9 have the same effect contents as in FIG. 883 (17) to (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 911 (b1), since only one hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. There is. At the timing shown in FIG. 911 (b2), the lord's character YM throws three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the lord's character YM throws these notice icons. In addition, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called gasse is displayed). Then, when the three notice icons described above are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 911 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. To be done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 911 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of notice icons displayed is reduced by one, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "03". The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is reduced may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or the notice icon may be displayed. The timing may be after digestion. It should be noted that, as shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is exhausted, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this example of performance, the number of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7-segment. However, for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, A transparent plate member is provided on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a voice, a decorative pattern display device (a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or other). The number of displayed notice icons may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 912 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (a first decorative pattern display device 208C and a second decorative pattern display device 208D) as in FIGS. 909 to 910. However, they are different in that they use the same size display device. In FIG. 912, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 912 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the variable pattern display, which is the target of prefetching. The mode is a default display mode, like the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 912 (c1). At the timing shown in, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the chance roulette display area 287 described above is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 912 (c1), the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed. It is shown. Further, the background display is also greatly displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 912 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the second decorative symbol display device 208D displays the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 912 (c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C that was performing the background display was switched to a display including the notice icon display area 285B, and was displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stock). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode at the time of displaying the notice icon is changed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes small and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 912 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, a notice icon I6 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon I7 for shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . At the timing shown in FIG. 912 (c3), since the number of reservations is one, the special reservation 1 second reservation number display H1 displays "1" to that effect.

  FIG. 912 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken has been digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance is given by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, effect display in which the notice icon is consumed is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 912 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is notified that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is given by displaying this opportunity.

  FIG. 912 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 has started. That is, it announces that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat is consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 912 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 912 (c8), the decorative design is displayed from the first decorative design display 208C to the second decorative design display 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative design display 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 912 (c9), the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C in response to the end of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, and the stop display. The effect display that pushes up the right pattern being displayed is performed, and the player is informed that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the guard length character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 912 (c9), when the decorative design is displayed large, for example, a large design in which the numerical design and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When the decorative design is displayed small, the small design consisting of only the numerical design is displayed, and the large design and the small design are displayed in different display modes, but the large design and the small design are displayed. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size.

  In addition, in this effect example, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Alternatively, both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in respective directions in which they are separated from each other, and in this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that the character objects arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized, and further, the character objects can be moved so as to project forward. You may. You may make it maintain such a state until all the notice icons are exhausted.

  FIG. 912 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 912 (d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. The three decorative pattern display devices may have the same size.

  The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 912 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and particularly, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed in is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F and the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol column. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to both the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 913 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 913, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , And the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with the frame portions projecting on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side and the right end side. A frame portion is provided so as to protrude from each. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are respectively configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are in positions closest to each other, It is possible to perform display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 913 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 885 (47) and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 913 (e1), while the swordsman reach is being executed, the icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed, and a notice is given that the production will shift to a more reliable production. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 913 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the directions in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 913 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 885 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been executed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J becomes slightly darker, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect being performed. The display is cut. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative pattern and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 913 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 913 (e6), a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified that the player can operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 913 (e7), the "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 913 (e8) to (e9), all are once hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the directions away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 913 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 913 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is displayed as a result of the loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display that the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 913 (e11-2). That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is consumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 923 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208H and the third decorative pattern display device 208J, and the variable display is performed again, and then the combination of decorative patterns of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration A combination of decorative patterns of "1-decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 913 (e7 ′) shows an example in which the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 9 (e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the player operates the effect button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 913 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  913 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of production when it is performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 913 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also It is also possible to rotate together with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, or separately. It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 6 (e6) is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 913 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third. The decorative pattern display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths of the respective display screens are aligned.

  FIG. 914 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 914, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is made in each of the transmission regions of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position in the vicinity of the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 914, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. On the second layer panel, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied. Note that, in FIG. 914, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. Moreover, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two layers, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, in the case of being configured by one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different by changing the pattern of lens cut. Further, in FIG. 914, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a public figure display device 210, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 914, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 914 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed while the decorative symbol variable display is being performed, and the variable icon display region 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 908, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 914 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 914 (f2-1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a dark display is displayed. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 914 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (lights off), and the dark display in the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 914 (f2-2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating an effect image, thereby performing the stock production of the notice icon. You may want to be told.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 914 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, a dark display is performed and guidance is performed. Stock production of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into the first layer panel and the second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated to rotate the first layer panel. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated together with the second layer panel.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 914 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, thereby simulating the future. It announces that continuous production will be executed.

  FIG. 914 (g) shows that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been digested. As shown in FIG. 914 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, at that timing. The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 914 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock production of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state of giving advance notice. As shown in FIG. 914 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variable display of the symbols in the chance roulette display area 287, the hat is displayed. The advance notice icon I6 is announced.

  FIG. 914 (i) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 914 (i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate. A pattern imitating the effect image is formed by illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and also illuminating the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer. The notice icon is being digested as well. At this time, when the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are made different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel and the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 914 (j) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 914 (j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after moving the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The screen is enlarged and displayed, and at this timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, thereby performing the notice icon digesting effect. Although the notice icon display area 285 is erased at this time, it may be displayed.

  FIG. 915 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 915 (1) to (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 for the fan to be the notice icon I31 for the drink. 885 (44) to FIG. 54 (54), only parts different from the above description with reference to FIG. 885 will be described in detail, and description of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this example of effect, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between the normal position (default position) and the protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 915 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 for this drink is a notice icon for giving notice that the content to be rendered is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 915 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 915 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 915 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 915 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image of sprinkling the content of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 915 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136 a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 915 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a protrusion button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protrusion position is displayed. At this time, the state is before the start of operation reception of the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 915 (17), after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 915 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 915 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. The timing may be before the display of, or the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 915 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. Further, in this example of performance, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. In addition, during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, for example, it is turned on in a manner of notifying that it is a period other than the operation acceptance period (for example, lights in blue). You may make it light in the mode which notifies that (for example, it lights in red).

  FIG. 916 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect using the movable means applicable to this embodiment.

  FIGS. 916 (a1) to (a3) show that, when stocking the notice icon, the effecting movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 916 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 904 (1), but the effect movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the effect device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

  FIG. 916 (a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C is moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a notice is given that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, or the notification may be given by voice or a lamp. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of effect movable bodies 224C according to the type of the notice icon and notify the type of the notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 916 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the notice symbol icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 916 (a3) shows that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 916 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable about the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable member 224Da with the character "large" attached, the fifth effect movable member 224De with the asterisk symbol attached, and the "board". The second effect movable bodies 224Db to which the characters are attached are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and in the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable bodies 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df marked with an asterisk and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd marked with the word “Mai” are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of the notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 916 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is exhausted, the rotation of the effect movable bodies of the exhausted number may be stopped, or the effect movable bodies may be rotated by the number corresponding to the total number of the notice icons stocked. Good.

  FIG. 916 (c1) to FIG. 916 (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the prefetch mode has been entered. In this example of performance, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode informing that the variable display of the special map that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 916 (c1) shows a state where the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production movable body 224 is configured by an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the production device 206 via the rotation axis ax1. . Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

  When the notice icon I41 for special training is digested and the prefetch mode is started, as shown in FIG. 916 (c2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “preparing for special training” is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. Is scrolled from to the left. As a result, the player is informed of the shift to the prefetch mode. On the other hand, in the production movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position (first position) that covers the front surface side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A reciprocating operation (prefetch operation) is performed between the two. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is made to return to the initial position once during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during the prefetch operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate. However, in addition to the upper arm 224a, the forearm 224b may operate, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm does not operate. Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 916 (c3) shows that the reach state is formed by aligning two "decorations 1" during the variable display of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching. The look-ahead operation is also continued here.

  FIG. 916 (c4) shows that special training reach as a super reach effect has started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the character display of "starting special training" indicating that special training reach has been started is displayed. In addition, after the production movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 916 (c5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 916 (c6). Then, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 917 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a figure showing stepwise another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon. Is. In FIG. 917, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 917, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  Since FIG. 917 (1) shows the same display as FIG. 904 (1) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 917 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of performance, at the timing shown in FIG. 917 (3), the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, but the notice icon I6 of the hat that he possesses has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 917 (4). As shown in, while the lord's character YM is standing by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 917 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the special icon 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The lord's character YM is still waiting at the throwing position.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 917 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the notice icon is announced during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notice icon is not stocked. Not, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variable display ends and the next symbol variable display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, a notice is displayed that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but a so-called gasse notice that does not display the notice icon is given. May be. In this case, for example, the lord's character YM may end the display before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead starts, for example, one symbol before the symbol variable display to be read ahead. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the lord's character YM may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is terminated, for example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. The display of the lord's character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the lord's character YM may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. Further, in the state where the character of Tonosama is on standby, when the big hit occurs in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, when the jackpot symbol after the super reach is derived (for example, , While the swing fluctuation is being displayed), the lord's character may continue the standby display with the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 917 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 917 (7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 882 (9) to (882). Since it is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 917 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 917 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 917 (12), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 917 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is performed.

  FIG. 918 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the advance notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 918, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 918, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIGS. 918 (a1) to 918 (a6) show that the notice icon is stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 918 (a1) illustrates a state in which the boring effect that is performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed is started when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 918 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 918 (a1), when the strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of “Strike item Get” indicating that the item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this example of performance, when the strike is won in the bowling game, the notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, bowling effect by the lord's character is started. The contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, that the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the prefetch advance notice, or is being executed. It may be related to a notice about the symbol variable display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this example of production, it can be said that the advance notice of stocking of the advance notice icon is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 918 (a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a special effect that is provided only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used in the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display that is being executed, or may be used as another prefetch advance notice. You may be asked.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 918 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and the character display of "following the next change" is displayed, which indicates that it is continuously performed in the symbol change display to be executed next. It is to be noted that a “Strike item Get” indicating the mission and its reward is also displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 918 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord's character rolls on the lane toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , It fuels the expectation that notice icons may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 918 (a4), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the scene where the strike has been taken together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, and as shown in FIG. 918 (a5). As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 918 (a6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is reported that stock has been made. In this way, in this effect example, the notice item is displayed without displaying (stock) the notice item during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended. Has been announced.

  As shown in FIG. 918 (b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 918 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped to the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285C that displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed to perform the above-described bowling effect in the wipe display area WP2 and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed on the screen.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 918, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during fluctuation display). Background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 918 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 918 (b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 918 (c), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 919 is a diagram showing, step by step, another modified example of the effect of increasing the number of advance notice icons applicable to this embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the one in which the special display of the special figure 2 is preferentially displayed over the special figure 1 has been described, but in this example of performance, either the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game is prioritized. Nonetheless, the special figure variation game according to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the variation of the starting mouth winning order in which the starting mouth winning order is started. It should be noted that this production example can also be applied to the case where the special figure 2 priority variation is performed. Further, in FIG. 919, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 919, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22 are holding icons showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and held, and the second special figure starting port 232 has been won and held. It is a hold icon showing a variable display of special figure 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 919 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line in accordance with the rule of Midaduji and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) for acquiring a notice item.

  First, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of special figure 2 is changed. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-1), the character SB of the sabotani is placed at any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. And a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and an icon IX for a loss are placed for each end point of the three horizontal lines. Further, a suitable number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of holdings at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of Mida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stocked. When the lost icon IX reaches the end point where the icon IX is arranged, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Then, every time the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of the sabotani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. Note that the character SB of the sabotani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-repeating is performed. For example, when the pseudo-repeating occurs, the character SB advances to a position two vertical lines ahead. You may do the same. Further, it is also possible to proceed to a vertical line two or more ahead for each symbol variation display. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 919 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIG. 918 (c) and FIG. 918 (d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the mami production even during execution of the super reach. Then, for example, there may be a case where an effect that the number of notice icons increases during super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 919 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change to the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 919 (a2-1), when the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the horizontal line in the upper row of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and a state in which the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle row are connected by the vertical line is displayed, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 919 (a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

  After that, when the variable display of the special map 1 is finished, the variable display of the special map 2 is continuously started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the moving animation. To be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 919 (a3-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the horizontal line in the middle row to the horizontal line in the lower row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle row. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variable display of the special map 2 ends, the variable display of the special map 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the moving animations. . Then, as shown in FIG. 919 (a4-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being eliminated, this vertical line is connected to the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani follows the horizontal line from the middle row to the upper row by the vertical line according to the rule of Amidakuji. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of the sabotani reaches the end point of the horizontal line in the upper row where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 919 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 919 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. To be done.

  In this example of performance, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-1) and described above, one of the plurality of different types of notice icons is selected, but, for example, FIG. 919 (a1-) As shown in 2), the hat notice icon I6 is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line, or the fan notice icon I10 is placed at all of the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-3). Good. In this way, by arranging the same type of advance notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed advance notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that an effect for giving notice that the big hit will be settled is performed as described above, and therefore the player It may be possible to further increase the expectation for a big hit. The effect shown in FIG. 919 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-4), the missing icon IX is not arranged, but the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production at ease.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-5), the sabotani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the hat notice icon I6 and the fan notice icon I10) arranged at the end points of the respective horizontal lines. Alternatively, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 919 (a1-5), since the fan advance notice icon I10 is included, it is assured that the effect of giving an advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so the player makes a big hit. It may be possible to further increase the expectation of.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-6), the notice icon of the lord of which the type of the notice icon is not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, The notice icon I3) of the 3rd lord may be arranged. In this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Further, the notice icon of the lord has different colors depending on the type as described above, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the third palace's notice icon I3, which is the red lord's notice icon, is more likely to be changed to the “pseudo-relation” confirmation notice icon than the “pseudo-relation” confirmation notice icon, and the white lord's notice icon. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of, can be changed to the notice icon in which "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 919 (a3-1) and as described above, it is difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani by hiding the central portion of the vertical line with smoke, but for example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. This allows the player to know in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, which may allow the player to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the character SB of the sabotani is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 919 (a2-1), the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 919 (a2-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the areas in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed are hidden by smoke, and then, as shown in FIG. ), The notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 919 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. It should be noted that, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of the respective horizontal lines are changed to the missing icon IX or the notice icon having a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida production are demoted. You may

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 919 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke that hides a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 919 (a4-2a). The vertical lines may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 919 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan may be acquired. Then, it is assured that the third vertical line is erased and the fan advance notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 919 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut midway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 919 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, and therefore, after the loss icon IX has been selected and the Amida effect has ended, FIG. 919 (a4-3a). As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  It should be noted that in the above-described Amida effect, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice for the variable display of symbols that is the target of the pre-reading, depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 920 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. is there. In FIG. 920, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 920, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the variable pattern display that is the target of the prefetch, and the hold display is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the hold icon of Sabohani). It is different from the above-described embodiment in that

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 920 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 920 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 920 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 is performing variable display of symbols, and in response thereto, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The variable display of the symbols is being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 920 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode).

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 of special figure 1 in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 It is displayed to inform that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 is displayed in a prefetching advance notice display mode (sabohani display mode) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (3), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 920 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1. It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 920 (5) shows that the symbol variable display is being continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. In this way, in this production example, the notice icon is displayed (stock) in the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display that is being performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The production of a certain lord has started.

  Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as a notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 920 (10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 920 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 920 (14), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. .

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 920 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and is lost. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 920 (16), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the symbols that have been pre-read is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 920 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the icon in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is performed. In this way, according to this effect example, it is possible to say that the pre-reading notice by the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 921 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect. FIG. In FIG. 921, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 921, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the variable pattern display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  921 (a1) to (a3-1) in FIG. 921 (a1) to FIG. 9 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is given in advance to notify that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 921 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of order. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area.

  After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 921 (a2-1), it is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is held at the display position of the first holding icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of special figure 1 and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 921 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "at the next change", and further, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following the notice icon I6 of the hat. Warns that it will always be stocked during the next symbol fluctuation display.

  After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display is ended, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variable display, As shown in 921 (a3-1), a hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 will be stocked, which may allow the player to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described production example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 921 (a2-2) is displayed. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "In the next change", and further, "ga stock" is displayed following this, but the question mark is added. In this case, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next variable display.

  When the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no production regarding the stock of the notice icon is performed as shown in FIG. 921 (a3-2). It should be noted that, although production related to stocking of the notice icon (for example, hall effect) may be performed, in this case, so-called gasse stock production in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

  921 (b1) to FIG. 921 (b3) show that the pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, is being performed during the symbol changing display being executed at the time when the symbol changing display as the pre-reading target is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 921 (b1), the game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended, and the prefetch notice is displayed as the display mode of the third suspension icon h13. The hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special figure 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 921 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variable display that is likely to be a big hit is being held, is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 921 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “intense heat approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

  After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display ends, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 starts, as shown in FIG. 921 (b3), during the execution of the symbol variable display. The lord's presentation is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice by changing the background display, in addition to the pre-reading notice by the stock of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 921 (c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended, the hall effect is performed and the notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

  921 (d1) to (d3) show that stocking of the notice icon and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. In other words, the stocking and digesting of the notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the variable display of the symbol can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 921 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as the notice icon as shown in FIG. 921 (d2). It is temporarily stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 921 (d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 921 (e1) to (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by the production of the lord, but is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do it.

  FIG. 922 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of stepwise. In FIG. 922, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 922, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

  FIGS. 922 (a1) to 922 (a3) show that the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are shared.

  As shown in FIG. 922 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or the explanation of the appearing characters may be displayed, or the notice may be displayed. Good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as the explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned hall effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the notice of the character "stock" is additionally added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 922 (b1) to 922 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the lord's effect is not stocked and is kept as it is. You may try to digest it. As a result, it is possible to perform the digesting effect of the notice icon related to the notice that is being changed and displayed.

  FIGS. 922 (c1) to 922 (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 922 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAL1, a notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon third display area YAL3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is shown in the notice icon third display area YAL3. It is displayed. Further, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAR1, a notice icon second display area YAR2, a notice icon third display area YAR3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F, respectively. In this example of performance, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. That is, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when the number is smaller than that. Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot may be different. Well, for example, the greater the number of stocked second button notice icons I11, the greater the It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be consumed, for example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be consumed. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being consumed. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of the notice items stocked.

  FIG. 922 (d1) to FIG. 922 (d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 922 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is the first hold. It is displayed in a small size overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the notice icon is included in the hold icon and may be displayed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 922 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced display hat displayed in the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the word "stock" is additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. To be done. In addition, in this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed in the change icon h0 is performed every time the suspension of the variable display of the symbol is exhausted, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 922 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the variation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the variation icons or the hold icons.

  FIG. 922 (f1) to FIG. 922 (f3) show an example in which the advance notice icon may not be stocked even though the advance notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

  FIG. 922 (f1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 9 (d1), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, thereafter, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 922 (f2), and then, as shown in FIG. 922 (f3), the variation icon is displayed. Although h0 is deleted, at this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also deleted together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. In this way, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon.

  FIGS. 922 (g1) to 922 (g3) show how, when a certain notice icon is consumed, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are consumed is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 922 (g1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bouquet notice icon I51 as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more of the plurality of types of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 881 (b). Which notice icon is included? It is difficult to identify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 922 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is consumed, the bouquet notice icon I51 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen, and then is enlarged and displayed. It

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 922 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes in display to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the kind of the notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is changed. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included, while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the notice icon may be continued to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the suspension of the variable display of symbols, the stock status is displayed even during the demo display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked, regardless of whether the variable display of symbols is held or not.

  In addition, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be announced.

  Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed due to a combination of chances while the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. . On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (downgraded).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The production may be changed to the fan notice icon I10 while the fan notice icon I6 is being consumed, or the number of pseudo repeats may be increased in the pseudo consecutive effect executed by digesting the hat notice icon I6. Good. In addition, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button holding icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  Further, depending on the length of the symbol variation display time, whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon may be determined.

  The length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not given may be the same or different between the symbol variation display that is a big hit and the symbol variation display that is a loss.

  Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the advance notice of stocking the advance notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice to stock the notice icon.

  Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variation time of the length for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be consumed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be consumed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is executed, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of special figure 1 before the interruption is performed. The notice icon may be kept in stock and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the types of the notice icons are not limited to those described above or those described below, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as the notice icon, and when this item for customization is consumed, for example, the number of selectable BGMs, the number of selectable backgrounds, and the selection by the player are made. The number of possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode) may be increased.

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is exhausted, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, and the volume can be set. The brightness may be settable.

  Also, for example, a user setting clearing item may be displayed, and when this user setting clearing item is consumed, for example, the user setting may be made clear, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do it.

  Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is consumed, for example, it is possible to end the look-ahead mode or the effect mode. Alternatively, the end of the prefetch mode or the end of the effect mode may be confirmed before the end.

  In addition, for example, points-acquiring items and level-up gift items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points may be gifted or the level may be increased. You may

  Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and, for example, when the lord's icon is consumed, the lord's VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  In addition, for example, the notice production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is exhausted, the icon “next notice” is displayed and the notice production of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the island simultaneous production when it is consumed. For example, the countdown until the island simultaneous production start may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that allows the store side to be customized when it is consumed. For example, even if it is possible to set a setting that allows production to be performed in connection with the region of the installed gaming store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed gaming store. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) can be different from the group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Sachihoko group). There are cases.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the tutorial display is started when it is consumed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting the roulette effect when it is consumed. In the roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variable display is given, and the like are displayed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is consumed.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 923 and 924. Here, FIG. 923 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in stages, and FIG. 924 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to the notice item. Is.

  FIG. 923 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure holding lamp 218 and a second special figure holding lamp 220. It should be noted that illustrations of the universal figure display device 210, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 923 (a), the reserved icon display area 281A of the special symbol 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of the special symbol 2 are adjacent to each other below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the left and right. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 923 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. Although the notice icons are displayed in the left-justified manner in the notice icon display area 285A, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

  FIG. 923 (b) shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side in the left alignment. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 923 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. In addition, at this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. This hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 923 (d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 is the display mode of the prefetching notice (the display mode in which “heat” is displayed). ).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, at the timing shown in FIG. 923 (e), the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. It That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 923 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, the princess character HI appears with a balloon of the characters "Atari" and "Question mark". The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 923 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which means that the result is out of alignment. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, so at the timing shown in FIG. 923 (h), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is started. It In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the notice icon Will not be digested and the notice icon will not be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, it is possible not to perform both the advance notice icon exhaustion and the increase display, or when the advance notice icon exhaustion and the increase display is performed. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, or any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 923 (i), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3”, and it is informed that the result of the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 923 (j), after the suspended variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and “Atari” and “Question mark” are displayed. The lord's character YI appears with a balloon of character notation. The timing of appearance of the lord's character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 923 (j), the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed may be before or after the display display of the notice icon It of the Lord is started, or at the same time. May be

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 923 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the evil vice notice icon are displayed. The Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil protagonist character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the appearance timing of the evil proxy character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 923 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. , It is reported that the big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to execute the increase display and the exhaustion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 924 (A), when the big hit determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 50/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 3/50 chance of increasing the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 2/50 chance of increasing the evil prominent notice icon. . On the other hand, 40/50 has a 40% chance of displaying the notice icon of the lord's notice, 35% has a 50% chance of displaying the notice image of the princess's notice, and has a 25/50 chance of showing the notice icon of the evil officer. Perform the digest display of. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the exhaustion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time or when the digest display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

  Further, when the result of the big hit determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of alignment, as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. 864, when the symbol variation display of the big hit is suspended Has a 3/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Princess notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the evil prominent notice icon. Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 10/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 15/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 924 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1 , With a probability of 25/50, increase display of the Lord's notice icon, with a probability of 20/50 execute increase display of the princess' notice icon, and with a probability of 7/50 increase display of the evil prominent notice icon. Run. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 15/50 chance to display the princess notice icon, and a 5/50 chance of the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of. Note that, for example, in a normal gaming state (non-electric power support state), in a pachinko machine that is not expected to win the second special figure starting port 232, even if the jackpot determination result is a big hit, It is also possible not to increase the display of the notice icon of No. and not display the notice of any notice icon.

Further, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of special figure 1, an increase display for any notice icon is displayed. Not performed, and neither of the notice icons is displayed for digestion.

  Note that, for example, when the electric power support state is terminated and one or more suspensions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 remain, the notice display of the notice icon is not performed as a prefetch notice for the suspension of special figure 2 Alternatively, the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 925 to 936.

  925 to 936 are diagrams showing, in a stepwise manner, modified examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 925 to 936, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 925 to 936 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof is overlapped with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the left edge portion thereof. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N is overlapped on the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be integrally rotated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 925 to 936, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 925 to 935 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 925 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 926 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 925. Is.

  As shown in FIG. 925 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 925 (a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information regarding a game and an effect is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 925 (a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the character of the Lord is given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and is provided in an area that does not overlap the display area of the first decorative pattern, but with the display area of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. In addition, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when a certain stage is entered, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying a normal stage name in white, it is not hot compared with the display of a red stage name, so this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the stage name and the reach name currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 925 (a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

  Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Both the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (b), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting opening 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle). At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to inform that the prefetching notice is displayed by the hold display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Then, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 925 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 925 (d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 925 (e), in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character sets a bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that, when thrown by the lord's character, has various effects on the effect. Note that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing or may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, there is an animation related to the notice icon with a high expectation for jackpots when it is consumed (high notice notice icon), and an animation related to the notice icon with a lower expectation for jackpots when digested than the notice animation with high expectation. The animation display modes may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 925 (f), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation display may be displayed in one symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 925 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (i). . The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice to shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 925 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "paquin" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 925 (k), throws the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize that it is more difficult to visually recognize than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1. To put it another way, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future or in the future.

Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged not only at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 but also at a position near the tutorial display section TT1. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content not related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at all. The content may be the content related to the current performance, or the content not related to the current performance. In FIG. 925 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon, and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, but the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed. Although it is not displayed in connection with, but is related to the content of the explanation by accident, the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 is digested in the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, as described later. Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be consumed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display section ST1.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (l), the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in the first decorative pattern display device 208L. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the disagreement is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 925 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "The notice icon is exhausted ..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the lord's character and the panda character is explained. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started in a state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. The timing of changing the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. If the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 is earlier than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanatory displays in one symbol variable display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 925 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 925 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves ...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb operate.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 925 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 925 (n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 925 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. To be done.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be consumed. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player long for the notice icon to be used soon. At this time, the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be able to be focused on.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 925 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 may be eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 926 (a) subsequent to FIG. 925 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a message notifying that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed. That is, in this example of performance, the development of the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman's notification icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 926 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 926 (c) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 926 (c), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may frame out after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may frame out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are erased at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

  In FIG. 926 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 926 (e), the button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the button reception time meter. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that the operation acceptance state is set. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 926 (f), as shown in FIG. 926 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with "Go." A cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 926 (h), the main character's lord lost to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 9 (i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The combination of decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 926 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 3-decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the off is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the notice icon I10 of the fan described above) for performing the rehabilitation effect after being displayed once is stocked, the background display is changed from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town which is a normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 927 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 928 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 927. Is. It should be noted that FIGS. 927 (a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 925 (a) to (l), and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 927 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 927 (m), the notice icon pattern CS (may be referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration” The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". When this notice icon pattern CS is displayed in a derived manner, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon design CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon design CS may include an image (including the enlarged / reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation based on a pattern may be any noticeable display of the notice icon. Further, there may be some that do not correspond, such as the notice icon design CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be larger or smaller than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of the notice icon displayed at the moment of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, throwing animation) is the notice displayed at the moment of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A certain notice icon may be displayed as both a design and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement notice icon may be displayed at two occasions, and one variation may be stocked at two occasions at different occasions, or may not be stocked. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves ...".

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 927 (n), the chance up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon design CS, and FIG. 927 (o). ), It is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and is arranged (stock). Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "paquin" to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, there is no particular notification by voice output. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chances of being stocked is derived by deriving the advance notice icon design CS, but it is also possible to give a notification by voice. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have different triggers for stocking, and therefore, the contents of production until stocking are different.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 927 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result is out of alignment. Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative pattern display device 208M, the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 927 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 927 (q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 928 (a) following FIG. 927 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (b). At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. In some cases, it can be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this production example, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Also, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is consumed, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is on the tutorial display portion TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 928 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach will be developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 928 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 928 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative pattern display device, it is possible to avoid the overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player, In some cases, it is possible to make the chance-up notice icon I63 easy to visually recognize.

  FIG. 928 (f) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (f), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman's character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward, but the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is not affected by it, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 928 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that the operation accepting state is set. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and fuels an expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the advance icon I63 for increasing the chance.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (i), as shown in FIG. 928 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, with the up of the lord, “go. The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Z” is added is displayed so as to be superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 928 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the noticed icon I63 of the increased chance that has been swinging is moved upward and is being digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 928 (l), the second cut-in image in which the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed in an overlapping manner on the first cut-in image because the angle of the lord's face is different, and the jackpot is hit. It has been announced that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image for display. May be. Also, when another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the second cut-in image may overlap the notice icon that is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. In the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In addition, in this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but is displayed when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. However, they do not overlap. In other words, the stocked advance notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed and may overlap with another image at one trigger, but may not overlap with another image at one trigger. You can When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for the promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 928 (h), the notice icon has been consumed and disappeared before the start of the cut-in display which is another promotion target. It may or may not disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 928 (m), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 9 (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 928 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 2-decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 929 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 929, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to display an effect display such that the displayed notice icon is conveyed to the stock position. It shows how they are doing.

  As shown in FIG. 929 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 929 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 929 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there is a case where an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is displayed as "Due to announcement of notice icon ...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 929 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the state that the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 is projected downward from the inside is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Delivery of notice icon ..." to "Swordsman is Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or may be the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or may be at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 929 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that pops out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. This burst effect display overlaps the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 929 (a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" to notify that effect, indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 929 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 929 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 929 (a6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 929 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 929 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b8), another example of the notice icon increasing effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 929 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 929 (b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. In addition, in this example of production, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 929 (b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be displayed. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 929 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown popping out upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 929 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR is changed to a magnified swordsman's notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 929 (b4). Is erased. At this time, a voice "PAKINE" for notifying that is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the sound output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or more than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62. The timing may be before the timing, may be after the timing at which the bomb icon I6 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or may be at the timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing when the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 929 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front surface side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 929 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see. May be

  After that, as shown in FIG. 929 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 929 (b6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 929 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player is The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 929 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size while being arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see.

  In this production example, for example, as shown in FIG. 929 (b5 ′), the height of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on 208L is set higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. Since it is possible to create a state where they do not overlap with each other, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is near the tutorial display part TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since it slides with, the third decorative pattern table while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 929, when the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, after sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the notice icon is displayed as the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be overlapped with each other, and an effect display may be performed in which the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 930 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 930 shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

  As shown in FIG. 930 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 930 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 930 (a3). The tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing, and "Tama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 at the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a4).

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 930 (a5) to (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward and the first decorative pattern. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be erased before the animation for frame out starts, may be erased at the timing when the animation for frame out starts, or frame out. It may be deleted at a timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 930 (a7), for example, after the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 925 (e) to (j), FIG. 930 (a8). As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is restarted from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then in FIG. 930 (a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 930 (a11), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the explanation display "Due to the completion of the notice icon ...", but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden and it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. The overlap condition with TT1 is eliminated. When the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easily visible by eliminating the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 930 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 930 (b1) to FIG. 930 (b2), even if the notice icon is consumed and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapped state on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 930 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIG. 925 (p) to FIG. 925 (p), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 931 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the notice icon increase effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 931 shows a state in which, in addition to the tutorial display on the tutorial display section TT1, the tutorial display is also performed in the conversation production of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 931 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed to the left of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 931 (a1) displays “Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun”. In this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Further, in this example of production, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a1), an explanation display that “gold is hotter than red” is displayed in the blowing portion TT2, and an explanation is given regarding the advance notice to be made in the pachinko machine 100. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The blowing portion TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern in some cases, but may be arranged at a position where they do not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed in the balloon section TT2 or the balloon section TT3 described later. Further, the same display as the display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In the tutorial display section TT1, the font of characters may be larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In addition, the fonts of the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be the same or different. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is configured not to overlap in the display area for performing other description display, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than that in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 931 (a1), “Castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibihime character CH. Also, the decorative pattern is still in variable display. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. The balloon section TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". The tutorial display section TT1 still displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 931 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 931 (a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 931 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a5), an explanation display “Swordsman reach is hot” is displayed in the balloon portion TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing at which the throwing animation is started, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. It may be.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a6), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61. As shown in FIG. 931 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon GOT1 and the balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) are displayed on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when the conversation effect (or the dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a6), an explanation display “When pandas intrude” is displayed in the balloon unit TT3, and a notice effect is explained. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position that does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Also, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing, or may be later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front surface side of the blowing portion TT3.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 931 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. As described above, in this example of effect, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 931 (a10), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs the voice "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with the plurality of display sections (the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon section TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 931 (a1) to FIG. 9 (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed in the balloon (the balloon section TT2 and the balloon section TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 931 (b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is red), and the word “intense heat” is displayed. In some cases, such as displaying, the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  931 (c1) to 9 (c3) show another example of the contents displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 931 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has started rocking. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (c2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 931 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Master of the Lord” to “Development into Swordsman Reach”, and an explanation display of the event that will occur (live commentary) Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 931 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs the sound “Paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described production example, the tutorial display section TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying the explanation about the production. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 931 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed. While changing (for example, making the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 red) and displaying the character "intense heat", a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed. Good.

  FIG. 932 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 932, the UI unit is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display region, the hold icon display region, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrally displayed. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone.

  As shown in FIG. 932 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI portion shown in FIG. 932 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI section, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on a frame formed by the UI section. At the timing shown in FIG. 932 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932 (a1), "Because the notice icon is exhausted ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 932 (a2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon of the special figure 1 (third hold icon h13) in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle).

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 932 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result is out of alignment. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  After that, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 932 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is similar to the throwing animation described above with reference to FIGS. 925 (e) to (k).

  In FIG. 932 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character ruptures, the blasted bomb icon I61 changes to the princess's notice icon I64, and while being displayed in reduced size, it moves to the stage name display portion ST2. At the timing shown in FIG. 932 (a5), although it overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2, it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess' notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon design CS (see FIG. 927), the explanation display is erased based on the trigger of acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display being erased before overlapping the stage name display portion ST2. It may be configured such that the timing of erasing is different. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display portion. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may not pass through the stage name display portion ST2 and the notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, in the case of the gasse pattern, the explanation display is not erased, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. In the case where the UI part is hidden during the darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gaze are executed when the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, after the bomb icon I61 throwing animation is started, the blackout effect is displayed. At the beginning, when the darkening effect is finished and the UI part is re-displayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display is disappeared from the explanation display being displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 932 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the "castle town" that has been displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 is displayed. The explanation display of “Stage” is deleted, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed above the stage name display portion ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Note that the scene in which the notice icon is consumed and the execution of the above-described darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or configured to overlap with at least some of the previously-obtained notice icons (at least one of the plurality of notice icons, the entire notice icon, or a portion of one notice icon). You may. In addition, the movable means is moved in at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the bombing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 932 (a7), the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the disagreement is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 932 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 932 (a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a8), the stage is changed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is displayed. No display is made. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be erased and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 932 (a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and the area functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 932 (a9), first, the stage name display portion ST2 is stocked with the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, and then the tutorial display portion. In TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In addition, in this example of performance, for example, when the notice icons are sequentially consumed from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 932 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is exhausted, the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the chance up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved momentarily so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

  Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 have been consumed, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4 and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 have been consumed. In this case, the display of the stage name is restarted on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display and the display of the stage name may not be restarted. The restart of the explanation display may be restarted within the same variable display as the symbol variable display in which the notice icon has been exhausted (for example, restarting after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is restarted, the exact same display may be restarted, or the display may be restarted from a different portion of the telop type (scroll type) display.

  Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is consumed, other notice icons may not be moved.

  Also, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, or may be It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the number of stocked icons is three, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display section. It was configured to stock up to 3 more in TT4, but if the number of stocks in the tutorial display section TT4 is first 3 and the number of stocks becomes 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is further 3 in the stage name display section ST2. You may stock up to three.

  Further, in this example of performance, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4. In the (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely set in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, and immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display is displayed. You may not be allowed to.

  Further, in this example of production, although the one shown in FIG. 925 and described above is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, it goes without saying that it is also possible to combine the modes shown in other drawings.

  Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, for example, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be consumed, such as the variable icon display area.

  Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested, and for example, a plurality of notice icons are digested in a toothless manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to fill the empty space. You don't have to move.

  In addition, one start opening can be divided into a first special prize winning opening and a second special prize winning opening, and in the normal game state, eight symbol variable displays can be reserved, a so-called MAX8 machine (8 (Although it may be called a maintenance order machine), the hold icon display area has a display area for four reservations in advance. It may be enlarged or expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display portion ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 932 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b2) show the situation where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 932 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. In addition, both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being variably displayed.

  Then, after that, at the timing at which the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, as shown in FIG. 931 (b2), the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward. In this example of performance, even when the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position in the stage name display portion ST2, at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display is displayed. The display of stage names has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the advance notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display portion ST2.

  FIG. 933 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 933 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 933 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 933 (a1) displays “Because the notice icon is exhausted ...”. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 933 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  FIGS. 933 (a1) to 933 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 933 (a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. Note that the display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 925 (a), so description will be omitted.

  FIG. 933 (a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI unit on the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. 925. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 933 (a2), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage, and in the default display mode, for example, The white pentagonal display mode, and the look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 933 (a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display region TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice icon does not overlap the tutorial display region TT1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 933 (a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 933 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation display is performed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 933 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. Note that the explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage) and the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition is displayed. May be displayed.

  933 (b1) to (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative pattern display device 208N and the tutorial display area TT1 is deleted when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 933 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 933 (b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 933 (b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen and is displayed as "Due to the announcement of the notice icon ...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 933 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the third The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked, and, for example, is an icon that gives advance notification of the number of times the effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated, and for example, the number of times of the button operation effect is high. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the big hit is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the easier it is to win the big hit.

  Thus, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that another display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 934 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 934 shows another example of the effect using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord.

  FIGS. 934 (a1) to 934 (a6) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 934 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 934 (a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 934 (a1) indicates that "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun". Further, as shown in FIG. 934 (a1), the notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stock) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing of being digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called gasse. May also function as a notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 934 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 934 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 934 (a3), the appearance that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 934 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 934 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 934 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Paquine" to notify that the Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 934 (a6), what was displayed as "Due to the notice icon being exhausted ..." is changed to "Swordsman is Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or may be changed from the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. May be before the timing, or may be after the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

  FIG. 934 (b1) to FIG. 934 (b3) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that since FIG. 934 (b1) is the same as FIG. 934 (a4) and FIG. 934 (b3) is the same as FIG. 934 (a6), description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display portion TT1 in FIG. 934 (b3), “Due to completion of notice icon ...” is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 934 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 934 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front surface of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display portion TT1 are difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 934 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, all the notice icons may be overlapped. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

  FIG. 934 (c1) to FIG. 934 (c3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 934 (c1) is the same as FIG. 934 (b1) and FIG. 934 (c2) is the same as FIG. 934 (b2), so description of these drawings will be omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 934 (c2), as shown in FIG. 934 (c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 notifies the swordsman. The icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have changed. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the production of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

  FIGS. 934 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that since FIG. 934 (d1) is the same as FIG. 934 (a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 934 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 934 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character becomes the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of the second holding icon h12, and at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 934 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )are doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 934, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 935 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 935 (a1) to 935 (a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying that fact. Since FIGS. 935 (a1) to (a3) are the same as FIGS. 925 (h) to (j), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 935 (a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 935 (a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 935 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the achievement display unit KM1 as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Swordsman Stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed in the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the swordsman's notification icon I62 for predicting that a performance with an extremely high expectation for a big hit will be performed. Good. The timing at which the achievement display section KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, the timing before the end of the throwing animation, or the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display section KM1 is displayed near the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, the achievement display section KM1 may be able to be focused on. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap the achievement display section KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 935 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon pattern CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 935 (a6) to FIG. 935 (a7), the notice icon I63 of a chance up from the notice icon pattern CS is displayed. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 935 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making at least a part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1 difficult to see.

  In this example of performance, when the display position of the notice icon is preset depending on the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed according to the type of the notice icon to be consumed. May be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the notice icons are exhausted to move the remaining notice icons so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals, among the notice icons, When the predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display portion KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 935 (b1) to FIG. 935 (b3), for example, an example of an operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operates when developing into a super reach or when a big hit occurs It is shown.

  FIG. 935 (b1) shows a state in which super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 935 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. . As described above, the UI portion is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than that when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of special diagrams 1 and 2 and the special symbols 1 and 2 of FIG. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 935 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions in which they approach each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable pattern and the explanation display are hidden by the decorative pattern display device, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 935 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. Also, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end portion of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. The image in which the character "Holiday" is given in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display portion 208N, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 935 (b3), the family crest accessory 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The wrapping is performed, and the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb, which are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. Further, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro 224Fa or the general 224Fb. Further, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. According to this, due to a phenomenon in which the decorative pattern display device and the movable effect by the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to focus the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 935 (c1) to FIG. 935 (c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. It is shown that the state is notified.

  FIG. 935 (c1) shows the animation of the duel scene in Swordsman Reach. FIG. 935 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 926 (d), but the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period below the second decorative pattern display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 935 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 935 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button reception time meter and the button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the player to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that the operation acceptance state is set.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 935 (c3), as shown in FIG. 935 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L indicates that the player goes up with A cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) is enabled, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 935 (d) shows an example of the notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-reminder icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, pending promotion notice icon I67, chance chance notice icon I68. , Panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that gives a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit when it is consumed. Further, the pseudo-reminder icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-representation will be performed when it is consumed. In addition, the notice icon I68 of the chance eye is an icon that gives a notice that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when it is consumed. Further, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that the player will move to the look-ahead zone when digested. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for notifying that, when digested, an effect that pandas intrude will be performed, and that a big hit (success) will be surely made.

  FIG. 936 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 936 (a1) to 936 (a7) show that the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” display) displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scroll-displayed. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 936, the left side is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  FIG. 936 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 936 (a2), when the scroll of the explanation display is started, the display “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 936 (a2), only the "Swordsman is" portion is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 936 (a3), only the "Swordsman is your lord" portion is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since neither character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable in some cases.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 936 (a4), the entire text "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of "Swordsman" is overlapped with the notification icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 936 (a5), the “Swordsman” part scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “I'm Lord's nemesis” part is displayed in the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least a part of the word "Denno Sama" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the timing shown in Fig. 936 (a6), the "Swordsman is the Lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the "Nemesis" section is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least a part of the character "nemesis" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

  At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 936 (a7), the scroll of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this example of performance, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are continuously changed by scrolling the explanation display. Further, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the notice display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the scroll of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIGS. 936 (b1) to (b7) show that in the tutorial display section TT1, while the scrolling of the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis” display) is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, A state in which a display (for example, a notice display of "intense heat") is performed is shown. Note that FIGS. 936 (b1) to (b3) and FIGS. 936 (b6) to (b7) show FIGS. 936 (a1) to (a3) and FIGS. 936 (a6) to (936), respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 936 (b3), as shown in FIG. 936 (b4) to FIG. 936 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice display. As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "intense heat" is displayed, thereby performing the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to visually recognize, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  After that, when the notice display is finished, the scroll display of the explanation display is restarted as shown in FIG. 936 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is proceeding in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the explanation display is restarted is the display after proceeding in the background. It is a mode. The display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is restarted may be the display mode at the time of interruption. After that, when the timing shown in FIG. 936 (b7) comes, the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display is described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIGS. 936 (c1) to (c5) show the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when multiple notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as part of the notice icons are exhausted.

  In FIG. 936 (c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the notice icon to be first digested, and the swordsman notice icon I62, which is the notice icon to be secondly digested, are the notice-up icon I63. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a visually difficult state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 936 (c2), when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, as shown in FIGS. 936 (c3) to (c5), the swordsman notice icon I62 increases the chance. The notice icon moving animation of moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easy to see. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon may or may not overlap the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of the notice icons stocked. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap with each other.

  In the above description, “an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] and a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, [Decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], and a notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, Gaming stand frame lamp 542 and the like], and the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like], and the image display means is a plurality of The holding display is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon of a type, and the holding display is a holding display area [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. Icon display area, variable icon display area 280, etc.], and the hold display corresponds to the number of operations (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the symbol variable display is held. It is a display [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], and the variable display is , Is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the image display unit. The icon is an icon different from the hold display, the notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, and the notice icon display area is This is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the notice icons are displayed in the respective areas. When the one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice means outputs the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. This is a viable means [for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, a pseudo-link effect may be executed, and when the 1,000-box notice icon I9 is exhausted, the reach transition effect is May be executed, etc.], the first notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons during the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once. Digesting a second number [eg, three, etc.] larger than the first number than if the icon [eg, hat notice icon I6, etc.] was digested by the first number [eg, two, etc.] The gaming table is characterized in that it is more likely to be a big hit when played. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the hold display area of the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be the hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be executable. Further, the advance notice means may be a device which, when one of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area is exhausted, always executes an advance notice of a type corresponding to the type of the exhausted advance notice icon, When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

  In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is equal to that of the notice icons”]. A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player should not miss the notice display. It may be possible to

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number according to the number of possibilities of the notice being executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display a number according to the number of the notice may be executed. There may be.

  In addition, the "previous notice means" gives a false notice of the same form as the notice form [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is a big hit], for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production, which is an outlier. Is a viable means,

  When the one of the notice icons (for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.) displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice means is a type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement notice that is out of order, reach transition effect, etc.],

  After the execution of the false notice, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may be a means other than a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner. May be. Further, the notifying means may always execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may not execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner.

  Even if the notice means is capable of executing only fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may be possible to execute something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. . Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

  In addition, after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be configured to be always off, or after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be a big hit. It may be.

  It should be noted that there may be a case in which after the false notice is executed, the notice in which the jackpot symbol is likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is executed.

  In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.] A gaming table characterized in that a fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

  Further, "holding display means capable of executing display according to the number of holdings [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, effect holding lamp 286, etc.] is provided, and the holding display means Is a display means different from the image display means. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of executing other than the display according to the hold number. Further, the hold display means may always perform display according to the number of reservations, or may not perform display according to the number of reservations.

Further, the gaming table, wherein the "holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

  In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effecting movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc. ], And the prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the prefetching advance notice means may execute only the prefetching advance notice, or may execute other than the prefetching advance notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing the prefetch notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetching notice means may be one that always executes the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter,“ second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 882 (2), etc.) ” ") Is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.], and is executed before the second symbol variable display is executed. The symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on a suspension suspended before the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)) Etc.] ”is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.], and the sixth number is different from the fifth number. It is a different number, the hold display, the first symbol variation This is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the display is executed [for example, the second target which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (4). During the period in which the symbol variable display based on the hold that is held before the hold is being executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The game table is characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variable display that is the subject of prefetching is performed Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may be exhausted by a number different from the sixth number. Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may be something that always informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended in the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, or the first symbol In the period in which the variable display is executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

  Further, there is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 891 (C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in one pattern variation display. The game table is characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the notice icons may increase even in the pattern variation display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

  Further, in the period in which the "symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol fluctuation display ") executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed" is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 891 (C) is the symbol variation display. The display is increased during the execution of the variable display of symbols that is executed before, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured to start displaying the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured such that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

  In addition, “the holding display area is an area capable of displaying the holding display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight], and the notice icon display area displays the notice icon in the eighth number. It is an area that can display up to [e.g. 6], and the seventh number is different from the eighth number. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 1, at least the same, or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 2, at least the same, or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the pending displays of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and at least the same may be the same.

  In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.], one of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 885 (49) to (50) or FIG. 897 (49)]. And one of the plurality of types of advance notice is a second advance notice [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 892 (Ac) or the same figure (Bb)], and the first advance notice is The second notice is different from the second notice, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, FIG. 885 (51) to FIG. (57) or FIG. 897 (50). -1) ~ Strong reach effect etc. shown in the same figure (57)] Yes, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, the display of the moon background], and the first effect is an effect different from the second effect. The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed, and the second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed. A gaming table characterized by. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  The first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 882 (1) to FIG. 886 (66) or FIG. 894 (1) to As shown in FIG. 898 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed without fail, the player's expectation may be improved in some cases.

  In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “first display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of performing symbol variable display, and second display means [eg, A decorative design display device 208, or a combination of the decorative design display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286, etc.], , The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons, and the second display means is a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, Stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.], and the second display means is the number for which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, " Pending number The display corresponding to () is displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is a display means that can be displayed [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], The variable display is a display started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means. The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number, and the notice icon display area is the holding display. The notice icon display region is a region different from the region, and the notice icon display region is a region in which one or more notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display region 285 includes the notice icon first display region YA1 to notice icon). The sixth display area YA6 is configured to be capable of displaying a notice icon in each area], and the second display unit is configured to consume one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area. In this case, the display means is capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational effect is executed. In some cases, if the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] During the period of execution, a big hit occurs when the notice icon is consumed by a second number larger than the first number (for example, three) than when the first number is consumed. A game table characterized in that it is configured to be easy. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the second display means may display a plurality of types of advance notice icons without fail, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holdings only in the holding display area, or may display a display according to the number of holdings other than the holding display area. It may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be one that can be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be one that can be started even when the hold is not exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed in a region other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons.

. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice display other than the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed can also be displayed. Good. In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed.

  In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only a notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times the notice display is displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other items may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

  In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same manner as the above-mentioned notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, and the like] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or reach that is an outlier]. The second display means is configured to display the notice icon [for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area. A display means capable of displaying, when one is consumed, the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect that is a missed notice], A gaming table, characterized in that, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is out of alignment. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display, or other than a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display mode. May also be displayable. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or may not display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. It may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it is possible to display other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. May be The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. It may be possible, or when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is exhausted, it may not be possible to display a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. .

  Further, after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display may always be off, or after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there is a case where the notice display in which the jackpot symbol is highly likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is displayed.

  In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.] A gaming table characterized in that a fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

  In addition, “the second display means is a display means configured by a plurality of display means, and one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like. And one display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, and the like], The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area, the hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area [eg, The number of holding lamps corresponding to the number of holdings is turned on, etc.], the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols, and the holding display means is a display different from the image display means. That means Gaming table characterized. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured by two display means or may be configured by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured by including other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may necessarily include the image display means and the hold display means, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold only in the hold display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of hold other than the hold display area. Good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

  Further, "the game console is characterized in that the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp or an LED]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

  Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

  In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol, According to the number of holdings, a holding icon is displayed in the holding display area, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the variable display of the decorative symbols and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holding while visually observing the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative design, or may not display the variable display of the decorative design.

  In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effecting movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc. ], And the prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, which may increase the expectation of a big hit.

  Here, the prefetching advance notice means may execute only the prefetching advance notice, or may execute other than the prefetching advance notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

  Further, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing the prefetch notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetching notice means may be one that always executes the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter,“ second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 882 (2), etc.) ” ") Is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.], and is executed before the second symbol variable display is executed. The symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on a suspension suspended before the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)) Etc.] ”is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.], and the sixth number is different from the fifth number. It is a different number, and the display according to the number of holding is the first This is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed [for example, two which are the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (4). In the period in which the symbol variable display based on the hold that is held before the eye hold is being executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch is the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Etc.], a gaming table characterized by the above. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variable display that is the subject of prefetching is performed Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be exhausted only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

  Further, in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may be exhausted by a number different from the sixth number. Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

  Further, the display according to the number of holding may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be one that always informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended in the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, In the period in which the first symbol variable display is executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended.

  Further, there is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 891 (C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in one pattern variation display. The game table is characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the notice icons may increase even in the pattern variation display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

  Further, in the period in which the "symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol fluctuation display ") executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed" is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 891 (C) is the symbol variation display. The display is increased during the execution of the variable display of symbols that is executed before, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the fourth symbol variation display

It may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which is executed, or in the period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the fourth symbol variable display It may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period when is executed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured such that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is always started, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

  In addition, “the hold display area is an area in which a display according to the hold number can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],

  The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.], and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number.

It is characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holdings and the displayable number of the notice icons are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icons.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the hold number, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the hold number. Good.

  Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings may be the same as the maximum displayable number of the notice icons.

  In addition, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 1, or at least the same may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of reserved characters in special figure 2, and may be the same.

  In addition, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of displays according to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

  In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.], one of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 885 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 897 (49). Etc., and one of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a second advance notice display [eg, stage change effect shown in FIG. 892 (Ac) or FIG. (Bb)]. The one notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, FIG. 885 (51) to FIG. ) And FIG. 897 (50-1) to FIG. And the like], one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, a display of the lunar background, etc.], and the first effect is the second effect. Is a different effect, the first notice display is a notice display for informing that the first effect is executed, the second notice display, the second effect is A game stand characterized by being a notice display for informing that it will be executed. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, or may display a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may necessarily display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

  In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIG. 882 (1) to FIG. 886 (66) or FIG. 894 (1) to As shown in FIG. 898 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is displayed without fail, the player's expectation may be improved in some cases.

  In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the gaming table.

  Although the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice in the above-described embodiment, it may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even while the special background mode for prefetching is being executed. Good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, If the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice c is configured to be displayed without fail. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are exhausted, "the pattern in which the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variable display" is performed. The notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. This is a display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display with the notice display b" is executed than with "the symbol variable display with the notice display c" being executed. It may be configured to. Further, the notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are exhausted, and the notice icon C is displayed. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed when the "variable display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B, or the notice icon D is consumed" is executed, rather than the "variable display in which the notice icon C is consumed" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, a big hit symbol is obtained when "the symbol variation display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is executed rather than the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed". It may be configured so that the confirmation display is easy.

  Further, in the above description, “first display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variable display and second display means [eg, A decorative design display device 208, or a combination of the decorative design display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286, etc.], , The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon, and the second display means is a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern announcement, stage change production. , Reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.], and the second display means is the number for which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, “held number”). Say ) Is displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.]. It is a possible display means [for example, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1], and the symbol variation display Is a display started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means, and The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed, and the notice icon display area is different from the holding display area. The notification icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notification icons can be displayed [for example, the notification icon display area 285 includes the notification icon first display area YA1 to the notification icon sixth display area YA6. And is configured to be able to display a notice icon in each area], the second display means, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a display means capable of displaying the type of the notice display corresponding to the type [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, a pseudo continuous production may be executed, and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is displayed. May be executed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.], in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, It is more likely to be a big hit when the second number [eg, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed, than when the first notice [eg, one, etc.] is consumed. The second display device is configured as described above, and the second display unit is the symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2). Symbol fluctuation display based on the third hold, etc.] ”. ) Is started, the display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a prefetch notice display. ] Was explained.

  In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only a notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, or the like] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach that is an outlier]. The second display means is configured to display the notice icon [for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area. A display means capable of displaying, when one is consumed, the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect that is a missed notice], A gaming table, characterized in that, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is out of alignment. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, and the like]. A game table characterized by being displayed means. ] Was also explained.

  Further, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and one display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means. [For example, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the effect holding lamp 286, etc.], the holding display means is a display means configured to include the holding display area, The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, turning on a hold lamp of a number corresponding to the hold number], and the image display means, The display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern, and the image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, FIGS. 882 (9) to 883 (20). ) As shown, the display of the notice icon as the prefetch notice is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.], and the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means. A gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the above-mentioned reservation display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Further, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative pattern, According to the number of holdings, a holding icon is displayed in the holding display area, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the period in which the “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)] is executed,” the notice icon is displayed. A fifth number [for example, three, etc.] may be consumed, and the symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display"). In the period during which the "[for example, symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the third hold that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)]" is being executed, the advance notice is given. The icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.], the sixth number is different from the fifth number, and the display according to the reserved number is the first number. In the period in which one symbol variable display is being executed, the Is a display notifying that the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended [for example, a design based on a suspension suspended prior to the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (4). In the period in which the variable display is executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], and the like. Stand. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed before the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching [eg, FIG. 882 (1). As shown in FIG. 886 (66) and FIG. 894 (1) to FIG. 898 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed by the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.], a gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 891 (C), the digest display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the hat

An increasing display of the child notice icon I6, the thousand notice box icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 is performed in a single pattern variation display, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, it is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed There is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat which is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 891 (C) is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, the “holding display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight], and the notice icon display area displays the notice icon. A gaming table characterized in that it is an area capable of displaying up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.], and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.] and is configured to be capable of displaying a first notice icon [for example, a thousand-box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 885 (47) or FIG. 896 (47)] as the notice icon. As an icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 892 (Ab)] is configured to be displayed, and the first notice icon is the second notice icon. Is another notice icon, and one of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, FIG. 885 (49) to FIG. (49) Reach transition effect, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a second advance notice display [for example, the stage shown in FIG. 892 (Ac) or FIG. Change presentation etc.], the first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display, and when the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed. When the second notice icon is exhausted, the second notice display is displayed, and one of the plurality of types of effects is It is the first effect [for example, the strong reach effect shown in FIGS. 885 (51) to (57) and FIG. 897 (50-1) to (57) in FIG. One of them is the second effect [for example, the display of the lunar background, etc.] Production is a production different from the second production, the first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first production is to be executed, and the second notice display is The gaming table, which is a notice display for notifying that the second effect will be executed. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like] and effect control means [for example, a combination of first sub control unit 400 and second sub control unit 500 and the like] are provided, and The control means is means for transmitting a command to the effect control means, the effect control means is means for executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is The first display means [eg, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.] is a means capable of executing control, and the effect control means is the second display means [eg, , Decoration pattern display device 208, etc.] is a means capable of executing control, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming machine provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice. It is an icon, and during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the suspension held before the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)]. The display of a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, etc.] may start as the notice icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 882 (9), the notice icon I6 for a hat is a notice icon. Such as displayed in the display area 285], the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [ An example For example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (9) to 883 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (9), displays the next symbol variation at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (14). Is not digested even if is started], the symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2) In the above, there is a case where the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is consumed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (9) to 883 (25), the hat notice icon I6 which is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (9) is displayed in FIG. 883 (23). As shown , Is digested in the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching, etc.], The gaming table. ] Was explained.

  In addition, "the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, a notice icon for a hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested in the pattern variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may start to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 882 (9) to FIG. As shown in 883 (25), the hat of the display started at the timing shown in FIG. 882 (9).

The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the pattern variation display that is the subject of the look-ahead so that the notice icon I6 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 883 (23), etc.], Stand. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “during the display of the one-time symbol variable display, the second number [eg, three, etc.] is more than the case where the first number [eg, one, etc.] of the first notice icon is consumed. ] When the first notice icon in [] is more likely to be a big hit, the second number is larger than the first number. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10, etc.] is configured to be displayed as the notice icon, so that the second notice icon is a big hit in the varied pattern display. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIGS. 886 (60) to (66), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit, etc.], And a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern announcement, stage change production, reach transition production, premier announcement production, re-variation production, etc.] , When the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat] is consumed, the first notice display [for example, shown in FIG. 884 (28) to FIG. 31 (31) as the notice display. [Pseudo continuous production, etc.] may be displayed.

A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a fake advance notice display [for example, a false continuous production or a reach transition production that is an outlier], and the first advance notice icon [for example, a front notice icon for a hat]. I6, etc.] is exhausted, a first false notice table [for example, a false continuous production that is out of order] may be displayed as the false notice display. The display mode is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display, and is configured so as to be displaced in the symbol variable display in which the first false notice display is displayed. Game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect to move to a special stage shown in FIG. 881 (b)], and the notice icon As a third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 of ribbon, etc.] is configured to be displayable, and when the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started [ For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, the background is switched to the prefetch mode, etc.],

A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] A gaming table characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 882 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol, etc.] A gaming table characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variable display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (9)] The notice icon I6 of the hat, which is started to be displayed during the variable display of symbols, is configured to be completely consumed by the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols [for example, a hold that is a target of prefetching] The notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested during the variable display of the symbols based on the above], etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the display unit, and the notice icon display area can display a plurality of the notice icons. An area [for example, the advance notice icon display area 285 includes the advance notice icon first display area YA1 to the advance notice icon sixth display area YA6, and is configured to be able to display the advance notice icon in each area],

A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.] is provided, and the production control unit is the display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like. ] It is a means capable of executing the control of [1]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like] and symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variation display [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214 and the like], The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means, the effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, The control means is a means capable of executing the control of the symbol display means, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],

A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming machine provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice. Icon [For example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 881 (a) and FIG. 88 (b), notice icon I21 for "house", notice icon I22 for "mon", notice icon I31 for "don", and "princess" The notice icon I32, the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", and the like, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type, and the notice icon may be displayed as a read-ahead notice display. It is an icon, and is a big hit symbol variable display that is a target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a big jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 904 (1). "Pattern variation display etc.") is held until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons"). May start to be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 904 to 905, the notice icon display is displayed in the period from the suspension of the variable display for prefetching to the end of the variable display. In the area 285, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 are displayed, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of display is a performance display, and the notice icon is consumed. In some cases, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 883 (23) to 884 (32), the hat notice icon I When 6 is exhausted, pseudo-link may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 885 (46) to (57), when the 1,000-box warning icon I9 is exhausted, the strong reach effect is started. Etc.], the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons [for example, a combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" shown in FIG. 904] The first effect display [for example, the effect image displayed in the crest drop effect shown in FIG. 905 (21)] is displayed as the effect display by being digested in the one-time symbol variable display. A gaming table, which is configured as described above.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notice icon is consumed.

  Also, according to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons can be shown during the pattern variation display before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started, and the expectation for a big hit can be given. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Also, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that has been consumed. There may be a case where a display other than the effect display corresponding to is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variable display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. It is possible that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be exhausted in one symbol variable display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

  In addition, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display only by being consumed in one symbol variable display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display, in addition to the fact that the first combination is exhausted in one symbol variation display. May be done.

  Further, “the first combination is a combination of a first number [for example, two, etc.] of the advance notice icons. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is displayed after one of the first combination icons of the first number of the notification icons is displayed until the first number of the notification icons are consumed. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that may be displayed.

  In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of“ house ”] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of“ crest ”]. The gaming table, wherein the first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

  In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 904 (1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 905 (19), the symbol variable display which is the target of prefetching is suspended. In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the symbol, the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been digested, etc.], And a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols until the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, it is possible that a plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, "in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monkey" notice icon I22 is consumed, the effect image shown in FIG. 905 (21) is not displayed, etc.]. Stand. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has been able to see.

  Here, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, only in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. Even in a symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed.

  In addition, as a result of the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 883 and the like shown in FIG. 883] being digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 4), the display of the banchou character BC displayed corresponding to the end of the hat notice icon I6 pushing up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed. . ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases in which variations in production are increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the third effect display is displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or by the third notice icon being digested, The display other than the effect display may be displayed. Also, the third notice icon may be configured to be always displayed when the third notice icon is consumed, or the third notice icon may be configured to be displayed. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the third effect display may be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or even if the third notice icon is not consumed. It may be configured to display the third effect display.

  In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66) is a symbol variation display, and is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 882]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 886 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ], A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may always be started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is a loss] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been digested by the time the certain pattern variation display is suspended until the pattern variation display that is the target of the look-ahead ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the start of the variable display is suspended in the pending display means. It is a means that can display the number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number") [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 shown in FIG. Is displayed, the number of holding icons are displayed, etc.]]. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 904 (the notice icon I21 of“ house ”or the notice of crest”). The icon I22, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1], etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In the above description, “first display means [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 909, first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 912] and second display means” [For example, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 909, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 912, etc.], and the first display means is a notice. Display related to icons [For example, the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 909 (10) to 910 (13) is exhausted, or the notice icon of the hat shown in FIGS. 910 (16) to (19). The display of the banchou character BC performed corresponding to I6, the pseudo continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 912 (c1) to (c5)] can be displayed. The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 909 (2) to FIG. 910 (13) or the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 909 (5) to FIG. Display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 912, or a display in which the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 912 (c6) is consumed], and the notice icon is displayed as a read-ahead notice display. There is a case that there is a case [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 881 may function as a look-ahead notice display], and the jackpot symbol variable display (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display") that is the target of the read-ahead. [For example, a symbol variation display or the like which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 912 (c1). ") The display of the plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance notice icons”) may be started during the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, FIG. 912 (c1) to As shown in FIG. (C9), during the period from the suspension of the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, to the end of the symbol variation display, the two notice icons I6 of the two hats are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. A shuriken notice icon I7 is displayed, etc.]. ] Was explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the display relating to the notice icon may be displayed on the plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means, Sometimes it can entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, “the second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 912 (c1)] is suspended, and then the second The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 912 (c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been digested during the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols], etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols until the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, it is possible that a plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, in the “second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 909, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 912, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. A gaming table configured (for example, as shown in FIG. 909 (5), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B), and the like. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the display means capable of performing the stock production is determined, it may be possible to avoid missing the stocked notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured to always display the advance notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the advance notice icon in some cases.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on the display means other than the second display means. Good.

  Also, in the "first display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 909, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 912, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 909 (2) to (5), a notice indicating that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A is displayed. Effect) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A], etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, so that it may be possible to keep the player in the display means and not to miss the display of the advance notice icon. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the display that gives the advance notice that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, and in the first display means, the display that gives the advance notice that the notice icon is displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed is always displayed on the first display means, and a display for announcing that the notice icon is displayed may be displayed on the first display means. You may not do it.

  Further, there may be a case where a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed also on the display means other than the first display means. There may be a case in which a display for announcing is displayed.

  In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 909, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 912]. Means provided, the second display means, the second display area [for example, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 909, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 912. Screen etc.] is provided, and the advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 909 (4) or FIG. As shown in 10), the notice icon is displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the entire range.

  In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 909, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 912]. Means provided, the second display means, the second display area [for example, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 909, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 912. Screen and the like], and the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 881]. When the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [eg, As shown in 910 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 changes from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the length-long character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol. And the like displayed across the decorative design display device 208B and the first decorative design display device 208A], a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact, and it may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Good. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed without fail over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon consumed may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, even if the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon is displayed over the first display area and the second display area, Good.

  In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66) is a symbol variation display, and is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 882]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 886 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ], A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may always be started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is a loss] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been digested by the time the certain pattern variation display is suspended until the pattern variation display that is the target of the look-ahead ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Further, "holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the start of the variable display is suspended in the pending display means. It is a means that can display the number of displays corresponding to the number of numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 shown in FIG. Is displayed, the number of holding icons are displayed, etc.]].

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat, etc. shown in FIG. 909) of FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.], and a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. 』
Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] and first movable means [for example, the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 915 (12) An actuator for displacing a position, a family crest part 224B shown in FIG. 907 (d4-2), and the like, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, 881 (a), each of the notice icons shown in FIG. 88 (b), the notice icon I21 of "house", the notice icon I22 of "mon", the notice icon I31 of drink, etc.], and the notice icon is It is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type, the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display, and is a big hit symbol variable display (preread target) Below, "second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)]" is suspended, In the period until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be started [for example, FIG. 882 (2. ) To FIG. 886 (66) and FIG. 915, two caps are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variation display. A notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are displayed, etc.], and the first movable means is a first movable effect [for example, FIG. 915 (12) to FIG. 17) is a means capable of executing the effect button 136 that moves the effect button 136 from the default position to the projecting position, and the fourth notice icon [for example, a drink] of the notice icons displayed. The notice table I31, etc.] is digested so that the first movable effect may be executed in some cases. ] Was explained.

  Although there is room for improvement in the movable means in the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the movable means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that variations of the effect can be increased. There are cases.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, which may enhance the effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, it may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, or the first notice effect may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not consumed.

  In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 882 (2)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66) and FIG. During the period from the suspension of the target variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I31 of the drink are consumed, etc.] , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols until the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, it is possible that a plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols,

In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, when the “fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 881 or the notice icon I21 of“ house ”, etc.] is consumed, the first movable icon” is displayed. A game table characterized in that the production is not executed. ] Was also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or of the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is exhausted, the movable effects other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are exhausted.

  Further, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon among the notice icons displayed is exhausted, or the first notice effect among the notice icons displayed may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in cases other than the case where the five notice icons are exhausted.

  In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136 or the like] operable by a player is provided, the first movable means is means for moving the operating means, and the first movable effect is Effect for changing the mode of the operating means from the first mode [eg, default position shown in FIG. 915 (12)] to the second mode [eg, protruding position shown in FIG. 915 (17)] A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the change of the operation means may be notified by the notification icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

  Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only by the operating means, or may be movable by means other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may be the one that can always move the operating means, or the operating means may not move.

  In addition, “a second movable means [for example, a family crest part shown in FIG. 907 (d4-2)] is provided, and the second movable means is a second movable effect [for example, FIG. 907 (d4-). 2)), which is a means capable of executing the "family crest fall effect, etc.", and when the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" etc.] of the displayed notice icons is consumed. A gaming table configured such that the second movable effect may be executed. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes rich, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  Further, when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed is consumed, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the notice icon displayed may be displayed. It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed when the sixth notice icon among them is consumed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed is exhausted, or the notice icon displayed is displayed. The second movable effect may be executed in a case other than the case where the sixth notice icon is not consumed.

  In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66) is a symbol variation display, and is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 882]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 886 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ], A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may always be started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is a loss] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been digested by the time the certain pattern variation display is suspended until the pattern variation display that is the target of the look-ahead ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the variable display of symbols is held [eg, the holding icon shown in FIG. 904]. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons in which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 915 (a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes or a notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.). Is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming machine provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice. An icon [for example, each of the notice icons shown in FIG. 881 (a) and FIG. 88 (b)], the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type, and the notice icon is This is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-reading notice display, and is a jackpot symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variable display [eg, pre-reading target shown in FIG. 917 (1) 2 In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the second suspension]. Compound "Preliminary icon".) May be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is held and then the symbol is displayed. In the period until the variable display ends, the notice icon I6 for two hats, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. One of them is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, notice that the notice icon by the lord's production is displayed as shown in FIGS. 917 (2) to (6) in FIG. 917]. The display suggestion display is a display that indicates that the display of the notice icon may be started. ] Was explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may display only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may display a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed as a notice read notice,

It may not be displayed as a notice display.

  Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of only indicating that the notice icon may be displayed, or may be other than that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be suggestable. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that the notice icon may be displayed, or may not indicate that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be.

  In addition, “the second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 917 (1)] is suspended, and then the second The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols until the end of the variable display of symbols, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. The game table is characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols until the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, it is possible that a plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, “The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, twice as shown in FIGS. 917 (2) to (5)). The notice that the notice icon by the lord's presentation is displayed over the variable display of the above], etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestive display may be displayed over the plurality of symbol variable displays, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestive display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be that there is a case. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over the plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over the plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In addition, "during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is configured to end [for example, FIG. 917 (2). ~ As shown in (5) of the same figure, the notice that the notice icon by the lord's presentation is displayed is finished before the symbol variable display, which is the target of the look-ahead, is started, etc.]. A gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestive display is terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started, so it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display. The display other than the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to be terminated during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the display. Further, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end, or the second symbol variation display It may be configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be terminated during the display of the symbol variable display that is displayed before the display.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestive display may be configured to end only during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end even when the symbol variable display that is displayed before is displayed.

  In addition, "the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may indicate that at least one of the notice icons of a third number [eg, three] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 919 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand-box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.], the third number is a number of 2 or more, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, at least one of the previously announced notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that at least one of the third number notice icons may be started, or the third notice icon display suggestion may be displayed. It may also indicate something other than that the display of at least one of the number of notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be displayed, or the notice icon of the third number may be displayed. It may not indicate that the display of at least one of the may be initiated.

  In addition, "at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed [eg, 919 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]. . ] Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon indication suggestion display, may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which has been suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggesting display, may be started. Further, it may be configured such that the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be necessarily started. There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which is suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display, is not started.

  In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66) is a symbol variation display, and is a symbol to be lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, FIG. 882]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 886 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ], A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, after the fourth symbol variable display is suspended, the display of the fourth symbol variable display ends.

In the period up to, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail, and from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In some cases, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started during the period.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is a loss] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been digested by the time the certain pattern variation display is suspended until the pattern variation display that is the target of the look-ahead ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 917. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons in which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat, etc. shown in FIG. 917) of FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.], and a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming machine provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice. An icon [for example, each of the notice icons shown in FIG. 881 (a) and FIG. 88 (b)], the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type, and the notice icon is This is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display, and is a jackpot symbol variable display (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [eg, target of pre-read shown in FIG. 920 (2) The symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third suspension, etc.] ”is suspended, and then the symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ first symbol variation display [eg, FIG. 920 (4) to FIG. Shown in (13) There is a case where the display of the symbol variation display, etc.]) is started, and in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. , The display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (4) to 886 (66), it is a target of prefetching. A notice icon of two hats from the start of the display of the pattern variation display, which is started after the pattern variation display which is a certain big hit is suspended, to the end of the design variation display which is the target of the prefetch I6, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of a fan, etc.], the first symbol variation display is the symbol displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended. Variation table A gaming table characterized in that it is a variable display of the display which is started next to the display. ] Was explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it starts after that. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the read-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the read-ahead from the displayed pattern change display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

  Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only one symbol variable display is started.

  Further, there may be a case where only the display of the plurality of notice icons is started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 882 (4) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is started after the display of the symbol fluctuation display is started after the symbol fluctuation display which is the big hit that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The notice table I6 of two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of a fan, etc. are consumed by the end of the symbol variation display which is a jackpot. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed to the end, it is started after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digesting the notice icon as a look-ahead notice display related to the second pattern change display that is the target of the look-ahead from the pattern change display.

  Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed,

In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Also, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, or the first symbol variation display There may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are not digested in the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, a plurality of the notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 920]. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons in which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.], and a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, in the case where the “second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 920 (2)] is suspended, the second The display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 920 (2)] is started,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variable display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variable display is held, or in the case other than the case where the second symbol variable display is held second. The display of the hold display may be started. Further, when the second symbol variable display is suspended, the display of the second suspended display may be always started, or when the second variable display is suspended, the display of the second suspended display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

  In addition, as the second prefetching notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetching display mode [for example, the prefetching notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) shown in FIG. 920 (2)]. In some cases, the second variable display is displayed in the second prefetch display mode in the symbol variable display displayed when the second variable display is suspended [ For example, as shown in FIG. 920 (2), when the pattern variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching, is suspended, the prefetching advance notice is displayed in the display mode (display mode of Sabohani). 3 hold icon h13 is displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, variations of the prefetching notice display may increase, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode as the second look-ahead notice display, or the second hold display may be displayed as the second look-ahead notice display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the form.

  Also, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variable display displayed when the symbol variable display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second symbol variation display. The second variable display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode in the symbol variable display that is displayed when is suspended.

  Further, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variable display other than the symbol variable display displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second suspended display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetching notice display [for example, the effect display of the prefetching mode shown in FIGS. 921 (b2) to (b3) and the like],

  The third look-ahead notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 921 (b1) to (b3). As described above, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third preserving target, is suspended, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variation of the pre-reading notice display is increased, which may improve the interest.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than that, the display may be started. In addition, the third look-ahead notice display is the second figure.

The display may be always started after the pattern variation display is suspended, or the display may not be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that becomes a loss based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 920 (2) " "Display etc.]" is suspended and is referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 920 (4) to (13)]". ) May be displayed, and during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons May be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 882 (4) to FIG. 886 (66), of the pattern variation display that is started after the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Destination after the display starts The notice icon I6 for two hats, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed by the end of the pattern variation display, which is the only target object, etc.]], and the third symbol The variable display is a symbol variable display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variable display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variable display is suspended, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

  Further, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may always be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started.

  Further, it may be possible that only the display of the plurality of notice icons is started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

  In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 883 (21) to 886 (66), which is a symbol variation display that is a loss] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display ends [for example, as shown in FIGS. 882 (2) to 886 (66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been digested by the time the certain pattern variation display is suspended until the pattern variation display that is the target of the look-ahead ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

  Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. In addition, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are always consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming table provided with "display means [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Is a means for displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 881 (a) and 88 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 935 (d), etc.], and the notice icon is , Is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display, and the notice icon is a hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 932]. It is another icon, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [eg, FIG. 2 is a character display or the like displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 2], and the first display is an explanation display [for example, a "previous icon displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932 (a1)". Displayed in "digestion ...", displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 925 (a), "displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in (l) of FIG. "Panda is master of the lord", etc.], and the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [eg, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932] of the display means. , The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a7), the tutorial table In the display section TT4, a swordsman's notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are displayed (stock), etc.]. ] Was explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be capable of being displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or may be capable of being displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be able to be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one. Also, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. .

  Further, “the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed [for example, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 as shown in FIG. 932 (a7), The explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

In addition, “When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 932 (a7), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display may be resumed. There may be. Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

  In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ intense heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 931 (d), etc.],” The second display is a notice display, and the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 931 (d). , The text display of “intense heat” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1], and the explanation display is a description display regarding the notice icon [for example, “in the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 932 (a1), The display of characters such as "The notice icon is exhausted ..."]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  In addition, “the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second Special drawing display device 214 or the like], one of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative pattern display device 208L, etc.], among the plurality of display means One is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], and the first display means is a device capable of displaying a variable pattern display. The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 929], and the third display means is a display of the second display means. Display according to [for example, FIG. 929 (a2) to FIG. a4) the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, etc.], and the first display area is in the third display means. It is a display area provided in at least a part of the area [for example, as shown in FIG. 929 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], A gaming table characterized by. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display adapted to the display of the second display means, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display adapted to the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display matched with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

  In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 932], and the third display is , Explanation display [for example, display of "castle town stage" displayed on stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 932 (a1), "Swordsman reach displayed on stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 926 (c). Etc.], and the third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 932 (a1)] in the display means, The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed also in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a7), the stage name display portion ST2 displays a princess notice icon I64. Two Amusement machine pseudo communicating notice icon I65 is displayed (stock) equal being, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area,

The third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, the stage name display section ST2 does not display the stage name, etc. ], A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The third display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

  In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by the line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. Further, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

  In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [eg, the hold icon shown in FIG. 932]. In the display area, the number of holding icons in which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.], and the notice icon does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number. The icons (for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 932 (a7) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-preliminary notice icon I65, swordsman notice icon I62, chance up notice icon I63, etc.) It is not an icon indicating the number of symbols whose variable display is activated, etc.], and a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, a gaming table provided with “display means [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 881 (a) and 88 (b), notice icons shown in FIG. 935 (d), and the like], The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a read-ahead notice display, and the display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 932] is reserved. Different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 932] in which the icons [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 932] are displayed. A display area, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first table. [For example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932], and the first display is an explanation display [for example, displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932 (a1). Displaying "Notice icon digested ..." Displayed on tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 925 (a) Displayed "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" Displayed on tutorial display section shown in FIG. "Panda is the master of the lord", etc. displayed on TT1], and the first display is the first display area of the display means [eg, the tutorial display section shown in FIG. 932 when displayed. TT4, etc.] and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [eg, shown in FIG. 932 (a9). So that in, in the tutorial display unit TT4, see the notice icon I63 notice icon I62 and opportunities-up of the great swordsman (stock) etc. that is], the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was explained.

  In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the first display area of the display means. May also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

  Further, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the tutorial display unit TT4 does not display the explanation, etc.], The gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display other than the display may not be displayed. The first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or the first display may not be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or in a state other than the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, Only the first display may not be displayed.

  Also, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 932 (a9), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. The game display is characterized in that the explanation display is resumed when all the notice icons are exhausted.] ] Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display are also resumed. There may be cases where Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

  In addition, when the first display is, for example, an explanation of the first character, the tenth display which is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

  In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ intense heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 931 (d), etc.],” The second display is a notice display, and the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 931 (d). , The text display of “intense heat” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1], and the explanation display is a description display regarding the notice icon [for example, “in the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 932 (a1), The display of characters such as "The notice icon is exhausted ..."]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

  In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  Further, the notice display may be a notice display made by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display [for example, the character display of“ Friday is hotter than red ”in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 931 (a1), (A6) is a character display such as "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the speech balloon portion TT2 and a character display such as "Panda breaks in" in the speech balloon portion TT3], and the third display is an explanatory display. The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display, and the third display is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. The display is displayed [for example, the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 931 (a6)], and the second display area is a display area different from the first display area. A game characterized by Table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the second display area of the display means. May also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

  In addition, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 931 (a10), Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the text display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon display section TT2 and "Panda breaks in" in the balloon display section TT3. A character display is displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. The display other than the third display may be displayed even when the display is on. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display is always displayed.

Alternatively, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may not be displayed.

  Also, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  Further, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, a notice display different from the first notice display (second notice display) may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

  In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 932], and the fourth display is , Explanation display [for example, display of "castle town stage" displayed on stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 932 (a1), "Swordsman reach displayed on stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 926 (c). Etc.], the display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display, and the fourth display is the third display area in the display means. [For example, the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 932 (a1)] is displayed, and the third display area is a display area different from the first display area. Number of [eg three, etc.] When the notification icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notification icon may be displayed in the third display area [for example, in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 932]. In a state in which the three notice icons are displayed, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all of the display content may be different.

  The fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

  Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

  Further, “the fourth display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a9), the notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display portion ST2, etc.], and the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

  In addition, “the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second Special drawing display device 214 or the like], one of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative pattern display device 208L, etc.], among the plurality of display means One is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], and the first display means is a device capable of displaying a variable pattern display. The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 929], and the third display means cooperates with the second display means. Displayed [for example, FIG. 929 (a2) to FIG. The display in which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIG. 7 and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked] is displayed, and the first display area is at least one of the third display means. Which is a display area provided in a partial area [for example, as shown in FIG. 929 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.], And a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display linked with the display of the second display means, or a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display associated with the display of the second display means. Good.

  The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

  In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 932 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by the line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. Further, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may be partitioned by a line.

  Further, "holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the start of the variable display is suspended in the pending display means. It is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of numbers (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. The number of pending icons is displayed, etc.], the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of pending depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice shown in FIG. 932 (a9) For icons (Princess's notice icon I64, Pseudo-ren notice icon I65, Swordsman notice icon I62, Chance up notice icon I63, etc.) And not the icon indicates the number and the like, amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings. . Further, the hold display means may always display a number of displays corresponding to the number of hold,

The display of the number corresponding to the number may not be displayed in some cases.

  Note that the number of reservations and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 937 to FIG. 1006, another game table to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail. To do. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 937 to 1006 are used only in the description using FIGS. 937 to 1006, and even when the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 1006, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 937 to 1006 are given priority.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 937. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106 as a door body, and a ball storage tray door. 108, the launching device 110, and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a light source having an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. A door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 as an example of an operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 939) by the operation of the player, and an effect button. A chance button lamp 138 which is built in 136 and causes the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for instructing the player to return the balance, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 937 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 as an example of operation means is also provided, and the effect button 136 and each button of the operation key unit 137 are provided in close proximity so that the player can operate with one hand. In addition, in this embodiment, each button which comprises the operation key unit 137 may be called a 1st operation means, and the effect button 136 may be called a 2nd operation means.

  Here, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. 969. FIG. 969 is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 937.

  As shown in FIG. 969, the operation key unit 137 is configured to have six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, and a cancel button 137f. Each of these buttons is smaller than the effect button 136, that is, the operation area is small. In other words, it can be said that the effect button 136 is larger than the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, and the cancel button 137f.

  The effect button 136 is operated by an effect button drive motor 434 (see FIG. 940), which is an example of a driving unit, and has an operable position (first position) protruding from the upper surface of the ball storage dish door 108 and a ball storage dish door. It is displaceable between the upper surface of 108 and an inoperable position (second position) that enters inside. The effect button 136 can be pressed by the player at the operable position, and cannot be pressed by the player at the inoperable position. The effect button 136 may be configured to vibrate during operation.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-hand hit button capable of maximizing the firing strength by pushing down the ball firing handle 134 may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. What

In FIG. 937, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted from illustration, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 939.

  FIG. 938 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 937 viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 940) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 940) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 940) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 940), and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game shop clerk. A launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 940) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that supplies power to various electric amusement machines (see FIG. 940). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power supply is turned on. A board case 184 and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 939 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed.

  A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this production device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The effect device 206 operates the effect movable bodies 224 and 225 to effect an effect, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in an enhanced form, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (detailed variable game to be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable variable games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy middle lamp 222 performs notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter, is configured not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "controlled state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "controlled state" includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. ing.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). In the case of winning a prize), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 938 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 937 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player are separately referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 938 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as the prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided near the second special figure starting port 232, and a pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 are combined. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening / closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is either small (corresponding to the first size) or large (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. A state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open

Then, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, a game ball that enters the second special figure starting port 232 that is a variable starting area than a game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is a fixed starting area There are more On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state at the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning a prize port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 939 as long as the gaming ball passes or enters to win the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning prize 226, variable winning prize 234) or starting mouth. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or by simply passing through universal drawing starting opening 228 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll.

. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball caught by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The production movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advanced position). There is.

  The shield device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 937, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 939 correspond to effect means, and among them, decorative pattern display. The device 208 corresponds to an example of a display unit or a decorative symbol display unit.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of this game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

<Control part>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 940. It should be noted that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control part of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control part 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control part 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are It may be composed of one common circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control unit, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One may be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined first sub-control section 400 and second sub-control section 500 may be regarded as a predetermined control means. Further, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 has a plurality of substrates (for example, a plurality of control substrates, one or a plurality of relay substrates and one or a plurality of control substrates, etc.). It may be composed of Further, when the combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 is regarded as a sub control unit, in the pachinko machine 100 described here, the main control unit 300 and the sub control unit (first sub control unit). The unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) are provided on different boards and are directly connected to each other by an electric signal line, but an electric signal between the boards is further connected by another relay board. It may be configured to relay the transmission / reception of.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. There is. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. Various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address. In the following description, when referred to as a table, conditions for determining which address in the ROM 306 is specified are in a table format. It may refer to a collection. These points are the same for the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random number generation circuits. And a main body opening sensor, a front frame door sensor, a door sensor with a ball storage tray, and a lower tray full tank detection for detecting that the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 937 is filled with game balls. A random number generation circuit that receives signals output from the sensors and various sensors 320 including a starting port, a winning port entrance, and a ball detection sensor provided inside the variable winning port, and outputs an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage. 318 and a sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a general figure display device. A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 210, and various status display portions 328 (for example, a universal figure holding lamp 216, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). The drive circuit 330 for controlling the display is connected to the drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open / close the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  The main control unit 300 is a game control means for performing game control, and has a win / failure determination means, a start information prefetching means, and a pre-determination means, which will be described later.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be roughly divided into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit. 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It stores in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the universal figure starting port 228, similarly, the value at the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the universal figure starting port 228 is latched. Then, the latched value is stored in the random value storage register, which is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponds to the universal figure starting port 228.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a predetermined winning opening such as a general winning opening 226, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 is won. And a sensor that detects a ball that passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electrical system abnormality signal indicating that the electrical system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is abnormal, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electrical system abnormality signal output means. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 may be provided in the power management unit 660.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an input / output interface for transmitting and receiving a command with the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication, the main control unit 300 can send a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 is the main control unit. It is configured so that a signal corresponding to a command can be transmitted to 300. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Information communication between the main control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 may be one-way communication so that the payout control unit 600 cannot transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 937, and an operation key unit. A detection signal from a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons that form 137 and a production button initial position sensor 427 as a detection unit that detects that the production button 136 is located at the initial position is sent to the basic circuit 402. A sensor circuit 428 for outputting, an upper arm motor and a forearm motor for driving the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 430 for controlling a family crest motor for driving the effect movable body 225, and an effect button drive for driving the effect button 136. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the motor 434 is connected. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is set to the operable position described above, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be set to an appropriate position. For example, the initial position is set to the inoperable position described above. You may do it.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 is connected to a second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative pattern display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246.

  The sub-control unit including the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives the command signal from the main control unit 300 which is the game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device. Control the production means such as 208.

  Thus, the 1st sub control part 400 and the 2nd sub control part 500 are functioning as an example of production control means.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 938 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout of the ball or the ball has been completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor (not shown) may be connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor detects when the front frame door 106 and / or the main body 104 is open and outputs an open signal. Here, the payout controller 600 may output the door opening information to the main controller 300 when the opening signal from the frame sensor is input.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the amount, control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mall 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power supply management unit 660 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 941 (a) to 941 (d). The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 941 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 941 (a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 941 (a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special figure. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while you can expect to win balls in 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot pattern. There are 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) designs that can be expected to win balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, which is 8 of the 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. While you can expect to win balls in four rounds of the round, you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, and "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design. "G" is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation in which winning of a ball cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that directs the player in a manner in which it is difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected will continue at the start of a jackpot. This is a jackpot that creates a form in which the player is encouraged whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue is continued when it becomes the eye or the ninth round).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is that the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. In addition, in the power-supported state,

Compared to the state, the opening time of the single opening of the blade member 2321 of the starting port 232 of Toku-zu 2 is likely to be longer (extension of the electric Chu opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the power-chew open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered tube increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric power support state for one winning in the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric power support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and returns for 2 seconds). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening times, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed so that the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game performed thereafter, until the next big hit game is started, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) ) Is maintained, and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric support state is maintained, and the 101st non-powered game is performed. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without electric power support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric power support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 941 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening of the variable winning port 234 in the big hitting game in which "Special figure G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 941 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 941 (b), six types of special maps of “special map a” to “special map f” are shown, and five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. E "). The "special map a" is a 15R jackpot design, is a 15R probability variation jackpot design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of the 15 rounds, and the "special map b" is a 15R jackpot pattern, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and "Special Drawing d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

  FIG. 941 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" decoration 1-decoration 1 " Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop displaying "decoration 7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) which is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol such as “special symbol I” or “special symbol f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, the separation). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this “variable display of decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 941 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 indicates that all seven segments are lit and one segment in the center is lit. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 941 (d), the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions are the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable display of the universal figure.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long-pressing automatic continuous tapping function of performing a pseudo continuous tapping operation by a long press operation of the effect button 136. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more, and the continuous hit operation is the effect button 136. Is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in the state where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the continuous hitting operation is performed at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) in a pseudo manner. ing. In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136 in the effect in which the single press operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is performed, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed by the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 940 will be described using FIG. 942. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 940 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. In addition, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures, which is divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win / no determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for general drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the special figure starting information storage unit, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and the starting information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 940 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 942 in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 938 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 938. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating processing, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the time of performing the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 943. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 940 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 940 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 940 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for random number generation The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for changing / stopping displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating / stop display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 234, 226 and the starting holes 230, 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each prize hole or for each starting hole is set. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 940 are made up of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the public figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. Turns on / off the 7-segment LED. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 941 (c)) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 941 (c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure start opening 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinction drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so as to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, the 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( Any one of the special symbols f) is confirmed and displayed.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234, the solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts and closes the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) and starts at a timing when the door member is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the open time in one single opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (power extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and game balls enter during the big hit game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases, which is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", its description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive, and special figure 2 which is being held Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

  Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even when the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, when the number of special game 2 variable game holding is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the special figure 1 variable game holding are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is prioritized over the special figure variation game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-match by using the hit / miss judgment table stored in the table (judgment judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of special figure 1 and special figure 2, so comparison is made with priority variation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holdings.

  Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update The special process and the special figure-related lottery process may be independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Further, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, final effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information for specifying the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as a number, it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

  Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, or the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  FIG. 944 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit determination process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 945 (a) to 945 (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section for storing the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section are special figures. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the ranking of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

  Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading is decreased, and the order of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the number of special figure 2 reservations is larger than the number of special figure 2 prefetches, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning / judging determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information and, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is, in addition to the non-electric power support, conditions such as not being in the big hit game.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (group of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning / judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit / miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 944, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. However, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 945 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 945 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 945 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 1 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with a holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 945 (a), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance)" is stored, "Special figure A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special figure I" is stored as storage symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Disappearance) is stored.

  FIG. 945 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 945 (b), the special-reading 2 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 2 variable game. . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 945 (b), the storage area “holding 1” stores “special drawing f” (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4” have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 945 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 945 (c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 945 (c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result and the fluctuation timer number (fluctuation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 946, for the win / fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 943, see FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 946 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win / loss determination, and FIG. 946 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win / loss determination. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true or false, the high probability state for special figure is referred to, and the high probability table for determination of odds or hits shown in FIG. 946 (a) is referred to. The low probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 946 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referred win / loss judgment table and the obtained random number value, the win / loss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit / miss determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the special determination of the special figure 2, if the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high probability table for hit determination of FIG. 946 (a). In this case, the low / probability table for determination of success / failure shown in FIG. 946 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range and the acquired random number value indicated by the referred win / loss determination table, the win / loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit determination result.

  FIG. 946 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the result of the big hit judgment is out of alignment, the table for small hit judgment shown in FIG. 946 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the table for small hit judgment referred to and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win / no win determination result (lottery result) per special map is the special one, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win / no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning / disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning / judging determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 943. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 947. Here, FIG. 947 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 947 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 947 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit / no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit / no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 design decision table which is shown in Figure 947 (b), on the basis of the hit result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit / damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 948 (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 948 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to. Further, in the chance button control processing according to the present embodiment, if there is an instruction to operate the effect button 136 in the effect data read in step S409 or the updated effect data, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. To do.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 430.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 948 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 948 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 949 (a) is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 949 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208 or effect data by the shielding device 246) is read from the ROM (not shown), or the like. If the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if there is a command to the VDP (not shown) in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the VDP (details will be described later).

  In step S513 subsequent to step S511, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to a drive circuit (not shown) that drives the shielding device 246.

  In step S515 following step S513, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when the effect requested by the command of the first sub control unit 400 is started or finished, the control command for notifying the first sub control unit 400 is output. Then, it returns to step S503.

  FIG. 949 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 949 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, the control command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 set in the information transmission process of the second sub-control unit main process (step S515), and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  FIG. 949 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM (not shown). As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address), etc. in the VDP attribute register based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from ROM to VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555, If not (step S553: NO), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM in step S551, the CPU has information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axes of VRAM, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP. The VDP sets a parameter according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the VDP to start drawing an image. The VDP starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP based on the image drawing end is input, and when the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), If not (step S559: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S561, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 950 is an example of a table provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, FIG. 9A is an example of a box data table, and FIG. 9B is an example of a parts data table. .

  The first sub-control unit 400 uses the box data in the RAM 408 to store the box data shown in FIG. 7A at each performance execution timing, such as at the start of fluctuation, at the time of holding change, at the time of notice effect, at the time of reach effect, and at the time of button effect occurrence. Set in the data setting area. The box data is part data including liquid crystal commands and information such as voice, light emission, and accessory (movable body) executed corresponding to the effect based on the liquid crystal commands (here, as an example, parts A to H ...). Composed of etc. The liquid crystal command is a command for displaying the effect display corresponding to each on the decorative pattern display device 208 at the time of start of fluctuation, at the time of hold change, at the time of notice effect, at the time of reach effect, at the time of button effect occurrence (for example, No. Command of box data such as 101, 102, 201 to 203).

  In addition, the liquid crystal command corresponds to the operation of the accessory M (effect movable body 246, 224, 225) corresponding to each of the fluctuation start, the hold change, the notice effect, the reach effect, the button effect, and the like. It includes a command (for example, a box data command such as No. 255) for performing the display.

  Specifically, in this example, No. The box data 1 includes a liquid crystal command for starting the special figure variation, a part A (data for storing a bicep accessory) and a part B (data for storing a shutter). In addition, No. The box data of No. 101 includes a liquid crystal command for displaying the background of the hall and part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the background of the hall). The box data of No. 201 includes the liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 01 and the part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (display of the character (lord) and the character "?"), And No. The box data of 202 includes a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 02, and part E and part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02 (display of characters (princess) and "genki?")). , No. The box data 203 is a liquid crystal command for executing the conversation notice 03, and part E and part G (direction data corresponding to the conversation notice 03 (display of characters (princess) and "Gekiatsuyo!")) No. The box data 255 includes a liquid crystal command for vertically moving the bicep character and a part H (data for vertically moving the bicep character).

  As shown in (b) of the same figure, the parts data includes the movable mode of the accessory (effect movable body 246, 224, 225, etc.) executed corresponding to each effect, the output sound (sound) from the speaker 120, This is information on the light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418, etc.).

  That is, each part data is composed of a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an accessory action layer having shutter device data and accessory (movable body) device data. Here, a plurality of (two) sound layers, lamp layers, and accessory action layers are provided, and the higher the number of each layer, the higher the priority. The number of layers of each part data may be one, and the number (or type) of device data may be one.

  Specifically, in this example, the part A (data for storing a bicep accessory) returns the bicep accessory (production movable body 224) to the initial position to the accessory operation layer 1 (bicep accessory operation layer). Contains device data. Further, the part B (data for storing the shutter) includes device data for returning the shutter accessory (production movable body (shielding means) 246) to the initial position in the accessory operation layer 2 (shutter accessory operation layer). There is.

  Further, the part C (effect data corresponding to the display of the saloon background) includes sound device data as BGM for the saloon background in the sound layer 1 and lamp device data of the light emitting pattern for the saloon background in the lamp layer 1. I have.

  Further, the part E (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 01) corresponds to the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the dialogue (such as "n?") Emitted by the character (donor) corresponding to the notice and the lamp layer 2. It includes lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice.

  The part F (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 02) is the sound device data of the dialogue (“Genki?”) Issued by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice in the sound layer 2 and the notice in the lamp layer 2. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to is included.

  In addition, the part G (effect data corresponding to the conversation notice 03) is stored in the sound layer 2 in the sound layer 2 and the sound device data of the dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Produced by the character (princess) corresponding to the notice. The lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice is included.

  In addition, parts H (data for vertical movement of the bicep character) include lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding to the vertical movement of the bicep character, and the role object operation layer 1 (the bicep character operation layer). ) Includes device data for vertically moving a bicep accessory (effect movable body 224).

  Although not shown here, the storage position (position) of each part data is set in each box data. The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408. In the box data 201, the head address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E. In addition, for example, No. In the box data 203, the start address of the position 0001 (for example, address 1001) is set as the storage position of the part E, and the start address of the position 0002 (for example, the address 1002) is set as the storage position of the part G. ing.

  The first sub control unit 400 sets the above box data at each performance execution timing (for each performance), and transmits the liquid crystal command to the second sub control unit 500. Each box data is also set when the first sub-control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. At this time, the part data is stored in the RAM 408 at addresses (parts data setting areas) corresponding to a plurality of positions. The part data may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 executes control for effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command, and sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400. The return command also includes position information. When the first sub-controller 400 that has received the return command sets a position (parts data) corresponding to the box data, the first sub-controller 400 determines the corresponding position in the RAM 408. When the part data is stored, the control data of the sound of the sound layer, the light emission mode of the lamp layer, and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer of the part data is stored in each device or the second mode as necessary. The effect is transmitted to the sub-control unit 500 and an effect corresponding to the effect display is performed.

  FIG. 951 is a schematic diagram showing an example of command transmission in the effect control of the present embodiment, and is an example of displaying an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on a liquid crystal command.

  The first sub control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 948, and the second sub control unit 400 performs each effect according to the result. A control command is transmitted to 500.

  For example, when performing the effect of the conversation announcement 01, the first sub control unit 400 instructs the second sub control unit 500 to change the No. 1 shown in FIG. 950 (a). The liquid crystal command of the box data 201 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes a command for instructing the decorative pattern display device 208 to display the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”).

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the No. Based on the position set in the box data of 201, the part data is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 201, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address (1). As a result, the character corresponding to the conversation notice 01 (

The sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") And the lamp device data of the light emission pattern corresponding to the notice are stored.

  No. from the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 201, the second sub-control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 01 (the image of the character (lord) and the character of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 01). Display control) is performed), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (2). The return command also includes position information, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the return command corresponds to the part data if the position (part data) corresponding to the box data is set. The control data is set (3). In this example, since the return command includes the information of the position 0001, various device data (sound, lamp, etc.) corresponding to the part E stored in the position 0001 (the area having the address 1001 as the start address) of the RAM 408. (Light emission mode of L) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect (4). In addition, since the effect by the speaker 120 and the lamp L is actually after receiving the command from the main control unit 300, there is a time lag.

  FIG. 952 is another example of a case where an image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the liquid crystal command.

  For example, when performing the effect of the conversation notice 03, the first sub control unit 400 instructs the second sub control unit 500 to change the No. shown in FIG. 950 (a). A liquid crystal command of box data 203 is transmitted (1). In this example, the liquid crystal command includes, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an image of the character (lord), a command for instructing display of the characters of the dialogue (“?”), And an image of the character (princess). It includes a command for instructing the display of the characters of that dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”).

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 sets the liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the No. Based on the position set in the box data 203, the part data is stored in the corresponding address of the RAM 408. That is, in this example, No. Based on the position 0001 set in the box data of 203, the part E is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1001 as the start address, and the No. Based on the position 0002 set in the box data of 203, the part G is stored in the area of the RAM 408 having, for example, the address 1002 as the start address (1). As a result, the sound device data of the dialogue (for example, "n?") Issued by the character (Den) and the lamp device data of the corresponding light emission pattern are stored in the area of the RAM 408 having the start address of 1001. In a region of the RAM 408 having a head address of 1002, sound device data of a dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Issued by a character (princess) and lamp device data of a light emission pattern corresponding thereto are stored.

  No. from the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command 203, the second sub control unit 500 displays the effect of the conversation notice 03 (the image of the character (lord) and the characters of the dialogue (“?”) On the decorative pattern display device 208 (conversation notice 03a). Is displayed), and the image of the character (princess) and the characters of the dialogue (“Gekiatsuyo!”) Are displayed (display control of conversation notice 03b))). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a to the first sub-control unit 400 (2) and a return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b (3). . In this example, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03a, includes the position 0001 information in the return command. Various device data (sound, lamp L emission, etc.) corresponding to the part E stored in the address area

(Light mode) data is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L, respectively, and the effect is executed (4). Further, in this example, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the return command corresponding to the display of the conversation notice 03b, includes the information of the position 0002 in the return command. Data of various device data (sound, light emission mode of the lamp L) corresponding to the part G stored in the area having the head address) is set and transmitted to the speaker 120 and the lamp L to execute the effect ( 5).

  As described above, when one liquid crystal command is a command for instructing execution of a plurality of effect displays (display of the conversation notice 03a and conversation notice 03b), and part data (parts E and G) is set for each command, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command corresponding to the display control for performing each display from the liquid crystal command, and uses the speaker 120 and the lamp L based on the part data (parts E and G) corresponding to each return command. Perform the performance.

  Next, the production system operation processing will be described. FIG. 953 (a) is a flowchart of the production system operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This effect system operation process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 948 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operating state of the operating means (step S601). That is, the processing of clearing (port clearing) the signals input from the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed. The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S603).

  After that, the CPU 404 executes a chance button operation state determination process (step S605).

  Here, the chance button operation state determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 953 (b).

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button has been operated (step S701). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is operated by detecting the input state of the signal of the effect button 136 at the input port.

  When it is determined that the effect button 136 is operated (step S701: Yes), the CPU 404 updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the input state (step S703).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705). That is, it is determined whether or not the previous operation status of the effect button 136 is OFF and the current operation status of the effect button 136 is ON.

  When determining that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is the first operation (step S705: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S707) and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when determining that the operation of the effect button 136 this time is not the first operation (step S705: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S707.

  If the CPU 404 does not determine in step S701 that the effect button 136 has been operated (step S701: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the long press operation has ended (step S709). When the CPU 404 determines that the long press operation has ended (step S709: Yes), the box data table related to the long press release is set (step S711). As a result, the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press is released is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and thus, in the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, a chance button indicating the effect button 136. The effect (effect) display that the long press has been released may be displayed for the image. It should be noted that the effect display of the long press release in the long press effect and the effect display of the long press release during the long press auto continuous hit may be different or the same. Further, according to the return command from the second sub control unit 500, according to the part data corresponding to the set box data table, the output of the sound effect by the speaker 120 and the various lamps 418 are synchronized with the effect display of the long press release. The effect may be enhanced by blinking with.

  When the CPU 404 does not determine in step S709 that the long-press operation has ended (step S709: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S711.

  Returning to FIG. 953 (a), the CPU 404, after executing the chance button operation state determination processing, the determination button operation state determination processing (step S607), the left button operation state determination processing (step S609), and the right button operation state determination. The process (step S611), the up button operation state determination process (step S613), and the down button operation state determination process (step S615) are sequentially executed. The contents of each of the decision button operation state determination process, the left button operation state determination process, the right button operation state determination process, the up button operation state determination process, and the down button operation state determination process are the same as the chance button operation state determination process described above. Since the processing is the same as the processing, detailed description will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button operation-related processing (step S617), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button operation-related processing executed in the production system operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 954 to 955. FIG. 954 is a flowchart of various button operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 955 is a flowchart showing a continuation of various button operation related processing shown in FIG. 954.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S801). When the initial operation flag is not ON (step S801: No), the CPU 404 ends this processing, but when the initial operation flag is ON (step S801: Yes), various buttons (effect button 136, operation key). If the unit 137) is pressed, the power saving state during the customer waiting demonstration is canceled (step S803). The power saving state is configured to shift, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after a standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, and without the symbol variation display and various button press operations. Specifically, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 100 is reduced by turning off the various lamps 418 or reducing the brightness, or reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative design display device 208. The power saving state may not be entered. The power saving state is released in response to the operation of one of the various buttons, but the power saving state can be released even when two or more buttons are operated at the same time. Alternatively, the power saving state may not be canceled when two or more buttons are simultaneously operated. Further, the power saving state may be released only when only one button is operated for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button (chance button) 136 is operated alone (step S805). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: Yes), it executes the button pressing process (step S807), and then ends this process. The detailed contents of the button pressing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S805: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S809). When the CPU 404 determines that the enter button 137e is operated alone (step S809: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S811), and then executes the enter button operating setting display process. (Step S813), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the enter button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S809: No), it determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815). When it is determined that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: Yes), the CPU 404 executes a button pressing process described later (step S817), and then executes a right button operation setting display process. (Step S819), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the right button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S815: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S823), and then executes the left button operation setting display process. (Step S825), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the left button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S821: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827). If the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S827: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S829), and then executes the upper button operation setting display process. (Step S831), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process at the time of operating the upper button will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the up button 137a is operated alone (step S827: No), it determines whether or not the down button 137b is operated alone as shown in FIG. 955 ( Step S833). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S833: Yes), it executes the button pressing process described later (step S835), and then executes the down button operation setting display process. (Step S837), this process ends. The detailed contents of the setting display process when the down button is operated will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S833: No), it determines whether both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839). . When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are being operated (step S839: Yes), the button pressing process described below is executed (step S841), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S839: No), it determines whether both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. (Step S843). When determining that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the button pressing process described later (step S845), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S843: No), the CPU 404 determines whether all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. Is determined (step S847). When the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: Yes), after executing the button pressing process described later (step S849), this process To finish. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S847: No), the process of step S849 is ended without executing the process of step S849. .

  Next, button press-time processing executed in various button operation-related processing and various button long-press operation-related processing described later will be described with reference to FIG. 956. FIG. 956 is a flowchart of the button pressing process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect for which the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is being received is being executed (step S901). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect for which the operation is being accepted is being executed (step S901: No), it ends this processing, and if it is determined that the effect for which the operation is being accepted is being executed (step S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903). Note that the effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of actually pressing the button is being performed, and for example, the effect of not pressing the button is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, The effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (back button effect) is executed when the effect button 136 etc. is operated is also included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: Yes), the operation is performed once (step S905), and then the process of step S917 is executed. . Here, the condition for determining that the effect being executed is the effect for one-time operation of the button includes that the pressed button is the button for which the operation is requested in the effect being executed. For example, when an effect that requires a one-time operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect being executed is an effect for one-time operation of the button, provided that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is configured to determine that The detailed contents of the one-time operation process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for one-time operation of the button (step S903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the effect being executed is an effect for repeatedly hitting the button. (Step S907). Note that the effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of actually pressing the button repeatedly is performed, and for example, the effect of not pressing the button repeatedly is not performed, but a predetermined button (for example, The effect is a state in which a predetermined effect (reverse button continuous hit effect) is executed when there is a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 and the like.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting of the button (step S907: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the continuous hitting operation process (step S909), and then executes the process of step S917. Here, the condition that is determined that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting of the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed. When the effect requiring the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, it is determined that the effect being executed is the effect for continuous hitting of the button on condition that the effect button 136 is operated once. Is configured. The detailed content of the repeated hitting operation processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for repeatedly hitting the button (step S907: No), it determines whether the effect being executed is an effect for pressing and holding the button (step S907: No). Step S911). The effect determined here is not limited to the one in which the effect of urging the long press of the button is actually performed. For example, the effect of urging the long press of the button is not performed, but the predetermined button ( For example, an effect that is a state in which a predetermined effect (rear button long-press effect) is executed when a long-press operation of the effect button 136 etc. is performed is included.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the long-press operation process (step S913), and then executes the process of step S917. Here, the condition that the effect being executed is determined to be the effect for long-pressing the button includes that the pressed button is a button for which an operation is requested in the effect being executed, For example, when an effect that requires a long-press operation of the effect button 136 is being executed, the effect that is being executed is the effect for long-pressing the button, provided that the effect button 136 has been operated once. It is configured to determine that. The detailed contents of the long press operation processing will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for long-pressing the button (step S911: No), the other button operation processing is executed (step S915), and then the processing of step S917 is executed. . The details of the other button operation processing will be described later.

  In step S917, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command corresponding to the box set in the one-time operation process, the repeated hit operation process, the long press operation process, or the other button operation process to the second sub control unit 500, as described below. After this (step S917), this process ends.

  Next, the one-time operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 957 to 958. FIG. 957 is a flowchart of the one-time operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 958 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the one-time operation process.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is the effect of a single operation using the effect button 136 (step S1001). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: Yes), the chance button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the chance button has been operated is set. After that (step S1003), the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is turned on (step S1005), and then the process of step S1031 shown in FIG. 958 is executed. In addition, in this process, when other buttons are simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136, the operation itself of the effect button 136 is treated as invalid, but it is treated as effective. You may

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect of the single operation by the effect button 136 (step S1001: No), the effect being executed is the effect of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. It is determined whether or not (step S1007). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: Yes), the box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1009). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, the chance button operation box for executing the effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the right button 137d is operated, the right button 137d is set. When the right button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. The button operation box for executing the effect is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, when another button (for example, the upper button 137a etc.) is simultaneously operated, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is invalid. However, it may be treated as valid. In this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, either button of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. Even if the button operation is performed, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011). When determining that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated (step S1011: Yes), the CPU 404 turns on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1013), and then the step shown in FIG. 958. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1011: No), it executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1013. A button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation flag of the right button 137d is turned off. It may be configured such that the processing of step S1033 described later is executed by leaving the two button operation flags ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S1007 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d (step S1007: No), the effect being executed is the effect button 136 and the left button. It is determined whether or not the effect is the simultaneous operation of 137c (step S1015). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: Yes), a box corresponding to the operated button is set (step S1017). . For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, it is determined that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated. The button operation box for executing the effect is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136 and the left button 137c, when other buttons (for example, the lower button 137b) are simultaneously operated, the operation itself of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is invalid. However, it may be treated as valid. Further, in this process, the effect may be performed only when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, and in that case, one of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c is operated. Even if the button operation is performed, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and the button operation box is set when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019). When the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated (step S1019: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1021), the step shown in FIG. 958. The process of S1031 is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are not operated (step S1019: No), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1031 without executing the process of step S1021. Note that a button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation flag of the left button 137c is turned off. It may be configured such that the processing of step S1033 described later is executed by leaving the two button operation flags ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S1015 that the effect being executed is not the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the left button 137c (step S1015: No), as shown in FIG. 958, the effect being executed. It is determined whether or not is an effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d (step S1023: Yes), the box corresponding to the operated button is set. (Step S1025). For example, when the effect button 136 is operated, a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the chance button is operated is set, and when the left button 137c is operated, the left button 137c is set. When the left button operation box for executing the effect of being operated is set and the right button 137d is operated, the right button operation box for executing the effect of operating the right button 137d is set. Set. Further, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect indicating that both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated is set, and the effect button 136 is set. When both the right button 137d and the right button 137d are operated, a button operation box for executing an effect indicating that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated is set, and the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and When all the right buttons 137d have been operated, a button operation box for executing an effect to the effect that all the effect buttons 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d have been operated is set. In addition, in this process, in addition to the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d, when other buttons (for example, the enter button button 137e and the like) are simultaneously operated, the effect button 136 and the left button 137c. Although the operation of the right button 137d and the right button 137d are treated as invalid, they may be treated as valid. In this process, the effect may be performed only when all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated. In that case, the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d. If any one or two of the buttons are operated, the button operation box corresponding to the button operation is not set, and if all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated, the button operation box Are configured to be set.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027). When the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are operated (step S1027: Yes), after turning on the button operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1029), step S1031. The process of is executed. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that all of the effect button 136, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are not operated (step S1027: No), the process of step S1031 is executed without executing the process of step S1029. Run. Note that a button operation flag is set for each button. For example, when only the effect button 136 is operated, the button operation flag of the effect button 136 is turned on and the button operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d is performed. The flag may be left OFF, or the three button operation flags may be turned ON so that the process of step S1033 described below is executed.

  The CPU 404 determines whether the button operation flag in the RAM 408 is ON in step S1031 (step S1031). When determining that the button operation flag is ON (step S1031: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the operation valid period ending process (step S1033), and then ends the process. Specifically, the CPU 404 performs a process of ending the operation valid period even before the operation valid period ends, and then sets a box for ending the effect that receives the button operation. Based on the set box, the CPU 404 transmits a liquid crystal command to the second sub-control unit 500 to the effect that the acceptance of the button operation will be terminated. Then, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 after displaying that the acceptance of the button operation is finished. If the button operation is continuously accepted until the operation valid period ends, the process of ending the operation valid period may not be performed.

  Next, the continuous hitting operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. 959. FIG. 959 is a flowchart of the repeated hitting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting with the effect button 136 (step S1101). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not the effect for continuous hitting with the effect button 136 (step S1101: No), the processing is ended. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is an effect for continuous hitting with the effect button 136 (step 1101: Yes), it performs a continuous hit effect lottery and sets the result (step S1103). Specifically, for example, whether or not to increase the continuous stroke meter displayed in the continuous stroke effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136, and in the case of increasing it, the increase amount is determined by lottery. Set the box according to the result. Then, the liquid crystal command according to the increase amount of the continuous stroke meter is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the increase of the continuous stroke meter in a mode according to the liquid crystal command (the 0th mode). ).

Here, an example applicable to the continuous hitting lottery mode will be described.
(First form)

The validity / invalidity of the operation may be determined by comparing the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period with the interval at which the player operates the button. For example, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.5 seconds, and finally the effect button 136 is operated. Until 0.5 seconds elapses from then, it is determined to be invalid even if the operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and it is determined to be effective when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed after 0.5 second has elapsed. In addition, when the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the comparison time C is set to 0.3 seconds, and the effect is displayed until 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the last effect button 136 was operated. Even if the button 136 is operated, it is determined to be invalid, and if the effect button 136 is operated after 0.3 seconds has elapsed, it is determined to be valid. Further, when the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the comparison time C is set to 0.1 seconds, and until the 0.1 second has elapsed since the last operation of the effect button 136, the effect button 136 has no effect. Even if an operation is performed, it is determined to be invalid, and it is determined to be valid when the effect button 136 is operated after 0.1 second has elapsed.
(Second form)

Also, the comparison time C set according to the elapsed time T from the start of the operation valid period to the first player operation is compared with the interval at which the player operates the effect button 136 to validate the operation. You may judge invalidity. For example, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is 12 seconds and the elapsed time T is less than 4 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is made effective at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and at other timings. The operation is invalid. When the elapsed time T is 4 seconds or more and less than 8 seconds, the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled at intervals of 0.3 seconds from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is disabled. When the elapsed time T is 8 seconds or more, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid at 0.1 second intervals from the initial operation, and the operation at other timings is invalid.
(Third form)

Further, in the production lottery of operation effects in which the continuous hit operation or the long press automatic continuous hit operation can be performed (the continuous hit effect lottery), the progress pattern of the effect of the continuous hit effect is larger than the progress pattern of the effect of the long press auto continuous hit ( For example, the increase amount of the continuous hit meter reaches 70% of the entire meter in 5 times of continuous hit operations, whereas it does not increase to 70% of the entire meter in long press auto continuous hit unless seven liquid crystal commands are transmitted. Etc.) and vice versa.
(Fourth form)

Further, the increase amount by the continuous hitting operation and the long-press auto continuous hitting operation changes according to the elapse of the operation valid period (for example, the increase amount becomes larger / smaller as the operation valid period elapses). May be.
(Fifth form)

Also, depending on the number of times the effect button 136 is operated during a predetermined determination period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the operation valid period (for example, 10 seconds) of the continuous striking effect, the remaining time after the end of the determination period in the operation valid period is determined. A lottery table that determines whether or not to perform an effect according to an operation in a period (for example, 8 seconds) may be selected, and the effect execution lottery may be performed based on the selected lottery table. When a lottery is won, an effect according to the operation is executed, and when no win is made, an effect according to the operation may not be performed. More specifically, for example, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is five or more, a low-probability lottery table with a low probability of winning in the effect execution lottery is set, and the operation of the effect button 136 in the determination period is performed. If the number of times is less than 5, by setting a high-probability lottery table that has a high probability of winning in the production execution lottery, it may be possible to fully enjoy the production contents even for a player who is not good at continuous hitting operation. . On the other hand, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is 5 or more, a high probability lottery table is set, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the determination period is less than 5, a low probability lottery table is set. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain the player who has actively performed the continuous hitting operation. It should be noted that also during the determination period, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the effect according to the operation is performed. In this case, the lottery table referred to in the predetermined period may be the same as or may be different from any of the lottery tables referred to in the remaining period. Further, the effect may be performed according to all the operations. In this case, in the effect according to the operation performed in the determination period, for example, the effect can be performed until the meter reaches a threshold value (for example, the meter can be increased to a certain value). Good. Here, the lottery table described above is a table for performing lottery to determine whether or not to execute the effect, but it may have a table configuration for determining the amount of change in the effect by lottery.
(Sixth form)

  Further, in the effect of operating one or more buttons with good timing in the operation valid period (may be referred to as “timing operation effect”), the effect period (the operation valid period may be set, for example, 15 seconds). Depending on the number of times the button has been operated with good timing during the predetermined determination period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start (the number of times the button has been operated during the period when it is determined that the operation timing of the corresponding button is good), the remaining period (for example, It may be configured to determine the operation effective period of the timing operation effect for 10 seconds). For example, if the number of times the button is operated with good timing during the determination period is three or more, the period for determining that the operation timing of the corresponding button is good is set as the first determination period, and the timing is determined with good timing during the determination period. If the number of times the button has been operated is less than 3 times, and if the period for determining that the timing of the operation of the corresponding button is good is the second determination period, the second determination period is better than the first determination period. By setting a long time, it may be possible to sufficiently enjoy the effect contents even for a player who is not good at timing operation. On the other hand, by setting the first determination period longer than the second determination period, it may be possible to entertain the player who is good at timing operation. Further, the period in which it is determined that the timing of the operation of the corresponding button in the determination period is good may be the same as or different from either the first determination period or the second determination period. Here, if the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set to be longer than the first determination period and the second determination period, the player can practice the timing operation in the determination period. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to easily participate in the operation effect. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set to be shorter than both the first determination period and the second determination period, the operation becomes easier as the timing operation effect proceeds, so the timing operation is gradually performed. You may be able to think that you have improved. Further, when the operation timing of the corresponding button in the determination period is set between the first determination period and the second determination period, the timing operation effect can be determined according to the skill of the player. It may be possible to satisfy both the player who is not good at and the player who is good at timing operation.

  In the present embodiment, it may be applied only to any one of the 0th form to the 6th form, or a plurality of types of continuous hitting effects are prepared, and the embodiment is performed according to the type of continuous hitting effect. May be different.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 sets a chance button operation box for executing an effect indicating that the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated (step S1105). Then, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the first operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S1107). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the start of pressing the effect button 136.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1107: Yes), after setting the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 ( In step S1109), this process ends. In the present embodiment, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is, for example, 500 ms, but it can be set to any time. As a result, when the time T1 is pressed for a long time during execution of the effect for repeated hits, the effect can be performed as if the effect button 136 was pressed, without pressing the button again. There is.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the long press automatic continuous hit is in progress (step S1107: No), then the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hit is transmitted. After setting the time T2 until it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1111), this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted is set to, for example, 100 ms, but can be set to any time. Accordingly, during execution of the effect for repeated hits, if the long press is continuously maintained and the time T2 elapses, it is possible to perform the effect as if the effect button 136 was pressed, without pressing the button again. It has become.

  The continuous stroke operation process in the present embodiment is executed only for the continuous stroke operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter). The button 137e) may be repeatedly hit.

  Next, the long press operation process executed in the button press process will be described with reference to FIG. 960. FIG. 960 is a flowchart of a long press operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect being executed is an effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 (step S1201). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is not an effect for long press by the effect button 136 (step S1201: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect being executed is the effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 (step 1201: Yes), the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation based on the initial operation flag in the RAM 408. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the start of pressing the effect button 136.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation (step S1203: Yes), the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1205). ), And ends this process. The time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is 100 ms in the present embodiment, but can be set to any time. As a result, while the effect for long-pressing is being executed, the effect of assuming that the long-pressing of the effect button 136 has been started by performing the long-pressing for the time T3 can be performed.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is not the first operation, that is, if it is determined that the button is being pressed for a long time (step S1203: No), the effect button (chance button) 136 has been operated. The chance button operation box for executing the effect is set (step S1207). Then, after the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 (step S1209), this processing is ended. The time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted is 231 ms in the present embodiment, but can be set to any time. Thereby, during execution of the effect for long press, when the long press is continued and time T4 elapses, the effect that the long press of the effect button 136 is maintained can be performed. The time T4 set in step S1209 is configured such that the same time (231 ms) is set each time in the present embodiment, but the set time may change each time it is set.

  The long press operation process in the present embodiment is executed for the long press operation effect by the effect button 136, but each button of the operation key unit 137 (up button 137a, down button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, The long press operation process may be executed for the enter button 137e).

  Next, the other button operation process executed in the button pressing process will be described with reference to FIG. 961. FIG. 961 is a flowchart of other button operation processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the enter button 137e of the operation key unit 137 has been operated (step S1301). When the CPU 404 determines that the decision button 137e is operated (step S1301: Yes), it sets the decision button push-down box for executing the effect that the decision button 137e is operated (step S1303). This process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that it is not the operation of the decision button 137e (step S1301: No), the CPU 404 determines whether it is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the right button 137d (step S1305: Yes), after setting the right button pressing box for executing the effect to the effect that the right button 137d is operated (step S1307), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is not operated (step S1305: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated (step S1309). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the left button 137c (step S1309: Yes), the CPU 404 sets the left button pressing box for executing the effect to the effect that the left button 137c has been operated (step S1311), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is not operated (step S1309: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated (step S1313). When the CPU 404 determines that the operation is the operation of the upper button 137a (step S1313: Yes), after setting the upper button pressing box for executing the effect that the upper button 137a is operated (step S1315), This process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the up button 137a is not operated (step S1313: No), it is determined that the down button 137b is operated, and the down button is pressed to execute an effect to the effect that the down button 137c is operated. After the box is set (step S1317), this process ends.

  Next, the enter button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. 962. FIG. 962 is a flowchart of the enter button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1401). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not it is from the time the power is turned on to the time when the returning display ends. When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on-related process is being executed (step S1401: No), this process ends. In this embodiment, the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are not displayed from the time the power is turned on until the display during recovery ends. It should be noted that the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen may be displayed so that the volume setting and the brightness setting can be performed even after the power is turned on until the display during recovery ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1401: Yes), it determines whether the setting display is non-display (step S1403). That is, the CPU 404 does not display the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen as shown in FIG. 978 (e) in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed, the symbol variation display, the big hit game, or the like. It is determined whether or not the state. When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1403: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the setting display is displayed (step S1403: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 explicitly or suggests to the player that the volume setting and the brightness setting can be performed by operating the operation key unit 137 during the customer waiting demo display displayed in the standby state. It is determined whether or not the icon is displayed. Even if such an icon is not displayed, if the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen is displayed if a predetermined operation is performed, the processing of step S1405 is unnecessary. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1405: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1405: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S1407). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the various lamps 418 and the brightness setting screen for displaying the set brightness are displayed. In the present embodiment, the brightness setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b. When the volume setting screen and the brightness setting screen, which will be described later, are configured to be displayed at the same time, the type of setting screen to be displayed does not have to be divided depending on the type of button. This brightness setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the effect buttons 136 or the buttons of the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1407: Yes), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is (step S1409), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the brightness setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time.

  On the other hand, when determining that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1407: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether the current volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 or a volume setting screen for displaying the set volume is displayed. In this embodiment, the volume setting screen is configured to be displayed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. The volume setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses without operating the effect buttons 136 or the buttons of the operation key unit 137. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1411: YES), it sets a liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is (step S1413), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 resets the display time for maintaining the display of the volume setting screen. Here, the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen as it is may be a command for resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and resetting the count of the predetermined display time. However, it may be a command for continuing the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1411: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1415). Specifically, for example, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen or the brightness setting screen displayed during the symbol variable display is displayed. When the CPU 404 determines that the pattern changing setting screen is displayed (step S1415: Yes), the liquid crystal for hiding the setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

After setting the command (step S1417), this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1415: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1417.

  Next, the right button operation time setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. 963. FIG. 963 is a flowchart of a right button operation setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. Note that the left button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing also performs the same processing as the right button operation setting display processing, so the description of the right button 137d is replaced with the description of the left button 137c. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S1501: No), the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S1501: Yes), it determines whether the setting display is non-display (step S1503). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is not displayed (step S1503: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether it is in the non-demo state (step S1505). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed in the standby state. When the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S1505: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the symbol variation setting screen (step S1507), and then ends this processing. That is, the CPU 404 sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen displayed during the symbol variable display. The brightness setting screen may be displayed together with the volume setting screen. Further, only the brightness setting screen may be displayed, or a setting screen other than the volume and the brightness may be displayed.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S1505: No), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1509), and then ends this processing.

  When the CPU 404 determines in step S1503 that the setting display is not hidden (step S1503: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume / brightness setting mini icon is displayed (step S1511). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is displayed (step S1511: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the volume setting screen (step S1513), and then ends this processing. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S1511: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S1515). When determining that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S1515: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process (step S1517), and then ends this process. In this embodiment, when the right button 137d (left button 137c) is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is set, but the right button 137d (left button 137c) is set. Then, the brightness setting may be disabled. The details of the brightness setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S1515: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519). When determining that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S1519: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen update process (step S1521), and then ends this process. The details of the volume setting screen update process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S1519: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1523). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S1523: Yes), it executes the volume setting screen updating process (step S1525), and then ends this process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is not displayed (step S1523: No), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S1525.

  Next, the brightness setting display update process executed in the right button operation setting display process and the left button operation setting display process will be described with reference to FIG. 964 (a). FIG. 964 (a) is a flowchart of the brightness setting display update process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes a user brightness setting operation process (step S1601). Here, the details of the user brightness setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 964 (b). FIG. 964 (b) is a flowchart of the user brightness setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the brightness volume knob (step S1701). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the brightness volume knob is acquired based on the signal output from the brightness volume knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The brightness volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the brightness by a game shop clerk. That is, the brightness volume knob can be referred to as a volume knob for performing master setting of brightness. Note that the brightness volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process of step S1701 may not be executed. Alternatively, one volume knob may be provided, and the functions of the volume knob and the brightness volume knob, which will be described later, may be unified by this volume knob.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703). When the CPU 404 determines that the value of the brightness volume knob is 0 (step S1703: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the brightness volume knob is not 0 (step S1703: NO), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the operation is the up button 137a or the right button 137d.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is an operation to increase the brightness (step S1705: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness being set is 10 when the brightness can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the maximum value (step S1707: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is not the maximum value (step S1707: NO), the brightness is increased by one level (step S1709), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1705 that the current operation is not the operation to increase the brightness, that is, the operation is to decrease the brightness (for example, the operation of the down button 137b or the left button 137c) ( Step S1705: No), and it is determined whether or not the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the brightness being set is 1 when the brightness can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness being set is the minimum value (step S1711), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1715. On the other hand, when it is determined that the brightness being set is not the minimum value (step S1711: NO), the brightness is lowered by one level (step S1713), and then the process of step S1715 is executed.

  In step S1715, CPU 404 performs the resetting process for updating the setting display of the brightness changed as described above (step S1715), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen is maintained in the non-display state. Even when the value of the brightness volume knob is 0, the brightness setting screen may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, in this way, the setting change of the brightness and the set brightness can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 964 (a), when the CPU 404 executes the user brightness setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the brightness setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the brightness setting display update process is executed. finish. Here, the timer setting until the brightness setting screen is erased is performed by resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time, and transmitting the liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including.

  Next, the volume setting display update processing executed in the right button operation setting display processing and the left button operation setting display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 965 (a). FIG. 965 (a) is a flowchart of the volume setting display update processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 executes user volume setting operation processing (step S1801). Here, the details of the user volume setting operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 965 (b). FIG. 964 (b) is a flowchart of the user volume setting operation process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 acquires the value of the volume control knob (step S1901). Specifically, for example, the value indicated by the volume control knob is obtained based on the signal output from the volume control knob (not shown) provided on the first sub-board 160. The volume volume knob is, for example, a knob for changing the volume by a game shop clerk. That is, the volume control knob can be referred to as a volume control knob for setting the master volume. The volume knob may not be provided, and in this case, the process of step S1901 may not be executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the value of the volume control is 0 (step S1903). When the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume knob is 0 (step S1903: Yes), it executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the value of the volume control is not 0 (step S1903: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the current operation is an operation to increase the volume (step S1905). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the right button 137d or the upper button 137a is operated.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the current operation is to increase the volume (step S1905: YES), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is 10 when the volume can be set in 10 levels from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the maximum value (step S1907: YES), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is not the maximum value (step S1907: NO), it raises the volume by one step (step S1909), and outputs data for outputting the sound effect for increasing the volume. After the setting (step S1911), the process of step S1919 is executed. As a result, every time the operation of increasing the volume is performed, the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect indicating that the volume is increased.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S1905 that the current operation is not the volume increasing operation, that is, it is the volume decreasing operation (for example, the operation of the left button 137c or the down button 137b) ( Step S1905: No), and it is determined whether or not the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913). That is, the CPU 404 determines whether the volume being set is 1 when the volume can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. When the CPU 404 determines that the volume being set is the minimum value (step S1913), the CPU 404 executes the process of step S1919. On the other hand, when it is determined that the volume being set is not the minimum value (step S1913: No), the volume is lowered by one step (step S1915), and data for outputting the sound effect for volume reduction is set. (Step S1917), the process of step S1919 is performed.

  In step S1919, CPU 404 performs a resetting process for updating the setting display of the volume changed as described above (step S1919), and then ends this process. Here, when the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen is kept in the non-display state. Even if the value of the volume knob is 0, the volume setting screen may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in this way, the setting change of the volume and the set volume can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Returning to FIG. 965 (a), when the CPU 404 executes the user volume setting operation process as described above, after setting the timer until the volume setting screen is deleted (step S1603), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting display update process. finish. Here, the timer setting until the volume setting screen is erased is performed by resetting the count corresponding to the elapsed time of the predetermined display time and transmitting the liquid crystal command for resetting the count of the predetermined display time. Including. The time until the volume setting screen is erased (timer) and the time until the brightness setting screen is erased (timer) are the same, but one time is configured to be longer than the other. May be.

  Next, the upper button operation time setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. 966. FIG. 966 is a flowchart of the up button operation time setting display process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. It should be noted that the lower button operation setting display processing executed in various button operation related processing also performs the same processing as the upper button operation setting display processing, and therefore the description of the upper button 137a is replaced with the description of the lower button 137b. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001). When the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is being executed (step S2001: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the power-on related process is not being executed (step S2001: Yes), it determines whether the setting display is non-display (step S2003). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting display is non-display (step S2003: Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the setting display is non-demonstration (step S2005). When the CPU 404 determines that it is in the non-demo state (step S2005: Yes), it ends this processing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that it is not in the non-demo state (step S2005: No), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2007), and then ends this processing.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S2003 that the setting display is not hidden (step S2003: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume / brightness setting mini-icon is displayed (step S2009: Yes), it sets the liquid crystal command for displaying the brightness setting screen (step S2011), and then ends this processing. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume / luminance setting mini-icon is not displayed (step S2009: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the luminance setting screen is displayed (step S2013). When the CPU 404 determines that the brightness setting screen is displayed (step S2013: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the brightness setting screen update process shown in FIG. 964 (a) (step S2015) and then ends this process. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the brightness setting screen is not displayed (step S2013: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017). When the CPU 404 determines that the volume setting screen is displayed (step S2017: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the volume setting screen updating process shown in FIG. 965 (a) (step S2019), and then ends this process. . In the present embodiment, the volume is set when the up button 137a (down button 137b) is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed. However, the up button 137a (down button 137b) is set. Then, the volume may not be set.

  On the other hand, when determining that the volume setting screen is not displayed (step S2017: No), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S2021). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol changing setting screen is displayed (step S2021: Yes), after resetting the timer until the symbol changing setting screen is deleted (step S2023), this processing To finish. The symbol changing setting screen is erased when a predetermined display time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without operating each direction button of the operation key unit 137, but by executing the process of step S2023. The display time of the setting screen for changing patterns is reset.

  Next, the button long press processing will be described. FIG. 967 (a) is a flowchart of the button long press processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This button long-pressing process is a process executed in the chance button control process (step S411) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 948 (a).

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 first initializes the operation state of the operation means (step S2101). The CPU 404 subsequently clears the initial operation flag in the RAM 408 (step S2103).

  After that, the CPU 404 executes a chance button long press operation state determination process (step S2105).

  Here, the chance button long press operation state determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 967 (b).

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 as a chance button is in a state of being long-pressed (step S2201). Specifically, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is long-pressed by detecting that the signal input state of the effect button 136 in the input port is continuously ON.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 has been long-pressed (step S2201: Yes), it updates the operation status of the effect button 136 in the RAM 408 to the long-pressed state (step S2203). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the long-press operation of the effect button 136 has been performed (step S2201: No), this process ends.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205). Specifically, the CPU 404 is set in the times T1 and T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic repeated hits set in the repeated hit operation processing shown in FIG. 959 and the long press operation processing shown in FIG. 960. It is determined whether or not the times T3 and T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted have elapsed.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: Yes), it turns on the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 (step S2207), and then ends this processing. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the time until the liquid crystal command is transmitted has elapsed (step S2205: No), the CPU 404 ends this process without executing the process of step S2207.

  Returning to FIG. 967 (a), the CPU 404, after executing the chance button long press operation state determination process, the determination button long press operation state determination process (step S2107), the left button long press operation state determination process (step S2109). The right button long press operation state determination process (step S2111), the upper button long press operation state determination process (step S2113), and the lower button long press operation state determination process (step S2115) are sequentially executed. In addition, the determination button long press operation state determination process, the left button long press operation state determination process, the right button long press operation state determination process, the upper button long press operation state determination process, the lower button long press operation state determination process Since the contents are the same as the chance button long press operation state determination process described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes various button long-press operation related processing (step S2117), and then ends this processing.

  Next, various button long-press operation related processing executed in the button long-press processing will be described with reference to FIG. 968. FIG. 968 is a flowchart of various button long-press operation related processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  First, the CPU 404 determines whether the command transmission flag in the RAM 408 is ON (step S2301). If the command transmission flag is not ON (step S2301: No), the CPU 404 terminates this processing, but if the command transmission flag is ON (step S2301: Yes), the effect button (chance button) 136 alone is used. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed (step S2303). When the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2302: Yes), it executes the button pressing process shown in FIG. 956 (step S2305), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the effect button 136 is operated alone (step S2303: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S2307). When the CPU 404 determines that the decision button 137e is being operated alone (step S2307: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-mentioned button pressing process (step S2309), and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the decision button 137e is operated alone (step S2307: No), it determines whether the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311). When the CPU 404 determines that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: YES), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2313), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the right button 137d is operated alone (step S2311: NO), the CPU 404 determines whether the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315). When the CPU 404 determines that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-mentioned button pressing process (step S2317) and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the left button 137c is operated alone (step S2315: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319). When the CPU 404 determines that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: Yes), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2321) and then ends this process.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the upper button 137a is operated alone (step S2319: No), the CPU 404 determines whether the lower button 137b is operated alone (step S2323). When the CPU 404 determines that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: YES), the CPU 404 executes the above-described button pressing process (step S2325), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the down button 137b is operated alone (step S2323: NO), the CPU 404 ends the process without executing the process of step S2325.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested during the effect for one-time operation, the effect for continuous hitting and the effect for long press, or during the display of various setting screens. In addition to the above, when the right button 137d is also operated at the same time, if any button other than the one requested to be operated is further operated, all the operations are treated as invalid, but it is invalid. If the right button 137d is operated at the same time in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is requested, the operation button 136 may be treated as effective. May be handled as if it was operated.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 970 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 970, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 970 (a), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during the symbol change of special figure 2. While the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is displayed blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 970 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided.

  The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamps 218. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamps 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become older hold icons, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

  In FIG. 970 (a), two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and these two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are both held. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 970 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 970 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric choo and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 970 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking → starting or erasing the moving animation of the holding icon → starting variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

  In FIG. 970 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The design has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 970 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 has started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 970 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 9 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. At the time when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or until that time, the second hold icon. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 970 (f).

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 970 (g), the effect button 136 is set to the effective period (hereinafter, this effective period is referred to as “second operation effective period”). The operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 and the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Thus, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be regarded as an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 970 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 9 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 970 (j), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display “Chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. Even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 970 (j) may be displayed or the display as shown in FIG. 970 (j). May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 970 (j). This also applies to the one-time operation effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long-press effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as the second operation result display. In addition, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, the “operation result display” may be referred to as an “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 970 (k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but the entry state may be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 970 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 970 (n). , Has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 970 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (o) is a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  FIG. 971 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 970 step by step.

  In FIG. 971 (p) continuing from FIG. 970 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 971 (s). In FIG. 971 (s), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 97 (t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from before. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 971 (v), the combination of decorative symbols of 15R sure variation big hit confirmation of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 971 (v) is lit. In FIG. 971 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 971 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable variation big hit” is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (not shown here).

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached by a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 970 (l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 971 (t) In 971 (u '), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 971 (v') following FIG. 971 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration" 6-decoration 6 ”is a combination of jackpot decorative patterns. Then, in FIG. 971 (w ′) that follows FIG. 971 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) that celebrates the big hit.

  FIG. 972 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case continued from FIG. 971 (q).

  In FIG. 972 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 970 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 972 (b). In FIG. 972 (b), the main character is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 97 (c), like the FIG. 971 (t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 972 (d), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 972 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special diagram 1 is turned on, and the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, an erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, an example of the operation result for each game state generated by the operation of each button of the effect button and the operation key unit 137 in the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 973 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation result of each button in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which symbol variation display is not performed, and FIG. 973 (b) is during symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in, and the figure (c) is a figure explaining an example of an operation result of each button in a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 973 (a), in the standby state, when the demonstration button 136 (chance button) is operated during the customer waiting demonstration display (animation demonstration display) by animation, the animation demonstration display is stopped and the symbol demo is displayed. Switch to display. The symbol demo display is a display or the like showing the variable display result of the decorative pattern displayed last. Further, when the demonstration button 136 is operated while the symbol demonstration is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, a demonstration demonstration corresponding to the operation is displayed. Here, in the demonstration effect, for example, when a plurality of kinds of effect modes can be executed, the effect mode is changed, a character is made to appear, an effect is displayed, and a game method for explaining a game method is described. This is an effect display or the like for starting the explanation. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the setting screen during the symbol demo display, the volume or brightness after the setting is confirmed, and the setting screen is erased.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated in the standby state and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the enter button 137e is operated in the standby state while the setting screen is displayed, the display time of the displayed setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is reset and the display is extended.

  Further, in the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume increases. In the standby state, when the right button 137d is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness rises and becomes brighter.

  Further, in the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. In the standby state, when the left button 137c is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered and the screen becomes darker.

  Further, in the standby state, when the up button 137a is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. When the upper button 137a is operated while the volume setting screen is displayed in the standby state, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  Further, in the standby state, when the lower button 137b is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, in the standby state, when the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the down button 137b is operated in the standby state while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 973 (b), if the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted during the variable display of the symbols, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the one-time operation effect, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the hitting effect, and an operation of the effect button 136 in the long-press effect. A performance or the like according to is performed. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period of the effect button 136 during the variable display of symbols, no operation result is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, no operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be done. In addition, even outside the effective operation period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and effect sound may be output, in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated while the pattern variation display is in progress and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, when the decision button 137e is operated while the pattern change display is being displayed and the setting screen is being displayed, the volume after setting is fixed and the setting screen being displayed is hidden.

  In addition, when the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is in progress and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  In addition, when the left button 137c is operated while the design variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not displayed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the left button 137c is operated during the symbol variation display and the symbol variation setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  Further, if the upper button 137a is operated while the symbol variation is being displayed and the setting screen is not being displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, during the symbol variation display, if the upper button 137a is operated while the symbol variation setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the symbol variation setting screen being displayed is reset and the display is extended.

  Further, when the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol variation display is being performed and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, if the lower button 137b is operated while the symbol changing display is being displayed and the symbol changing setting screen is being displayed, the display time of the currently changing symbol changing setting screen is reset and the display is extended.

  Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated within the operation valid period during which the operation for accepting the operation is performed during the variable display of the symbols, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, when the effect button 136 and the direction key are both pressed at the same time during the execution of the effect for one-time operation that requires the operation of the effect button 136 and the direction key, etc. Is done. In addition, when the design variation display is in progress and both the effect button 136 and the direction key are operated outside the operation valid period, no operation result is obtained. Even outside the operation valid period, various lamps 418 are blinked, effect display is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and sound effects are output according to the operation of both the effect buttons 136 and the direction keys. You may do it. At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 973 (c), when the big hit game is in progress and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 136, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the one-time operation effect, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the hitting effect, and an operation of the effect button 136 in the long-press effect. A performance or the like according to is performed. Also, during the big hit game, the production button

If the effect button 136 is operated outside the effective operation period of the button 136, no operation result is obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, when each button of the operation key unit 137 is simultaneously operated in addition to the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, even if the effect button 136 is operated, no operation result is obtained. It is configured not to be done. In addition, even outside the effective operation period, various lamps 418 may be blinked, effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and effect sound may be output, in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. . At this time, the effect may be unrelated to the effect in the symbol variable display.

  Further, when the enter button 137e is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, no operation result is obtained. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the enter button 137e is operated while the setting screen (volume setting screen or brightness setting screen) is being displayed, the volume or brightness after setting is confirmed, and the setting screen currently displayed is displayed. You want to hide.

  If the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the right button 137d is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased. In the big hit game, when the right button 137d is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased and becomes brighter.

  If the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the volume setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered. If the left button 137c is operated while the big hit game is being displayed and the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered to become dark.

  If the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the upper button 137a is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is increased. If the upper button 137a is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is increased.

  In addition, during the big hit game, when the lower button 137b is operated while the setting screen is not displayed, the brightness setting screen is displayed. On the other hand, during the big hit game, when the lower button 137b is operated while the brightness setting screen is displayed, the brightness is changed and the brightness is lowered. If the lower button 137b is operated during the big hit game and the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is changed and the volume is lowered.

  In addition, if the production button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the jackpot game and other than the jackpot round (for example, during the jackpot start production, during the round presentation, during the jackpot end presentation, etc.), no operation result is obtained. Not done. In addition, during the big hit game, when both the effect button 136 and the left button 137c are operated during the big hit round, the music of the BGM output during the big hit game is changed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are prepared as the BGM output during the big hit game, and for example, each time the effect button 136 + the left button 137c is operated, "song 1"-"song 3"-"song" The selected song can be transitioned in the opposite direction, such as "2"-"Song 1" ....

  Further, during the big hit game, if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated in other than the big hit round, no operation result is made. In addition, during the big hit game, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated during the big hit round, the music of the BGM output during the big hit game is changed. More specifically, each time the production button 136 + the right button 137d is operated, the selection is made in the forward direction such as "Song 1"-"Song 2"-"Song 3"-"Song 1". You can transition songs.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 974 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 974 is an effect example that may be executed in a part of the effect performed in FIGS. 970 to 972.

  FIG. 974 (1) corresponds to FIG. 970 (o), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed. As shown in FIG. 974 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, while the state that the reach is being performed in the "decoration 7" is shown, the three decorative symbols are also variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. These three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, for example, at the time when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, three combinations of symbols corresponding to the display result of the special symbols 1 or 2 are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the three decorative symbols displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are stopped and displayed at the same time, but, for example, the left, right, and middle may be sequentially stopped and displayed. .

  At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 974 (2), the symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 974 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emission mode (for example, blue). In addition, when the left button 137c is operated, similarly, the symbol changing setting screen is displayed. The symbol changing setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol changing setting screen functions as an example of the volume setting display. Further, the symbol changing setting screen displayed by operating the right button 137d or the left button 137c may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. This symbol changing setting screen is arranged and displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer in which the effect display is being performed. Therefore, while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, it is difficult to visually confirm the effect display. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is at the third stage among the five stages.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 974 (4) while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 974 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage. In this embodiment, the sound volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated once. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third stage, the volume decreases by one stage, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG indicates the second stage. The display will change to that. In this way, the volume gauge VG that is variably displayed by operating the right button 137d or the left button 137c in the state where the symbol changing setting screen is displayed is an example of notification of the result of the setting operation. Sometimes you can. In the present embodiment, only the volume can be set while the design is changing, but the brightness setting, the effect mode, the BGM, etc. may be set. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto-repeat function operates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured to (decrease), or the volume may not be increased (do not decrease) unless the auto repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once. Further, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is fixed to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen is erased. You may In addition to this, for example, the entered password may be set by operating the effect button 136 on the password input screen. That is, in this case, the effect button 136 can be said to function as a first operation unit for performing various settings.

  FIG. 974 (6) corresponds to FIG. 971 (p), and the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (7). Then, as shown in FIG. 974 (8), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be simultaneously operated within the effective period. It The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the validity period. 136P2 are included. At this time, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are subjected to an operation waiting animation display. Here, the operation waiting animation is, for example, an animation in which a button is repeatedly retracted or projected. Here, the operation waiting animation may not be displayed, and the still image may be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 974 (8), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid. The operation promotion notification image may be configured to be displayed at the same time when the operation valid period starts. Here, the operation valid period is a period in which the period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is valid and the period in which the operation of the right button 137d are valid overlap, and, for example, one of the buttons is first The valid period of the operation is started, and thereafter, the period overlapping when the valid period of the operation of the other button is started is also included in the valid period of the operation. In addition, the effect of continuous hitting operation or the effect of long-pressing operation may be performed during the effective period of the operation started earlier, and the effect of performing simultaneous operation of two or more buttons may be performed. On the contrary, the effective period of the operation of one button and the effective period of the operation of the other button overlap first, and then the effective period of the operation of one (the other) button ends and the other (the one) ends. The effect may be configured such that the effective period of the button operation continues, for example, after performing the operation operation of two or more buttons at the same time, the effect operation of one (the other) button is continued. You may perform the structure of performing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display including the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 may be referred to as an example of the first operation display regarding the operations of both the first operation unit and the second operation unit. .

  Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (10), as shown in FIG. 974 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 974 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display screen may be hidden. At this time, the effect display (first operation result display) in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the operation result presentation is performed. The effect button 136 and the right button 137d emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, red) while being operated. As a result, it is notified in advance that the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit. In addition, you may make it perform even when the result of the said symbol variation display is not a big hit, and may produce that the expectation to a big hit is high. Here, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not limited to the case where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing, and the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is pressed. It goes without saying that this also includes cases where the production button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is pressed. That is, it suffices that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. In addition, the production button 136 and the right button

The effect of the simultaneous operation as shown in FIG. 974 (12) may be started only when the button 137d is operated at the same timing. When one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after being pressed, the simultaneous operation may not be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect is produced by the effect movable body 225 by the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. However, even when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the effect movable body 225 is used. It is configured so that a performance may be performed. If the simultaneous operations are not performed within the operation valid period, the effect by the effect movable body 225 may not be performed. Also, the effect contents to be executed may be different when the simultaneous operation is performed within the operation valid period and when the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, for example, within the operation valid period. If the simultaneous operation is performed, the effect with high expectation for the big hit is performed, and if the simultaneous operation is not performed within the operation valid period, effect with low expectation for the big hit is performed. This may be done or vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the number of buttons requesting the operation, the higher the expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display. As a result, the more buttons the player has, the higher the expectation for a big hit, and the more interesting the game may be. That is, it can be said that the display shown in FIG. 974 (8) or the like functions as the advance notice. In addition, regardless of the number of buttons requesting an operation, the expectation to the big hit in the symbol variation display may be the same. Further, it may be performed as a pre-reading notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 974 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted, and in FIG. 974 (14), the protagonist Tono is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and then as shown in FIG. 974 (15). In the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging fluctuation. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the three decorative symbols are still variably displayed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the luminance setting is not possible during the variable display of the symbols, but the luminance setting may be possible. The setting method in this case can be performed in the same manner as the volume setting, but for example, in the case of the brightness setting, by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b, the setting during the symbol variation for the brightness setting. The screen may be displayed to set the brightness, and the brightness may be changed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b. That is, the design fluctuation during setting screen displayed by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation, and the design fluctuation during setting screen is The brightness gauge that is variably displayed by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b in the displayed state may be an example of notification of the result of the setting operation.

  FIG. 975 is a diagram for describing another example of effects in the effect shown in FIG. 974. Here, FIGS. 975 (a1) to (a5) show that only one of the buttons is operated when the effect requiring the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed. 975 (b1) to (b5) of FIG. 975 (a1) to FIG. 975 (a1) to FIG. 975 (c1). )-(C5) in the figure, when an effect that requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed, one button is operated first and the other is maintained while maintaining that state. An example of the effect when the button is operated is shown.

  FIG. 975 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 974 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 975 (a2), if only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 975 (a3), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display. Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed. Here, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 may not change even if the right button 137d is operated. When the right button 137d is operated while the symbol variation display is being executed, the symbol variation setting screen is displayed and the volume can be set, but the button operation is performed to give an effect such as a notice. From the start of the display (button operation promotion display) to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen is prohibited so that the volume is not set. That is, from the timing of FIG. 974 (7) to the end of the symbol variation display, the volume setting is prohibited. The volume setting may be prohibited only while the button operation promotion display is being performed. Further, the volume setting may be prohibited only after the button operation promotion display is started until the operation result effect is finished.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 975 (a4), when the operation of the right button 137d is released, as shown in FIG. 975 (a5), the display form of the right button image 137dP1 changes from the display form at the time of operation to the display form at the time of non-operation. However, the operation result rendering is not performed yet.

  FIG. 975 (b1) is also the display corresponding to FIG. 974 (10), but remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. At this time, as shown in FIG. 975 (b2), if only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 975 (b3), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display. Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation result effect is not performed. Further, since both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are not operated at the same time, the operation valid period continues, and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed. The corresponding remaining time display bar 136P2b is also displayed such that the meter continues to decrease despite the operation of the right button 137d.

  After that, when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled as shown in FIG. 975 (b4), as shown in FIG. 975 (b5), the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode at the time of operation to the display mode at the time of non-operation. However, the operation result rendering is not performed yet.

  FIG. 975 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 974 (10). At this time, as shown in FIG. 975 (c2), if only the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 becomes non-display as shown in FIG. 975 (c3). Although the display mode at the time of operation is changed to the display mode at the time of operation, the operation of the effect movable body 225 (operation result effect) is not performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 975 (c4), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is started as shown in FIG. 975 (c5). This also applies when only the effect button 136 is operated first and the right button 137d is operated in that state. That is, even when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated or long-pressed and the other button is operated, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same timing. The same result as the case (execution of operation result effect) is obtained.

  FIG. 976 is a diagram for describing another example of effects in the effect shown in FIG. 974. Here, FIG. 976 (a1) to FIG. 9 (a2) show a case where only one of the buttons is operated when an effect that requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is being performed.

976 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to 974 (8). (c1) to (c2) of the same figure show another example of effects of the effects shown in (974) to (974) of FIG.

  FIG. 976 (a1) shows a state where the effect button 136 is not operated and only the right button 137d is pressed and held. Therefore, the display mode of the right button image 137dP1 is changed from the display mode when not operated to the display mode when operated. After that, for example, when the remaining one-third time of the effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 976 (a2), it is as if the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating along with the character display “please press the chance button”. An animation display (vibration animation display) is started, and a display for further instructing the operation of the button that is not operated is displayed. The start timing of the vibration animation display is not limited to the above-described one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a predetermined time (for example, a time period from when one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated). The vibration animation display may be started when (3 seconds) has elapsed. The vibration animation display ends when the corresponding button (the effect button 136 in FIG. 976 (a2)) is operated. In this way, when only one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a display (vibration animation display) different from the normal display (operation waiting animation display) is displayed. ) May be performed.

  976 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b2) correspond to FIGS. 974 (7) to 974 (8), but in FIG. 976 (b2), the right button image 137dP1 is not displayed and only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed. Is displayed.

  976 (c1) to (c2) also correspond to FIGS. 974 (7) to (8), but in FIG. 976 (c2), in addition to the right button image 137dP1 and the effect button image 136P1. The left button image 137cP1 is further displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed by changing the number of displayed button images. For example, the larger the number of button images displayed, the larger the hit. It is structured to have high expectations.

  FIG. 977 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect shown in FIG. 974.

  FIG. 977 (a) corresponds to FIG. 974 (7), and an effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 977 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which urges both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d to be operated simultaneously within the effective period. It In FIG. 977 (b), as the operation promotion notification image, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 as well as remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b representing the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed corresponding to the respective button images. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 977 (b), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 or the right button 137d is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 977 (c), at the timing shown in FIG. 977 (d), as shown in FIG. 977 (e), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 977 (f), the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 and the right button image 137dP1 is changed to a grayed out display. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2b displays that the remaining time is zero. The right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 977 (g), the effect movable body 225 moves to a position where it covers the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a shaking motion that vibrates on the spot is performed, and an operation result effect may be performed. It suggests that you may not. It should be noted that the stir operation by the production movable body 225 may not be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 977 (h), when the operation of the right button 137d is released and the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 977 (i), the effect movable body 225 is the decorative symbol display device. It may move to a position that covers the entire display screen 208. At this time, the effect display described above is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this way, during the operation valid period, the operation result effect may be performed by performing the button operation once in the order of the right button 137d and the effect button 136. In this example of the effect, the operation result effect may be performed by operating the two buttons of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d once, regardless of the operating order, or the correct order ( For example, the operation result effect may be performed on condition that the button operation is performed with the right button 137d and the effect button 136 in this order. Further, the operation result effect may be performed even when the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated. In this case, for example, when only the effect button 136 is operated or when only the right button 137d is operated, the stir operation by the effect movable body 225 is performed in the manner shown in FIG. When both 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 977 (i) may be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 977 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, but the operation result effect is not performed, the effect movable body 225 descends as shown in FIG. 977 (i ′). Without raising, the one-button operation effect is failed. At this time, the remaining time display bar 136P2a displayed in correspondence with the effect button image 136P1 and the effect button image 136P1 is changed to a gray-out display, and the meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2a displays that the remaining time is 0. Become. As a result, it is notified that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d have been operated. The effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b may be deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 977 (j ′), the animation of the duel scene is restarted, and the appearance that the main character Tono is defeated by the enemy swordsman is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are displayed. Although the display for prompting the operation of the button requesting the operation is performed such as prompting the operation, for example, the display for prompting the operation of the button other than the button requesting the operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the operation button 136 is requested to be operated once, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are displayed, but an operation result effect is produced by operating only the effect button 136. May be performed. Further, a display prompting the user to operate a button different from the button requesting the operation may be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the operation of the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, but even if the effect button image 136P1 is operated, the operation result effect is not performed, and the right button 137d is operated. In the case of, the operation result presentation may be performed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (8), the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but the operation effective notification period is not started, and then the operation promotion notification image is erased. It may be performed. As the fake effect, for example, in the effect in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed when the two effect button images 136P1 are close to each other and overlap each other, the operation promotion notification image is not displayed because the two effect button images 136P1 do not overlap each other. Although it is not displayed, the effect of the button operation is not started, and the operation promotion notification image is displayed, but it is difficult to mechanically press the target button urging the operation, or it is displaced to the inoperable position. It is conceivable that there is an effect such as being unable to press the button.

  FIG. 978 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting operation using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  In FIG. 978, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown. Further, in the present embodiment, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol LED 285a and a special symbol 2 fourth symbol LED 285b are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 200. The special symbol 1 for the fourth symbol LED285a is for notifying whether the special symbol 1 is changing the symbol by its lighting mode, and the fourth symbol LED for the special symbol 2 285b is for the special symbol 2 according to its lighting mode. Informs whether or not the symbol is changing. For example, when the fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 blinks at a predetermined interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) during the variable display of the symbols, and the display result is lost. Is turned off, and is turned on when the display result is a big hit, but the lighting mode can be set arbitrarily, and the luminescent color can be made different according to the symbol variation display state. You may

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 978 (a), a big hit start effect indicating that the big hit game has started is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a striking manner display for prompting right striking is displayed. In addition, the fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 is off, it is shown that the display result is lost, the fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 is lit, and the display result is a big hit. Has been done. That is, the big hit this time is a big hit when the special figure a is displayed on the second special figure display device 214.

  FIG. 978 (b) shows that the first round has started. As shown in FIG. 978 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect during the big hit round is displayed. Then, "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first big hit game is shown below the hitting display. "BONUS x 1" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, a music title display MT indicating the music title of BGM output from the speaker 120 is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 978 (c) shows that the third round is being executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 978 (d), when the right button 137d (or the left button 137c) is operated once, as shown in FIG. 978 (e), the decorative pattern display device 208 sets the volume. The screen is displayed. It should be noted that the volume gauge VG on the volume setting screen indicates that the volume is at the third stage of the five stages. The volume setting screen may be displayed or erased when the left button 137c and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated. By doing so, the player operates the operation intentionally. By doing so, it may be possible to set the volume, and it may be possible to suppress the annoyance that the volume setting screen is displayed by an unintended operation.

  Then, when the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 978 (f) while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 978 (g). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage.

  Further, when the right button 137d is operated while operating the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 978 (h) while the volume setting screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 978 (i). , The volume is not increased or decreased, the music of BGM is changed, and the changed music name is displayed on the music title display MT. That is, in the present embodiment, the volume cannot be changed while the effect button 136 is being operated. The volume setting screen is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the last operation of any direction button on the operation key unit 137. Here, when the effect button 136 and any direction button of the operation key unit 137 are simultaneously operated, the direction button may not be operated. Further, when the effect button 136 and the direction button are simultaneously operated, the volume setting screen may be erased.

  FIG. 979 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 979 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 is provided in the lower center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. .

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamp 218. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 979 (a), one holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 has a default display mode (circular shape). No pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. The hold icon can be displayed not only in the default display mode but also in a prefetching notice display mode, and can also function as a prefetching notice for the pending symbol variation display.

  Further, in the change icon display area 280, the change icon h0 is displayed in a default display mode. The variable icon h0 can be displayed not only in the default display mode but also in a notice display mode, and can also function as a notice display for the symbol change display.

  When the right button 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 979 (b) during the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 979 (a), the volume setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 979 (c). Is displayed. At this time, according to the volume gauge VG, it is shown that the volume is the fourth stage among the five stages. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that no operation result is obtained even when a button to which an effect or function corresponding to the operation is not operated is operated. You may make it perform the effect production of confirming that. In addition to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect effect may be an effect output by the speaker 120, a sound output from the speaker 120, or a light emission of a lamp by the various lamps 418.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 979 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an operation promotion notification image 136P for urging the production button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 979 (d), since the operation valid period has not yet started, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. On the other hand, the volume setting is valid, and the volume can be changed by operating the left button 137c or the right button 137d. Further, since the remaining time display bar 136P2 is arranged and displayed on the layer on the back side of the volume gauge VG, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so as to overlap the volume gauge VG, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player is a special figure due to the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. You can recognize that is changing. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 979 (e), as shown in FIG. 979 (f), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, As shown at 979 (g), neither the operation result effected by the operation of the effect button 136 nor the change of the volume is performed. That is, both operations of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are treated as invalid. The meter of the remaining time display bar 136P2 hidden in the volume gauge VG is reduced and displayed as time passes.

  Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the direction key was last operated, the volume setting screen is erased and the remaining time display bar 136P2 appears, as shown in FIG. 979 (h). Even in this case, unless the operation of the right button 137d is stopped, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective.

  Next, the relationship between the operation of the effect button 136 and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. 980 to 981. Here, FIG. 980 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of the effect for continuous hits, and FIG. 980 (B) is the effect for continuous hits. Is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the long-press operation by the effect button 136 and the effect display during execution of, the same figure (C), long-press operation by the effect button 136 during execution of the effect for long press. It is a timing chart explaining the relationship between the effect display. Further, FIG. 981 (A) is a timing chart for explaining the effect display when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of the effect for continuous hitting, and FIG. 98 (A) is It is a timing chart explaining the effect display when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of the effect for long press.

  In the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the effect pattern of the decorative symbol variation display according to the received command. To do. Then, in the effect according to the determined effect pattern, effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute various effects. All box data of the effect contents decided to be executed by the effect lottery is read out, the part data included in the read box data is stored in the RAM 408, and the liquid crystal command included in the box data is stored in the first sub-control unit 400. From the second sub-control unit 500.

  As the liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the start of the variable display of symbols, for example, a background command for designating the background, a timer command for designating the variation time, and the number of holdings are designated. Hold number change command, hold display command that specifies the display position and color of the hold icon, notice command that specifies the content of the notice, reach command that specifies the content of the reach to be executed, temporary stop that specifies the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped There are a design command, a final stop design command and the like for designating a decorative design to be confirmed and displayed when the design is stopped. Here, the timer command includes data capable of specifying the production time before the reach (announcement timer) and the production time of the reach (reach timer).

  Then, in the second sub control unit 500, based on the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400, control is performed such that the effect display designated at the designated time is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second sub control unit 500, when a predetermined effect display is performed, transmits a return command to that effect to the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the control corresponding to the received return command.

  When the effect for continuous hitting is performed while the symbols are changing, as shown in FIGS. 980 (A) and 980 (B), the liquid crystal is transferred from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500 at the timing of a. When the command is transmitted, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for continuous hitting is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, it reads the part data corresponding to the received return command from the RAM 408, and outputs the sound, blinks the lamp, and moves the effect based on the read part data. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 980 (A), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is given to the first sub-control unit 400. When it is transmitted from the second sub-control unit 500 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Done.

  Thereafter, similarly, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C1 (E1) and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control is performed. In the unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D1 (F1) and displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 980 (B), when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time and the automatic long-press continuous stroke function, the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is started. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 and displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. Is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. The effect display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 cannot recognize that the second operation has been performed by the effect button 136 unless at least the time T1 has elapsed since the operation was started. Therefore, in the case of continuous tapping operation, every time the effect button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 is operated is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when a long press operation is performed. It is possible to

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted (E2, G2, I2, ...). (At the timing), the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 displays (F2, H2). , J2 ... (at each timing), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, when a long press operation is performed, the second sub control unit 500 cannot recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated until at least the time T2 has elapsed. Therefore, in the case of continuous hitting operation, every time the effect button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Even before the period of time elapses, the second sub-control unit 500 can recognize that the effect button 136 has been operated, and more effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is performed than when a long press operation is performed. It is possible to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 980 (A) and (B), when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result effect at the timing g, A return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 also sets the operation valid period to end. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, both the operation and the long press operation of the effect button 136 are treated as invalid even if the operation is performed.

  In addition, when the execution condition of the operation result effect is satisfied by the continuous hitting operation or the long-press automatic continuous hitting function at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub control unit 500 ends the operation valid period. A return command to start the operation result effect is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub control unit 400 and is stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, but the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command. At times, when the operation valid period has ended, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation of the effect button 136 is invalid, and an effect display indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is displayed. I don't know.

  When the effect for long press is performed during the change of the symbol, as shown in FIG. 980 (C), when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500 at the timing of a, The second sub-control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long-pressing is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, it reads the part data corresponding to the received return command from the RAM 408, and outputs the sound, blinks the lamp, and moves the effect based on the read part data. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α, but at this time point, the liquid crystal command to the effect that the effect button 136 is operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. If the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B3, and the effect button 136 is pressed. The effect display indicating that the long press operation is performed is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when the long press operation is performed, the second sub-control unit 500 may recognize that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed until at least the time T3 has elapsed since the operation was started. Can not.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, every time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted (at each timing of C3, E3 ...). ), The liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 because the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, and the second sub-control unit 500 causes (D3, F3 In response to the reception of the liquid crystal command (at each timing of ...), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the long press operation by the effect button 136 is being performed.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the operation valid period is also set to end in the second sub control unit 500. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid.

  In addition, when the execution condition of the operation result effect by the long press operation is satisfied at the timing before the timing of g, the second sub control unit 500 ends the operation effective period and starts the operation result effect. A return command to that effect is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the operation valid period is set to end. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command from the second sub control unit 500, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is also set to end in the first sub control unit 400 and is stored in the RAM 408. The part data corresponding to the received return command is read, and effect control based on the read part data is performed.

  Next, an operation in the case of performing a long press operation with the effect button 136 intermittently during execution of the effect for continuous hitting will be described with reference to FIG. 981 (A). It should be noted that FIG. 981 (A) shows a state in which an effect for repeated hits is performed while the symbol is changing.

  First, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit at the timing of a, the second sub control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for continuous hitting is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, the return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, it reads the part data corresponding to the received return command from the RAM 408, and outputs the sound, blinks the lamp, and moves the effect based on the read part data. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of A1 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the operation of B1. The liquid crystal command is received at the timing, and the effect display that the effect button 136 has been operated is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 (for example, 500 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing of C2. When the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of D2 and operates the effect button 136. The effect display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 is released at the timing of β1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C2, the liquid crystal command of the button release is the first sub-control unit. 400 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. Upon receiving the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing β2, the second sub-control unit 500 recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  Then, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started again at the timing of E4, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of F4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated. The operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained.

  After that, when the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is assumed that the effect button 136 has been operated once at the timing of G4. Is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of H4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated. That is, if the long press operation is temporarily interrupted during the operation valid period and the long press operation is performed again, the liquid crystal is displayed until the time T1 has elapsed from the start of the long press operation, as in the case of the first long press operation. No command is sent. When the long press operation is performed again during the operation valid period, the liquid crystal command may be transmitted when time T2 has elapsed after the long press operation was started. Further, the liquid crystal command is transmitted when a time different from the time T2 (may be longer or shorter than the time T2) has elapsed since the long press operation was restarted. Good.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the effect button 136 is operated once every time T2 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hit is transmitted. As a result, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and in the second sub control unit 500, the effect button 136 is operated in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect display is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub-control unit 500 to the first sub-control unit 500. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the operation valid period is also set to end in the second sub control unit 500. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, both the operation and the long press operation of the effect button 136 are treated as invalid even if the operation is performed. Therefore, even if the time T2 elapses at the timing of g and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500 as if the effect button 136 was operated once, At the timing of h when the sub control unit 500 receives the command, the operation valid period has already expired, so the operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, an operation in the case where a long press operation by the effect button 136 is intermittently performed during execution of a long press effect will be described with reference to FIG. 981 (B). It is to be noted that FIG. 981 (B) shows a state in which an effect for long-pressing is performed while the symbol is changing.

  First, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit at the timing of a, the second sub control unit 500 receives this liquid crystal command at the timing of b. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative pattern is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 based on the content of the received liquid crystal command. After that, when the effect display for long-pressing is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of c, a return command to that effect is transmitted from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command at the timing of d, it reads the part data corresponding to the received return command from the RAM 408, and outputs the sound, blinks the lamp, and moves the effect based on the read part data. It controls the operation of the bodies 224, 225 and the like.

  After that, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a return command instructing the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of e, and the second sub-control unit 500 also enables the operation. Set the start period. On the other hand, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the start of the operation valid period at the timing of f, the first sub control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to start.

  After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing of α1, but at this time point, the liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated is not transmitted.

  After that, when the time T3 (for example, 100 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing at the timing of A3. If so, a liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of B3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed.

  After that, when the time T4 (for example, 231 ms) until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, the long press operation of the effect button 136 continues at the timing of C3. The liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 as being in the middle. In the second sub-control unit 500, when the liquid crystal command is received at the timing of D3, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the operation of the effect button 136 has been canceled at the timing of γ1 after transmitting the liquid crystal command at the timing of C3, the liquid crystal command for the button release is the first sub-control unit. 400 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 at the timing of γ2, it recognizes that the long press by the effect button 136 has been released.

  After that, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is restarted at the timing of α2, and when the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued at the timing of E5. A liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. In the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F5, and displays the effect that the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, as long as the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, it is considered that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing every time the time T4 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted elapses. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs a long press operation by the effect button 136 in response to the reception of the liquid crystal command. The effect effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, when the second sub control unit 500 determines that the operation valid period has ended without executing the operation result presentation at the timing of g, a return command to that effect is sent from the second sub control unit 500 to the first sub control unit. While being transmitted to the control unit 400, the operation valid period is also set to end in the second sub control unit 500. On the other hand, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command instructing the end of the operation valid period at the timing of h, the first sub-control unit 400 also sets the operation valid period of the effect button 136 to end. After the operation valid period is set to end, even if the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued, the operation is treated as invalid. Therefore, even if the time T4 elapses at the timing of G5 and the liquid crystal command to that effect is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 assuming that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing, Since the operation valid period has already expired at the timing when the second sub control unit 500 receives the command, the long press operation is treated as invalid.

  Next, refer to FIG. 982 and FIG. 983 for an example of the effect for repeated hits in the present embodiment.

While explaining. Here, FIG. 982 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of an effect for repeated hits centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, and FIG. 983 is a pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the consecutive hit production centering around the decorative design display device 208 of step.

  FIG. 982 (a) shows a state in which the robot has reached the reach state and developed into the super reach (panda group attack reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 982 (a), it is shown that the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and three variable decorative patterns are displayed in the lower left of the display screen.

  Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 982 (b), after the effect display of innumerable pandas is displayed, as shown in FIG. 982 (c), the effect button 136 is pressed. The character display "defeat all pandas with continuous button hits" suggests that a mission may be achieved and a big hit may be achieved by repeated hits.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 982 (d), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which prompts the production button 136 to be repeatedly hit to defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 982 (d), the operation valid period (first operation valid period) is in a state before the start, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. The word "preparation" to that effect is displayed, and then the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 982 (e). At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “100 more” indicating that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is 100.

  Then, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 982 (f) at the timing of A1 in FIG. 980 (A), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. A liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted, and when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of B1 in FIG. 980 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in FIG. 982 (g). As shown, the character display is updated to "98 more" indicating that two pandas have been defeated. The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases as time passes. In this way, in the continuous hit effect, the effect display in which the number of remaining pandas to be defeated in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136 decreases may be referred to as an example of the first effect display.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing C1 in FIG. 980 (A) as shown in FIG. 982 (h), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. A liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted, and when the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing D1 in FIG. 980 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the result in FIG. 982 (i). As shown, the character display is updated to "72 more" indicating that 26 pandas have been defeated.

  Thereafter, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing E1 in FIG. 980 (A) as shown in FIG. 982 (j), the effect is produced from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. When the liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is transmitted and the second sub control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F1 in FIG. 980 (A), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the liquid crystal command in FIG. 982 (k). As shown, the character display is updated to "50 remaining" indicating that 22 pandas have been defeated.

  Then, in response to the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 being continuously performed, the decorative pattern

The display device 208 displays that the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is decreasing, and as shown in FIG. 982 (l), the number of remaining pandas to be defeated is one. When the effect button 136 is operated before the operation valid period ends after the update display to the character display of "1 body" is performed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the display as shown in FIG. 982 (m). , The character display of "0 more" indicating that all the pandas have been defeated is updated, and as shown in FIG. 982 (n), the director character throws away the pandas and "decoration 7". It is reported that all three will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the repeated hit operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIG. 982 (m) to FIG. 98 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). The display is done.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect due to the repeated hit operation, as shown in FIG. 982 (m ′), the banquet character is knocked out by the panda and the lost effect is performed. At the same time, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed to notify that there is a loss. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 982 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 982 (c) to 98 (m), by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, it is suggested that a mission may be achieved and a big hit may occur. There is a case where a series of displays in which a character string "defeat all pandas with" is displayed and an operation promotion notification image is displayed to promptly defeat all the pandas within the operation valid period by repeatedly pressing the effect button 136 is there.

  FIG. 983 shows the same effect as in FIG. 982, but shows a state in which a continuous hit operation using the long press automatic continuous hit function by a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  Since FIG. 983 (a) to FIG. 98 (e) are the same as FIG. 982 (a) to FIG. 98 (e), description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, for example, at the timing A1 (first timing) in FIG. 980 (B), as shown in FIG. 983 (f), when the operation of the effect button 136 is started (that is, the effect button 136 is long. When the pressing operation is started), a liquid crystal command to the effect that the effect button 136 has been operated is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control is performed at the timing of B1 in FIG. 980 (B). When the sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is updated to the character display of "98 more" indicating that two pandas have been defeated, as shown in FIG. 983 (g). . The remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed so that the gauge decreases as time passes.

  After that, at a timing (for example, the timing of D1 in FIG. 980 (A)) before the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted with the operation state of the effect button 136 being maintained is reached, Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub-control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated as shown in FIG. 983 (h).

  Thereafter, while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, for example, at the timing (second timing) of C2 in FIG. 980 (B), the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted elapses. Then, a liquid crystal command indicating that the effect button 136 has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the second sub control unit 500. Then, at the timing of D2 in FIG. 980 (B), the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 983 (i), 26 pandas have been laid down. Is updated to the character display of "72 more". As described above, in this embodiment, the liquid for automatic continuous hitting is used.

The time T1 until the crystal command is transmitted functions as an example of the first time.

  After that, at the timing (for example, the timing of F1 in FIG. 980 (A)) before the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted with the operation state of the effect button 136 being maintained is reached, Since the liquid crystal command from the 1st sub control unit 400 has not been transmitted yet, the display of the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is not updated as shown in FIG. 983 (j).

  Thereafter, with the operation state of the effect button 136 maintained, for example, at the timing of E2 in FIG. 980 (B), when the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hits is operated elapses, the effect button 136 is turned on. A liquid crystal command indicating that it has been operated once is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 receives the liquid crystal command at the timing of F2 in FIG. 980 (B), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 983 (j), 22 pandas have been laid down. Is updated to the character display of "50 more bodies". As described above, in the present embodiment, the time T2 until the liquid crystal command for automatic repeated hits is transmitted functions as an example of the second time.

  Then, in response to the long press operation by the effect button 136 being continued, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is reduced every time the time T2 elapses. As shown in 982 (l), when the time T2 elapses after the update display to the character display of "1 more body" indicating that the remaining number of pandas to be defeated is 1 more body, the decoration is displayed. In the symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 983 (m), the display is updated to “0 more characters” indicating that all the pandas have been defeated, and as shown in FIG. 982 (n), The character is thrown away by the panda, and at the same time, it is notified that three "decorations 7" will be a big hit. That is, in this effect example, since the execution condition of the operation result effect by the repeated hit operation is satisfied, the effect as shown in FIG. 982 (m) to FIG. 98 (n) as the operation result effect (first result display). The display is done.

  On the other hand, when the operation valid period ends without satisfying the execution condition of the operation result effect due to the repeated hit operation, as shown in FIG. 982 (m ′), the banquet character is knocked out by the panda and the lost effect is performed. At the same time, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is displayed to notify that there is a loss. In addition, after the display shown in FIG. 982 (m ′) is performed, a revival effect may be performed and a big hit may be displayed.

  Next, an example of a long press effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 984. Here, FIG. 984 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect for long-pressing, centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 984 (a) shows a situation in which the player has entered the reach state and developed into the super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 984 (a), it is shown that the reach state has been reached with "decoration 7", and at the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are variably displayed, and An animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In FIG. 984 (b), the animation of the duel scene continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 984 (c), the effect for long-pressing with the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2. At the timing shown in FIG. 984 (c), the operation valid period (second operation valid period) has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, when the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 984 (d), the character display of "long press" for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. After that, for example, at the timing of α in FIG. 980 (C) (third tie), as shown in FIG. 984 (e), the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 is started, but at this point, the effect is produced. The liquid crystal command indicating that the button 136 has been operated is not operated, and until the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted with the operation state of the effect button 136 maintained, the decorative pattern display device 208 Then, as shown in FIG. 984 (f), the same display mode as in FIG. 984 (d) is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500 at the timing of A3 in FIG. 980 (C) after the time T3 has elapsed, it is indicated by B3 in FIG. 980 (C). At the timing, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 984 (g), the display image of the lord displayed on the upper part of the display screen is enlarged, while the display image of the swordsman is reduced, and the lord appears. A display is produced that directs the player to be slightly dominant. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display in which the display image of the swordsman displayed above the display screen is enlarged while the display image of the swordsman is reduced may be an example of the second effect display. Further, in the present embodiment, the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted functions as an example of the third time.

  After that, the time T4 elapses while the operation state of the effect button 136 is maintained, and, for example, at the timing of C3 in FIG. 980 (C), the liquid crystal command indicating that the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continuing. Is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the second sub-control unit 500, at the timing shown by D3 in FIG. 980 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 984 (h). While the display screen of the lord displayed above the display screen is further enlarged, the display image of the swordsman is further reduced, and a display is produced in which the lord is considerably predominant.

  Then, in response to the long press operation by the effect button 136 being continued, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the display image of the lord is gradually enlarged is displayed every time the time T4 elapses, and then, When the execution condition of the operation result effect (second result display) by the long press operation is satisfied, effect effects as shown in, for example, FIG. 974 (13) to (15) are performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 984 (c) to (h), the display of the operation promotion notification image for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be referred to as the long press operation display.

  Next, an example of the step-up effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 985 to 987. Here, FIG. 985 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a step-up effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 986 is an example of the effect shown in FIG. 985. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the continuation in stages, and FIG. 987 is a diagram showing another example of effects performed in the effect shown in FIG. 985.

  In FIG. 985, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. A lamp 216, a fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol LED 285b for special figure 2 are shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 985 (1), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In response to this, the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is also stopped and displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In addition, the fourth design LED 285a for special figure 1 and the fourth design LED 285b for special figure 2 are both turned off, indicating that the display result is missing.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 985 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

  In FIG. 985 (1), the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special map 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special map 1, and these three hold icons h11, h12, of the special map 1 are displayed. All h13 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

  In FIG. 985 (2), the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol variation is started on the first special symbol display device 212, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 985 (3), the hold icon (target hold icon of the current pattern change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 due to the move animation of the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes icon h0. Therefore, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes special. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. At this time, the fourth symbol LED 285a for special figure 1 starts blinking. The start timing of the moving animation of the hold icon may be before the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. It may be after the start of display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 985 (4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two "decorations 7" stop and enter the reach state. At the lower left of the display screen, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 985 (5) shows a situation where the super reach (Echigoya reach) has been developed. In this super reach, a character display of "secure an Echigoya" indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a more reliable reach production by capturing the character of Echigoya during the reach effect is displayed. This Echigoya reach is a reach including a step-up effect in which the effect for one operation is performed up to three times.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 985 (6), when the player moves to Echigoya Reach, the effect for the first time operation (the effect of step-up 1) is started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 holds a thousand boxes. It is displayed that the character of Echigoya is chased by the character of the protagonist's lord.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 985 (7), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display for prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 985 (7), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 985 (8), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 985 (9), FIG. As shown in, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs the effect of succeeding in the effect for the first one-time operation and shifting to the effect for the second one-time operation. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 985 (10) is displayed even when there is no operation of the effect button 136 before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 985 (10) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 987 (a1) described later) may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 985 (11), the effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 2) is started for the second time, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes is the main character. The character being chased by is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 985 (12), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display for prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 985 (12), the operation valid period is before the start, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 985 (13), as shown in FIG. 985 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, FIG. 985 (15) As shown in FIG. 7, the decorative pattern display device 208 performs the effect of succeeding in the effect for the second one-time operation and shifting to the effect for the third one-time operation. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 985 (15) is displayed even when there is no operation of the effect button 136 before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 985 (15) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 987 (b1) described later) may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 986 (16), the effect for the first operation (the effect of step-up 3) is started for the third time, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of Echigoya holding a thousand boxes is the main character. The character being chased by is displayed again.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 986 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed as an operation display that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At this time, in the effect button image 136P1, an operation waiting animation display is performed. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 986 (17), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 986 (18), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 986 (19), FIG. 986 (20). As shown in FIG. 7, the decorative pattern display device 208 gives the effect that the character of Tonosama has caught the character of Echigoya, thereby notifying that the effect for the third one-time operation has been successful. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 986 (20) is displayed even when there is no operation of the effect button 136 before the operation valid period ends, but when the operation valid period ends without any operation, A different effect (for example, an effect such that the display shown in FIG. 986 (20) is performed after the display shown in FIG. 987 (b1) described later) may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 986 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 succeeds in producing one operation for three times, and thus a state of transitioning to the special reach which is an advanced reach of super reach is shown. .

  After that, as shown in FIG. 986 (22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is switched to dark display, the decorative pattern displayed in the lower left part of the display screen is left, and other displays become difficult to see, and then As shown at 986 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect indicating that swordsman reach, which is an example of special reach, is started.

  As described above, the first effect for the first operation is an example of the first continuous effect display in relation to the second effect for the first operation. Further, in the relation of the effect for the first operation of the first time, the effect for the second operation of the first time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display, and the effect for the first operation of the third time. In the relation of, it can be said as an example of the first continuous effect display. Further, the effect for the first one-time operation of the third time can be said to be an example of the second continuous effect display in the relationship of the effect for the one-time operation of the second time.

  FIG. 987 (a1) to FIG. 985 (a3) are diagrams sequentially showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 985 (9). FIG. 987 (a1) to FIG. 987 (a3) show an example of an effect when the first-time one-time operation effect fails.

  FIG. 987 (a1) shows that the production button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the first one-time operation production, or that the character in the Echigoya runs away after the operation valid period ends. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the first one-time operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 987 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen temporarily stops at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” and shakes. It is displayed that the change is occurring.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 987 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed even in the center of the display screen with the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and there is a gap. Be informed.

  FIG. 987 (b1) to FIG. 985 (b2) are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 985 (14). FIG. 987 (b1) to FIG. 987 (b2) show an example of an effect when the second-time single-use operation effect fails.

  FIG. 987 (b1) shows a state in which the production button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the second one-time operation production, or after the operation valid period ends, the character of Echigoya puts off a thousand boxes and runs away. Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the second one-time operation effect has failed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 987 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 7” is formed again, and for example, normal reach is performed. In addition, normal

The reach effect is not limited to the normal reach, and a reach effect other than the normal reach (for example, long reach or super reach) may be performed.

  FIG. 987 (c1) to FIG. 9 (c3) are diagrams showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 986 (19). FIG. 987 (c1) to FIG. 987 (c3) show another example of effects when the third-time first-use operation effect is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 987 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the lord's character wears sunglasses and rides on a motorcycle to chase after the character in Echigoya is displayed. In the effect shown in FIG. 987 (c1), the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the third one-time operation effect, or after the operation effective period ends, the effect for the third one-time operation Although it is informed that the production has succeeded, at this time, instead of the production that the character of Echigoya is caught as shown in FIG. 986 (20), the character of Tonosama is the Echigoya as shown in FIG. 985 (15). It is an effect that shifts after performing an effect indicating that the player will chase after another, and is a premium effect (an effect of step-up 4) that is confirmed to be a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 987 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to full-rotation reach and variably displays at low speed while maintaining the state where three identical decorative symbols are lined up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 987 (c3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" to notify that the big hit has occurred.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 988 and 989, the relationship between the effect contents and the operation of the effect button 136 will be described. Here, FIG. 988 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect button 136, and FIG. 989 is the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect button 136. It is a figure explaining the relation with operation.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 drives the effect button drive motor 434 in order to improve the effect of the operation, and an operable position (first position) at which the player can press down and a player. It is possible to displace between the inoperable position (the second position) where the pressing operation by is impossible. The operable position is a position where the effect button 136 is most protruded, and the inoperable position is a position where the effect button 136 is most concave. The inoperable position is, for example, a position where the upper end edge of a flange-shaped collar portion provided at the upper end of a cylindrical button case surrounding the side wall of the button body of the effect button 136 and the upper surface of the button body are flush with each other. Alternatively, the upper surface of the button body may be recessed from the upper edge of the collar portion. The condition for displacing the effect button 136 to the inoperable position is, for example, a case where the pressing of the effect button 136 is restricted in order to operate another effect button. After the effect button 136 is displaced to the inoperable position, when the button return condition is satisfied, the effect button drive motor 434 is driven to perform the initial position return control for returning the effect button 136 from the inoperable position to the operable position. At this time, for example, the player may have pressed the effect button 136 and cannot return due to the pressing force. As a result, when the drive time of the effect button drive motor 434 elapses, the effect button 136 cannot return to the operable position and remains in the inoperable position. Thereafter, for example, every time a return condition such as the start of the symbol variation display is satisfied, the initial position return control is performed, so that such a situation can be prevented from being maintained. . Since the effect button 136 is determined to be in the ON state when the effect button 136 is maintained in the inoperable position, for example, while the effect for long press or the effect for continuous hitting is being performed, long press It is determined that the operation has been performed, and during the execution of the effect for one operation, it is not determined that the effect button 136 has been operated unless there is an operation from OFF to ON, so that it is substantially impossible to operate. Become.

  FIGS. 988 (a1) to 988 (a3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed at the start of the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 988 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 985 (1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it has been displaced to the inoperable position but has not been restored in the previous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 988 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 985 (2). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines the detection state of the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the effect button initial position sensor 427 detects that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 obtains the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine not in position. Here, the initial position of the effect button 136 is a position after the power-on operation (initial operation) performed when the power is turned on.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes the initial position returning process of returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, so that the effect button drive motor 434 is driven and the effect button 136 is moved to the initial position as shown in FIG. 988 (a3). Will be returned. Note that FIG. 988 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 985 (3). The initial position returning process is executed and the initial position returning operation is started at a timing before the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, or at the same time as the decorative symbol variable display is started. It may be after the start of the decorative pattern variable display.

  FIG. 988 (b1) to FIG. 988 (b3) show an example in which the initial position return control is performed when the above-mentioned Echigoya reach is being performed.

  FIG. 988 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 985 (10). That is, it is informed that the production will shift to step-up 2. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it is displaced to the inoperable position but is not restored.

  FIG. 988 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 985 (11). That is, it is shown that the effect of the step-up 2 (second continuous effect display) is started. The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 detects the effect button initial position sensor 427 in response to receiving a return command from the second sub-control unit 500 indicating that the effect of step-up 2 has started. Determine the state. At this time, since the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the effect button initial position sensor 427 detects that the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, and the CPU 404 obtains the detection result, whereby the effect button 136 is initialized. Determine not in position.

  After that, the CPU 404 executes the initial position returning process of returning the effect button 136 to the initial position, so that the effect button drive motor 434 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 988 (b3), for the first time of the first operation. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation valid period in the effect of (3) is started. That is, control is performed such that the effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Note that FIG. 988 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 985 (12). The timing at which the initial position returning process is executed and the initial position returning operation is started is not limited to the above-described one. For example, a return command indicating that the operation promotion notification image has been displayed is given by the first sub control unit 400. The initial position returning operation may be started based on the reception by the. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial position returning process is executed in the step-up 2 effect, but the initial position returning process is executed in the step-up 1 effect, the step-up 3 effect, and the step-up 4 effect. You may do it.

  FIG. 989 (a1) to FIG. 9 (a3) show an example in which the initial position returning operation is not performed even though the step-up effect in the Echigoya reach described above is performed.

  FIG. 989 (a1) corresponds to FIG. 985 (4). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it is displaced to the inoperable position but is not restored.

  FIG. 989 (a2) corresponds to FIG. 985 (5). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. At this time, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 receives from the second sub-control unit 500 a return command indicating that the effect of step-up 1 has started, but the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 Since the part data for performing the initial position returning operation corresponding to the return command is not set, the initial position returning operation is not performed and the effect button 136 remains in the inoperable position.

  FIG. 989 (a3) corresponds to FIG. 985 (8). As described above, since the effect button 136 does not perform the initial position returning operation in step-up 1, as shown in FIG. 989 (a3), the effect button 136 is pressed while the effect of step-up 1 is being performed. 136 remains in the inoperable position. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode, but the operation of the effect button 136 cannot be performed as described above. In this case, the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitted in the light emission mode indicating that the chance button lamp 138 is operated, and for example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off.

  FIGS. 989 (b1) to 9 (b4) show the effect button 136 when the character of Echigoya has run away in the step-up 1 effect shown in FIGS. 989 (a1) to 9 (a3). An operation example is shown.

  FIG. 989 (b1) corresponds to FIG. 987 (a1). At this time, the effect button 136 is in a state in which it is displaced to the inoperable position but is not restored.

  FIG. 989 (b2) corresponds to FIG. 987 (a2). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position.

  FIG. 989 (b3) corresponds to FIG. 987 (a3). The effect button 136 is still in the inoperable position. In this way, in this effect example, when the first-time one-time operation effect fails, the initial position returning operation is not performed in the symbol variable display. In addition, in this example of performance, the operation when the first one-time operation effect fails is described, but also when the second one-time operation effect or the third one-time operation effect fails. Similarly, the initial position returning operation may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 989 (b4), when the hold is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, the initial position returning operation is performed in the manner shown in FIGS. 988 (a2) to (a3). Done.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the effect button 136 is in the initial position from the detection result of the effect button initial position sensor 427 after performing the initial position returning operation. However, if it is determined that there is not, a predetermined retry control is performed. Specifically, when the CPU 404 determines that the effect button 136 is not at the initial position as a result of the first initial position returning operation, the CPU 404 performs the second initial position returning operation. This is repeated until the effect button 136 is determined to be at the initial position, and the effect button 136 is not at the initial position although the initial position returning operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the fifth time). If it is determined that there is a problem with the operation of the effect button 136, the effect button drive motor 434 is disabled and the effect button 136 is not driven until the power is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is displaced to the first position where the button is projected and the second position where the button is recessed. The position can also be referred to as a first state and a second state. For example, the second position (second state) may be a position further protruding than the first position (first state), and it is difficult for the effect button 136 to be hardened and pressed. The effect button 136 may be in a softened state and may be easier to press, or may be in a vibrating state without being pressed. In the case where the movable body is housed, the state in which the movable body rotates or moves may be the second state.

  Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 990 to 1006.

  FIG. 990 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 990 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 974, but the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, whereas only the right button 137d is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 990 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (1) to 974 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 990 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 990 (10), as shown in FIG. 990 (11), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, When only the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 990 (12), the effect movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 also occurs. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result presentation is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the right button image 137dP1 may be erased while the right button 137d is being operated. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2 continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 990 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 990 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 990 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (13) to (15). The above-described operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. An operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) may be performed. This is the same in the above description, and is also the same in the following description.

  FIG. 991 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 991 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 974, but while operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the effect button 136 is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 991 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (1) to 974 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 991 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 991 (10), as shown in FIG. 991 (11), one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is selected. When only the production button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 991 (12), the production movable body 225 located above the decorative symbol display device 208 does not operate, and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also performed. The operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed without being performed (that is, the operation result presentation is not performed), and the remaining time display bar 136P2 has a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be erased while the effect button 136 is being operated. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2 continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 991 (13), animation of the duel scene is restarted without operation result effectuation. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 991 (14) to (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 991 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 992 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 992 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 974, but the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1, respectively. It is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 992 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (1) to 974 (7), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 992 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 992 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. This operation promotion notification image corresponds to the remaining time display bar 136P2a and the right button image 137dP1 corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 in place of the remaining time display bar 136P2 in addition to the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. A remaining time display bar 136P2b is included. The remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 are also displayed such that the meter decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 992 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 992 (10), as shown in FIG. 992 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 992 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. Here, the confirmation sound may not be output in some cases, or the confirmation sound may be always output. After that, as shown in FIG. 992 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 992 (14) to (15) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (13) to (15). As described above, in this effect example, when the confirming sound is output from the speaker 120, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the confirming sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  It should be noted that, in this effect example, the operation result effect is produced when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, but one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d in the operation effective period. The operation result presentation may be performed even when the other button is operated within a predetermined time after the button is operated. Here, it is preferable that the predetermined time is set to an appropriate time as an error (allowable range) of simultaneous pressing, but in the pachinko machine 100, simultaneous operation with one hand is required because the game ball is ejected. There are some cases, and it is suitable to adopt in such a case. Further, in this case, an operation result effect (second operation result effect) different from the operation result effect (first operation result effect) described above may be performed. That is, during the operation valid period, the first operation result effect is performed by the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, and the first operation result effect is performed by the operation of either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d. What is configured to perform a second operation result effect other than the above can be included in the present invention.

  FIG. 993 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 993 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 992, but both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, whereas only the effect button 136 is operated. The state of the production performed in each case is shown. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 993 (1) to 99 (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (1) to 992 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 993 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 993 (10), as shown in FIG. 993 (11), one of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is selected. When only the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 993 (12), the operation result notification is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. All of the display modes are in accordance with the remaining time of the operation valid period. Here, the effect button image 136P1 may be erased while the effect button 136 is being operated. In this case, the display of the remaining time bar 136P2a corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 may be continued. As a result, the remaining time is displayed by the remaining time display bar 136P2a continuously, so that it may be possible to know that an effective operation has not been performed yet. Further, the remaining time display bar 136P2a may be deleted together with the effect button image 136P1. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 993 (13), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 993 (14) to 993 (15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 993 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 994 is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 993. Specifically, in FIG. 994, after the operation valid period is started, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, but a button different from the requested button is operated. The situation is shown.

  First, as shown in FIG. 994 (11 ′), when both the effect button 136 and the up button 137a are operated, as shown in FIG. 994 (12 ′), the operation result effect is not performed, and the operation is performed. The promotion notification image may be continuously displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 994 (11 ″), when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, a different type from the above-described operation result effect (for example, the first operation result effect). The operation result effect (for example, the second operation result effect) may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the center of the display area, and 10 pandas are displayed around it. The operation result display including the display arranged so as to surround the character display is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 994 (11 ″ ″), even when both the effect button 136 and the upper button 137a are operated, as described in FIG. 994 (12 ″ ″), the above-described operation result effect is produced. May be performed. That is, in this case, it can be said that the upper button 137a different from the button (right button 137d) for which the operation is instructed corresponds to a so-called hidden command (hidden button).

  In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, the example in which the production button 136 and the other direction keys are operated has been described, but it may be the case where buttons other than the direction keys and the production button 136 are operated, for example, It is configured such that at least a part of the front frame door 106 can be pressed, and when the effect button 136 and the pressing operation portion of the front frame door 106 are operated, the above-described first operation result effect is not performed. Alternatively, a second operation result effect different from the first operation result effect may be performed, or the first operation result effect may be performed. Further, a lever may be provided instead of the pressing operation portion of the front frame door 106, and the operation result as described above may be obtained by operating the effect button 136 and the lever. Further, in addition to the lever, an operating means capable of pushing in a structure can be applied. In each of these cases, it is possible to function as a hidden button.

  FIG. 995 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect for repeated hits centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 995 shows another example of the effect following FIG. 974 (6). Specifically, in FIG. 974, the operation result effect described above is performed by one simultaneous pressing operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 995, the effect button 136 and the right button are pressed. The operation result presentation is performed as a result of continuous hits by simultaneous operation of the buttons 137d.

  After the display shown in FIG. 974 (6) is performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 995 (1), it is urged to continuously hit the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) simultaneously. The simultaneous stroke production including simultaneous display of "Right key and chance button" is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 995 (2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an operation promotion notification image is displayed which prompts simultaneous continuous hitting operations of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d within the effective period. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the validity period. 136P2 are included. Although the operation promotion notification image has the same display mode as the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 974 (8), it may have a different display mode, for example, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are continuously hit. An animated display may be displayed. In addition, the operation valid period in this example of performance may be a period in which simultaneous pressing of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is required a plurality of times.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 995 (3), when the simultaneous operation is performed once or a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 995 (4), the effect movable member 225 is moved downward little by little, and the effect movable member 225 is moved downward. The lower part of 225 overlaps a part of the front surface side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed. In addition, each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, an effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates is performed, and when the simultaneous operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the effect movable object is generated. The 225 may move downward. That is, the effect in which the effect movable body 225 vibrates each time the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated can be referred to as an example of the operation result effect. Moreover, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are once or plural times. Performed when two simultaneous operations are performed

The effect of the downward movable body 225 moving downward can also be referred to as an example of the operation result effect. That is, it can be said that the operation result effects are respectively performed for effects in which the effect movable body 225 is moved little by little by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Note that an effect different from the operation result effect may be performed. Also, every time the production button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, the content of the production is, for example, first operation result production> second operation result production> third operation result production ... May be configured to change every time simultaneous operations are performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 995 (5), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times at the same time, as shown in FIG. The body 225 moves further downward, and about 3/4 below the effect movable body 225 overlaps the front surface side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 995 (7), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated once or a plurality of times simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 995 (8), the effect movable body 225 is displayed. Moves further downward, and the entire effect movable body 225 overlaps the front surface side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display as if the production movable body 225 is shining is displayed. That is, the same effect as in FIG. 974 (12) is performed.

  In this example of effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function (described later) may be activated for the effect button 136. For example, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated before the operation effective period is started. When the operation valid period is started after that, the operation result production such as the production movable body 225 vibrates is performed only once at the beginning, and thereafter, the long press automatic continuous hit function is provided. As for the right button 137d which is not operated, the operation result effect may not be performed unless the operation state is OFF> ON. In addition, after the operation valid period is started, the operation result presentation may be performed on condition that the buttons for which the operation is requested are OFF> ON, respectively. In such a case, For example, when the operation valid period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is not performed unless the operation button 136 and the right button 137d are respectively operated again. May be configured as. Further, when the operation effective period is started in a state where the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the operation result effect is performed every time a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Good. Further, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled for the effect button 136, the timing at which the operation result effect is performed may be based on the timing at which the pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. The timing at which the player operates the right button 137d for which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not valid may be used as a reference. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation result effect by arbitrarily combining these.

  FIG. 996 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 996 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 992, but in this effect example, the auto mode can be set, and when the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is pressed. When the button effect for which the operation is requested is performed, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated and the operation result effect is performed. That is, in this effect example, while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only the right button 137d is operated, but both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. It is shown that the operation result production is being performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 996 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (1) to 992 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 996 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 996 (10), as shown in FIG. 996 (11), of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. When only the right button 137d is operated, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 996 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 is controlled as being operated even if it is not operated. Therefore, the operation button 136 is operated by operating the right button 137d. It is controlled so that the operation result presentation is performed assuming that both 136 and the right button 137d are operated. In addition, in this effect example, the fixed sound is not output, but the fixed sound may be output in some cases. Then, as shown in FIG. 996 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 996 (14) to (15) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 996 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 997 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 997 is an effect example corresponding to FIGS. 992 (7) to (15), but in this effect example, a long press operation of the effect button 136 causes a pseudo continuous hit operation. It has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more, and the continuous hit operation is the effect button 136. Is an operation mode in which the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times. The long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled depending on the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In this example of the effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the repeated hitting operation is performed at a constant interval (for example, 200 ms interval) in a pseudo manner. Is configured. Further, in this effect example, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136 in the effect of performing the single pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is performed by the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation is started. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 997 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (7) to 992 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 997 (3), the right button 137d after operating the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 997 (4), as shown in FIG. 997 (5). Is operated. However, since the timing when the right button 137d is operated is the timing before the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started, the effect button 136 is in the invalid state. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. After that, when the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started at the timing shown in FIG. 997 (6), the operation of the effect button 136 becomes effective, and the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 997 (7), the operation result effect is performed. As described above, in this example of the effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, so when the right button 137d is operated after the operation of the effect button 136, both buttons are enabled. It will be delayed until the timing comes. In this example of effect, when the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be valid. That is, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed after operating the right button 137d, the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 136d is not enabled at the timing when the long-pressing of the effect button 136 is started, and the pseudo button is pressed. You may make it delay until it becomes the timing when a continuous hitting operation is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 997 (8), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 997 (9) to (10) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 997 (8) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 998 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 998 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 997. However, also in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid. In this effect example, the right button 137d is operated after the effect button 136 is operated, and both buttons are operated. However, the right button 137d is pressed before the timing at which the pseudo continuous hit operation is started. A state in which the operation of the button 137d is released is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 998 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (7) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 998 (3), as shown in FIG. 998 (5) at the timing shown in FIG. 998 (4), after operating the effect button 136, the right button 137d. Is operated. However, at the timing when the right button 137d is operated, the effect button 136 is in the operation invalid state because it is a period in which the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started. Therefore, at this timing, the operation result effect is not started. After that, as shown in FIG. 998 (6), when the operation of the right button 137d is canceled before the timing of the pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 being started, the effect button 136 and the right button are released. Both 137d are not operated, and as shown in FIG. 998 (7), the operation result presentation is not performed, the operation promotion notification image is continuously displayed, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b are displayed. Shows a display mode according to the remaining time of the operation valid period. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, as shown in FIG. 998 (8), the animation of the duel scene is restarted without the operation result effect. After that, the display shown in FIGS. 998 (9) to (10) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 998 (8) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 993 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 999 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 999 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 996. However, in this effect example, when the auto mode is set, not only the effect button 136 but also the direction keys including the right button 137d. When the button effect that requires the operation of the direction key is performed, the operation result effect is performed even if the direction key is not operated as if the direction key was operated. That is, in this effect example, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are requested to be operated, whereas the operation result effect is produced even when neither the effect button 136 nor the right button 137d is operated. It is shown to take place. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 999 (1) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (1) to 992 (10), description thereof will be omitted.

  After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 999 (9), when the timing shown in FIG. 999 (10) comes, as shown in FIG. 999 (11), either the effect button 136 or the right button 137d. Even though no operation has been performed, the operation result effect is performed as shown in FIG. 999 (12). As described above, in this effect example, since the auto mode is set, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are controlled as being operated even if they are not operated. Therefore, the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Even if neither of the above is operated, the operation result effect is controlled as if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d were operated at the same time. In addition, in this effect example, the fixed sound is not output, but the fixed sound may be output in some cases. Moreover, after the operation valid period is started, the timing at which the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated can be appropriately set. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 999 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 999 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 999 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 996 (13) to (15).

  1000 to 1001 are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, FIG. 1000 is another example of the effect continued from FIG. 970 (e), and FIG. 1001 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 1000.

  FIG. 1000 (a) continuing from FIG. 970 (e) shows a state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 1000 (b), the effect button 136 is within the effective period (in this example of effect, it may be referred to as the second effective period). An operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the button is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 and the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Thus, the operation promotion notification image 136P can be regarded as an example of an operation display related to the operation means.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 1000 (c), the valid period has decreased, and in FIG. 1000 (d), the player has pressed the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136 is in a normal button state, for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights in red, and no operation such as vibration is performed (second button state of the effect button 136). When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 1000 (e), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display “Chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. Even when the effect button 136 is not pressed within the valid period, the display as shown in FIG. 1000 (e) may be displayed or the display as shown in FIG. 1000 (e). May be displayed differently, or may not be displayed as shown in FIG. 1000 (e). This also applies to the one-time operation effect, the continuous hit effect, and the long-press effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach state entry notice image 2071 functions as the second operation result display. In addition, in this effect example, the effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed may be referred to as an example of the second effect. In the following description, the “operation result display” may be referred to as an “operation response display”.

  In FIG. 1000 (f), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 1000 (g). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but the entry state may be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display. As described above, when the operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed, the jackpot pattern is configured to be displayed more easily than when the operation promotion notification image 136P is not displayed, but the jackpot pattern is easily displayed. Does not have to be configured.

  In FIG. 1000 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 1000 (i). , Has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach). An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 1000 (i), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 1000 (j), a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

  In FIG. 1000 (k), the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, the effect (first effect) of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 1000 (l). Then, as shown in FIG. 1000 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously activated within the effective period (in this effect example, sometimes referred to as the first effective period). An operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to enter the operated state is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes an effect button image 136P1 that is an image imitating the effect button 136, a right button image 137dP1 that is an image imitating the right button 137d, and a remaining time display bar that indicates the remaining time of the validity period. 136P2 are included. At this time, an operation waiting animation display showing that the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is displayed. At this time, the effect button image 136P1 may not be displayed as vibrating and may be a still image. In the present embodiment, in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is performed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the display in which the effect button image 136P1 is vibrating is not performed. Has become. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), an effect button 136 (may be referred to as a second operation means in this effect example) and a right button 137d (may be referred to as a first operation means in this effect example). ) Is operated, as shown in FIG. 1000 (o), the operation result effect shown in FIG. 1000 (e) (in this effect example, it may be referred to as the second operation result effect) Different operation result effects (sometimes referred to as the first operation result effects in this effect example) are performed. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an operation including a character display “Gekiatsu” in the center of the display area and a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display The result is being displayed. Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 lights up in red and vibrates (first button state of the effect button 136). This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 vibrates, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1001 (p), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 1001 (q) to 100 (r) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 1001 (p) to 100 (r) are the same as those in FIGS. 974 (13) to (15). The second operation means may be the effect button 136, the right button 137d, or another direction key. Further, the first operation means may be the right button 137d, an effect button, or another direction key.

  In this example of effect, the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136 are different depending on the presence or absence of vibration of the effect button 136, for example, the first button state and the second button state. Then, it may be different depending on the intensity of vibration. For example, the effect button 136 may vibrate with strong vibration in the first button state, and the effect button 136 may vibrate with weak vibration in the second button state. Although the lighting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, it may be different, for example, in the first button state and the second button state. The emission color may be different from that of the button state (for example, the first button state is the state in which the effect button 136 emits the first emission color, and the second button state is The effect button 136 may be in a state of emitting the second emission color.), Or may have the same emission color but different luminance (for example, the first button state is the effect button 136). May emit light with the first luminance, and the second button state may be a state in which the effect button 136 emits light with the second luminance lower (higher) than the first luminance.) So that the number of LEDs (For example, the first button state is a state in which the number of LEDs that make up the chance button lamp 138 is the first number, and the second button state is the LED that makes up the chance button lamp 138. The number of emitted light may be a second number that is less (more) than the first number.). Although the form of the effect button 136 is the same in the first button state and the second button state of the effect button 136, it may be different, for example, in the second button state, The form of the main body of the effect button 136 may be in a protruding position or may be in a depressed position with respect to the button state. That is, the first button state and the second button state are included in the present invention as long as at least part of the states are different.

  Further, the state of the effect button 136 before the start of the first effective period may be all the same state, or the state of the effect button 136 may change during the period other than the first effective period, For example, the state of the effect button 136 may change to function as a notice effect or a pre-read notice.

  Further, in this example of effect, the effect button 136 is configured to be vibrable, but for example, at least a part of the effect button 136 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, a portion of the effect button 136 that is directly operated. The button body may be rotatable, or the body of the effect button 136 is transparent and the inside can be visually recognized, and a decorative member such as a light-emitting body is rotatably provided inside the body of the effect button 136. Good. Further, a cylindrical case body that accommodates and supports the button body of the effect button 136 and is attached to the door 108 with a ball storage tray may be configured to be rotatable. In the effect button 136 configured in this manner, the first button state may be set to the rotation state, and the second button state may be set to the non-rotation state. In the first button state, The first rotation speed may be set to the rotation state, and the second button state may be set to the second rotation speed slower (faster) than the first rotation speed.

  As described above, in this effect example, any form can be applied as long as the first button state and the second button state are different.

  FIG. 1002 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 1002 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 992. However, in this effect example, the directional key vibrates when the operation valid period is started. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 1002 (1) to FIG. 100 (10) are the same as those in FIG. 992 (1) to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1002 (7), after the production (first production) of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started, as shown in FIG. 1002 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 1002 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 1002 (10), as shown in FIG. 1002 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. If both are operated at the same time, as shown in FIG. 1002 (12), the operation result effect is

Done. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 1002 (11), the direction keys vibrate when the operation valid period starts. This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. The effect button 136 may be vibrated together with the direction key. In the present embodiment, when the direction key (right button 137d) vibrates, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the direction key (right button 137d) does not vibrate. Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1002 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 1002 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 1002 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 1003 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 1003 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 992, but in this effect example, when the operation valid period is started, the chance button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 blinks in red. It is shown that light is emitted at.

  FIG. 1003 (1) corresponds to FIG. 992 (1), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. As shown in FIG. 1003 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the setting screen is not displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, while the state that the reach is being performed in the "decoration 7" is shown, the three decorative symbols are also variably displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. These three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, for example, at the time when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, three combinations of symbols corresponding to the display result of the special symbols 1 or 2 are stopped and displayed at the same time.

  At this time, when the right button 137d is operated as shown in FIG. 1003 (2), the symbol changing setting screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 1003 (3). At this time, the right button 137d emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, red) while being operated. Moreover, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. The other buttons may be turned off or may emit light in another light emission mode (for example, white). In addition, when the left button 137c is operated, similarly, the symbol changing setting screen is displayed. The symbol changing setting screen is a display screen including a volume gauge VG. That is, the symbol changing setting screen functions as an example of the volume setting display. This symbol changing setting screen is arranged and displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer in which the effect display is being performed. Therefore, while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, it is difficult to visually confirm the effect display. Note that the volume gauge VG indicates that the volume is at the third stage among the five stages.

  When the right button 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 1003 (4) while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step as shown in FIG. 1003 (5). In response to this, the volume gauge VG changes to a display indicating that the volume is at the fourth stage. At this time, the effect button 136 is lit in blue. Note that the effect button 136 may be lit in red, or may be lit in blue without being lit in red. In addition, the light may be emitted in another light emission mode (for example, a mode in which the light is turned on in white). In this embodiment, the sound volume is increased by one step each time the right button 137d is operated once. On the other hand, when the left button 137c is operated in a state where the volume gauge VG indicates the third stage, the volume decreases by one stage, and accordingly, the volume gauge VG indicates the second stage. The display will change to that. When the right button 137d (the left button 137c) is pressed for a long time, the auto-repeat function operates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the volume increases by one step every predetermined time (for example, 200 ms). The volume may be configured to (decrease), or the volume may not be increased (do not decrease) unless the auto repeat function is activated and the operation is performed once.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 1003 (6) to 1003 (10) are performed. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 1003 (6) to (10) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (6) to (10), detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1003 (7), after the production of the simultaneous operation of the chance button (production button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) (first production) is started, as shown in FIG. 1003 (8). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 1003 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 1003 (10), as shown in FIG. 1003 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 1003 (12). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 1003 (11), when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 emits light in a mode of blinking in red. This may increase the player's expectation of a big hit. Note that the direction key (right button 137d) together with the effect button may be made to emit light in a mode of blinking in red. Further, when the operation valid period is started, the effect button 136 may be made to always emit light in a mode of blinking red, or may be emitted in another light emitting mode (for example, a mode of lighting in red). It may be. In addition, the effect button 136 may not necessarily emit blue light when the operation valid period is started. In the present embodiment, when the effect button 136 emits light in a red blinking mode, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the effect button 136 does not emit a red blinking mode. . Note that the jackpot pattern may not be settled and displayed easily. Then, as shown in FIG. 1003 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 1003 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 1003 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 1004 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 1004 is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 992, but requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the operation promotion notification image, the operation button 136 is promoted, and the right button 137d is not notified. That is, in this example of the effect, at least a part of the buttons (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) requesting the operation are not notified, and the operation of the right button 137d functions as a hidden command. It shows that you do. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 1004 (1) to 1004 (5) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (1) to 992 (5), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 1004 (6) shows that the animation of the duel scene continues. In this effect example, thereafter, effects of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) are started at the timing shown in FIG. 1004 (7). However, as shown in FIG. 1004 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is requested, only “press the chance button” and the operation of the effect button 136 are required. Is displayed as if to request. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 1004 (8), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2a corresponding to this effect button image 136P1, and the right button image 137dP1 and the remaining time display corresponding to this right button image 136dP1. Bar 136P2b is not included. Therefore, a normal player expects that a predetermined operation result effect will be produced by operating only the effect button 136. However, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet or strategy magazines. In that case, it may be possible to expect that a special operation result effect is performed by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136.

  Then, after the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 1004 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 1004 (10), as shown in FIG. 1004 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 1004 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 1004 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped, and the confirmation sound is generated. You may make it produce the output which is not output. Also, during the operation valid period, the operation result presentation may not be performed and the operation promotion notification image may be continuously displayed until both the production button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time (that is, display). At least one of the effect button image 136P1 and the remaining time display bar 136P2b being displayed may not be erased). Then, as shown in FIG. 1004 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 1004 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 1004 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 992 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 1005 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 1004.

  FIG. 1005 (6) continuing from FIG. 1004 (5) shows that the animation of the duel scene continues. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 1005 (7), the effect of simultaneous operation of the chance button (effect button 136) and the right key (right button 137d) is started. However, as shown in FIG. 1005 (7), this effect requires operation of both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d, whereas the effect shown in FIG. 1004 (7) is different from the decorative pattern display. The device 208 does not display a button request. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 1005 (8), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image displayed here includes only the remaining time display bar 136P2, and does not include the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1. Therefore, a normal player who sees this may be able to recognize that the period for doing something has started, and may give a sense of expectation to the subsequent development of the effect. On the other hand, for example, a player who has obtained information by looking at the Internet or strategy magazines can expect that a special operation result effect is produced by operating the right button 137d together with the effect button 136. There are cases. Further, the display position of the remaining time display bar may be displayed, for example, at the same position as the position displayed when the effect button image 136P1 is displayed, to make the player think that there is something. The remaining time display bar may be conspicuous as a position of the button image or the like (for example, the center of the display screen).

  Then, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 1005 (9), at the timing shown in FIG. 1005 (10), as shown in FIG. 1005 (11), the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are pressed. When both are operated at the same time, an operation result effect is produced as shown in FIG. 1005 (12). In this example of effect, in the operation result effect, the confirmation sound for notifying the confirmation of the big hit is output from the speaker 120. When only the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 1005 (12), for example, only the effect movable body 225 is dropped and the confirmation sound is generated. You may make it produce the output which is not output. Then, as shown in FIG. 1005 (13), after the animation of the duel scene is restarted, the displays shown in FIGS. 1005 (14) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 1005 (13) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 1004 (13) to (15).

  FIG. 1006 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 1005.

  FIGS. 1006 (8A) to 100 (10A) correspond to FIGS. 1005 (8) to 1005. FIG. 1006 (8A) to FIG. 100 (10A) show a state in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation promotion notification image displayed here is different from FIGS. 1005 (8) to (10) and includes only the remaining time display bars (136P2a, 136P2b) corresponding to the number of buttons requesting the operation. Therefore, the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 are not included. In this manner, the buttons requesting the operation (the effect button 136 and the right button 137d) are made to be hidden buttons, respectively, and the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b corresponding to the hidden buttons are displayed so that the number of buttons can be operated. It may be possible to hint to the player whether it is good or bad.

  FIGS. 1006 (8B) to (10B) correspond to FIGS. 1005 (8) to (10). FIGS. 1006 (8B) to (10B) show a state in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The operation promotion notification image displayed here does not include any of the button image and the remaining time display bar, unlike FIGS. 1005 (8) to 1005 (10). That is, it can be said that the operation promotion notification image is not displayed. In this way, by not displaying any of the buttons (operation button 136 and right button 137d) for requesting the operation and the remaining time display bar, there is a case where an effect that is a completely hidden command can be performed. It should be noted that in this production example, the display of the animation of the duel scene is thinned, so that it may be possible to indicate to the player that the hidden command is being accepted. Here, the animation display of the duel scene may not be thinned.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example of the effect when a plurality of buttons are operated at the same time has been described. However, for example, a touch panel is provided and the button and the touch panel are operated at the same time, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor. May be provided, and the present invention may be applied to one in which a button and a non-contact sensor are simultaneously operated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same button (effect button 136) is used as a button for performing a normal button operation and a button for performing a long-press automatic continuous hit, but a button for performing a normal button operation is used. Alternatively, a mode may be provided in which an effect button corresponding to the operating method is provided, such as a button for performing long-press auto continuous hitting provided separately.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the one-time operation effect, an effect may be performed in which a plurality of buttons are operated at preset timings. Specifically, for example, the effect button image 136P1, the right button image 137dP1, and the remaining time display bar 136P2 are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the icon of the effect button 136 is displayed at a predetermined position on the gauge of the remaining time display bar 136P2. An icon of the right button 137d may be displayed to indicate the operation timing of each button, and an effect that the operation result effect is performed may be performed when each button is operated at an appropriate timing.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an effect in which a long press operation and a single operation are combined may be performed. For example, the left button 137c may be long-pressed to increase the gauge, and the effect button 136 may be operated in that state to provide an operation result effect. In this case, if the effect contents are made different according to the amount of the gauge at the time of operating the effect button 136, the effect of the effect may be further improved. In addition, a combination of continuous hitting operation or long-press automatic continuous hitting and one-time operation may be performed, or a combination of continuous hitting operation or long-press auto continuous hitting and long-pressing operation may be performed. .

  Moreover, you may make it perform the long-press simultaneous operation effect that the operation result effect is performed by performing the long-press operation with each of two or more buttons. For example, when the long-press simultaneous operation effect is started, After performing a display prompting that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d be pressed and held at the same time, a display prompting that the button that is being pressed and held is released is displayed. As a result, when the long press simultaneous operation effect is successful, the operation result effect indicating that the operation is successful is performed, and when the simultaneous long press operation operation effect is failed, the operation result effect indicating that the operation is failed is performed. Here, the degree of change in the effect (for example, the amount of increase in gauge) is made different between when one of the two buttons requested to be operated is pressed for a long time and when both buttons are pressed for a long time. May be. Furthermore, the degree of change in the effect may be different between when one button is pressed and held and when the other button is pressed and held. Moreover, the change of the effect may not be performed unless both buttons are pressed and held. Also, when releasing the two buttons that are being pressed for a long time, the display contents may be different, such as when the one of the two buttons is released and when both are released, the effect in the operation result presentation is different. Alternatively, the operation result effect may not be performed when only one of the two buttons is released, and the operation result effect may be performed when both of the two buttons are released.

  Further, a configuration may be provided in which the operation result effect is performed by performing a continuous hit operation or a long-press automatic continuous hit with each of two or more buttons.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one button is provided for each function of the effect buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137, but two or more buttons having the same function are provided, and as described above. It may be configured to be applicable to the embodiment. For example, a configuration is provided in which two effect buttons are provided and three upper buttons 137a are provided, and an effect is provided by simultaneously operating two effect buttons and one or a plurality of upper buttons. You may prepare. Further, in addition to the buttons, a production lever imitating a production lever, an automobile handle, a motorcycle handle, or the like may be provided to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. A configuration may be provided in which an effect is produced by simultaneously operating the button and. Alternatively, a production dial such as a jog dial may be provided to be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, production is performed by operating the production dial and other buttons at the same time. You may provide such a structure. Further, a configuration in which a plurality of effect buttons 136 having the same function but different purposes are provided may be applicable to the above-described embodiment. For example, a first effect button used in a normal effect and a second effect button used when a special effect is performed are provided, and the first effect button is operated while operating the second effect button. A configuration may be provided in which an effect is further enhanced by operating the No. 1 effect button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the eco mode (power saving mode) may be settable. In the eco mode, for example, when a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, a transition is made to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. At this time, each time the direction key or the determination button 137e is operated, a notification to that effect (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Further, when the eco mode is set, a notification to that effect (an example of the notification of the result of the setting operation) may be performed. Here, the eco mode is a decoration for the purpose of suppressing power consumption, for example, when the variable display of symbols is not started before a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting demo display. In this mode, the brightness of the backlight of the symbol display device 208 is reduced, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the output from the speaker 120 is turned off, and the drive of one or more drive devices is limited or stopped. In addition, when the eco mode is set, the emission brightness and the volume of the various lamps 418 during the game may be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the original (daitomo) mode may be set. In the original mode, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, an operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed to shift to a setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. Note that the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIGS. 867 and 940 may be provided with an original mode selection switch that switches whether the original mode is valid or invalid. The original mode selection switch is operated by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100 when the pachinko machine 100 is shipped from the factory, or by a clerk at a pachinko machine installation store. The original mode selection switch may be made inoperable after shipment by caulking the portion of the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 where the original mode selection switch is provided, for example. That is, since the player cannot operate the original mode selection switch, it is preferable that only a limited number of people such as the manufacturer person and the store clerk can operate the original mode selection switch.

  In the original mode, a game table in which the original mode can be set, and history information of a result of a game set in the original mode is stored in the game table. On the gaming table, various benefits (for example, effects having a low appearance rate, execution of effects indicating information on game profit, etc.) are provided according to history information. When ending the game in which the original mode is set, the individual setting information, which is the player's individual information including the history information stored in the game table, is input to the server. Every time the game in which the original mode is set is finished, the gaming machine issues individual setting information including new history information in which the history of the game is reflected. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. By inputting the individual setting information stored in the server to the game table at the time of playing the next game, the privilege corresponding to the history information included in the input individual setting information is given at the time of the next game. This individual setting information is included in the encrypted password of a predetermined number of digits and is exchanged between the gaming table-the player (external device) and the server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that identifies the model of the game machine, and the corresponding machine code is stored in the game machine. In the specifications that history information can be used in common between different models, there are multiple corresponding model codes, and in the specification that history information can be used only between the same models, there is only one corresponding model code. .

  In the original mode, when a password is entered to store the player's history information in the pachinko machine 100, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the right button 137d) is pressed on the screen for setting the original mode. By operating, it is possible to transit to the password input screen. On the password input screen, for example, while looking at the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been transmitted, operate the direction keys to move to the position of the desired character, and press the effect button 136 or the decision button 137e. By doing, the input character is determined. When a predetermined operation (for example, an input completion operation using the direction keys and the enter button 137e) is performed after the password input of a predetermined number of characters (for example, five characters) is completed, the input password is the password of the pachinko machine 100. 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  In the case of initializing the player history information stored in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, for example, a predetermined direction key (for example, the left button 137c) on the screen for setting the original mode. May be performed by operating. In this case, the player's history information may be initialized after displaying a warning message to confirm whether or not the player's history information may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set whether to turn on or off the function of the above-mentioned auto mode. To set the auto mode, for example, a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed.

By doing so, the setting can be performed by shifting to the setting screen (an example of notifying the result of the setting operation) and appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the setting screen. Further, for example, the setting may be performed by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the determination button 137e in the customer waiting state), or by using a direction key other than the determination button 137e. It may be settable. For example, each time the enter button 137e is operated in the customer waiting state, the function of the auto mode may be switched between the ON state and the OFF state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time may be set. For the time setting, for example, when a predetermined operation in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, operation of the effect button 136 in the customer waiting state) is performed, a transition is made to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and this setting is performed. This can be set by appropriately operating the direction key and the enter button 137e on the screen. When the screen for setting the time is displayed as described above, the time can be changed by operating the directional key, for example.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled only for the effect button 136, or each button (upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d that constitutes a direction key together with the effect button 136. The long press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid for any one or more of the decision button 137e, the cancel button 317f).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting operation (for example, the first setting operation) is performed by operating one button (for example, the right button 137d) forming the directional key. A setting operation different from the first setting operation (for example, the second setting operation) may be configured by simultaneous operation of two buttons (for example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d). The character of the password may be selected by operating the button 137c, and the entered password may be all cleared by simultaneously operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, the setting operation may be possible by simultaneously pressing the effect button 136 and the direction key.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the long press automatic continuous hit function and the automatic mode are disabled only when a special effect such as a button effect requesting simultaneous pressing of two or more buttons is performed. May be done. Further, even when the hidden command can be accepted, the automatic continuous hitting function or the automatic mode may be disabled. According to this, the existence of the hidden command may be kept secret to a normal player. Further, even if the hidden command can be accepted, the long press automatic continuous hitting function or the automatic mode may be enabled. According to this, it may be possible to inform a normal player of the existence of the hidden command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation result effect has been described as being performed while the reach effect is being executed, but it may be in the variable display of symbols before the reach effect is started, or the reach effect is not performed. It may be displayed during symbol fluctuation display, during re-lottery effect that is performed after the temporary stop of decorative symbols, during promotion of lottery symbols for decorative symbols during jackpots, or probability variation lottery. It may be during performance, or may be applied to various notifications or effects such as notification of prefetching notice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for example, BGM may be selected (song selection), and, for example, on the setting screen that can be shifted while waiting for a customer, the directional key or the effect button 136 is used to select a song. It may be configured to be able to. Song selection can be changed not only while waiting for customers but also during big hit start performance and big hit game

Alternatively, the music may be selected by the production button 136. In this case, for example, the display of the song name that is changed by operating the direction key or the notification that the song selection has been confirmed by operating the effect button 136 can be an example of the notification of the result of the setting operation. There are cases.

  In the above description, "the first operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, the enter button 137e, etc.] and the player can operate" A second game console provided with a second operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like] and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], wherein the plurality of kinds are provided. One of the displays is a volume setting display [for example, a symbol variation setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (3), a volume setting screen shown in FIG. 978 (e), etc.]. Is a first operation result display [for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 974 (12), FIG. 975 (c5) or FIG. 977 (i)], and the volume setting display is , The first This is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (2), when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, FIG. 3) The design change in-use setting screen is displayed, etc.], and the first operation result display is based on that both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. When the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated as shown in FIG. 974 (11), the effect movable body is displayed as shown in FIG. 974 (12). 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect as if the effect movable body 225 is shining, etc.], . ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the display contents when the first operating means is operated and when the plurality of operating means are operated can be made different, so that the variation of the display according to the operation can be increased and the player It may be possible to improve the interest of.

  Here, the first operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The first operation means may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operable by the player in some cases.

  The second operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The second operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may be capable of displaying other than the volume setting display and the first operation result display. . Further, the display means may always display the volume setting display and the first operation result display, or may not display the volume setting display and the first operation result display.

  Further, the volume setting display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the first operating means, or may be displayed in response to the operation other than the operation of the first operating means. It may be displayed as. Further, the volume setting display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the first operating means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the first operating means. May be.

  Further, the first operation result display may be displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation result may be displayed. There may be a case where it is displayed in response to something other than the operation of both the means and the second operation means. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means, or the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where the two operation means are not displayed in response to the operation of both.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the volume setting display, the brightness setting display, the display setting display of the display means (decorative pattern display device 208, the liquid crystal display device, etc.), and the character selection for selecting the character to appear in the game Display, music selection display for selecting BGM, mode selection display for selecting a production mode during a game, and user mode display for entering a password etc. to inherit a player's game history can be displayed It may be configured to. That is, it can be said that the volume setting display is an example of a rendering means capable of setting a set value by a setting operation.

  The types of display settings of the display means include, for example, the brightness adjustment of the LCD backlight, the color temperature adjustment, the black level adjustment (brightness adjustment of the black portion of the image), and the white level adjustment (image (Brightness of white part), adjustment of color density, adjustment of hue, adjustment of sharpness (outline of image), adjustment of resolution and the like. Further, when the sound output means is configured to include a high-pitched speaker and a low-pitched speaker, volume settings for only low tones, volume adjustment for only high tones, balance adjustment of high tones and low tones are also included in the settings relating to the sound output means. May be.

  Further, the display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means is not limited to the setting display, and may be the effect display. For example, if the right button 137d is operated while two treasure boxes are displayed side by side, the treasure box on the right side opens to acquire an item, or the left button 137c is pressed to select one of the two left and right routes. When operated, it is also possible to perform an effect display in which the left route is selected.

  In the period in which the “first effect [for example, effect of simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 974 (6) to 974 (12) and the like] is performed,” the first operation means is performed. [For example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e and the like] and the second operation means [for example, an effect button 136 and the like] are operated, The first operation result display is configured to be displayed [for example, in the production of the simultaneous operation of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIGS. 974 (6) to (12), the effect button 136 and When the right button 137d is simultaneously operated, the effect display as shown in FIG. 974 (12) is displayed, etc.],

  In the period in which the first effect is performed, the volume setting display is not displayed even if the first operation means is operated [for example, effect of simultaneous operation shown in FIG. 974 (6). Is started, the volume setting is set to a prohibited state, etc.]. ] Is also described.

According to this gaming machine, since the volume setting display is not displayed even if the second operating means is operated during the operation of the first operating means during the period of the first effect, the first effect is performed. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player from unintentionally displaying the volume adjustment display while the game is being played, and concentrate on the first effect.

  Here, the first operation result display is displayed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period in which the first effect is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means in a period other than the period in which the first effect is performed. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of both the first operation means and the second operation means during the period in which the first effect is performed. Good, in a period in which the first effect is performed, it may not be displayed in response to both the first operation means and the second operation means being operated.

  Further, the volume setting display may not be displayed only when the first operation means is operated in the period in which the first effect is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the first effect is performed. It may not necessarily be displayed when one operation means is operated.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a second operation result display [for example, reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 970 (j)],

  The second operation result display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 970 (g) to (j). , The reach state entry notice image 2071 may be displayed when the production button 135 is pressed within the operation valid period, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means, or other than the operation of the second operation means. It may be displayed according to the above. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or may not be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means. There may be cases.

  In addition, during the period in which the “second effect [for example, an effect in which the operation promotion notification image 136P shown in FIG. 970 (g) to FIG. 970 (h) is displayed, etc.] is performed”, the second operation means is operated. A gaming table, wherein the second operation result display is displayed in response to the operation. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the second operation result display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operation means in the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect. There may be a case where the information is displayed in response to a matter other than the operation of the second operation means in the period in which the operation is performed. Further, the second operation result display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means in the period in which the second effect is performed, or the second effect is displayed. In the period in which the operation is performed, it may not be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation unit.

  In the period in which the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed when the first operation means is operated in addition to the second operation means, or the second operation result is displayed. A display different from the result display (for example, back button display) may be displayed.

  Further, in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed, the second operation result display may be displayed in response to the operation of the second operation means, or the second operation. Result display

An operation result display different from that may be displayed.

  In addition, it is configured such that, in the period in which the second effect is performed, the first operation result display is not displayed even if both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 979 (f) to (g), when an effect that operates the effect button 136 is performed, even if the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time, the operation result No production is performed, volume is not changed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, in the first operation result display, the first operation result display is displayed even when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the period in which the second effect is performed. In some cases, the first operation result display is displayed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in a period other than the period in which the second effect is performed. There may be cases where

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first operation display, and the first operation display is a display related to both operations of the first operation unit and the second operation unit. [For example, an effect that prompts simultaneous operation of the chance button and the right key shown in FIG. 974 (7) to (10)], and the first operation result display is the first operation means and the first operation means. A gaming table, which is a display that is displayed until both of the second operating means are operated. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first operation result display may be displayed only until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed other than until both of the operating means are operated. Further, the first operation result display may be always displayed until both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. It may not be displayed until both of the means are operated.

  Note that the first operation display may be displayed during the first effect, but the first operation display may not be displayed during the second effect. In this case, a predetermined operation result effect (for example, back button effect) may be performed when the first operation means and the second operation means are operated.

  Also, in addition to the first effect, the first operation display may be performed. For example, in the tutorial effect performed while the symbol variation display is displayed, "When the chance button and the right key are pressed, the hot effect is displayed. The first operation display may be performed at a timing that is completely different from the timing at which the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated, such as a display such as "may be displayed". Further, in this tutorial effect, a display explaining the period during which the back button effect is executed and the operating method of the operating means at that time may be displayed.

  Further, "the first operation display is a display for prompting the user to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a door body [for example, front frame door 106, etc.] is provided,

  The door body is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means,

  It is configured so that the player can simultaneously operate the first operating means and the second operating means with one hand [eg, as shown in FIG. 937, a ball provided on the front frame door 106]. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided close to each other on the upper surface of the storage tray door 108, and the player can operate the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand. Etc.], a gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since there are two operating means at a position where it is easy to operate even when performing a firing operation, it is possible to easily perform both operating means simultaneously with one hand, and get used to operating the operating means. It may be possible to make it easier for even non-players to participate.

  Here, the door may be provided with only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may be provided with something other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Good. Further, the door body may be necessarily provided with the first operation means and the second operation means, or in some cases, the first operation means and the second operation means may not be provided. Good.

  Further, in addition to the first operating means and the second operating means, there may be one that can be simultaneously operated by the player with one hand.

  Further, “the second operating means is an operating means having a larger size than the first operating means. ] Was also explained.

  In other words, it can be said that the second operating means is an operating means having a wider operable surface than the first operating means.

  The first operating means may be smaller than the second operating means, or the first operating means and the second operating means may have the same size.

  In addition, “production control means (for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.) is provided, and the production control unit is operated when the first operation unit is operated. Is a means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 constitute an operation key unit 137 as shown in FIG. 953. When each button is operated, the corresponding control is performed, etc.], the effect control means executes a control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated. This is a possible means [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 perform control according to the operation of the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 953]. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the operation of the first operation means is performed, or the operation of the first operation means. If there is, it may be possible to execute control other than the control related to the operation of the first operation means. Further, the effect control means may necessarily execute control relating to the operation of the first operation means when the first operation means is operated, or the operation of the first operation means may be performed. If the first

There may be a case where the control related to the operation of the one operation unit is not executed.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing only control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the operation of the second operation means is performed, or the operation of the second operation means If so, control other than the control related to the operation of the second operation unit may be executable. Further, the effect control means may necessarily execute control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated, or the operation of the second operation means may be performed. In this case, the control related to the operation of the second operation means may not be executed.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “manipulation means [for example, effect button 136 or the like] operable by the player, driving means for driving the operation means [for example, effect button drive motor 434 or the like], Display means capable of displaying a display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

In the gaming table provided with, the drive means controls the operation means to have a first position [for example, an operable position shown in FIG. 988 (a3)] and a second position [for example, FIG. 988 ( a1) which is capable of being displaced with respect to the inoperable position and the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display relating to the operating means (hereinafter, “operation display [eg, , 988 (b3) shown in FIG. 988 (b3) ”)), and the operation means is at a position different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. In addition, the operating means may be displaced to the first position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 988 (b2) to (b3), the effect button 136 is at the operable position ( When the position is different from the initial position) It is like return to the operable position performance button 136 before the operation promoting notification image by performing a back initial position move is displayed, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the movable means in the second state is deformed to the first state before the operation display is displayed, so that the operation effective period of the operation means is started in advance. In some cases, it can be grasped by the player.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of driving only the operating means, or may be capable of driving other than the operating means. Further, the driving means may drive the operating means without fail, or may not drive the operating means.

  Further, the display means may display only the operation display, or may display other than the operation display. Further, the display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

  Further, the driving means may be capable of displacing the operating means only between the first position and the second position, and the operating means may be moved between the first position and the second position. It is also possible to be able to displace other than the interval. Further, the driving means may be a means for always displacing the operating means between the first position and the second position, or displacing the operating means between the first position and the second position. It may not be allowed.

  Further, the operation means may be configured such that at a timing before the operation display is displayed, the operation means may be displaced to the first position only when the operation means is different from the first position, At a timing before the display is displayed, the operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position other than when the operation means is different from the first position. Further, the operation means may be configured to be displaced to the first position without fail when the operation means is different from the first position at the timing before the operation display is displayed. At a timing before being performed, when the operation means is different from the first position, the operation means may not be displaced to the first position.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 1 shown in FIG. 989 (a1) to FIG. 9 (a3)]. One of the types of display is a second continuous effect display [for example, the effect of step-up 2 shown in FIG. 988 (b1) to FIG. 988 (b3)], and in one symbol variation display. , The first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display may be displayed, and the second continuous effect display is after the first continuous effect display. And the operation display is a display displayed during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 989 (a3), Operation promotion notification image is displayed in the production Etc.], the operation display is a display displayed during the period in which the second continuous effect display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 988 (b3), operation promotion in the step-up 2 effect] A notification image is displayed, etc.], when the operation means is in the second position at a timing from the display of the second continuous effect display to the start of the display of the operation display In addition, the operation means is configured to be displaced to the first position [for example, as shown in FIGS. 988 (b1) to (b3), operation is performed after the step-up 2 effect is started. The effect button 136 is returned to the initial position before the promotion notification image is displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to know in advance that the second operation display will be displayed in the second continuous effect display.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to know in advance that the second time of the continuous effect display will be displayed by the displacement state of the operating means, so that it may be possible to give the player an expectation for the change. .

  Here, the display means may be configured to be able to display only both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, or other than both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. May also be configured to be displayable. Further, the display means may be configured to always display both the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display, and at least one of the first continuous effect display and the second continuous effect display. There may be a case where either one is not displayed.

  Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is displayed only after the first continuous effect display, or may be displayed after a display other than the first continuous effect display. Good. Further, the second continuous effect display may be a display that is always displayed after the first continuous effect display, or may not be displayed after the first continuous effect display.

  In addition, the operation display may be displayed only during the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or when it is displayed in a period other than the period in which the first continuous effect display is displayed. There may be. Further, the operation display may be always displayed during the period during which the first continuous effect display is displayed, or may not be displayed during the period during which the first continuous effect display is displayed. Good.

  Further, the operation means is displaced to the first position only when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from the time when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the time when the operation display is started. It may be configured to, and at the timing between the display of the second continuous effect display and the start of the display of the operation display, the operation means is in the second position except when the operation means is in the second position. It may be configured to be displaced to one position. Also, the operation means is always displaced to the first position when the operation means is at the second position at the timing from the time when the second continuous effect display is displayed until the time when the operation display is started. May be configured to, in the timing from the display of the second continuous effect display until the display of the operation display is started, the first when the operation means is in the second position. The position may not be displaced in some cases.

  In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 or the like] is provided, and the first position is the initial position [for example, in FIG. 988 (a3)]. And the like, the effect control means is a means capable of executing control for displacing the operation means to the first position (hereinafter, referred to as “initial position returning control”), and The effect control means is a means capable of executing the initial position return control when the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started [for example, FIG. b2) to (b3) in the figure, before the operation promotion notification image is displayed, if the effect button 136 is not in the initial position, the initial position return control is performed, etc.]. . ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by performing the initial position returning operation for the "movable means not in the initial position" before the operation acceptance period starts, it is possible to give a misunderstanding that the movable means is not in the initial position. Sometimes it can be prevented.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the effect control means executes the initial position returning control, so that it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control portion.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only the initial position returning control, or may be capable of executing controls other than the initial position returning control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the initial position return control, or may not execute the initial position return control.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of executing the initial position return control only when the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. At a timing before the display of the display is started, the initial position return control may be executed in addition to the case where the operation means is not at the first position.

  In addition, “provided with a detection unit capable of detecting that the operation unit is in the first position [for example, the effect button initial position sensor 427,

  The effect control means can execute the initial position return control when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at a timing before the display of the operation display is started. A gaming table characterized by various means. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to accurately grasp that the operating means is not at the first position.

  Here, the detecting means may be capable of detecting only that the operating means is at the first position, or the operating means may be capable of detecting other than the first position. Further, the detection means may be one that always detects that the operation means is at the first position, or may not detect that the operation means is at the first position.

  Further, the effect control means can execute the initial position return control only when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. The initial position return control may be executed except when the detecting means detects that the operating means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. It may be. In addition, the production control means, when the detection means detects that the operation means is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started, always performs the initial position return control. Alternatively, the initial position return control may not be executed when the detection unit detects that the operation unit is not in the first position at the timing before the display of the operation display is started. .

  In addition, "the effect control means is a means capable of executing retry control,

  The retry control is control for executing the initial position return control again when it is determined that the operating means is not in the first position even after executing the initial position return control. , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of executing only retry control, or may be capable of executing other than retry control. Further, the effect control means may always execute the retry control, or may not execute the retry control.

  Further, "the first position is a position at which a player can operate the operation means [for example, an operable position, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first position may be a position at which only the player can operate the operation means, or a position at which the operation means can be operated by anyone other than the player. Further, the first position may be a position where the player always operates the operating means, or the player may not operate the operating means.

  Further, “the second position [eg, an inoperable position or the like] is a position at which the player cannot operate the operation means. ] Was also explained.

  Note that the second position is a position at which the player can operate the operating means, and may be a position different from the first position. In addition, "when the symbol variation display is started, if the operation means is in a position different from the first position [eg, an inoperable position], the operation means is displaced to the first position. A gaming table, which is configured as described above. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operation means is returned to the initial position at the start of the symbol variation display, so that the operation means is brought to the initial position state r when the operation means is brought into the second state. Sometimes it can be easier to get started.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible to prevent the operation means from being in the initial position in a plurality of symbol variable displays, and to make it easier for the game shop staff to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred. There is.

  Further, according to this gaming table, by performing the initial position returning operation at the time of starting the pattern variation, when operating in a range overlapping with the range in which the other effect movable body rotates, contact with the other effect movable body is made. Sometimes it can be easier to prevent.

  In addition, the gaming table, wherein the operation display is a display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 988 (b3)] prompting the operation of the operation means. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “operation means operable by the player [for example, effect button 136 or the like] and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] are provided. It ’s a game console with

  One of the plurality of types of display is the first effect display [for example, in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 983 (g), the remaining number of pandas to be defeated according to the operation of the effect button 136. Is the display that may be displayed during the first operation effective period [for example, the operation effective period in the effect for repeated hits], and the first effect display One operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, and is the timing at which the long press operation is started in the first operation valid period (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing [eg, FIG. B), "A1 timing, etc.]")))) and the first pressing operation continues for a first time [for example, time T1 until a liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hitting is transmitted] line. Was broken Accordingly, the first effect display may be displayed, and the long press operation is continued for a second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. In some cases, the first effect display may be displayed, and the second timing is the timing at which the long press operation is continued after the first timing and the first time is performed. The gaming machine characterized in that the first time and the second time are different. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the time from the timing when the long press operation is started and the time from the timing when the time has elapsed can be different from each other at the timing at which the first effect display is displayed, It may be possible to entertain the player by preventing the timing at which the effect is displayed from becoming monotonous.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, the operating means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operable by the player.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  Further, the first effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the first operation valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first operation valid period. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the first operation valid period, or may not be displayed during the first operation valid period.

  In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed only in response to the long press operation by the operating means being continued for the first time from the first timing. However, it may be configured to be displayed in response to something other than that the long press operation by the operation means is continuously performed from the first timing for the first time, or The one effect display may be configured to be always displayed in response to the long press operation by the operation means being continued for the first time from the first timing. It may be configured such that it may not be displayed in response to the fact that the long-pressing operation by the operation means is continuously performed from the one timing for the first time, and the first effect display is Second timing in the first operation effective period The first practice display may be displayed only when the long-press operation is continuously performed for the second time, and the second exercise during the first operation effective period may be displayed. The first effect display may be displayed in response to a case other than that the long press operation is continued from the timing of and the second time is performed. In addition, the first effect display is always displayed in response to the long press operation continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. The first effect display may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being continued for the second time from the second timing in the first operation effective period. It may be.

  In addition, the first time and the second time may be the same or different, the first time may be longer, the second time may be longer. Good.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a first result display [eg, operation result effect shown in FIG. 982 (n) or FIG. 983 (n)],

  The first result display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation valid period is started [for example, shown in FIG. 982 (n). As described above, by continuously operating the effect button 136, an operation result effect in which the bancho character throws the panda away is displayed, etc.], and the first operation result period is started in the first result display. This is a display that may be displayed later even when the long-press operation is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 983 (n), by long-pressing the effect button 136, An operation result effect in which a character throws a panda away is displayed, etc.], and the first effect display may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means during the first operation effective period. And , The amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first result display may be displayed even if a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is performed, so that the player may be able to arbitrarily select an operation method. . That is, the player who knows that the first result display is displayed regardless of the continuous hit operation or the long press operation can perform the long press operation to be comfortable, and know this. A player who does not know this may be able to enjoy the game a little because he or she does the continuous hit operation. In other words, since there is an element for playing the game, it may be possible to promote participation in the game.

  Here, the first result display may be displayed only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation valid period is started, or the first operation is displayed. It may be displayed in a case other than the case where the operation means is repeatedly hit after the effective period is started. Further, the first result display may be always displayed when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period is started. After the operation is performed, the operation means may not be displayed when it is repeatedly hit.

  Further, the first result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation display may be performed. It may be displayed in a case other than the case where the long press operation is performed after the effective period is started. Further, the first result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the first operation effective period is started, or the first operation effective period is After the start, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the operation means during the first operation effective period, or during the first operation effective period, the operation means may be displayed. It may be displayed in accordance with something other than the operation. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated in the first operation effective period, or the operation means may be displayed in the first operation effective period. It may not be displayed depending on the operation.

  In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a continuous-stroke operation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 982 (c) to 98 (m), by continuously striking the effect button 136, the mission is performed. Is displayed, which indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit and that "defeat all pandas with continuous button hits" is displayed, and encourages you to repeatedly depress the production button 136 to defeat all pandas within the valid operation period. A series of displays in which an operation promotion notification image is displayed, etc.], the repeated hitting operation display is a display for prompting continuous hitting of the operating means, and the first operation valid period after the continuous hitting operation display is started. Is configured to be started. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the continuous hit operation display is performed.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, a display in which a display of a swordsman is reduced while a display of a lord is enlarged, as shown in FIG. ],

  The second effect display is a display that may be displayed during a second operation effective period [for example, an operation effective period in an effect for long press], and the second operation effective period is the operation. It is a period during which the operation of the means is effective, the second operation effective period is a period different from the first operation effective period, the long press operation is started in the second operation effective period. From the timing (hereinafter, referred to as “third timing”), the long press operation is continuously performed for the third time [for example, the time T3 until the liquid crystal command for long press is transmitted]. Accordingly, the second effect display may be displayed, and the second effect display is not performed for the third time because the long press operation is continued after the third timing. Is not displayed [For example, The display in which the display of the swordsman is enlarged while the display image of the swordsman is reduced in 984 (g) is not displayed until the time T3 elapses after the operation of the effect button 136, etc.]. And a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the same long-press operation is performed, the timing at which the effect display is displayed is different depending on the effect. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to entertain the player with variations in the display timing of the effect display. is there.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player accustomed to the game can display the first effect display or the second effect display depending on the time until the effect display is displayed. It may be possible to grasp and to entertain the operation.

  Here, the second effect display may be a display that may be displayed only during the second operation valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the second operation valid period. Good. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the second operation valid period, or may not be displayed during the second operation valid period.

  Further, the second operation valid period may be a period in which only the operation of the operation unit is valid, or a period in which the operation other than the operation of the operation unit is valid. Further, it may be a period during which the operation of the operating means is always valid, or the operation of the operating means may not be valid.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only in response to a long press operation continued for a third time from the third timing, or There may be a case where the operation is displayed in response to a matter other than that the long press operation is continued from the timing of and the third time is performed. Also, the second effect display may be always displayed in response to the long press operation continued from the third timing for the third time, or from the third timing. It may not be displayed in response to the long press operation being continuously performed for the third time.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a long press operation display [for example, an operation promotion notification for promoting the long press operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIGS. 984 (c) to (h). Image display, etc.], and the long-press operation display is a display prompting the user to long-press the operating means, and the second operation valid period is started after the long-press operation display is started. [Eg, as shown in FIGS. 984 (c) to 984 (d), the operation valid period is started after the operation promotion notification image is displayed, etc.]. And a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the second operation effective period is started after the long press operation display is seen, it may be possible to take a sufficient period in which the long press operation can be performed.

  Here, the second operation valid period may be configured to be able to start only after the long press operation display is started, or to be able to be started even after the long press operation display is started. May be. The second operation valid period may be configured to always start after the long press operation display is started, or may not be started after the long press operation display is started.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second result display [for example, operation result effect by long-press operation], and the second result display is the second operation valid period. Is a display that may be displayed when the long-press operation is performed after the start of the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the second result display may be displayed only when a long press operation is performed after the second operation valid period is started, or the second result display may be performed. It may be displayed other than when the long press operation is performed after the operation valid period is started. In addition, the second result display may be always displayed when a long press operation is performed after the second operation effective period is started, or the second operation effective period is After the start, it may not be displayed when a long press operation is performed.

  In addition, “the first time [eg, the time T1 until the liquid crystal command for automatic continuous hits is transmitted] after the first timing [eg, the timing of A1 in FIG. 980 (B)] is reached In response to the operation unit being operated again before the elapse, the first effect display [for example, in the effect for continuous hitting shown in FIG. 983 (g), the operation button 136 is tilted in response to operation. There is a case where a display effect such that the remaining number of pandas that should be left is reduced] is displayed, and the first time is continued while the long-press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. A gaming table, characterized in that the first effect display is not displayed until the time elapses. ] Was also explained.

  Here, even if the first effect display may be displayed only in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing. Alternatively, it may be displayed in addition to the case where the operation unit is operated again before the first time elapses after the first timing. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the first time has elapsed from the first timing. There may be a case where the operation means is not displayed in response to the operation means being operated again before the lapse of the first time from the first timing.

  Here, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed until only the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. Alternatively, it may be configured not to be displayed even when a time other than the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. In addition, the first effect display may be configured to be displayed without fail when the first time elapses in a state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing. The display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed in the state where the long press operation is continuously performed after the first timing.

  In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.] is provided, and the production control means is configured to perform the long-press operation in response to the long-press operation. A gaming table, which is a means capable of executing control relating to. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to reduce the control load of the main control unit.

  Here, the effect control means may execute only the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may execute the control other than the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. It may be one. Further, the effect control means may always execute the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation, or may not execute the control related to the long press operation according to the long press operation. Good.

  Further, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first operation effective period is The gaming table, which is a period started during the display of the symbol variable display. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

  In addition, "the first time is longer than the second time, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to prevent the first effect display from being unintentionally displayed.

  The first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time may be the same.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"First operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, etc.] and a second operation that can be operated by the player A gaming table provided with means [for example, a production button 136 or the like] and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], among the plurality of types of displays. One is a volume setting display [for example, a volume gauge VG shown in FIG. 974 (3) or FIG. 978 (e)], and one of the plurality of types of display is an operation result display [for example, 974 (12), 975 (c5), 977 (i), etc.], and the volume setting operation by the first operation means [for example, FIG. 974 (4) or 978 (f). ) Shown in The volume setting operation by the left button 137c or the right button 137d] is enabled, and the display mode of the volume setting display is changed by performing the volume setting operation while the volume setting display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (3) to (5) and FIGS. 978 (e) to (g), the volume gauge VG of the third stage display mode is displayed. When the right button 137d is operated during display, the volume gauge VG changes from the display form of the third stage to the display form of the fourth stage, etc.], and during the first effective period, the first operating means and the above-mentioned The operation result display is configured to be displayed when both of the second operating means are operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (11), the effect button 136 and Right button 137 When both d are in the operated state, as shown in FIG. 974 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect is produced. The effect display in which the movable body 225 is shining is displayed, etc.], and the first effective period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation unit and the operation of the second operation unit are effective. [For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (9), a period (operation valid period) during which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively effective is started, or the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are activated. A period in which both are operated is valid (operation valid period is started), and the like. ] Was explained.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of the first valid period (hereinafter,“ first valid period display [eg, FIG. 974 (8) To the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 10 (10) and the remaining time display bar 136P2a, 136P2b etc. shown in FIG. 975 (b1). ”) In the first effective period. Even if only one operation means is operated, the change of the display mode of the first effective period display is configured to continue [for example, FIG. 975 (b1) to FIG. 9 (b3) or FIG. 976. As shown in (a1), even if the right button 137d is operated without operating the effect button 136, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue to decrease, etc.], Valid period In addition, even if only the second operation means is operated, the change of the display mode of the first effective period display is configured to continue [for example, without operating the right button 137d, the effect button Even if only 136 is operated, the meters of the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b continue to decrease, etc.], and during the first effective period, the first operating means and the second operating means It is configured such that the display of the first effective period display is ended by the operation of both of them [for example, FIG. 974 (10) to FIG. As shown in (c3) to (c5) in the figure, when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated in the operation valid period, the remaining time display bars 136P2, 136P2a, 136P2b are erased. The effect display as if the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed, and the like]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display is a display prompting to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means [ For example, an operation promotion notification urging that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 974 (8), FIG. 975 (b1), and FIG. 976 (1) are operated simultaneously within the effective period. Image etc.], and is configured such that the first valid period is started after the display of the operation promotion display is started [eg, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 974 (8). Is displayed, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (9), and the operation prompting display is an image simulating the first operation means (hereinafter, “first operation image”). [For example, FIG. 974 (8) and FIG. 5 (b1) or a right button image 137dP1 etc. imitating the right button 137d shown in FIG. 976 (1)].), And the operation promotion display imitates the second operation means. Image (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation image [for example, effect button image 136P1 or the like imitating effect button 136 shown in FIG. 974 (8), FIG. 975 (b1), or FIG. 976 (1)]”. ), The first valid period display corresponding to the first operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar displayed corresponding to the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 975 (b1). 136P2b, etc.] and the first valid period display corresponding to the second operation image [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 975 (b1). 2a, etc.] is configured to be displayed. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, in the "first effective period, the operation of the second operating device is operated during the operation of the first operating device, so that the display of the first effective period display is terminated. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 975 (c1) to (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased and the effect is movable. The effect display as if the body 225 is shining is displayed, etc.], and the operation of the second operation device is performed during the operation of the second operation device during the first effective period, the first operation The display of the effective period display of is finished [for example, when the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased, and the effect movable body 225 is displayed. light Like effect display such as that takes place, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display, and the operation prompting display is a display prompting to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means [ For example, an operation promotion notification urging that both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 974 (8), FIG. 975 (b1), and FIG. 976 (1) are operated simultaneously within the effective period. Image, etc., and is configured such that the first effective period is started after the display of the operation promotion display is started [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 974 (8). After that is displayed, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (9), etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first valid period is: It is a period started during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 974 (9) to FIG. 12 (12), FIG. 975 (c1) to FIG. 9 (c5), and FIG. 976 (a1) to FIG. As shown in (a2), the operation valid period has started during the variable display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, etc.], The gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the volume setting display is configured to start to be displayed in response to the operation of the first operation means during the second effective period [e.g., FIG. As shown in FIG. 3C, when the right button 137d or the left button 137c is operated during the operation valid period for volume setting, the volume gauge VG is displayed, etc.], and the second valid period is the above. A game console characterized in that it is a period during which the volume setting operation is valid. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first valid period and the second valid period do not overlap [for example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to (15), after the button operation promotion display is started, Until the symbol variation display is completed, the display of the symbol variation in-use setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, and the like]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the operation result display is configured to be displayed by the operation of the second operation device during the operation of the first operation device during the first effective period [for example, As shown in FIGS. 975 (c1) to (c5), when the effect button 136 is operated while the right button 137d is operated, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, etc. ], The operation result display is displayed by the operation of the first operation means during the operation of the second operation means during the first effective period [eg, When the right button 137d is operated while the effect button 136 is operated, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is displayed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, while the volume setting display is being displayed, in a state where the second operation means is operated, the display mode of the volume setting display does not change even if the volume setting operation is performed.

[For example, as shown in FIGS. 979 (f) to 979 (g), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, the volume is not changed, etc.] , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  Further, “a door body [for example, the front frame door 106 or the like] is provided, and the door body is provided with the first operation means and the second operation means, and the player operates the first hand with the one hand. It is configured such that one operation means and the second operation means can be operated at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 937, the upper surface of the door 108 with a ball storage dish provided on the front frame door 106]. The effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are provided in close proximity to each other, so that the player can operate the effect button 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 with one hand, etc.]. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “production control means (for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.) is provided, and the production control unit is operated when the first operation unit is operated. Is a means capable of executing control relating to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 constitute an operation key unit 137 as shown in FIG. 953. When each button is operated, the corresponding control is performed, etc.], the effect control means executes a control relating to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated. This is a possible means [for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 perform control according to the operation of the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 953]. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, in the above description, “a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, a production button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, A cancel button 137f and the like], and a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the production movable bodies 224 and 225, various lamps 418, etc.]. One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]. One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like], and the first operation means By operating the operation means, the settings relating to the game table are configured [for example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (2) to (3) and 990 (2) to (3), symbol variations When the right button 137d is operated during display, a symbol fluctuation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIGS. 974 (4) to (5) and 990 (4) to (5). ), If the right button 137d is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the volume is increased by one step, etc.], and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, , Operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12)], and when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first effect is It is configured to be performed [eg, FIG. ), If both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are simultaneously operated, the operation result effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 974 (12), etc.], the first operation means. And in a state where only one of the second operating means is operated, the first effect is configured not to be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 990 (11), When only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the operation result effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 990 (12), or as shown in FIG. 991 (11). In the case where only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, as shown in FIG. 991 (12), the operation result effect is not performed, etc.]. Gaming table. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first effect is not performed only by operating one of the first operating means and the second operating means, so that it is easy for the player to search for complicated operations. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. In addition, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the production means may be any suitable one such as a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, or a means for displaying a design by causing a light guide plate to emit light. Further, the production means such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means and a combination of the display means and the light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, only the settings relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means, or other settings than those relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means. . Further, it may be configured such that the setting relating to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting relating to the gaming table may not be possible due to the operation of the first operating means. .

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Moreover, the production means may be one that always executes the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operating means. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be executed when both the first and second operation means are operated.

  Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed. When both of the operating means and the second operating means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed. When only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In addition, “a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided, and the first effect is the first operation unit and the second operation unit in a first effective period. It is configured so that it may be executed when both of the operating means are operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (7) to FIG. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the period, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable member 225. Is displayed], one of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 974 (8)], The first display , A display prompting the user to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means, and the first display is an image simulating the first operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “first Image [for example, right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 974 (8)] ”, and the first display is an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as“ second Second image [for example, an effect button image 136P1 or the like shown in FIG. 974 (8)] ", and the first display is an effective period display [e.g., an effective period display regarding the first effective period]. The remaining game time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 974 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2a, 136P2b shown in FIG. 992 (8), and the like] are displayed. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by providing the first effective period, it is possible to increase the difficulty level of operating the plurality of operating means, and thus it may be possible to increase the sense of achievement.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first effect is configured to be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state in the first effective period. It may be configured to be executed in a case other than the case where both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state during the first effective period. May be. Further, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state during the first effective period. However, it may be configured such that it may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state during the first valid period.

  Further, the first effect is configured to be executed only during the first effective period when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. It may be configured to be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in an operated state even in an effective period other than the first effective period. May be done.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

  Further, the first display may be a display that prompts only to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means, or both the first operation means and the second operation means. It may be a display prompting other than operation.

  Further, the first display may be a display including only the first image, the second image and the effective period display, or may include a display other than the first image, the second image and the effective period display. It may be a display. Further, the first display may be a display that always includes the first image, the second image, and the valid period display, or may not include the first image, the second image, and the valid period display. It may be.

  In addition, “the first image is an image that does not disappear when only the first operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [eg, FIG. 11) to (12) in the figure, the right button image 137dP1 is not deleted when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.], the second image Is an image that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 991 (11) to FIG. , The effect button image 136P1 is not deleted when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.], the first image is the first operation means. And before This is an image that may disappear when both of the second operating means are operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (11) to (12), the right button image 137dP1 is , Erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.], the second image is in a state where both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. It is an image that may disappear when the effect button image 136P1 is removed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (11) to 974 (12), in the effect button image 136P1, both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated. Is erased, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, neither the first image simulating the first operation means nor the second image simulating the second operation means is erased when only one operation means is operated. As a result, it can be notified that effective operation is not performed. Therefore, it may be possible to effectively prompt the player to operate the plurality of operating means.

  Here, the first image may disappear when an operation means other than the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be deleted. It does not have to be erased even when an operation means other than is operated.

  Further, the second image may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means is operated, it may not disappear.

  Further, the first image may disappear only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first image may be deleted. It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, the first image may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in operation, and the first operating means There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operation means are operated.

  Further, the second image may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in an operated state, It may disappear even when both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, the second image may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operation means are operated.

  In addition, “the first display includes only one of the valid period displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (8), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is 1 in the operation promotion notification image. Only one is included], the effective period display is a display indicating the remaining period of the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is a display according to the remaining time of the operation effective period. Etc.], the valid period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state [eg, As shown in FIGS. 974 (11) to (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, etc.], Stand. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since it may disappear when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, it is possible to recognize that an effective operation has been performed. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the valid period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first valid period, or may indicate something other than the remaining period of the first valid period. Further, the valid period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first valid period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the valid period display may notify the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the validity period display may be such that it may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, or the first operating means and The second operation means may disappear even in a case other than a state where both are operated. Further, the effective period display may disappear without fail when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, or the first operation means and the second operation means may be displayed. There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the operating means are operated.

  In addition, “The valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated [eg, FIG. 990 (11)- As shown in FIG. 12 (12) and FIGS. 991 (11) to (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2 is displayed when only the right button 137d of the effect buttons 136 and the right buttons 137d is operated. It is not erased when only the production button 136 is operated, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effective period display does not disappear when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, so that the effective operation is not performed. In some cases, the player can be informed, and therefore, the player can be prompted to appropriately operate the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the valid period display may disappear when an operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, or other than the first operating means and the second operating means. Even if the operating means is operated, it may not disappear.

  In addition, “the first display includes the two valid period displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 992 (8), the operation promotion notification image includes remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b. 2 included, etc.], the valid period display is a display that indicates the remaining period of the first valid period [for example, the remaining time display bars 136P2a and 136P2b correspond to the remaining time of the operation valid period. Displayed in a different display mode], one of the two valid period displays (hereinafter, referred to as "two valid period displays") is a valid period display corresponding to the first operation means (hereinafter, "valid period display"). , "The first valid period display [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2b displayed in correspondence with the right button image 137dP1 shown in FIG. 992 (8)]". Display One of them is an effective period display corresponding to the second operation means (hereinafter, "second effective period display [e.g., displayed corresponding to the effect button image 136P1 shown in FIG. 992 (8). Remaining time display bar 136P2a etc.] "), and the first effective period display disappears when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state. The remaining time display bar 136P2b is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 992 (11) to (12). Etc.], the second effective period display is a display that may disappear when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in an operated state [eg, FIG. 992]. (11) to (12) ), The remaining time display bar 136P2a is erased when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated, and the like], a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  If it is configured that only the effective period display corresponding to the operated operating means disappears, it is mistaken that the player performed an appropriate operation when operating each operating means without performing an appropriate operation. However, according to this gaming machine, the first valid period display and the second valid period are displayed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Since the display may disappear, it may be possible to recognize that a valid operation has been performed.

  Here, the first display may include only two valid period displays or three or more valid period displays.

  Further, the valid period display may indicate only the remaining period of the first valid period, or may indicate something other than the remaining period of the first valid period. Further, the valid period display may necessarily indicate the remaining period of the first valid period, or may not indicate the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the valid period display may notify the remaining period of the first valid period.

  Further, the first valid period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and It may disappear even when the operation means and the second operation means are both in the operated state. Further, the first valid period display may be always disappeared when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, and the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operation means are operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, It may disappear even when the operation means and the second operation means are both in the operated state. Further, the second valid period display may disappear without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and There may be a case where it does not disappear when both of the second operation means are operated.

  In addition, “the first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [for example, The time display bar 136P2b is not erased when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.],

  The first valid period display is a display that does not disappear when only the second operating unit of the first operating unit and the second operating unit is operated [eg, FIG. 993 (11 )-(12) in the figure, the remaining time display bar 136P2b is not erased when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, etc.], the second effective The period display is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2a 136 is not erased when only the right button 137d of the right buttons 137d is operated, etc.], the second effective period display is the first operation means and the second operation means of the first operation means. two This is a display that does not disappear when only the operating means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 993 (11) to (12), the remaining time display bar 136P2a includes the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. Is not erased when only the production button 136 of the above is operated], etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, neither the first effective period display nor the second effective period display disappears. In some cases, it may be possible to inform that the effective operation is not performed, and therefore, it may be possible to prompt the player to appropriately perform the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means.

  Here, the first valid period display may disappear when the operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It does not have to be erased even when an operating means other than the operating means is operated.

  Further, the second effective period display may disappear when the operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the first operating means and the second operating means may be displayed. It may not disappear even when an operating means other than the means is operated.

  In addition, “the first effective period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation unit and the operation of the second operation unit are effective [for example, shown in FIG. 974 (9). At a timing, a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the right button 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively effective is started, or it is effective that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated. A period (operation valid period) is started, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only both the operation of the first operating device and the operation of the second operating device are effective, or the operation of the first operating device and the second operating device may be effective. It may be a period during which the operation of the operation means other than both the operations of the operation means is effective. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are always effective, or the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where neither of the operations of the operating means is valid.

  In addition, “the first effective period is configured to be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 990 (8) is displayed. After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 990 (9), etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be easier to recognize that the first valid period is started.

  Here, it may be configured such that only the first valid period is started after the display of the first display is started, or after the display of the first display is started, The valid period other than the valid period of may be configured to start. Further, the first valid period may be configured to always start after the display of the first display is started, or the first valid period may be configured to start after the display of the first display is started. It may be configured such that the validity period may not start.

  Further, the first effective period may be configured to be started only after the display of the first display is started, or even after the display of the first display is started, May be configured to start the validity period of.

  Further, the “playing machine-related setting” is a “setting for executing a power saving mode [e.g., eco mode”]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, a "playing machine-related setting" is a "time setting". ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first effect is the This is an effect that may be started during the execution of the variable display of symbols [for example, as shown in FIG. 974 (12), the operation result effect is started during the variable display of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2]. Etc.], a gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect is performed during the symbol change display, so that the first effect can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit can be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing displays other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be that the execution may be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be started other than during the symbol variable display. May be Further, the first effect may be that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Also, "the first operating means is a button, and the second operating means is a button. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved in some cases.

  In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],

A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, in the above description, “a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, a production button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, A cancel button 137f or the like], wherein one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like], and one of the plurality of operation means One is a second operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.] and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications. One of the plurality of types of notification is the first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12)] One of the plurality of types of notifications is the second notification [for example, deletion of the symbol fluctuation setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (5), or reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 970 (i). Etc.], and the first notification may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated during the first effective period. If the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are both operated at the same time during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 974 (11), the display is shown in FIG. 974 (12). Operation result presentation may be performed, etc.], in the state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first effective period, The first notification is real It is configured not to be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 990 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12), the operation result effect is not performed, or, as shown in FIG. 991 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, FIG. As shown in (12), the operation result presentation is not performed, etc.], and the second notification may be executed when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (5) is displayed, the volume is set to the set value and the symbol is changing. The setting screen may be deleted, or, as shown in FIG. 970 (i), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry notice image shown in FIG. 970 (j) is displayed. 2071 may be displayed], and the first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to (15), the button From the start of the operation promotion display to the end of the symbol variation display, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or FIG. 970 (g) to FIG. j) and the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to (12) are different periods, and the like], etc.]. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easier for the player to search for a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. In addition, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  In addition, only a plurality of types of notification may be configured to be executable, a plurality of types of notification may be configured to be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of notification may not be performed.

  Further, in the first valid period, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first notification may be executed even in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Good. Further, the first notification may be executed without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. However, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first notification may not be executed.

  Further, in the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first notification may be executed. Alternatively, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that notification other than the first notification is also executed. Good.

  Further, in the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, only the first effect is configured not to be executed. Alternatively, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means is operated. The second notification may be executed in a case other than the case described above. Further, in the second effective period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

  In addition, “providing a means for performing a plurality of types of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.], one of the above-mentioned effects Is a first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12)], the first notification is the first effect, and the second notification is , Notification of the result of the setting operation [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (5) is operated, the volume is set to the set value and used during the symbol changing. The setting screen is erased, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first operating means can be utilized for different purposes.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  In addition, “providing a means for performing a plurality of types of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, effect movable bodies 224, 225, various lamps 418, etc.], one of the above-mentioned effects Is a first effect [for example, operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12)], and one of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect [for example, in FIG. 970 (i)]. Shown

Reach state rush notice image 2071], the first effect and the second effect are different effects, and the first notification is the first effect, and the second effect is the second effect. The notification is for the second effect, which is a game table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first operating means may be shared by different effects.

  Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  In addition, "the first operating means is an operating means capable of changing into a plurality of states, and the state of the first operating means in the first effective period and the first operating state in the second effective period. The state of the operation means may be different [eg, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), during the first effective period, the effect button 136 lights up in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while 1000 (d), during the second effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and the operation such as vibration is not performed, etc.]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the difference in required operation between the first effective period and the second effective period can be recognized due to the difference in state of the first operating means.

  Here, the first operating means may be capable of changing to only a plurality of states, or may be capable of changing to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the first operating means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states in some cases.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the first operating means in the first effective period and the state of the first operating means in the second effective period are different, or the first operation in the first effective period. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the first operating means in the second effective period may be different. Further, the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the first operating means in the second effective period without fail, and the state of the first operating means in the first effective period may be different. There may be a case where the states of the first operating means in the second effective period do not differ from those in the second effective period.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of states is the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138 and is vibrating. State, etc., and one of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (d), while the effect button 136 is illuminated in red by the chance button lamp 138, A state in which an operation such as vibration is not performed, etc.], the first state and the second state are different states, and the first operating means is configured to perform the first operation in the first valid period. The operation means is more likely to be in the first state than in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), in the first effective period, the effect button 136 is the chance button lamp 138. More red light and vibrate, etc.], the first operation means is an operation means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state during the second effective period [eg, FIG. As shown in d), in the second effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and the operation such as vibration is not performed, etc.]. . ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by vibrating the first operating means.

  Here, the first operation means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operation means may be in the first state or may be in the second state during the second effective period. Further, the first operation means may be always in the first state or may not be necessarily in the second state during the first effective period. Further, the first operating means may be always in the second state or may not be always in the first state during the second effective period.

  In addition, “a plurality of light emitting means [for example, various lamps 418 and the like] are provided, and one of the plurality of light emitting means is a first light emitting means [for example, a chance button lamp 138 and the like]. The light emitting means of is a light emitting means provided in the first operating means, the first light emitting means is a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, and among the plurality of types of light emitting patterns, One is a first light emission pattern [eg, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 flashes in red as shown in FIG. 1003 (11), etc.], and the plurality of types of light emission patterns One of them is a second light emission pattern [eg, a light emission pattern in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in blue as shown in FIG. 1003 (4)]. The first light emitting pattern and the second light emitting pattern are different light emitting patterns, and the first state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern. The second state is a state in which the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating the plurality of operating means by the light emission pattern of the first operating means.

  Here, the first light emitting means may emit light only in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may emit light in a light emitting pattern other than the plurality of types of light emitting patterns. Further, the first light emitting means may always emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns, or may not emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting patterns.

  In addition, “the first operating means is an operating means configured so that at least a part thereof can vibrate, and the first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is vibrating. Yes [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating as shown in FIG. 1000 (n)], and the second state is a state in which the first operating unit does not vibrate [eg, the figure As shown in 1000 (d), the effect button 136 is not vibrating, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by vibrating the first operating means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be capable of vibrating, or all of the first operating means may be configured to be capable of vibrating. In addition, at least a part of the first operation means may be configured to be vibrated, or at least a part other than the part may be configured to be vibrated. Further, the first operation means may be configured such that at least a part thereof always vibrates, or at least a part thereof may not vibrate.

  In addition, "the first operating means is an operating means at least a part of which is configured to be rotatable, and the first state is a state in which at least a part of the first operating means is rotating. Yes, the second state is a state in which the first operating means is not rotating, a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize the necessity of operating a plurality of operating means by rotating the first operating means.

  Here, a part of the first operating means may be configured to be rotatable, or all of the first operating means may be configured to be rotatable. Further, the first operation means may be configured such that at least a part thereof is rotatable, or at least a part other than the part thereof is also rotatable. Further, the first operation means may be configured such that at least a part thereof is necessarily rotated, or at least a part thereof may not be rotated.

  In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first valid period is: It is a period that may be started during execution of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (m), the first effective period starts during the variation display of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2 Etc.], in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state than in the first state is a big hit symbol in the symbol variation display A gaming table characterized by being easily displayed in a fixed manner [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (m), when the effect button 136 vibrates in the first effective period, a big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed manner]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, both the first operation means and the second operation means can give a notice by the operation means in addition to the effect by the operation, so that the range of effect of the operation means is widened. There are cases.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing displays other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first valid period may be started only during the execution of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the execution of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the first valid period may be always started during execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, during the first effective period, the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display only when the first operating means is in the first state. Even when the one operation means is not in the first state, the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, in the first effective period, when the first operating means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the symbol variable display, and in the first effective period, When one operation means is in the first state, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

  Further, only during the first effective period, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display when the first operating means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state. Good, even in the period other than the first valid period, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display when the first operation means is in the first state than when it is not in the first state You may do it.

  Further, during the first valid period, the first operating means may be always in the first state, or the first operating means may not be in the first state in some cases.

  The first operation means may be in the second state during the first effective period, and the first operation means may be in the second state during the first effective period as compared with the case where the first operation means is in the second state. In the case of the state, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

  In addition, “a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, enter button 137e, cancel button 137f, etc.] One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button. Button 137f, etc.], and one of the plurality of operation means is second operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.] and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications. One of the types of notification is the first notification [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12)], and the plurality of types of notifications. One of them is the second notification [for example, deletion of the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (5), or reach state entry notice image 2071 shown in FIG. 970 (i)], The first notification may be executed when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 974 (11), when both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated at the same time in the operation effective period, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 974 (12) is performed. Etc.], the first notification is issued when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the first valid period. Not run [For example, as shown in FIG. 990 (11), when only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated in the operation valid period, it is shown in FIG. 990 (12). As described above, no operation result effect is produced, or, as shown in FIG. 991 (11), when only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated, the result is as shown in FIG. 991 (12). As shown, the operation result presentation is not performed, etc.], and the second notification may be executed when the first operation means is operated in the second effective period. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the symbol changing setting screen shown in FIG. 974 (5) is displayed, the volume is set to the set value, and the symbol changing setting screen disappears. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 970 (i), when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the reach state entry warning image 2071 shown in FIG. 970 (j) is displayed. Etc.], the first valid period and the second valid period are different periods [for example, as shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to (15), button operation promotion display is started. After that, until the symbol variation display ends, the display of the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is prohibited, or shown in FIGS. 970 (g) to (j). The operation valid period is different from the operation valid period shown in FIGS. 974 (7) to (12), etc.], the state of the second operation means and the second state in the first valid period. The second in the effective period The state of the working means may be different [for example, as shown in FIG. 1000 (n), during the first effective period, the effect button 136 lights up in red by the chance button lamp 138 and vibrates, while 1000 (d), during the second effective period, the effect button 136 is lit in red by the chance button lamp 138, and the operation such as vibration is not performed, etc.]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the operating means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the operating means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first notification is not executed only by the operation of one of the first operating means and the second operating means, which makes it easier for the player to search for a complicated operation. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to recognize a difference in required operation between the first effective period and the second effective period due to the difference in the state of the second operating means.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. In addition, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  In addition, only a plurality of types of notification may be configured to be executable, a plurality of types of notification may be configured to be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of notification may not be performed.

  Further, in the first valid period, the first notification may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first notification may be executed even in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. Good. Further, the first notification may be executed without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first valid period. However, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, the first notification may not be executed.

  Further, in the first valid period, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, only the first notification may be executed. Alternatively, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that notification other than the first notification is also executed. Good.

  Further, in the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, only the first effect is configured not to be executed. Alternatively, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In the second valid period, the second notification may be executed only when the first operating means is operated, or the first operating means is operated. The second notification may be executed in a case other than the case described above. Further, in the second effective period, the second notification may be configured to be executed without fail when the first operating means is operated, or when the first operating means is operated. The second notification may not be executed in some cases.

  The second operation means may be changeable only to a plurality of states, or may be changeable to a state other than the plurality of states. Further, the second operation means may be one that always changes to a plurality of states, or may not change to a plurality of states in some cases.

  Further, there may be a case where only the state of the second operating means in the first effective period and the state of the second operating means in the second effective period are different, or the second operation in the first effective period. The state of the means and the state other than the state of the second operating means in the second effective period may be different. Further, the state of the second operating means in the first effective period may be different from the state of the second operating means in the second effective period without fail, and the state of the second operating means in the first effective period There may be a case where the states of the second operating means in the second valid period do not differ from those in the second valid period.

  In addition, “the first effective period is a period during which both the operation of the first operation unit and the operation of the second operation unit are effective [for example, the right button at the timing shown in FIG. 974 (9). A period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the 137d and the operation of the effect button 136 are respectively effective is started, or a period in which it is effective that both the right button 137d and the effect button 136 are operated (operation effective) Period) is started, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first effective period may be a period in which only both the operation of the first operating device and the operation of the second operating device are effective, or the operation of the first operating device and the second operating device may be effective. It may be a period during which the operation of the operation means other than both the operations of the operation means is effective. Further, the first effective period may be a period in which both the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means are always effective, or the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means. There may be a case where neither of the operations of the operating means is valid.

  Also, "the first operating means is a button, and the second operating means is a button. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved in some cases.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, in the above description, “a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, a production button 136, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, A cancel button 137f and the like], and a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the production movable bodies 224 and 225, various lamps 418, etc.]. One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an enter button 137e, a cancel button 137f, etc.]. One of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, the effect button 136, etc.] One of the effects is a first effect [for example, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 992 (12)], and both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated. The first effect may be executed when it is in the state of being displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 992 (11), both of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are performed. When the two are simultaneously operated, an operation result effect may be produced as shown in FIG. 992 (12), etc.], and only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. In the operated state, the first effect is configured not to be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 990 (11), only the right button 137d of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d is operated. In case of As shown in 990 (12), the operation result effect is not performed, or, as shown in FIGS. 991 (11) and 993 (11), only the effect button 136 of the effect button 136 and the right button 137d. In the case of being operated, as shown in FIG. 991 (12) or FIG. 993 (12), the operation result effect is not performed, or as shown in FIG. 994 (11 ″) or FIG. 994 (11 ″ ″). As described above, when both the right button 137d and the up button 137a and the effect button 136 are simultaneously operated, an effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 993 (12) (the effect shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″)) is displayed. The second operation result effect, the operation result effect shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″ ″) may be performed, and the like], etc.]. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first effect is not performed only by operating one of the first operating means and the second operating means, so that it is easy for the player to search for complicated operations. You may be able to. In addition, this may give the player a sense of achievement.

  Here, each of the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Good. In addition, the plurality of operating means may be provided at positions where the player can always operate, or may be provided at positions where the player may not be able to operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the production means may be any suitable one such as a display means, a sound output means, a light emitting means, a movable body, or a means for displaying a design by causing a light guide plate to emit light. Further, the production means such as a combination of the display means and the sound output means and a combination of the display means and the light emitting means may be constituted by a plurality of means.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Moreover, the production means may be one that always executes the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the first effect may be executed. The first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state. Further, when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in the operated state, the first effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first operating means. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be executed when both the first and second operation means are operated.

  Further, when both the first operation means and the second operation means are in the operated state, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed. When both of the operating means and the second operating means are operated, the effect other than the first effect may be executed.

  Further, in a state in which only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, it may be configured such that only the first effect is not executed. When only one of the operation means and the second operation means is operated, the effect other than the first effect may not be executed. Further, in a state where only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated, the first effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, The first effect may be executed when only one of the operating means and the second operating means is being operated.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a second operation result effect shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″) or FIG. 994 (12 ″ ″). Operation result effect, etc.], and the first effect and the third effect are different effects, and both the first operation means and the second operation means operate during the first effective period. The first effect may be executed when it is in the state of being displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 992 (7) to (12), the operation is effective. When both the effect button 136 and the right button 137d are operated within the period, the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable member 225. The effect is displayed as if Further, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.], when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. The third effect is configured to be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 994 (11 ″) or FIG. 994 (11 ″ ″), the right button 137d is not the upper button 137a). When both the and effect buttons 136 are operated at the same time, an effect different from the operation result effect shown in FIG. 993 (12) (the second operation result effect shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″) or FIG. 994 (12) ′ ′ ′) May be performed, or in FIG. 992 (11), the operation button 136 and the right button 137d are operated to produce the first operation result effect. Is another second There is a case where the operation result presentation is performed, etc.], The gaming table characterized by the above. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third effect different from the first effect when the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means fails (when only one operation means is operated) Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment when the first effect is performed.

  Further, according to this gaming table, even if the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means fails, another dissatisfaction (third effect) is executed to alleviate the dissatisfaction of the player. Sometimes you can.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the third effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the third effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the third production, or may not execute the third production.

  Further, in the first effective period, the first effect may be executed only when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. Alternatively, the first effect may be executed in a case other than the case where both the first operation means and the second operation means are operated in the first effective period. May be configured. Further, in the first effective period, the first effect may be executed without fail when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated. However, even if it is configured such that the first effect may not be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period. Good.

  Further, the first effect may be executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated only during the first effective period. Alternatively, the first effect is executed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in operation during the period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

  Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be executed only when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. Alternatively, the third effect may be executed in the first effective period, except when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. May be configured as follows. Further, in the first effective period, the third effect may be configured to be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated. However, the third effect may not be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first effective period. Good.

  Further, the third effect may be executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated only during the first effective period. Alternatively, the third effect is executed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated during the period other than the first effective period. May be configured.

  In addition, "the effect means includes a first effect means [for example, effect movable body 225, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and a second effect means [for example, speaker 120, effect movable body 225, etc.]. The first rendering means and the second rendering means are different rendering means, and the first rendering includes both the first rendering means and the second rendering means. This is an effect executed by using [for example, as shown in FIG. 992 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a fixed sound is output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 992 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable member 225 seems to be shining. effect Etc.], the third effect is an effect executed by using one of the first effect means and the second effect means [eg, FIG. 994]. As shown in (12 ′ ″), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but no confirmation sound is output from the speaker 120, or FIG. ), An operation including a display in which the character “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display A result display is performed, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first effect can be executed as a more flashy effect than the third effect, and the player simultaneously operates both the first operation means and the second operation means. It may be possible to improve the sense of accomplishment.

  Here, the rendering means may be configured to include only the first rendering means and the second rendering means, or may include rendering means other than the first rendering means and the second rendering means. It may be configured by. Further, the rendering means may be configured to necessarily include the first rendering means and the second rendering means, or may include at least one of the first rendering means and the second rendering means. There may be no cases.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only by using both the first effecting means and the second effecting means, or an effect other than the first effecting means and the second effecting means. It may also be implemented by means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by using both the first effecting means and the second effecting means, or both the first effecting means and the second effecting means. It may not be executed by using.

  Further, the third effect may be executed by using only one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the second effect means. It may be executed using a rendering means other than either one of the two rendering means. In addition, the third effect may be executed by always using one of the first effect means and the second effect means, or the first effect means and the first effect means. There may be a case where it is executed without using either one of the two effect means.

  In addition, "the first effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and the second effect means is a movable means [for example, an effect movable body 225 or the like], and the movable The means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movable effects, one of the plurality of types of movable effects is a first movable effect, and the first movable effect is a display of the display means. Movable effect that moves to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the area [for example, the effect movable body 225 is from above the decorative symbol display device 208 to the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208]. Moving effect, etc.], and the third effect is an effect that is executed without using the second effect means [eg, as shown in FIG. 994 (12 ″), effect movable body 225 Does not work, decoration In the center of the display area of the pattern display device 208, a character display "Gekiatsu" is displayed, and an operation result display including a display in which 10 pandas are arranged so as to surround the character display is displayed.] , The first effect is an effect including the first movable effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 992 (12), the effect movable body 225 moves to the front surface side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the effect movable body 225 is shining is performed, and the like], the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the display of the plurality of types of displays is performed. One of them is a second display, and the second display is a display related to the first movable effect [for example, the effect movable body 225 shown in FIG. 992 (12) is shining. Like effect A 示等, amusement machine the first effect is the effect of including the second display, it is said. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first movable effect is performed only when the simultaneous operation of the first operating means and the second operating means is successful, so that it may be possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment. is there.

  Here, the movable means may be capable of performing only a plurality of types of movable effects, or may be capable of performing effects other than the plurality of types of movable effects. In addition, the movable means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of movable effects, or may not execute the movable effects of thin-liquor sake.

  Further, the movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first movable effect. Further, the movable effect may necessarily execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, the first movable effect may be such that it moves only in a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or it moves in front of the display area of the display means. It may move to a position other than the position where at least a part of the means overlaps. Further, the first movable effect may be such that the movable means always moves to a position where at least a part of the movable means overlaps in front of the display area of the display means, or the movable means moves in front of the display area of the display means. May not move to a position where at least a part of the above overlaps.

  Further, the third effect may be executed without using only the second effect means, or may be executed without using any effect means other than the second effect means. Good. Further, the third effect may be executed without necessarily using the second effect means, or may be executed using the second effect means.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the first movable effect, or may include effects other than the first movable effect. Further, the first effect may include the first movable effect without fail, or may not include the first movable effect.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

  Further, the second display may be a display related to only the first movable effect, or may be a display related to other than the first movable effect. In addition, the second display may be a display that is always related to the first movable effect, or may not be related to the first movable effect.

  In addition, the first effect may include only the second display, or may include a display other than the second display. Further, the first effect may necessarily include the second display, or may not include the second display.

  Further, “a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, FIG. 1004 (8). And the like], and the third display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1004 (8)]. Then, the right button image 137dP1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.], and the third display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means [for example, In the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1004 (8), the effect button image 136P1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is included, etc.], and the third display is A game table characterized by being a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1004 (8) is displayed during the valid operation period]. . ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, by not displaying an image simulating the first operation means during the first effective period, it is possible to cause the simultaneous operation of the first operation means and the second operation means to function as a hidden command. In some cases, it is possible to give a rare value to the appearance of the first effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

  Further, the third display may not include only the image simulating the first operation means, or may not include the image other than the image simulating the first operation means. . Further, the third display may not necessarily include an image simulating the first operation means, or may include an image simulating the first operation means.

  Further, the third display may include only an image simulating the second operating means, or may include an image other than the image simulating the second operating means. Further, the third display may necessarily include an image simulating the second operation means, or may not include an image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only during the first valid period.

  Further, “a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, FIG. 1005 (8). And the like], and the fourth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1005 (8)]. Then, the right button image 137dP1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.], and the fourth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the second operation unit. For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1005 (8), the effect button image 136P1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.], Shown is a display including a display relating to the first effective period [for example, the remaining time display bar 136P2 is included in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1005 (8)], and the fourth The display is a display that may be displayed during the first valid period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1005 (8) is displayed during the valid operation period]. A gaming table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, only the display regarding the first effective period may be displayed, and in the case where the player can perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect. There is.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to inform that the button is a hidden button effect by displaying the first effective period.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image simulating the first operation means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the first operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the first operation means, or may include an image simulating the first operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may not include only an image simulating the second operation means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the second operation means. . Further, the fourth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the second operation means, or may include an image simulating the second operation means.

  Further, the fourth display may include only a display regarding the first effective period, or may include a display other than the display regarding the first effective period. Further, the fourth display may necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, or may not include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fourth display may be displayed only during the first effective period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first effective period. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the fourth display may only be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, FIG. 1006 (8B). And the like], and the fifth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the first operation means [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1006 (8B). Then, the right button image 137dP1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.], and the fifth display is a display that does not include an image simulating the second operation means [ For example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1006 (8B), the effect button image 136P1 of the effect button image 136P1 and the right button image 137dP1 is not included, etc.], The display of No. 5 is a display that does not include the display relating to the first valid period [for example, in the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1006 (8B), the remaining time display bar is not included, etc.], Display 5 is a display that may be displayed during the first effective period [for example, the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 1006 (8B) is displayed during the effective operation period]. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to perform various operations during the first effective period in order to see the first effect. In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to notify that it is a hidden button effect.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only the image simulating the first operation means, or may not include the image other than the image simulating the first operation means. . Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include the image simulating the first operating means, or may include the image simulating the first operating means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only an image simulating the second operating means, or may not include an image other than the image simulating the second operating means. . Further, the fifth display may not necessarily include an image simulating the second operating means, or may include an image simulating the second operating means.

  Further, the fifth display may not include only the display regarding the first effective period, or may not include the display other than the display regarding the first effective period. In addition, the fifth display may not necessarily include the display regarding the first effective period, or may include the display regarding the first effective period.

  The fifth display may be displayed only during the first valid period, or may be displayed during a period other than the first valid period. Good. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed during the first valid period, or may not be displayed during the first valid period.

  Further, the fifth display may only be displayed in the first valid period.

  In addition, “the operation of the first operation means allows the setting related to the gaming table [for example, FIG. 974 (2) to FIG. (3) and FIG. 990 (2) to FIG. As shown in, when the right button 137d is operated during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation setting screen including the volume gauge VG is displayed, or FIGS. 974 (4) to 974 (5) and 990 ( 4) to (5) in the same figure, if the right button 137d is operated while the symbol changing setting screen is displayed, the sound volume is increased by one step, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the first operating means can be utilized for different purposes.

  Here, only the settings relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means, or the settings other than those relating to the gaming table may be configured to be possible by operating the first operating means. Good. Further, it may be configured such that the setting relating to the gaming table is always performed by operating the first operating means, or the setting relating to the gaming table may not be possible due to the operation of the first operating means. .

  Further, the “playing machine-related setting” is a “setting for executing a power saving mode [e.g., eco mode”]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, a "playing machine-related setting" is a "time setting". ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first effect is the This is an effect that may be started during the execution of the variable display of symbols [for example, as shown in FIG. 992 (12), the operation result effect is started during the variable display of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2]. Etc.], a gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect is performed during the symbol change display, so that the first effect can be applied to, for example, a notice effect, and the expectation of a big hit can be further enhanced.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing displays other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

  Further, the first effect may be that the execution may be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be started other than during the symbol variable display. May be Further, the first effect may be that the execution is always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the execution may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Also, "the first operating means is a button, and the second operating means is a button. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the operability of the first operating means and the second operating means may be improved in some cases.

  In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the game table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like], the game table. ] Was also explained.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine comprising image display means, symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols, and advance notice means capable of executing multiple types of advance notice, wherein the image display means is a hold display. A display means capable of displaying, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons, and the hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means, The hold display is a display according to the number of the operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”), and the symbol variation display is when the hold is exhausted. Is a display that can be started, the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit, the notice icon is an icon different from the hold display, and the notice The icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more of the notice icons, and the notice means is displayed in the notice icon display area. In the case where one of the announced notice icons is consumed, it is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon, and is a period during which the symbol variable display is executed once. In the above, in the case where the first notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is exhausted by the first number, the second number larger than the first number is more likely to be a big hit. Is configured as
A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the advance notice means is a means capable of executing a false advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode, and the advance notice means displays the advance notice icon. When one of the notice icons displayed in the area is consumed, the fake notice is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, and the fake notice is executed. A gaming table characterized in that the result of the variable display of the symbols is lost later.

  (Supplementary note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the notice icon that is started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed. The game machine is characterized in that the fourth number, which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit than the third number.

  (Supplementary Note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, further comprising a suspending display means capable of executing a display according to the number of suspensions, and the suspending display means being the image display means. Is another display means.

  (Supplementary Note 6) The game machine according to Supplementary Note 5, wherein the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

  (Supplementary Note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, further comprising prefetching advance notice means capable of executing prefetching advance notice, wherein the prefetching advance notice means displays the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area. A gaming machine, which is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying.

  (Supplementary Note 8) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 7, the notice icon is displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is a target of prefetching is being executed. The fifth number may be exhausted, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed is executed. In the period of time, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, and the hold display is the first symbol variation. A gaming table, which is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the display is being executed.

  (Supplementary Note 9) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. The gaming table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period.

(Supplementary note 10) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 9, wherein the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol variation display". ) Is being executed, the display of the notice icon may be started during the period in which the fourth variable display is being executed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note 11) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 10, wherein the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number, and the notice icon display area is It is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number.

  (Supplementary Note 12) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, further comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions, and one of the plurality of types of notices is the first one. It is a notice, one of the plurality of types of notice is a second notice, the first notice is a notice different from the second notice, among the plurality of types of production One is a first effect, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is a different effect from the second effect. The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed, and the second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed. A gaming table characterized by.

  (Supplementary Note 13) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 12, wherein the advance notice icon displayed in the advance notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 14) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 15) A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon, which is displayed during the first symbol variable display. The display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon, and the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is the first symbol variation display. May not be digested during the display of, in the symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display"), the first symbol variation display A gaming machine, characterized in that the first notice icon that has not been digested during display may be digested.

  (Supplementary note 16) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 15, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is exhausted during the display of the first symbol variation display. A gaming table characterized in that it may be played.

  (Supplementary Note 17) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 15 or 16, wherein the first notice icon is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display as a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display. There is a case that there is a case, a gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 18) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 17, wherein the first number of the first notice icons are exhausted during the display of the symbol variation display once. Also, when the second number of the first notice icon is exhausted, it is more likely to be a big hit, and the second number is a number larger than the first number. Stand.

  (Supplementary note 19) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 18, wherein the second notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon, and the second notice icon is consumed. A gaming table, which is configured to be a big hit in the variable display of symbols.

  (Supplementary Note 20) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 19, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display, and the first notice icon is consumed. In the game table, a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.

  (Supplementary Note 21) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 20, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display, and the false notice is displayed when the first notice icon is consumed. The first false notice display may be displayed as the notice display, and the display mode of the first false notice display is the same as the display mode of the first notice display. A game table characterized in that it is configured so that it will be displaced in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 22) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 21,

One of the plurality of types of display is a look-ahead effect display, the third notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon, when the third notice icon is consumed, A game stand characterized in that the prefetch effect display may be started.

  (Supplementary note 23) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 22, wherein the display means is a means including a plurality of display means.

  (Supplementary Note 24) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 23, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variable display.

  (Supplementary note 25) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 24, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is the second symbol. A gaming table, which is configured so that it is always consumed by the end of the variable display.

  (Supplementary note 26) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 25, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means, and the notice icon display area is A gaming table, which is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons.

  (Supplementary note 27) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 26, further comprising an effect control unit, wherein the effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit. And a gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 28) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 27, comprising main control means and symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. The production control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note 29) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary note 30) A gaming machine provided with a first display means capable of performing symbol variable display and a second display means, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon. The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays, and the second display means is the number of times the operation of the symbol variable display is suspended (hereinafter, “suspended”). The display means that is capable of displaying a display according to the "number") in the hold display area, the symbol variable display is a display started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is the second It is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holding depending on the displayed number, the notice icon display area, the hold display area Different from The notice icon display region is a region in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed, and the second display means is used when the notice icon in the notice icon display region is consumed. The notice means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon, and the notice icon has been consumed a first number in a period in which the symbol variable display is executed once. The case where the second number, which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than the case, the second display means displays the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. Prior to the start of (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”), the display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a read-ahead notice display. Game table for the butterflies.

  (Supplementary note 31) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 30, wherein the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. And a gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 32) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 30 or 31, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display. The display means is capable of displaying, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. The gaming table is characterized in that, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is out of alignment.

  (Supplementary note 33) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display means is a display means configured by a plurality of display means. .

  (Supplementary Note 34) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 33, wherein one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means, and one display means of the plurality of display means is a hold. Display means, the hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area, the hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of hold in the hold display area The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol, and the image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, and the hold display. The means is a display means different from the image display means.

  (Supplementary note 35) The game console according to supplementary note 34, wherein the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

  (Supplementary note 36) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display means is an image display means, and the image display means is a variable display of decorative symbols. Is a display means capable of displaying, and a holding icon is displayed in the holding display area in accordance with the number of holdings.

  (Supplementary note 37) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon is extinguished by a fifth number in a period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed. Yes, in the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is displayed. The sixth number may be consumed, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, the display according to the pending number, the first symbol variation display is executed The gaming table, which is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during a certain period.

  (Supplementary note 38) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. A game table characterized by being surely digested by.

  (Supplementary note 39) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 38, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. The gaming table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period.

  (Supplementary note 40) The gaming table according to supplementary note 39, wherein the fourth symbol is executed during the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the variable display is executed may start to be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 41) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40, wherein the hold display area is an area in which a display corresponding to the hold number can be displayed up to a seventh number. The icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number.

  (Supplementary note 42) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41, comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions, and capable of displaying a first notice icon as the notice icon. As the notice icon, a second notice icon is configured to be displayed, the first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon, and the plurality of types One of the notices is a first notice, one of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice, and the first notice is the second notice. The notice display is different from the notice display, and when the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed, and the second notice icon is consumed. And the second notice is displayed. One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect Is an effect different from the second effect, the first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed, and the second notice display is A game stand characterized by being a notice display for notifying that the second effect will be executed.

  (Supplementary note 43) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42, comprising a main control means and an effect control means, wherein the main control means can send a command to the effect control means. The production control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means. And the effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.

  (Supplementary note 44) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 43, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 45) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon. Yes, the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display, and when the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. In, in the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") are consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. There is, in the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variable display until the end of the second symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons But The display of one type of the plurality of types of display may be a display, and when the notice icon is exhausted, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon is displayed. Is configured to be displayed, one of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon, and one of the plurality of notice icons is a notice icon, It is a second notice icon, and in one symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first number notice icons") are exhausted, and thus as the effect display. The first effect display is configured to be displayed, the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon, and the first number of notice icons is Second forecast A notice icon includes an icon, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

  According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display characteristic.

  Also, according to this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number of icons are consumed. Sometimes you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit by making the number of the notice icons look like a symbol variation before the hold which is the prefetch target.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be displayed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or an effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. You may go.

  Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be consumed, or only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed on the screen.

(Supplementary Note 46) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 45, a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as a “second number notice icon”) are consumed in one symbol variable display. Also, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed, the first number and the second number are different numbers, the notice icon of the second number is the first A notice icon including one notice icon of the notice icon and the second notice icon, wherein the second number of notice icons is one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. The other notice icon is not included in the notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed in one symbol variation display. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, and the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are consumed.

  Further, even if the second number of notice icons are exhausted, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed depending on the number of the notice icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons may be surely consumed.

  Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not consumed and the second number of notice icons are consumed. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

  (Supplementary Note 47) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 45 or 46, wherein one of the plurality of notice icons is the notice icon, and the third notice icon is consumed. Then, a game stand characterized in that a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production and enhance the production effect.

  The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  (Supplementary Note 48) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 47, wherein the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching is suspended. In this case, the gaming table is characterized in that the plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the third symbol variable display and the end of the fourth symbol variable display.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be read ahead ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the design variation display of the prefetching is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third design variation display to the design variation display of the prefetching target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) that is the subject of prefetching. The maximum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit and is a miss. It may be the same or different.

  Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) that is the subject of prefetching. The minimum number of notice icons consumed in variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons consumed in the design variation display (second design variation display, fourth design variation display) that is the target of prefetching is in a state where the design variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. , The result of the variable display of the pattern to be prefetched may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended , The result of the variable display of the pattern to be prefetched may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.

  (Supplementary note 49) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 48, in the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. A gaming machine, wherein the plurality of notice icons may be displayed before the game is finished.

  According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold that is the prefetching target ends.

  (Supplementary note 50) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 45 to 49, further comprising a suspending display means, wherein the suspending display means is the number of the start of the symbol variable display being suspended (hereinafter, “suspended A game machine characterized by being a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to "number".).

  Note that the hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

  (Supplementary note 51) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 50, characterized in that it is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

  (Supplementary Note 52) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 51, wherein the game console is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 53) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 51, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note 54) A gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means, wherein one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means and one display of the plurality of display means is provided. Means is a second display means, the first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display , One of the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon, and among the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means. One type of display is a display related to the notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, and is a jackpot symbol variable display (pre-reading target). Hereafter, it will be referred to as "second symbol variation display". ) Is suspended, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. .) May be consumed, and in the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. In the gaming machine, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern is formed by cutting the light guide plate with a lens and irradiating it with a light source from the side. , LED or the like, or 7-segment.

  Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display regarding that the notice icon is stocked, a display regarding that the notice icon is exhausted, or a notice of stocking the notice icon. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is consumed.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Supplementary note 55) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 54, wherein the second display means is configured so that the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A gaming table characterized by that.

  In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed. Moreover, you may make it perform the effect | action that a notice icon is consumed by a 2nd display means.

  (Supplementary note 56) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 54 or 55, characterized in that a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed may be displayed on the first display means. A gaming table.

  In addition, the "display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. You may make it perform in the symbol variable display.

  (Supplementary Note 57) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is A gaming machine characterized by being a means provided with a second display area, wherein the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  (Supplementary Note 58) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is The second display area is provided, and the effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. And a gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 59) A gaming table including display means and movable means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays The display is a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, and is a jackpot symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variable display") that is a subject of the read-ahead. In the case where is suspended, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. ) May be consumed, and in the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display until the end of the second symbol variation display. , The plural A notice icon may be newly displayed, and when the notice icon is exhausted, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as an "advance notice icon effect") is performed. As a result, the production by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable means production”) may be performed as the notice icon digestion production.

  Note that the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, but may be performed by another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means for which the effect is performed may be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 60) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 59, wherein the first movable means production may be performed when the twenty-first notice icon is exhausted as the notice icon. A gaming table characterized by

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first moving means effect may not be performed, and if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first movable means must be moved. Means production may be performed.

  Further, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

  Further, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, the movable means different from the first movable means may be used for the presentation, or the 21st notice icon is consumed. Then, the effect may always be performed by the first movable means.

  (Supplementary note 61) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 59 or 60, wherein the first moving means effect is not performed when the twenty-second notice icon is exhausted as the notice icon. A gaming table characterized by

  It should be noted that the first moving means effect may be performed even if the 22nd notice icon is consumed, or another effect (or effect display) when the 22nd notice icon is consumed. May be performed.

  (Supplementary note 62) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 59 to 61, further comprising an operating means, wherein the movable means is the operating means, and the first movable means effect is The gaming table, wherein the mode of the operating means is an effect that changes from the first mode to the second mode.

  Here, “change” means deformation, displacement, movement, and operation.

  (Supplementary note 63) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 59 to 62, further comprising a second movable means, wherein the movable means is the first movable means, and the notice icon is exhausted. A game table characterized in that, as the effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.

  (Supplementary note 64) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon. Yes, the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display, and when the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variable display”) that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. In, in the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") are consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. There is, in the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variable display until the end of the second symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons But In some cases, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display, and the notice icon increase suggestion display may display the notice icon. The gaming table, which is a display that suggests that the notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be always displayed in only one symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  (Supplementary note 65) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64, wherein in the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end. A gaming table characterized by.

  The change in which the display of the advance notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

  (Supplementary note 66) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed as the notice icon. There is a case that there is a case, a gaming table.

  The advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that the advance notice icon is increased by one. Further, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice increase notice display may not be increased. Moreover, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasse that the notice icon does not increase. Further, the advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of advance notice icons will increase. In this case, for example, when the number of the notice icons suggested by the notice increase notice display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice increase notice display may be increased.

  (Supplementary note 67) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein a twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display, A gaming table, which may be displayed as the notice icon.

  (Supplementary note 68) A gaming machine comprising display means and hold display means, wherein the hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of hold, and the display means Is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display In the case where the pending display (hereinafter, referred to as the "second pending display") of the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the "second symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. , The second hold When the display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 69) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 68, wherein the second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode, and the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed In the game table, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.

  (Supplementary note 70) The gaming table according to supplementary note 68 or 69, wherein a pending display of a lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) that is a target of prefetching (hereinafter, “fourth”). "Hold display".) Is displayed, when the plurality of notice icons are consumed between the start of the third symbol variable display and the end of the fourth symbol variable display There is a gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 71) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, the notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the display means is a plurality of A display capable of displaying different types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display. , The second display is an explanatory display, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed, and the second display is displayed Is a display displayed in the second display area, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed. There is a gaming table.

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display. Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode names of the selectable effect modes. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, or a frequency of occurrence of one-shot notification effect There is a mode for making it.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the animation that appears when the notice icon is displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  Further, here, the “preliminary icon” may be only one preliminary icon, only some of the plural notice icons, or all of the plural notice icons. It may be a notice icon. In addition, the “trailer icon” may be only the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons, or a part of the trailer icon including the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon is displayed. May be easy. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, or the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the advance display may not be performed in the first display area, but the advance display may be performed in the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 72) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 71, wherein the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display.
(Appendix 73)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 71 or 72, wherein the first display is a variable icon display, the explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon, and the notice icon is the second display. May be displayed at least partially (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”) in an overlapping manner, and when the notice icon is consumed, the second part of the second display may be displayed. A game table characterized by eliminating overlap.

  According to this game table, by displaying in the second display area where the explanation about the notice icon related to the present and the next symbol variation display is displayed rather than the change icon, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a failure, it may be possible to newly expect the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed.

  The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion. Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be able to at least suggest an expectation for a big hit in the symbol variable display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of the look-ahead.

  Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed only in a single number, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in a plurality. Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icon may be able to be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

  (Supplementary Note 74) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, the display of the second display may be started in a state where the notice icon is displayed. Characteristic game table.

  (Supplementary note 75) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 73, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed. .

  (Supplementary note 76) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 75, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is a notice. A gaming table, wherein the third display is displayed in the second display area when the third display is displayed.

  (Supplementary note 77) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 76, wherein the second display area is an area divided by a line.

  (Supplementary note 78) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 77, wherein the "preliminary icon is displayed in the second display area rather than in the first display area when displayed". Is an icon that is displayed in a display area close to the display area of "the notice icon is displayed in the second display area when displayed". A gaming table.

(Supplementary note 79) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 78, the symbol variation display that is a big hit has a larger number of digesting the notice icon than the symbol variation display that is a loss. ,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary note 80) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the plurality of types In the case where one of the explanation displays is a first explanation display, the first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon, and the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice display. There is a certain icon, and the big hit variation has a larger number of times the notice icon is consumed than the loss variation.

  (Supplementary Note 81) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 80, in the case where the notice icon is displayed in a display area in which the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”). A gaming table characterized by an icon.

  (Supplementary note 82) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 81, in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is displayed in the first explanation display area. A gaming table characterized by being not played.

  (Supplementary note 83) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 80 to 82, wherein one explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display, and the second explanation. The display is a display showing the current performance stage, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display area in which the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”). A gaming table characterized by being an icon.

  (Supplementary note 84) The game console according to supplementary note 83, wherein the performance stage changes even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.

  (Supplementary note 85) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 80 to 84, wherein the display means uses a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of types of notice icons”) as the notice icon. Displayable means, one of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon, and one of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect, and the second notice icon may be displayed before the start of the second effect. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note 86) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display. The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. , The first display is an explanation display, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means, and the notice icon is the first display area when displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being an icon displayed in one display area.
(Appendix 87)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 86, wherein the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

  (Supplementary note 88) The game console according to supplementary note 87, wherein the display of the first display may restart when the notice icon is consumed.

  (Supplementary note 89) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display and the second display is a notice. The display is a display, the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, and the explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon. Game table.

  (Supplementary note 90) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 89, wherein the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is , A first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, one of the plurality of display means is a third display means, the The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variable display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying a performance display, and the third display means is a second display means. Is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display, and the first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means. .

  (Supplementary note 91) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 90, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,

The third display is an explanation display, the third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means, and the notice icon is also displayed in the second display area. A game table characterized by being an icon that may be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 92) The game console according to supplementary note 91, wherein the third display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining the character displayed on the second display means. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed. The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of probability change. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the reach jackpot expectation degree. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation degree of the character. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

  It should be noted that the term of the notice icon explained so far is given for the sake of convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif). When the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). The term “preliminary notice” in the notice icons is also given for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that the item is to be stored.

  (Supplementary note 93) A gaming machine provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position where the player can operate, and a producing means capable of executing the first effect, wherein the operation table includes: One is the first operating means, one of the plurality of operating means is the second operating means, and the setting relating to the gaming table can be performed by operating the first operating means. In the first effective period, the first effect is configured to be performed when both the first operating device and the second operating device are operated, and In the first effective period, when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the first effect is not performed. A gaming table that is configured.

  (Supplementary note 94) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 93, further comprising display means capable of displaying the first display,

The first display is a display prompting to operate both the first operating means and the second operating means, and the first display is an image simulating the first operating means ( Hereinafter, it is a display including a "first image"), and the first display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image"). Yes, the first display is a display including a valid period display relating to the first valid period, the gaming machine.

  (Supplementary note 95) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 94, the number of the valid period displays in the first display is one, and the valid period display suggests the remaining period of the first valid period. It is a display, the effective period display is a display that does not disappear when only one operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated, the effective period display, A gaming table, which is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.

  (Supplementary note 96) The game console according to supplementary note 94 or 95, wherein the first image is operated only by the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means. When the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the second image does not disappear The first image is an image that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and the second image is the first operating means. A game table, which is an image that disappears when both of the second operation means are operated.

  (Supplementary note 97) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 94, wherein the valid period display in the first display is two, and one of the two valid period displays is the first operation. It is an effective period display (hereinafter referred to as "first effective period display") according to the means, and one of the two effective period displays is an effective period display according to the second operation means ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as "second effective period display"), and the first effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are operated. The gaming table, wherein the second effective period display is a display that disappears when both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated.

  (Supplementary note 98) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 97, wherein only the first operating means of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first valid period display. In the case where only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, the first effective period display disappears. The first image is a display that does not disappear when only the first operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, and the first image is a display that does not disappear. The second image is a display that does not disappear when only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated, and the first image is the display This is a display that disappears when both one operation means and the second operation means are operated, and the second image is displayed. Is a display that disappears by being operated both said second operating means and the first operating means, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

  (Supplementary note 99) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98, wherein the “setting operation relating to the gaming machine” described in supplementary note 93 is an eco mode setting operation. Characteristic game table.

  (Supplementary note 100) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 98, wherein the “setting operation relating to the gaming machine” described in supplementary note 93 is a setting operation of time setting. Characteristic game table.

  (Supplementary Note 101) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 93 to 100, wherein the first operating means is a button and the second operating means is a button. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 102) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary note 103) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 101, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note 104) A game table having a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player, wherein one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means, and One of the operating means is a second operating means, and when both the first operating means and the second operating means are being operated in the first effective period. The operation result is informed (hereinafter referred to as “first notification”), and in the first effective period, one of the first operation means and the second operation means is The first notification is configured not to be performed when only one of the operating means is operated, and the first operating means is operated during the second effective period. If it is in a state, the operation result notification (hereinafter referred to as "second notification" .) Is performed, the first valid period and the second valid period are different periods, and the aspect of the first operating means and the first valid period in the first valid period are the same. A mode of the first operating means in the second valid period may be different from each other in some cases.

  (Supplementary note 105) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 104, wherein the first notification is an effect and the second notification is a notification of a result of a setting operation. Characteristic game table.

  (Supplementary note 106) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 104, the first notification is a first effect, and the second notification is a second effect. A game machine characterized in that the first effect and the second effect are different effects.

  (Supplementary Note 107) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to 106, the first operation means is a means capable of adopting a plurality of modes, and the one of the plurality of modes. One is a first aspect, one of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect, the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects, the first aspect The operating means is an operating means configured to more easily take the first aspect than the second aspect in the first effective period, and the first operating means is configured to operate in the second effective period. A game machine characterized in that it is an operating means configured to take the second aspect more easily than the first aspect.

  (Supplementary Note 108) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 107, the first aspect is an aspect in which the first operating means emits light in a first light emission pattern, and the second aspect is the first aspect. A game machine characterized in that one operation means emits light in a second light emission pattern, and the first light emission pattern and the light emission pattern in the valley are different light emission patterns.

  (Supplementary note 109) The gaming table according to supplementary note 107, wherein the first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is configured to be vibrable, and the first aspect is The gaming table is characterized in that at least a part of the first operating means vibrates, and in the second aspect, the first operating means does not vibrate.

  (Supplementary note 110) The gaming table according to supplementary note 107, wherein the first operating means is a means in which at least a part of the first operating means is configured to be rotatable, and the first aspect is , Is a mode in which at least a part of the first operating means rotates, and the second mode is a mode in which the first operating means does not rotate,

  (Supplementary note 111) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 107 to 110, comprising a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display, wherein the first operation means is in the first effective period. It is a means that may take the first aspect, the case where the first operating means takes the second aspect is more than the case where the first operating means takes the first aspect during the first effective period. A gaming table characterized in that the symbols corresponding to the big hits can be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

  (Supplementary Note 112) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to 111, wherein the first operation means is a button, and the second operation means is a button. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 113) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 104 to 112, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 114) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to 112, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary note 115) A game table comprising a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player, wherein one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means, and When one of the plurality of operating means is the second operating means and both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated in the first effective period Is configured to notify the operation result, and only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in the first valid period. In the state, the operation result is not notified, and in the second effective period, the operation result is notified when the first operation means is operated. Is configured to be carried out and said first validity period and prior The second valid period is a different period, and the mode of the second operating means in the first valid period and the mode of the second operating means in the second valid period may be different. A gaming table characterized by.

  (Supplementary Note 116) A gaming machine provided with a plurality of operating means provided at a position operable by a player, and a producing means capable of executing a plurality of effects, wherein the gaming table is one of the operating means. One is a first operating means, one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means, one of the plurality of effects is a first effect, The first effect is configured to be performed when both the first operating means and the second operating means are in operation in one effective period, and the first operation is performed. Is configured such that the first effect is not performed when only one of the first operating means and the second operating means is being operated during the effective period of A gaming table characterized by

  (Supplementary note 117) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 116, wherein one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the first effect and the second effect are different effects. , The second effect is performed when only one of the first operation means and the second operation means is operated in the first effective period. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note 118) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 117, wherein the rendering means is a means including a plurality of means, and one of the plurality of means is a first means. , One of the plurality of means is a second means, the first means and the second means are different means, the first effect is the first means and It is an effect performed by using both the second means, the second effect is an effect performed by using one of the first means and the second means, A gaming table characterized by.

  (Supplementary Note 119) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 118, wherein the first means is a display means, the second means is a movable means, and the second effect is the second. The first effect is an effect in which at least a part of the movable means moves to the front of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as "movable effect"). A game console characterized in that it is an effect including, and the first effect is an effect including a display effect related to the movable effect on the display means.

  (Supplementary Note 120) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 119, characterized in that setting operation relating to the game machine is possible by operation of the first operation means. Game table.

  (Supplementary Note 121) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 120, wherein the “setting operation relating to the gaming stand” described in Supplementary Note 120 is an eco-mode setting operation.

  (Supplementary note 122) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 120, wherein the "setting operation relating to the gaming machine" described in supplementary note 120 is a setting operation for time setting.

  (Supplementary note 123) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 116 to 122, further comprising: second display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first display. And one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is an image simulating the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”). .), And the second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image”), and the second display is It is a display that does not include the first image, the first display is a display that is displayed in association with the setting operation, the first display may not be displayed in the first valid period. The second display is a table that may be displayed during the first valid period. In it, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

  (Supplementary Note 124) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 116 to 122, further comprising a second display unit capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first display. And one of the plurality of displays is a second display, one of the plurality of displays is a third display, and the first display is the first display. A display including an image imitating one operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”), and the second display is an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter, “second image”). Image)), the second display is a display that does not include the first image, and the third display is an effective period display corresponding to the first effective period. Yes, the first display is a display that may not be displayed in the first valid period, the second table Is a display that may not be displayed in the first valid period, the third display is a state in which the first display and the second display is not displayed in the first valid period A gaming table characterized in that it may also be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 125) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 124, wherein both the first image and the second image may not be displayed in the first valid period. Game table.

  (Supplementary Note 126) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 116 to 125, wherein the first operating means is a button and the second operating means is a button. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 127) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 116 to 126, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 128) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 116 to 126, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is described as an example. However, for example, a game ball is enclosed in a body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine body for use. The present invention can also be applied to an automatic pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be performed by a credit.

  Further, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a spinning machine (slot machine) that uses a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball).

  Here, a slot machine (rotating cylinder game machine) as a game table to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. 1007. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 1007 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 1007), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on the belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are formed by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame member. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet is placed on the medal, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is effective, and when two bets are placed on the medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three bets are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right horizontal line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. It should be noted that the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, a game start for informing that a game start operation is possible is started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can be in a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu to be described later (for example, a menu for setting the game history information of the individual player), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and affixing various certificates is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 that includes two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the drawings) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

  It should be noted that it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may look odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 1008 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 1008 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 1008, the information display button 1046 includes a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is the same as the information display button unit 1050.

This is a general term for a number of buttons, and more specifically, a determination (call) button 1046O provided substantially in the center of the information display button unit 1050 and an upper selection button 1046U provided separately from the left side of the determination (call) button 1046O. , A lower selection button 1046D, a left selection button 1046L, and a right selection button 1046R, and a cancel button 1046C provided separately on the right side of the decision (call) button 1046O.

  The slot machine 1000 configured as described above is also configured to be able to perform the above-mentioned eco mode setting, original (daitomo) mode setting, time setting, and the like. For example, when a predetermined operation in the slot machine 1000 (for example, an operation of the chance button 1100 in the standby state) is performed, a transition is made to the setting screen (an example of notification of the result of the setting operation), and information is displayed on the setting screen. The various settings described above can be made by appropriately operating the respective buttons constituting the button 1046.

  In addition, for example, in the effect of requesting a button operation, a specific button effect of simultaneously operating both the chance button 1100 and a button (for example, the right selection button 1046R) forming the information display button 1046 is performed. It may be configured. The buttons for requesting operations include the chance button 1100, the medal insertion button 1032, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and the buttons constituting the information display button 1046 (for example, the upper selection button 1046U, the lower selection button 1046D, the left selection button 1046L, the right selection button 1046L). The selection button 1046R, the determination (call) button 1046O, and the cancel button 1046C) can be appropriately combined. Further, it may be operated in combination with the start lever 1035. Further, the title panel 1062 may be configured to be capable of being pressed, and a specific button presentation may be performed by operating the title panel 1062 in combination with another button or the start lever 1035.

  Further, in the above-described specific button effect, after the start lever 1035 is operated to start the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012, the first stop operation is performed and the first stop reel is stopped, and then the second stop operation is performed. It is possible to start at any timing after the third stop reel is stopped after the third stop operation is performed after the second stop reel is stopped after being performed. Alternatively, the operation may be started during a so-called freeze period in which the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is not accepted for a certain period of time. Further, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be provided so that it can be started in the simultaneous production performed when a predetermined start time is detected by the RTC.

  Further, the operation valid period in which the button operation can be accepted may be forcibly ended by various operations controlled by the main control circuit side.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The game table according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means for judging whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of combinations are won by a lottery, and a reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether or not the reel stop control means for performing stop control regarding the stop of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means are the predetermined symbol combinations corresponding to the internally won combinations. And a payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode when the stop mode of the symbol is the predetermined winning mode, It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  Further, the game table according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type gaming machine" is a machine that circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. In addition, bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, while communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further widen the range of the game.

  The game table according to the present invention can be applied to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

Claims (9)

A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a hold icon,
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a notice icon,
The hold icon is an icon that displays a number of displays according to the number of holds,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed in the hold icon display area of the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means,
The hold icon display area and the notice icon display area are different display areas,
The hold icon and the notice icon are displayed in different display areas so that the notice icon is consumed so that the pattern variation display is not understood.
In the period in which one symbol variable display is executed, in the case where the notice icon is used for the second number larger than the first number, as compared with the case where the first number is consumed. Is more likely to be a big hit,
At least one of the notice icons is consumed in a state where a plurality of the notice icons are displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the notice icon that has not been digested at the time when the certain symbol variation display is finished (hereinafter, “not digested”). "Notice icon of.") May be displayed.
When the power failure occurs and the power is restored during the execution of the variable display of symbols while the hold icon and the notice icon are displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the hold icon is in the default mode. Is displayed as
In the first case, the notice icon is not displayed ,
In the first case, the variable display of symbols ends and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display means,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon as a read-ahead notice display before the pattern variation display, which is a target of the read-ahead, is started,
The undigested notice icon is an icon displayed as the prefetch notice display,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The certain symbol variable display is a variable display in which the result is a big hit,
The undigested notice icon is an icon that may be digested during the jackpot,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the order in which the notice icon is digested,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays,
The notice icon is displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display.
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 6,
The gaming table, characterized in that, after the false notice display is displayed in the certain symbol variation display, the result of the certain symbol variation display becomes a failure. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed is being executed,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 8 ,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by that.